A GREEK GRAMMAR

FOR COLLEGES

BY

HERBERT WEIR SMYTH

PH.D., UNIVERSITY OF GOTTINGEN ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATUHE IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY

AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY

NEW YORK
BOSTON CINCINNATI ATLANTA CHICAGO

CoPYRIGHT,

1920, BY

HERBEHT WEIH SMYTH

ALL R1GHT8 RtSERVED

SMYTH.

GR'EEl\: GltA.MMA.R FOR OOLLEGES W. P.

1

PREFACE
THE present book, a part from its greater extent and certain differences of statement and arrangement, has, in general, the same plan as the author's Greek Grammar for Sclwols and Colleyes. It is a descriptive, not an historical, nor a comparative, grammar. Though it has adopted many of the assured results of Comparative Linguistics, especially in the field of Analogy, it has excluded much of the more complicated matter that belongs to a purely scientifi.c treatment of the problems of Morphology. It has been my purpose to set forth the essential forms of Attic speech, and of the other dialects, as far as they appear in literature; to devote greater attention to the Formation of W ords and to the Particles than is usually given to these subjects except in much more extensive works; and to supplement the statement of the principles of Syntax with information that will prove of service to the student as his knowledge widens and deepens. As to the extent of all amplification of the bare facts of Morphology and Syntax, probably no two makers of a book of this character, necessarily restricted by con,siderations of space, will be of the same mind. I can only hope that I have attained such a measure of success as will commend itself to the judgment of those who are engaged in teaching Greek in our colleges and universities. I trust, however, that the extent of the enlarged work may lead no one to the opinion that I advocate the study of forma] grammar as an end in itself; though I would have every student come to know, and the sooner the better, that without an exact knowledge of the language there can be no thorough appreciation of the literature of Anient Greece, or of any other land ancient or modern. In addition to the authorities mentioned on page 5, I have consulted with profit Delbrck's Syntaktische Forschungen, Gildersleeve's numerous and illuminating papers in the American Journal of Philology and in the Transactions of the American Philological Association, Schanz's Beitrii.ge ZMr historiscln Syntax der griechischen Sprache, Riddell's Digest of Platonic Idiorns, La Roche's Grarnrnatische St1tdien in the Zeitschrift fr oesterreichische Gymnasien for 1904, Forman's Selections from Plata, Sclmlze's Quaestiones
v

PREFACE
Epicae, Hale's Extended and Remote Deliberatives in Gl'eek in the Transactions of the American Philological Association for 1893, Harry's two articles, The Omission of the Article with 8-ubstantives ajter o{ro<;, o8~, ~KVO<; in Prose in the Transactions for 1898, and The Perfect Subjunctive, Optative, and Imperative in Greek in the Classical Review for 1905, Headlam's Greek Prohibitions in the Classical Review for 1905, Marchant's papers on The Agent in the Attic Orators in the same journal for 1889, Miss Meissner's dissertation on -yap (University of Chicago), Stahl's Kritisch-historische Syntax des g1iechischen Verbums, and Wright's OomparaUve Grammar of the G1eek Language. I have examined many school grammars of Greek in English, German, and French, among which I would particularize those of Hadley-Allen, Goodwin, Babbitt, Goodell, Sonnenschein, Kaegi, Koch, Croiset et Petitjean. I am much indebted also to Thompson's Greek Syntax. I would finally express my thanks for helpful criticism from Professor Allen R. Benner of Andover Academy, Professor Haven D. Brackett of Clark College, Professor Hermann Collitz of the Johns Hopkins University, Professor Archibald L. Hodges of the Wadleigh High School, New York, Dr. Maurice W. Mather, formerly Instructor in Harvard University, Professor Hanns Oertel of Yale University, and Professor Frank E. Woodruff of Bowdoin College: Dr. J. W. H. walden, formerly Instructor in Harvard, has lent me invaluable aid by placing at my service his knowledge and skill in the preparation of the Indices.
HERBERT WEIR SMYTH.
CAMBRJDGE,

Aug. 1, 1918.

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION The Greek Language and its Dialects . Advanced Works on Grammar and Dialects Abbreviations PART I: LETTERS, SOUNDS, SYLLABLES, ACCENT The Alphabet Vowels and Dphthongs Breathings Consonants and their Divisions Pronunciation Vowel Change Euphony of Vowels Hiatus . Contraction Synizesis Crasis Elision . Apbaeresis Euphony of Consonants Final Consonants . Movable Consonants Syllables, and their Quantity Accent: General Principles . Accent as affected by Contraction, Crasis, Elision Change of Accent in Declension, Infiection, and Composition Proclitics and Enclitics . Marks of Punctuation . PART II: INFLECTION Parts of Speech, Stems, Roots Declension : Number, Gender, Cases Rules for Accent of Nouns, Case Endings of 'Nouns
DECLENSION OF SunSTANTJVES

PAGE

1 5

7 8 9

10 12 14
18 18 19

21 22 23 24 24-33 33 34 34-36 37 40 41 Al, 42 43

44

45, 46
47, 48 48--72

First Declension (Stems in ii.) Second Decleusion (Stems in o)

vii

48-52 53--56

viii

CONTENTS
PAGE

Third Declension (Consonant Stems) . Formation of Cases and Stems, Gender . Labial Stems . Dental Stems . Liquid Stems . Stems in Sigma Stems in os, w(F) Stems in , and v Stems in eu, av, ou Stems in ot Cases in -<Pt( v) Inegular Declension ])Jo;CLENSION OF ADJECTIVES First and Second Declensions Third Declension . Consonant and Vowel Declension Combined Irregular Declension Comparison of Adjectives DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS . Persona! Pronouns Intensive Pronoun ar6s Reflexive Pronouns, Possessive Pronouns Reciprocal Pronoun, Definite Article, Demonstrative Pronouns Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns I!os, oeva., etc., Relative Pronouns Correlative Pronouns AnvERBS: Origin, Comparison, Correlative Adverbs NuMERALS VERBS . Voices, Moods, Verbal Nouns, Tenses Number, Person, Tense-stems Principal Parts, Verb-stems . l Infiection, MI Infiection, 'l'hematie Vowel . Paradigms Vowel Verbs : Synopsis- and Conjugation of Mw Vowel :Verbs Contracted: ri!J.w, ?ToLw, o7JMw, etc. Consonant V erbs !J.t-VerbS: rl01/!J.L 1 ttTT1/!J.<, OiOW!J.L, <iKV!J.L Accent of V erbs Augment Reduplication Tense-suffixes, 'l'hematie Vowel Mood-suffixes Persona] Endings . Formation of Tense-systems . Changes in the Verb-stem

56-71 58-60 60 61 62
64

66

67 69 70
71

71
73-86 73 77
79

85 86 90-98 90
92 93
94

95

96 98
99-1{)-2

102-106 106-224 107 108

109 110

112-142
112

120 128 134 143

145 147

150
151

152 157-182 157

CONTENTS

ix
PA <iF.

Present and Imperfect . 163-170 First Class (Simple Class) 163 Second Class (Tau Class) 164 Tbird Class (Iota Class) 165 Fourtb Class (Nu Class) 167 Fiftb Class (cr~< Class) 168 Sixth Class (Mixed Class) 169 Future, Active and Middle . 170 First Aorist, Active and Middle 172 Second Aorist, Active and Middle 174 First Perfect and Pluperfect, Active 176 Second Perfect and .Pluperfect, Active . 177 Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect, Mitl,lle. 178 First Passive (First A orist and First Future) 180 Second Passive (Second Aorist and Second Future) 181 Periphrastic Forms 182 First Conjugation or Verbs in 0 183-202 Vowel Verbs. 184 Liquid Verbs, Stop Verbs 185, 186 Infiection of 0-Verbs 188-202 Present and Imperfect, Active and Middle 188 Contract Verbs 190 Future Active and Middle, Future Perfect 193 Future Passive 194 First Aorist, Active and Middle 194 First and Second Aorist Passive 195 Second Aorist, Active and Middle 196 First and Second Perfect and Pluperfect, Active 198 Perfect and Pluperfect, Middle 201 Second Conjugation or Verbs in MI 202-218 Present System : First or Simple Class . . 203 Fourth Class 204 Infiection of MI-Verbs . 205-21o' Present and Imperfect 206 Futures, First Aorist, Second Aorist . 208 First and Second Perfect and Pluperfect, Active, Perfect Middle . 210 Irregular MI-Verbs 210-218 p.[, elp.t, f'l}P,L, </>7J! , 210-215 Tjp.at, K<.IJ7Jp.at, KEf.LaL . 216 i}p.l, xp-f}, ooa 217 Peculiarities in the Use of Voice-forms 218-222 Future Middle with Active Meaning 219 220 Middle Deponents, Passive Deponents . Deponents with Passive Meaning . 221 Active Verbs with Aorist l'assive in a Middle Sense 222 ,Mixture of Transitive and Intransitive Senses

CONTENTS PART III: FORMATION OF WORDS

PAGE

Primary and Secondary Stems Primitive and Denominative Words Suffixes Changes in Stems Formation of Substantives Formation of Adjectives List of Noun Suffixes . Denominative Verbs First Part of a Compound Last Part of a Compound Accent of Compounds, Meaning of Compounds PART IV: SYNTAX Sentences, Subject, Predicate
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

21!5
226

226 228 229 236 238-244 245 247-250 250-251 . 252

255 256 256 257 258 258 259-261 259 260 261 261-265 261 262 263 264 265 266 269-272 272-283 272 275 278 278 283 284-298 284 285 286 293 298-311

Subject a Substantive or an Equivalent Predicate Nouns, Attributive Adjective Appositive, Copula, Object . Expansion of Subject and Predicate The Concords The Subject . Jts Omission "lmpersonal Verbs, Subject of the Infinitive Case of the Subject: the Nominative The Predicate Omission of the V erb Concord of Subject and Predicate. With One Subject . With Two or More Subjects . Concord of Predicate Substantives Apposition . Peculiarities in the Use of Number,.Gender, Person Adjectives Attributive Adjectives: their Agreement Predicate Adjectives: their Agreement Attraction of Predicate Nouns Corriparison of Adjectives (and Adverbs) Adverbs The Article . o, -1), Tb in Homer , 1), Tb as a Relative and Demonstrative , 1), rb as the Article Position of the Article Pronouns

CONTENTS

xi
PAGE

Persona! Pronouns Possessive Pronouns The Pronoun arbs Reflexive Pronouns Demonstrative Pronouns Interrogative Pronouns . Indefinite Pronouns li.Xhos, ffepos, dXMXo<> .
THE CASES
VOCATIVE GENITIVE \.

298 299 302 304 307 309 310

311

Genitive Proper with Nouns Genitive of Possession . Genit.ive of the Divided Whole (Partitive) Genitive of Quality Genitive of Explanatiou Genitive of Material, Measure Genitive, Subjective and Objective Genitive of Value . Genitive Proper with Verbs. Partitive Geniti ve . Genitive of Priee and Value . Genitive of Crime and Accountability Genitive of Connection . Genitive with Compound Verbs Genitive Proper: Free Uses Ablatival Genitive with Verbs Genitive of Separation . Genitive of Distinction, Compa.rison Genitive of Cause . Genitive of Source Genitive with Adjectives Genitive with Adverbs. Genitive of Time and Place .
DATIVE

. 312 313-337 313 314 315 317 317 318 318 319 320 320 325 326 826 327 328 328 328 380 330 331 332 335
336

Dative Proper Dative Dependent on a Single Word Direct Complement Indirect Complement Direct or Indirect Complement Dative as a Modifier of the Sentence Dative of I nterest . Dative of Relation . Dative with Adjf'ctives, Adverbs, Substantives Instrumental Dati'le

337-353 338 338 338 340 340 341 341 344

345 346

xii

CONTENTS
l'AG P.

Instrumental Dative Proper . Comitative Dative. With Adjectives, Adverbs, Substantives Locative Dative . Dative with Compound Verbs AccusATIVE . Accusative of Internai Object (Object Effected) Cognate Accusative Accusative of Result Accusative of Extent Terminal Accusative Accusative of External Object (Object Affected) Free Uses of the Accusative . Accusative of Respect : Adverbial Accusative Two Accusatives with One Verb . Two Verbs with a Common Object
7'IIE PREPOSJ7'10NS

346 349 351 351 353 353-365 355 355 357 357 358 358 360 360 361 362 364 365 369 369 370' 371-388 . 388

Origin and Development Variation Hepetition and Omission t Jrdinary UBes List of Prepositions Improper Prepositions .
7'1/E VERB

THE VolCES. Activ Voice . Middle Voice Passive Voice THE Moons. The P.article .ltv The Moods in Simple Sentences Indicative without ltv Indicative with ltv . Subjunctive without lLv . Subjunctive with ltv Optative without ltv Optative with lLv . Imperative Infinitive and Participle with ltv THE TENSES Kind of Tirne, Stage of Action Tenses outside of the Indicative Tenses of the Indicative

389-398 389 390 394 398-112 398 400 400 402 403 406 406 407 409 411 A12-437 418 415 421

CO~TENTS

xiii
PAC:F.

Present . Imperfect :Future Aorist . Perfect . Pluperfect :Future Perfect Periphrastic Tenses
Tt INFINITIVE

Subject and Predicate Noun with Infinitive Persona! and Imperso11al Construction .Infinitive without the Article As Subject, I>redicate, and Appositive . Not in Indirect Discourse After V erbs of will or dese . After Otlter Verbs . After Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substantives. Infinitive of Pmpose and Hesult Absolute Infinitive . Infinitive in Commands, Wishes, and Exclamations In Indirect Discourse Infinitive with the Article
THE PARTICIPLE

Attributive Participle Circumstantial Participle Genitive Absolute . Accusative Absolute Adverbs used in Connection with Circumstantial Participles Supplementary Participle Not in Indirect I>iscourse In Indirect Discourse Omission of ifJp w~ with a Participle in Indirect Discours~> Verbs taking either the Participle or the Infinitive Hemarks on Home Uses of I>articiples .
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -TOS

Persona! and lmpersonal Constructions

SUliMARY OF THE FoRMS OF SrMPLE SENTE:\CES

421 42!1 427 429 434 435 43 43() 437-454 438 440 441 441 44:.! 443 445 445 446 447 448 449 450 454-479 455 456 459 461 462 465 466 470 472 47:3 474 477 479-480 4RO . 481 484 485 487 488

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE

Asyndeton . Coordinati?n in Place of Subordination- Parataxis .

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

General View Anticipation (or Prolepsis) .

xiv

CONTENTS
PAGJ.:

489 492 PuRPOSE CLAU~F;R (FINAJ, CLAusEs) 493-496 Equivalents of a Final Clause. 496 BJECT CLAUSES 496-503 Connection of Final with Object Clauses 497 Object Clauses with Verbs of Effort 497 Object Clauses with Verbs of Caution 500 Object Clauses with Verbs of Fearing 500 CAUSAL CLAUSES 503-505 l instead of lh-t after V erbs of Emotion . 505 RESULT CLAUSES (CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES) 506-511 &trT with the Infinitive . 507 &trT with a Fini te V erb . 510 PROVISO CLAUSES WITH bf) <l, q) <lu 512 CONDJ'r!ONAL CLAUSES. 512-537 Classification 513 Table of Conditional Forms . 516 Present and Fast Conditions 516 Simple Present and Past Conditions 516 Present and Fast Unreal Conditions 518 Unreal Conditions- Apod<Jsis without li. v 520 Future Conditions 522 More Vivid Future Conditions 523 Emotional Future Conditions 525 Less Vivid Future Conditions 526 General Conditions 527 Present General Conditions . 528 Past General Conditions 528 529 Indicative Form of General Conditions . 529 Different Forms of Conditional Sentences in the Same Sentence Variations from the Ordinary Forms and Meanings of Conditional Sentences 530 Modifications of the Protasis . 530 Modifications of the Apodosis 531 Protasis and Apodosis Combine<l 532 Less Usual Combinations of Complete Protasis and Apodosis 534 l with the Optative, Apodosis a Primary Tense of the Indicative, etc.. 535 Two or More Protases or Apodoses in One Sentence 536 CoNCESSIVE CLAUSES 537-539 TEMPORAL CLAUSES 539-555 Indicative Temporal Clauses referring to Present or Fast Time 541 Temporal Clauses referring to the :Future 543 Temporal Clauses in Generic Sentences 545 Temporal Clauses denoting Purpose 547
Assimilation of Moods. Three Main Classes of Subordinate Clauses

CONTENTS
Summary of the Constructions of lws so long as and until . General Rule for 1rplv before, until 1rplv with the Indicative 1rplv with the Subjunctive 1rplv with the Optative . 1rplv with the Infinitive .
7rpOTEpov :1], 1rp6trfJev 1], 1rplv 1], 1rci.pos
"COMPARATIVE CJ,AUSES

xv
548 54!) 551 552 553
553

Similes and Comparisons

RELATIVE CLAUSES

Relative Pronouns Concord of Relative PronomJs The Antecedent of Relative Clauses Definite and Indefinite Antecedc;;t Omission of the Antecedent . Relative not Repeated . Attraction of Relative Pronouns Case of the Relative with Omitted Amece,Jent Inverse Attraction of Relative Pronouns Incorporation of the Antecedent . Other Peculiarities of Relative Clauses Use of the Moods in Relative Clauses Classes of Helative Clauses . Ordinary Relative Clauses Relative Clauses of Purpose Relative Clauses of Cause Helative Clauses of Result Conditional Relative Clauses Less Usual Forms .
DEPENDENT SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES

555 555--560 559 560-580 561 562 563 563 564 566 567 568 569 570
571

Dependent Statements with on or ws Indirect Discourse General Principles. Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse Complex Sentences in Indirect Discoursc Implied Indirect Discourse Remarks on the Constructions of Indirect Discourse
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES

572 573 573 574 574 575 576 580 580-596 581 584 585 587 587 589 590

Direct Questions . Indirect Questions

EXCLAMA TORY SENTENCES

597 . 601 606 607

Direct Exclamatory Sentences Indirect Exclarnatory Sentences .

XVl

CONTENTS
P.AG"F.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

Difference between oil and 1-'-IJ Position of o and 1-'-IJ o Adherescent ou after l (Uv) o and 1-'-IJ with Indicative and Optative 1-'-IJ with Subjunctive and Imperative Negatives of Indirect Discourse o and 1-'TJ with the Infinitive Not in Indirect Discourse In Indirect Discourse o and 1-'-IJ with the Participle o and 1-'-IJ with Substantives and AdjectiveR uRed Substantively

608. 60H
610

611
61~

614

615 615-618 615 617 618 61H 620 oels, J.I.TJEis 620 .Apparent Exchange of ov and 1-'-IJ . 1-'r, and 1-''IJ o with the Infinitive depending on Verbs of Negative Meaning. 622 (524 1-'17 o with the Infinitive depending on Negatived Verbs 625 1-'17 o with the Participle depending on Negatived Verbs 62(5 p.-fJ and 1-''IJ o with the Subjunctive and Indicative 62() Redundant o with ?r-fJv, etc.

ou p.-fJ

6:W
627 628

Negatives with &rrr and the Infinitive . Accumulation of Negatives Some Negative Phrases
PARTICLES

62\l
6!ll 632-671

General View List of Particles

FIGURES

List of Grammatical and Rhetorical Figures

671-68!3 684-722 723-756 757-784

Appendix: List of Verbs English Index Greek Index

INT;RODUCTION
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS

A. Greek, the language of the inhabitants of Greece, has been constantly spoken from the time of Homer to the present day. The inhabitants of ancient Greece and other Greeks dwelling in the islands and on the coasts of the Mediterranean called themselves (as do the modern Greeks) by the name Hellenes ("E'YJV>), their country Hellas ('E.f), and their language the Hellenic (~ 'E.'YJVLK~ yma). We call them Greeks from the Latin Graeci, the name given them by the Romans, who applied to the entire people a name properly restricted to the rpaot, the first Hellenes of whom the Romans had knowledge.
N. 1. ~ Graeci ( older Graici) con tains a Latin suffix -icus; and the n~me rpatKol, which occurs first in Aristotle, is borrowed from Latin. The Roman designation is derived either from the rpaot, a Boeotian tribe that took part in the colonization of Cyme in Haly, or from the rpaot, a larger tribe of the same stock that lived in Epims. N. 2.-No collective name for' all Greece' appears in Homer, to whom the Hellenes are the inhabitants of Hellas, a district forming part of the kingdom of Pelens (B 683) and situated in the S.E. of the country later called Thessaly. 'Eli.Ms for ' all Greece ' occurs first in Hesiod. The Greeks in general are calle<\ by Homer' Axawl, 'Ap-y<ot, Aavaol.

B. Greek is related to the languages of the Indrans (Sanskrit), Persians (Zend), Arrnenians, Al banians, Slavonians, Lithuanians,Romans, Celts, and Germans. These various languages are all of the same stock, and together constitute the Indo-European family of languages. An important relation of Greek to English, which is.a. branch of the Germanie tongue, is illustrated by Grimm's law of the 'permutation of consonants':
?T=f lr=th 1 K=h 1 {j=p 1 o=t ?Tar1]p rp<s Kapol rvp{j1) i56o father three heart thorp two

I'Ya:ypos =,c(k)l
acre

<P=b 1 O=dl x=g cpipw Ovp x1Jv bear. door goose

The above English words are said to be cognate with the Greek. words. Derived words, such as geography, theatre, are horrowed. directly or indirectly, from the Greek (ywypacp{ii, fJii-rpov).
GREER GRAM.

-1

JXTRODFCTJO~

C. At the earliest lmown period of its history the Greek language was di vided iuto dialects. Conesponding to the ehief divisions of the Greeks into Aeolians, Doria.ns, and Ionians (a division unknown to Homer), tlnee groups of dialects are commonly distinguished: Aeolie, Dorie, and Ionie, of which Attie is a sister dialel't. Aeolic and Doric are more nearly related to each other thau is either to Ionie. Aeolie: spoken in Aeolis, Lesbos, and kindred with the dialect of Thessaly (except Phthiotis) and of Boeotia (though Boeotian has many Doric ingredients). ln this book 'Aeolic' means Lesbian Aeolic.
N. 1. -Aeolic retains primitive ii (30); changes,. before c to a- (115); bas . recessive accent (162 D.), and many other peculiarities.

Dorie: spoken in Peloponnesus (except Arcadia and Elis), in several of the islands of the Aegean (Crete, Melos, Thera, Rhodes, etc.), in parts of Sicily and in Sonthern Italy.
N. 2.- Doric retains primitive i (30), keeps,. bef ore t (115 D. ). A lm ost aU Doric dialects have -pH for -p.<v (462 D.), the infinitive in -p.<P for -vcu (469 D.), the future in -~w from verbs in -!w (516 D. ), the future in -a-w, -crop.a.c (540 a). N. 3.- The sub-dialects of Laconia, Crete, and Southern Ital y, and of their severa! colonies, are often called Severer (or Old) Doric; the others are called Milder (or New) Doric. Severer Doric has 7J and w where Milder Doric has <t and ov (59 D. 4, 5 ; 230 D.). There are also differences in verbal forms (654).

Ionie: spoken in Ionia, in most of the islands of the Aegean, in a few towns of Sicily, etc.
N. 4. -Ionie changes primitive i to 7J (30); changes ,. before c to a- (115); bas !ost digamma, which is still found in Aeolic and Doric ; often refuses to contract vowels; keeps a mute smooth before the rough breathing (124 D.) ; bas K for.,. in pronominal forms (132 D. ). N. 5.- The following dialects do not fall un der the above divisions : Arcadian (and the kindred Cyprian, wbich are often classed with Aeolic), Elean, and the dialects of N.W. Greece (Locris, Phocis, Aetolia, Acarnania, Epirus, etc.). N. W. Greek resembles Doric. N. 6.- The dialects that re tain i (30) are called A dialects ( Aeolic, Doric, etc.); Ionie and Attic are the only H dialects. The Eastern dialects (Aolic, Ionie) change n to cr< (115). N. 7.- The lo'cal dialects, with the exception of Tzaconian (a Laconian idiom), died out gradua]] y and ceased to exist by 300 A. n.

D. The chief dialects that occur in literatnre are as follows (almost all poetry is composed in a mixture of dialects):
Aeolic: in the Lesbian lyric poets Alcaeus and Sappho (600 n.c. ). Numerous Aeolisms appear in epie poetry, and some in tragedy. Theocritus' idylls 28-30 are in Aeolic. Doric: in many lyric poets, notably in Pindar (born 522 n.c.) ; in the bucolic (pastoral) poetry of Theocritus (about 310-about 245 u.c.). Both of these poets

INTRODUCTION

adopt sorne epie and Aeolic forms. The choral parts of Attic tragedy also admit sou1e Doric forms. There is no Doric, as there is no Aeolic, literary prose. Ionie: (1) Old Ionie or Epie, the chief ingredient of the dialect of Homer and of Hesiod (before 700 n.c.). Almost ali subsequent poetry admits epie words and forms. (2) New Ionie (500-400), the dialect of Herodotus (484-425) and of the medical writer Hippocrates (born 460). In the period between Old and New Ionie: Archilochus, the lyric poet (about 700-650 n.c.). Attic: (kindred to Ionie) was used by the great writers of Athens in the fifth and fourth centuries n.c., the period of her political and literary supremacy. ln it are composed the works of the tragic poets Aeschylus (525-456), Sophocles (496-406), Euripides (about 480-406), the comic poet Aristophanes (about 450385), the historians Thucydides (died before 396) and Xenophon (about 4::l4.about 355), the orators Lysias (born about 450), Isocrates (436-338), Aschines (389-314), Demosthenes (38:J-322), and the philosopher Plato (427-347).

E. The Attic dialect was distingnished by its refinement, precision, and beauty; it occupi<:>d an intermediate position between the soft Ionie and the rough Doric, and avoided the pronounced extremes of other dialects. By reason of its cultivation at the hands of the greatest writers from 500 B.c. to 300 B.c., it became the standard literary dialect; though Old Ionie was still occasionally employed in later epie, and Doric in pastoral poetry.
N. 1.- The dialect of the tragic poets and Thncydides is often called Old Attic in contrast to New Attic, that used by most other Attic writers. J>lato stands on the border-line. The dialect of tragedy contains some Homeric, Doric, and Aeolic forrns ; these are more frequent in the choral than in the dialogue parts. The choral parts take over forms used in the Aeolic-Doric lyric ; the dialogue parts show the influence of the iambic poetry of the lonians. But the tendency of Attic speech in literature was to free itself from the influence of the dialect used by the tribe originating any literary type ; and by the fourth century pure Attic was generally used throughout. The normal language of the people ("Standard Attic ") is best seen in Aristophanes and the orators. The native Attic speech as it appears in inscriptions shows no local differences ; the speech of Attica was practically uniform. Only the lowest classes, among which were many foreigners, used forrns that do not follow the ordinary phonetic laws. The language of the religions cuits is sornetimes archaic in character. N. 2.-0id Attic writers use'"' for rr (78), p<r for pp (7!J), ~uv for <rvv with, s for <is into, 11 for" (Mvfor xv.., thou luosest), -i)s in the plural of substantives in_..,us (f3a.<r<Xi)s, 27), and occasionally -ara< and -aro in the tbird plural of the perfect and pluperfect (465 f).

With the Macedonian conquest Athens ceased to produce great writers, but Attic culture and the Attic dialect were diffused far and wide. With this extension of its range, Attic lost its purity; which had indeed begun to decline in Aristotle (384-322 B.c.). . F. Koin or Common dia1ect (~ K~Ll'TJ ihO.roc;). The Koin took its rise in the Alexandrian period, so called from the preminence of

INTRODUCTION

Alexandria in Egypt as a centre of learning until the Roman conquest of the East; and lasted to the end of the ancient world (sixth eentury A.D.). It was the language used by persons speaking Greek from Gaul to Syria, and was marked by numerous varieties. In its spoken form the Koin eonsisted of the spoken form of Attic intermingled with a eonsiderable number of Ionie words and some loans from other dialects, but with Attic orthography. The literary form, a compromise between Attic literary usage and the spoken language, was an artificial and almost stationary idiom from which the living speech drew farther and farther apart.
In the Koin are composed the writings of the historians Polybius (about 205-about 120 n.c. ), Diodorus (under Augustus), Plutarch (about 46-about 120 A.n.), Arrian (about 95-175 A.n.), Cassius Dio (about 150-about 235 A.n.), the rhetoricians Dionysius of Halicarnassus (under Augustus), Lucian (about 120-about 180 A.D. ), and the geographer Strabo (about 64 n.c.-19 A.n.). Joseph us, the Jewish historian (37 A.D.-about 100), also used the Koin. N. 1.- The name .Atticist is given to those reactionary writers in the Koin dialect (e.g. Lucian) who aimed at reproducing the purity of the earlier Attic. The Atticists flourished chiefly in the second century A. n. N. 2.- Sorne writers distinguish, as a form of the Koin, the Hellenistic, a name restricted by them to the language of the New Testament and of the Septuagint (the partly literai, partly tolerably free, Greek translation of the Old Testament made by Grecized Jews at Alexandria and begun under Ptolemy Philadelphus 285-247 n.c. ). The word Ilellenistic is derived from 'En'1vtur1)s (from D\!1.'7vl!;w speak Greek), a term applied to persons not of Greek birth (especially Jews), who had learned Greek. The New Testament is composed in the popular language of the time, which in that work is more or less influenced by classical models. No accur!Lte distinction cau be drawn betweeu the Koin and Hellenistic.

G. Modern Greek appears in literature certainly as early as the eleventh century, when the literary language, which was still employed by scholars and churchmen, was no longer understood by tl1e common people. Du ring the middle ages and until about the time of the Greek Revolution (1821-1831), the language was called Romaic ('Pwp.aK~), from the fact that the people claimed the name of Romans ('Pwp.aot), since the capital of the Roman Empire had been transferred to Constantinople. The natural language of the modern Greeks is the outcome of a continua.} clevelopment of the Koin in its spoken forni. At the present day the dialect of a Greek peasant is still organically the same as that of the age of Demosthenes; while the written language, and to a less extent the spoken language o.{ cultivated Athenians and of those who have been infiuencecl by the University at Athens, have been largely assimilatecl to the ancient idiom. Modern Greek, while retaining in general the orthography of the classical period, is very different in respect of pronunciation.

INTRObDCTION
ADVANCE'b WORKS ON GRAMMAR AND DIALECTS

AnRiNS: De Graecrre linguae dialectis (I. Aeolic 1839, II. Doric 1843). Gottingen. StiJl serviceable for Doric. BLASs: Pronunciation of Ancient Greek. Translated from the tbird German edition by Purton. Cambridge, Eng., 1890. BoiSACQ: Les Dialectes doriens. Paris-Lige, 1891. BRUGMANN : Griechiscbe Grammatik. 4te Aufl. Mnchen, 1913. Purely comparative. CHANDLER: Greek Accentuation. 2d ed. Oxford, 1881. GILDERSLEEVE AND MILLER : Syntax of Classical Greek from Homer to Demosthenes. Parti. New York, 1900. Part ii, 1911. GooDwiN: Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. Rewritten and enlarged. Boston, 1890. HENRY : Prcis de Grammaire compare du Grec et du Latin. 5th ed. Paris, 1894. Translation (from the 2d ed.) by Elliott: A Short Comparative Grammar of Greek and Latin. London, 1890. Hmr: Handbuch der Griechischen Laut- und Formenlehre. Heidelberg, 1902. Comparative. HoFFMANN: Die griechischen Dialekte. Vol. i. Der sd-achaische Dialekt (Arcadian, Cyprian), Gottingen, 1891. Vol. ii. Der nord-achaische Dialekt (Thessalian, Aeolic, Boeotian), 1893. Vol. iii. Der ionische Dialekt (Quellen und Lautlehre), 1898. KRGER: Griechische Sprachlehre. Parti, 5te Aufi., 1875. Part ii, 4te Aufi., 1862. Leipzig. Valuable for examples of syntax. KHNER: Ausfhrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache. 3te Aufl. Parti by B!ass. Part ii (Syntax) by Gerth. Hannover, 1890-1904. The only modern complete Greek Grammar. The part by Blass con tains good collections, but is insufficient on the side of comparative grammar. MEISTER: Die griecbischen Dialekte. Vol. i. Asiatisch-aolisch, Bootisch, Thessalisch, Gottingen, 1882. Vol. ii. Eleisch, Arkadisch, Kyprisch, 1889. MEISTERHANS: Gra)llmatik der attischen Inschriften. 3te Aufi. Berlin, 1900. MEYER: Griechische Grammatik. 3te A ufl. Leipzig, 1896. Comparative, with due attention to inscriptional forms. Deals only with sounds and forms. MoNRO: A Grammar of the Homeric Dialect. 2d \)d. Oxford, 1891. Valuable, especially for its treatme~t of syntax. RIEMANN AND GoELZER: Grammaire compare du Grec et du Latin. Vol. i. Phontique et tude des Formes, Paris, 1901. Vol. ii. Syntaxe, 1897. SMrTn: The Sounds and Inflections of the Greek Dialects. Ionie. Oxford, 1894. V AN LEEUWEN: Euchiridium dictionis epicae. Lugd: Bat., 1892-94. Con tains a full discussion of forms, and aims at reconstructiug the primitive text of Homer. VEITCH: Greek Verbs Irregular an Defective. New ed. Oxford, 1887.

INTIWDCCTlN

ABBREVIATIONS
A.
Ag. Ch. Bum. Pers. Pr. Sept. Sn pp.

=Aeschy lus.
=Agamemnon.

= Choephori. = Enmenirles. = Persae. = Prometbeus. =Selltem. =Supplices.

H. F. Hi pp. I. A.

A es. = Aeschines. And. Andocides. Ant. Antiphon. Antiph. = Antiphanes. = Aristophanes. Ar.

= =

I. 'l'. Med. Or. Phoen. l:iupp. Tro.

=Hercules furens. = l!ippolytus. = 1phigenia Auliensis. = 1phigeuia 'l'auri ca.

=~1edea.

Lys.
Mt~n.

= Lysls.
= ~1eno.

= Orestes. = Phoenissae. =Supplices. =Trondes.

Hdt. Hom.

= Herodotus. = Homer.

Ach. =A charnenses. Av. = Aves. Eccl. = Eeelesiazusae. =Equites. Eq. Lys. = Lysistrata. Nu b. =Nnbes. = I>ax. P. Pl nt. =Plutus. llan. = Ranae. Thesm.= Thesmophoriazusae. V es p. = Yespae.

'l'he books of the lliad are designated by Greek capitals (A, B, r, etc.); those of the Odyssey by Greek smallletters (o., fJ, y, etc.).

Menex.= Menexenus. Par. = Parmenides. Ph. = Pbaedo. Phae. = Phaedrus Phil. = Philebus. Pol. = Politicus. Pr. = Protagoras. R. = Respublica. Soph. = Sophistes. S. =Symposium. Th. = Theaetetus. Theag. = Theages. Tim. = Timaeus.

s.
Aj. A nt. El. O. C. O. 'l'. Ph. Tr.

= Sophocles.

=Corpus inscriptionum Atticarum. Corn. Fr.= Comic Fragments. D. = Demostht'nes. Diog. = Diogenes Laert. Laertius. E. = Euripides.
Ale. = Alcestis. And. = Andromache. Bacch. = Bacchae. Cycl. = Cyclops. =Eiectra. El. Hec. = Hecuba. Hel. =Helena. Herne!. = H eraclidae.

C.I.A.

I. = Isocrates. I.G.A. = Inscriptiones Graecae antiquissimae. Is. = Isaeus. Lye. = Lycurgus. L. =Lysias. Men. = Menander.
Sent. = Sententiae.

Stob.
Fior.

= Stobaeus.

=Ajax. =Antigone. = Electra. = Oedipus Coloneus. = Oedipus Tyrannus. = Philoctetes. = Trachiniae. = J;'lorilegium.

T. X.

= Thucydides. = Xenopbon.
= Anabasis. = Apologia. = Agesilaus. = Cyropaedia =de re eq-aestri. = Hellenica.
=Hier~.

Philem. = Philemon. Pind. = Pindar. = Plato. . P.

A. Ale. Cbarm.
Cr.

= A pologia. =A lcibiades. = Charmides.

= Crito.

Crnt. = Cratylus. = Critias. Critl. Eu. = Ruthydemus. Euth. = Euthypbro. G. =Gorgias. Hi pp. M. =Hippias Major. Lach. = Lacbes. L. =Leges.

= Hipparchicus. = Memorabilia. = Oeconomicus. = l!espublica Atbenlensis. R. L. = Respublica Lacedaemonia. S. =Symposium. Vect. =de vectigalibus. Ven. = de venatione.

A. A p. Ages. C. Eq. II. Hi. Hi pp. M. O. R. A.

The dramatists are cited by Dindorf's !ines. But Tragic fragments (Fr. or Frag.) are cited by Nauck's numbers, Co mie fragments ( except Menander's Sententiae) by l{ock's volumPs and pages. The Orators are ciled bythe numbers of the speeches and the sections in the Teubner editions. Other abbreviations: - K . r. . = m! r ot,.d (et cetem); sc a: = scilicet; i.e. id est; ib. = ibidern; e.g. = exernpli gmtia; I.E. = Indo:!J:uropean; )( as f!ontrasted with.

PAR1, I
LETTERS, SOUNDS, SYLLABLES, AC.CENT
THE ALPHABET
1.

The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters.

Na me

Form

Equivalents

a>..c/w.
{3~Ta

B r
Do

f3
Y 3
f

alpha bta

a: aha; a: father
beg go dig met daze :Fr. fte thin meteor; : police kin let met net lax obey pet
l'lill

Sound as in

yap.p.a m

gamnw
delta epsilon zta ta thta

z
H
I

t
'YJ

fi, l ( ~ tf;>..6v)
t~Ta

e
z

f]m
()~Ta

(), {).
K

lW-ra
K0.1r1ra

K A
M N

lota kappa
lambda mn

'Aap.f33a p.

i e: c, k l

th

vv
0
'Ir

nu
xi
(nncron pi

'S
0

~~;: (~'i:)

m n x
6 p r s

n
p
~

ofJ, 0 ( () p.KpOV) 1r ( 1r'i:)

pw

dw
sigma
tau pslon plU: chi

u, s
T

T y
<P

u{yp.a Ta v

x
w

il (v !f>..6v) cf>e ( cf>)

x~t: (xt:) tf;e'i: ( tf;'i:)

\Il

~ ( ~ p.ya)

psi omega

such t tar (u) y : :Fr. tu; : Fr. sr graphie ph Germ. macben ch gypsum ps note 0

a. Sigma (not capital) at the end of a word is written s, elsewhere u. Thus, ue<uJJ.6s emthquake. b. The names in parentheses, from which are derived those in current use, were given at a. late period, some as late as the Middle Ages. Thus, epsilon mean.' simple e,' UJ18ilon simple u,' to distinguish t.hese letters from a<, o<, whiclt were souuded like e and v. 7

LETT.EHS, VOWELS, AND DlPHTHONGS

c. Labda is a better attested ancient name than lambda. 2. The Greek alphabet as given above originated in Ionia, and was adopted at Athens in 403 B.c. The letters from A to T are derived from Phoenician and have Semitic names. The signs 'Y' to fl were invented by the Greeks. From the Greek alphabet are derived the alphabets of most European countries. The anCJents used only the large letters, called majusc.ules ( capitals as E, uncials as 8); the smallletters (minuscules), which were used as a literary hand in the ninth century, are cursive forms of the uncials. a. Before 403 B.c. in the official Attic alphabet E stood for e, '1], spurious e (6), 0 for o, w, spurious ov (6), H for the rough breathing, X~ for :a:, <;Pl: for .Y. A was written for ")', and 'v for . Thus:
Eb.OX~ENTEIBO'v

EIKAITOib.EMOI ()o~f:V -rfj f3ovii

KO.L

T~ ()~1'-'f

X~YAAPA~E~X~YNEAPA~~AN

~vyypa<f>~<; ~vvf:ypwf!av.
trtT~()Hov ti:lVO.L m) TOV pyvptov.

EfliTEb.EION ENAIAflOTOAPAYPIO

3. In the older period there were two other letters: (1) F: Fa, vau, called digamma (i.e. double-gamma) from its shape. It stood after e and was prouounced like w. F was written in Boeotian as late as 200 B.c. (2) ?: K67nra, koppa, which stood after 1r. Another s, called san, is found in the sign ~, called sampi, i.e. san+ pi. On these signs as numerals, see 348.
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS

4. There are seven vowels : a, "' 'YJ, L, o, v, w. Of these " and o are aiways short, and take about half the time to pronounce as 'YJ and w, which are always long; o., L, v are short in some syllables, long in othei-s. In this Grammar, when o., L, v are not marked as long (, , ii) they are nnderstood to b short. All vowels with the circum:fiex (149) are long. On length by position, see 144.

a. Vowels are said to be open or close according as the mouth is more open
3 D. Vau was in use as a genuine sound at the time the Homeric poems were composed, though it is found in no Mss. of Homer. Many apparent irregularities of epie verse (such as hiatus, 47 D.) can be explained only by supposing that F was actually sounded. Examples of words containing F are: /J.urv town, /J.va~ lord, vavw j)lease, etKw give way (cp. weak), dKo<J< twenty (cp. viginti), ~Ka uros each, hwv willing, lft.7rop,a< hope (cp. voluptas), lfo<m am like, l!o, ol, 1! him, 1!~ six, lf1ros wo1d, ei1rov said, lfp')'ov, lfpow wmk, hvVp, clothe, fr. Fu-vvp,< (cp. vestis), pw will say (cp. verbum), l!u1repos evening (cp. vespe1), Yov violet (cp. viola), ~ros year (cp. vetus), 1}1!s sweet (cp. SW!vis), lov (ooa) know (cp. vide1e, wit), !s strength (cp. vis), ir.!a willow (cp. ~>itis, 1vithy), oKos house (cp. vicus), ovos wine (cp. vinum), 5< his (123), oxo cmTinge (cp. veho, wain). Vau was lost first before o-sonnds (p6.w seP. cp. 1w-wa1'e). F occurred also in the middle of words: KfO< glmy, airel alv.>I!.IJ.,, op< ,,heep (cp. ovis), KrJfl< key (Dor. Kii:ts, cp. clavis), ~tvfos stmnge1', <fl to Zeus, Kat.r6s beautiful. Cp. 20, 31, 37 D., 122, 123.

9J

DIPHTHONGS, BREATHJNGS

or less open in pronouncing them, the tongue and lips assuming different positions in the case of each.
5. A diphthong (M,P9oyyoc; having two sounds) combines two vowels in one sy Hable. The second vowel is L or v. The diphthongs are: aL, a, ot, tj., Th 't' ; av, w, ov, 1JV, and vL. The L of the so-called improper diphthongs, tj., Th 't' is written below the line and is called iota subscript. But with capital letters, Lis written on the line (adsc1ipt), as THI l6.HI = rfj J8n or 'flL'fj to the song. All diphthongs are long.

a. In ;, 11, 'tl the ' ceased to be written about 100 n.c. The custom of writing 'under the line is as late as about the eleventh century. 6. n, ou are either genuine or spu1ious (apparent) diphthongs (25). Genuine , ou are a corn bination of -r <, o + u, as in <l1rw I leave (cp. o<7ra I have left, 35a), "fvf< to a race (49), aKoou()os follower (cp. K<v()os way). Spurious .,, ou arise from contraction (50) or compensatory lengthening (37). Thus, tplf< he loved, from ltpl, ()fis placing from ()vr-s ; l<j>louv they loved from l<j>l<ov, 1ros voyage from 1rMos, /lous giving from iiovr-s. open

a a
7. The figure of a triangle represents the relations of the vowels and spurious diphthongs to one another.
''7

From a to ' and from a to ou the elevation of the tongue gradually increases. w, o, ou, u are accompanied by rounding of the lips.

r,

v ii (i.e. Germ. ii)___ ou close

8. Diaeresis.- A double dot, the mark of diaeresis ('La[pL> sepamtion), may be written over L or v when these do not forJ?l a diphthong with the preceding vowel: 7rpotrwu I set before, V1Jt to a ship.
Bf{EATHINGS

9. Every initial vowel or diphthong has either the rough (') or the smooth (') breathing. The rough breathing (spiritus asper) is pronounced as h, which is sounded before the vowel; the smooth

5 D. A diphthong wu occurs in New Ionie (wvr6s the same from o aros 68 D., i11-wuro of myseZf= !i-auro i12D D., ()w11-a = ()af!wx woncle1). Ionie has '7U for Attic au in sorne words (Hom. v'7bs ship). 8 D. In poetry and in certain dialects vowels are often written apart which Jater formed diphthongs: 1rciLs (or 1rds) boy or girl, lln<to'7s 3on of Peleus, lu (or lt) well, 'Alii'7s (or 'Mo'7s) llades, "fv< to a race. 9 D. The Ionie of Asia Min or lost the rough breathing at an early date. So also before p (13). Its occurrence in compounds (124 D.) is a relie of the period when

10

13IATlliXGS,

CONSO~ANTS

[xo

o. 0!> oros
10.

breathing (.spilitus lenis) is not sounded. mountain.

Thus, opo> h6ros boundary,

Initial v (v and ) always has the rough breathing.

11. Dipllthongs take the breathing, as the accent (152), overthe second vowel: alpt!w hairo I seize, atpw afro I lift. But t, ?h o/ take both the breathing and the accent on the first vowel, even when 'is written in the line (5): ~/lw= Atow 1 sing, ~ll7Js Ato7Js Hades, but Alv<ICis Aeneas. The writing l/l7Jl\os (' Alo7Jos) destroying shows that a< does not here form a diphthong; and hence is sometimes written a (8).

12. In compound words (as in 1rpoop.v to jmesee, from 1rp6 + op.v) the rough breathing is not written, though it must often have been pronounced: cp. t~llpii a hall with seats, Lat. exhedm, exedra, 1roulqrwp very learned, Lat. polyhistor. On Attic inscriptions in the old alphabet (2 a) we find E"X'HOPKON <il8pKov

faithjul to one's oath.

13.

rhetor).

Every initial p has the rough breathing: p~-rwp 01a.tot (Lat. Medial pp is written pp in some texts: ITvppo> Py1-rhus.

14. The sign for the rough breathing is derived from H, which in the Old At tic alphabet (2 a) was used to denote h. 'l'hus, HO o the. After H was used to denote 7), one half (f-) was used for h (about 300 n.c.), and, later, the other half (-1) for the smooth breathing. From f- and -1 come the forms' and '.

CONSONANTS

The seventeen consonants are divided into stops (or mutes), spirants, liquids, nasals, and double consonants. They may be arranged according to the degree of tension or slackness of the vocal chords in sonnding them, as follows:
15.

a. Voiced (sonant, i.e. sounding) consonants are produced when the vocal chords vibrate. The sounds are represen"ted by the letters {J, o, 'Y (stops), , p (liquids), p., v, -y-nasal (19 a) (nasals), and r. (All the vowels are voiced.) p with the rough breathing is voiceless. b. Voiceless (surd, i.e. hushed) cousonants require no exertion of the vocal chords. These are ,., r, K, <j;>, e, x (stops), q (spirant or sibilant), an.d >f and ~ c. Arranged according to the increasing degree of noise, nearest to the vowels are the nasals, in sounding which the air escapes without friction through the Hose; next come the semivowels \!and~ (20 a), the liquids, and the spirant q, in
it was still sounded in the simple word. Hom. sometimes has the smooth where A ttic has the rough breathing in forms th at are not Attic : 'At/J71s (" Ato7Js ), the god Hades, chro spran[J (iiop.ac), iip.v/Jcs together (cp. iip.a), i}<os sun (ijws), i}ws dawn (fws), fpTJ~ hawlc (UpCi.O, ovpos boundmy (Bpos). But also in lip.a~a wagon (Attic iip.a~a). ln Laconian medial q became' (h): ev!Ki. = ivfK7)q< he conquered. 10 D. ln Aeolic, v, lil'e ail the other vowels (a,nd the diphthongs), always has the smooth breathing. The epie forms IJp.p.<s you, IJp.p.<, IJp.p.< (!325 D.) are Aeolic.

21]

11

sounding which the air escapes with friction through the cavity of the mouth ; next come the stops, which are produced by a remo val of an obstruction; and finally the double consonants.

16. Stops (or mutes). Stopped co11sonants are so called because in sounding them the breath passage is for a moment completely elosed. The stops are <}ivided into three dasses (aceording to the part of the mouth chiefiy active in sounding them) and into tluee orders (according to the degree of force in the expiratory effort).
Classes Orde1s <P

Labial (lip sounds) Dental (teeth sounds) Palatal (palate sounds)

7r

T
K

0
"/

()
X

Smooth Middle Hough

1r

i
0

'Y

<P

a. The dentals are sometimes called lingua/s. The rough stops are also called aspirates (lit. breathed sounds) because they were sounded with a strong emission of breath (26). The smooth stops are th us distinguished from the rough stops by the absence of breathing. ' (h) is also an aspirate. The middle stops owe their name to their position in the above grouping, which is that of the Greek grammarians.

17. Spirants. _rl'here is one spirant: (J' (also called a sibilant). a. A spirant is beard when the breath passage of the oral cavity is so narrowed that a rubbing noise is produced by an expiration.
18. Liquids. - There are two liquids: has the rough breathing (13).

and p.

Initial p always

19. Nasals. -There are three nasals: y-nasal (palatal).

p.

(labial), v (dental), and

a. Gamma before K, "/, x, ~ is called -y-nasal. It had the sound of n in think, and was represented by n in Latin. Thus, d.-yKpa (Lat. ancora) anchor, IJ.'Y'Y<or (Lat. angeltts) messenger, 11</Jl'Y~ sphinx. b. The name liquids is often used to include both liquids and nasals.

often called semivowels.

20. Semivowels.- t, v, the liquids, nasals, and the spirant (J' are becoining ,, and F are also called spirants.)

a. When 'and u correspond toy and ~v (cp. minion, persuade) they are said tn be unsyllabic; and, with a following vowel, make one sylla ble out of two. Rrmivocalic ' ancl u are written 'and li Initial ~ passed into' (h), as in -l;1rap liver, Lat. .iecm; and into g- in ju'Y6v yoke, Lat. ,iugurn (here it is often called the spirant yod). Initial ~ was written f (:3). Medial !:_, li before vowels were often !ost, as in ri!-'c!.-(!:.)w I hnnour, f3o(\i)~6s, gen. of ~o-s ox, cow (43). b. The form of many words is due to the fact that the Jiquids, nasals, and cr may fulfil the office of a vowel to form syllables (cp. 7;ridle, even, pst). This is expressed by ~, ft, g, f, fJ, to be read 'syllabic ,' etc., or' sonant ' (see 35 b, c).

21. Double Consonants. - These are ,, ~' and

of 0'8 (or 8;) or

(26).

is written for

KO',

y(]', X<T;

.p. /; is a combinati on .p for 71'0', {3(]', </>(]'.

12
22.
DnIsw:-.;:=;

PRONl$CIATION
TABLE OF CONSONANT SOUNDS

Physiological Differences

Lainl

Dental

Palatal

Nasals
Semivow~ls

Voiced Voiced Voiced

J.L

-y-nasal (19 a)
~(y)

Y.(F)

Liquis Spirants Stops

p*

Voiced Voiceless Voiced Voiceless Voiceless Aspirate Voiced Voiceless

[3 (middle)

crt
<J, '

6 (middle)

-y (middle)
K

.,. (smooth) </J (rough)

e (rough)
5"

-r ( smooth)

(smooth) (rough)

Double ~ consonants l

tf

*pis voiceless.

ta was voiced only when it bad the~ sound (26).

ANCIENT GREEK PRONUNCIATION

The pronunciation of Ancient Greek varied rouch according to time and place, and differed in many important respects from that of the modern language. While in general Greek of the classical period was a phonetic language, i.e. its letters represented the sounds, and no heard sound was unexpressed in writing (but see 108), in course of time many words were retained in their old form though their pronunciation bad changed. The tendency of the language was thus to become more and more unphonetic. Our current pronunciation of Ancient Greek is only in part even approximately correct for the period from the death of Pericles (429 n.c.) to that of Demosthenes (322) ; and in the case of several sounds, e.g. t, cf>, X B, it is certainly erroneous for that period. But ignorance of the exact pronunciation, as well as long-established usage, must render any reform pedantical, if not impossible. In addition to, and in further qualification of, the list of sound equivalents in 1 we may note the following:
23.

24. Vowels. -Short a, ,, v differed in sound from the corresponding long vowe1s only in being Jess prolonged ; e and o probably differed from Tf and w also in being less open, a difference that is impossible to parallel in J<~nglish as our short vowels are more open than the long vowels. O. : as a in Germ. hat. There is no true ii in accented syllables in English ; the a of idea, aha is a neutra! vowel. E: as in bont; somewhat similar is a in bakery. 'IJ: as in fte, or
24 D. ln Lesbos, Boeotia, Laconia, possibly in Ionia, and in sorne ,other places, v was still sounded oo after it became like Germ. in Attic.

PRONUNCIATlON

13

nearly as e in where. 0:: nearly as the first e in meteor, eternal. o : as o in Fr. mot, somewhat like unaccented oin obey or phonetic (as often sounded). "': as o in Fr. encore. Eng. ii is prevailingly diphthongal (o"). v was originally sounded as u in prune, but by the fifth century had become like that of Fr. tu, Germ. thr. It ne ver had in Attic the sound of u in mute. After v had become like Germ. , the ouly means to represent the sound of the old u (oo in moon) was ou (25). Observe, however, that, in diphthongs, final v retained the old v sound. 25. Diphthongs.- The diphthongs were sounded nearly as follows: aL as in Cairo av as ou in out 7111 as h 1-oo eL as in vein ev as e (met)+ oo (moon) wv as oh 1-oo oL as in soil ov as in ourang VL as in Fr. huit In q., 'th'!' the long open vowels had completely overpowered theL by 100 n.c., so that L ceased to be written (5 a). The L is now generally neglected in pronunciation though it may have still been sounded to sorne extent in the fourth century n.c. -The genuine diphthongs u and ov (6) were originally distinct double sounds ('h 1oi, oh'-oo), and as such were written El, OT in the Old Attic alphabet (2 a): ErE 1~ E hret!5i), TOYTO N rovrwv. The spurious diphthongs u and ou (6) are digraphs representing the long sounds of simple e (French ) and original v. By 400 n.c. genuine " and av had becorne simple single sounds pronounced as ei in vein and ou in ourang; and spurious " and ov, which had been written E and 0 (2 a), were now often written El and OT. After 300 n.c. eL gradually acquired the sonnd of ei in seize. v was sounded like eh 1-oo, 1JV and c.~u like h 1-oo, oh 1-oo, pronounced rapidly but smoothly. v~ is now commonly sounded as ui in quit. It occurred only before v-owels, and the Joss of the L in u6s son ( 43) shows that the diphthongal sound was disliked.
26. Consonants. -Most of the consonants were sounded as in English (1). Bef ore L, K, y, T, <T 11ever had a sh (or zh) sound beard in Lycia (AvKlii), Asia (' Aulii). <T was usually like our sharp s; but before voiced consonants (15 a) it probably was soft, Jike z; thus we find both K6jf.LoS and Kd<Tf.Los on inscriptions. - t was probably = zd, whether it arose from an original uo (as in 'AfJi}vaje, from 'AfJ71va(v)s-oe Athens-wards), or from dz, developed from dy (as in ju-y6v, from (d)yv-y6v, cp. jugurn). The z in zd gradually extinguished the d, until in the Hellenistic period (p. 4) 5 sank to z (as in zeal), which is the sound in Modern Greek.- The aspirates cJ>, 9, x were voiceless stops (15 b, 16 a) followed by a strong expiration : ,.h, rh, Kh as in upheaval, hothouse, baclchand (though here his in a different sy1lable from the stop). Thus, <f>ev-yw was ,.'ev-yw, tiw was r'w, l!xw was 1!-K'w. Cp. .p' ;p for ,.(1) 'i)l, etc. l'robably only one h was beard when two aspirates came together, as in <xtip6s ( hr'p6s ). After 300 A.D. (probably) .p, 8, and x becaroe spirants, rp being sounded as f (as in 4>iL?r?ros Philip), tl as th in theatre, x as ch in German ichor loch. The stage between as pirates and spirants is sometimes represented by the writing ,.q, ( = pf), re, KX,
26 D. Aeolic bas ui5 for !: in ilui5os ( 6jos bmnch). In la te Laconian 8 passed into fT ( G'7]piov = e.,piov wild beast). In Laconian and some other dialects [3 became a spirant and was written for F. il became a spirant in Attic after Christ.

14

VOWEL CHANGE

which are affricata. -The neglect of the h in Latin represenlations of </>, 0, x possibly shows that these sounds consisted of a stop + h. T!Jus, Pilipus .pl),,,.,.os, tus= OUos, Aciles = 'AxLXevs. Modern Greek bas the spirantic sounds, and these, though at variance with classical pronunciation, are now usually adopted. See also 108.
VOWEL CHANGE

27. Quantitative Vowel Gradation.- In the formation and infiection of words a short vowel often interchanges with its corresponJing long vowel. Thus
SHORT

a.

(1) 'ii (ii after e, ' p, 31) '1) frq>-6-01 q,V-rns l-w iKiiPw -r"ip,d-6.1 </><-w nature !show !permit I love !come I honour rpfJ-p.a O'T}w-o-w K.VOV -r"i}Li}-uw d-<T01 </><-1,-o-w growth future imperf. future future future 28. Difference in quantity between Attic and Epie words is <lue chiefly either to (1) metrical lengthening, orto (:l) different phonetic treatment, as KaXrhs, rLPfW become Epie K.Msfa.ir, rtvw lpay (37 D. 1), Attic 1i.Ms, Ttvw. 29. The initial short vowel of a word forming the second part of a compound is often lengthened: o-rpa.r'T}"(hs geneml (o-rpar6s a1my + 6:ye<v to lead 887 d).

LONG "1

1J

30. Attic 1], a.- Attic has TJ for original a of the earlier period, as <P~!LTJ report (Lat . .frna). Ionie also has TJ for original a. Doric nd Aeolic retain original ii ( cpiip.a).
28 D. Metrical lengthening. -Many words, which would otherwise not fit into the verse, show in the Epie "' for e, ou (rarely o<) for o, and ii, , ii for a., ,, v. Thus, elvd.Xws in the sea for iv&.ws, ela.pLv6s vernal for iap<v6s, inrelpoxos eminent for v1Tpoxos, elXf,XovOa. have come for iXf,XovOa, ouMp.evos destructive, accursed for ohf.Levos, opea mountains from 5pos, 0u11f.L1TOLO of Olympus from "OXvp:rros. o before a vowel appears as o< in ,.voLT, breath. Similarly, T]-yd.Oeos very holy for -y&.Oeos; but f,vep.Om windy (from d,vef.LoS) has the 'l of inrf,vep.os 1mder the wind (29), and nOi}f.Levos placing (for n0f.Levos) borrows 'l from rl87Jp.<. A short syllable under the rhytlunic accent(' ictus') is lengthened metrically: (1) in words having three or more short syllables: the first of tluee shorts (ovJf.Levos), the second of four shorts (.,.eLpoxos), the third of five shorts (.,.epeio-<a boundless); (2) in words in which the short ictus syllable is followed by two longs and a short (OuM,u.,.ow ). A short sylla ble not un der the rhythmic accent is lengthened when it is preceded and followed by a long; th us, any vowel preceded by F ( 1rvelw breathe = .;.vFw), , or v bef ore a vowel ( .,.poOiip.tTJ<TL zeal). 30 D. 1. Doric and Aeolic retain original i, as in p.iiov apple (cp. Lat. malum, Att. ,ufjXov), Kiipv~ herald (Att. Kfjpv;). But Doric and Aeolic have original 'l when 7J interchanges with <, as in rl87Jp.< I plat:e, rlOe,uev we place, pAr7Jp p.iirpa mothe1, 1rotp.f]v .,.o,,uv, shepherd. 2. Ionie has 7J after e, ' and p. Thus, -yeve-1], <T!<<-1,, -i}p.p1J.

34]

VOWEL CHANGE

15

a. This is true also of the ii which is the result of early compensative lengthening, by which -avu-, -auX-, -aup.-, and -auv- ellanged to -iiu-, -iiX-, -iip.-, and -iiv-. (See 37 b.) But in a few cases like reis for rcivs, and in 1r.ua for 1ravua (113) wllere the combination avu arose at a later period, ii was not changed to ?1 iHp.va< for ucf>fjva.< to weave follows nrpiiva< to pierce. b. Original ii became ?1 after v, as <f>vf} growth. In sorne words, however, we find ii.
31.

In Attic al one this

"fJ

was changed back to .:

1. When preceded by a p; as 7)p.pii day, xwpii country. This appears to have taken place even though an o intervened: as aKpoiip.o. a musical pie ce, .8poii collected. ExcEPTJONS: (a) But Pf?l was changed to P?l: as KOp'f! for KOpf7J maiden. (b} Likewise p?}, when the result of contraction of pea, remained: as op'YJ from opea mountains. ( c) And pu7J was changed to PP'T/ : as K6pp'YJ for Kopu'YJ (79) one of the temples. 2. When preceded by , or , : as "(<v<d. generation, uKtti shadotv. This change takeR place even when the ?1 is the result of the contraction of <a: as iryt healthy, ivoe lacking, for y<fj from -yLE(u)a, tvo<fj from lv(u)a; also, if originally a f intervened, as viii for PEfii young (Lat. nova). ExcEPTIONS: Sorne exceptions are due to analogy: 'Y<fi healthy, ev<f>vfj shapely (292 d) follow <ra<f>fj clear.
32. In the choruses of tragedy Doric ii is often used for 'YJ Thus, /J-&.T'YJP mother, !fvxix. soul, y earth, ovaravo> wretched, (3av went.

33. The dialects frequently show. vowel sonnds th at do not occur in the corresponding Attic words.

34. Transfer of Quantity. - 'YJo, 'YJa often ex change quantities, becoming cw, i. Thus, YJo> (Epie aoc; folk) becomes ewc;, as 1ro:'Jo> becomes ?Tocw of a city; rd)vYJ6roc; rd)vcwro dea.d; (3aaL~a {3aaLa
king.
33 D. a. forE: iapos saered, "Aprap.<s (for Apnp.<s), -rpci1rw tuTn Dor.; E for a.: 8puos comage Aeol., fpu'f!v male, bplw see, rluueps jour ( = rhrapes) Ion.; o. for o: o<iiKarlo< (for tiiKouw<) 200 Dor., ,-ci unde?' Aeol.; o for o.: urporos (rrrparbs) army, 6v (.v.) up Aeol., rhop<s (rhrap<s) fou?' Dor.; E for 'IJ: l!uuwv injeTior (~;rwv) Ion.; E for o: 'A1rwvDor. (also'A1rowv); E for u: p.\wv greater Ion. ; E for ' : Kpviiv mix ( = Ktpvcivat for K<pavvuva<) Aeol.; 'forE : iurl?} hearth Ion., lu,riii Dor. (for ur1ii), xptuws (xptueos) golden Aeol., Otbs god Boeot., Koup.lw arrange Dor.; u for a.: 1rluvpes jou? (rhrapes) Hom.; u for o: dvvp.a name Dor., Aeol., .1rv from Aeol.; w for ou: wv acc01dingly Ion., Dor. 34 D. Often in Ionie : 'Arp<t<w from earlier 'Arpetiio son of Atreus, lKrew from lKhiio su:ppliant. Tls w generally'makes a single syllable in poetry (60). The 'JO intermediate between iio and ew is rarely found.

16

VOWEL CHANGE

[35

35. Qualitative Vowel Gradation. -In the same root or suffix we find an interchange among different vowels (and diphthongs) similar to the interchange in sing, .~ag, sung.

a. This variation appears in strong grades and in a weak grade (inchiding actual expulsion of a vowel- in diphthongs, of the first vowel). Thus, <f>p-w 1 carry, <f>6p-o-s tribute, <f>wp thiej, <f>ap-rpi quiver, l-rp p-o-s chariot (twocan"ier), el'll'-w 1 leave, M-o<'ll'-a 1 have lejt, <'li'<v to leave. The interchange is quantitative in <f>bp-o-s <f>wp (cp. 27). b. When, by the expulsion of a vowel in the weak grade, an unpronounce: able combination of consonants resulted, a vowel sound was developed to render pronunciation possible. Thus, pa or ap was developed from p between consonants, as in 7ra-rp6.-rn from 'll'arp-rr< (262) ; and a from v, as in avr6-p.o.-ro-v for avro~o<~-rov automaton (acting o/its Ojlln will), cp. p.fO-s mge, p.-p.ov-a 1 yearn. So in ovop.alvw name for ovop.v--~w ; cp. 6vop.a. c. A vowel may also take the place of an original Jiquid or nasal after a consonant; as iirra for Xiirrp.. This p, , p., v in b and c .is called sonant liquid 0 or sonant nasal. 36.
Strong Grades 1. 2.
TABLE OF THE CHIEF VOWEL GRADES

Weak Grade

Strong Grades

Weak Grade
a

1. 2.

a. b. c.

(.

: 0

-or a
v

:oc.

eu : ou

d. O.:w e. 7]:W w f.

eor a
0

-y--yov-a I am born { i--y<v-b-p.7]v I be came rpbrw I tu rn rpo7r-1j l'OUt b.. 7rel0-w I persuade '11'-'11'oL9-a I trust (568) c. tev( O)rr-o-p.a< I shall go : .X-1jXov8-a I have go ne d. <f>i-p.l (Dor., 30) I say <f>w-vij speech Ow-p.6-s heap e. J rl-07]-p.L I place \. pij-y-vii-p.<. I IJreak ~-ppw-y-a. I have broken ol-ow-p.< I give f.

a.

-yl--y v-o-p.a< 1 become "rpti'll'-7]v I was put tn flight '11'<0-avbs persuasive f/}..v0-o-v I went (Epie) rpa-p.h we speak

8e-r6-s placed, adopted

i-ppd-y-71 it was broken L-oo-p.<v we give

N. 1. - Helatively few words show examples of aU the above series of grades. Sorne have five grades, as 'll'a-rfjp, 1ra-rp-a, <V-7rd-rwp, <V-7rd-rop-a, 'li' a-r p-6s. N. 2.- e and ' vary in 7r<rdvviip.t .,.lrv71P.' spread out.

COMPENSATORY LENGTHENING
37. Compensatory lengthening is the lengthening of a short vowel

to make up for the omission of a consonant.

37 D. 1. Ionie agrees with Attic except where the omitted consonant was f, which in Attic disa.ppeared after a consonant withont catising lengthening. Thus, ~e<vos for ~vos stranger, <tv<Ka on account of (also in Dem.) for ~v<t<a, opos boundary for 6pos, t<opos boy for Kopos, p.ovvos alone for p.6vos. These forms are also used generally in poetry.

42]

VOWEL CHANGE.
ct
0
EL

17
ou

The short vowels are lengthened to l'bus the forms become

a
ra v-s rds
gp.Etva

" v
ELKVVJIT-$

-p.<v--<Ta

fKhLV-!Ta
~KX.vct

-r6vs ToUs

OLKVVS

the

I remained

I leaneit

the

showing

a. Thus are formed Knlvw I kill for Knv-~w, q,IMpw I ilest1oy for <PO<p-~w, ilorpa giver for ilonp-J,a, Khivw I lean for K.<v-J,w, o.o</>Vpw I lament for o}..oq,vp-Jw. _ b. a becomes 7J in the <T-aorist of verbs whose stems end in , p, or v, when not preceded by ' or p. Thus, i<;av-<Ta becomes ~-<P7Jva I showed, but 7r<pav-<Ta becomes 1rpfiva I jinished. . So <T<f}v7J moon for <T<.a<T-P7J (<Tas gleam).
c. The diphthongs .. and ou due to this lengthening are spurious (6).
38. fi arises from a< upon the Joss of its ' (43) in &.t always (from al<l), &eros eagle (alerbs), K&.<< weeps (K.ale<), Mfi olive-tree (i)l.ali, cp. Lat. oliva). a. This change took place only when a< was followed by F (al rel, alrrros from fLE'TOS, KhaLfE< from Kaf', 111, 128) or ' (871f3iils the Thebad from e.,{3ads); and only when F or ' was not followed by o.
SHORTENING, ADDITION, AND OTHER VOWEL CHANGES

39. Shortening. -A long vowel may be shortened before another long vowel: {3acnMwv from {3au<1}wv of kings, vwv from v71wv of ships, nOvews from 'TE0P7]WS dead. 40. A long vowel before ,, v, a nasal, or a liquid + a following consonant was regularly shortened : vafis from original vfivs ship, p.ly<v from -p.<"f7J-P'T were mixed. The long vowel was often introduced again, as Ion. P7JS ship. 41. Addition. -a, <, o are sometimes prefixed before ~' p., p, F (prothetic vowels). Thus, -fl</>w anoint with oil, l1ros fat; -pv0p6s red (cp. Lat. ruber), <-.CKo<T< from <-Cr )flKo<T< ; o-p.6pyvfJ.< wipe; <-xO<s and xe<s yesterday, t-Kns weasel ( Knil71 weasel-skin helmet) are doubtful cases. 42. Development. -A medial vowel is sornetimes developed from )1. or v between two consonants; tbus a, a; ap, pa; av (35 b). Also (rarely) in forms like Ion. {3payxos = A tt. {3pyxos hoarseness.
2. Doric generally lengthenR < and o to 71 and w , ~ijvo>, wpos, Kwpos, 1-'wvos. So p.wua muse from fJ.Ovua for fJ.ovr;;a, rws for r6vs the, iJfJ.l am for '"~-''' X7Jlo< 1000 for xeo-<o<, Ionie x<Itot. (In sorne Doric dialects F drops as in Attic (~vos, IJpos); and avs, ovs may become as, os: il<u7r6rts lmds, r6s the.) 3. Aeolic has ats, <<s (a gemtine diphth.), ots from avs, <vs, ovs. Thus, 'lTaua all (Cretan ,.v<Ta, A tt. 1r<Ta), Mo'"' they loose from MovTL. Elsewbere Aeol. prefers assimilated forms (~1-'fVVa, gKhtvva, ~vvos, ~VVE Ka, 5ppos, ~fJ.fJ.L, x.!I\.LOL). But single p are also found, as in K6pfi, 1-<6vos. Aeolic bas q,O<ppw, Klvvw, oo</>ppw; cp. 37 3., 39 D. In the Ionie genitive of . stems (214 D. 8) -ewv is from -7]wv out of -iiwv. So in Ionie {3a.<T<a from f3au<.i)a king. So even before a short vowel in Hom. fipwos, fipw< hero (cp. 148 D. 3).
GREEK GRAM.

-2

18

EUPHONY OF VOWELS

[43

43. Disappearance. -The 'and v of diphthongs often disappear before a following vowel. 'l'hus, vbs from vlbs son, fJo-bs genitive of fJoli-s ox, cow. , ani. v here became semivowels (~, ~), which are not written. Cp. 148 D. 3. 44. a. The disappearance of e bef ore a vowel is often called hyphames!s ( v<t>a.lpe<ns omission). Th us Ionie vouu6s chick for veO<J"u6s, oprf} for oprf} festival; ci.oews jearlessly for ci.lleiws. Here e was sounded nearly like y and was not written. b. The disappearance of a short vowel between consonants is called syncope ( IJ"V'"fKo7r1, cutting up). Th us 1ri1rrw fall for ,.,_,.er-w, 1ra.rp6s father for 1ra.rpos. Syneopated forms show the weak grade of vowel gradation (85, 8fi). 45. Assimilation. -A vowel may be assimilated to the vowel standing in the following syllable: fJ<fJlov boole from f3v{3lov (f3v{3os papyrus). a. On assimilation in distracted verbs (opbw see, etc.), see 643 ff., 652.
EUPHONY OF VOWELS

CONTACT OF VOWELS AND HIATUS

46. Attic more tban any other dialect disliked the immediate succession of two vowel sounds in atljoining syllables. 'fo avoid such succession, which often arose in the formation and inflection of words, various means were employed: contrw;ti<m. (48 ff.), when the vowels collided in the middle of a word; or, when the succession occurred between two words (hiatus), by crasis (62 ff.), elision (70 ff.), aphaeresis (76), or by affixing a movable consonant at the end of the former word (134).
47. Hiatus is usually avoided in prose writers by elision (70 ff.) ; but in . cases where elision is not possible, hiatus is allowed to remain by different writers in different degrees, commonly after short words, such as .;;, el, .;;, Ka.{, p.f}_, and the forms of the article.

43 D. So in IIdt. dera.< fo~ Kelera.< lies, f3a.O.!a. for f!a.O<a. deep. 44 D. Cp. Hom. iEo( A 18 (one syllable). L becomes ~in Hom. 7rbLOS (two syllables) <I> 567. , rare! y disappears: ofjp.ov for o-l}p.tov belonging to the people

a.

M 213.

47 D. Hiatus is allowed iu certain cases. 1. In epie poetry: a. After' and v: lt~ov< p.cf>ls, uv luu<. b. After a long final syllable having the rhythmic accent : p.o< 8oV(j!J. (_,_v v...!... v). c. 'Vhen a long final syllable is shortened before an initial vowel (weak, or ?nproper, hiatus): ci.KTfj </>' Vo/7J' (_,_V v_,_ _ _,_). d. When the concurrent vowels are separated by the caesura ; often after the fonrth foot: ci.)\:\' /17' p.wv OXfWP f7rt{31}ueo, 1 rppa to7JcU ; Very often between the short syllables of the third foot (the feminine caesura): as, d.)o..X' ci.Kiovua. K&.07JI1"o, 1 p.cp ' e1rmeleeo p.iJO<;~ ; rarely after the first foot : a.rp ~7vw A 333. e. Where F bas been lost. 2. In .Attic poetry hiatus is allowable, as in 1 c, and after rl what '! e well, interjections, 1repl concerning, and in ovM (p.7Jo) ds (for ooels, p.7JOEls no one).

54]

CONTRACTION
CONTRACTION

19

48. Contraction unites in a single long vowel or diphthong two vowels or a vowel and a diphthong standing nex.t each other in successive syllables in the same word.

a. Occasion for contraction is made especially by the concurrence of vowel sounds which were once separated by cr,!! (), and .!,(17, 20:a).

The following are the chief rules governing contraction:

49. (I) Two- vowels which can form a diphthong (5) unite to form that diphthong: yf.vE = yivEt, al86 = al8o, K~CtJpov = K'tJpov.
50. (II) Like Vowels. - Like vowels, w hether short or long, unite in the commou long; EE, oo become n, ov (6): yf.p,.a = yf.pa, cptfTJTE
cpEE = .cpEt, 8TJOOJJ-EV = 8YJ.OVJJ-EV. a. ' is rarely contracted with, (oif>' + Li5wv = oif>tliLov (lls son in inscriptions, from (,)vs = v16s, 43).

= cpti]n j

sma~l snake)

or v with v

5~. (III) Unlike Vowels.- Unlike vowels are assimilated, either the second to the first (ptogressiue assimilation) or the first to the second (regressive assimilation).

a. An o sound always prevails over an a or e sound: o or (1) before or after o., and before 'h forms (1). oE and Eo form ou (a spurious diphthong, 6). Thus, r<p,d.op,ev = rp,wp,ev, alooa = alow, 1jpwa = l)pw, rp.d.w = rp,Q, 07J61JTE = 01Jwu; but </><fOJLEV = </><OVJLEV, 01JbETOV = 01JOVTOV. b. When a. and E or 'Il come together the vowel sound tha.t precedes prevails, and we have L or '1]: lipae = lipii, rp,d.1JTE = rp,.re, 6pea = 6p~. c. u rarely contracts: u + = ii in lxiJ&owv from lxiJvlotov small jish; v+ E strictly never becomes ii (273).
52. (IV) Vowels and Diphthongs.- A vowel disappears before a diphthong beginning with the same sound: p.va.t = p.va, cptt =

cpt>..E'i:, 8Tj>..6ot

8Tjo..

53. A vowel before a diphthong not beginning with the same sound generally con tracts with the first vowel of the diphthong; the last vowel, if t, is subsc'l'ipt (5): rp.ct = rp.<f, Tfp..otp.Ev = r.,u.Ojp.Ev,
EL7rUL

= d1r'[J,
E+

JJ-EJJ-VTJOJJ-YJV = JJ-EJJ-V<JJ-YJV

a. But

7Jo'i, 7J6T/

= 7JO.

o. becomes 0., </>LOL

</>LO; 0

+ u,

n become o :

7]6E<

54. Spurious u and ou are treated like e and o : rp,aELv=rip.v, 7JbeLv= 7Jov, Tp.aovtn=rp,wcr' (but rp,d.EL =rp.fj. and o7J6" = 07Joi, sin ce et is here genuine ; 6).
50 D. ' + ' = occurs chiefiy in the Ionie, Doric, and Aeolic dative singular of nouns in -Ls (268 D.), as in 1r6'1"' 1r6X; also in the opta.tive, as in if>lh-i-ro

tj>8-ro.

20

EUPHONY OF VOWELS

[55

55. (V) Three Vowels.- When three vowels corne together, the last two unite first, and the resulting diphthong may be contracted with the first vowel: thus, Tp4 is from Tp.a-u out of Tp.a-E(cr)aL; but IIEpLK'ovs from IIEpLKos.
56. Irregularities. -A short vowel preceding a or any long vowel or diphthong, in contracts of the first and second declensions, is apparently absorbed (235, 290): xporua = xpiYi (not xp1Y1j), :rr"Ma = cbrfi (not cl?rw), by analogy to the a which marks the neuter plural, xp~Yia.s = xp~Yas. (So -i}p.!as = -i}p.is to show the -as of the accus. pl.) Only in the singular of the first declension does eii become 71 (or ii after a vowel or p): xp~Y!iis = xpv~Y1js, p-yvp!q. = p-yvp(j.. In the third declension eea becomes eii (265); Lea or vea becomes Lii (vii) or LTJ ( v7J). See 292d. Varions special cases will be considered under their appropriate sections.
57. The contraction of a long vowel with a short vowel sometimes does not occur by reason of analogy. Thus, v71t (two syllables) follows v7Jos, the older form of vews (275). Sometimes the long vowel was shortned (39) or transfer of quantity took place (34).

58. Vowels that were once separated' by IY or ~ (20) are often not contracted in dissyllabic forms, but contracted in polysyllabic forms. Thus, Oe(u)os go, but eovKvilioTJS Thucydides (Oeos + KVOOS glo1y).

59.
a+a = 'ii +a =ci a+ii =ii a+ aL =at a+q. ={i =ii a+ a-j <L (gen.) = {i a+ (sp.) = =ci a+7J =i a+v a+L =at a+L ={i a+o =w a+ OL ='i' a+ ov(sp.) =w a+w e+a +ii =w =TJ =ii =7]

TABLE OF VOWEL CONTRACTIONS

[After u. or ov, gen. rneans gennine,

~:;p.

means spuriou..]

= -ylpii = fis = f3{3fi1Yc = p.va'i = p.v(j. == Ttp..r rp,clet = rip.(j. rp.cietv = Tp.v rp.ci7JT = TfJ...TE r.p.a 17 = rp.iiK!pa = Kfpa.c f;.trepos = p</repos TJ.Ld.Of.LE'V = r.p.wp.<v TtjJ.O..OLJ.LL = TLp.f;>p.L
-ypaa ias f3ef3aaiYL p.vaaL p.vaq. T.p.aETE
h.p.de(~Y)o

<+aL

=v
=a.t

DEaL

=Mn

whence M
XPIYaLs = XPIYas

(56)

= (sp.) </JLfETf +f + f( (gen.) = f< (gen.) </>LffL < + (sp.) = L(sp.) </>Lff<V </>LfTJTf f + 7J =TJ <f>cV + 17 =v == EL (gen.) 'Y'vei.' + L = OV (sp.) </>LfOp.EV f + 0 </>LfOLT f + OL =oL + ov (sp.) == OlJ </>LfOVIYL
f f

= </>LETf = </>LE = </>LEV = </>L1jTE

=</>LI = -yv

= =

</>Lop.E> </>LOT

= </>LOVIYL

(55)

+v +w
f

=ev

r.p.aw rdxea OIYTfa

= r.p.w = r.p.w
=T<lX7J

+'l'
EL(gen.)
L

7J+ a<

ci,.-Ma.

= OIYri(56) 71 + = ?r1j 7J +

'1+
(sp.)

=w ='i' =v =TJ

= E </>LfW = </>Lw XPliY'I' = XPVIY'iJ V7J(CT)aL =Mn T.f,Lf}EPTOS = TJ.Lf}PTOS

l'v

= 17
=TJ

l'Il"
T}J:I]ELS

= rp.1js

=k'v

55 D. In Hom. oeos of jear from of(u)-os the first two vowels unite.

61]

CONTRACTION, SYNIZESIS
TABLE OF VOWEL CONTRACTIONS- Concluded

21

'7+'1

'7+11 11 +ot
'1+'

='7 =17

='!'
=17

L +< o+a

=t =w
==i

<j>av-1}'7TE = <j>avfin = ~~ N11 JLEiJ.V'10liJ.1JV = iJ.f.J.VtPJl1JV K17ts = KVS Xlws Xros a.l/36a. alow ?rba ?r.

o+17

OL

07JO?J

0
0

= ov (sp.) lo-f}o< + (gen.) = OTJdEL

fL OL

(56)

= = = = lo-f}ov
=:

0 + L = 7Jxo'i = ov (sp.) ,. oos = ?ros o+o =ot 0'7"/..60Lp.V = 0'7Op.EV 0 + OL o + ov (sp.) = ov (sp.) 0'7"/..60V<TL = 017ocn 07J6w =w = o71w 0 + w =:?rc)j ?rIJ'I' o+'l' ='l' ==ii ixOvlowv = lxOvowv V+ L

=4? =ot

Obvs 1Jxo<

= 0'7O = ot;s

o +EL (sp.)
0

== ov
=w

1]

01JhfLV 07J61JT

=:

01JO 01JOVP o1Jwn

v+ v w+a w+< w+w

=ii =w ='!' =w

us (for v!6s) l'!s ijpwa =i)pw ;jpwL = i7P4' oww(Hom.)= ow

N.- The forms of p-y6w shiver contract from the stem p-yw- (yielding w or 'l').
SYNIZESIS

In poetry two vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, belonging to successive syllables may unite to forma single syllable in pronunciation, but not in writing. Thns, {3A~ missiles, ?T~> city, IT1J1Jall~ son of Peleus, )(Piia-<e golden. 'fhis is called Synizsis (crvv[(1)<Tt> settling together). ~ 61. Synizesis may occur between two words when the first ends in a long vowel or diphthong. This is especially the case with Il>]
60.

59 D. Attic contracts more, Ionie Jess, than the other dialects. The laws of contraction often differ in the different diaJects. 1. Ionie (OJd and New) is distinguished by its absence of contraction. Thus, 1rhos for 1ros voyage, nlxa for nlx1J walls, O<rra for oa-r bones, oto-1} for c;o-r, song, ep-y6s for cip-y6s idle. The Mss. of Hdt. generally Jeave u, <7J uncontracted; but this is probabJy erroneous in most cases. Ionie rareJy contracts where Attic does not: o-yowKovra. for 6-yoo-f}Kovra. eighty. 2. eo, <w, <ov general! y re main open in ali diaJects except A ttic. In Ionie ,., is usually monosyllabic. Ionie (and Jess often Doric) may contract <o, eov to <v: a-< from a-o of thee, </><<a-t from <j><ova-t they love. 3. a.o, iio, aw, iiw con tract to ii in Doric and Aeolic. Thus, 'Arpfloa from 'Arp<loao, Dor. 'Y<.vn they laugh from -y<Movn, xwpv from xwp6.wv of countries. In Aeolic oa =ii in f3ii06EvTL (Ion. f3w0o<VTL) =A tt. f3o7JOOVTL aiding (dative). 4. Doric con tracts ae to 7J; a7J to '1; '"'' a?J to ?1 Thus, vtKTJ from vtKa.< conquer! pi) from pciEL and pci17 ; but ae =a. ( liws from <iws, Hom. 1Jws S7tn). 5. The Severer (and earlier) Doric contracts to .,, and oe, oo to w. Thus, q><'A.-f}rw from <j><<hw, o1Jwre from o1JheT<, t1r1rw from t1r1rO-o (230 D.); the Milder (and Jater) Doric and N. W. Greek cotractto "'and ov. Aeolic agrees with the Severer Doric.

22
now, Y; or,
~

CRASlS

(interrog.), p.'lj not, 7rd since, yw I, ..3 oh ; as

:q ov 0 18.

a. The tenu synizesis is often restricted to cases where the first v:::wel is long, Where the first vowel is short, , , were sounded nearly like y ; u nearly like w. Cp. 44 a. The single syllable produced.by synizesis is almost al ways long. CR A SIS

Crasis (Kpcn<; mingling) is the contraction of a vowel or diphthong at the end of a worcl with a vowel or diphthong begin ning the following worcl. Over the syllable resulting from contraction is placed a' called coronis (Kopwv[<; hook), as r/J.Ma from r a.\.a the othe1 things, the rest.
62.

a. The coronis is not written when the rough breathing stands on the first word : ol1v8pw1ros = itv8pw1ros. b. Crasis does not occur when the first vowelmay be elided. (Sorne editors write r/J.XXa., etc.) 63. Crasis occurs in general only between words tlutt be long together ; and the first of the two words uuited by crasis is usually the less important; as the article, relative pronoun (IJ, i), 1rp6, Ka.l, of}, ~- Crasis occurs chiefiy in poetry. a. It is rare in Hom., corn mon in the dialogue parts of tlle drama ( especially in comedy), and frequent in the orators. 64. .,. , r, K become <P, 0, x wh en the next word begins with the rough breathing (124): rfi i}p.lpq.= 8-l}p.lpq. the day, Ka.! ol and the= xol (68 c). . 65. Iota subscript (5) appears in the syllable resulting from crasis only when the first syllable of the second word contains an ': 'yw oila. i'Y:[,ila I know (but rt/i on&.v'f' = rwn&.v'f' the instrument, 68 a). 66. The rules for crasis :lre in general the same as those for contraction (48ff.). Thus, r ovop.a. = roiJvop.a the name, o lv= ovv, w 11.v<p = wv<p oh man, 11"p l!xwv = 1rpoiJxwv excelling, rb ip.&.TLov = Oolp.ri:nov the cl oak (64 ), . "ftlJ = ,i"f.:;. But the following exceptions are to be noted (67-9):

67.
f.tOU

ffrl =

A diphthong may lose its final vowel : o! lp.ol = ovp.ol, ffOL lffrl = ffoMrl., f.tO~(J'Tl. Cp. 43, 68.

.X-I}Ona., ro avilp6s = r.vl!p6s, r<P avl!pl = r.vopl, o a.~os = a.vr6s the same, rov a~rov = ra.~oi) of the same. b. 'I'O!. -roi ilpa. = rripa., p.vroL 11v == p.<vrr!v. C. 1<0.!.- (1) at iS dropped; Ka.l a{rr6s KO.~T6<, Ka.l 0~ KOV, Ka.l T] x?}, Ka.l ol xol, Ka.l iKer<<T< xtKeuer< and ye beseech (64 ). (2) a.L is contracted chiefiy before < and : Ka.! lv= K.v, Ka.! l'Y th= K."fth, Ka.i ls ds, Ka.l Ta. K~ra. (note however Kal El= K<l, Ka.! ds K<is); also before o in Ka.l _/Jre xif>u, Kal/J71'WS = Xif>11'WS (64).

68. The final vowel or diphthong of the article, and of rol, is dropped, and an initial a. of the next word is lengthened unless it is the first vowel of a diphthong. The same rule applies in part to Ka.l. a. Article. -o av-l}p .v-l}p, o! 11.vop<s itvopes, al a"fa.Oa.l d"faOa.l, 7] aX-I}OHa.

74]

ELISIO~

23

N. -The exceptions in 68 a-c to the laws of contraction are due to the desire to let the vowel of the more important word prevail : llv-qp, not wv7Jp, because of
6,vf!p.

69. Most crasis forms of lnpos other are derived from .npos, the earlier form : thus, oErepos = llnpos, o! Erepot = tlrepot; but ro rpou fJoripou (64).

ELISION

Elision is the expulsion of a short vowel at the end of a word before a word beginning with a vowel. An apostrophe (') marks the place where the vowel is elided.
70. M.X'() 11.-ye, Ewt!(a) vva, <<t>' (= rrl) auro (64), ~xotjl(t) av, -yvotr'(o) .v. a. Elision is often not expressed to the eye ex ce pt in poetry. Both inscriptions and the Mss. of prose writers are very inconsistent, but even where the elision is not expressed, it seems to have occurred in speaking; i.e. l!oe 1r and l!' ei.,.. were spoken alike. The Mss. are of little value in such cases.
71.. Elision affects only unimportant words or syllables, such as particles, adverbs, prepositious, aud conjuuctions of two syllables (except 1rEpl, lJ.xp<, pixpt, l!rt 72 b, c), and the final syllables of nouns, pronouns, and verbs. a. The final vowel of an emphatic persona! pronoun is rarely elided.

72. Elision does not occur in a. Monosyllables, except such as end in (ri, M, -y). b. The conjunction lin that (l!r' is IJTE when). c. The prepositions 1rpo before, ii.xpt, P-'XP' until, and 1r<pl concerning (except before t). d. The dative singular ending ' of the third declension, and in en, the ending of the dative plural. e. W ords with final u. 73. Except url is, forms admitting movable v (134 a) do not suffer elision in prose. (But sorne cases of in theperfect occur in Demosthenes.)
74. at in the personal endings and the infinitive is elided in Aristophanes; scarcely ever, if at ali, in tragedy ; its elision in prose is doubtful. ot is elided in tragedy in o(fJiJ' alas.

68 D. Hom. has t:Jpturos = .pturos, wvrbs = avrbs. Hdt. has OVTEpos = lrEpos, Wvf]p == 0 v-f}p, Wvrol = ol alrrol, rWur6 = T aVr6, TWuro = TO aro, wVro lo avro, wvpES = ol li.vope<. Doric has KrJ7rl Ka1 E1rl. 72 D. Absence of elision in Homer often proves the loss of f (3), as in Kar li.crru X 1. Epie admits elision in ucl. thy, pa, in the dat. sing. of the third decl., in -u< and -at in the personal endings, and in -va.<, -uOa< of the infinitive, and (rarely) in J.LOI, uol, roi. li.va oh king, and /i.va = cl.vcl.ur7J()' rise up, elide only once, lo and never. Hdt. elides less often than A ttic prose; but the Mss. are not a sure guide. 1r<pl sometimes appears as 1rlp in Doric and Aeolic before words beginning with other vowels than ' cl~<' clVva.t A 272. Cp. 148 D. 1. 73 D. In poetry a vowel capable of taking movable v is often eut off.

24

EUPHONY OF CONf;;ONANTS

[75

75. Interior elision takes place in forming compound words. Here the apostrophe is not used. Thus, ovod, no one from ovO t:I,, Ka6opaw look dOWn UpOn frOlll KaT opaw, p.dJtTJJ.LL let go from p.er TJJ.LL (124).

this are derived from the demonstrative pronouns /Jo, TofiTo (333 g). b. Interior elision does not always occur in the formation of cornpounds. Thus, <TK7J7rrofixos sceptre-bearing from <TK7J7rro + oxos (i.e. <Toxos). Cp. 878. c. On the accent in elision, see 174.

+ the deictic ending

a. t,

Totrrt

APHAERESIS (INVERSE ELISION)

76. Aphaeresis (<f>alpm taking away) is the elision of at the beginning of a word after a word ending in a long vowel or diphthong. This occurs only in poetry, and chief!y after p.f} not, 'if or. Th us, p.'l, 'vrafiOa, i) 'p., 7rap~w 'p.avrov, aliT'I, '~fjM<v. In sorne texts editors prefer to adopt crasis (62) or synizesis (60). a is rarely elided th us.
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS

77. Assimilation.- A consonant is sometimes assimilated to an-

other consonant in the same word. This assimilation may be either par#al, as in -.,.p.cf>-6TJv I wa.s sent for ...,.t:p.7r-{}TJv (82), or complete, as in ip.p.vw I abide by for iv-p.t:vw (94).
a. A preceding consonant is generally assimilated to a following consonant. Assimilation to a preceding consonant, as in l'iJp.t I destroy for o-vv-p.t, is rare.
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS

78. Attic has TT for rnr of Ionie and most other dialects: 1rpTTW

do for 1rpurrw, (}d)..arra sea for (}O.>..auua, KpdTrwv stTOnger for Kpdrruwv.
a. Tragedy and Thucydides adopt ""as an Ioni~m. On b. TT is used for that "" which is regularly formed by sometimes by r, 0, and' (114). On TT in.'ATnKos see 83 a.
xapl<<T<Ta
K

see 114 a. or x and ' (112),

75 D. Apocope (.,.oKo7rf} cutting off) occurs when a final short vowel is eut off bef ore an initial consonant. In literature apocope is confined to poetry, but in the prose inscriptions of the dialects it is frequent. Thus, in Hom., as separate words and in compounds, d.v, Kar, -rrap (,., .,. rarely) for va, Kara, 7rapa ( 7r6, .,.b). Final T is assimilated to a following consonant (but KarOavii:v to die, not KaOOavfiv, cp. 83 a); so final v by 91-95. Th us, ~at to pick up, ap. 7rbvov into the strife; Ka[3{3ae threw down, Ka<'II"< left behind, KaKK<lovr.s lit. lying down, KaUa~aLS break in pieces, for Kaf fa~atS = KaTf'il;a<s, Kiti} , KaOO<TaL entermg into, K'II" 7rei5!ov th1ough the plain, K'Y -ybvv on the lcnee (kag not kang), Kp poo v in the stream; [3[3aXAr interrupt, ,.,.,./p.lf; will send away. When three consonants collide, the final consonant of the apocopate word is usually lost, as KaKTav< sleu;, from KctKKrav< out of Kar(f)Krav<. Apocope occurs rarely in Attic poetry. 'II"OT for .,.orl ( = ,.p6s in meaning) is frequent in Doric and .Boeotian. N.- The shorter forms may have originated from elision.

EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS

25

79. Later Attic bas pp for pa- of older Attic: 6&ppos courage = 6pa-o, /1.ppYJV male= apUYJV a. But p<r does not become pp in the dative plural (lrlrrop-11< orators) and in words containing the suffix -<r<s for -ns ( lfp-<r<s raising). b. Ionie and most otber dialects bave p<r. p<r in Attic tragedy and Tbucydides is probably an Ionism. Xenophon bas p<r and pp.

80. An initial p is doubled when a simple vowel is placed before it in infiection or composition. Thus, after the syllabic augment (429), ;.-ppn was jlowing from pw ; and in Ka[-ppoo> fair flowing. After a diphthong p is not doubled: V-poo> fair jlowing.
a. This pp, due to assimilation of <rp (g-pp, Kal-ppoos), or FP (lppfJ07J was spoken), is strie tl y retained in the interior of a word; but simplified to single p wh en standing at the beginning, i.e. pw is for ppw. In composition ( 11-poos) single p is due to the influence of the simplified initial sound. b. A different pp arises from assimilation of p<T (79), pE (sounded like py, 44, 117), and vp (95).
81. {J, -y, o are not doubled in Attic (p. 75 D.). In 'Y'Y the first 'Y is nasal (19 a). cp, x, 0 are not doubled in Attic; instead, we have 1rp 1 KX 1 rO as in ":.a1rpw Sappho, BKxos Bacchus, 'ArOis ( Atthis) Attic. Cp. 83 a.
CONSONANTS WITH CONSONANTS

STOPS BEFORE STOPS

82. A labial or a palatal stop (16) before a dental stop (r, 8, 6) must be of the same order (16). 1
rub;
'lrT: (nrp{J-ra<) rhp1rra< has been rubbed from rpi{J-w ( 'YE"'fpacp-ra<) -y-ypa1rra< has be en written from -ypcp-w write. "YT, XT become KT: (EE-y-ra<) eEKTa< has been said from e-y-w say; (fJ{JpEx-ra<) {J{JpEKTa< has been rnoistened from {Jp<x-w rrwisten.

a. f3T, cj>T become

80 D. In Hom. and even in prose p may remain single after a vowel: g-pE~E did from p~w, Kal-poos. So i<T-ppo1ros and l<T6-po1ros (by anal ogy to p61ros) equally balanced. lK xpwv {JeEa pov M 159 represents {J<>.m ppov. Cp. 146 D. 81 D. 1. Hom. has many cases of doubled liquids and nasals: n>.a{JE tovk, if7JKTos unceasing, li!'-1'-0Pos without lot in, </><O}J-}J-ofJs fond of srniles, -yvv<pos very snowy, pyEvv6s white, lfvvE'TrE 1elate. These forms are due to the assimilation of <rand >., ~'- or v. 'l'hus, yri-vvtpos is from ya-<Tv<pos, cp~ sn in snow. 2. Doubled stops: irn that (<Tfoo-n), o7r1ron as (<Tfo5-7rore), l!o5EL<TE jeared (i5fE!<TE). 3. .ITIT in }J-f<T<Tos rniddle (for 1'-<0!os rnedius, 114), o1rl<T<TW uackwarcl, in the datives of <T-stems, as l!7re<T<r< (250 D. 2), and in verbs with stems in <r (rpe<T<re).

4. One of these doubled consonants may be dropped without lengthening the preceding vowel: '05mrevs from 'Oov<r<TEvs, 1'-f<ros, o7rl<Tw. Soin 'Ax<Evs from 'AxtHEvs. On oo, {J{J, see 75 D. A-eolic has many doubled consonants due v, assimilatioo (37 D. 3).

26

EUPliONY OF CON::50NANTS

b. 1r8, ci>S become j36 : ( KE11"-0'IP) Kef315'1v by stealth from K1r-r-w steal ; ('Ypa<f>li'lv) 'YPcif315'1v scmping from 'YP'-<f>-w write (originally scmtch, scrupe). K8 becomes y6: (7rEK-il'lv) 7r'Y'Iv entwined from 1rK-w plait. c. ri, j39 become 4>9: ( 71"EJ.L7r-8'1v) 7reJ.L<f>B'Iv I was sent from 11"JJ-11"-w se nd; (irpf3-811) irpi</>8'1 it was rubbed (rpt(3-w 1"1tb). K9, y9 become x9: (i,.eK-8'1) 7rXixB'I it was plaited (1rXlK-w plait); (f'Y-8'1) <XIxB'I it was said (X'Y-w sny)
N. 1.- Cp.
1rra

seven,

~j36oJWs

seventl!, ic!>9>7JJ-pos lasting seven days.

N. 2.-But K out of remains unchanged: KlwJJ- SUl"!"ende1, K8iw run out (104). 83.

A dental stop before another dental stop becomes u.

c:ivucrros practicabl e for vvr-ros from vrw complete, tcrTE yo1t know for i-TE, ocr8a thou knowest for olo-Ba; ,.,,. ..,."-ra, has been persuaded for ,.,,...e-ra, 1relcr8'1" I was persuaded for 11"EL8-8'1v.

a. rr, rB remain unchanged in 'ArnKos, 'Ar8ls Attic, and in Kar8avev die (75 D., 81). So rr for crcr (78).
84. Any stop standing before a stop other than r, , 8, or in other combina,.. tion thau,.</>, KX, r8 (81) is dropped, as in KEKO!J.<(o)-Ka I have brought. 'Y before K, 'Y, or x is gamma-nasal ( 19 a), not a stop.
STOPS BEFORE

K,

85. Before p., the labial stops (1r, (3, cp) become p.; x become y ; y before p. remains unchanged.

the palatal stops

lljLp.a eye for o7r-JJ-a (cp. 61roma), fELIJ.!J.<L< I have been left for EEL7r-JJ-<L< from Xel1r-w leave, rrpipp.a for rerpifJ-JJ-aL from rpt(3-w rub, 'Yt'YP<L!J.!J.ILL for 'Y'YPIL</1!J.O,L from 'YP<f>-W Write, 1r11"E'Y!J.aL for 7r71"EK-!J.ILL from TfK-W plait, TfTEV'Y!J.ILL for TETEUX-!J.ILL from TEX-W Uild.
a. K and x may remain unchanged before 1-' in a noun-suffix: dK-JJ->7 edge, lJpa.x-JJ->7 drachma. K!J. remains when brought together by phonetic ebange (128a), as in d-KJ.L'I-Ka. am wearied (Kcip.-vw). b. 'Y'YIJ. and 1-'!J.f.' become 'Y!J. and 1-'1-' Thus, X1jE'Y!J.a. for 'IE'Y'Y-JJ-a. from 'I<'YX-f."J.L (X"fx-w convict), 11"11"Ef.'J.La. for ... ,,.,!J.JJ--p.a from 1l'<np.7r-p.a. ( 71"f!J.7r-w

send).
86. A dental stop (r, 3, 0) before p. often appears to become cr. Thus, >/vvr:rp.at for Tjvvr-p.at (&.vvr-w complete), 1rcppaup.at for 7ricppaO-JJ-aL (cpp~w declare), 7T'E7rLr:rp.at for 7T'7T'EL()-p.at (1rd()-w persuade).
87. On the other hand, since these stops are act.ually retained in many words, such as <perp.ov oa1, ,.orp.os .fate, ap8f.'6s nmnber, cr must be explained as due to analogy. Thus, i]vvcrp.a., ,.(<{>pa.crp.a., 7rhELcrp.a.< have taken on the ending -crp.a by analogy to -erra where cris in place (1r<{>pa.crra.< for 11"<</Jpa-ra.<). So tcr!J.EP we know (Hom. (op.ev) folJoWS tcrTE y ou know (for lo-re): ocrp.'lj odor stands for o-<T!J.'I

85 a. D. 'Soin Hom. tKI-'evos favoring (iKciPw), Ka.xp.vos slwrpenerl.

97)

EUi>HO~Y OF C~SOXANTS

27

CONSONANTS BEFORE N

88. f3 regularly and cp usually beeome JL before v. Th:us, UJLVO> re'vered for u{3-vos (uf3-oJLat), U'TVJLVD> firm for u'Tvcpvos (u'T'cpw contract).
89. -yl-yvo/ML< become, 'Y<'YVW(]"KW know become rtvoJl-a.<, -yvwqKw in Attic after 300 n.c., in New Ionie, late Doric, etc.
90.
v

v becomes in oJLt clestroy for &-VJLt. is kept in. .,..lva.Jl-at approach. On sigma before v see 105.

BEFORE CONSONANTS

91. v befor.e 71', {3, cp, tf! becomes JL: JL.,..t'11"TW fall into for v-7r71"'Tw, JL{3d>..w th1ow in for v-{3aw, JL<f>a[vw exhibit for v-</>atvw, ;JLtftvxos

alive for v-tftiixos. 92. v before K, y, x, ~ becomes y-nasal (19 a): yKaw bring a charge for v-Kaw, iyypacpw inscribe for v-ypacpw, uvyxiw pour together for uuv-xw, uvy~'w grincl up for CTuv-~i:w.
93. v bef ore r, il, 0 re mains unchanged. thunde1 (f3pJ1--w rom).

Here

may represent Jl-:

{3pov-r1}

94. v bef ore JL becomes JL : ;JLJL'Tpos mode1ate for vJL'Tpos, JLJLivw fibide by for VJLVW.
Jl-O.< -(]"Jl-a< (489 h); as in 7rrpa.q(from .Pa.lvw show) for 7r<rpa.v-Jl-D.< (cp. 1rlrpa.-y-Ka., 1rrpa.v-ra.t). b. Here v does not become q; but the ending -(]"Jl-O.< is borrowed f+om verbs with stems in a dental (as ... rppa.q!J.a.<, on which see 87).

a. Verbs in -vw may form the perfect middle in

95. v before , p is assimilated (, pp): uvoyos concourse for uuv-oyoo;, uuppw flow together for CTuvpw. 96. v before u is dropped and the preceding vowel is lengthened ( to t, o to ou, 37): JL black for JLav-o;, do; one for v->, nfh[ placing for n8w('T)-<>, 'Tovs for 'Tov-s. a. But in the dative plural v before -(]"< appears to be dropped without com-

pensatory lengthening: Jl-{O.(]"L for for <f>pv-q, mind. But see 250 N.

!J.fO.V-{]"L, oaljl-ML

for

OO.LJl-0>-r!L divinities, rpp<q[

CONSONANTS BEFORE

97. With ua labial stop forms

J\El-.f;w shall leave 'Tpt-.f;w shall rub ')'pa'fw shall write

tf!, a palatal stop forms

K?ipv~
li.~"'

~-

for "
"

EL11"-(]"W rpifJ-qw -yparp-q"' {Jov'!l.f}

hemld for K7JpvK-S shall lead " -y-qw

{31]~

cough
{JwM

"

fJTJx-s

90 D. Aeolic {36Ua council, Attic lengthening), probably for fJo'!l.va.

and Doric

(with compensatory

28
'Y, x become K.

EGPHU~Y

OF

CO~SONANTS

[g8

a. The only stop that can stand before" is,. or K, hence {!, q, become ,., and Thus, 'Ypa.</>-<rw, 'Y-<rw become 'YP0.7r-<rw, K-<rw.

98. A dental stop befme (J' is assimilated ('m) and one u is dropped.
<rwJ.ta<rt

bodies for <rwJ.ta.<r<rL out of <rwJ.ta.r-<rt, 1ro<rl feet for 1ro<r<rl out of 1roo-<rt, bi1ds for opvi<r<rt out of opviO-<rt. So 1ra<rxw su.ffm for 7ra.<r<rxw out of 1ra.8-<TKW (cp. 7ra.0-P and 126). a. 0 and 0 beCOI11C T bef ore <r: 1rOO-<rL, opvi8-<rt beCOI118 1rOT-<rL, OpVT-<rL.
~pvi<rt

99.

is dropped before ,. is dropped before

<rK <r</>

in in

otoa.(K)-<rKw teach (i5ti5a.K-r6s taught). (3a(7r)<r-</>TJJ.tli evil-speaking.

100. vr, vo, vO before (J' form V(J'(J' (98), then V(J', finally v is dropped and the preceding vowel is lengthened (07).
1r<rt

all for 1ra.v<r-<rt out of 1ra.vr-<rt, nOe<rt placing for n8<v<r-<rt out of n8<vr-<rt. So 'Yl'Yiis giant for 'YL'Yavr-s, Mov<rt loosing for iiovr-<rt, <r7rd<rw shall make libation for <r7r<vo-<rw, 11'i<roJ.tat shall suffer for 7r<v0-<roJ.taL (1riv8os gTief).

101. a. v in, crvv with in composition are treated as follows: before p, <r, or t keeps its v: ~v-pu8J.tos in Thythm, v-<rK<uatw prepaTe, vt<hviiJ.tL yoke in. <Tuv before" and a vowel becomes <ru<r-: <ru<r-<r<f)tw help ta save. before " and a consonant or t, becomes <ru-: <ru-<rK<vatw pack up, <rv-tu'Yos yoked together. b. 'll'iiv, 'll'nv before "either keep v or assimilate v to <r: .,.4-v-<ro</>os all-wisr, 1ra.v-1J7Jvos or 1ra.<r<ri7Jvos the full moon, 7ralv-<rKws thick-shaded, 1ra.l<r-<ruros Tushing l.Jack.
v p,

'102. On p<r see 79 a. <r is retained in IL<ros p1ecinct. p<r, <r may become with lengthening of the preceding vowel: 1f'Ypa. I collected, 1/'Y'Ya. I announced for rJ'Y<p-<ra, TJ'Y'Y<-<ra.
~ BEFORE CONSONANTS

Sigma between consonants is dropped: 1}yy(cr)O you have announced, yeypcp(cr)OaL to have written, 'lK(cr)JI-T/vo<; of six months (~ six, JI-~V month).
103.
~v-<r1rovoos

a. But in compounds " is retained when the second part begins with ": included in a truce. Compounds in ov<r- ill omit " before a word beginning with ": ou<rx<<rTO~ haTd to cleave for OV<r-<TXL<TTOS (<rxltw). 104. <~ out of ( = hs) drops " in composition bef ore another consonant, but usually retains its K unaltered : lKTElvw stretch out, lKolowJ.t' sur?ender,
98 D. Hom. often retains "": 1ro<r<rl, oa<r<ra.<r8ai for lia.r-<ra<rOat ( liaroJ.taL divide). 102 D. Hom. has wp<r< incited, Kp<r< eut, U<rat to coop up, K<rat ta put ta

shore.

JI2]

EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS

29

K</Jpw carry out, iK06w sac1ijice, iKrnP!;w preserve from danger (not. ~<;S )w), Kp.a.vfJtivw learn thoroughly. Cp. 82 N. 2, 136.

as in elp.l for l<r-p.t.

105. 11 before p. or v usually disappears with compensatory lengthening (37) But 11p. stays if p. belongs to a su:ffix and in coinponnds of ov11- ill : ov11-p.evf]s hostile. a. Assimilation takes place in Ileo71'6vv'llfos for Ilt'o,.os vij11os islancl of Pelops, vvp.< cl othe for i11-vp.< (Ionie etvp.<), gppn was flowing for -11pn, 80 a. 106. 110 !;>eco mes ! in sorne adverbs denoting motion towards. va.je for' AfJf,va.s-oe Atl~ens-wards (26, 342 a). Th us, 'A0-1,-

107. Two sigmas brought together by infl.ection become u: {3/.(ut for {3/.(u-ut missiles, l,.(ut forl,.(u-ut words (98), n>..f.<rat for n.f.u-uat (from n.w accomplish, stem n.w-).
a. 1111 when = TT (78) never becomes 11.

108. Many of the rules for the euphony of consonants were not established in the classical period. Inscriptions show a much freer pr&ctice, either marking the etymology, as 11vvp.a.xos for lfvp.p.a.xos ally (94), lvKa.ev for l-)Ka.ev to bring a charge (92), or showing the actual pronunciation (phonetic spelling), as Trry ( = Tv) Ka.Kov (92), TT] p. ( = -rT]v) {3ovf,v (91 ), -ro ( = Tov) D"(ov, l!"(oolfts for I!KooIT<s su1rendering (104), <xp<'pw, x06w for inpt'pw, h06w (104).
CONSONANTS WITH VOWELS
CONSONANTS BEFORE

AND

109. Nu merous changes occur bef ore the semivowel ~ ( = y, 20) before a vowel. This y is often inicated by the sign ~ In 110-117 (except in 115) ~ is =y. l.l.O. >..~ becomes . : J.oc; for &>..~oc; Lat. alius, O.op.at for .~o p.at Lat. salio, cpv.ov for cpv.~ov Lat. jolium. l.l.l. After av, ov, ap, op, ~ 1s shifted to the preceding syllabl~, forming aw, ow, atp, otp. This is called Epenthesis (,./.vewt> insertion).
<f>a.lvw show for rj>a.v-fw, p.a.tva. black for p.ea.v-~a., IT?I'a.ipw gasp for 117ra.p-}w, p.opa. fa te for p.op-~a.. (So Ka.lw weep for Ka.r-~w 38 a.) On ' after <v, ep, " <p, vv, vp, see 37 a.

(cp.

J.l2. K~, X~ beCOln8 'T'T ( = fT(T 78) : cpv..T'TW guard for cpv.aK-~W cpv.aK~ guanl), mprTw disturb for rapax-~w (cp. mpax~ disorde1).

105 D. 11 is assimilated in Aeol. and Hom. ~p.p.eva.< to be for IT-JJ.eva.< ( eva.t), d.p"(evv6s white for d.p"f<IT-vos, p<f3evv6< darlc (ip<f3<11-vo<, cp. 'Epef3o<), tip.p.e we, IJp.p.es you (iTJJ.<, 11p.es). Cp. 81 D. 106 D. Aeolic has 110 for medial 1 in li11oos branch (5jos), JJ.<l11ow rnake rnelody (p.eljw). 107 D. Homer often retains 1111 : {3el111<, 1!71'<1111<, -ret'1111a.t.

30

EUPHO:"iY OF CONSONANTS

113. (I) '~"~ 8~ after long vowels, diphthongs, and consonants become u; after short vowels n, ()!:. become uu (not= TT 78), which is simplified to u.
o.TtTo. fate from o.iT-~o., ,-qo. all from ,-o.vT-xo., p,tTos middle (Hom. p,tTtTos) from p,<IJ-~os (cp. Lat. med-ius), T6tTos so great (Hom. T60"tTos) from ToT-~os (cp. Lat. toti-dem). a. In the above cases 7"~ passed into TIT. Th us ,-n-xa, ,-ntT, ,-vtTtTa, ,-<iviT<t (Cretan, Thessalian), ,-fiq (37 D. 3).

114. (II) r~, ()!: become TT ( = uu 78) : p.tT(a bee from p.Et-r-~:a (cp. p..t, -tro<; lwney), Kopln--rw equip from Kopv8-~:w (cp. Kpv>, -v{}o helrnet).

a. xpl<tTITo. graceful and other feminine adjectives in -<11"11"<1 are poetical, and therefore do not assume the native Attic prose form inn. But see 299 c. b. TT from'~"~, Ox is due to analogy, chiefly of n from K~.
115. r before final t often becomes u. Thus, -r[()7JuL places for -r{87)Tt j alSO in 7TOVULO<; 1'iCh for 7TOVT-W<; (Cp. 7TOVTO<; wealfh). a. n before final, becomes vtT, which drops v: lfxovtT< they have for lfxovn (37). 116. J: between vowels and Yk after a vowel form ': th us, ,.['w hope for mkw, 7T,<; on foot for 7T0!:,0<; (cp. ?T8-[o-v grou nd), ap?T'w seize for p,.ay-~:w (cp. lp1ra~ rapacious). After a consonant '/k forms : pw work from lpy-~:w. . 117.
Bopps from Bopiis Boreas.

""k becomes ""'~" as in xaM,-Tw oppress from xf.<,--~w. P! be co mes pp in Here was sounded nearly like y (44, 61 a).
DISAPPEARANCE OF :3 AND F

118. The spirant u with a vowel before or after it is often lost. Its former presence is known by earlier Greek forms or from the cognate languages.
119."

Initial

before a vowel becomes the rough breathing.

i,-rd seven, Lat. septem; 7}p,<ITvs halj, Lat. semi-; friT'YJP,' put for IT<-ITT'Y)-P,<, Lat. si-st-o; <i,-6p,7Jv 1 followed from -11"<,.-o-p,'Y)v, Lat. sequor. a. When retained, this tT is due to phonetic change (as riVv for ~vv, tTi'Yf, silence for IT~'Y'YJ Germ. schweigen), orto analogy. On the loss of' see 125e.
120.

Between vowels u is dropped.

')'vovs of a race from 'Y<v<(tT)-os, Vtt. gener-is, V thou loosest from Mn for ii<-(IT)cu, Mou from iii<-(IT)o thou didst loose for thyself, nOeo for nOiitT, d'Y]P from ltr-L'Y)-V Old Lat. siem, a:'Af,O<-La tTuth from 'Y]011"-LO..

115 D. Dorc often retains T ( rlO'Y]n, lfxovn). Lat. te), I)9T j~ (fol from Toi.

ITl is not from (Dor.) T (cp.

125]

EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS

31

a. Yet cr app"ears in sorne -JL< forms.(rlllcra<, to-rao-o), and in llpao-us = Oapo-vs }28. cr between vowels is due to phonetic change (as o- for o-<J 107, 1rXouo-ws for .,..;>.0 vnos 115) orto analogy (as 'Xiicra for lXia, modelled on lo<K-o--a), cp. 35 c. 121. cr usually disappears in the aorist of liquid verbs (active and middle) with lengthening of the preceding vowel (37): 'crr<tXa 1 sent for lo-r<X-cra, 'q,'TJ""' 1 shl:noed for lq>av-cra, <q>f]varo for <q,av-craro. Cp. 102. 122. Digamma (3) has disappeared in Attic. The following special cases are to be noted : a. In nouns of the third declension with a stem in av, ev, or ov (43). Thus, vaiis ship, gen. vews from "'TJf-0., {3acrtXEus king, gen. {3ao-<Xlws from f3ao-<Mir-os (34). b. In the augment and r_eduplication of verbs beginning with f : Elp-ya~6JL'TJ" - 1 worked from l-rp'fa~o!L'IJ"' 'otKa am like from fEfOLKa. Cp. 431, 443. c. In verbs in w for rw: pw 1 flow, fut. pev-o-oJL<t<. 123. Sorne words have !ost initial err T,ous sweet (Lat. sua(d)vis), o1i, of, l him, l!s his (Lat. suus), 'IJos custom, nllos character (Lat. con-suetus). ASPIRATION

124. A smooth stop (1r, T, K), brought before the rough breathing by elision, crasis, or in forming compounds, is made rough, becoming an aspirate ( <f>, (}, x) Cp. 16 a.
.q,' o1i for .1r(o) ov, vuxiJ' I!X7]v for vuKr(a) IJX'T]v (82); O.rpov the other (69); OolJL<inov for r fJLanov the cl oak (66); JLEIIi7JJL' let go for JLr( ) 7JIL' afJ6.1!7]s selfwilled from ar6s se(f and l!v please. a. A medial rough breathing, passing over p, roughens a preceding smooth stop: q>povp6s Watchman from 1TpO-opos, q>poJoOS gone frOID 1rp6 and oiJ6s, TIJpL1T1TOJI four-horse chariot ( rerp + Z1r1ros).

125. Two rough stops beginning successive syllables of the same word are avoided in Greek. A rough stop is changed into a smooth stop when the following sy Uable con tains a rough stop.
a. In reduplication (441) initialq,, 0, x are changed to 1r, r, K. Thus, ,.lq,w-ya for 1-1v--ya perfect of q>ev-yw flee, rl-07]-JLL place for Ot-07]-JL<, KfX7]Va for xX7]Va perf. Of xacrKW gape. b. In the first aorist passive imperative -Il< becomes -n after -07]-, as in M-{}7]-r< for Xv-07]-0<; elsewhere .(}, is retained (-yp{J(J,). c. In the aorist passive, Oe- and Ou- are changed to re- and ru- in l-r-07J" was placed ( rlii7JJL') and l-ru-0'1" was sac1ijice<l ( Ovw ). d. From the same objection to a succession of rough stops are due .JL,.lxw .JL,.lcrxw clothe for .JL1-, le-xe<pli. truce for tx-X"P'i. (from ~xw and xip ).

123 D. Hom. <liai! pleased stands for ffl! from io-rao. 124 D. New Ionie generally leaves ,., r, K before the rough breathing: .,.' oli, JLErl7JJL<, ro!lrepov. But in compounds (9 D.) q,, 0, x may appear: p.Ooos method
(JLEra after +boos way).

3:2

EGPHONY OF CONSONANTS

[126

e. The rough breathing, as an aspirate (16 a), often disappeared when either of the two following syllables contains </>, 0, or X 'xw have stands for l!xw = ~rexw (119, cp. 1!-~rxov), the rough changing to the smootb breathing before a rough stop. The rough breathing reappears in the future l!~w. Cp. t~rxw 1estmin for l<rxw from <r<-<rx-w, lilieOov foundaUon, but Jlios seat, Lat. sedes. f. In IJpl~ hair, gen. sing. rp<x-6s for Op<xos, dat. pl. Opt~l ; raxus sw~ft, comparative raxtwv (rare) or Oiirrwv (Oii<r<rwv) from IJaxwv (112). g. In ra</>- ( rarpos tomb ), pres. IJa'lC-T-W bury, fut. Oa'if!w, pelf. riJap.-p.aL (85); rprpw nourish, fut. Op'if!w, perf. rcOpaf.Jrp.a<; rpxw run, fut. IJp~op.a<; rpu</>(rpurpf] delicacy), pres. Opu1rrw enfeeble, fut. Opu'if!w; r6rpw smoke, perf. r-IJ!f.Jrp.a<. N. -The two rough stops rem ain unchanged in the aorist passive l1Jp<f>07JP was nourishecl, Mpu<f>IJ7Jv was en.feebled, rpav07Jv was shown forth, clJp1JwiJ7Jv was set upright, M'Ax07Jv was charmed, haOapiJ7Jv was purified; in the perfect inf. 7r<f>av1Ja<, K<KaiJapiJa<, reiJcicpiJa<; in the imperatives 'YPcL</>7J0L be written, <rrpa<f>7JIJ' turn about, rpao, say.
126. Transfer of Aspiration. - Aspiration may be transferred to a following syllable: 7raCTxw for 7ra0-CTKw (cp. 98). 127. Sorne roots show variation between a final smooth and a rough stop ;
Oxop.a< receive, liwpolibKos bribe-take1; d<f>w anoint, 'Al1ros fat; 1r'AKw weave, 1rll.oxu6s braid of hair; and in the perfect, as i'}xa from li lead.

"'w

VARIOUS CONSONANT CHANGES

128. Metathesis (t1ansposition). - A vowel and a consonant often exchange places: ITvu~ the Pnyx, gen. ITvKv.Ss, rlKrw bew for n-rK-w (cp. reK-ev). a. Transposition proper does not occur where we bave to do with ap, pa =P. (20, 35 b) as in Oap<ros a;cl Op&.<ros coumge; or with syncope (44 b) due to early sl;lifting of accent, as in 7rfr-ol-''" fly, 1CT-pov wing; or where a long vowel fo1lows the syncopated root, as in rlf-PW r-rp.7J-Ka I have eut. In {3f3'A7JKa I have thrown (f3aw tluow), {37J is formed from {3e'Ae founcl in {3e-p.vov missile. 129. Dissimilation.- a. sometimes becomes p wh en 'A appears in the same word : p7a'Aos painful for X7a'Aos (/L'A"'os pain). b. A consonant (usually p) sometirnes disappears wh en it occurs also in the adjoining sy llable: lipu<f>aKros railing for lipu-<f>paKros (lit. fenced by wood). c. Syllabic dissimilation or syncope occurs when the same or two sirnilar syllables containing the same consonant succeed each other: p.rpopeus a jar for p.<f><-</>opeus, Oap<ruvos bold for Oap<ro-<ruvos. This is often called haplology. d. See also under 99, 125 a, b. 126 D. Hdt. bas lvOara thme (vra0a), v0env thence (vre0ev), K<Owv tunic (x<rwv). 127 D. Hom. and Hdt. have ans again (aMLS), oKl not (oxl). Ail the dialects except Attic liave liKop.a<. 128 D. Hom. Kpaol7J, Kapot 71 heart, Kapr<<rros best (Kpar<<rros), {3apo<<rros slow est ({3paous), oparbs and -oapros from Mpw fla y, ~-opaKov saw from OpKop.a< see.

1<'1NAL CONSONANTS

33

130. Development. - o is developed between v and p, as in avopos of a man for<ivpos from &.vfJp (cp. cinder with Lat. cineris); fJ is developed between J.l. and p (or X), as in J.l.<<F'YJJ.l.fJpli midday, south from J.l.<<F-rJJ.l.P'i for J.l.<<FrJJ.l.<p<i from J.l.ffr1os middle and -i}J.l.ffpi day (cp. chamber with Lat. camera). 131. Labials and dentals often correspond : ?rotvf] and -rl<F retribution; cpovos murder, O<lvw strike. 1r and K: a.l1r6Xos goat-herd, fJov<oXos ox-herd. 1r-r for -r is found in ?r-roX<J.l.OS war, 1r-r6Xt< city for ?roXeJ.l.os, ?roX,.. Cp. Neoptolemus and Ptolemy. So xO and x in xOwv ground, xa.,.a.l on the ground. 132. The dialects often show consonants different from Attic in the same or kindred words.
FINAL CONSONANTS

133. No consonant except v, p, or u (including ~and If!) can stand

at the end of a Greek word.

All other consonants are dropped.

a. Exceptions are the proclitics (179) lK out of, derived from .1~ (cp. 104, 136), and oOK not, of which oo is anotber form (137). b. Examples of dropped final consonants : <Fwp.a. body for <FWJ.l.a.-r (gen. IFWJ.l.a.Tos); 1ra. oh boy for ?ra.<o (gen. ?ra.<-os); -yaXa. milk for -ya.Xa.K-r (gen. -yaXa.K-r-os); cJ>ffpov bearing for cJ><pov-r (gen. <f>povr-os); Kfjp heart for KrJp, cp. Ka.p-li ; /!XXo for d.X~oo (110), cp. Lat. aliud; ~</><p<-( r) was carrying, ~<f>epo-v( r) were carrying (464 c, e). c. An original final m preceded by a vowel becomes v, cp. t?r?rov witb Lat. equum. So lv one from EJ.l. (349 a), Lat. sem-el, liJ.l.a. once.
130 D. So in Hom. J.l.ff-J.l.f3Xw-Ka. have gone from J.l.Xw from J.l.OX- in (-J.l.OX-o-v
{Jporos

At the beginning of words this J.l. is dropped; thus, fJXw<FKw go, J.l.fJpo-ros (root J.l.PO-, J.l.Op-, as in mot-tuus). In composition p. remains, as in 1!-J.l.fJpo-ros immortal; but 1!-fJpo-ros immortal is formed from {Jpor6s. (128 a).

mortal for

132 D. .,. for rr: Doric ru, rot, r, liLiKa.roL (otiKOIFLOL), rtKaTL (dKOIFL), IToT<Mv (ITo<F<Lo<hv). -r : Doric <FdJ.l.<pov to-day (rfJJ.l.<pov Attic, <Ff]iJ.fpov Ionie). K 1r: Ionie (not Hom.) K6re when, K6repos which of two? liKw<, KOIFOS, Kfj. K " -r : Doric 1r6Ka. (1rou), li<a. (lire). y " fJ : Doric -yXhpa.pov eyelid, -yMxwv (Ion. -yXf]xwv) pennyroyal. S " fJ : Doric 6o<Ms ( 6{JoMs) a spit. ,. " -r : Hom. ?rl<Fvpes, Aeol. 7r<F<Fvpes four ( rh-ra.pes) ; Aeol. 1rf]Xv< jar o.tf (cp. rrJXD<Fe), 1rffp.1r< five (1r/vre). -r : see 120 D. cl> " 0 : Hom. <f>f]p centaU1 ( Of]p beast). p " : (rhotacsm): ]ate Laconian, Elean -rlp who, Thessal. 8e6poo<r " <r "

e "

Tos god-given. 0: late Laconian<Ft6s for Oe6s god (26 D.). " X : Doric lveev come.

GREEK GRAM. -

34

1\tV ABLE CONSONANTS

MOVABLE CONSONANTS
134. Movable N may be added at the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel. Movable v may be annexed to words f'nding in -en; to the third person singular in -e; and to lcrd -is. Th us, 1r<Ttv n,ey<v K<va. he said that to everyl!ody (but 1r1T< \l-yoviT< -ra.-ra ), "fOVIT<V lp,ol they speak to me (buc \'-"fov~Tl p,ot), riTnv 11.\\o~ the1e is another (187 b), 'AOfJv'Y/IT<v -1j~Ta.v they were at Athens. a. Except l~T-rl, words that add v do not elide tbeir final vowel (73). b. Ve1:bs in -<w never (in Attic) add -v to the 3 sing. of the contracted form: a.-r6v he tleated him well. But ii<~ went and pluperfects (as no<~ knew) may add v. N.- Movable vis called v l<j><KVITnK6v (dragging ajter).
< "lrOLH

135. Movable "is usually written at the end of clauses, and at the end of a verse in poetry. To make a syllable long by position (144) the poets add v before words beginning with a consonant. Prose inscriptions frequently use , before a consonant. 136.

Movable

lK before consonants.

he. acts th us; ~ a. <Mils means straightway,

appears in o-rw> thus, ~ ont oj, before vowels, o15-rw, 'l'hus, ov-rw;; l"Tro[n he acted tlws but o15-rw 7rOLE: :yops but K -r~s yops out of the rnarket-place.
<flOu straight towards.

137. oK not is used before the smootb breatbing, ovx (cp. 124) before the rough breathiug: oK o\l"fo, ovx f}os. Before all consonants ov is written : .o 1ro\Xol, o pifow~. Standing alone or at the end of its clause o is written o~ (rarely o~K), as 1rw~ "fp oi!; for how not? Cp. 180 a. Il A longer form is oxl (Ion. od) used before vowels and consonants. b. P.'Y/Kn no longer derivefl its K from the analogy of oKln no longer.

SYLLABLES

There are as many sy llables in a Greek word as the re are separate vowels or diphthongs: th us, -+8a-a truth.
138.
139. The last syllable is called the ult-irna; the next to the last syllable is called the penult (paen-ultima almost last); the one before the penult is called the antepwnult (ante-paen-ultima). 134 D. Hom. has .1"fw(v) I, il.p.p,(v) tous, i!p,p,t(v) to you, IT<j>l(v) to them. The suffixes -</> and -0< vary with -<J>v and -O<P: 0<6<fJL(P), 7rp6iTO<(v). Also KI( v) Attic il.v, vv(v) now. The Mss. of Hdt. avoid movable v, but it occurs in Ionie inscriptions. Hdt. often has -0< for -O<v ( 1rp61TO< befo!e, 57rtiT0< l!ehind). 136 D. Severa! adverbs often omit s without much regard to the following word: .p,tpl about, &.p.tpls (poet.), p.lxp, il.xp< until (ra rely p.lxp~, il.xp<s ), &.-rplp,as and .-rplp.a. quietly, 1ro'AX&.K" often (1roXHK Hom., Hdt.).

I45]

SYLLABLES

35

140. In pronouncing Greek words and in writing (at the end of the line) the rules commonly observed are these : a. A single consonant standing between two vowels in one word belongs with the second vowel : 11-"(w, ~o-<f>l-?;w. b. Any group of consonants that can begin a word, and a group formed by a stop with J1. or v, and by JLV, be longs with the second vowel: r6-1rrw, 6-"(ooos,
IL-~rpov, (-xiJos; 7rp-"(p.a, ~-IJvos, )l.l-JLV"f/.

c. A group of consonants that cannot begin a word is divided between two syllables: lJ.v-IJos, -1rls, (p-"(f.'a. Doubled consonants are divided: IJa>.ar-m. d. Colllpounds di vide at the point of union : el~-<f>pw, 1rpo~rppw ; av-a"(w, el~ d"(w, ~uv-xw. (But the ancients often wrote a-va"(w, el-~a"(w, 7rpo-~e)I.IJev, -~a"(w,
ou-~ape<rros.)

e. ~, when followed by one or more consonants, is either attached to the preceding vowel ( 11-pt~-ros), or, with the consonant, begins the following syllable (11-p<-~ros). (The ancicnts were not consistent, and there is evidence for the pronunciation 11-pt~-~Tos.) f. The ancients divided iK TOUTou as -K rou-Tou. This practice is now abandoned.
141. A syllable ending in a vowel is said to be open; one ending in a consonant is closed. Thus, in p,+r'YJp rnother the first syllable is open, the second closed.
QU ANTITY OF SYLLABLES

142. A syllable is sh,ort when it contains a short vowel followed by a vowel or a single consonant : lh-6s god, ~-vo-JJ.<-a-a I tlwught.
143. A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel or a diphthong: xw-pii country, oov-os slave. 144. A syllable is long by posion when its vowel precedes two consonants or a double consonant: t7r7ros hmse, ~tout of.

a. One or both of the two consonants lengthening a final syllable by position may belong to the next word : 11>-)l.iis ?rotT"f/s, a>.>.ii KTTJf.'U. b. J.ength by position does not affect the natural quantity of a vowel. Thus, both )1..!-~w I shall say and )I..,Hw I ~hall cease have the first syllable long by position; but the first vowel is short in >..!w, long in >.'lj~w.
145. A stop with a liquid after a short vowel need not make the preceding syllable long by position. A syllable containing a short vowel before a stop and a liquid is common (either short or long). vVhen short, such syllables are said to have weak position.

Thus, in oaKpu, ?raTpbs, li'lr)\.ov, TfKVov, Tl op~ the first syllable is either long or short as the verse requires. In Homer the syllable before a stop with a liquid is usually long; in Attic it is usually short.
144 D. f may be one of the two consonants: 1rps (r )oiKov ( _ _ v).

36

SYLLA BLES

a. The stop and the liquid making weak position must stand in the same word or in the same part of a compound. Thus, i11 iK-Mw 1 release the first syllable is al ways long, but in (-K~u he heard it is common. b. {J, -y, before p., or v, and usually before , make the preceding syllable long by position. Th us, -yv6s (_ v) pure, {Jt{Jlov (~ v v) book. N.-' Common' quantity bas been explained as due to a difference in sylla bic division. Thus, in -r~Kvov, the first syllable is closed (rh-vov); while in -rtvov the first syllable is open (-r-Kvov). Cp. 141.
~46. The quantity of most syllables is usually apparent.

Thus, syllables

a. with .,, w, or a diphthong, are long. b. with e, o, before a vowel oi a single conso11ant, are short.
c. with e, o, before two consonants, or a double consonant, are long. d. with a, ,, v, before two consonants, or a double consonant, are long. N. -But syllables with , o, or a, ,, u before a stop and a liquid may be short (145). Cp. also 147 c.
~47. The quantity of syllables containing a, <, v before a vowel or a single consonant must be learned by observation, especially in poetry. Note, however, that a, ,, v are always long a. when they have the circumfiex accent: 1rs, bp.i:v. b. when they arise from contraction (59) or crasis (62): -ypa from -ypaa, &.p-y6s idle from -wros (but /ip-y6s bright), d'Y.:, from Ka! l'Y<I!. c. , and u are generally short bef ore ~ ( except as initial sounds in augmented forms, 435) and a,<, u before r. Thus, Kfjpv~, h'fJpi!~a, .,..t~w, p1rii:tw, f7rtrw. d. as, ts, and vs are long when v or vr has dropped out before s (96, 100). e. The accept often shows the quantity (163, 164, 170). ~48. A vowel standing before another vowel in a Greek word is not necessarily short (as it usually is in classical Latin).

146 D. In Hom. an initial liquid, nasal, and digamma (3) was probably doubled in pronunciation when it followed a short syllable carrying the rbythmic accent. Here a :final short vowel appears in a long syllable : lv! p.ryripourt (v_,_ v v__,_ v), cp. 28 D. The lengthening is sometimes due to the former presence of u or F befo're the liguid or nasal: ou 'IJ~mv v_,_ _ _,_ v (cp. if.7JKros unceasing for -u7JKros), u pi}~ftv -=---=-- (cp. lf.pp7JKros unbroken for -FP7JKTos). (Cp. 80 a, 80 D., 81 D.) 147 D. a, <, v in Hom. sometimes show a different quantity than in Attic. Thus, Att. Kifi-6s, rtvw, <j>Oavw, Mw, 'IJJ-<, Hom. KaMs, rivw, <j>Oii.vw (28), and ).t\w and "r'll'-' usually. 148 D. 1. In Hom., and sometimes in the lyric parts of the dram::t,a syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong is shortened bef ore an initial vowel: li~w wv (...:._V V_:_), <fixera< el vat (...:._V V...:__), K8{ tJ.W ap"/Vp6ro( (....:...V V...:._ V V...:._). Here < and u have become semivowels (20, 43) ; thus, elixera 1 y<va<, cp. 67. -t;t, -n, -'l' were shortened Jike ii, 7), w. Th us, ".,.r'l' /Jp.(3p'f' (...:... v v _,_ _). 2. This shorteuing does not occur wh en the rhythmic accent falls upn the final sy Hable: vn8i'J' 'Oov6fi< (....:... v v _,_ v v _,_ v), .;; ~ "' (....:... v v).

154]

ACCENT

37

ACCENT

i49. There are three accents in Greek. No Greek accent can stand farther bacl;: than the antepenult. 1. Acute (') : over short or long vowels and diphthongs. It may stnd on ultima, penult, or antepenult : Kao>, a{JLwv, av8pW7ros. 2. Circumflex (~): over vowels long by nature and diphthongs. It may stand on ultima or penult: y~, ewv, 8wpov, TOVTO. 3. Grave ('): over short or long vowels and diphthongs. It stands on the ultima only: TOV av8ptt, Tf}V TVX'YJV, OL 8wt ~ 'E,Ud(io.
150. The acute marks syllables pronounced in a raised torre. The grave is a low-pitched torre as contrasted with the acute. The circumflex combines acute and grave. 151. Accented syllables in Ancient Greek had a higher pitch (rovos) than unaccented syllables, and it was the rising and falling of the pitch that made Ancient Greek a musical language. The Greek word for accent is 7rpou't'olii (Lat. accentus: from ad-cano), i.e. 'song accompanying words.' Musical accent (elevation and depression of tone) is to be distinguished from quantity (dnration of tone), and from rhythmic accent (stress of voice at fixed intervals when there is a regular sequence of long and short syllables). N. -The accent heard in Modern Greek and English is a stress-accent. Stress is produced by strong and weak expiration, and takes account of accented sy llables to the neglect of the quantity of unaccented sy llales. Th us, short! y after Christ, tiv8pw7ros was often pronounced like a dactyl, cpl!..os like a trochee; and 7rp6uw7rov, vva, were even written 7rp6uo7rov, lvvf}a. 152. The marks of accent are placed over the vowel of the accented syllable. A diphthong has the accent over its second vowel ( rouro), except in the case of capital q., 17, 't' (as "A<orJs, 5), where the accent stands before the first vowel 153. A breathing is written before the acute and grave (ot, 1/), but under the circumflex ( ;;,, ovros). Accents and breatltings are placed before capitals: "OJ-LTJPos, opa<. The accent stands over a mark of diaeresis (8): KTJ"iL. 154. The grave is written in place of a final acute on a word that is followed immediately by another word in the sentence. Thus, JLET. T~v JLaxYJv a.fter the battle (for !J-ETa T~v JLax'YJv). It is also sometimes placed on Tt>, Tt (334), to distinguish these inefinite pronouns from the interrogatives T>, T.

a. An oxytone (157) changes its acute to the grave when followed by another word, except: (1) wh en the oxytone is followed by an enclitic (183 a); (2) in ris, rl interrogative, as rls ovros; who's this '1 (3) when an elided syllable follows 3. The short<>ning rarrly occum in the interior of a word. 'J'hus, Hom. i)pwos (_v v), u!ov (v v), in the A ttic orama arrJt" (_v_), 7owros (v_ v), 71"0LW (v_), ofwn written 7row in inscriptions (cp. 43).

38

ACCENT

[xss

the accented syllable: vuxO' 5l\'l}v (12t), not vxO' 5'I}v (174 a); (4) when a colon or period follows. (Usage varie~ bef ure a cuul!ua.) l.55. The ancients regarded the grave originally as belonging to every syllable not accented with the acute or circumfl.ex; and sorne Mss. show this in practice, e.g. 7r"(Kprf}s. Later it was restricted to its use as a substitute for a final acute. l.56. The circumfl.ex is formed from the union of the acute and the grave ~ never from " Th us, 1ras 1r&.ls, ev= l!. Similarly, since every long vowel may be resolved into two short units ( mome), rwv may be regarded as = rolw. The circumtiex was thus spoken with a rising tone followed by one of lower pitch. fWG'a, liifWs are thu,; p/Jrm, op.os; p.ou1J'7]s, of}fWv are p.OUG''I}s, i5Up.ov. In o<ooiJ'a (i.e. oioG'o.) compared with oLiious the accent has receded (159) one mora. a. The wh ole vowel receives the acute wh en the second short unit of a vowel long by nature is accented : t.t = AU.

(" = ),

l.57. Words are named according to their accent as follows: Oxytone (acute on the ultima): 0/jp, Ka,\6.,, .vK.6.,. Paroxytone (acute on the penult): 'w, dTrw, EvK6ro.,. Proparoxytone (acute on the antepenult): d.v8pwTro>, Trat8fvop.Ev. Peris pomenon (circumfl.ex on the ul ti ma) : y~, 8wv. Properispomenon (circumfl.ex on the penult): 7rp~t'>, p.ovcra. Bary,tone (when the ultima is unaccented, 158): p.ovcra, p.~r'YJp, 7r6Ep.o<;;.
].58. A word is called barytone (f'!ap-rovos deep-toned, low-toned) when it bas no accent on the ultima. Ail paroxytones, proparoxytones, and properispomena are also barytones. l.59. An accent is called recessive when it moves back as far from the end of the word as the quantity of the ultirna permits ( 166). The quantity of the penult is he~e disregarded (rp'lrwp.ev ). Cp. 178.

l.60. Oxytone ( o~us, sharp rovos) means 'sharp-toned,' perispornenon ( 7r<p<IJ'7rwp.evos) 'turned-around' (circumjlectus, 156). Pan;xytone and propmoxytone are derived from o~urovos with the prepositions 1rapri and 1rpo respectively. Acute corresponds to Lat. acutus (o~eo., scil. 7rpOG''f'olii). l.61. The invention of the marks of accent is attributed to Aristophanes of Byzantium, librarian at Alexandria about 200 n.c. The use of signs served to fix the correct accentuation, which was becoming uncertain in the third century n.c.; marked the variation of dialect usage ; and rPndered the acquisition of Greek easier for foreigners. The signs for the accents (and the breathings) were not regularly employed in Mss. till after 600 A.D. l.62. The position of the accent has to be learned by observation. But the kind of accent is determined by the following rules.
162 D. 1. Aeolic has recessive (159) accent in all words except prepositions and conjunctions. Thns, rrbq,os, Zes, i.e. Zs, auros, l7reLv ( = L7r<v), l\l1rovros

( = L'lrOPTOS),

IJ.p.p.!S ( = i}p.ES).

x6g]

ACCENT

39

163. The antepenult, if accented, can have the acute only (/J.v8por

f3aaD..na qneen, o1KocpvaKO'> of a ho'use-gaard). If the ultima is long, either by nature or by position (144), the antepenult cannot take an accent: hence &.v8pnrov (176 a), {3acn>..da kingdom, o1Kocpv>..at.
'ITO>,

a. Some nouns in -ews and -ewv admit the acute on the antepenult. Thus, the genitive of nouns in -Ls and -us ( 1rews, 1rl>ewv, <iuuws ), the forms of the .Attic declension, as ews (289). So the Ionie genitive in -w (1roMrew); a!so some compound adjectives in -ws, as ovuepws unhappy in love, >flKepws lojty antlered. On wvuvwv see 186.

164. The penult, if accented and long, takes the circumflex when the ultima is short by nature (vl)<To>, -rav-ra). In all other cases it has the acute ( cpof3o<>, evKoro>, rovrov).

a. Apparent exceptions are (};ure, o~ns, 7}ile (properly noe). See 186. b. A final sy Hable containing a vowel short by nature followed by t or >f does not permit the acute to stand on the antepenult (olKocf>uan; but the circumflex may stand on the penult (KfjpuO.
165. The ultima, if accented and short, bas the acute (1romp.o); if accented and long, has either the acute (>...X.vKw>), or the circumflex
(IJeptK~> ).

'

'

166. When the ultima is long, the acute cannot stand on the

antepenult, nor the circumflex on the penult. llwpov are impossible.

a. b.

Thus, /lv8pw1rov and

167. When the ultima is short, a worcl, if accented

on the ultima, has the acute: <Tocf>o>. on a short penult, has the acnte: vop.o>. c. on a long penult, has the circumflex: owpov. d. On the antepenult, has the acute: av8pW7rO. 168. When the ultima is long, a word, if accented a. on the ultima, has the acnte or the circumflex: yw, <Tocpws. b. on the penult, has the acute: wv, &CJLwv.
169. Final -a< and -o< are regarded as short: JkOVUa<, (3ouoJkat, 7rp07raa<, But in the optative -aL and -oL are long (Mua<, {3ovXe6o<), as in contracted syllables. So also in the locative otKo< at home (but oKo< houses). a. The difference in the quantitative treatment of -u< and -o< depends on an original difference of accentuation that may have vanished in Greek -aL and
IJ.P8pw7ro<.

2. Doric regarded final-o, (169) as long (vOpcfnrOL), and probably -a< in nouns (xwpaL); made paroxytones the 3 pl. act. of the past tenses (f<f>ipov, iMuav) and such words as 1raloes, -yuvalK<s, 7rTWKas; made perispomena the gen. maso. pl. of pronouns (rourwv, wv) and the gen. fem. pl. of adj. in -os (Jkcporepv). The substitution, in the accus. pl., of -as and -<>s for -as and -<>vs, caused no change in the accent ( 1rduO.s, rlJk7ros).

40

ACCENT

...,,, when short, were pronounced with a clipped, or simple, toue; when long, with a drawled, or compound, toue.
170. The quantity of a, ,, v (147) may often be learned from the accent. Thus, in Oci:>..aTra, ~p,rvs, .,.iixvs, ouva.p,<s, p,?iv<s, the vowel of the last syllable must be short; in rpl:>..os the' must be short (otherwise rp'Aos). Cp. 163.
ACCENT AS AFFECTED BY CONTRACTION, CRASIS, AND ELISION

171. Contraction.- If either of the syllables to be contracted had an accent, the contracted syllable hasan accent. Th us: a. A contracted antepenult has the acute: <fJt.Ebp,<vos == </>t.oVJL<vos.
b. A coutracted penult has the circumflex when the ultima is short; the acute, when the ultima is long: </><ovn == tf><.ofirrt, tf><.Ebvrwv = rpt'AovTwv. c. A contracted ultima has the acute when the uncontracted form was oxytone : <Fra.ws = i<Frws ; otherwise, the circumflex: q}t'Aw = tj>t:>..w. N. 1.- A contracted syllable has the circumfl.ex only when, in the uncontracted form, an acute was followed by the (unwritten) grave (155, 156). Thus, Il<p<K'Ai]s = liEp<K.?is, Tp,ciw = Tp,w. In al! other cases we have the acute: tj>t'Abvrwv = </><ouvrwv, flfl.ws == {J.flws. N. 2.- Exceptions to 171 are often due to the analogy of other forms (236 a, 264 e, 279 a, 290 c, 309 a).

172. If neither of the syllables to be contracted had an accent, the contracted syllable has no accent: cp{.EE = cp{n, yv = yvEt, 7rEp{7rooc; = TrEp{rr.ouc;. For exceptions, see 236 b. 173.
~ts

Crasis.- In crasis, the first word (as less important) loses accent: r&ya80. for r &.ya8a, r&v for T v, K&yw for Kal. yw.

a. If the second word is a dissyllabic paroxytone with short ultima, it is un certain whether, in crasis, the paroxytone remains or changes to properispomenon. In this book roiJp-yov, nf:>..:>..a. are written for TO (p-yov, T. t:>..a. ; but many scholars write TOVp"fOV, Tci.ct.
174. Elision. -In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent: 1rap' (for 1rap) JJ>ol, &.., (for a) iyw. In other oxytones the accent is thrown back to the penult: 1r, (for 7rO.) trra8ov.

a. Observe that in ?rb'A)\ ~1rafJov the acnte is not changed to the grave (154 a, 3). A circumflex does not result from the recession of the accent. Thus, tpf}p,' (not tf>fitl) i-yw for </>'flp,t i-yw. nvci and 1ror, after a word which cannot receive their accent (183 d), drop their accent: oilrw 1ror' 7jv.
ANASTROPHE

175. Anastrophe (&.vaarpocp~ turning-back) occurs in the case of oxytone prepositions of two syllables, which throw the accent back on the first syllable;

179]

AC:CgNT, PlWCLITICS

41

about these things.

a. Wben the preposition follows its case: TovTwv .,.(p, (for 11"<pi TOVTw') No otber preposition th an 11"<pl follows its case in prose. N. 1.- In poetry anastrophe occurs with the other dissyllabic prepositions (e:x:cept cinl, cip..pl, oi). In Homer a preposition following its verb and separated from it by tmesis (1650) also admits anastrophe (Xoucry lJ..,.o for ci...oXovcry). N. 2. - When the final vowel of the preposition is elided, the accent is dropped if no mark of punctuation intervenes : xpcrlv iHp' -i]p.<dpycr<v B 37 4. b. When a preposition stands for a compound formed of the preposition and icrTl. '.rhus, 11"1ipa for .,.p<cr~< it is permitted, ifv, for lfv<<TTL it is possible (Mis a poetic form of lv). N. -In poetry, .,.pa may stand for .,.pcr< or .,.pp.<; and li. va arise 1 up! is used for vcrr71lh. Hom. has If v<= l!vcr<.
CHANGE OF ACCENT IN DECLENSION, INFLECTION, AND COMPOSITION

176. When a short ultima of the nominative is lengthened in ail oblique case a. a proparoxytone becomes paroxytone: 8aarra 8aaTT7J'>, /J.v8pw1ro<;

&.v8pw1rov.

b. a properispomenon becomes paroxytone: p.oaa p.ovarJ'>, 'wpov 'wpov. c. an oxytone becomes perispomenon in the genitive and dative of the second declension : 8e:o<; 8wv lhcj) e.;;)JI 8w<;. 177. When, for a long ultima, a short ultima is substituted in inflection a. a dissyllabic paroxytone (with penult long by nature) becomes properispomenon: Dw <. b. a polysyllabic paroxytone (with penult either long or short) becornes proparoxytone: ?Ta<D~vw 1raC8we:, 1rKw 7r.[Kop.e:v. 178. In composition the accent is usually recessive (159) in the case of substantives and adjectives, regularly in the case of verbs:
f3aa<<; vO.f3ar:n;, 8.6, d.(J.o,, >..e: ?To.iie:.
a. Proper names having the form of a substantive, adjective, or participle, usually change the accent: 'E;>..,.,s (lX.,.Is), rXaKos (-yXavKos), rXwv ('Y<hwv). b. Special cases will be considered under I)eclension and Inflection.
PROCLITICS

179. Ten monosyllabic words have no accent and are closely connected with the following word. They are called proclitics (from ?TpoK>..tvw lean forward). They are: The forms of the article beginning with a vowel (b, ~' oL, ai); the prepositions iv, e:l, (,), ~ (iK); the conjunction El if; w<; as, that (also a preposition to); the negative adverb ov (ovK, ovx, 137).

42

ACCENT, ENCLITICS

[x8o

b. t. lv, and els receive an acute in poetry when they follow the word to which they be long and stand at the end of the verse: Kcuwv ~tout of evils :;;: 472. c. ws as becomes iJJs in poetry when it follows its noun: O<IJS iJJs as a god. ws standing for oiffws is written iJJs even in prose ( oii' ilJs not even th us). d. When the proclitic precedes an enclitic (183 e): l!v TIITL.

180. A proclitic sometimes takes an accent, thus: a. o at the end of a sentence: <t>ris, ~ ov; do you say so or not '1 7Tws "'fp ojj; fr why not ? Also ojj no standing alone.

N. - used as a relative (for lis, 1105) is written li. see 1114.

ENCLITICS

On li demonstrative

181. Enclitics (from yK>..ivw lean on, upon) are words attaching themselves closely to the preceding word, after which they are pronounced rapidly. Enclitics usually lose their accent. They are:

a. The persona! pronouns p.o, p.ol, p.; uo, uol, u; ou, ol, l, and (in poetry) u<f>lu<. b. The indefinite pronoun rls, rl in ail cases (including ro, r( for nv6s, nvl, but excluding ILTTa = nv&.); the indefinite adverbs 7Tov (or 1ro8l), 1r?i, 7Tol, 7To0v, 1ror, 1rw, 1rws. When used as interrogatives these words are not enclitic (ris, rl, 1ro (or 1r68<), 7Ti], 1ro, 1r68ev, 7T6T, 7Tw, 1rws). c. Ali dissyllabic forrns of the present indicative of dp.l am and </>7Jp.l say (i.e. al! except d and <f>?is). d. The particles "'f, r, rol, 7rp ; the inseparable -oe in lioe, rou6uo<, etc. N.- Enclitics, when they retain their accent, are called orthotone. See 187 .
. 182. The accent of an enclitic, when it is thrown back upon the preceding WOl'd, al ways ,appears aS an acute: 8~p T (not 8~p T)'frOffi
()~p

+ r.

183.

The word preceding an enclitic is treated as follows:

a. An oxytone keeps its accent, and does not change an acute to a grave (154 a): o6s JJ-OL, Ka.bv O'TL. b. A perispomenon keeps its accent: pi'A.w u<, rip.wv nvwv. c. A proparoxytone or properispomenon receives, as an additional accent, the acute on the ultima: 1Lv8pw1r6s ns, li.v8pw7Tol nv<s, 1jKouud. nvwv; uwu6v p.<,
7TaOS TLPES.

d. A paroxytone receives no additional accent : a monosyllabic enclitic loses its accent (xwpii ns, plos p.ov), a dissyllabic enclitic retains its accent (xwpii> nvbs, tplo< nvis) except when its final vowel is e!ided (174 a).

181 D. Also enclit ic are the dialetic and poetica! forms p.e, ulo, u<, rot, r, and ru (accus. = u), ~o, <v, ~ll<v, p,lv, viv, u<f>l, u<f>lv, u<f>, u<f>wl, upwtv, u<f>wv, u<f>las, upas and u<f>s, u<{:!a.; abo the particles v or vvv (not vv), Epie K (Klv), Ut, v, pd.; and Epie uul, Ion. <Is, thou art.

J88]

ACCENT, PUNCTCATION

43

N.- Like paroxyton cs are treated properispomena ending in ~ or Y, when followed by a dissy lia bic enclitic: Kfjpv~ luri; and so probably Kfjpv~ r. e. A proclitic (17\l) takes an acute: h rm, .t rtves.
184. Since an enclitic, on losing its accent, fonns a part of. the preceding word, the writing lJ.v8ponros ns would violate the rule (14!J) that no word cau be accented on a syllable before the antepenult. A paroxytone receives no additional accent in order that two successive syllables may not have the acute (not
rf>lbs UTLP).

185. When severa] enclitics occur in s_uccession, each receives an accent from the following, only the last having no accent: er ,-o6 ris rtva tao< <x8p6v if ever any one saw an enemy auywhere T. 4. 47. 186. Sometimes an enclitic unites with a preceding word to forma compound (cp. Lat. -que, -ve), which is accented as if the 'nclitic were stilla separate word.
Thus, aVre (not oVr), lf){TrE, etre, Kairot, oVrtvos-, ~rtvt, Wvrtvwv; usually -rrep ( W<TwEp);

and the inseparable -ii in oo, ro6uo, o(Kaoe; and -8 and -x< in <tiJ (poetic at8e), vaLx<. o~TE, t;rtvt, etc., are not real exceptions to the rules of accent (16:3, 164). a. o!bs re able is sometimes written oi6ure. oVK ovv is usually written o~Kovv not therefore, and not therefore ? in distinction from ovKovv therefore. t'lw 'l< and !J.ol 'l may become g'lW'l<, I!}J.o<'l<
187. An enclitic retains its accent (is orthotone, cp. 181 N. ): a. When it is emphatic, as in contrasts: ;) uol ;) r(/; ,-ar pl crov eitlw to you o1 to you1 father (EIJ.o, lp.oL, iJ. are empbatic : 1,- Kal l!J.ol tell me too), and at the ueginning of a sentence or clause : rf>TJI-'l 'l<ip I $a y in fact. b. luri is written ~crn at the beginning of a sentence; when it expre.sses existence or possibility; when it follows ovK, !-'1!, El, ws, KO.,l, /..M (or !..!..'),
roilTo (or ToiJr'); and in ~dT Lv o some, TLP OT sornetimes. 'l'hus, El <.rrtv oVTws if it f3_ so, roro 8 ~crn that which exists. c. In the phrases ,-or !J.v ... ,-or M, nvi!s !J.v .. nvs i. d. After a word suffering elision: ,-o/../..ol o' elcrlv (for i elcrtv), ravr' lcrrl.

e.

When a dissyllabic enclitic follows a paroxytone (183 d).

N. 1.- When they are used as indirect reflexives in Attic prose (1228), the pronouns of the third person ob and uq:,lcrt are orthotone, ol is generally enelitic, wbile li is generally orthotone. N. 2. -After oxytona prepositions and gv1<a enclitic pronouns (except rls) usually keep tbeir accent (f,-l crot, not i,-t cro< ; liv<Ka crofi, not ~v<Ka crov; l!ve~<' ~v, nnt l!veKa ro). t}J.o, !J.ol, !J. are used after prepositions ( except ,-p6s !J.<; and in the drama !-'<f>l !J.O< ).

MARKS OF PUNCTUATION

188. Greek bas four marks of punctuation. The comma and period have the same forms as in English. For the colon and semicolon Greek has only one sign, a point above the li ne ( ): ol o -i)ows l,-eLOovro i,-Lcrrwov 'li<P a{mji and they gladly obeyed; for they t1usted hirn X. A. 1. 2. 2. The mark of interlogation (;) is the same as our semicolon: ,.,:;,, 'lp o; fm why not?

PART II
INFLECTION
189. Parts of Speech.- Greek has the fol1owing parts of speech: substantives, !!,djectives, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and particles. ln this Grammar no-un is nsed to include both the snbstanti ve and the adjective. 190. lnflection is the cl1ange in the form of nonns, pronouns, and verbs which indicates their relation to other words in the sentence. Declension is the inflection of substantives, adjectives (including participles), and pronouus; conjagation is the inftection of verbs. 191. Stems.- Intlection is shawn by the addition of endings to the stem, which is that part of a ward which sets forth the idea; the endings fit the ward to stand in various relations to other words in the sentence. 'l'he endings original! y had distinct meanings, which are now seldom apparent. In verbs they represent the foree of the persona! pronouns in English ; in nouns they often 'correspond to the ideas expressed by of, to, for, etc. Thus, the stem o')'obecomes :\6-yo-s word, the stem <"yo- becomes ')'o-f.L<v we say. Whether a stem is used as a noun or a verb depends solely on its signification ; many stems are used bath for nouns and for verbs, as Ti~J-0.- in T!J-f, honour, T~J-a- in r~J--w 1 honour; <X... tiJ- in <X ... l( 15)-s hope, 7l'ljw 1 hope (<X7l'<i-}w). The pur.e stem, that is, the stem withont any ending, may serve as a ward; as xwpO. land, "Y< speak ! M-ye oh ward! 192. The stem often chnges in form, but not in meaning, in nouns and verbs. Th us, the stem of X67o-s wrwd is o')'o- or o')'<-, of 7l'aTf,p father is 7l'ar<p(strong stem) or ... arp- (weak stem); of Xl7l'O-~J-<P we leave is n7l'o-, of e-l7l'of.L<v we left is <.,. o-. The verbal stem is also modified to indicate change in time: T~J-f,- .. o-~J-<V we shall honou1. 193. Roots. -The fundamental part of a word, which remains after the ward has been analyzed into ail its component parts, is called a root. When a stem agrees in form with a root (as in 7l'oi-6s, gen. of 7l'o6s foot) it is called a root-stern. A root contains the mere idea of a wor in the vagnest and most abstract form pos~ible. Thns, the root Xry, and in another form O'J', contains th" 1dea of srq;ing simply. By the addition of a fnrmat.ive element o we arrive at the stems <')'o- and o')'o- in ')'o-p.e v we say, M')' o-s word (i.e. what is said). 44

I8!)-I97]

DECLENSION

45

Words are built by adding to the root certain formative suffixes by which the stem and then the word, ready for use, is constructed. Thus, from the root Xu are formed M-<TL-s loosing, Xv-rpo-v ransom, Xu-n-Kirs able to loose, Xu-11-ij-vo.L to have loosed. The formation of the stem by the addition of suffixes to the root is treated in Part III. The root itself may assume val"ious forms witbout change of meaning, as Xe-y in M7-o-p,ev we say, Xo7 in M7-o-s word. N. -Since Greek is connected with the other Indo-European languages, the roots which we estab!ish in Greek by analysis of a word into its simplest form often reappear in the connected languages (p. 1, A). 'l'hus, the root <PP of </>pw I bear is seen in Sanskrit bhariimi, Lat. fera, Germ. ge-baren. The assumption of roots is merely a grammatical convenience in the analysis of word-forms, and their determination is part of comparative grammar. Roots and suffixes as such never existed as independent words in Greek, or indeed in any known period of the parent language from which Greek and the other Indo-European tangues .are derived. The theory that ali roots are monosyllables is ill supported. As far back as we can follow the history of the Judo-European languages we find only complete words; hence their analysis into component morphological elements is merely a scientific deviee for purposes of arrangement and classification.
DECLENSION

194. Declension deals with variations of number, gender, and case. 195. Number.- There are tluee numbers: singular, dual, and plural. 'l'he dual speaks of two or a pair, as TtiJ cp8a.p.w the two eyes; but it is not often used, and the plural (which denotes more than one) is frequently substituted for it (oi cp8aA.p.o{ the eyes). 196. Gender. - There ar three genders : masculine, feminine, and neuter.
a. Gender strictly marks sex-distinction. But in Greek, as in German and French, many inanimate objects are regarded as masculine or feminine. Such words are said to have 'grammatical' gender, which is determined only by their form. Words denoting objects without natural gender usually slJOw their grammatical gender by the form of the adjective, as p,o.Kps X67os a long speech, p.o.Kpi. vi)<Tos a long islrmd, p,o.Kpov n<xos a long wall. b. The gender of Greek words is usually indicated by means of the article : ofor masculine, r, for feminine, r6 for neuter.

ovo.1T'1"

197. Rule of Natural Gender.- Nonns denoting male persons are masculine, nouns denoting female persons are feminine. Thus,

seaman, o aTpanwTTJ> soldie1, ~ yvv~ woman, ~ KDPTJ maiden. a. A whole class is designated by the masculine : ol lf.v8pw1ro< men, i.e. men and women. b. ExcEI'TIONS ro r1m RuLE oF NATURAL GF;NDER.- Diminutives in -wv are neuter (199 d), [\S r v8pc!J1rwv rnanikin ( lf.v8pw1ro< rnan), r 1ro.tiJlov little child (male or female, or r, 1ras child), r "fho.wv little wornan (~ "(uvo woman). Also the words rKvov, rhos chilcl (strictly 'thing born'), voparrooov captive.

46

DECLE~SION

198. Common Gender. -Many nouns denotiug persons are either masculine or feminine. Thns, o1ra'is boy, 1} ,-a<s gi7l, oOe6s god, 1} Oeos ( 1} Oti poet.) goddess. So with names of animais : 6 {3oDs ox, i} f3ous cow, o ,-,-os horse, 1} ,-,-os ma1e. a. Sorne names of .animais have only one grammatical gener witlwut regard to sex, as o a-yws he-hare or she-hare, 1} aW1f1J~ he-fox or ~he-fox. 199. Gender of Sexless Objects.- The gender of most nouns denoting sexless objects has to be learned by the endings (211, ~28, 255) and by observation. The following general l'Ules should be noted. a. Masculine are the names of winds, months, and most 1ivers. Tlms, o Bopcis the North Wind, o'EKaro!Lf3au.hv Hecatombaeon, o K7]<{!un:r6s Gephissus. N.- The gender of these proper nam es is made to correspond to o ILv!Los wind, o p.f}v month, o?Tora,..6s river. In the case of winds and rivers the gender may be due in part to personification. b. Feminine are the names of almost all countries, islands, cities, trees, and plants. Thus, 1} 'ArnKf} .Attica, 1} .O.i)os De los, 1} K6ptv0os Gurinth, i} ,-irvs pine, 1} li!L7rEos vine. The gender here follows that of 1} -yi) or i} xwpci land, country, 1} vi]<ros island, 1} 1roLS city, 1} lips, originally tree in general, but later oak (ro Mvlipov is the ordinary worcl for t1ee). c. Feminine are most abstract words, tl1at is, words denoting a quality or a condition. Thus, 1} aprfJ virtue, 1} livota good-will, 1} TaXVT7]S SW1ftness, 1} (}..,-ls hope. d. Neuter are diminutives (197 b), words and expressions qnoted, Jetters of the alphabet, infinitives, and indeclinable nouns. Th us, r !LE< the ward y ou,' -ro -yvwOt <reavr6v the saying 'learn to know thyselj;' r /1)\.<f!a alpha, r ,-atoEvHv to educate, r xpwv necessity. N.- But some nam es of womeri end in -wv (197 b): 1} rvKpwv Glycerium.
200. Remarks. -a. Most of the exceptions to 199 a--b are dne to the endings; e.g. 1} Af}07] Lethe, i} ~ru~ Styx (rivers of the Lower World), r Ap-yos A1yos, o Kavowv Calydon, r "l)l.wv Ilium, ol A<f>ol Delphi, o w-r6s lotus. b. Change in gender is ofteu associated with change in form : o MKos he-wolf, 1} MKaLPa she-wolf, o 7rOt7]Tf}s poet, i} ?rotf}rpta poetess, o f3loros and i} {3wrf} life, o rp61ros rnanner, 1} rpo1rf} Tout. c. The gender of one worcl may influence that of another word of like meaning. Thus 1} vi]<ros island and 1} )l.leos stone are feminine probably because of 1} 'YiJ land and 1} ,-hpa rock. 201. Cases.- There are five cases: nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative. The genitive denotes from as well as of, the dative denotes to or fm and also by, with, on, in, at, etc. The other cases are used as in Latin.

a. The genitive, dative, and accusative are called oblique cases to distinguish them from the nominative and vocative.
202. The vocative is often like the nominative in the singular; in the plural it is always the same. Nominative, vocative, and accusative have the same form in neuter words, and always have a in the

:zog]

DECLENSION

47

plural. In the dual there are two forms, one for nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for genitive and dative.
203. Lost Cases.- Greek bas generally lost the forms of the instrumental and locative cases (which have become fused with the dative) and of the ablative. The Greek dative is used to express by, as in fJlq., Lat. v; with, as in XUJots with stones; and in, on, as in 'Yii on the emth. FTom may be expressed by the genitive: 1rppw J:-1rapr7Js fm from Sparta. When the genitive and dative do duty fol' the ablative, prepositions are often used. Instances of the forms of the ]ost cases are gi ven in 341.

204. Declensions.- 'fhere are three declensions, which are named from the stems to which the case endings are attached. 1. First or -declension, with stems in 0: l V D 2. Second or 0-declension, with stems iu o ( owe1 ec1enswn. 3. Third or Consonant declension, with stems in a consonant or in L and" The nominative and accusative are alike in the singular and plural of all neuter nouns. The nominative and vocative are alike in the plural.
GENERAL RULES FOR THE ACCENT OF NOUNS

205. Substantives and adjectives accent, in the oblique cases, the same sy llable as is accented in the nominative, provided the nltima permits (1'63); otherwise the following syllable receives the accent.
1 decl.
OaXarra, Oa.Xarr7Js, OaXarry, Oa'!l.arra.>, OaXa.rra< (l(ill), Oa.'!l.arra.ts, 8aXa7Tiis. li110pw1ros, Opw1rov; >Opw7r'l', 11v0pw1rov, 11>0pw7rot ( 160), >Opw7rwP, .11eptfnrots, ;v(Jpdnrovs. Xw>, oPros, ">.oPTt, oPTa, ">.oPTES, XEPTwv. ll~ws (287), ci~iii, ll.~w>, ~lov, ~iiis, ~l'l', ~lq., ~lwv, flo<S. xap[ELS (299), xo.plEPTOS, xa.plEPTL, xa.plEPTa., xa.ptVTWP.

2 decl.
3 decl.

Adj.:

206.. The character of the accent depends on the general laws (167, 168, 176). Thus, PiK'T}, viKa.t (169) ; owpoP, o<i>pou, owpa.; crwp.a., crwp.a.ros, crwp.rhwv,
tr<f!p.a.Ta..

207. Oxytones of the :first and second declensions are perispomena in the genitive and dative of all numbers: crKtd, crKts, crK<~, crKtwv, crKta.is; Oes,
llEoi!,

o.r;;,

O<wP, Oeos; <f>aP<p6s, rj>aPEpoi!, tj>aPEprj, tj>a.PepwP, tj>a.P<pos.

208. The genitive plural of all substantives of the first declension has the circumfiex on the w of -w>. Thus, viK1J >tKw>; OaXa.rra. Oa.'!l.a.rrw; 7ro">.tr7Js 7ro'!l.TWv ; vEavla.s vEO.vtWv.

209. The fem. gen. plural of adjectives and participles in -os has the same accent and form a.s the masculine and neuter. Thus, OlKa.ws, gen. pl. tKa.lwv '(in all genders) ; Xu6p.<>os, gen. pl. Xvop.vwv (in all genders).

48
210.

FlRtiT

.)JECLENS10~

(a-STEMS)

[210

CASE END1NGS OF NOUNS

VowEL llECLENsioN

CONSONANT DECLENS!ON
Masc. nnd J<'em. Neuter

SJNGULAR
Masc. and l<'em. Neuter

Nom. Geu. Dat. Ace. V oc. N.A.V. G.D. N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

-sor none -s or

-v
-LO

-sor none -os

none

-v -v
DUAL

none none

-v or -: none or like Nom.

-
E
OI.V

none none

-v
PLURAL

-
-vs (-lis)

-: (I)V -s (-L<n) -:

ES

-: -(I)V

..o-1..,
-vs, -:s

(T'O"L, ... EO"O"&.

-:

a. The stem may undergo a change upon its union with the case ending, as in the genitive plural of the first declension (213). Cp. 258, 264, 268, etc. b. In the vowel decleusion, -< of the nominative plural is borrowed from the infiection of pronoun.s ( hevo-t).
SUBSTANTIVES

l!'IRS'I' DECLENSION (STEMS IN

i)

211. Stems in are masculine or feminine. The feminine nominative singular ends in -ii, -ii, or -TJ; the masculine nominative singular adds ., to the stem, and thus ends in -> or -TJ 212. Table of the union of the case endings (when there are any) with the final vowel of the stem.
FEM. SING. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc. ii or i. ii-s or 1')-s ii- or 11- ii-v or i.-v ii or i. MASC. SING. MASC. FEM. PL. MAsc.FEM.DuAL N.A.V. G.D. ii
a.-t.V

1') ii-s 1')-S a.- wv (for -.,v, f-.,v) 1')-S ii-o (Hom. ii-o) 1')-L ii-1. a.-s or a.-o-( v) 1')- 1')V O.-v lis (for a.-vs) 1')V Q.o.L ii i. or 1'J '1

Observe the shortening qf the stern in vocative singular and plural, in nominative and dative plural, and geuitive and dative dual.

~us]

FlRST DECLENSIO~ ( -STEMS)

49

213. Accent.- For special rule of accent in the genitive plural, see 208. The genitive plural is al ways perispomenon si nee -wv is contracted from --wv derived from original (and Hom.) -ti-wv (51). Final -cuis treated as short (169). a. The form of the gen. pl. is taken from the pronominal adjective, i.e. (Hom.) ~6.wv goddesses follows the analogy of (Hom.) r6.wv (332 D.) for ri( o-) wv, cf. Lat. istii-rum dea-ru m.
214.

The dialects show various forms.

215. Dative Plural.- The ending -att-t(v) occurs in Attic poetry ([Katat from K7J rigltt, &mroratat from t:a7TOT7J> lord). a. Attic inscriptions to 420 B.c. bave -yen (written -'l]w<), -?]<Tt, and (after <, ,, p) -~UL (written -atut) and -iiUL. Thus, opaxp.flut and opaxp.fiot drachmas, ;,ap.lf!.u' and rap.!O.ut stewaTds. 'lJU< and -O.ut are properly endi.ngs of the locative case (341). 214 D. 1. For 'l Doric and Aeolic have original ii; thus,.vfKii, viKas, vtKf!.,
vtxav ; ?roxtrO.s, Kptrtis, 'Arpeioas.

2. Ionie bas '1 for the ii of Attic even after <, ,, and p; th us, ')'<vef], oiKi'l], -yopf], p.olp'l]s, p.olpy (nom. p.opii), ve'l]Vl'l]s. 'l'hus, -yopf], -fjs, -fi, -f]v; v<'l]Vl'l]s, -ou, -y,?]>. But Hom. has 8e6. goddess, 'Epp.elas He~mes. 3. The dialects admit -ii in the nom. sing. less often than does Attic. 'l'hus, Ionie ?rpp.v'l] stern, Kviu'l svour (Att. ?rpp.va, Kvua), Dor. r6p.ii da1ing. Ionie bas '1 for ii in the abstracts in -el'l], -ol'l] ('l]8e!'l] t1uth, evvol'l] good-will). Hom. bas vup..pii oh maiden from vup..p'lJ. 4. Nom. sing. masc. -Hom. has -ra for -T'l]s in c,.,.6ra hrwseman, [,.,.'l]ara J'i'ller of horses, vecp<'lJ')'<pha cloud-collector, Kiiavoxara dark-haired; and, with recessive accent, p.'l]rlera counsellor. So in the adj. evpo?ra faT-sounding. Cp.
Lat. poeta, scriba. 5. Gen. sing. masc.- (a) -ao, the original form from 0.-(<)o, is used by Hom. (Arpeloiio). It contracts in Aeolic and Doric to -a ('Arpeioa). (b) -Ew, from 'lJO (= O.o) by 34, is also used by Hom., who makes it a single syllable by synizesis (60), as in 'ArpeloE_C;J. Hdt. bas -w, as ?roirew (163 a). (c} . ., in Hom. after a vowel, Bopw (nom. Bop'l]s). 6. Accus. sing. masc. -In proper names Hdt. often 'has -<a borrowed from s stems (264), as Mtnaoea for Mtnao'l]-v. 7. Dual.- Hom. has the nom. dual of masculines only. In the gen. and dat. Hom. has -atv and also -auv. 8. Gen. plur.- (a) -iwv, the original fonn, occurs in Hom. (p.ouu6.wv, -yop6.wv). In Aeolic and D01i.c -iiwv contracts to (b) -iv (-yop.v). The Doric -iv is found also in the choral sangs of the drma (?rerp.v J'acles). (c) -wv, the Ionie form, appears in Homer, who nsually makes it a single syllable by synizesis (60) as in {3ou1!;:.v, from {3ou{] plan. -wv is from -f]wv, Ionie for -iiwv. ( d) -wv in Hom. generally after vowels (Ktutwv, from Ktul'l hut). 9. Dat. plur.: -yut(v), -ys, generally before vowels, and (rarely) -c; in Hom . .Jouie has -yut, Aeolic -atut(v), -ats, Doric -ats. 10. Accus. plur. : -avs, -iis, as in various Doric dialects, -a<s in Aeolic. GREEK GRAM. - 4

50
216.

l<'IRBT DECLENSION (il-STEMS)

1. FEMININES
SINGULAH

[2r6

iJ xC:.pa (xwp-)
land
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.
xC:. pa xC:.pas
x.:.p~

i) viK']
(viK-)

.fJ cJnryi)
( cpu-y-)

.fJ fioOLpu
(~J-otp-)

~ yWTTU ("fWTT-)

i) 96.UTTO. (OaaTT-)

victo1y
viK'l vfK1]S vfKU vfK1]V vfK1]

jliyht
cj>uyfJ

fate
fl-Oi:pa. fioolpas
fl-O(p~

ton gue
yWTTCI. yci>TT1]S yci>nn ywTTCI.V yWTTCI.

sea
96-CI.TTCI. 9uUTT1]S 9uM.nn IJna.TTCI.V 96-a.TTCI.

tuy~s

xC:.pti-v xC:. pa

uyn cj>uyfJ-v cj>uyfJ

DUAL

fl-Oi:pa.-v fJ-OLpCI.

N.A.V. G.D.

xC:.pa xC:.pa.w

vtKa vfKULV

cj>uy cj>uya.i:v
PLURAL

fl-O(pii floOLpa.LV

yci>TTii yci>TTULV

9a.nTTa 9a.nTTULV

N.V.
Gen. Dat. Ace.

xwpa. xwpwv xci>pa.LS xC:.piis

v'LKa.l. vLKWv

vfKa.LS vfKiiS

cj>uya.( cj>uywv cj>uya.i:s cj>u-ys

fioOLpCI.L floOLpwv flootpa.s fioO(piis

ywTTUL yO>TTWV yci>TTULS yC:.niis

9nCI.TTCI.L 9uCI.TTWV eu\nTTCI.LS 9a.clTTS

Chpii season, 171-'lp day, CTK<Ii. shaclow, }MixrJ battle, TfXVTJ art, "fVW!J-TJ judyment, Tt!J-1, hono1, apET-1, virtue, !J-Ocra muse, 1rpwpa prow, i.!J-a~a wagon, il6~a opinion.

217. Ru LES. -a. If the nominative siugular ends in alpha preceded by a vowel (crK<Ii. shadow) or p (!J-Opa), alpha is kept tllroughout the singular. b. If the nominative singular ends in alpha preceded by a consonant not p, alpha is changed to TJ in the genitive and dative singular. c. If the nominative singular ends in "'' TJ is kept in al! the cases of the singular. d. When the genitive singular bas -TJs, final a of the nominative singular is always short; when the genitive singular has -iis, the final ais generally long.

Feminines fall into two classes : 218. (I) Feminines with a or '1 in all the cases of tl1e singular.
olKlii house, xwpO. land.

a appears in all the cases of the singular, as in "fVd race, Otherwise, TJ throughout the singular, as viKTJ victory. a. After o, we find both ii and 1], as crToli porch, (3o1} shout, ci1co1} hcaring, po1} CU1Tent, p6pomegranate. After p we have "1 in K6pTJ girl, /lep"] neck (81). After
E,

<,

or

p,

219. (II) Feminines with O. in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular. The quantity of the vowel is generally shown by the accent (163, 164). In this class are included: 1. Substantives having <r (~,tf;, TT, or crcr), t, , or a.Lv before the final a show i5. in nom., accus., and voc. sing., 'and "1 in gen. and dat. sing.

Thus,

223]

FIRST

DECLK!\SIO~

(ii-STEMS)

51

p,oO'a muse, p,oun;s, p,oVO'TJ, ip,a~a wagon, rpcbr<S"a table, -ywTTa tongue, pl!a root, ip,ta contest, atva lioness. Others are rp,a da1ing, lilatra mode of lije, il.Kavea thorn, p,va fly. 2. Substantives in i in nom., accus., and voc. sing., and i. in gen, and dat. sing. a. Substantives in -e<a and -rpta denoting females, as [3aule<a queen (but [3autXeli. kingdom ), >f;.XTpw. jemale harper; so the fern. of adj. in -vs, as -yvKus, -yvKa sweet. b. Abstracts in -e<a and -ota from adjectives in -TJS and -oos, as IL)\ij(Jew. uuth (from iL}.'l()iJs true), e~vota goofi ~vi/l (from elivovs, <ivoos kincl, 290). c. Most substantives in -pa after a diphthong or , as p,opa jate, -y<f>pa b1idge.

220. Exceptions to 219, 1 : KPO''Y/ temple (later KppTJ), l!p11''1J dew; to 2 b: in Attic poetry, TJOeli., eflvoli., IL-yvoli. ignorance, which owe their ii to the influence of the genitive and dative d,)\'Y/(Jel.s, iLTJOelq., etc. 221. Most, if not ail, of tl1e substaJl.tives in i are formed by the addition of the suffix ~a or <a (20); thus, -yXwria from -yt.wx-~a (cp. ')'wxv-spoints), -y<f>pa from -ye<f>up-~a, oH<pa giver from oorep-~a (and so <f>lpovO'a bearing from <f>epon~a ), p,opa from p,op-~a, "if;arp-<a. 222.
Il. MASCULINES

SINGULAR

0 ve.vLas

o1rof.rtjs
( 1roiri.-)

o KpT~S
( Kptri.-) judge

'ATpeL!itjs
('AT petlii.-) son of .Atreus

( vei.vti.-) young man

citizen

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

VEiv(O.-s

veiivLou
VEivl.~

veavta-v
VE(iv(O:

1rOtTtj-S 1rOtTOV 1rOiTU 'II'OiTtjV 1rO<Til

DUAL

KpTTJ-S KpTOV KpT

KPLT~-v

KpTn

'ATpetj-S 'ATpeLSov 'ATpet5n ATpet51)-V 'ATpe(Stj

N.A.V. G.D.

vei.vl.a.

veivLa.'v

1rOiTi 1!'0iTilW
PLURAL

KP'Til KP'TilLV

.L

'ATpeLSi 'ATpeLl>llv

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

VEi.Vl.O.t.
VECivl.WV

veavLo.t.s

veavtas

1rOLTilL 1rOi:TWv 'II'OlTil'S 1ro>..tTis

KP'TilL KpTwv KP'TilLS ..<. KPVTilS

'ATpe\:511' 'ATpe.6wv 'ATpe11s 'A.,.peis

rap,ii.s steward, Alveli.s .Aeneas,- va6T1}s sailor, ro~6r'Y/s bowman, O'rpanwT'fJS soldier, o<O'?r6T1JS rule1,- p,a0'1JrfJs JJupil, 1rOLTJTiJs poet- IUpO''!Js Persian.

223. Accent.- 'l'he vocative of <11'1r6TTJS lord is O'?rora.

52

FIRST DECLENSION (<i-STEl\1.8)

224. a: and 11- In the final syllable of the singular ii appears after <, ' and p; otherwise we find 7J. Cp. 218. a. Exceptions are compounds in -pirp1JS: "f<W-p.rp7Js measurer of land. 225. Genitive singular.- The form in -ov is borrowed from the genitive singular of the second declension: A few words in -iis, generally nam es of persons not Greeks, have -ii, the Doric genitive (214 D. 5): 'Avvlf3iis Hannibal, gen. 'Avvlf3ii. 226. Vocative singnlar.- Masculines in -iis have the voc:ttive in -ii (veiivlii) ; those in -T7JS have -t (1rora), all others in -7]s have -7] (' Arpelo1J, KpovlliTJ son of Kronos) except names of nations and compounds: IHpcrt Persian, '2,Kv8a Scythian, "(<w-p.rpa (nom. "(<w-p.Tp1Js measurer of land), ?rati!o-rpl{Jii. gymnastic master.
CONTRACTS (FEMININES AND MASCULINES)

227. Contracts in a or YJ from i m: aa have the circumflex in all the cases: nominative feminine -, -~, masculine ->, ~>
SINGULAR

4t IJ-Vci mina
(p.vii- for p.vaii-)

] criiKfj

fig t?ee

oBoppcis Boreas o'Ep!JoijS Hermes

(Boppii- for Bopeii- 117) ('Epp.7J- for 'Epp.eii-)
'Ep~Joii-s

(crvKTJ- for
<rKEii-)

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

IJ-Vci
~Jovcis

!J-Vq.

!J-Vci-v p.vci

criiKij <r'iiKijS criiKfi criiKij-v criiKij

DUAL

Boppci-s Boppo Boppq. Boppci-v Bopp ci

'Ep!J-O
'Ep~Joii
'Ep~Joij-v

'Ep~Joii

N.A.V. G.D.

!J-Vci p.va.tv

riK. riKa.v
PLURAL

'Ep~Joci

'Ep!Joa.v

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

!J-VO.L
!J-VWV

aiiKO.L

!J-VO.LS pcis

riKWv criiKa.ts criiKcis

'Ep!Joa. 'Ep!Jo<V 'Ep!Joa.ts

'Ep~Jocis

The dual and plural of 'Ep,.ijs mean statues of Hermes. Ot.her examples: 1J 'A87]v Athena (from 'A87Jva()ii-), 'YiJ earth ('Y<ii- or "(aii-) with no plural in Attic, .;, 'Yaij weasel ("(aeii-), .;, .oetfnoij nie ce ( cl.oe<j>toeii-), o'A1reijs .Apelles ('A1reeii-). 227 D. Hdt. has 1-'vat, p.vewv, wciis, 'YiJ and "f<wv, 'Ep,uijs, Bop?)s. 'Y?i (and "(aa), CTVKTJ, 'Epp.eliis 214 D. 2, Bop7Js. Hom. has

A81}val1},

SECOKD DECLENSIOX (o-STEMS)

SECOND DECJ,ENSION (sTgi\IS IN o)

53

228. 0 stems in the nmninative ad - to the stem in masculii1es and feminines; -v in neuters. The feminines, of which there are few, are declined like the masculines. ln the neuters, nominative, vocative, and accusative singular have the same form (in -o-v); in the plural these cases end in -a. 229.
TABLE OF THE UNION OF THE CASE ENDINGS WITH THE STEM VOWEL
SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL

Masc. and Fern.

Neuter Masc., Fem., and Neuter

Masc. aud Fe m.

Neuter

o-s o-v N.A.V. Nom. 0-L i "' (I)V ou (for o-()o) 0-LV G. D. Gen. '!' (for o-) Dat. o-s or o-o-( v) o-v Ace. ous (for o-vs) i V oc. 0-L o-v i a. Final -ot is treated as short (169). b. The rlat. sing. in -4' represents the union of the stem vowel -o and ai, the original case ending in the I. E. languages. Forrns in -ot, as ofKot at horne, may be locatives ( -o + i, the locative en ding).- The stem vowel o varies with , which a.prears in the vocative sing., and in 7raVOTJ!J-Ei (locative) in full force.N. A. V. dual -w is for I. E. ou. -The genitive pl. -wv is due to i.he union of -o + wv, wldch contracted to -wv in the earliest period of the language.- The neuter plural is probably the relie of a feminine collective ending in -ii, which was shortened to -f..

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

230. 231.

The dialects show varions forms.

SINGULAR

o t.,..,.os horse (17r7r0-)

0 :iv6pw1ros 1nan
( av8pw7ro-)

J oSos way
( ooo-)

To SO\pov gift
(owpo-)

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

t'ft''JTO-S
t'fMt"OlJ

li.v6p"''ll'o-s
C.v9p001rOU

686-s oSoil

tTr'JT''f>
t'II''II'OV

.v6p<i>'ll''f' Kv8pwrro-v

;,s''
oS6-v oS

~1T1TE

li.v6pwrre

SOl po-v S<l>pou S<l>p'f' SOl po-v 80\po-v

230 D. 1. Gen. sing.- -OLo, the original form, appears in Hom. 7roe!J-ow. By Joss of' (48) cornes -oo, which is sometimes read in Hom. (Al6'Aoo for Al6'Aov K 36). By contraction of oo cornes -ou found in Hom., Ionie, Milder Doric. oo yields "' in Aeolic and Seve rer Dorie (t1r1rw). 2. Dual.- -ouv in Hom. (t1r1rouv). 3. Dat. pl. --ot<Tt(v) Hom., Aeolic, Ionie. 4. Ace. pl. --ovs is from -ov-s (found in Cretan), that is, the accus. sing. +s. From -ovs cornes -ws Severer Doric, -o<s Aeolic 1 -os Cretan and in Dor. poetry. -ous is Hom., Ionie, and Milder Doric.

54

SECO!\D DlWLENSION (0-STEMS)

DUAL

~232

0 t1r1rOS hOi'Se (i1r1r0-)

O.vOpw1ros man (av/Jpw1ro-)

.v9pC:,11'(1) .v0pcf>1TOLV
PLURAL

..j oSos way

( ooo-)
68~

To Swpov gift
( wpo-)
SC:, p., Scf>pow

N.A.V. G.D.

t1r1t'~

t1r1TOLV

8o'Lv

N.ll. Gen. Dat. Ace.

t1MTOL
L11'1r'WV

Y1r1TOLS 1T1TOlJS

O.vOpw1roL .v9pcf>1TWV . v0pw1TOLS .vOpw'lT'OllS

o8o( oSwv oSos oSovs

Swpa. SC:, p., v Scf>pOLS Swpa.

Masculine : 6"fos ward, ofjp.os people, ol\os slave, Klvovos danger, ?ro<p.os war; a"fp6s field, 1rOTa.p.6s l'iver, apt8p.6s numbe?'. Feminine: Pfj<Tos island, 1}1rpos mainland; o( i]) rpoif>6s nurse. Neuter: gp"fov work, 1rnp6v wing, o'll'vov dinner. 232. Feminines. -a. See 197 for vu6s daughter-in-law; see 199 for vfjcros island (cp. 200 c), Afjl\os (the island of) Delos, K6ptv8os Corinth, if>TJ'YOS (acornbearing) oak, lip.'ll'<os vine. b. Some are properly adjectives used substantively : otal\aros (sei/. "fGrrra. sper-ch) dia lect, oL<ip.<rpos (sc il. "fpa.p.iJ.fJ li ne) dimneter, a.Vl\<ws ( scil. Oupi. dom) house-door, <TV"fK7JTOS (scil. {3oul\1} council) legislative body, gP7JfJ.OS and 1]7l'pos (scil. xwpi. C(mntry) desert and mainlan(l,. c. W ords for way : O<J6s and dll<uiJos way; and aiJ.a.~<r6s cmriage-1oad, arpa.11'6s .foot-path, which may be adjectival (b) with oii6s omitted. d. Varions other words: {3acra.vos touch-stone, f3lf3l\os boole, 'Ypa.vos c1ane, "fPa/Jos jaw, "flr.fos challe, oTos W?'iting-tablet, OOKOS beam, op6cros dew, KaiJ.VOS aven, KapOO'Il'OS lcneading-trough, K{3wros hest, KO'Il'pOS dung, 7JVOS wine-press, l\t/Jos stone (200 c), vocros disease, 'Il' l\lv/Jos brick, paf3os rod, crop6s coffin, <r7l'oo6s ashes, raif>pos trench, X7J6s coffer, 'fa!liJ.Os sand, 'ffjif>os pebble. 233. Vocative. -The nom inati ve (}6, is used instead of the voca-

tive.

&.3~cpo

brotlr retracts the accflnt (a3EcpE).

-oL<TL(v)

234. Dative Plural.- The ending rarely in Attic prose (Plato).

often appears in poetry,

a. In Old Attic inscriptions -o<s displaces -o<<r<(v) about 444 n.c.

CONTRACTED SUBSTANTIVES

235. Stems in w and oo are contracted according to 50, 51. the neuter becomes O. (56).

10a

in

235 D. Homeric and Ionie generally have the open f01ms. oivox6os winepo1!rer does not contract in Attic since it stands for olvoxoros.

238]

SECO~D

DELEXSIOX (o-ST EMS)

SINGULAR

55
,.o,
crTov bane

ovoils mind
(voo-)

o1repC1rous sailing around

( tr<p<tr oo-) ( tr<pltr OO~) ( tr<p<tr Mou) ( tr<pm b4J) ( tr<pltr oo-v) ( tr<pltr O)
DUAL

(ocruo-)
(ocrT~o-v) (ocrT~ou) (ocrT~4')
(&crr~o-v)
crTO-V

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc. N.A.V. G.D. N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

(POO-~)

voil-s

1TEpL'II'OUS 1TEpL'II'OU 1rEpL1r'I' 1TEpL1TOU11 '11'EpL1rOu

(vbou) vo ( P04J) V'l (vbo-v) voiJ-v

<rTO

crTqi
O"'TO'-V
bO"TOV

(v6e)
(v6w) (vootv)

VO'

(&crT~o-v)

vti>
voL v

( tr<pLtr Mw) ( tr<pLtr bOLV)

PLURAL

1TEpL'II'W 'II'EpL'II'OLV

(ocrTw)
(ocrT~o<v)

crTW
U'TO'LV

(voo<) (vowv)
(voot~)

voL

veil v
voLs
voils

( tr<pltr OOL) ( tr<p<tr Mw v) ( tr<pLtr bOL~)

(tr<pttrMov~)

1TEpL1reL 1TEpL'II'W11 1TEpL'II'OLS 1TEpL1rOUS

(ocrrla.)
(ocrT~wv)
(o<TT~OL~)

o-T.

O"Ti3v
crTots o-T.

(vbous)

(ocrTla.)

otro~

(.,-Mo~)

voyage, po~ (pbos) stream, r Ka.vov (Kavwv) basket.

236. Accent.- a. The nominative dual is irregularly oxytone: vw, dcrrw, not vw, crrw accordiug to 171, N. 2. b. Ka.vov (Kav<ov) IJasket receives its accent (not Kavouv) from that of the genitive and dative Ka.vo, Ka.vciJ. Cp. 2\JO c.

c. Compounds retain the accent on the syllable that bas it in the nominative .singnlar: gKtrou~ from gKtroos; gKtrou (not Ktro) from iKtrhou; (Ktrwv (not Ktrwv) from htrMwv. ATTIC DECLENSION
237. Some substantives ending in -wc; are placed under the Second Declension because they are derived from earlier o stems preceded by a long vowel (-wc; from -YJo>, 34). A few others have a consonant before -w. The vocative has no special form.

N. -This eclension is called "Attic" because the words in question generally show -ws in Attic and -os in the Koin dialect (p. 3, F).
238.
SI:SGUI.AR

o ve<ils
v?J6-s) V?JO) P?JciJ) V?J6-v)

temple
PLURAL

DUAL

Nom. ve<il-s (Ionie Gen. VE~ ( " Dat. VE~ ( " Ace. veOOv ( "

N. A.

VE~

(Ionie v?JiJ)

G. D. ve<jiv (

"

V?JOV)

Nmn. ve~ (Ionie v?Jol) Gen. veWv ( " v?}wv) Dat. ve<jis ( " V?JOS) Ace. veOOs ( " V?JOS)

238 D. Hom. bas v?J6s temple, ii.os people, Kaos cable, a.-yw6s hare, -yciows ister-in-law, 'A86ws, K6ws; Hdt. has ews, a.-y6s, Kos. Hom. and Ht. have

56

THIRD DECLENSION

[239

a. So o Xews people, o Mev.!Xews Menelaus, o Xa:yws hare. Observe that w is found in every form, and that it takes ' subscript in the dative of ail numbers where an ordinary o stem has ' b. 'I'here are no neuter substantives belonging to the Attic declension in standard classical literature ; but neuter adjectives (289) end in -wv. c. vews and most words of this declension owe their forms to transfer of quautity (34) or to shortening (39). 'l'hus, ><ws is from ..,6s (= Doric vii6s), vewv from PIJOv; vecp is from "lii' Xa')'ws is contracted from Xa')'wos. d. In the accusative singular sorne words end in -w or -wv, as Xa')'W or Xa')'wv hare. So o"AOws, 1] Klws, 1] T.!ws, 1] Kws, o Mivws. 1] ~ws dawn al ways bas ~w. 239. Accent. -a. 'l'he accent of the nominative is kept in all cases. MevlXews (163 a) retains the accent of the earlier Mev.!Xiios. b. 'l'he genitive and dative are oxytone when the final syllable is accented. N. -'l'he accentuation of the words of this declension is doubtful. Sorne of the ancients accented a')'ws, a')'wv, others a')'ws, Xa')'wv, etc.
THIRD DECLENSION

This declension includes stems ending in a consonant, in or a diphthong, and some in w and o, representing w and ot.
240.

t,

v,

N. - 'I'o determine whether a noun belongs to the third declension it is necessary 'in most cases to know the stem, which is usually fou nd by dropping -os of the genitive singular. Stems in , and v are classed under the consonant decleusion because neither of these vowels admits contraction with the case endings beginning with a vowel, herein being like a consonant.
FORMATION OF CASES: NOMINATIVE SINGULAR

241.

Masculine and feminine stems not ending in v, p, s and wr,

add s.
a. A labial( ... , (3, <P) + s becomes y; (97). b. A dental (r, o, 0) + s becomes <nr (98), which is reduced to s (107). c. A palatal (K, ')',x) or Kr+ s becomes ~ (97).

('l'be same changes occur in the dative plural.) "fDlf vulture ')'J7r-6s, Apa>f .A1ab Apa(3-os; KaK6r71s baseness KaKOT'T/T-os, lX ... ts hope 7rlo-os, 5pvs bird IJpvO-os; <fJa~ guard <j>vaK-os, p.ci.~rrr~ scourge p.ci.trr')'-os, trci.7rt"f~ trumpet trri7rt')'')'-os, /Jvv~ nal llvvx-os, vu~ night vvKr-6s ; iX-s salt X-6s, lxOvs jish lxO-os; Xl<j>iis elephant <Xlq,avr-os.
242. Masculine and feminine stems ending in v, p, and s reject s and lengthen a preceding vowel if short ( to 71, o to w).
alp.wv divinity oaip.ov-os, XELJJ.WV winter XEL!LWV-os, Xtp.i}v harbour hLJJ.lv-os, "EXX71 Greek "EXX71v-os ; pi}rwp orat01 pi}rop-os, i}p air fp-os, <j>wp thief <j>wp-os, i}ws, gen. i}os, dawn, whence Att. ~ws by 39. Hom. has ITerew-o, the original form of the_genitive, frorn Deuws. vew is from vewo out of "'oo.

249]
"P'~P7J'

THIRD DECLENSION

57
On p.~v

trireme (stem "P'7Jpeu-, 263 b), alws shame (stem alocr-, 266). see 259 end. For stems in es, nominative -os, see 263 c.

243. Masculine stems in ovT drop T (133) and lengthen o to w: ypwv old man ypovT-os, lwv lion >..ovT-o<;.

244. Neuters show the pure stem, from which final T and other consonants not standing at the end of a word (133) are dropped: ilpp.a chariot ilpJW.To<;, 1rpyp,a thing ...pfyp,aT-o<;, y&M mille y>..aKT-o<; (133 b).
245. Summary.-s is added to stems ending in a labial, dental, palatal, and in avr, evr, uvr; to some stems in v (as eis one v-6s, p.lJ..iis black p.D..av-os); to stems in eu, au, ou ; and to masc. and fem. stems in , and u. s is not added to most stems ending in v, nor to those in ovr, p, es, as, os, u (neut.), w(f), o(<).
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR

246. Masculines and feminines usually add a to stems ending in a consonant ; v to stems en ding in t or v.
')''lra, 6vux-a, {M<j>avr-a, 'Atp.b-a, p~rop-a, Movr-a; 'lro'At-v, lx06-v, {Jo-v from ... 6'At-s city, lx86-s jish, {Jo-s ox, cow. Stems in eu take a (275).

247. Barytone stems of two syllables ending in tr, drop the dental and add v.

,a, 8

usually

xap<s grace (stem xaptr-) xaptv, ltpts strife (lpt-) lfptv, 5pvs bird (opvO-) 5pvv. So elie'A'lr<s hopeful ( ee'A... <o-) eliex ... ,. (292). Oxyton es end in a : <X... t-a, u<j>pii')'a (u<J>piiyts seal). a. K'Aes key (K'Aet-), Old Att. K'A?]s, bas K'Av (late K'Aea), ace. pl. K'Aes (late Keas).

VOCATIVE SINGULAR

248.

The vocative of masculines and feminines is usually the pure

stem .
... 6'At ( ... 6'At-s city), {Jo (f3o-s ox, cow), "2wKpares ("2wKpar7Js). Stems in t and PT cannot retain final and r (133), hence Aprep.< from ApT<JLLS ('Apr<p.<-), 'Irai from 'lrO.s boy, gi1l ('lrat-), veiv< from veiv maiden (v<iv<o-); ')'pov from ')'pwv old man ('YepoPT-), ')'l')'av from ')'l')'iis giant ('Y<')'aPT-).

249. The vocative is the same as the nominative: a. In stems ending in a stop (16) consonant (except those in '" t, iO; PT in nouns): a; <j>u'Aa~ watchman. (Miis Ajax (Alavr-) is nom. and voc.) 243 D. Hdt. has owv tooth 66vr-os. Attic oovs has the infiection of a participle in -ous (307) .. 247 D. The ace. in a (xaptra, ltpta, 5pv8a) occurs in Hom., Hdt., and in Attic poetry. So KopuOa and Kopuv (K6pvs helrnet) in Hom. 249 D. Hom. has liva oh king as well as li va~ ( vaKr-); Aav from Alavr-. Dov'AvMfLi, AO.o&.p.ii (from stems in avr) are later forms due to analogy.

58

THJllD DECLENSION

[zso

b. In oxytone stems ending in a Jiquid and not taking s to form their nominative (242): ;:, 7rotp.i}v shepherd ( 'lrO<p.<v-); but vi}p rnan, 1rari}p jathe1 have IJ.vep, 1rarep (262). Barytones use the stem as the vocative : oap.ov, pijrop from oalp.wv divinity, pi}rwp orat01'. c. In ali participles.
DATIVE DUAL AND PLURAL

250.

The dative plural adds -en to the stem.

Apaifl C Apa{3-) "Apaif!<, p.&.<rrl~ (p.a<rT'Y-) p.a<rn~' q,v'Aa~ ( q,u'AaK-) </>u'Aa~' <rwp.a (<rwJLaT-) <TWJLa<rL (98), .1rls (1rto-) 1TL<TL (98), opvs (opvO) opv<rt (98), .</J. ( ll\<pavr-) .</J.<rt, 6-!Jp .( 61]p) 01]p<rl. a. Stems in vr drop vr and lengthen the preceding vowel ( 100) : 'Awv (~eovr-) .OV<Tt, 'Yl"/.S ( "/L"/UVT-) "/L"/.<Tt.

b. Stems in v drop v without Jengthening the preceding vowel (if short):

/ialp.wv ( oatp.ov-) oalp.o<rt, 'lrOtJLfJV ( 'lrOtp.ev-) 7rOLJLE<Tt, </JpfJv mi nd ( </Jp<v) </Jpe<rl.

N.- Strict! y v is not dropped, but since the stem of the dat. pl. is weak in form (25:3 a) the v stood originally between two consonants and should become a (85 b). 'l'hus, </Jpa<rl in Pindar is for </Jpg<r<. Attic q,pwl borrows its e from q,plves, q,pevwv, etc. So 'lrO<JL<r<, for 7rotp.a<r< from 7rotp.~<r<, becl),use of 7ro<p.ves, etc. c. p<r is not changed to pp (79 a).

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL

251. a. The en ding -as is produced by adding vs to the stam (v becoming a between two consonants by 85 b). 'l'hus </Jv'AaK-as is from </JuaK-~s. This -as may be added even to ' and v stems: Hom. 1r6'At-as, ZxOu-as, Hdt. 1rfJxe-as. Hom. 1r6'As is from 1r6'A<-vs (Cre tan). b. The nominative pl. masc. or fem. is sometimes used instead of the accusative pl. : rp<fJpe<s 264, 1r6'Am and 1rfJxm 268.
ACCENT, STEM FORMATION, QU ANTITY, GENDER

Accent.- Stems of one sy 1lable accent the case ending in the genitive and dative of allnumbers; and. -wv and -o<v take the circumfiex accent. Th us, cpI/J ~ein, cp>..ef3-6;, cp>..e,G-wv; 8~p wild beast, 8rJ?->, O'YJp-o:.v, 87Jp-wv; Op[~ hair, Tp<x->, Tp<x:7JV. 252.

a. Exceptions. The ending of the gen. dual and pl. is not accented in the case of o, 7] 1ras boy, gi1l, o lip.ws slave, o Ows ,iaclcal, o Tpws Trojan, 7] ocf.s toTch,
250 D. 1. Horn. has only -oLLv in the gen. and dat. dual. 2. In the dat. pl. Hom. has -<r< ({3e<r-<r<, li7ra<r-<r<), and in a few cases -e<r<, reduced from -e<rn ( v&.Kr-e<r<); -<r<r< occurs after vowels ('YPv-<r<r< ; for 'YP<r< ?) . -ea-<r< was added both to stems not ending in <r ( 1r6o-e<rn, {36-e<r<r<, IJ.vop-<<r<r<, i'-e<r<rl, 274 D.), and even to stems in <r (i7r-<<r<r<). Hom. has alBo 1ro<r<rl, 1rO<Tl; Pind. xaplre<r<r<, Op.<<r<r<. Tragedy has this -<<r<r< (KopuO-e<r<r<), and so Aeolic, and the Doric of Corinth.

255]
,. 0 cpws light, ro ovs ear.

THIRD DECLENSION

59

Thus, 1ra.l/lwv (but 'll'a.<ul), Tpww, t:Jrwv, etc. So tfJv being, 6vrwv (30G), b. A trisylla':>ic form, if contracted, does not show the accent on the case ending: {jp-os for lfa.p-os, {jp-< for lfa.p-<, from ,. lfa.p spring.

253. Variation of Stem Formation.- Many words of the third declension show traces of an original variation of stern that is due to the influence of a shifting accent which is seen in some of the cognate languages. In Greek this variation has often been obscured by the anal ogy of other forms. Th us 'll'a.ripwv, in comparison with Hom. 1ra.rpwv, Lat. pat1um, gets its from 1ra.ripEs. a. Variation of stem is seen in wv, ov (259); 'YJP, Ep, pa. (262); 'YJ<, Hr- (264); in stems in<, EL (270); v, w (270); Ev, 'YJV (278); o<, w (:l79), etc. Words in wv, 'YJ> show a middle form ov, EV, and a weak form in v (250 N.). b. Severa! words ending in p show a pmallel stem in T ; thus, vllwp VJater lla.r-os, {j1ra.p live1 ij1ra.r-os, cppi.p tank cppi.r-os (but poet. MJ.<.p VJ((e OJ.<a.pr-os ). The reason for this change is uncertain, but ar is derivee! from vr after a consonant (35 b) : vllvros, +wvros, cp. Lat. jecinu1is, nom. jecu1'. {j11'ap is probably derived from 1}11'apr (183). c. -a ros was transferred from such genitives as 6v6J.<aros, ij11'aros to other n0uter words: "f6va.ros from "fbvv knee, instead of "fOPf-o<, whence Hom. "fovv6s. cpws light, for cp&. os (stem cpa.0'-), bas taken on the r inflection ( cpw7-6s, tc.). d. Neuter stems in -Es show -os in the nominative. Cp. l!ros yeaJ..' (stem luu-) with Lat. vetus, veter-is (for vetes-is). 254. Variation of Quantity. -a. In poetry the quantity of 'in words in - may differ from that of prose ; as in tragedy 5pv'<s lii1d, Kovs dust, ocps se1:pent (in prose 5pvs, Kov<s, 5cp<s); so in Pind. lxOI!s (prose lx06s) fish. b. Kfipv~ herald, <Po'i:v!~ Phoenician, J.<aurr~ u:hip have long v and ' in the oblique cases except the dat. pL ( Kf,pvKos, <PolvK<, J.<aur"fa., etc.). cil\w71''YJ~ fox. bas in the gen. cil\w'II'<Kos, etc., by analogy to such words as 'II'O<J.I.~P, 7l'O<f.dvos (d.l\w11'-f,Kwv occurs in Ionie). 11'Vp jire bas 1ri!p6s, 1riJpl, etc. (285, 25). 255. Gender.- The gender of substantives of the third declension is frequently known by the last letters of the stem. 1. :M:asculine are stems ending in

a.

vT : 6oovs tooth ( 6/lovr-), llpci.Kwv serpent ( llpa.Kovr-). b. 1JT, "'T: 1r~'YJ< day-laiJourer (1rP'YJT-), 'Yil\ws laughter ("fEwr-). Exceptions. Stems in -T'YJT (2, b) : 1} rOf,s dreBs ( <uO'YJT-), ro cpws light ( cpwr-). c. v: nJ.<wv meadow (ELJ.<OP-). Exceptions. Fern.: stems in "fov, llo v (2, a), and <f>pf,v mi nd (eppe v~), is strength (tv-), pis nose (pv-), ciKTis my (ci.Krv-), "fl\wxis a1'1'0W-point ('Ywxv-), wllts birth-pang (wiiv-), ElKWP image (EiKov-), 7}wv S/!01e (-l]ov-), xOwv earth (x06v-), x<wv snow (xwv-), cil\KVwv halcyon (cil\Kvov-), etc., o, 1} xi,v goose ( X'YJP- ). d. p: Of,p wild beast ( O'YJp-), <f>wp thief ( cpwp-). Exceptions. Fem.: XElp hand (XEf>"'), Kf,pfate (K'YJp-), "faurf,p belly ("faO'TEf>"'); neut. : stems in ap ( 8, a), 1rp fi re ( 11'vp-), and the indeclinable 1ril\wp monste1, rhJ.<wp (Hom.) tolcen, etc. e. E\J: "fOPUS paTent, <f>ov<VS 1nU1'd1'1'.

60

THIRD DECLEN:SION: LABIAL STEMS

2. Feminine are stems ending in

a. -yov, Sov: ura"(wv drop (<Tra"(ov-), xeilwv swallow (xeoov-).
9: KaK6TTJS baseness (KaKOTTJT-), lfpts Stl'ije (lpto-), l'lr[S hope (7rLO-). Exceptions. Masc.: 'lrOVS foot (7roo-), , 17 opvs bird (opvO-). c. , u with nom. in -ts, -vs : 7roH city, l<TXD-s strength. Exceptions. Masc. : l')(fn-s se1pent, i!x-s viper, 6px-s testicle; f3orpv-s cluster b.
1"1)'1', l),

of grapes, lxO-s fish, p.-s mottse, vhv-s corpse, <Tnfxv-s em of corn, 71'eKv-s axe, 'lrijxv-s jore-arm; and o, .;, <T-s or -s swine. d. o: 1Jxw echo, 'lre<Ow persuasion.

3. N euter are stems ending in

a. a.T, a.p: 7rp."(p.a thing (7rpa"(p.ar-), vKrap nectar (veKrap-). But >f&.p starling. c. ,
b. a.s, ES (with nom. in -os): Kpas jtesh (Kpea<T-) 1 "(vos 1ace ('Yeve<T-). u with nom. in -<,-v: <Tlva'lr< mustard, il<Trv city.
N.- No stem ending in
'Ir,

{3,

q, or

K,

'Y,

x is neuter.
1

256. STEMS IN A LABIAL

('rr, fJ, cp)

SINGULAR

Olt IN A PALATAL

(IC, "f, X)

o At9to>Jt
(Al8wir-)

ft cf>~"'
( </>{3-)

;,

cf>v~a.~

( </>vaK-)

ft <J>a~a.-v~ ( </>aa'Y"(-)
phalanx
cf>a~a.-y~
cf>a~a.-y-y-os

ft a.~~ ft &pt~ (al"(-) ( rp<x-, 125 f)

Ethiopian
Nom. Gen. Dat. .Ace. .Voc. At9Co>Jt At9Co1!'-os At9CO'IH At&Co1r-a. At9Co>Jt

vein
cf>~"'
cf>~f3-6s

watchman
cJ>ti~a.~ cf>.J~a.K-OS
<f>v~a.K-L <f>.J~a.K-a.

go at
a.~~

hair
OpC~ '~'Px-Os

<f>}..f3-C cf>f3-a. <f>>Jt

cf>O.}..a.'Y'Y- cf>D.}..a.-y-y-a.
cf>D.}..a.-y~

a.t-y-os a.t-y-( a.t-y-a.

a.t~

TPLX-( .,.pc x-a.

&pC~

cf>.J~a.~

DUAL

N.A.V. At9(o1!'-F At9L011'-0W G.D.

cf>~f3-

cf>v~a.K-E cf>u~6.K-OLV

<f>ef3-o'Lv

cf>O.~a.'Y'Y-E cf>a..'Y'YOL v

a.t-y- a.!-y-o'Lv

TPLX-E TPx-o'Lv

PLURAL

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

At9Co'IT-ES At9LO'IT-WV At9(o ljtL(v) At8Co1r-a.s

cf>f3-s cf>f3-wv cf>e>Jtt(v) cf>f3-a.s

cf>vO.KES cf>u6.K-ulV <f>va. ~cv) <f>tia.K-a.s

cf>D.a.n-s <f>a.O.-y-y-wv cf>O.a.-y ~(v) <f>Ma.-y-y-a.s

a.t-y-es a.!-y-O>v a.!t((v) a.t-y-a.s

TPLX-ES TPLXWV
9pL~((v)

.,.ptx-a.s

Masculine: Kw'f thie.f (Kw'lr- ), 'Y'f vulture ( 'Yii71'-), Apa'f .Arab (' Apaf3-), Owpa~ breastplate (8wpaK-), 6vv~ na il ( ovvx-). Feminine: K'ip.a~ ladder (Kp.aK-), p.<Tr!~ whip (p.a<TT'Y-, 254 b), <T7rt')'~ trumpet (<Ta'lr<'Y'Y), Karf}t'f upper story (KaT7J<</>- ).

zsB]

TI-lllW DECLENSION: DENTAL STEMS

STEMS IN A DENTAL

61

(T, , 8)

257.

A.

MASCULINES AND FEMININES

S!NGULAR

9f)s
(O'YJT-)

ij hCs
(?rLO-)

ij xcips
(xap<r-)

ij

lpv~s

( opviO-)

-yC-yiis ( ')'L')'avr-)

oypwv ( -yepovr-)
old rnan
ypwv oypOVTOS ypovT-L oypovT-a. ypov

serf

hope
-rr(s -rrLS-os -rrLS- -rri8-a. -rr(

g1ace
xcips xcipLTOS xcipLTL xcipw xcip
DUAL

bird
lpv~s lpv~6-os

gia nt
yC-yiis y(oya.VTOS oy(ya.VTL y(ya.VT-0. y(ya.v

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc. N.A.V. G.D. N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

9f)s 9'JTOS 6']T-L 6ijT-O. 6f)s

lpv~6-

()pviv
lpv~

6ijTE 6'JTOLV

-rrL8-E -rrLS-ow

xnpLTE xa.pLTOW
PLRAL

lpv~6-E

pvi6-ov
lpv~6-Es

y(ya.VT-E oyoynVTOW

ypovT-E YEPOVTOLV

6ijTES 6'JTWV 6tjcrC( v) 6ijTO.S

-rrL8-Es -rrCS-wv -rr(cr(v) -rrLS-a.s

xcipLTES XO.PLTWV xcipcr(v) xcipLTO.S

pvi6-wv
lpv~cr( v) lpv;:6-a.s

y(ya.VTES yynVT-WV yiyiicr(v) ylya.vr-a.s

oypOVTES YEPOVTWV ypOUCTL (V) ypovT-a.s

Masculine: -y/.ws laughte1 ('YEWr-), l</J.s elephant ( (e</Javr-), wv lion (EOVT-), olios tooth ( OOOVT-), voc. olios. Feminine: l~JOf,s clothing ( IJ0'Y}r-), fp<s strife (fp<o-), ci~Y?ris shield ( aiJ?r<o-), 1rarpis jathe1land (?rarp<o-), K6pvs helrnet ~KopvO-). a. In ?rous foot, Doric 1rchs (stem ?roli-) ov is irregular.
258.
B

NEUTERS WITH STEMS IN ,. AND IN O:T VARYING WITH a.s

SINGULAR

crlp.a. body (IYWf-LrJ.T-)

1]'-rra.p live1 ( i}?rar) Tf-rra.p

1]1T'U.T-OS
111TQ.T-L

Tpa.s portent ( upar-) Tpa.s

TpO.T-OS

Kpa.s horn (Kepar-, Keparr-) Kpa.s Kp:T-OS

KpiiT-L

N.A. V. crlp.a. Geu. CTWfLO.T-OS Dat. <r~JlO.'T-L

(Kpa-os)

Kpws

Tpa.T-L

(Kpa.-)

Kpa..

257 D. xpchs skin (xpwr-) and soJJJe other words often show a stem with no r. Thus, Hom. xpo6s, xpot (also Hdt. ), xp6a, and also, but rarely, xpwr6s; xpwra. Hom. has lop<J, -yCfJ, ~P'I' for Att. lopwn (lopchs sweat), -yt.wn (-y<iws laughte~), gpwn (gpws love). Hom. lias also ace. llipw, -y<it.w (or -yt.wv), gpov (from gpos). Sorne stems in-t/5 are generally, stems in Ionie, Doric, and Aeolic: 8ns, 8nos (but 8noos e 30), IIapLs, IlapLOs. 258 D. 'J'he other dialects rarely show the r forms. Hom. has rpas, rpaa (reipa), npawv, repaEIJIJL, Kpas, Kpaos, Kp<u, Kpa, KEpawv, Kpa.IYL and KepaEIJIJL.

62
B.

THIRD DECLENSION: DENTAL STEMS

NEUTERS WITH STEMS IN T AND IN iiT VARYING WITH a.sConcluded
DUAL

crOifJ.a. body (crwp.ar-)

..j''ll'a.p liver ( i)7rar-)

T)1t'O..T-E

Tpa.s portent (npar-)

Tpa.T-E

Kpa.s horn ( KEpiir-, K<pacr-)

KpfiT-E

N.A.V. o-00p.a.T-E G.D. O"'WJ.LciT-OLV N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

a-Wp.o.T-0. crw p.O.T-W v cr6.fJ.a.cr( v) cr6.p.a.T-a.

J1i6.T-OLV

Tep6.T-oa.v
PLURAL

KEpih-ow

(Kpa-e) Kpii ( KEpa-OLV) KEp<jiv

1\'II'O.T-0.
f}1r6.T-WV

Tpa.T-0.

1\'II'O.O"L( V) 1\'II'O.T-0.

TEpclT-WV Tpa.o-L( v) Tpa.T-0.

KpiT-0. (dpa-a) Kpii KEpih-wv (K<pci.-wv) K<pwv Kpiio-L(v) KpiT-0. (Kipa-a) Kpii

5vop.a na me ( ovop.ar-), crrbp.a mouth ( crrop.ar ) , p.{l\t ho ney (p.eXtr-), ')'ci.Xa milk ( -yaaKr-, 133 b), <j>ws light ( q,wr-), Kfjp hemt (for K1Jpo-, 1:38 b ).

a. Stems in as (264) drop cr before the endings and contract ao, aw to w, and aa to ii.. b. dpas, meaning wing of an a1my, i;; declined from the stem Kepacr- (.,.1 Kpws in single file); in the meaning horn, from the stem K<piir-. c. For the inflection fj7rap, i)7rar-os, see 253 b. Of like inflection are li"I\EL<j>ap fat, <j>pii.p cistern, 0"1\<ap bait, and poetic 'ljp.ap day, eoap food, .,.,pap end. d. ripas, Kpas form tbeir nominative from a stem in s. So, too, ,.pas end ,.par-os, <j>ws light (contracted from <j>ci.os) <j>wr-6s (253 c).

259.

STEMS IN A LIQUID

(, p) OR A NASAL (v).

SINGULAR

OOfJp
( 81JfJ-)

o pf)Tw'p
(p1Jrop-)

Tj pis
(pv-)

TJ)'EfJ.6.V ( i)')'Ep.ov-)

.)I6.V (-ywv-)

'II'OLJ.LTJV ( 11'0Lp.V)

wild beast
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.
91Jp 91Jp-6s 91Jp-t 9ijp-a. 9fJp

orator
pf)Twp pf)Top-os pfjTOpL pfjTop-a. pijTop

no se
pts piv-6s piv-( {>tv-a. pts

leader
TJ)'EfJ.6.V TJ)'p.6v-os TJ)'Efl-OV-L TJ)'Ep.6v-a. TJ)'Ep.ti>v

contest
O:ydw .)'WV-OS .)'WV-L .)lOi V-a.
.:y~v

shepherd
'II'OLfloTJV 'II'OLfloV-OS
'JTOLJ.LV-L

'II'OLp.v-a. 'II'OLflofJV

I-I dt. base for a before a vowel (cp. 264 D. 3) in ripws, rpea (also rparas, rpara), KpEDs, KpEL, dpm, Kepwv. Hom. has 11'<pas .,..tparos for 11'pas 7rpaTos. :From cpci.os ( <j>ows ), whence <j>ws, he has dat. <j>ci.EL, pl. <j>d<a. q,ci.os is used in tragedy. 259 D. Late Greek shows o"l\<f>tv, ptv, IJiv shore (Hom. ets). ~"1\p.tvs worm in Hippocrates has its v from the oblique cases. Hom. has f}pt, f}ipa from !if}p .ai1; from Kpoviwv Hom. has Kpovtwvos and Kpoviovos. p.aKaps is Doric for p.ci.Kiip happy. Pind. has <j>pacrl (250 N.). Ionie p.els, Doric p.f}s are from !-'vs for p.1Jvs (40, 37 D. 1, 2). Aeolic gen. p.fjvvos is from p.1Jv<r-os.

:z6z]

TllflW

DECLT~~SIO~:

LIQUID STE:\IS
A NASAL

63

STEMS IN A LIQUID

(:>.., p) oa
DUAL

(v)- Ooncluded
:yWv
( -ywv-)

b 9f]p
(07Jp-)

0 frfJTwp
(p7Jrop-)

i) pi:s
(p.v-)

i)y<fLWV
( +r;ep.ov-)

'II'OLfLfJV
( 1/"0Lp.EV-)

wild beast
N. A. V. 9ijp-e 91]p-otv G.D.

orator
pf]Top-E P1JTOp-OLV

nose
ptv-e
prv-oiv
PLURAL

leader
i))'EJLOV-E i))'Ep.OV-OLV

contest
O.yiiw-e J.ywv-OLV

shepherd
1T'OLIJ-V""'E

'II'OLp.)'-OLV

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

9fjp-ES 91Jp-Olv 91Jp-cr(( v) 9ijp-a.s

pf)Top-ES p1]T6p-cw pf]Top-crL (v) Pf]Top-a.s

ptv-s
pr.v-Wv p:cr(( v)

~)'Ep.OV-ES ~)'EJLO'V-WV ~)'Ep.OCT L (V)

~y< p.o v-a.;

ptv-a.s

O.ywv-s ci:ycv-(r)V O.-yO>cr( v) O.yO>v-a.s

'II'OLJLV-ES
1rOLJLV-COV

'II'OLp.CTL( V)
'lrOLp.v-o.s

alOf}p upper air ( alOep-), o Kpirf}p rnixing bowl ( Kpar7Jp-), o .pwp thiej ( if>wp-), ro vKrap nectar (v<KTap-), oi~.pts dolphin (oe~if>lv-), "E7JV GJeek ('E7Jv-)' o oalp.wv divinity (oacp.ov-), voc. oap.ov, 24!l b. The only stem iso f.s salt (pl. grains of salt); i} f.s (poetic) means sea. o p.f}v rnonth was originally a sigma stem (p.7JVIJ"-, cp. 11Mnsis).

260. Accusative Sing.- 'A1row and IIoiJ"ELow are found as weil as 'A7roThe shorter forms are regular in inscriptions, and occur especially in expressions of swearing after vi) r6v, p.. r6v (15!J6 b).
wva, IIoiJ"Ho wva.

26l.. Vocative.- IJ"wrf}p p1eseTve1, 'A1rowv, IToiJ"Howv (from IToiJ"HO!wv, -ciwv, . -arwv) have voc. IJ"wrep, A1roov, IToiJ"ELoov with recessive accent. Recessive accent also occurs in compound proper nam es in -wv; as A -yap.p.vwv, 'A-yap.ep.vov; Arop.owv, Ar6p.eoov ; if>cf}p.wv, if>cMjp.ov ; but not in th ose in -,Ppwv (E9<j>pov). AaKeoalp.wv has AaKeoap.ov.

STEMS IN
-np middle, -rp weak.

V ARYING WITH

262. Severa! words in -r7Jp show three forms of stem gradation : -r7Jp strong, p between consonants becomes pa (35 b). The vocative has recessive accent. vf}p rnan has the weak form in p even before vowels; between v and p, o is inserted by 130.

260 D. KVK<ruv potion usually has KVK<w for KVK<wva. 262 D. Poetry often has 1rarpos, 1rart!pc, p.7Jrpos, p.7Jrpc, etc. Poetical are 1rarpwv; Ov-yarpc, ()u-yarpa, ()u-yarpes, Ov-yarpwv, Ov-yarp<IJ"IJ"<, ()-yarpas, -yaiJ"Tpos, etc. ; and vpos, vpt, vpa, vpes, vpwv, vpas ali with long a. Hom. bas N.vop<<IIJ"< and vopaiJ"c (with -aiJ"c only in this word), !1f}p.7Jrpos and /17Jp.fJrepos.

64

TilliW DECLEXSION: LJQUID STEMS

SJNGULAR

[263

0 '11"11Tf)p
('Tra.Tep-)

~ p.fJT'JP

~ 9U)'0.T1JP

o .vf]p
( v<p- or v(o)p-)

(p:qnp-)

( Ou'fa.T<p-)

jathe1 Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

'11"11Tf]p .,....,.p-6s '11"11Tp-( '11"11Tp-11 p

rnother
P.fJ'~"'lP

daughter
.9"'10..,.1Jp 9uyaTp-6s 9U)'a.Tp-C Ouya.Tp-11 Ovya.,.p
DUAL

rnan
.vf)p .vSp-6s .v!lp-( ii.vSp-a. ii.vEp

....a.....

P.'JTp-os P.'JTp-( fL1]'1'p-a. p.ijT<p

N.A.V. G. D.

'11"11Tp-E
'11"11Tp-o~v

P.'JTp-E p.1]'1'p-OLV
PLURAL

OuyaTp-E Ouya.Tp-ow

ii.v!lp-E .vSp-otv

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

'II"CtTp-ES
orra.-rp-"'v

'11"11Tp0.-cn (v)
'7rO.Tp-a.s

p.1]'1'p-ES p.1]'1'p-wv P.'J'I'pcl-<rL( v)

P.'l'~'p-a.s

Ouya.Tp-Es OuyaTp-wv 9uya.Tp0.-cn (v) 9uya.Tp-a.s

l.v!lp-ES .vSp-c\lv .vSpci-cn( v) l.vSp-as

a. The accent in the weak forms of p.-fJr'l}p, Ou'fT'IJP in the gen. and dat. sing. follows that of 'TI"a.rp6s, 'TI"a.rpl. b. 'fa.tn-fJp belly, bas 'fa.o'rp6s, etc. 'IJp.-fJr'IJp is inflected !1-f,p.'l}rpos, !1-fJp.'IJrp<,
!11Jp'IJ7pa., -fJJL'IJ1'p.

c.

~rrf,p

star bas gen.

~rrpos,

dat. <rrp<, dat. pl.

~rrpa<rt.

STEMS IN SIGMA

(ES',

a~, oc;)

263. Stems in sigma are contracted where u falls out between the vowel of the stem and the vowel of the ending (120). Thus, yvos race, gen. yEvE(u)-os yvous, dat. yEvE(u)-t yvn, cp. Lat. genus gener-is (for genes-is), gener-1:. a. The masculine and feminine accusative plural, when it is contracted, borrows the form of the contracted nominative plural. -m is not derived from -<a.s. In the dative plural the union of " of the stern and " of the ending produces <r<r, which is reduced to "without lengthening the preceding vowel (107). b. Masculine stems in <s with the nominative in -'l}s are proper nam es ; the feminine rpt-fJp'IJs t1irerne is an adjective used substantively (properly, t1'iply fitted; .;, rpt-fJp'IJS (va.s) 'ship with three banks of oars '). c. Neuters with stems in <s have -os in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular; neuter's with stems in a.s have -a.s in these cases. d. Sorne stems in a.s have also a stem in a.r or ir (258).

THIRD
264.
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

DECLENSIO~:

SIG~IA

STEMS

65
Demosthenes

o ~c.>KpUT'JS
("I-wKprir<-os) ("I-wKprir<-<) ("I-wKprir<-a.)

Socrates

o .6.tjJLOcr9V'I)s
( I17]J10(]"(}ve-os) ( /17JJ10(]"(}ve-<)

("I-wKpa.T(]"-)
~c.>KpUT'I)S ~c.>KpUTOUS ~c.>KpUTEL ~c.>KpUT'I)

( !17}j10(]"(}fp(y-)

~<i>KpO.TES

..6.tjJLO<r9V'I)S .6.tjJLO<r9vous ..6.TJJLO<r9vn (117JJ.~-MIJve-a.) ..6.T)JLO<r9Vtj .6.'1)JLcicr9eves

SINGULAR

-ij TpL'I]ptjS
( rp<7Jpw-)

orO yvos
( ')'P(]"-)

'l'o ypa.s
( -yepa.(]"-)

t1'ireme
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.
N. A. V. G. D.
TpL'I]p'I)S ( Tptf}p<-os) TpL'I]pous ( Tptf}pe-t) TpL'I]pn ( rptf}pe-a.) TpL'I]P'I) TpLijpEs

race
yvos ( -yve-os) yvous ('Y ev<-<) yvn yvos yvos
DUAL

prize
( -ypa.-os) ( ')'pa.-t)

ypa.s ypc.>s ypa.L ypa.s ypa.s

(rptf}pe-e) TpL'I]pn (rpt7Jp-otv) TpLi]pow

yvn ( ')'<Pf-DLP) yevOLV

( -yve-e)
PLURAL

( -ypa.-e) ypii ( -yepci-otv) yep~v

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

( rptf}pe-es) TpL'I]pns ( rpt7Jp-wv) TpL'I]pc.>V ( rptf}p(]"-(]"L) TpL'I]pE<rL( V)

TpL'I]pns

( ')'ve-a.) (-yev-wv) ( ')'V-e(]"-tH) ( -yve-a)

yV'I) yevwv yvecrL( v) yVTJ

(-y!pa-a.) ( -yepri-wv) (-ypa.CT-(]"<) (-ypa-a)

ypii yepwv ypa.crL(v) ypii

l:.to-yv7JS Diogenes, 'J;,.?roKpcir7Js Hippocrates. Neuters: (ros yea1, epos width, ~l<j>os sword, rxos wall, -yijpas old age, Kpas jtesh (for Kpa.l ho1n see 258).

a. Proper names in -'f}s have recessive accent in the vocative.

b. l'roper nam es in --yv7Js, -Kprir7Js, -J.~-P7Js, -<j>riv'f}s, etc., may have an accus. in -7JP derived from the first declension. Th us, "I-wKprirTJ, 'Apt(]"ro<J>civ7Jv, like 'Arpelo7Jv (222, 282 N. ). But names in -Kijs (265) have only -<ii. . Proper names in -7Js often show -<Os, -ea in the lyric parts of tragedy. d. Neuters in -os often show open forms (especially -ewv) in Attic poetry. -ewv is frequent in Xenophon. e. rp<f}po<v and rp<i}pwv have irregular accent by analogy to the other forms. f. A preceding p does not prevent the contraction of ea to 7), as p7J from To 5pos mountain (cp. 31. 1). g. The dat. sing. of as stems is properly -a< ; but -q. is often written on the authority of the ancient grammarians. This q. may possibly be due to the analogy of q. in ii stems.

264 D. 1. Hom. uses the open or the closed forms according to convenience.
-evs occurs in the gen. of a few words in -o1 (f3eeus); -ewv is often a monosyiGRBEK GRAM.

-5

66

THUW DECLE.NSION: STEMS IN

0~,

O(F)

265. when -eu- of the stem is preceded by e, the forms are iuflected as folJows: r Olos jear (oEEu-), IIep<Kf)s from IIep<K<i?Js Pericles (Ilep<Kwr-):

Nom. Geu. Dat. Ace. Voc.

(Me-os)

(o-<)

lios liovs liet lios lios

(IIep<K?JS)

(IIep<K-os)
( IIep<K;\6e-<) ( IIep<K-a) (IIeplKm)

IIepLK>..ijs IIepK>-ovs IIepLK>..et IIepLK>..ii Ilep(K>..ets

So 'HpaKf)s Hmacles, :Zo</>oKf)s Sophocles. a. After e, ea contracts to ii (56). On the contraction of -EEos, see 55.

b. Mos is uncontracted because the form was originally oe_:os (58).

STEMS IN or;

266. ~ a18<bo; shame is the only os stem in Attic. It is inflected in the singular only. Nom. a.tlici>s, Gen. a.tlioils (a186-os), Dat. a.t8ot (a1o-L), Ace. a.t8w (a186-a), Voc. a.t8ci>s.
STEMS IN

w(p)

267. Stems in (~F have lost vau and appear as w stems. This w contracts with the case endings in the dative and accusative singular and in the nominative and accusative plural. Stems in wp are masculine.

Jable (60), as is the accus. sing. and pl. -ta from nom. -?Js or -os. Hdt. has open -tas, -ea, -EEs (?), -ta. In the dat. pl. Hom. has fUetrtr<, {3etr<, and f3eetrtr< (250 D. 2) from {3os missile. 2. Stems in as are gene1:ally uncontracted in Hom. ('YfJpaos, 'YfJpa), but we find -a< in the dat. sing., Kpewv and Kpe<wv in the geu. pl. ln the nom. and ace. pl. ais short ('Ypf.), and this is sometimes the case even in Attic poetry (Kpf.). The explanation is obscure ('Ypf. does not stand for 'Ypa'). Hom. has obraa-tr< and OE7rcLEtrtrL (of'lr<lS CUp), 3. In Hom. and Hdt. severa! words in -as show e for a before a vowel (cp. opw in Hdt. for opciw ). Hom. : oil/Jas g!'OUnd, o~l!eos, o~l!e and o~/Je<; Kwas jleece, K<l!ea, K<l!ea-<; Hdt.: '"fpas, '"fpeos, but Kpas, Kpws, Kpewv. InAttic poetry: {3pras image, f3pheos, f3pre<, etc. Cp. 258 D. 265 D. Hom. has Kla (for Ka' ?), and from -Kf)s: -flos, -f)<; Hdt. : -los (for -hos), -, -ef.. For -f)os, -f)a the open-<eos, -<ea may be read. Attic poetry often ~ bas the open forms -l?Js ( also in prose inscrip.), -let, -EEs. 266 D. Hom. and Ion. i] T]<l!s dawn (T]oa--) is infiected like all!<l!s. For all!os, T]w we may read ali! bos, 1)6a and some other open forms in Hom. The Attic form ~ws is declined according to 288; but the accus. is ~w (238 d). Hom. has !opba front lop<l!s sweat (usually ar stem). Cp. 257 D. 267 D. Hom. has fipwi (for fip'f' read i]pwi'), ijpwa (or fipw'), fipwes -ljpwas, Mtvwa and Mivw. Hdt. has the geu. l\1tvw and Mtvwos, the ace. 1rarpwv, ijpwv, but p.f]rpwa.

THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN I AND Y

SINGULAR DUAL PLURAl,

67

Nom. 1\p<o~s hero

Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc.

;jpw-os ;jpw- ( usually iiP'l') 1\pw-a. (usually ipw) 1\pws

N. A. G. D.

v.

1\p<o~E

N. V. iP"'<S (rarely iP"'s)

ijpw-oLV

Gen. 1jp4-wv Dat. ;jpwcn(v) Ace. ipw-a.s (rarely ipws)

TpcfJs Trojan (252 a), 1ra-rpws jather's brot/ter, wfrrpws mother's b1other, p,<bs slave (poetic, cp. 25ll a).

a. Forms of the Attic second declension (237) are gen. ijpw, Mtvw, ace. ijpwv; dual fiP'I' (on an inscription).
STEMS IN
L

AND u

268. Most stems in ' and some stems in v show the pure stem vowel only in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular. In the other cases they show an in place of ' and v, and -ws instead of -os in the genitive singular. Contraction takes place when this E stands before ' ,, or a of the case ending.
SINGULAR

J 1t'OLS city
(7r0t)
Nom.

o.,.~xvs jorearm
( 1r'1JXU-)

To l.a-Tv town 1j crs sow (au-ru-) (uv-) cr-s o-v-os 0"\1-t o--v o-

otxe.is fish
(ix Ou-)

Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc.

"ll"o-s i.O'"Tl> 11'~XliS 11'0EWS 0.0"'1"E-WS "II"TJXEWS (1roX-) 1I'OEL (1r1)xe-t) 11'TJXEL ( i.un-) 0.0"'1"E&. "II"OLV O"''TU 11'~xv-v 1I'OL O.crT\J "~~"~X"
DUAL

tx&jj-s tx&t'i-os tx&t'i-i:

txe.i-v
txt.i

N.A.V. (1r6Xe-e) 1I'O<L (1r1Jx) "~~"TJXEL (aun-e) li.crTEL G. D. "II"O-oLv 11'TJXOLV 6.CTTOLV
PLURAL

o-v-E o-v-otv

tx&t'i- txeu-ow

RV. (1r6Xe-es) "II"ws (7r'>Jxe-es)1rTJX"S (i.un-a) ilcrTTJ o-v-<s Gen. 11'o<-wv ' "~~"TJX<-wv lcrTE-wv o-v-.Ov Dat. 11'oe-cr(v) "~~"TJX<cr(v) lcrT<o-(v) crv-o-C(v) Ac. 11'ous "~~"TJX<Ls (i.un-a) lcrTTJ o-s

tx9v-Es tx9t'i-wv tx9v-cr(v) tx6s

268 D. 1. stems. a. Doric, Aeoiic, and New Ionie retain the ' stem without variation in ali cases: 7rO, 1r6Xws, 1r6X (from 1ro<<) and rarely 1r6EL in Rdt., ?rotv, 7rOt, 7r!tes, 1roXlw~, ?roXcr, 1r61 -om ?rotvs (Cretan), and 1r6Xtas.

68

THIRD DECLENSION: STJ<:MS IN I AND Y

269. Stems in and " are of two kinds : 1. a. Stems in ,, with genitive in -tws, as (masc.) p.avns seer, tx<s viper; (fem.)
7r0h<S

City,

7rOl7J11<S

poetry,

OUVap.tS

power,

<TTC<T<S

faction,

J{Jp<S

OUtrage.

Neuter nominatives in-< are not used in cla.ssical prose. b. Stems in ' with genitive in -ws, as Kis weevil, gen. Ki-os, dat. Ki-l; and so in proper names in -<s, as Au-yap.<s Lygdamis, gen. Av-ylicp,ws. 2. a. Stems in v, with genitive in -vos; as (masc.) p,fJs mouse, (36Tpvs cluster of grapes, lxOvs fish; (fern.) ops oak, cppvs eyebrow, l11xvs force. b. Stems in v, with genitive in -ews: (masc.) 1rf}xvs jorearm, 7TeKvs mte; (neut.) li<TTU town. N. 1.- In the nom., ace., and voc. sing. barytone stems in v have slwrt v ; oxytone substantives (usually) and monosyllables.have ii; and monosyllables circumf!ex the ii ( <Ts, <Tv, <Tv). N. 2.- 1} ~'YX'Avs eel follows lxOs in the singular (-yx'Au-os, etc.), but 1r7}xus in the plural ( i-yxl'Am, etc.). But this does not hold for Aristotle. 270. Stems in ' and v vary with stronger stems, of which in the cases other than nom., ace., and voc. sing. is a survivaL Thus: a. ' v, as in 7rO<-s, 1r?jxu-s. b . ,, ev, which before vowels ]ost their' and v (43), as in 7ro'A)-<, 1ro'Ae(~ )-ts, 7T7JX(J~)-es; which con tract to 7rD'AE<, 1r6'Am, 7rTJXLS. c. There is also a stem in "'' as in Hom. 7rDrJ-os (268 D. 1, c), whence 1r6'Ae-ws. N. 1. -1r6'Ae-os in Attic poetry for the sake of the metre is due to the analogy of u stems with gen. in -E-Os ( fJo-a., 297 ). Hom. 'TrTJXE-os is the regular form (from "lr7JX(J~)-os). Attic 'TrTJX-ws follows 7rOews. 7rO<-11< and 'TT'TJXE-11< for 7rO<-<T< and m7xv-11t are due to the anal ogy of forms from stems in EL, w ( 1r6'Ae-wv, 7rTJX-wv, etc.). N. 2. -The dual 1ro'Aee occurs in some Mss. 271. Accent. -Final -ws of the genitive singular does not prevent the acute from standing on th('l antepenult (163 a). Thus 1ro'Ae-ws, 7rfJx-ws, li11n-ws. "lro'Ae-ws retains the accent of the earlier 'TT'o'An-os, which, by transference of quantity (34), became 1r6'Ae-ws. The accent of the gen. pl. follows that of the gen. sing.
lxOs

272. Accusative plural. - 1r6Xm, 7rTJXELS are borrowed from the nominative. is from lxOuv-s. lxOuas occurs in late Greek. Cp. 261 a.

b. Hom. has 7rOLS, 'lT'Ows, ?ro'Ai, 1rOE< or -<i' (for which some read 7T'Oi, as ~<ov; is correct) and 7rT6'Ae, 7T'6\.tv, 1r6'A,; pl. 1r6'Ates, 1ro'Aiwv, 1rOE<T' (some read instead 7rD<I1<) or 7T'o'Alel111< (260 D. 2) i?rc'At<<T<v, 1r6'Ais or 1r6'Aw.s ( 1ro'Am appears in sorne texts). c. Hom. has also forms with '1): 'TT'O'I)os, 7rO7JL, ,f6'A'I)es, 7rO'I)as. 2. " stems. a. Ionie, Doric, and Aeolic have the open forms 7rTJXs, li<Tn, (J.<TTea; in the gen. sing. -os, never -ws ( 7rTJX<os, li.<TTeos ). In the dat. sing. of words of more than one syllable Hom. has -v or -v<, as v.!Kv< (vKvs c01pse), but Hdt. does not show -v<. b. The geu. pl. has the regular accent (7r7!Xwv, <iiTTwv). On the dat. 7r<'AKE<T<T<, vKv<T<T<, 1rlrv1111< (sorne woul<'l read vh11,, 7rlTii11<), PEK1111<, see 250 D. 2. Hom. has accus. lxOs and lxOuas, Hdt. has lxO"as very rarely.
1r611e

Z75]

THilW DECLENSIOX: STEMS IN EY, AY, OY

69

273. Contraction. -lxO (once) for lx Ove and lxOs for lx Oves occur in comedy. lx!J is not a legitimate contraction, as u cannot contract with e (51 c). lx!Js (for lxOves) is the accus. form used as the nom. (251 b). 274. ots sheep is declined as follows : os, ol-6s, ol-l, o-v, o; dual, ol-e, ol-ov ; pl. o-<s, ol-wv, ol-l, ol-s. Here the stem is oi, representing Of', which is properly an ' stem : Of's, Lat. ovi-s. 275.
STEMS IN EV, av, ov
SINGULAR

0 fla.<rLEV-S
king

it ypa.il-s
olrl VJoman

ij va.il-s ship
va.'-s

o, it floil-s
ox, cow
floil-s flo-os flo-t floil-v floil

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

(fJanl-L)

fla.o-ev-s fla.<TL-ws fla.<rLEL fla.o--a fla.<rLEV

y pa.il-s ypa-os y pa-t ypa.il-v y pa. il

DUAL

ve-6s
VT}-t

vo.:-v
va. V

N.A.V. G. D.

fla.o-LTj fla.<rL-OLV

yp.-e ypa-otv
PLURAL

vij-
ve .. otv

flo-e flo-oi:v

N.V.

Gen. Dat. Ace.

fla.o- Tjs, later } ypa.-es { fla.<rLELS fla.o-L-wv ypa-iv ypa.u-o-(( v) fla.<rLEV<rL( V) fla.o-L-iis ypa.il-s

vij-s
VE-lV

130-s

va.u-o-( (v)
va:-s

flo-wv flou-o-((v) floil-s

Like {JaLevs are declined the masculine oxytones l?r1revs horseman, iepevs priest, -yovevs parent, <f>ovevs rnurdeTer; like {3os is declin et! xos threequart measu1e (but ace. xoa and xoas).
274 D. Hom. has 5s, tos and olos, 5v, oes, Otwv and olwv, oterJL ( oteL o 386) and 5erJL, 6rs(). 275 D. 1. Hom. ha.s {3Mtfios, -fi,, -fia, -e, -fies, -eiit (and -fJet), -fias. Also -<os, -, -i, from the stern er = ~ -es and - for -os and - are not common. 'Arpevs, Tiioevs have -(F )-os etc. regularly (Tiiofi from TiiOc!a). Hdt. bas -fos, -fi' or -ft~, -i, -e, -s, -wv, -ecrt., -fG.s. 2. Hom. has 'YP'Yfs or "fP'Yfts, 'YP'Yf<, 'YP7J and 'YP'Yft; the unattic {J6eL (and floul), f36as (and {3os), {3wv ace. sing. H 238. The Doric nom. sing: is f3ws, ace. pl. {3ws. 3. The declension of vas in Doric, Homer, and .Herodotus is as follows:

70

TIIIlW DEULENSION: STEMS IN OI

276. Substantives in -eus preceded by a vowel may contract in the gen. and ace. sing. and pl. 'J'hus, Xteus fishennan bas gen. Xdws or Xtws, ace. Xd. or Xt, gen. pl. Xdwv or Xtwv, ace. pl. Xd.s or Xts. AU other forms are regular. The contracted forms were in use in the fi!th century, but in the fourth ( especially after 350 n.c.) the open forms are common. So are declined Ef3oeus Euboean from Ev{3oteus, llatpateus PeiTaeus, llaTaL<us Plataean. 277. Other Forms. -a. In the drama from words in -<us we find rarely -fi in ace. sing., -i5.s in ace. pl. -los and -?los, -?les, -?las are occasionally fonnd. b. 'l'he nom. pl. in older Attic ended in -ijs ({3arnXijs), derived either from -?les by contraction or from -l71s (once on an inscription) by 34. -?ls occurs on inscriptions till about 350 11. c., and is the form to be adoptcd in the texts of authors of the fifth century and in Plato. -es occurs rarely, but is suspected. f3arnXs (regnlar on inscriptions after 329 n.c.) is from anal ogy to i]lis. c. 'l'he ace. pl. f3arns was not used till the end of the fourth century. -?ls (the nom. form) is used for the ace. in a few passages (251 b). 278. Stem Variation.- Stems ending in w, av, ov Jose v before case endings beginning with a vowel, ~ passing into F (4:1). Stems in w show the pure forrn only in the vocative; other forrns are derived from the stronger stern TfV and ii. v bef ore a consonant become ev, i5.v ( 40) as in f3arneus, f3arrtern, vas, vavrr[ from {3arrt7fVS, vii us, etc. From {3arrtX?i(F )-os, -17 (F )-<, -ii(F )-a, -?i(F )-as come, by transfer of quantity (34 ), the Attic fonns. So vews is derived from VTf(F )-os. ln {3a<rtwv, VWV1 is ShOrtened from the Tf Of {3arrtf}wv, VTfWP by 39. f3o-6s, etc. are from the stern f3ov- f3of-, cp. Lat. bovis.

.,v.

STEMS IN

OL

279. Stems in ot, with nominative in -w, turn L into unwritten!: (y) (43) before the endings beginning with a vowel. .;, 1m&w persuasion is thus declined:
N.

meer..

G.

.,.n9os

(7rt86-os).

D.

.,..,eot

(7rH8o-<).

A.

.,..,ecr. (1ret86-a).

V. 'ITEL9ot.

Dual and plural are wanting.

PLURAL

S!NGGLAR

Do rie

Homer

Ildt.

Do rie

llom('r

Hdt.

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

va.-s

V'lS

V'lS
VE-6S

va-os V'lOS, VEOS va-t v'l-t

va.il .. v vfj-a.,
V-a.

(and V'lOS ?)
V'lt
v .. a.

vfj-es, v-es va:-Wv V'lWV, ve-Wv va. v-o-t( v), V'lV-<rL( v) vti-eo-o-L( v) v.fJ EO"O"L (V) , V-EO"O"L (V) vci-a.s vfj-o.s, v-a.s

v ci-es

VES
ve-(jv

V'lVO"L v-o.s

Hom. has va.v<Tl in vavrr<KuTos. 279 D. In Ionie the f01ms are contracted (7rt8os, etc.). from 'Iw, ATfTov, but :tiso 11'<<1Jw. Hdt. has ace. 'Iov

CASE IN -4>~(v), llUGULAR DECLEN:SlON

71

So iJxw echo, eerrrw well-being, rfJL5w sparing, "Za1rtpw, k1JTW, Ka.vif'w. o< stems are chiefly used for women's narnes. a. A stronger form of the stem is wt, seen in the earlier form of the nominative ("Za7rrf>o/, ATJT<j)). The accusative bas the accent of the nominative. b. When dual and plural occur, they are of the second declension: nom. <xo! (late) from exw woman in child-bed, ace. 'YofYYovs from yonw gorgon. c. 7} EiKwv image, 7} 7Jowv nightingale, properly from stems in ov, have certain forms from this declension ( EiKos, e!Kw, voc. 71 iio). CASES

IN

-cfn(v)

280. Cases in -4>~(v). --r/><(v) is often added to noun stems in Hom. to express the relations of the lost instrumentai, locaLive, and ablative, both singular and (more commonly) plural; rarely to express the relations of the genitive and dative cases. From ii stems are made singulars, from o stems singulars or plurals, from consonant stems almost always plurals. Except in IJ<o-rf>tvwith the yods -rf><(v) is not added to a stem denoting a person. (a) lnstruI!lental: fJlTJ-r/>< by might, htpTJ-r/>< with the othe~ (hand), iiaKpvo-rf;tv with tears; (b) Locative: IJ!5p7J-r/>< at the do01, operr-rf;t on the mountains; (c) Ablative: K<rf>a"/..f}-rf>tv from off the head; especially with prepositions, as K 7rOVTo-rf>tv frO!ll! off the sea, 1r va-rf>tv from the ships.
IRREGULAR DECLENSION

281. The gender in the singular and in the plural may not be the same : orrTos grain, T rrrra; oerrp.os chain, T iierrp. chains (ol iierrp.ol cases of irnprisonment) ; To rrTiiwv stade, race-course, pl. T rrTii<a and ol rrrow<. 282. Usually the inegularity consists in a word having two different stems. a. Both stems have a common nominative singular: rrKOTos mkness, rrK6Tov rrK6Ttp, etc. (like Y1r1rov Y1r1r'l') or rrKoTovs rrKDT<< (like 'Yvovs ')'v). So Tov AOw, and rv" AOwv from AOws (238 d), Tv "ZwKpti-r1J and rv "ZwKp.T7]v (264 b). These are called heteroclites ( rep6K<Ta d~(ferently declined). N. Many compound proper names in -7]s (especially names of foreigners) have forms of the 1 and 3 decl., as T<rrrrarf;pv1Js, -vovs, -v11 and -vH. So 8eoKptV'lJ (voc.) in Demosth., Aewvio7Jv and Aewvll!<a in Hdt. b. Certain cases are formed from another stem than that of the nom. singular: o 5vetpo-s dream, gen. ov<ipaT-os (as if from T 6vetpap), or (Jess freq.) velpov; so Tv 'A1rbX'Awva and Tv 'A1row (260), ro vUos and To vlo (285, 27). These are called rnetaplastic forms (p.eTa1r"/..arrp.6s change of formation). >~ 283. Defectives are sbstantives having, by reason of their meaning or use, only one number or only certain cases. Thus, sing. only : o d-f}p air, o aliJ-f}p upper air; pl ur. only: T .:l.wvVrr<a, T '0Mp.7r<a the Dionysiac (Olympie) festival, o! ET7Jrrlat annual winds; in sorne cases only : ti! f.L< my good sir or rnadam; .6vap dream; 6rf><os use on! y in nom. ; 'At{36s lfla from *Xlif; stream, libation. 284. Indeclinables are substantives having one form for ail cases: To xpewv, ro xfiwv, etc. fatality, rb IJ.Xrf;a alpha, To 'Yv to spealc, most cardinal numbers (To iiKa ten), severa! foreign words, as 'IaKwfl Jacob, .:l.afll/J David.

72

llEGULAR SUBSTANTIVES
285. LIST Ol!' THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES

1. n p1JS ( o) Ares, stems 'Ape!T-, 'Apev- from 'Ape!T F- G. Apews (poet. Apeos), D. Ape<, A. Ap17 (poet. Apea), Ap17v. Epie G. Ap17os, Apeos, D. Ap11<, Apei', A. Ap17a, Ap17v. Hdt. Apeos, ApEL, Apea. Aef'liC 'Apevs, Apeuos, etc. 2. 6.p~v (o, iJ) lamb, sheep, stems pev-, pv-, pva-. Thus, d.pv-6s, pv-l, d.pv-a., d.pv-es, clpv-wv, clpv-!TL (Hom. /J.pv-e!T!T<), d.pv-as (declined like a subst. in -17p). Nom. clpT,v occurs on inscript. but d.p,v6s (2 decl.) is commonly used. 3. ycl.a. ( r6) milk (133), 'Yal-aKr-os, 'YctaKT .,, etc. 4. yws (o) laughter, 'Ywr-os, etc. Attic poets A. 'Ywra or 'Ywv. Hom. bas D. 'Y'A<p, A. 'Yw, 'Ywv or 'Yfo (?) from Aeol. 'Yos. Cp. 257 D. 5. yovu (r6) knee, 'Y6var-os, etc. Ionie and poetic 'Yovvar-os, 'Yotivar-<, etc. Epie also 'Youv-6s, 'Yovv-l, 'Yov-a, pl. 'Yov-wv, 'YOVV-e!T!T< (250 D. 2). The forms in ov are from 'YOVf- (37 D. 1, 253 c); cf. J,at. genu. 6. yuv~ (1!) woman, 'YVva<K-6s, "{uva<K-l, "{Uva'iK-a, "{tfVa< (133); dual "fVYatK-e, 'YVvaLK-o'iv ; pl. 'YVva'iK-es, 'YUVa<K-wv, 'Yuva<~i, 'YVVa'iK-as. The gen. and dat. of all numbers accent the last syllable (cp. clvT,p). Comic poets have A. "{vvT,v, "{vvas, N. pl. "{uvai. 7. Scl.Kpvov ( r6) tea1, oaKpvou, etc., in ]Jl'ose and poetry. OKpu (rb) is nsually .t poetic, D. pl. oaKpV!TL, 8. &fvSpov (rb) tree, obopou, etc. Also D. sing. ovope<, pl. Ovlip.,, ohopE!T'L. Hdt. has ovopov, Ovopeov and /Jlvopos. 9. 6os ( TO) jear (oee!T- ), Mous, ilfEL. Hom. oelovs, 55 D. Cp. 265. 10. Sopu (rb) spear, Opar-os, iJbpar-L, pl. o6par-a, etc. Poe tic oop-6s, oop-[ ( also in prose) and 06p-EL (like IJ.!TTE<). Ionie and poetic oopar-os, etc., Epie also . ooup-6s oovp-l, dual oop-e, pl. oop-a, oop-wv, oop-!T!TL (250 D. 2). 'l'he forms with ou are from oopf- (37 D. 1). 11. pws ( o) love, tpwr-os, etc. Poetical tpos, tp<p, tpov. Cp. 257 D. '12. Zevs ( o) Zeus, t:H-6s, 1:i<-i, Al-a, Ze. Zes is from <eus, A<~6s, etc., from <f- Ionie and poetic z.,vbs, z.,vt, Z?iva. 13. 6p.s ( iJ) justice and the goddess Themis ( fiep,to-), fip,<o-os, fi!J.<o-<, fi!J.<-v. Hom. has fi!J.<!TT-os, etc. Pind. fil!J.<r-os, fip,<-v, fip,<r-es. Hdt. fi!J.t-os. In the phrase fip," eva< jas esse (indic. fip.LS url), Bp,<s is indeclinable. 14. Kcl.pa (r6) head (poetic) used in Attic only inN. A. V. sing., but dat. KctP'!- Other cases are from the stem Kpiir-, G. ~<par-os, D. Kpa-rl; also r icpr-a N. A. sing., Kpr-as A. pl. Epie shows the stems Kp.ar-, Kp.r-, Kap.,ar-, Kap17r-. N. Kap'f/, G. Kpdaros, Kpar6s, Ka.pf}aros, KriprJros, D. Kpdan, Kparl, KapT,an, Kap'f/r<, A. Kap. N. pl. Kripa, Kptara, Kapljara, and Kd.p'rjva, G. Kptirwv, Kapf}vwv, D. Kp..ffl, A. Kpra. 15. Ktlwv (0, 7]) dog, Kvv-6s, Kvv-l, KVv-i~ Kov; K6v-r=, K_vv-ov; KVv-es, Kuv-Wv, Kvcrl,
KVv-a.s.

16. Xiia.s () stone, poe tic also s, G. os (or Mo v), D. 'A., A. av, 'A.a; dual e; pl. -es, d-wv, li-e!T'!T<, li-e!T'<. 17. p.cl.pTus (, 7)) witness, !J.dprvp-os, etc., but D. pl. p.dprv-!T<. Hom. has N. p.aprv _ pos, pl. p,prvpo<. 18. t!)(.,.ous ( o) Oeclipus, G. 0101-rroilos, O!Ol?i-ov, OloL11'6o. (Dor.), D. OiMrrofh, A. Olol'lrovP, Olo<7r6o.v, V. OiQl.,.ous, ozot.,.ov.

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

73

19. ilvupos (ci) and 5VELpov (ro, Ionie and poetic) dream, ovflpov, etc., but also ovelpar-os, etc. r 15vap only inN. A. 20. lipvts (ci, i}) bi1d (257). A. 6pvi0a and 5pvv (247). Poetic 15pvs, A. 15pvv; pl. N. 5pvm, G. 5pvewv, A. 15pvm or 15pvis. Dor. G. 5pvx-os, etc. 21. li<r<rE dual, two eyes, pl. G. otnrwv; D. 150"<To<s (-o<<T<). 22. o~s (ro) ear, G>r-os, G>r-l, pl. wr-a, ifJr-wv (252 a), tiJ.-1; from the stem tlJrcontracted from o(o")ar-, whence o(~)ar-. ous is from oos, whence also the Doric nom. ws. Hom. G. oilar-os, pl. oi!ar-a, oi!a.-, and G>.-l. 23. Ilvue (7}) Pnyx (128), ITvKv-6s, ITvKv-l, ITvKv-a, and also ITvvK-6s, ITvvK-l, ITvvK-a. 24. 1rpE<rj3Eur~s ( b) en voy has in the pl. usually the forms of the poe tic 1rpt.-f3vs old man, properly an adj., old. Thus, N. sing. 7rpe.-{3evrf}s, G. 1rpe.-{3evro, etc., N. pl. 1rp.-{3m, G. 7rprf3ewv, D. 7rpir{3e.-<, A. 1rpio-{3m (rarely 7rp<o-f3evral, etc.). 1rpio-{3vs meaning olrl man is poetic in the sing. (A. 1rpio-f3vv, V. 1rpio-~v) and pl. (1rpio-f3m); meaning envoy 1rpio-f3vs is poetic and rare .in the sing. (dual 1rpeo-{3f} from 1rpeo-f3evs). 7rpeo-f36r'l)s old man is used in prose and poetry in all numbers. 25. .,.p (r6) fire (1riJp-, 254 b), 1rvp-6s, 1rvp-l, pl. r 1rvpa watch-ji1es, 2nd decl. 26. ll6wp (r6) watm, voar-os, voar-<, pl. voar-a, dr-wv, etc. Cp. 253 b . .27. ut6s (o) son has three stems: 1. v!o-, whence v!o, etc., according to the 2nd decl. 2. v!v-, whence vUos, v!, dual vie, vUo<v, pl. vles, uUwv, vlio-<, v!es. The stems v!o- and v!v-, usually Jose their' (43): o, Mos, etc. 3. vi- in Hom. G. vTos, D. vTt, A. vTa, dual vfe, pl. utes, v!ao-<, vias. 28. XE(p (il) hand, XELp-Os, Xe<p-l, xep-a; dual xep-e, xp-ov; pl. xilp-es, XELp-wv, xp-o-1, xp-as. Poetic also xep-6s, xp-l, etc.; dual, xp-ov. A tt. inscr. have Xe<pov, xe<po-l. Hom. agrees with Att. prose and Hdt. except that he has also xp-l, xelp-eo-o-< xetp-<o-<. 29. XP~S (o) skin, xpwr-6s, xpwr-l (but XP<ii in the phrase iv XP<ii), xpwra. Poetic xpo-6s, xpo-t, xp6-a, like alorf>s, 266.
ADJECTIVES

ADJECTIVES OF THE FST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

286. Adjectives of Three Endings.- Most adjectives of the vowel declension have tluee endings : -o>, -YJ (or -ii), -ov. The masculine and neuter are declined according to the second declension, the feminine according to the first.
a. When e, ,, or p (30, 218) precedes -os the feminine ends in -ii, not in -'1]. But adjectives in -oos (!10t preceded by p) have '7 Thus, o)'ooos, o-yo6'1), 5')'ooov eighth, .Op6os, .Op6a:, &.ep6~v cmwded. See 290 e.

287. ya66s good, lJ.~w> worthy, fJ-0-Kpo> long are th us declined:

285 D. 27. Hom. bas also v!6s, v!o, v!ov, vU, v!Wv, v!oo-t; vUos, vU, vUa, ulfes and v!s, vUas. v< sometimes makes a short syllable in ul6s, v!6v, vU (148 D. 3). 287 D. In the fem. nom. sing. Ionie has -7], never -ii ; in the fem. gen. pl. Hom. bas -<iwv (less often -iwv); Hdt. has -iwv in oxytone adjectives and partlciples, and so probably in barytones.

74

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
SINGULAR

[288

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

6.y"9cis 6.y"8ov ciyn&.;:. ciyn&civ ciyC19

6.y"9f) ciyn8ijs ciydfl ciyn8t'Jv ciyC18f)

ciyn8civ 6.yn8o ciyne.;:. ciyn8civ ciyn8civ

i.fos cif(ii cif(o\J ciftcis cif('!' ci~(q. i.!;ov cif(civ

i.~LE
ci~(ci

i.fov ci!;(o\J cit('!' i.fov

i.~LOV

fL"KpOS fL"Kpov fi."KP'' fL"Kpciv fJ.nKp

fl.nKpR jLnKpOV fJ.nKp.s jLnKpo fi."KP4 fL"KP'' f1.11Kp0.v fJ.nKpOV fJ.nKpa !1-nKpOV

DUAL

N. A. V. ciy11M ciyneli ciyn8.0 G.D. ciyn8o<v ciy11811<v ciyn8otv

ci~(..,

ci~(ci

ci~(..,

ci~(ow ci~(n v ci~(ow

PLURAL

-' fL"Kpw fLC1KpO. fLO.Kpw fJ.nKpoiv fLC1KpO.LV fLO.Kpotv

N.V.

ciyn8o(

ciyo.8n( ciyn8a.

Gen. Dat. Ace.

/(T(JXQs

ciy118~v ciy118~v ciyo.8~v

ci-y118o<s ci-y11811is ci-yn9ots ciyn9ovs ciyo.8lis ciyn80.

i.~LOL i.tLC1L i.fLC1 citLOlV cif!CA1v .f(..,v .!;(os .!;!11s .!;(os ci!;(o"s cif!.s i.f11

fLC1Kpo(

fi.C1Kpo.( fLO.Kpn

f1.11Kp~v fLO.Kp~v fLO.Kp~v

jL11Kpots f1.11Kpnts f1.11Kpots fLO.Kpovs jL11Kpiis p.o.KpO.

{jOOfl, KO.KOS bad, tJO</>OS Wise, KO</>os, K00</>7), KO</>OV light, Ofj)l.os Clem; vopeos, vopel, vopov courageous, !ilKa.ws just, i!p.ows like, a.luxp6s, a.luxpti, a.luxp6v base, lXeuOepos free; ali participles in -os and ali superlatives.

a. The accent in the feminine nominative and genitive plural follows that of the masculine: lf.~<a.<, ~lwv, not ~la.<, ~<wv, as would be expected according to the rule for substantives (205), e.g. as in a.lrl ca1tse, a.lrla.<, a.lnwv. b. Ali adjectives and participles may use the masculine instead of the feminine dual forms : rw -ya.8w p.7Jrepe the two good mothe1s.

288. Adjectives of Two Endings.- Adjectives using the masculine for the feminine are called adjectives of two endings. Most such adjectives are compounds.
289. aLKO unjust (&.- without, OK'fJ justice), cppovtp..O> prudent, and V..Ew> propitious are declined th us:
SJNGULAR

Masc. and Fern.

Neut.
i8LICOV

Masc. and Fem.

Neut.

Masc. and Fem. N eut.

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

i.6LKOS .6(KO\J ci6(K'I' i.6LKOV iSLKE

.8(KO\J .6(K'!' i.8LKOV

li8LKOV

<j>poVLjLOS <j>poVLjLO\J <j>puV!jL'!' <j>pcivp.ov <j>povp.E

<j>p6vp.ov <j>pov(p.o
<j>pov(l'-~

EECAIS
~ECAI

~ECAIV

'tECAI
~E'!'

<j>poVL/lOV <j>poVLfLOV

tE'!' tECAIV
~EO>S

tEO>V tECAIV

289 D. Hom. has fXios or Xiios; ?ros, ?rEl7J, ?reov (Hdt . .,.)l.os, 7rf7J, ?reov); uws (only in this form), and u6os, u67J, .<I6ov. Hom. bas N. ~ws, A. ~wv living, and twos, tw>, twov living.

290)

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
DUAL

75
Masc. and Fem. Neut.

Masc. and Fern. Neut.

Masc. and Fem.

Neu~.

N.A. V.
G. D.

.8(Kw .Stocow

.S(ocw
.S(oco~v

cf>pov(p.w cf>poVLfloOLV
PLURAL

cf>pov(p.w cf>pov(p.ow

fEW fE'!'V

iEW fE'!'V

N. V.
Gen. Dat. Ace.

o.s~oco~

.S(ocwv
.8(Ko~s

0.8LKQ. .Stocwv
.Stoco~s

.8LKO\JS

0.8LKQ.

cf>p6VLf10L cf>pov(p.wv cf>pov(p.OLS cf>pov(p.olls

cf>povp.a. cf>pov(p.wv
cf>pov(p.o~s

\'}\E'I'

cf>p6vLp.a.

fEWV fE'1'5 fEWS

iEa. fEWV fE'I'S iEa.

a. Like li.o<Kos are declined the compounded 11.-o"Yos irrational, 11.-rip.os dishonou1ed, -xp<os useless, ~J"-7rpos experienced, i1rl-<t>8ovos envious, <~-evos hospitable, v1r-f]Koos obedient. Like <f>p6v<p.os are declined the uncompounded {J.p{3a.pos barbarian, 7)<Tvxos quiet, 7)1'-fpos tame, os talkative. b. Like' <ws are declined other adjectives of the Attic declension (237), as if.K<pws without horns, ~<6xp<ws serviceable. For the accent, see 163 a. Adjectivt>s in -ws, -wv have -a. in the neut. pl., but ~K7r<w occurs in Xenophon. c. 'II'ws full bas three endings: 1rws, 1rii., 1rwv, pl. 7r<tJ, 7ra.<, 1rla., but most compounds, such as J"11"<ws quite full, have the fern. like the masc. cr<Ois safe has usually sing. N. <Tws masc., fern. (rarely <T.), <Twv neut., A. <Twv; plur. N. <T!p masc., fem., <T. neut., A. <Tws masc., fem., <T. neut. Other cases are supplied by <Twos, <Twii, <Twov. <Twov also occurs in the accusative. d. In poetry, and sometimes in prose, adjectives commonly of two endings have a feminine form, as 1r.rpws paternal, {3la.ws violent; and those commonly of three endings have no feminine, as va"YKa.os necessary, <f>lws friendly.

290. Contracted Adjectives. -Most adjectives in -o> and -oo are contracted. Examples : xpfJcrEO> golden, py(;p0> of silver, ,b6o simple (feminine &n-.\a).
SINGULAR

N.V.
Gen. Dat. Ace.

(xp6<T<os) XP'iitroiis (xpv<Tlov) . XP'iitroii (xpv<Tl<t>) XP'iitr<> (xpiJ<T<ov) Xp'iitroiiv

(xpv<Tlii) (xp<Tliis) (xpv<Tlf!) (xp<Tliiv)

DUAL

xptrfJ xp'iitrfJs Xp'iitrfl xpilcrfJv

(xpD<T<ov) (xp<Tlov) (xpv<T<t>) (xp6rnov)

XP'iitroiiv xp'iitroii xptr<i> xp'iicroiiv

N. A. V.
G.D.

(xpv<Tlw) (XPV<TfOLV)

XP'iitr<f> XP'iitrotv

(xpv<Tlii) xp;;cra (xpv<Tla.<v) xp'iitra.tv

PLURAL

(xpv<Tlw) (xpv<Tlo<v)

xpcr<f> XPiltrotv

N.V.
Gen. Dat. Ace.

(XPV<T<ot) XP'iitro'i: (xpv<Tlwv) XP'iitr<Oiv (XPV<TfOLS) XP'iitro'i:s (xpii<Tlovs) XP'iitroiis

(xpV<T<a.<) (xpv<Twv) (xpv<Tla.") (xpv<Tliis)

xpvtra.t xptr<Oiv xpilcra.ts xpvtras

(xprma.) (xpv<Tlwv) (xpvulo<s) (XPV<T<a.)

xptra xpcrOiv xpilcrots xpvcra

76

DECLE~SION

OF AD.JECTIVES

[290

SII'Gt:l,AR

N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

(ap")'upws) ci.pyupoiis ( ap")'vpt#ou) cipyupoii ( ap")'vp'f') cipyup'i' (ap")'upwv) cipyupoiiv

(ap'jvpii) ( ap'jvpii.s) ( ap'jupq.) ( ap)'uplii.v)

DUAL

ci.pyup. cipyvp.s .pyupq. .pyvp.v

( ap'jvpeov) ( ap'jvplou) ( ap")'vpl'f') ( ap'jupeov)

ci.pyupoiiv ci.pyupoii .pyup< .pyvpoiiv

N.A.V. G. D.

(ap'jvpiw) cipyvp~ ( ap")'VpfOLV) .pyvpoi:v

(ap")'vp&.) cipyvp. ( ap'jVpaLV) .pyvpO.LV

PLURAL

(ap")'vpw) ci.pyvpoo ( ap'jVpOLV) .pyvpoi:v

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

( ap)'Vp<OL) ( ap")'vpwv) ( ap)'VpfOLS) ( ap")'vpiovs)

.pyvpot cipyvplv .pyupoi:s .pyvpoils

( ap")'up<aL) ( ap'jvpiwv) ( ap'jvplrm) ( ap'jvpiii.s)

ci.pyvpa.;: ci.pyvplv ci.pyvpa.i:s .pyvp.s

( anupea) ( ap")'vpwv) ( ap)'VpoLS) (ap'jupea)

ci.pyvpii ci.pyvplv .pyvpoi:s ci.pyvp.

SINGULAR

N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

(.,. /..6os) ( 1rMov)

(7I'6'f')

(<i.,.Mov)

.1roiis .1r0ii n1r<> .11'oiiv

( .,.Mii) (7riis) (u.,.q.) (u.,.ii.v)

DUAL

.1Tij n11''js o..,.. n1ri)v

(7rMov) (li.,. Mou) (li.,. M"') (.,.Mov)

.'JTO'V

n1roii o..,..'' n1ro.iiv

N.A.V. G. D.

(..bw) (<i.,.Motv)

ci.1rW n11'OLV

(u.,.li) (u7ra<v)
PLURAL

n1r.
nra.tv

(.,. Mw) (..ootv)

a.,..c:,
.1TOLV

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

(li.,. Mo<) (<i.,.Mwv) (11'IJOLS) (li.,. Mous)

.1TOL n11'lv Q..,..oi:s ci.1roiis

(<i71'a.t) (u.,.wv) ( 71'fa.<S) (<i.,.:\o!is)

C.1ra.L
&:rrWv

o..,..a.s o..,..&s

(ci71'Ma) (.,.Mwv) (.,. Mots) (li.,. Ma)

.1TQ .11'lv .?TOS c\..,..&

a. So xaKos, -1), -ov brazen, </JOLVLKOS, -1), -ov Cl'imson, 11'0p</Jvpos, -i, -ov dal'k red, <rLO'YJpos, -ii, -ov of iron, il<71'oiis, -1), -ov twofold, and other multiplicatives in -71'oiis (354 b). Compounds of two endings (288): el!vovs, -ovv (elJvoos) weil <lisposed, li.1rovs, -ovv (lf..,.oos) not navigable, el!pous, -ouv ( eupoos) faiT-jlowing. These have open oa. i:: ~:1e neuter plural. b. The vocative and dual of contracted adjectives are very rare. c. Adjectives whose uncontracted form in the nom. sing. has the accent on the antepenult (xpv<reos, 7rop<f>upeos) take in the contracted form a circurnfiex on their last syllable (xpv<ros, ,.op<f>vpos) by analogy to the geu. and dat. sing. The accent of the nom. dual masculine and neuter is also irregular (xpv~rw, not xpv~rw).

292]

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

77

d. For peculiarities of contraction see 56. .1rXij is from <l7rX.!ii, not from 1rM'l. e. Sorne adjectives are not contract.ed : d.p"faMos difficult, K<pa.!os crajty, v.!os young, 6-yoos eighth, d.Op6os crowded (usually). (Here eo and oo were probably separated originally by f, 3.) ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION 291. Such adjectives as belong only to the consonant declension have two endings. Most such adjectives have stems in > (nominative -TJ> and ->) and ov (nominative -wv and -ov). Under ov stems faU comparative adjectives, as f3. riwv, j3f.>..rov better. a. There are some compounds with other stems : M. F. d.7rci.rwp, N. l11rarop jathmless, G. d.1rci.ropos; li.1ro<s l11ro< without a country, 1r6<Iios ; aroKprwp avroKpci.rop independent, aToKpaTopos; li.pp'7v ( older li.pO"'lv) li.ppev male, /J.ppevos; ~xap<s ~xap< agree able, vxptros ; e~e1r<s eli'!1..,., hopej1, e7r<os. For the ace. of stems in <T and < see 247. Neut. elixap< and lle1Tt for<vxap<r, ee7r< (133). 292. TJ()~, ( TJBHr-) true, d-7Tt> (d..mo-) hopeful
SINGULAR

are thus declined:

Ne ut.

Masc. and Fern.

Neut.

Masc. and Fern.

E.UEXTLS

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

.1J9~s

.1J9s .1J9oils .1j9E1: .1]9s .1j9s

DUAL

( d.178-os) ( d.'78.!-t) ( ri'78-a.) .1j9ij .1]9s

ellE.,., ev1rS-os EVE1rS- ellE.,., E.UE1rLV

E'}E1rL

N.A.V. G.D.

(d.'78t!-e) ( d.>78.!-otv)

.1]9EL .1J9o1:v
PLURAL

ev.,.S- eve1r-o.v

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

( d. 178.!-es) .1]9e1:s (d.178-a) .1]9i] (ri178-wv) .1J9.0v ( ri'78fiJ"IJ"L 107) . 1]9cn (v) (d.T}B-a) .1]9i] .1J9e1:s ..

ev1rS-es EV1r8-a. ev..1r-wv eV1rL<n(v) ev.,.,&-a.s ev1r8-a.

a. /J.7f8es means indeed! Like 17BfJs are declined O"a.tj>~s clear, ervxf)s lucky, e-yevf)s high-born, d.O"Bevf)s weak, "fKpaTf}s self-re8trained, 1T-f}p'7s full. 292 D. The uncontracted forms of es stems appear in Hom. and Hdt. -er and -ees are, however, sometimes contracted in Hom., and properly should be written -EL and -m in Hdt. The ace. pl. masc. and fern. is -eas in Hom. and Hdt. From adj. in -e-fJs Hdt. has vii. for vda, Hom. vKeas for VK~t!a.~, vppeos for vppeos.

78

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

b. The accusative pl. cl.7JI/s has the form of the nominative. c. Compound adjectives in -1]s not accented on the last syllable show reces.sive accent even in the contracted forms. 'l'hus, <j>La.f}II1JS lover of truth, neut. tj>Lcl.1JOES, airrripK1JS selj-sufficient, neut. a.vrapKes, gen. pl. arripKwv, not arapKwv. N. - Except in neuter words in -woES, -wes, -wpes, and -fJPes, as euwl'ies sweetsmelling, 1roH)pes reaching to thefeet. But rp,f,pwv, not rpL1Jpwv, from rpLi}p1JS, 264. d. (o")a becomes Ei, not <7J (56): <Ke, v/lei for dJK>-..ea, vl5ea. from <Kef}s glorious, vofJs needy (G. <Keovs, v15eovs). But <<(o-)a. and ue(o-)a yield ca. or <7), ua. or u7J. Thus, iryc or iryLfj (irycf}s healthy), dHf>v or tj>ufj (dHf>vf}s comely), cp. 56, 31, 2. The forms in -fj are due to the analogy of such forms as i!U/>epfJ (iJ.tcJ>pf}s resembling),
293.

Stems in ov: fva[p.wv happy, f3. riwv better:

SINGULAR

Masc. and Fern.

Neut.

Masc. and Fem.

j3ETtwv

Nent.

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

EvSa.(J'o"'Y ESa.p.ov evSa.(JJ.Ov-os evSa.Cp.ov- ESa.(p.ov-a. ESO.LjJ.OV Eillla.L,..OV E6a.L,..OV

DUAL

j3di:ov

j3ETiov-os j3ETfov- j3ETfov-a. or j3ETf(l) j3TLOV j3TLOV j3TLOV

N.A.V.
G.D.

EvSa.(jJ.Ov-E tSa..,..ov-ow
PLURAL

j3ETfOVE j3ETLOVOLV

N.V.
Geu. Dat.

tSa.c,..ov-es

Ev Sa.( p.o v-a.

j3ETfOVES j3E Tfovs

j3ETfov-a. j3E},Tt(!)

evSa.p.Ov-wv ev6a.(p.ocn( v) . Ev6a.(,..ov-a.s

{ PETtovs

PETLOV-(I)V

PEkTiocn (v)
f3E Tiov-a.s ' f3E Tiov-a. J3eTi"'

Ace.

a. Like <VoalJ.twv are declined J.tf,J.twv J.tvfJJ.tOv ~indful, cl.')'v<.IJJ.twv 6-')'vwJ.tOv u12jeeling, llcj>pwv ll<j>pov senseless, 'Tfhrwv .,,.,ov ripe, o-wrf>pwv o-w<j>pov prudent. b. Like ~eriwv are declined J.tel\wv J.t<'L\ov greater, KaKiwv KaKov baser,
{&.TTWP ~aTTOP l88.

c. The neuter nominative and accusative have recessive accent. d. Comparatives are formee! from stems in oP and in o~; cp. J,at. melioris for melios-is. os appears in ~<riw for ~<ro(.o-)-a, ace. sing. masc. fem. and nom. ace. neut. pl., and in {jertovs for {jerio(o-)-es, nom. pl. masc. fem. The accusative plural borrows the nmnin:ttive form. Cp. 251 b. The shorter forms were more frequent iu everyday speech than in literature.

zg8)

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
CONSONANT AND VOWEL DECLENSION COMBINED

79

294. Adjectives of the consonant declension having a separate fmm for the feminine inflect the feminine like a substantive of the first declension ending in -0. (216). 295. The feminine is made from the stem of the masculine (and neuter) by ading the suffix -!!l (ya), which is com.bined with:;the preceding syllable in different ways. The genitive plural feminine is always perispomenon (cp. 208). For the feminine dual, see 287 b. 296. Stems in v (-vs, -na., -v). -The masculine and neuter have the inflection of m]xvs and aaTv, except that the geuitive singnlar masculine and neuter ends in -o> (not -ws-) and -m in the neuter plural remains uncontracted. 297. ~t!, sweet is thus declined:
SINGULAR

Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. N.A.V. G. D. N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

i)S,J-s i)s.!-os ( i}l) iJSt i)Sli-v i)Sli

DUAl,

i)Seta. i)8e(O:s iJStq. )S.ta.-v iJSta. i)SeLa: i)8e(-a.w

PLURAL

i)S,J i)S-os ( 1}0/) i)S.:

Js,;
i)S,J i)S-e )S-OLV i)S-a. i)S-<Ov i)S-cn( v) )S-a.

i)S-e )S-OLV
( -l}es) i)Sets

i)8Eta.L
i)Snwv

i)8-<OV i)S- en( v) -!)Sets

i)8e(O.LS i)S.Ca:s
o~vs

So {JafJ6s deep, -yvKvs swt, epvs b1oad,

sha1'[!, Taxvs swift.

a. In f}oea -1a bas been added to -l,er- = f}eiJ-, a stronger form of the stem i]v- (cp. 270). The nominative masculine f}es is used for the accusative. b. The adjectives of this declension are oxytone, except 7iJJ.<<rus half, 8ij;l.us female, and some compounds, as l.,.1Jxus of two cubits. 298. Stems in v (-a:s, -a.wa., -a.v; -1]v, -ewa., -ev). tender are declined as follows:
p.os black, -rp'I'Jv

296 D. Hom. has usually -ea, -el1Js, -ely, et.c. ; sometimes -la, -1Js, -ly, etc. The forms without ' (43) are regulrtr in Hdt. For -uv Hom. has -la in e6pla it6vrov the wide sea. f}ovs and fJfjf..us are sometimes feminine in Hom,

80
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc. N.A.V. G.D. N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
SINGULAR

l'Aas I'A-a.v-os p.D..a.v-L I'a.v-a. I'a.v

p.cuva. p.ea.LV1JS p.E>..ucvn I'a.Lva.-v p.a.Lva.

I'a.v I'>..a.v-os p.Ea.v-L

Tp'l)ll Tpev-os Tpev-L Tpev-a. Tpev

Tpewa. TEpELV1JS TEpELV!) TpELva.-v Tpewa.

TpEV Tpev-os Tpev-L TpEV Tpev

p.D..a.v
I'>..a.v
DUAL

p.E>..a.Cvi I'E>.,a.( va.LV

p.a.v-e l'e>..6. v-o LV

PLURAL

TpEVE TEpvOLV

TEpELVi TEpEL\ID.L\1

TpEVE TEpV-OL\1

!'D.liES

p.D.LIID.L p.ea.LIIcv p.e>..a.Cva.s p.e>..a.Cvas

p.>..a.v-a.

Tpev-es TEpV-OIV TpEO'L( v) Tpev-a.s

TpELVD.L TEpELVC\1 TEpe(va.L's Tepe(vis

-rpEv-a.
TEpV-01\1 TpEO'L(v) orpev-a.

1'>..6.v-<w I'a.ci'L (v)

I'a. v-a.s

p.e>..6.v-01v
I'a.cn (v) p.a.v-a.

Like pii.s is declined one adjective: Tctiis, raatva, raav Wl'etched. a. piXi.s is for pav-s by 37, 96. With the exception of piXi.s and raiis, adjective stems in v reject s in the nom. sing. JLfarn for f.L<av-fi< 96 a, 250 N. The feminine forms JLfatva and repELva come from f.L<av-Ja, -rep<PJa by 111. The vocatives JLfav and rpev are rare, the nominative being used instead. 299.

(301).
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.
N. A. V. G. D.

Stems in vT occur in a few adjectives and in many participles xaptEL'i gracejul and 7r'i all are declined th us :
SINGULAR

xa.p(ELS XO.PLEVTOS xa.pLE\ITL x a.p(eVT-a. xa.p(ev

X a.p(EO'O'O. X ClpLO'O''IJS xa.pO'cru xa.pCeO'O'a.-v X a.p(EO'O'a.

xa.p(ev X a.pLEVTOS X a.pLEVTL xa.p(ev xa.p(ev

DUAL

'II'.S

"'r .a-a.

1T.V

-rra.vT-0S
-rra.vr-(
"J't'IVT-0.

'II'O.O''I)S 'ITO.O'TI
..<

..<

1ra.vr-6s
'l!'a.VT-C
1T.V

1r.o-a.-v
1T.C'"a.

'II'.S

"'T.V

xa.pLE\ITE

xO.pLO'O'i

xa.p(EVTE

XO.pLVTOL\1 Xa.pLO'O'O.L\1

X O.pLVTOLV
PLURAL

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

X a.pLEO'O'O.L X a.pLVT-01\1 Xa.pLEO'O'C\1 Xa.p(EO'L (v) XO.pLO'O'D.LS X a.p(EVTO.S X O.pLO'O'iS

Xa.p(EVTES

X a.p(evT-0.
xa.pLVTOI\1 xa.pLEO'L(v)

1rcl.vT-ES
1r6..VT-(I)V

1r.O'"O.L

1T'ciVT-O. 1r6.VT-WV

1raa-Wv
1rfO"'O.LS

'II'.O'L( v)
1T'6.VT-Q.S

'II'.O'L( \1)
'lt"tl.VT-0.

X a.p(eVT-0.

1rfO"iiS

299 D. Hom. has a1JLar6efifia bloody, fiKt6evra shadmJJy, but riJLfJS and rif.Lf, <<s valuable, riJLf}PTa and rip.f,evra. Doric has someLimes -i.s, -ivros for -ll.ets, -devros, as rpwviivra. Attic poetry often has the open forms -6m, -6<fifia.

DECLENSION OF PART!CIPLES

81

I,ike xa.p!m are infiected 1rr<phm winged, <j;1.wf,s voiced, oa.Kpvom tear,f1. Adjectives in -os and -ns are generally poetical or Ionie. <f;wvf}<vra meaning vowels is always open. a. xaplets, 1r.s are derived from xapLEvr-s, 1ravr-s by 100; xaplev from xapt.vrby 133. The ii of 1r.v (for 1riiv(r)-) is irregular and bolTowed from ,.as. Compounds have ii : i11rav, rrup.1rav. b. From xapLEr- is derived xapl<rrrra with rrrr, not 'l"r, by 114 a. xapter- is a weak form of the stem xapLEvr-; it appears also in xapl<O't for xapLEr-rrt (98). Participles in -ets (307) form the feminine from the strong stem -evr + ,a. 1rrra stands for 1ravrrra out of 1ravr-1a (113 a). 7rci.vrwv, 1r.rrt are accented" contrary to 252 ; but 1ravr6s, 1ravrl, 1riirrwv are regular. c. Adjectives in -6ets con tract, as p.<tros, p.<trorra, p.et.aov, G. p.<trovros, p.<trourr7Js, etc. (p.<tT6ELs honied). 1rup6m bas 7rupovra., 1rreporrrra. So in names of places : 'Ap-yevvorrrrat Argennusae for -herrrrat ; 'Pal'vos, -ovros, for
'Pap.v6ELs, -6evros.

DECLENSION OF P ARTICIPLES

300. Like &.yaOoc;, -~, -ov are inflected all the participles of the middle, and the future passive participle. 301. Participfes of the active voice (exeept the perfect, 309), and the aorist passive participle have stems in v.-. The masculine and neuter follow the third declension, the feminine follows the first deelension. a. Most stems in ovr make the nom. sing. masc. without s, like -ylpwv (243). But stems in ovr in the present and second aorist of p.<-verbs ( tiious, oous), and al! stems in a..-, u.-, vvr, add s, Jose vr (100), and lengthen the preceding vowel (ovs, -is, -E!s, -s, 37). In like manner the dat. pl. is formed: -on-rrt = -ovrr<, etc. N.- The stem of participles in -wv, -ovros was originally wvr. "f'pwv was originally a participle. b. The nominative neuter of all participles drops final.- of tl1e stem (133). c. The perfect active participle (stem or) has -ws in the masculine, -os in the neuter. -ws and -os are for -rw.--s, -ro.--s. d. The femilJine singular is made by adding 1a to the stem. Thus, Mourra (iiovr-;a), ovrra (o..--~a), lrr.-rra (lrr.-avr-!a), nOerra (n8eP7'1a). The perfect adds -v( rr )-;a, as in ell!-va. 302. The vocative of all partieiples is the same as the nominative. 303. Participles in -wv, -is, -e<s, -ovs, -iis frequently use the masculine for the feminine in the dual. 304. The accent of monosyllabic participles is an exception to 252: (/)v, llvro~ (not OVTOS), rTTds, <TT0.VToS. 305.

Participles in

-wv, -o,cru, -ov

(w-verbs): ,\;Jwv loosing (stem

iiovT-), lv being (stem vT-).

306 D. In the feminine of participles from stems in ov.-, avr (306), Aeolic has -otrra, -atO'a (Mot<Ta. \6rratrra), and -a<s in the masculine (M<ra<s). GREEJr <H~AM.- 6

82

DECLENSION OF l'ARTICIPLES
8INGLAR

[306

Masc.

Fern.

Ne nt.

Masc.
~v
8vT-OS OvT-L

Fern.
Q((rQ,

Nent.

N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

Mbw
ijOVTOS ~.'ovT-L UovT-a.

ou<ra. outr1]S oua-n

Uoua-a.-v

vov OVTOS ilovT- vov

DUAL

Ov
OVT-OS

ovtr1]S

o.UO""n
oi:io-o.-v

OvT-1..

OvT-a.

Ov

N.A.V. G. D.

iioVT-E OVTOLV

oua-a olitra.Lv

UovT-E OVTOLV
PLTJRAL

OvT-E
8vT-OLV

o-lltTCi
o.Ua-a.~ov

>vT-E
l)vT-OLV

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

UoVT-ES OVT-OIV UoutrL(v) UovT-a.s

ou<ra.L
i.ioua-Wv

liovT-a.

6vT-E'S

OU<rO.LS olia-iis

OVTWV outrL( v) UovT-a.

OvT-wv

oUcra.t. oa-(;)v
olJcra.~s

OVT-0.

OtltrL( V)
OvT-O.S

OvT-wv OtltrL(v)
OvT-a.

o-tla-as

So are inflected '11"aLi5evwv educating, "(pacpwv w1iting, cplpwv beming. a. All participles in -wv are intiected like )l.wv, those in -wv having the accent of iJJv, 5vros, etc. ; as t1rwv, moua, t1rv fuwing left. Such participles are from w-verbs, in which o is a part of the tense suffix. b. Like participles are declined the adjectives hwv, houa, h v willing, 6.Kwv, rf.JCOV<Ta, LKOJI unwilling (for .Kwv, etc.), G. fi.Kovros, ciKOlltT?]S, dKovror:;. 306.

Participles in

-as, -iia-a., -a. v: B<T>

SINGULAR

having loosed, iCTr.i> setting.

N.V. Gen. nat. Ace.

lla-iis U<ra.VTOS
.ijO'"O.VT-L

itrii<r~
v,.fa-1Js a-.a-n

va-a. v Utra.vT-OS
-rlo-a.VTI.

Lo-Tis
i.o-T.VT-OS

Lo-T.o-a.
tcrraCJ"'T)S

' ' LO"'TO.VT.,L

La-T.VT-0.

'il<ra.VT-0.

X.=iia-aO""a.-v

va-a. v
DUAL

Lo-Tio-n to-,-aa-a. v

i.o-Tci.v i.o-Tci. VT-OS LuTci. vT-L

ta-,.a. v

N. A. V. U<ra.vT-E tr.<rii <rO.VTE G. D. a-6.vT-OLV <r.trO.LV iia-ci.vT .. OLV

PLURAL

Lo-T.VT-E i.tTT. VT -OL V

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

U<ra. VT-ES'
liO"".VT-WV

Ua-ii a-( v) U<ra. vT-a.s

U<rii<ra.L <rii<rwv iia-.a-a.s a-.a-a.s

U<ra.vTO. iio-6. VT(l)V 'triia-L( v)

iio-a.vT-0.

' la-T.<rL (V)

ltrT.<rO.LS l<rT.<rL( V)

LO'"Tcl.vT-a.s

LuTfo-is

ta-TO.vT-a.

So are declined .,..a,evui.s having educated, uTf}ui.s having set.

309]

DECLENSION OF P A!tTJ Cl l'LES

-El.S,

83
(p.tverbs): n8d.,

307. Participles 111 placiug, tOlJ<;; giving. N. V. Gen. ])at. Ace.

TL9e(s TL9VTOS
TI..9vT-L

-Et.a-a.,

-EV j

-ous,

-0\JO"Q.,

-ov

SINGULAR

n9tto-n TL9E(O"']S TL9ewu TL9etci-n-v

TL9v TL9VTOS
TL9vT-L

s.l>o..ls 8L80VTOS s.sovT- 8L80VTn

8L8ocrn 88o..lcr1]s 88o..luu 8L8ocrn-v

88ov 8LOOVTOS 8L80VTL 88ov

TL9VTl1

TL9v
DCAL

N.A.V. TL9vT-E TL9VTOW G. D.

TL8do-ii.

Tt.8VT-E

TL9e(crnw

TL9VTOLV
PLURAL

8.8ovr-e 8L80VTOW

88ovcrii 88o..lcrnw

8L80VTE 8L80VTOW

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

TL9vT-ES
TL9vT-CJW

TL9ELO"l1L
TL9Et0"'00V

TL9VTl1 TL9vTWV n9eio- (v)

TL9VT-a.

8LOOVTES 8L80VTWV 88oo- (v) 8L8ovTns

88ocro. 88oucroov 88o.Ucrns 88o..lcriis

8L80VT(1 8L80VTWV 88oo- (v) 8L80VTCJ.

TL9Eio-L( V) TL9VTl1S

TL9e(o-ns TL9e(o-iis

So are infiected O<ls hnving placed, 1ratowOeis having been educcttfd, uiJeis having !Jeen loosed, oovs having given. a. In participles with stems in ovr of J.tt-verbs the o belongs to the verb-stelll.

308.

Participles in
8ELKV'S 8ELKVVVTOS
8nKvtlvT-L

-s, -o-n, -uv: nKv6s

SINGUI.AR

showiug, cp6 born.

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

8HKVO"'O.

8ELKV..Jv

.pij, cpvvTOS

cj>o-o. cj:6<r1]S .p6<ru cpo-n-v

8ELK>'<r1JS

8ELKVVVTOS
SuKvUvT-1.
Set.KvVv
DGAL

8EL.Kt<i:ru
8eLKV"a-a.-v

8ELKVVVT-n

cj>vvT- cj>vvT-a.

cp ..lv cpvVTOS cj>..lvT- cj>..lv

N.A.V. G.. D.

fiELKV-'VT-E
8ELKVV'VT-OLV

cj>..lvT-< cj:il<rii cpvvT-OLV cj:'<rnLV

cj>..lvT-<
cpvvT-OLV

l'LCIUL

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

8ELKv...lvT-ES
8ELKVtJ VT-WV

ELKV'a-0.1..
8et.KviJ0"'6lV

SetKvvT-a.
8ELKvtJvT-WV

cpvvTES

cpvvTWV
cpo-L( V) cj>..lvT-ns -os:

8ELKVO"L (V)
8EI.KVtiVT-O.S

8ELKV'!TCJ.LS
8ELKVijO'"i.S

8ELKVO"L (V)
8ELKVliVT-a.

cpO"CJ.L cj>o-oov cp61TnLS cjJo-iis

cj>..lvT-n

cpvvTWV
<!>ilo-(v) cj>vvTn

309. Perfect active participles m -ws, -va., loosecl, Elw; knowing.

I.vKw<>

having

309 a. D. Hom. hfi.R ecrraws, ecrrawcra, ecrra6s, G. crraoros, ('(C., Hdt. cruws, ia-uwcra, icrus, G. cruwros, tte. Sorne editions have lcruwra iu Hom.

84:

DECLENSIO:'\ OF ADJECTIVES
SINGULAR

[310

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace. N.A. v. G.D.

AeuKC:.s )\.EUKOTOS
EVKOT-~

EUKULO. EUKULiLS EUKllLC!EUKUL!I.-V

EUKOS EUKOTOS EUKOTL EVKOS

DUAL

dliC:.s dlioT-OS dli6T-L etlioT-a.

etliuia. dliu(Ls Etliu(q. etliu<a.-v.

Elli6s ellioT-OS flli6T-L etli6s

AEUKOT-a.

EUKOTE Ae uKoT-OLV

EUKULiL EUKULO.LV

EUKOTE EUKOTOLV
PLURAL

dooT-E dliOTOLV

etliu(L dliu(a.w

etli6T-E etlioTOLV

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

EllKOTES EUKOTo>V EUKO<TL(v) EUKOT-a.s

EUKULO.L EUKULa,V EUKULO.LS EUKULiLS

EUKOTO. EUKOTo>V EUKO<TL(V) EUKOT-a.

ellioT-ES dliOTOlV elli6cn(v) e!86T-a.s

etliuta. Etliua.v Etliu(a..s dliu(iis

ellioT-a. etlioTOlV dliocn(v) EllioT-a.

So are infiected 'II"E7ra.toeuKchs, "'I"E'lra.towKu'ia., 7re7ra.<oeuK6s having educated; -yeyovws, -yeyovva., "(E'yov6s born. a. <Trws standing (contracted from i<Traws) is infiected i<T-rws, <Trw<Ta., i<Tr6s, G. i<Trw-ros (with irregular accent, from ura.6ros), <TTW<T7J<, i<Trfl>ros; pl. N. i<Trwres, uTWua.t, i(rrWra, G. Ea-rWrwv, l7TwuWv. So rEfJJJecfJs, -reBveWua, -refJvebs dead. N. - i<Tr6s (the usual spelling in the neut. nom.) has -6s (not -ws) in imitation
of eio6s and of forms in -K6s, thus distinguishing the neuter from the masculine.

Contracted Participles.- The present participle of verbs in and the future participle of liquid verbs (401) and of .Attic futures (538) are contracted. r.p.wv hononring, 71'o<wv making, are th us declined:
310.
-aw, -<:w, -ow,
SINGULAR

N.V. Gen. J)at. Ace.

( rp.awv) Ti:p.&iv ( T p.ao VTOS) TLp.ii>vT-OS ( rp.&.ovn) TLJJ-(;)VT-1. ( rp.&.ovra.) Ti:p.a.VT-0.

( rp,d.ouua) 'T'Lp.~a-a. ( rp.a.oVif7JS) Ti:p.cl><rtJS ( rp.a.ou'(l) Ti:p.C:.crn ( rp.&.ov<Ta.v) Ti:p.&icra.-v

DUAL

( rp.dov) ( rp.&.ovros) ( rp.aovn) ( rp.&.ov)

TL!l-W V T:!I->VTOS T:!'-a.vTL

Ti:p.wv

N. A. V. ( rp.&.ovT)

Ti:p.a.vT-E

G. D.
N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

(rp.a.6vrocv) Ti:p.C:.vTOLV

( TL}J-O.O<T.) Ti:p.C:.crii ( rp..aoUuaLv) Ti:J.LJ,a-a.I.V

PLURAL

( Tp.aovrE) T:f.LWVTE ( r'i}LaOJI!OLV) TLf.I.WVT--ot.v

( T p.aOVTS) ( rp.a.6vrwv) (rp.&.ouut) ( rp.&.ovra.s)

T:p.a,VTES

Tip.C:.vT-o>V
Ti:p.a.cn(v) Ti:p.O>vT-a.s

( rp.aovua.<) ( rp.aov<Twv) ( rLp.ao{uraLs) ( T}J-OO<T.S)

np.wcra.

Ti:p.wcra.v
T'l.p.Wcra.LS
Ti.p.cl><riiS

( TLp.aovra) ( rp.a6vrwv) (rp.aou<T<) ( rp.&.ovra)

TLJ.LWVTQ.

Ti:p.C:.vTWV
Ti:J.L<ilcr(v) ..-i:p.a.vT-a.

310 D. Aeolic has also rtp.acs, ?rolecs,

o~OL~

from Tip..p.<, 7rol7Jp.L,

o~Wp.L.

ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLEXSION

SJNGUJ,AR

85

N.V. Gim. Dat. Ace.

( ?TOLWV)

1t'OL&lv
'71"0LO'VT ..QS

( 1rOLOVITa)

'lrOLOITO.

( 1ro<ov)
( 1r0Lf0VTOS)

'Jt"OLOV
1l"OLOIVT-OS 11"0\.0VT-L

( ?rOtfOVTOS) (1rodovrt) ( ?rOLfOVTa)

( 7rOL0UIT7)S) ( 7rOL0UIT!/)
( 7rodou<Tav)
DUAL

1TO.OV0"1JS
1i'OL0-60"'tl

'IT'OLOVT-1. 1TOLO'VT-Q.

( 1r0Lf0PTL) ( 7r0LfOP)

'Jt'OLO'O'"O.V

1t'OLO'V

N. A. V. ( ?rotloVT<) G. D. ( 1TOL6VTOLP)

'JT'OLOVT-E
1r0LOVT-OLV

( 7rOL0UITii)

"lLoVa-0:

( trOdOPT<)

1T'OLO'VT ..E"

( ?rOt<OU<Tatv) "JT'OLOiJO'"O.LV
PLURAL

( 1rOL0PTOtP) 'ZI'OLOUVT-OI.V

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

( ?rOtfOVTfS)
( 7rOL6PTWP) ( 'TrOtfOUIJ't) ( 7r0tf0VTUS)

1TO.OVT-ES
11"0LOUVT-WV

( 7r0tfOUIJ'at) ( 7rOL01J<Ta<s) ( 7rOL0UIJ'iis)

"JJ"OLO'O"'O.l.

( 1rOtOPTU) ( 1rOL0PTWV) ( 1rOtfOVCrL) ( 1r0tfOVTa)

'JT'OLOVT-0.
'lr'OLO\JVT-CIJV

( 7rOL0UITWP) 1TOI.O\IO"Wv
"JTOL01iO"O.LS

1rooilo-( v)
'Jt"OLO'VT-Q.S

1TOovo-L (V)
1TOLOiiVT-0.

1rOLO~CJ<.iS

a. The present participle of th us, o7Jwv, 07JO<Ta, 07Jov, G.

7JW (o7Jbw)

07Jovv-ros, o7JOVIT7JS, 07Jov-ros,

mamfest is infiected like etc.

?rOtWV:

ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLENSION

311.

and
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. V oc.

7Tov>

The irregular adjectives p.yw; great (stems p.eya- and p.Eyao-) much (stems 7Tov- an cl 7TOo-) are th us decline cl:
SJNGULAR

p.yus !Lynou .... yci.<[> p.ya.v ILyci.e

p.eycl>..1J )JoEyn1JS Jloyn>..n )JoEynT)V p.eyci.T)

)Joyu )Joeyci.ou

"II"OVS "II"OO 1TO'' "II"OVv

"I!Of) Toijs "I!O TO{jv

"II"OV orroo "II"O<i> "II"OV

J~o-vO.>..<t> !LY O. )Joyu

DUAL

.N. A. V.

!LEYnw !LEyci.ow

G. D.

J~oyna ]Joeyci.a.w

Jlo<Yci.w )loeyci.ov
PLURAL

N.V. Gen. Dat. Ace.

G.

1'-yci.o !Lynwv 1'-ynos !Lynous

)JoEyci.a.. )lo<ynw.v JloEyci.a.s )JoEy6.iis

Jloy6.a. )Joey6.wv Jloynos )Joey6.a.

"ll"oot 1rowv 'ttooi:s "ll"oovs

TOu( TO>v TOULS 'l!"oxxas

"ll"on "II"O>v 1TOOLS ,.on

311 D. Hom. has sorne forrns from the stem 1rou- ( 1rouu-) which are not A ttic:
?roto>,

N. pl. 1ros, G.

-;rowv, ]), troEITITt

(:l50 D. 2),

7rOITITL

and

1ro<TL,

86

ADJECTIVES OP JRllEGULAR VECLENS!ON

[312

a Except in the fmms pi-yas, pi-yav, yi-ya, the adjective p.-yas is inflected as if the nominative sing. nusc. were p.e-yd.os. p.-yas is sometimes found in the voc. sing. Except in 1ros, 1roMv, 1roM, the adjective 1r ,Ms is inflected as if the nominative sing. nm ..;c. were 1ros. b. The stem 1roo- is from 1ro'A~o-, i.e. 7rOfo-, f being assimilated to . c. 1rp(j.os mild fonns its masc. amlneuter sing. aud dual !rom the stem 1rpq.o-; its fern. in ali numbers from the stem 1rpii.v-, as nom. 1rpii.eia. for 1rpii'!.-<a formed like i}eLa. (297 a). Thus 1rp(jos, 1rpii.a, 1rp(jov, G. 1rprf_ov, 1rpiielii.s, 1rprf_ov, etc. In the plural we have
N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.
1rp~oL

or 'll'piiets 1rpcf.wv or 'll'piiwv 1rpcf.OLS Or 'll'piio-L( V) 1rpcf.O\IS

1rpiiELO.L 1rpiiuciiv "JI"piiELO.LS

1rpii.ELii.s

,.pq.a. or 1rpiia. '2T'pq:wv or 1rpii.6)v '11'pcf.os or 1rpiio-( v) ,.pq.a. or 'll'piia.

d. Sorne compounds of 1rous foot ( 1ro-) have -ovv in the nom. sing. ne ut. and sometimes in the ace. sing. masc. by analogy to ci1ros (290). Thus, rpl1rovs three-footed, rpl1rovv (but ace. rpl1roa tripod).
ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING

312. .Adjectives of one euding have the same termination for masculine and feminine. The neuter (like masc. and fern.) sometimes occurs in oblique cases. Examples: -yvws -y,wr-os !tnknown or unknowing, a1ra.LS d7rad5-os childless, pyf1s p-y?)r-os white, ip1ra~ ip1ra.-y-os mpacious, p.d.Kap p.d.mp-os blessed, Kd.p.cis Kd.p.avr-os unwea1ied. Here belong also certain other adjectives commonly used as substantives, as -yvp.vfJs -yvp.v~r-os light armed, 1rv1Js 7rV1Jr-os poo1, cj>v-yd.s cj>v-yd.-os fugitive, -/iX~ ijLK-os cornTade, Xawv Xa.6v-os jlatterer. Some are masculine on! y, as 8.XovrT,s (-o) volunteer. .Adj. in -is -los are feminine only: 1 E1Jvls Greek, 1rarpls (scil: -y?)) fatherland, ITvp.p.axls ( ... 6Xt<) an allied state.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

313. Comparison by -TEpo>, -Ta.Tos. -The usual endings are:

For the comparative: -rEpo> m. -rEpa f. -rEpov n. For the superlative: -raro> m. -rarr; f. -rarov n. The endings are added to the masculine stem of the positive. Comparatives are declined like Mw>, superlatives like ya8> (287). liijos (r;>w-) clear, 51J6-rEpos, 51JO-Ta.Tos; to-xpos (laxvpo-) strong, to-xpoTEpos, to-xpo-Ta.Tos; ,.iis (p.Eo.v-) black, ,.eO.v-Tepos, ,.EO.v-Ta.Tos ; J3a.ps ((3apv-) heavy, J3a.p-Tepos, J3a.p-ra.Tos; .1J8~s ( r;8w-) true, .1]8o--TEpos, .1]8o--Ta.Tos ; e-ocE~s ( "KEE<T-) fammts, E"oc~eo--TEpos, eocEcr-Ta.Tos .

.A. 1rolas. Hom. bas also 1roXMs, 1roXXT,, 1ro6v (like -ya86s), and thpse fmms are commonly used by Hdt. 1rovMs (for 1roMs) is sometimes fem. in llom.

CO.l'liPAlUSON OF ADJECTIVES

87

a. xa.pLtrrEpos, -trTO.TOS are from XO.PifTT<pOS, -TO.TOS (83, 299 b), from XO.pietS
Compounds of xapts gmce add o to the stem (xa.p<r-o-), whence bnxa.ptnflnpos more pleasing. 'lrVTJs poor has 'lr<vtr-r<pos from 'lr<v<r-npos, with e for 'YJ
gracejul.
b. Originally -npos had no other force thau to contrast one idea with another, and this function is retained in oe~!upos 1'ight ) ( pltrnpos lejt, i}phepos our ) ( li,Jh<pos yom. Hom. bas several such words : "fponpos w-ild ) ( lame, O'YJMnpa.t -yuva.ZK<s ) ( rnen, cp. 1\.rcadian ppvnpos from lipp'YJv male. Cp. 1082 b.

314. Adjectives in -os with a new, VW-Tpos, VfW'TaTO>, XaE7r0-

short penult lengthen o to w:

vto-s

dijficult, Xa7rWTEpos, xa.7l'WTaTO.

An undue succession of sl!ort syllables is thus avoided.

a. If the penult is long either by nature or by position (144), o is not lengthened: <1rr6s lean, <1rronpos, <'lrrora.ros. A stop and a liquid almost always make position here (cp. 145); as mKpos bitte1, 'lr<Kpupos, 'lr<Kpora.ros. K<v6s ernpty and trr<v6s nal'row were originally K<vfos, trT<PfOS (Ionie KLv6s, arav6s, 37 D. 1), bence K<v6npos, trnv6npos. , 315. The following drop the stem vowel o: "f<pa.t6-s aged, "f<pa.l-r<pos, -y<pa.lra.ros; 1rO.at6-s ancient, 'lrO.ai-TEpOS, 'lraai-raTOS; trXOao-s SlOW, trXOai-T<pos, axoai-TaTOS; <j>lo-s dear, <j>[-TEpOS (poetic), <j>[-TO.TOS (319, 11). a. Sorne other adjectives reject the stem vowel o and end in -cunpos, -atraros, as fiavxos quiet, raos equal, 6p8pws early. These, Jike trxo)l.alnpos and -y<palr<pos, imitate 1raa.lnpos, which is properly derived from the adverb 1rd.a.< lony ago. So p,<tra.lnpos, -airaros imitate p.eaa<- in Hom. p.<O'at-'lrows rniddle-aged. 316. -EO"TEpos, -Eo-Ta.Tos.- By imitation of words like 'YJOcr-npos, 'YJ8trra.ros (:H3), -<trnpos, -<crraros are added to stems in ov and to sorne in oo (contracted to ou). 'l'hus, e&Oaip.wv happy, <oa<p.ov-crnpos, -trra.ros; cbr)l.oiJs sirnple, a'lrOVcrTEpos (for a7rO-ffT<pos), .1rocrraros; e!lvovs Well-disposed, <votrr<pos, -ovtrraros, and so in all others in -vous from volis rnind. (Others in -oos have -ownpos: .Opowupos mo!e C!'owded from .Opbos.) a. Some stems in ov subst.it.ute o for ov ; as (from f7r<7}trp.wv jorgetjul, l'lr<'YJcrp.ova-npos) f1rL'YJtrp.6-raros ; 1riwv fat, 1ri6npos, 1roraros ; 'IT'Irwv l'ipe has 7r<7ra.lT<pos, 1r<1ra.lra.ros. Cp. 315 a. b. Other cases: (with Joss of o) lppwp.vo-s st1ong, lppwp.<vcrrepos, -erraros, ii.Kpiro-s unmixed, .KpiTtrraros, liap.evo-s glad, liq,Oovo-s abundant. 317. -a-rEpos, -o-raros.- By imitation of words like .xaplr;r<pos for xa.p<rrepos (83) from llxa.pts disar;reeable, -urnpos, -<crraros are used especially with adjectives of a bad meaning-, as K<'Irr-lcrraros ( K'IrT'YJS thiej, 321 ), KO.K'YJ'YOPlcrupos (Ka.K1)"fopos abusive), a-lcrr<pos (Mos ta.lkative).
318. Comparison by -L<Ilv, of the positive the. endings
-o-Tos.-

~wv

Rome. adjectives add t~ ~he root for the masculine and femmme, -ov

314 a. D. Hom. ln)upwra.ros (but cp. Att. ol)i1p6s), )l.ipwraros (Mepwra.ros ?). 318 D. Hom. and Doric poetry have also -<wv, which is as old as -iwv. Forms in -iwv, -tcrros are much commoner in poetry than in prose. Hom. bas {3.Otcrros (f3aBvs deep), {3pcrcrwv (f!paxvs short), {3.pottrros (f3paos slow), KVotcrros (Kop6s f!lorious), iJJKttrros (wKs quick).

88

CU.MPAl-tiSON OF ADJbCTlVES

[319

for the neuter to form the comparative, and -uro -'r} -ov to form the superlative. 'fhe vowel (or the syllable po) standing before of the n0minative is thus lost.
PoSITIVE
CoMPARA.TIV.E

SUPERLATIVE

sweet ( -1} -l}-ovi} pleasure) ora,x-11-s swift (To ,-d.x-os swiftness) 1'-y-a.-s great ( ,.;, p.-y-<Oos great ness) .}..yELvos painful (,- ti"><.-y-os pain) a.lax-po-s shameful (,- acrx-os sharne) X9-po-s hateful, hostile (,- ~X 0-os hate)

~S-11-s

~S-t01v

-ijS-LtTTOS

9iTTOIV

!LELtlllv .}..y-fOIV X8-t01v

(112, 125 f) (116)

TclX LITTOS !LYLtTTOS il.}..yLITTOS a.ta-x LITTOS X9-LtTTOS

a.tax-i01v

Forms in -iwv are declined like {3"><.,-twv (293), those in -t<TTOS like a-yafJ6s (287).

319. lrregular Comparison.- The commonest adjectives forming irregular degrees of comparison by reason of the sound changes or because se veral words are grouped under one positive, are the following. Poetic or Ionie forms are in ( ).
1. .ya.9os good

.!LELVclv (from JJ.<v-wv) (ap<lwv)

j3E)\.Tf01V

li.pLtT'TOS ( ap-<Tf}

ViT-

tue)
fi~TLtTTOS

(f3l"><.npos, not in Hom.) (Kpa,-6s powerful) (cp. KpaTos strength)

KpE(TTOIV 1 KpELa-crv

(f3l"><.TaTos, not in

Hom.)
KpclTLtTTOS

2. KllKOS bad

(Kplcrcrwv) (Kapr<ITTOS) (<f>lpnpos) ( <f>pTaTos, <f>ptcrTos) qliiiV ("><.wlwv, wlnpos) ''tTTOS KclKLtTTOS KllKiOIV ( KrJ.KWTEpos) pei01 XELplllv(xp<lwv) rneaner, de- XELpLtTTOS terior (x<tp6upos, x<p<t6npos)
;jTTOIV1
-ijtTtTOIV (for f}K-wv) weaker, infe!ior (lcrcrwv)

(ijKLcrros, rare), adv. ijKLcrra least of all

KclLtTTOS ( Ka-OS

3. Ko.Ms beautiful

KllfiiiV

beauty)

4.

.,.a.Kpos

long

!LilKpOTO.TOS
ITTO<)

(p.f}Kt-

5. 1'-ya.s great

ILYLtTTOS

319 D. Hom. has also K<pa"><.t!os yai1zful, clafty, K<ptwv, dpuiTos; p.Ylwv, Oi-y<crTos rnore, rnost d!eadf7tl (cp. p'i:"(os culd, p"'f7J6< chilling), Ki}o<crTos (K7Jos dea1, K'i)os care).

C.lPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
6. 1'-iKpos srmall (lMxa, f. of l'Aaxus)
!LiKpOTEpos aTTOlv, acrcr01v !LLKpOTO.TOS

89

(for la-

clX LO"TOS

xwv)

7.

Myos

S. 1rovs

(inscriptions) (1r-6'Al!;wv Hom. rather less) much, pl. many 'II"E(o>V, 'II"01v, neut. 'II"ov,
'II"EV

little, pl. few

1'-Ek.lv E!t01v

(p.errros, rare)
(ytcrTOS

9. f>45os easy
(p'f/lows)

pq..,v (Ion.
(p'fJlnpos) ( raxT<pos) (</JlTEpos)

p'1/lwv)

pij.crTOS

(P'f}lro.ros, pfJ<crros)
TclXI<rTOS

10. Ta.xvs quick

11. cj>(os dear

ei.TTwv, McrcrOlv

( raxvraros)
cj>(TO.TOS cj>La.ITa.TOS (Xenoph.)

(Xenoph.) ( </J<'Alwv, rare in Hom.)

cj>a.(Tepos

a. p.elvwv, tl,punos express aptitude, capacity or worth (able, brave, excellent) ; (Je'Ariwv, {3'Arunos, a moral idea (viTtuous) ; Kpdrrwv, Kpcirunos, force and superiority (strong) (?)rrwv is the opposite of Kpelrrwv); 'A~wv means ?nOTe desimble, more agreeable ( ciJ 'Ar/irrTE my good friend) ; KaKiwv, Kci.K<rrros express moral perversity, cowardice ; xeipwv, xelpurros, insufficiency, lack of a quality (less good) (worthless, goodj01 nothing is </Ja'Aos). b. lM.rrwv, ~'Aiirrov, lMx<rrros refer to size: srnaller (opposed to p.d!;wv); . orto multitude: feweT (opp. to 1r'Adwv). p.elwv, p.eov, Tjrrov, ijK<<rra also belong both tO JKpbs and to Ol-yos. c. The orators prefer the longer form of 1r'Aelwv, especially the contracted 1r'Adw, .,. 'Aelovs, but the neut. 1r 'Aov. 1r 'Aev is not contracted from 1r 'Af!ov. 320. Defectives. -Sorne comparatives and superlatives are derived from prepositions or adverbs:
('rrp6 bejore) ( li1rp ove1, beyond) ('II''f}crlov near) ( 'll'pop-yav serviceable) 1rp6npos former 'II'pr<pas (poetic) higher, 1rpwros ji1st 1rpraros (poetic) high-

supe1ior.
11'7J<rLalrepas 7rpovp-y<alTEpas crrepas later, latter
~crxaras

est, suprerne.
7r7J<Halraras vcrraros latest, last

a. -aras appears in v1raras highest,

farthest, extreme (from

<O.

321. In poetry and sometimes in prose comparatives and superlatives are formed from substantives and pronouns. Hom. bas {3arr<'Aev7pos more kingly,
320 D. Hom. has o'!I'Mrepos younger, o1r'Abraras. Severa! defectives denote place; l1racrcrvrepas (<irrrrov nemer), 1rapalrepas (1rci.podJev before), p.vxolraras (p.vxa in a 1ecess). -aras in p.craros, p.crcraras (p.rros middle), 1rvp.aras last, varos lowest . .For vcrraros Hom. has rrrri.nos ; and oevntros last from 15eTEpos second.

90

DECLESSIOX OF

PERSO~AL

PRONOCXS

[322

king), hatpdraros a closest companion ( ha<pos colmade ), Kvvupos more doglike, -raros (Kvwv dog), Kovp6upos more youthful (Kofipos a youth). Aristophanes has Kerrri<rraros most thievish (K7rT7JS thief, 317), and ar6raros his very self, ipsissimus. 322. Double Comparison. -A double comparative occurs sometimes to produce a comic effect, as Kvvrepdrrepos (321). A double superlative is 1rpwrwros.
-raros ({Jaut"l\evs
-rpo<>, -raro;

Comparison by p..ov, p.L-rra. - Instead of the forms in or -wv, -urro<; the ad verbs p..ov more, p.&.A.urra most, may be used with the positive; as p.ov cp{.o<; 11w1e dear, dearer, p.&.A.urra rf>{.o<; most dear, dearest. This is the only way of comparing participles and words that do not take the comparative and superlative endings (p..ov ~Kwv more willing).
323.

a. Comparison by J.I..ov, J.l.dtura is common in the case of compound adjectives, adjectives with a prepositional prefix, verbal adjectives in -r6s, and adjectives in -ws. 324. To express equality or injeriority oiirw as ( often in correlation with &u1rep), f}rrov less, may be placed before the positive. Thus, as good as handsome may be expressed by ovrws d:ya8s &u1rep K< KaMs, C,u1rep d:ya8s oVrw Kal
KaMs, otx f}rrov Kas 7} Kal -ya86s.

PRONOUNS

325. The Persona! Pronouns. - The pronouns of the first, second, and third person are declined as follows:
SJNGULAR

Nom. Geu. Dat. Ace.

-yC

cr-u thou

--he, she, it (325 d)

o ; o enclitic

fLoii ; fLO" enclitic" fLOL ; fLOL enclitic fL; fLE enclitic

enclitic cro( ; cro enclitic cr; <rE enclitic

croii ; cro" DUAL

or; o1 enclitic
1! ;

e enclitic

N.A. G.D.

vC:.

we two

cr<j>C:. you cr<j><Pv

PLURAL

two

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

-JfLELS -JfLWV -JfLLV -JfL.S

WB

~fLELS ~fL.:V 'l1fl-LV ' llfLtlS

you

cr<j>Ets they crcj>O>v .;<j><cr(v) cr<j>.s

vp.p.-

325 D. 1. Homer infiects the persona! pronouns as follows. (The forms pp.-1 are Aeolic).

325]

DECLE~SJON

OF PERSON AL PRONOUNS

1. The enclitic forms p.ou, p.o<, p.; <Tou, <To<, ""' are used when the pronoun is unemphatic, the longer forms ip.o, ip.ol, ip. and the accented <To, <Toi, <T are
y6>, ytllv uu, 'MIV'Ij uEio, uo, uEo (en cl. r fJoELO, tJoo, f.LE, A3D6)' O'E, Geu. f'oEU (en cl.), tJo9Ev uEu (encl.), u9Ev Dat. uot, TOL (en cl.), TEt v tJoot, f'-0 (en cl.) Ace. r:r, uE ( encl.) tJoi, f.LE (en cl.)

Nom.

SJNGULAU
..(.

Eto, io, o (en cl.),

Et1',

w (encl. ),

i9Ev, 9Ev (en cl.) ot, ot, ot ( encl.) , i, (encl.), fLLV (encl.)
u~we

DUAL

N. A. G. D.

v.a>, v<f! v.a>v

oiJtJoEtS, l.f'of'oES r oiJf'oE((I)ll' oiJfLWV

0'~<1\'i, 0'~ u~<l\'iv, O'~''"

(en cl.)

( 62)

u~w'v ( encl.)

PLURAL

Nom. Gen.

Dat. { oiJfLtv, l.fLfLL(v) Ace. { oiJfLa.s, l.fLfLE

..1fLELS, llfLfLES (and VOC.) ,}f.I.Etwv, ,)fLWv u~Etwv, ucj>wv, u~ewv (en cl.), u~<l\v u~tO'L(.v), O"~r:r(v) (encl.), O"~LV (en cl.) l ' O"~a.s, ucj>Ens (en cl.), UfLEO.S 1 Uf'of'oE ucj>E (en cl.)
H

<Tc/> (encl.) is used as accus. of ali genders and numbers.

2. Herodotus infiects the persona! pronouns as follows:

SINGULAR

Nom. Geu. Dat. Ace. Nom. Gen. Dat.

y<I> f'-o, fLE, fLEU (en cl.) fLO(, fJoOL ( encl.) tJoi, f'oE (en cl.)

O"V O'O, O"E, O'EU (en cl,) uot, TOL (en cl.) u, uE (en cl.)
PLURAL

Ei. (encl.) ot (encl.) (en cl.), fLLV (en cl.) ucj>Ets O"cj>wv, ucj>E(l)V (en cl.) ucj>(O"L, O"cj>LO"L (en cl.) ucpa.s, O"cj>Ens (en cl.), neut. ucj>Ea. (en cl.)

oiJf'oELS iJtJowv iJtJotv Ace. { iJtJoa.s

,)f'oELS ,)f'o(IIll UfJoLV ' ,}fLO.S

<Tcf>l<T< is used for nvTos, -as; <Tc/>< (en cl.) for nvTos, -as ; <Tcf>a. (en cl.) for a>lTa. 3. Ionie p.<v (encl.) is used in ali genders (eum, eam, id), but not in t!Je plural. llp.p.<, IJp.JLE occur a few times, <TOEv often, in tragedy. 4. The chief forms peculiar to Doric are : I. i'(<iJv also before consonants ; G. op.os, ip.os, f}lofVS; D. lp.lv; Pl. N. cip.s; G. cip.6>v, cip.wv; D. cip.lv(f), p.tP; A. tlp.. II. n), TOP'YJ; G. Tos, nos, ns, To, n, TEO; D. Tlv, Tiv71; A. T, +tv, TU; Pl. N. Dp.s; G. ~p.wv; D. Dp.lv, vp.tv; A. Dp.. III. G. os, o; D. flP; A. vlv; Pl. G. <Ttf>.dwv, >fwv; D. cf>lv, >flv; A. <T</J, >f.

92

DECLENSION OF a:th6s

used when the pronoun is emphatic. Thus, 56< p.o1 -r {31{3lov give me the b!Jok, obK tp.ol, <Tol hr1{3ove6ovrn they are ploU'ill(J not ayainsi me, but agaimt you. See 187 a. On the use after prepositions see 187 N. 2. b. For i'YJJ, ip.ol, <TV the emphatic g'YW'Y<, g/MI'Y< (186 a), O"V'Y< occur.
lp.ofi'Y<, tp.l'Y<

Also

c. The use of the plural you for thou is unknown in Ancient Greek; bence
p.e< is used only in addressing more thau one person. d. Ofthe fonns of the thirdpersonal pronounonlythe dativesoland<Tq)I<TI(v) are

cornmonly used in Attic prose, and then only as indirect reflexives (1228). To express the persona! pronouns of the third person we find usually : hvo<, ovros, etc., in the nominative (1194), and the oblique forms of a-r6< in ali other cases. e. For the accus. of oi'i the tragic poets use v1v ( encl.) and <Tq)e (en cl.) for masc. and fem., both sing. and pl. ( = eum, eam; eos, eas). Doric so uses vw. <Tq)lv is rarely singular (ei) in tragedy. f. ?]p.Giv, i}p.'iv, i}p.fis, bp.wv, p.v, bp.fi<, when unemphatic, are sometimes accented in poetry on the penult, and -v and -fis are usually shortened. Thus, ijp.wv, Tjp.1v, Tjp.as, 'bp.wv, vp.1v, vp.a< -v and -0.< are sometimes shortened even if the pronouns are emphatic, and we have T,p.iv, f7p.<, p.iv, p.&s. <Tq)as occurs for O"q)fi<.

326. 8terns.- I. (<)p.e- (cp. Lat. me), vw- (cp. Lat. no-s), (f)p.o-, ?]p.e-. lp.ov is from <;do ; f7p,<< from p.p.<-<< (37) with the rough breathing in imitation of Dp.e< ; T,p.wv from f7p.lwv, i}p.s from T,p.lus with ii not 'Y/ by 56. f-ydJ is not connected with these stems. II. fJ'v- and fJ'e- from rf<; ro-; O"</Jw-; from op.p.ep.<(37). III. ~ for O"f< (cp. Lat. se), U for O"<f<, ol for O"f0-1, and <Tq)e-. The
form of the stems and formation of the cases is often obscure.

327. The Intensi'Ve Pronoun a.iJ.,.os. -avr6> self is declined thus.:

, SINGULAR PLURAL

Masc. J<'em.

Neut.

Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

Nom. a.'T6s a;ITfJ a;T6 N. A. a.'T~ a:VTi a.'T~ Gen. a.'Toii a.'Ti]s a:-ro G. D. a.'To'Lv a;Ta.Lv a.'-roLv D at. a.-Tip a. "TT a. 'T~ Ace. a.VT6v a;TTJv n'Tci

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

a.'ToL

a.'Ta.C a.VTO.

a.VTWv a.VTWv a.'T6>v a.Tots a.'Ta.s a.Toi:s a;ToVs a.-Tis a:Tcl.

ar6< is declined like 'Ya86s (287), but there is no vocative and the neuter nominative and accusative have no -v. But 1'ar6v the same is common (328 N.).

328. avr6> is a definite adjective and a pronoun.

It has three

meanings:
a. self: standing by itself in the nominative, avr< vfJp or o v1}p a-r6< the man himself, or (without the article) in agreement with a substantive or pronoun ; as vopos arov of the man hirnself 327 D. Hdt. has avrlwv in the genitive plural. worbs, rwr6 (Hdt.), see 68 n.
For the crasis wvr6s (Hom.),

REFLgXIVE AND POSSESSIVE PlW:NOUNS

93

b. him, her, it, them, etc. : standing by itself in an oblique case (never in the nominative). The oblique cases of aor6s are generally used instead of o, oi, g, etc., as o 1rar"r]p aoro his fathe1, ol 1ratos avrwv thei1 chilclren. c. same: when it is preceded by the article in any case : 6 ars vf}p the same man, ro aro vop6s of the same man. N.-The article and aor6s may unite by crasis (68 a): aiJT6s, arf}, miJT6 or ravr6v; ra!lro, mvr1)s ; ravn;>, ravri7, etc. Distinguish a!Jrf} the same f. from avr'7 this f. ; ravrd. the same n. from Tam these things n. ; Tary from TaUT1J.
329. Reflexive Pronouns.- The reflexive pronouns (referring back to the subject of the sentence) are formed by compounding the stems of the personal pronouns with the oblique cases of avnl. In the plural both pronouns are declined separately, but the third person has also the compounded form. The nominative is excluded by the meaning. There is no dual.

myself
Gen. !la."Toii, -ijs Dat. !la."T'', -t Ace. jla.l!Tv, -ijv

thyself

himself, herself, itself

o-ea."Toii, -ijs ( o-a."Toii, -ijs) a. UTO, -i]S, -OV ( a.ITO 1 -i]S, -O') a.uTip, -', -'P (a.'T4', -'ft, -ip) O"EC."Tii>, O"O."T'', -i\) O"EC."TV, -ijv ( O"O."TV, -ijv) a.uT6v, -'ftv, -6 ( a.VT6v, -T]v, -6)

-n (

ourselves yourselves Gen. ~.,_Wv a.TWv ,Jp.&v a.V-rWv Dat. iJ!ltv a.l>Tots, -a.ts .,} jlv a.llTo'Ls, -a.'Ls

themselves
a.uTWv or O"'cJ>Wv a:TWv a.vTots, -a.ts, -oLs or O"'cJ>Lo-Lv

a.'ToLs, -a.ts

a.uToVs, -<is, -6. or o-~&s a.V' -' TOUS, -O.S

a. For iavrwv, etc., we find arwv, aros, -as, aTous, -ds. of himself from a6ro (328).

Distinguish aro

330. Possessive Pronouns.- Possessive pronmins, formed from the stems of the personal pronouns, are declined like ya8, c'J.~w (287).
jlS jl'lj jlOV my, rny own; mine O"S o-1] o-ov thy, thine own; thine iJ!'-Tepos -a -ov our, ou1 own; ou1s .,}1'-Tepos -a -ov y our, yoU1' own; yours o-j>Tepos -a -ov thei1 own

[ls

~-

lv

his (he1, its) own]

329 D. Hom. never compounds the two pronouns: thus, pi8Ev a6rijs, <Toi a6T<j], oi avr{p, af1T6v, g a.orf}v. Hdt. has a few cases of the uncompounded forms; usually i~J.ewvro, -rtf), -r6v, aewuro, fwvro, wvrWv, -ocrL, -os, and u~wv a6rwv, etc. The forms with Ewv started with iwvr<IJ in the dative from o() a6T<j], and spre:..d thence to the other Citses. 330 D. 1. Hom. has also TEos thy, 6s for 8s his, her own, ii!J.os 011r, !J.os your, tT<j>6s thei1 (rarely of the singular), vw'tTEpos of us two, tr<j>w'ITEpos of you twu. For 1"6s AtLic poetry may use dfJ-6s (sometimes printed p.6s) our. 2. os, 6s in Hom. may mean my own, yom own (1230 a).

DECLENSJO:-;' OF l'lW:'\0\JXS: .~OLV,

[331

o ip.os my j1iend (adj.) from

a. Distinguish the adjectival from the pronominal use: oip.Os q,iXos or o q,iXos q,iXos ip.os u jriend of mine (pron. ). See ll\l6 a. b. os is not used in Attic prose. .For his, her, its, avro, -1js, -o are used.

331. Reciprocal Pronoun.- The reciprocal pronoun, meaning one another, each other, is made by doubling the stem of ao> (.\.\-ao-). It is w;ed only in the obliqne cases of the dual and plural. (Cp. alii alimum, alter alteri~ts).
DUAL PLURAL

Gen. Dat. Ace.

QhTJhOLV QhhTJhOLV O.>->-f)>-w

QhTJhO.LV QhTJhO.LV <i.>-f)>-a

QhhTJhOLV <i.>-f)ow O.>->-f)>-w

QhTJhWV <i.hTJOLS <i.TJhOVS

<i.f)hwv 0.>-f)a.Ls <i.f)>-as

QhhTJhWV
QhhTJhOLS hh1Jh0.

332. The Definite Article.- The defini te article d-, ro-) is th us declined :
SINGULAR DUAL

o,

~'

r6 (stems

o-,

PLURAL

Nom. Geu. Dat. Ace.

ci TOV Tc{) TOV

~ TTJS TO' Tij Tip TTJV TO

TO

N.A. G. D.

TW
TOLV

TW
Tot v

TW
TOt V

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

ot
T(v

a.t
TCV

..a.
TIV

To'Ls

Ta.Ls

TO'iS

TOVS

TO.S "'

..a.

a. The defini te article is a weakened demonstrative pronoun, and is still used as a demonstrative in Homer (1100). b. rci (especially) and rav, the feminine forrns in the dual, are very rare in the au thors, and are unknown on A ttic prose inscriptions of the classical period.

333. Demonstrative Pronouns. -The chief demonstrative pronouns al'e oSt: this (here), oro<; this, that, Kt:vo<; tlwt (there, yonder).

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

CISE TO!iE Tep!iE TOV!iE

i)!iE TTJO"!iE -rfl!iE -rf) v SE

TO!iE TOV!iE -repliE To!iE

0\ITOS
TOlJT0\1

SINGULAH

O.Vr1J TO.VTT)S
Ta.11T1]

TO'TO
TOitT0\1

Kei:vos
Kdvou
EKELV'P

KdVTJ
KdV1)S

Keivo Ke(vou

TOVT'f'
TOiiTOV

TOVT'tl

'

Ketvn
KdV1]V

KfLV'f'
KEivo

TO.VTT)V

TO'TO

EKEi:vov

332 D. Hom. has also gen. roo, gen. dat. dual rov; nom. pl. roi, rai; gen. pl. fem. rciwv; dat. pl. masc. ron, fem. ri/en, ri/s (Hdt. rou<, ri/u<). Doric are rw, rs, etc. ; pl. also N. rol, rai; G. fem. rv. Generally poeti~ are rou<, rau<. roi p.h, Tol lf occur rarely in tragedy for o! p.h, o! f. 333 D. For rouo< Hom. !ms also rouo<uu< or rouo<u<. Doric has n. pl. Tollro<, ravra<, gen. pl. fem. ravrv ( Aeol. raiirciv). nvos occurs in Il dt. (together with hvos). Doric and Aeolic have K1jvos.

334]

DECLENSION OF OE, O~TOS, KELVOS

DUAL

95
KELVII>
Kdv~~>

N. A. G. D.

,..:.s. ,..:.s. ,..:.s.

TotvSE TotvSE TOtvSE a.'(SE Teil v SE Tiicr5e Tcl.SE 1'cilv5e

TOiiTc-l

TOVTQ)

TOVTt
TOiJTOI.V

Kdv~~>

-ro'liTOI.V T011TOC.V

KELVOLV kdvoc.v KELVOLV

Nom. otSE Gen. 'l'cilvSe Dat. To<cr5e Ace. 'I'Ovcr5e

O'UTOL

. .

PI,URAL
O.'VTO.L

'I'O.''I'a.
TO\JTV

KE'LVOL
KdV(I)V

Ketva.~
tcdVQlV

KE'LVO.

TOiiTU)V 'I'OV'I'II>V

KELVII>V

Ta.tcr5e Totcr5e

,.a.s.

TOiiTOLS Ta.VTG.I.S 'I'OV'I'O~S

KELVOLS tcE!va.LS KELVO~S

'I'OV'I'OVS 'I'O.VTiiS

TO.'TO.

KELV01JS tcELvas

KEtva.

a. 8e is forme from the old demonstrative o, ?], r6 this or that, with tlie indeclinable demonstrative (and enclitic) en ding -e here (cp. hi-c from h-ce, Fr. ce-ci). For the accent of ije, oroe, oJe see 186. b. oliros bas the rough breathing and ., in the same places as the article. ou corresponds to the o, av to the a, of the article. For oliros as a vocative, see 1288 a. (o1iros is from o+the particle *v+ the demonstrative suffix ro + s). c. Kevos has a variant form Kvos in poetry, and sometimes in prose (Demosthenes ). ( hevos stands for he(, )-evos from he'i there + suffix -evos.) d. Other demonstrative pronouns are
rou6ue .,0,6ui5e TTJ<K6ue roufJe ro<lie TTJ<KfJo rou6vi5e rot6ve TTJ<K6ve

so much, so many} pointing forward such (in quality) (to what follows). so old, so great

These are formed from -/Je and the (usually) poetic r6uos, roos, TrJ'!I.lKos with the same meanings. e. Combinations of the above words and ollros are
'TOCTOTOS TOLOTOS

TOUa VTT}
TOLat'JT't]

'T'TJLKO'TOS

'T'f/LKaV'T'T}

rouoro(v) rotoro(v) 'TTJLKO'To(v)

80

much, 80 many }pointing backward such (in quality) (to what precedes). so old, so great

The forms in -v are more common than those in -o. Attic prose inscriptions have only -ov. f. The dual rarely bas separate feminine forms. g. The deictic su:ffix - may be added to demonstratives for emphasis. Before it a, e, o are dropped. Thus, oiJt this man here, i]oi, rooi, G. rovt, .,.,uot, etc~ ; oirrout, avri]t, rouri, oilrort, rourwvi. .So with other demonstratives and with adverbs: rouovrout, ovrwui, wi. For - we have, in comedy, --yi or (rarely) -o formed from -y(e), (e) + t. Thus, airrTJ')'i, rouro-yt, rouroi5t.

334. Interrogative and lndefinite Pronouns.- The interrogative pronoun ,.[,, T{ who, wh!:ch, what ? never changes its accent to the grave (154). The indefinite pronoun Tt>, Tt any one, some one, anything, something is enclitic (181 b).
333 e, D. Hom. always, Hdt. rarely, bas the final v. 334 D. Hom. and Hdt. have G. rio, re, D. "~'<'(re/) Hom.), G. r~wv, D. ro<U<. These forms are also indefinite and enclitic (gen. rewv Hdt. ). Hom. bas /lu ua for the indefinite nva.

96

DECLEXSION OF T(S, TLS, ETC.

SJ:-IGVLAR

[335

lnte?-rogative Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. N.A.V. G.D. Nom. Geu. Dat. Ace.
TLV-ES TLV-II>V TL-Irl( v) TLv-o.s 'TL v-o.
TLv-6.s

lndefinite
TL 'TLS Tw-6s, TO' Tw-!, T~ TL
DUAL
1'LVcl

TLS TLv-os, TLV-L, TLVO. TLV-E Tlv-ow

'TOV

TL

'T<fl

TL
TLV-

TLV-OLV
PLURAL

TLV-0.

TLV-S
'TW-OlV

TLv-Q. TL-ITL(v)
'Tl.V-Q.

a. ll.rra (not enclitic) is sometimes used for the indefinite nvci. li-rra is derived from such locutions as 7roarra, properly 1roM +na (for r~a).
335. iX.os.- The indefini te pronoun .os another (Lat. alius, cp. llO) is declined like UV'TOS: aos, d'l], .o (never .ov). 336. ~e'ivo..- The indefini te pronoun ova, al ways used with the article, means such a one. It is declined thus : sing. o, i}, r aeva; ro, rijs, ro oevos; r,;J, rii, r4' OEVL; rv, rhv, TO ckiva; plnr. (masc.) ol oeves, TWV o~lvwv, 'TOS oei'vas. Example : b oeva ro oevos rv ova el<JrJ'Y"f<ev such a one son of such a one impeached such a one [D.] 13. 5. ova is rarely indeclinable. Its use is colloquial and it occurs (in poetry) only in comedy.
337. Other indefinite pronominal adjectives are: ~'I"Epos, -li, -ov : with article, the otJ!er, one of" two, the one (Lat. alter, alteT1tte1); without article, other, another, a second (alitts). By crasis (G9) tiHpos, Oo:repov, etc. Kci.TEpos, -li, -ov: each (of two) ute1que; pl. eithe1 paTty, both pa1ties, as utTiquc. ~Ko. II"Tos, -1], -ov: each, each one, eveTy, evmfj one, used of more thau one (quisque). fLOvos, -1], -ov: al one, only, sole. .,..s (299): all, enti1e, eve~y. The negatives ov6Els, fL1J6E!s (349 b) no one (poetical ol!ns, 1-'-hns, in prose only olin, 1-'-hn, declined like r!s; accent 186), Lat. nemo, nullus. ov6Tepos, fL1J6TEpos neitheT of two (Lat. neute1).

338. Relative Pronouns.- The relative pronoun 6<;, ;;, 6 who, which, that is declined thus: 338 D. 1. Hom. uses the demonstrative forms o, iJ, r6 (332) as relatives (1105). In this case the nom. pl. has roi, rai (332 D. ). 2. Besides the forms in 338, Hom. has gen. So (miswritten Sov) and 3. Hdt. bas 5s, ij, r6, ot, a.t, ra. In the oblique cases he uses ro, r1js, etc. ; though, especially after prepositions capable of elision, he has the relative forms, as ai oli, 7rap' c;, Kar' ?lv, v7r' wv; also ES ().

g"'

339]
SINGUI~AR

DECLENSION OF

os, O<TTLS
PLURAL

97
Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

ils

0\J

.. ...
tlv

ij
~s
TI

P
()

0\J

DUAL

N.A. G.D.

;;, " oi.v otv oiv

;;,

ot

. a.t . "'" "'"

ois

li
~v

a.ts

ots

.f)v

oUs &s

&.

a. The feminine dual forms tl and alv are seldom, if ever, used in Attic. b. lis is used as a demonstrative in Homer and sometimes in prose (1113). c. The enclitic particle -1rep may be added to a relative pronoun (or adverb) to emphasize the connection between the relative and its antecedent. Thus, 5tr-7r<p, i]-1rep, l>-1r<p the ve1y person who, the very thing which; so wtr7r<p just as. otr7r<p is declined like lis. d. Enclitic r is added in q) <Pr on condition tliat, oios u (186 a) able to, lir< inasmuch as.
339. The indefiuite or genetal relative pronoun oun>, ~rt>, o n wlwever (any-who, any-~oldch), any one who, whatever, anything which, inflects each part (6> and rl>) separately. For the accent, see 186.

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. N.A. G. D. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

So-TI.S
0l)T\.VO"' :TO'U
~TLVL,
~

SINGULAR

1\Tt.S

S Tl.
O~TLVOS, (),-ou
qrTLVL 1

~<TTWOS

lTqJ

n-rv
;)vTLVQ.

8T'f?

OvTLVO.

;;,..
.STI.VE

DUAL
lSTLVE

{,JTLVE

O'i:VTLVOW

otvnvow
PLURAL

otvTLVOLV

orTLVES
JvTLV~V, )T(I)V

aXT~<VES
WVTLVWV

t'T'LVO.,

WVTLVWV, STeV

liTT a.
0TOLS

OL<TTL<TL(v),
oiJ<:rTI.VO.S

STOLS

a.t<rTL<TL (V)
fitTT\.VU.S

0 L<TTL<TL (v)'
a:n.vo., "
it'T'TU.

a. The neuter 15 n is sometimes printed ii,n to a void confusion with the conjunction lin that, because. b. The slJOrter forms are rare in prose, but almost universal in poetry ( especially lirov, or4J ). Inscriptions have almost al ways lirov, lir4J, ii.rrct. c. The plural arra is to be distinguished from li. rra (334 a). 339 D. Hom. bas the following special forms. The fmms not in ( ) are used also by Hdt. In the nom. and ace. Hdt has the usual forms.
S!NGULAR PLURAL

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.

(oTLS) (STTEO), (liTTEU) STE\J

0TE'tJ

() TTL)
STEO>V OTOL<TL

&a-a-a.

(STwa.)
GREEK GRAM.-'

() TTL) 7

(STwa.s)

&.o-O"'a.

98

CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS

[340

d. rls may be added to inroTEpos, otT os, alos (340) to make them more indefini te, as J1fo6s ns of 1ehat.~oever kin tl. e. o1iv, ofJ, or ofJ1roTE lllay be added to the indefinite prononns to make them as general as possi!Jle, as OITTtiTov (or otTns oov), fJr<tToP, orwv any one whateve1, any thing whateve1, an so o7rowviT-nvas-ov, oiTT<IT-ofJ-7rou, or OITT<IT-c,.q11'or-ov. In these combinations al! relative or interrogative force is !ost. f. The nncompounded relatives are often nsed in an exclamatory sense, anrl sometimes as indirect interrogatives. Indefi11ite relatives may be used as indirect interrogatives.

340. Correlative Pronouns. -Many pronominal adjectives correspond to each other in form and meaning. In the following list poetic or rare forms are placed in ( ).
Interrogative: Direct or Indirect Indefinite (EllClitic)
DemonstratiVe

Relative (Specifie) or

Excla1nntory

lndefinite Ilelative or Indirect Interrogative

rls who?

rLs

( o, os) oo this

os VJho, which oiTns whoever,

which? what? some one, any (here), hic qui? on", aliquis, ovros this, that quidam is, ille hei:vos ille
7rbTpOS

qui

any one who q11isquis, q11icunque

071'0TpOS

7rbTpos or grEpos the one or l o7rOTpos which ojtwo? 71'0rEp6s one of 1 the otlter of two 1 whichever two (rare) alte1 of the two ute1? alTos as rnuch as, as many as quantus, quot alos of which

whichevm of the two utercumqtte

o7r61TOS

7I'OIT6s of some 7rbtTos how so ( TOITOS) quantity or rnuch, .much? how TOIT61To so many? quan- numbeT 'TOCTOTOS tus? quot? many tantus, tot
7rOL'oS'

ofwhatever size, number quantuscumque, quotquot

(nroZ'os

of what sort ? sort q11alis?

7rrJ[KOS

7ro<6s of some ( roos) ro<61To

TOLOTOS

J talis

l such
rso

sort, (such) as qua lis

of whatever sort qualiscumque

1I'rJlKos

how olrl? how large?

ofsome age, size

old, iso ( T7]lKOS) \young, rrJ<K6tToe i sa T'f}LKOTOS lzarge, j sa lgreat

071'7J[KOS f}iKOS Of of whatever age which age, size, (as old, or size laTge) as

340 D. Hom. has (Aeolic) 1r1r in o71'7rbTpos, o7r7roos, and aiT in oiTITos, r61TtTos, etc. Hdt. has K for,.. in (o)KoTEpos, (o)K6tTos, (o)Koos.

ADVERBS

99

ADVERBS

341. Origin. -Adverbs, like prepositions and conjunctions, were originally case forms, made from the stems of nouns and pronouus. Some of these nominal and pronominal stems have gone out of common use, so that only petrified forms are left in the adverbs. Some of these words were still felt to be live cases; in others no consciousness of their origin survived. Many adverbs show old suffixes joined to the stem or to a case form (342). It is sometimes uncertain whether we should speak of adverbs or of nouns with local endings.

Nominative (rare): .,..,;~ with clenchedfist, L1ra~ once, avap,l~ pell-mell. Genitive: V7Js day after to-morrow, Ws next, 1ro, o whe1e, aro in the very place, K1roowv out of the way (K + 1rowv); by analogy, lp,1roWv in one' s way. Dative: OTJp,o<Tlq. at Jntblic cost, X&.Opq. in secret, Ko<vfi in common, etc. (1527 b ), li.TJ otherwise, .,..ij lww. Accusative: very common, especially such adverbs as have the form of the accusative of neuter adjectives, as 1roM much, p,iKp6v a little, 1rpwrov at first, rf}p.<pov to-day, 1roXM often. See 1606-1611. Locative: o(Ko-< at home ( olKo-s house), 'I<FOp,o- at the lsthmus, 1ro whither, and ali adverbs in -o<. The-< of the consonantal declension is properly the ending of the locative, as in Mapa8w;:- at Marathon; -on (234) in 0 stems, in contrast to -o<S; -ii<F< (-w<) in A stems (215) : Ovpiiu-< at the doors, ITarau-< at Plataea, 'AO-fJvTJ<F< at Athens; further in 7rda< long ago, 'Ke there, 1ravoT)p,el in full force. Inst1umental: ll.vw above, K&.rw below, o!i?rw not yet, w-e thus (but the forms in -w may be ablatives); Kpvrpij and X&.Opi in secret. Ablative: ali adverbs in -ws, as ws as, oln-ws th us, rpws otherwise. Here, e.g. original repw (cp. Old Lat. altBd, abl. of alts) became repw (133), which took on -s from the analogy of such words as d.p,rpls parallel to .p,rpl.
342. Place. - To denote place the common endings are : -, -6, -en at, ~:n to denote place whe1e (locative). -ov, the sign of the genitive, is also common. -6Ev from to denote the place whence (ablative). -8E ( -~), -<TE to, toward to denote place wkither. In the following examples poetical words are bracketed.
otKo-~

( otKo-6) at home

otKo-8Ev from home li..o-6ev from elsewhe1e .-a.x-6-&ev

otKa.Se ( oKovS<) homeward

( olKa- is an old accusative form. )

O.Uo-8, elsewhe1e or .U-a.x-ov

li.Uo-o-e elsewhither .-a.x-0-o-e

342 D. Hom. has many cases of the local endings, e.g. opa>-8< in heaven, cl-yopij-Oev from the assembly ;. also after prepositions as a genitive case: l~ M8<> out of the sea, 'IX<6-0< 1rp6 befure Ilium. Cp.lp,Me>, <FOE>, ~Oev, 325 D. 1. -Se in iia-e to the sea, .,..6XL>-e to the city, 1relw-e to the plain, 'Adilxr-oe to (the honse Of) Hades, OP-0 o6p,oP- to his house.

100
0.f1-tj>OTp>-0L
Olt

ADVERBS
bath
O.t~-tj>oTp>-&ev

[343 ( O.t~-tj>oTpw-<TE to bath sides) .,.a.vT-a.x-6-<Te in all

from both

sides
'lt'a.VT-a.x-ot in every

si des
1t'a.vT-a.x-o-9ev from every

direction
ci!Toii in the very place ol'oii at the same place

side
1t'nvT-o-9ev (rare) a.T6-9ev from the very

directions
'rt'ci.VT-0-0"'E

'A9>Jv'IJ-<r' at Athens
'O>.."IL'~~'(a-.,..,

at Olympia

a.T6-<re to the vmy place place oJ:.L-<re to the sa me place OJ:.L-9ev from the same place 'AO~vtj-9ev f1om Athcns 'A&~va.te to Athens '0vf1<'11'ta-9ev f1orn Olympia 'O>..vt~-.,.(a.te to Olympia

a. In -ai;e, -oe is added to the accusative (1589), and stands for -a(v)s, the old ace. pL,+ -oe (Eng. To). Cp. 26, lOli. The other endings are added to the stem. -IFe is usually added only to pronominal stems. -ITL fonns a locative plural. o snetimes takes the place of i. of the first declension (pli;oOev from the root, stem {ui;i.-), oris added to consonant stems. \Vords in -repo- lengthen o to w. Between stem and ending ax is often inserted. b. -1Je11 may take the form -Oe in poetry, and especially when the idea of whence is !ost, as 1rp61TIJe in front (134 D.). -Oa is found in (viJa in al! dialects. -Oa. for -Oev occurs in Aeolic and Doric. c. Some local adverbs are made from prepositions, as li.vw aiJOve, (~w outside, (ITw within, Karw below, 1rp61TO<v in front.
343. Manner.- Adverbs of manner ending in -w have the accent and form of the genitive plural masculine with -> in place of -v.

SiKctLOS
ICO.ICOS

a1roils cra.cj>fts -IJSvs <T<f>tj>pwv aos 'II'.S

~v

just bad simple lJlain pleasant prudent other all being

genitive plural

S~oKa.lwv
KO.Klilv

s.~ea.iws

" ,, " " " " " "

" " " "

urWv

KO.K>S a1rws
~ra.cj>oos
~S.,s

cra.tj>oov -/jSwv
<Twtj>povwv

a"'"
1T'6.VTWV BvTlV

<Twtj>p6vws aws
'JT'ci.VT(I)S

"

>vT(I)S

}ustly ill simply plainly pleasantly prudently otherwise in every way rerly

a. Adverbs in -w~ are not formed from the genitive plural, but are originally old ablatives from o stems (341), and thence transferred to other stems. The analogy of the genitive plural assisted the transference.
344. Various Other Endings. -AdverbR have many other endings, e.g. : -a.: IJ.p.a. at the same ti me, p.d.'ila. ve1y, rd. x a q11ickly (in Attic prose perhaps). -a.Ks: 7roll:>..d.K'~ many timr.~, often, ha.ITrri.K" each time, roiTa.vraKLs so often, oiTd.KLS as often as, 1r <LITTaKLS very often, oL-yri.KLs sehlom, 1r :>..wv<iKL~ more times. The forms without -s (oiT<iKL, 7roMK<) are earlirr, and -s bas been aded by imitation of /ils, rpls, ..$'!": 1Tv'il:>..fj(:38'f/v in short. -Go v: gvliov 1oithin, ITX<Ii6v al most. -EL:

COMP ARISOX OF A:OVERBS

101

-crTL: lO<ovrl

travoruul in full levy (341, locative). -TE: ore when (Aeolic 6ra, Dor.oKa). -T<, voluntarily, 'E?JP<crr-1 in Greek (fashiun).

345. Comparison of Adverbs.- In adverbs derived from adjectives the comparative is the same as the neuter singular of the comparative of the adjective; the superlative is the same as the neuter plural of the superla ti ve adjective.
cro<j>oos xo.pLVTOIS E1\So.L11-6vws Ko.oos
~Sws

wisely gracefully happily well pleasantly well

o-ocJ>WTEpov

o-oc1>00Ta.Ta.
xa.pl.O"TQ.TQ.

XO.pL<TTEpOV
ESa.t.jJ.OVO"'TEpov

EI8a.t.f.LOVO""TO.TO.

K,clLOV

KclL<TTO.

~Sov T[TTov

~8LO"'TO.

less (ilHl, 2)

~Kt.O""TQ.
Kpi.O"'TO.

.{;

<lp.ELVOV

(adv. of
,.6.a.

6:ya.96s

good) very

11-.ov

!'-6.L<TTO.

a. Adverbs of place ending in w, and some others, retain w in the comparative and superlative.
ab ove aja1
O.vwTpw 1roppwTpw

civ<J>Tci:r(l)
1rOpp01TclTW

b. l-y-yv near has l-y-yvrepov (-dpw), -y-yvrar-w (-r-ar-a. rare). trp<j) early has 7rpwi"alTepov, 7rpwi:alraTa. c. There are some forms in -w from comparatives: d.cr</>a<crrpws (d.crcpaCTTEpov) more securely, fJ<rbvws (fJ/..r-ov) bette1. Superlatives ll-ov are usually poetic ; as p,y<crr-ov.

346. Correlative Adverbs. - Adverbs from pronominal stems often correspond in form and meaning. In the list on p. 102 poetic or rare words are in ( ).

a. The demonstratives in ( ) are foreign to Attic prose except in certain phrases, as Kat th even th us; ovo' (p,?Jii') t:Js not even th us (cp. 180 c); gvea p,v . . gvea U here . . . tlwe, gvO<v (pb) Kat gvO<v (M) from this sle an that. l!vOa and fvOEP are usually relatives, gvoa taking the place of ou 1vhere and ol 1vhither, and hiJ<v of oO<v whence. b. roT p,P . . . r-or- fi is synonymous with 1ror- p,v . 1ror fi. c. o v (330 e) may be added for indefiniteness : 1rwcrov in any way whatever, orroO<vov j1orn what place soever. rrod is often used after interrogatives to give an intensive force, as in ris rron who in the wo1ld (as qui tandem); also with negatives, as in oi!rror< never, ovrrwrron never yet. Other negatives are ovoap,o nowhere, ovoap:fi in no way, ovoap,ws in no manner.
346 D. 1. Hom. has ( Aeolic) ?rrr in llrrrrws, orrrr6T; Hdt. has
K

for the rr-forms,

e.g. Ko, Kov, i!Kov, Kbn, etc. Hdt. has vOara, lvO<TEv for lvra!Ja, vr<Oev (126 D.). 2. Poetic are 1rbO, for rro, se, for ou, 'f}p,os ~when, 'ij wkich way, where, etc.

102
I utel'l'ogathe : Direct and Indirect

CORRELATIVE ADYERBS

[347

Jmlc.nite

(Enclitic)

Demonstrative
1

l{elative Specifie

lndefinite Relathe or Indirect Interrogative

1rO

7T"O

(gvoa) lvll&.o<,

o whe1e
(~vila

o'1J"ov whe1e-

whe1e?
11"68<v

somewhere lnaOa the1e h yondm

1l"ollv from (gvO<v) vllvo<, some place ln<vll<v thence K<ii<v from

where)

( eve1)

Place

whence?

ollu whence (gvll<v whence) o1l"oll<v u:hence-

(soeve1)

yone1
?To'i'

whithe1?
r

... ot to o'1J"o< whither(gvoa) lvO&.o<, ol whithm some place lvralla thither (gvlla whither) (soever) EKIJE thith1' ...or some time, eve1 rbn then lire when o1l"Or< when-

7r0T

when? Ti me
7T"TJVlKa at

( eve1)
(r7JvlKa) 1 at T7]VLKdO ~ that ti me T7]VLKaVTCL ) time i]vlKa at which 011"1)ViKa at

what time?

which time 517"11 in which way, as

07rWS

---Way

... iJ which

--Manner

71"ll some way? how? way, somehow

(rii)riiile, raur171 Yi in ~lhich this way, thus way, as (rws), (&s) wile, ovrw(') tlms, ws as, how

1rWs how?

1rWs

somehow

how

so, in this way helvws in that way

NUMERALS

347. The numeral adjectives and corresponding adverbs are as follows:

34:7 D. l. For the cardinals 1-4, see 349 D. Hom. bas, for 12, owil<Ka (for ilfwiieKa), iivwo<Ka, and ilvoKalil<Ka ( also generally poe tic); 20, <(KotJ< and l<lKotJ< ; 30, rptfJKovra ; 80, lryliwKovra; !JO, lvevfJKovra and lvvfJKovra; 200 and 300, 0<1JKDIJW<, rp<1JKOIJ<O< ; 9000 and l 0,000, lvve&.xo<, il<K&.Xo< ( -xo< ?). He bas nlso the onlinals 3d, rplraros; 4th, rh paros; 7th, {3ilbf1-aros; 8th, lryo6aros ; 9th,

347)
SIGN
CARDINAL

NUMERALS
ORDINAL
ADVERB

103
(L.,.a.S once
Sls Tp(s

1 2 3 4

a.'

Ets, J.LLa., lv Svo

one
three

'll"pWTOS SevTEpos Tp(Tos

jirst

P'
y'
S'

twu

second
-ov

TpEL5 1 TpLa.

third

twice thl-ice

TTTa.pEs, TTTa.pa. ( T<r<rO.pE5 1 TO"<rO.pa.)

TTa.pTos, -1),

TETp.KLS

5 6 7 8 9

E'
'

1rVTE

'II"J'"'II'TOS

'lfEVT6.KLS

~~
HrT.

~KTOS
(j38op.os oy8oos
VO.TOS

~.KL5
11"T6.Kt.S

t'
1'J

KT~
~vva.
1

KTci.KLS ~vci.ICLS
8EK.KLS

9'
L

10
11

8KO.
~v8EKO.
S<i>SEKO. TpELS ( TPLO.) Ka.t SKC1 (Or TpEL<TKO.LbEKC1)

8KC1TOS 1 1) 1 OV

v8KO.TOS
SwSKa.TOS TpLTOS Ka.t 8KC1TOS

v8EKciKLS
8w8EK.KLS TpEL<rl<a.t!lEKO KLS

12

13
14 15
LE

TTTO.pES ( TTTO.pO.) Ka.t SKO.

1fEVTEKa.(8EKO.

'II'fJ.'II'TOS K< 8KC1TOS KTOS K.a.t. SKO.TOS

'7rEVTEKO.L8EKci.KLS

16
17

L;-

KKO.L8EKC1

(for SKO.EKa.

KKC1t8EK.KLS

103)
HrTC1KO.L8EKC1 OKTWKO.!SEKO. ivvEO.KO.L!iEKO. EtKO<TL( V) ELS KO.t EtKO<TL (V) Or EtKO<TL ( KO.t) EtS

~j380fJ.OS KC1t liKO.TOS

oy8oos KO.t 8KC1TOS VO.TOS KO.t !lKO.TOS
dKOO'"T6S,

HrTC1KC1L!iEKclKLS
KTWKO.L8EKci.KLS vvEO.KO.L8EKciKLS

18 19
20 21

-f),

.c) V

EtKoa-6.KLS

'll"pWTOS KC1t dKO<TTOS

EIKO<TclKLS a.,.a.s

30
40 50 60 70 80
J.L

TpLO.KOVTO.

-'

TptiiKOO"TOS TETTO.pa.KO<TTOS 'II'EVT1) KO<TT05

TpLfiKOVTci.Kt.S

TETTO.p.KOVTO. 'II"EVTijKOVTO.

TETTO.pO.KOVT6.KlS
1J'EVT1JKOVT6.KLS

v'

f
o
'Il"

~ijKOVTO.
pSop.ijKOVTO. oySoijKOVTO.

~1)KO<TTOS
j380fJ.1)KO<TTOS oy!lo1) KO<TTOS

t'rJKOVTcJ.KLS f380fJ.1)KOVTclKLS oy!l01)KOVTclKLS

<i'vo.ros; 12th, ouwoho.ros; 13th, rpirr(rpe"r- ?)Ko.<i)ho.Tos; 20th, tKour6s; and

the Attic fonn of each. 2. Hdt. has ouwoeKo. ( liuwliho.ros), uuu<p<uKo.lo<Ko. indeclinable ( uuuep<uKo.tliKctros), TpdJKOVTct (rpt7]KOUTOs), TfUU<priKOVTct, o-yliwKOVTct, OL7]KO(JLOL (lit7]KOULOUTOS), rpt7JKOuwt: for l!varos he has erva ros, and so elvdKts, elvaKouwt, elv~K<uxf)uo<. 3. Aeolic has 7rfJJ.7r for 5 (cp. Hom. 1r<JJ.1rW{3oov five-pronged jork), gen. pl ur. 1rJJ.1rWv infiected, as also li<Kwv, rerruepctKovrwv, etc.; for 1000, xXtot. Doric has, for 1, ijs (37 D. 2); 4, rhopes ; 6, r<~; 7th, gf31i<JJ.OS; 12, 15vwlieKct; 20, fiKctT<, f<lKctT<; 40, rerpwKovrct (nrpwKouros); 200, etc., li<iimrlot, etc.; 1000, X7Jiot and xXlot (37 D. 2); for lst, 1rp.ros.

104
SIGN
CARDINAL

NUMERALS
RDINAL
ADVERB

[348

90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000 2,000 3,000 10,000 20,000 100,000

9'
p'
0'"

bEVijKOVTCL

VEV1JKOO'"TOS

VEV1JKOVTclKLS
KO.TOVTci.KI.S

. . .

KO.T6v Sl.iK60"t.OL, .. a.L, .. a,

TpLiiKOO'"LOL TETpCLKOO'"LOL 1TEVTO.KCJ"t.Ol.

KO.TOO"T6S, .., , 6V
6LiiKOO'"LOO'"TOS TpLiiKOO'"LOO'"TOS TETpCLKOO'"LOO'"TOS 11'EVTCLKOO'"LOO'"TOS

liLiiKOCI"LclKLS TpLiiKOO'"LclKLS TETpCLKOO"LclKLS

'JTEVTO.KOCT&.6.KLS

u'

cl>'

x' .Ji'
(1)

~O.KO''I.Ol.
1rTO.K60'"1.01.

~CLKOO'"LOO'"TOS
1rra.KOO'"LOCTT6S ' KTO.KOO'"I.OCTTS VO.KOO'"LOO"T6S

~CLKOO"LclKLS
1rTO.KOO'"L6.K LS
KTO.KOO"I..KLS

KTO.K6CJ"'l.OL VO.KO"LOL
XtLOL, CLL 1 CL 6Lo-xtLOL TpLO"XtLOL p.upo,
..<

~
,CL

VCLKOO'"LclKLS

XiLOo-T6s,

-fJ,

-6v

XiLclKLS 6LO"XLLclKLS TpLO"X:LclKLS p.\ipLclKLS 6Lo-p.'iipLnKLS liEKCLKLO"p.'iipLclKLS

.~

liLo-XiLOO'"TOS TpLo-XLLOO'"TOS p.'iipLOO'"TOS 6Lo-p.'iipLOO'"TOS liEKCLKLo-p.'iipLOO'"TOS

;y

..

-cu, -a

,K ,p

6Lo-p.'iJpLOL liEKCLKLO"p.UpLOL

N.- Above 10,000 : ouo p.vpu.oes 20,000, etc., p.vpuiKLS p.6pw, i.e. 10,000 x 10,000. 348. Notation. -The system of alphabtic notation came into use after the second century B.c. The first nine letters stand for units, the second niue for tens, the third nine for hundreds (27 letters). In addition to the 24 letters of the alphabet, three obsolete signs are employed: -, a form identical with the late abbreviation for <n, in place of the lost F (3), once used for 6; 9 (kappa), in the same order as Lat. q, for 90; for 900, 10) sampi, probably for san, an old form of sigma, +pi. From 1 to 999 a stroke stands above the letter, for 1000's the same signs are used but with the stroke below the letter (o.'= 1, 1o. = 1000). Only the last letter in any given series has the stroke above: pvf1 157, vo. 1 401, ii. is sometimes used for 10,000 ; fi for 20,000, etc. 1o.10)' 1910. a. In the classical period the following system was used according to the inscriptions: 1= 1, lill= 4, r (7rne) = 5, r 1 = 6, b. (oho.) = 10, b. b. = 20, H (KO.Tbv) = 100, H H = 200, 1000, M = 10,000, fh (7r<vTciKLS olKo.) =50, [XX (7r<VTaKLS XfLOL + XfLOL) = 6000. b. For the numbers from 1 to 24 the letters, used in continuons succession, are frequently usedto designate the books of the Iliad (A, B, r, etc.) and of the Odyssey (o., {3, -y, etc.).

x=

349. The cardinals from 1 to 4 are declined as follows: 349 D. Hom. has, for p.lo., to. (l~s, iii, fo.v); for vl, iciJ; ouo, ouw (undeclined); the adj. fonns oow and pl. oowi regnlarly declined. For 4, Tl<T<To.pes, (Aeolic) 1rl<Tvpes; Pind. has rhpo.<Tov. Hdt. bas ouo sometimes undeclined, also ovwv, ovo<TL; r<T<Tepes, -a, Te<T<Tpwv, d""'P"'; Tf<T<T<pe<TKo.loeKa 14 undeclined. Aeolic OVE<TLv 2 ; 7/"f<T<Tvpes, 1r<1vpo. for 4.

350]

NUMERALS
one two
v

105
four
TTTCI.pES TTTa.pa.
TETTci.pwv

th?'ee
TpELS Tp(a.
rp~Oiv

Nom. EtS Gen. v6s Dat. v( Ace. ~va.

..,.ca.
..,.~as

v6s
vL

N.A . 81lo G.D. 8uotv

....~q.
..,.ca.v

Tp~cr(( v)

TPELS

TpLO.

TTTa.piTL( V) TTTCI.pa.s TTTa.pa.

a. ds is for iv-s (cp. 245). The stem iv was originally <J<p, (Lat. semel, simplex, singuli), weak forms of which are li-1ra~, -1ros, from (]'JL-?r- (35 b). p,la stands for <J p.-ta. b. ooo <ls, p:TJo <ls not even one unite (with change in accent) to form the compounds oo<ls, f1.'1ols no one. These words are declined like <ls : thus, oods, oo<p,la, ooov, ooo<Pos, oo<p,<s, oO<vos, etc., and sometimes in the plural (no men, none or nobodies) oOv, oovwv, oM<n, oOvas. For emphasis the compounds may be divided, as oo <ls not ONE. A preposition or dv may separate the two parts, as ooo' 1r p,<s from not a single one, oo' &v ivl ne uni quidem. c. 1rpwros (primus) meas the first among more thau two, 1rpoT<pos (prior) the first of two. d. ovo may be used with the geu. and dat. pl., as Mo p,v'l}vwv of two montl1s. ouov occurs rarely with plurals : 1rat<Jiv . ouov D. 39. 32. ouv for ouov does not appear till about 300 n.c. e. dwt>w both, N. A. dwf>w, G. D. p,<j>ov (Lat. arnbo). But both is more commonly p.<j>6T<po<, -a<, -a. f. For rrrap, -pd.Kovra, etc., early Attic prose and tragedyhave r<J<Jap<s, etc. g. The first numeral is infiected in rp<s Kal oha 13, rrrap<s Kal oKa 14. rpwrKalo<Ka and Ionie T<<J<J<p<(]'Kaloaa (very rare in Attic) are indeclinable.
350. The cardinals from 5 to 199 are indeclinable; from 200 the cardinals, and all the orclinals from jirst on, are declined like d-ya06s.

a. Compound numbers above 20 are expressed by placing the smaller number first (with Kal) or the larger number first (with or without Kal).
ouo Kal dKo(]'<( v) two and twenty o<VT<pos Kal eiJo:O(]'TOS e(KO(JL Kal Mo twenty and two, or dKO(JL ouo twenty-two <iKMTOS Kal oevrepos 555 = 1rfVT KaL 1rEvTf}KOVTa Kal 1rEVTaKO(]'LOL Or 1rEvTaKOlJlOL (Kal) 1rEPTf}Kovra (Kal)
'lr'vT,

b. For 21st, 31st, etc., ls (for 1rpwros) Kal <lKo(]'r6s (rp<aKo(]'ros) is permissible, but otherwise the cardinal is rarely thus joined with the ordinal. c. Compounds of 10, 20, etc., with 8 and 9 are usually expressed by subtraction with the participle of Mw lack, as 18, 19, ovov (evs) Olovres dKO(]'<. So
vau(]'/ p,ts OEOV(]'a<s r<rrd.paKovra with 39 ships, ouov Movra 1r<VTf}Kovra l!T'TJ 48 years; and with ordinals evs oov <iKo(]'rov hos the 19th year. The same method may be employed in other numbers than 8's or 9's: e1rrd cl.1rooovr<s rp<.KOULO<, i.e. 293. d. An ordinal followed by l1rl ot!Ka denotes the day of the month from the 13th to the 19th, as 7rffJ-7rTT/ 1rl <iKa on the 15th.

106

ADV.ElS

[3.5!

351. With the collective words (996) 1} 1'1T1Tos cavalry, .q du,.ts men with shields, numerals in -wt may appear even in the. singular : a~rocriii ;,.-,.os 200 horse T. 1. 62, <Ur,.-ls p.vpla K< rErp<J.Koula 10,400 horse X. A. 1. 7. 10. 352. p.Op<m, the grea test number expressed by a single word, means 10,000 ; J1.plo<, countless, infinite. In the latter sense the singular may be used, as iJ.ipla lpYJp.la infinite solitude P. L. 677 E.
353. Fractions are expressed in several ways: -fjp.wvs 1, o roi/ &.pt8!LOD ha({ the number, ac! i}p.luE'a' rwv vewv half of the ships, r fii''O:U roi/ urpa.ro half the army, 1JJJ.mi'a.vrov haif a talent; rpla -ljp.m).Xavra 1! talents, rpirov -ljp.lJJ.vawv
~1 ntina; T(JLT'T])J.pi!JV

-Iii''""'

56o p.oipa.c ! But when the r,umera.tor is Jess by one than the denominll.tor, the genitive is omitted and only the article and p.pfl are used: as r. -rp/.11. J'-I''I :f, i.e. the three parts (sei!. of four). 354. Other classes of nume1al words. a. Distl'ibutives proper, answering the question kow many each? are wanting in Greek. lnstea.d, <iv., ds, and Ka.r., witlt the accus., and i:lompounds of u6v with, are used: Ka.rt/Jo or uvvlivo two by two, two each (Lat. bini). The cardinals are often used alone, as <ivp! ~Ka(Jrq> ow(Jw 1rvre d.p"fvp!ov p.v.s singulis militibus dabo qninas mgenti minas X. A. 1. 4. 13. b. Multi'.plicatives in -11'\os -fold (from -1rXoos, Lat. -plex), I;.,.Xos simple, <t,-Xovs ttvofold, rpt1t'ovs threefold, ?roMrXoDs manifold. c. Proportionals in -"Jr"XauVJs: L7rO.(Jtos twice as great or (pl ur.) as many, 1ro:XilarrMuws many times as great (many). d. ll<rr6s means double, rp<rros treble (from x-ws, rpx-<os 112). N.- Multiplication.- Adverbs answering the question how many times? are 'used in multiplication: -r ols 1l'lvu iUKa ltniv twice jive me ten. See also 347 N. e. Abslract and C'oUectit'e N-u.?iI~rs in -as (geu. -&.o-os), a1l feminine: :vcis or 'p.ovds the i.Um[ltl' (me, un{tN, n!Qnad, vas the :numbo two, d-ua?ity, rpcd.s trinity, tria(l, eKcl.s ecad, decade, tilcds, hcrroncls, x<XL<ts, JJ.!ptas myriad, bca.rv p.upui.!ies a million. Also in -6<: rp,TTds (-os) tlw tlti1Yl of a tribe (properly the 1tWmber three), n-rpa~-vs. f. Adjectives in -a.<os, answering the question on what day? owrepo;os (or ri)
3<vnpaL~t)

h 7rJ.l.1t'T1)p.6pti>V ~>

f'll'frpt'TOS

1!,

n/..-E,U'II'T05 ~~> ~W>'

Tl"Tf

oJ

&.,..i)M he departed on the second day.

g. Adverbs of Division. -p.ovaxii sinqly, in une way only, oixa., o<xii in two paTts, doubly, TPx.ii, rl.,-pax.a., etc., ,.onaxii in many ways, ?T"aPTax.ii in every way.
VERBS

INFLECTIO:SC:

PRELIMIKARY REMARKS

(355-380)

355. The Greek verb shows distinctions of voice, mood, verbal noun, tense, number, and person.

a:1 .Pa.uws.

3fl4 D. Hdt. has o,J;os (from ot;,:&-m), TP<~IJs for <Tds, Hom. ha,; <!ixa and <h;,:Ba, rpi;,:a. and -rp<x!M.;

T(JLT1'65;

a.lso

-?rT)O"LOS

r,II<11'~, rorparrl>.fj.

s6o]
356.

VERBS: PRELIMINARY REMARKS

107

Voices.- There are three voices: active, middle, and passive.

a. The middle usually detiotes that the subject acts on himself or for himselj, as '!l.ovo!J-a< wash rnyse~(, &.JJ-VVoJJ-a< rlPfend myse~f (lit. ward o.tffo1 myself). b. The passive borrows ali its forms, except the future an aorist, from the middle. c. Deponent verbs have an active rneaning but only middle (or middle and passive) jorms. If its aorist has the middle form, a deponent is called a middle deponent (xaplt'oJJ-a< gratijy, lxapuJaJJ-"1); if its aorist has the passive form, a deponent is called a passive deponent (ivOvJJ-lop.a< 1'eflect on, ivdJvwfJO"'v). Deponents usually prefer the passive to the middle forms of the aorist.
357. Moods.- Four moods, the indicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, are called jbte, because the. person is defined by the ending (366). The infinitive, strictly a verbal noun (358), is sometimes classed as a mood. 358. Verbal Nouns.- Verbal forms that share certain properties of nouns are called verbal nouns. There are two kinds of verbal nouns. 1. Substantivai: the infinitive.

N.-The infinitive is properly a case form (chiefly dative, rarely locativt), herein being like a substantive.

2. Adjectival (inflected like adjectives): a. Participles: active, middle, and passive. b. Verbal adjectives: In -r6>, denoting possibility, as cfn'YJT6> lavable, or with the force of a perfect passive participle, as yp;rro w1itten. In -ro>, denoting necessity, as ypli'To> thal must be w1itten.
359. Tenses.- The re are se ven tenses in the indicative: present, imperfect, future, aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect. The future perfect commonly has a passive force, but it may be active or middle in meaning (see 581). The subjunctive has three tenses: present, aorist, and perfect. The optative and infinitive have five tenses: present, future, aorist, perfect, and future perfect. The imperative has three tenses: present, aorist, and perfect. 360. Primary and Secondary Tenses.- There are two classes of tenses in the indicative: (1) P1imary (or Principal) tenses, the present and perfect expressing present time, the future and future perfect ex pressing future ti me; (2) Secondary (or Histmical) tenses, the imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist expressing past time. The secondary tenses have an augment (428) prefixed. 359 D. Hom. does not use the future or future perfect in the optative.

108

VEl'tBS: PRELJMIXAllY RE.MAllKS

361. Second Aorists, etc.- Some verbs have tenscs calle second aorists (ar:tive, middle, a]l(l passive), second perfects aud pluperfects (active ouly), and second futures (paHsive). The meaning of these tenses ordiuarily corresponds to that of the first aorist, etc. ; but when a verb has both forms in any tense (which is rarely the case), the two forms usually differ in meaning. Sometimes one form is poetical, the other used in prose. 362. No single Greek verb shows all the tenses mentioned in 359 and 361 ; and the paradigms are therefore taken from different verbs. 363.

Number.- There are three numbers: the singular, dual, and

plural.
364. Person.- There are tlnee persons (first, second, and third) in the indicative, subjunetive, and optative. 'fhe imperative has only the second and third persons.

a. Except in a few cases in poetry (4G5 c) the first person plural is used for the first person dual.
365. Inflection. -The infiection of a verb consists in the addition of certain endings to the different stems. 366. Endings.- The endings in the finite moods (357) show whether the subject is first., second, or thir person; and indicate number and voice. See 462 ff.

a. The middle has a different set of endings from the active. The passive has the endinQs of the middle except in the aorist, which has the active endings. b. The indicative bas two sets of endings in the active and in the middle: one for primary tenses, the other for secondary tenses. c. The subjunctive uses the same endings as the primary tenses of the indicative ; the optative uses the same as those of the secondary tenses.
STEMS

367. A Greek verb has two kinds of stems: (1) the tense-stem, to which the endings are at.tached, and (2) a common verb-stem (also called theme) from which a11 the tense-st.ems are derived. The tense-stem is usually made from the verb-stem by prefixing a reduplication-sylla-ble (439), and by affixing signs for mood (457, 459) and tense ( 455). A tense-stem may be identical with a verbstem. 368. The Tense-stems. -The tenses fa11 into nine classes called tense-systems. Each tense-system has its own sei)arate tense-stem.

VBlU38: l'lLI.l\UNARY Rl%IAB.KS

SYSTEMS. TENSES.

109

I. II. III. IV.

v.

VL

VII. VIII. IX.

Present, including present and impe1ject. FutU!e, " future a~;tive and middle. First aorist, jirst aorist active and middle. Secoml aorist, second a1n-ist active and middle. First pe1ject, " , jiTst perject, first pluperfect, and fut. perf., active. Second perject, " second pmfect and seco11d pluper.fect active. pe1ject and plupmfect middle (pass.),future perfect. Perject middle, " " Fhst passive, jirst aorist and ji1st future passive. Second passive, " second amist and second future passive.

The tense-stems are explained in detail in 497-597. a. Since few verbs have both the ji1st and second form of the same tense (161), most verbs have OJJ!y six of these ni ne systems; many verbs do not even have six:. Scarcely any verb shows !fil nine systems. b. There are also secondary tense-stems for the future passive, the pluperfect, and the future perfect. c. The tense-stems assume separate forms in the different moods. 369. The principal parts of a verb are the first person singular indicative of the tense-systems occmring in'it. These are generally six: the present, future, first aorist, first (or second) perfect active, the perfect middle, and the first (01 second) aorist passive. The future middle is given if there is no future active. The second aorist (active or middle) is arlded if it occurs. Thus:
Dw loose, Ail<Tw, giiua, Ai>..vKa, AD..vp..at. vfJ"f}v >..dr,w leave, d<fw, >..f:>,otr,a, :np.p.o.t, J>..E[rp(}"f}v, 2 aor. tr,ov. yp&.rpw write, yp&.tf!w, f.ypatf;a, yiypa<fla, y.ypap.p.o.t, 2 aor. pass. ypcp"f}V rrKnrrw jee1, rrKw</Jop.at, <TKwt/Ja, (J"Kwcp()"f}v.

370. The principal parts of deponent verbs (356 c) are the present, future, perfect, aud aorist in di cati ve. Both first and second aorists are given if they occur. {Jovop.at tm:sh, {Jou>..fJ(J"op.at, {3E{3ov"tJfl-a.l, {JovA~B"tJv (passive deponent). y{yvop.at becorne, yEJnuop..at, yEyivqp.at, 2 aor. yEVOJJ."tJV (middle deponent).
py&.~op.at 1.1.-'0rk, py&.uo!'-at, dpyarr&.tJ-YJV, i{pya(J"p.at, Elpy&.(J"B"f}V

371. Verb-stem (or Th erne).- The tense-stems are made from one fundamental stem called the verb-stem (or theme).

This verb-stem may be a root (193) as in ri-w honour, or a root to which a derivative suffix has been appended, as in r-f<d.-w honour.
372. A verb f01ming its tense-stems directly from a root 1s called a primitive verb. A derwminative verb forms its tense-stems from a 'longer verb-stem, originally a noun-stem ; as llovA6w enslave from lloo> slave. Verhs in p.t (379), and verbs in w of two syllables (in the present indicative active, as Af.y-w s]Jeak) or of three syllables

110

VERB-STEMS, THEMATIC VOWEL

[373

(in the middle, as 8xoJ=L receive) are gene1ally primitive. Others are denominative. , 373. The verb-stem may show nnmerous modifications in form.
Thus, corresponding to the gradatior..s in sing, sang, sung (35), the verb
.Ei1r-w leave shows the stems .mr-, onr- (2 perf. .-OL7r-a.), .L1T- (2 aor. t-L1T-o-v); the verb <j>drt-w fiee shows <j>w-y- and rpu-y- (2 aor. ~-<J>u-y-o-v). In pfnvp.L break wc find the three stems PTJ'Y, pw-y (2 perl. ~ppw-ya. ), pa.-y (2 aor. pass. lppa'YTJ ). uT..-w send has the stems <YTe.- and uTa.- (perf. f-uTa.-Ka., 2 fut. pass. uTa.-f;<Yop.a.L ).

a. When the fundamental stem shows modifications, it is customary for convenience to call its shorter (or shortest) form the Terb-stem, and t.o derive the other forms from it. The student must, however, beware of assuming that the short f01ms are older than the other forms. 374. The _verb-stem may also show modifications in quantity, as
B-w loose, perfect -v-Ka. ' N.- Varions causes procluce this variation. Mw bas from analogy to M-<Yw, ~-.-ua. where the verb-stem M has been regularly lengthened (534, 543). For Attic <j>Uavw anticipate Hom. has <j>86.vw for if>8a.vrw (28, 147 D.).

present

375. w Inflection and fi.' Inflection. -The re are two slightly different methods of inflecting verbs, the first according to the common, the second according to the fi.' system. The names w-verbs and p-tverbs (a small class) refer to the ending of the first person singular active of the present tense in di cati ve only : '-w loose, d87J-p.L place.
a. In the w infiection the tense-stem ends in the thematic vowel. To this .form belong al! futures, aJ)d the presents, imperfects, and second aorists showin.q the thematic vowel.

376. According to the ending of the verb-stem, w-verbs are termed:

1. V owel (or pure) verbs : . a. Not contracted : tho se th at end in v or t, as '-w loose, .,.m81l-w educate, xpi-w anoint. Such verbs retain the final vowel of the stem uncbanged in all their fmms. b. Contracted: th ose that end in a, .., o, as T.p.w honour from T.p.rf.-w, 7ToLw make from .,.od-"'' 87Jw mamfest from '87J6-w. 2. Consonant verbs, as: lJiquid or nasal verbs : 8p-w .fia y, p.v-w remain. Verbs ending in a stop (or mute), as lJ.y-w lead, .,.{8-w persuade.
N.- Verbs ending in a stop consonant are called labial, dental, or palatal verbs. Consonant verbs do not retain the final consonant of the stem unchanged in al! their forms. The final consonant may be assimilated to a following consonant, or may form with it a double consonant.

377. Thematic Vowel.- Some tense-stems end in a vowel which varies between o and " (or w and 7J) in certain forms. This is called the thematic (or variable) vowel. Thus f,o-p.<'v B<'-T<', 'w-p.(v B7J-n,

CO~JCGATION:

LIST OF PARADlGMS

111

.Da'a-JLfV .~<J'f-Tf. )'he ypac/>w j 71-. See 456.

thernatic vowel is written

/, or w/71, as .0 j,-,

378. o is used before IL or v in the indicative, and in the optative, "' before IL or v in the subjunctive, elsewhere E is used in the indicative (1J in the subjunctive). 379. In the JLL inflection no thernatic vowel is employed, and the endings are attached direct! y to the tense-stem. The JLL forrn is used only in the present, imperfect, and second aorist. In the other tenses, verbs in JLL generally show the same inflection as w-verbs. For further explanation of the w and the JLL inflection see 602ff., 717 ff. 380. Meanings of the Tenses and Moods.- In the synopsis (382) meanings are given wherever these are not dependent on the use of the varions forms in the sentence. The meanings of the subjunctive and optative forms and the difference betwen the tenses can be learned satisfactorily only from the syntax. Some of these meanings may here be given:
a. Subjunctive: Mwp,<v or V<J'wp,<v let us loose, (liiv) Mw or XV<J'w (if) I loose, (tva) -yp&.</>w (th at) I rnay write. b. Optative: (.til<) Mo<p,< or X6<J'a<p,< (would) that I rnay loose! () Mo<p,<v or X6<J'a<p,<v (if) we shoul loose.

381.

CONJUGATION: LIST OF PARADIGMS

I. Verbs in "': A. V owel verbs not contracted : Synopsis and conjugation of ~w (pp. 112-118). Second aorist (active and middle) of f1rw (p. 119). Second perfect and pluperfect (active) of .f1rw. B. Vowel verbs contracted: Present and imperfect of TJL.w, 7rOLw, ory.ow (pp. 120-123). C. Consonant verbs: Liquid and nasal verbs: future and first aorist (active and middle), second aorist and second future passive of cpa{vw (pp. 128-129). Labial, dental, and palatal verbs: perfect and pluperfect, middle (passive) of f1rw, yp.cpw, 1rd8w, 1rpriTTw, fyxw (p. 130). Perfect of the liquid verbs &yyD,Aw, cpa[vw; and perfect of Tfw (p. 131). II. Verbs in IL' A. Present, imperfect, and 2 aorist of T{8ryJLL, tTTJJLL, o!OwJLL (pp. 135 ff. ). Second aorist middle of 7rpt.p.ryv (p. 138). B. Present and imperfect of odKvJLt (p. 140). Second aorist: lov (p. 140).

112

CONJUGATION OF 0-VERBS

[382
CONJUGATION

1.

(A) VOWEL. VEllES: SYNOPSIS OF FlliST AORIST SYSTEM

1 Aorist

382.
1.

PRESENT SYS1.'EM

ll. FUTURE SYSTEM

Future

lll.

AcTIVE: Indic.

Present :md Imperfect

>..'w I loose or am

k'o-w I shall loose

~'iio-a.

loosing
V.vov I was loos-

I loose

ing
Subj. Opt. Imper. In fin. Part.
'w k>lotl-'t Mie loose Unv to loose 'wv loosing

k\So-w
>.\io-otl-'t 'o-nv to be about to >.\io-a.tp.t o-ov loose ilo-a.t to loose or to

loose k\So-wv about to loose

>.\io-ol-'a. I shall loose

have loosed
>.'o-as having loose

MIDDLE: Indic. 'ol-'a. I loose (for

my self)
'ii61-'1JV I was

(for rnyself)
'iio-6.1-'1JV I loose (for

loosing (for myself)

k\iwjJ-a.t Subj. Opt. 'iiOLIJ-1]V Imper. k\iou loose (for thy'iio-OL!J-'I)V

my self)
k\io-wl-'a.' 'iio-O.Li-''I)V o-a.t loose (for thy-

self)
-In fin.
'eo-9a.t to loose (fo1'

se(f)
k\1o-e<T9a.t to be about to '<Ta.<T9a.. to loose or to

Part.

have loose (for one's self) 'iiol-'evos loosing (for lio-61-'evos about to li<T6.1J-EVOS having one's self) loosed (fm one's self) loose (fo1one'sself) loose (for one' s self)
VIII FIRST PABSIVE SYSTEM
1 Aorist

one's self)

1 Future PASSIVE: Indic. k>lol-'a.' I am 1 (b . ) u9-f)<TOIJ-O.L I shall be v61-'1JV ~ emg loosed 1 was J loosed Subj. Like Middle Opt. " Imper. " " In fin. u9-f)o-e<T9a.t to be about " "

k,}91Jv I was loose uOl (for XvOlw) u9ELTJV

x-ue,....

be loosrd

u9ijva. to be loose or

to be loosed be loosecl

to have been loose

u9E!s having been

Part.

U91)<rOIJ-EVOS ab01tt to

loosed

Verbal adectives j uT6s that rnay be loosed, loose J l UTos that rnust be loosed, (requiring) to be loose

SYNOPSIS OF .\vw
OF fl-VERBS:.
NOT CONTRACTED ).'"' ().v, ).;:;) loose
V. FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM VII. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM

113

1 Perfect and Pluperfect Active

).4).vK

I have loosed 1 had loosed

0.E).-.IKTJ ).E).vK.Os ~

or ).().v KOI

).E).VK.0S EtTJV Or ).().vKOLjloL ).E).VK.0S tcr9L Or [).).vKE] 1 ).E).vKvL

).).vK~s

to have loosed

having loosed
Perfect and Pluperfect Middle
).).vp.L

I have loosed (for myself) I had loosed (for myself)

~).().-.lp.1Jv

).E).vp.vos ~ ).Evp.vos dt) V vcro

(712, 714) to have loosed (for one' s self) having loosed (for one' s self)

).Evcr9L

"-().vp.vos

Perfect and Plu perfect Passive

).U.vp.a.L

Future Perfect Passive

).Eiicrop.a.L

I have r been 0.EVp.1Jv I had lloosed

Like Middle

I shall have been loosed

" " "

" " "

"

1 The simple forms of the perfect imperative active of Mw probably never occur in classical Greek (697), but are included to show the inflection.
GREEK GRAM.-8

114

CONJGAT10N OF 0-VERBS
I.

[383

(A) VOWEL VERBS:

1.
ACTIVE

383.
Present
INDICATIVE.

Imperfect
\iov iES \iE

Futur
'i1o-w \lo-Hs 'i1o-EL },;}O"ETOV UO"ETOV \So-op.EV ijO"ETE :\;}0"0\JO"L

s.

1. },;1.., 2. 'i1Hs 3. ;}H

D. 2. 'i1ETOV 3. ;}ETOV

~~iETOV
\i'I'1)V 'i1op.ev
iETE

P. 1.
2. 3.
SUBJONCTIVE.

;jO fi-EV ;jETE },;iovo-

Vov

s.

1. },;}.., 2. },;lus 3. },;in

D. 2. ij'I')TOV 3. ij'I')TOV

P. 1.

Uwp.ev

2. ij'I')TE 3. },ij(o)O"L
PTATIVE.

s.

1. ijOLfl.L 2. A'i1os 3. },ijo

'i1o-OLf1-L 'i1o-OLS ijO"OL ijO"OLTOV \io-ol'I'1)V 'i1o-OLf1-EV ijO"OLTE ,jO"OLEV

D. 2. ijOLTOV 3. \iolorT]v

P. 1.

ijOLfl-EV

2. 'i10LTE 3. 'i1ouv
IMPERATIVE.

s.

2. iiE 3. \iTW
;}ETOV \iTWV 'i1ETE \iOVTWV 'i1Hv 'i1wv, },;iovo-a., iiov 'i10"ELV ll.'i1o-wv, 'i1o-ovo-a., Mo-ov

D. 2. 3.

P. 2. 3.
INFINITIYE.

}> ARTICIPLE.

(305)

(305)

VOWEL VERBS: ACTIVE OF >..ilw

NOT

115

CONTBACTED
1 Aorist 1 Perfect
~UKQ.

VoleE OF ~;'j(l)
1 Pluperfect
a~vK'I) a~vK'I)s ~~~VKEL(v)
a~VKETOII a~uKT'I)II

hw.

s.

1. 2. 3.

.'cra. V\'cra.s .'crE

~UKO.S
~UKE

D. 2. 3.

a-a.-rov
i~'CTUT'I)II

~E~VKO.TOII ~E~VKO.TOV

P. 1. i~i'icra.p.ev 2. :a-O.TE 3. .'cra.v

SUBJ.

~~VKO.p.EII
~E~VKO.TE ~~vKiCTL

ae~VKEJlEII
E~VKETE i~E~VKECTO.V

s.

1. ~;f(J'(I) 2. ~U"1ls 3. ~i'icrn

~E~UKWs ~

(691) Or

~EVKOI

(692)

~E~UKWS US ~E~UKWs

E.VK'!IS E.VK'!l ).e.VK'I)TOV

D. 2. ~;fCT'I)TOV 3. ~;'j<T'I)TOV
P. 1. ~;'jO'(I)JlEV 2. ~;fCT1JTE 3. ~;fCTOICTL PT.

~E~UKOTE -1jTOV ~E~UKOTE -1jTOV

~E.VK1JTOV ~EVKOIJlEV ~E.VK1JTE

~EVKOICTL

~E~ UKOTES ~ JlEll

~E UKOTES -1jTE ~E~UKOTES ~CTL
~EUKWS Et'I)V ( 694) ~EUKWs ft1JS ~EUKWS Et1J ~E~UKOTE Et1JT011, EITOII
AtUKOTE elfJ'I"iJv, EtT'I)ll

s.

1. ~;'jCTO.LJlL 2. ~;'jCTQ.LS, ~;fCTELO.S (668) 3. ~;fcra.L, ~;fCTELE (668)

Or . ~E.VKOLP,L, OL1JV ~E~VKOLS 1 OL1JS

~E~VKOL, OL1J
.E~VKOLTOII

D. 2. ~ijCTQ.LTOV 3. ~'cra.LT1Jll
P. 1. ~;fCTO.LJlEV 2. ~;'jCTQ.LTE 3. ~;fcra.LEI/1 ~;'jCTELO.V (668) lMP.

.EUKOLT1JV .EVKOLJlEV EVKOLTE

~EVKOLEII

~E~UKOTES Et1Jp.EV1 tlp.E11

E~UKOTES Et'I)TE 1 E!TE

~E~UKOTES Et1Jcra.v, eltv

~e~ uKWs tcre. ( 697) ~E~UKWS CTT(I)
:\eVK6TE O"'TOV

s.

2. 3. 3.

Mlcrov
~'CTuT(I)

or

[UKE

(697)

.E~UKTOI
.E~VKET011

D. 2.
P. 2. 3. lNF. P.A.RT.

~\CTa.TOV
:Vu6.'T'wV
J\i1cra.TE
O"'.V'T(I)V

E~UKOTE CTTOIV

.E~UKTOIII

E \JK6TES a-T

.EMKETE)

~EUKOTES !VT(I)V
~E~UKVO.L ~E~UK:i>S, ~~UKUta., ~~UKOS

VCTQ.L i11TiS, ~;}ITiO'a.,

~\O'a.v

(306)

(309)

116

CONJUGATION OF 0--VERBS
2.
Present Imperfeet

[383
MIDDLE!

Future

INDICATIVE.

s.

1. X\Jop.a. 2. <in, H (628) 3. ETO.

'Of1-1JV ov
~;iETO

crop.a. crn, Meru (628) creTa. crecr8ov Ucrecr8ov \icrOfi.E8a. crEcr8E UcroVTa.

D. 2. ecr8ov 3. ;fecr8ov

ecr8ov \icr81Jv 'op.,ea. 'i1ecr8e ovTo

P. 1.

'6p.E8a.

2. Mecr8e 3. ovTa.
SUBJUNCTIVE.

s.

1. wp.a. 2. TI 3. 1JTO..

D. 2. 1Jcr8ov 3. 1Jcr8ov

P. 1.

v.:.p.e8a.

2. 1Jcr8e 3. UwVTa.
PTATIVE.

s.

1. \io(p.1JV 2. M1oo 3. 'iioTo

\icrOLflo1JV croo UcroTo 'i1cro<r8ov \icro(cr81Jv \icroCp.e8a. Ucrocr8e crOWTO

D. 2. Uocr8ov 3. uotcrO,v

P. 1.

\io(p.E8a.

2. Uocr8e 3 UOWTO
IMPERATIVE.

s.

2. ov 3. \icr8w

D. 2. Uecr8ov 3. \icr8wv

P. 2.
INFINITIVE.

'i1ecr8e

3. \icr8wv
Uecr8a. \iop.evos, \iop.v1J, \iop.evov (287) Ucrecr8a. \icr6p.evos, -1), -ov (287)

p ARTICIPLE.

1 M"' in the middle usually means tv release for one's self, get some one set j1ee, hence to ransom, redeem, deliver.

383]
VoiCE OF 'OI

VOWEL VERBS: MIDDLE OF .~w

117
Pluperfect
EVj.L1JV VCTO XVTO Xvcr9ov EUCT9Tj > EVj.LE9o. va-9e XVVTO

1 Aorist

Perfect
Xvp.cn XVCTO.L XVTCU va-9ov Xva-9ov Evp.E9U vCT9E XvvTO.L evp.vos evp.vos

INDICATIVE.

s.

1. va-6.p.1J" 2. 'CTOI 3. 'CTO.TO

'a-ua-9ov CT6.CT91Jv iia-6.p.e9a. 'i1a-ua-9e 'CTU11TO 'CTOIJ40.L >..'iicrn 'CT1JTUL 'CTT]a-9ov >,.;';.,.1JCT9ov iiCTC:.p.E9U 'CTTjCT9E ;jCTOiliTUL iia-o.Cp.1)11 'CTULO 'CTULTO

D. 2. 3.

P. 1. 2. 3.
SUBJUNCTIVE.

s.

1.
2. 3.

.:i (599 f)

Evp.vos us

ti

D. 2. 3.

Evp.VOI ~TOV EVJ4VOI ~T011 evp.voL Zlp.ev EVp.vOL ~TE EVj.LVOL ZlCTL EVj.LVOS Et1)v ( 599 f) E Vj.LVOS Et1)s E Vj.Lvos Et1J EVj.LVOI Ei1JT011 Or ETOV evp.vOI etf]Tl]v or etTljv EVj.LliOL EtT)j.LEll Of EJ4E11 EVj.LVOL E(1JTE or ElTE EVj.LliOL Et1JCTUV Or EE11 XVCTO

P. 1. 2. 3.
PTATIVE.

s.

1. 2. 3.

D. 2. >..'iia-uriov 3. VCTO.(CT91)v

P. 1. 2. 3.
IMPERATIVE.

va-u(p.e&u 'CTULriE 'CTO.LliTO

s.

2. ~CTO.L 3. iicr6.cr901
'cro.a-9ov vcr6.cr901v 'crucr9e vcr6.a-801v >..'i1a-ua-9u vcr6.1-'evos, -1),

>..e>..va-9.,

(599 g) (712)

D. 2. 3.

va-9ov eva-801v vCT9E Evcr&01v EvriO.L

P. 2. 3.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.

-ov

evj.Lvos, -1),

-ov

(287)

(287)

118

CONJUGATION OF 0-VERBS
3.
PASSIVE VOICE OF

[383

}.ij.,
1 Future
v9ijcrol'-a.~

.li"uture Perfect
INDICATIVE.

1 Aorist
v91]V v91]s >.ve'l v81]TOV v9ijT"I)V v81]floEV V81]TE hv&'lo-a.v >.vea. >.v8ijs v8'fi v8ijTOV v8ij'I"OV v8>floEV v9ijTE
>.,ea..,.~

s.

1. e'i1o-ol'-a.~ 2. e;jo-n, e\1un 3. hE;jO"ETO.~

>.v9ijcrn, v9ij<m v9ij<reTa.~ v9ijcreo-8ov v9f]<re<r9ov V91]CTOI'-f9a. v9ijuecr9e >.v9ijcrovTa.L

D. 2. EUO"ecr9ov 3. >.E>.'i1o-eo-9ov
P.

1. E<rOfloE8a. 2. eUcrecr9e 3. EUO"OV'I"O.L

SuBJONCTIVE.

S. 1. 2. 3.
D. 2. 3.
P.

1. 2. 3. 1. EO"OL 1'-'JV 2. EUCTOLO 3. EU<rOLTO

PTATIVE.

s.

A118EL1]V v8EL"IJS h119d"IJ 119EtTOV 01" v9d1]TOV 118d'I"'Jv or 118eT]T1]v 119EtfloEV or v8EL"IJfloEV 118etTe or v9el"IJTE >.v8etev or v9El1]CTO.V >.ve"IJ ... ~ v8ijT., M91]TOV AV8TJT.. V M91]'1"E 118vT.,V

V91]<r0L!'-1]11
v9ij<ro~o v9ijcro~TO

D. 2. eU<ro~u9ov 3. EA<rOLcr91]V
P.

>.v9ijcro~cr8ov

119"1J<rOLcr91]V >.,e'lcro '""eea. >.v8ijuo~cree v9ij<rOLVTO

1. E<r0L!'-E9a. 2. eU<ro~cr9e 3. EU<ro~VTO

IMPERATIVE.

s.

2. 3.

D. 2. 3.

P. 2. 3.
INFINITIVE. pA RTICIPLE.

eUo-eu8a.~
E<rO!'-EVOS, -1], -ov

118ijva. 119e(, >.v8eto-a., 118v (30)

118T)crecr8a.~

v91]<rOI'-fVOS,
-1),

(287)

-ov (287)

0-VERBS: SECOND AOIUST, SECOND l'ERFECT

119

384. As examples of the second aorist and second perfect systems (368), the second aorist active and middle and the second perfect and pluperfect active of >..d1rw leave are here given.
2 Ao1ist Active 2 Aorist Middle
2 Perfect }..>..OL'II'O. >..OL'II'O.S }..OL'II'E }..e}..oL'II'O.TOll >..eOL'II'O.TOV >..eOL'II'O.fi.Ell >..eOL'II'O.TE }..e}..o('ll'iicrL

2 Pluperfect
>..E>..o!'ll"') >..E>..OL'II''I)S ae>..oL'II'EL( v) >..e>..oL'II'ETOll >..E>..OL'II'TTJV >..E>..oL'II'Efi.Ell l>..e>..oL1reTe >..E>..o(.,.ecra.v or EOL'II'(o) >..e>..o('II'US >..e>..oC'II"D E>..OL'II''I)T011 >..eOL'II'TJTOV eOL'II'(o)fi.Ell EOL'II''I)TE EOL'II'(o)CJ'L or EOL'II'OLfi.L ( 695) eOL'II'OLS EOL'II'OL EOL'II'OLTOV e>..oL'II'OLTTJll eOL'II'OLfi.Ell eOL'II'OLTE >..eOL'II'OLEll

!ND.

S, 1. 2. 3.

L'If011 L'II'ES L'II'E

~L'II'ETOV

>..L'II'Of1.1J11 >..L'II'OU L'II'ETO >..L'II'ecr9ov >..L'II'a'91JV L'11'6p.E9a. L'II'ecr8e }..L'II'OVTO L'II'(o)fi.O.L L'II'U L'II"')TO.L L'II"')cr8ov L'II"')cr8ov L'11'C:.p.e9a. L'11'1Jcr8e L'II'(o)VTO.L L'II'OLflo'l)ll L'II'OLO
L'Ir'OI.TO

D. 2.
3.

>..L'II'T1J11 L'II'Ofi.Ell >..L'II'ETE L'II'Oll L'II'(o) >..!'ll'lls

},('11"0

P. 1. 2.
3.
SUBJ.

s.

1. 2.

>..eOL'II'~

l> (599 c)

(692)

}..eOL'II'~S

tis

3.

EOL'II'~S ~
>..eOL'II'OTE ~TOV eOL'II'OTE ~TOV EOL'II'OTES <l)p.ev EOL'II'OTES ~TE EOL'II'OTES l>crL >..e>.o .,.~ et11v
>..eOL'II'~ Et'l)s
>..eOL'II'~S et'l)

D. 2.
3.

},('II'TJTOV }..('II'TJTOV },('ll'(o)fLEV L'II'TJTE },('ll'(o)CJ'L },('II'OLfi.L L'II'OLS L'II'OL >..L'II'OLTOV L'II'OLT'I)ll L'II'OLfi.Ell >..L'II'OLEV L'II'E },L'II'T(o) >..L'II'eTOv },L'II'T(o)V M'II'ETE L'II'OVT(o)ll

P. 1.
2.

3.
PT.

S. 1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 3.

(599 c)

L'II'OLcr8ov L'II'OLcr81JV L'II'OLp.e8a. L'II'OLcr9e L'II'OLVTO L'II'O' L'II'cr8(o) >.,(.,.ecr8ov L'II'cr9(o)v L'II'Ecr8e L'II'cr8(o)V

>..eOL'II'OTE Et'I)TOv, dTOV >..eOL'II'OTE di)T'I)V, dT'I)V EOL'II'OTES d'l)fi.EV, etp.ev >..eOL'II'OTES EtTJTE, etTE EOL'II'OTES ef1JcrO.V, etev

2. L'II'OLTE

JMp,

S. 2.
3.

D. 2. 3. P. 2.
3.
lNF.
PART.

L'II'C:.v, L'IfO' L'II'OfLEVOS,

cra., L'ft'6v

}..eOL'II'"'s, -uta., -6S

(309)

(:305 a)

-ov (287)
-'1),

120
I.

CONJUGATION

OF -VERBS

[385

(B) VOWEL VERBS: CONTRACTED VERBS

385. Verbs in -aw, -t:w, -ow are contracted only in the present and imperfect. The principles of contraction are explained in 49-55. rp.&.w (rp.a-) honow, ,.od.w (7roLt:-) make, and 8'rJw (~o-) manifest are thus inflected in the present and imperfect of the active, middle and passive.
ACTIVE PRESENT INDICATIVE

s.

1. ( rip.d.CA>) 2. ('ri!J.Iim) 3. (ori!J.Iifl)

'I':floc'il 'I':floo'j.S 'I':floo'j. 'I':Jio.TOV 'I':jJo.TOV 'I'Lfloc'iljJoEV 'I':flo.'I'E 'I':floc'iiCJ"L

(1rot<f<A>) (1rotm) (1rotft)

(1rotETov) (1rotETov) ( 1I"OtO!J.EV)

1r'Ot.()

'II'OLE:S 'II'OLE:
1r'Ot.E'T'OV
'!r'OLE'LTOV

(o"i"o"') (o 11 Mets) (o 11Met)

( 01J1I.OeTOV)

S1Jc'il S1JO:S S1JOt STJo''I'ov 51JO'TOV S1JOVfloEV S1JO'TE S1JOVCJ"L

D. 2. (T!J.If.ETOP) 3. ( T!J.If.ETOV)

(o7JOETOV) (OTJMO!J.EV) (07JOeTE) (o 11oouu)

P. 1. (T!J.If.O!LfV) 2. (T!J.If.ETE) 3. ( T!Lif.OVCTL)

'II'OLOVfloE11
'II'OLEtTE

(1rotETE)
(1rotovut)

'II'OLOVCI"L

IMPERFECT

s.

1. (htp.a.ov) 2. (htp.a.es) 3. (htp.a.e)

lorffloll>l'

( ...oleov)

mo(ouv
~'D'OLEI.S

(lo~11.oov)

61)ou11 61)ous Sf)ou

ri,..O:s
ort,..a T:flo.1'011 T:floaT'I)l'

( 'll'olees)
(l'll'olee)

( l~11.oes)
(lo~oe)

'II'OLEL

D. 2. ( hip.d.erov) 3. ( T!J.aT7JP)

( i1rotETOP) 'II'OLE:TOV ( 1rOteT1JV) 'II'OLELT'I)V ( l'll'otop.ev) 'II'OLOVJLEV (l1rotere) mOLE:TE 'll'o(ou11 ( ...oleov)
PRESENT SUBJONCTIVE

( Ni1JOeTOV) 61JO'TOV (1JOT1JP) 61JOVT1)1' (OTJOop.ev) 61JOVfloEV.

P. 1. ( T!Lif.O!LfV) lTi:JLc'iljJoE11 2. (lTip.<f.ere) TLp..TE hi p.~~> v 3. (lrt!Laov)

(lo7JMere)
(l~oov)

61JOV1'E S"'ou11

s.

1. (T!J.<f.<A>) 2. (Tip.<f.vs) 3. (ri!J.Ii!J)

'I':floc'il T:jJoo'j.S ":':flolj. 'I':flo.TOV 'I':flo.'I'OV 'I':floc'ilfloEV 'I'Lflo.TE or:p.c'iiO'L

(1rOtCA>) ( 7rOt!/S) ( 'II'Ot!J)

( 1rOt1JTOP) ( 11"0tf1JTOV)

'II'OLG>

(o 11o"')
(TJMvs) ( 11 Mv)
(o7JM1JTOV) (01J01JTOV) (o 11 Mw!Lfv) (a 11 in]n)
(o 11 M~~>ut)

STJil 51Jots 51JOL 61Jc'iiTOV 61Jc'iiTOV 51Jc'ilfloE11 61Jc'iiTE STJc'iiiTL

'II'OLijS 'II'OL' 'II'Odjorov 'II'OLij'I'OV

D. 2. ( Tp.d.1JTOV) 3. ( Tp.d.1JTOV)

P. 1. ( T!J.If.<A>!LfV)
2. (T!J.If.TJTE) 3. ( T!J.If.WcTL)

( 'lrOtCA>p.EV) 'II'OLc'iljJoEl' 'II'OLij'I'E ( 1rOt1JT<)

( 7rOtfCA>O't)

wot.WO"L

385]

VOWEL VEIS: CONTRACTED VEl{BS ACTIVE- Ooncluded PRESENT OPTATIVE (see 393)

121

1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

s.

( TJLa.O{'f}P) ( rip.a.ol7Js) ( rp.a.ol7J)

TLf.Lcp1Jll TLf.Lcp1JS TLf.L'(l'}

( 7roteol1Jv) ( 1rOL0{7JS) ( 1r0L0l7J)

11'0L0(1Jll 'II"OLO('JS 11'0L0(1J

(o7J.ool7Jv) (07J00{7JS) (7J.ool7J)

li!J0,1Jll li1JO('}s li!JOL1J

( 'T"jLa.Ol'f}TOP) TJLLP'1JTOP ( TJLML'f)T'f}P) TJL<pf}T'f}P ( rp.a.oL7JJLP) rJLLP7JJL<V ( rip.a.ol'f}n) TJLLP'1JT ( T;.ta.ol'>}<TCLV) TJ.LLP'>}<TCLIJ rp.ipp.t rp.<jjs ri;.teP

(rrOL0{'1JTOV) 11"0L0{'1}7"0P ( 11"0L0tf}7"'1JP) ?rOWL1}TT}JJ ( 1rOL0{7JJLP) 1rOL0{'1jJLV ( 7r0LOI'I)TE) 1rOLOi'1}TE ( 1/"0<E0[7J<TCLP) 1/"0LOi'f}dCLP

( 01J.00{7JTOP) 01).Ol'1}TOP ( 01).OOtf}T'I)P) 01).Otf}T7]P (1J)..ool7JJLv) 1))\0l'1}JLP ( 07J)\ool7Jre) 1J)\0{'1}TE ( '>)OOi'f}dQ.V) O'>}OL'f}<TCLV

s.

or 1. ( T;.trf.OLJLL) 2. ( rp.&.ots) 3. (rip.&.ot)

or
( 1/"0tfOLJLL) ( 1/"0LfOLS)
(1r0L~01)
1fOLOJ1.L
7r0LOS

or
( 01Jh0oLP,L) (/i7j.60tS) (o"'Mo<) ( 01J60LTOP) (o'I)OO[T'I)P) ( 07Jh0oLJLEP) (li7JMom) (o7JMo,ev) 01Jh0J.IL O'I)OS O'l)hOt

?rOtai'

D. 2. ( rp.rf.otrov) 3. ( rip.a.olr'f}v)

Tif.L'i'TOV Tif.L<tJT1Jll Tip.ijlp.ev TLf.L'iiTE Tif.LijiEV

(wodotrov) ( 1/"0LEO(T'f}P) ( 'JI"OdOtJLP) ( 'JI"OtOt'T") ( 1/"0tOL<P)

'!I"OLOLT0\1 'II"OLOLT'}V 'II'OLOLfJ.EV

11'0LOL1'E

li1JOLTOV li!JkOLT1JV li1JOtp.ev li'}kOtTE li!JOLE\1

P. 1. ('rip.rf.OLJLP)
2. ( rip.&.otre) 3. ( rp.&.otev)

'II'OLOLEV

PRESENT IMPERATIVE 2. 3. D.2. 3. P. 2. 3.

s.

( rfp.a.e) (rp.a.hw)
(rip.&.erov) (rp.a.hwv)

Tip.ii. Tip.aTCil TLflo.T0\1 - -< TLfl.O.TCil\1 Tiflo.TE TifJ.ci>VTCilV

( 1rolee) (woterw)
(1rott!erov) (woterwv)

-rroCu

'II'OLELTCil
1r'Ot.ELTOV
1TOLfiTWV 1r0C.E,TE

(o'ljoe) (li'I)oTw) (/i7j67"0V)

(o7J0~7"WP)

Sfiou 61JOVTCil li!JOVr0\1 li!JOVTCil\1 S1Joii-re S1JOVVTCilV

( 7" p..7") ( np.a.bnwv)

( 'lrOLf'1:) ( 7rOte6vrwv)

'n'OLOiiVT(I)V

(on Meu) (o7J)..o6vrwv)

I'RESENT INFINITIVE
(rp.etv)

Tip..v

( 1l'OLLP)

'II'OLELV

(7J.6LP)

61JOV\I

PRESENT PARTIOIPLE
(rip.wv)

TifJ.C\1

(wot~wv)

1't'OLci>V

(o"'Mwv)

S1J).cv

For the inflection of contracted participles, see 310. For the infinitive, see 469 a. Attic prose always, and Attic poetry usually, use the contracted forms. N. 1. -The open forms of verbs in -aw are sometimes found in Homer. Verbs in -ew often show the ufwontracted forms in Homer; in Herodotus contraction properly takes place except before o and w. Verbs in -ow never appear in their uncontracted forms in any author. N. 2.-1rott!w sometimes loses its' (43) except before o sounds.

122

CONJL;GATIO~

OF

0-VEH.BS

[385

MIDDLE .AND pASSIVE PRESENT INDICATIVE

s.

1. ( r,...ao}Utt) T~l'-"'1'-0.~ 2. ( rp.ti!h rp.ae<) Ti: l'-!} TL!'-.TO.~ 3. ( Tp.aETa.L)

( 1rOLO}I-fJ.L) 1ro~oiil'-a.~ ( O'T]6op.at) 61JOV!'-0.~ ( 1rOL!/,1rOLfL) 1rO~'fi, 'II"O~(L ( O'TJ6!1, 'T]li.Oet) 61JO: ( 7rOLETrJ.L) 1r0LE'LTO.L ('TJ6ETat) 61J>..oiiTa.~
'lrO~ELtT9ov

D. 2. (rp.aeqllov) 3. ( rp.ael70ov)

T:!'-.tT9ov ( 7rOLEI711ov) Ti:!'-.tT9ov ( 7rOtEI700 V) T,,.c:.,..ea. ( 7rote6p.ella) ( 7rOLE1711E) T:!'-.tT8t TL!'-iiiVTO.~ (7rot!ovra<)

1rO~ELtT8ov

(o'TJ6EI711ov) ( 'T)ll.be1711ov) ( O'T]ll.o6p.ella) (o'TJ6errlle) ('TJMovra<)

S1JOiitT9ov S1JOiitT8ov s'IJ>..ov,..ea. S1J>..ov<r8

S'I)OVVTO.~

P. 1. ( rp.a6p.ella)
2. ( rip.rierrlle) 3. ( rp.aovra<)

'~~"o~ovi'-E9a.
1rO~ELtT9E
1rO~OWTa.~

HlPERFECT

s.

1. ( rp.a6p.'T] v) 2. ( rp.riov) !3. ( hip.riero)

Ti:!'-C:,I'-'1)11
Ti:fL&> Ti:fL.TO

( 1rOLEOP,'T]V) ( i1rot!ov) ( i1rodero)

'II"O~OV!'-'1)11

'Jfo&.oii
'JTOLE'LTO

( io'T)ll.o6p.'T)v) (io'TJMov) (io'T]ll.bero)

61JOVtJ-'I)V 61JOV 61JOVTO 61J>..oiitT9ov 6t)OVtT9t)V 6t)OV!'-E8a. 6t)OvtT9E 61JOVVTO

D .. 2. ( rip.rierrllov) 3. ( hp,aqi/'T)v)

T:!'-.tT9ov ( i7rot1711ov) Ti:!'-i<T9t)v (i7roLEII'T]V) lT;;""c:.,..ea. ( brote6p.elld) lT;;,_.rie (i7rotE1711E) ( f7rOLOVT0) Ti:~VTO

1rO~Ei:tT9ov 1!o~E(tT8t)V

( io'T]li.Oel70ov) ( fO'T)li.OI711'T)v) ( fO'T)o6p.ella) (io'T)ll.ael711e) (iO'T]bOVTO)

P. 1. (trp,a6p.ella)
2. c erp.aeqee) 3. (rip,aovro)

1rO~OV!'-E9a.
'lrO~ELtT8E
1rOLOiVTO

PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE

s.

1. ( rip,awp.a<) 2 .. ( r.<p.av)
H. ( rip.ti'T)rat)

Ti:!'-c\il'-a.~

TL!'-!} T:!l-.T<1'

( 1ro<wp.at) (1rody) ( '!rOL'T)Tat)

'II"O~c\il'-a.~

'lr0~

1rO,ijTa.'
'lrO~ijtT9ov

('TJ6Wp.at) (o'TJMn) ( 'T]'hiYt}rat) ('TJ6'1]1711ov) (o'TJ6'1)1711ov) ( o'TJll.owp.ella) (o'TJ6'1JI711e) (o'T)6Wl'7rJ.t)

S1J>..iiip.<1~

61J>..oi:
S'I)iiiT<1~

D. 2. ( rip.a'T)I711ov) 3. ( rip.ti'T]I7IIov)

TLJio.tT9ov ( 7rOL'T]I711ov) T:!'-.tT9ov ( 7rOL'T]I7()ov)

T~,.c:.,..ea.

'II"OtijtT9ov
1ro~c:.,..ea. 1TO~ijtT9E

61JiiitT9ov S1JiiitT9ov s1J>..c:.,..e(1 S1JiiitT9E S1JI>vTa.'

P. L (rp,awp.ella)
2. ( rip,d.'T]I711e) 3. ('r,...awvrat)

TLtJ-.tT9E
T:!'-iiiVTa.~

( 7rOLEWp.EIIa) (7rOL'T)I711E) ( '!rO<wvra.t)

-rroL.vra.\.

PRESENT OPTATIVE

s.

1. ( rp.aolp.'TJV) 2. ( rip.aoto) 3. ( rip.aotro)

TL!'-tP 1'-TJV TLp./j>o

TJL''TO

( 1rOLEOfp.'T]V) (1r0LOLO) ( ?rOLOLTO)

1TO~o(I'-1J" 'n'OLoto
'JTOLO'LTO

(o'TJoolp,'TJv) ( o'T)'>.6ow) (o'T)OotTO) (o'TJ60tl70ov) ( 'T]ooli711'T)v) ( 'T)oolp.ella) ('T)60LI78E) (a.,Motvro)

S1JO(I'-1J" S1JO:O S1JOLTO S1JOi:tT8ov 61)>..o ttT9 '1 v S1J>..o ,,..ea. S1JOttT9E S1JOVTO

D. 2. ( rip.aotl70ov) 3. ( rp.aoli7II'T]v)

T:!'-''<T9ov ( 1rOLOtl711ov) Tt,.cptT91Jv ( 7rOLEOfi70'T]V) TL!'-tP I'-E9a. ( 1I"Oteolp.ella) TL!'-''tT9E ( 7r0tOt178E) ( 1r0LOLVTO) TiJL'f>VTO

1TO~Oi:tT9ov

1TO~OLtT91JV
1TO~OL!'-E9a.
1TO~Oi:tT9E
"'T'OI.OVTO

P. 1. ( rip.aolp.ella)
2. ( rp.ao<rriiE) 3. ( rp.aotvro)

YOWEL VRBS: COX'l:'HACTED \'ERBS

MIDDLE AND PAssivE-

123

Goncl1tded

PRESENT IMPERATIVE

s.

2. (Ti,.W.ov) 3. ( Tp.a.<rfJw)

TLfLW -rp.io-ew

( 1rou!ou) (1rotdufJw)

1T'OLO

1ro<e(o-9w

('IMov) (o'IolufJw)

S1J~O S"l~ouo-9w
S1J~ovo-9ov S1J~ovo-9wv

D. 2. (Tip.lieufJov) -rp.cio-9ov 3. ( Tp.a.ufJwv) -rrp.io-9wv P. 2. ( ,-p.d.eu!Je) -rrp.cio-Oe 3. ( Tp.a.luiJwv) -rrjJ.io-9wv

( 1rOLEUfJOV) 1rOLELo-9ov ( ?rotdufJwv) 1rOLE(o-9wv

( 01j6EufJov) ( 01jOu8wv)

11"0LEL0"9E ( 7rOLEU8E) ( 7rOtdu8wv) 1rOLE(o-9wv

PRESENT INFINITIVE

(o1j6EUIJE) S1J~Oilo-9E ( 01jO<fiJwv) S1J~ouo-9wv

( -rp.d.eu!Ja.L)

-r:p.cio-9a..

( 7rOLEUIJa.L)

1rOLELo-6a.L

(o1j6E<ffJa.L)

S1J~Oilo-9a..

PRESENT PARTICJPLE

( -rp.a.6p.evos) -rrp.cf>p.evos

( 7rote6p.evos) 1rOLoup.evos

(o'IOoJJ.EVos) S1J~oup.evos

386. Examples of Contracted Verbs. 1. Verbs in -a.w:

a..,.a.-rci.w deceive ( 1rd.T'1 decett) j3o6.w shout ((:Jof} shout) fLEMTci.w practise (p.eT'I p1actice) vi:Kci.w conqueT (viK'I) victory)

opp.ci.w set in motion (bpp.f} impulse) 1rnp6.op.a. attempt ( 1re'ipa. t1ial) TE~E"Tci.w finish ( TEEVTf} end) -ro~p.ci.w da1e ( TO!'-a. !laTing)

2. Verbs in -ew:
ci.SKw do wrong (ll.iltKos unjust) 13o1J9w assist (f:Jo7J06s assis ting) Koo-p.w order (Ko<fp.os mtler) p.o-w hate (p.uos ha te) olKw inhabit ( oiKos ho1tse, poetic) ....o~ep.w mnke war ( 1roep.os wa1) cj>Oovw envy ( tpfJ6vos envy) cj>~w love ( <j;los friend)

.'3. Verbs in -ow:

Kllpow rnake vall (Kpos auth01ity) thnk WOrthy (li.~LOS W01'thy) .,.o~ep.6w rnakB an ene1RY of ( 1r0ep.os war) So"M"' enslave (ooos slave) o--re4>a.v6w crown (urltpa.vos crown) ~E"9ep6w set j'ree (<eMiepos fTee) t"y6w put under the yoke (ivy6v yoke) T0.11"ELVOW humiliate (ra.?rELVOS humblefl)
cl.~LOW

,.,,...a..,
1rOLE&J

387. Principal parts of Contracted Verbs.

TL!'-'Ijo-w 91Jplio-w
1T'Otf)crw

91Jpliw S1J6W

htp.1JO"O. 91)piio-a.
1r0LT)cra.

TE-rf!'-1JKO. TE91jpiiKO.
'IT'E'tt'O(T)KO.

TETffL1jfLO.L TE91jpii!'-O.L 1rE1rOL1Jf'O.L

5e51j~Wf'O.L

TLfL~61JV

91Jpi91JV 1rOL'Ij91JV
51J~cf>81JV

S1J~cf>o-w

51j~wo-a.

s.s~~wKa.

124
388.
PJes. Act.

CNJUGATlN OF -VERBS
SYNOPSIS OF T:flocl-W hononr
Impf. Act. Fut. Act. Aor, Act. Perf. Act. Plup. Act.

Ind. T:flo> Imp. Tt..,.a Inf. Ti:f1oa11 Par. Ti:f1o0l11

TffloW11

Ti:floiJcrw

Sub. T'i:flo> Opt. TLp.q$1')v, .. .pJl"

T:floi)CTH11 Ti:f1oiJcrw11
Middle

Tfflo1)0"0. Ti:floiJcrw Ti:p.i)cra.LfloL Tfp.1)CT011 Ti:p.ijcra.L Ttp.i)cris

Middle

TETfflo'I)ICD. TET:floiJK'IJ 'I"E'I":flo'I)ICWS cl) 'I"E'I":flo'I)KWS E~1)11 TET:flo1JIC110.L 'I"ET:flo1JK0.S

Mid. Pass.

Mid. Pass.

Ind. T'i:floOlfloa.L
Sub. Ti:floOlfloa.L Opt. TLflo'l'flo1J11 Imp. Ti:p.Ol Inf. T:p.acr8a.L Par. Ti:p.wp.E11os

T:floWflo1J11 Ti:floiJcrofloa.L T:flo1JCTOLJJ.1)11 Ti:p.i)crEcr8a. T:flo1JCTOfloE1IOS

Pnssive

T:fJ.'I)CTclfl-1)11 Ti:p.i)crwp.a.L 'I":Jlo1JCTD.Lflo1)11 Tfp.1)CTO.L T:p.i)cra.cr8a.L T:flo1JCTclfJ.E110S

Passive

'I"E'I"fp.'l)fJ.D.L TET:floiJflo'IJ11 'I"E'I":Jlo1Jflo1IOS c:i TE'I":Jlo1JJJ.VOS d1)11 TE'I"ffl-1)0"0 'I"ETi:p.ijcr9a.L TET:flo'I)Jl.VOS

Fut. Perf. Pass.

Ind.
Sub.

Opt. Imp. Inf. Par.

'I":JJ.1J9iJcrcr8a. 'I":flo1)81JCTOJJ.E110S

T:p.-1)91)11 .,.,..,.1J8a. T:p.1)9EL1)11 '1":p.i)91)TL 'I":JJ.1)8ij11a.L TJJ.1J8ds

TETfloiJCTOfJ.O.L

TET:flo-IJCTECT9a.L TE'I":Jlo'I)CTOJJ.EVOS

Verbal adjectives: 389.

Preo. Act. Impf. Act.

SYNOPSIS OF 81Jp6.-w hunt

Fut. Act. Aor. Act. Perf. Act. Plup. Act.

Ind. 81Jp0l

8i)pw11

81Jpacrw 81Jpacroflo 81Jpacrn11 81Jpacrw11

Middle

Sub .. 81JpC. Opt. 81Jpti1J11, -~flo' Imp. 8-l)pi Inf. 81Jpa11 Par. 81Jpw11
Mid. Pnss.

8i)picra. 81Jpacrw 8'1 pacra.Lp. 8i)piicro11 81Jpacra.L 91Jpacras

Middle

TE8i)piKa. TE81)piK1) TE91JpiitcWs cl) TE81J piKWS E~1)11 TE81)pitcVa.L TE91Jpiitc0.s

Mid. Pass.

Ind. 91)pwp.a.L 91JpO.p.1J11 91Jpacrop.a. Opt. Imp. Inf. Par. Ind.

Su b. Sub. 91Jp>p.a. 91Jptiflo1J11 91Jp0l 91Jpao-9a.L 81Jpwp.E110S

81Jpicro(p.1)11 91Jpacrcr9a.L 91Jp:CTOfJ.EVOS

Passive (lnte)

91Jpicr6.p.1)11 81Jpairwp.a. 81Jpiicra.(p.1JV 9-l)piicra. 81Jpacra.o-9a. 81JpiCTclfloE110S

rassive

TE8i)piif1oCU TE81Jpap.'I)V TE91J piip.vos .:> TE91J pip.vos ~1)11 TE9i)piicro .,..e1Jpacr8a. TE91Jpiif1oVOS

[81Jpi8i)crofloa. J

Opt. Imp. Inf. Par.

81Jpa81)11 81Jpii80l [81)pi81JCTOLJJ.1)11) 81Jpii9EL1)11 81Jpci81JTL [ 81Jpi8i)crEcr9a. J 8'1 pii8ij11a. [ 91J pii81JCTOJJ.EVOS) 81Jpii9ds

Verbal adjectives:
81JpiTOS 91Jpi'I"OS

391]

VOWEL YERES: ONTRACTED VERBS

SYNOPSIS OF
Impf. Act.
1roCouv 11'0L-O>

125
Plup. Act.
11'E11'0Li)IC1)

390.
Pres. Act.

rnake
Perf. Act.
11'E1I'0(1]1CG.

Fut. Act.
11"0t.T}cr
11'0LfJCTOL...L

Aor. Act.
1T0(1]0'"Q.

Ind. 'JTOLc) Sub. 'II'OL() Opt. 11'0LOL1JV, Imp. 1I'OLu Inf. 1T'OLEiV Par. 1rot.v

1rot.T)a-w
-ot..,.L 11'0Li)<Ta.L...L 1I'Ol1J<TOV

1TE1TOL1)KWS

6)

11'E11'0L1JICWs Et1JV

'II'OLTJO"ELV

11'0LtJCTG.L 11'0LfJ<TiS

11'E11'0L1JICVG.L 11'E11'0L'I)ICWS

1rOLTJo-wv

Mid. Pass.

Middle

Middle
11'0L1J<Tcl ...1JV 11'0Li)<Tw..,.a..

Mid. Pass.
11'E11'0L1J ...G.L 11'E11'0L'I)...VOS 11'E11'0LfJ ...1JV

Ind. Su b. Opt. lm p. Inf. I>ar. Ind. Sub. Opt. lmp. Inf. Par.

11'0LOV...a.L 1I'OLOV ...1JV 11'0Li)<TO ...a.L 11'0Lcil ...a.L 11'0L0(...1JV

'II'OLO'

(t,

11'0L1]<TOL...1]V

11'0L1J<TG.L...1JV 11'0(1JCTG.L

11'E11'0L'I)...VOS El1JV 11'E1I'O('I)<TO 11'E11'0LijCT9a.L

11'0LEt0'9a.L 11'0LOV...EVOS

11'0Li)<TECT90.L 11'0L1JCTO ...EVOS

11'0Li)<Ta.CT9a.L

11'0L1J<Tcl...EVOS 11'E11'0 L1J ...VOS

Passive
11'0L1)9i)CTO...G.L

Passive
11'0Li)91]V 11'0L1J9cil 11'0L1J9EL'}V 11'0LfJ91JTL

Fut. Pcrf. )?ass.

11'E11'0L~CTO ...G.L

11'0L1J~CTECT90.L

11'0L1]9ijva.L 11'0L1]9ELS

11'E11'0L~<TE<T9a.L
11'E11'0LfJ<TO ...EVOS

11'0L1]9~CTO ...EVOS

Verbal adjectives: 391.

Pres. Act. Impf. Act.
Touv

1I'OL1]T6s, 1I'OL1JTos

SYNOPSIS OF
Fut. Act.
TEcil ( TECTO>,

TE-w

complete
Aor. Act. Perf. Act.
TETEKG.

Plup. Act.
TETEIC'}

Ind. Sub. Opt. lmp. Inf. Par. Ind. Su b. Opt. lmp. Inf. Par. Ind. Sub. Opt. Imp. Inf. Par.

TEI> TEcil

488)

TE<TG. TE<TO>

TETEX,EK~ (;)
TETEEKWs Et1)V

TE0(1Jv, -ot ... L TEL TEELV TEcilv

TEOLt]V, -ot..,.L

TE<Ta.L ... L TEE<TOV

TEELV TEcilv

TEo-O.L
TE<TiS

'T'ETE~EI<VO.L
TETEEK<i>S

Mid. Pass.
TEcil ...a.L TEOL ...t]V TEOV TEELCT9a.L TEOV ...EVOS

Middle

Middle
TEE<Tcl ...'JV TE<TW ...G.L

Mid. Pass.
TETEE<T ...~L T TE<T ...TJV .. TETEECT .... VOS 0> TETEE<T ...VOS Et1)V

TEOV ...a.L TEOU ...1JV TEOii...a.L

TEOL ...t]V

TEECTa.( ...1JV TE<TG.L

TETXea-o
TETE<T9a.L TETEE<T ...VOS

TEELCT9a.L T<ov..,..vos

TE<Ta.CT9a.L TEE<Tcl...EVOS

Passive
TEECT9i)CTO... G.L

PnRsive
TE<T91]V TEECT9cil

Verbal adjectives:
TEE<TTOS TEECTTOS

TEECT81]CTOL...1JV

TEECT9E L'J V TECT9t)TL

TEE<T9i)CTECT9a.L TEECT91]CTO ...EVOS

TEE<T9ijva.L TEECT9ELS

126
392.
Pres. Act.

CONJCGA.TlON OF 0--VERBS
manifest
Perf. Act.
SES-ljII>KO. SES1JII>KWs ~

[392

SYNOPSis oF S1J6-"'

Impf. Act.
iSf)ovv

Aor. Act.
~Sf)fAI<ra.

Plup. Act.
~SEII1JWK1J

Ind. Snb. Opt. Imp. lnf. Par.

1JI 51JI

51JW<rfAI
Sf)~~><rov

51JOL1JV, -OjJ.L 5-ljov S1Joiiv 51JIiv S1JW<rEW 1JW<rfAIV

S1JW<rO.LjJ.L SES1JII>KWS E1JV 51JI<ra.L S1JM<ras SES1JII>KVO.L E51JfAIKws

Mid. Pass.

Middle

Middle

Mid. Pass.

!nd.
Sub. Opt. !mp. Jnf.

S1)oii14a. 51JOijJ.a.L St)o(I':IJV 51JOii 51JOii0"90.L 51JOujJ.Evos

~51JOujJ.1JV S1Jwa-o14a.

(as pass., 809)

SE51JII>jJ.VOS ;, 1JW<rOLjJ.1JV 1JW<rE0"9a.L 1JfAI<rO jJ.EVO$ 5E81JII>jJ.VOS E1JV 8E8fJII>O"O 8E81)I0"90.L E81JII>jJ.VOS

Par.

Passive

Passive
~1JW91JV 81JfAI9i

Fut. Perf. Pass.

8E1JW<rO,...a.L

Ind. Sub. Opt. lin p. Inf. Par.

1J"'91ja-o,...a.L 1JW91JO"OL,...1JV 1Jw91jo-Eo-9:u 81JII>91JO"O,...EVO$

1JW9El1JV 8E1JII>IJ'OL,...1JV 81)W91JTL 81Jw9ijvaL Sdi1J.:0a-Ea-9m 81JW9ELS 8E81JWO"OjJ.EVO$

Verbal adjectives: 81JWTos, 81JWTos

REMARKS ON THE CONTRACTED VERBS

393. In the present optative active the re are two forms: (1) that with the modal sign -~YJ-, having -v in the 1 sing., and -O'av in the 3 pl.; (2) that with the modal sign --1 having JU in the 1 sing., and -w in the 3 pl. The first form is more common in the singular, the second in the dual and plural.
T<P.ciTJv (rarely rlf.'<J!I-<), TtfJ-<\)Tov (rarely rlwt571To11), TtfJ-<ifLEV (rarely rlfJ-Cf5711uv), 'II'OLOL1JV (rareJy 'II'OWP,<) 1 'II'OLOTOV (rare]y 11'0Wl'I)TOV) 1 'II'OLOjJ.EV (rareJy ?roLOl'1!L<V) 1 1JOL1jV (rare]y 7JOtfJ-<), 81JOTOV (rarely 7JOI'I)TOJ1) 1 St)OjJ.EV (rare]y 1JOI"Y)}J.EV).

394. Ten verbs in -aw show TJ where we expect . These are 8u{lw tliirst, {;w live, 7!'nvw hunger, Kv scraJJC, vw 11pin (rare), O'p.w wash, xow give oracles, XPw am eager for (rare), XPwp.at 1{Se, and lf!w rub. See 641.

399]

VOWBL VERBS: CO~TRACTED VEIS

1

127

395. (,;w live and XPwp.aL use are inflected as follows in the present

indicative, subjunctive and imperative and in the imperfect.

Indic. and Snbj. Imperative Imperfect

s.

1. tlil 2. t'fis 3. tii

XPiilfloa.~

XPii XPiiTO.L XPii<r8ov XPii<r8ov XP"fJ.E8a. XPii.,.e

xplilvTO.~

tii tfJT tijTOV tfJTv tiiT

xpi xpfJ<r8 xpij...Oov xpfJ<r8v xPii.,.e xpfJ<r8v

itv itTJS tTJ ltijTOV tfJTTJV tip.Ev tijTE tv

X~P.'IJV

xp XpijTo Xpii<r8ov Xp-{J<r8TJV XpWp.E8a. Xpij<r8E Xp<iVTo

D. 2. tijTOV 3. tijTOV

P. 1. tlilfloEV 2. tijTE 3. tlil<r

twvTv

Infinitive : tf)v, XPiJ<r8a.L

Participle :

tv,

XPWfloEvos

396. Kaiw bttrn, Kaiw weep, do not contract the forms in which , has disappeared (38). Thus, Kdw, Kd.ets, K.H, K.of.uv, Kdere, K.ovo-t. 397. Verbs in -Ew of two syllables do not contract E with o or w. The present and imperfect indicative of 1rw sail are infiected as follows.
'II'Ei:TOV 'II'Ei:TOV 'II'OfloEV 'II'Ei:TE '!TOVCTL
11'EOV

7rOf1oOV
'II'Ei:TOV 'II'dTTJV
1rE\TE

O'II'EI.S E'I!'EL

E7rEOV

and so 'II'w, 'II'oLp.L, 'II'Ei:, 'I!'Ei:v, 'I!'v, 'II'ou<rO., 'II'ov. run, 'll'vw b1eathe.

In like manner 8

a. /Uw need has es, it is necessary, Oy, oo<, ev, ro fov what is necessary; 8op,ru tvant, request, bas o<, o<T<u, il<6p,dJa, iwp.at, But Ow bind is usually an exception, making iles, il<, 'oop.<v, touv bound, r ov that which bind.s, op,at, ovrat, but il<6p,<vov, ov appear in sorne writers. b. ~w scrape contracts. {30w, ~iw and rpiw have !ost (J'; 'II'w, 6w, 1rvlw have lost l!(F) ; . ow need is for W(J'W; w bind is for e~w.
398. Two verbs in -ow, ~8pw sweat, piyw shiver, may have w and '1' instead of ov and ot. See 641. Thus, indic. p-yw, p-y0s, p-y0 (or p-yo), opt. p"f~7Jv, inf. p-ywv (or p"{ov), '[lart. p-ywv. Sn ipwG'<, opt. iopwy (or iilpo), part. l'Opwv (or iopov). a. ovw wash, when it drops its u (43), contracts like 7J.6w. Thus, ovw, ov<, Xov<t, but ovp,<v (for o(~)o-wv), Xou, oIJ'<; and soin other forms, as
~ou, ora.t,

XofhrOat, oVf.J.Evos.

b. o(op.at think (imperfect o/6p.7Jv) has the parallel forms op.aL (riJp.7Jv). 399. Movable v is never (in Attic) added to the contracted 3 sing. imperfect (l?ro{Et, not l?roEw).

128

CONJlJGATION OF U-VERBS
I.

(c)

CONSONANT VERBS

400. Verbs whose stems end in a consonant are in general inflected like non-contracting "'-verbs in ali tenses. 'fhe future active and middle of liquid and nasal verbs are inflected like contracted t:w-ve1bs.
401. Liquid cf>a{vw show.
INDICATIVE.

and Nasal Verbs: future active and middle of

Future Active Futre Middle

S. 1. (<f>avw)
2. ( <f>avm)

3. ( <f>avet)
D. 2. ( <f>avErov) 3. (<f>averov)

cJ>a.v&\ cJ>a.ves cJ>a.vet

cJa.vEi:TOV

( <f>avop.a<) cj.a.voIJ.O.L (<f>avTJ or-) <f.a.vfi or -et ( <f>avETa<) cJ>a.vetTa.L ( <f>aveu-llov) ( <f>av<u-llov) ( <f>ave6p.e1Ja) (<f>aveu-IJe) ( rpavovra1) ( <f>aveolp.'1/V) ( <f>avow) (<f>aVOITO)

cJ>a.vE:TOV

cJ>a.vetcr9ov cJ>a.vetcr9ov cJ>a.vOUIJ.e9a. cj.a.vetcr9e cJ>a.VOVVTQ.L cj.a.vO(IJ.1jV <f.a.voi:o cJ>a.votTo

P. 1. ( <f>avop.ev)
2. ( <f>avt!ere) 3. ( rpavOUCTL)
PTATIVE.

..,a.veLTE

cJ>a.vOtJoEV

<f.a.vocn <f.a.voC1JV <f.a.voC1Js <f.a.vo(TJ cJ>a.votTOV <f.a.vO(TTJV cj.a.vO:tJoEV cj.a.vO:TE <f.a.votev

S. 1. (<f>aveol"'v)
2. ( q,aveol11s) 3. ( <f>aveol"')

D. 2. ( <f>avo<TOV)
3. ( <f>aveolr"'v)

. ( <f>avo<u-IJov) cJ>a. votcr9ov ( <f>aveoluiJ"'V) cJ>a.vo(cr91JV ( <f>aveolp.eiJa) cJ>a.vo(tJoE9a. ( <f>avo<uiJe) cJ>a.votcr9e cj.a.voi:VTo ( rpaVOIVTO)

p. 1. ( <f>aVOIJ.'EV) 2. ( <f>aVOITE)

3. ( <f>avo<ev)
or

S. 1. (<f>avo<p.<) 2. ( <f>avo<S)
3. (<f>avo<)

cj.a.vOttJoL cj.a.vots cj.a.vot

cf>a.voi:TOV

D. 2. (<f>avo<rov)
3. ( <f>av<OlT"'v)

cj.a.vo(TTJV cj.a.VOLtJoEV cj.a.voi:TE cj.a.voi:ev cj.a.vetv cJ>a.vOUIJ.EVOS, 1j, -ov (287)

P. 1. ( <f>avo<p.ev) 2. ( <f>aVOITE) 3. ( <f>avo<ev)

INFINITIVE.

(<f>ave<v)

p ARTJCIPLE.

( <f>avwv, <f>avovu-a, cj.a.v&\v, cJ>a.vocra., ( <f>ave6p.evos, <Pavlov) cJ>a.vov -71, -ov)

(310)

CONSONANT VERBS : </>a[vw

129

'402. Liquid and Nasal Verbs: first aorist active and middle, second aorist and second future passive of <f>aivw show.

INn.

s.

1 A orist Active

1 Aorist Middle 2 A orist Paseive

2 Fntnre Passive

1.

~cj>1JVO.

2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

cj>1JVO.S cj>1JVE cj>i)va.TOV cj>1JVUT1)V cj>i)va.I'-Ell cj>fJVO.TE cj>1JVO.V

ci>1Jvci.I'-1J" cj>i)v"' cj>fJVO.TO cj>i)va.a-9ov cj>1JVU<r91JV cj>1JVU!lE9a. cj>i)va.<r9e cj>fJVO.VTO cj>i)v"'l'-a. cj>i)vn cj>.jV1JTO.L ci1V1J<r9ov cj>1Jv1J<r9ov cj>1Jv6>1'-e9a. cl>fJV1J<r9E
cf.T)vVTa.l..

cj>UV1JV cj>ci.V1Js cj>ci.V1) cj>UV1JTOV cj>O.VfJT1JV cj>UV1J!'-EV cj>UV1JTE cj>ci.v1)<rO.V cj>a.v&i cj>a.vfis cj>a.vfi cj>a.vijTOV cj>a.vijTOV cj>a.v&ip.ev cj>a.vijTE cj>o.v&i<rL cj>a.vEL1JV cj>a.vEL1JS cj>a.VEL1J
~O.VE:1"0V Or

<j>O.VfJirO!liLL <j>a.viJa-n, cj>a.vi)a-n <l>vfJ<rETO.L <j>a.vi)a-ea-9ov <j>a. vi)<re<r9ov <j>O.V1Jir0!'-E9a. <j>o.vi)<re<r9e <j>O.vfJ<rOVTQ.L

SunJ. S. 1. cj>i)v"' 2. cl>>lvns 3. cl>>lvn D. 2. cj>iJV1JTOV 3. cl>fJV1JTOV

P.

1. cj>i)v"'I'-EV 2. cl>fJV1JTE 3. cj>i)v..,<rL

cj>i)va.!l cj>i)va.s or cj>i)vna.s (668) cj>i)vu or cj>i)vne ( 668) cj>fJVO.LTOV

PT.

1. 2. 3. D. 2.

s.

cj>1JVO.L!l1JV cj>i)va.o cl>fJVa.LTO cj>i)va.L<r9ov <1>1Jva.(<r91Jv cj>1JVO.L!le9a. cj>i)va.L<r9E cllvULVTO cj>ijvo.

cj>1)vci.~r9"'

cpa.v1J<r0LI'-1J" cpa.vfJ<rOLO cpo.VfJ<rOLTO cj>o.vi)<roL<r9ov cpo.V1JITO L<r91) V cpO.V1JITOL!lE9o. cpO.vfJ<rOLIT9E cpO.VfJITOLVTO

3. cj>1JVO.LT1)V
P.

1. cj>fJVO.L!lEV 2. <l>fJVO.LTE 3. cj>iJvo.uv or cj>i)vna.v (668)

cj>o.VEL1JTOV cj>O.VELT1JV or cj>O.VELfJT1JV cj>o.veip.ev or cj>o.vEL1JJLEV cj>o.veiTe or cj>o.Vf!1JTE cj>o.VELEV 01" cj>a.veC1JITO.v cj>civ1)9L cj>a.vi)Tw cj>clV1JTOV cj>o.vi)Twv cj>ti.V1JTE cj>o.vVTWV cj>o.vijvo.L

lMP.

2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 2. 3.

s.

cj>ijvov cj>1JVUT"' cj>i)vO.TOV cj>1JVUTOIV cj>i)vo.TE cj>1JVUVTOIV

cllva.<r9ov cj>1Jvcl<r9wv cj>i)va.<r9e ci>1Jvcl<r9wv

cj>i)va.~r9o.

lNF.
PART.

cj>ijva. cj>i)vas, -a<ra., cj>ijvo.v (306)

G.REEK GRAM.- 9

cp0.11fJITEIT90.L

cj>o.v1J<r6p.evos, -1), ci>1Jvci.p.evos, -1), cj>a.ve(s, -ov (287) cj>a.vei<ro., -ov (287) cj>o.vv (307)

130

CONJUGATION OF -VERBS
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE (AND PASSIVE)

[403

403. In the perfect and pluperfect middle (and passive) of stems ending in a consonant certain euphonie changes (409) occur upon the addition of the personal endings. 404. Severa] verbs with stems ending in a short vowel retain that vowel in the perfect (and in other tenses); su ch stems originally ended in u; as TI.-w finish, from T(o> end ( Tdu- ). This u appears in the perfect middle stem (nTl-u-p.aL, nT(-u-TaL). In the second persan singular and plural but one u is found ~ TTE-craL, 7n(-ufh. By analogy sorne other verbs have au at the end of the verbal stem. 405. In the perfect and pluperfect middle the third person plural of stems ending in a consonant or of stems adding u consists of the perfect middle participle with dai are (in the perfect) and ~uav wme (in the pluperfect). 406. Perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of AdTrw (nTr-) leave, yp&.cf>w (ypa</>-) write, TrdfJw (1mfJ-) 1Jersuade, 7rpiTTW (7rpiiy-) do.

Pmfect Indicative

s.

1. >....e1111a. 2. }....EL"'O.L 3. }..,.EL11"70.L

-y-ypa. ......a.. -y-ypa."'a.L -y-ypa.'IM"O.L -y-ypa.cj>&ov -y-ypa.cj>9ov -ye-yp6.1111E9a. -y-ypa.cj>9E "'fE"Y pa.I'-1'-VO der(

'II"'II"ELeri'-O.L
1r1TELCT'O.L

....mpa-y..,.a.
'II"-rrpa~a.
1T1rpii.KTO.L

....mucrra.
1r11"ELtr9ov 1r1rELcr8ov

D. 2. >....ucj>&ov 3. >....ELcj>9ov
P ..1. >..e>..ec..,...,.eea.

-rr:.rpax&ov -rrl-rrpax&ov 11"E-rrpit-y...E9a. -rrl-rrpax9E -rrE-rrpa-y..,.vo eliT(

2. },.l}..ELcj>9E 3. },.E},.ELI'-1'-VOL der(

'II"E11"ELeri'-E9a. 11"11"ELer9E 'II"E11"ELeri'-VOL ElfTL

Pluperject

s.

1. ~},.E},.E(I'-1'-'IV 2. }....EL"'O 3. ~},...EL11"TO

l-yE"'fpcli'-1'-'JV yypa."'o -yypa.7rTO l-y-ypa.cj>9ov yEyp6.cj>91JV

tl'11"E11"ELeri'-'JV
'fr'1f'ELCTO 1t'11"ELO"'TO

l-rrE-rrpiyi'-')V -rr7rpllo 1r1rpiiKTO 'II"'Irpilx9ov 1TE1rpix9TJV

D. 2. >..}..ELcj>9ov

1r11"ELcr9ov

a.

}..edcj>9')V

'II"E1rE Ler91J v

P. 1. l}.E}.E(111'-E9a. tl'11"E1rELer11E9a. "'fE"'fpcli'-11E9a. l.,-E1rpi-y...E9a. 2. ~}...ELcJ>9E -yypa.cj>9E 1r1rELcr9E ml.,.pax9E ' 3. }.E},_ELp.p.VOL i}era.v -yEypa.l'-p.voL i}era.v 'II"E1rELerp.EVOL ')erO.V -rrE'Irpii:yp.vOL i)era.v

Perfect Subjunctive and Optative

}.E}.ELI'-1'-VOS ;, },.EELI'-1'-VOS E{')V YE"'fPO.I'-1'-VOS .!, "'fE"'fPO.I'-1'-VOS Et')V 'II"E'II"ELITI'-VOS :, 'II"E'II"ELeri'-VOS EhjV 11"E1tpii:-yi'-vos ;, 'II"E'Irpii:-yi'-vos El')v

CONSONANT VERBS: PERFECT, PLUPEHFECT

Perject Impe1ative

131

S. 2.
3.

~4Xu>Jto ~~ci>e(l)
~~ucjt9ov ~~E(cjt9Qlv

'\'ypa.>Jto yeypci.cjt9Ql yypa.cjt9ov . yeypcl.cjt9Qlv yypa.cjt9E yypcl.cjt810v

'II''li'ELCTO 'li'E11'ELCT9Ql 'li'11'ELCT9ov 'li'E11'ELcr9QlV 'li''li'ELcr9E 11'E'li'ELCT9Qlv

11''ll'piiEo .,...'ll'ptxe(l) 11''ll'pax9ov 11'1'11'piixe(l)v

11'11'pax9

D. 2.
3.

P. 2. 3,

~4Xucjt9e
~E~E(cjt9QlV

.....'ll'ptxe(l)v

Perject Infinitive and Participle

~E~Etcjt9a.L

yEypcl.cjt9a.L

'li'E'li'Etcr9a.L

11'111'pax9a.L

~.~up.p.vos, 1J, -ov yypa.p.p.vos, 1J, -ov 'li'E'II'Ucrp.vos, 1J, -ov 11'E11'pliyp.vos, 'IJ, -o"

407. Perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of V..yxw (eyx-) confute, cl')")'w ( cl')")'E-) announce, cpa{vw ( cpav-) show, -rew ( TEE-) finish.

Perject Indicative

s.

1. 2. 3.

~~~Eyp.a.L ~~~Ey~a.L
~~~EYKTO.L }.:q~EYX9ov ~oq~eyx9ov

-l)yyE~floO.L
-ijyye~cra.L -ljyyE~TO.L

'li'cjta.crp.a.L ( 'II'cjta.vcra.L, 'li'cjta.VTO.L 'li'cjta.v9ov 11'cjta.v9ov

707 a)

TETXECTf"CLL TETXE-CTCLL 'TETXE-CTTO.L TETXE-cr9ov

TET~E-cr9ov

D. 2. 3.

-ijyy~9ov -ijyy~o9ov

P. 1. ~1J~Yf"E9a. 2. oqE'/X9E 3. ~'IJE'\'floVOL Etcr(

'JYY~.,..ea. -iiY"YEBE ']yyep.voL etcrC

11'Ecjtci.crp.E9a. 11'cjta.v9E 'II'Ecjta.crp.voL etcrC

TETE-CTf"E9a.
TET~E-cr9E

'TITEECTf"VOL EtCTL

Plupe11ect Indicative

8. 1.
2. 3,

~1J'\'flo1JV ~fJE'/~0
~f)E'/KTO

']yyf"'IJV -liY"YEcro i\yyE~ TO ijyyE9ov 'jyy91Jv 'jyyp.E9CL

E'li'Ecj>Mp.1JV ( 'li'cjta.vcro, 707 a) 'II'cjta.VTO "

1rfJa.v8ov

TETECTflo1JV
-TET~E-CTO

-TETEECTTO -TETE-cr9ov TETE-CT91Jv ETETECT-p.E9a.

-TET~E-cr9E

D. 2. ~~~'Yx9ov 3. 1J'/X91Jv

'li'Ecjtci.v91Jv 11'Ecjtci.crp.e9a. 11'cjta.v9e

P. 1.

~1J'/p.E9a.

2. lfJ~E"Yxe -ii'Y'/E9E 3. 1JE'\'f"VOL -1jcra.v 'JY"YEp.voL -1icra.v 'li'Ecjta.crp.v'!L -1icra.v

TITEECTfloVOL ~cra.v

Perject Subjunctive and Optative

1JE'YfJ.VOS cT, 1JE'/f1oVOS Et'IJV

'J"YY~p.vos

cT>

'li'Ecjta.crp.vos

cT>

TETE~ECTf"VOS

cr,

']yy~p.vos d1Jv

'li'Ecjta.crp.vos et11v

TET~Ecrp.vOS d1JV

132

CON.JliGATION OF fi-VERBS
Perject Imperative

S. 2. i).fJEy~o 3. ).1JYX.9"'
D. 2. l).fJEYxeov 3. ~1Jiyxe"'" P. 2. ~fJEYX9E 3. i1Jyx9wv

;jyyEcro itnae"' ;jyyeMov i]yyO"'v ;jyyeME

(11'cl>avcro, 712 a) 11'Ecl>civ9"' 11'cl>av9ov 1Tecl>civ9wv 11'icl>av9E 11'Ecl>civ9wv

'I"E'I"E~cro ,.E,.Ei~cre~~~

,.e,.e~eov TE'I"E~9wv

'I"E'I"E-cr9E
"r:E'I"E~9wv

oirtyi9wv

Perject Infinitive and Participle

i1Jlyx.9u. ).1JE"'{jLVOS, 'IJ, -ov i]yy94L 1]-yyEjLvos, 'IJ, -ov 11'Ecl>civ9a 11'Ecl>O.crjLVOS, -ov
1'),

TETE-cr9UL TETEEIrjLVOS, 'IJ, -ov

EXPLANATION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT FORMS

408. The periphrastic third plural is used instead of the forms derived directly from the union of the stem with the ending. Thus, -ye-ypa!J-p.vot el~l is used for -ye-yparp-na< which would become -ye-ypaif>a/rat by 35 b, v bPtween consonants passing into a. The periphrastic form is also \)Sed in verbs adding ~ to their l'tems, as HHe-~-fJ-vo< el~l for -rere'Ae-~-11Tat. Stems in v that drop v in the perfect system form their perfect and pluperfect re~arly; .tlms, Kpivw ( Kptv-) }utlge has Khpwrat, hKp<11To. N. -On the retention of
-ara.t, -aTo

see 465f.

409. Euphonie Changes. -For the euphonie changes in these forms see 82-87, 103.
'A'Awf>Oe

a. Labial Stems.- <t!J--!J-at is for 'Ae'Awr-!J-a<, )l.'Jo..<trp-Oov is for 'Ae'Aet1r-rr8ov, is for 'Ae'Aet7r-~8e ( 103). In the same manner are infiected other labial stems, as rpi{Jw ( rpfJ-) rub, pi1rrw (p1r-) tMow: TTpp.-fJ-aL for reTpfJ-!J-a<, -rTp>fa< for TeTpfJ-~a<, etc. Stems ending in /J-7l" drop 1r before /J-, but retain it before other consonants. Tbus,
1f"<1f"EfJ-7r-!J-at 1f"E1f"fJ-1f"-UaL
1r1l'E,U.'Jr-Ta.&.

becomes
''

1f"7re!J-f1-at 1f"f1l"EfJ-lfO.L
1r7rE}J.'7fTC1L.

7re7refJ-7r-fJ-E8a 1f"E7r<!J-7r-rr8e

becomes
"

1l"E1f"fJ-iJ-E8a 7r1l"Efl-<f>8e (103)

. Oov

b. Dental Stems. -1f"7r<t~-rat is for 1f"E1f"Et8-Tat (8~), 1f"1l"e<rr-8ov is for 7re7ret8(83), 7r7ret<r8e is for 1f"<7ret8-(rr)8e (83, 103). The rr thus produced was trans409 b. D. Hom. has the original forms
1l"<<j>pao!J-vos, K<lcopv8fJ-vos.

CONSONANT VERBS: PERFRCT, PLUPERFECT

133

ferred to the first persons 'lff'II"Ha"}uu, .,.. .,...ru !J-<6a (SG, 87). Like 'JI"'IfH<r !J-at, etc., are formed and infiected f>f;evupu from >f;euow (>f;evo-) deceiv?, 'lfltf>pMp.at from tf>pci!w (tf>pa.o-) declare, ~u.,..etu!J-a.< (100) from u1rlvow (tr.,.<vo-) pour a libation. c. Palatal Stems. -1rl"1rpii~at is for .,..,.,.pii'""f-<Tat (97), .,..l.,..piiK-ra.< is for .,..,.,..fa.'YTa< (82 a), .,..&piix6e is for we7rp".'""f-tr6e (103). Like "Tr"lrpii'""f!J.a.< are infiecteu 1rKw ( 7r<K-) weave 11"11"<'Y-P-a, li'""fw (a 'Y-) lead 'lj'""fp.a<, acirTw ( aa.'Y-) exchange -lf/1./l.a.'""f!J-a., Tap&,,.,.w ( Tapa.x-) confuse T<Tcipa.'""fp.a.<. Stems in -'YX challge x before p. to 'Y and drop one 'Y (as in l/1.-fJ/I.'Y-P-U' for TJ <'Y'Y-P-a, 85 and 85 b), but keep the second palatal before other consonants (as in l/1.-fJ/I.'Y~a. for /1.'1/<'Yx-tra.<, 97 ; Mih<'YK-Ta< for TJE'""fX-Ta.<, 82). On the reduplication see 446. d. Liquid and Nasal Stems.- Stems in /1. or p are infiected like fl'Y'Y<!J-U', as trT/1./l.w ( crn/1.-, crTa./1.-) send ftrTa.!J-U<, a.tpw ( ap-) raise 1iPP-U<, 'Y<lpw U'Y<P-) wake l'Y'frr<P!J-U' ( 446). Stems in v retaining the nasal are infiected like "Trtf>atr!J-a.<, as <rTJ!J-alvw (trTJp.av-) signify tretrf,J1.MJ1.0.<. (For -<TJ1.a.t see 94 a and b.) Stems in v dropping the nasal ( 659 a) are infiected like /l./l.vJ1.a.<, as Kptvw ( Kptv-) jutlge
KKpLJ1.0.L.

e. Vowel Stems adding .,.., - Here the stern ends in a vowel except before
J1. and T j thus, TET<-<Ta.t, TETe-trOov, T<Te-uOe: but TT<-<T-p.t1-t, T<TE-cr-p.e0a., TET<-<T-TO.L,

N. - Sin ce the stem of n/l.w is properly T<<<T- ( n/l.ecr-~w, 624), the original infiection is T<TE<tr-tra.<, whence T<T<-tra< (107) ; nT<<T-Tat; TET<<u-trOov, nn/l.ecr-trO<, whence TETetrOov, T<TetrO< (103). T<Teup.a.t and T<T<<Tp.<Oa are due to the analogy of the other forms.
410. The forms "Trtf>a.vaat, brltf>av(J"o, and .,..,!tf>a.v(J"o are not attested. 707 a. 411.

Cp.

The principal parts of the verbs in 406-407 are as follows:

persuade, 2 perl. 'II"'II'oL9a. I tntst, a:yy"' announce (il.yyE-), O.yyEw, 1f'1rELCTJl<tL, 11'Ela-9TJV. ii'f'fELa., i)yyEKa., i)yyEjl.a.L, ~'fY'~~'P;i.,..,.., do ( .... pay-), 1rpli!;.,, 'll'pa!;a., 61JV. 2 perf. 'II''II'paya. I have jaTed and ypcicj>"' twite ( ypa.cj>-), yp6.l(!.,, ypa.l(!a., yypa.cj>a., yypa.jJ.jl.a.L, 2 aor. pass. I have done, 'II''II'pliyl'-a., 11'plix9'1v. TE(J) finiSh ( TEE-IT-), TEw, TEE<Ta., ypcicj>1JV. TETEEKa., TETEITjl.a.L, TEIT(j1JV. YX"' conjute ( E'YX-), y!;w, i)>..Ey!;a., cj>a.Lvw show (.pa.v-), cf>a.v&i, cf>1Jva, 1 perf. olE'fjLa.L, ~'Y)( 91'jV. E('II'(J) lea'Ve (L'II'-, EL'II'-, OL'II'- ), E(l(!w, 'II'cf>a.yKa. I have shown, 2 perf. 11'cf>1Jva. 2 perf. OL'II'a., ELjlojl.O.L, t(cj>61jv, I have appeared, 'II"cj>a.a-1'-a., cj>civll'lv I was shown, 2 aor. pass. cj>civ'lv I 2 a. L'II'OV. appeared. 'll'de., persuade ( m9-, ..mO-, 'II'OL9- ), 'II'E(oo.,, 'lru<Ta., 1 perf. 'II''II'ELKa. I have

134

CONJUGATIO~

OF MI-VERBS

CONJUGATION OF jJ.L-VERBS

412. The conjugation of p.t-verbs differs from that of w-verbs only in the present, imperfect, aud second aorist active and middle; and (rare1y) in the second perfect. The P.' fonns are made by addiug the endings di1ectly to the tense-stem without any thematic vowel, except in the snbjunctive of all verbs, and in the optative of verbs en ding in -v p.t. 413. Vel'bS having second aorists and second perfects of the p.t fonn are, as a rule, w-verbs, not p.t-verbs, in the present. Thus, the second aorists : ~{3.,v ({3a{vw go), ~yvwv ( y<yvwcrKw know); the second perfect: T8vap.Ev (OvlfcrKw die). 414. There are two main classes of p.<-verbs. A. The root class. This class commonly ends in -rrP.' or -w-p.< (from stems in"' a, oro). The present stem is usually reduplicated, but may be the same as the verb-stem, which is a root.

Verb-stem

Present Stem

Present

n8E-, TtO.,- (for (),(}", (),9.,, 125 a) T{()"'P.' place r.,,..., send fE-, f.,- (for CTLCTE, ULCT1J) -, ~ CTTa-, O'T'Yf iUTa-, iUT'YJ- (for CTLUTa, ULO'T'YJl 119) ZcrT'YJP.' set {wp.< give 8o-, 8w&8o-, twrp1Jp.{ say rpa-, 4>"1rpa-, <Prr B. The -viip.t class. This class adds vv (v), after a vowel vvv (vv), to the verb-stem. In the subjunctive and optative regularly, and sometimes in the indicative, verbs in -vvp.t are in:flected like verbs
9-, 9.,111

-w.

Verb-stem tK~wy

KEpaPrJYu{3E-

Present Stem ELKVV- l ELKvV~wyvv-, ~EvyviiKEpavvv-, KEpavvP'YJYVV-' P1JYVUuf3Evvv-, cr {3Evvv-

Present

dKvii P.' show

~e.Jyvp.t

yoke

KEpavvup.t mix p~yvp.t break u{3f.vvp.t extinguish

C. There are sorne (mostly poetic) verbs in -nu.u, which add va-, '1- to form the present stem; as oap.-v'!-P-1 I subdue, Mwva-P-ev we subdue.
415. Ali the possible /J-1 forms do not occur in any single verb. TlO'!P-1 and !wp.t are incomplete and ilTegular in the second aorist active ; and ~ITfl'l went out from IT{3hv'"' is the only second aorist formed from vp.1-verbs. hrpuip.'!v I bought, second aorist middle (from the stem 7rpLCI- with no present), is given in the paradigms in place of the missing form of liTT'!!"' ; and ~ov 1 entered from lJvw (but formed as if from o/J-1) in place of a second aorist of the viip.1-verbs.

416]

CONJUGATION OF r[(J"f}jl.t, 'lurwu, oiwJLL

135

416. (A) Root Class.- Infiection of r{8YJJLL place, tCTTrJJLL set, wJLL give, in the present, imperfect, and second aorist tenses; and of
i7rpufJL1JV

I bought.
AcTIVE
Present Indicative

1. TL-91Jfl.L 2. TL-91j-S 3. TL-91J-CTL D. 2. TL-9E-TOV 3. TL-9E-TOV P. 1. TL-9E-p.E11 2. TL-9E-TE 3. TL-9O"L

s.

LO"T'JP. L<rT'JS LO"TTJO"L

t-O"'TQ.... TOV L-O"TQ...TOV

St-&1-p.L SC-6,.,-s SC-llc.lO"L 6C-6o-Tov SC-llo-Tov SC-So-)l.Ell SC-5o-TE SL-66-crL

\-tTTQ. .. p.EV t-O"TQ...TE

L-O"TCJ'"L

lmperject

s.

1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

TL-91J-V
~-TC-DELS

(746 b)

-TC-9EL -TL9E-TOV TL-9-T'IJ11 -TC-9e-p.Ev -TL-9E-TE -TC-9e-o-a.v

tO"TTJV tO"T'JS tO"T'J t<rTO.TOV

f-o-T6.-T'I')V

-6C-6ovv (746 b) .l-llC-6ovs .!-6C-6ov -6C-6o-Tov -6L-60TTJ11 -llC-So-p.ev -ll(-6oTE -6!-6o-o-a.v

tO"TO.fl.Ell tO"TO.TE f-o-Ta.-o-a.v

Present Subjunctive
1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

s.

TL-9cil TL9-S TL9fi TL-9'j-TOV TL-9TJTOV TL-9cil-p.ev

TL-8i\T~

lO"T)

t-O"T-S t-<rTii
1-0"'T'j-TOV

SL-llcii S-ll<p-s SL-llcp 8L-llci\-T011 SL-ll<ii-TOV 8L-6<ii-p.ev 6L-6<ii-TE SL-6<ii-o-L

t. . a-Tfi-TOV
LO"T<ifl.EV
l...g-Tf)-TE

TL-9cil-O"L

t..a-TiiJ-crl.

Present Optative

s.

1. 2. 3. D.2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

TL8EL1JV TL-9EL1JS TL-9eL1J TL-9ELTOV TL-9eLTTJV TL-Oet-p.ev TL-9ELTE TL-9ete-v

l-aTO.(l]-V

LO"TCI.LTJS t-<rTa.C'l
[-O"TO.t-TOV

6L-6oL1JV 6L-60LTJS SL-6o!1J 6L-lloi:TOV 6L-6oC-T1jv 6L-6o L}I-EV 6L-60i:TE 5L-6ote-v

i.-o-Ta.L-T1)V

1-0"Ta.t-p.EV

t.. O"TO.'L-TE
i-O"TO.iE-V

136

CONJUGATION OF MI-VERBS AcTIVE - Ooncluded Present Optative or (750)

~-O"TO.C1)-'T'OV

[41G

or (750)
D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.
TL-9EL1JTOV TL-9ELfjT1JV TL-0EL1Jfl.EV TL-9EL1JTE TL-9EL1JO"O.V

or (750)
!lL-IlOL'IJTOV !lL-!lOLfjT1JV llL-IlOL1Jfl.EV llL-!loL1JTE llL-!l0(1]-0"0.V

t-o-Ta.LfjT1JV t-o-TO.L1Jfl.EV t-o-TO.L1JTE

t-O"TO.L1]-0'"0.V

Present Imperative

s.

2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 2. 3.

TL-9EL (746 b) TL-9-TO> TL-9E-TOV

TL-8-TW1'

tO"TT)

t-aTci. ..T

SC-Sou !lL-!lo-TO> SC-So-Tov !lL-!lo-TO>V SC-llo-TE !lL-!lO-VTOlV

t-o-TO.TOV
1-0"Tci.-TQ>V

TL-9E-TE TL-9i-VTO>V

t-o-TO.-TE

i,.. crTci.-VTWV

Present Infinitive
TL-9-VO.L
L-o-TO.-va.L

ll-56-va.L

P1esent Participle TL-OeCs, -Eto-a., -v (307) i-o-Tis, -.o-a., -6.v (306)

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE

SL-Ilo'lls, -o\io-a., -<iv

(307)

Present Indicative

s.

1. TL-9E-Jl.O.L 2. TL-8E .. O'"O.I. 3. TL-9E-TO.L D. 2. TC-Oe-o-Oov 3. TL-9e-o-9ov P. 1. TL-9-Jl.E9a. 2. TC-Oe-o-Oe 3. T(-9e-vTO.L

t-o-TO.Jl.O.L 'L.. O"TO.-O"O.L

L-c:rTa.-TO.L

SC-SO-Jl.O.L (747 f) SC-!lo-o-a.L SC-So-Ta.L SC-So-o-9ov SC-So-o-9ov !lL-56-p.eOa. SC-5o-o-9e SC-5o-VTa.L

t-o-Ta.-o-Oov t-o-Ta.-o-9ov {-O"Tclfl.E9a. t-o-Ta.-o-Oe t .. crTo.-vra.L

Imperfect

s.

1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.

TL-9-Jl.1JV -TC-Oe-o-o -T(-9e-To -TC-9e-o-9ov -TL-9-o-01JV TL-9-Jl.E9a. -TC-9e-o-9e

-TL-8E-VTO

i-a-T0.-fJo1'fV
~-O"TO.O"O ~-O"TO.TO

-llL-50-fJ.'IJV (747 f) -SC-5o-o-o -5(-50-TO -5C-5o-o-8ov -5L-56-o-91JV -5L-!lO-Jl.E9a. -SC-5o-o-9e -5(-50-VTO

f-o-Ta.-o-9ov t-crT6.-cr91JV t-crTclJl.E9a.

~-crTa.-cr9e

P.

f-CTTQ.VTO

416]

CONJUGATION OF rOwJ.t,
MIDDLE AND pASSIVE -

OTYJjJ..L, wfM.

137

Goncluded Present Subjunctive

t.. o-Tci-p.a.l.

1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

s.

TL-8l-...aL TL-8ij
TL8~TGL
TL-8~-cr8ov TL-8~-cr8ov

i-CTT'fi
t-a-Ti]TQ.t.
t-crT~-cr8ov
l-CTT~-cr8ov

TL-8<fl-p.E8a
TL-8~-cr8E

t-crT<f>-l'-e8a
t-crT~-cr8E
t-O"Tc4-VTO.L

TL8i-VTGL

SL-Sl-1'-aL li-S<P !iL-Si-TaL 5L-Iil-cr8ov 5 -lil-cr8ov li-li<f>-p.E8a li-lil-cr8e St-Si-VTGL

Present Optative

s.

1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

TL-8EL-I'-TJV TL-8et-o TL-8ELTO TL-8et-cr8ov TL-8E(-cr8TJV TL-8ELI'-E8a TL-8ELCT8E TL8EL-VTO

l-CTTGLI'-TJV
i-O"'Ta.i:-o

i-o-Ta.L-To

t-CTTat-cr8ov t-crTa(-cr9t)v l-crTGLI'-E8a

i-O""Ta.i:-a-9e

t..a-Ta.t-vro

li-lio(-1'-TJV !iL-Sot-o li-liot-To li-liot-cr8ov 5L-IioL-cr8TJV li-lioC-p.E8a 51-liot-cr8e li-liot-VTo

or

s.

1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3.

TL-8EL-I'-TJV
Tt~8Et-o

TL-8ot-To (746 c) TL-8ot-cr9ov TL-8o(-cr9t)v TL-8oC-I'-e8a TL-9ot-cr8E TL-90LVTO

Present Imperative

s.

2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 2. 3.

TL-8E-CTO TL-8-cr9"' TL-8e-cr8ov TL-9-cr8"'v Ti-8e-cr9E TL-8-cr8"'v

~L-CTT0.-0"'0

i-O"'Tci.-o-9(l)
t-O"'Ta.-o-9ov

i-crr6.-o-9wv
t-crTa.-o-9e i-o-T.-0"'9wv

SC-So-cro 5-oo-cre.., . lll-So-cr8ov S-lio-cr8"'v Sl-So-cr8e li-lici-cr8"'v

Present Infinitive
TC-8e-cr9aL
~-CTTa-cr8aL

SC-So-cr8aL

Present Pmticiple
TL-8I'-EVOS
t-uTci.-p.evos

s ..s&-.,.evos

138

Ci\JCGATION OF Ml-V.ERBS
SECOND AORIST

[416

Indicative
Active Middle Active -0'1'1)-v -0'1'1)-S O'T'IJ EO'T'I)TOII -O'TfjT'IJ11 -O'T'IJf1-E11 O'T'I)TE EO'T'I)-0'0.11 Middle Active (8WKO., Middle

s.

1. ( 9TJICO., 755) -9-p:I)V

2. (9TJICO.S) 3. (91]KE)
-9ou -9E-TO -9e-0'0ov -0-0'0'1J11 -O-p.eOa. -9e-0'9E -9E-VTO

stood 11'pLC.f1:'1v (415)

1rpC~

755) -86-p.TJV (756 b)

-8ou -60-TO -8o-0'8o11 -86-0'91]11 -86-p.e9a. -8o-rie -80-VTO

(6wKa.s) (8wKe) -80-T011 -86-T1]11 -8o-p.e11 -80-TE -80-0'0.11

'll'p(a.To -11'p[a.-0'0ov -'ll'pLC.-0'0'1)11 -11'pci.-p.e9a. -11'p(a.-0'9E -11'pL0.11TO

D. 2. -9E-TOV 3. -0-T'IJ11

P. 1. -Oe-p.e11 2. ( -9E-TE 3. -9e-0'0.11

Subjunctive

s.

1. 2. 9-s 3. e'!1

e.;;

9i-p.a.

e-1 '!

O'TOI
O'T-S O'T O'Tij-T011 O'Tij-T011 O'T-p.e11 O'Tij-TE
O"TW-CTL

11'p[w-p.a. ( 424,
'~~'PL'!J 'II'PL'IJTO.L

N. 2) 8i
8~-s

8i-p.a.
8~ 8i-TO.L

9ij-To. Oij-0'9011 9ij-0'9ov 96>-p.e9a. 8ij70'8E 9i-vTa.

8~
801-T011 8i-TOV 8i-p.E11 SOl-Te Si-O'L

D. 2. 9ij-T011 3. 9ij-T011

11'PL'IJ0'9011 11'PL'IJ0'9ov 11'p<i>-p.e9a.

'Il

8i-0'9011 801-0'9011 S6>-p.e9a. 6i-0'9E Si-VTO.L

P. 1. 8i-p.e11 2. 9ij-TE 3. 9i-O'L

p['IJ-O'Oe

11'pLW-VTO.L

Optative

s.

1.

9e('l)-11

2. 9E('I)-S 3. 9e['l)

9e(-p.'l)v 9et-o

O'TO.L'I)-11 O'TO.L'I)S

'll'pLO.Lfl-'1)11 11'p[a.-o ( 424, 11'pLO.L-TO 11'p (a.L-0'9ov 11'pLa.[-0'9'1)v 11'pLa.(-p.e9a. '11'p(a.L-0'9e 'IT'pLO.LVTO

8o['l)-11

So[-p.'l)v Sot-o Soi:-TO Soi-O'Oov So(-0'91]11 8o[-p.e9a. Sot-0'9E 8oi-11TO

N. 2)

8o['I)-S So("' Soi-T011 SoL-1'1)11 8oi-p.e11 Soi-TE OO:E-11

9ei:-To, 9oi-To O'TO.L'I) Oei-0'9011 Oe[-0'91]11 9eC-p.e9a. 9ei:-0'9e 9ei-11TO

O"'TO.t-TOV

D. 2. 9Ei-T011 3. 0eL-T1]11

CTTO.:-TTJV

P. 1.

9ei-p.E11

O'Ta.i-p.e11
O'"TO.i-TE
O'"TO.E-V

2. 9ELTE 3. Oete-11 or (758) D. 2. 9EL'I)T011 3. 9ufJ-T'IJ11

or (746 c)

or (758)
O'TO.L'I)T011 CTTO..fj-1'1)11

or (758)
So('I)-T011 SofJT'I)V 8o[1]-p.Ev So('I)-TE fiOL'I)CTO.V

P. 1. 9EL'I)fi-E11
2. 3.
9Et'I)TE 9EL1]CT0.11

9oCp.9a. 9oicr9e 9oivTo

CTTO.L'I)fl-EV CTTO.L'I)-TE CTTO.L'I)CTO.V

417

CON.JVGATION OP -r[()'Y/1-'' LCTT'YJfLL, [OWfLL

SECOND AoRIST- Ooncluded

13!:l

Imperatit>e

s.

2, 6-s 3. O-TW

eov 6-cr6w
6-cr6ov 6-cr6wv 8-cr6E 6-cr6wv

crTij-6 O"T"TW <rTij-TOV

crr-f)-TWV

1Tp(w 1TpLci-cr6w 1Tp(a.-cr8ov 1TpLci-cr6wv 1Tp(a.-cr6E 1TpLci-cr6wv

86-s llo-Til> 86-TOV 86-TII>V 60-TE

66-v~wv

llo v 86-crOw 86-cr9ov 86-cr9wv 66-cr8E 66-crOwv

D. 2. O-TOV 3. O-TWV P. 2. O-TE

<rTftTE
O"'Tci.-VTWV

"

O-VTWV

Infinitive
0EVO.L 8-cr9a. crTij-va. 1Tp(a.-cr6a.L 6ov-a. llo-crea.,

Participle
J. 6ds, 8etcra., 8-fUVOS, .,, O"TO.S, C"'TO.O"'O., 6-v (307) crTci-v (30G) -ov

1rp1.0.-p.EVOS,

-TJ,

Sovs, 6ovcra., 86-p.evos,

66-v (307)
TJ,

-ov (287)

-ov

SECOND PERI<'ECT 01!' JLL-VERBS

417. A few verbs of the p.t class have a second verfect and pluperfect. Ouly the dnal and plural occur; for tlJe singular, the first pe1fect and pluperfect are used. The second perfect and pluperfect of icrT'YJfL' are infiected as follows :
SECOND PERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive

Optative

Imperative

s.

1. 2. 3.

(~<rT'lKa.)
(~cr.,.,Ka.s)

stand -a-TW
-crTfi-s -crTii
-aTi]--rov

-crTa.L'l- (poetic)
-O"'TO.i'l}-S

1-crTa.-8 (poetic)
-crrcl.-Tw
-CTT6.-TWV

(~O"T'lKE)
~-O"TI1TOV
~-o-TO. ..TOV

-crTa.('l
-o-"'"a.i-TTJV Or -O.L~T1']V

D. 2. 3.

-crTI1TOV Or 11L'1T0V ( 4{) 1b) 1-crT!I.TOV -crTI1LfJoEV

-O"'TO.E-V

-o-Tf)-TOV
-O"TW-p.ev

P. 1. 2.
3.

~-O'"TO. ... J.LEV

01'

11L'lf'oEV

~-O"TI1TE
-O"T.CTL

-O"'Tfj-TE
-aTW-o-L

-O'"TO.-TE Or -CLLT)TE

or

-O.LT)O"'O.V

INFINITIVE

-crTci-va.L

l' ARTICIPLE

-crT<i>-s, EO"Tiicra., -<rT6s (309 a)

SECOND PLUPERFECT

S. 1. ( elcrTfJK'l) stood
2. ( El<rT"KTJS) 3. ( ElcrTf)KEL)

D. 2. -crTa.-Tov 3. -D"'T0.-T7]V

P. 1.

1-0"'TO.-p.EV

2. -crT\1-TE

3.

~-crTa.-cra. v

For a list of second perfects of the p.t forrn, see 704-700.

140

CONJUGATION OF MI-VERBS

[418

418. (B) -vliflo Class.- Inflection of the present system of 8dKvup.t show and of the second aorist 1li:iv entered.

Indicative
ACTIVE MIDDLE AND PABSIYE ACTIVE

Present

Imperfect

Present

S. 1. SELK-W-floL (746 a) -SELK-W-V (746 a) SdK-VV-floO.L 2. liELK-W-S -SELK-v'U-S SELK-VU-O'O.L 3. SELK-W-O'L -SELK-W SE(K-VV-'I'O.L

lmpetfect -SELK-VV-flo'I]V
~-SELK-V\1-CTO

2 Aorist
~-Sv-v

(415)

~-S'U-s

E-Sei.K-vu-To

-Sli

D. 2.
3.

SELK-VU-'I'OV 6ELK-Vll-'I'OV SELK-Vll-floEV 6E(K-Vll-'I'E SELK-VV-iiO'L

-SELK-VU-'I'OV -SELK-VV-'I"']V -SELK-VV-floEV

-8E(K-VU-TE

SE(K-V'0-0'90V -SELK-vu-u&ov ~-S'U-'I'OV 6ELK-Vll-u9ov -6ELK-VV-0'9'1]V -S'-'I''I]V SnKvV-floE9a. -SnK-VV-fJ.E9a. ~-S'U-floEV liE LK-Vll-u9E -SE(K-Vll-u9E -6'0-'I'E SELK-VU-VTO.L -SELK-Vll-VTO -6'0-0'0.V

P. 1. 2.
3.

-SELK-Vll-O'O.V

Subjunctive

s.

1. 2.

6ELKVVU> SELKVVtJS SELKVVtJ

3. D. 2. 6ELKVV'I]TOV 3. SELKvV'I]'I'OV

6ELKVVU>flo0.L SELKVVtJ SELKVV'I]'I'O.L 8ELKVV1]0'9ov SELKVV1]0'90v 6ELKVll<f>floEIJa. SELKVV1]0'9E 6ELKVVU>V'I'O.L

Svw

5vns Suu
SVTJ'I'OV SVTJ'I'OV

P. 1. 2. 3.

SELKVVU>fLEV 6ELKVV'I]'I'E 6ELKVVU>O'L

s, .. ,..,v
SvTJTE Sv wu

Optative

.s.

1. 2. ,3. D. 2. 3. P. 1. 2.

SELKVVOLfloL
8ELKVVOLS

6ELKVVOL SELKVVOL'I'OV 6ELKVlJOL'I''I]V SELKVVOLfloEV 6ELKVVOL'I'E 6ELKVVOLEV

SELKVtJO(flo'I]V 6ELKVVOLO SELKvVOL'I'O SELKVVO Lu9ov 6ELKVUOL0'9TJV 6ELKVllOLfLE9a. 6ELKVVOL0'9E 6ELKVVOW'I'O

" "'

Imperative
2. 6ELK-VV (746 a) 3. 8ELK~Vii-TW D. 2. SeLK.:vv-Tov 3. 8ELK-vli-TWV P. 2. 6ELK-VV-'I'E 3. SELK-VV-V'I'WV
SELK-vv-va. (7 46 a)
SELK-vs

s.

8e(K .. VU-O"'O

6nK-w-u9w 6ELK-VU-u9ov

Sii-9 6'-'I'U> 6\i-'I'OV

6nK-vv-u9wv
SELK-VV-0'9E

S'-TWV
Sii-TE

SnK-vv-u9wv

S'-v'l'wv
Sli-ven

Infinitive
SE(K-VU-0'9CU

Participle
-iiua., -vv (308, 746 a)
SELK-VV-,...EVOS, -TJ,

-ov

6's, Siiua.,

Suv (:308)

SYNOPSIS OF rt8TJp.t, t<rTTJfJ-t

419.
Pres. Act.
SYNOPSIS OF T!&"i!L' ( 0-, 671-)

141

place
1 Perf. Act. 1 Plup. Act. T9"1K0. TE9fJK"l TE9"lK..S:. TE9"lK~ Et"'V

Ind. Sub. Opt. Imp. !nf. Par.

rC9"lflo'

,.,e.;;

Impf. Act. TC9"lv

Fut. Act. 9f}Cl'U1 9f}Cl'OLfloL 9f}Cl'ELV 9f}Cl'UIV Fut. Mid. 9f}Cl'Ofloa.L

Aor. Act. 9"1K0.

e.;;
9EL"'V

TL9EC"lv rEL TL9VO.L TL9E(S Pres. M. P. lmpf. M. P. Ind. TL9EfJoO.L TL9flo"'V Sub. TL9ciif10.L Opt. TL9e(f1"1V lm p. r(9e<TO Inf. rL9e<T9a.L Par. TL9tJoEVOS

Ols

Ind. Sub. Opt. Imp. Inf. Par. 420.

9etva. TE9"1KVO.L 9e(s TE9"1Kti>S Perf. M. P. Plup.M. P. 2 A or. Mid. T9ELfloO.L 9f1"1V 1'E9ELjL"'V re9ntJovos :, 9Wf10.L re9ntJovos et"lv 9eLf1"1V 9"1Cl'0Lf1"1V 9oil T9ucro re9eO:<T9a.L 9<T9a.L 9f}Cl'ECI'9a.L re9nfl-vos 9floEVOS 9"1Cl'OfloEVOS 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass. TE9f}ITOfJoO.L rO"lv TE9< TE9e("lv T9"1TL TE9f}Cl'ECI'90.L TE9ijVO.L TE9"lcT0floEVOS TE9ELS Verbal adjectives : 9Eros, 9eros.

SYNOPSIS OP t<TT"lflo'

(crTa-,

<TTrJ-)

set (in perf. and 2 aor. stand)

2 A or. Act.

Pres. lm pf. Act.

Fnt. Act.

1 Aor. Act. ITT"liTa.

O"'TTJO'"W

Ind. t<TT"lflo' set

~<l'T'lV

<Trf)<TUI shall set

set ITT"lv stood

Q'"T()

Sub. t<rr& Opt. i.o-Ta.(f)V Imp. t<TT"i Inf. Lo-T6.va.&. Par. LO""T'its

Cl'Tf}Cl'OLfloL
CTTT}O"El.l'

Cl'Tf}Cl'UIV Pres. Impf. M. P. Fut. Mid. Ind. t<Tra.p.a.L stand o-rf)<Top.a. (in trans.) i<TT<flo"lV ITTTI<T<f1"1V (trans.) Sub. i.crTWp.a.l. <TTf)<Twp.a. Opt. LCI'TO.Lflo"'V ITTTIO"O.Lflo"lV Imp. ZcrTcuro Cl'TijiTO.L !nf. t<TTO.Cl'90.L O"T'f}ITE0"90.L CTTf}O"O.IT90.L Par. L<TT<tJoevos O"T"'!<l'DfloEVOS <l'T"'O"afloEVOS 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass. Ind. o-Ta.9Tj<Top.a. shall be OTrcl.O"lv was set Sub. set up Cl'Ta.9c\i Opt. O"T0.9"iO"O(flo"lV Cl'Ta.9EL"lV lm p. Cl'Ta9'1JTL Inf. o-ra.9f)ire<T9cu CTT0.9ijva.L Par. O"T0.9']Cl'OjLEVOS <TTa.9eLs Verbal adjectives : CTTO.ros, CTTa.ros.

Cl'rf}ITO.LfloL Cl'TO.L"'V Cl'TijiTOV Cl'Tij9L <TTijiTO.L Cl'TijVO.L .(. <TTf)<TiiS Cl'TO.S 1 Aor. Mid.

Perf. Plup. Act. <TT"lKa. stand EL <l'Tf) K"l stood o-Tf}Kw, a-T<ii ITT"'jKop., II'Ta.L"lv
~0"1"0.91. .trrT)Kva.L, trTci.vL UT1')K~S, a"TWS

Fut. Perf. Act.

CTT'f)~"'

shall stand

EITTf)~uv ECTT'f)~UIV

142
421.
Pres. Act.

CO~JUGATlON

OF Ml-VElS

[421

SYNOPSIS OF Swp.L (llo-, ow-) give

lmpf. Act.

!nd. Swp.L Sub. SSm Opt. SLSOL1JV

CSouv

Fut. Act. M>ITW

Aor. Act.

1 Perf. Act.

1 Plup. Act.

S.r.ITOLJLL fl.r.ITELV
S<f>ITWV

Imp. SCSou
Inf. s.s.sva.L Par. SSous
Pr~s.

SwKa. Sm OOL1JV Sos Sova.L Sous

2 A or. Mid.
~S6JL1JV

SSwKa. SeSwKWs cr, SeSwKWs d1JV SeSwKva.L SESwK.r.s

l'erf. M. P.

SES<f>K1J

M. P.

Impf. M. P.

~'ut. ~!id.

Plu p. M. P.'

!nd. Su b. Opt. lm p. !nf: Par. Ind. Sub. Opt. lmp. !nf. Par.

SCSop.a. ~SLOOJL1JV s.&<iip.a. SL&oCp.1JV &C&oiTO SC8o<T9CLL SL86p.evos

s.r.ITOJLO.L SwiTOLJL1JV swiTEIT9a. SwiTop.Evos

1 !<'nt. Pass.

Smp.a. SoCp.1Jv So SoiTea., OOJLEVOS

1 Aor.
Pa~s.

~&ScSJL1JV SSop.a. SEOOJLVOS cr. SESop.vos EC1JV SSo<To SEfloiT9a.L MOOJLVOS

So9f)ITOJLO.L

~S69tjv

So9ii So9d1JV So91JITOLJL1Jv S691JTL So9f)ITEIT9a.L So9ijva.L So91JITOJLEVOS So9ELS Verbal adjectives: SoTos, SoTos SYNOPSIS OF SELKIIiJLL ( OELK-) ShOW
lmj,f. Act. Fut. Act.
Se(~w

422.
P1es. Act.

1 Aor. Act.

1 Perf. Act.

1 Plup. Act.

ln. Sub. Opt. Imp. Inf. Par.

Ind. Sub. Opt. lm p. Inf. Par. Ind. Sub. Opt.

llELKviv SELKIIiJLL SELKVUW &LKVUOLJLL

SEL~a.

SeCfw
6EL~OLJLL
Se(~ELv

8fLKri
SELKvUVO.L SELKV~S
Pres. M. P. Impf. M. P.

SEL~O.LJLL 6Ei:~ov 6Ei:~O.L SEC~as

SSELxa. SESELXWs cr, SE SELx ws EC1JV SE SELX va. SESELx<f>s

~SESELX1J

SEC!;wv
Fnt. }lid.

1 Aor.

~-!id.

Pmf. Mid.

Plup. Mid.

SELKVUJLO.L ~SELKVUp.1JV SELKVUWJLO.L SecvuoCp.1JV

SdKVUO"'O

SECfOJLO.L 6ELfOLJL1JV MLfEIT9a.L MLfOJLEVOS

Fut. Pnss.

~SELfci.JLt]V

SELSWJLO.L SELfa.CJL1JV SEL fa.

SeC~a.IT9a.L

SELKVUIT9a.L SELKVUtJ-EVOS

SEL!;ci.p.EVOS
1 Aor. Pa.ss.

SESEL'YJL1JV SSEL'YJLO.L SeSEL-yp.vos ~ Se SEL-yp.vos EC1JV SSELfo SESExaa.. SES EL'Y JLVOS

SELX 9f)ITOJLO.L

Imp.
Inf. Par.

SeCx91Jv Sex9m SELx91JITOLJL1JV Sex9EC1Jv SeCx91JT' SELx9fJITEIT9a. SELx9iJva. SELx91JIT6p.evos SELx9eCs

Verbal adjectives : 5ELKT6s, 6ELKTos

425]

ACCENT OF VERBS
ACCENT

143

Simple or compound verbs usually throw the accent as far back as the quantity of the last syllable permits (recessive accent, 159).
423.

Mw, llOJMV, >..6p:qv; ?ratiieuw, !TO.LOEUOU<rt, 1TO.L0UT71V ; a?ro{3aw, &,,.6{3o. ; a!ToX6w, a?rlXov ; li.?rLJ.t<, UUV<Gp.ev, UUJL</>"'JLL, !Tapeur<.
424.

To this general rule there are exceptions. a. Enclitics. -Ail the forms of </>TJP.l say, and elp.l am, except <f>rfs and eT.

b. Imperatives.- (1) 'l'he second person siilg. of the second aorist active imperative of five verbs is oxytone : el1rl say, Ml come, eupl jind, iU see, 'Aa{3l take. Their plurals are accented el?rhe, 'AOhe, etc.; compounds have recessive accent: KaTEL?re, d?reMJe, f<t>eupe, 1rapa'Aa{3e. (2) The second aorist middle (2 sing.) is perispomenon, as Xo.{3oD, ?rapo.{3aXoD,
KaiJeXoD.

c. Contracted verbs are only apparent exceptions: th us, e.g., -rp.~ for -rip.aEL, OTJovu< for o7JMouu<, </><Xev for </><XlELv. So the subjunctive of the first and second aorist passive Xu!Jw for 'Au!Jlw, <t>avw for <t>avlw ; the optatives Xuflep.ev from Xu!Jl-i-p.ev, OLOOJMV from o:i6--p.ev; the futures <t>avw for cpavw, tpavop.L for cpavOLJLL, cpavev for cpavle<v, cpavwv for cpavlwv; <1rev for <1rlev; and the present and second aorist active and middle subjunctive of most p.<-verbs, as nflw for nf/lw, lu-rwp.a<, Owp.a<, perf. KeK-rwp.a<. On tiovu<, n8n, see 463 d.
N. 1.- In athematic optatives the accent does not recede beyond the diphthong containing -<-, the sign of the optative mood : iu-ra'io, iu-rap.ev, iu-ra-ro, o<o-ro ; and so in uf/ep.ev, Xu!Jeiev. N. 2. - ovap.a< am able, f7rlUTO.JLO.L understand, Kpp.ap.a< hang, ovlVT]JLL plojit, and ?rp<ap.7Jv bought (749 b, 750 b, 757 a) have recessive accent in the subjunctive and optative (ouvwp.a<, ?rlu-rwp.a<, ouva<-ro, Kplp.a<-ro). d. Poetic forms sometimes fail to follow the rule, as Mv being.

425. Infinitives, participles, and verbal adjectives are verbal nouns (358), and hence do not regularly show recessive accent. a. Infinitives.- The following infinitives accent the penult: all infinitives in -va<, as XeuKva<, XufJfjvaL, io--rava<, u-rfjvaL ( except Epie -p.eva<, as u-rf,p.eva<) ; in verbs in w the first aorist active, as ft.vua<, Tra<oevua<, the second aorist .middle, as X<7ru8a<, the perfect (middle) passive, as 'Aeft.uu8a<, 7r<?ra<l5eu8at, ?re7ro<fju8a<. N.- The present inf. of contracted verbs and the second aorist active inf. of w-verbs have the perispomenon by 424 c. b. Participles. - ( 1) Oxytone: the masculine and neuter sing. of the second aorist active, as X<Trwv, x,.,.6v; and of all participles of the third declension ending in -s in the masculine ( except the first aorist active), as XvOels. XvfJv, evKws euKos, u-rws u-r6s, nfle{s n!Jlv, o<oous tl56v, iu-rll.s iu-rav, oELKvVS OE<Kvuv (but Mo-ii.s, 7rO<f,rriis ). Also lw v going from efp.L.
425 a. D. The 2. aor. mid. inf. in Hom. is recessive in -ylpeu8a< ( -yelpw assemble); so the perf. MXrwOa< ( aX&.op.a< wander), KaX7J<r8o.< (lixvvf.La< am distressed).

144

ACCENT OF VERBS

(2) Paroxytone: the perfect middle (passive) : e"Avpbos. N. -Participles are accented like adjectives, not like verbs. The fcm. and neuter nom. accent the same syllable as the masc. nom. if the quantity of the ultima permits, thus 7ra.Li5ewv, 7rati)eovcra, 7ra<oeov (not 'l!"aloevov); 7rot?]criis, 7ro<?)criicra, 1rod)crav (not 7rol7wav); rp<wv, </><ocra, rptov (from rp<ov). c. Verbal Adjectives. -The verbal adjective in -ros is accented on the ultima (vr6s); that in -reos on the penult (vros). N. -Prepositional compounds in -ros denoting possibility generally accent the last syllable and have three endings (286), as tavr6s dissoluble, l~a<per6s removable. Such compounds as have the force of a perfect passive participle accent the antepenult and have two endings, as tci.vros dissolved, l~alperos chosen. Ali other compounds in -ros accent the antepenult and have two endinga, as 11{Jaros impassable, x<po7rol7Jros artijicial.
426. Exceptions to the recessive accent of compound verbs. -a. The accent cannot precede the augment or reduplication : l17re<p.t am absent, 1r;jv was absent, elcr-;JMJov they entered, 'l!"--?ja-av they were absent; rp-Krat arrived (cp. iKra<). N.- A long vowel or diphthong not changed by the augment receives the accent: v7r-EKE was yielding (indic. v7r-elKw, imper. v'II"-E<Ke). b. The accent cannot precede the last syllable of the preposition before the simple verb nor move back to the first of two prepositions: 'l!"epLIJes put around, a-vv!Koos give up together (not a-vveKoos), crv-yKaiJes put dawn together (not a-v-yKa!Jes). Compounds of the second aoriBt active imperatives 156s, gs, Ols, and crxls are thus paroxytone: l'll"llhs set on, 1repLIJes put around, l'II"La-xs hold on. c. When compounded with a monosyllabic preposition, monosyllabic second aorist middle imperatives in -o from ,t.t<-verbs retain the circumfiex: 'll"pooo betray, lv!Jo put in. But the accent recedes when these imperatives prefix a dissyllabic preposition : d.,..6/5ov sell, Kara!Jov put down. The open forms always have recessive accent, as lfv!Jeo, Karci.IJeo. a.' The accent of uncompounded infinitives, participles, aorist passive, perfect passive, and of the second aorist middle imperative (2. p. sing., but' see 426 c) is retained in composition. e. 1rla-rat wil( be far from, 'II"<Trtu will be upon do not have recessive accent. f. Compound subjunctives are differently accentuated in the Mss.: 'll"oow,uat and 7r6ow,ua<, e7rt0firat and l1rLIJ7JraL ; the aorist of f7],t.t< has 1rpow,t.ta< and 7rp6w,ua<. 'II"Xw has cl.,.6a-xw.ua<. Compound optatives retain the accent of the primitives: 'll"oooro, as Oo'ro. For <TvvOoro, 'll"poa-Ooa-IJe (746 c) the Mss. occasionally have <TVVIJOLT0 1 7rp6a-IJoL<TIJE ; and 80 7rp6otrO. 427. Final-a., (and -o<) are regarded as long in the optative (169), elsewhere a.<> short. Renee distingnish the forms of the first aorist.

3. Sing. Opt. Act.

:Vw
&1roBw 7raL8u!w

Infin. Act.
vuat &1rovuat 7raL8evuaL

2. Sing. Imper. Mid.

vuaL

UuaL &1roB<TaL 7raL8evuaL

d7r6Vaat
?ra{8uaL

425 b (2) D. But Hom. bas a'l),uevos (Mo,ua< wander), KaxfJ.uvos or K7J x,uevos (11xvv,ua< am dist1essed), la-cr,t.tvos (a-.Vw drive).

.AGGMENT

145

AUGMENT

428. The augment (inc1ease) denotes past time. It appears only in the secondai-y or past tenses of the indicative mood, nam ely, imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. The augment has two forms, the syllabic and the temporal. 429. Syllabic Augment. - Verbs beginning with a consonant prefix. E as the augment, which thus increases the word by one syllable. In the pluperfect E is prefixed to the reduplication .

.\:6w
"n"atikvw

loose

(-vov
-"n"a{8EVov

(-vcra
-"n"a{8wua

~-EVK'I] ,
{;;-7J'E7ratBEvK'I}

educate

a. Verbs beginning with p double the p after the augment. pt1rrw throw, r-pp7rTov, ~-ppi'if!a., l-ppirfJ07Jv i pfrtvlp.L break, ~-pp7J~a., i-ppri"(7]v. N. -pp is here due to assimilation of FP as in Hom. lppe~a did (and lpe~a.); of up in lppeov flowed. Cp. 80 a.
430. fJofi!l.op.a.t wsh, ouva.p.a.t am able, p."/1."/l.w intend augment with e or with 7J (especially in later .Attic) ; thus, lfJovMp.7Jv and i}fJovMp.rJv, lovvrip.rJv and i}ovvrip.rJv, li'Jvwi}07Jv and 1Jouv1}07]v. a. These forms seem to be due to parallelism with i)Oe"!l.ov (from UNXw wish) and ~lie"!l.ov (from OXw). 431. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment because they formerly began with a consonant. Thus,
li.yVii)J-L break (F6:yvi)J-), e~a., aor. pass. ~Y'I" WKO)J-O.L am Captured (Fa.LCTKO)J-O.L), imperf. -i)LCTKO)J-'1)11, aor. ~-11>11 (with tem-

poral augment) or 'icw.

.v86.v111 please (Fa.v86.vw), aor. ~a.8ov (Ionie). .v-o(yw open (Fo(yviifLL), imperf. .v-'!')'OV. .w permit (crEFa.w), Etwv, Etii.o-a., EtiiOtJv. tofLO.L sit (for crE8~of.La.L), ELCTci)J-tJV. 0Ctw accustom ( crFEe(tw, cp. 123), etOtov, EtOo-a., dO!crOtJV. CTTW roll (FEALTTW), EtLTTOV, d.L~a., El(XetJv. ~Kw or XKuw draw ( creKw), EtKov, EtKVcra., etKvcr01)v. l"l!"ofl-a.L joUow (o-E"II"OJI.a.), EL11"0f'-'IJ" p-yO.to)J-O.L work ( Fp-y6.tofLO.L), elp)'a.crcif.LtJV. ~p"II"W C1'eep ( CTEp"ll"..;), Ep11"0V. o-TLciw entertain ( FECTTLa.w), elo-T(wv, ELcrT(ii.cra., ELCTTLiOtJv.

429 a. D. Hom. bas l"/I.a.{3< took (for l-ua{3e), tw<ov swarn (for i-uveov), luuelovro Shook (for tJT"fE<OVTo), roi'JELUE jeared (for t-OfELU<). tp.p.a./Je learned iS

due to analogy. 431 D. Sy]labic augment in Homer before a vowel is a sure proof of initial f in tfL1rov and sorne other verbs. Similar Ionie and poetic forms occur from eTov, etXw, etpw, tX1rw, gvvp.t, ~pow, olvoxow, etc. GREEK GRAJII.-] 0

1-16
t~p.

AUGMENT

[432

X"' hold (o-x.,), xov. send (o-Ltr1)p.L), aor. du. 1-rov for --Tov, .~e'lv for --81)v. L<TTTJIL' put ( trL<TTTJIL'), plu p. EttrTi)KT) for -o-E-<TTTJKTJ. p&J..w see ( Fop6.w), Wp(.l)v, d.lpciKo. or p.Ka.. C:.9<w push ( Fo>8o>), c(,jo"v, o>o-a., eci>o-91Jv. C:.vo!La.L buy (Fo>vo!La.L), eo>vov!LTJV, wvi)91)v. d6ov saw, 2 aor. of opO.w (for -pliov). ELOV took, 2 aor. of a.tpw (for e-ov).

432. Sorne forms of sorne verbs in 431 are augmented as if no consonant bad preceded the first vowel, as T,p-yat"6p.7Jv (and lp-yat"oJJ.7Jv ). 433. Since F disappeared early, many augmented forms show no trace of its existence, as, <i)Kovv from olow dwell (FoKos). Besides E, '1 was also used as the sylla bic augment. This appears in Hom. T,-flom ( -TJS ?), Attic fim y ou knew. 434. The verbs il-yvJJ.t, .liJ"KOJJ.a<, (v)ol-yviiJJ.<, op&.w, which began originally with f, show forms that appear to have a double augment; as lti.-y7Jv, liwv, (v)'f'"(Dv (rarely 1fvot-yov), <wpwv, wpiia (and 6piia). These forrns appear to be due to transference of quantity (34) from T,-Fii'Y7Jv, T,-fo<-yov, T,-fopwv (cp. 4:33). 435. Temporal Augment.- Verbs beginning with a vowel take the temporal augment by lengthening the initial vowel. The temporal augment is so called because it usually increases the time required to pronounce' the initial syllable. Diphthongs lengthen their first vowel.
a.. becomes 1) :

"
0

"''
:

l1 CI.L a.li
EL

" "

"'' ;;

11' 1)l1:
1)l1:

El1 OL

n: .., . ..

ll:yo> lead E;>,..,.Cto> hope lKETEvw supplicate op Ctw mwk o:tr {,j3pCtw insult a.lpo> seize a.i>o> play the jlute elKO.tw liken eilxop.a. pray olKoo dwell

~yov

~xa.
'j'II'La'CI.
KTEUO"O.

'jX1J
~'II'(KT)

-ij'II'LbOV
fKTE\IOV

ij1rLK0.
K'f'E\HCO.

tKETEVKT)
WpLK11

wptov i\f3ptov 'fipollv

TJ.Uouv

l.Spta-a. i\j3pLo-a.
T)il1)o-a.
tjKa.tTO.
1)"~Q.p.1)V

~ptKO.

i\j3pLKCI. tlPTJKCI. 1Jil1JKCI. 1){)'/!LCI.L

~K1]K0.

i.j3p(K1) nP>lK1J 1)"i)KT) TJilY!LTJV

~Ki)K1)

'!Ka.tov TJ"XO!LTJV
~KOUV

<KTJO""O.

436. Initial '!- becomes 17: qw sing, ~ov. Initial "'' , v; w remain unchanged. Initial a. usually becomes 7J : dpurrdw lweak.fast, T,pliJ"T'TJIJ"a. vii.i<TKW and viiMw expend form &.vdwiJ"a and v-fJwiJ"a, vii.WfiTJv and &.v7JW87Jv. 437. Initial diphthongs are sometimes unaugmented: a.l1 in aalvoJJ.at d1'Y; <tKatov, fiKatov; ": <p87Jv and 7JVpfe7Jv from EvpliJ"KW fi nd, ~&.JJ.7JV and 7J!;aJJ.7JV from EilxoJJ.a< pray; Ol1 is never augmented, since it is never a pure diphthong when standing at the beginning of a verb-form.
EL:

435 D. Initial a becomes

a.

in Doric ai1d Aeolic ; initial at and av remain.

REDUPLICATION

147

438. Omission of the Augment.- a. ln A ttic tragedy the augment is sometimeH omitted in choml p<tssages, rarely in the dialogue parts (messengers' speeches), which are uearer akin to prose. b. ln xpfjv (from xp'i] + i'jv) the- augment is strictly unnecessary, but is often added (txpfiv) since the composition of xpfiv was forgotten. c. ln Homer and the lyric poets either the syllabic or the temporal augment is often absent; as cparo and gcparo, {Jfjv and lf{J"Yfv, lfxov and lxov. Iteratives (495) in Hom. usually have no augment (gxeuKov). N. -In Homer the absence of the augment represents the usage of the parent language, in which the augment was not necessarily added to mark past time. It is therefore erroneous, historically, to speak of the omission of the augment in Homer. d. In Herodotus the syllabic augment is omitted only in the case of pluperfects and iteratives in uKov; the temporal augment is generally preserved, but it is al ways omitted in verbs beginning with at, av, e<, ev, o<, and in -yvtw, eOXfw, vw-yw, gpow, Mw, pp.w, etc. ; in otl1ers it is omitted only in some forms (as -yopvw, 11.-yw, .Kw, opp.aw), and in others it is variable ( -y-y..w, ii....Tw, ll.pxw, hriuTap.at, vxop.a<) ; in cases of Attic reduplication the augment is ne ver added. Hdt. omits the augment for the reduplication in the above verbs.
REDUPLICATION

439. Reduplication is the donbling of the sonnd standing at the begiuning of a word. It is used in the perfect, pluperfect, and future pedect tenses in all the moods, to denote completed action. It is sometimes found also in the present and second aorist.
:L

440. V erbs beginning with a simple consonant ( except p) or with a stop and liquid (, p., "' p) place the initial consonant with < before the stem. Mw loose, f-VKa, e-.vK!vat, -.vp.at, E-f!uop.at ; -ypacpw write, oyl-)pa<j>a; K.ivw incline, K-K<Ka; {Ja7rTw injure, fJc-(3.a<j>a; 1rpiw saw, 1r-1rpiup.a<. a. Exceptions: verbs beginning with -yv, most of th ose with -y , and sorne Thus, -yvwpl!;w recognize, l--yvwp<Ka; ')'t--yvwuKw know, ~--yvwKa; -yMcpw with fJX. carve, f,--y.vcf>a ; (3auTavw sprout, l-fJMunwa (usu. fJe(3Mur"r)Ka ).
441. An initial aspirate is reduplicated by the corresponding smooth stop:
cpovvw murder, ....-cp6vevKa; Oow sacrifice, T-OvKa; xopeuw dance, Ke-xopevKa.

442. In all other cases the reduplication is formed Jike the augment.

a. Verbs beginning with a short vowellengthen the vowel, as 1!-yw lead, iixa; op06w set upright, i/JpfJwKa; -y-y.w annmmce, if-y-yeKa.
b. Verbs beginning with two or more consonants (except a stop with a liqnid), a double consonant, and p simply prefixe. pis here doubled (cp. 429 a.).
439 D. Reduplication (or the augment for the reduplication) is general! y retained in Hom. Exceptions are ~pxaTaL and ~pxaro from rp-yw shnt, /l.vw-ya orde1, ~ur a< from ~vvvp.< clot/w. On oxaTa< await, lo-yp.1Jv was expecting cp. 634. 442. b. D. Hom. has pe-pv1rwp.lvos (pv1r6w soil), (p.p.ope (p.eipop.at obtain) for l-O"p.ope 445 a, l!uuvp.at (uw wge) for -K,v-p.a<; Ionie has kr"r)p.at.

148
Thus,

REDl)PLICATION

[443

Kri!;w jound, 11-KT<Ka; <f7r<ipw sow, lf~<f7rctpp.a<; <fTpartJ-y{w arn general, -<frparfJ"ftJKa ; !:tJrw seek, l-!:f}Tt]Kct ; tj;avw touch, 1!->favKa ; pi1rrw thruw, i!pprpa.

N.- p.<iJ.>V<fKw remind and Kraop.at J.<VfJP-tJ ; Kf-KTt}fJ-ctL, -K-KTf}fJ-'f!V,

acquire are exceptious:

p.-p.vtJp.a<, l-p.<-

443. The verbs mentioned in 431 which originally began with a consonant now !ost, reduplicate regularly. Since the reduplicated consonant bas disappeared only e is left, and this often contracts with the initial vowel of the theme. Thus, i!ii-ya for r-(ii'Ya from ra"fV!iJ.L break; ~W<ffJ-ctL for fE-fW<TfJ-ClL from rw(Uw push; l<TTrJKa for <f<<TTrJKa from l<fT'YJfJ-' set; e!Ka for <f<<T<Ka from tJP-' (<T<-<T1JiJ.<) send. 444. Pluperfect.- The pluperfect prefixes the syllabic augment E to the reduplicated perfect beginning with a consonant; wh en the perfect stem begins with a vowel the pluperfect retains the prefix of the perfect.

Thus perf. 'hl>wKa, 'h'hvfJ-a<, plu p. l-'1\iMKrJ, l-l\el\6p.1Jv ; perf. lf-<fraKa, lf-<frctfJ-ct<, plup. l-rrraKrJ, i-<TrafJ-tJV from <TTil\'1\w send; perf. in6pwKa, plup. fnopevKtJ from a"fopevw hamngtte; perf. VP'YJKct, plup. riPfJK'YJ from a!p{w seize. a. Verbs showing '.Attic' reduplication (446), in almost ail cases augment the pluperfect. b. The verbs of 431 follow the perfects of 443; as lli."ftJ ( li"fvp.< ), W<TfJ-1/V ( WiJfW ), elj.Lt}V (rJiJ.L ), ppW"ft} from (f)pf}"{VVfJ-L, t<TTt}fJ-L formS <Trf}Kt} ( = -(<T )<<fTt}KrJ), Ion. and poet. <frf}KtJ (rare in Att. prose). i!otKa am like forms icft<tJ.
445. Sorne verbs beginning with a liquid or P- take EL instead of the reduplication: a.fLf30.v., ('1\afJ-) take, d-rJrpa, et-'YJP-P-ct<, <l-'1\f}rf>tJ; a.yxciv"' (Xax-) obtain by lot, et-'htJxa, d-'1\fJx'YJ; 'Y"' collect (in composition) -d-'1\oxa, -<l-Mx'Y/, -<f-<"ffJ-ct< (rarely l\{-<"ffJ-a.<); fLELpOfLa. receive a shaTe, -iJ.aprat it is jated, -fJ-apro with rough breathing; also the stems ep, PTJ say, d-ptJKa, d-pfJK'YJ. a. dl\'f/rf>a is from <T<-<T'Y)rpa by 37 (cp. Hom. i!l\a(3ov for -<fa{3ov), iJ.apra.t is from <T<-<TiJ.apra< (cp. Hom. iiP-fJ-Ope ). The other forms are probably analogues of dtJrf>a..

446. .Attic Reduplication.- Some verbs whose themes begin with

a, "' or o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate by l'epeating the initial vowel and the consonant and by lengthening a and E to TJ, o to w. Th us &.ydpw collect, &.y-~y<pKa, &.y~~Y"PJ=L; ydpw awaken,

444 b. D. Hdt. has ot<a (for l!ott<a), l!wea, lw8ea; Hom. has i!w!Jev and dwiJe. 445 D. Hom. odow jear stands for 0-0fW from 0-0fO(J,.)ct (cp. or<os). So lielilo<Ka. for lie-il rot Ka. For ilelileKro gTeeted we should re ad of}lieKro with 'Y}- reduplication. Hdt. has <&.fJtJKa and -<ctiJ.iJ.fvos. tJfJ-P-ct' occurs in tragedy. 446 D.- In Hom. 'Attic 'reduplication is even more frequent than in Attic; thus, lotJochs from 1!/lw eat, ipf}p<7ra have jallen, ippt'l('ro (without lengthening) frOID pei'l('W OVerthrmV, Opwp{xaraL from op"(W 1'each. }<'or Other poeticaJ forll1S see in the List of Verbs a-yeipw, a1plw, l\aofJ-at, &.papi<TKW, ipdilw, ipi!;w, lfxw, il!;w,
opaw, ilpwp.<.

POSITION OF AUGME:'I:T AND REDCPLlCATION

14\:1

y-~ypfLaL; yxw conjute, -~fYJm-L ; pvrrw cliy, p-wpvxa, p-wpvyfLaL; O,J.-VfLL swear, p.-WfLOKa; o-p.L destroy, -WKa. So also cppw beaT, v-~voxa, iv-i]vfyfLaL.

a. The name 'Attic ' was given by the Greek grammarians to this form of reduplication though it occurs in Homer and in the other dialects. b. Kow hear has K--f]Koa for K--f}Ko(\!)a; li'Yw has "t-1Joxa for <i'Y-1J('Y)oxaThe plnperfect augments except in the case of verbs with initial : rJK-TJKDTJ, wprwp,6KTJ, 'll'wwTJ; but l\-TJIITJ, lv-1Jvhf.'TJV. 447. Reduplication in the Present. - A few verbs rednplicate in the present by prefixing the initial consonant and ,, as 'Yl-"tvof.tat, "/L-"/V'-f"TK"'' p.<.-f.tvrf<J'Kw, rl-Krw for n-r(<)Kw, 'll'i-'ll'rw for 'll't-'ll'(<)rw, l-11'T1Jf.'' for 11'<.-IJ'T'f/P.'-, rl-11'71-'' for /lr.-11'71-'' (125 a), ol-owf.t' 'll'lpr'II'TJ-1-''-fill (71'\a-, 'II'TJ-) and 7rlp.7rpTJP.'- bum (7rpa-, 7rp7]-) insert 1-' a. In some verbs the reduplication belongs to the verbal stem: {Jt{Jtw make
go l{Jl{JMa, otoa<J'Kw teach lollial;a.

448. Reduplication in the Second Aorist.- li "'w leadforms the second aorist -if-y-a-yov, -y-&."/w, -y-&.-yo'l-'' -y-a-y<v, middle 1J"t-a'Y61-''7" So also -ifv-<"/KO. and -!fv-e-yKov from cj>pw.

POSITION OF AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUND

VERBS

In verbs compounded with a preposition, augment and reduplication stand between the preposition and. the verb.
449. Thus, V11'<pf3o.lvw pass over, V'll'<pe{Jo.tvov, V7r<pf3f3TJKa ; <l11'f3a\\w th1ow into, El<J'f3a\\ov, Ell1'{3ef3TJKO.. a. Before of the augment lK regains its fuller form 1; (133 a), and lv and IJ'VP reappear in their proper forms which were modified in the present. Thus lK{3a\\w th1ow out, ll;f3a\\ov, K{3f3\TJKO. ; lp,f3&.\\w throw into, lvf3a\\ov; IJ'VM-yw collect, 11'vvee"/oP, IJ'vvd\oxa ; O'vppi1rrw throw toyetheT, 11'vvpp'fo., IJ'vvppcj>a; IJ'VIJ'KVcttw pack togetheT, IJ'VV1J'Katov, IJ'VV1J'KVct<J'/11)V. b. Prepositions (except 1repl and 7rp6) drop their final vowel: 7rof3&.\\w throw away, 7r-{3o.ov ; but 'll'epr.{J&.\\w tlwow a1oun, 11'<ptf3a\\ov, 7rpof3o.lvw step f01'wmd, 7rpof3TJv. But 7rp6 may contract with the augment (11'poVf3TJv).
450. But some verbs, which are not often used except as compounds, are treated like uncompound verbs and take the ang1i1ent before the preposition, as ha./1-l}p.TJP sat from Kaliw<at, h&.lit\ov set, sat from Kalll\w, iJf.t<Pl,IJ'a clothed from j.tcj>LfVPV}.tL, fKa/lev/iop (and KO.IJTJOOP) Sl!pt from Ka./lew, i}71'LIJ'Tct}.t1)P, i}11'<.1J'T-f}/11)P from i'TI'l<J'ra}.tat unerstan. 'iTJf.'' forms cj>iH and iJ<t>i<t. The simple verbs occnr mostly in poetry. But 'TI'oa.w e1~ioy makes 'll'oavKa, ll;<ratw review 1;-l}raKa.

448 D. Hom. has many reduplicated second aorists, as 71'f-71'tliov from 11'<l8w ( 'TrLii-) pe1suae, KeKDf.t'f/>, K<-Khf.tevos from K\of.ta<. command, <-ali<J'Iiat from \o.vli&.vw (\ail-) escape the notice of, 11'<-</>tlio-lio.t from cj>Elliof.to.L ( cj>tli-) spare, -ifp-o.pov from po.pl11'Kw ( p-) join, ifJp-opov from 6pvvp.r. arouse. The indicative forms may t:tke the syllabic augment, as in l-'ll'-cj>paoov from rj>patw (cppa.-) tell. From lvl'TI'rw chle and pVKw check come 1jvi11'arro, QnJ (vv'TI'oP, and o)p~KaJror.

150

POSITION OF ACGl\1ENT AND REDCPLICATION

[451

451. Double Augment. - Some verbs t<tke two augments, one before and the other after the preposition, as f}v-.,xbwrlv, f}v-<<rxbwqv from av-<xop.a endure, 1)v-wxouv from voxw annay, hr?JvwpOwp.a from hra.vop06w set upright. So also, by analogy to tl.te foregoing, a few verbs derived from compound words: f}p.4J< <r{h}rovv from p.4J<rfJ?JTW dispnte, f}vnMKfl from vrtotdw go to law (vrlo<Kos). 452. Compounds of Suer- iil and E{i weil. ( 1) oU<Frux.!w am unhappy, 1-ou<rrvxovv, Of-OU<F-TVX?JKa. OU<F-?Jp<FTOUv, OU<F-?JPf<FT?JKa from OU<r-ap<<FrfW do not occur. (2) <l<p-y<rw do good, <l<P"fT?J<rav, d;<p"fT?JKa (inscrip.), d'?JP'YT?JKa (texts). 453. Verbs derived from compound nouns take the augment and the reduplication at the beginning; as p.JOoM-youv, J.tfp.IOo/..6-y?JKa. from p.v0o"Ao-yw tell legends (p.vOoM-yos teller of legends); r/?Kol56p.ouv, r/?Kol56p.?JKa from olKooop.w lmild (olKoObJ.tOS house-builde1) ; iJf.l:rrowv, f}p.7r6?JKa. from lp:rroMw tmjfic in (tp.1ro1) trajfic). a. hK?J<r<atw hold an assembly (lKK?J<rla) makes f}K-K?J<rla)ov or ~<-K?J<rla)ov. l-y-yu.w pledge makes v<-yvwv, v<')'V?J<ra and (better) f}-y-yvwv, TJ"f'YV?J<ra. 454. Verbs derived from compound nouns whose first part is a preposition are commonly treated as if compounded of a preposition and a simple verb; as Kar?J-yoplw accuse (Kar-f)-yopos), KO.T?J-y6pouv, KaT?J"fOP?JKa.; tvOp.lop.a< ponder (gvOJ.tOS) ev<Op.-f)O?Jv, vT<Op.fj<rOa ; l1rwpKw swear .falsely ( hlopKos), 7r<wpK?JKa ; l-yXHPltw ent1ust (<v x<~pl), iv<xflp<<ra. a. But severa] verbs are not treated as Cmpollllds, such as 1ra.raw deceive, a7ri<FTfW distrust, a1ropw am in dijficulty, 7rapp?J<F<.)op.a< speaJc .free/y.
TENSE-SUFFIXES, THEMATIC VOWEL, MOOD-SUFFIXES

455. Tense-Suffixes.- The tense-suffixes, which are added to the verb-stem to form the tense-stell1s, consist of the the matie vowel and certain other letters. No tense-suffixes are added to the verb-stem (1) in the second aorist active and pliddle, and second perfect and pluperfect, of p.<-verbs; (2) in the perfect and pluperfect middle of verbs in -w and -p.<. The tense-suffixes are as follows : 1. Present systell1, -%-, -r%-, -~%-, -v%-, -av%-, -ve%-, -va.-, -vu-, -( <)<rK% ; or none, as in 4Ja-p.v. 2. Future system, -<r%-. 3. First aorist sytem, -IJ"a-. 4. Second aorist system, -%-; or none, as in g-<rr?J- 5. First perfect system, -Ka- (plupf. -K?J- from -KfCI.- ; -K- from -K<e- ; -K<-). 6. Second perfect system, -a.- (plupf. -?J-, --, or --) ; or none, as in ~-<rra.-r<. 7. Perfect middle system. none (future perfect -<r%-). 8. First passive system, O?J-, -!1<- (future passive -81)<r%-). 9. Second passive system, '1, -- (future passive -?JIJ"%-). N. --a in the aorist is properly a relie of the persona] ending (666). 456. Thematic Vowel. -The thematic, or variable, vowel appears at the end of the tense-stems in the present, imperfect, and second aorist active and

455. D. For tl1e Doric future -IJ"<%-, see 540. -For the Epie first aorist -<r%-, see 542 D.- For the doubling of " in the future and first aorist, see 534 b. D., 544 b.D.

THEl\IATJC \'OWEL, lVIOOD-SllFFlXES

151

middle of w-verbs, and in all futures and future perfects. The thematic vowel in the indicative iso before p. or v (and in the optative of the tenses mentioned); elsewhere it is 'l'hus, %-, <11'%-, O'%-, v07JO'%-, eO'%-; Mo--p.<. In the subjunctive it is w /11 a. Attic inscriptions have both -eO'IJwv and -oO'IJwv in the imperative.
w j 1!-

457. Subjunctive. -In the subjunctive of all verbs the thematic vowel is 'l'hus, }..6w-p.ev, 6'1/-TE, VO'w-p.ev, O'T.l7]-TE. a. Verbs in -vp.t form their subjunctive like w-verbs. 458. In the present and second aorist of p.t-verbs, and in the aorist passive,

w /1/ is added to the tense stem. 'l'hus niJwp.ev from nll~w-p.ev, IJw from IJ-w, niJiju from niJf-11-TE, v!Jw from viJ-w.

459. Suffix of the Optative. -The optative adds the mood suffix --, or -7!which contracts with the final vowel of the tense-stem : Mo<JL< for Mo--p., <f><ol7Jv for <f><eo-17]-v, ,.,e,l'l/v for n1Je-l1J-v. -<1)- occurs only before active endings. When the suffix is -<1}-, the 1 pers. sing. ends in -v; as rp.ao-11}-v = rp.cp1J; when it is --, the 1 pers. sing. ends in -p., as rp.io-i-p.< = rp.cpJL<.
460. "! is used as follows (in all other cases --) : a. In contracted verbs in the singular, rarely in the dual and plural. -appears in the dual and plu ml, rarely. in the singular. b. In liquid verbs in the future active singular: <f>avol1!- for <f>aveo-l1)-v. In the dual and plural -- : <f>avoirov, </>avo'ip.Ev for <f>av<6--rov, <f>ave6--p.ev. c. In the singular of JLL-verl.Js : n0El1Jv for n1J<-l1J-, tol1J for Lilo-l1}-v, IJEl1}v for 1Je-l1J-v. Here the modal sign is n,ded to the tense-stem without any thematic vowel. -- is more common in the dual and plural : niJe'ip.ev for niJ--p.<v, top.ev for t6--p.ev, 1Je7u for IJi--u. V erbs in -vp.< make their optatives like Mw. d. In the aorist passive: v8d1Jv for f..v!Je-11}-v, <f>avfl1}v for <f>a.ve-11}-v. In the , dual and plural -- is more cornmon : viJip.ev for viJ--p.<v, <f>aviin for <f>av--re. e. In sorne second perfects, as 11'po<1JviJolTJ<, and in the second aorist O'xol11v from gxw (but -ffxo'ip.< in composition). N. -In the ;3 pl. -- is regular bef ore -v: Mo-- v, niJE-e-v, v!Je-'ie-v. 461. a. In the 1 n,or. opt. act. of w-verbs the emlings -ELas, -e<E, and -eLav are more common than -a, -aL, -aLev. b. In the aor. opt. passive of al! verbs and in the opt. of p.t-verbs and of contract verbs -Lrov, -LT1Jv, -Lp.ev, -LTE, -LEv are commoner than -L1JTDv, -<1JT1Jv, -LTJJL<v, -L1JT<, -<1JO'av. l'rose writers use either the shorter or the longer forms ; poets use only the shorter forms. Except in contract verbs -L1JTE is very common in the 2 pl. and is sometimes the only form in the Mss., as oi1JTE, 1Jel1}n, "(vol7Ju, -(3al1Jn, viJEi'l/T<, <f>avEl1JTE ; but the forms in question occur in prose writers and their genuineuess is therefore unsupported by metrical evidence.
457 D. Hom. has -%- inRtead of _w f1J-, especially in the 1 aor., 2 aor. of JL<verbs, and 2 aor. pass. (lpuO'O'OJLEV, odJop.ev, rpa11'Elop.ev; also in (op.<v, <(oop.ev). 'l'hese forms do uot occnr in the sing. or 3 pl. active. Verbs in w rarely show this% in the pre;;ent. (Otlwr examples 532, 667 D., 682 D.) 460 D. -L7J- is very rare in Hom. in the dual and plural:

152

PERSONAL ENDINGS

ENDINGS OF THE VERB :

PERSON AL ENDINGS

462. To make the complete verbal forms, to the tense-stems in the various moods are attached the persona! endings in the finite moods and other endings in the infinitives, participles, and verbal adjectives. See 366. The persona! endings of the four finite moods are given below. In many f01ms only the 1.u-verbs preserve distinct endings. Some of the endings are due to analogy of others and many are still unexplained. The first person dual, when it is used, has the form of the first person plural.
ACTIVE INDICATIVE
(primary tenses)

MIDDLE INDICATIVE
(secondary tenses)

INDICATIVE
(primary tenses)

INDICATIVE
(secondary tenses)

AND SUBJUNCTIVE Sing. 1. - or -tL 2. -s (for -o-<), -8o. (-o-Oa) 3. -cr (for --n) Dual 2. -Tov

AND OPTATIVE -v

AND SUBJUNCTIVE
-flolloL -cra.L -TIIoL

AND OPTATIVE
-tL1JV
-crO -TO

-s,

-cr&a.

-TOV -T1]V -tLEV -TE

3.

-TOV

-creov -creov
-tLeea. -cree
-VTO.I.

-creov
-O'"e1JV -tLea. -creE VTO

P.lur. 1. -floEV 2. -TE 3. -vcr (for -vu) AcrivE Sing. 2.

-v, -O"'a.v,

MIDDLE IMPERATIVE
-crO

s.
Dual 2. 3. Pl ur. 2. 3.

-, -e,, -s
-TW
-TOV
-T(I)V

-cr9w -cr9ov -crewv

-creE

-TE

-VTWV ( -TW<TaP)

-v9wv ( -o-Owo-av)

462 D. Doric has --n for _.,.,, -JLs for -JLEP, -PT< in 3 pl., and -ri.v, -o-Oi.v, -JL.P for -TTJV, -<TeTJv, -JLTJP. -ri.v, -o-eav, -JLi.v are also Aeolic. The close agreement between Greek and Sanskrit may be illustrated by tne infiection of Old Greek and Doric <j>i.JLl say, Skt. bhil:mi shine, grp.pov, Skt. abharam bore. l</J<pC-TT}V abbara-tam rpa--r6v bha-tas grp.po-v abhara-m rpi-JLl bM-mi </JfpO-jJ.EP abbari-ma rpa-JLls b ha-mas g</J<p<-S abhara-S <Pri-s bM-si </Jcp<-TE abhara-ta <j>a-Tf b!Jti:-ti rpa-r< bha..tha g</J<p<-( T) abhara-t rpa-r6v bha-thas rpa-vrl bM-nti f>fp-TOV abhara-tall i!<j>epo-v( T) abbara-n(t)

PERSONAL ENDJNGS

153

463.

PRIMARY ENDINGS OF THE ACTIVE (IND. AND SUBJ.)

a. r Sing.- -Ju is found only in 1-'t-verbs. Verbs in -w \tave no ending and simply lengthen the thematic vowel (Mw, >.l...w). The perfect has nopersona! ending, -a taking the place of a thematic vowel. b. 2 Sing.- (1) -uL is found in Hom. uul thou art from the 1-'t-verb el,.,.L I am; possibly also in <Pris thou sayest. Attic el thou art is derived from -uL. riO'fi-S is obscure. ELs is probably for >.e-u<, >.e, EL, to which s bas been added. Subj. Mv-s follows the analogy of the indicative, but with long thematic vowel. TLIJfjs for TLIJ-vs. In the perfect -s (not for -ut) has been added. (2) -IJa is a perfect ending, as in ou!Ja knowest for olO + IJa (83). From the perfect it spread to the imperfects 'lju!Ja wast, -ljE<uiJa wentst, tcp11u8a saillst, and to ifo'flu!Ja or ifoELuiJa k1iewest. The perfect has commonly -a-s. oiuOas and 'lju!Jas are late. c. 3 Sing. --TL is found in ,ut-verbs: u-rl, rl!J'f/u< for rliJ'fi-TL (Doric) by 115. EL is obscure, but it cannot be derived from >.e-u< for 'Ae-n >.vv, TLIJfj (for TLIJt!v) follow MEL, but with long thematic vowel. In the perfect, -e with no persona! ending. d. 3 Pl.- Original -PTL is retained in Doric MovTL, whence. Attic MovuL (115 a); vrl, Attic elut. Subj. MwuL from Mw-PTt, TLIJwuL from TLIJw-PTL, 'II'OLWUL from'll'o<wvTL (Dor. ). Many,.,., forms are derived from -avTL, as TLI#i.uL ( TLIJ-aPTt), o56om ( otob-avTL), urm ( urci-avTL), iurut (from lura-aPT<), the accent of which bas been transferred to niJuL (747 D. 1), OLOOUL from (Dor.) TIIJE-PTL, olo-PTL. -i.n from -gTL (35 b), properly the en ding of the perfect after a consonant, appears as -!.u, in Hom. 'll'e</JuK!.ut; but it bas been replaced by -ii.O't out of -aPTt, as in rerpcicp-i.u,. 464. SECONDARY ENDINGS OF THE ACTIVE (IND. AND OPT.)

The optative usually has the endings of the secondary tenses of the indicative.
463 a. D. The Hom. subj. i8'Aw,.,.,, rvxw,.,.,, d.'Yci'Ywl-'' are new formations. Aeolic bas cf>l'YJ/kL, ooKl!kW!-'L (indic.). b. (1) es or ds in Hom. and Hdt. is derived from < +s. For this form uO'(l) may be read in Hom. Theocr. has-es for -m (&.,.,.tt..'Yes, etc.) and perf. 'll'7rOPIJLS ( 557. 2. D.). b. (2) -u!Ja in Hom. indic. cpfju!Ja, rl8w8a, if11u8a; subj. iJVO'iJa also written i8'f/0'8a; opt. (rarely) Kalot0'8a, {3aour8a. -O'IJa occurs also occasionally in Doric (7ro8op'ij0'1Ja) and Aeolic (txELuiJa, cf>l'f/UOa). c. Aeolic bas rliJ'YJ, 1rol71, uTEcf>avot, but Tjut says. Snbj.: Hom. iiJTJO'< (also written IJt'f/UL; cp. Arcad. l!x71). <f>opt!rw<, 8l70'L. d. Hom. bas -iiut in riiO't they go, l!i.O't they are, and in f3<{3ri.iil1't, 'Y''Yrii.ut. Aeolic bas >.6otut, cf>lELut, ri,uatO'L. 464 a. D. -v for_,.,., is very rare (rplcf>otv in Eur., r.,.,.riprotv in Cratinus). c. Doric Tjs was for 7w(r). e. -vis regular in Doric and common in Hom. and later poetry ; as l!O'ra-v

154

PERSOXAL ENDlNGS

a. 1 Sing.- -v stands for JJ. (133 c), cp. ~<J>epo-v, Skt. abhara-m. After a consonant JJ. (sonant nasal, 20 b, 35 c) became a: n.vcra for "1\iicrp., Epie ~a was for .Y,(cr)a from .Y,crl/;. In the pluperfect -'7 is from e-a (467). -vis found in the optative when the wood suftix is -<'7- ; elsewhere the optative has -JJ.<. b. 2 Sing. -On -crOa. see 403 b (2). c. 3 Sing.- -r dropped (133 b) in ~ii<, hl1J'7, and in the opt. Mo<, et17 (cp. Old Lat. sied). ~"1\iicre has its - from the perfect (cp. oile) and shows no persona! ending. d. Dual. - -T't)v is ra rely found for -rov in the 2 dual ( <vph't)v in Plato). Hom. has hexerov as 3 dual. e. 3 Pl.- -v for -vr by 133 b. -cra.v (taken from the 1 aorist) is used (1) in the i.mperf. and 2 aor. of IJ.<-verbs, as hl8e-cra.v, ~8e-cra.v; (2) in the aor. pass. iM8't)-cra.v, icpriV't)-cra.v (here -v preceded by a short vowel occurs in poPtry, 585 a. D.); (!'l) in the pluperf. "1\eMK<cra.v; (4) in the opt. when -<'tJ is the modal suffix (4f0). In the opt. -crav is rare.
465.
ENDINGS OF THE MIDDLE (INDIC., SUBJ., OPT.)

a. 2 Sing. -l'rimary -cr a< retains its cr in the perfect of ail verbs (l\"l\v-<Ta<), and in the pres. of J.t.<-Verbs (rl8e-<Ta<). Elsewhere <T drops between vowels, as in Y/ or ii<< from l\e-cra<, l\v8-fJO"Y/ or-<<, <j>avfi from <j>av<-<Ta<, rp.ij. from rp.rie-<Ta< ; subj. Mv from ')O"a<, .p-fJvv from <jJ-f}v't}-O"a<, Ofj from 8-f}e-(]"a<, io/ from OW')-CTat, i from i!'t)-CTa<, </><fi from </><'tJ-CTat, o't)o from i'76!1 = O'tJ6'tJCTat. N. 1. -The forms -v and -< are found in the present, future, and future perfect. See 628. N. 2. - ouvq, and ovv for ouvaCTa<, brlCTT'f and E71"iCTTTI for E71"lCTTaCTa<, </>i<< for q,teCT a<, are poe tic and dialectic or late. b. 2 Sing. - -<ro stays in all plnpg. and in the imperf. of p.t-verbs. Elsewher~ it !oses its CT, as in Mou from "1\ve-CTo, )\{JCTw from MCTa-CTo, </J-f}vw from <jJ-f}va-CTo, "1\[.,.ov from "1\i.,.e-CTo, M9v from ~8e-CTo, 7rplw from 7rpla-cro, hp.w from TfJ.rie-CTo, <jJtl\o from l<jJ<e-<To. In the optative, Moto, l7roto, nOiio, do, DCTaw, from Do<-CTo, etc. ; r p./Jo from r p.rio<-CTo. N. 1. - ilvw or .Y,ivw and .;, ... tCTrw are commoner than ilvaCTo and TJ7rlCTraCTo from ovap.a< am able and 7r!CTrap.a.< tnde!stand. N. 2.- After a diphthong or a long vowel in the 2 aor. indic. mid. -<To is retained, as elcro (!'71'-' send), if.Jv't)CTo (ovlv1Jp.< benejit).
(~<TT't}-CTa.v), ~iltoov (Jliloo-CTav), q,ll\'t)Bev (</Jtl\1}01)-CTav), rpricpev (hpri<jJ"f}-CTav). The short vowel before v( r) is explained by 40. Hom. ije-v were became ~v, used in Dor. as 3 pl. ; in Att.ic it, was used <ts 3 sing. 465 a. D. Hom. h<ts (3ouea.<, perf. p.p.V"f)a<, but pres. ovaCTa<, 7raplCTTaCTaL ; lJ"<fe< is uniqne (fm lJ"<f<a.<) ; subj. iV't}a<. Do rie often con tracts, as otv for ote-a<. Aeolic geuerally leaves Ea.< open (KelCTe-at). Hdt. has open -ea<, -'t)a<. b. Hom., Do rie, and Aeolic have generally open forms, as Hom. (3ri"l\"l\e-o (rarely (3d,)\l\w), wouCTa-o. ~pew, CT71"O al'e from -f0. Horn. has p.ripvao for Attic p.ripvaCTo, and may drop CT even in the pluperfect (~CTCTuo ). Vfhen no rie contracts tto we have ii. ln Hdt. a.o, eo are open, but the writing eu for <ois foun.

PERSON AL ENDINGS

155

c. Dual.- The 1 pl. is uscd for the 1 dual exccpt in the ihrcc poetic forrns 'lr<piwp,eOov, Xi.lpp.eOov, opJl.WP-<Oov. Hom. has -a-Oov for -crOrJv in fJwpf}crcrecrOov. d. I Pl. -In epie and dramatic poetry -wcrOa. is often used for -Jl.e8a. for' metrical reasons (f3ovM,.,.ecr8a., 'lr<<Jr.Jl.ecr8a). e. 2 Pl. -On the Joss of cr in cr8e (~crraXOe), see 103. f. 3 Pl. - After vowel stems -vra,, -vro are preserved. A fter stems en ding in a consonant -vro., -vro became -o.ro.t, -o.ro by 35 b. These forms were retained in prose tU! about 400 n.c. (e.g. rerxo.ra<, reraxo.ro).
ENDINGS OF THE IMPERATIVE 466. 1. Active. a. 2 Sing.- e, Xl'lr<, rio., (for rl8e-<) have not !ost -Ot, -Ot is fouud in 2 aor. pass. cpavrJ-0< ; in crrfj-Ot and l<Tro.-8t ; in some 2 .aorists, like 'YVw-Ot, rfj-Ot, 1r-8t, which are ~'-' fmms though they have presents of the w fnrm (fi87). Also in t<T-0< be or know, tlh go, cpriOt or cpo.Oi say. MB~n is for v8?J8t by 125 b. b. -s occurs in Os, ils, il6s, <TX< (and in the rare Ol'Y, 1rim). This -s is not derived from -Ot. c. X<T-ov aor. act. and <T-o.t aor. mid. are obscure in origin. 2. Middle. a. 2 Sing. - -<To retains its <T in th (rare) perf. of ail verbs and in the pres. of Jl.t-verbs (X.:'v<To, ri8e<To, t<Tro.<To ). Elsewhere <T is dropped, as in Dov from De-<To, <11'o from <11'-<To, Oo from 0-<To, oli from l-<To, 1rpiw from 7rpia-<To, rp.w from rp.e-uo. N.- ri8ov, t<Trw, Oloov are poetic or late. 3. 3 Pl. -For -vrwv and -<T8wv we find -rw<Tav and -<T0w<Tav in prose after Thucydides, in Euripides, and in inscriptions after 300 n.c. Th us, 'Tw<Tav, <Trirwcra.P, Xh;Owcrav, fnr&.G'"Owo-av, u81Jrwcrav, Lrrrw(Jav, L7rr0wuav,

ifJnvricrBwcrav, </Javf}rw<Tav, rJl.<T0w<Tav, </Jt<i<TOwcrav, 'Y<'Ypd.cpflwcrav, 11'<7reicrflwcrav, nflhwcrav, otf>.. rwcrav, 8rw(f'a.P, Tt8d'8wuav, Ou"Bwffav, -Tw(Ja..p, -(J'8wuav. N. -~~rwv for ovrwv is rare. Attic inscriptions have (very rarely) -VTwcrav.

f. -ara<, -aro occur in Hom. regularly in the perfect and pluperfect of consonant stems, as rerpd.<f>aro.t, lara< for cr-vrat, fiaro for -lju-vro from f}Jl.at ( -ljcrp.a<) ; also in stems ending in -, as cpOiaro. -a rat, -ara were transferred to vocalic stems, as f3<(3f}arat, (3e(3Xf}aro, Hdt. ovvarat. Hom .. bas -a-ara< in rJXoarat from Xavvw dr'ive. In the opt. -ara always ("f<voiaro for 'Yvotvro). In Hdt. rJ before -arat, -aro is shortened, as perf. 7J'Yarat for in-ft-arat = fi"frJVrat, l(3e(3aro for -rJaro. For K<vrat, Hom. K<larat and Karat, Hdt. has Karat. In the opt. Hdt. has -ara: f3ovoiaro, oe~aiaro. In Hdt. -a rat, -aro occur even in the present system, rtflarat, ovvarat, !crraro. 466 a. D. -0 is not rare in Hom., pres. oiowflt = olilov, opvv!Jt, aor. K8<, perf. rraOt. Aeolic ha.s t<Tr, <f>l/..?J. 1rl<t, oxo, oloot (Pindar) are very rare. 3. Doric has also -vrw, as in 1rapex6vrw; Aeolic -vrov, as cppovrov. Doric has -crflw (pl.) and -<Tflwv.

156

ENDINGS OF TITE INFINITIVE, PARTICTPLE

ENDINGS OF THE PLUPERFECT, ENDINGS IN

<T9

467. Endings of the Pluperfect Active.--1], -17s, -n(v) are derived from -e(o')a, -<(IT)as, -<(IT)<. In later Greek the endings are -v, -s, -EL(v), -ELrov, -<LT1Jv, -<Lp.<v, -e<u, and very late -O'av. 468. The Endings -<T9e, etc. -The IT of the endings -O'fh, -O'OOJ, -O'Oov, -O'OOJv, -O'Oa< (409 N.) has no exact parallel in cognate languages, and seems to have spread in Greek from forms like rer<O'-Oe, gtw0'-8<, etc., where a sigma-stem was followed by original -8<.
ENDINGS OF THE INFINITIVE, P ARTICIPLE, AND VERBAL ADJECTIVE

469. Infinitive.- The following are the endings added to the tense-stem to make the infinitive. a. -ev: in present and 2 aorist active of w-verbs, al! futures active. l'hus, V v, rp.v, <'II'Ev, VITv, <f>avev from De-ev, rp.rie-ev, t'II'-ev, VO'e-ev, <f>avE-ev. b. -a.: in 1 aor. active, as O'a<, 'll'atlieO'a<, iliii;a<. c. , -va.: (1) present, 2 perf. of p.t-verbs, the two passive aorists, as nO-vaL, eO'rriva<, vOf]-va<, <f>avfi-vaL; (2) perfect active, <uK-vaL, and elil-vaL from elil-e ( oila). N. 1.- The ending evaL appears in the 2 aor. of }.tt-verbs, as ilovaL from 06-eva<, Oiiva.L from O-eva<. d. -<T9a.: in other cases. N. 2. -The infinitives are old cases of substantives, those in -a< being datives, the others locatives. 470. Participles. -The stem of the participle is formed by adding the following endings to the tense stem. a. -vT-: in all active tenses except the perfect, and in 1 and 2 aor. passive (301). b. -oT-: in the perfect active (fm' -ror-) ; masc. -dJs, fe m. -va., neut. -os (301 c). c. -jLevo-: in the middle, and in the passive except in the aor:ist. 471. Verbal Adjectives.- Most of the verbals in -ros and -ros are formed by adding these suffixes to the verbal stem of the aorist passive (first or second). Th us, <f><1JT6s, -rlos (f-</><f}-01Jv) ; 'II'<LO'r6s, -Tos ( l-7rei0'-01Jv) ; T<<O'Tos, -Tos On the (l-u0'-81Jv); O'Tar6s, -ros (l-O'Tri-1Jv); {J1JT6s, -dos (l-{JfJ-8'1v). accent of compound verbals, see 425 c.

467 D. Hom. has -ea, -17s, -n or -v (- only in fioee), -<O'a.v, and rarely -ov, -es, -e; Hdt. has -ea, -eas, -ee (-EL?), -ea.re, -(ra11. 469 D. -ev appears also in Hom. li5ev (miswritten litiew). Hom. bas no case of -eva< (for Uva.< wriw tp.eva<). For -ev or -va< Hom. often uses -jLEVa.L (also Aeolic) and -tLEV (which is also Doric) ; both endings show the accent on the preceding syllable, as !<U"yvvwvctt, ~f.'}J.<va.< ( = eva<), <f><f}p.eva<, O'r-ljp.eva<, O'rawva<, Doric cl.i;lwva<, op.otw8f}}J.EVU.L, oaf}p.eva.t; Tt8p.ev, ~p.p.ev, tp.ev, Olp.ev, lMp.ev, cl.~p.ev. has -p,ev in the aorist passive, as al1Txvv8fip.ev. -p.Ev is preceded.by a short syllable and generally stands before a vowel. -va.< al ways follows a long vowel. Doric has -'YJP and -Ev in the present. Aeolic bas -17v in the present and 2 aorist.

477]

CHANGES lN THE VERB-STEM

157

a. Sorne are derived from other stem' forms (pres. and fut.), as </Jep-r6s,
l-rlov, ouva--r6s ; p.eve-ros (Cp. p.ev-w = p.evw fut.).

472. Verbals in --ros, --rf}, --rov either (1) have the meaning of a perfect passive participle, as Kpmr-r6s hidden, 11"atoev-r6s eclucatecl, or (2) express possibility, as vo"'-ros thinkable, opO.-ros visible. Many have either signification, but sorne are passive only, as 7rot'Y/r6s done. See 425 c. N. a. Usually passive in meaning are verbals from deponent verbs, as p."ip.'Y/-ros imitated. b. Usually active in meaning are compounds derived from transitive active verbs; but sorne intransitive verbs make active verbals, as pu-r6s jlowing. c. Many are active or passive, others only active : p.ep.7r-r6s blamed, blamable, blaming, 11"ttn6s trusting in (rare), t1"usted, i1.7rp0.Kros doing nothing, not done, q,OeyK-r6s sounding. 473. Verbals in --ros, --ra., --rov express necessity (cp. the Lat. gerundive in -ndus), as oo-rlos that must be given, 11"atowros educandus.
FORMATION OF THE TENSE-SYSTEMS <!l AND MI-VERBSl

CHANGES IN THE VEH.B-STEM

474. From the verb-stem (or theme) each tense-stem is formed by the addition of a tense-suffix (455) or of a prefix, or of both. In 475-495 certain modifications of the verb-stem are considered. 475. Variation in Quantity.- Many verbs of the first class (498 ff.) show variation in the quantity of the vowel of the verb-stem, which is commonly long in the present but fluctuates in other tenses, as ..\5-w, ..\il-<Tw, ~-<Ta, but ..\,\v-Ka, ..\..\1!-p.ru, X-87Jv (Other examples, 500.)

a. Sorne verbs of the Fourth Class (523 c) lengthen a short vowel of the present in some other tenses. Th us, Xap.fJvw (Xaf3-) take, Xf}lf;op.a<, EI'Y/</Ja, ft'Y/!J-!J-at, iX-f,<fJO'Y/v, but 2 aor. I!Xaf3ov.
476. Vowel Gradation (35, 36).- Verbs of the first class show a variation between a strong grade (or two strong grades) and a weak grade. The weak grades, r, 1!, a., appear especial1y in the second aorist and second passive systems; the corresponding strong grades, n (oL), EV (ov), 7J (w), appear usually in the other systems (oL, ov, w, in the second perfect).

a. Expulsion of a short vowel between consonants (so-called syncope 493) produces a weak form of the stem of the same grade as t, u, a (30). Cp. 'Yl--yv-op.at becorne (aor. --yv-6-M'Y/V), l-11"-r-6-p.'Y/v (pres. 11"T-o-Mat fly) .with ~-t7r-o-v, ~-</JU"I-0-v, -rK-'Y]-V (477 C). So'l!-crx-o-v got from l!x-w have. , b. a. is the weak form of '1 (a), as in -r-f,Kw hK'Y/v; and of e, when has X, p., v, p be fore or after it, as in rp7rw, hp7r"'v ( 4 79).
477. The following examples illustrate the principles of 476. a. n o : XeC1rw leave, Xdlf;w, 2 perf. MXo7ra, ELp.p.a.t, ldif>Onv, 2 aor. I!X~1rov.

158

CHANGES lN THE VEl-ST.El\1

[478

N. -The weak form appears when the verb undergoe;; Attic reduplication (44); as in r!i.,.,eicf>w anoint, 2 perf. .'fJ<cf>a, .'fJ.<p.p.a<; ipKw ti'W" (louic and poetic), 2 perf. p'fJp<'YJLa<, 2 aor. jjp<Kov; pei1rw ove1throw, !<:pic pt1 ~<7ra; but pdl!w prop, p'fJpeurp.a.<. b. EU ou u: .Ev(8)<Fop.a< I shall go, 2 perf. 'fJ.u8a (Epie 'fJou9a.), 2 aor. (Epie 1i"'u8ov) ; <f>Ev'Yw flee, <f>ev~op.a.< or <f>w~op.a.<, 2 perf. 7r<f>w'Ya., 2 aor. l<f>u-yov; pw flow (for pev-w, 4:3), pev<Fop.a<, ppvrJKa (pue-), 2 aor. pass. ppvrJv.' N. - xw JJOU1" (for xw-w, 43), lxea. (for lx eva.), has v in KXVKa, Kxvp.at, lxv0'1]P; <Fevw (poetic) uTge, l<F<Feva., g<F<Fvp.a<, <F<FOrJv or l<F0rJv rushed. See also nxw in the List of Verbs. c. "1 w a.: PTJ'Y->p.< break, p'fJ~w, lpprJ~a., 2 perf. gPP"''Ya, 2 aor. pass. ipp6.'Y'1 ; ri)K-w meit, r'fJ~w, i!r?)~a, rfrrJKa, r'fJxOrJv, 2 aor. pass. r6.KrJ>. N.- Verbs of class c nsually have O. in the 2 aorist, w in the 2 perfect (if there is one), elsewhere "1 w occurs in the present in rpw'Yw gnaw, 2 aor.hpa'Yo>.
478. Change of e to o in the Second Perfect. " of the verb-stem is changed to o.

In the second perfect

K.'Ir-r-w steal KfKo<f>a., (1ro- )Knlvw kill (Krev-, 519) -Krova, .'Y-w collect et.oxa., 1raa-xw, fut. 1rela-op.a< (from 1revOa-op.a<, 100) 1r1rovfJa, 1rp.1r-w send 7r7rop.cf>a, <Frfp'Y-W love i!a-rop'Ya, rlKrw beget rfroKa, rp1r-w tUJn rrpo<f>a, rp<f>-w nouTish rirpo<f>a, <jrOelp-w co1rnpt t<t>Oopa.. So in 'Y l'Y( e) vop.a< become -yev6p.'f]v, 'Yf'Yova. ; 'Yelpw awaken 'YP'fJ'Yopa ( 446). This change corresponds to that of et to ot ( 4 77 a).

479. Change of e to a..- In verb-stems containing , p., v, p, an" is usually changed to a in the first pe1fect, perfect middle, and second p~ssive systems.
rp1r-w tuTn, rrpap.p.a<, frprX7rrJV (1 aor. rpi<PfJrJv); rp<f>-w feed, repap.p.a<, rpri</>.'1 (1 aor. i0p<P0'1v); a-1relpw (a-1rep-) sow, ga-1rapp.a<, a-1raprJv; cf>Oelpw (<f>Oep-) destroy, l<f>Oapp.a<, <PfJriprJv; a-r~w (a-re -) send, i!a-raKa, ga-ra.p.a<, a-ra.rJV; relvw (rev-) st1etch, rraKa, rfrap.a<, rriO'I]v (1 aor.). a. Also in the2 aor. pass. of K1rrw steal (Ka7rrJv), 1r.KW weave (7r.cl.KrJ>), riprrw gladden (Epie rcl.prrrJv). Many of these verbs also show o in the second

perfect (478).
480. This O. is also found in the second aorist active and middle of Krelvw kill (i!KTQ.POV poetic), TEJLPW CUt (diaJectali!ra.p.ov), rp7rw turn (frpa7TOvpOetiC), Tfp7rW gladden (hap1r6p.rJv poetic), poetic l!pKop.a< see (i!/JpaKov). Also rripOw, 1rr1Ja-a-w. 481. e in the perfect middle in KK.ep.p.a< (K.7rrw steal), 7rrr<'Y!J.a< (1r.Kw weave) is introduced from the present. 482. The : in 479, 480 is developed from a liquid or nasal brought between two consonante (35 b). Thus, ~a-ra.p.a<, rhap.a< from a-r?J.p.at, rer~a<, irafJrJv from irvOrJv (20 ). Here <Fr., rv reprcsent weak grad<;Js of the stem.
0

E, o, a., w appear in rp1rw turn, rpiif!w, (rpeif!a, 2 perf. rhpocf>a, rhpo.p.p.a<, hp<f>OrJv, 2 aor. pass. rpa7rrJV; frequentative rpwrrr!.w (867). b. The variations e, o, w appear in 1rrop.a< fly, 7ror{op.a< (poet.) and frequentative 1rwrcl.op.a< (poet., 867) fly about.

483. a. The variations

CHANGES lN THE VERB-STE:M

159

484. 'IJ, a. in the Second Perfect. -In the second perfect a of the verb-stem is lengthened to 'Y) (ii) : OJ.>..>..w (Oa>..-) bloom, Tf.OYJa; cpa[vw ( cpa.v-) show, 1rcp'Y)VJ.; p.a[vw (p,av-) 1nadden, p.p.YJva; Kp&'w (Kpay-) cry

out, KKpiiya.
485. Addition of E . - a. To the verb-stem is added to make the present stem in ooKt!w seem, fut. oo~w, aor. ~oo~a ( OOK-) ; so in "fapiw mai-ry, wOw push. Usually e is added in sorne stem other than the present. b. ln many verbs e is added to the verb-stem to form the tense-stems other thau present, second aorist, and second perfect, e.g. JJ.axop,a< (JJ.ax-) fight, p,axoJ.l.a< ( = JJ.ax(" )oJJ.a<), lp,axeffap,1Jv, !J.E!J.rLX1J!J.a<. So lf.xOoJJ.a< am grieved, fio6'A.op.a< wish, "fl"fvoJ.l.a< becume, Mw want, (l) O'A.w wish, J.i.w in tend, p.Et is a care, o(oJJ.a< think. c. In sorne verbs is added to form one or more tense-stems, as p.vw (p.ev-) 1emain, !J.EJ.l.v1JKa (JJ.eve-) to a void -v-Ka in the perfect. So, vJJ.w dist1ibute, ~xw have, otxoJJ.a< am gone. So also oapOavw, M<f>alvoJJ.a<, pw, ffreifiw (poetic), Tv"fxavw. d. Some verbs have alternative presents with or without Here sometimes one is used in prose, the other in poetry, sometimes both are poetic or both used in prose. Thus, ~Kw draw (Hom. also i'A.Kt!w), lrlxw laxw sound (both poetic), p.ow p.EOw (both poetic), pi1rTw and p1rTw throw (both in prose). 486. Addition of a. and o.- a or o is added to the verb-stem in some verbs. Thus, p,KaoJ.l.a< bellow (Epie 2 aor. J.l.Kov), lJ.i.K1JffaJ.l.1J>; 'AlffKOJ.l.<u ('A.-) be captwed, 'AwffoJJ.a< from 'Ao- ; 5p.v-J.l.< swear ( OJ.l.-) iJJp,offa, OJ.l.WJ.l.OKa etc. ( O!J.O-) ; otxop,a< am gone, .Epie otxwKa or cilxwKa. 487. Lengthening of Short Final Vowel.- Verb-stems ending in a short vowel genera1ly lengthen that vowel before the tense-suffix in all tenses (except the present and im perfect) fonned from them. Here a ( except after ' t, and p) and become YJ, o becomes w.
TJJ.a-w ( Tp,a-) honow, Tp,-1,-ffw, hip,1)-ffa, TTiJJ.1)-Ka, nTip,7]-p,a<, lTp,-f,-01)v; 071pa-w (01Jpa-) hunt, 87Jpli-ffw, lOf]p.-ffa, etc. (389); 1rodw (7ro<E-) rnalce, 'Tr0<-1,-ffw, 'ffo[7J-ffa, 7r7rOl1J-Ka, 7r7rol1J-p,at, l7ro<i]-01)v; 01J.6W ( 01JO-) rnanijest, 01JW-<Jw, lil-f,'A.w-ffa, etc. ; law pe1mit, lliffw, etc. a. Note Kpotiffop,at, f}KpO.ffp,1)v, etc., from Kpoaop,a< hear; xp-I,<Jw, ~XP1Jffa from xpaw give macles; xp-f,ffoJJ.a<, lxprpp,1Jv from xpaop,a< use; TP-1,""' and ~TP1Jffa from TTpalvw bore are from TpE-.

b. Verb-stems adding eor o (486), and stems apparentlyreceiving a short final vowel by metathesis ( 128), lengthen the short final vowel, as {Jo6'A.op.u (fia vX-) UYish, fiov'A.-1,-ffoJ.l.a< (f!ovXe-, 485), KfJ-vw (KaJJ.-) am weary, dKJJ.1J-Ka (Kp,a-). 485 D. Some Ionie and poetic verbs adding e are 'A.~w, /J.MoJJ.a<, 'Y'Ywvw, 'Y1J0w, oov1Cw, tpoJJ.a<, El'A.w, l1ravpw, KEalifw, Ko!J.at, KEVTw, K-f,ilw, KTV'ffw, Kvpw, aCJKw, J.l.oop,a<, J.l.O!;w, 1CaTfO!J.a<, PL"fW, (f'TV"fW, Topw, xa.\w, </><fW (poetic forms), xpatff!J.fW; d.J.1.7raKlffKw, 7ra</>lffKw; Epie lo<oaffK1Jffa (o<oaffKw), 7rt0-f,ffw, 'ffE'ff<Of]"w, 'fft0-f,ff.s ( 1rl0w ), 'ffE</J<o-f,"oJ.l.a' ( <f>eli5oJJ.a< ). 486 D. a is added also in fipxaoJJ.a<, "foaw, 51Jp<aop,a<, X<xp,aw, !J.1JKaoJJ.a<, f1-1JT<aw. Ail these are mainly poetic.

160

CHANGES IN THE VERB-STEM

488. Retention of Short Final Vowel.- Many verb-stems ending appantly in a short vowel re tain the short vowel, contrary tQ 487, in some or all the tenses.
~r.!<<ra,

"f/l.t-w laugh, "f<if<ToiJ-a<, ht/l.a<ra, "f<t<TIJ7Jv; n/l.w finish, n/l.w from r<X-w, rrr/l.ua, ur/l.e<riJ-a<, lu/l.<r()7Jv; vvw accomplish, vt<Tw, ifviJua, ifviJ<rp.at.

a. The following verbs retain the final short vowel of the verb-stem in ail tenses: li"fa-iJ-a.t, a.lli-op.a.t, d-op.a.t, /l.l-w, vv-w, p<FKW (p-), pK-w, p6-w; pv-w, ')'<Xci-w, l/l.avvw ( l'Aa-), DI.Kv-w, a11d ~K-w (K-<-), lp.-w, lpti-w, ~pa-p.a (poet.), l<TIJlw (l<TIJt-, lo-e-, loo-), i-w, IJ/I.-w, iM<TKOiJ-a.t (i'Aa.-), KMw break, p.<IJV<TKw
(p.e8v-), ~-w, 7rTV-w ( 7rT-, 7r'TV-), <T7r-w, T<-w, rpr!-w, <j>IJlvw ( <j>IJt-), <j>M-w, xa'Ati-w, x l-w (xv-). Also ail verbs in -avvJ.U and -vvJ.U ( except lf<rfJ7JKa from crfJvvp.t extinguish), and 6/1./l.p.t (o/1.-E-), Bp.ViJ-< (p.-, DM-, op.o-), rrr6pvp.t (<rrop-E).

b. The following verbs keep short the final vowel in the future, but lengthen it in one or more other tense-systems, or have double future fonns, one with the short vowel, the other with the long vowel: a.lvw ( alv<Tw, ii v< <Ta, ii v<Ka, iJ v07Jv, iiTJJJ.a.t), lixiJoJJ.a.t (xiJ-, xiJ-), KaX-w, wixoJJ.a.< (JJ.a.x--), JJ.Vw, 1rivw (1rt-, 1ro-), 1ro()l-w, 1rovl-w, lp6-w (Epie), <j>Ocvw (<j>IJa.-). c. In sorne verbs the final short vowel of the verb-stem remains short in one or more tense-stems, but is lengthened in the future, as o-w bi nd, ofJ<Tw, lfo'I}<Ta., olliua, Of0JJ.aL, lot07)Po So alpw, fJalvw (fJa-), fJvw (fJu-), olowp.L (oo-, ow-), l!Uva-p.at, o6w (aV-, o-), <pl<TKW (<p-e-), lfxw (<F<x-, "X-), IJvw (IJv-, 8-), f'Y)JJ.L (. -, 7)-), ~<TT7JJ1.L (<rra-, <FT'YJ-), Mw (XV-, X-), rl07Jp.L ( 8<-, 87}-), rlvw ( n-), cp6w ( <f>v-, tj>-), and the root lp-, pe- (<7rov). d. Most of the verbs refusing to lengthen a final short vowel have verb-stems originally ending in" (624); as re/l.w from T<<<T-~w (cp. r rl/..os). By analogy to these, other verbs retain their short final vowel.
4~9. Insertion of o-. - In the perfect middle and first aorist passive systems, verbs which r.etain a short final vowel and sorne others usually insert u before the persona! ending.

Thus, n/l.lw (488 d), nr/l.etTJJ.at, re/l.<T87Jv; <T7rCw draw, ~<r7ra<Tp.at, rr7ra<T87Jv; K<l-6w 01der, K<K'Aeu<TJJ.a<, lKe<r87Jv; -yt-yvcfJ<TKW know, 1!-yvw<rJJ.a<, l-yvcfJ<TfJ7Jv. a. If the aorist. passive ends in -IJTJv and not in -<T87Jv, the perfect middle does not insert " Thus -8'1}v, not -<T87)v, occurs in aU verbs in -Evw except ""'"' stone to death, in all verbs in -Ew which have -fJTJ preceded by n, in all verbs in -ow except xow heap up, and in al! verbs in -aw except those that retain ii. Stems originally ending in" (624) properly show a-. b. If the aorist passive ends in -<T87Jv, the perfect middle ma.y or may not insert a-. Verbs in -a)w and -lw (stems -ao, -<o) regularly have a- by 83, 587. In the case of other verbs some always show a-, sorne never show a-, and sorne are doubtful. In many cases the later usage with " bas crept into the Mss. of
-ti.!J-7)11, d.e<Ta.

488 D. Here belong Epie Knolw, Korw, Xow, V<Ldw, and the forms ll.a<Ta, priw shows lp- and piJ-. 489 D. Hom. has original forms in 7r<f>paoJJ.vos ( <{>p<i)w), K<KopuiJJJ.lvos ( KopvTTw),

7r7rd1M<v ( 1r<i8w).

CHANGES IN THE VERE-STEM

161

the classical authors (so with the perfect of X.!w, f!alvw, opaw, jwvvp.t, K<iw (KXrfw), u'fljw, xpiw, and with the aorist of 1raw). c. The following verbs show an inserted u both in the perfeet middle and the aorist passive in classieal Greek : allUop.a<, 'Y<"/VWO"Kw, XKw, 8X6.w, 8paw, K<ew,
Kaw, Kva(t)w, Koplvvp.<, Kvtw, ~vw, ,-lp.,-11Ju, ,-piw, ?rTlTTw, uf!vvp.t, uelw, O"K<- Mvvp.t, O"?raw, Tavw, Tfw, Tlvw, !)w, <j>aw, x6w, XPtf!W. d. The following form only the perfeet middle with,. in elassical Greek : f!vw, lvvp.t (elp.at, but l!uTo Hom.), ipw, jwvvp.t, ~lw, *oOuuop.at, 1rMw, <j><w (Hdt.). e. The following form only the aorist passive with u in classical Greek : ti-yap.a<, Kow, vw, d.pITKW, tix8op.at, '"(eaw, oalvp.t, opaw, tMw, ~pap.at, ipaw, iXaO"Kop.at, Kelw "(KX-rJw), Xew, p.e8O"KW, P,IP,VDO"Kw, otw, 5vop.at (Hdt.), ,-alw, ?raalw, 1rTavPJJ-1, 1rlp.1rp7Jp.1, palw, pwvvp.t, O"T6pvp.t, xaXaw, xpaop.at, xpaw, xpiw.

f. Only in post-classical Greek is ,. attested both in the perfect middle and aorist passive in picw, !lw, Kalw, ( ?ro) avw, Mw, 51p.t, ,-vw, 7rralw, uaw, lf!avw. - Only in the perfect middle: ti-yap.a<, Kow, vw, -yeMw, iipdw, ip.w, ~pap.a<, KEp&.vvJ.tt, Kohollw, p.e8Uu-Kw, va.lw, v&.w spin, lnrvlw, 1ralw, 7rctalw, 7rTvvjJ.t (and in Ionie), ,-lp.7rp7JP.' (Aristotle; earlier perf. ,-l,-p7Jp.at), uT6pvp.t, xaJ\aw, lf!aw. WJ:ten the perfect middle is not attested in classical Greek sorne at !east of the u forms from the above verbs may represent classical usage, provided the aorist passive has -u87Jv.- Only in the aorist passive : dop.a<, :\lw, pw, f!alvw,
f!vlw, -yww, eiXvw, <Xavvw, lpvp.cu, ipw, !wvvvp.<, Kalw, ~lw, p.axop.at, vlw heap up, *OliVuuop.at, ?rw, ?rTw, u,Pjw, q,eci.vw.

g. Sorne verbs have double forms (one of which may be disputed) in the classical period : Svvafl-O.L: ovvfJ87Jv and vv6.u87Jv ( chiefiy Ionie and poetic) ; KE~6.vv'fl-L: hp6.871v and hep6.u87Jv; Kpov"' : KKpovp.at better th an KKpovu p.at ; v"' : VV7Jp.a1 and vlV7JO"p.at; C:pfl-L: op.wp.op.al (and OP,WP,OO"Tat), wp.6erw and wp.6u87JV.Dialectal or dialectal and late are f!wu87Jv for f!ofj(J7Jv (f!oaw ), <X~Xaup.at i]Mue7Jv (<Xavw ), KeK6p7Jp.a< for KeKopeup.at (Koplvvp.t ), ,-e,-haup.a< ( ?r<Tavvp.t ). h. Sorne verb-stems ending in v show -u-p.a< in the perfect middle: Tjii6vw, p.talvw, 1rax6vw, 1repalvw, <j>alvw, <j>alvw. Thus ,-<paup.at, ;jv<Tp.at, p.ep.laup.at. Dialectal or late : 87JVvw, KO<alvw, 1rTVvw, p.alvop.at, ~alvw, ~7Jpalvw, 0"7Jp.alvw. On -p.p.a< see 579. i. Observe that sorne vowel verbs inserting ,. do not lengthen the final vowel of the verb-stem in any tense ( -yeX6.w, uXw) ; and that sorne not inserting ,. (Mw, ()6w, Mw) do not lengthen the final vowel in some tenses. i1r-awlw commend and 1rap-atvw exhort do not insert,. and have the short vowel in all tenses. j. The insertion of u in the perfect middle started in the 3 sing. and 2 pl. Before the endings -Ta< and -uee, ,. was retained in the case of verbs with stems originally ending in,. (as uXw), or where,. developed from T, , 8 (98) before -Ta<, -u8e ( ,-,-<<O"Ta< from ,-e,-edha<). See 409 b, 624. In al! cases where the verb-stem did not originally end in u, the sigma fmms are due to analogy; as in
KKVITP,aL (Keeuw), 1rl1r7JO"p.a1 (1rLj.t1r7Jp.t), ~)'VWG/<at (-yt)'VWITKW).

490. Addition of 9.- The present stems of sorne poetical verbs are made by the addition of 8; as ~~~-e-w spin, ,-X-Ij-e-w am full (1rlJ.'-1r7J-JJ-<). Cp. 832.
490 D. A few verbs make poetic forms by adding -e%- to the present or the 2 aorist tense-stem, in which a or e (v once) takes the place of the thematic GREEK GRAM. -11

162

[491

a. Most of the indicative for ms seem to be impcrfects, but sin ce some have the force of aorists ( e.g., Soph. O. (). 8;l, 1:JM, O. J'. ()(i()), in ce nain editions they are regarded as second aorists, and the iulinitives au participles are accented (against the Mss.) on the ultima (iltwKaOv, elKaiJwv).

491. Omission of v . - Some verbs in -vw drop the v of the verbal stem in the first perfect; perfect middle, and iirst passive systems.
Kpivw (Kptv-), judge, Khpt-Ka, KKpt-p.at, hpl-8'1/v.

So also Kivw incline, 1rDvw

wash.
492. Metathesis. :.____The verbal stem may suffer metathesis (128). a. In the present: IJvft(J"KW die, 2 aor. geavov, perf. -rtiJvrJKrz. b. In other tenses: {3riw throw ((3a-), perf. {3if3'1/Ka, l{3f}IJrJv (f3'TI-); -rip.vw eut ( -rel-'--), 2 aor. hel-Lo, perf. -rrp.rJKa ; lUpKop.at ( ilepK-) see, 2 aor. U!paKov; -rip1rw delioht, 2 aor. pass. l-r&.p,.'T/v and l-rpri7rrJv (both poetical). 493. Syncope.- Some verbs suffer syncope (44 b).
!l.

In the present; 11"l11"rwfall fOr7rt7r(e)r-w, r(J"xw hold for (o-)t-o-()x-w (125 e), p.lp.vw for t.u-p.ev-w. b. J n the future : 11"-r1wop.at from 1rhop.at fly. c. ln the second aorist: ~(J"xov for l-(J"ex-ov from ~xw (lx- for (Tex-, 125 e). d. In the perfect: 11"-7rra-l-'at have expanded from 1rerd.-vvp.t. N.- Syncopated f01ms are properly weak stems ( 4 76 a).

494. Reduplication. - rrhe verb-stem may be reduplicated. a. In the present with ': 'Y<-'YVW-(J"Kw ( "(vw-) kiuno, rl-6rJ-P.< place, t-(J"T'T/-P.' set, ill-ow-p.t give. The present reduplication may be carried over to other tenses: otild.(K)(J"KW teach (1!9), otMi;w. With : T-Tpalvw bore. b. In the second aorist: li:yw (d'Y-) lead, -i)'Y-a"(-ov; ~11"01-'a' jollow, <o-,.6p.1)P (for
(1"(1"11"-0!J-'f/V).

c. Regularl:y; with e in the pcrfect.

495. Iterative Imperfects and Aorists in -o-K%-.- Homer and Herodotus have iterative imperfects aud aoriHts in -(J"Kov and -(J"KOfJ-rJV denoting a customary or repeated past action. Homer has iterative forms in the imperfect and 1 and 2 aorist active and mid<lle. Herodotus !Jas no iteratives in the 1 aorist and few
vowel of the simple verb. Such forms are chidly I-Iomeric, but occur sometimeR in Attic poetry, very rarely in prose. Th us, </><"(ew ( </>f:'Yw lJUrn ), il!twKaeo, (o<wKw pursue), g(J"xeeov (gxw have). IJ-forms are found in moods other than the indicative ( dKri9w, elKci8oLJ.u, f.Lvrf8a.rE, OtwKd.8Etv, Ellai8wv). 492 D. See the List of Verbs for poetical forms of al-'aprrivw, oapiJrivw, !Jp6.rrw,
{3wrrKw, "Oap.6.tw, Oip.w, 1rop-.

493 D. See the List of Verbs for poetical forms of 1rtw, 1reMtw, p.w, p.t!op.a; also grerp.ov frncnd, ~11"<</>vov slew. 494 D. Poetic dpapl(J"Kw (dp) fit, and the intensives (867) p.ap-p.alpw (p.ap-) flash, 1rop-<P6pw ( <Pup-) grow red, 1rap.-<Palvw (<Pa v-) shi ne bright/y, 7rot-7rvuw ( 1rvu-) puff. Also with 1) in OrJ-OK-ro greeted (Mss. oeloKTO ).

soo]

PRI~SENT

SYSTEM: FIRST CLASS

163

in the 2 aorist; and only from w-verbs. Herodotus regularly and Homer usually omit the augment. -aw verbs have -aa-uKov or -a-uKov; -<w verbs -<<-<TKov, in Hom. also -<-<TKov. -a-uKov is rare in other verbs than those in -<lw. The vowel preceding the suffix is al ways short. a. The suffix -uK%- is added to the tense-stem. Impe1j.: q,dry<-<TK< (<f>dryw flee), ~x<-<rKov (gxw have), vKt-<TKOfJ.EV (viKaw conquer), -yotia-<TK< ('Yotiw bewail), Kp(nrra-<TK (Kp(nrrw hide), KaE-<TKov (Kaw call), jwvvV<TK<To (!;wvvJ.Lt gird); 1 aor.: 7ro-rpy;a-<TK< ( 1rorp1rw turn away); 2 aor. : q,-y<-<TK<, (fTa-<TK< stood.
VERB-STEM AND PRESENT STEV1

496. From the verb-stem (or the me) the present stem is formed in severa] ways. Ail verbs are arranged in the present system according to the method of forming the present stem from the verbstem. Verbs are named according to the last letter of the verb-stem (:m.>): 1. Vowel Verbs, 2. Liquitl Verbs (including liquids and nasals), 3. Stop Verbs.
1. PRESENT SYSTEM

(PRESE:-<T AND IMPEgFECT ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) 497. 'rhe present stem is f01med from the verb-stem in five different ways. There are, therefore, fi ve classes of present stems. The verb-stem is sometimes the present stem, but usually it is strengthened in different ways. A sixth class corisists of irregular verbs, the present stem of which is not connected with the stem cir stems of other tenses. FST OR SIMPLE CLASB 498. Presents of the Simple Class are formed from the verb-stem with or withont the thematic vowel. 499. (I) Presents with the thematic vowel (w-verbs). The present stem is made by ading the thematic vovvel %- to the verb-stem, as fl-w, ?ra<-v-w, 1rav-w, p/v-w, 1rd()-w, <(>dry-w, and the denominative verbs rf.L-w, <{>t-w, j3a(n"u-w. For the persona] endings, see 463 ff. For the derivation of mau y of these verbs, see 522.

500. The fimtl vowel of the verb-stem is long in the present indicative, but either long or short in the othe< tense-stem~, of the following verbs in -vw or -<w. 1. a. Verbs in -vw geuerally have in Attic in the present; as Mw louse, il6w go ltnder, Bvw saerificP. (almost always), <f>6w make"grow (usually). Also in Mw, pr6w, {3p<v86ol'-"'' -y-qp6ol-'"'? O<lKpVw (once i!), iilpvw, l(fx6w, K<lrr6w,' Kv6w,

500. 1. D. Homer has short v in Mw, vw, {3pw, ilw, pw, nJ.Lvw, ravvw, <jJw, and in ail denominative verlJs except ipTJrDovro and hrL06ov(f<, where is metrically uecessary ; long v in ~6w, 1rr6w, [,., ; anceps in etw sacrifice ( doubt-

164 PRESENT SYSTEM:

FH~ST

CLASS, SECOND CLASS

[sox

KWKOw, KwVw (usually), p.7Jv6w, o?T6w (o?Tvlw), ?TTDw, p6op.a.L, ur6op.a.L, rp6w, 5eL; possihly in eiMop.a.L, i]p.uw, p.uw, ~uw, rpMw; iLvuw, J1.7Jpuop.a.L, 1T7J0uw (once q, rplruw. wpuw (v) is doubtfu!. b. -vw has v short in vuw, puw, {Jpuw, KVw (but KOL), p.eOuw, and in all verbs in -vvw. 2. Attic has 1 in primitive verbs in -Lw, as ?Tptw, xptw, x)l.tw, but l'in rlw. Denominative verbs have 1; but iuOtw. 501. Severa! verbs with medial , ii in the present, show r or , ii or ii in some other tense or teses. Thus, O)l.t{Jw press rOL</Ja., ?Tvi-yw choke i?Tvl-y7Jv, rpi{Jw rub rhpupa. irplfirJV, rD</Jw raise snwke i7U<P7Jv, -.J;6xw cool i>j;ux7Jv.

gradeS

Verb-stems having the weak grades a, ,, v, show the strong a, V in the present i aS T~K-W ( TaK-) melt, .d?TW (t7T-) leatJe, rj>f!ryw ( cj>vy-) .flee.
502.
TJ>

a. To this class belong also -f}Ow, 11"-f}?Tw, rfO"T}?Ta. am astonisherl, 2 aor. tra.</Jov, el</Jw, (IWloLKa., 703), e!Kw (i!oLKa), (erwOa., 503 a), ipelKw, ipel?Tw, ?TelOw, uTEl{Jw, !Trdxw, rploop.a.L; ipeu-yop.a.L, KeuOw, ?TeUOop.aL, TEvxw. 503. Present Stems in -e %- for eu%-.- The strong form ev before the thematie vowel became 'f ( e~) and then e (20 a, 43) in the verbs 9"' run Oeuuop.a.L, vw swim i!vwua., 1rw sail i!?Te~ua., 1rvO> breathe t?Tvevua., pw flow pevuop.a.L, X"' pour KxvKa, Kxvp.a.L, <xu07Jv.
504. (II) Presents without the thematic vowel (p.t-verbs). The personal ending is added directly to the verb-stem, which is often reduplicated. The verb-stem shows different vowel grades, strong fonns TJ w in the singular, weak forms E (a), o in the dual and plural. Th us r{-8'1)-p.t, r{-8-p.<v; -CTTYffL' for cn-CTTTJ-P.' ( = CTt-CTr-p.t), Z-CTra-p.Ev;

8{-Sw-p.t, 8{-8o-p.<v. a .. AU verbs in p.L ( enumerated 723 ff) belong to this class except those in -viip.L (523 f) and -V'IJJJ.L (523 g). .
SECOND Olt T CLASS (VERBS IN -7r'Tro)

The present stem is formed by adding -r%- to the verbstem, wbich ends n 1r, {3, or rf>. The verb-stem is ascertained from the second aorist (if there is one) or from a word from the same root.
505. fu!), 06w rush on, 1age, )l."iJw (rarely Mw), ?ToL?Tvuw, puop.a.t. Pindar bas v short in Ouw sacrifice, luxuw, uw, p.avvw, puw, puop.a.t, in presents in -vvw, and in denominative verbs. 2. Hom. has i in the primitives ?Tiop.a.t and xptw; but rtw and riw (relw?) ; -l'w in denominatives (except p.-f}vie B 769). ~ovtw, otop.a.L are from KOVL(IT)-~w,
OL ( 11" )-1op.a.L.

3. Where Attic has ii, i in the pre:;;ent, and Epie ii, l', the former are due to the inflnence of ii, i in the future and aorist. """' 503 D. These verbs end in -ww in Aeolic ( ?Tveuw etc.). Epie ?Telw, ?Tvelw have EL by metricallengthening (28 D.).

513]

PRESENT SYSTEM: THIRD (IOTA) CLASS

K61rrw eut, verb-stem Ko1rin 2 aor. pass. f3M1rrw injure, " {3af3" " Kav11'rw cover, " " Kauf3" {Jt1rrw throw, " " /JL</>-, pi</>- " 2 aor. pass. l-K61r-'IJV. l-f3Mf3-'IJ KaM{J-'1) hut. i-ppl<P-'IJ

165

a. a-rpa1rrw lighten, xa1rrw oppress may be from _.,.,_w (117, 607).

506. Sorne of the verbs of this class add < in the present or other tenses, as
p1rTW thl'OW, 11'K7'W CO'Inb, TV11'TW Strike 1'V11'-f}a-w.

THIRD

on

IOTA CLASS

507. The present stem is formed by adding -~%- to the verb-stem and by making the necessary euphonie changes (109-116).
I. PRESENTS IN

-to>

Dental Verb-stems.- Verb-stems in B unite with t to form presents in -~w (116), as cf>pa~w tell ( cppa~kw), v. .w{~w hope (7rt&.), KofL[~w carry (KoJ.Lt~-1] a carrying), lw smell (oo-J.L.fJ odou1), Ka81.~ofLaL seat myself (~os seat).
a. (j!tw save (for w-<tw) forms its tenses partly from the verb-stem w-,
partly from the verb-stem
<J'Wh

,~'5os.

509. Stems in y . - Some verbs in -~w are derived from stems in y preceded by a vowel ; as ap7ra~w seize for &.p7ray-~w (cp. &.p7ray-~ seizwe), Kpii~w cry out (2 aor. :Kpayov). See 116, other examples

623

III.

a. vll'w wash makes its other tenses from the verb-stem vif!- (fut. vlif;w, cp.
Hom. vi7rTO/-'a<). 510. A few verbs with stems in yy Jose one 'Y and have presents in -lw; as Kal'w screa'ln (Ka'Y'Y-iJ), fut. Ka')'~w; a11'il'w sound the tru1npet ia11'<')'~a (also M!w sob, 1ra!w cause to wander). 511.
p<')'~w,

pnwyield pl'w do (poetic) ancH'pow (Ionie and poetic).

See ll.

512. Most verbs in -~w are not formed from stems in Il or y, but are due to analogy. See 516, 623 y III, 866. 6.
11. PRESENTS IN -'M'w (IONIC AND LATER ATTIC -crcro>, 78)
K

Palatal Verb-stems.- Stems ending in to form presents in -rrw (-uuw).

513.
K'IJpK-~w (Kf)pv~,

or

x unite

with

cpuMrr-w gua1d from cj>uaK-JW ( puaK-1} gua rd (112)); K'IJpDrTw proclaim from Ki}pK-os); rapaTTw disturb from rapax-~w (rapax-1} confusion). a. 1rrrw cook is for 7r<K-~w ; all other tenses are made from 71'7r-.

508 D. Aeolic has -<Tow for -tw.

166

PRESE:\T

SYSTi~~I:

THIRD (IOTA) CLASS

5l.4. Severa! verbs showing forms in -y sccm to unite -y with 1 to form presents in -rrw (-<T<Tw.) 'l'hus }o.}o.ciTTw change, 1-'cirrw lcnead, 1f}o.1,rrw slrike (with the 2 aorists passive i]}o.M-y-'l]v, 1-'ci'Y-'1" '1r}o.1jy-'1v), 1rplirrw do (2 perf. 1r1rp.-ya., 571), rcirrw arrange (r.y-6s commander). a. So lipcirrol-'a.' grasp, vcirrw compress (515 b), vvrrw push, 7rTU<T<TW fuld, <Tcirrw load, <Tplrrw pipe, <T</>cirrw kill, <f>pcirrw fence. 1rplirrw has the late perf.
.,.hrp.xa.

5l.5. Some presents in like thm;e from K, x-

--r-rw

(-(rrrw) are formed from stems in

-r, ()

Poet. ip<T<Tw row (Ep&-'l]s rower) aor. 1fpe<Ta ; poet. Kopu<T<TW arm ( K6pvs K6pve-os helrnet), imperf. K6pv<T<Te. a. So also {J}o.lrrw talee honey, .,.&,.,..,-w sp1inkle, 1rrlrrw pound, and perhaps .,.}o.ciTTw forrn; also cicpcirr<Tw lldt., and poetic i!-'ci<T<Tw, }o.a.<f>U<T<Tw, }o.l<T<To!-'a<. b. v&.rrw comp1ess (va.-y-, vali-) i!va~a, v<va<TI-'a' and vva"f!-'rJ.' Cp. 514 a.
5l.6. Formations by Analogy. -a. As 'Y+ 1 and li+ 1 unite to form t, 'llone of the verbs in -rrw cau be derived from -'YJW or -li~w. Since the future and aorist of verbs in -tw might often seem to be derived from Btems in K, x, or r, (), uncertainty arose as to these tenses : th us the future <T<f>&.~w ( <T<f>a-y-<Tw) from Epie <T</>ri!w slay ( <TcjJay-~w) was confused in formation with <f>vM~w ( <f>v}\aK-<TW ), and a present <T<f>&.rrw was constructed like cpvMTTw. Similarly, Attic p1rri<Tw ( -op.a<) for Epie p1r&.~w ; and so in place of (poetic) p!-'6tw fit ( p!-'oo-) the form ,pl-'6.,-.,-w was constructed.
III. LIQUID AND NASAL STEMS

5l.7.

whih
u-rw

(I) Presents in -.w are formed from verb-stems in , to is assimilated (110). Thus, &yyw annmmce (yyt:-,\w), send (uT-kw).

5l.8. (II) Presents in -aww and -atpw are formed from verb-stems in -av and -CJ.p, the~ being tlnown back to unite with the vowel of the Vl'b-stem (111 ). 'l'hus, cpo.[vw ShOW ( cf>o.V-kW ), ovop..a.[vw na?ne ( OVOp.aV-J,.W), xapw rejoice (xo.p-hw ).

a. Many verbs add -Iw to the weak form of the stem, as ovol-'alv-w for ovop.a.v-!w from ovol-'!;-<w, cp nomen (35 b). b. Hom. has Koalvw and Klici.vw honom, 1-'e'/l.alvw blaclcen and p.&.vw g1ow black. 6'/l.trrOalvw slip is la te for o)\Ltre&. vw. c. The ending -aww has been attaclwd, by analogy, in Oepl-'a.lvw rnalce hot, etc. (620 III, 866.7). Likewise -vw (ii1!l) in poetic prvvw prepare, parallel to pr6'"' (in composition), by analogy to (3apvvw weigh clown, 7)iltlvw sweeten.
516 D. Homer has many cases of this confusion ; as 1ro'/l.el-'ltw ( 1roXep.tli-) but In Doric the ~ forms from -tw verbs 11.re especially common, as xwpltw sepmate, xwp<~w, lxwpt~a. 1ra.ltw sport has (lite) g.,.a,~a.
'IToel-'l~w.

523]

l'HESENT

SYSTE~l:

FOUR TH (N) CLASS

167

5~9. (III) Presents in -ww, -E!pw, -vw, -pw, -vvw, and -ipw are formed from stems in V, Ep, 'tv, 'tp, vv, vp with ~%- added. Here ~ disappears and the vowel preceding v or p is lengthened by compensation ( to EL; ' to ; v to ). See 37 a, 111.

nlvw stTetch ( nv-~w), <j>O<lpw <lestroy ( <j>O<p-), Kptvw ( Kptv-), olKrtpw pity ( olKrtp-) generally written olKnlpw, p.6vw ward off ( p.uv-), p.a.prpop.a.t call to witness (p.a.prup- ). a. o</><lw ( o</><-) owe, am obliged is formed like nlvw, <f>IJ<lpw in order to distinguish it from o<j>w (o</><-) inc1ease forrned regularly. Hom. has usnally Aeolic o</>w in the sense of <P<lw. <lpw flay (<p-~w) is parallel to fp-w (49U).

520. Verb-stems in -a.v- for (a.'.!, -a.F-)- Two verbs with verb-stems in -a.u have presents in -a.tw from -a.<fW out of -o.F-~w (:38 a): Ka.(w burn (Ko.u-, Ko.f- ), fut. Ko.u-<Tw; and Ka.(w weep (Ka.v-, Ko.f-), fut. Ko.v-rrop.o.t. Others 624 b. a. Attic prose often l)as Kdw and KMw, derived from O.Lf before (Kii.m, and, with a extended to the 1 person, Kiiw). Cp. 396. 521. Addition of e. -The following verbs add < in one or more tense-stems other th an the present : {3rinw thl'ow, Ko.Ol!w sit, Ka.lw weep, 6jw smell, <j><iw owe, am obliged, xo.lpw 1ejoice. 522. Contracted Verbs and Sorne Verbs in a. Verbs in -o.w, -<w, -ow, which for convenience have been treated under the first class, properly belong here, ~ (y) having been !ost between vowels. Thus, rp.ri.w from rp.o.-~w ( rp.a-), olKw well from olK<-!w ( olK<- alternate stem to olKo-, 229 b), ?J6w from ?Jo->w So in ~nominatives, as poetic p.?Jvlw am wroth (f.L?JV<;w ), q,r6w sow (</>rv-~w). Primitives in -w, -w are of uncertain origin. Cp. 608, 624. N. -The rare spellings vlw, Ovlw, p.<IJulw, q,ulw indicate their origin from -~w. b. So with stems in long vowels: pw do from pa-1w, !w live from !?J1w (cp. NOt), xpw give Ol'acles from XP?J-~W (2 pers. xpfis, 394). FOlJltTH Olt N CLASS

-w, -vw.-

The present stem of the N class is formed from the verbstem by the addition of a suffix containing v.
523.

a. -v%- is added : aK-vw bite, rp.-vw eut. So 6vw, Kap.vw, 1rivw, 1rlrvw poet., rlvw, <j>IJavw, q,IJlvw. b. -a.v%- is added : o.irriJ-av-op.o.< perceive, .p.o.pr-aP-w eJT. So o.~avw,' {3o.rrravw, o.p!Javw, 7T'<x8avop.o.L, oiavw, OLrriJavw, oifJL<TKrivw (526). c. -a.v%- is added and a. nasal (p., v, or 'Y nasal) inserted in the verb-stem: o.-p.-{3-av-w (af3-) takr-, o.-v-8-av-w escape uotiee (o.IJ- ), ru-'Y-x-av-w happen (ru x-). So .vrivw plNISf (.-), IJ<'Y'Yrivw toul'h (!J<'Y-), K<'Yxrivw find (K<x-), o.-yxavw obtain by lot (o.x-), p.o.viJ&.vw learn (p.o.IJ-), 1T'vv0avop.o.< inquire (1ru8-). d. -ve%- is added: f3-v-w stop up (also f36w), iK-v-o-p.o.< come (also fKw), 519 D. Aeolic has here -<vvw, -<ppw, -wvw, -<ppw, -uvvw, -uppw (37 D. 3) ; for Knlvw, it has Kro.lvw ; cp. Doric q,Oo.lpw for <j>O<lpw.

l68

PRESENT SYSTEM: FlFTII (-CTKw) CLASS

[524

Ku-v-w kiss, aJL'If'-rx-v-o-JLat have on, 1r-urx-v-o-JLat promise (cp. f-<rx-w for <TL<rx-w, 493 a). e. -uv%- is added : l\avvw drive for a-vu-w.

f. -vu (-vvv after a short vowel) is added (second class of }-tt-verbs, 414):
o<lK-vu-JLL show (llELK-, present stem ll<tKvv-), _\y-vu-JL' yoke (.lu-y-), 6\\uJLL destroy (for o-vVJLL, 77 a); Kepci-vvJ-f'L mix (Kepa-), <TK<Ilri-vvll-1-'' scatter (<TK<oa-). Others 729 ff. Some of these verbs have presents in -uw (746). N. 1.- The forms in -vvuJL' spread from ~vvvJL, ufUvvup.t., which are derived from <T-VU}LL, <T{JE<T-Vp.t.. N. 2.- Sorne verbs in -vw are formed from -vF%- for -v~%-; as Hom. rtvw, q,utvw, q,Odvw, dvoJLa' from rt-vf-w, etc., (37 D. 1). Attic rtvw, etc.dropped the f g. -va., -VTJ are added (third class of JLt-verbs 412); as in (poetic) llriJL-VTI-1-'' I conquer, ociJL-va-JLEv we conquer (oa!Jr ), and in <rKlo-v"'-1-'' (rare in prose for <TK<IlrivvuJLt) scatter. The verbs of this class are chiefly poetic (Epie), and most have alternative forms in -aw. See 737.

In two further divisions there is a transition to the Iota Class. h. -v%- for -v-1% is added: {Jalvw go (f!a-v-!w), Kepoalvw gain (Kepoa-v-J,w), rETpalvw bore (rerpa-v-tw). So poetic palvw sprinkle. For the added v, cp. riK-v-w (523 a). See 518 a. i. -a.w%- for av-!% is added: o<rcppalvo}Lat smell (?J<rtJ>paP-,!0}-tat), Hom. atralVOJLaL sin (also atrpalvw). See 518 a. 524. A short vowel of the verb-stem is lengthened in the case of sorne verbs to form one or more of the tense-stems other than the present. Thus, aJL{Jcivw (\a{J-) take \f,if!oJLaL (\Tif!-); oriKVW (llaK-) bite of,~w (o"'K-). So a-yx&.vw, avOavw, ru')'xcivw, TruvecivoJLa' (1rv8-) inquire, fut. Tr<V<TOJLat (1rev8-). a. _\eryvvJLL yoke, Trf,')'vvJL' jasten, pf,-yvliJL< break have the strong grade in ali tenses except the 2 pass. system. JLEl')'vVJLL mix (commonly written JLi')'vJLt) has JJ.t'Y- only in the 2 perf. and 2 pass. systems. 52.5. Addition of E and o. -fl. Many verbs add e to the verb-stem to form ail the tenses except present, 2 aorist, and 2 perfect; as al<rOavoJLat, aJLaprcivw,
avocivw, a~civw, a7rex8&.vo}Lat, {Ja<Travw, oapOavw, KL'xrivw, JLavecivw, OL<T8rivw, ocpt<TKrivw. One or more tenses with added are formed by K<poalvw, 6\vJJ., O<TtJ>pa[VOJJ.aL, <Tr6pvup,t, TV')'XriPW, b. 6p,vu!J.' swear has oJLo- in ali systems except the present and future, as lfJJLo<ra, op,WJLOKa, but fut. OJLOJLaL from O!J.EOJJ.at.

FIFTH OR INCEPTIVE CLASS (VERBS IN -ITK(I))

526. The 1)resent stem is formed by adding the suffix -CTK%- to the verb-stem if it ends in a vowel; -tCTK%- if it ends in a consonant. Thus, p-CTKw please, (vpCTKw jind. a. This class is called inceptive (or inchoative) because sorne of the verbs belonging to it have the sense of beginning or becoming (cp. Lat. -seo); as "''T/Pri<TKw grow old. But very few verbs have this meaning. b. In Ov'!i<rKw die, p.<JJ.VY(J"Kw remind, -t<TKw was later added to verb-stems ending in a vowel. The older forms are Ovf,<rKw, 1-''f'vf,<rKw.

PRESENT SYSTEM: SIXTH (MIXEIJ} CLASS

{3<-{Jpw-<FKw eat, lh-opii-<FKW run away.

169

c. The verb-stem is often reduplicated in the present; as -y<--yvW-<FKw know, l'oetic dp-ap-l<FKw fit, poetic a7r-a</J-l<FKW decei'Ve, have the form of Attic reduplication. J.I.<F-yw may stand for 1-'<-(1-')<F-yw. d. A stop consonant is dropped before -<FKw (99); as o-oa(K)-<FKw teach (cp. L-aK-ros), M(K)<FKw a'Void, M(K)<FKW speak. 1ra<Fxw sutfer is for 1ra(IJ)<FKW (126). e. The present stem often shows the strong grades w (weak o) and a or '7 (weak a). See b, c. Weak grades appear in </Ja<FKw say, fJo<FKw feed. f. On the iteratives in -<FKW see 495.
527. The following verbs belong to this class (poetic and Ionie forms are starred): a. Vowel stems: M>]<FKw* (dM?)-), dvafJuh<FKOJ.I.a* (f3w-), p<FKW (ap-), {Ja<FKw* ({3a- for fJ~-, 35 b), fJfJpW<YKW ({Jpo-), {JW<FKw* (J.I.0/1.-, J.I..o-, fJ/I.o-, 130 D.), {Jo<FKW ({Jo-), "fEVELa<FKW (Cp. "fEPELaW), "f?)paiJ"KW ("(?)pa-), "fL"fPW<FKW ("(PO) l OEl<FKOJ.I.aL frighten, lhipii11"KW (pa-), -i}fJiiiJ"KW ('/JfJa-), ?jM<FKw* (?j/l.a-), IJv!<FKW (Oav-, liva-), IJp'f!<FKW* (IJop-, IJpo-), f/l.t!.IJ"KOJ.'aL (f/l.a-), KLK'lj<FKW* (Ka.-, K?)), KUt<FKOJ.I.a<* (KU), J.I.Eii0<FKW (J.'EIJU-), J.'LJ.'PTl<FKW (J.'VU.-), 1rL7rl<FKW* ( 7rL), 1rL7rptl<FKW ( 1rpa-), 1rLV0 <TKW* ( 1rLPU-), 7rL</Ja0<FKW* ( </>CJ.IJ-), TLTpW<rKW ( TpO ), </Ja<rKW (.pa-), xa<FKW* (x a-). b. Consonant stems: /l.lrrKOJ.I.aL ( ./1.-o-), dMrrKw* ( a.uK-), clJ.I.fJ/I.lrrKW ( clJ.I.fJ.- clJ.I.{J.o-), aJ.1.7r.aKirrKw* ( clJ.1.7r.aK-), vi./l.lrrKW ( av-i./1.-o-), cl7ra</JlrrKw* ( cl7r-a</J-), apaplrrKw* (p-), oeolrrKoJ.I.a* welcome (e-o<K-) and o?)ol<FKOJ.I.a' (usually written o<o-) WClCOTfle, O)arrKW (oL/iax-), t<FKW (ii"K-), f1rU.Up{rrKW* (aup-), EVplrYKW (eup-), MrrKw* (il.aK-), J.l.lrr"(w* (1-''Y-), oif>.LrrKrivw (o</J/1.-e-), 7rrirrxw (7ra1J-), <FTEpl<FKW
(rrrep-e-), TLTrYKOJ.I.aL* (n-TUK-), vMrrKw* (/l.aK-), XP'ltrrKOJ.I.U.<* (XP'l).

528. Addition of E and o.-rrreplo-Kw depri'Ve (cp. rrrpoJ.I.a<) makes ali the other tense-stems from rrTEpe- ; plo-Kw has epe- except in the present and 2 aorist. -a/l.l<FKOJ.I.aL am capture (./1.-) adds o in other tense-stems.
SIXTH OR MIXED CLASS

529. This class includes sorne irregular verbs, one or more. of whose tense-stems are quite different from others, as Eng. am, was, be, Lat. sum, fui. For the full list of fonns see the List of Verbs.

1. a!pw ( a!p-, -) take, fut. a!p>]rrw, i}p?)Ka, etc., 2 aor. et/l.ov. 2. eTOov (po-, l-) saw, 'Vii, 2 aorist (with no present act.) ; 2 pf. ooa know (794). Middle dool-'a.' (poetic). ilov is nsed as 2 aor. of optw (see below). 3. e1rov ( El1r-, ip-, p-) spoke, 2 aor. (no pres.) ; fut. ( lpw) lpw, perf. !-pTJKa, !P'l!-'at, aor. pass. lpp>]IJ?)v. The stem ip- is for rp-, seen in Lat. ver-bura. (Cp. 492.) p- is for FP, hence tpTJp.a for r-FP'lJ.I.a<. 4. ~PXOJ.I.a' ( lpx-, /l.uli-, i/l.uiJ-, i/I.IJ-), go. Fut. /l.eorroJ.I.a< (usually poet.), 2 perf. i/1.>]/l.uiJa, 2 aor. 'lj/I.IJov. The Attic future is .Ip., shall go (774). The imperf. and the moods of the pres. other thn the indic. use the forms of EI-' 526 c. D. Hom. !JaS li'IJ"KW liken for fEfl(K)<FKW, also f<FKW from rl(K)-<FKW, r<Tu(K)<FKop,a< prepare, o-ol(K)-rrKop.a< welcome.

170

PRESENT SYSTE.l\1: SIXTH (MIXED) GLASS

[530

5. <rOlw ( i<rO-, io-, <J>a:y-) eat, fut. goop.a.t (541 ), pf. ioiJooKa., -ioiJo<<r p.a.t, T,otrO'I'}v, 2 aor. gq,a."fov. 6. ptiw ( opa.-, o1r-, fLD-) see, fut. 5if;op.a.t, perf. wp.Ka. or 6p.Ka., perf. mid. wp.p.a.L or wp.p.a.t (ch1r-p.a.t), t:J<j>O'I'}v, 2 aor. tioov (see 2 above). 7. ,-&.<rxw (,-a.O-, ?r<v8-) su.ffer, fut. ,-El<rop.a.t for ,-evO-<rop.a.L (100), 2 pf. ,-,-ovOa., 2 aor. g,-a.Oov. (See 526 d.) 8. ,-tvw (1r1-, 1ro-) drink, from 1ri-v-w (523 a), fut. 1rtop.a.L (541), pf.1r1rwKa., 2 aor. g,-wv, imp. ,-Ot (466. 1, a, 687). 9. rpxw (rp<x- for Opx- (125 g), opa.pr-, opa.p.e-) l'Un, fut. opa.p.ovp.a.L, pf. O<optip.'I'}Ka., 2 aor. gopa.1-1ov. 10. <j>pw ( <j>ep-, ol-, veK-, by reduplication and syncope iv-eveK and ivryK-) be ar; fut. ot<rw, aor. 1fv<"fKa., perf. iv-iJvox-a. ( 446, 4 78), iv-1,ve"f-p.cu, aor. pass. T,vxO'IJv. 11. wvop.a.L ( chve-, 1rpta.-) IJUy, fut. chv-IJ<rop.a.t, perf. iwv'l'}p.a.t, iwv1,8'1]V. For fWV'I'}<TtiP.TJV the form ,-p,&,p.'I'Jv is used. 530. Apart from the inegnlarities of Class VI, sorne verbs may, by the formation of the verb-stem, belong to more thau one class, as {Ja.lvw (III, IV), o<r<j>pa.lvop.a.t (III, IV), o<j>t<rKavw (IV, V). 531. Many verbs have alternative forms, often of different classes, as Kl!tivw
K!oa.lvw honour, ~Kw iKiivw come, p.e/..tiv-w grow black, p.e/..a.lvw (p.e/..a.v-~w) blacken, KMtw ( KO."f"f-) K<t"f"f-tiv-w scream, <r<f>atw <r<j>arrw slay ( 516). Cp. also tivw vrw accomplish, pw prw d1aw water, Hom. ipVKw, ipKtivw, p!Ka.vtiw

restrain.

Cp. 866. 10.

Il. FUTURE SYSTEM

(FUTURE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) 532. Many, if not al!, future forms in u are in reality subjunctives of the first aorist. Muw, ?ra.toe<rw, /..elif;w, <rrfJ<rw are alike future indicative and aorist subjunctive in form.. In poetry and in sorne dialects there is no external difference between the future indica,tive and the aorist subjunctive when the latter has (as often in Hom.) a short mood-sign (457 D.); e.g., Hom. {J1,<rop.<v, p.elif;era., Ionie inscriptions 7rot1,rret.

533. The future stem is formed byadding the tense-suffix -<T%- (-t:<T%in liquid stems, 535) to the verb-stem : .\5-<Tw, I shall (or will) loose, N6riop.at; B+<Tw from T{-8rrp.L place; od~w from odK-V-p.t show.
a. In verbs showing strong and weak grades ( 4 76) the ending is added to the strong stem: ei,-w /..elif;w, r1,Kw r1,~w, 1rvw 1rve6rrop.a.t (503), Olowp.t owrrw.

534. Vowel Verbs.- Verb-stems ending in a short vowellengthen the vowel before the tense suffi x (a to 'YJ except after c, t, p). Th us,
Tp..w, Tp.~<TW ; .w, ii<Tw ; <j>t.iw, <j>t~<Tw. a. On xptiw give macles, xptiop.a.< use, Kpotiop.a.L hem, see 487 a. b. For verbs retaining a short final vowel, see 488.

634 D. Doric and Aeolic always lengthen a to . ('ri!'rrw). b. In verbs with stems origiually ending in -rr Hom. often has "" in the future : civvw vurrcrerrOa.t, TfW r<!T!TW; by analogy 5ip.t Of!T<rW (and o<Tw, O<Ta.<).

539]

FUTURE SYSTEM

171

535. Liquid Verbs.- Verb-stems en ding in , p., v, p, add -w%-; then u drops and < coutracts with the followiug vowel.
<f>alvw ( <f>av-) show, <f>avw, <f>aves from q,av-1( tr )w, <f>av-i(tr)m ; trrlw (trre-) send, trreovp.ev, trrere from trre-(tr)oiJ.ev, trre-l(tr)ere. See p. 128.

536. tr is retained in the poe tic forms Kltrw ( Klw lan, Ke-), KVptrw ( KVpw meet, Kvp-), Olptrop.a< (8lpo1J.a< 1cann myseZf, Bep-), optrw (opvp.< muse, op-). So also in the aorist. See papltr Kw, etw, Kelpw, <f>Oelpw, <f>6pw in the List of V erbs. 537. Stop Verbs. -Labial (.,., [3, cp) and palatal (K, y, x) stops at the end of the verb-stem unite with u to form tf! or ~- Dentals (r, il, ()) are lost bef ore u (98).
K01r-T-w (Ko1r-) eut, K6if;w, Koif;op.a<; {3M.1r-r-w (f3a{3-) il\iure, {3Mif;w, {3Mif;op.a.L; "fparp-w write, "fpaif;w, "fpaif;op.a.L; 1rh-w weave, 1rl~w, 1ri~op.a.L; l:"f-w say, M~w, l~op.a.L; ra.parrw (ra.pa.x-) disturb, rapa~w, rapa~op.a.<; rppa)w(</>pa.o-) say, <f>patrw; 1rel8w ( 11"<0-, 1re<8-) persuade, 1reltrw, 1reltrop.a.L. a. When e or o is added to the verb-stem, it is lengthened to '1 or w : as povop.aL (fiov-e-) wish {3ovfttrop.a.L, ltrKop.aL ( -o-) am capturNl wtrop.a.L. So

also in the first aorist and in other tenses where lengthening is regular. 538. Attic Future.- Certain formations of the future are called Attic because they occur especially in that dialect in contrast to the later language; they occur also in Homer, Herodotus, and in other dialects. 539. These futures usually occur when tr is preceded by a or e and these vowels are not preceded by a syllable long by nature or position. Here tr is dropped and -aw and -lw are contracted to -w. When L precedes tr, the ending is L-(tr)lw which contracts to -Lw. a. Ka.lw call, rew finish drop the tr of Ka.itrw Ka.itrop.a.<, reltrw retrop.a.< and the resulting Attic forms are Ka.w Ka.ovp.a.L, rew (nop.a< poetic). b. lavvw (la-) drive bas Hom. lMw, Attic lw.- Ka81)opu (Ka8ei'i-) sit has Attic Ka.Oei'iofJp.a.<. -p.axop.a.L (p.o. x--) jight has Hom. p.a.xtrop.a.L (and p.ax-f}trop.a.L), Attic p.a.xofJIJ.a.L. -op.L (o-e-) destroy has Hom. otrw, Attic Ow. c. All verbs in -awp.< bave futures in -a(tr)w, -w. Thus, uKeoawp.L (trKei'ia-) scatter, poet. trKeoatrw, Attic trK<i'iw. Similarly some verbs in -<vvvp.L: p.rpdwp.L (p.rpte-) clotlw, }~pic p.rpLuw, Attic p.rpLw; trr6pvp.L (trrop-e-) spread, late trropltrw, Attic trropw. d. A very few verbs in -a.)w have the contracted form. {3L{3a!w ({3L{3a.i'i-) cause to go usually has A ttic {3L{3w from {3Lfiatrw. So ~~erwp.ev = <~eratrop.ev from i~era!w examine. e. Verbs in-Ljw of more than two syllables drop tr and insert e, thus making -<(tr)w, -L(tr)op.a.L, which contract to -Lw and -Lop.a.L, as in the Doric future (540). 535 D. These futures are often uncontracted in Homer ({3aw, Krevm, "t"t<MovtrLv) ; regularly in Aeolic ; in Hdt. properly only when e comes bef ore o or w. 537 D. Doric has -~w from moEt verbs in -!w (516 D.). 539. b. D. :For Hom. -ow for -aw, see 645.

172

FUTURE SYSTEM

[540

So vop.i!w (vop.Lil-) eonRi<ler makes vop.urew, vop.<-ew, vop.<w and in like mann er vo,u<op.a<, both inflected like ,.-o,w, 1rowvp.a.L. Ho lOwtn, olKwvres from iOi!w accustom, olKl!w colonize. But IJ'Xilw (IJ'x<o-) split makes IJ'XiiJ'w. voi-"w etc. are due to the analogy of the liquid verbs. N.- Such forms in Attic texts as liJ'w,
TEMIJ'w, vop.liJ'w, flL{~iJ'w

are erroneous.

540. Doric Future.- Some verbs, which have a future.mi<ldle with an active meaning, fo'rm the stem of the future ini<ldle by adding -CT'-'-, and contracting -CTop.at to -CTovp.at. Su ch verbs (except vw, 7rr7w) have also the regular future in -CTop.at.
KaVIJ'op.a<, vw (vu-, vev-) swim veviJ'op.a< (doubtful), 1rEVIJ'Op.aL, 1rVfW (1rvu-, 1rVV-) b1eathe 1rVUIJ'Op.aL, 1ri1r7'W ( 7rT-) .fall 1r1J'00p.a.L, 1rVv0vop.aL ( 1rV0-, 1rV0-) 1rVIJ'Op.aL (OU Ce), <j>E6'YW ( </JV'Y-, Kalw (Kau-,
71'fW (7rV-, 7rV-)

520) weep

Sail

</JW'Y-) <j>w~op.at, x.!lw (

xo-)

X<IJ'Op.aL.
o-oOp.es, -G'oVp.e&a. o-Wv, -(fop.evos

a. 'l'he infiection of the Doric future is as follows: iiO""W, ~croJ.taL iiiJ's, -IJ'ii
O"E, -O""ETTal.

iio-eiTe, -<JECJ'8e <rovrt, -uovrar.

ticreiv, -cre'irrOat.

b. These are called Doric futures because Doric usually makes all futures (active and middle) in -IJ'w -IJ'w, -IJ'oJ.<a' -IJ'op.a<. c. Attic 1rEIJ'op.a< (Hom. 7r1J'op.a<) from 1ri1rrw fall co mes from ,.-ereop.a<. Attic g,.-eiJ'ov is derived from 2 aor. g,.-erov (Dor. and Aeol.) und er the infiuerrce of 7reiJ'ofiJ.<a'

541. Futures with Present Forms.- 'l'he following verbs have no future suffix, the future th us having the fornr of a present: l3op.at (?-) eat, 7lfop.at ( n-) drink, xw (xv-) and xop.at, pom". See 529. 5, 8.
a. 'l'hese are probably old subjunctives which have retained their future meaning. In goop.a< and ,.-fop.a< the mood-sign is short (457 D.). Hom. has fUop.a; or {Jeiop.at live, of}w jind, Kf}w (written Kelw) lie, ~av6w achieve, lp6w draw, 7av6w stretch, and eu7'a< avoid. vop.cu go is for veO'oJ.La<.
Ill. FIRST (SIGMATICl AORIST SYSTEM

(FIHST AOIUST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)

542. The first aorist stem is formed by adding the tense suffix -CTa to the verb-stem : --CTa I loosed, DCTw, BCTatfU; -3n~a I showed, from odK-V-p.t. See 666.
539 D. Hom. has e<K<W, Kop.<w, Krep<w; and also TEw, Kaw, lw, vTL6w, (U45), civuw, lpuouiJ'<, rav6ouiJ'<. Hdt. always uses the_,,;; and -wfip.a< forms. Homeric futures in -f!W have a liquid bef ore e, and are analogons to the futures of liquid verbs. 540 D. Hom. EIJ'O'eTa< (and ltiJ'IJ'e7'a<, lfiJ'e'l'a<, ltiJ'Ta<). In Doric there are three forms: (1) -IJ'w (and -IJ'w), -IJ'eop.a< (and -IJ'op.a<); and often with ev from eo as -efi,.n, -efip.es; (2) -IJ'iw with 'from e before o and w; (3) the Attic forms. 542 D. Mixed Aorists. -Hom. has sorne forms of the first aorist with the thematie vowel (%) of the second aorist; as li~eTE, li~<IJ'Ii< (li'Yw lead), l{Jf}IJ'ero,
oa.J.<OWIJ'<

545]

FIRST AORIST SYSTEM

173

a. In verbs showing strong and weak grades (476), the tense-suflix is added to the strong stem : 1re!Ow i!1rwra, n]Kw i!r1)~a, 1rvw i!1rvwua, t<T71Jp.L (ur a-, <T71)-)
~CJT1)CJ0. 1

f<JT1)<Tap.1)V. N.-rle1)p.< (Oe-, Orr) place, olowp.t (oo-, w-) give, ~111-'' (-, 7]-) send have aorists in -Ka (~81)Ka, ~owKa, 'ijKa in the singular: with K rarely in the plural). See 755.

543. Vowel Verbs.- Verb-stems ending in a vowel lengthen a short final vowel before the tense-suffix (a to TJ except after ' t, p). Th us, TjMw TtfLTJ<ra, w da<ra ( 431), cptf.w cp{TJrra.
a. x<w (xv-, xw-, xF-) pour bas the aorists l!xea, ixetip.1Jv (Epie i!xeva, <xevtiP.1Jv) from <xevua, ixev<Tap.1Jv.
b. For verbs retaining a short final vowel see 488.

544. Liquid Verbs.- Verb-stems ending in , p., v, p Jose <r and lengthen their vowel in compensation (37): a to TJ (after t or p to ii), tO Ll r to , V tO V.
cpalvw ( cpav-) show, l!<f>1)va !or <f>o.vuo. ; 1repo.lvw ( 1repav-) .finish, hdpiivo. for hrepo.vuo.; <Trw ( <TT<-) send, i!ur<<o. for luTE<To.; Kptvw (Kptv-) judge, i!Kpivo. for KpLVCJO. ; aop.o.L ( ci.-) leap, 1}Mp:qv for 1}uap.1)v. a. Sorne verbs in -atvw (-o. v-) have -ii va instead of -11vo.; as 'YVKo.lvw sweeten 'YKiivo.. So luxvo.lvw make thin, K<poo.ivw gain, Kot'Aalvw hollow out, <1ro.lvw fatten, onalvw be angry, .,. .,.o.lvw make ripe. Cp. 30 a. b. The poetic verbs retaining u in the future (536) retain it also in the aorist. c. o.tpw (&.p-) 1"aise is treated as if its verb-stem were ap- (contracted from d<p- in d,elpw) ! aor. '/jpa, cpw, cpo.tp.L 1 J.pov, 6.po.t 1 cfpo.s, and -fJpap:qv, tfpwp.o.t 1 apa.l/L1)V, tfpo.ul!o.L 1 apap.VOS. d. fv<'YKo. is nsed as the first aorist of <f>epw bew-. E1ro. is rare for E1rov (549).

545. Stop Verbs.- Labial (1r, {3, cp) and palatal (K, y, x) stops at the end of the verb-stem unite with <r to form if! or~- Dentals (r, 8, ()) are lost be fore <r (cp. 98).
1rp..,.-w send l!1r<p.>j;o., 1r<p.>f<ip.1)v; {JMnw (fJ'Ao.fJ-) injuTe i!{J'Aa>fo.; 'YPri<f>-w write hpo.>fo., -ypwftip.1Jv; 1rK-w weave f.,.;>...~o., .,.;>..,~rip.1)v; X-y-w say i!Xe~o.; ra. prirrw ( ro.po.x-) distuTb htipa~o., To.pa~tiwqv; poetic tpuuw ( tp<r-) 1ow fpeuo. ; <f>pasw ( <f>po.l-) telll!<f>po.ua, <f>paurip.1)v; 1rdll-w (1rtll-, 1rELIJ-, 1rotll-) persuade l1r<tua. a.. On forms in <T from stems in 'Y see 516.

imper. {Jf,<Teo (fJalvw go), llD<T<To (lvw set), [~ov (~Kw come), o<Te, otueu, olulp.<v, oluf1VO.< ( cplpw b1ing), imper. 6pueo 1ise (opvvp.< Touse). 543 a. D. Homeri,i]Xevrip.11 v and 1JX<<ip.1)v avoided, ~K1Jo. buTne (Att. tKa.vuo.), i!uuwo. dT ove, also have lost u. 543 b. D. Hom. often has original <Tu, a~ 'Y Mw ryXa.u<To., reVw lreuuo.; in others by analogy, as oip.< 5<uuo., op.vvp.< 6p.ouuo., Ko.Xfw K<.<uuo.. 544 D. Hom. has Ionie -1)va for -iivo. after ' or p. Aeolic assimilates u to a liquid; as i!Kptvva, &.1rluuo., lvlp.p.o.ro, uvvppo.tua ( = <Tvvelpiirro. ). Cp. Hom. ibpc E ( o<f>W inc1ease). 545 D. Hom. often has u<T from dental stems, as hop.tuua hop.Luurip.1)v (Kop.isw). Doric has -~o. from most verbs in -sw; Hom. also has ~ (ijp1ro.~"). See 516 D.

174

SECOND AORIST SYSTEl\1

IV.

SECOND AORIST SYSTEM

(SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) 546. The second aorist is formed without anv tense-suffix and ouly from the simple verb-stem. Only primitive verbs (372) have second aorists.

547. (I) n.-Verbs. -0-verbs make the second aorist by adding %- to the verb-stem, which regularly ends in a consonant. Verbs showing vowel gradations (476) use the weak stem (otherwise there would be confusion with the imperfect).
Xei1rw (Xt7r-, et7r-) le ave ..t7rov, -t7r6p:qv ; cpdryw ( <f>v'Y-, <Pv'Y-) flee ~</>V"fOP ; 1rrop.a.t fly i1rr6p.7Jv ( 4 76 a) ; Xa.p.f3avw (Xa.f3-) take ~Xa.f3ov.

548. a. Vowel verbs rarely form second aorists, as the irregular a.ipw seize (TXov, 529.1), riJlw eat (~<j>a."fov), opaw (ei'iov). ~1J"LOP drank (1rivw) S the only second aorist in prose from a vowel stem and having thematic in:flection. b. Many w-verbs with stems ending in a vowel have second aorists formed like those of p.t-verbs. These are enumerated in 687. 549. Verbs of the First Class (499) adding a thematic vowel to the verbstem form the second aorist (1) by reduplication (494), as fi'Yw lead 7i'Ya."fov, and e1rov probably for -fEfE7r-ov ; (2) by syncope (493), as 1rrop.a.t fly 1rr6p.7Jv, l'Ylpw ( ryep-) 1ouse frtp6p.7Jv, ~1rop.a.t ( O"E7r-) follow <T7r6p.7Jv, imperf. d1r6p.7Jv from i-<TE1rOf1.7Jv, !!xw (<TEX-) have ~<Txov ; ( 3) by using a for e ( 476 b) in poetic forms (480), as rp1rw turn hpa.1rov; (4) by metathesis (492), as poet. opKop.a.t see
~OpO.KOP,

.550. (II) M.-Verbs.- The stem of the second a orist of ftt-verbs is the verb-stem without any thematic vowel. In the indicative active the strong form of the stem, which ends in a vowt>l, is regularly employed. The middle uses the weak stem form.

546 D. Hom. has more second aorists than Attic, whieh favoured the :first aorist. Sorne derivative verbs have Homeric second aorists classed under them for convenience only, as Krv1rw sound ~Krv1rov ; p.vKaop.a.t roar ~p.vKov ; <TTV'Yw hate I!<Trv"fov. These forms are derived from the pure verf>-stem (485 d, 553). 547 D. Hom. often has no thematic vowel in the middle voice of w-verbs (U5ryp.7Jv from i'ixop.a.t receive). See 634, 688. 549 D. (1) Hom. has ()KKero (Ko-p.a.t command), XXa.IJov (XT,8-w lie hid), 1r<j>pa.i'ie ( cppa!w tell), 11'E7rt1Jev ( 11'El8-w persuade). T]pVKa.Kov ( ipVK-w check), 1]vt7Ta.11'ov and lvv1rov (vl'll'rw ch ide, vt1r-) have unusual formation. (2) i-11'X-6f1.7JP (1rXo-p.a.t am, come, 11'eX-). (3) bpa.IJov (7rp8-w sack), ~ra.p.ov (rp.-v-w eut). (4) {:JX'qro (f3aXXw hit, 128 a).

554]

SECOND AlUST SYSTEM

175

t-rrr"'-IJ.' (<r-ra-, <TT't/-) set, second aorist g<TT't/v, g<T.,."'' g<r.,.'t/, ~<TT't/Tov, <r-rf}-rtjv, middle l-Of-IJ-"1 from -riiJ"'IJ.' ( IJe-, IJ'tl-) place, -o6-!J.'t/V from o[OW!J.L ( oo-, ow-) give.
~<TT't/IJ.'P, ~<TT't/T<, ~<TTtj<rav;

551. Originally only the dual and plural showed the weak forms, which are retained in the second aorists of -rliJw.u., olow!J.<, and l'tl!J-' : ~Oe!J.ev, ~oop.ev, elp.ev ( l-lIJ.), and in Hom. fJa-r"'v ( also fJfJnw) from ~fJ"' went. Elsewhere the weak grades have been displaced by the strong grades, which forced their way in from the singular. 'l'hus, lf-yvov, ~rpvv in Pin dar ( = ~-yvw-<rav, lfrpv-<ra.v), which come from l-yvwv(-r), lrpvv(-r) by 40. So Hom. hav, ~fJO.v. Such 3 pl. forms are rare in the drarnatic poets. a. For the singular of -riiJ"'IJ.'' olow!J.<, l"'!J.<, see 755; for the imperatives, 759; for the infinitives, 760. 552. No verb in -I!J.< has a second aorist in Attic from the stem in v. 553. The difference between an imperfect and an aorist depends jormally on the character of the present. Thus lf-r/>"1- said is called an 'imperfect' of rf>"'-IJ.i : but lf-<TT"'- stood is a 'second aorist' because it shows a different tense-stem th an that of t<r-r"'IJ.' Similarly lf-rpep-ov is ' imperfect' to rppw, but lf--r<K-ov 'second aorist' to -rlK-rw because there is no present -reKw. lf<rnxov is imperfect to u-rlxw, but second aorist to <rnlxw. Cp. 546 D.

NOTE ON THE SECOND AORIST AND SECOND PERFECT

554. a. The second aorist and the second perfect are usually formed only from primitive verbs (372). These tenses are formed by adding the persona! endings (inclusive of the thematic or tense vowel) to the verb-stem without any consonant tense-suffix. Cp. nu1ro-v with lfXii-<r-a, hpa.,..-7Jv with hprp-0-7Jv ( -rphw tu rn), -yl--yparp-a. with lv-K-a. b. The second perfect and second aorist passive are historically older thau the corresponding first perfect and first aorist. c. -rp1rw tUln is the only verb that has three first aorists and three second aorists ( 596). d. Very few verbs have both the second aorist active and the second aorist passive. In cases where both occur, one form is rare, as ~-rv1rov (once in poetry), ldJ1r7}V ( 1"V1r1"W Stlilce ). e. In the same voice both the first and the second aorist (or perfect) are rare, as lfrpOa<ra, ~rf>IJ"' ( rpOavw anticipate). Wh en both occur, the first aorist (or perfect) is often transitive, the second aorist (or perfect) is intransitive (81H); as lf<rr7J<ra I erected, i.e. rnade stand, lf<r-r7Jv I stood. In other cases one aorist is used in prose, the other in poetry : lf1rEL<ra, poet. htiJov ( 1rel1Jw persuade); or they occur in different dialects, as Attic harp71 v, Ionie <Oarf>07Jv ( oa..,...,-w bu1y); or one is much later th an the other, as lfXEL'fa, late for ~t7rov.

551 D. Hom. has lfK-rav I slew (K-rElvw, Krev-) with a taken from gK.,.a!J.ev, and ov-ra he wounded (ov-raw).

176

FIItST PERFECT SYSTEM

V. FIRST (K) PERFECT SYSTEM (FIRST l'ElU'ECT AND PLUPEltl<'ECT ACTIVE)

[555

555. The stem of the first perfect is formed by adding -Ka to the reduplicated verb-stem. -v-Ka I have loosed, --VK1/ I had loosed.
a. The K-perfect is later in origin than the second perfect alld seems to have started from verb-stems in -K, as ~-o<K-a ( = flfO<Ka) from e'tKw resernble. b. Verbs showing the gradations n, Ev: o<, ov: ,, v (476) haven, w; as 'lrEl()w (7rte-, '!rEl{}-) pe1suade 1rf1r1Ka (560). But o5o<Ka fear bas 01 (cp. 564).

556. The first perfect is formed from verb-stems ending in a vowel, a liquid, or a dental stop (r, 8, 0). 557. Vowel Verbs.- Vowel verbs lengthen the final vowel (if short) before -Ka, as r'ip.-w hononr r-rtp.TfKa, 0.-w perrnit E.ii-Ka, 1rod.-w rnake 71"-.rolrJ-Ka, rlOrJJLL ( 0-, 0-rr) place T-OYJKa, 8[8wp.L (Bo-, 8w-) give 8i-8w-Ka. 558. This applies to verbs that add E (485). For verbs that retain a short final vowel, see 488. (Except <Ff3wf-'' (<F{3E-) extinguish, which bas ~<Ff37JKa.) 559. Liquid Verbs.-Many liquid verbs have no perfect or mploy the second perfect. Examples of tlie regular formation are cpa[vw ( cpav-) show, 1rcpayKa, &yyw ( dyy.-) announce, ~yyfKa.
v ; as KlKp<Ka, KfK<Ka from Kpivw (Kp<v-) judge, incline. T<lvw ( T<v-) stretch has rhaKa from TEr if Ka: b. Monosyllabic stems changeE to a; as ~<FraKa, ~.peapKa from <Jr"1\'A.w (<FT<-) send, .peelpw ( <{>Oep-) C01'1'Upt. N .. For a we expect o; ais derived from the middle (~<Frap.a1, ~<f>Oapf-'a<). c. Ail stems in 1-' and many others add E (485); as vp.w (vEf-'+), cl-istribute VEVff-'7JKa, f-'fw (1-'<-E-) cme for p.Ef-'f7JKa, rv-yx&.vw(rvx-E) happen T<TVX7JKa. d. Many liquid verbs snffer metathesis (492) and thus get the form of vowel verbs; as {3aw (f3a.-) throw f3ef37JKa; Ovr<FKw (Oav-) elie r1Jv7JKa; Kaew (KaE-, KTJ-) Call KfK7JKa; Kaf-'VW (KaJ.I.-) am Weary KfKp.7JKa; Tff-'VW (Tf-'-) CUt TfTf-'7JKa. Also 1ri1rrw ( 'lrEr-, 1rro-) fall 7re7rrwKa. See 128 a. Kivw ( K<v-)

a. Some liquid verbs drop

555 b. D. Hom. i'i<iow (used as a present) is for i'iE-oro(:)-a. oELi'i- was written on account of the metre wh en F was ]ost. Hom. Mo1a is for o<-o(f )-a with the weak root that is used in i'ifi'hp.u. flee 703 D. 557 D. 1. Hom. has the K-perfect only in verbs with vowel verb-stems. Of these some have the second perfect in -a, particnlarly in participles. Thus KEKf-'7JWs, Attic KKf-'7JKWS ( "f-'-1'-w a rn weary); KEKOp7Jws (Kop-vvf-'1 satiate) ; 7rE<{>VKa<F< and 7rE<{>6a<J< ( <{>6w p1oduce). 2. In some dialects a present was derived from the perfect stem ; as Hom. .vw-yw, Theocr. o<ool"w, 'lr<</>VK<< (in the 2 perf.: Theocr. 1rE1r6vOw ). Inf. nOvaK7JV (Aeol. ), part. KEK-Ij-yovr<s (Hom.), 'TI'E</Jpi"wv (Pi nd.). 3. From p.lp.7JKa (P-7J"&.op.a< bleat) Hom. has the plup. f-'fP.'YJKOv.

s6gJ
560.

SECOND PEIECT SYSTEM

177
Tre.{()w

(me-,

'TrH{)-, TrOt{)-)

Stop Verbs.- Dental stems drop r, , e before -Ka; as persuade 7r7rLKa, Kop.{tw ( KOfLL-) Carry KfKOfLLKa.
VI. SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM

(SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE)

The stem of the second perfect is formed by adding a to the reduplicated verb-stem: -y--ypacp-a I have written (-ypacp-w). 562. The second perfect is almost al ways fonned f1om stems ending in a liquid or a stop consonant, and not from vowel stems.
561.

a. aK?)KOa (aKOVW hear) S for aK7JKO(f)a (KOf = KOJh43). 563. Verb-stems showing variation between short and long vowels (476) have long vowels in the second perfect (ii is tlms regularly lengthened). 'l'hus, r?]Kw (raK-, T1JK) rnelt TT7JKa, Kpli!;w (Kpa-y-) cry out Khpi-ya, <j>a.lvw (<j>av-) show 7rf</>1Jva have appeared (but rr<j>a-yKa have shawn), p?]-yvJu (pa-y-, Fn!-y-, pw-y-, 477 c) break ~ppw-ya. a. dwOa am accustomed (= <rE-<rfwO-a.) has the strong form w (cp. -l)Oos custorn, 123); Hom. ~Ow (Attic Ml!;w accustmn). 564. The second perfect bas o, ot when the verb-stem varies between a, E, o (478, 479) or,, Et, ot (477 a): rpi<j>-w (rpE</>-, rpo.p-, rpa.rp-) nou1ish rhpo<j>a., "/I.Elrrw ("/\,.,.., Etrr-, ot1!'-) leave oL7ra, 1l'Elew (,.,o., 1l'EL0-, 1rotO-) persuade 1l'7rot0a. trust. 565. Similarly verbs with the varfation u, Ev, ou (476) should have ou; but this occurs only in Epie El"/1.?]"/l.ovOa (=A tt. "/1.?]"/l.vOa); cp. eEu(8)-<rop,at. Other verbs have w, as </>E-yw fiee 1r<J>Ev-ya. 566. After Attic reduplication (446) the stem of the second perfect has the weak form ; "/I.Ei<J>w ( "/I.ELrp-, "/l.trp-) anoint "/1.?)"/l.t<J>a. 567. Apart from the variations in 563-566 the vowel of the verb-stem remains unchanged: as -yf-yparpa ( -ypri.<J>w write), Khv<J>a ( KD1rrw stoop, Kvrp-). 568. The meaning of the second perfect may dil'fer from that of the present ; as -yp?]-yopa am awake from -ydpw wake up, <r<r1JP"- Y1"in from <ralpw sweep. The second perfect often has the force of a present ; as rrbrotOa tntst (7rf1l'ELKa have persuaded). See 819. 569. Aspirated Second Perfects.- In many stems a final 1r or (3 changes to cp : a final K or -y changes to X (cp and x here imitate verbstems in cp al,ld x, as Tpcpw, pvTTw.) 561 D. Hom.has severa! fonns unknown to Attic: lfilour.a (oovrr-t!-w sound), lio"/1.1!'a (~"/1..,.-w hope), ~op-ya (pt!!;w wo1k), 7rpo-(3(3ov"/l.a ((3ovof.'aL wish), f.'f.'1Ja (p,"/l.w
care jo1). 562 D. But oota fear from oFt-. See 555 b. D., 703. 569 D. Hom. never aspirates.,., (3, K, -y. Th us KEKorrws =A tt. KEKo<J>ws ( K61r-r-w eut). The aspirated prrfect occurs once in Hdt. (f7re.,.6f.'<f>Et 1. 85); but is unknown in Attic until the fiHh century n.c. Soph. T1. 1009 (Parhpo<J>as) is the only example in tml'<'dy.
GREEn: GRAM.--

12

178

SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM

[570

K01r'TW (Ko1r-) eut KKopa, 1rJ.L1r-w send 1rf1rOJ.Lpa, fJM1rTW ({3\afJ-) injure fJl{3\apa, Tpt{3w ( Tpf3-) rub Th pipa, pv\&,rTw ( pvaK-) gua1d -1r<pv\ax.a; Tplp-w ( rp<p-) nourish T'Tpopa ; OpV'T'TW ( opvx.-) dig opwpvx.a.

570. Most such stems have a short vowel immediately before the final consonant; a long vowel precedes e.g. in a.lK-V-J.L< aax.a, K1JpVrrw (KrJpiiK-) -K<K1Jpiixa, 1rTf,a-<Jw (1rT1JK-) ~1rr1Jxa. TTp<pa and r0\upa show 1 in contrast to in the present ( rpt{Jw, O\t(:3w ). qrp-fw, riJ.L1rW do not aspirate (~qrop-ya, poet. aJ.L1ra ). 571. The following verbs have aspirated second perfects : li-yw, \\&.rrw, vol"(w, {Ja1rTW, a<lKVJ.L<, lhWKW (rare), O)..t{Jw, K1JpVrrw, Kf1r'TW, K01r'TW, a-yx.avw, aJ.LfJavw, a1rTW, f"(W COl leCt, J.LaTTW, J.Lf["(VJ}L<, 1rfJ.L1rW, 1r fKW, 7rpd'T'TW, 1rTf,qqw, rarTw, Tp1rw, rpif3w, plpw ( lvf,voxa), pvaTTw. vol"(w or vol"fVJ.L< has two perfects: dvcpxa and vcp-ya. 1rpiiTTw do has 1rf1rp-ya have done and fare (well or ill), .and (generally later) 1rhpxa have done. 572. Second Perfects of the ,...-form.- Sorne verbs add the endings directly to the rednplicated verb-stem. Such second perfects lack the singular of the indicative.
fa-T1}J1.< ((j'Ta-, lJ'T1}-) Set, 2 perf. Stem eqra- ; ~<J'Ta-J.L<V, /!qra-T<, E<J'Tii-q<, nf. eqTa-va<; 2 plup. I!<Jm-<Jav ( 41 7), The singular is supp lied by the forms in -Ka ; as I!<JT1JKa. These second perfects are enumerated in 704.

573. Stem Gradation.- Originally the second perfect was infiected throughout without any thematic vowel (cp. the perfect middle), but with stem-gradation: strong forms in the singular, weak forms elsewhere. -a ( 1 singular) was introduced in part from the aorist and spread to the other persons. Corresponding to the infiection of oa (794) we expect 1rhodJa, .,.,.,.o,qOa, 7rf7ro<0<, 1r1r<<JTov, .,.,.,.,el", 1r1r<<JT<, 1f'<7rl0au (from .,.,.,.,egu). Traces of this mode of infiection appear in Hom. 'Y<)'aT1JV (from 'Y'YifT1Jv, 35 b) 'Yf"faJ.L from -yryova; gK'TOV; ltKT1}V, fKWS from ~O<Ka j f1rf1r<0J.LV j J1.fJ.LJ.LV from J.LfJ.LOV j 1rf1raq0 (for 1r<1raO'T = 1rnreOT<) from 'lf''lf'ovOa (other examples 704, 705). So the masc. and neut. participles have the strong forms, the feminine has the weak forms (J.L<J.LrJKWs, J.LEp.aKv'ia. as ElOWs, luZa,).

VII.

PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM

(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE, FUTURE PERFECT PASSIVE)

574. The stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive is the reduplicated verb-stem, to which the personal endings are directly attached. v-p,at I have loosed myself or have been loosed, ~-ftrp.:qv; ~o-p,at (-w-p,t give), y-p.-at (dK-vv-p,t show). On the euphonie changes of consonants, see 409.

574 D. A thematic vowel precedes the ending in Hom. JJ.fJ.LfJ<Ta< (J.Lw care for), opwp<Ta< (6pviiJ1-< rouse).

PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM

179

575. The stem of the perfect middle is in general the same as that of the first perfect active as regards its vowel (557), the retention or expulsion of v (559 a), and metathesis (559 d).
Tp.a-w hononr urip.'T!-p.at ur!p.f,p.'T/v; ..-ou!-w make .,.,.,.ol.,-fJ.U., l..-<..-otf,p.'T/P; -ypatf>-w write -y-ypap.-p.at ; Kpivw ( KpLP-) jdge KKpt-p.at ; ulvw ( T<v-) stretch rhap.aL ; tf>Oelpw ( <f>O<p-) CII1'1'Upt ~<f>Oap-p.at ; {Jaw ({3a-) throw {3{3'I)-p.aL lf3<{3f,p.'T/v; ..-<l(Jw (..-8-, ..-HO-, ..-o,O-) pe1suade ..-..-wrp.at l..- ..-da-p.'T/V.

576. The vowel of the perfect middle stem should show the weak form when there is variation between < (<t, w): o (o, ou): a (, v). The weak form in a appears regularly in verbs containing a liquid (479) : that in v, in ..-..-vup.at from 1rvvMvop.aL (..-ve-, ..-we-) learn, poet. ~a-a-vp.at hasten from a-ew (O'v-, a-ev-) u1ge.
7r..-Xe-yp.at (..-K-w weave), ~!;ev-yp.at (!;ev-y-vii-p.L yoke).

577. The vowel of the present has often displaced the weak form, as in etp.p.aL (1..--w leave), ..-..-eta-p.at (welO-w persuade),

578. A final short vowel of the verb-stem is not lengthened in the verbs given in 488 a. is added (485) in many verbs. For metathesis see 492; for Attic reduplication see 446. 579. v is retained in endings not beginning with p., as <f>a.lvw ( <f>av-) show, 7r<f>avTaL, 1r<f>av8e. Before -p.at, we have p. in IJJ~vp.p.at from o~DPW (o~vv-) sharpen, but usually vis replaced by "

On the insertion of " see 489.

580. Future Perfect.- The stem of the future perfect is forrned by adding -<T%- to the stem of the perfect middle. A vowel immediately preceding -<T%- is al ways long, though it may have been short in the perfect middle.
M-w loose, XeXD-uop.at I gJwll have een loosed (perf. mid. il-p.at), Ol-w bi nd 001,-0"0p.aL (perf. mid. ooe-p.at) 1 -ypa<f>-W Write '"(E'"(paif;-op.at, KaW Call KKf,uop.aL,

581. The future perfect usally has a passive force. The active meaning is found where the perfect middle or active has an active meaning (1946, 1947). K<Krf,uop.at !all possess (KKT'T/p.aL possess), KEKpd~op.aL shall (:ry out (KKpi-ya c1-y out), KEKa-y~op.a shall scream (Ki< a-y-ya sc1ram ), p.<p.vf,a-op,a.t shall 1'emernber (P.P.P'T/fJ.a' remember), ..-e... avuop.at shall have ceased ( 1r1ravp.at have ceased). 582. Not all verbs can form a future perfect; and few forms of this teuse occur outside of the indicative: ota..- ..-oEP.'T/U6p.EPov Thuc. 7. 25 is the only sure example of the participle in classical Greek. The infinitive p.ep,vf,ueuOat occurs in Hom. and Attic prose. 583. The periphrastic construction (601) of the perfect middle (passive) participle with guop.at may be used for the future perfect, as fif;evup.vos ga-op.aL I shall have lwm, drceived.
580 D. Hom. has ii<il~o~tat, p.<p.vf,a-op.at, K<Kf,O'y, K<)OW<T7t ; KeKaof,a-op.at, 71'<</>tof,a-eraL <~re from reduplicated aorists.

180

FIHST PASSIVE SYSTEM (H PASSlVE)

584. Future Perfect Active.- The future perfect active of most verbs is formed periphrastically (600). Two perfects with a present meaning, larq.~a I stand (t'T'YJJ.LL set) and rOv'YJKa I am dead (Ovj'Kw), form. the future perfects i'r~~w I shall stand, nOv~~w I shall be dead.
VIII. FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM <8H PASSIVE)

(FIRST AlUST AXD FST FUTURE PASSIVE)

FIRST AORIST PASSIVE

585. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed by adding -Orr (or -0-) directly to the verb-stem: J-AV-O'YJ-v I was loosed, J-cj>O.v-O'YJ-v I was shawn (cj>a[vw, cf>av-), J-86-0'YJ-v I was given (8wJ.Lt, 8o-, 8w-). a. -OTJ- appears in the indicative, imperative (except the third plural), and infinitive ; -Oe- appears in the other moods. -OTJ- is found before a single consonant, -Oe- before two consonants or a vowel except in the nom. neuter of the participle. 586. The verb-stem agrees with that of the perfect middle herein: a. Vowel verbs lengthen the final vowel of the verb-stem, as 7"-Tip.?J-p.at, l-Tip.i)-O?Jv. On verbs which do not lengthen their final vowel, see 488. b. Liquid stems of one syllable change e to a, as T-Ta-p.a, l-Ta-O?Jv (Hlvw stretch, uv-). But <TTp<f;w ttl1'n, Tphrw turn, Tp</Jw nou1ish have lrnp</JO?Jv, Tp<fJOTJv, lOp</JO?Jv (rare), though the perfect middles are ~<TTpap.p.at, TTpap.p.at, TOpap.p.at.

c. Primitive verbs showing in their stems the gradations e ( , w) : o ( ot, ou) :

a (, v) have a strong form, as Tp</JO?Jv from Tpbrw (Tperr-, Tpo1r-, Tpa1r-) turn, l'l\el<fJOTJv from '/l.l7rw ('/l.t1r-, '/l.et1r-, '/l.ot1r-) leave, 7r'l\e6<J0T}v from 1r'I\w (1r'l\v-, 1rw-)

sail . . d. Primitive verbs showing in their stems a variation between e : '1 and o : w have, in the first aorist passive, the short vowel. Th us, Tl0TJP.' (Oe-, OTJ-) TO?Jv,
olowp.t ( oo-, ow-) iiJOOTJV. e. Final v is dropped in sorne verbs: J<-Kpt-p.a,, hplO?Jv. See 491. f. The verb-stem may suffer metathesis : f3-{3?J-p.a, l-{3-f]-0?Jv. See 492. g. Sigma is often added: K<-J<w<J-p.a,, -~<<e<T-OTJ See 489.

x (82 c);

587.

Before 0 of the suffix, 7r and f3 become cf>; K and y become r, 8, 0 become (J' (83). cf> and x remain unaltered.

i7r-W fl<f;-0T}V, {3il7rTW ({3a{3-) {3il</J-0TJV; </JV<iTTW ( </>VaK) </JV<iX-0TJP, tl'f-w 1fx-0?Jv; Kop.l!;w (Kop.li5-) KofJ.l<T-0TJP, 1rele-w l7rel<T-0TJv; 'fpa<f;-w lypa<fJ-OTJv, TapaTTw (Tapax-) lrapax-O?Jv.

584 D. Hom. has K<xapfww and K<xapf)<TofJ.a' from xalpw (xap-) 1ejoice. 585 a. D. :For -OTJ<Tav we find -0<'' in Hom., as odKptOev. 58'6 b. D. <TTpa</JO?Jv is Ionie and Doric ; Hom. and Hdt. have iTpa<fJOTJv from Tp1rw. Hom. has Tap<fJOTJv and Tp</JOTJ" from rp1rw gladden. 586 e. D. Hom. has KlvO?Jv and KlO?Jv, hplv07Jv and KplOTJv; iipv0'T)v Att.

!opDB7JP (!p6w

crect),

p.rrvvvOrJv (va1rvw Tevive).

594]

SECOND PASSIVE SYSTE:\1 (H PASSIVE)

181

l-8v-87J>

588. 8 of the verb-stem becomes r in l-r-0"1> for l-Oe-O'T/>, and in l-ru-0"1 for from rlOwu ( Oe-, 871-) place and 86w (Ou-, Oii-) sacrifice. See 125 c.
FIRST FUTURE PASSIVE

589. The stem of the first future passive is formed by adding -a-%- to the stem of the first aorist passive. It ends in -8'Y/a-op.at. 'l'hus, 7rat3vfJ+a-op.at I slwll be educated, vfJ~-uop.at I shall be loosed.
T}Joaw, TJ1.1J87Jv TJ1.7J81}rro}Joa<; law, eld87Jv la81}rro}Joa<; ehrw, lel<f>OrJv L<j>81}rro}Joa<; 1rel8w, 1relrr87Jv 7rLrr81}rro}JoaL ; Tflvw, r<i8rJ> raOfwoJl.aL; rrrw, hxOrJv raxO-f}rro}Joa<; rl87}}JoL, T87JV T8-f}rro}JoaL i [W}JoL, 08r]v oo81}rro}JoUL i eiKPV}JoL, eefx8rJP LX8-fJrroJ1-UL.

IX.

SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM PASSIVE)

(SECOND AORIST AND SIWOND FUTUHE PASSIVE)

SECOND AORIST PASSIVE

The stem of the second aorist passive is formed by adding -'YJ- (or --) directly to the verb-stem. Th us, f3M.f3'YJv I was 1:nju1ed from f3>..&.7r-ruJ (f3>..af3-).
590.

a. -71- appears in the indicative, imperative (except the third plural), and infinitive ; + appears in the other moods. -71- is found before a single consonant, -e- before two consonants or a vowel except in the nom. neut. of the participle.
591. The second aorist passive agrees in form with the second aorist active of }Jo<-verbs; cp. intransitive exp7J> 1'ejoiced with ifrrr'T/> stood. The passive use was developed from the intransitive use. 592. Primitive verbs showing in their stems the grades e: o: a have a. Thus an e of a monosyllabic verb-stem becomes a, as in 7rK-w weave 7raKrJ>, Kf7r-T-W steal K7r7JP, <j>Oelpw ( <j>Oep-) CU1'1'1lpt e<j>O.pr]P, rTTW ( rTT<-) send lrrr.7Jv. But "fw collect has "f7J 593. Primitive verbs showing in their stems a variation between a short and long vowel have, in the second aoriBt passive, the short vowel. Th us -r-f} Kw
( raK-, T7JK-) melt r.KrJ>, /rfJ"Y'Jl.L (pa "Y-, PrJ"Y-, pw-y-) lnwtlc lpp."frJV. a. But 7rT]rrw (1ray-, 7rrJ"Y-) strike has 7r."Y'T/ only in composition, i~e1r "f7J>; otherwise l1r TJ"YrJ

as

594. The second aorist passive is the only aorist passive formed in Attic prOSe by d."fPVfl.L (ld"f7JV), "fp.<j>w ("fp.<j>7JV), Opw (lOprJv), 8.7rTW (r.</>'1/>), K07rTW (h67r7J>), Jl.Ulvw (Jl..P'T/>), 1rvi"Yw (i7rvt"Y7J>), pr.rw (ipp.<f>7Jv), pw (ppu'T/V active),
p-1]-yv!Jl.< (ppa"frJV), rr1}1rw (lrr.7r7Jv), rrK.1rrw (lrrK.</>'1/v), rr1r<lpw (irr7r.prJv), rrrw (lrrr.7Jv), rrtj>jw or rr<j>rrw (lrrtj>."f7J>), rr<j>.Hw (rr<j>.rJv), r6tj>w (hvtj>rJv), <j>Oelpw (ltj>Op7Jv pass. and intr.), <j>Dw (in subj. <f>uw), xalpw (xprJ> active).

589 D. Hom. has no example of the first future passive. To express the idea of the passive future the future middle is used. See 802. Doric shows the active endings in l.Joth futures passive: oetxO'T/rrovr<, va-ypa<f>rJrre. 590 a. D. For -7Jrra> we generally find -ev (from -rJvr, 40) in Hom.; also in Doric.

182

SECOND P A~Sl V E SYSTEM (H PASSIVE)

[595

595. Both the flrst aorist passive and the second aoriHt passive are formed by l\elrf>w (fJl\elrf>OTJv), l\Mrrw (-TJiiX07Jv, i}!i-y')v), (-Jci:TrTw (fJatf>7Jv), fJJ\ti-rrrw
((3Mtf>07Jv, i(3Mf37Jv), (3p.!xw (lfJpt!xOTJv), !eu-yvp.t (f!u-y7Jv), Ol\ifJw (l0itf>01Jv), K-rrrw (lKa-rr7Jv), Kivw (-eKlv7Jv), Kpu-rrrw (lKpu<f>07Jv), l\.!-yw collect (iteMx!J'lv, but <TVVE")'TJV), p.aTTW (p.")'')v), p.el")'VVjJ.L (lp.l-y7Jv), 1rTJ")'VjJ.L (-rra")'')V), 1rEKW (-rraK1Jv), -rrf}rrw (l-rrTJ/'TJV and -e-rr<i")'1Jv), pt-rrrw (ppi<f>IJ']v, lppl<f>1Jv), urepl(jKW ((jrepfJIJTJv), (jTptf>w ((jrparf>7Jv), rarrw (haxO'lv), rf}Kw (lraK1Jv), rp.!-rrw (hp-rr71v pass. and intr.), rp.!<f>w (hpatf>7Jv pass. and intr.), rpt(3w (hpl{31)v, 'hpt</>IJTJv), <f>alvw (rf>av!J7Jv was shown, rpav7Jv appeaTed), <f>pa-yvp.t (l<f>paxO'lv), >fvxw (1fvX7Jv). Most of these verbs use either the one in prose and the other in poetry,

the dialects, or late Greek. in brackets.

nly the forms in common prose use are inserted

596. Only those verbs which have no second aorist active show the second aorist passive; except rpbrw, which has ail the aorists: active trp<lfa and {rpa-rrov turnNl; middle rpe!fap.7Jv put to ftight, hpa-rr6p.7Jv turned rnyself, took to ft'ight; passive hpt!</>01Jv was ttTned, hpri-rr')v was tuTned and tuTned rnyself.
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE

The stem of the second future passive is formed by adding -u%- to the stem of the second aorist passive. It ends in --quop.w. Thns, {3/.:q{3~uop.at 1 shall be inju?ed from {3/..'lrTW ({3>..a(3-) e-{3>...&.{3-rrv
597.
K6-rr-r-w, lK67rTJV KO'TrTJ(jop.at ; -ypa<f>w, l-ypri</>TJV -yparf>f}!jop.at ; <f>alvw, l<f>av7Jv appeared, rpavf}(jop.at; <f>Oelpw, lrp!Jap7Jv rf>Oapf}(jop.at ; 7rTJ")'Vp.t fix, l-rr-y7Jv 1ra-yf}(jop.at.

598. Most of the verbs in 594, 505 form second futures passive except 11-yvp.t,
.l\~l<f>w,

{3a1rrw,

fJplxw,

!e-yvp.t,

O>..t(3w,

Kf'Trrw,

p.alvw,

1-'rirrw,

pa1rrw.

But many of the second futures appear only in poetry or in late Greek, and some are fotu:J.d only in composition.
PERIPHRASTIC FORMS

Perfect.- For the simple pmfect and pluperfect periphrastic fonns are often used.
599.
a. For the perfect or pluperfect active indicative the forms of the perfect active participle and el!-Ll or 1jv may be used: as evKws Elp.t for vKa, evKws 'ljv for e!!K7J. So (3efJoTJ01)K6res 1j(jav for l(3efJo7JOTJKE(jav (fJoTJIJw corne to aid) ; ell-'l re07JKWs for riOTJKa I have placecl; -ye-yparf>ws 1jv for l-ye-ypri</>TJ I had written; -rre1rov8ws 1jv l hacl su.tferecl. Such forms are more common in the pluperfect and in general denote state rather than action. b. For the perfect active a periphrasis of the aorist participle and txw is sometimes used, especially when a perfect active form with transitive meaning is lacking; as (jTf}(j'.s l!xw I have placed (~(jT7JKa., intransitive, stand), lpa(j8eh txw I have loved. So often because the aspirated perfect is not used, as l!xm rapri~'.> thou hast stirrecl up. Cp. habeo with the perfect participle.

697 D. Hom. bas only oaf}(jeat (lilriTJv leamed), l-''i'TJ(j<(j8at (p.el-yvp.L rnix).

PEIUPHRASTIC FORMS

183

c. In the perfect active subjunctive and optative the forms in -Kw and -Ko<p.L are very rare. In their place the perfect active participle with wand ef7]v is usually employed: evKws (eOL'11"ws) w, d7]v. Other forms than 3 sing. and 3 pl. are rare. Cp. 691, 694. d. The perfect or pluperfect passive is often paraphrased by the perfect participle and url or 1jv; as -yeypa.fLp.vov urL it stands written, uri IJeiJo-yp.vov it stands resolved, '1I"O.P7J'Y'Y<p.vov 1jv == '11"a.pfJTt<To ('11"a.pa.-y-yJ..:>.-w give O!'!lers). e. In the third plural of the perfect and pluperfect middle (passive) the perfect middle participle with Elul (1jua.v) is used when a stem en ding in a consonant would come in direct contact with the endings -v-ra.<, -vro. See 408. f. The perfect subjunctive and optative middle are formed by the perfect middle participle with wor El7]v : :>.-e:>.-vp.vos w, et7]v. g. The perfect imperative of ail voices may be expressed by combining the perfect participle with tuiJ<, ~urw (697). evKws tuiJ< loose, etc., Eip7]fLvov turw let it have been said, -yeyovws turw P. L. 951 C; -ye-yov6us gurwua.v P. L. 779 d. h. Peri ph rasis of the infinitive is rare : .uiJv7]K6-ra. .Tva.< to be dead X. C. 1. 4. 11.

600. Future Perfect Active.- The future perfect active of most verbs is formed by combining the perfect active participle with uop.at shall be. Thus, yeypacpw<; uop.at I slwll have written, cp. scriptus ero. For the two verbs which do not use this periphrasis, see 584.
:>.-e:>.-o-y7]p.vos tuop.a.L

a. The perfect middle participle is used in the case of deponent verbs : ...oAnd. 1. 72.

601. Future Perfect Passive.- The future perfect passive may he expressed by using the perfect middle (passive) participle with uop.at shall be. Thus, !feuup.vot uf.u8f. you will have been deceived.
FIRST CONJUGATION OR VERBS IN O.

Verbs in -w have the thematic vowel-% (-w/7]-) between the tense-stem and the personal endings in the present system. The name "w-conjugation," or "thematic conjugation," is applied to all verbs which form the present and imperfect with the thematic vowel. 603. Inflected according to the w-conjugation are all thematic presents and imperfects; those second aorists active and middle in which the tense-stem ends with the thematic vowel; all futures, all first aorists active and middle ; and most perfects and pluperfects active. 604. Certain tenses of verbs ending in -w in the first persan present indicative active, or of deponent verbs in which the personal endings are preceded by the thematic vowel, are inflected without the thematic vowel, herein agreeing with p.t-verbs. These tenses are: ali aorists passive; all perfects and plnperfects middle and passive; a few second perfects and pluperfects active; and those second aorists active and middle in which the tense-stem does not end with the thematic vowel. But ali subjunctives are thematic.
602.

184

0--CONJCGATlON: VOWEL VElWS

[6os

605. Verbs in -w fall into two main classes, distinguished by the last letter of the verb-stem : 1. Vowel verbs: a. Uncontrated verbs. b. Contracted verbs. 2. Consonant verbs: a. Liquid verbs. b. Stop (or mute) verbs.

N. Under 2 fall also (c) those verbs whose stems ended in <Tor F (624).
606. Vowel Verbs.- Vowel verbs usually do not form second aorists, second perfects, and second futures in the passive. A vowel short in the present is commonly lengthened in the other tenses. Vowel verbs belong to the first class of present stems (498-504; but see 612). 607. Vowel Verbs not contracted.-Vowel verbs not contracted have verb-stems ending in f, ~' or in a diphthong (aL, L' av, w, ov).
() ia-Olw eat, 7rptw saw, xptw anoint, poet. olw fear, rtw honou1 (500. 2); (v) avw accomplish, wOw am intoxicated, Mw loo se, 06w sacrifice, q,6w produce, Kwvw hinder (and many others, 500. 1 a); (at) Kvalw scratch, 7ralw strike, 7rralw StUmble, '!raaiw W1"CStle, ct:yaloJJ-aL am indignant, oaiw Jcindle, OaloJJ-aL divle, LaloJJ-aL desire eagerly, poet. JJ-aloJJ-aL desire, valw dwell, palw st1ike; (EL) KTfw (later KEiw) slmt, a-elw shake, Epie Kelw split and 1"6St; (<LV) avw kindle, Opaw break, a'!roaw enjoy, '!raw make cease (7raoJJ-a< cease), poet. lauw rest; (ev) f3aa-<ew am king, f3ov71.ew consult (f3oveoJJ-aL deliberate), 07]p<vw hunt, Keew orde1, evw stone, 7ralevw educate, xopew dance, <j>ovevw slay. Most verbs in -ww are either denominatives, as f3a<JL<vw from {3a<TL<Vs ; or are due to the analogy of such denominatives, as '!ra<li<w. 'Y<oJJ-a< taste is a primitive. Olw run, v<w swim, 'lf"w sail, 7rvw breathe, p<w flow, x<w poU!" have forms in EV, v; cp. poet. <T<Vw urge, a<w avert, xew am g1ieved; (ov) Kovw hear, Koovw dock, Kpow beat, ouw wsh.

608. Some primitive vowel ve1:bs in -tw, -vw (522) formed their present stem by the aid of the suffix !(Y), which has been lost. Denominatives in -tw, -vw, -evw regularly added the suffix, as poet. J.I-TJPl-w am w1oth from J.I-TJP<tw (JJ-iiv<-s wrath), poet. liaKp6w weep (oaKpv tear), poet. <flr6-w beget from q,rv-!w, JJ-<Ovw am drunk, {3aa-tevw am king. Poet. o7JploJJ-a<, JJ-a<Trlw, JJ-7JrloJJ-a<, K7JKlw, x71.vw,
'Y7Jpvw, l()w.

609. The stem of sorne of the uncontracted vowel verbs originally ended in <T or F (624). 610. Some verbs with verb-stems in vowels form presents in -vw (523), as 'lf"ivw drink, <f>Oivw peTish; and in -a-Kw (526). 611. Vowel Verbs contracted.- Vowel verbs that contract have verb-stems ending in a, , o, with some in ii, 'f/, w.
~(y),

612. All contracted verbs form their present stem by the help of the suffix and properly belong to the Thir Class (522).

613. Sorne contracted verbs have verb-stems wllich originally ended in aor F (624).

-CONJUGATION: LIQUID VERI3S

185

614. Liquid Verbs.- Liquid verbs have verb-stems in>.., p., v, P The present is rarely formed from the simple verb-stem, as in p.v-w remain; ordinarily the suffix f (y) is added, as in rnDi.Xw (a-nX-~w) send, Kptvw (KpLv-~w) judge, KT<ivw (Krev-1w) slay, <t>alvw (<Pav-~w) show. 615. A short vowel of the verb-stem remains short in the future but is lengthened in the first aorist (544 ). Thus: a. u in the future, 1J in the aorist: <t>alvw (</>av-) show, <f>avw, ~rf>71va. In this class fall aU verbs in -atvw, -atpw, -aXXw. b. E in the future, E in the aorist: p.v-w 1'Mnain, p.evw,. ~p.etva; IJTXw ( IJreX-) send, <TT<w, ~<TTeta. Here belong verbs in -eXXw, -ep.w, -ep.vw, -epw, -etpw,
-EVW 1 -ELVW.

c. t in the future, ;; in the aorist: KXtvw (KXtv-) incline, KLvw, ~KXiva. Here belong verbs in -tXXw, -ivw, -ipw. d. ii in the future, ;; in the aorist: a-vpw (<Tup-) drag, <Tilpw, ~IJpa. Here belong verbs in -vpw, -vvw. For the formation of the future stem see 535, of the aorist stem see 544.

616. For the perfect stem see 559. Few liquid verbs make second perfects. On the change of e, a of the verb-stem to o, 71 in the second perfect, see 478, 484. Liquid verbs with futures in -w do not form future perfects. 617. Monosyllabic verb-stems containing e have a in the first perfect active, perfect middle, first aorist and future passive and in all second aorists, but o in the second perfect. Th us, </>Oelpw ( <t>!Jep-) corrupt, ~</>OapKa, '<t>!Japp.at, <<t>MprJv, but lh-</>!Jopa have destroyed (819). 618. A few monosyllabic stems donat changee to a in the 2 aor., as rlp.vw eut hep.o v (but 'rap.ov in Hom., Hdt. etc.), 'Yl'Yvop.at ("'fE v-) become "'fev6p,rJv. See also O.tvw, Opop.a<, Kop.at, root </>ev-. Few liquid verbs form second aorists. 619. Stems of more than one syllable do not change the vowel of the verb-stem.
620. List of Liquid Verbs. -The arrangement is according to the classes of the present stem. Words poetic or mainly poetic or poetic and Ionie are starred. !. {Jouop.at ({Jou X-e-), f!JXw ( eOeX-e-), elMw* ( eie-), txXw*, p.w, p.w, 11'op.at*, </>tw (Epie </><-).- {Jpp.w*, "'fp.w, p,w*, Opp.w*, vp.w, rpp.w, and "'fap,w ( "'fap.-e-). - "'fl-yvop.at ( "'fEv-e-), p.vw, p.lp,vw* (p,ev-), 11'vop.at, <TiJvw*, <Trvw, and -ye-ywviw* (-ye-ywv-e-).- Verbs in ep.w and -evw have only pres. and imperf., or form the ir tenses in part from other stems.pw, 'po!-'at (p-e- ), 'ppw (lpp-e- ), !Jipo!-'a<*, qrpO/-'at, </>pw, 11'auplw*, ( 'Tr()JI)p-e-), and Kupw* (Kup-e- ), ropw* ( rop-e). III. :yO.XXoflou, d.-y-yXXw, aloXXw*, iiXXo,..,a<, d.nraXXw*, {JaXXw, ataXXw*, !JaXXw, laXXw*, lvoaO!-'rL<*; OKw, o<t>elXw ( 0</>E-, ocpetE-), <t>lXXw*, 11'aw, 11'0<Kl'XXw, <TKw*, rnXXw, -rXXw, riXXw*, <T</>aXXw, 1{;cfXXw.-uv"' verbs

(the following list includes primitives, and most of the denominatives in classical Greek from extant v-stems, or from stems which once contained v; 518 a) : avw*, <TIJ!-'alvw*, </>pctlvw*, et!-'alvw*, palvw*, evrppalvw, 614 D. 'lmj;vpO'e(J'!Ja< in J>indar is made from <f>uww (</>Vpw knead).

186

0--CONJUGATION: STOP VERBS

[62!

IV.

Oa.vJULlvw, lalvw*, Kalvw*, Kpalvw*, KJp.alvw*, Kwp.a.lvw*, Xp.aliiOp.at, p.Ea.lvop.at, ~alvw, vop.alvw*, 1T"1Jp.alvw*, 1rtalvw*, ?Totp.alvw, pa.lvw, IJ"alvw, IJ"'I)p.alvw, fJ"1TEpp.alvw*, TEKTalvop.at, cf>alvw, cp/l.eyp.a.lvw, XELp.alvw*, xpalvw. Ail other denominatives in -aww are due to analogy; as "'fptalvw, aalvw, "'fVKalvw, OVIJ"XEpalvw, lxOpalvw, Oepp.alvw, lfJ"xvalvw, Kepoalvw, KOLalvw, Kvoalvw*, Ealvw, EVKalvw*, JULpa(vw, p.ap')'alvw*, p.talvw, p.wpalvw, ~1Jpalvw, opp.alvw*, OIJ"cppalvop.at, ?Te?Talvw, 1TEpalvw, 1TtKpalvw, pvwalvw, urpalvw, "'ftalvw, Opalvw*, cpalvw, xaE1Talvw.- .EEtvw*, "'fdvop.at*, lpeElvw*, OElvw*, KTElvw, 1TELpElvw*, fJ"TElvw*, ulvw, cpaElvw*.- Kivw (Kt-v-), Kpivw (Kpt-v-), ptvw*, IJ"ivop.at (Xenoph.), wotvw. - a.krx\ivw, X"'f6vw, pr6vw*, (3a06vw, (3ap6vw, (3pao6vw*, f}o6vw, OapfJ"Dvw, l06vw*, E1T7'Vvw, f6vw, pr6vw*, ?TDvw.- a.~pw, fJ"?Taipw, "'fEpalpw*, valpw*, lxOalpw*, KaOalpw, p.app.alpw*, p.e')'alpw*, IJ"alpw*, IJ"Kaipw, TEKp.alpop.at, xalpw (xap-E- ), lf;alpw.- ."(ELpw, p.Elpw*, OElpw, E')'Elpw, Etpop.at*, -.tpw jo in, .tpw* say, lp.Elpw*, KElpw, p.Elpop.at, ?TElpw*, fJ"1TElpw, rdpw*, </>Olpw.oiK'rtpw (miswritten olKTElpw).- KL>;jpofLa.*, p.apr6pop.at, p.tvDpop.a.t*, p.opp.Vpw*, p.6pw*, ooVpop.at, /l.ocpVpop.at, ?Top</>Dpw*, IJ"Vpw, cp6pw*. a. Kap.vw, rp.vw; b. ocptfJ"KtlVW ( ocj>-E-) ; b. {Jalvw, KEpoalvw, nrpa.lvw (also Class III); i. ofJ"cppalvop.at (ofJ"</>p--), also Class III. V. See 527.

621.

Stop Verbs.- Many verb stems end in a stop (or mute) con-

sonant.
The present is formed either from the simple verb-stem, as in 1rK-w weave, or by the addition of r or 1 (y) to the verb-stem, as in {3M1rrw (fJ/I.a.fJ-) injure, cf>v"Xarrw (</>v"XaK-1w) guard. Ali tenses except the present and imperfect are formed without the addition of r or ; to the verb-stem ; thus, (3M1f;w from (3/l.afJ-IJ"w, cf>v/l.fw from cj>vaK-fJ"-W, 622. Sorne monosyllabic stems show a variation in the quantity of the stem vowel ' or v, as rpi{Jw rub perf. rrpi</Ja, Y,vxw cool 2 aor. pass. y;tx11, TTJKW melt (Doric ,rfi.Kw) 2 aor. pass. haK7JV. Cp. 475,477 c, 500. Many monosyllabic stems show qualitative vowel gradation:. u o; v ev ou; a. 1J w; a. e o. For examplrs see 4 77-484. 623. List of Stop Verbs.- The arrangement of the examples is by classes of the present stem. Words poetic or mainly poetic or poetic and Ionie are starred. The determination of the final consonant of the verb-stem of verbs in -lw, -Trw (poetic, Ionie, and later Attic -IJ"IJ"w) is often impossible (516). 1T- 1. (3/l.l?Tw, opl?Tw, 'X.,-w*, EV1Tw*, g7rop.at, ipEl?Tw*, 1!p1Tw, tl!J-1TW, Ei1rw, 1TW,
p.?Tw*, 1T!J.1TW, 1rp1ret, phrw, rp1rw, rp1TW.

II. urp1rrw, "YVrip.,Trrw*, Ocbrrw*, lvl1rrw*, lphrrop.ar.*, lchrrw*, Krlp:rrTw,

K1rrw, K67rrw, p.6.p1rrw*, tTK7rrap.ru, uK-f]Trrw, UKTJpltrTOJ.LaL*, uKcfnrTw,

~-

I.

II.
1.

<j>-

Il;

IV.

xaX?Trw, and iiov?Tw* (oovw--), KTV1Tw* (KTV1T--), TU1T7'W (Tv?T-E-). !J-Elf3o!J-at, OXt{Jw, El{Jw*, cdf3o!J-a.<, IJ"n[{Jw*, rpt(3w, </>fJo!J-at*. (3/l.wrw, Ka61TTW.- IV. c. a!J-(3d.vw (/l.afJ- ). /I.E[</Jw, ')'Mcpw, -ypacpw, ep</Jw, !J-p.</>O!J-a<, vd</>EL (vi</><), vi}cpw, fJ"Tcpw, fJ"Tp</>w, rp</>w, r6cf>w*. i?TTW, {Ja?Trw, op1Trw*, Oa?TTW (125 g), 0pV1TTW (125 g), KpV7r7'W (Kpv</>-, Kpv(3-), KV?Trw, a1rrw, pwrw, pi1rrw (ppl</>-1J>, but p?T-7}), IJ"Ktl1TTW. a. 1rlrvw* 1Ti1Trw.- X<j>avw* (X<j>-).- V. ?Ta</>lfJ"Kw* (</>+).

0-UOiUUG AT ION : STOP VERBS

T-

187

I. liarlop.at* (li ar-e-), K<vrlw* ( KEV'T-<- ), 'lrarlop.at ( 1rar-e-), 'lr''Top.at ( 'lr<'T- 1

'lr'T-).

III. -ypwuuw*, aip.&.uuw*, {JXlrrw (fJXtr- from p.tr-, 130), fJp&.rrw, pluuw*,
Xluuop.at*, 1rvplrrw ( 1rvper-, 1rvpe-y-).

e-

IV. b. p.apr&.vw ( p.apr-e-), fJXaur.vw (fJXa<rr-e-). S- I. /.liw, .Xlvliw* ( I.tvli-e-), p.lpw*, /p;w, ~liw*, etliop.at*, r7rd-yw, lpelliw*, (KaiJ)evw (evo-e-), ijliop.at, K-f,w* ( K7)1i-e- ), Kvivliw*, p.tliop.at* (p.e-e-), p.-f,liop.at*, 1rlpliop.a<, <Y'Irlvliw, <r'lr<vliw, <flelliop.at (also Epie <f>etlie-), 'fevliop.at, and K<aolw* (Keali-e-). III. Examples of denominatives from actual li-stems. -yvp.v.jw, eKri.\w, tx.!w, p.t-yri.jop.at*, lnrljop.at*, 1raltw, 7r<p.7r.jw, 'faK.jw.- aiJXI\op.at, liwpl\w, 7rl\w, lpljw, K<pKljw, 7]tjop.at, uroXljw, <f>povrljw, >/17J</Jljw. IV. ,vI.vw* ( ,o-f-), K<palvw ( K<pav- 1 Kp0-f-), olli.vw'lii (oio-f-), xavcJ.vw (xa-, xav-, xevli-). I. at!Jw*, /1)\(Jop.ai* ( M-e-), lx!Jop.a<, {Jpw!Jw*, etw!Ja ( M-, 563 a), lpro!Jw*, ~x!Jw*, Kev!Jw*, KwiJw*, Xf}!Jw*, 1rel!Jw, 1rlp!Jw*, 7re61Jo!ML<*, 1rVIJw, and "(1}1Jlw (-y1}8-e-), w!Jlw (w8-e-).

III. Kopvuuw*.
IV. b. alu8.vop.at (alu8-e-), 1rex8rJ.vop.at (lxiJ-e-), ap!Jrivw (a.p8-e-), tu8rJ.vw ( t<r8-e-), av8.vw (Xa8-), p.av8.vw (p.aiJ-e-), 7rVv8&.vop.a.t ( 1ru8-). V. 1r&.uxw for 1ra8-uKw (98, 126). 1 ( - 1. fJpVKw, lpKop.at*, twKw, <(Kw yield, etKw* resernble, ~Kw, lpelKw*, lp6Kw*, ijKw, fKw*, 1relKw*, 1r Xhw, pl-y Kw*, r-f,Kw, rlKrw ( r<K-) and oKlw ( oOK-<-),
p.1JKI.op.at (p.'YJK-a-), p.KI.op.at (p.K-a-).

III. alvlrrop.at, ;;.rrw, <irrop.at, lrrw, lvluuw*, 8wp-f,uuw*, K1JpVrrw, p.aIV. I.

X.rrw, p.urrw, 1rlrrw (and 7r7rrw), 'lr'luuop.at*, <f>pirrw, 1rrf}uuw, <fJvX&.rrw. a. .Kvw; d. iKvop.at (iK-). -V. See 527 b. ll-yw, p.lX-yw, pf}-yw*, 1rel-yw, dp-yw, lpe{J-yop.at*, 8lX-yw*, 81,-yw, Xl-yw, X{,-yw, pl-yw*, 1rvi-yw, urf-yw, urlp-yw, u<f>l-y-yw, rl-y-yw, r p.-f,-yw*, rpw-yw, <f>eu-yw, <f>8l-y-yop.at, <fJXl-yw, <f>pryw, >f;l-yw, and p-ylw (p-y-e-), <JTv-yw ( urv-y-e-). ~pw* and pl\w* (511). -i.\op.at*, XaMjw*, tiXa7r.\w*, p1rrl.jw, a6.jw, {Jaurrl.tw, Kpd\w, 1rI.jw*, ur.jw, urevcijw, u<f>ajw* (u<f>rirrw).-liatjw*, 8wp.l\w*, Kpl\w, p.aurljw, ua1rltw, <YT1Jpljw, urljw, <rrpo<f>aXltw*, upl\w, rpljw*, (popp.ltw*. - tirvjop.at*, -ypujw, p.ujw, XoMjw, <!</JVjw.- oip.wjw. c. 8t-y-y&.vw (8t-y-).- V. p.lu-yw (526c). 4-yxw, clpxw, {Jpax- in ~fJpax<*, fJplxw, -yXlxop.a<, xop.a.<, <Xl-yxw, ~pxo p.at, Elixop.at, l!xw (uex-), laxw*, tuxw ( utux-w ), Xelxw*, p..xop.at (!LUx--), vfJxw*, o(xop.at (oix-e-1 olx-o-), UfJ.VXW*, U'lrfpxw*, <Yrfixw*, 'TEVXw*, rp{XW1 rpvxw (rpx-o-), 'f1Jxw, >f;vxw, and fJpx.op.at* (f3pvx-a-). p.(uruw*, fJT,rrw, Opdrrw, Op{rrrw, 7rTUao-w, 7rTr.lJ<raw*, rap&.rrw. c. K<'Yxci.vw* (Kt X-<-), Xa-yx.vw (Xax-), rv-yxcivw ( rvx-<, revx-). - d. tip.'1f't<rxvop.at ( p.,.ex-), i;.,.,uxvlop.at ( v.,.ex- ). -V. toci.crKw (i5toax-). M~w* (ci.Xe~-e- 1 ci.<K-), al1~w.-IV. b. aiJ~&.vw (av~-e-).-I. g>f;w (f>f;-e-).
<T

"1-

III.

x-

IV.

I.

III. IV.

624. Verbs in cr or F

or F(1!)- Some verb-stems ended originally m

188

INFLECTION OF 0-VERBS

a. Sigma-stems (cp. 488 d) with presents either from -O"-w or -O"-fw. Thus (1) from -<T-w: d.tcouw, ctw burn, -yeuw, ew, ~lw, Opctuw, Kpouw, viO"op,ct<* (v<Y<T-ofJ-ct<, cp. vb<T-ros), Ew, O"dw, rpw*; (2) from -0"-lW (488 d): d.-yctlop.a<*, ctlliotJ-ct<, d.KlofJ-rJ.< (Hom. Kelop.ct<), pKiw, -yeaw, tcelw* split, Keiw* (i.e. Kew) celebrate, tcoviw*, <ctiotJ-ct<*, p.ctlop,ct<*, vctlw* dwell, vett<fw (Hom. VtK<iw), olvo{Jctpeiw*, o(op,at (from otop,ct<), 7rv8w (Hom. 7rv8eiw), 7rTiTTW (7rriVO"-Jw), reMw (Hom. reelw), and sorne others that do not lengtheu the

vowel of the verb-stem (488). Also others, such as prrtcw (perr-), vvl!fJ-1, ~wvvVtJ-1, rr{Jvvp,1 (732). -rr is retained ln rpO"op,ct<*. b. F-stems (from -!(-\w): 'Yctlw*, lictlw* kindle, Kctlw (520), Kctlw (520), valw* swim, flow ' 222. -For the loss of F in Ow, etc., see 43, 503.
INFLECTION OF -VERBS

Verbs which end in win the first person present indicative active, and deponent verbs in which the personal endings are preceded by the thematic vowel, have the fo11owing peculiarities of infiection:
625.
a. The thematic vowel usually appears in ail tenses except the perfect and pluperfect middle (passive) and the aorist passive (except in the subjunctive). These three tenses are infiected like p,t-verbs. b. The present and future singular active end in -w, -<<s, -H ( 463). The ending -p.< appears only in the optative. c. The thematic vowel o unites in the indicative with the ending -vn, and forms -ov<T< (463d). d, The third plural active of past tenses ends in -v. e. The imperative active has no persona] ending in the second person singnlar except -o-v in the first aorist. f. Except in the perfect and plqperfect the middle endings -<Ta< and -O"o !ose O" and con tract with the fina,l vowel of the tense-stem (465 a, b). In the optative contraction cannot take place ( Do- ( O" )o, V<Ta<-("" )o ). g. The infinitive active bas -<~v (for -e-u) in the present, future, and second aorist ; -e-va< in the perfect; and -ct< in the aorist. h. Active participles with stems in -ovr- have the nominative masculine in -wv.

626. In 627-716 the method of infiection of all w-verbs, both vowel and consonant, is described. The examples are generally taken from vowel verbs, but the statements hold true of consonant verbs. Fmms of w-verbs which are inflected according to the non-thematic eonjugation are included nnder the w-verbs.
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT ACTIVE AND MIDDLE (PASSIVE)

For the formation. of the present stem see 497-531.

(;2?. Indicative.- Vowel and consonant verbs in -w infiect the present by attaching the primary endings (when there are any) to the lJresent stem in-%

INFLECTION OF 0-VERBS: PRESE::-\T

189

(-"' 1-rr ). Mw, T"ip,w (Tip,a-w), <f>o.lvw, l\fl1rw. The imperfect attaches the secondary endings to the present stem with the augment. See the paradigms, pp. 114, 120. For the active forms -w, -m, -H, see 463.
628. -n and ~t are found in the pres. fut. mid. and pass., fut. perf. pass. e-(o-)o.t yields 11 (written El in the Old Attic alphabet, 2 a), which is usually gi ven as the proper spelling in the texts of the tragic poets, whereas et is printed in the texts of prose and comedy. et was often written for 7Jt (11) after 400 n.c., as in 'Yafl r6xa, since both had the sound of a close long e. It is often impossible to settle the spelling; but {Jo6et wishest, otet thinkest, and 5'-f shalt see (from opriw) have only the -Et forms. ~~ is sometimes called Attic and Ionie in contrast to -n of the other dialects, including the Koin. 629. Subjunctive.- The present subjunctive adds the primary endings to the tense-stem with the long thematic vowel. For the endings -11s, -v see 463. Th us, Mw, -'[}s, -n, Tip,(is ( = rip,ri-ys), Tip,(i ( = r"ip,ri-'[1), <j>alvwp,ev, -7JTE, -wrn (from -wvn). Middle Mw-p,at, My ( = V1]-<Tat), V1]-rat; Tip,ii-<Tflov ( = rp,arJ-o-Oov);
<j>ritvw-p,eOa, <f>alV7)-<T0<, rpalvw-vro.t.

630. Optative. -To the tense-stem en ding in the thematic vowel (al ways o) are added the mood-sign -- (-<<-) or -t1J- (450, 460) and the secondary persona! endings (except -p.< for -v, where the mood sign is --, 459). In the 3 pl. we have -t<-r. a. The final vowel of the tense-stem (o) contracts with the mood suffix (<), o-i becoming ot. Thus Motp,t (t..6o--p,t), Vots (Mo--s), Motev (Mo-te-v), olp,7Jv (l\vo-t-p,T}v), MotO (Mo--o-o). 63l.. Imperative. - The present imperative endings are added to the tensestem with the thematic vowel < (o before -vrwv). The 2 pers. sing. active has no ending, but uses the tense-stem instead ( 1raiev<, <f>av<). ln the middle -rro loses its <r ( 466, 2 a) ; Mou from DE-rrc, <f>alvov from rpalv<-rro. On the forms in -<rw<rav and -eo-Owo-av for -ovrwv and -errOwv, see 466, 2 b.

632. Infinitive.- The present stem unites with -ev : Me-ev::: Met v, el7r<-ev = t..el7rEtv. In the middle (passive) -o-Oat is added : Me-rrfJa<, l\el7re-<T0at.
633. Participle.- The present participle adds -vr- to the present stem ending in the thematic vowel o. Stems in -o-vr have the nominative singular in -wv. Thus masc. Mwv from t..ovT-s, fern. Movo-a from vovr-~a, neut. t..ov from t..ov( T ). See 301 a and N.

634. A few w-verbs in the present and imperfect show forms of the Ju-conjugation. These are usually Epie.
Mxop,at, 3 pl. Mx ara< a'Wait for oexgrat, par't. M'Ywvos, imperf. l'Yp,7fv. But these are often regarded as perfect and pluperfect without reduplication. l-yp,1Jv

l!x11v.

632 D. Severer Doric has gX7J" and l[xev; Milder Doric has ~X<<v; Aeolic has Hom. has J"VV<<v, p,v}"<vat, p,vvp,EV. 633 D. Aeolic has fern. -<IL<ra in the present and second aorist (37 D. 3),

VOt<Ta, l7rOt<Ta.

190

INFLECTION OF 0-VEH.BS: CONTRACT VElS

in sorne passages is a second aorist (688).- (w eat (529. 5), inf. (8p.<>at.- <pw (or eipuw) in <ipvarat. - orat wash is from Mer a<, not from ovw (cp. 398 a).~ oip,at think is probably a perfect to otop,at (oi-o-).-ord.w wound in ovra, oTap.evat is 2 aor. - <j>pw bear, imper. <j>pre.
CONTRACT VERBS

635. Verbs in -aw, -w, -ow con tract the final a, ' o of the verb-stem with the thematic vowel -oj, (-w/TJ) in the present and imperfeet tenses. Th us, 'TfLaw rfLw, 7!'oLw 71'0Lw, YJ.w 'YJw; f.rtfJ-Uov f.rtJLwv, f.7!'o{wv f.7!'o{ovv, f.~oov f.~>..ovv. The rules of contraction are given in 4955 ; the paradigms, p. 120.

a. Open forms of -ew verbs occur in the lyric parts of tragedy.

636. Subjunctive.- The subjunctive adds the primary endings. contractions see 59.

For the

637. Optative.- cl.ot becomes c;;, o< and oo< become oi'. Thus, -ao-'i-p.t -tp!L<, -ao-1.,-v = -4?"1, -ao-i-P,"'V = .ffJ."'V; -!o--p,t = -o}J.t, -eo-1"1- = -ol.,v, -w-i-P,"'P = -olp.'Y/v; -oo--p.t = -op.<, -o-1"1- = -oi'Y)v, -oo-iP."'V = -olp."' Thus, r'ip.qS'Y/v (rip.ao-1.,-v), rip.'f!'Y/< ( rp,ao-1"1-S), TfJ.tPTf ( Tp.aO-Tf), TfJ.tPfJ.'Y/V ( rp.ao-fp,TfV), 1r0LOLO ( 'I!'OLO-<TO), '11'0LOtTO ( 'I!'OLO-L-TO). 638. ln the singula1 -aw verbs usually end in -.;.,.,., -07/<, -wiJ, rarely in -(jjp.t; -(ps, -c;J. -<w verbs usually end in -ol.,v, -ol.,.,s, -oiTf, rarely in -op.t, -os, -o ( -o<

chiefiy in l'lato).
639. In the dual and plnml -aw verbs usually end in -(jjrov, -4?rTf>, -(pp.o, -c;Jr, -tp<>, rarely in -qS.,rov, -<tJfJT'Y/>, -.f"'P.H, .p.,re, 4?Tf<Ta>. -<w verbs usually end n -OTOV, -OIT'Y)>, -D}J.<>, -OtT<, -OEV, rareJy in -o['Y/TO>, OL-IjT'Y/V, -O['Y/p.EV, O['Y/T<, -ol"'<Tav. 640. Few cases of the optative of -ow verbs occur. In the sing. both -ot.,.,v and -op.t are found ; in the plur. -oi'p.<v, -ou, -oev. For p'i-y<j!.,v from p'i-y6w shiver see 641.

64l..

Several contract verbs have stems in

-a, -v, -w.

These are the verbs of i~94, 3U8 with apparently irregular contraction, and pw do; with presents made from -.-;w, . .,.,w, -w-Jw. Tb us, from tf)w, tf)m, !f)et and xpfJop.a.<, xpfJ(" )a<, xpfJ<rat come !;w, !;i)s, !;ii and xpwp.a<, XPI> xpf)ra<; so OLff)>, '11'L>f)> from OLff}-ev, 1rftVf)-<P. lpow, p'YOW (398) deriVe the foriDS in W and 4' from lopw-, p'i-yw- (lopww, p-yww from lopw<T-1w, p'i-yw<T-1"'). The forms in -ow are from the weaker stems ipO<T-, p-yorr-.

641 D. Hom. has otif;d.wv, 1r<tVdWv, 'II'H>f)p.evat, p.vdop.at, xpf,wv (Mss. xpe!wv) uttering o1acles, -yeww, lopww. The verbs in 394, except litif;w and '11'<tvw, have stems in 'fJ and if. (36 e); thus, in Hdt., xp.rat from xpaera, but xpw imper., xpwp.evos from xpf)o, XPTfOJL<vos by 34. Hom. and Ion. tww bas the stem tw (!w-lw), Hdt, has tf)v, /Jt>f'ijv, but Kv.v, rrp.iv,

CONTRACT YERES IN THE DIALECTS

CONTRACT VERBS IN THE DIALECTS

191

642. -a.111 Verbs in Homer.- Hom.leaves -ctw verbs open 64 times, as vct-rciw, -<iovo-<, iihci, dototciovo-ct, 'YO<io<p.<v, T7J<8ciov-ra<. When contracte, -aw verbs bave the Attic forms, as opw, op{i<, opfi; as repfi makest t1ial from 1rpcie-(o-)ct< from 1r<Lpaop.ct< ; 1Jpw didst pmy from 1Jpcie-( o- )o from dp&.op.a<. 643. Wben uncontracted, verbs in -ctw often show in the Mss. of Hom., not the original open f01ms, but " assimilated" forms of the concurrent vowels, ct<, ct<t, ct7J giving a double a sound by ct prevailing over the e sound ; cto, ctw, cto<, ctov giving a double o sound by the o sound prevailing over the . One of the vowels is commonly lengthened, rarely both.
O.E

= (1) a.a. : op&.eo-8ct< = opcicto-Octt, eo-8< = ci'Yciao-8<.

d'Yci-~
O.OL

= (2)

O.EL

= = 0.'!1 = =
0.0

(1) (2) (1) (2)

= (1) = (2) = (1)

0.01

aa.: p.vcieo--Bct< p.vticto-8ct<, 1J'Yci-. (2) IIIOL : i}{3aOL!J.L = i}{3WOLP,L. eo-8< 1J'Ytict<T0<. a.ou (1) ow : opaov<Tct = op6wo-ct, opcia.q.: opci<t< opciqs, ci<t Uq;. OV<TL = op6wtrt, aciov (from iiq. : p.evotv&.et == p.evoLvdg. ciMeo imper. of ciMo,uct<) = aMw. a.q.: Un = ciq.<. aq.: p.van wooest 2 sing. mid. = (2) 111111 : i]f3aovrra. = i]f3wwo-ct, opd= p.vtiq;. OV<TL = opWW<TL. OV here iS OW : OpaOVT< = opOWVT<. a spurious diphthong (6) 1110 : i}f3aov-res = i]f3wovr, p.vaderived from OVT: OpctovTo == p.vWoJJTo. OVTfct, i}{3aOVT-~ct, opdovTL j 001 : opcio] = opow, f3odwv = or by contraction in dXdou {3oowv. from aM<o.

= (2) = (1)

W(l):

= =

o"' : opo .... = op61jJT.

p.evotv&.w

f.LEJIOLvWw.

N.- dMw from dM<o wander is unique.

'Y<wov-r is from 'Y<ww (641 ).

644. The a.gsimilated forms are used only when the second vowel (in the unchanged form) stood in a syllable long by nature or position. Hence opowp.<v, opctctT<, opct-ro, do not occtu for opao,uev, etc. (p.vw6p.evo for ,uvii.op.<vo is an exception.) The first vowel is lengthened only wh en the metre requires it, as in i]f3won for i]f3aone _ v _ v. Thus two long vowels do not occur in succession except to fit the form to the verse, as p.evotvww for ,u<votvaw; but i]f3wo<p.<, not i]f3w'l'lk' When the first vowel is metrically lengtbened, the second vowel is not lengthened, though it may be long either in a final syllable (as in p.evotvtiq;) or when it represents the spurious cliphthong ou from -ov-r- (as in i}f3wwo-ct, opwwo-< fOr i}{3aOV<Tct, opdOV<TL fr0111 -oVTJa, -OVTL). 645. The assimilated forms include the "Attic" future in -a.w from -cto-w
(539); as hW<TL ( = Mov<Tt), Kpep.6w, octp.aq;, octp.OW<TL.

646. The assimilated forms are found only in the artificial language of Homer, Hesiod, and their imitators, and nowhere in the living speech. They are commonly explained as derived from the contracted forms by a process of 'distraction,' and as inserted in the text for the sake of the metre. Th us op{is,

192

CONTRACT VERBS IX THE DIALECTS

(3oCwrH, the spoken forms w!Jich had taken the place of original pm, (3oovr<s, in the text, were expauded into pq.s, (3oowvres, by repetition of the a and o. While the restoration of the original uncontracte!l forms is generally possible, and is adopted in severa! modern editions, a phonetic origin of many of the forms in question is stiJl sought by some scholars who regard p6w as an intermediate stage between opw and pw. It will bEl' observed, however, that the forrns in 648 cau be.derived only from the unassimilated forms.

647. In the imperfect contraction generally occurs, and assimilation is rare. 648. Sorne verbs show eo for ao, as ijvnov, rpo1reoV., Jl-evoiv011, ...arlovraL. Cp. 649, 653. 649. _.,_., verbs in Herodotus. - Hdt. contracts -aw verbs as they are contracted in Attic. In many cases before an o sound the Mss. substitute e for a (ro.Jl-w, oplw11, l<poluo11). This e is never found in all the forms of the same verb, and the Mss. general! y disagree on each occurrence of any forrn.- Hdt. al ways has -<#7)11, ~cP!l-71"' in the optative.
650. -e"' verbs in Homer. -a. Hom. rarely contracts ew and o (except in the participle). In a few cases ev appears for eo, as "lroLd'!l-71"; rarely for Ou, as ueO"L. When the metre allows eith'er -ee and -fe<, or-e<, the open forms are slightly more common. .. is often necessary to admit a word into the verse (as i}-y.,.oa,, <<t>lXe<), and is often found at the verse-end. -<--a, -l--o, in the 2 sing. mid. may become -.za,, -o, or -lai, -o, by the expulsion of one e ; as J1-0ea or !J.Oa sayest, aloo show 1egmd. b. IIHKElw, r<.fiw, from -0"-;w (lle<K17-, rE.17-) are older forms than lle<Kw, rw. See 488 d, 624. !Jflw, trElw, 1r11fiw show metricallengthening (28 D.). c. On -7)!J.11aL in Hom. see 657. 651. -e"' verbs in Herodotus. -a. Hdt. generally Jeaves 0, ew, ov, open, except when a vowel precedes the , in which case we fi nd w for o ( -y11oVV'TS). In the 3 pl ur. -ouO"L is kept except in 1rOLO"L. For --o in the 2 sing. mid. we find -o in airo. ee, ,, in stems of more than one sylhtble, are usually uncontracted in the Mss., but this is probably an error. li' it is neces8ary and lii11 are never written otherwise. -The Ion. eu for 0, ou, occurs rarely in tragedy. b. In the optative H dt. has -o, after a consonant, as Kao,, but -o after a vowel, as 7rowp.t, 7row. 652. Verbs in -o ... -a. Hom. alwa.ys uses the contracted forms except in the case of such as show assimilation like that in -aw verbs. OOL = 04J : OTJLOOL11 = OTJL6t;J11. oo = (1) ow : 07)6ovro = OTJ6wvTo. 1 (i) wo : inrv6ovras = inrvWovras. oov == ow : p6ou<rL = p6wcn. b. Hdt. contracts -ow verbs as in Attic. Forms with u for ou, as litKa.t.,.,, ioLKalwv, are incorrect. 653. Doric.- Doric (5\l D.) contracts a and a.71 to TJ; aL and av to 11; ao, aw, to ii. except in final syllables: r~J.w, rl'-fis, T!J.', r}L.!J.s, r!J.i)H, r}L.vrt, rtl'-1/, TL!J-7)11. Monosyllabic stems have w from a+ o or a + w. Some verbs in -aW have alternative fO!'lUS in -W (648), aS opw, 'T}LW.

66o]

FUTURE, FUTURE PERFECT

-ew

193

654. The contractions of

Severer Doric
<f><w, <PXw, <PXlw

verbs in Doric may be illustrated th us:

Milder Doric
cf>Xlw, cf>'Aw

</>te<, </>ts(?) </>tet' </>tlop.es, </>t'Alop.es, </>t'Alwp.es, </>twp.es <J>t'Af)re

<j>LEOP'TL, <j>tfOPTL, <j>thPTL t

cf>t'Aes, </>t'Ah(?) <j>t'A <j>tMop.es, <j>top.es, <J>t'AefJp.es </>tere

<j>LhfOPTL, <j>LOPTL, </>LPTL

a. tw for eo is a diphthong. (=y) fore is often expelled

w for eo is common in Theocritus. (Koup.6vres = KoiTp.oPres).

In Cretan

655. Verbs in -ow contract oo and oe to w in Severer Doric aud to ou in Milder Doric. 656. Aeolic. -In Aeolic contract verbs commonly pass into the p.t-conjngation: rtp.atp.L, -as, -a, rip.iip.ev, rtp.Cire, rip.atut, imperfect, htp.iiv, htp.Cis, htp.Ci, etc. inf. rtp.iv, part. rip.ats, -avros, mid. rip.iip.a, inf. .rp.d.p.evat. So q,l'ArJp., <j>l7J!J.<P, <j>l'ArJre, <j>IXetiTt, ~<j>l'A7Jv, iuf. <j>l'A7Jv, part. <j>Im, -ePTos. Thus op7J!J.L from opw Att. opaw, KUh7}/).L, a(V7JIJ.L. So also of}'Awp.t, 3 pl. of}OL<TL, inf. O*wv. Besides these forms we find a few examples of the earlier infiection in -aw, -ew, -ow, but these forms usually contract except in a few cases where e is followed by an o sound (1rorovra). From other tenses, e.g. the fut. in -rJITW, 7J bas been transferred tO the present in aotKf}w, '1J"01Jf}w,

657. Hom. has several cases of contract verbs infiected according to the p.conjugation in the 3 dual: <5'AfJ-r7Jv (ITMw spoil), 1rpo1Tavof}-r7Jv (1rpo1Tauoaw speak to), '1rELf}-r7Jv (1rEL'Aw threaten), op.aprfJ-rrJv (op.aprw meet); also IJ'aw 3 sing. imperf. ( ua6w keep safe). In the infinitive -rJp.eva, as 'YofJp.evat ( 'Yodw ), 'lrELPf}p.ePat (1rELvil.w, 641), cpt'Af}p.evat (</>Mw), <j>opf}p.evat and <j>opf}vat (<J>opw). But
<'YVEW baS <'YPE/).Pat.

FUTURE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

(532 ff.). (580 ff.)

-w

FUTURE PERFECT

658.

AU vowel and consonant verbs in

infiect the future alike.

659. Indicative. -The future active and middle add the primary endings, and are infiected like the present; as Muw, MITop.a. On the two endings of the second singular middle, see 628. Liquid verbs, Attic futures (538), Doric futures (540) are infiected like con tract verbs in -ew; th us <j>avw cf>avovp.a, Ka'Aw Ka'Aop.at, and '1rel1'op.a, follow 'lrOtw 1rowiJp.at (385). a. 'l'he only future perfect active from an w-verb is re!Jvf)~w shall be dead (584), which is infiected like a future active. Ordinarily the periphrastic formation is used : 'Ae'AevKws ~uop.a shall have loosed. The future perfect passive ('AeMuop.a shall have been loosed) is infiected like the future middle. The periphrastic forms and the future perfect passive rarely occllf outside of the indicative. 660. Optative.- The infiection is like the present: 'A{j(jo--p.t, Xvuo-tp.7Jv. In the optative singular of liquid verbs, -rJ-v, -rJ-s; -rJ, in the dual and plural -~rov, GREEK GRAM.- 13

194

FIRST AORIST

[661

-i-r'}v, -i-p.ev, -i-re, --v, are added to the stem ending in the thematic vowel o; th us tj>av<o-l'Jv tj>avol'}v, tj>avo-i-p.ev = tj>avowv. So in Attic futures in -aw, as fJf3aw (539 d) cause to go: flf3cp'Jv, -cp']s, -<P'I, pL f3fJIFp.ev.

661. Infinitive.- The future infinitive active adds -ev, as Mo-e<v from Mue-ev, q,avev from rpav.!(o-)e-ev. 'l'he infinitive middle adds -ulla<, as Mo-e-o-llat, rpaveo-lla<, from rpav.!(o-)e-o-IJat. 662. Participle. -The future participle has the same endings as the present:
Do-wv Mo-oua-a 1\o-ov, rpavwv tj>avoo-a rpavov; middle, vo-6p.evos, rpavo6p.evos.

FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE

(589, 597)

663. Ali verbs infiect the first and second future passive alike, that is, like the future middle. 664. The indicative adds -p.a< to the stem ending in -IJTJiro- or -11o-o-, as ulli]o-o-p.a<, rpavi}-o-o-p.a<. For the two forms of the second person singular see 628. The optative adds --p.'Jv, as ull'lo-o-i-p.'Jv, tj>av'}o-o-i-p.'Jv. The infinitive adds -<TIJat, as ulli]-<T<-o-llat, rpall'fro-e-<TIJat. The participle adds -p.evos, as ull'}o-6-p.evos, tj>av'}o-6-p.evos.
FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

(542)

665.

All vowel and consonant (1)-verbs infiect the first aorist alike.

666. Indicative. -The secondary endings of the first aorist active were originally added to the stem ending in -o-- ; tb us, X va- p., X vo--s, Xvo--r, ivo--p.ev, 0 iX[io--re, Xo--vr. From ivo-p. came ifvo-a (by 35 c), the a of which spread to the other forz~s except in the 3 sing., where e was borrowed from the perfect. a. . In the middle the secondary endings are added to the stem ending in -ua-. For the loss of a- in -o-o, see 465 b, 667. Subjunctive. -In the subjunctive the long thematic vowel -w; 11- is substituted for the a of the indicative, and these forms are infiected like the present subjunctive: Mo-w Mo-wp.a<, rpi}vw tj>i}vwp.at. For the loss of a- in -a-at see 465 a. 668. Optative.- To the stem ending in a the mood-Suffix is added, making at, to which the same endings are affixed as in the present: Mo-a--p.< = Mo-atp.<, !o-a-i-p.TJV = vo-alp.'}v, rpi}va--p.t = cpi]va.<p.t. The infiection in the middle is like that of the present. For the loss of a- in -o-o see 465 b.- In the active -etas, -ete, -etav are more common thau -ats, -a.t, -a.tev. 661 D. Hom. has ti~p.eva.t, ti~p.ev, lL~etv. Doric has -TJv, -etv; Aeolic has -TJv. 667 D. Hom. has forms with the short thematic vowel, as p6o-o-op.ev, ti-yi}o-ere, vewo-i}o-ere; p.lli]o-op.a.t, </>ri'{lea.t, fXao-6p.eo-1Ja., OTJi}o-era.t. In such forms aorist subjunctive and future indicative are alike (532). Pindar has {3do-op.ev, aido-op.ev (457 D.). 668 D. Hom. has both sets of endings, but that in a.t is rarer. In the drama -e<as is very much commoner thau -a.ts. -a.ts is most frequent in Plato and Xeno-

FIRST AND SECOND AOlUST PASSIVE

195

669. Imperative. -The regular endings (462) are added to the stem in -<ra. (or -a. in liquid verbs) except in the active and middle 2 sing., in which ~ov and -a.t take the place of -a.: v<rov v<rarw, <ra.t li<ra<rllw, if>fjvov if>rJvarw, q,fjva.t if>rJva<rilw. 670. Infinitive.- The aorist active infinitive ends in -a.t, which is an old dative: the middle ends in -<rlla.t: <ra.t M<ra.-<rlla.t, if>fjva.t rpf]va.-<rlla.t, 1r~a.t 7r~a.-<rlla.t. 671. Participle. -The active participle adds -vr like the present: masc.
,,il<ris from v<ra.vr-s, fem. M<ri<ra. from v<rivr-!a., neut. <ra. from li<ra.v(r). See 301. The middle ends in -JJ.<vos: 1\i<ra-JJ.<vos, if>rJa-J1.vos.

FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE

(585, 590)

672. All vowel and consonant verbs in -w infiect the aorists passive alike, that is, according to the p.L-conjugation, except in the subjunctive.

a. Vowel verbs rarely form second aorists that are passive in form, as pw flow, pp6rJv (803). But pw is properly not a vowel verb (see 503).
673. Indicative.- The indicative adds the active secondary endings directly to the tense stem ending in -ilrJ- (first aorist) or -'1" (second aorist). The inflection is th us like that of the im perfect of a verb in -JJ.t.
V61]-V v91]-S V61J h(91]-V r(91]-S T(61J v91]-TOV "U6fj-TT]V r(6e-TOV TLII-TTJV v91]-f1EV v61]-TE V91]-crClV rL9E-f1EV TL9E-TE TL9E-crCI.V

'1J

a. For -<ra. v we find - from -v( r) in poetical and dialectic fmms before which has been ShOrtened tO f ( 40) 1 th US IJJpjJ.rJiiP for Wp}Jof]ilrJ<TO.V frOID Op}JoaW UT(!e.

674. Subjunctive.- The subjunctive adds -w / rJ- to the tense stem en ding in -11<- or -- and cou tracts: 1\vllw, -i)s, -il, etc., from l\vllw, -<vs, -v, etc.; q,a.vw, -ils, -il from rpa.vw, -f1)S, -v, etc. 675. Optative. -The optative adds -i- or -trJ- to the tense-stem er.ding in -Il- or -<-, and con tracts. In the singular -trJ- is regular ; in the dual and plural -i- is generally preferred. Thus vilfirJ from 1\vil<-lrJ-v, q,a.v<lrJv from q,a.v<-lrJ-v,

phon, Jess common in poetry, and very rare in the orators. Neither Thuc. nor l:ldt. bas -a.LS. -a.t is rare in prose, most examples being in Plato and Demosthenes. Hdt. has no case. In Aristotle -at is as common as -f<<. -a<v is very rare in poetry, in Thuc. and Hdt., but slightly better represented in Xenophon and the orators. -<ta. v is probably the regulai form in the drama.- The forms in -f<a.s, -<t<, -<ta. v are called "Aeolic," bnt do nrt occur in the remains of that dialect. 671 D. Aeolic bas -a.<S, -a.<<ra, -a.v (37 D. 3). 674 D. Hdt. leaves w open (a.ip<il.!w, <Pa.v.!wrn) but contracts <'1/, v (if>a.vi)). Hom. has some forms like the 2 aor. snbj. of Jl-<-verbs. Thus, from i!a.Jl-Paw (oaJl-V'TJJ1-t) subdue: oa}Jo1)w, -f]vs, -f]v, -1)er<. So also i!af]w (oa- learn), <ra.1rf]v (<rf]'lfw cause to 1ot), <j>a.vf]v (<j>a.lvw show), rpa.'lff]oJl-< (nfp'lfw amuse). The spellings with <t (e.g. i!a.JJ.<iw, oa<iw) are probably incorrect.

196

FIRST AND SECOND A ORIST PASSIVE

'Au8iirov from 'Av8i-i-rov, <f>avrov from tj>avl-i-rov, 'Av8ep.ev from vOl-i-p.ev, tj>aveev from <f>avl--v. The inflection is like that of the present optative of a 1"'-verb.
V9E-!1J-V v0EL1JS l\.v9-L1J TL8E-!1J-V TL8E-(1JS TL9E-L1J u8e-LTOV v9E-LT1JV TL9e-t-TOV TL9E-LT1JV u9E-LJI-EV u9E-LTE l\.v9E-LEV TL8E-LJI-EV TL9E-LTE TL9E-LEV

a. -1-qp.ev is used only in prose (but Plato and Isocrates have also -p.<v ). -el'YJT< is almost al ways found in the Mss. of prose writers; -iiTE occurs only in poetry (except from ~u-verbs). -il<v is more common in prose than -El'YJO'av.
676. Imperative. - The endings of the imperative are added to the tense-stem ending in -0"1- or -'YJ Before -vrwv, -0"1- and -'rJ- become -8- and -- (Xv8lvrwv, </Javlvrwv). For -TL instead of -lh in the first aorist ('AvB'rJn) see 125 b. 677.
</Jav?l-vat.

Infinitive. --vaL is added to the tense-stem in -811- or -11-: 'Av8?7-vat,

678. Participle. -The participle adds -vr, as masc. 'AuBel< from 'AvOEVr-<, fern. 'Av8e'J"a from 'AvO<vr-J,a, neut. 'Av!Uv from 'AvOev(r). See 301. So tj>avels, etc.
SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

(546)

679. Most verbs in -w inflect the second aorist according to the w-conjugation; sorne inflect it according to the p.t-conjugation. 680. The inflection of most second aorists of w-verbs is like that of an imperfect of w- verbs in the indicative, and like th at of a present in the other moods.
~-L'II'OV
-L'II'OfJ-']V L'II'W
~-ll.vo-v -'iiOJI-1JV
)\.(.,..

VE

)\.(.,..;.,..,..
L'li'OLJI-1JV

ll.;5w ll.;5w.,..a,
'iio-!-JI-1JV

L'II'OV ( 424 b. 2) L'II'ELV (L'II'EV, 424 C) L'li'-cr9aL

ll.lou
l\.iJm ( Jl.;jEEV)

l:rrv
L'II'OJI-EVOS

ll.le-cr9aL ll.lwv
'iiOJI-EVOS

For the loss of ti in -tio in the second person singular see 465 b.
681. A number of w-verbs fonn their second aorists without a thematic vowel, herein agreeing with the second aorists of p.t-verbs. Cp. loiv p. 140. The second aorist of y-yvw-uKw know is inflected as follows.

677 D. Hom. has -p.evat, as OiJ-OLWO-f,p.Evat, oaf,p.Evat (and ila?lvaL). Doric has -p.<v, Aeolic -v (p.<8vti8'f/V = p.e8uo-8ijvat). 680 D. Hom. has the infinitives Eltrlp.evat, 1-rrlp.ev, el'lr<v. 'For 8avl<tv (Attic 8aviiv) etc., 8avlev should be re ad. -lE Lv in Hdt. is erroneous. Dorie has -ijv, as p,o)l'jjv (ff'AwiTKw go). Aeolic has -'Y}v, as MfJ'YJP

SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

197

682. The indicative is inflected like rrr1 v (p. 138); the subjunctive, like ow (p. 138).
~-yvw-1-'Ev yvw yvw-1-'Ev -yvw-rov -yvw-rE yvw-s yvw-rov yvw-rE ~-yvw -yv<f>-T1)v ~-yvw-cra.v yvw yvw-rov yvw-cr a. We expect 1!-yvorov, t-yvop,ev, etc. (551), but the strong stem "fVw- bas been transferred to the dual and plural. So also in l!f37Jv, l!</>0'1/v, U">.wv.- Subjunctive {3w, f3fis, f3fi, {3fjrov, {3wp,ev, (3fjTE, f3wut. On the formation of the subjunctive see 757 D. ~-yvw-s ~-yvw-v

683. The optative is inflected like oot1v (p. 138). yvo(1JV yvoti-'EV or yvo(1JI-'EV yvo(1JS yvotorov or yvoL1JTOV yvotrE or yvo("IJTE yvo(1J yvo(T1JV or yvofJT"IJV yvotEv or yvoC1Jcra.v a. So {3o.l7Jv, {Jo.rov or (3o.l7Jrov, (3o.p.ev or {3o.l7Jp,ev. In the 2 plur. the Mss. of prose writers have only -<7JT< ( -yvol7Jre, -{3o.l7Jre) ; but -<'1/'T is not attested by the evidence of verse.

684.

The imperative is inflected like

rrr~e~

(p. 139).

yvwO, yv<f>rw -yvwrov, -yv<f>rwv a. In composition oui.-yvwOt, .v&.f37JO' (423). composition occurs in poetry, as .v&.(3ii.

yvwrE, yv6vrwv For {3fj0t (from (3o.lvw) -f3ii in

685. The infinitive adds -Eva~, as yvwvm from yvw-Evat (like rrr~vat from rrr+Evat). In composition 8tayvwvat (426 d). 686. The participle adds -vr-, as masc. yvov> from yvwr->, fem. yvovrra from yvovr-~a, neut. yvov from yvov(r). See 301. In corn po siti on 8tayvov> (426 d ).

a. Before vr the long vowel w is regularly shortened to o by 40.

687.

The following w-verbs have second aorists of the p..t form.

),luKop,o.< ( cD1.-o-) am capturecl, fa.">.wv or ij">.wv ( t..w, t..ol7Jv, t..wvo.<, ">.ous ) . {3o.lvw (fia-) go, l!f37Jv (fiw, (3a.l7Jv, (3fjlh and also -(3ii in composition, {3fiva.t, {36s). {3t6w (f3w-) live, i(3lwv (f3<w, (3P'l/v, {Jtwva.<, fiwus ). Hom. f3.brw imper. "1'1/PriuKw ("Y7Jpo.-) g1ow old, '7Jpva.< poet., 'Y'l/Pd.s Hom. -y<-yvwuKw ( -yvo-, -yvw-) know, 1!-yvwv ( -yvw, -yvol7Jv, -yvwO<, -yvwva.<, -y vous). -lhop&.uKw (opii-) run, only in composition, -iopiiv (-i'ipw, -i'ipa.l7Jv, -op.va<, -op&.s). Hdt. bas l!op7JV, opfivat, op&.s in composition. o6w ( ilii-) enter l!oiiv 'entere infiected p. 140 (Mw, opt. Hom. /56'1/ and I!Ki'iii!J.v for OV-l7J, lKov-i-p.ev; ofiBt, oliva.<, o6s ). l!xw (crxe-) have, uxls imper.

682 D. 1!-yvov, from l-yvwv( r) by 40, is found in Pind. Hom. has l!ovv, l!r">.a.v, lfKra.v; Pind. l!q,vv. -Horn. bas {3ti.r7Jv and f31Jr7Jv.- Hom. has (3t..~era<, i.">.era.t.Subj. : Hom. has -yvww ">.ww, -yvwns -yvl/)s, -yvwn -yvl/1, p.f31JYJ va.f3y, -yvwrov, -yvwop.e. "/VWJ.I.EV, -(31}op.ev q,Bwj.l.ev, "fVWWIJL "fVW<TLV (3w<TLV <fJ8lw<TLV. 685 D. Hom. bas -yvw}Jova.t, i5Dp,eva.<, Krap.eva.<, and -KraJJ.ev.

198

FIRST AND SECOXD PERFECT

[688

wre!vw (Krev-, KTa-) /cil!, rKrav, ~KTa~, ~Kra, hraJ.'P, 3 pl. ~KTav 5al D, subj. KTEWJ.'EP, inf. KTaJ.'PU.L KTaJ.'P, part KT<h; fKTaJ.")P WaS killed (Kracr!Jiu, KTaJ.'POS) ; ail poetic fmms. 1rTop.a< ( 1rer-, 1rre-, 1rra-) fly, poet. l!7rr>Jv ( 1rralnv, 1rrds ), middle (,.-r6.J.'>JV ( 7rTacriJa.<, ,..,.&1-'evo~). ,..,.c:;,, 1rrfjiJ<, 1rrfjva< are late. 1rivw ( ,.,_) d1ink, fh imper. CTKW ill .7rOCJ'KW ( CJ'K-, CJ'K-) d1y U}J, .7rOCJ'Kfjvat. ra- endme, fut. r'Af,croJ.'a<, poetic l!r'Anv (r'Aw, ralnv, r'AfjiJ<, -r'Afjva<, r"Ad~). <j>IJ6.vw ( <j>Oa-) anticipate, l!<j>Onv ( cpOw, <j>Oal.,v, <j>IJfjva<, <{>Od~). <j>Dw ( <j>-) produce, l!<j>vv was p1oduced, am ( rpuw subj., rpva<, rp6~ 308).

688. The following w-verbs have in poetry (especially in Homer) second aorists of the p.< form: aop.at (.i"Acro, .iXro), .1raupaw (.1roupiis), paplcrKw (IJ.pp.evo~), IJ.w (al-'eva.<), (36.XXw (~vl-'f3Mrnv, 1!(3>JTo), (3<(3pwa-w (1!(3pwv), root -yev- (-yvro grasped), XOJ.'a< (oKro), Epie K<xdvw (htx.,v, <xf,w, <xei'TJ, <xfiva< and K<x-1,J.'EPa<, K<XeiS and K<Xf,J.'VOS i properJy from KlX>Ji-<<), 6.W (.:n-6Kas), KVW ('AiJ(J<, Kv8<), rl!w (TlJ.'evos), root Xex- (I!Xero laid himsdfto 1est), X6w (M.,.o), orw
(ora, OTaJ.'VOS), 7raW (7ra'TO), 7rarw (f7rf,/t'1/P), trpiJw (1rp8at trep8-cr8at), trWw (lftrwv), 7rV- (IJ.J.'trV!TO T1li1led), trTf,crcrw (Ka7a7r'Tf,'T'1/P), a'VW (lcrcrUi-<'1/V, lfcrvro, CTV/tVOS), <j>Olvw (l<j>Oli-''1/V), xw (lXVI-''1/P, XVI-'evos). I!eK'To, trci.'To are properly first aorists (for l'AeK-cr-.,.o, tra'A-a--'To), cr being lost

between two consonants (l 03).

FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE

(555, 561)
689. Ali vowel and consonant verbs in -w inflect the first perfect alike. Some verbs in -w inflect the second perfect according to the w-conjgation, others infl.ect it. according to the ftL-conjugation. 690. Indicative.- Originally the endings were added to the stem without any thematic vowel. Of this untbematic formation a few traces survive (ii73). In tbe 2 p. sing. the ending is -~, but originally -IJa; in the 3 pl. -Kan stands for Ka-vn out of Ka-vr< (100). Thus uKa, -a~, -e, trbroJ.'rpa, -a~, -e, etc. The peri phrastic combination occurs in the indicative (5G!l a). 691. Subjunctive. -The perfect subjunctive is commonly formed periphrastically by the perfect active participle and w, Tis, !j, etc. 'Th us evKws ( -yeypa <j>ws) w, etc., euK6TEs ( -ye-ypa<j>oTEs) WJ.'ev, etc. Of the periphrastic forms only the 1 and 8 sing., 2 and 8 plnr. are attested. 692. Instances of the simple perfect subjunctive (XeMKw, -ye-ypa<j>w) are very rare. The simple form is made by substituting the thematic vowel w ; 71 for a in the tense-stem. Only the sing. and the 3 plm. are attested from w-verbs. 693. Besides dow (oloa) and icrrf,KyJ, etc., Attic prose has only about 16 occurrences of the simple perf. Rubj., and from the following verbs only: f3alvw, <Uli<a, l-yelpw, l!o<Ka, OvycrKw, at~f3civw, av06.vw, ,.cfcrxw, tro<w, <f>6w. Jlip!JOCr. has forms from f3<f3pwcrKw, trovw, n6xw. There are about 30 occurrenc<'S in the

SECO~D PERFECTS OF THE MI-FOR:\1

199

poetry. Attic prose writers show about 25 cases of the periphrasis from all w-verbs.

694. Optative. -The perfect optativ.e is commonly formed periphrastically by the perfect active participle and .t71 v, d7Js, et7J, etc. Th us 'A-EhvKws ( -yeypo.<f>ws) e(7Jv, etc., .<vK6us ( -ye-ypo.<f>6res) ilp.Ev, etc. The dual is exceedingly rare. 695. Occasionally the simple forms are used ('AeMKo<p.<, -ye-yp.!flo<p.<). These are formed by ad ding the mood-sign <, and the endings, to the tense-stem with the thematic -vowel ( o). All the -<TJ-forms are attested ; of the -i-forms only the 3 sing. and 1 and 3 plur. 696. Of the simple optative there are about 25 occurrences in Attic prose, and from the following -verbs only : 1roxwpw, l~a.1ra.rw, elcr[3a'A'Aw, 7ra.po.iilowp.<,
got.Ka., -f(J'T1}Kot,

7r7JperW, Ov!luKw, av8vw, Karafi'ffw,

7rou~,

'll'"d.O"xw, ?rpopxop.at,

In the poets there are about 16 occurrences. Prose writers show about 106 occurrences of the periphrastic forms.
lp.1ri1rrw, <f>vw.

697. Imperative.- The usual form of the first perfect imperative is periphrastic: 'AevKws tcre,, l!crrw, etc. No classical Attic writer uses the simple forms. 698. The second perfect is rare, and occurs only in the case of verbs which have a present meaning. From active verbs infl.ected according to the w- conjugation there occur K<x7Jv<r< gape, Ar. .Ach. 133 (xacrKw, xa.v-), and K<Kpd.-yere screech, Vesp. 4.15 (Kpiijw). Most second perfectsshowthe Il' form and have present meaning, as r8va.8t (Hom.) re8vd.rw from OvrfcrKw die, 0/i<Ot from 1i1i<o. fear, and KKp.x8< from Kpti.jw in Aristophanes. Most such second perfects are poetical. 699. Infinitive. -The perfect infinitive adds --va.<, as 'Aeudva.<, .e'Ao<7rva.<. '700. Participle. -The suffixes of the perfect participle in the nominative are -(F)ws, -va., -(F)6s, as 'Ae'AvKJs, <0<7rWs. See 301 c, d, 309. '701. Pluperfect Active. -The pluperfect is formed by adding -ea., -ea.s, -erov, -ETTJP, -<p.<v, -eu, -ecrav to the reduplicated stem. By contraction from l'Ae'AvKm, -ea.s, -<< come the forms l'AiMKTJ, -TJs -EL(v). In the later language EL spread from the 3 sing. and was used throughout, as <KELv, -e<S, -EL, -<<rov, -dr71v, -ELp,<v, -e<r<, and very late -e<crav. The best Mss. of Demosthenes have -ELv in 1 sing. Instead of the simple pluperfect we find periphrastic forms, 599 a.

-u,

SECOND PERFECTS OF THE fLL-FORM

A few w-verbs form their second perfects in the dual and plural without a by adding the endings directly to the stem. Herein these forms agree with the second perfect of JLL-verbs (417). In the singular a is used.
'702.

699 D. Doric has -11v and -e<v, as 1ieovK7JV oeovKva.<, -ye-yti.mv -yeyovlva.<, Aeolic has -TJv, as u8viK7JP. 700 D. In the 2 perf. Hom. sometimes has -WT-0< for -6r-os, as /(KP,7JWS, -wros (Kp.vw am weary). In the 2 perf. Hom. sometimes has a. for Attic 77 in the feminine, as d.p1Jpws d.pa.pva. from {{p7Jpa. (po.plcrKw fit). See 573. Aeolic infl.ects the perfect participle as a present in -wv, -ovros. Thus Hom. K<K'ATj-yovra.s for K<K7J"f6ras (KMjw scrcam), l'ind. 7rE<f>piKovra.s ( <f>plrrw shuclder).

200

SECO~D

PERFECTS OF THB: MI-FOl{,M

703. The second perfect i'ifota I jear usually bas the' forms of the first perfect o<Ka in the singular; Jess frequently in the plural.
Perfect SSoKa. or SSa. S6oLKa.s or SSa.s liSOLKE Or SliLE Pluperfect 8E!IoCK1J or SeSC1J SeSoCK1JS or SeSC1js lieSo(KEL or lieliCEL
Su~junctive

SeSCw (rare)
Optative Se6LEL1JV (rare)
Imperative

SliLT0\1 6e6LT1]ll SSLfJ.E\1 66LTE lieSCiio-L

Ss.e. (poet.)
Infinitive SeSLva. or liESoLKva.L Participle SeStC:.s, -vta., -6s or SeSotKC:.s, -vta., -Os.

or liESoCKa.fJ.Ell or .liESoLKO.TE or lielioCKiio-

66LfJ.Ell 66LTE 6liLO"O.V or 6eliOLKEO"Q.\I

704. Other second perfects inflected like fow. are the following: a. {Jalvw (fia-) go, 1 perf. fJfJ'f/Ka have go ne, stand fast regular ; 2 perf. 3 pl. fi{Jcn (poet.), subj. 3 pl. fJfJGkn, inf. {Je fia vaL (poet. and Ion.), part. {Je{Jws ( contracted from fie{Jaws) fief! wu a, geu. fiefiwros. b. -yt-yvojLa< ('fev-, -ya- ) become, 2 perf. "ff-yova am regular; 2 perf. part. poet. -ye-yws ( contracted from -yeyaws), -ye-ywua, geu. -ye-ywro>. c. 8vrfuKw (Ba v-, 8va-) die, 1 perf. rt!Ov'f/Ka am dead regular; 2 perf. du. Tfevarov, pl. r8vap,ev, rt!Ovare, TE8vcrt, 2 plup. 3 pl. lrci&vauav, 2 perf. opt. TE8val7]v, , imper. re8varw, inf. n8vrivaL, part. TE8vews, -ewua, -e6s, geu. -ewros. d. i!oLKa (FfOLKa) am like, appear (lK-, ElK-)'has the p. fonns ~ot-yp.ev(poet.), ef~iicrt for loLK-u-iiut (poet. and in Plato). fo,Ka (l<j!K'f/ plnp.) has also the foll. forms: lolKw, loiKoLp.L, lotKvaL ( <iKPaL poet.), lotKWs ( elKws also in Plato). e. Kpil!;w (Kpa-y-) cry out, 2 pert. Khpii-ya aH present, imper. KKpiixB and K<Kpii-yere, a tbematic form (both in Ar1stoph. ). 705. Other verbs with second perfects of the ,..,.form ( chiefly Homeric) are:
IJ.vw-ya ( /J.vwxB), {Jt{JpwuKw (fiefipwres ), l'{dpw (l-ypfnopa), ~pxop,aL ( e0..-IJv8p,ev),

703 D. The root of fo,a, is oF-, strong forms ore-, orot-. Hom. has ole, olov jeared, fied; for oooLKa., OfOLa he has odooLKa, oelo,a,, etc. (once o<liliiuL). Here EL is due to metrical lengthening. oelow, a present in form, is really a perfect for e-oro(~)-a,. 704 a. D. Hom. has 3 pl. {Jefiriiiu, inf. fiefJaJLEv, part. (3e(3a.ws, (3e{Ja,v, gen. {Jefiawros; 2 plup. fifJMa.v. b. Hom. has -ye-yriiire and -ye-yriiiu ,, inf. -ye-ya!I-H, part. -ye-ya.ws, -ye')'ava ; 2 plup.
lK')'<')'rfT7JV.

c. Hom. rf8va8t, reOvrip,evru and TE8vrip,ev, r<8v'f/WS 'f/WTO> and 7JOros, fem.
T8VTJVl'f/S.

d. Hom. imperf. <Ke, 2 perf. :3 du. /{l'Krov, 2 plup. i,PKEL ltKT'f/V, lolKeua,v, part. lotKWs (elKws <P 254), Kva and KVa (<loLKVaL ~ 418); mid. -!jl'Kro, /{Kro. Hdt. bas oKa, olKWs.

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT MIDDLE (PASSIVE)

201

p.fp.ova (p.<p.aws), 7rct<TXW (7r7ro<T0<), 1rfl8w (l7r7rt0p.<v), 7ri7r7W (7r7r7Ws), root oalearn (oeoaws), root 7a- (7Tap.<v, TET<tl1]v, TTaBt, TETctp.<vat and TE7rip.ev,

771]WS).
PERFECT .A.ND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE .A.ND PASSIVE

(574)

All vowel and consonant verbs in middle according to the p,t-conjugation.

706.

-w

infiect the perfect

707. Indicative.- The perfect middle is infiected by adding the primary middle endings directly to the tense-stem, herein agreeing with the p.t-conjugation. The pluperfect adds the seconda1-y middle endings. In vowel verbs the formation is simple, as in v-p.at, leV-p.1]v. But in consonant verbs, the consonant at the end of the stem comes into collision wit}1 the consonant at the beginning of the ending ; hence certain euphonie changes described in 409. The periphrastic form occurs in the 3 pl. and sometimes in the 3 sing. (599 d, e). a. Stems in v avoid the fonns -v-uat, -v-ua ; thus, from <f>olvw, instead of 7r<j>avuat, brl<j>avuo the periphrastic 7rE<j>aup.lvos el, 1ju8a were probably used. 708. Subjunctive.- The perfect middle subjunctive is commonly formed by periphrasis of the perfect middle participle and &1, Tis, Y,, etc. 'l'hus evp.lvos w. 709. From two verbs, whose perfect stem ends in ?J-(a), the simple forms are constructed. KT<Lop.a. ( ICTa-) acqnire, peri. KK71]p.at possess ( Hl46), forms its subjunctive by adding the them a tic vowel -w f 11 _ to K<-KTa; thus K-KTri-w-p.at = KEK7Wp.aL, KEKTcl-1]<TaL = KEKTj, K-KTcl?JTaL = KKT'i)Tat, etC.- flLI'-VtJtTKW (p.va-) remi nd, perf. p.lp.v?Jp.at remember (1946) : p.e-p.va-w-p.at = p.ep.vwp.at, p.<p.P1]-W-p.<Oa = p.<p.vwp.eOa. With K<Krwp.at, p.ep.vwp.at, cp. iu7wp.at, p. 137. The periphrastic KEKT1]p.lvos c:>, p.<p.v1]p.vos &; occur. 710. Optative. -The perfect middle optative is commonly fonned by the periphrasis of the pmfect middle participle and et?Jv, <t7Js, d7], tc. 'rhus <vp.lvos et?Jv, etc. 711. Some verbs add -l-p.?Jv, -o-i-p.?Jv to the tense-stem (700). -a. KTaop.aL (K7a-) acqui1e, perf. KK77Jp.at possess (1946) : opt. KEKT7Ji-p.1]v = K<KTVP.7JP, KEKTf)i-uo = KEKTiio, KEK77JL-TO = KEKTiiTo. Less frequent and doubtful are K<KTlfp.7]v, -<f'o, -<f)To, -<fp.<Ba from KKT?J-o-i-p.7]v, etc. b. p.tp.vr/uKw (p.va-) remind, perf. p.lp.v7Jp.aL rernernbe1; opt. p.ep.v7]-ip.7Jv = p.ep.vriP.'1v, p.ep.vf}-i-uo = p.Ep.vfio, p.ep.vf)-i-To = p.ep.vfiTo, etc. The fonns p.ep.v<fp.7]v, -<f'o, -<f)To, etc., from p.<p.v7]-o-t-p.7Jv, etc., are uncommon and suspected. c. Kalw (Ka<-, K7J-) call, perf. KK7Jp.at arn called (1946) ; opt. K<K?J-i-p.7]v, etC. = KEKyfp.7]P, KEKV0 1 KKjTo, KKrlp.E8a. d. {JriXXw (fJa-, {J7J-) throw, perf. owfJfJ7Jp.at, opt. lhafJefJX?i<TB<. N.-The forms in -rip.7Jv, etc., have the p.t-forrn; the doubtful -lfp.1]v, etc., belong to the w-conjugation.
708 D. Hdt. has p.<p.vewp.eOa, and this form may be read in ~ 168. 711 D. Hom. has ETO <T 2:i8 = V-L-TO (cp. oalvTo). Pind. bas p.Ep.valaTo.
p.lp.voto

in Xen. is from

p.p.vop.at.

202

MI-CONJUGATION

[712

712. Imperative.- In the tbrd person singular the perfect meaning is regularly retained, as Elp~u!Jw let it have been said. The 2 sing. and pl. are generally found only in the case of perfects with a present meaning, as p,P,V'Tj<TIJ< remembe?' 1 p,T, .,wf>6fJ'TI<TIJ< do not be ajiaid! 11'1ravuo stop! See 698. a. The dual and 3 pl. are apparently wanting. The 2 sing. in -vuo from stems in -v does not occur. For 11'rpavuo, 11'</Ja(fp,Pos tulh was probably used. 713. Attic prose writers have .PafJ<f3~uiJw, .71'0K<Kplu1Jw, dp~uiJw, lKT-f,uiJw, 1fiV<J1Jw, K<To, -K<lu!Jw, KKT'Tj<To, p.p.P'Tj<J'IJ, 11'1Talu1Jw, 11'<11'pav1Jw, 11'<11'0l'Tj<J'o, 11'<11'pd<J'IJw, .,..q,&.u!Jw, 11'</>bfJrrriJ<, TT.x1Jw, T<Top.r)<J'IJw. 714. Instead of the simple forrns of the imperative we find the periphrastic use of the perfect participle and ttJIJ<, ~<J'Tw, etc. (599 g). Th us lp7jp.vov li<J'TW =
lp-f,<J'IJW.

715. Infinitive.- The perfect infinitive adds -u!Ja<, as XM-<J'IJat. Consonant stems !ose the (J' by 103, as <ii<f>IJa,, '1T11'pfix1Ja< (406), T/l"'fXIJa<, 11'<</>aPIJa< (407). 716. Participle.- The perfect participle adds -p.Pos, as vp.vos, Lp.pbos, 'lr11'pi:yp.ros (406, 407). On the <J'of 11'</>aup.lvos see 409 d.
SECOND CONJUGATION OR VERBS IN

MI

Verbs in -p.< usually have no thematic vowel between the tense-stem and the personal endings in the present system (ex ce pt in the subjunctive). The name "p.t-conjugation," or" non-thematie" conjugation," is a1)plied to all verbs which form the present and im perfect without the thematic vowel.
717.

7ia. Of verbs ending in- -p.< t.he following tenses are inflected accori)lg to the p.<-conjugation (except in tl1e subjunctive): all non-thematic prel':ents and imperfects; all aorists passive; all perfects and pluperfects middle; those second aorists active and middle in w hi ch the tense-stem does not end with the thematic vowel; one verb (Z<TT'r}fL') in the second perfect and pluperfect active.
719. Certain tenses of verbs ending in -p.< in the first person present indicative active, or in -p.a< in the present middle (and passive) when not preceded by the thematic vowel, are inflected aecording to the w-conjugation. These tenses are: all futures, all first aorists active and middle, most perfects and plnperfects active, and all subjnnctives. Verbs in -vvp.L regnlarly inflect the subjunctive and the O}Jtative according to the w-conjugation. Furthermore, the 2 sing. in the present and 2 and 3 sing. in the imperfect active of certain verbs, and sorne other fonns, follow the w-eoujugation (746). 720. Verbs in -p.< add the endings directly either to the verb-stem (here a, root) or after the suffixes vv or VYJ Renee three classes are to be distinguished.

MI-CONJDGATION: PRESENT SYSTEM

203

A. Root class; as cf>,rpi say, verb-stem (and root) cpa, <Prr This class often shows reduplication in the present and imperfect, as 8f.8w-p.t gi-ve.
N.-Two verbs have verb-stems ending in a consonant: elp.l am (M-tJ.<) and
'fitJ.a.< sit ( f]<r-tJ.a< ).

B. -vv- class ; as 8dK-vii-p.t show, verb-stem 8nK-, present stem 8EtKvV-. C. A few verbs, mainly poetical, add va-, vrr; as fTK[?rvrrp.t axi?rvaJJ-EV scatter, M.fJ--V'YJfJ-t 8p.-vafJ-V, subdue.
721. Deponent verbs without the thematic vowel are infiected according to the p.<-conjngation.
PRESENT SYSTEM

722. Verbs in -P-t belong to the first or simple class (504) orto the fourth class (523).
FIRST OR SIMPLE CLASS

The present is made by adding the personal endings directly to the verb-stem, which is a root. This verb-stem may be used in its pure form or it may be rednpFcated.
723.

a. Sorne verbs of this class with no\active have a verb-stem of more thau one syllable (usually two syllables). 724. Unreduplicated Presents: eltJ.l (l<r-) am, etJ.L ( 1-, el-) go, 'fitJ.a< ( f]<r-) sit, -f,tJ.l say ('fi said, 3 sing.), KetJ.a< (KH-) lie, <P7JtJ.l (<Pa-, <P'TJ-) say, XP~ it is necessary (793); and poet. ll'TJtJ.' (&.7J-) blof 725. Deponents. -11-ya-tJ.a.L cand .-yaotJ.aL) admi?e, Oa-tJ.aL appear, Ol<-tJ.a.Lflee, make flee (cp. Olw), ova-tJ.a< am ale (737 a), br!-<rm-tJ.a< understand, ~pa-tJ.aL love (poet. for p.w), t7rmtJ.aL fly (late, see 72G a), KPtJ.atJ.aL hang (intrans.), 5vo-tJ.aL insult, 7rra-tJ.aL (poet. by-form of 7rhotJ.a<) fly, hrp<<.tJ.7JV bought a second aorist, <rretJ.a.L affinn. a. Other such forms are Hom. fetJ.aL (rtetJ.a<) strive, dpvtJ.a< and ~pvtJ.a< ?'escue, Ion. X.!vtJ.a< take. 71"t<rr7Jra< II 243 owes its 7J to such non-present forms as
71" urrf}<rop.a<.

726. Reduplicated Presents.- olo'T)tJ.L bincl (rare for Mw), OtWtJ.L (oo-, ow-) give, f'TJtJ.L (-, 1]-) se nd, t<JT'T)tJ.L (<rra-, <rr7J) set, Klxp7JtJ.L (xpa-, XP~-) len, ovlv7JtJ.' (ova-, ov7J-) /Jenefit, .,.lwrr7JtJ.L (1rXct-, 71"7J) jill, 7rltJ.?rP7JtJ.L (1rpa.-, 7rp7J-) burn, rl8'f/tJ.L ( 8e-, 87)-) place. a. Also poetic f3lf37JtJ.L (f3a-, f37J) go, in Hom. f3<f3ds strirling, ol-!7JtJ.aL (also Ion.) seek, for lh-17JtJ.a< by 116 (cp. 17Jrw seek), r7JtJ.' (iXa-, f)\7)- for cn<rXa-, <rL<r7J) am propitious. t1rratJ.a< (late) for ,-&otJ.aL fly is an aalogue of t<rratJ.aL and is not properly reduplicated. rlrp7JtJ.' bore is late. 727. Verbs in -tJ.< reduplicate with 'in the present. Ree414, 447. 7rl-tJ.-71"7JtJ.L and 71"L-tJ.-71"P'TJtJ.' may Jose the inserted nasal in compounds of lv, but only when iv- takes the form ftJ.-; as EJ.J.7ri71"1Jp.L, but iv<,-l!J.'II"a<Jav. Doric has Kt'YX'TJtJ.L. In o-vl-v'T)-tJ.< the reduplication takes place after a vowel (verb-stem ova-, ov'T)-).

204

MI-COXJUGATIOX: PRESENT SYSTEM

a. Heduplication is in place only in present and imperfect; but Hom. has

'"" w<Tofl-'"

FOURTH CLASS

728. Most p.t-verbs of the fourth class add -vv- (after a vowel, -wv-) to the verb-stem. 729. Verb-stems in -o;: Kep-vvfi-t mix, PP-<i-vvp,t hang (intrans.), .,.,,.,;._ vvi!1u spnad, <TKeil.-vvp,t scatter. 730. Verb-stems in (for e<T): ~-wp.t (in prose wt>d-vvfJ-t) clothe, opvvfi-t satiate, <T{3-vvp,t e;:tinguish. 731. 732.

Verb-stems in w: jw-vvi!p,t gird, p<h-vvi!fi-t strengthen, <TTpw-wfi-t spread.

Ali the forms in -vvfi-tStarted from verb-stems ending in ": gvvp,t from <T-v-fJ-t, <Tf3hvfi-t from <T{3<<T-v-fu, jwvvfi-t from !;w<T-v-P-' Ail the other verbs are analogues of these.
733. Verb-stems in a consonant: lf:y-vvfi-t b1ealc, ll.p-vvfi-"'' ea1n, o1-vfi-< show, Elp"{-vfi-t ( = <tnw) shut in, !;!l"f-vfi-t yoke ( 11"o) KT<t-vp,t often written -KTlVVfJ-L ( = KTElvw) kill, p,<l"{-vVfJ-L (111iSWl"ittel1 iJ-I"f-ViJ.t) ?nX, -o["{-VVfJ-L ( = -Of"{w) open, o.fJ-L ( 0)\.-E) destroy, op.-vp,t (op,-<-, OfJ--0) SWfar, OfJ-Op"{-VVfJ-L wipe off, 6p-vfi-t rouse. 1rf}"/-vp,t ( """'"/-, """''Y-) fix, .,. f!'Y-V}J.t (once, in K7r .fJ"fvv<T8o;t Thuc. 4. 125; cp. ?r-f]rTw ), ?rTp-vvp,at sneeze, /N!'Y-vVJ.l.t (pa"{-, P'1"f-, pw"{-) lwealc, <TropvJ.l.< spread, <j>p"{-v}J.t ( = <j>prrw) inclose. 734. Poetic verbs: a!-vv}J.at talee, ll.-vp,t complete (vvw), lJ.x-vvJJ.c<< am t1oubled, "{6.-vvJJ.at 1ejoice, ilal-vp,t entertain, i("'l-vv}J.c<< excel, t-vvp,o;, move myself. (cp. K:vw),, op"f-vJ.l.t 1ea~h, .r-vvJJ.c<< st~fh, with vv carried into. other tenses ( ro;vvw), n-vv!l-"'' (cp. Epw rzvw from r<-vr-w) better TElvvJJ.at, chasttse. 735: The verbs whose verb-stern ends in a liquid or nasal often form the tenses other than the present by adding e or o, as o"/.."/..p,t (from o"/..vJJ.t) rf><<Tc<,
oW<Ka ( O--)' Of.I-PJLL ifJp,OITa ( Oj.t-0-).

736. vJJ.<-verbs form only the present and imperfect according to the P-<conjugation; with the exception of <T(3-vv}J.t, which has 2 aor. ~<T/311 The 2 aorist passive and 2 future passive are rare, as p-f]"fv}J.< pp6.'Y'1" hpo."f1J<To}J.o;<,
!;<V"{VJ.l.L ElV"f'l/P.

plur~tl,

-v-qp.t c1ass. A few verbs add YTJ- in the singular, va- in the to the ver-stem. These verbs are almost entirely poetical or dialectical; and show by-forms in -vaw. They are:
737.
O}J.V11!1-' (oa}J.vw) subdue, Klpv'l/p.t (K<pv6.w also Epie) mix, Kpl!J.VTJJL' (miswritten Kp1}P,V1'}f.J-L) SUSpend, ?rpP'l/fJ-L sell, ?r[TP'l/}1-L (?r<rvfiw) Spread, <TKlOV'1f.LL (and KlOV'Y}}J.t)

scatter.
736 D. From verbs in -v!l-' second aorists middle are formed in Hom. by only three verbs: wl'Yv}J.t (commonly written !1-i"fvJL<) mix ~!1-<Kro, 6pv}J.t to~tse
Jipro, 7r1}"{VJ.l.L fiX Kc<T'lr'l/KTO.

744]

INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS

205
In u-

a. Only in the mid~Je: p.apva,.,.ru fight, ... tXvap.at ( .,.,xvaw) app1oach. vap.a< am able, va has grown fast (cp. ouvaros).

738. Stem Gradation.- Verbs of the root class show in the stem vowel a variation between strong and weak grades in the present and imperfect indicative active. The singular has the strong grade, the dual and plural have the weak grade. The optative active and most middle forms have the weak grade.
a. 1J strong (original and Dor. ii),
a.

weak ; <fnJp.l <f>ap.v, (<f>rJP l<f>aJ.I.v;

r~rr1Jp.<

t~rrap.ev, r~rr1J r~rraw; oa"'P1J"'' oap.va"''"

b. 1J strong, E weak: rliJ'fJJ.I.' rl!Jep.<>, hl!Jnv rl8ep.ev; f'fJJ.I.' ep.ev. c. "' strong, o weak: l/)WJ.I.< lop.ev. d. u strong, weak (cp. xe~ ...w ifx,.,.ov) : .r,.,., will go, r,.,.ev. The grades EL, o, appear in dow, subjunctive of oa know, pl. t~rp.ev for tp.ev (79U). 739. In the second aorist l~rrnv 1 stood the strong form l1as been carried from the singular through the dual and plural of the indicative. The strong stem occurs also in the imperative (~rrfj8<, ~rrfjH) and infinitive (~rrfjvo.t). 740. The second aorist infinitive shows the weak stem: 8e1va< from O-evat, iiova< from oo-<>a<. Cp. 469 N. ~rrfjva< is, however, from ~rriJ-eva< (469 c. N.). 741. A few root verbs retain the strong grade 'fJ throughout. Thus, poet. dnp.< blow /1,1JJ.I.P; &bres is from a1JPTS by 40; lk'np.at seek (poet. Olk'e~rOat is from l(op.at); 7rip.11'1JJ.I.' jill 2 aor. v11'TJJ.I.'fJ., opt. lp.11'?J.I.'fJ" 742. Verbs q,dding vu show the strong form of the verb-steru in the present. jdry-vv-p.< b1eak 2 aor. pass. ppd-ynv, J.1.l"(-vV-J.I.< (miswritten p.t-y,vp.<) mix 2 aor. pass. lp.l"f'fJv, te-y-vv-p.< yoke 2 aor. pass. ll"f1JP. 743. The ending vu varies between strong vv and weak vu. Thus elKv!p.<
lKVUj.I.V, E<lKvVP EoelKPUJ.I.fP.

INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS

744. Verbs in -p.L differ in inflection from verbs in-win the present and second aorist systems and (rarely) in the second perfect system. Verbs in -p.t have the following peculiarities of inflection:
a. The endings _,.,., and -<r< (for original -n) occur in the present indicative active: riOn-p.<, rten-u<; r/Jn-p.l r/Jn-~rl. b. The 3 plural present indicative active has generally the ending -<r<, from o.-avn, as nO.!u<, !~rrii<r<. So in the 2 perf. active urii<r<. c. The 3 plural of active past tenses has -<ra v: hlOe-<rav. d. The imperative ending -0< is sometimes retained: <f>a-el, ~rrfj-8<; sorne forms never had it: rlOEL, 1<rr7J. e. The middle endings -<ra< and -<ro regnlarly retain <r: rlOe-u~<, hlOe-<ro. N.- But not in the subjnetive or optative; and usnally not in the second aorist; as r<Oii for nOn-ua<, rr0io for nO--~ro, Wou for ~Oe-<ro. f. The infinitive active ho' -va< : nO-va<, oti5o-va<; the 2 aorist active has -~va. rarely : Oevat for !N-eva<, ova< for ob-eva,.

206
-ovs (301 a, 307

INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS
a): ilt)ovs, odio-vr-os.

[745

g. Active participles with stems in -ovr- have the nominative sing. masc. in
/

Forms of -p.t verbs which are inflected according to the thematic conjugation are included under the Second Conjugation.
745. 746. J.tt-verbs may pass into tJ1e w infiection elsewhere thau in the subjunctive. a. Verbs in -V!J.t< often infiect the present and imperfect active (not the middle) from a present in -vvw; as <tKvw (but usually f!KvIJ.t<), o<tKvm, oKvv<t, imperf. fOElKVVOV, -<S, -, etC. i imper. oeiKVV, inf. OLKVLV, part. LKVWV. b. rUJ'YJJ.<L, l<TT'YJJ.<L, lwJ.t<, fr)J.t<, etc., show some w-forms in pres. (and imperf.) indic. opt. imper. and infin.; but the forms n!Jw, i<Trw, 15t6w, Uw, do not occur in the 1 sing. c. In the present and second aorist optative of rliJ'Y)J.t< and ~'YJJ.'' there is a transition to the w-conjugation but not in the 1 and 2 singular. The accent is differently reported: (1) as if the presents were niJw, Uw; (2) as if the presents were rliJw, fw. Thus : Active : r'upiotn for <f>'T, piotev for <f>teev. -Middle : niJoro, 7rtiJolj.t<IJa, <Tvv!Joro, 1rtiJovro ( also accented rUJotro, l1rl1Jotvro); 1rpooro, 1rpoow1Je, 1rpoovro (also accented 1rpoo<ro, 1rp6otvro). Hdt. has -IJotro and -Oli:ro. The form in -oro for -ero occurs especially in Plato. d. The Mss. vary between niJwJ.ta< and rliJwp.a<, 1roiJwp.a< and 1r61JwJ.ta' (426 f). e. Some other p.t-verbs show alternative w-forms, as 7r<J.t7rt.w, -ew (7rlJ.t7r'YJJ.t<), 7rt7rpt.w (7rlJ.t1rP'YJJ.'L), Hom. d:yt.oJ.ta< (li."YaJ.ta<), and iMop.a< (r)p.<). So often with -'YJJ.<L verbs (737), as oap.v~ and Ot.p.v'YJ<T<, hlpvi and K<pvfls.

PRESENT AND IMPERI!'ECT ACTIVE AND MIDDLE (P ASSIVB)

747. Present Indicative.- a. The primary persona] endings are added to the stem with the strong form in the singular and the weak form in the dual and plural. b. In the 2 sing. rliJ'Y)s, f'l)s, l<Tqs, eiKvs, etc., <T bas been added to the stem. This <T is obscure in origin, but cannot be derived from -<Tt. niJ<s is rare. c. 3 sing. rliJ'YJ<T<, l<TT'IJ<T<, etc., with -<T< for -n (463 c). d. 3 plur. niJi.<Tt, l<TT<Tt, etc., from niJ-rivn, i<Trt.-avn (408 d). e. For the retention of <T in rliJe-<Ta<, etc., see 465 a, b, and ::-<. 2. f. looJ.ta< in the middle pl'esent and imperfect is used only in composition, as 1rolop.a<. But the simple form occurs in the passive.

746 D. The tragic poets never have the w-forms ; the poets of the Old Comedy seldom; those of the New Comedy often have the w-forms.- Plato usually has -vvi<Tt. Hom. has je"Yvvov (and jE"YVV<Tav, tfJpvvov, tfJp.vve, p.vvhw, etc.). Hdt. usually keeps the p.<-forms, but has some w-forms in 2, 3 sing. 3 pl. present indic. and part., and 1 sing., 3 pl. imperfect. Doric usun,lly has the w-forms; Aeolic has !hv, and op.vv infin. 747 D. 1. Hom. has rl8-rw8a, rliJ'IJ<T< and niJe, niJew<; il<ilo'is and oto<TIJa, low<TL (usually) and otoo, tiloficn, P'YJ'v<T< from P'IJ"Yv-vn, ti<T' they go and ~ii<T< they aTe. O~ <Tra<TKe see 495. Mid. J.tt.pv"'o from J.tt.pvap.at,

I~FLECTlON

OF MI-VERBS: PISENT

207

748. Imperfect.- hi/Jm hill<, lOioovv illilovs illilov (for iilti5wv, -ws, -w) are thematic forms (746 b). For the imperfect of MvaJJ-a< aBd l7rtJ-raJJ-aL see 465 b, N. 1. For the retention of tJ in hlO<tJo see 465 b. 749. Subjunctive.- Attic new, etc., are derived by contraction from the forms of the weak stem to which the thernatic vowel w j '7 has been added. Th us nOw, -lys, -v, n8fWJJ-fP, -f1]7f, -fW(JL; iltil6w, -6bs, -6v, otli6WfJ,fP, -01]7, -OW(JL. L(JTW is derived from itJrw. See 746 b. Verbs in -vJJ-L regularly inflect the subjunctive like w-verbs: o<<Kvw, -uvs, -uv. a. Similarly the middle (passive) forms are derived from n8w-JJ-oc< n01]-(tJ)a<, etc., iltil6w-JJ-a< iltil6'7-(tJ)a.<, t(]'TfW-JJ-a< t(]'Tf'l-((]')a<, etc. For the Joss of (]'in -(]'a< see 465 a. -vJJ-< verbs inflect the mid. subj. like MwJJ-aL. b. ilva.JJ-a< am a!Jle, 7rl(]'TaiJ-a' understand, KpJJ-aJJ-at hang, and IJ:ya.JJ-a< admire put wf '7 in place of the stem-vowel so th at there is no contraction: ilvwJJ-a<, ilvv, ilv1}-ra<, ilvvwiJ-8a, etc. So, too, hrptdp.1]v, 1rplwp.a< (757 a). c. Traces of -rat in -vp.t verbs are very rare : pfryvrat Hipponax 19 ; cp. LO.tJK<orivv-rat P. Ph. 77 b. 750. Present Optative. -The optative active has the secondary endings and the mood sign -<1]- in the singular, -- ( -<<- 3 pl.) in the dual and plural. In the dual and plural the longer (-<'7-) fonns are rare. Thus n8fl'7 (n8<-l7J-v), nOp.< v ( nO--p.<v ), t(]'-rai7Jv ( t(]'Ta-11}-v) itJ-ra'i<v (t(]'Tri-lf-v). The shorter forms in dual and plural occur in poetry and prose, the longer forms only in prose. a. The middle (passive) has the secondary endings and the mood sign -throughout: n8fip.1]v (n0<-i-p.7Jv), t(]'-ralJJ-7] (itJra-t-JJ-7Jv), i(]'ralJJ-<Oa (ltJra-t-wiJa), iltilovro (iltill>--vro). On nOoho, etc., see 746 c. b. The accent follows 424 c, N. 1 ( n8fTo not rliJELro). But the verbs of 749 b are exceptional : ilvaw ilvatro ; and so 5va<o 5vatro from vl P7JfJ-' enefit ( 424 c, N. 2). 751. Present Imperative.-rliJ<t and illilov are formed (cp. 1rol<< and il~ov) from -riO<-<, illilo-<. t(]'T7} and ildKv show the stronger stem fonns. For the middle endings and the retention of (]'' see 466. 2. a. -On the forms niJ.!TwtJav for nOvrwv, n8tJ8wtJa.v for nOt!(]'Owv, see 466. 2. b.

2. Hdt. has nO nOetJt; L(]'T~ is doubtful; il<ilos, iltilo, iltooi!tJt, t(]'< ~tJ<, -PV(]'L and -vovtJ<. Middle: -a rat and -aro (imperf.) for -vrat, -vro in nOlara.t n8aro, itJ-raTat l(]'-raro, ovvarat ovvaro. -ara<, -aro have been transferred from the perfect and pluperfect of consonant stems, sncb as "(f"ypif>arat, "frypd<f;aro (45 f). 3. Dorie has l(J'-ri.JJ-t, and for '7 in ail t.enses ( tJTdtJw, ~tJT(]'a, ~(J'r v); -n in 3 sing. rl07}TL; -vn in 3 pl. rliJEvn, illoovn 4. Aeolic has Tl81]s, Tl07}, TlefL(]'L; ftJTs, ttJT; illilws, olilw; Orip.vfis. 748 D. Hom. has lrOEL, iillilo~s, iolilov.- Hdt. bas 7r<p<rl8w 1 sing., iillilovv, illilov, tJ-r and vt(]'T7} (both in Mss.).- In poetry -v occurs for -tJa.v as Tl8<V, f(]'rav, illilov (464 e. D.). 749 D. Dor. has niJt!w, -<wwv, but contracts < + 7J to 7J; pl. otilwvTL (and -rl87Jvn). Dor. has OvJJ-a.<, l(]'rra<; Hdt. vltJT7JTa<, 7rttJrwvra<, ovvwvrat. 750 D. Hom. has the JJ-t-forms ilatvvro and ila<v6a-ro, Plato has 11"7J"fPVTo. 751 D. Hom. has ttJT1] and Ka.OltJr, illilw9t, fiJ-7r7r7JIJ<, 6JJ-vv0<, 6pvv0<, t(]'Ta(]'o and fqrao. -rlOov, ttJ-rw occur in the drama. J>ind. bas illoo< (active).

208

I~FLECTlON

OF MI-VERBS: FUTUl{E, AORIST

[752

7 52. Present Infinitive. -'l'he active adds -vat, the middle -u8a<. oelKvp.< admits the form lietKvuetv. 753. Present Participle.- 'l'he active adds -vr-, the middle -p.evos. Th us n8e(s (n8e-vr-s), n8eua (rdJe-vr-1a); n8-p.evos. For oetKvDs we find oetKPuwv. THE FUTURES
754. The futures of verbe in -p..t do not differ in formation and infiection from those of verbs in -w.
rUt>] p.<: 8f}IJ'w, Of}uop.at, re8f}11'op.at ; luT7Jf.t': IJ'rf}uw, urf}uop.at, ura8f}uop.at, urf}~w; f'f}p.t: ;jiJ'W, -;jiJ'op.at, -e8f}IJ'Of.tat j o(OWJ.tl : OWUW, -OWUOJ.tat, oo8f}uop.at j oelKVf.tt: oe(~w, Je(~Of.t'J.L, OELX8fJIJ'Of.Lat, OEOd~OJ.tat (late) Or 00L'YfJ.VOS ~UOp.at j p.el"fVf.tt: p.el~w, -p.<xBfJuop.at, f.t<'YfJIJ'op.at (poet.), p.ep.ei~op.at (poet.) ; 1rf}-yvp.t: 1rf}~w, va-yf}uop.at.

a.

iJ'Tf}~w

is the only future perfect from a p.t-Verb (584). FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

The verbs rl87Jp.<, TJp.<, Olowp.t form the singular active of the first aorist in -K-a, thus, ~87JKa, ~owKa, f}Ka. The forms of the second aorist (756) are generally used in the dual and plural and in the other moods. a. The form in K rarely appears outside of the singular, chiefiy in the 3 pl., as ~owKav ( = ~ooiJ'av), Jess frequently in the 1 and 2 pl., as lowKaf.tv, ~aT<. b. That K was not a suffix but a part of an alternative root appears from a comparison of 8TJK- in 1{81JKa and perf. TfB1JKa with fio- in fici. c. l11'T1Jf.t' has g,T7JIJ'a I set. placed (mid. lurwap.1Jv ), to be distinguished from 2 aor. ~uT1Jv I stood. 'd. l87JKap.7Jv is un-Attic; TJKUf.LTJP (in comp.) is rare and probably found only in the indic. ; lowKaJ.t1J" is very late.
755.

SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

756. Indicative.- Tl81Jp.<, fTJp.<, olowp.< use the short grade forms in dual and plural active: ~-8e-Tov, g-IJe-p.ev, ~8e-uav; el-Tov, et-p.ev, ei-IJ'av (for l--rov, etc.); ~-oo-p.ev, ~-oo-IJ'av. In the singular the K-forms, lt81JKa, -ljKa, gowKa, are used. lUT'T}f.LL haS gUT1JP, I{UT'T}S, f<ITTJ (for tUT'T}T, 464 c), ~UT'f}fJ.EV, etC. (p. }38). a. ufJizvvp.t extinguish is the only verb in -vp.t forming a second aorist (~ufJ1Jv,
u[3w, ufJel'T]v, ufJij8<, ufJijvat, uf3els).

752 D. Hom. has -p.evat or -vat preceded by 1J in df}p.eva< dijvat from II1]p.< blow, n8f}p.evat, K<XfJp.evru and K<XiJvat as from KlX1Jf.t' Also !urup.evat (and iuTap.ev), !ev-yvup.oat (and !;ev-yvup.ev, once tw-yvp.ev). -p.ev after a short vowel, as Tt8p.ev, otoop.ev (once iltoovat). Doric l1as n8p.ev, o<oop.ev. Theognis has n8ev, uvvLEi:v. 753 D. Hom. bas n8f}p.evos K 34. 755 D. Hom. has ~81}Kav, ~owKav, lvf}Kap.ev, Of}Karo ; Hdt. uvvBf}Kavro; Pind. 81]KUJ.tVOS.
lf8ev, lfuTaP, lfooP.

756 D. Hom. has older -v for -uav in lfuritv (he uses lil1'r7Juav also), Dor. has For the iterative uTa-uK<, o6-uKov see 495.

759]

lNFLEC'tlON OF MI-VRRBS: SECOND AOUIST

209

b. The middle uses the weak stems -Oe-, --, -ilo- in i-O-p:qv, -p.~v (for i--p:qv), For the loss of" in -<To (~Oov, ~oov) see 46[) b. c. In prose the only uncompounded second aorists middle are l1rp"iP.'f/V bought (pres. WVOp.o.L) and wvf}p.'f/V deriVed benejit (ovlv'Yjp.L). WV-f]p.'f/V keepS 'f/ (pOet.OV'f/<TO, ov-f]p.evos). l<TT'f/JkL does not make the form <TTO.Jk'f/V.
i-ilb-p.'f/v (only in composition).

757. Second Aorist Subjunctive. -AU the forms of the 2 aor. subj. are due to contraction of the thematic vowel with the weak stem-vowel. Thus Ow, etc., from fUw, Ovs, Ov, Owp.ev, etc.; w, etc., from ~w, ~vs, l!w<TL; !lw, etc., from il6w, liovs, i56v; <Trw, etc., from <Trw, <Trt!vs, etc., with from "1 before a vowel. Cp. 682. a. hpuip.'f/v bas 1rplwp.o.L with w j "1 in place of the final vowel of the stem (49 b). 758. Second Aorist Optative.- The forms of the optative of the second aorist are made and infiected like those of the present except for the reduplication. 'l'hus, in the active : Oel'f/v ( Oe-l'fi-V ), <Tro.l'f/v (<Tro.-l'YJ-), ilo!J<v ( li6--p.ev), lioev (lib-Le-v). The shorter forms are preferred in the dual and plural, and poetry has only these ; prose admits either the longer or the shorter forms. a. In the 2 pl. cases of -L'fi-re ( ool'f/re) are more numerous thau -L-re ; but they usually lack metrical warrant. b. Second aorists of stems in v lack the optative in Attic. c. In the middle: Oelp.'f/V ( Oe-i-p.'f/V)' oolp.'f/V ( ilo-i-!J'f/V ), -!J'f/V (i-i-!J'f/V). For Oolp.<Oo. see 746 c. For the accent of 1rplo.<o see 424 c, N. 2. 759. Second Aorist Imperative.- On O-s, o6-s, ~-s, see 46. 1. b. These verbs show the weak form of the stem (O-rw, O-vrwv). f<Tr'f/p.L and <T(3vv!!JL have -OL in <Trfj-OL, 0"(3fj-8L. For <Trfj-OL the poets may use -<Tra in composition, as cl7r6<Tra stand off. a. The middle adds -<ro, which !oses its " fter a short vowel, as in Oo for Ol-<To, ooO for o6-<To, 1rplw (and poet. 7rplo.-<To). " is not dropped after a long vowel (6v1)<To). Cp. 465 b, N. 2. c. p. In poetry: i1rrap.'f/v (prose -'TrTOJk'f/V) from 7rTo.!JO.L fly; Hom. 1r fjro approached, ~f31JTO was hit (others, 688). 757 D. The subjunctive shows traces of an earlier double form of infiection: 1. With short thematic vowel : 0-f]s, 81), 0-f]<rov, Of}op.<v, OfJ<re, o-f]ov<TL. Homer : Of}o!J<V, <TT-f]Op,<v, -<TT-f]<rov, KLx-f]op.ev, owop.<v, 7ro01jop.~L. 2. With long thematic vowel: 0-f]w, Of}vs, 8-f]v, OfJ"'rov, Of}wJJ.<v, OfJ'f/re, Of}w<TL. Hom. 8-f]w, OfJvs, 0-f]v, <Trf}vs, <Tr-f]v, vf}v, owv or ilw1J<TL, 7r<pL<TrfJwcrL, od>w"' By shortening of the long vowel of the stem we obtain a tbird form : 3. Ow, Ovs, Ov, O'f/TOV, Ot!wp.<v, O'f/T, Ow<TL. Hom. d.<Pv, e&!J<V, <TT&!J<V, Hdt. Ow, Owp.ev, OwcrL, 6W!JO.L, crrwp.ev, 7rocrrw<TL, Aeolic 6w. 4. From 3 are derived the contracted forms Ow, 6fis, 6fi, etc. Hom. vo.<Trf/, oci's, oc;; or lic;i<TL, owp.ev; Dor. OWVTL; Hdt. -Oii, -Ofjro.L; owp.<v, -owre, OW<TL. N. -In Hom. the Mss. often have for "1 of the stem, as B<lw, (3<lw, O<lo!J<V,
KLX<lop.<v.

758 D. Hom. has <Tro.l'f/<TO.v P 733, the on1y case of -L'fi- outside of the singular; oV'f/ (for ov-l'f/ ), hilp.ev (for -ou--p.< v), and <fJOro (for <POl--ro) from <{JOivw pe1ish. 759 D. Hom. has Oo and ~v6<0.
lilEK GRAM.

-14

210

INFLECTION OF Ml-YERBS: l'EIECT

[760

b. In composition 7r<pW, 1r60o<, 1raprrr7Jih, lviJo, 1rpoo; but KariJou, 7r<plou, 7r<plou1J< (426 b-e). c. For the 3 pl. Ohwuav, o6rwuav, l!uOwuav, see 466. 2. b.
crrfjvaL (urf,-<va<), oovat (86-<va<), e[va< (1!-nat). Ol-criJa<.

760. Second Aorist Infinitive.- The active adds -<va< in IJiiva< (Ol-na<), The middle adds -uOat, as

761. Second Aorist Participle. -The active adds -vr- like the present: IJ<I< (0<-vr-<), OeO'a (Oe-vr-~a), Olv (Oe-vr); erras (ura-vr-<), uri.ua (ura-vr-~a), urv (:rra-vr). The middle adds -p,evo<, as IJ-JLEVO<.
FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT (AND PLUPERFECT) ACTIVE

762. Indicative.- The perfect of rlOw" is rliJTJKa. A later form rIJEIKa, not found on Attic inscriptions till after 200 n.c. and due to the analogy of efKa, still appears in sorne texts. rliJeKa is Do rie. For KaiJluraKa Attic used Karaurf,uis l!xw (cp. 599 b). a. The dual and plural of the second perfect and pluperfect of tcrT7Jf.L' ( 417) are formed without K: l!urarov, l!uraJLEv (without augment in the pluperf. ), .!crri.ut from -crra-avn, pluperf. l!ura-uav. The singular is supj)lied by the 1 perf. l!ur7JKa

1 stand. 763. Subjunctive. -iurf,Kw and iurw appear in prose and poetry, iur7JKWs
Ji in prose.

764. Optative.- urf,Ko<Ji-< occurs in comp. in prose, tp<IJ'r wres ikv in Plato, u07JKW< et7Js and oeowK6TEs <l<v in Demosthenes. 1Tral7Jv is poetical. 765. Imperative. -I!ITraiJ< is poetical. 766. Infinitive and Participle. - ITrva< and IJ'TW< are much more common than IJ''r'fJKva< and ITTTJKWS.
PERFECT .MIDDLE (PASSIVE)

767. rMEip.a< even in composition is rare and is unknown on Attic inscriptions. For the pass. perf. K<'ip.a< (791) was used. Doric has rlOep,a<.
IRREGULAR MI-VERBS

ELjLL ((]'-, cp. Lat. es-se) arn has only the present and future systems.
768.
760 D. Hom. has Olp.eva<, Oep.EV; IJ'Tf,p.evat ; o6p.eva<, OOf.LEV; aud Oei:vat, IJ'Tfjvat, Dor. bas IJJLEv, i56f.Lfv, IJ'rap.ev. 766 D. Hom. has ITrf.LEva< and IJ'rwv, iuraw<, -abro<. Hdt. has ITuws, -ewros. Doric has -ea for -va ( ITriiK<a). 768 D. 1. Homer has the following forms: Pres. ind. 2 sing. ITITl and <<, 1 pl. Elp.v, 3 pl. ( eliTl, and) ~ii.IT< not enclitic. lmperf. -l}a, ~a, ~ov, 2 sing. -l}a-ea, lfTJ!Tea, 3 sing. -ljev, 1!7Jv, ifTJv, '!jv (rare), 3 pl. -ljiTav, I!IJ'av; iterative (4\l5) i!a-Kov (for tiT-IJ'Kov).
ova<.

no]

IHREGCLAR MI-VElWS: Elllt

PRESENT

211
hiPERFECT

Indicative Subjunctive

Sing. 1 ElfL( 2 E 3 o-TL Dual 2 o-T6v 3 crr6v Pl ur. 1 O'JLV 2 a-T 3 do-L Infin. evn
crop.a.1., crn
o-oLJL1JV,

. "'
ti

Optative
E~TjV

Imperative
~a-e.
O'"T(I)

Indicative

ns
~TOV ~TOV
.......v

E~TjS
EtTj Eh]TOV dTJTTjV
E~']J.I.EV

~ or ~v ~a-en ~v
~O'TOV
1\0'1'1JV

.
.

or or

ehov etTTjV

~O'"'T'OV
O'"TWV

~TE (A)O'.

Et']TE Ettj<TCLV

or dp.ev Or ETE Or EEV

~1'-v
O"'TE

O"T(I)V

~TE or ~O'TE (rare) ~<TG. V

Participle

~v, o{ia-a., Ov,

gen. OvTos, oa-1)s, OVTos, etc. (305)

FrTt:"RE (with middle forms)

(or a-e1.), a-Ta.t., O"ecr8ov, a-ea-8ov, o-O.,.e9a., O""ecrSe, crovTa.a., opt. inf. <Teo-9n, part. rJ.I.Evos, -1], -ov. a. The imperative 3 pl. g,JTw(J'av occurs in Plato and Demosthenes; 6vTwv in Plato and on inscriptions. b. In composition tJv retains its accent, as cbrwv, cbro(J'a, cbrbvros, etc.; and so i[(J'raL, as chr(J'TaL (42 e).
ifp.EV

769. The optative fonns dq,u.<v, .r'l/u, d'f/(J'av are found only in prose writers. occurs in poetry and l'lato, <u only in poetry, E<v in poetry and prose and more frequently thau drwav.

770. The indicative <i}Jol is for *<(}'-}Jo' (37) ; d is for *"(}'' (originally (l'-(1'[, 463 b); E(J'-rl retains the original ending n; (J'l is for ((J'-)<m, cp. Lat. sunt; E(J'}Jov, with (J' before p. despite lOf>; the (J' is due to the influence of E(J'T. The subjunctive wis for i!w, from E(l'-w ; the optative d'f/v is for E(J'-L'f/-v; <i}Jo<v for E(J'-"''" cp. Lat- sim us. The infinitive <vaL is for (J'-vaL; the participle tJv is for iwv, from E(J'-wv. Subj. i!w, i!T/s, 3 sing. ET/, ET/(/'L., rw, 8pl. EW(J'L (twice ciJ(J'L) ; }JofTL}JoL has 1 sing. }Jo<TW, and J.L<nlw (with metricallengthening). Opt. d'f/v, etc., also iloLs, eoL; Imper. 2 sing. i!(J'-(J'O (middle form), e(J'rw, 3 pl. i!(l'rwv. InL <vat a.nd E}JoJ.LfPa.L (for E(l'-wvat), E}Jo}Jo<P, also i!p.<vaL, ii}Jo<V. Pa.rt. wv, lo(J'a, 6v, etc., rarely the Attic forms. Fut. often with (}'(}' : i!(J'(J'O}Joa' and i!(J'o}Joa.L ; 3 sing. I!(J'naL, i!(J'ra, l!u(J'<ra, also f(I'(J'TaL (as iu Dor.), 1!(/'(J'f(J'IJaL, E(I'(J'O}Jo<vo. 2. H!lrodotus haspres. ind. 2 sing. 1., 1 pl. fiJ.Lv; imperf., the Attic forms and lia, 2 sing. l!as, 2 pl. i!an; iterative e(J'Kov; subj. l!w, l!w(I'L; opt. once lv-lo, d'f/(J'av, less freq. EV; part. lwv. 3. Dor. pres. ind. 1 sing. f]}Jol and fi}Joi, 2 sing. f(J'(J'[, 1 pl. nJ.L< and EI}JofS (Pind. <lp.v), 3 pl. vrl; imperf. 3 sing. 17 (for t,(J'-r), 1 pl. 1jp.<s, 8 pL ~(J'av and 1jv; inf. 7JJJ-ev, eJ..P; part. lW v and fern. ~a(fCTa, pL Evres. }!"~ut. ffffep.at, -V, -fjrat or -rat, f(I'(J'OvTaL (540 D.). 4. Aeolic li}Jo}Jo< out of f(J'}JoL; imper. i[(J'(J'o, part. l!wv, E(l'(l'a (Sappho); imperf. l!ov.

212

IRREGULAR MI-VERBS: EjLL

771. Old Attic 1) is from 1)a. (Hom.)= 1Jo-!f;, i.e. o-- augmented +the secondary ending p., which becomes a by 35 c. i}s for ijo-Oa is rare. The 3 pl. was originally ijv, contracted from i)ev (Hom.); this i}v came to be used as 3 sing. By analogy t.o ijp.ev 7jo-re the 1 sing. i)v was formed. 772. Inflected according to the w-conjugation are the subjunctive, the participle tfJv, and severa! dialect forms. 773. EjLL

(1-, d-; cp. Lat. -7e) go has only the present system.
PRESENT

IMPERFEC1'

Indicative Subjunctive

Optative

Imperative

Indicative

tw Sing. 1 ELJI.L tOLJI.L or lOL1JV or ifnv '\la. 2 EL te. tos tns UEL<T8a. or ifELs tT(I) 3 ELITL to or n tn 'lELV \:OI.TOV Dual2 tTOV t1jTOV tTOV '[l'I'OV t'I'(I)V t1j'I'OV 3 tTOV tol'I'1JV '!'I'1JV Plur. 1 tj-EV tOLJI.EV tJI.EV UJI.EV 2 tTE t1j'I'E tOL'I'E t'I'E tTTE 3 tii.O"L tU>O"L toLEV t6vTwv ti<Ta.v or iie<Ta.v Infinitive : lva.. Participle : t<l>v, loviTn, t6v, gen. l6VTos, lo1I<T1JS, l6VTos, etc. Verbal Adjectives: lT6s (poet.), lTos, l'I'1J'I'os.

a. The imperative 3 pl. trwo-av occurs rarely in Xenophon and Plato. The accent of the simple form of participle and infinitive is kept in composition, as 1raptwv, 7raptovo-a, '7rt>a<. Otherwise the compounds have recessive accent so far as the rules allow : 7r&.petp.t, IL1reto-t, but 1rfla, 7rpoo-fip.<v.
b. The participle lwv is accented like a second aorist. 774. dp.t in the indicative prese~lt means 1 shall go, 1 am going. See 1880. :For 1 go gpxop.at is used in the present indicative, but not (in prose) in the imperfect, or in the oth(>r moods. The scheme of moods and tenses is as follows: Present: indic. gpxop.at, subj. tw, opt. fotp.t or lol'f/v, imper. ro,, inf. Uva<, part. lwv. Imperfect: ~a. Future: ep.t, evo-olp.1Jv, evo-eo-Oat, evo-6p.evos. 775. In the imperfect the older prose writers usually have a, 'i)wrOa, n<<-v, the later h;:we i}Hv, fim, i}H. The plural forms-fiHfLEV and i}HH are not classical. Prose writers seem to prefer i/ea-av to ~a-av. The '!1 here is the stem "' augmented. 776. The part., the subjv., and the opt. are inflected with the thematic vowel ; and so also sorne of the dialectical forms.

773 D. Hom. has 2 sing. <a-IJa (Hesiod <s) ; subj. t'!Ja-IJa and r'!Js, tvo-<v and ty, !ofLv and fop,ev; opt. l<l"' and fot L infin. tp.evat, (fLv, and Uva:, (twice). 1mper.f.: 1 sing. f!a, v'ljov, 3 sing. 1]e, il<, fie< (at the verse-end, il<?), t<; dual tr1Jv, pl. iJof.Lev, ;ftTav, br?;uav, Luav, 7jt'o11. For ?]ra, 7jl"E, 1fi:uaP Rome write i}ea, 1fee, i}etTav. Future: do-op.at 0 4G2, o 213. f<lo-op,at ::; 8 and felo-aro, lfelo-aro probably come from Ftep.at st?"ive (778). Hdt.: 1]a, oie, oio-av (Mss.), but Tl for ?J' is correct.

717]

IRREGULAR MT-VERBS:

lruu

2Hl

777. l"lltJ.l ((-, 1]-) send is inftected nearly like -r[8ryp.t (p.135). 'l'he inftection of the present and second aorist systems is as follows:
ACTIVE
INDICATIVE

M!llllLB (PASSIVE)
INDICATIVE

MIDDLE

Pres.

Imperf.

Second Aor.

Pres.

Imperf.

Second Aor.

s.

1 ~T(fU t1]V (.j'Ka.) 2 tT(S, fEi:S (746 b) tELS (746b) (..jKO.S)

3 2 LT(CTL
D. 2 tETOV 3 tETOV

tEL tETOV i:TT(V tep.ev tET{ tECTO.V

( .j'KE) etTov E\:TT(V

Ep.O.L tJLT(V - eYp.T(v tECTO.L( 465 a) tECTO - Etcro tETO.L tETO -dTO tEcrOov tecrOov tp.eea. tecrOe t<VTO.L tEcrOov tcrOT(V l:p.<Oa. tecrOe tEVTO EtcrOov etcrOT(v e\:p.eOa. etcr9E <tvTO

P. 1

tep.ev

2 t<TE 3 t.cr ( 463 d)

-dp.ev - ELTE - <tcra.v

s.

1 2 tijs 3 t

'"'

_..,
-u

. -us .
-

SuBJUNCTIYE

tWp.a.t.

wp.a.L 1J'I"O.L

l: ti]TO.l. fijcr9ov l:ijcrOov i@p.eea. l:ijcrO< twvTa.L

-u

. . .

D. 2 tijTOV 3 tijTOV

-1jTOV - .j'TOV .Jp.<v 1JTE

J>TATIVE

- .j'crOov - ..]'crOov - wp.ea. -1]cr0<

-

P. 1 twp.ev
2 til TE 3 twcr

- c&Tt.
-<LT(V - e'lT(s

~VTO.f.

s.

1 fELT(V 2 fELT(S 3 MT!

te!p.T(V
feLo
fE~TO

e\:p.T(V (758 c)
eLo

-<'1
-

- dTO (-otTo) <tcr9ov e'(cr9T(v

D. 2 f.LTOV or
fELT(TOV

fElT1]V

or

tEL~TT)V

etTov or te<cr&ov - d1JTOV TT(V or f<Ccr9T(v - El~TT(V

and

1JP.' usually has the initial , short. Present: -tes, 1Jcn from i<-vn, inf. tlp.evat and -ifp.<V. Impe1;f. : -<Lv, -m, -<L, 3 pl. <V. Future: ljO"w, once v-fO"<L. Fi1st Aorist: 'jKa and ~1JKa, lvi}Kap.<v once, 'jKav once. Second Aorist: for the augmented <l-forms Hom. bas usually the unaugmented <-; as O"av, vro. In the subjunctive p.<Odw, p.<Oi}y, <Plv, p.<Owp.<v. 2. Hdt. has -!iL (accented -<t), !e.,.,, imperf. -<t, perf. vlwvTat for v<vrat, pa,rt. p.<-p.<r-t-p.lvos for p.<8<Lp.lvos. 3. Dor. has perf. wKa, wJJ-aL.

777 D. 1. In Hom.
-i, ifO"L

21~
P. 1 t<jJ.EV or
2
td1JjJ.EV fETE Or t.('IJTE fEEV 01' tf('l)cra.v

IRREGULAR MI-VEIS: lTULL

EiJ.LEV Or fd1J.E9a. -- E'L1JjJ.EV - ELTE or tEi:crOE E~lT)TE

E:EV Or

fE'LVTO

Et1Jcrl1v

ELjJ.E8a. ( - ot.... ea.) ELcrOE (-otcrOE) ELVTO ( - OLVTO)

IMPERATIVE

8, 2 tEL (746 b) 3 tT6l

-~s
-~T(I)
-

~E<TO

-o.J
~creO>

tcr80> tEcr8ov tcrOO>v

D. 2
3

~ETOV

~TOV

icrOov
~cr80>v

tTO>V

-tTwv
-TE
-

P. 2
3

r.T.
tVTO>V ( 466. 2, b) tV11L

..

EVTWV
I~FINITIVE

tE<T8Etcr80>v ( 466. 2, b) -

ifcr8E icr80>v

ELV11L
PAltTIClPLE

Ets, -

ELcra, -

v tjJ.EVOS

~JJ-EVOS

Future : - {\cr0> in prose only in composition ; - {\crojJ.aL only in composition. First Aorist: .]Ka in prose usually in comp., - 'JK6.jJ.1JV; both only in the indic. Perfect Active: - dKa only in composition. Pertect Middle (Passive): - ELjJ.O.L (plup.- Etp.1Jv),- Etcr80>, -dcrOa,- Etp.vos, only in composition. Aorist fassive: - ii81Jv, - Ow, - Oijva, - 0Els, only in composition. Future Passive : - 81jcroll.a, only. in composition. Verbal Adjectives: - Tos, - Tos, only in composition. 778. Since Ywu is reduplicated (probably for <THI'YJ-p.t) the initial , should be short, as it is in Hom. (rarely in Attic poetry). is probably due to confusion with the of Hom. fEp.ru (riEp.at) st1ive, a meaning that Y<p.at occasionally shows in Attic. tEp.a< meaning hasten occurs only in the present and imperfect. 779. " is for < + < in the second aorist active (l--P.'"= ip.Ev), perfect active (f-e-Ka= EfKa), perfect middle (E--p.at = itp.a), second aorist passive (l + -O'YJ" = 07Jv). In the aorists lis the augment, in the perfects the first is the reduplication of the weak stem -. The first aorist 'ij-Ka has the strong stem form. Present subj. tw, li)s, etc., are for Uw, Uvs, etc. ; aor. subj. -w, -iis, etc., are for -M-w, -1!-vs, etc. 780. Much confusion exists in the Mss. as regards the accentuation. Thus for ls we find tm, and in Hom. 1rpotEL (present), as if from Zw. See 746 c.
ot-ro,

781. For <ir{>totTE, etc.) see 746 c.

<ir{>foLEv

and 1rpoo'i-ro, 1rpoo<TOE, 1rpoolv-ro (also accented 7rp6-

llUGULAR MI-VERBS: <j>'l'}p.L

782. The imperfect of upi'Y/1-'' is either <f>t'YI" or 1,</>i'YI" (450).

215

<1>1111( ( <j>a-, <f>rr, cp. Lat. forri) ;;ay, say ye8, or assent is inflected in the present as follows:
783.
PRESENT

l:MPERFECT

Indic.

Subj.

Opt.

Imper.

Sing. 1 2 3 Dual 2 3 Plur. 1 2 3

<J>1Jp.t

.Pns
<J>1Jat
<j>a.T~V

<!>"'

<l>ns +n <j>ijTOV <j>ijTOV <j>Olp.ev <j>ijTE

<j>O.LT]V cpa.(T]S cpa.(T]

<j>a.&< or

.pa.e,

<j>6.Tw
~6.TOV

cpT]V cp1Ja&a. or cpTJS <J>TJ cpa.Tov cpclT1JV

~cf>a.TE

<j>am)v <j>a.p.v <j>a.T <J>aa!

not found not found

cpa.tp.Ev or <j>a.C1Jp.Ev <j>a.(TjTE <!>ruev or <!>a.t1Jaa.v

<j>6.Twv <!>nTE

<!>wa

<!>6.vTwv

<j>a.aa.v

Infin.: <J>6.va.; Partie.: poet. cj>is, <!>ciaa., 4>6.v (Attic prose <!>6.aKwv) ; Verbal Adj. : <!>a.T6s (poet.), <!>a.-ros. Future : <j>T]aw, <1>-fJauv, 4>1]awv. First Aorist : 4>1Jaa., <1>-fJaw, cj>T]aa.p., - - , <l>iJaa.L, <1>-fJaiis. Perf. Pass. Imper. : ....e<l>6.a&w let it be sa id. 784. All the foTms of the present indicative except <f>rfs are enclitic (181 c). -In composition <TVf-'</>'Y/1-'' <Tvp.<f>vs (but the Mss. often have <Tvp.<{lr/s and <Tup.<f>fls),
<Tup.<f>w, <Tvp.<f>a(Jt.

785. In the optative <f>ar< does not occur, perhaps by chance (461, 683 a). <f>ap.ev, <f>a<v are ordinary Attic ; <f>al'YJp.<v, <f>al'YJ<Tav are rare. 786. Middle forms in present, imperfect, and future are dialectic. 787. oil <f>'YIP.' means 1ejuse (Lat. nego). ln the meaning assert, <f>a<TKW is commonly used outside of the indicative. In the meaning say often, <f>a<TKw is used. <f>'YJ<Ta and <f>f,<Tw are aor. and fut. in the meanings say yes and assent. <f>'YJP, (<f>'YI (and <f>ava<) often correspond to Lat. inquam, inquit. 788. <f>'YI" and <f>w, <f>a.l"f/" may have an aoristic force. are hoth imperfect and second aorist.
<f>'Yiv and poet. <f>&.p."f/>

783 D. 1. Hom. has <f!<TOa. for <f>ns; subj. <f>f,v and <f>n"' (463 c. D) for <t>fl; imperf. (<f>'YJv, <f>fjv, (<f>"f/<TOa., <f>fj<TOa., (<f>"f/s, <f>fjs, 3 s. (<f>"f/P, rarely <{If), 1 pl. <f>a.p.v, 3 pl. (<f>a.<Tav, <f>a<Ta.v, <f>a.v, <f>v. 2. Doric <f>ap.l, <f>aTl, <f>a.nl; imperf. <f>a, <f> ; inf. <f>ap.<v; fut. <f>li<Tw, <f>li<Top.a<; aor. <f>a<Ta. 3. Aeolic <f>p.t or <f>a.p.<, <f>a.<TOa., 3 s. <f>a<T<, 3 pl. <f>a.a"t. 786 D. Middle forms cf <f>"TIP.l are rare or unknown in Attic (Plato has perf. imper. 71"<</>a<TOw), but common in other dialects; yet the pres. indicative middle is rare. Hom. has imperf. <f>d.f-'71", <f>aTo or <f>aTo, etc., imper. <{lao, <f>a<TOw, etc., inf. <f>a<TOa< (and in choral poetry), part. <f>ap.<vos (also in Hdt. ). These middle forms are active in rneaning.

216

IRIGL'LAR MI-VEIS: ~Jla.L

789. ~JlO.L (~rr-) sit is inflected only in the present system. of the verb-stem appears only before -rat, -ro.
>iJJoa.L 1)1rO.L 1)11"TO.L

The rr

. .

PRESENT

IMPERATIVE

.jcr8ov .jcr6ov

1\JJ.ESa. .jcr8E .jv-ra.L

1)11"0 -ijcr8(1), etc.

1)11"0 1)11"'1"0

ilflo'l"

. .

lMPERFECT

.jcr8ov 1Jcr81JV

1\JJ.Sa. .j'erSE .jv-ro

The subjunctive and optative are wanting; present infinitive .jcrSo. ; participle 1\JJ.EVOS. a. Uncompounded fJ~J-a< occurs only in Epie, tragedy, and Herodotus. The missing tenses are supplied by ~g-op.a<, tjw and tjop.a<.
790. In place of .fiJW.L we find usually Kal)-'YJp.at in Attic prose and comedy. Ka()'YJILaL sometimes is perfect in memling (I have sat, I have been seated). The rr of the verb-stem does not appear except before

-ro.
PRESENT

lMPERFECT

Indicative Subjunctive

Optative

Imperative

Indicative

s.

1 K6.01)p.O.L 2 K6.01)<ra.L 3 K6.01)TO.L

Ka.9WJJ.O.L Ka.9fl Ka.9ij-ra.L

Ka.9o(p.1JV Ka.Ooi:o Ka.9oi:-ro

K6.91JO"O Ka.OfJcr9(1)

tKa.91JJlo"fiV ( 450) or Ka.OfJI'''l" Ka.9ijcro K6.91JO"O K6.01)TO Ka.9ijcrTo or Ka.Oij-ro K6.81Jcr9ov Ka.01jcr91)V Ka.91]p.e9a. K6.91)<r9E K6.91JVTO Ko.Oijcr9ov K0.9fjcr91JV Ka.91]p.e9a. Ka.OijcrOe Ka.9ijvTO

D. 2 K6.01Jcr0ov Ka.9ijcr9ov Ka.Oo i:crO ov K6.91Jcr9ov 3 K6.91Jcr9ov Ka.OijcrOov Ka.9o(cr,hJV Ka.91Jcr9wv P. 1 Ka.91]p.e9a. K0.9t:>JloE9a. K0.90(JJ.E9a. 2 K6.91Jcr0e Ka.OijcrOe Ka.0oi:cr9e K6.01J0"9E 3 Kci.01JVTO.L Ka.Sc\ivTO.L Ka.9oi:v'TO Ka.91jcr9(1)V

Infinitive: Ka.9ijcr9a.; Participle : Ka.OiJJJ.Evos.

a. Tbe imperative has Ka8ov in comedy for Ka871 a-o. In the imperfect Ka8fJp.7Jv is used about as often as Ka8fJp.7Jv. b. The missing tenses are supplied by Ka8jof-'a<, Ka8ijw, Ka8ig-of-'a<.
791. KELJlO.L (Kn-) lie, am laid, regularly used in the present and imperfect instead of the perfect and pluperfect passive of r:()'YJf.tL place. 789 D. Hom. bas aTa<, and ~aTa< (twice), aTo, and i!aTo once (once 7jvTo). is pro bably the correct spelling for d-. 790 D. Hom. has 3 pl. Ka8daTo (KaiJf}aTo ?). Hdt. has KaTaTa<, KaTlaTo; Ka8i;o-To not Ka8'ijTo. 791 D. Hom. has 3 pl. prPs. K<iaTa<, KaTa<, KovTa< ; imperf. KEvTo, K<iaTo, KaTO, ter. KfO'KfTO i SUbj. Ki;TaL, and KfTaL for KE(!)-l-TaL i fut. KfiO'Of-'aL. Hdt. bas 3 sing. pres. KETa< and KETa<, 3 pl. KaTa<; imperf. ~KE<To, pl. KaTo.
~-

794]

IRREGULAR MI-VERBS: oLfia.

PRESENT

217
}MPERFECT

Indic.

Subj.

Opt.

Imper.
KELO'O

Indic.
KELjlo']V
~KEI.O'"O
KELTO

Sing. 1 2 3 Dual2 3 Plur. 1 2 3

KELjloO.
KEtO"O.l.

KELTO. KELO'&ov KEt0'9ov KELjloE9o. KEL0'9E KEi:VTo.

K'JTO..

KOTO

Kd0'9U> Kei:O'Oov KEL0'9U>v

iKn0'9ov KEW01]V KELjlo00.

(8o.) K']0'9E ( KO.TO.) KOJVTO. (11'p00')KOVTO

KE'L0'0E KEL0'9U>v

iKEL0'9E
KHVTO

Infinitive : KEi:0"9a.; Participle : KELjloEvos. Future : KdO'ojloa., KELCT1J or KElO'u, KELO'ETa.t, etc. a. In the subjunctive and optative KL becomes Ke- before a vowel ( 43). b. Compounds have recessive accent in the present indicative and imperative: 1f'ap&.KL}Joru, 1rap&.Keuro, but 7rapa.KtiiJa.t. 792. T)-jLL (cp. Lat. a-io) say occurs only in the present and imperfect 1 and 3 sing., and is used in parentheses (as Lat. inquam, inquit). Forms: -l}p.l, -~}til; 7jv, 7j. Examples: 1ra., -l}p.l, 1f'a. boy, I say, boy! (emphatic repetition). 7jv o' yw said I, 7j o' 8s said he (lll3).
793. XPlJ it is necessary is really an indeclinable substantive meaning necessity with the verb understood, In the present indicative tiTi is to be supplied. Elsewhere XPTJ unites with the forin of the verb to be supplied; as subj. XPV (XPTJ + V), opt. xpel1J (XPTJ + 1J), inf. xpfiva.t (XPTJ + eva.t), part. indeclinable 'xpewv (xp1) + 6v) ; imperf. xpfiv (xp1) + 7jv), and Jess commonly <xpfiv with an augment because the composite character of xpfiv was forgotten, fut. xpfitiTat
(xp1)

+ ~tiTa<).

a. ,.,.6XP'l it suffices has pl. :rroxpwti<, part. 1f'oxpwv, -xpwtia, -xpwv, imperf.
.7rXP1J, fut. d1roxpf}tie<, aor. d7rXP1Jtie.

794. oLfia. (1, d-{, ol- originally with F; cp. Lat. video) know is a second perfect with the meaning of a present, and formed without redu}Jlication. The second perfect and second pluperfect are infiected as follows :
792 D. Hom has ii, Doric f}Ti, Aeolic 7jti<. 793 D. Hdt. )las XPTJ, xpfiv, xpfiva.t, but rhrpoxp~, 1roxpilv. 794 D. J. Hom. has ooas a 337, top.ev, ttiatit (ttitiatidorftiati< I 313); subj. elOt!w 7f' 2313 and low (? ~ 235), et/5op.ev and doeTe with short thematic vowels; inf. t/5p.eva.t, ti5JJ-ev; part. l/5va and l/5ua.. Pluperf. fioea, fi151JtiiJa. T 93, ?jdom( -1)s ?) X 280 with 1J as augment (433), fi/51J, fioee, >ieloe< ' 206, 3 pl. ttia.v for l/5-tia.v. Fut. etO"op.r:u, inf. elorw.!p.ev and -tietv. 2. Hdt. has ooa.s, top.Ev and ot/5a}LV (rarely), otoiitiL, subj. ell5fw, plup. fioea., va (yoEL ?), -vMaTe, fioetia.v, fut. elof}tiw. 3. Dor. has ttiii,ut (pl. ttia.JJ.ev, ttia.vn) and ooa.. Boeotian bas (TT'<' for ((J'T'<'. Aeolic has fOloTJJJ.' and oOa..

218
Indic.

lRREGULAR Ml-VElS: ota.

SECOND PERFECT

[795
SECOND PLUPERFECT

Subj.

Opt.

Imper.

Indic.

Sing. 1 ot!la. 2 olCT6a. 3 oiSe Dual 2 tCTTOV 3 tCTTOV Plur. 1 2 3

tCTfi-EV teTTE t.,.a;.,.,

et8> el8fls elSfl elSijTov etSijTOV etSwfLEV ElSijTE etS>.,.,

Et8ELTJV et8eCTJs eU)eLTJ etSe"LTOV elSeLTTJV elSELfLEV or elSELTJfLEV dSe"LTE etSeCTJTE ElSe"Lev dSeCTJCTa.v

t.,.e. tCTTW
to-TO V
tCTTWV

or SELv nSTJ ti8TJCT6a. or 'li'SELs nSEL(v)

UCTTOV UITTTJV nCTfLEV UCTTE nCTa.v

teTTE
tCTTwv

or 'li'8EflEV SeTE SeCTa.v

Infinitive ElSva.; Participle etSoos, elSu"La., etSos (309); Verbal Adj. lCTTos; Future etCTofla.L. Compound CTvvoSa. am conscious of 795. The verb-stem has the meaning find out; hence the perfect oia. means I have jou nd out and hence I know. 796. In Ionie and late Greek we find oas, ota.p,<v, etc. These forms are rare in Attic. oO"IJas occurs in comedy. 797. In the optative dual and plural prose writers have either the shorter or the longer forrns; the poets only the shorter forms. 798. Pluperfect ~v, .ifi5m occur in later Attic (Demosthenes), but are suspicious in earlier writers. ifoO"IJa occurs in the best Mss. of Plata and elsewhere, but it is less correct Attic. ifi57JS is incorrect. fl is rare. rwrov, i!O"r7JV are al most entirely poetic. In the plural ifo!J-<v, ifor<, fiO"av are post-classical. ifo<~J-<v, ifo<r< occur rarely in the Attic poets. 799. oiO"IJa. is from ol/5 + Oa; fO'T from l/5 +TE; r.,.e, from l/5 + e, (83). ((J'P,EP (older ti5p,<v) gets its .,. from fO"TE (87). !O"iO"< is from l/5 + O"avn, with (J' from (Hom.).tO"av= li5-0"a.v with the ending-O"a.v (cp. di;iO"< 704d). ifli7J is for i}-<lli7J with 7J as augment (433).
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE VOICE-FORMS, ETC.

800. Some verbs in the present appear in classical Greek in the active voice only, as {3avw go, p7rw creep, rp~w tremble; others in the middle only, as ao!La' leap, {3ov>..o0 a, wish, Ka07J0 at sit, K,uat lie. 801. Outside of the present some active verbs show middle fonns especially in the future, as {3~cro!LU' shall go, .Kovcro!Lat shall hear (805); and some verbs exclusively or chiefly deponent show active forms especially in the perfect, as y[yvo!La' becorne y~yova, !La.vo!LU' mge p.p.7Jva, 8pKo!LUL poet., 2 aor. 8paKov, perf. 8f8opKa. , 802. For the passive voice the middle fonns sufficed in most cases; many middle futures are still used passively (807), as 8tK~cro-

802 D. I-Iom. has Kr!J-7J" was killed, EO'XOf-'7JV was sta!Jild. Cp. also iJo<O"rlf-'7J and afo<O"IJ<v (ali5o!J-a<?'espect), OiO"a.ro and wiO"IJ7J (otop,a.t think), <xo7>.wO"p,7Jv aud <xo'Aw87Jv (xoow emage).

V ART A TIO:'\ OF VOICE: .FliTUI MIDDLE

219

p.at shall e wronged; and traces of the passive use of the aorist middle appear in Hom., as ~f31'JTO was hit. 'rhis use was largely abandoned when -'Y}v and -81'}v came to be used as special marks of the passive. Originally neither -'l'Jv nor -81'Jv was passive in meaning. 803. The second aorist in -11 is primarily intransitive and shows active
infiection (as lftrT1J> stood). Many so-called passive f01ms are in fact merely intransitive aorists of active verbs, as ppvrJ from plw jlmo, KaT<KlvrJv from KaraKivw lie down, and do not di:ffer i,n meaning from the aorists of deponent verbs, as p.avrJv from p.alvop.at Tage. 804. The aorists in -OrJv that are called passive are often active or middle in meaning, as ijtr81Jv took pleasuTe in from ijilop.a<, iwxv87Jv Jr-lt ashamed from altrxvw disgTace, altrx6vop.at am ashamed; chp-yl!r81Jv became angTy from op-yl!;w
angeT.
FORMS OF ONE VOICE IN THE SENSE OF ANOTHER

805. Future Middle with Active Meaning. -Many verbs have no active future, but use instead the future middle in an active sense: ap.f3avw ta.ke ~'-f;op.at, ytyvwawn know yvwcrop.at.
a. Most such verbs denote a physical action, as the action of the vocal organs; the action of the organs of sight, hearing, smell, touch ; the action of throat, mouth, lips; bodily activity in general, voluntary or involuntary; and other aspects of the physical side of human organism.

806. In the following list of active verbs with middle futures those marked * have also an active future ; those marked t sometimes have an active future in late Greek. Ali verbs ad ding -av- to form the present stem (523, b, c) have a middle future except at'J~avw, \av8avw, 6</>t!fKavw. Verbs denoting praise or biarne usually have both an active and a middle future.
*/.ilw triKovw aaa!;w tap.apravw t..-avTaW t1ro\auw *ap1ra!;w j3aill!;w j3aivw tj3tbw *J3\f,.w {3\w"""'

<lp.l *KM!;w *p.w *KG.lw *-yrJpa!rKW *..-atvw Kpd!;w "frJpVw lpuy-yavw t Kv..-rw -yt-yvdJ!fKW l!rOlw t KWKDW *-yp!;w 8G.up.ri!;w a-yxavw oaKVW *8w ap.j3avw ilelilw *Ot-y-yavw atrKW (see 703) -Ov!f!TKW p.av8avw -tilpdtrKw Op0trKW *veuw *litwKw Kap.vw v.!w swim *-yKwp.ta!;w K<( -y )xavw
tj3oriw

t-yeM"'

oiila tolp.w!;w ooV!;w top.viip.< opriw ororv!;w oVpw ..-G.l!;w ,.a.,.xw f,.1J/5a.w 1rivw

*rlKTW ..-i..-rw ..-w trMw (gT7Jv) ..-vw rp.!xw *..-oO.!w rpw-yw p.!w TV')'XCVW Tw8ri!;w *pocp.!w ftr-yaw </>e!!-yw ftrtw..-aw *<P8rivw trKW7rTw Xcf.O""KW ftr..-ouilctjw x.!!;w (late) *xwplw

a. Compounds of xwp.!w with 1ro-, !fu-y-, ..-apa-, 1rpotr- have both active and middle futures; other compounds have only the active futures.

807. Future Middle with Passive Meaning.- In many verbs the future middle has the meaning of the future passive, as lhw wrong,
&.tK~crop.at

shall e wronged.

220
808.

V ARIA 'l'ION O.F VOICI<:: FUTURE MIDDLE

[8o8

The following verbs commouly use tlw future middle in a passive sense.

(Ail of these have the tuture pa<;sive iulate Ureek, except

"fvow not to know "fwvltol-'a< conte nd <Kw wrong p,</J<1Tf3TJrw disp~tte vol"fvp,< open, C.I.A. etp"fw shut h1r l\Vvw wash ivepevw lie in

.!-'</J<iTf3TJrw, Uw, Elp"fw, v<pe6w, olt<w, 7ra<a"fW"fW, 7rpoa"fop<6w, iTTp<pAow, iTTU"fW.) l-'a1Trt"f6w whip out olt<w inhabit wait op,oo"fw agree jo1 ovELoi5w rPp?uach l7rt{3ouevw plot 7radia"fw"fw eduagainst cate ~xOalpw hate 1roep.w wage war l!xw have 7rpoa"fope6w joteOepa7re6w tend tell Kw!lw p1event ITraOp..w measure 1Trpe{3Mw rack ITru"fw hate (poet.) rap.rrw disturb rTJpw gua1d rp</Jw 1WU1"ish :pif3w _?'Ub uw 1am </J<w love <fJu.rrw guatd

2. 1054 (not found iu literature) iipxw rule o<ild.iTKW teach Uw prmit

809. Some verbs use in a passive sense both a future middle form and a future passive form; on the difference in meaning see 1738.
ll."fw lead, ll.l;o,..a<, xO?]ITop.a<. 1rarw deceive, 1rarf,1Top.a<, ll;a7rarTJOf,iTop.a<. al;vw increase, al;f,iTo!-'a<, al;TJ0?]1Top.a<. {3M1rrw hu1t, {J.'{lop.a<, {3a{3f,iTop.at. i!TJMw rnanijest, TJWITop.a<, TJwOfwop.a<. 51'Jp,t6w fine, 5TJJJ.LWITOp.at, 5TJJJ.LW0?)1Top.aL. t<aw call, Kaop.a< (rare), KTJOfwop.a<. t<TJpVrrw proclaim, t<'Y}pvl;o!-'a< (rare), KTJpu)(Of,iTop,a<. t<pivw judge, t<ptvop.a<, t<ptOf,iTo!-'a<. "fw say, l;op.a< (tragic), exO?]ITop.at. "/..e[,.w leave, ,.o?..elfop.a<, 7roEL</J0fwoi.<a<. p.aprupw bear witness, p.aprvpf,iTop.a<, p.aprUpT]Of,iTop.at. 1rOLOpKW /)esiege, 1rOLOpt<f]iTO!J.at, 1rOLopt<T]0fJITOJJ.aL. 1rpthrw clo, 1rpd.l;op.a< (rare), 7rp'iix0fwop,a<. iTrepw deprive, 7rOITTEpf,iTop.a<, 1rOITTEpTJO?)iTop.a<. rp,.w honour, rp.fwop,a<, rip.TJOfJiTop.at. u{Jpl5w insult, u{3pwp.a<, u{3ptiT0f,ITO!-'aL. </Jpw bear, otiTop.a<, oiiTOf,iTop.a<, KaTEv<xO?)iTop.a<. </Jpovw : Kara</Jpovf,iTop.a< despise, t<ara</Jpov'Y}O?]iTo!-'a<. GJ</JEW aid, GJ</J<?ITOp.at, GJ</J<T]0?)1Top.at.

810. Middle Deponents.- Deponent verbs wh ose aorists have an active or middle meaning with middle forms are called middle deponents. The aorist passive of such verbs, when it ocmus, has a passive force. Thus alTu5.ofW.L acc1tse, rjnmip:r;v accused, rjrLiieTJv was accuse. Others 813 c. 811. Passive Deponents. -Deponent verbs whose aorists have the passive form but the active or middle meaniug are called passi'ue deponents j as j3o{)A.of1-aL wish, aor. ij3ov-IJ8TJv The future is usually middle in form. Most passive deponents express mental action of some sort. 812. In the following list verbs marked * have a future passive form and also a future middle form ; as l!ta"fop.a' convmsf, aor. o<eMxOTJv conversed, fut. o<al;op.aL and ta?..<xO?]iTop.a< shall converse. Bnt i)o,ua' talee pleasure in has only T]iTIJf,ITo,ua<, and Tjrr.o!-'a< yield to, am worste !Jas only TjrrTJOf,iTop.a<: Verbs with t have also an aorist middle, but it is less common, or poetic, or late Greek.

lli3]

VARJATlN Ol<' VOlCE: DEl'ONE};TS

"''~TTt.oJLa<

221

t d'Y"IL"' admire, i}'YurO'Y)v

yield to,

~rr1}8rJv

*t aloo,ua< fe el shame,

iJOt!<JO'Y)v

t.Mo,uat (nsu. poet.) wander, iJ"I>.1}07Jv t.,ut"I>.Mo,ua< contend, i},u<?j07Jv tt.pvo,ua< deny, 1Jpv1}07Jv *11x0o,uat am grieved, 1Jx01:<J07}v {3ovo,uat wish, if3ov1}0'Y)v (430) ol:o,uat want, io<i;0'Y)v . i'UpKo,ua< (poet.) see, MpxOrJv o6va,ua< am able, iovv1}07Jv (430) livavnbop.a< oppose, iJvavnwO'Y)v E1rt<Jra,uat unde1stand, -fJ7rt<Jr1}0'Y)v ~pap.at pt.w love, iJpt.rrO'Y)v <l.a{3o,ua.< am cautious, 'Y)fla{3i;07}v tfioo,ua.< take pleasuri! in, 1/rr07Jv

( v- )O,uo,ua< consider, liv<O,u1}07Jv (1rpo-)O,uo,ua< am eager, 7rpo<O,u1J0rJ *t(ata-)M'Yof<a< converse, at<XOrJv (7r<-),u"/>.op.a< care for, li7r<,U<1}07Jv (,u<ra-),u"/>.o,ua< 1egret, p.<r<p.<1}0'Y)v (1ro-)voop.at despair, 7r<vo1}07Jv *(ota-) voo,uat 1ejlect, ouvo1}07JV (iv-) voo,uat think of, P<voiJOrJv t(brt-)voop.a< think on, 7r<vo1}0rJv t (1rpo-) vol:op.at foresee, p1ovide, 7rpo<voi}O'Y)v otop.a.t think, ,P1}07Jv </Jtorp.o,ua.< am ambitious, i<f;tor,uf}07Jv

a. Some verbs use either the aorist middle. or aorist passive without distinction, as ivavl!;o,ua.< bivouac, 1rP.'Y,Uct'Tuo,ua< am engagee! in. b. Some verbs use both, but prefer the aorist middle, as a7roKpivo,ua.< answer, :rroo'Yo,ua. speak in defence, ,up.<f;op.a< blame. c. Sorne verbs use the aorist passive in an active or middle sense, as :rropo,ua< doubt, pass. be disputed, aor. 7J1ropfJOrJv; 1rpt.w prove, 1rpt.o,ua< try, aor. E1r<<pilOrJv (less often E1rLp.rra,u7Jv), fut. 1rpfirro,ua. and. 1r<<p.01}<Jo,ua.t. ipt.w (poet. lpa,ua<) love has 7Jp.<J07Jv fell in love with, fut. parr01}rro,ua<.
813. Deponents with Passive Meaning.- Some deponent verbs have a passive m~ning. 'rhis is avoided by good writers in the present and imperfect or future passive, is not frequent in the aorist, but is common in the perfect and pluperfect passive. Thus 7rptvErat (7l'EKp{(J.q) ravra this an.ncer is (was) made is not good Greek. Few verbs show the passive meaning in most of these tenses; as &vofM<t bu y, am bought, wv-)()YJv was bought, cf.JV'Y}fM<t have bought, have been bought.

a. Present and Imperfect: 'Ywvi!;oJJ.aL contend, am contended fo1, {3tt.!o,ua< force, am forced, ,ua.lvo,ua< mrtltreat, am malt1eated, wvo,uat uy, arn bought. b. Future l'assive: 1rapv<!o,uat deny, a7rapvrJ01Jrro,ua<, ~p'Y.!;op.at wurk, do, p'Yaa-0-IJrrop.at.

c. Aorist Passive: These verbs (middle deponents, 810) have also an aorist
middle; the aorist passive is used in a passive sense: 'Ywvl!o,ua< conten, a.l!d!o,ua< harass, alvlrro,ua< speak darkly, alnt.o,ua.t accuse, t.Kio,ua< heal, {3<t.!;o,ua< force, Oxo,ua.< receivA, l'iwpt!o,ua.< present, lp'Yt.!;o,ua< work, do, iJ'Yo,ua.t lead, O<t.o,uat behold, tt.o,ua< heal, Krt.o,ua< acqui1e, v,ualvop.at maltreat, wf3aoJ1.a< abuse, J1..UDJ1.a< irnitate, oo<{JtJpoJ1.a.' lament, 1rpor:j>arrl!;o,ua< feign an excuse, xpt.o,ua< use, wvo,ua.t lmy. 7roKpivo,uat has a'lr<Kpivaro answe1e, a71'<Kpl07Jv usu. means was sqJantte. d. Perfect and Pluperfect: These verbs use the perfect middle in the middle or the passive sense: 'Ywvl!;o,ua< conte nd, alvlrro,ua< speak da1kly, alnt.o,uat accuse, t.1roKpfvo,ua< answm, 71'oo'YoJJ.a< maTee a dP,fence, {3tt.!o,ua< fone, ivOp.o,ua.t (:onsider, ~p'Yt.!;o,ua., work, do, djxo,ua< pray, -iJ'Yo,uo.< lead, Krt.o,ua<

222

VARIATION OF VOICE
acquire, Xw{J&.op,a.L abuse, p,TJxav&.op,a devise, p,p.op,a irnitate, ?rapp'YJO"Latop,aL speak boldly, ?roXrevop,cu act as (discharge the duties of) a citizen, ?rpa:yp,aTEvop.a am engaged in, O"Kf-rrrop,a view, xp&.op.a use, wvop,a.L bu!J.

814. Active Verbs with Aorist Passive in a Middle Sense.- The aorist passive of some active verbs has a reflexive or mi.Jdle sense, either sometimes or always. Thus Evcppa{vw gladden, TJcppavBYJv rejoiced, K'ivl.uJ move, ~K'iv~BYJv was rnoved or moved myselj, cpa{vw show, icprivYJv showed rnyselj, appeared (icprivBYJv usually was shawn). a. These verbs are often called rniddle passives. b. The middle and the passive form of the future of such verbs is often found, the middle being frequently preferred. 815. A orist Passive and Future Middle forrns: disgrace, ~O"xvvOTJv felt op-yl!;w anger, wp-yi0"8TJv became angry, asharned, aiO"xvvop,a.L Op-ywp.cu avLd.w vex, i]v,&OTJv felt vexed, &.vLiiO"op.a.L opp.d.w incite, wpp.?)8't)v Set OUt, opp.?jO"OJI-O.L l?rei-yw urge, i]71'EiX87Jv urged, i'll'el~op.a.L 1rel8w persuade, ?rl0"8TJv obeyed, ?relO"op.a.L eotppalvw gladden, TJUif!pav8TJV rejoiced, ?rav&.w cause to wander, ?rf..av?]O'tlv <Oif!pavop.a.L wandered, ?rll.av?)qop,a, Kvw move, hv1}8TJv rnoved (besti1'1'ed) 1ropevw convey, brop<UOTJv rnarched, ?rornyself, Kv?jO"op,a.L KoLp.d.w put to sleep, hop.1}87Jv lay down pEVU'op.at. to sleep, KoLp.?jO"op.a.L if!o(3w ter1ijy, lif!o{J?]O't)v was afraid, cpoJ\ii1rw vex, f..71'1}8TJv grieved, v?r?jO"op.a (3?]0"op.a.L a. av&.-yop.a.L set sail, Kar&.-yop.a.L land, o1r f..l!;op.a arm my self, 'opp.l!;op.aL lie at anchm, generally have an aorist middle.
aiO"x6vw

816. Aorist Passive and Future Passive forrns :

JI-LfJ.VJO"K~ remind, lp.v?j0"8TJv 1ernembered, O"cpaHw trip up, deceive, lO"if!d.TJv erred,
JLVTJ0"8?jO"OJLO.L O"Tpcpw turn, lO"rp&.if!TJv O"op.aL
8~ 7.

turned,

. failed, qcpaf..?jqop,a.L O"Tpacp?]- r?]Kw cause to melt, lrd.KTJV languished, raK?]O"op,aL

dissolved,

Passive A orist and Middle and Passive Future forms:

d.ll"a.d.TTW 1'elease, ali"7]d."'f7]V eparted, a1rad.~OfJ.U.L, a1ra.J\J\a-y?jO"O}LU.L. cpalvw show, rpd.vTJv appeared, cpavop.a.L, rpav?)qop.a.L (819).

818. Some verbs have a passive aorist rarely in a middle sense; with the middle aorist in a different meaning. Kop.l!;w bring, Kop.l0"87Jv betook myself, Kop.LO"d.p.TJv carried off. O"<j}!;w save, O"w8TJv saved myself (was saved), lO"wO"d.p.TJv saved for myself. if;evow deceive, tp<60"8TJv deived my self ( was deceived), y;wO"aJL'YJ' lied.
8~9. In some verbs showing lst and 2nd aorist, or lst and 2nd perfect, the first tenses are generally transitive, the second tenses generally intransitive. The future active of these verbs is transitive. In sorne transitive verbs the perfect ( usually the 2nd perf.) is intransitive.

8rg]
i.yw..,.~:

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE

trans. Kard:yvp.t break,
-ii~a ;

223

in trans. Kartlyvup.at b1eak, 2 aor. -ed"('JV;

2 perf. -ii-ya. am broken.

j3a.lv111 go : trans. {Jf}uw shall cause to go, 1 aor. i!fJ71ua, Ion. and poet. ; in trans. 2 aor. ~{J71v went, pf. {:UfJ'JKa have gone, stand fast. ~~~~: trans. cause to enter, sink, put on, ovuw, ~oua, ooiiKa; in trans. enter, pass under, ovop.at, ovw, 2 aor. ~ov dived, went down, ooKa have ente1ed, gone down. In prose usually Karao6w make sinlc, Karoua, Karai56uw; Karaovop.at sink, Karai56uop.at, Karov. -Of anothe1' s clothes, evi56w (evloCTa) means put on, a1roo6w hi56w (.,.oiiua e~loiiua) mean talee off; of one's own clothes, lvOfJop.a< and ivoiiv mean put on, a..,.oo6op,at iKo6op.at ( a..,.loiiv <~loiiv) mean

talee off.
'yELpw: trans. rouse, wake up, ryepw, 1fyetpa, etc. ; in trans. -yelpop.at wake, am awake, iyep!Jf}uop.at, 1nlpiJ7Jv, 2 aor. 1}yp6p.'JV awoke, 2 perf. iypf}yopa am awake. tcrT'I]"'' set: trans. urf}uw shall set, 1 aor. ~O'T'T/O'a set, euriJ'f}v was set, turap.at set for myself, urf}uop.at, eur7Juap.7Jv. Four active tenses are intrans. : 2 aor. l!p-r1Jv (set myself) stood, pf. ~O'T'T/Ka (have set myself) stand, a1n standing, e!urTJK'J stood, was standing, 2 perf. ~urarov stand, fut. pf. u-rf}~w shall stand. So also 'tu-rap.at set myself, stand, tr-rf}ffop.at. N. -The same distinction prevails in the compounds : avln7JP.' raise up, avu-r1Jv stood up, a<f>lo-r7JJI.' set o:ff, cause to revolt, a1rlu-r'T/v stood o.ff, revolted, a<f>lur'fJKa am distant, am in ?'ev olt ; l<f>lur'TIJI.' set ove1, i1rlo-r7Jv set my self ove1, e<f>u-r7JKa am set over; Ka1Jlur7JJI.' set dawn, esta!Jlish, Ka-rfur7Jv established myself, became established, Ka.IJlur1JKa am established. The aorist middle has a different meaning: Ka.T<urf}ua-ro established for hirnselj; uuvlur7JJI.' int1oduce, unite, uuvo-r7Jp.ev banded together. ).E(.,.., leave: trans. Xel'fw, I!X,.,.ov, XXot7ra have left, have failed, am wanting. Xel.,.op.at mid.= remain (leave myself), pass. =am left, am lejt behind, am inferior; 2 aor. mid. eXt.,.6p.7Jv left for myse~f (in Ho nt. was left, am inferior), .'Ael'fop.at willleave for myself, will1emain, be left. p.a.lvw: trans. madden, hp.aivw, -p.avw, -p.7Jva; intrans. ?'age, p.alvop.at, p.avop.at, ip.v'f}v, 2 perf. p.lp.7Jva am raging. (;'}..).;:; .... ., trans. rlest?oy (perdo), d.1r6'A!p.t 7 -oXw, -<hXeua, -o'Aw<Ka have ruined (perdidi) ; in trans. pe1ish (pereo ), a..,.6}..Xup,at, -oXop.at, 2 aor. -wMp.7Jv, 2 perf. -6Xw'Aa am ruined ( perii). 11"EL8111 : trans. persuade, 1reluw, l!1retua, .,..,.e<Ka have persuaded, 1relu1J'Jv, 'l!"etuiJT]uop.at; intrans. (pe1suade myself) obey, believe, .,.e[IJop.a<, 1relo-op,a<, l1rfluiJ1}v, .,.(.,.etup.at am convinced; 2 perf. .,.(.,.otiJa I trust ( = 'lrturew) is rare in prose . .,..qyw..,.: trans. fix, make fast, .,.fJ~w, l[.,.7J~a, l1rf}xiJTJv; intrans. am jixed, freeze, 'l!"TJ"(vvp.at, 1rayf}uop.a<, i1ra'Y'1"' 2 perf. 'lrf71"'T/"fa am fixed, frozen . .,.tvw drink: 2 aor. ~1rwv drank, 1 aor. l!1rua caused to clrink. 1r1jTTw: trans. terrify, h1rXf}TTw, Kara.,.Xf}rrw, "Tr'fJ~a; in trans. am affrighte, iK1rTJTTOJ!.O.t 7 -7r"('JV . ..,.piiTTIII do: .,.(.,.piixa (probably late) ha'Ve done, ,.(,.paya ha'Vefared (well or ill)

ano. ha'Ve done.

-pf}~w, tpp7J~a ; intrans. break, burst, pf}yvup.at, -payf}uop.at, lppy']v, 2 perf. l!ppwya am broken. crj3vwp.: trans. extinguish, put out, a..,.ou{Jvvvp.t, a1ru{3eo-a, a..,.eu{Jio-07Jv ; intrans.,

pf)yw"' : trans. break,

224

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE

(82o

be extinguished, go out, :rrocr{:Jlvvvp.a.t, :Tro<T{:Jf,<Top.at, :rrl<TfJTJ went out, .,.l<TfJTJKa. am extinguished. crfJ.... w : trans. make 1'0t; in trans. rot, <Tf,'Trop.at, <Tti'TrTJV 1'otted, 2 perf. <T<T7J'Tr<X. am 1otten. Tf)Kw : trans. cause to rnelt; intrans. rnelt, Tf,Kop.at, h&.K7Jv, 2 perf. T'1'7JKa am rnelted. cf>a.Cvw : trans. show, <j;a.vw, ~<P7Jva., 11'l<j;a"'fKa have shawn, .,.q,a.up.at, <j;&.ve7Jv was shawn, made known; trans. also show, deela1e, cpa.lvop.at, <j;avop.at, <j;TJvtip.TJv showed (rare and poetic in the simple form; 11'<<f>TJvtip.TJv declared is common); intrans. show oneself, appear, <j;alvop.a.t, <j;avf,uop.a.t and <j;avop.at, <j;tiv7Jv appeared, 2 perf. 1rl<j;7Jva. have shawn myself, appemed. The middle means show oneself, appea1; the passive, am shawn, am made evident. <f>a.vf,uop.a.t means shall appear or shall be shawn, and is not very different in sense from <j;avop.at (but see 1738, 1911). cf>6ECpw : trans. destroy, ta<j;()dpw, -<t>fJpw, -<f>{}<tpa., -<f>8apKa. ; in trans. am ruined, ta.<f>IJ<lpop.a.t, -<<j;Ocip7Jv, -tj>8a.pf,<Top.a.t, 2 perf. otl<j;8opa. am ruined in Hom., have destroyed in Attic poetry. .p;i., : trans. bring forth, produce, <f>uw, l!<f><Ta; in trans. am produced, come irtto being, tj>6op.a.t, tj>{;<Top.a.t, l!<j;vv, 2 perl. 1r<j;Ka. am by nature.

820. Poetic forms: pa.pl<TKw ( p-) fit, 2 aor. ifpa.pov trans. and intrans."'fdvop.a.t am born, t'YHvtip.TJv begat. - p<lKw 1end, 2 aor. ifptKov trans. rent and in trans. shivered. - pd1rw tlwow dawn, 1fpt7rov trans. threw clown and in trans. fell.- 6pvvp.< rouse, 2 aor. (/,popov trans. roused and in trans. have risen.- va'Y<"'fVW<TKw read, vl"'fvw<Ta persuaded in Hdt., 2 aor. vl"'fvwv read, 1ecited. 821. The following are poetic intransitive second perfects: lip.pa. fit ( pa.plG'riw fit, trans.). -l!o\1ra hope (Epie ('1\.,.w cause to lwpe).-dKTJa sorrow (Kf,ow trouble). -6pwpa. have a1isen (5pvvp.< rouse).

PART III
FORMATION OJ:i' WORDS
822. Infiected words generally consist of two distinct parts : a stem and an infiectional ending (191) : 8wpo-v gift, stem 8wpo-, in:flectional en ding v; >.:6o-p..v we loose, stem Al:o-, in:flectional ending p..<iv.

a. The inflectional endings of nouns and verbs, and the formation of verbal stems, have been treated under Inflection. The formation of words, as discussed here, deals primarily with the formation of noun-stems, of verbal stems derived from nouns, and of compound words. Uninflected words (adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, :J,nd particles) are mostly of pronominal origin and obscure; such adverbs as show case forms are mentioned in 341 ff.
823. Sorne stems are identical with roots (1oot-sterns, 193) to which only an inflectional ending, or no ending at all, has been added.
{Joli-s ox, cow

p.-s mouse

eis one (stem <fv-) va fi-s ship 8-f}p wil beast (gen. 81Jp-bs) o1f voice (stem 6,--) K"'Aw1f thief(K"'A:~r--r-w steal) :~rous foot (stem :~roo-)

q,M~

li-s hoy, so1v fla me ( q)'Ay-w burn) xelp ha nd (geu. XELp-6s)

xOwv earth (stem xBov-)

824. Most stems are derived from roots by the addition of one or more formative suffixes.
ow-po-v gift, stem owpo-, root ow ( ol-ow-p.< give), suffix po-. -ypap.-p.a-r-ev-s scribe, stem -ypap.p.anv-, root -ypa</J, suffixes p.ar and ev.

a. Most words are therefore built up from root, suffix, and inilectional ending by a process of composition analogons to that seen in compounds (869 ff.), in which the union of the varions elements yields an idea different from that seen in each of the parts.
825. A stem is p11:rnary if only one suffix is added to the root (Sw-po-v); secondary, when more than one suffix is added to the root

( ypap..-p..a:r-~-.5-s ).
826. There are two kinds of stems: noun-stems (substantive and adjective) and verb-stems. 827. W ords containing a single stem are called sirnple words, as XOyo-> speech; words containing two or more stems are called compound words, as .oyo-yp&.</>o-s speech-writer.
GREEK GRAM.

-15

225

22()
828.

FORMATION OF WORDS

[828

According to the character of the suffi x words are called:

a. Primitive (or Primary): formed by the addition of a suffix either to a root or to a verb-stem to which a vowel, usually ' has been added (485, 486).
Root -ypa<j> : 'Yf"i<j>-w WTite, -yparp-1] wTiting, "(pa<j>-dJ-s write1, 'YPrLf1r/La sornething written, 'YPa!L-!LfJ line. Verb-stem-y<vdn "(<vt!-(J"()a, becorne ("(<vDwrJv, "(l-"( v-oiLa<): "(v<-(J"t-s genes{s, origin; T<p-< (rt!pw bore) : rip<-rpo-v ginet, inst1unwnt jo1 boring.

b. Denominative (or Secondary): formed from a noun-stem (substan-

tive or adjective) or adverb.

'YPa!L-!Lar-evs writer (stem 'Ypa/L!Lar-, nom. 'YPa!Lf.'a) ; <oa<!Lov-l happiness (stem <oa<f.'ov-, nom. <oal!Lwv); otKaLO-(J"VV'rf justice, olKa-w-s just (olK'rf right); <j>l-to-s friendly (<j>lo-s dear); oou?..O-w enslave (ooo-s slave); 'TI"aat-6-s ancient, of old date, from the adverb 'Tfaa< long aga.

829. Suffixes fmming primitive words are callecl primary suffixes; suffixes forming denominative worcls are called secondary suffixes.

a. The distinction between primary and seconclary suffixes is not original and is often neglected. 'l'hus, in o<tv6s te1-rile (i5Et- jeaT), vois a primary suffix ; in (J"KOT<tv6s daTk ( (J"K6ros, 858. 11), it is secondary. So English -ale is both primary (readable) and secondary (cornpanionable). b. It is often difficult to determine wh ether a suffix is addecl to a verb-stem or to a noun-stem: /(J"xv-plJS strong (/(J"xo-s st1ength, /(J"xv-w am stmng). c. A primitive word may be formed from a verb-stem which is itself denominative: ro~w-rf]s bowman from To~<v-w shoot with the bow, derived from r6~o-v bow. A primitive may be formed with a suffix derived from a denominative : <j><"(-up6-s burning ( <j>-y-w burn) with upo from t"(u-p6-s (<-yv-s) sMill. d. A denominative often has no corresponding primitive ; sometimes the latter has been !ost, sometimes it \vas presumed for the purpose of ward-formation by the imitative process al ways at work in the making of language. Thus, Of.'-v-w-v bed, from o<f.'-vo-v ( f.'-W build, const1uct).
830. To determine the root all suffixes must be removed from the stem until only that part remains which contains the fundamental ide a.

a. Most roots are noun-roots or verb-roots ; but originally a root was neither noun or verb (193). Some roots are pronominal, and express direction or position. Greek has many words whose roots cannot be discovered. The form of a root in Greek is not necessarily tbat which Comparative Grammar shows was common to the cognate languages. b. Since the origin of many words, even with the help of tl1e cognate langtlages, is uncertain, we are often at a Joss where to make the dividing line between root and suffix. Suffixes are often preceded by a vowel which may be regarded as a part of the suffix or as an expansion of the root (by some scholars regarded as a part of the root itself). 831. Changes of the root-vowel.- a. The root-vowel is sometimes strong,

FORMATION OF WORDS: SCFFIXES

227

sometimes weak: EL, o (weak ); v, ov (weak v); '1 or w (weak a. or ) p.-p.ct remnant, om-6-s remaining, cp. fl1r-w, l!-/..1r-ov; S"e')'-os team, cp. S"eu')'-v-p., S"v')'-6v yoke ; <I'Irovo-f} zeal, 1reuo-w hasten ; /..f}0-'1/ jorgetjulness, t..av8civw (o.O-) joTget ; 1j8-os disposition, 1!8-os custom, habit ; pwx-p.bs clejt, pf}')'-v-p. bTeak (pa')'-, P'l/'Y-, pw'Y-): Cp. 36. b. often varies with o, sometimes with a. ; '1 sometimes varies with ..,, ')'6v-o-s ojfspTing, ')'l-')'v-op.ctt (')'Ev-) ; -rb v-o-s tone, TElvw (rv-) stretch ; -rpaif>-epbs well-jed, -rpo</>-fJ nourishment, rpf:q,-w 1Wl!Tish ; pw')'-b-s helping, pf}')'-w help. Cp. 36.
832. Root-determinatives.- A consonant standing between root and suffix (or ending), and not modifying the meaning of the root, is called a 1'0 at-determina~~
0

fJa-8-po-v pedestal, from fJalvw go (fJa-) ; li<I-8-w (poetical for e<I8lw) eat, for o-8-w, cp. Ionie l!o-w; 1rf}-O-w (poet.) am full, 1rfj-8-os crowd, 'lr'q-IJ-wp'l/ satiety, cp. 7rlp.-1r'f/-P.L; ra-0-p.bs day' s journey, rri-8-p.'l/ a Tule, from 1crT'f/fJ.' (erra-) ; p.f}-x-w wipe, cp. crp.aw wipe. -On the insertion of cr, see 836.

a. The origin of root-determinatives is obscure. In part they may be relies of roots, in part due to the analogy of words containing the consonants in question.
833. Suffixes. -A suffix is a formative element added to a root (or to a stem) and standing between the root and the ending. Suffixes li mit or particul arize the general meaning of the root; but only in a few cases is the distinct mcaning of the su:ffi_x known to us.

a. The origin of the Greek suffixes is oten obscure; of those inherited from the parent language only sorne wcre employed to make new words ; others were formed by Greek itself (productive' suffixes). From the analogy of the modern languages we infer that some suffixes were o!lce independent words, which, on becoming a part of a compound, !ost their signification. Th us -hood, -head in chilclhood, godheacl are derived from Old Eng. 'had,' Gothie 'haidus' characte1, nature; -ship in ownership, cou!tship, cornes from a !ost word meaning 'shape' ; -ly in jriendly from Old Eng. 'lc' body. So -wo'f/' meaning smclling ( oS"w), as in <vwo'l/' jiagmnt, acquired a range of meaning originally inappropriate to it by passing into the general idea of 'full of,' 'like,' as in 1rotwo'l/s grassy ( 1roli), otp.wli'f/s pesti7 ential ("-o<06'), rf;'f/KWii'f/s 'wasp-lilce ( <I</>fJO. This suffix is distinct from -n~fJ ha'ving the fonn of, lilce (808 a). Conversely, many suffixes, themselves insignificant, acquired a definite meaning by reasou of the root with which they were associated. - Irrespective of its meaning, one word may serve as a mode! for the creation of another word ; as stmvation, constellation, etc., are modelled on contemplation, etc. b. Many dissyllabic suffixes, due to a combination of the final letter or letters of the stem and an original monosyllabic suffix, ada.pt themselves to independent use. Cp. ego-tism for ego-ism because of patriot-ism, -able in laughable and p1obable (from proba-bilis). Tlms, patronymics in -ao'l/,, -<ci.o'f/s 845. 2, 3; words in -cttvct 843 b, 5; -ao 858. 2 a; -ov 851. 1 ; -crTEpos 316; -T'f/S 843 a, N.; -f}m 858. 3 ; -f}i'o 858. 2 b ; -os 858. 2 a ; -bm 858. 3 ; -iilwv 852. 2 ; -T'f/S 843 a, N., 844. 2 a; -rr<p.os 858. 9; -wr11s 843 a, N., 844. 2 a; and many others. c. Simple suffixes are often addcd to case forms or adverbs, thus producing,

228

FORMATION OF WORDS: CHANGES IN STEl\IS

by contamination, dissyllabic suffixes; as. pxa.-o-s ancient 858. 2 a; 7ra.a.t-6-s of old date 828 b, a.pt-v6-s vernal858. 12; q,vu<-K6-s natural 858. b; cp. v-t-o-s marine ( lXs). d. Many compound suffixs are formed by the union of two suffixes, new stems being created by the addition of a suffix to a stem, as: r7Jp-<o 851. 2, <ITK-<o 852. 6, <ITK-Liw 854. See 854. e . Suffixes often show gradations: ortJp, or(l)p, orEp, orp (36 N. 1) as in oo-rf}p, OW-TWp, o6rELpa. (OUt Of 00Tp-~a.) giVe1'; 1f;<f-Tp-La. harp-player; flot) V fl.V: t-p.f}P harbour, Xl-p.v-7) lake ; fl.(I)P fl.O.p: rK-p.wp, TK-p.a.p goal ; (l)p p : o-wp water, o-pi hydra ; (I)V a.v : rhr-wv carpenter, fern. rKra.tva., from reKra.v-!_a ; and in Xt!wv lion, fern. a.<va. (843 b. 5).

834. Changes in stems.- Various changes occur when a su:ffix is

added to a stem.
ptowv small snake ( o<f;<- + toto v from IJ<f;t-s). So wh en a consonant is dropped at the end of a stem: a.io-o-s venerable (a.lows 1'eve1ence, stem aiou-), {3au<e-li kingdom (f3au<eu-s king, stem (3au<ef- for {3a.utE>J.-, 43), ure-o-s 1ejined ( lLurv city, stem ureF- for ure>J.-, 43). Cp. 858. 2. b. A long final vowel of a stem may be shortened before the initial vowel of a suffix: illKa-w-s just, olK7J right, stem o<Ki-. (Properly olKa< is an old case form, 833 c, to which -o-s is added.)

a. The final vowel of a stem is contracted with the initial vowel of a suffix :

c. A final vowel or diphthong may be dropped before the initial vowel of a suffix: uop-li wisdtJm (uop6-s wise), ri}Jrw-s honoured, costly (rp.f} honour, stem rp.-), (3au<<K6-s royal ({3a.u<ev-s king), 1rOr-<K6-s civic (1ro'Air7Js citizen, stem

a.. The finalletter or letters of a consonant stem may be dropped : uw<f;po-uvv7J temperance, moderation ( uw<f;pwv temperate, stem uw<f;pov-), p.e'A-uoptov little song (p.-os song, p.eeu-), 7]8-w6-s genuine ('A7J8f}s -<s t1ue). So apparently in the case of 'a vowel stem in oeu1r6-uvvos belonging to the mas ter ( oeu1r6r7Js). e. The final consonant of a stem undergoes regular euphonie change before the initial consonant of a suffi x : (3Xlp.-p.a. glanee ({3Xl1r-w look), otKau-rf}s a judge ( OLKO.-T7)S, from omi!w judge, stem OLKao-), 'TrliT-TL-S faith ( = 7rt8-n-s, from 7rel0-w persuade, stem .,.,()_), ~LS style ( = ey-ut-s, from l"'/-W speak). f. Stems in o have an alternative in e (cp. t7r7ro-s, voc. t1r1re; 229 b). .This e often appears in denominatives: old-w dwell, olK-r7Js house-se1-vant, olKe-o-s domestic (oKo-s lwuse). g. Derivatives of i stems may apparently show win place of ; as urpanw-T7JS soldier (urpa.nil army), 'Ira.<W-r7Js an Italiote, Greek inhabitant of Italy ("Ira'Ali Italy). See 843 a, N. Stems in i have 7J in rp.f}-m honoured (rp.f}, stem rp.i-). h. Vowel stems, especially those derived from verbs, often lengthen a final short vowel before a suffix beginning with a consonant : 7rDl7J-Jl poem, 1rolrr-u-s poetry, 7r0<7J-rfJ-s poet, 7rO<'f/T<-K6-s c1eative, poetical (1rod-w make); oeup.w-r1}-s prisone1 (oeup.6-s, eup.<i fetters). Verbs with stems in a., e, o usually show in derivatives the stem vowel as found in the tenses other than the present; as 07J6-w mani.fest, fut. 07Jw-uw, of}Xw-u<-< rnan~(Pstation ; p6w plough, fut. p6-uw, /ipo-ITL-S arable land, po-rf}p j)lOUghman ," ep-ltrKW ji nd OUt, fut, EUp-f}-ITW, evp-7]-p. discovery, but ep-e-uts cliscovery, ep-e-rf}s discove1er.

'lrOT.).

FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES

229

i. Vowel stems sometimes insert a vowel bef ore a suffix beginning with a consonant: ?rot-1]-r'l)-s, Ionie for ?roi-rrrs citizen, ?rro:\l-<-IJpo-v (poetic) city. j. Consonant stems, and vowel stems not en ding in o, often show o before a suffix in denominatives; a stem in -ov is th us replaced by one in -o : uw<j>pouvv'1 tempeTance ( url"ppwv tempemte, uw<j>pov-) ; a!p.a.r-6-m bloody (afp. a, -aros blood) and <YK<-6-m shadowy (uKtd. shadow) by analogy to ooM-as wily, 858. 3. Cp. 873-87 5. 835. Severa! substantives are formed by reduplication : cl:y-w'Y-?f tmining (d:y-w lead), io-w-?f food (Ionie t/5-w eat), 'Yl-'Yfis, -avros giant. Sorne, by metathesis (128 a): rp.fj-ut-s Ctltting (rip.-v-w eut). 836. Insertion of sigma. - Between root (or stem) and suffix u is often found, and in sorne cases it has become attached to the suffix. This parasitic letter spread from the perfect middle, where it is properly in place only in stems in r, 15, IJ, or u; as in uxt-u-p.b-s cleaving with u from g-ux<-u-p.ru by analogy to g_<YXL<Y-Tct< for l-ux<o-ra< (uxltw cleave). In -<Y-TTJS the transference was made easier by words like ux<u-r6s cloven for ux<o-ros. 'l'hi~ u appears before many suffixes, and usually where the perfect middle has acguired it (489). fLO.: <Y'!fa-u-p.a spasm ( u?raw Tend, ~<Y'!fa<Yp.at ), Kw-u-p.a comma nd ( K<<v-w comma nd, K<K<V<Yp.at), p.la-<Y-p.a stain (p.talvw stain, p.<p.laup.at).- fLO: <Y'!fa-u-p.6s = <Y'!fa-u-p.a, K<w-u-p.6s command.- fL'l: ou-<Y-P.TJ setting (vw set).- TTJS: K<<vu-r?fs Signal-man, op)('lj-<YT'lfs elanCe?' (6px-{-op.at dance), OVVa-<Y-T'ljS [O?'d (ouva-p.aL am able). Also in opa-u-r?fpws ejficacious (opa-w do), opx?f-u-rpi dancing-place, ?rTJ-<Y-p.6vT} .fulness. -<Y-p. has displaced op., -IJ-p. (832) in 6up.?f odoU?' (earlier 6op.?j), pv-u-p.6s (and pv-IJ-p.6s) 1hytl!rn. 837. Insertion of tau.- In a few words r is inserted before the suffixes p.o, p.a, p.TJ, p.TJv. Thus, i!<j>-<-r-p.?f comman!l (lrPiTJp.t, root , 7}), a-r-JLa depth of the sea, av-r-p.1[ and civ-r-p.?fv bTeath (dTJp.t blow). In ip<r-p.6-v om the r ma,y be part of the verb-stem (lpluuw, 515), and have spread thence to the other words.
FORMATION OF SUBSTA::"'"TIVES
838. Sorne suffixes have a special significance; of these the most important are given in 839-856. But suffixes commonly used with a special function (such as to denote agency, action, instrument, etc.) are not restl'icted to this function. Only a few have one function, as npo to denote comparison.

a. The instrument may be viewed as the agent, as in pat-u-r~p harnmeT, lit. smasheT, from pa.l-w srnash. rpo (863. 16) may express the agent, instrument, or place. Suffixes used to denote actions or abstract ideas often make concrete words, as rpo<f>-?j nurtu1e and nouri~hment, a')'')'<-{0. message (cp. I<:ng. d~vell ing, clothing). 1rop8p.<ov means .ferry, .fe?ry-boat, .fe?ryman's jee. Words originally denoting an agent have lost that rneaning, as 1ra-r'4p jather (orig. protectoT), and in many cases the original force is changed.
839.
AGENCY
rop, rpo, u,

a. The primary suffixes ra, T1Jp, doeT of an action, are masculine.

denoting the agent or

230

FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES

1. ..-a (nom. -r-6-s): Kpt-r{J-s judge (Kpivw clccidr:, Kp<-), K7r-r't)-S thief (K1r-r-w steal), 1f0<7J-r'lj-s poet, i.e. maker (1rot-w make), a't]-T-/j-s jlute-player
(a-w play the flute), p.a0-'1]-r-/j-s pupil (p.avBavw leam, p.afi-<-), iK--r7J-s suppliant (iK-v-o!Joa< come, iK-). Tt)P (nom. -r?)p) : oo-r?)p giver ( Ol-ow-p.t give, oo-, ow-), t!'w-r{Jp saviour ( t!'tf-!;w save). ,-op (nom. -rwp): p-/j-rwp orator ( piw shall say, p-, p<-), d-p't}-Ka have spoken, Krlt!'-rwp founde? (Krl!;w fou nd, Kno-), <r't)p.avrwp commande?, poet. (t1'7J!Joalvw give a signal, tY7Jp.av-). Tpo (nom. -rp6-s) : li-rp6-s physician (tci-o}lat heal). Ev (nom. -v-s): -ypa<f>-v-s WTiter (-ypa<f>-w write), roK-<V-< father (rlKrw beget, TEK-). b. The primary suffixes Tpt3, Tptii, Ttpii, n3 are feminine. TpS (nom. -rpls) : aO7J-rpls jemale jlute-player. "'Pii (nom. -rp<a): 1ro<f}-rpta. poetess (late), lf!a-rpta female harper (lf;aw play tlw harp, lf!a-). .,... pa (nom. -rpa from r<p-~a) : a<.iJ-rELpa fern. of t!'w-r-ljp, /56-rELpa fem. of

2.
3.

4.

5.

1. 2.

3.
4.

lK--ns female suppliant fem. of lK--r7)s. c. The same root or verb-stem may have different suffixes denoting the agent: -y<v--r't)s, -yv-<-rfJp, "t<v-t!-rwp be getter; p.a0-7]-rpls, or p.afi-1}-rpta female pttpil, fem. of p.aB-7]-rf}s. d. Words in -r't}p, -rp,, -<vs are oxytone. Words in -rwp, -r<tpa, -rpta have recessive accent. "\Vords in -T?J< are oxytone or paroxytone. e. See also ov (nom. -wv) 861. 18.

.,..8 (nom. -ns):

oo-r{Jp.

840.

NAMES OF ACTIONS AND ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES

a. Substantives denoting actions often express abstract ideas, and names of actions and verbal abstracts are often used concretely. The following suffixes (ex cept fLD, nominative -~L6-s, and Hr, nominative -os) form feminines; all are primary except tii in some words.
1. .,.. (nom. -n-s) : 1rl<r-rH faith (1rdO-w peTsuade, 1ft0-), <f>a-n-s rumow ( </>?Jp.l

say, <f>a- ). 2. ,,.. (nom. -a-H): e~<~ style ("f-w speak), 1fol7)-<rL-S poetry (1rod-w rnake), <f>Ol-<rt-~ decay (<f>Ol-v-w decay), 06-<rH act of giving or gift (lil-ow-}l< give, oo-, ow-), 8-o-.-s placing (rl-e7J-!<t place, 8<-, 87J-), ra-o-.-s tension (for rg-o-<-s 35 b, from rdvw stTetch, r<v-). .,., is derived from n after a vowel (115). 3. o-ii (nom. -t!'li) : in substantives from verbs in -a!;w out of -o.o-kw ; as ooKtp.aO'li examination (oKtp.a!;w examine, ooK"p.ao-). 4. ,." (nom. -rv-s 863 a. 17): rare, poetic a.nd dialeetic, /i-?J-rs eating (poet. lfo-w eat), fJorrr6-s shouting ((3oa-w slwut). 5. J:l-O (nom. -)lb-s, masc.): otw-y-}l6-s pwsuit (ot!.iJK-w pursue), 1frap-~Jo6-s sneezing (1rrap-vv-p.at sneeze). On fJ-p.o see 832, <r-p.o 836, r-p.o 837. Cp. 8(31. 1.

FORMATION OF WOIWS: SCBSTANTlVES

231

6. 1'-a (nom. -JJ:rJ): -yvw-JLrJ knowledge (-y<--yvw-IFKW know), <PfJ-JL'YJ report, omen (<PrJ-1-'l say), r-JLfJ honom (poet. -ri-w honou1), wfJ-JLrJ memory (JL<-JLvr/-IFKW 1emind). See alBo 861. 1. 7. jloi (nom. -JLa): r6'A-JLa dming (rM)-va< clare). 8. EO' (nom. -os, neut.): o-os fe ar, p-y-os cold. 9. a (nom. -iii) : primitive, from verb-sterns, as JLav-lx. madness (JLalvoJLa< rage, JLav- ). Denominative: fJY<JLov-ia. sovereignty ( iJ'YwJ;v leade1), d1<p-ywla lcind service (p-yr-<a from <<p-yTrJS doer of (fOOd deerls). Withont any noun-stem : 'lf"o'AwpKlx. siege ( 'lf"owpKw besiege). V erbs in -vw derived from substantives, as 7ra<il<v-w educate (1ras chil!l), show abstracts in -ICi for (~)-<Ci (43): 1ratofix. education, IFTpaT<lx. campaign (1FTpardJoJLa< talee the field), {3M<'A<ix. 1'eign, kingdom ({3aiF<<v-w am king). 10. o, a.: see 859. 1, 2.

b. Many feminine substantives expressing the abstract notion of the adjective are derived fTom adjective stems (a few from substantive or verb stems). Many of these denominatives express quality, cp. Eng. -ness, -hood.
1. Li (nom, -<a) ; from adjectives in -rJS and -oos, -ous, as af}e<<a truth for a'Y}0EIF-<a from arJOfJs t11w; ~vilELa want for vo<(<)1F-<a from vo<'hs needy, 4-l a, 292 d; fi!vo<a kindness for <vvo(o)-<a from <voo-s <livous kind. 2. a (nom. -Iii): <oatJLov-lx. happiness (<oalJLwv happy), IFvp.f.J.axlx. alliance (1FVf.J.f.1.axos fighting along with), !Fo<f>-ix. wisdom (1Fo<f>o-s 1oise). Since r becomes IF bef ore <Ci we have aOava!FiCi immortality ( aOavaTo-s immortal). Cp. 859. . 3. <Tuva (nom. -IFVvrJ): o<Kaw-IFVVrJ justice (lKaw-s just). Abstracts in -IFVvrJ are properly fe m. Of adj. in IFUVOS, as "fr]OO-IFVVT} joy ( "frJ00-IFVVOS joy.ful), -OIFVVrJ by anal ogy in f.J.O-vr-oiFvvrJ mt of divination (JLavn-s seer). See 865. 7. 4. 'T''IJ'T' (uom. -T?)S) : if><6-Tr]S, -TrJTOS frienclship (<f>O-S fTien!l), liFO-TT)S, -TT)TOS equality (tiFo-s equal), v<D-TrJS youth (vo-s young), 1raxii-rrJs thickness (1rax6-s thick). 5. a.8 (nom. -ifs): abstract substantives of number, as rp<-as, -aoos triad (rps). JLov-as, -doos mtit (1"6vo-s alone, single). See also 863 b. 8.
<Vp-os width ( <Vp-6-s bro!td).

c. Sorne neuter abstracts express quality: nx-os speed (rax--s swift), See 840 a. 8. d. A feminine adjective is used substantively in poet. 7r<vvrf} wisdom from ,.,vvro-s tvise; with recessive accent in ~xOpx. enmity from <xOp6-s hostile, OpJLrJ wa1mth from 0<pp.6-s wann. . e. Some compound adjectives in -f}s yield (by analogy) abstracts in -<Ci not in -<<a; as aruxlx. mi.~(ortune from a-rvx-'l)s unfo1tunate. Fluctuation often occurs, as in KaKo'I)Om KaKO'r}Olx. malignity from KaKo-fJOrJs ill-disposed; Old Attic Ur]O<lx. (=Ion. aT}8EirJ) for a'Af}OELa. 841.
RESULT OF ACTION

rrhe result or effect of an action is expressed by the primary suffixes

232
1.
ES

:FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES

(nom. -os, neut.): -yv-os mee, family, stern -yev-e<F- (-yl--yv-op.a; am bo1n, --yev-6p.17v, -yev-), rh-os child, stern reK-fiF- (rlKTw bring forth, reK-), >j;e-os lie, stem 1f;eu-e<F- (1f;d1-w deceive). 2. p.a.T (nom. -p.a, neut.): -yprip.-p.a thing written ( -ypri<{>-w write), v61'}-p.a thought (vow think), 7rOl1'}-p.a poem (1rod-w make), p-p.a hide (p-w flay), rp:q-p.a section (n!p.-vw eut, rep.-, Tp.1'}-, 128 a).

842.

INSTRUMENT OR MEANS OF ACTION

The instrument or means of an action is expressed by the primary suffixes

1. Tpo (nom. -rpo-v, neut.): llpo-rpo-v plough (pb-w plough), M-rpo-v ransom

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

(M-w release, :X.-), <Fe-<F-rpo-v rattle (<Fel-w shake, 624 a), l-oaK-rpo-v teacher's pay (oLori<FKw teach, iax-), :X.ou-rp6-v bath (bathing-water; :X.ou-w wash). 9-po (nom. -Opo-v, neut.): K-Opo-v bar for closing a door (K:X.el-w shut, 832). TplL (nom. -rpa, fern.): 11-K-rpa kneading-t1ough (~nw knead, 11-a-y-), piJ-rpa compact (fpw <pw shall say, lp-, pe-), xv-rpa pot (xw pour, xv-). Tl]p-o- (nom. -rTJp-w-v, neut.): in a few words, as 1ro-r7Jp-to-v eup (1rtvw drink, 1ro- 529) ; 8e:X.K-riJp-w-v spell, cha1m ( 8:X.-y-w charm). See 858. 14. no (rare; nom. -eov, neut.) : rpo<j>ea pay fo1 rearing. See 863 a. 8. po (nom. -p6-v, neut.): 1rr-e-pb-v wing (1rh-op.at fly).

843.

THE PERSON CONCERNED

a. The persan concerned or occupied with anything is denoted by a denominative formed by one of the following secondary suffixes:
1.

(nom. -<il-s, masc.): 'YPJJr/1-ar-ev-s secretary ( -ypri.p.p.a, -aros anything written), lep-eu-s priest (lepb-s sacred), l1r1r-eu-s h01seman (t1r1ro-s horse), xa:X.KeV-$ coppersmith (xa:X.Kb-s coppe1). 2. TiL (nom. -T1'}-s, masc.) : vau-T1'}-s. sailor (va-s ship), ro~b-r17s bowman (rb~o-v bow), old-rTJS house-servant ( oKo-s house,.834 f), e<Fp.cfJ-T?'J-S prisoner (834 h). N.- By anal ogy are formed: ev-TT}-s bed-jellow ( eviJ bed), following oiK,.11-s ; o1r :X.-tr1'}-s heavy-armed soldier ( o1r :X.o-v, o1r :X.a anno ur) following 7ro:X.i-TTJ-S from older 1r6:X.-s; <rrpan-cfJr'1-s soldier ( <Frpantl a1my) following e<Fp.cfJ-T?'JS. See 834 g.
EU

1.

b. The following secondary suffixes form feminine substantives: .a (nom. -Li.) : corresponding to masculines in -eu-s, as ll:peta priestess for

lep-e~-La (lep-eu-s priest), fJMlELa queen ({Ja<FL-ev-s king). See -aLva belo w. 2. ll (nom. -ls) : <j;ap/1-aK-[s SOTCe1ess ( <j>dpp.aKo-v chaTm, poison, <j>app.aK-eu-s sorcere?), Ka7r1'J-ls female huckste1 ( Ka7rTJM-s huckster), <j>uaK-ls female guard ( <j>v:X.a~). 3. TLll (nom. -ns) : corresponding to masculines in -T1'}-s: old-ns house-maid (olK-T?'Js), 1ro:X.Z-ns female citizen (7roi-r1'Js). 4. LTTlL, L<T<TlL (nom. -Lrra, -L<F<Fa) : from ~a added to stems in Tor K (112, 114), as 8fJrrafemale se?jfrom (!1'}T-i_a cer,., 81'}r-6s serf), KlL<F<Fa Gilician woman from KLLK-~a (Kli>.L( Gilieian); ]~.ter, by analogy, {Ja<Fl<<F<Fa queen. 5. a.wii (nom. -aLva) corresponding to masculines in -wv: -aLva lioness (:X.-wv

845]

FORMATION OF WOIWS: SUBSTANTIVES

233

lion), 0<pa7r-atva handmaid ( Opa1r-wv attendant), AaK-atva woman of [.,aconia (AaK-wv a Laconian). Dy analogy, in o stems: MK-atVa she-wolj (MKo-s). -atva stands for -av-~a, -av being a weak form of -wv (833 e, 35 b).

N.- Names of dealers in anything usually end in -1rw7Js, -ov ; fern. -'lrWts, (1rwXw sell), as {3t[3Xw-1rw7Js bookselle1 ([3t{3XIo-v book), qiro-1rW7JS graindeler ( qro-s grain), pr0-1rwts b1ead-wornan ( lipro-s bread). Cp. also xa1r7Jls under tS.
-~os

844.

GENTILES OR PLACE NAMES

Gentiles are denominative nouns denoting belonging to or coming from a particular country, nation, or city. Gentiles are formed from proper nouns by secondary suffixes.
1.
(nom. -s, gen. -lws, masc.), tS (nom. -ts, gen. lo-os, fem.) : I!Xarates -ws, I!Xara"s -loos a Plataean ( 7} I!Mrata); 'Ep<rpt<s an E1etrian (i] 'Ephpta); Meyap<us, Meyapls a MegaTian (r Myapa); AloX<s Aeolian (MoXos, mythical ancestor of the Aeolians). a. -Ls (-loos) may denote a land or a dialect: 7} wpls ('yi]) Doris; 7} AloXls ('Ywrra) the AeoUc dialect. 2 ..,a; (nom. -rrJ-s, masc.), ... ,s (nom. -ns, fern.) : T<')'<d-r7Js, T<')'<i-ns of Tegea ( 7} T<')'a) ; "J;1rapr-t.d-r7Js, Z1rapr-ti-rt< of Spmta ( 7} -:L1rapra) ; Al')'ivfJ-r7Js, Al')'ivi)-ns of Aegina (i] M')'iva); 'J:,vf3ap-i-r7Js, 'J:,v[3ap--ns Sybarite (7} Zu[3apts); "J:,tK<t-w-r7Js, ZtK<<-w-ns Siciliote (iJ "J:,tK<Xlii). a. The endings -ir7Js, -wr7Js are due to analogy ; see 843 a. N. 3. Other gentil es, properly adjectives, end in -Los, -ta, as 'A87Jvao-s, -ala of Athens (a< 'AOi)vat ), MiX'>]<T-w-s for M.rJr-w-s of JJfiletus (MtX7Jros ), '01rouvrw-s of Opus ('01ros); ()Kos, (t)Kii, as 'Iwv-tK6s Ionie ('Iwv-<s Ionians); vo-s, v..] preceded by ii(TJ), i, as "J:,apot-avO-s of Sardis ("J:,apom), Aap;<f;aK-TJv6-s of Larnpsacus(Aaw.f!aKos), Bvsavr-vo-s .Syzantine(Bvsavrwv). See863 b. 12.
Eu

845.

PATRONYMICS

Patronymics, or denominative proper names denoting descent from a father or aucestor, are formed from proper names of persons by means of the following suffixes :
1. Sa (nom. -TJ-s, masc.), S (nom. Bopi:-o7J-s son of Bore as

-<,

fem.) : fem. Bop<cf-s, -os

from Hoplii-s

Stems in a shorten a to a ; from such forms arose 2. a.Sa (nom. -cio7J-s, masc.), a.S (nom. -as, fern.) : e<(Jrt-aiirJ-s son of Thestius fem. 8E<Tn-cls, -aoos

from 8l<Tno-s

From this type arose a new formation : 3. a.Sa (nom. -tarJ-s, masc.), .a.s (nom. -tels, fern.): . <P<p7Jr-tao7J-s son of Pheres fem. <fi<prJr-tcls, -tao-os from <Plp7Js (-7Jros) Il<p<T'IJ-ao7J-< son of Pe1seus (fem. Il<p<T7J-ts, -lo-os) from Il<p<T<v-s TEXap.wv-tao7J-s sun cif Telamon from T<Xa.p.wv ( -wvos)

234

.FORMATlON OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES

4. ~sa (nom. -lo7]-s, masc.),S (nom. -ls, fern.): Tavra-lo7J-s son of Tantalus fern. Tavra-ls, -lo-os from KeKpo7r-lil7]-s son of Gecrops fern. KeKpo1r-ls, -lo-os from son of Oeneus fern. Olv7J-ts, -lo-os from OlvE-lil7]-s son of Leto fern. A71rw-ts, -li-os from A 71 ro-to7]-s

Tdvraco-s KKpo>f (-o1ros) Olveu-s A71rw (279)

5.

Stems in o drop o; stems in Ev (71v) drop v; stems in ot (w<) drop' or 'i:cov (poetic and rare; nom. -iwv, masc.) : Kpov-twv son of Gronus (also Kpov-li7Js), gen. Kpov-tov-os or Kpov-twv-os according to the metre, from Kp6vo-s. 6. ~"'va or i:vii (poetic and rare ; nom. -twv7J or tv71, fern.) : 'AKp<<I-<WV7J daughter of' AKplrno-s 'Aop7J<Ir-iv7J daughte1 of" Ailp7J<Iro-s
:ov

846. Variations occur especially in poetry: a. Hom. ll7J<-lo?)-s, ll>J<-til7]-s, IT7J7]-<io7]-s, and IT7J<-twv, son of IT7J<u-s; 'Arp<-lo7]-s, 'Arpe-t/J7]-s, and' A-tp<-twv, son of' Arp<u-s. b. Two patronymic endings: Taa-'tov-l/J7]-s son of Taca6-s. c. The stem drops or adds a syllable: AwKGt-li7]-s son of AwKalwv, -lwv-os ; Aa!-'1f-<T-ll5?)-s son of A<i!-''lro-s. d. -<o7Js is used in comic formations : K<7rr-l/J7]-s son of a thief. e. -vilis occurs in the dialects, as 'E7r<ti-'ELvwvilii-s Epaminondas. f. -LOs, -<LOs, may indicate descent, as T<<t/-'Wvt< 1rac oh son of Telarnon, Tvvoacp<li 8v-yaT7JP daughter of Tyndareus; cp. Tennyson's "Niobean daughter." 847. A patronymic may include the father, as ITwn<IrpGtT loact the Peisistratidae (Peisistratus and his sons). 848. Most genuine patronymics are poetical and belong to the older language. In the classical period patronymics rarely indicate descent in the case of historical person.s ; as Evp1rlo7Js, 'Apt<Irlil7Js. 849. ]'<fetronymics denote descent from the mother, as !:J.ivac-til7]-s son of !:J.i1.v&.7J, <'Pvp-lo7J-s son of <'P!Mpi. 850. Relationship is sometimes denoted by the suffixes L6o (nom. -tilo-s son of) and .Seii (nom. -<ilf) daughter of) ; as il<rf>-Loo-s nephew, o<<f>-Lof) niece ( o<rp6-s brothe1). PLACE

851. Place may be expressed by the secondary suffixes 1. ~o (nom. -w-v, neut.) : !:J.LOv6rnov (sei!. L<p6v) ternple of Dionysus, "HpacLOv

Heraeurn. Also -e:w (nom. -<a-v, neut.) : from substantives in -eu-s and by extension in others; as xachKe-o-v j01ge (xaK-eu-s coppersmith), 87]0'<-ov Thesurn (8,w<u-s), o-y-<Lo-v place for speaking (M-yo-s speech), /-'OV<I-<a-v seat of the 111uses (p,oqa muse), '0v!-'7rL-EO-v Olympiurn ( 'OMI-'1rw-s Olympian Zeus). 2 .. ..-t]p-o (nom. -rfJp-w-v, neut.): derived from substantives in -rf}p (or -rf}s); as Kpoiirf}p-w-v audito1ium ( Kpoir1}p or Kpoiir1}s hearer), lp-yMT'fJp-LO-v wo1kshop (lnacO'rf}p woTkrnan), f3ovwr1}pwv senate house (f3ovwr1}p or f3ov<vr1}s councillor, sena tor). See 863 a, 8.

FORMATIOX OF WOlWS: SCBSTANTIVES

235

3. rov (nom. -wv, gen. -wv-o~, masc.) : vop-wv apartment for men (v>)p, vi5p-6s
man), l1r1r-Wv stable (l1r1ro-~ h01se), 1rap8v-wv maiden's apwtment, PaJthenon, temple of }>allas (1rap8vo-~ malen), olv-wv wine-cellar (ovo-~ wine), p.1r-wv vineyard (IJ.p.1reo-s vine). .Fonns in -e&>v occur, as 1repurrep-ewv dove-cote ( 1repurrepti cl ove), olvewv. 4. t-r8 (nom. -"in~, fem.): added to wv, .vopwv-Z.ns apa1tment jo1 men, ')'vva<Kwvn~ apartment j01 women. 5. rova (nom. -wv<li, fem.) : po/5-wv<li 1"0Se-becl (p6/5o-v rose). 6. -rpa (rare; nom. -rpi, fem.): opx>)-<r-rpi dancing-plixce (opx-op.a< dance), 1raal-<r-rpi 1crestling-ground (1raal-w wrestle). Cp. 836.
DIMINUTIVES

852. Diminutives are denominatives formed from the stems of substantives by various secondary suffixes.
1.
LO

(nom. -<o-v, neut.): 7ra<o-lo-v little child (1ra~, "tra<o-6~), 6pvi8-w-vsmall bi1d ( 8pv~, 5pv8o~), <r1rio-w-v small shield ( <r"trl~, .<r1rlo-o~ ).

N.- Trisyllabic words are paroxytone if the first syllable is long by nature or position. 2. 8-o (nom. -lo<o-v, neut.) : derived from such words as <r1rlo-w-v; as /;<cj>-lw-v dagger (i;lcj>o~ sword, stem /;<cj>e<r-), [3o-low-v small cow ([3ofi-s), olKio<o-v small house, olK< + <owv (olKl.), lxBvow-v smalljish (lxOos). See 833 b. 3. a.p-o (nom. -r!.pwv, neut.): muo-apw-v little child. 4. t~8-po (nom. -vopwv, neut.): p.e-opw-v little song (p.o~). 5. t~Lo (nom. -wv, ne ut.) : 1r-.w-v little epie or ve1sicle (~1ro~ ). 6. LO"Ko, LO"Kli (nom. -l<rKo~, masc., -l<rK7J, fem.): .v8pw7r-l<rKo-s manikin, ?ra<o-l<rKo-s young boy, "tra<o-l<rK7J young gi1Z. From this cames -<<rK-w in <r?r<o-l<rK<o-v
small shield.

853. Many other diminutives occur, as a.Kvli: in m8aKV7J wine-jar (1ri8os); 8, i8: in up.ai;l~, -loo~ small wagon (ip.ai;a), V7J<rt~, -wo~ islet (vij<ro-s); 8-et~: of the young of animais, as vK-toev~ wo{f's whelp (MKo-~), also oev~ son's son, gJanclson (ulo~); x.o: opra<xo~ young biTd (6prals) chick; x.va: KVlXV7J (and Kvlxvwv, KU<xvls) small eup (Kv</;). Rare or late are -aKiowv, -li<r<ov, -acpwv, -toapwv, -<<rKapwv, wv, 861. 19, -vos, and over 25 ethers. See o, 800. 1. 854. Diminutives are often combined: "tra<o-<<rK-apwv st1ipling, p.e<paK-wv,
p.e<paK-l<rKo~, p.ELpaK-V-wv, p.e<paK-v-li5wv stripling cloaklet (xavl~), scpOpwv insect (sciiov animal). (ppa~

lass), Xav-L<rK-lowv

855. Sorne words, especially such as denote parts of the body, are dimin'ltive in form, but not in meaning; as Kp.vto" 11kull, 87Jplov beast ( = 81)p), 1reolov plain ( 1roov grou nd), ail in Homer, who has no diminutives. Diminutives often employed tend to !ose their diminutive value. 856. Diminutives may express affection, familiarity, daintiness, and sornetimes pity or contempt (cp. da1-ling, lo1d-liny). See the examples under 852, and also 1rarp-lowv daddy ( 1rar1)p), oecj>-low-v dear little b1other, "ZwKpar-lowv dem 8oclcy, dv8pw1r-wv rnanikin. Sorne endings often have an ironical force, as
1rour-.~

rich chu1l, ')'li<rrp-wv jat-belly.

236

FORMATION OF WORDS: ADJI<:CTIVES

FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES

857. Adjectives are formed by the sarne suffixes as are used in substantives, the same formation producing in one case a substantive, in another an adjective. Many words formed with certain suffixes (w, p.o, vo, po, -ro) are used as adjeetives or as abstract substantives (usually feminine or neuter). Thus qni friendly or friendship; so cr-ri<f>-avo-c; c1own (cr-r.<f>-w encircle) was originally an adjective. Many suffixes have no characteristic signification. Adjectives are either primitive (from roots or verb-stems) or denominative (from substantives or other adjectives). But this distinction is often obliterated and difTicult to determine. 858.
1. o,

The following are the chief adjectival suffixes:

(nom. -o-s, -?J or -a, -o-v) : primary: ot7r-6-s remaining (ei7r-01 leave, L7r-, <L7r-, OL7r-), WK-6-s b1ight (V0'0'01 shine, EVK-!_01). 2. ~o, ~a : a common suffix expressing that wlch pert(tins or belongs in any way to a person or thing. By union with a preceding stem vowel we have aw, ew, ow, (f'o, vw. Primary (rare): a')'-w-s sacred ( a')'os expiation); with a comparative force: ILos other (-~o-s alius), JJ.rros rniddle (JJ.B-~o-s medius, 113). Secondary in -riJJ.-w-s worth y, costly ( -rJJ.iJ honou1); cpl-w-s friendly ( cp[o-s dear) ; 6p8-LO-S Steep ( op8o-s Straight) ; 7r OVO'-LO-S ?'iCh ( 7r OTO-S riches, 115); lK~-w-s just (illK-?J right, 834 b); olKE-w-s domestic (oKo-s house, 834 f) ; mi-rp-w-s he?"edita?'Y ( 1rrx-r'>]p fathe?, 1rrx-rp-, 262) ; {iMiw-s royal (fiarr<u-s king) ; Bip-w-s of summer ( Bpos, stem Bepw-) ; alilo-o-s venemble ( alilws sharJW, stem alilorr-, 266) ; -ljp'fos heroic ( 7)p01s he1o, -ljpwf-, 267); 1r1)xv-w-s a cubit long (1ri}xv-s, 268). The feminines are often abstract substantives, as cp~-ii jriendship. a. The ending -aos has been transferred from a stems, as in xprr-ao-s of or j1om dry land (xprr-os). The form t-aos ocmus: opaxJJ.-ta'io-s wo1th a dmr:hma (ilpaxJJ.'I)). -Eos has become independent in vilp-eos mctnly (d.vi]p). On gentiles in -ws, see 844. 3. b. Ionie 1]-'io (nom. -?)os), properly from stems in ev ('lJv), as Hom. xaK'l)-o-s b1azen (pertaining to a xaKEv-s brazier; Attic xaKeos, -os, see 858. 4 ), fJarrt'>)-ro-s royal; and transferred in Ionie to other stems, as in wocJJ.'l)o-s warlike, v8pw1r-1)o-s human (Attic v8ptinmo-s), vp-'l)o-s man/y. 3. EVT for F'"" (nom. -ELs) forms denomintive adjectives denoting fulness or abundance (mostly poetic). -rJJ.'I)-ns ( -rJJ.7is) hono1tred, and by analogy oEvilp-'l)m woody (ilt!vilpo-v tree); xapl-m gmceful (xpt-s), oM-ELs wily (6o-s), and by analogy a!JJ.a-r-6-m bloody (afp.a., -a-r-os blood, 834 j), ixOv-6-m full of fish, Kpv-6-ns chilling (Kpv-os chill). Also in evpw-m mo1tldy (evpws, -w-ros). 4. Eo (nom. -o-s, -oiis, 290) forms denominative adjectives denoting mate1ial: xpvrreos, xpiirroiis golden (xprr6-s gold).

FORMATION OF WORDS: ADJECTIVES

237

a. <o is derived from -!o, se en in XPV<TELos (poe tic). Here is part of the stem (834 f). On -'l)os see 858. 2 b. 5. E<T (nom. ~>]s, -!s): primitive: l{;wli-?js false (>fd;/i-w deceive), rra.cp-1]s clea1, wp'l)v-1}s prone, irr-?js healthy. Very common in compounds, as -<Tcpa.X-1]s unharmed, secure (.-priv. + <Tcpo.X- in <Tcpri.X.X.w trip). 6. Ko, o.Ko, LKO (nom. -Kos, very common, cp. 864. 1): many denominatives formed by these suffixes denote l'elation, many others fitness or ability. a. Denominatives : p,avn-K6-s p1ophetic (p,ri.vn-s prophet); cpv<Tt-K6-s natnml ( cpfm-s natu1e); O'I)X.v-K6-s feminine ( Oij"Au-s female); Llii.pEL-K6-s Daric ( Llp:o-s Dmiu.s ). b. From cpvrr<-KOs, etc., <Ko was taken as an independent suffix in p.ovrr-<K6-s musical (p.o<Ta muse) ; flapflap-<KO-s barbarie (flri.pflapo-s barbarian, fo1eigner); fiLiia<TKa-<K6-s able to teach ( litoa<TKa..o-s teacher); p.a.O'I)p.ar'"6-s fond of learning (p.ri.fJ'I)p.a., -p.a.ro~ thing leamt); K<paf.<-<Kb-s Potters' quarter, Ceramws (K<pa.p.dJ-s potte1) ; flo.a'L-<Kb-s royal (f3a<T<<u-s king); 1}pw-i'K6-s heroic, from 1jpw (f), -os hero; 'Axa<-<Kb-s or 'Axii.-<Ko-s (38) .Achaean (' Axa6-s .Achaean). N.-px<Ko-s able to l'UZe (px-1]), 'YPa.</J-<K6-s able to write or d1aw ('Ypa.cp-1]), need not be derived directly from the root. c. Kop<v0t-o.K6-s Corinthian (KoplvO-w-s Co1inthian); <T1rOVO<L-cu6-s consisting of .spondees (G"wov/5-iia-s spondee). d. T-LKo re presents '"6 added to the verbal in r6- (cp. also p.a0'1)p.ar-uc6-s). Th us, <K-nK6-s s1!ited to spealcing (Xt!'Y-w speak); al<TfJ1}-nK6-s capable of feeling ( alG"O-.vop.a.< feel); pt0p.1J-TtK6-s skilled in mtmbering ( .p<Op.!w to number); wpii.K-nKb-s practical, able to do ( wp&.nw do); <TK<'1rTLK6-s reflective (G"dw-r-op.a< look carefully, consider). Added to a noem-stem: va.v-TLKo-s nau.tical (va.-s ship). 7. o (nom. -Xo-s): prima.ry (us.ually active) and secondary. Cp. 860. 1. Primary in o<L-M-s cowmdly ( li<!oot-Ka. fear, lh-, li<-, oo-) ; <Trp<{3-Xb-s twisted ( G"rpcp-w tum) ; rvcp-M-s blind (r6cp-w raise a snwke) ; Koi'X.os hollow ( = KOf-<o-s, Lat. cv-tts); rpox-a.M-s running (rpt!x-w run); dK-.O-S lifce (~OLKO. am like, <iK-); KO.j1.'1r-UO-S bent (K.p..7r-T-W /)end) ; </J1/i-wM-s spming ( cpdli-op.a.t spare). 'lraT-'1)-Ms deceitful ( ciwdr'l) deceit, 1rar.-w deceive) may be a primitive or a denominative. Cp. 860. 1. a.-eo denoting quality in .pw-a.o-s attractive, ravishing ( .pw.!;w seize), Bap<T-ao-s bold (Oci.p<T-os boldness). 8. p.o (nom. -p..o-s, 861. 1): primary: 8<p-p.6-s wmm (Op-w warm); secondary in fl-a-p.a-s seventh. 9. -p.o, <T-LP,o (nom. -<p.o-s, -<T<p.o-s) : often denoting able to or fit to. Adjectives in p.o are primitive or denominative, and are derived from <-stems ; those in -rr<p.o are denominative and come mostly from stelllH in <T< +p.o (as xp-1}-<n-p.o-s useful, from xpij-G"<-s ltse); but G"<p,o has the nee been abstracted as an independent suffix. lioK-<p.o-s app1oved (ooK--w seem good); p.ax-p.o-s warlike (p...x'l battle); vbprtp.o-s confo1ma/Jle to law (v6p..o-s); ili-wli-<p.o-s eatalile (io-wli-~ food, poet. ~li-w eat); Ka<Tt-p.a-s combustible (Kciw bwn, Ka.-c<-s bum-

238

FORMA TIO~ OF WORDS: NOUN SUFFIXES

ing); Mrn-p.o-s able to loose (M-<n-s loosing); i7rrr-rnp.o-s fit for riding

10.

JLOV

(lrrrrajop.a< ride); H.b-rnp.o-s easy to talee (L.lrrKop.a<, d.wv). (nom. -p.wv, -p.o v): primary in p.v-lj-p.wv mindful (JJ.<-p.vr}-rrKoJJ.aL ?"emember), r{j-JJ.wv endu1ing, wretched (1!-r"'-v endu1ed). Cp. 861. 8.

11. vo (nom. -vo-s, 861. 11): primary (usually passive) and secondary (829 a). Sometimes denoting that which may, can, or must be done. Primary in oet-v6-s fearful ( O-l!o<-Ka feal, a<-, o<<-, oo<-); rreprv6-s to be revered ( rrt!{3-oJJ.a< 1evme); rr<IJ-av6-s persuasive ( rreliJ-w persuade, rr<O-, rr8-, rro<8-); rri<r-uvo-s trusting (rrd8-w ). Secondary in rrKont-vb-s daTk ( = rrKorerr-vo-s from rrK6r-os da1kness). 12. wo (nom. -wo-s, 861. 11): forms denominative adjectives ofmaterial, as W-wo-s of stone (liJo-s), ~v-<vo-s wooden (~vo-v); to denote time, and derived from such forms as iap<-v6-s veTnal (~ap spring), as in iJJJ.p-w6-s by day (iJJJ.t!p), x1Jerr-tv6-s of yesterday (x!Jt!s); other uses: .viJpwrr-tvo-s hurnan ( liv!Jpcmro-s man), ."!iJ-<v6-s genuine ( ."'IJ'I)s true ). LVEO in a-veo-s a-i'vo-s stony (is stone). On -"!vos, -vos in gentiles, see 844. 3. 13. po, pa (nom. -p6-s, -pli): primary, and secondary. Primary, in ix1J-p6-s kated, hostile (l!xO-w hate), ap.rr-pb-s shining (Mwr-w shine), xaa-p6-s slack (xaM-w slaclcen). Secondary, in <j>o(3e-p6-s femjul (<j>6(3o-s fea?, <j>o(3%-, 834 f), Kpar-ep6-s mighty ( Kpr-os might); primary or secondary in .vtii-pb-s grievous ( viii grief, vt-w grieve). See 860. 3. 14. 'I'T)p-o (nom. -r{jpw-s): in denominatives, derived from substantives in -T"'P (or -r'YJs) by the suffi.x <o; but the substantive is not always found. rrw-r-ljp-w-s p1eserving (iTw-r{jp saviom), whence the abstract <rwrwlii (858. 2) safety; IJeK-r'l)p--<o-s enchanting ( IJ<K-T'I]p charmer, IJky-w enchant), whence IJ<.Kr'l]p<ov (842. 4), v-r'l]p--w-s delivering (.v-r-ljp), opp.'YJT'I)pwv starting-place ( opJJ.W, opJJ.W}kaL start). 15. v (nqm. -v-s, -ta, -v): primitives are nou-s sweet ( iio-op.a, am pleased), ra x-v-s swift (rx-os swiftness), {3Q.IJ-v-s deep ({3iJ-os depth). Cp. 859. 8. 16. fll8Eo- (nom. -Wo'YJs, -woes): in primitives (rare), as rrp<rr-WO'YJS prope1 (rrprr-w beseem); usually in denominatives denoting fulness or similarity: rro<-WO'YJS grassy ( 1rolii), a!JJ.ar-wo'ls loo king lilce l!lood ( a.fp,a). See 833 a. 17. Suffixes of Degree: i:ov and LO'To (318) usually form primitives; TEpo and Ta.To (313 ff.), denominatives. npo occurs also in rrb-TEpo-s which oftwo? 7rp6-Tpo-s ea?'lieT, vrr-TEpo-s later, K-Tpo-s each. On the suffi.x Tpo apparently without comparative force, see 1066, 1082 b. ~v-TEpo-v is substantivized (bowel); from lv in. 18. Suffixes of I'articiples and Verbal Adjectives (primary): active vr, or, 301 a, c; middle and passive wvo. Verbal adjectives denoting completion (usually passive) ro; possibility and necessity ro, reo (471-473). On the formation of AnvEnns, see 341 ff.

LIST OF NOUN SUFFIXES

The list includes the chief suffixes used in substantives and adjectives. ration of a suffix from the root is often arbitrary and uncertain.

Sepa-

859]
859.

.FO!U\IATION OF WOlWS: NOUN SUFFIXES

VOWEL SUFFIXES

238

1. o: nom. -o-s masc., fem., -o-v neut. A common suffix in primitives denoting persons (usually male agents) or things ( often abstracts). O.px-6-s leader from ll.px-w lead; u-y-6-v yoke from dry-l'v-p.< yoke (u-y-, w-y-); M-y-o-s speech from e-y-w spealc; v6p.-o-s custom, law from vp.-w dist1ibute; <rro-o-s expedition from <rrAAw (<rTE -) se nd; rporp-6-s (o, 7}) ntt1'Se from rprp-w 1Wu1ish; rpop-o-s tribute from cpp-w bear, bring. a. The roots of sorne words appear on! y in other languages: ofx:-o-s lw use, Lat. vir,- u-s. b. The suffix has the accent when the agent is denoted. E of the root varies with 0 (831 b). 2. a:: nom. -ii or -?J fem. A corn mon suffix in primitives, usually to denote things, often abstracts (action). px-fJ bPginning from ll.px-w begin; o<f3-fi pouring from AElf3-w pott1'; p.ax-?J jight from p.ax-op.a< jight; <r1rovo-f} haste from <r7f1lo-w hasten; <rri-y-?J roof from <rd-y- shelter; rpo<jl-1} nnurishment from rp<f>-w nourish; r6x-?J chance from rvyxavw happen (ru x-); <jlop-d crop ~rom <jlp-w beaT; rpvy-f} fliyht from </JEV')'W flee ( <jlvy-, <jJEv-y-). a. The roots of sorne words appear only in other languages: -yuv-1} woman ( Eng. que en). b. Most substantives accent the suffix ; but many accent the penult. 3. ii: nom. -is, -?Js, in a few masculines, usually conipounds : 7rad5o-rpif3-n-s trainer of boys in gymnastics ( rpif3w nil!). 4. t, = primary, in o<jJ-H snake, poet. rpx--s r1mner (rpx-w 1un), 1r0-H city (original! y 1rA--s), 1fv--s yemling. Many words with the t-suffix bave taken on i5 or r; as A1r-i-s hope lA1ri-o-os (gA1r-op.a< hope), x6.p-<-s gmce xapt-T-OS (xaipw rejOiCe, xap-). 5. o: in a few primitive verbal adjectives (a-y-w-s 858. 2), but common in denominate adjectives (858. 2), rare in substantives: wp.<jl-lo-s brideg1oom (vvp.</J1J bTide); in names of things more concrete than those ending in -<ii: p.apr6p-w-v a testirnony (cp. p.aprp-t. testimony) ; in gentil es (844. 3); in diminutives (862. 1), often in combination with other diminutive suffixes ( apw, tow, v.Aw, etc. 852) ; often in combina ti on with a final stem vowel (851. 1, 858. 2). 6. La, ii: rarely primary, in p6)a flight ( <f>E6y-w flee) ; in verbal abstracts : p.aviii madness (840 a. 9) ; usually secondary in the fem. of adj. in -vs: (3apeia = (3apEy_-<a, 1rlrra pitch ( = 7r<K-1a, cp. Lat. pic-us), yAwrra ton gue= -yAwx-~a (cp. -yAwx-t-s point, -yAwx-Es beards of corn), 8ijrra self (843 b. 4); in the nom. fem. of participles in vr, or (Mou<r<t from Avovr-!_a, )leAvKv-a); in deno1ninative abstracts expressing qnality (840 b. 1, 2); in nam es of persons: rap.-lii-s steward ( -rp,-v-w eut, g-rap.-ov), NK-10.-s Nicias (viK'IJ victoT!J). -Often in cOJnbination with other suffixes: awa 843 b. 5 ; -<-ta 840 a. 9 ; <<r<ra 843 b. 4; rpta, TE<p. 839 b. 2, 3. 7. fO, Fii: primary, in lfpos for /Jp(f)os boundary, KEv(r)os ernpty, X.(r)os lejt (I,at. laev1<S), KaA(r)os beaut~ful; (probably) secondary in verbals in -ros (Avrt!os that must be loosed) and in adj. in -aAlos (860. 1 ).

240

FOltl\1ATION OF WOllDS: NOUN SUFFIXES

[86o

8. v (Ev) : primary, in adjectives (858. 15), in substantives: 'Yv-v-s chin, ,.?)x-v-s fom-a7m.- 9. : primary, in feminines : lcrx-6-s strength, orf>p-v-s eye-brow, vK-ii-s (Hom.) corpse, cf. Lat. nec-a1e. -10. Ev ( tJV) : primary of the agent (839 a. 5); rarely of things : Ko"IT-eu-s chisel (Kb,.-r-w eut); secondary, of the person concerned (843 a. 1), in geutiles (844. 1), rarely of things: iovaK-eu-s reed-thicket (ii va!; reed) ; in diminutives in -L5eus (853). -11. oL (nom. -w): primary in .,."e-w ,."eos pe!suasion (279).-12. WF (nom.-ws): primary in i)p-ws i)pw-os hero (267).

860.
1.
~o, >..a:

SUFFIXES WITH LIQUIDS

(, p)

primary, in <f>-)\0-P 1ace, q,ii-)..-lj clan ( q,6-w produce), 1r-o-s felt (Lat. pi-lu-s), j"eu'}'-'lJ Zoop of a yoke (l"v'Y-v-f.'' yoke); 6_e-)..o-s ontest, J.eXo-v p1ize, rv<f>-M-s blind (r6<f>-w raise a smoke), crrpef3-M-s twisted (crrp</>-w turn). Cp. 858. 7. Secondary, in 7ra.xv-M-s thickish (dimin.). a.o, a.ii: primary, in of.t<f>-a.M-s navel, Kp6r-a..o-v clapper (Kp6r-o-s noise), Ke<f>-a.-Ij head, rpox-a.M-s running ( rpx-w), 7rt-a..o-s fat ( 11"ia.lvw fatten) ; secondary, in op.-a.M-s level (op.o-s one and the same). Developed from this are a.Eo, a.Eii : 7ri-a.o-s fat, Kep15-a)..o-s wily ( Kp/5-os gain), see 858. 7. Eo, Eii: primary (prob.), in E1K-eo-s like (lotKa au~ lilce, eiK-), Pe</>-.'YJ cloud (Lat. nebula); secondary, in ev-p.-'lJ altar. 1Jo, tJO:: Ka"IT-'lJ.o-s huckstm (agency), ev-'1)..1} sacr~tice (86-w), v'f-'YJM-s lofty (v'f-os height); prima1-y or secondary: :rra.T-7)-b-s guileful ( a1rci.T7J gu ile, a1ra.Ta-w cheat), ui'Y-'T)M-s mute (cri'Y'6 silence, cri')'ci.-w am mute). Lo, Lli: primary, in rpox-l.o-s sandpiper (rpx-w run); secondary, in on-l"J\o-s passionate (onfJ).- ;o, ;a.: primary, in crrp6(3-i)..o-s top (<J'rprp-w tmn); secondary, in 1rUi-io-v sandal (1ri-'T) fetter, ?Tovs foot). vo, t~ii: primary, in Oci.KT-vo-s finger, crra.<f>v-Ij bunch of grapes. Secondary, in f.'LKK-v.o-s small (p.KK-6-s). o, li : <rrpovo-V'T) beetle. wo, wa: primary, in eto-w.o-v image (eto-of.ta.< 1esemble), vx-w)..1} prayer ( IJx-op.a.t). Rare forms: a.Lo, a.>..,.,.o, ELo, 1JLo. 2. Av: primary, in 81)-"1\u-s female (root {)'1 giue suck). 3. po, pa: primary, in substantives: <i'Y-p6-s field, Lat. age1 ( li'Y-w ), veK-pb-s corpse (cp. vh--s ), -ya}L-(3-pb-s son-in-law ( -ya.p.--w ma?Ty, for fJ see. 130), lx8-pfr.s enemy, ~xe-pa hatred (gx8-w hate), linv-po-s silve1, /5-pa hyrlra (v15-wp water); xarely, of instrument 842. ; of place, in g/5-pa seat; primary, in adjectives (858. 13). a.po, a.pa: primary, in (3M<f>-a.po-v eye-lid (f3X,.-w look), r-a.po-s basket ( r aw, r )..?)va. bea~), .t7ra.p6-s shiny (cp. l"IT-os fat). iipo (1Jpo), apa (1Jpli): primary or seconda1-y, in av<-a-p6-s grievous (cl.vla grief, avt<i-w grieve), 11"-'T)-pfr.s pail~(ul (61r7J pain, "IT-w grieve); secondary, in av&-'T)p6-s jlowery (live-os), and perhaps in 7rov-'T)pfr.s toilsome ( 7r6vo-s, "/Tov-op.a.L toil). epo, epa : secondary, in cpof3e-p6-s te1-rible ( q,b[3o-s ter!"O!"), whence crKt-epfr.s shady ( crKtd sharle); also in 1reve-ep6-s fathe1-inlaw =lit. one who binds (cp. 7rEuf.'a. = 1reve-rYp.a cable), h-epo< those below the earth (lv). t~po, "Pli: secondary, in <-yu-p6-s (.<'YV-s) slirill, whence primary IJ.x-vpo-v ch a.t!, <f>e'Y-vp6-s burning ( </>.'Y-w bun~). po, pa: primary or secondary, in ltrxii-pb-s strong (!crxll-w a~n st1ong, lcrx_ll-s st1ength); primary, in f?T-iipo-v 1ind ("1\?T-w peel), 'Y'rf>-iipa. bridge. wpo, wpa: primary, in o"IT-Wpa late summe1 ( o?T-tcr8ev at the rear, afte!).

86r]

FORMATION OF WOlWS: NOUN SUFFIXES

2-H

4. pt (rare): primary, iwO:K-pt-s hill-top (O:r<-po-s highcst), ta-pt-s knowing (eoov,

ilnv ).

5. pu (rare) : primary, in &.K-pv tca1; cp. Old J,at. dacrmna for lacrima. 6. a.p: primary, in f,1r-ap, ij1rar-os live1 (253 b), 1r-ap fat, g-ap spring. -7. p, 1JP: primary, in ci~p ap-os ail (IJ.ruu blow, of the wind), al11--{jp, -p-os uppe1 air ( ar/1-w kindle).- 8. (l)p: primary : gen. -ar-os: ilo-wp watei'; gen. -wpos : !xwp ichor, senm~; gen. -opos: by analogy in aro-Kprlr-wp posse3sing full potvers (Kprlr-os powe1). -9. (l)pa: primary, in 'Tr:q-11-wp'fl (Ionie) satiety, cp. 832.

861.

SUFFIXES WITH NASALS (p., v)

1. 11-o, 11-a (nom. p.o-s; -p.O. and -p.'fl) : primary, in substartives denoting actions or abstract ideas (840 a. 5-7), and in sorne concretes: xii-JL6-s juice (xw pour, xv-), -ypaJL-P.TJ li ne ('Yprl<f;-w W1'ite, draw); in adjectives (858. 8, 9). On -r-p.o -r-p.a, -11-JLo -11-p.a, -ff-JLO -ff-JLa see 837, 832, 83(); secondary, rarely in substantives: op-tJ-6-s coppice (op-s t1ee, oak), or adjectives: l!rv-fJ-0-s t1ue (nfOSI'eal).--1'-o: secondary, derived from' stems (858.9).-2. 11-a.T (nom. -p.a): primary, denoting result (841. 2). Here to p.o. from p.g (cp. 5vo;;.a name, Lat. nomen; rptJ-a. goal, I,at. te1men) r has been added ; cp. cvgnomentum. - 3. fl-EV (nom. -M'tl"): primary, in 7rOt-p.-f}v shephe1d, <-p.-f}v hwbour. -4. 11-evo: :primary, in participles: iiO-JL<vo-s. -5. p.L (rare): :prirnary, in <PfitJ-<-s speech (:poet. for <f;f,-MTJ).-0. )UV (nom. -tJ-s): prim., P1J'YtJ-i-s surf (p-f}-y-v-p.t bi'eak). -7. p.vo, p.va: prim., in ffra-p.vo-s
jal' (t-ffr1J-J1-' set, stand, ffra-), {3<-tJ-PO-v dart ({3&,)-.)-.w throw), 1rol-Jlv1J flock, l-p.v'f/ lake.- 8. ,_,.ov (nom. -tJ-wv): primary, in f7'Y<-p.wv leader (-!n-o;;.a.tlead); adjectives 858. 10. -9. 1'-ova: primary, in 7r1!-ff-p.ov-f} flness (7rlp.-7r1]-;;.< jill). -10. 11-"'v (nom. -;;.wv): primary, in xet-p.wv winte1, et-;;.wv meadow. 11, llO, Vii; prmary, n W-VOS 8/eep, Ka71'P6-S S?nlike, 'TrOL-VTJ j)U1liSh1nent, if;<p-v-f} dower ( tj;p-w bring), rh-vo-11 child ( rlK'rw em, r<K- ), in adjectives (858. 11); secondary, in adjectives (858. 11), in ff</j-v1J moon ( = ffeaff-v1J, ffas gleam).-a.vo, a.va: primary, in a-r<f;-avo-s crown, ffr<if>-av1J diadem (ffr<f;-w enci1'cle), lip1r-avo-v, op<1r-rlv'fl sickle (op1r-w pluck), 5p"{avo-v instrument (~p-yov tVOi'k), 111]-y-rlv1J whetstone (111}-y-w whet); in adjectives: ffT<'Y-av6-s (cp. ffr<-y-v6s) watP1'-tight ( ffr-y-w shelte1'); secondary, in {IP-r-riv1J fodder (f3o-r6-s, {36-ffKW graze), 'fop-a.vo-v seat (<a-pEi. seat). avo (T!vo), ivii ("!va): secondary, in gentil es (844. 3). evo, eva: primary, in 1ra.pO-vo-s maiden, w-v'fl elow. "lvo, 1JVii: primary, in n-01J-v1J mwse (OfjcrOa< give suck).

wo, wa: secondary, in adjectives of material and time (858. 12), and in
pao-<v6-s slende1', fJ-<-Lv1J millet. weo, tvea: seconary, in adjectives of material '(858. 12). tvo, tva.: primary, in xa-v6-s li1'i(lle, ff-vo-v parsley; secondary, in gentiles (844. 3); in patronymics (845. ); in lpv8p-vo-s red mullet (pvl1p6-s 1ed); {3o!\{3-iv1J a ki nd of {3ol\[3-6s (a l!lb-root). ovo, ova: primary, in K-ovo-> battle-!'out (K-oJla< urge on); in abstracts, as i}o-ovf} pleasure (1/o-otJ-ut mnpleased). tJVo, tJVi: primary, in 1wp-v1J cht, 11'lff-vm-s Telying on (nl/1-w pmsuae). 'vo, 'va: primary, in Klvo-ivo-s danger, alffx-Dv1J disgrace. wvo, wvii: primary, in Ko-wv6-s hill, Kop-w1J c1ow.- 12. vv (rare) : primary, in t"f-i'V-1 smuky fi re.
GREEK GRAl!. -

242

FORMATIOX OF iVORDS: XOCX SCFFTXES

13. cuvtt: sccondary, of tho pcrson conccrnecl (843 b. 5).- 1~. tt v: primary, in p.iis p.a.v-os /,/ack. -15. Ev (nom. -'11): prim:J.ry, in rp-'1/v tender, /J.pp-'1/v male. -l. 'lv: primary, in 7r<v0-1jv inquirer ( 7rev0-op.a.<, 7rvv0ci.vop.a.t inquire). -17. LV (nom. -s): primary, in /Jell.q>is dolphin, w/Jis tmvail.18. ov (nom. -wv): primary, in words of agency : rKr-wv carpenter, rpry-wv turtle-dove (rpvjw ?1W7'mw, rpvy-), KVIJ-wv wave (Kli.Vjw dash, Kvo-); and in others, as elK-wv image (~otm am lilce, EiK-), x<-wv snow.- Hl. ov: secondary, in p.a.aK-lwv darling, diminutive of p.a.a.K6-s soft. -:ov: primary, in comparatives; -i]o-iwv sweeter (7]15-v-s); secondary, in patronymics (845. 5). - FOV: primary, in 1riwv fat.- 20. wv: secondary, in words denoting persans possessing some physical or mental quality, as "f<np-wv glutton (ya.<rr-ljp belly);._to denote place (851. 3); in names of months: 'AvOerrr'Y)ptwv. -21. F"'v: primary, in a.l(r)wv age, gen. alwv-os. -22. Lwv: secondary, in patronymics (845. 5). -23. Lwva: secondary, in patronymics (845. 6).
862.
SUFFIXES WITH LABIALS ( .,.,

<j>)

1. o.,.: primary, in rrK6ll.-o1f stake, pale (o-Kclll.ll.w stir up; split?).- 2... .,. : primary, in Kwv-wlf; gnat.-:1. <j>o, .pa (rare): primary, in Kp6r-a<j>o< the temples, Kopv-<j>Tj head (K6pvs helmet) ; usually in names of animais, as ~p-:</Jo-s kid, g)I.(J.<j>os deer; secon<lary, in late diminutives: 0'1/p-cl<j>w-v insect (0-ljp beast), K<pl5-v<j>w-v petty gain (Kpl5-os gain).
SUFFIXES WITH DENTALS (T, S, 0) 863. a. Suffixes with T. 1. T: primary, at the end of stems, as ci-yvws, ci-yvw-r-os unlcnown ("ft-"fvdJ-o-Kw lcnow). 2. To, TC.: primary, in verbal adjectives in -r6-s (471) with the force of a perfect participle, as yvw-ro-s known (y<--yvw-o-Kw lcnow), o-r(J.-r6-s ,placed, standing (t-o-r"'-P.' set, place), or with the idea of possibility, as ll.v-r6-s able to be loos cd; in verbal abstracts, which sometimes become con crete: Koi-ro-s, Koi-r'l/ becl ( KE-p.(J.t lie), fJpov-r-lj thunder (fJpp.-w 1'0a7), <j>v-To-v plant (</J6w p7'oduce), 1ro-r6-v drink (1rivw drink, 1ro~ 529), fJw-r6s, fJo-r-lj lzfe, means of living (fJio-s life); in numerals, rpl-ro-s third, I!K-ro-s sex-tu-s.- In superlatives, ur-To primary, as 7}15-to-ro-s sweetest ( -i]il-v-s) ; TttTo, secondary, as cili.'I/Oo-"r(J.ro-s most tr1ce (cill.'l/0-ljs).-TC. (nom. -r71-s): primary, to denote the agent (839 a. 1); secondary, to denote the person concerned (843 a. 2).-ttTo, ttTC.: primary, in Oav-aro-s death (OvTi-o-Kw, O(J.v-ev die), Kctp.-aro-s weaTiness ( KctJ.t-vw, K(J.p.-v am wemy). ETo, eTC. : primary, in 7m"(-er6-s frost ( 7r1}y-vii-p.t rnake ha Tel) ; secondary, in ev-r7J-S becl-fellow ( ev-lj bed, 843 a. N.). ii:Tii: C.TLS, 'l'JTC. 'I'JTLS, LTC. LTLS, wTC. wTS, in gentiles (844. 2). 3. Tii:T (T'I'JT): secondary, in substs. denoting quality (840 b. 4).-4. TEFO: primary, in verbal a.-1jectives ( 473). - 5. TEL pC. : primary, of the agent (839 b. 3).- G. Tepo: secondary, in comparatives (313) ; substantivized in ~v-upo-v bowtl.-7. T'I'JP' primary, to denote the agent (839a. 2), often regarded as the instrument: p(J.t<rr-ljp hwmner (8'l8 a), cipv-r-ljp

863]

FOR:.\IATIOX OF WOIWS: NOCN SUFFIXES

243

ladle.- 8. rtJp-Lo : compound suffi x, of place (851. 2), of means (842. 4), of wa,ges (842. 5): Operr-Ti}p<a 1'f~vard for 1'ea1ing ( -rp</J-w) ; in adjctives, 858. 14.- 9. on: primary, to denote action or an abstract idea . (840 a. 1); rarely, of persons: 11-av-r<-< seer (11-alv-o~< rage, am inspi1'ed, Jtav- ). -10. TL6: primary, of the agent (839 b. 4).-11 . .,.op: primary, of the agent (839 a. 8). -12. Tpii : primary, of instrument or means (842. 3); of place (851. 6). -13. "'P'" (nom. -rp<a): primary, of the agent (839b. 2). -14. Tp<8 (nom. -Tpls): primary, of the agent (839b. 1). -15. Tp<o : secondary, in 'M--rp-w-s belonging to another. -16. .,.po (--rpo-s, -rpo-v) : primary, to denote the agent (839 a. 4), instrument (842. 1), place, as O.--rpo-v theatre (place for seeing), --rpo-v bed.17 . .,., : primary, of actions or abstract ideas (840 a. 4); in li<T-rv city, <P--rv sprout ( </JV-w pToduce) ; secondary, denoting cotmection with a numeral: rp<-r-r-s thiTd of a tTibe ( -rpl-ro-s thi1d). 18. a;.,.: primary, in Kepiis, Kpii-r-os (and Kpws, 258) hom. -19. 1'JT: primary, in 7rv7)s, -7)-r-os serf('rdv-op.a< toil), 'II'&.V'l'JT-<S planets('II'ava-w wander), -20. LT! primary, n J<f'f.t, LT-OS ho ney (Lat, mel), xap-LS grace (xalpw 1'e}oice, X"P ). See 859. 4.- 21. ;;.,.,s (nom. -r,s, fern.) : secondary in words denoting place (851. 4).-22. "'"': pr:mary, in -yews, -wros laughter ('Y<M-w laugh).-28. vT: primary, in active participles. ( except the perfect), as Vo-vr-os ; in some adjectives infiected like participles ( hJJ,, willing), and in participial substantives: paK-wv seJ'pent ( ipK-O!l-"' gleam, paK-<'iv), also in l\wv lion, aJ<iis adamant. -24. FEVT (nom. -m): secondary, in adjectives denoting fulness (858. 3), and in sorne proper names of places: ''ll'os Opus from ''ll'of'"T-s (844. 3). b: Suffixes with 8. 1. 5: Recondary, in patronyD'ics (845. 1). -2. &-a.vo: secondary, in onoav6-s a nobocly (oilns nobocly), properly from nil, neuter of rl, + avb-s. - E-8a.vo: primary, in p-y--iiav6-s chilling (p-y-w shudder). -3. 5-a.'lro: secondary, in \oiia1rbs foreign, properly \oo, neuter of al\l\os (cp. aliu), + a'/1'6-s.- 4. 6-a: secondary, in patronymics (845. 1).- 5. &-1o: <TTa-ll-w-s standing (-crr'l'J-!"<), with prob. from a word containing the suffi x ii, as !l-<Paiiw-s public from p.-</Ja/56-v publicly.- 6. Swv: primary, in p.<-<-iiwv care (11-iEL is a care), -y-1)-iiwv pain (.-yi-w su.tfer); secondary, in KorvX1Jwv a cup-shaped hollow (KorTJ eup); cp. xB-1)-iiW" dtsl.ress (li xO-os burden).- 7. 6wva : primary, in /1-<-<!-IlWv'l'J ca1e ( see iiwv). 8. a.8 : primary, in v<<fJ-as, -ao-os snow-ftake ( vi<fJ-w, better v<l<fJ-w, sno~v), <fJv-y-as exile ( </Je-y-w flee, cp v-y-), a~J-11'-as torch (Xt!l'II'W shi ne) ; secondary, in abstract feminines denoting number (840 b. 5). -9. ta.8, 10. ta.Sa: secondary, in patronymics (845. 3).-11. aSto: secondary, in KTWp.-aow-s ji'O'In the Shoulder (ififMJ-s), derived from O<X0-ao-LO-S divided (i,xOas, -aoos divicled). -12. 8: primary, in cr'll'-is, -lo-os shield, i'II'-ls hope (~'II'OJ<a< hope) ; secondary, in adj. as avf-Lf-Laxls allied ( 'II'OLS) from avp.Jhaxo-s allied with; in wors denoting the person concerned (.843 b. 2); in gentiles (844. 1), as Il<pcrls l'e1sian woman; in f!lmininB patronymics (846. 4).- 13. ,sa: : secondary, in patron ymies

2--!4

:FOlC\lATJON .F WlWS: NN SUFFIXES

(845. 4 ). - 14. L8to: secondary, in nam es of relationship (850).15. L8tu: secondary, in diminutives (853).- 16. 8o : secondary, in diminutives (852. 2), and transferred in pmp-io<o- doomed (fMJpa doom). -17. ;;8: secondary, in KV'f/1-'i< greave (KPTJI-''f/ leg, thigh).-18. v8i: secondary, in patronymics (84G, e). -19. "'SE<r: secondary, in adjectives of fulness (858. 16). c. Suffixes with e. 1. e appears in suffixes that are obscure in relation to root or stem (832): opv< opv8-o< bi1d, 'fdl-'a.Oo< sand, Kvalla. eup, rnFA.c:IJos ordure; se veral in -vil (probably not Greek), as lp(3-tvllo< chiclc-pea.- 2. 8>-.o, e>..a: primary, in "fv-c:-OXo-v, "(c:v--OX'f/ 7'ace ("fl"(-vol-'a.' become, "(c:v-). -3. 9>-.LO: secondary, in "(n--IJXw-s belonging to one's biTth. -4. 9po, Opa : primary, in IJ.p-Opo-v joint (papliJ"Kw join, p-), bn-fia-Op latlder (fia.lvw go, fia-).
SUFFIXES WITH PALATALS (K, y, X) primary (rare), in 0-fJ-K'f/ IJOX (rl-O'fl-1-'' place); secondary, in adjectives (858. G).- a.Ko (rare): primary, in 1-'a-aKb-< soft (cp. Lat. mollis); secondary in adjectives (858. 6. c).- La.Ko : secondary, in Kp-ta.K6-< of the Lord.- LKo, LKi: secondary, in adjectives (858. 6), in gentiles (844. 3). -2. <rKo, <rKi: primary, in /5lrrKo< quoit ( = ltK + IJ"Ko-sfrom 15tK-ev throw), fio-IJ"KTJ fQod (cp. fi6-1J"Kw feed).- L<rKo: secondary, in diminutives (852. 6). 3. O.K : primary, in /-LEpa~ lass, 1-'fLPUK-LO-V lad dimin. 854, K6a~ flatterer. 4. iK: primary, in Owp~ b1east-plate.- 5. LK: primary, in KV<E eup, :qx,~ cornmde.-6. i:K: primary, in 1rp,~, -Ko< partridge.-7. 'iiK: primary, in Kfjpv~, -iiKos herald. 8. a.'{: primary, in ip1ra~ 1'apacious, p7ra."(-TJ seizu1e (cp. p1rt~w seize).:9. ty: primary, in 1-'aiJ"rt~, -i"(-os whip. -10. "'l: primary, in '.wrv~, -v"(o< rim. -11. 'l'Y: primary, denoting something hollow, in <jJaa"f~ phalanx, tJ"a7r<'Y~ trurnpet, Xtpv'"'f~ la1ynx. 12. xo: secondary, in i>praX-<xo-s chick, dimin. (pra.M-< chiclcen).

864.

1.

Ko, Ki:

865.

SUFFIXES W!TH SIGMA

1. <rL ( = n) : primary, denoting actions or abstract ideas (840 a. 2) ; rarely of

persons: 1r6-1J"H husband. -2. <rL.: primary, denoting actions or abstract ideas (840 a. 3).- 3. <rLo : primary, in p.er-tp-IJ"LO-< raised from the grou nd (1-'r-a.lpw lift ~tp, p-). -4. <rLfi-O: in adj. (858. 9). -5. <r1"'JVO: in /5v(1J")IJ"r'f/vo-s unhappy. -6. o-To: secondary, in rptiiKorrr6-< thirtieth from rpiKovr +ro-s. -7. <ruvo, <ruv.: secondary, in adjectives: /5ovO-IJ"vvos enslaved (15oXo-<), OtpiJ"vvos bold OapiJ"o-IJ"vvos (OtpiJ"-os courage, 129 c), and in the feminine, to make abstract substantives (840 b. 3). 8. o.<r: primary, in "(p-as prize; varying with <ir, as in rp-a< -rfpa.r-o< portent (258), or with <IJ" (2G4 n. 3). -. E<r: primary, denoting quality (840 a. 8) or result (841. 1) in a,djectives (858. 5.) -10. L<r: primary, in K6m dust, fouad in Kovtw (= KovtiJ"-~w, 500. 2, D).-11. L<r<rci: secondary, in words denoting the person concerned (843 b. 4). -12. o<r: primary, in alows shame (al/5o< from a.i/5o(1J")-o<, 26U). -18. i:o<r: primary, in comparatives (293 d, 318).

866]

.FORMATION OF WORDS: DENOMINAT!VE VElS

245

DENOMINATIVE VEHBS

The formation of primitive verbs (:172) is treated in 49-G29, 607-624, 722-743.

866. Denominative verbs are formed from th stems of nouns (substantives or adjectives). Verbs lacking snch a noun-stem are made on the madel of the ordinary denominative verb. The principal ~erminations are as follows: 1. -a.w: derived chiefiy from words with ii stems (a few from words of the second eclension). Verbs in -aw denote to do, to be, orto have, that which is

expressed by the stem.

Tp.a-W h07WU7 ( TJJ."IJ, stem Tp.a-), apuJTa-W b7'Cakfast ( <.pt<JTO-P b7ealcjast), ro'Ap.&.-w dme (rb'Ap.a daring, stem ro'Ap.ii-), Kop.6.-w wear long hai7 (K6JJ.7J hai1'}. KO<p.a-w, lull to sleep, has no primitive noun. On -<aw and -aw clenoting a desire or a bodily condition, see 868 b.

2. -Ew:

d~rived

chiefiy from%- stems (834 f), and thence extendcd to al! kinds of stems. Verbs in -<w denote a condition or an act'ivity, and are often intransitive. old-w dwell ( oKo-s house, olK%-), </n'A(-w love ( q,D,o-s deaJ, if>t'A%-),

vtr7Jp<rw se1've ( 7r7JPT7Js servant, 7r7Jp<rii-), dJTvx--w am .fo7'tunate ( drrvx"fJs fmtunate, <vrvx<<J-), I<J--w hate (p.i:<Jos hate, !J.<J<<J-), <Jwtj>poP--w am ternperate (<Jw<j>pwv), J.Laprvp--w bear witness (p.6.prvs, -vp-os). a. Some <w-verbs from <<J-Stems have older forms in -lw (G24 a). 3. -oOl : chiefly derived from o-stems. Verbs in -ow are usually factitive, denoting to cause or to rnalce. o71'A6-w manifest, malce clem (oi)Xo-s), oovM-w enslve (oo'Ao-s), s'f!M-w emulate (lfj'Ao-s emulation), S7JJJ.L6-w punish (i"7Jp.lii damage), p.a<Jr"'fo-w whip (1-'a<Jr<~, -r-yos whip). itp6w plO?tgh has no primitive. On the formation of the present stem of verbs in -aw, -<w, -ow,

. 4.

-fVW :

see 522 . derived from SUbStantiVeS frOill V-StemS (607) and thence extended tO other stems. ww-verbs usually denote a condition, sorne times an activity.

{3a<JtdJ-w am king, ntle (f3a<Jt<v-s), [3ov'A<v-w counsel ({Jou'A"IJ), Ktvoiiv<v-wventu?e, incur ilange1 (KlvoiiPo-s), 7rato<v-w eucate (7rai:s boy, girl), O<pa1r"Etl-w atten (O<p&..,.wv attendant). 5. -w (rare) : from v-stems, as oaKpD-w weep ( oaKpv te ar). Cp. 608. 6. -c-,tw, -tw: derived originally from stems in o or 'Y (as 7ri\w hope= 7r<-1w, ptr6.sw seize= p7ra"'f-;w), and thence wiclely extended to other stems (cp. 623 il, 'Y) Snch verb~ denote action. '"'fVp.v&.\w exercise ( 'YVJ.Lvas, -6./l-os st1ipped, nalced) ; itva."'fKa\w cornpel (itv6."YK7J necessity); itrip.cl.\w dishonour (/Lrip.os); {Jtcl.\op.at use jo1ce (flit fo1'ce); Oav!J.as<" wonder (Oafip.a); tj>povrl\w talee care (tj>povrlr); vf3pl\w insult (v[3pt-s out1age); voiJ-ll:w consider (v6p.o-s custom, law); -r<<xlsw fortify (nt:x-os wall, stem TELX<<J-); xapl!;op.at o a favouJ' (x apt>, -LTOS jaVOUJ')

246

FUI-L\1AT10N OF WOiWS: DENOMI.:>IATIV VERB8

[867

a. Verbs in -tw and -taw derived from proper names express an adoption of

language, mnnners, opinions, or politics: 7Jv!w speak (/reelc ("E7Jv), {jaKxuitw act like a bacchante ({jaKxuf<), aKwvltw imitate Laconian manners (AaKwv), fk7Joltw side with the Medes (Mi)oos). b. Verbs in -lw,, -otw, and -utw are rare ('ll'djw p1ess, poet. O<IT11'6w am l01d, KOKKVjw cry cuckoo ). 7. -a.ww: originally from stems in -av + 1w (518), but usually extended to other stems. See 6il0, III. ~"'"'alvw blacken (Jkas black, fk<av-), duppalvw gladden (IJ<j>pwv glad, d;tppov-), IT7Jfkalvw signzfy (ITrwa_, ITf}fk<Lr-os sign), xa"''ll'alvw am angry (xa"'71'6-s hard, angry). 8. -vw: from stems in uv+ .fW (5Hl). The primitive words often show stems in v. See 620, III. fja_OVvw deepen ({3a06-s deep), T<LXDVW hasten (raxv-s swzft), aliTXDVW disgmce (aTcrx-os shame), Oa_ppovw e1wourage (Oapp-g,s courage). 9. On other denominatives in ..,_w, Jw, pw, see 620, III ; on inceptives see 526-528. 10. Parallel formations are frequent, often with different meanings. .ptiTraw take a midday meal, .ptiTrltw give a midday meal; rtp.ciw, (poet.) rfk6w, arfka!w dishonour; ouMw enslave, ilovvw am a slave; evoatfkOvw am happy, vila_tp.ovltw account happy, congratulate; Oappw am comageous, Oappovw encottrage; opK6w, opKl!;w malce one swem an oath; opp.aw urge on, opp.alvw (poet.) ponder; opfkw lie at anchoT, pp.l'w anchor trans. (opp.os anchomge); 'll'o..,p.w ('ll'op.lfw Epie) wage war, 'II'OEfk6w malce hostile; ITK7Jvaw put in shelter, mid. take up one's al;ode, ITK7Jvw am in camp, ITK7Jv6w encamp, go into qumteTs; IJw<j>povw am tempeTate, ITwtjJpovltw chasten; rupavvt!w, rupavvevw am absolttte Tule!', rupavvlw talee the pa1t of absolute Tule1, rupavvtaw (late) smack of tymnny . .Cp. 531.
867.

Frequentatives and Intensives.- These are mostly poetical.

-a.w in

ITrp:,xpaw tuTn constantly (rrrpt!tjJw tnni), rpwxaw gallop (rpixw nm), 'll'orao,u.at, 'll'wraofkat, and 'll'orop.at, fly about ( 'll'hop.at fly). -LTTp<w in {aiTrpw clrive ( aw, avvw). -Ta.w in ITK<praw SJ?!'ing (ITK<Lipw skip). -Ta.tw in KviTraw dmg about (gKw d1ag). With reduplication, often with change of the stem-vowel, in 'll'otrrvvw puJf ( rrvw breatlw, 'II'Vv-), 'll'opt/JDpw gleam darkly ( tjJ6pw mix), 'll'afktfJalvw sli'ine b1ightly (t/Jalvw bTing to light, malce appear).

868. Desideratives express desite. Such verbs end in -LTnw, -La.w, and rarely in -a.w. Thus, 'II'OEJk7JITEiw desite to wage war ('ll'o<Jkw), 'll'aa~Eiw wish to get !'ill of (Mrrw exchange), !<arrEiw wish to laugh (!<aw); 1Trpar7J/Law v;ish to be geneml ( 1Trpar7J16s) ; tfJovaw wish to shecl blood ( q,6vos mmder). a. Verbs in -ta_w and -aw are formed from substantives. Those in -ITELW may come from the future stem. b. -taw and -aw ma.y denote a bodily affection : otjJOafktaw su.tfer from ophthalmia (o<fJ8ap.i.), {jpa-yxaw am homse (f3pa1x6s hoarse). Some verbs in -wrrw (-wiTiJ'W) have a similar meaning: ru<jJwrrw am blind (rutjJMs), and even p.wiTITw am hungTy (p.,6s hunger).

FOIUiATION OF WORDS: CO.Ml'OUNIJ \VOlWS

COMPOUND WORDS

27

869. A compound word is formed by the union of two or more parts ; as oyo-yp.cf>o-> speech-writer, &-~-o8o-o; outlet (lit. way out through).

a. Compounds of tluee or more parts usually fall into two separate units ; as battle of the f1ugs-and-mice. Such compounds are common in comedy; as rrrp<'fo-otK0-7rav-ovp"flii mscal/y perversion ofjnstice. b. In a compound word two or more members are united under one accent; as in blackbe1ry contrasted with black err!f Most compounds in Greek, an infiected language, are genuine compounds, not mere word-groups such as are com.mon in English, which is for the most part devoid of infiections. c. Every compound con tains a defining part and a defined part. The defining part usually precedes: <-rux'!)s fu1tunate, as opposed to ou<J-rvx'!)s unfortnnate. The parts of a compound stand in vnrious syntactical relations t.o each other, as that of adjective or attributive genitive to a substantive, or that of adverb or abject to a verb, etc. Compounds may thus be regarded as abbreviated fonns of syntax. Cp. 895 a, 897 N. 1.
flarpaxo-!J.!o-~J.axl

l!'IRST PART 01!' A COMPOUND

870. The first part of a compound may be a noun-stem, a verbstem, a numeral, a preposition or adverh, or an inseparable prefix. a. The use of stems in composition is a survival of a period in the bistory

of language in which infiections were not fully developed.

FIRST PART A NOUN-STEM

871. First Declension (a-stems).- The fir~t part may a. end in a or '1J (mrely): a"fopii-v6!J.os clerk of the rnwket ("fopd), vK1J-1>6po-s bringing victory ( viK7J). b. end in o: o<Ko-"fp<j>o-s WTilm of law-speeches (olK1J j1tstice). Here o is substituted for ii of the stem by analogy to o-stems. N.-:- Compounds of 'Y7i earth have 'Yw- (for 'Y1JO- by g4); as "f<w-p.rp7Js surveyor (land-rneasurer; !J.<rp<!w rneasu1e). Doric has 'Yii-pbp7Js. Cp. 224 a. c. Jose its vowel before a vowel: K<<j>a.X-aX"'fiJs ca1tsing head-ache (K<<j>aX'lj head, /lX"f-os pain). S72. Second Declension (o-stems).-The first part may a. end in o: o"fo-"tp</Jo-s speech-writc1. b. end in ii or '1J (randy): o.</J7Jf3oo-s deer-shooting (~a<jJos, fll\w ). Here '1J is due to the analogy of -stems. c. Jose o bef ore a vowel : !J.Dv-apxo-s 11unwrch (sole 1'1tler: ,_,6vo-s alone, llpx-w 1'1tle). N. - Words of the 'A ttic' declension may end in w, as vw-Kopo-s C1tstodian of a temple (v<ws).

248

FORMATION OF WOH.DS: COMPOUND WORDS

873. Third Declension (consonant stems).-The first part may a. show the stem ( ,, v, av, ov): p.avn-7r6o-s inspired (p.civr.-s sem, 7r-w, cp.
-Koos), lx0v-{36o-s catching-fish (lx06s, {Jciw), fiov-K6o-s ox-herd (f3o-s, -Koo-s, cp. Lat. colo, and 181). N.- A few consonant stems retail1 the consonant : /LEci'Y-XOos dipped in black bile (1-'ei.s, xoX?j). See also 876. b. add o to the stem: 6Wp.ar-o-<j>6a~ body-g1wrd (O'wp.a body, <j>vMrrw guard), /LTJ7'p-0-11'o<s mother-city, metropolis (JL?TTJp, mSts), <f>vO't-o-M'Yos natuml philosopher ( <j>vn-s nature), ix8v-o-11'wTJS fishmonger (lx86s, 11'wew sell). t. add i. (rarely TJ): 11'oo-ci-vt7rrpo-v water for washing the feet ('ll'ovs, vl7rrw), a/L7raO-TJ-po/Lli. torch-race.

874. Compounds of 7rs all usually show 7ri.v-, as 7rciv-O'o<f>o-s (and 71'&.0'-0'o<f>os 101 b) all-wise, '!l'ap-pTJ6li. frank ness (' all-speaking '); but also 7ravr- in 'll'civrapxos all-ruling; and '!l'avr-o- in 7ravr-o-'li'Ww-v bazaar ( 'li'W<!w sell). 875. Neuter stems in /LaT usually show 1-'ar-o, as 'Yap.ar-o-'JI'ot6-s sculptor (li'Ya.I-'a. statue, 7rodw make). Sorne have /La, as ovo!-'a-Kvr6-s of famous name;. sorne show "'" for 1-'aro, as al!-'o-ppa'Yli. hemordwge ( alp.a, -aros blood, />''YP!/L<

break, 80). 876. Stems in E6 (nom. -TJS or -os) usually drop EO' and add o; as if'wo-o1-'aprvpli. false testimony ( if;wo-?js); and so stems in aO', as Kpeo-<f>ci'Yo-s flesh-eating (Kpas, <f>a'Yv 529. 5 ). Some stems in eO' and aO' retain E6 and a.O' (in poetry), as craKEO'-'ll'cio-s wielding a shield (craKos, '!l'aw), O'M-<j>6po-s light-bringing (O'as, <f>pw); some add ' (for sake of the metre), as opeO'-l-rpo<f>os mountain-bred (5pos, rp<f>w); these may belong to 879. 877. Other abbreviations : 'Yaa-8TJv6-s nttrse ( 'Ya.a.KT- mille, Ofj-O'Oat give suck); /Lt-TJ'01Js honey-sweet (1-'E<r-), KEa<-ve<f>f}s black with clouds from Keatv6-s black (cp. 12\l c) and v<j>os cloud. 878. Words once beginning with F or cr. - When the second part consists of a word beginning with digamma, a preceding vowel is often not elided: Ka.KO-P"/6S (Epie) doing ilr (later KaKOP"/OS) from fp"/0-P WOrJc; /L7JVOLO?S C1'eScent-shaped (iJ.1Jv7J moon, foos shape) ; r~Lii-opos (later r/Lwp6s) avenging (r!L? honour, ropr!.w observe, defend). -Compounds of -oxos, from ~xw have (orig. crt!xw, -O'oxos) contract: K7JpoDxos holding an allotment of land (Kfjpo-s lot), 7rOt-oxos protecting a city (for 7rO<-o-oxos). 879. Flectional Compounds.- A comJJound whose first part is 'a case form, not a stem, is called a fiectional compound (cp. spoTtsrnan, kinsfolk): (1) nominative : rpELO'-Kal-oEKa thi1teen; (2) genitive: At66-Kovpot DioBcu1i (sons of Zeus), 'E1}0'-'ll'ovros Ilelle's sea, llEo11'6v-vTJO'OS (for IIEo'll'orJ'-vwos, 105 a) Pelops' island; (3) dative: oopi7J11'ros won by the spear; (4) locative: boot-'11"6pos wayfarm, ITvot-'YEv?)s born in Pylns. -From su ch compounds derivatives rnay be formed, as 'ETJcr'll'6vnos of the IIellespont, 8EO<O'ex8pli. hat1ed of the gods.
FIRST PART A VERB-STEM

Sorne compounds have as their first part a verb-stem (cp. bl'eak-watel', pick-pocket, catch-penny). Su('h compounds are usually
880.

885]

FORMATION ' WORDS: Cl\ll'OlJND WORDS

2-!9

poetic adjectives. The verb-stem is usually transitive and has the form that appears in the present or aorist. .
88~. Before a vowel the verb-stem remains uncbanged or drops a final vowel ; before a consonant it adds e, o, or ' : cp<p-runns shield-bearing, p.irr-<ivfJpw'lrOS rnan-hating (tiirr-w), lK-e-x<Lplii (125 d) holding of hands, t1uce, <7r-<HTrparlii dese1tion of the arrny, viK-6-(:Jovos prevailing in the Benate, .px-<-TK-rwv rnasterbuilder.

<H

882. The verb-stem adds en (before a vowel, rr). Some insert e before (rr) : rrw-rrl-1ro<s saving the state (<T0tw), pttf;-a<T'Ir<s craven, lit. throwing away a sbield (pt7r-T-W ), 01}~1-fJ}koS (and OaK-i-fJv}kOS) hea1t-eating ( oaK-v-w), K-e-<Tl1r1TOS with long train, lit. trailing the robe (cp. I\K-<-xl-rwv) a. Thise is the vowel added in many verb-stems (485).
FIRST PART A NUMERAL

883. The first part of a compound is often a numeral: 8-1rov biped, 'Tp-7rov tripod (having three jeet), T0p-t7T7TOV jour-horse chariot, 1rvr~ov contest in jive events.
FIRST PART A PREPOSITION OR ADVERB

884. A preposition m adverb is often the first part of a com-

pound :
(1-VYJ<TTO<;

<T-o8os entrance, a7To-<f>yw flee jrorn, ever to be rernembered.

tV-TVX~S

happy, d-

a.. Except wh en the substantive is treated as a verbal (as in efrr-ooos entra nee, cp. <irr-dvru enter), prepositions are rarely compounded with substantives. Thus, <Tvv-oovos fellow-slave, inro-15Liia<TKaos ( = o iJ,.6 nv< o.) under-teacher; also v?Tb-EvKos whitish. b. The ordinary euphonie changes occur. Observe that 1rp6 before may contract with o ore to ov: 1rpoxw or 1rpoi!xw holfl before (cp. 449 b). See 124 a. c. 1J sometimes is inserted after a preposition or takes the place of a final vowel: 7rp-1}-<f>a,vos conspicuous, l7r-1}-{:!o"J\os having achieved. d. Akin to adverbial compounds are some in cj><-o, as <f><op.afJi}s one who gladly lea1ns.
FIRST PART AN INSEPARABLE PREFIX

sas: Several prefixes occur only in composition:

1. .( v)- (riv- before a vowel, ri- before a consonant; alpha privative) with a negative force like I"at. in-, Eng. un- (or -less) : v-<i~ws unworthy ( = ou" li~ws), riv-6)kows wike, v-wvvos anodyne (ouv11 pain, cp. 887), Il-vous silly, d-T}kos unhnnmued, d-Oeos goless, oyap.os doya}kos marriage that is no maTTiaye. ri- is also found before words once beginning with digamma or sigma: ri-1}7]s t<npleasant (f']i5us), -6pii-ros unseen (rop<iw), d-o.,.os tvithout shields (<To7rov), and, by contraction with the following vowel, ~Kw v ( ri-rhwv tmuilling). But v- often appears: d.v-?TL<T-ros (and ll-e7rTos) unhoped fm (re"J\?Tls), llv-o.,.os without shield. a. -, riv- (for r,, 35 b) represent weak forrns of I.E. ne 'not.'

250
2.
3.

l!'ORMATION OF WORDS: COMPOL'NJJ WlWS

[886

4.

5.

6.

7. 8.

(Lat. smi-) : i}p.<-KvKws semi-circular (KvKos ), 7}p.<-J<os ha(( as nmrh again ( oll.os who le), i}p.<-Ovi]s half-dead. Suer- ( opposed to fi'i well) ill, un-, mis-, denoting sometbing difficult, bad, or u11fo1tunate, as ov<r-rvxi]s unjortunate, ov<r-xepi}s hmd to manage, v<ralp.wv of ill fortune (contrast EO-rvxi}s, eo-xepi]s, e-oalp.wv), v<r-dpELTTOS ill-pleased, D.U<T-1rap ill-star1erl Paris. ci.- (or a-) copulative denotes union, likeness (cp. Lat. con-) ; -Koov8os attendant, agTeeing with (K1<.ev8os path: i.e. going on the same raad), a-Tavros of the same weight, a-1ras all togethe1. A variation of d-copulaUve S -intensive ; -revi}s StTetched ( TEivw Stretch), a-7r00S lev el ( 7rfOP g?'OUnd). a. -copulative stands for <ra- (from <Tf.L 20, 35 c), and is connected with 0 ap.a, op.o, and op.o- together. VTJ- (poetic) with the force of a negative (cp. Lat. n): vi}-1rowos unavenged (?To<vi} punishment), PT/-TrevOi}s freeing f?'om pain and sorrow (1rh8os). In some cases PT/- may be derived from v (not) and the Tl of the second part, as v-fj<TT<S not eating (poetic ~-w, cp. 887). apL, ~pL- (poetic) With intensive force (cp. ap<-<TTOS best), ap<-1TpE1Ti}S Vei'Y distinguished (1rp1rw ), pl-Tf.Los p1ecious. ci.ya.- (poetic) intensive (cp. li"fav very): d"f<i-<rrovos laud wailing (<rrvw groan). ta.-, Sa.- (poetic) intensive (for J.a = <a- veTy, llG): ~a-p.<vi]s very coumgeous (p.VOS COUrage), oa-<TKLOS thick-shaded (<TK<d).
LAST PART OF A COMPOUND

~l'.t- half

Compound Substantives and Adjectives. - The last part of a noun-compouud consists of 3, nlm-stem or of a verb-stem with a
886,

nonn-suffix.
887. Nonns beginning with i, e, 'o lengthen these vowels (a and to 'Y/, o to w) unless they are long by position. <rrpaT-T/"fOS army-learling, gene1al (<Trparos, li."fw), <O-i}vep.os with fair wind (et well, apep.os), ~ev-T/a.<rlii driving out ofjo1eigners (fvos, ll.auvw), &.v-wvvp.os nameless (av-, ovop.a), av-wp.all.os uneven (aP-, op.aMs). a. Sorne compounds of li"fw lead show ii: ll.ox-a"fos captain (Mxos company).

b. By analogy to the compound the simple form sometimes assumes a long vowel: f,vep.o<<r<ra windy. Cp. 28 D. c. Lengthening rarely occurs when a preposition or 1riis precedes : <rvv-wp.o<rlii
conspiracy ( of.LPV!J-< .~wear), Trav-i}"fVpLS general assembly ( li."fvpLS

a"fop6. ).

d. The lengthening in 88 is properly the result of early contraction (<rTpaTo +<L'fos). On the pattern of sncb contracted forms irrationallengthening occurs when the first part of the compound ends in a consonant, as ov<T-T/E"fi}s (for ov<r-a<"fiJs) c?uel from all.hw care jo1.
888.

A noun forming the last part of a compound often changes

i ts final sy llable.
N. Masculine or feminine nouus of the second or third declensions usually remaiu unaltered : ~v-IJ.os inspired, li.-1ra.LS childless.

FORMATION OF WORDS: COMPOl:;ND WORDS

251

a. -os, -'1), -ov: form compound adjectives from nouns of the first declension., neuters of the second declension, nouns of the third declension, and from many verb-stems. 11.-rJWS dishunoured (rJLiJ), qvv-mrvos crnnpanion al table (ii.Z'Il'vo-v meal), li.PatJLos bloodless (alJLa, 875), harlrr-x<<pos ltundred-handed (xelp), ao-p.o<f>opos bringing tribute (<f>!p-w), yew-ypa<f>os geogmphe1 8l b. ~. ('lpa<f>-w), ix8vo-<f>4yos fish-eating (<f>ayev 529. 5). b. -'l)s, -es: form compound adjectives from nouns of t!Je first and third declensions, and from many verb-stems: ci-rvxi]s unjortunate (r6x7J), oEKa.-ri]s of ten years (r&os ), e-eti}s beautijul in jonn (.Zoos), <v-p.a8i]s quick at leaming (JLav8avw, p.a8-), d.-<f>avf}s invisible ( <f>alvw, <f>av-). c. Other endings are -'JS (gen. -ov), -T'I')S, -T1JP: y<w-p.rp'T)s surveyo1 (871 b. N. ), vop.o-8T'T]s law-give1 (voJWs, rlO'T]JL<, 8-), P.'TJo-fJori]p shepherd (p.fjov, fJo-O'KW jeed). , d. Neuters in -p.a. make adjectives in -p.wv: 11'pyp.a thing, ci-11'pdyp.wv inactive. </>pi, v mind becomes -<j>pwv: fiJ-<f>pwv well-minded, rheerful. -'ll'ari,p father becomes -'ll'll.Twp : ci-'ll'arwp jatherless, <f><o-'ll'&.rwp loving his fatlw. e. Compounds of yfj land end in -')'ws, -')lws: Kara-')IEws subtmTanean, etrrO-'{Ews of thin soil. - Compounds of vas ship, Kpas horn, 'Yfipas old age end in -ws, as 11'~pl-vws supercargo, vif;l-KEpws lojty-antlered (Hl3 a), ci-')1-f,pws j1ee from old age. 889. The last member of a compound is often a verbal element that is

not used separately: ci')lap.ar-o-'ll'otos statue-maker, sculptor, 1111'-i,Koos subject

( dKo6w hear, &.Ki,Koa ), ft.o')lo-')lpa<f>os speech-writer. -<f>opos ringing, -oop.os nilding, -opop.os running .are used separately in the meanings tribnte, building, race.

890. An abstract word can enter into composition only by taking a derivative ending (usually -i) formed from a real or assumed compound adjective: va-s ship, p.tix'TJ fight = vav-p.axos, whence vav-p.axta naval battle; Eil well, fJovX-1, counsel = Eil-[3ovft.os, whence -[3ovla good counsel; civ-neg., dpx-1, rule = IJ.v-apxos, whence civ-apxlii anarchy; il well, 11'p~ <loing= *ev'll'pii~os, whence E-11'pii~lii well-doing. Contr:tst -fJovli with 11'po-fJovft.fJ forethought, v-ft.oyl eulogy with 11'po-o')los prolo[!Ue. a. Only after a preposition does an abstract word rem ain unchanged : 11'po[3ovft.1, forethought. Exceptions are rare: p.<<18o-<f>apci Teceipt of wages (p.<0'8br, </>opd ). 891. Compound Verbs.- Verbs can be compounded directly only by prefixing a preposition, as O'vp.-p.d,xop.a< fight along tvith. a. A preposition ( 11'po-8EO't<) derived its name from this use as a prefix. Originally all prepositions were adverbs modifying the verb, and in Homer are partly so used. See 1638, 1689. Cp. upheave and heave ttp. 892. Al! compound verbs not compounded with prepositions are denominatives ( ending in -ew) and formed from real or assumed compound nouns. From vas ship and p.ax'TJ fight comes va6p.axos fighting in ships, whence vavp.axw jight in ships; so olKooop.w build a ho use from olKo-op.os house-builder ( oKos, Op.w). Contrast va-11'El8w 1ing ove1, convince with ci-11'<0'rw disbelieve (iL-11'<<1ros); dvn-')Iw speak against with oJW-oyw agree ( op.bft.ayor agreeing).- <~ d'Y'Yw announce good news cannot form a verb va')I')I<w. a. cir'ip.aw (cirlw) dishonour, oaKpvx<w shed tears are exceptions. civ-op.o<bw make unlike is not from civ- and oJW<w but from civ-op.ows unlilce.

252 FORMATION OF WORDS: ACCENT OF

ACCENT OF COMPOUNDS

CO~lPOUNDS

[893

Compounds generally have recessive accent, as r:fn0--7-tJ-oc; loving-honour (ritJ-~). But there are many exceptions, e.g.893.

a. Primitives in -d, -'>], -'>]s, -!)s, -1"6s, and -los usually keep their accent when compounded; except dissy llabic words in -d, -'>], -o]s wh ose first part is not a preposition. 'fhus, Kptr'>]s judge, woKptr'>]s actor, ovELpoKplrns inte~preter of dreams. b. Compound adjectives in -ns, -.s are usually OXYtone : EV-"fEv'>]s well-born. 894. Compounds in -os (not -ros or -Kos) formed by the union of a noun or adverb and the stem of a transitive verb are: a. oxytone, when they have a long penult and an active meani.ng: (}'rpar-n"f6s general. b. pmoxytone, wh en they have short penult and an active meaning: warpoKrbvos pa1'1'icicle, tBo-fJ6Xos th1owing-stones, a<f"O-TOJ.l-OS throat-cutting, Mipo<j>opos water-cmrie1. c. proparoxytone, when they have a short penult and passive meaning: warp6Krovos slain by a father, tB6-fJoXos pelted toith stones, atf"O-roJ.l-oS with throat eut, a-rb-"fpa<j>os w1itten with one's own hand. N. -Active compounds of -oxos (~x-w, 878), -apxos (lipx-w), -(J'iios ((J'iiM-w rob), -wopBos (wt!pB-w destroy) are proparoxytone; i]vl-oxos (rein-holder) charioteer, tww-apxos cornrnande1 of hmses, !Ep6-(}'iios ternple-robbe1, 1rroXl-wopBos saclcing cities. pafJI!oiJxos stajf-bearer (pafJobs) is conLracted from pafJ/!6-oxos.
MEANING OF Cl\iPOUNDS

Compound nouns (substantives and adjectives) are divided, according to their meaning, into three main classes : determinative, possess-ive, and prepositional-phrase, compounds.
895:

a. The logical relation of the parts'of compounds varies so greatly that boundary-Jines between the different classes are difficult to set up, and a complete formal division is impossible. The poets show a rouch wider range of usage than the prose-writers.
896. Determinative Compounds.- In most determinative compounds the first part modifies or deternnes the second part: the modifier stands first, the principal word second.

Thus by hand-work a particular kind of work is meant, as contrasted with machine-work; cp. speech-writer and letter-writer, race-horse and horse-race. a. The first part may be an adjective, an adverb, a preposition, an inseparable prefix, or, in a few cases, a substantive.
897. There are two kinds of determinative compounds. (1) Descriptive determinative compounds. -The first part defi nes or explains the second part in the sense of an adjective or adverb. (This class is less nu merous thau the second class.)
aKp6-woLS upper city, citadel (liKp. 7r0tS), OJ.l-0-OVOS fellow-slave (o;w oovEVwv, Cp. 885. 4 a), ofl-"fOVOS late-born (of "fVO;tVos), 1rpo-{Jov'>] forethought,

8g8]

FORMATION OF WlWS: .:\IEA:'\1:'\G OF COJI.lPOUNDS

253

p4>t-8a:rpov amphitheatre (a place-for-seeing round about), lt--yparf>os not written (o -y<-ypap.pbos).

a. Copulative compounds are formed by the coordination of two substantives or adjectives: tiirp6-p.avns physician and seer, -y'AvK-7rLKpos sweetly-bitter. Similar is deaf-mute. So also in numerals: ow-o<Ka two (and) ten = 12. b. Oompamtive compounds (generally poetic) are p.e'At-'T}i'!f]s honey-sweet (pi'A,, T,ovs), 7roo-f]v<p.os "Ipts Iris, with feet swift as th wind. Cp. eagle-eyed, goldfish, blockhead. Such compouns are often possessive (898), as jwoo-i'!tiKrv'Aos rosy-fingmed, xpvCJo-K6p.1Js golden-haired. (2) Dependent determinative compounds. -A substantive forming either the ;first or the second part stands in the sense of an oblique case (with or without a preposition) to the other part. Accusative: 'Ao-yo--ypd.rf>os spcech-writm ('AO-yovs -ypd.rpwv), CJrprt.r-1]-y6s armyleading, genmal (CJrparv li-ywv), rf>t'A-6.vfJpw7ros loving mankind (rf>t'Awv vOpw1rovs), O<LCJt-oalp.wv wpeTstitious (oeotws ros oalp.ovas); cp. pickpocket, sightseer, paiJ<stalcing, soothsayer, laughteT-loving. Geuitive :. <JTpar6-7r<Oov camp (CJrparo 1roov g1ound on which an anny is encamped). In ~t6-'Ao-yos woTthy of mention (li~ws M-yov) the defining part stands second (869 c) and is governed by the adjective part like a preposition (cp. 899). Cp. ringmaster, law-officer, jest-book. (Ablative): .v<p.o-CJK<7rf]s shelte1ing f1om the wind; cp. land-b1eeze, sea-b1eeze. Dative: lCJ6-8ws godlike (tCJOS ee,;;) ; cp. churchgoer, blood-thi!sty. (Instrumental): XELp-o-1rol7Jros made by hand (x<pCJl 7rOL'T}r6s), xpvCJ6-oeros botmd with gold (xpv<T<;J i'!fros) ; cp. tlmnde1-stntck, storm-swept, star-sown. (Locative): olKo--yevf]s born in the house (iv o(K<p -y<v6p.<vos), oi'!ot-7r6pos wayfarer (879) ; cp. hemt-siclc. N. 1.- The Greeks did not think of any actual case relation as existing in these compounds, and the case relation that exists is pmely logical. The same form may be analysed in different ways, as rf>Mv8pw1ros = rf>t'Awv vOpw1rovs or= rpl'Aos
dv8pcfYrrwv.

N. 2. - Such compounds may often be analysed by a preposition and a dependent noun: Oe6-op.'T}ros god-built (u1r rwv Oewv op.7Jros).
898. Possessive Compounds. -In possessive compounds the first part defines the second as in determinatives; but the whole compound is an adjective expressing a quality, with the idea of possession understood. In most possessive compounds the idea of having (~xwv) is to be supplied.

So, in English, TedbTeast is a bird having a red breast, the first part being an attribute of the second. .p-yvpo-ro'os having a silveT lw v; p.a.Kp6-XHP having long arms, long-arrne<l; 8eo-et51)s having the appeaTance ( d?os) of a gocl, gocllike; CJw-rppwv having sound mind, tempentte; r0p-L1r7rOS having four hOTSCS; op.o-rp07rOS Of liJce Character ( p.o- occurs only in componns, but note 8p.ows lilce); 7ro'Av-K</Ja'Aos many-headed; eV-rvxf]s having goocl fmtnne, fortunate; oeKa-erf}s lasting ten years (cp. a twoyea!-old) ; p.rp,-Kiwv having pillars Tound about; ~v-Oeos inspired (having a god within: lv avr<;J 8<v ~xwv).

25 :FORMATIOX OF \VORDS: MEANING OF COMPOUNDS

[8gg

a. Adjectives in -<of}~ from foos fotm ( crTEp-o-o-1}~ star-like, lx0u-o-Eto1,s fish-lilce, p.r,v-o-Eto1,s c1escent, -rrov-E<o1,s of many lcinds, crtpa<p-o-iJs sphe1ical) are to be distinguished Hom those in -wr,s derived from 6!;w smdl (833 a). b. English possessive compounds in -ed apply that ending only to the compound as a whole and not to either member. In Milton: eep-th1oated, whitehande, open-hearterl; in Keats : sutle-carlenced. Besides those in -ed there are others such as Blue/Jea?'Cl. c. Many possessive compounds begin with (v)- negative or oucr- ill; as &--rra childless (having no children or not having children, -rraoas oK h:wv), l1-Tp.os dishonou1ed (having no honou1), ovcr-(3ouos ill adviud (having evil counsels).

899. Prepositional-phrase Compounds. - Many plnases made of a preposition and its object unite to fonn a compound and take on adjectival infiection. Such componnds are equivalent to the phrases in question with the idea of being or the like added.

&-rr-otKos colonist ( away f1'0m home : -rr' o1Kov) ; -yxploLOs in the hand, dagger (iv X"Pl) ; -yxwp<os native (in the country: <v xwp.) ; -rrtOaM,-,-ws dwelling on the coast ( brl OaiiTT1J) ; tpticrnos on the hemth (tp' (cr,-l.); Kar-yE<os underglound, cp. subtetmnean (KaTt -yi)s); -rrap-oo;os contrary to opinion (-rrapt oo~av) ; -rrap&.-tppwv out of one's mind, Lat. de-mens (-rrapt r1)v <j>ptiva); -rr-Eu0vos unde1 liability to give account ( -rr' v06vats) ; so <j>pooos gone ( =-rrp oo ')u6p.uos, cp. 124 a). a. From such phrases are derived verbs and substantives: l'YX"Pltw put into o1w's hanrls. P-nt1ust, o<axE<pl!;w have in hand, manage ( ot x<pwv), ota-rriicrwv octave-scale (-1, a,a 1racrwv xopowv crvp.tpwvlii. the concord through all the notes). By analogy to K-rroowv out of the way (<K -rroowv) come p.-rroowv in the way and l11--rr6ws irnpuling, lp.-rrooltw impede.

b. The compounds of 8 represent bits of syntax used so frequeutly together that they have become adherent.

PART IV
SYNTAX
DEFINITIONS

900. A sentence expresses a thonght. Syntax (uvvra~L> arranging togethe1) shows how the different parts of speech and their different infiectional forms are employed to form sentences. 901. Sentences are either complete or incornplete (904). 902. Every. complete sentence must contain two members: 1. The Subject: the persan or thing about wlch something is said. 2. 'l'he Predicate: what is said about the subject.

Thus, r fHpos (subj.) heXevrii (pred.) the summer j came to an end T. 3.102, 'f;Me (pred.) Ki)pv~. (subj.) a !wald j came 3. 1J3.
903. Complete sentences are simple, compound, or cornplex. In the simple sentence subject and predicate occur only onee. A componnd sentence (2162) consists of two or more simple sentences coordinated: Tfj ' vUT(po.[Cf- f.TropEvovro & Tov Tr)[ov, Kat Ttrruaif>pVTJ'> EtTreTo but on the next day they marche thTough the plain ancl Tissaphemes kept following them X. A. 3. 4. 18. A complex sentence (2173) consists of a main sentence and one or more suhordinate sentences: ()7fon Uot ylcppav &o.f3aivav, tUTr(VOev i!Kauro> v:heneter it was 11ecessm,y to c1oss a bridge, every one made haste 3. 4. 20. 904. Ineomplete sentences consist of a single member only. Such sentences stand outside the structure of the sentence. The ehief classes of incomplete sentences are

a. Interjections, such as w, tp<v, alo., ofJJ.ot. b. Asseveratiom; which serve as a predicate to a sentence spoken by auother: val yes, swely, ofi no, !J.atrna ce1tainly, KaXws ve1y well! c. Headings, titles : Kvpov 'Avf3acns the ExpPdition of Cyrus, 'Avn"(bv?J the Antigone, t5VJJ.JJ.axlii 'AIJ?Jvalwv Kat eerraXwv the Alliance of the Athenians and 'I7~essalians C. I. A. 4. 2. 59 b. d. Vocatives (1283), aud nominatives used in exclam(ttion (1288). e. Exclamations without a verb : i<po hither! N.- Examples of such incomplete sentences in English are oh, assuredly, no wonder, Tight about face, away, }ire! 265

256

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[gos

905. Trne impersonal verbs (932) have a grammatical subject in the persona! en ding; but the real subject is properly an idea more or Jess vague th at is present to the mind of the speaker. Similar in nature are infinitives used in commands (2013).
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

The most simple form of sentence is the finite verb: lu-T{ he-is, >..iyo-iJ-V we-sny, '7r-u(h ymt-follow. .
906. Here the subject is in the persona! ending, the predicate in the verbal stem. No other single word thau a verb can of itself forma complete sentence. 907. The subject of a sentence is a substantive or one of its equivalents. 908. Equivalents of the Substantive.- The function of the substantive may be assumed by a pronoun, adjective (in masculine and feminine more frequently with the article), numeral, participle, relative clause (ot ef}<fJfJTJrrav rwv
1roep.lwv rard: if-y-yeov those of the enerny who were captu1ed rnade the same

report X. A. 1. 7. 13); by the article with an adverb (o1 r6re the men of that day), or with the genitive (rd: rfjs rxTJs the incidents of fortune, fo!tune (1299)); by a prepositional phrase (oL ap.<jJI TOV 2:-wKpUTTJ Socmtes and hisfollowers; br! p.-ya a great pmt), a preposition with a numeral (l!cpv-yov 1r<p1 oKraKorrlovs about eight hundred took to flight X. H. 6. 5. 10); by an infinitive with or without the article (1984, 2025); and by any word or phrase viewed merely as a thing (ro bp.e'i:s limv l-yw, r?]v 1r6tv -yw when I say You, I rnean the State D. 18. 88). Cp. 1153 g. (Furthermore, by a clause in a complex sentence, 2189. 1.)
909. The predicate of a sentence is always a verb. The verb may either stand al one, as in liptK.i]> &7ri]AI1 Pericles departed; or it may have certain modifiers, called complernents to the predicate (nouns, participles, adverbs), as IhptK.i]> &7r~.8 7rpno> jirst (opyt~6iJ-VO> in anger; Tor then). Cp. 924. 910. Predicate Nouns.- No~ns (substantivai or adjectival) are often used as complements to the predicate. Thus, a. A predicate substantive is a substantive fmming part of the predicate and asserting something of its substantive: liptKi]> 'fip8'1 urpaTYJ'fO> Pericles was elected general, t.u8e Kvov 7rpuf3wr~v you elected hin1 envoy L. 13. 10. b. ApTedicate adjective is an adjective forming part of the predicate and asserting something of its substantive: &vf]p 8{Kato un the man isjust, v60tuav ITeptK evrvxY} they thought l'micles jo1tunate.
911. A predicate substantive or adjective may often be distinguished from an attributive (912) in that the former implies some form of iiva< be. Thns, 1rperrf3evrf)v and evrvxfi in 910. After verbs signifying to name or call, eva< is sometimes expressed (1615). 912. Attributive Adjective.- An attributive adjective is an adjective simply addecl to a noun to describe it, and not fmming any part of an assertion made about it : o o[Kato> &v~p the just-man.

J20]

APPOSlTlVE, COPULA, OBJECT

257

913. Ali adjectives that are not attributive are predicate. So 1rpwro< luptthey were the ji1st to arrive (1042 b), ro{mp <fJlcp XPJ!'-a< I treat this man as a friend ( == o!Jros, rf XPW!'-a<, tjJlos i<Trl).
Kov-ro

914. Under adjectives are included participles: o 1'-<ft.ft.wv (attrib.) 1r6<!'-os the future wcw, rara <i1rwv (pred.) 7rJi<<v saying this he went off, opCJ <T< Kpfnrrovra (pred.) 1 see y ou hiding. 915. Predicate subBtantives, adjectives, and participles, in agreement either with subject or object, are more common in Greek than in English, and often cal! for special shifts in translation: 1'-fT<Wpovs ~<KO!'-<<Tav r:s al'-a~is they lifted the wagons and ca1"Tied them out X. A. 1. 5. 8. Cp. 1579.
916. Appositive.- An appositive is a noun added to another noun or to a pronoun to descl'ibe or defi ne it: Mtrta87J' o urpar7Jyo.; Miltiades, the general, f,p.ES Ot tEpE<; yon, the priests, TOVTO, 8 UV Ei7l"E>, d~ 7rapEurt, uxo>..~ tls, which yon mentioned, is al ways present, (I mean) leis1lre P. 'l'b. 172 d. 917. Copula.- An indeterminate verb th at serves sim ply to couple a predieate substantive or adjective to the subject is called a copula: 'fvocpw ~v 'A87Jvao,; Xenoplwn was an Athenian.

a. The most common copulative verbs are dva' be and 'yl'yv<<T8a< become. l\1any other verbs serve as copulas: Ka8l<Tra<T8a< become, 7retpKiva<, inrapxv, 1r> (poetical) be, oodiv see.m, <f>alv<<T8at appear, Ka<<T&a,, vowi~<<T8at, aiw<tv, Kv (poetical) be called, rv')!xv<tv, Kvpiiv (poet.) happen, tu1n out, aipir&a, e chosen, vol-'l~<<T8at be rega1ded, Kpiv<<T8a, be jttflged, and the like. 918. a. The copula is strictly the predicate oris a part of the predicate with its supplements. b. The above verbs may also be complete predicates: lf<Tn 0<6s there isa god. c. For the omission of the copula, see 944.. d. A predicate substantive or adjective stl.nds in the same case as the subject when coupled toit by a copulative verb (989). e. For dva< added to a copulative verb, see 1615.
919. Object.- A verb may have an object on which its action is exerted. The object is a substantive (or its equivalent, 908) in an oblique case. An object may be direct (in th'} accusative) or 1:ndiTect (in the genitive or dative); Kvpo.; owua f<V<; ( direc.t) -rif a~v't' (indirect) Cyrus will give sixminae to the slave, f..\a{3ov r~> ~wv7J> (im1ired) rov 'Op6vrii.v (direct) they took hold of Orontas y the girelle X. A. 1. 6.10. 920. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs.- Verbs capable of taking a direct object are called tmnsitive because their action passes over to an object. Other verbs are called intransitive.

a. But many intransitive verbs, as in English, are used transitively (1558, 1559), and verbs usually transitive often take an indirect object (1341 ff., 1460 ff., 1471 ff.).
GREEK GRAM.-17

258

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SEXTE~CE

[921

KINDS OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

Simple sentences have six forms : Statements; Assumptions, Commands, \Vishes; Questions; and Exclamations. Of these, Assumptions, Uommands, and Wishes express will. See 2153 ff.
921..
EXPANSION OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

The subject and the predicate may be expanded by amplification or qualification :

922. 923. Expansion of the Subject. -The subject may be expanded: A. By amplification: :<;:evlis Kal Ili<Tlwv :rrhrev<Tav Xenias and Pasion sailed away. B. By qualification: 1. l3y an attributive a<1jeci.ive, b ci')'aOs civf}p the goodman, an attributive substantive denoting occupation, condition, or age, civ~p <T7pannos a captain (986), an adjective pronouu or nunJeral: i]p.hepos cplos a f?'iend of ours, ouo 11'aoes two children. 2. By the genitive of a noun or substantive pronoun (adnominal or attribui.ive genitive): <Tr<j;avos xp.ro a cTOwn of gold, b 11'ar~p i]p,wv our father. 3. By a preposition al phrase: boos Kar ro 'YTJO<f;ov a way down the hill. 4. By an adverb: o! vv llv0pw11'o< the men of the present day. 5. By an appositive (91G). A substantive in any case may be qualified Jike the subject. 924. Expansion of the Predicate.- The predicate may be expanded: A. By amplification: o! o'Xi)'ol a11'i)Mov Kat 11'olovv o,rw the captains depa1ted and did so. B. By qualification: 1. By the oblique case of a noun, a substantive pronoun, or a numeral. This is called the object (19, 920). Thus: bpw rv llvopa I see the man, <j;wvi)s Kouw I hear a voice, 11'ero rcp i}')'ep.ov< hP- followed the guide, ')'a11'~ -i}p.s he loves 1ts, <viKTJ.re r~v p.&.'X'YJ" he won the liattle (cognate accusative, 1567), ~owKa oKa I gave ten. The oblique case may be followed by an adnominal genitive or a dative:. opw 71'oos rwv 11'orwv I see rn any of the citizens. 2. By a preposition with its appropriate case: 'ljMov e11'1 rs "K'YJvii.s they went to their tents. 3. By an inl1nitive: ieee< 11'<0e'i:v he wishes to (!pmt. 4. By a participle: llp~op.a< -ywv I will lit gin rn y speech. 5. By an ad verb or adverbial expression : Ev turw let him know weil, ri)s vvKros 'ljOe he came du1ing the night, 11'i)0e rp<raos he depaTted on the thi1cl day (1042). On complements to the predicate, see 909.
AGREEMENT: THE CONCORDS

There are th1ee concords in simple sentences: 1. A finite verb agrees with its subject in .uumber and person (949). 2. A wonl in apposition with another word agrees with it in case (976). 3. An adjective agrees with its substantive in g<mder, number, and case (1020). (For the concord of relative pronouns, see 2501.)
925.

THE SUBJECT
926.

259

Apparent violation of the concords is to be explained either by a. Construction according to sense, where the agreement is with the real gender or number (e.g. 949a, 950-953, 958, 996, 997, 1013,1044, 1050, 1055 a, 1058 b); or by b. Attraction, when a word does not have its natural construction because of the influence of some other word or words in its clause (e.g. 1060 ff., 1239, 1818, 2465, 2502, 2522 ff.). This principle extends to moods and tenses (2183 ff.).
THE SUBJECT

The suhject of afinite verb is in the nominative: Kvpos f3o. Cy1~~,s called out. 928. 'fhe subject nominative may be replaced
927. a. By a prepositional phrase in the accusative: v!Jp.e'rfk Ka.IJ' iKa<Trous re Ka.l consider individw!lly and a.ll together 'r. 7. 64. b. By a genive of the divided whole (Ull8): ITe'I)vs l5 Ka.r 8e<T7rtas 'Y<v6p.evot lp.axovr6 T< Kal lv xwpq- g.,..,.Tov Karpwv the Pellenia.ns who were opposed to the Thespia.ns lcept up the contest and several on both sides jell on the spot X. H. 4. 2. 20.
~6p.1ravns

OMISSION OF THE SUBJECT

929. An unemphatic pronoun of the first or second person is generally omitted: ).J.yE TOV vop.ov ?'ectd the law (spoken to the clerk of the court) D. 21. 8.

930. An emphatic pronoun is generally expressed, as in contrasts: <T p.v o' li7retp.t do thou 1wit for him, but I will depmt S. l'h. 123. But often in poetry and sometimes in prose the pronoun is expressed when no contrast is intended. The first of two contrasted pronouns is sometimes omitted: ci:\M, el f3o6.et, pb' bd Tc/! <TrpaT<vp.an, l-yw o' lO{i>.w 7rop<6e<TIJat but, if yo1t prejeT, Tema in with y our division, I am willing to go X. A. 3. 4. 41. Cp. 1190, 1191.
KEvov lKiit!xou, 'Yw

931. The nominative subject of the third person may be omitted a. When it is expressed or implied in the context: o <Fos 1rar't]p <f>of!erat J.<'IJ T g<Txara 1rcl.liv youT jather is afraid lest he su.ffer death X. C. 3. 1. 22. b. When the subject is indefinite, especially when it is the same person or thing as the omitted subject of a preceding infinitive (937 a) : -1) To ote<Tiiat <iot!vat (cip.a.Ol.), ovK o1oev the ignorance of thinlcing one lcnows tchat one does not lcnow P. A. 29 b. Often in legal language: o vbJ.<os, os KE.<6et T iauTo l~evat ow8i<T8at lhrws av llit!\v the law, which enjoins tha.t a man has the 1ight to dispose of his J11'0JI01'ty as he wishes Is. 2. 1.3. c. When a panicular person is meant, who is easily understood from the situation : Tovs vbJJ.ovs civa'Yvwrnra< he (the cler!;) 1vill1earl the laws Aes. 3. 15. d. When it is a general idea of person, and usually iu the third person plural of verbs of saying and thinlcing: ws ryoV<TLP as they say D. 5. 18. So paa-l they say, otovra< people thinlc; cp. aiunt, jerunt, tradunt.

260

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[932

e. In descriptions of locality: nv Of KP'JJJ.VWOES jOI' it (the place) was steep T. 7. 84. f. In impersonal verbs (932, 934).

932. lm.Personal Verbs (905).- The subject of a true impersonal verb is a vague notion tbat cannot be supplied from the context:

lf! ~v it was late, Kaws (xa # is well, 1fS'YJ ~v p.,cpt yopiiv 1r~8ovrrav it was already about the ti1ne when the market-place is j1l X. A. 1. 8. 1, am{i ov 7rpovxwpH it (the course of events) did not gowellwUh him 'r.1.109.
933. An impersonal verb the subject of which may be derived from the context is called quasi-impe1sona.l.

a. When the indefinite it anticipates an infinitive or subordinate proposition which forms the logical subject (1985). So with lioKEi: it seems, <fv~J-f3alm it hrrppens,
li~<<fTL it is permitted, 1rphr, 1rpo<1i}K<< it is fitting, rpalvera< it appems, i-yvno it hrtppened, <i<1rf !J-E venit me in mentem, o7JXo it is evident, etc. Thus, ~Jl.s 1rporrryK<t 7rpo8J1.orpovs va< it behooves you to be more zealous X. A. 3. 2. 15, <frf<L aTOVS 01rWS av o(KaOe arjJlKWVTaL it Came intO their thoughtS hOW they ShOUld

reach home 6. 1. 17. b. So also with x.pf}, oe it is necessmy; as, oe <1' MEi:v y ou ought to go (lit. to go binds y ou). The impersonal construction with -rov is equivalent to o< (2152 a): f3o7J8'l)rov. O"rl ros 7rpd')'Jl.a<f<v DJ1.v you must 1escue the inte1ests at stake D. 1. 17.
934. In sorne so-called impersonal verbs the person is left unexpressed because the actor is understoog or implied in the action. So a. In expressions of natural phenomena originally viewed as produced by a divine agent: f3povr~ tonat, r,., pluit, vdrfle< ningit, XELJl.!;e< it is storm y, I!O"<<<f< it shoolc, there was an emthquake. The agent (Z<vs, o Oeos) is often (in Hom. always) expressed, as Zes a<1rp1rre< Iuppiter fulget. b. When the agent is known from the action, which is viewed as alone of importance : <1a1rl!;e< the trwnpet souns (i.e. o(fa"l\7r,')'Kr7}s <1a1rl!;e< the tntmpeter

sounds the trurnpet), hf}pv~ proclarhation was rnade (scil. signal is given (sc il. o Kijpv~ or o<1\7r<')'Knjs).

o Ki)pv~),

O"'lJfJ.alve<

the

935. In impersonal passives the subject is merely indicated in the verbal ending : "1\')'eral re Kal ')'prjJ<Ta< speeches (M7o<) and writings ('YPiJ-JJ.aTa) me compose P. Phae. 261 b. This construction is relatively rare, but commonest in the perfect and pluperfect: ouK 1!"1\"1\ws auros 1r<7rOV7JTa< theil' labour has not been lost P. Phae. 232 a, hd aros 1rape<1K<Va<1ro when their preparations were completed X. H. 1. 3. 20. 936. Subject of the Infinitive.-The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative: Kwov avToc; 1ropdwBaL they ordered that they should proceed X. A. 4. 2. 1.
a. See 1975. On the nominative subject of the infinitive, see 1973.

937. Omission of the Subject of the Infinitive.- The subject of the infinitive is usually not expressed when it is the same as the subject or object (direct or indirect) of the principal verb: l!<f>'l lOX<<v he said he was willing X. A. 4. 1. 27 ( contrast dixit se velle), 1rvns alrovra< ros Oeos r rpafia a1ro-

944]

THE NO:MIN ATIVE

261

Tphmv everybody prays the goils to avert evil X. S. 4. 47, obs p.o< rp(is f}plpas lip~a< aro g1ant me the cont1ol of him for three days X. C.l. 3. 11. Cp. 1060, 197::!. a. An indefini te subject of the infinitive ( rml, tlvOpcJnrovs) is usually omitted.

Cp. 931 b, 1980.

CASE OF THE SUBJECT: THE NOMINATIVE

938. The nominative is the case of the subject; the obliqne cases, with the exception of the adnominal genitive {1290 ff.) a11d adnomillal dative (1502), are complements of the predicate. 939. The nominative is the case of the subject of a finite verb and of a predicate noun in agreement with the subject. ITp6~vos 1rap~v Proxenus was present X. A. 1. 2. 3, K.\apxo> <fluys :ryv Clearchus was an exile 1. 1. 9.

a. On the nominative subject of the infinitive, see 1973 ; in excla.mations, 1288.

940. Independent Nominative. -The nominative may be used independently in citing the names of persons and things: ,.porrel'fl</> r~v rwv 7rOV'flPWV Ko<v~v 1rwvvp.li.v <rvKo<f>&.vr'f/s he 7'eceived the common appellation of the vile, i.e. 'informer' A es. 2. 99, ro o' t 1-' s or av f"(W, "(W r7}v 7rOLV when I say Y ou, I mean the State D. 18. 88. Cp. 908. (The accus. is also possible.) ~o in lists (cp. 904 c): rl87Jp.t ouo 7rO<'YJT<K1js eto'f/ Odii. p. v Kal tlv8pw1rlv'f/ I assume two kinds of poet1y: the divine and the human P. Soph. 266 d. 941. A sentence may begin with the nominative as the subject of the thought in place of an oblique case: o1 o <f>l'Aot, &v ns 7rl<rr'f/Tat auros xp1Jrr0at, rl tp-f,rrop.<v auros eva<; b?.tt as for friends, if one knows how to tTeat them, what shall we call them? X. O. 1. 14 (for ros o <f>l'Aovs . rl tp-fJuop.ev dvat). a. On the nominative in suspense see under Anacoluthon (Index). 942. In referring to himself in letters a man may use his own name in the nominative, either in apposition to the first person contained in the verb (976), or as subject of a verb in the third person : 8JurrroK'Afjs ijKw 1rap <rl I, Themistocles, have come to you T. 1. 137, 'Apra~P~'f/S vop.l!;<t .Artaxe7'Xes thinks X. H. 5. 1. 31. a. A speaker referring to himself in the third person usually soon reverts to the first person (D. 18. 79). 943. When there is no danger of obscurity, the subject may shift without warning: p.lav p. v vav a!J.f3&.vovrr<v, rtis 15' aii.s OVK ivv-IJO'fl<rav, 'A}..' 7ro</J<U'OV<F<V they captured one ship; the rest they we1e unable to captuTe; but they (the ships) escaped T. 7. 25, rwv v6p.wv aurwv ttkOU7 rl KUOV<ft Ka! rl 7rapaf3ef3-f,Kii.<rtV hear what the laws themselves command and what transgressions they (my opponents) have comrnitted D. 59. 115.
THE PREDICATE

Om1:ssion of the Verb

944. Ellipsis of the Copula. -The copulative verb ETvat is often omitted, especially the for ms f.rn[ and da[. This occurs chiefiy

262

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[945

a. ln general or proverbial statements: Kocv1] 7) TVX1J Kai TO p.l'A'Aov bpaTov chance is commun tu all and the future cannat c scanncd l. 1. 20; b. in expressions of necessity, dut y, etc.: avci"fK'1/ </>vanecrea, it is necessaTy to e on our guard D. 9. 6. So witb lJJpa, Ka<p6s, elK6s, XPEwv, litov, verbals in -Tlov (2152), as (}epatrevTlov Tos 6eous we must se1ve the gods X. M. 2. 1. 28; c. with various adjectives: lf.~cos, ovvaTOS, trpMp.os, olKatos, o[os, </>pooos, hocjJ.OS i th us, 7) lfIX'i} oovEUnv 'Tol!J."' the soul is ready to e a servant P. Phae. 252 a, d Tcs ltrepwTtP'1/ tr6Tepov KpETrov if any/Jody slw1tld ask whetlter it is etter X. M. 1. 1. 9. 945. Other forms of evac are Jess cornmonly omitted: Kocvwvev ~TOL!J.O< (scil. lp.l), o!J.a' o Kal Aax7JTa Tovo (scil. ~roc!J.ov .Ivac) I am ready to assist you and I think th at Laches hrTe is also 1eady P. Lach. 180 a, oo cr o"fo-ypci</>os ( scil. ); are you not a speech-W1'iter? D. Hl. 250, v~ lv !J.cr4J (scil. 1jv) the night was half gone Aes. 3. 71, /i,rotra )'E<S Kc oMap.ws trpos cro (scil. ilvTa) you are talking absmdly ancl not at all lilce yourself X. M. 2. 3. 15, Tos 6EOs p."fl<rT'1/ xpcs (scil. ~crTw) to the gods let our heartiest thanlcs e given X. C. 7. 5. 72. Cp. 1041. 946. In Jively discourse the form of a verb signifying to do, speak, come, go, etc., may be omitted for brevity. The ellipsis is often unconscious and it is frequently uncertain what is to be supplied to complete the thought. Th us, Tl lio (sc il. brol7Jcrav) ?) bref3ovwcrav; wh at else did they do except plot against us? T. 3. 39, ooov lio (scil. trocwv)?) tr6cv T'~} v aTo troeltrwv doing no.thing else except leaving his native city 2. 16, lv a Tl ( scil. "/fV'1/Tac) ; to what pu?jJose ? D. 19. 257, trEpl p.v TolTov Kar crxo-/jv ( scil. ~w) ali out this y and y 24. 187, wfJ !J.Ol "fE p.{J(iovs (scil. ~1JTE) none ofyour legends for me 1 Ar. Vesp. 1179, &Xi\ (crdif;acr(J) l!upov but consider another point L. 13. 79, w </>l if>ape, tro"L ?} ( scil. d) Kal tr6{1ev (scil. ofiKm); my deaT Phaedrus whither, I eg of you, are you going and whence do y ou come? P. Phae. 227 a, oK s K6paKas ( scil. lppiwm) ; will y ou not be off to the crows? Ar. Nub. 8l, trpos cr (scil. iKETEvw) "fov&,rwv I entreat thee by thy lcnees E. Med. 324. Cp. 1599. 947. Kal Tara and that too tak!'JS up a preceding expression: "fptwTpovs aOTos trcj>7JVE Kal TaT' ds ain6v he made them nw1e savage and that too towaTds himselj P. G. 516 c; often with concessive participles (2083): MEfvwva o' OK l!;i}uc, Kal TaTa 7rap' 'Apcalov wv TO Mvwvos ~vov he clid not ask joT Menon and that too although he came j1om Ariaeus, lllenon' s gvest-fTiencl X. A. 2. 4. 15.' Cp. 1246, 2083. 948. A verb that may easily be supplied from the context is oftn omitted. Th us, l v !J.MJw, traucrop.aL ( seil. 1rocwv) 8 'l clKwv 1rocw if I le a rn better, I shall leave off doingwhat I do unintentionally P. A. 26 a, p.EXTjcras wvtrep oi tro'A'Aol (scil. ltrL!J.Eovrac) not cming foT wh at most men ca re for 36 b, <li v av(ics !;1JTTjcreT TaTa, orws (sc il. i!xovTa) epiJ<rETE if y ou inqui1e about this la ter, y ou will fi nd th at it is so 24 b. See under Brachylogy (Index).
CONCORD OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE

949. A finite verb agrees with its subject in number and persan. Thus, roTo ro >fi}<f>cu!J.a l-yveTo this bill was passed J,. 13. 56, 8 Oi'iocK' i-yw !J.'i7 tr<l,(J1JO' Dp.s which I fear lest ym< may suffer 1). 9. 65, i)v o' ?roif;7J<f>lcrwvTaL o! lioc,

957]

CO:'\ClW OF SCBJECT AND PltEDICATE

263

l11rtp.ev ii1ravres rovp.1ra.tv but if the 7est vote against (following), we shall all return bacle again X. A. 1. 4. 15, rw ~vw rwoe </Jlw (O"rov lp.w these two strangers

are f7iends of mine P. G. 487 a. a. The verbal predicate, when a copulative verb (917), may be attracted to the number of a predicate noun, which often stands between subject and verb: r xwplov roro, o1rep 1rp6repov 'Evva Oliol iKa.ovro this place which was f07merly called Nine Ways 'l'. 4. 102, ii1riiv rb p.O"ov rwv re<xwv 1jO"av O"raow< rpiis the enti7e space between the walls was tluee stades X. A. 1. 4. 4. So with the participle~ of such copulative verbs: r?]v i]ov-i}v twKere ws :yaOv 5v (for oO"av) you chase a_!te7 plet~sure as if it we1e a good P. Pr. 354 c.
WITH ONE SUBJECT

Subject in the Singular, Verb in the Pluml

950. With singular collective substantives (996) denoting persans and with like words implying a plural, the verb may stand in the pluraL

Thus, r O"rpar61reoov lv alrlq. lfxovres rv 'A-y<v vexwpovv the army retmned holding .Agis at fault T. 5. GO, rota.ra KouO"iiO"a i] 1r6LS 2 Ay-rwliiov )o..ovro {JMtii the city, afte7 !waring such aTguments, chose .Agesilaus king X. H. 3. 3. 4. So with f3ov"Ij senate, p.pos paTt, 1r.ijOos multitude, oijp.os people, ox.os thl"ong.
951. So with KO.O"TOS: rwv avro KO.O"TOS Kal 7ralowv Kal XP"YJf-'rlTWV IJ.pxoVO"t every man is maste1 of his own children and p1operty X. R. L. 6. 1. 952. If KMros, Karepos, /J.)o..)...os are added in apposition to a plural subject, the verb generally remains plural : i"(w re Kal O" p.a.Kpv oyov drepos 1rerelvap.ev both you and I have cmTied on a long cont1oversy l'. Pr. 361 a. If the verb follows the apposition, it may be Hingnlar: oro< p.v ilos il.a Myet these say, sorne one thing, some anothe1 X. A. 2. 1. 15. Cp. 982. 953. A subject in the singular, followed by a clause containing the preposition p.erd with, rare! y takes a plural verb: 'AK<{3td7Js p.er MvrtO.!ov Y1r1rwv e7rop1wavres 1ropaO"a.v Alcibiades and Mantitheus escaped because they tome well p1o-vicled with horses X. H. 1. 1. 10.

Subject in the Dual, Verb in the Pluml

954. The first persan dual agrees in form with the first person plural (462). 955. A dual subject may take a plural verb: 'SEVocf>wvrr 7rporpxov ?lvo vEii.v[Kw two yonths mn 1!p to Xenophon X. A. 4. 3.10. In the orators the dual verb is almost always used. 956. The dual and plural verb may alternate: aYpeO"<V e!h"YJv re Kal te7rpfii;avro the two souls have made thei1 choice and put it into ~tfect P. Phae. 256 c. 957. The neuter dual may be followed by the dual, the plural, or the singular verb (A 104, ~00, M 4GG).

264

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

S?lbject in the Plural, Verb in the Singular

958. A neuter plural subject is regarded as a collective (996), and has lts verb in the singular: Ka ~v r U"cpayta the sacrijices were propitious X. A. 4. 3. 19.

N. --The neuter plural seems to have been originally in part identical in form with the feminine singular in i, and to have had a collective meaning.
959. A plural verb may be used when stress is laid on the fact that the neuter plural subject is composed of persons or of several parts : r r:Yj TWV AaK8atp.ov{wv avrov J~7rfLtfUV the Lacedaemonian magistrates despatched him T. 4. 88, cpavp ~U"av Ka2 Ztrtrwv Ka2 &.vBpwtrwv Zxv>J troUa many traces bath of horses and oj men we1e plain X. A.1. 7.17.

a. With the above exception Attic regularly uses the singular verb. Homer uses the singular tlll'ee times as often as the plural, and the pluralless frequently with neuter adjectives and pronouns than with substantives. In sorne cases (B 135) the metre decides the choice. 960. Following the construction of ooK ravTa, we find Ob!;av rara when it had be en th us decided x. A. 4. 1. 13, and also o6!;avTa TaVTa x. H. 3. 2. 19. See 2078 a. 961. Pindaric Construction. A masculine or feminine plural subject occasionally is used with.lf<TTL, 1jv, ')'l"fVETa<, as: 1!.,-TL Kat lv Tas IOa rr6Xw<v llpxovTs T< Kat Ofjp.os the re are in the other cities too rulers and populace P. R. 462 e. The verb usually precedes, and the suhject is still undetermined ; hence the plural is add~d as an afterthought. (Cp. Shakesp. " far behind his worth J Cornes ali the praises.") In Greek poetry this construction is rarelyused with other verbs. On i!<TTLV at, see 2513. a. 1jv was originally plural (464 e .. D), and seems to survive in that use.
Su~ject

in the Pluml, Verb in the Dual

962. A plural subject may take a dual verb when the subject is a pair or two pairs: a~ ZtrtroL opafJ-TTJV the span of mares ran w 392.

a. This is common wh en Mo, lip.cpw, ap.cp6TEpo< are used with a plural subject: Oo llvpes rrpornX06vTE A')'<Ot o<EE"fl.,-()rJV p.7} rrotv p.ax'f/v two men coming to Agis

uTged him not to fight T. 5. 59. But even with these words the plural is preferred. The neuter plural with oo rarely takes the dual verb (P. Tim. 56 e).
WITH TWO OR MORE SUBJECTS

963. (I) Wh en the subjects aTe different individuals or things and stand in the third person 964.

With two subjects in the singular, the verb may be dual or plural:
1

Kptrliis Kal

AXKt{3ui07]s iOvv&.BTJV KdV4J XPWf.Lvw a-vpp.cixl.f' TWv 7rt8p.tWv

we~e

Kpa-rV

Critias and Alcibiades

able to keep contTol of thei1 apjletites by the helJJ

973]

CONCORD OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE

265

of his example X. M. 1. 2. 24, EpvfLowv Ka! "J:.o<f>oKfj~ &<f><KOJLevo< ~~ KpKiipav rrpdnva-av on their a1rival in C01cyra Eurymedon and Sophocles proceeded to make an attack T. 4. 46. 965. In Homer the verb may intervene between the subjects (Alcmanic Construction) : d~ 'AxpovTa Ilvp<<f>E'fflwv TE pova-<v KwKiiTo~ TE Py1iphlegtthon and Cocytus .flow into Ache1on K 513. 966. The verb may agree with the nearest or most important of two or more
subjects. The verb may be placed a. Before both subjects: ?jKE fLV o 0EpG"a'f6pi~ Ka! o 'E~~KEG"TOS el~ A<a-(3ov Ka! t!Kovv lKe Thmsagoras and Execestus came to Lesbos and settled there D. 23. 148. b. After the first subject: li u IloJLapxo~ ?jKe Kal 'Aoel~tavTo~ Kal Nucr}paro~
Ka! IL?-.o< nv~ Polemanhus came and Adimantus and Nicemtus and cc1tain others P. R. 327 b, .Pa?-.vo~ <iJxeTo Kal o! <J"v a{mp Phalinus and his companions depaTted X. A. 2. 2. 1. c. After both subjects : ro (3ou'Aevr~pwv Ka! ofifto~ 1rapopiira< the senate and the people are disregatded Aes. 3. 250. (Cp. Shakesp. "my mistress and her

sis ter stays.")

967. (II) With several subjects referring to different persons the verb is in the plural; in the jirst person, if one of the subjects is first pers on; in the second person, if the subjects are second and third person: -bfL> 3 Kat ytiJ nf3, .yofL<v bnt ymt and I say this P. L. 661 b, .Y,ws Ka! ozs, OVK a..'Y)V av TLVa 3vva[fLE8a ~8r]V 43nv we and these men could not sing any otlter song 666 d, ov a-V fLOVO> o8<: oZ crot <f>DI.ot npwrot ravr'YJv 36~av ~crxErE not you alone nor your jiiencls aTe the jint who have held this opinion 888 b. 968. But the verb may be singular if it refers to the nearer or more important or more emphatic subject: 1rdpe<p,< Kal 'fw Ka1 oi'iTos .Ppiivla-Ko~ K< Ilo)l.vKpdT?Js I am present and so are Phryniscus here and Polycrates X. A. 7. 2. 29. 969. The verb may agree in person with the nearer or more important subject: a- re 'fp "En?Jv d Ka1 i)p,e~ foT you are a GTeek and so a1e we X. A. 2. 1. 16.
With subjects connected by the disjunctives ~ or, ~-;; either- or, neither-nor, the verb agrees in number with the nearer subject wh en each subject is taken by itself : oi' re a- oilr' av ILo~ otl1~ ilva<r' &vre<1r<v neithe1 you 1w1 anyllody else could reply X. M. 4. 4. 7.

970.

ai'n-e-o~n

971. When the subjects are taken toget)ler, the plural occurs : ii A?Jp,o<f>wv
e?Jp<7r7rlo?J~

gxova-< rwv ftwv what Demophon or The1ippides have of rny p1operty

D. 27. 12.

This is unusnal.

, 972. When ~ than unites two subjects, if the verb follows ~' it agrees with the second subject : rvx?J (:N?-.riov ~ i)w'is iJ~twv avTwv 7r<pov~te0a fortune always talees better care of us than we du of ou1selves D. 4. 12.
CONCORD OF PHEDICATE SUBSTANTIVES

A predicate substantive agrees with its subject m case: Mtnli3'YJ> ~v urparYJyo> Miltt:ades was a general.
973.

266

SYl\TAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTEXCE

[974

974. A predicte substantive may agree in gender and nnm ber with its snbjeet; but this is ofteu impossible : n)xr; r 8v'YJrwv 1rp.yfLara ,the affairs of mort(S are chance 'l'rag. frag. p. 782, 1rvr' ~v 'A~avpos Alexander was everything D. 23. 120. 975. A predicate substantive or adjective agrees with the subject of the governing verb when the subject of the infinitive is omitted because it is the same as that of the governing verb (937): ox oJwo')'f}<rw iK7Jros 7}KV 1 shall not admit th at 1 have come uninvited P. S. 174 d, Ef1rep ~wf.v l'AeuOepot Evat if indeed we clairn to be free X. C. 8. 1. 4.

On the agreement of demonstrative and relative pronouns with a predicate substantive, see 1239, 2502 e.
APPOSITION

976. Concord.- An appositive (916) agrees in case with the word it describes: KOaKL, 0W<iJ e'YJp[<p Kat fL"(YT?J {3f3n to a flattere?, a terrible bectst and a '1Je1y great source of injury P. Plue. 240 b. An appositive also agrees in case with the pronoun contained in a verh: Ta8v{3ws, r}Kw, fla.va.iowv lJ7r'YJfir'YJ> 1, Talthybius, hve come, the servctnt of the Danairls E. Hec. 50~). Cp. 942. 977. An appositive to a possessive pronoun stands in the genitive, in agreement with the personal prononn implied in the possessive : rov lp.ov ( = p.o) ro raa<7rWpov (3iov the /;fe of me, wretched one Ar. l>lut. 33, r p. TEP ( p.wv) arwv Kop.<<rOe you will regain your own D. 4. 7. Cp. 1200.2. b, 1202. 2'. b.

978. An appositive in the genitive may follow an adjective equivalent to a geniti ve : 'AOTJvaos ( = 'A07Jvwv) (!;v, rro'Aews rfjs p.e')'l<rr7Js being an Athenian, a citizen oj the g1eatest city P. A. 29 d. 979. Agreement in ?W?J!e? between the appositive and its llOtm is unnecessary and often impossible: 8fj(3a<, 7rO<S rrrv1elrwv Thebcs, a neiyhbowing city Aes. 3. 133. So with owpa in poetry: )'rip.os, xpv<rfjs 'A<{JpooiTT}s owpa, ma1riage, gift of golden Aph?'odite Theognis 1293. 980. An appositive to two substantives is dual or plural: Oappos Kal <{J6(3os, /i<f>pove ~vp.(3ou'A.w dwing and fear, two unint(;l/igr.nt counsellors P. Ti m. 60 d, 7rvos 1rovos re, KVpw< <rvvwp.ora< sleep and toil, sup1enw conspi?ators A. Emn. 127. 98l.. Partitive Apposition (ax!JfLa Ka8' oov Kal. p.pos, construction of the whole and part). 'l'he parts are represented by the appositives, . which stand in the sa me case as the wh ole, w hic:h is plared first to show the subject or ohjed of the sentence: rw ow, ~ fLv ds fLaKpwv v~<Tovs, ~ o' Els rprapov two roads, the one to the Jauds of the Blest, the otlwr to Tartams P. G. 524 a (dist11'1mti"e apposition). The appositi ves are generally in the nominative ( fLv, ~ ; oi fLv, oi (l), ra rely in the accusative.

g86]
a.

APJ>OS 1Tl ON

267

o /J,vouzv;

The wlwle may stand in tho singular: :\')'erat .fvxn i] ph vovv X"" i] with TcgaTd tu the soul, i8 one sa id tu have intelligence, the otheJ' jully~ P. Ph. 93 b.

982: To the worcl denoting the whole the appositive may be a COllective Silgu}al' (ad.fitnCtiVe appOStion): oroo fLV cto cta. y:o the se say, sonw one thing, sante another X. A. 2. 1. 15 (cp. 1Jpwrwv o ao> ao P. Uhann. 153 c), oi crrpar'Y}yOL (3pax~w Kacrro &?rEoyrycraro each of the generals dejended himself briejly X. H. 1. 7. 5. Cp. 952. 983.
'l'he a 1 }position may be limited to one or more parts:
IIei-o1rovv?)<rw< Kat

o! ~v,.,.,.,.axo< r ovo 1-'P'YJ twu-thi!ds of the Peloponnesians and the allies 'l'. 2. 47. Often with participles: ( o! 'AIJ'l}vaJL) d.vwv?)<TIJTJ<rav Kat raiie ro i!1rov<, <j>d.<rKovTE< o! 'lrpE<r{JVTEpo< 'lr:\cu ~ii<<riJa< the Athenians betlwught thcmsdves of this vene too,

the old rnen saying that it had been utte1erl long before T. 2. 54. 984. In partitive appositioil emphasis is laid on the whole, which is stated at once as the subject or object of the sentence. In the genitive of the divided whole (1306) emphasis is laid on the paTts , th us, Twv 1r6:\wv a! 1-'V Tvpavvofivra<, ai o O'YJI-'DKpaTofivTa,, ai o d.p<<TTOKparovTaL of states somc me despotic, othe1s democmtic, otheTs aTistoc1atic P. R 338 d. 985. Construction of the Whole and Part in Poetry.-In Homer and later poets a verb may take two objects, one denoting the person, the other the part especially affected by the action: rv ii' /J,op< 'Ir :\ftr aox.!va him he smote in the neck with his swoTd A 240, i) <r< 1r6oa< vlfEL she will wash th y jeet r 356. But the accusative of the part, often explailled as an a.ppositive, was an external object (1554 b) th,at became an accusative of respect (1601 a). In' Axaw<T<v M 1-'f')'a <riJho< ~1-'fJa>: h<rT<p Kapo ill anl she set mighty stTength in the hea1't of each of the Achaeans A 11, hriffT<p is a partitive appositive, KapOill is local dative and grammatically independent of 'AxawcTLv. The construction is very rare in prose: TO< V!<TLP afJTWP ap<r1} 'lrapa')'P01-'fVTJ Tat< lfXa< if Vil'tUe iS 1nj)a1'(e(/ in the 'soU{S of theil' sons P. Lach. 1!JO b. 986. Attributive Apposition.- A substantive may be used as an

attributive to another substantive. This is common with substantives denoting occupation, condition, or age (nsually with &vryp, &v()pw7rO>, yvvry); &v:Y,p pryrwp Cl pu/Jl?:c speaker, dv'Yjp rvpavvos a espot, 7rpEcr{3vraL av8pw'lro' old men, ypav yvvry an old wornan. So also ?rE.racrrat p\KE> Thracian ta,rgetems X. A. 1. 2. 9, iJ.E8po> MaKEOwv a, scoundtel of a, Macedonian D. 9. 31, "EYJV (for 'E'l)VoKo>), as oi "EYJVE> 'lrEracrra[ the Greek ta,rgetee1s X. A. 6. 5. 26. a. In standard prose "Ei-:\'l)v is used as n adjective only of persons (in poetry also of things). b. The addition of d.v?)p often implies respect: /J,vop <rTpaTLwTa< jellow soliers X. A. 1. 3. 3, ci! /J,v15p o<Ka<rTal juTymen, gentlemen of the j1li'Y D. 27. 1. (Cp. foemen.) The addition of /J,v8pw-rro< often implies contempt: /J,viJpw1ro< -y6'1)< a juggling jellow Aes. 2. 153. c. Many of the snbstantives thus qualified by an attributive substantive were originally participles, as ')'pwv d.v?)p an old man P. Lys. 223 b.

268

SY~TAX

OF '.tHE SIMPLE SENTENCE

987. Descriptive Apposition.- Here the appositive describes somethiug defini te that has just been mentione: ~ ~fLrpa ?To.ts, r, Kow~ Kara<:f>vyq rwv 'E.\.\>lvwv ou.r city, the common rejnge of the Greelcs Aes. 3.134. 988. Explanatory Apposition.- Here the appositive explains a general or vague statement: rovrov TfLWfLat, v ?Tpvravd<f! ur~<TW> 1 propose this as the penalty, maintenance in the Prytaneum P. A. 37 a, fLE)Ic:FTov KoKov .naa)lft, nOVYJp[s rleli'verance ftom the greatest of evils, vice P. G. 478 d. So in geographical statements : KVn-pov ZKav , Dacj>ov she came to Cyp1us, to Paphos 8 362; cp. , D.wpts, Botov to the tenitory of the Dotians in which Boewn lies T. 1.107. 989. In Homer the substantiva! article at the beginning of a sentence may be followed by an appositive noun at or near the end : 7] ' ahoua' aJ.I.a. ron ')'vv7] Klev but she, the woman, went unwillingly with tliem A 348. 990. roDTo, a.To ToDTo, aTo, lKei:vo often introduce emphatically a following substantive (or an equivalent, 908): Kvo Kepa.lvHv -IJ'Y<Ta.t, T-ljv i}oov1)v this (namely) pleasme it 1ega1ds as gain P. R. oOG b. Cp. 1248. 991. Apposition to a Sentence. - A no un in the nominative or accusative may stand in apposition to the action expressed by a whole sentence or by some part of it.

a. The appositive is nominative when a nominative precedes:

1t'p6</Ja.cns

p.Mvov l~ea.v~

I was tipsy, a snjficient excuse Philemon (Com. frag. 2. 531 ). b. The appositive is accusative, and states a reason, result, ,intention, effect, 01' th!3 like : plt/1! a?r 1t'VP"fOV, V')'pov oe8pov Will hurl thee from the battlement,. a grievous death 0 73G, 'E"!\b?Jv ICTavwp.<v, Meve'l' V'lf'?JP 'lf'LKpdv let 1ts slay Ifelen and thus cause a sore grief to i11enelaus E. Or. 1105, eoa.LJ.I.Ovol?Js; J.I.urtJv i)oi<J'Twv 6"fwv blest be thon- a 1etu1'n for th y most welcome tidings E. El. 231. . N.- The appositive accusative is often cognate (1563 f.): op~s Eopv<J'BO., tie'lf'Tov o1fl thou beholdest Eurystheus, an unexpected sight E. HeracL 930. 992. An effect or result may be denoted by an appositive in other cases: 'lf''IJOwv 1t'po<J'oe<J'Ba.i p.ot ooK< J.I.VBwv l!n rwwv we need, it seems, sorne f1the1' w01ds to act as a spen l'. L. 903 b. 993. From the construction in 991 b arose many adverbial accusatives (1G06 ff.) such as x&.ptv on account of, 1t'p6pa.rnv in pretence, owpefi.v gmtis; as os TLS o Tpwwv bd P?)V<J'L <j>potTO . . . x&.ptv "EKropos VJhoever of the T1ojans rushed at the ships as a favo~t1' to lfector (/01' Hector's salee) 0 744.
994. Many neuter words are used in apposition to a sentence or clause, which they usually precede. Such are &.fLcponpov, &.fL<:f>onpa both, TO 8avorarov the 1nost dread.ful tlng, 8vov Ofinpov or e&.rpa one or the othe1, To lva.vr[ov the contrary, -ro Kcpr.f..a.wv the chief point, -ro eyofLvov as the SO.!Jhlg "s, ovolnpov neither thfng, <J"Y]fLELOV O sign, TKfLolptoV o evidence, -r rewraov the last thing, ro r~> napOtfL<> as the proverb

999]

PECULIAIUTIES IN THE USE OF NUMBER

269

runs, avro TOVTO this very thing, ravr TOVTO this same thing. Thus, rails &.p..cporEpa -rail-ra, Kat divovs rfj 1r0EL Kat 1roV<rovs those who are both loyal to the State ancl rich D. 18.171, EI7rEV oTL 8Et 8vov 8&npov, ~ Kdvovs v 0Mv8'1! p.1} olKEV ~ avrov v MaKE8ovq. he sm:d that one of two things was necessa1-y- eithe1 that they should not live at Olynthus 07' he himself in Macedon 9. 11, -ro 8 p..ywrov, .1rE1Lov &vr' fip~V'l'J> ~xovrE<; and what is u;orst of all, having war instead of peace 'r. 2. 65, &.' ~' ro .Eyop.Evov, KaT07TLV ~opr~s "KOfJ-El' ; but have we come 'after a jeast ' as the saying is? P. G. 447 a, mro aro -ro roi! '01-L~Pov in these very words of Homer P. A. 34d.
995. Very common are introductory relative clauses forming a nominative predicate of the sentence that follows : il i5f 1ravrwv oELv6ra.rov but what is most ter1ible of all L. 30. 29. lO'rl is regularly omitted (944). Su ch relative clauses are followed by an independent sentence, a clause with Brt, by Bre "(ap, Bra.v, Bra.v 'Ycip, el. Similarly r o' ~O'xa.rov 1ravrwv, I!TL but what is worst of all P. Ph. 66 d, etc.
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBER

996. Collectiv~.Singular.-A noun in the singular may denote a nnmber of persans or things : o M~8os the Medes T.1. 69, ro 'E,\YJVLKov the Greeks 1.1, -ro f3apf3aptKov the barba1ians 7. 29, ~ 7Tv8os the bricks 3. 20, i1T1rov ~xw El> x,\{iiv I have abont a thousand horse X. C. 4. 6. 2, p..-p{ii d!J7T; ten thmtsancl heavy arrned X. A. 1. 7.10. On the plural

verb with collectives, see 950.

Cp. 1024, 1044.

a. So with the neuter participle : r p.ax6J1.<vov almost = ol p.ax6p.evot the cornbatants T. 4. 90. b. The name of a nation with the article may denote one person as the representative (King, etc.) of a class: o Ma.Keowv the Nacedonian (Philip) D. 7.6. 997. The inhabitants of a place may be implied in the name of the place: A!trf3os 1rtfO'r7J f3ovf..rJ8vTEs Ka.l 1rp ro 1f"Of.J.OV Lesbos Tevolted, having wished to do so even befo1e the war 'l'. 3. 2. 998. Distributive Singular.- The singular of ahstract nouns may be used distributively (rarely with concrete substantives): oO"oL 8Kawt f.yl.vovro v r<(J avrwv f3"! all who provecl themselves .f7"st in their hues P. A.41 a, 8uJ.cpopot -rov rp1rov d~fferent in character T. 8. 96. The distributive plural (1004) is more common than the distributive singular: cp. Vf:av{aL rlis o!fw; youths 1:n appearance L. 10.29 with ~8s r1}v OlfLV pleasing in appeamnce P. R. 452 b. 999. Dual.- The dual is chiefly employed of two pemons or things which, by nature or association, form a pair : o<f>8a.J1.W the eyes (both eyr.s), xepe the hands, f1r?rw a span of hoTBes. The addition of ILJ1.rpw l10th indicates that the two things belong together: Mo emphasizes the number. Both liJ1.rpw and llo were early used with the plural. The dual died out in the living speech of Attica by 300 n.c. Aeolic has no dual, and Ionie !ost it very early. In Hom. the dual is used freely, and often in conjunction with the plural.

270

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SENTI~NCE

[xooo

1000. Plural.- The plural of proper nam es, of materials, and of abstracts is used to denote a class. (1) of proper names: TJrrf.s men like Theseus P. Th. 169 b. (2) of rnaterials: he re the plural denotes the parts, the different kinds of a thing, a mass, etc. : rota bow Hdt. 3. 78, 7rvpo{, Kp8a{ wheat, barley X. A. 4. 5. 26, oivoL tvines 4. 4. 9, Kpa meat Ar. Ran. 553 (Kpas piece of meat), TjwL hot days T. 7. 87, ~va tirnber T. 7. 25. (3) of abstracts: here the pl mal refers to the single kinds, cases, occasions, manifestations of the idea expressed by the abstract substantive; or is referred to several persons: :yvw,u.orrvvaL rnisunderstandings X. A. 2. 5. 6, 8a7rTJ egrees of heat X. M. 1. 4. 13. Used in the plural, abstract nouns may become concrete, as racpa{ .fuJteral T. 2. 34 ( racp~ sepulture), E"cpporrvvaL goo cheer X. C. 7. 2. 28 (iJcppOrTVV7! 1nTth), xapt'TE<; proofS Of good Will, presentS D. 8. 53, Evvotat cases of benevolence, p1esents D. 8. 25.

a. Many con crete substantives are commonly used only in the plural:
,-Xat gate, epat do01, r 'OM/k'lrLU the Olympie festival; and in poetry owp,ara house, Kip,aKEs ladder, KTpa bed; cp. 1006.

b. The plural, especially in poetry, may correspond to the Englislt indefinite singnlar : l,-l vau~l by ship. 1001. In Homer the plural denotes the varions forms in which a quality is manifested : rEKro<n1vat the arts of the cm-penteJ' 250. In poetry, often of feelings, emotions, etc.: p,avlat (attacks of) madness A. Pr. 870. 1002. oMvEs (JLTJv) denotes classes of men, states, nations (D. 5. 15). ' 1003. The neuter plural is often used even in reference to a single idea o:r thought in order to represent it in its entirety or in its details, as r 71 fJq the truth. This is very common with neuter pronouns : ~X.ELpov6twvv B ravra yp ~7rtrrrap.TJV bttt I waved my anns, for I knew how to do this X. S. 2: 19, & raxwv quickly P. A. 32 d.

a. Thucydides is fond of the neuter plural of verbal adjectives used impersonally : lif!TJ<f>l<J'avro 7rOp,7Jra vat they voted that it was necessary to make war 'l'. 1. 88, ovvara 'ljv it was impossible 4. 1. Cp. 1052.
1004. Distributive Plural.- AbRtract substantives are often used distributively in the plural : rryat rwv vEwrpwv 1rapii 7rpErrj3vrpotr;; the silence of the younge1 men in the presence of the ir elclers P. R. 425 a. 1005. N ames of towns and parts of the body are sometimes plural: 'AOryvaL Athens, ryj3at Thebes, rrr~fJ'7 and rrrl!/f!'a breast ( chiefly poetic). The name of the inhabitants is often used for the name of a city : ll.cpo{ D. 5. 25. 1006. Plural of Majesty (poetic).- The plural may be used to lend dignity: 8p0110t throne s. Ant. 1041, KYJ7rTpa scepteT A. Ag.1265, owp.ara dwelling 6; 7rat8tKa favowite in prose (only in tl1e plural form ). 1007. Here belongs the allusive plural hy which one person is alluded to in tlJe plural number: 8Err7rorwv Oavarotrrt by the death of

rors) PECGLIAlUTIRS

IN THE GSE OF KCl\ER, GENDER 271

our lord A. Ch. 52, 7ra8ovr:ra 1rpos -rwv cfn-rrwv I (Clyta.enmestra) hcwing su:.ffered at the hands of my dea1est ones (Orestes) A. Emu. 100. 1008. Plural of Modesty.- A speaker in referring to himself may use the first persan plural as a modest form of statement. ln prose, of an author: tlvvota 7ro()' iu;.v JyvE-ro the rejlection once occurred tome X. C. 1. 1.1. In tragedy, often with interchange of plural and singular: d KwvJLEr:rea JL1 JLa8Ev Cl. f3ovoJLa.L (f I (Creusa) arn Jn"evented from leaming what I wish E. Ion 301, iKETEVOJLEV JLcpl r:rliv ywwflla . . . 7rpor:r7r[-rvwv I entreat thee, as 1 grasp thy beard E. H.F. 1206. See 1009. 1009. In tragedy, if a woman, speaking of herself, uses the plural verb (1008), an adjective or participle, in agreement with the subject, is feminine singular or masculine plural: 1}wv JLapTvpop.Er:r8a, 'pwr:r' Cl. 'pv o f3ovoJLaL I call the sun to witness, that I wn acting against rny will E. H. }<"'. 858, apKoJLEV ~JLE> oi 7rpo()ll1fU'KOVTEr; U'8Ev it is enough tha.t I (Alcestis) elie in thy stead E. Ale. 380.
1010. el1r, <{>tfp, li'Y may be used a.s stereotyped formulas, without regard to the num!Jer of persons a.ddresse : el1r JJ.O<, ~ ");wKpars r Kal p.is ol lio< tell me, Socmtes and the 7'est of y mt I'. Eu. 283 b. 1011. One person may be a.ddressed as the repreRenta.tive of two or more who are present, or of his family: 'Avrlvo', o~ 1rws lia-n v . . p.O' Dp.v alvva-Oa< AntinmlS, it is in no wise possible to .feast toith yo11 f3 i110, .;; rKvov, 1j 1rapnov; rny child7en, a1e ye here '? S. O. C. 1102. So in ra.matic poetry, the corypha.eus may be rega.rded as the representative of the whole chorus, as .;; ~va<, p.f, P. avpTJ ris <ip.< stmngers (addressed to the whole chorus) do not ask (the singular of the coryphaeus) me 1oho I am S. O. C. 207. 1012. Greek writers often shift from a particula.r to a. general statement and vice ve7sa, thus permitting a free transition from singular to plural, and from plural to singula.r: o&O TOT a-v-yxalpL 0 rupavvos fVOG"TpOLS "'(p OV<TL Ta7rLVOdpoLS aros otovrcu xpfia-Oa< not even tlwn does the despot TP,joice toith the 7est; faT the maTe they me in want, the maTe submissive he thinks to fi nd them X. Hi. 5. 4.
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF GENDER

1013. Construction according to the Sense (926 a.). -The real, not the grammatical, wndrr often determines the agreement : ~ <j>lrar'' ~ 7rp<<T<T rip.~Ods rKvov 0 eaTest, 0 ff1'Patly honou7erl child E. Tro. 735 (this use of the attributive adjective is poetical), r p.<paKw 1rps a?jovs w<"'fbwvm the pouths conveTsing with one auothe1 l'. La.ch. 180 e., rar' t!\"'fv 7] cha<li-l]s aVTT/ K<rpaT,, i~<T/vOws this sharndess felloto spolce th us when he came 011-t D. 21. 117. 1014. So in periphrases: Zs TT!f.Laxow ls 1rarpa lwv mighty 1 elemachus, gazing at his fathe7 1r 476, ro rwv r.pEa-f3vrc!pwv i]p.wv .. xaipovTs ri/ lKdvwv 7ra<o<ii 1ve the elde1s delijhting in their spo1t P. L. 657 d. 1015. The masculine is used for person in general : oK .Ti~<ra< rlKrovras I!ovs, qK llxova-' ar'i) rKva unfruitful herselj; she will not endu1e that others

272

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[ror6

bear children E. And. 712, nr6upos av i1 f3<Tiwv, .re 0 vfjp dO' " "fVVTj which ever of the two is supe1ioT, jVhether' the man m the woman X. O. 7. 27. So ol "(ovs paTents, ol ,.rii<s children. See 1055.

See also 1009, 1050.

PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PERSON

or 71'> may be used in the drama with the second perf?Oll of the imperative: Zrw nr;, El<rayy,E go, one of you, announce E. Bacch. 173. 1017. The second person singular is used to designate an imaginary person, as in proverbs : tf;vxli> l,.~fLEo r}}> <rmvro care for thy own soul Men. Sent. 551, a11 ia such phrases as EIBE> d.v you would have seen (1784 a), ~y~<raw d.v you mfght think, as credideris (1824).
1016.
rir;

a. Hdt. uses the second person in directions to travellers (2. 30).

See also 942.

ADJECTIVES

Adjectives moify substantives (including words used substantively, 908), and substantive pronouns. Adjectives are either attributive (912) or predicate (910).
1018. 1019. The equivalents of an adjective are: a participle (o! ,.ap6vus 11'o'ira< the citizens who a1e p1esent); a noun in apposition (il7Jp.M8v7Js pfjrwp Dernosthenes the orato't', i.e. uot il'Y}f.LOIJ'0v1Js IJ'TpctT'YJ"f6s, p.s ol 'A07Jva" you Athenians); an oblique case (IJ'rt!<pavos XPIJ'o a crown of gold, ri)s aori)s "fVWf.L'YJS "fW I am lilceminded); an oblique case with a preposition (al lv riJ 'AIJ'lq, '"'6Hs the cities' in Asia); an adverb (ol,.ci.a< the ancients). (Furthermore, a clause in a complex sentence: ro TlX<IJ'p.a, 8 lfiv aor60<, a!poIJ'< they captured the jortress which was the1e; cp. 2542.) 1020. Concord. -Ali adjective agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case. This holds trne also of the article, adjective pronouns, and participles: th us, A. Attributtve: i)[Kaw<; v~p the just man, TO a~Ka{ov vBpo<;, rtil 8tKa{w d.v8p, oi i){Katot d.vBp~r;, etc., o{;ro<; v~p this rnan, rovrov ro vBpor;, etc., Tj cfnov<ra OvyarYJp the loving daughter. B. Predicate: Ka> ywv the prize is glorious, ravr' <r-riv TJ{)IJ these things are true, ai d.pt<rra~ BoKov<ra~ dva~ <jn)<rar; the natures which seem to be best X. M. 4. 1. 3. On the agreement of demonstrative pronouns used adjectively with a predicate substantive, see 123~. For relative pronouns, see 2501.
ATTIUBUTIVE ADJECTIVES
ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY

1021. An attributive adjective (or participle) generally with the article, often dispenses with its sub~tantive, and thus itself acquires the value of a substantive.

10271

ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES

273

a. This occurs when the substantive may be supplied from the context;
when it is a general notion; or when it is omiLted in common expressions of a

definite character, when the ellipsis is conscious.

1022. Masculine or feminine, when the. substantive is a person: o lKawr the just man, OlKaws a just man, oi 'AeTJvaot the Athenians, oi 1rol\Xol the many, the rabble, oi txf-yot the oligarchcal pa1ty, ol {3ovMJJ.evo< all who wtll, i} J<' the beautiful woman, -)J nKocra the mothm (poet., E. Ale. 167), iKtcTJO'<.l;ovcrat women in assembly. 1023. Neuter, when the substantive idea is thing in general: TO -yo.86v the (highest) good l'. R. 506 b (but r -yo.8. good things L. 12. 33), T X1)8s truth P. G. 473 b, Tb J<ou,bv the cmnmonwealth A nt. 3. (3. 3, To cr6p.evov the future A es. 3. 165, To Xe-ybp.evov as the saying is T. 7. 08, p.rpl p.!crov -)Jp.par about mid-day X. A. 4. 4. 1, brl 1roM ove1 a wide space T. 1. 18. 1024. In words denoting a collection (990) of persons or facts: To V7r?Koov the subjects T. 6. 69, T {3o.pf3o.p<Kbv the barba1ian force X. A. 1. 2. 1, TO ~VJJ.JJ.O. X<Kbv the allied forces T. 4. 77 (and many words in -tKbv), Ti1 'EX1JVLKa Greek history T.l. 97; and in words denoting festivals (Ti:L '0Mp.7rta. the Olympian games X. H. 7. 4. 28). 1025. With participles, especially in Thucydides : TO p-y<\op.evov Ti}< pri}s their angry feelings 1'. 2. 59, Tfjs 1r6Xews To TJJ.WJJ.<Pov the dignity of the 8tate 2. 63. The action of the verb is here represented as taking place under particular circumstances or at a particular time. These participles are not dead abstractions, but abstract qualities in action. 1026. A substantivized adjective may appear in the neuter plural as well as in the neuter singular: T 8e~t rov K~paroc; the ?ight of the wing X. A. 1. 8. 4, rijc; :2.aafLVoc; T 1roa the greate1 pa.tt of Salamis T. 2. 94, 1rt ;rMi'<Jrov dv&pmwv to the greatest part of mankind 1.1., tc; rovro 8vcrrvxc; to this degree of misfortune 7. 86 (cp.1325).
a. On the construction of Tfjs ')'i)s 2. 50, see 1313.
-1) 7rO?

the greater part of the land T.

1027.

(such as

~fJ-p.

In common expressions a definite noun is often implied day, o86, way, XEP hand).

a. Masculine: Ko,.os gulf, b 'Ibvws the Ionian gulf T. 6. 34, o-Tpa.Tos force, cl 1rel;6s the land force 1. 4 7. b. Feminine: yi] land (xwpa country) -cbo Ti}< ~o.vrwv from the ir own country T. 1. 15 ; oi58' -)J 'EXXs oO' 7J {3<ip{3o.pos neither Greece nor bmba1ic land D. 9. 27 ; -vv@p.'IJ judgment: Ko.T T-/)v ~p,'v according to my opinion Ar. Eccl. 103, K ri}r vKW<T1JS according to the prevailing opinion X. A. 6. 1. 18; 81KTJ suit: ipf/1'-TJ" Ko.rn-yopovT<s bringing an accusation in a case where there is no defence P. A. 18 c ; -ljp.pi day : T-i) v vcrT<pa.liiv the next day X. C. 1. 2. 11, rfj 7T' ponpa.lq. the day befoTe L. 19. 22; Kpa.s wing: To <iJwvvp,ov the l~ft wing "T. 4. 96; p.EpCs part: EiKoa-d a twentieth 6. 54; p.o'i:pa. portion: -)J .,. .,.pw;.tPTJ (LlO. 61) or 7J elp,a.pp,v1J (D.l8.205) the allotted p01tion, destiny; va.ils ship: -)J TP<'PTJ< the ship with th1ee banks of oms; o8s way: eW<lq. by the straight road P. L. 716 a, r-i) v To.xicrnw by the
G1tEli

GllA.l\1.- 18

274
xeip hand; iv

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

shortest way X. A. 1. 3. 14; TX"'l mt: !J-DV<T<Kf} the art of music P. J,. 668 a; ii<~<~ on the riyht haud X. A. 1. 5. 1, i~ punlpii.s on the lejt 4. 8. 2; >J!fJcj>os vote: rl]v lvavrliv N<Ki'f 0ero he voted in OllJJosition to Nicias P.Lach. 1::>4d. 1028. The coutext often deLermiues the substanLi ve to Le supplied : TavTov .PKpa-yov ws Jl\lyiis (7r'I))I<s) 1ral<raev they shouted that he had dealt him (too, 106:3) jew blows x. A. 5. 8. 12, rpla TaavTa Ka1 x<ll.liis (15paxp.is) th1ee talents and a thousand draclnnas D. 27. 34; cp. a dollar and twenty (cents). Cp. 1572.
1029. From such substantivized adjectives arose many prepositional and adverbial expressions of wlwse source the Greeks themselves had probably lost sight. Many of these seem to be analogues of phrases once containing o86<;: T~V aw<; lf!YJ<f>{Cw-fh you vote to no purpose D. 19. 181 (i.e. the way leacling elsewhere than the goal), &.1ro ,.17, 7rpwr1 , at the very beginning T. 7. 43, J.;ro r1J> ia-YJ> on an equality 1. 15, J~ tvavd> from an opposite direction, jacing 7. 44.
AGREEMENT OF ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES

1030. An attributive adjective belonging to more thau one substantive agrees with the nearest: rov Ka.ov K&yaev &.vipa Kal yvvaKa ev3a{fLova iva{ <f>'YJfLL the pe1ject man and woman are happy I maintain P. G. 470 e. In some cases it is repcated with eaeh substantive (often for emphasis) : 'v a-wfL' ffxwv Kat lf!xf]v fL{av having one body and one soul D. 19. 227. 1031. But occasionally the adjective agrees with the more important substantive: o <Tl-yl\os ou venaL hrr. d{Jo/..ovs Kal 'fJp.<w{J6)uov 'ATTLKOJ)s the siglns is WOTth seven and a half Attic obols X. A. 1. 5. 6. 1032. Of two adjectives with one substantive, one may stand in closer relation to the substantive, while the other qualifies the expression thus formed : 7rOL> ~pfJ11-YJ fLEy.YJ a Zwge deseded-city X. A. 1. 5. 4. 1033. If one substantive has several attributive adjectives, these are ~ometimes added without a conjunction (by Asyndeton): Kpa d,JV _La, f.pcpaa, xo[paa flesh of lambs, kids, swine x. A. 4. 5. 31. Tls is commoner in poetry, especially when the adjectives are descriptive: yxos f3p~(} fLya crnf3ap6v a spear heavy, huge, st(mt II 141. 1.034. 'fwo adjectives joined by Ka{ may form one combined notion in English, which omits the conjunction. Ro often with 7rov> to emphasize the idea of plurality: 7ro K<iya(). many blessings X. A. 5. 6. 4, 7ro Kat 3Ewa nwny dreadful su.ffeJings D. 37. 57.

a. Kal\s K.yali6s means an mistocrat (in the political sense), or is used of a peTject quality or action (in the moral sense) as T. 4. 40, P. A. 21 d.

PREDICATE ADJECTIVES

27.5

1035. An attributive adjective is often used in poetry inslead of the attributive geuitive: fli7J 'HFiiK'A7]Ei7J il 058 the might of Hemcles (cp. "a Niobeau daughter" Tennyson); rare! y in prose : 1rora.p,6s, ipos 1r e8p,a.os a 1'ive1, a pleth1on in with X. A. 4. . 4. 1036. An attributive adjective belonging logically to a dependent genitive is often used in poetry with a goveming substantive: vKos vopwv ~vva.,p.ov kind1ed st1ife of men S. A. 793 (for strife of kind1e men). Harely in prose in the case of the po8sessive pronoun : c!v rc/i Dp.edp4J o"Oev' rijs -yvwp.7Js in the wealcness of yom ptwpose T. 2.61. 1037. An attributive adjective may dispense with its substantive when that substantive is expressed in the context: p.erxn r?js Ka.l<YrrJS (rxv7Js) rwv rexvwv he sh']res in the fai1est of the arts P. G. 448 c. 1038. A snbstantivized participle may take the genitive rather than the case proper to the verb whence it is derived : (3a.<Y,t..!ws 1rpo<Y~Kovus 1elations of the king 'l'. 1. 128; contrast Ilep,Kijs 6 p.ol1rpo<Y1}Kwv Pericles my 1elation X. H. 1. 7. 21. 1039. Adjectives used substantively may take an attributive: oi tJp,irpoL vap.v<.s your enenes X. H. 5. 2. 33.
PREDICATE ADJECTIVES

1040. The predicate adjective is employed a. With intransitive verbs signifying to lie, becorne, and the like (917): i] o xapos aorJ'Aos 'f'fV7Jra.' the fa v our has been concealed A es. :3. 283. So with active verbs which take a preposition: v6p.ovs ~Be<Y8e e1r' o~'Ao ros o,K~<Yovru you have enacte laws with regard to o.tftnders who are unknown D. 21. 30. b. With transitive verbs: (1) to qualify the object of the verb directly and immediately : ros Ka.Kos XP7J<Yros vop.l\Hv to juclge bad men good S. O. T. 60!l, (2) to express the reoult of the action (the proleptic use, 1579). So with a.~e<v grow, a.rpnv raise with f.d-ya.s great, p.erwpos on high, vlf!7J/..6s high, p.a.Kp6s large. 1041. With verbs of saying and thinlcing the predicate adjective is usually connected with its noun by eva.<, with verbs of perceiving, showing, by t!Jv (2106): ovva. -yp op.a.< oa.<p.6vwv eva.' KO.K6v fm 1 thinlc no one of the gocls is base E. I. T. 391, 07JO lf;evo?j ri) v ooa.8~K7]V OVIYU.V it shows that the will is false D. 45. 34. But elva.ds som etimes omitted (945), as rs-yp m'As 1rp~m 1ra<Yiis aya.Os wp.o/..o-y~<Ya p.ev for we have ag1eed that all honoura/Jle actions a1e goocl P.l'r. 359 e. On the omission of t!Jv, see 2117. For eva.' with verbs of nanng and calling, see 1615. 1042. Several adjectives of time, l'lace, orde1 o.f succession, et0., are used as ]Jl'edieates where English employs an advetb or a preposition with its ease: &qnKvovvTat rp,ra'iot the.1J WTive on the thirrl day X. A. 5 . .'3. 2, Kar{3atvov rrKoraun they <lescrmdecl in the darlc 4. 1.10. In such cases the adjective is regarded as a qnctlity of the subject; whereas an adverb would regard the mwmet of the action.

a. Time, pl act: xpbvros late, 6p8pros in the morning, evTEpa.os on the second clay, ToO<Yraos how many da ys? 1ra.i8pws in the open air.

276

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1043

b. OrdeT of succession: 7rpwros, 7rpDr<pos first, vrrrepos later, p.rros in the midst, rel\euraos last, rrraros last. N.- Wben one action is opposed to another in order of sequence, the adverbs 1rpwrov, 1rporepov, vrrrctrov, etc., not the adjectives 1rpwros, etc., must be used : -rrpwrov p.fv eorlKpe 1rol\v xpovov .. dra l!l\efe rouioe ji1st he wept for a long ti me, then he spoke as follows X. A. 1. 3. 2. Hence distinguish -rrpGJros ri) 1r6l\e< 1rporrt!{Jctl\e he was the first to attack the city. 1rpwrn ri} 1r6l\eL 1rporrt!f3al\e the city was the jiTst place he attacked. 1rpwrov rfi 1rol\et 1rporrt!f3al\e his fiist act was ta attaclc the city. The same rule applies in the case of JJ.Ovos, JJ.Ovov, as JJ.OP?JV ;'l]v 7rLrrrol\1]v li')'paif;ct this is the only letter 1 wTote, JJ.Ovov li')'paif;ct r'l]v hr<rrrol\-f}v '1 only W!'Ote (but did not send) the leiter. But this distinction is not al ways observed (A es. 3. 69). 1043. So also with adjectives of degree, mental attUude, manner, etc. : <{Jt!povra< ol l\lOo< 1rol\l\ol the stones a1e th1own in g1eat numbers X. A. 4. 7. 7, ros veKpos V7ra<F7r6vous 7rO<Jctv they !'esto!ed the dearl unrle~ a t1uce T. 1. 63, ol Oeol ewvs 7rf1-7rourrl tu the gods send y ou forth favoumbly X. C. 1. 6. 2. So with fl-E"f<tS high, lirrJJ.evos glarlly, hourrws, hwv willingly, IJpKws under oath, ctl<{Jvlws suddenly. On lil\Xos, see 1272.
AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE ADJECTIVES (AND PARTICIPLES)
WITH ONE SUBJECT

1044. A circumstantial participle (2054) referring to a collective noun (996) may be plural : r urpareuJJ.<t 1ropl!;ero rrrov K61rrovres ros {Jos the army provided it~elf with provisions by killing the cattle X. A. 2. 1. 6. So after oels, as oods KO<JJ.-fJO?J ( = 1ravres ev ')'pU7rPlf!- 1jrmv) rovs 1rol\wl\6rcts 1rev8ovres no one slept because they we1e all btwailing the dead X. H. 2. 2. 3. Cp. 950. 1045. A plural participle may be used with a dual verb: ')'el\arrr?JP lJ.fl.<fJ"' {Jl\r!if;ctJ;r<s eis ril\l\-f}l\ovs bath lookerl at each other ancl burst out laughing P. Eu. 273 d. A dual participle may be used with a plural verb: 1ro 1ror' 5ve ?JVp-fJJJ.eea; where in the wo1Zcl me wei' E. I. T. 777. 1046. A dual subject may be followed by a plural predicate adjective or participle; el ')'ap T<S <{Jctl'l} TW 1r6l\et TOVTW 1rl\elrrrwv ')'a8wv alrlis ')'<"{evij<r0<tL if any one shoulcl assert that these two cities have been the cattse of very many blessings I. 12. 156. 1047. A predicate adjective is neuter singular wh en the subject is an infinitive, a sentence, or a general thought: ~ov .,.oov x8pov> ~XLJI j is it pleasant to hve many enernies? D.19. 221, o1}ov 0' on mvr' cntv .AYf81} it is clear that these things are true 2. 19. 1048. A predicate adjective referring to a masculine or feminine singular subject is often neuter singular and equivalent to a substantive. This occurs chiefl.y in statements of a general truth, where the subject refers to a w hole class, not to an in di vi dual thing. Thus, Kaov dp0vYf peaee is a fine thing D. 19. 336, d.7rt<TTov 'Tas 7rOi:-

AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE ADJECTIVES

277

-rdau; ~ -rvpavv{ despotism is an abject of mistrust to .fr states 1. 5, 1u~ov ?Tot> vos vops the state is larger than the individual P. R. 368 e.

So also in the plural (1056).

1049. So with names of places: ti<Tn -1} Xatpwma li<Txa-rov Ohaemnea is on thefrontier of Boeota T. 4. 76.
-r~s

Botwrliis

1050. A predicate superlative agrees in gender either with the subject or (usually) with a dependent genitive: v6a-wv xa..\.e?Tw-ra-ros q,e6vos envy is tlle most jell of diseases Men. fr. 535, a-vp.f3ovos yat9o> X:JYJ<Ttp.w-ra-rov mivrwv -rwv KTYJp.arwv a good counsellor is the most useful of all possessions I. 2. 53. 1051.

For a predicate adjective used where English has an adverb, cp. 1042.

1052. A predicate adjective is often used in the neuter plural ( especially with verbal adjectives in -rs and -ros in Thucydides and the poets): hm~ hop.a. 1}v, v'>)-yero when (ail) was ready, he put. out to sea 'l'. 2. 56, avva.ra.1}v
ros AoKpos p.Vve<TOa.t it was impossible to 1esist the Loc1ians 4. 1, ilKEL rrtxe<P'f/ra dva<

they decided to make the attempt 2. 3.

Cp. 1003 a.

WITH TWO OR MORE SUBJECTS

With two or more substantives a 1)redicate adjective is plural, except when it agrees with the nearer subject: cf>of3o> Kat v6p.os tKavo> lpw-ra Kwiav fear and the law aTe capable of ?est'taz:ning love X. C. 5.1. 10, ?Towv o ..\.6-ywv Ka~ Oopv{3ov ytyvop.vov the1e arising ?mteh discussion and confusion D. 3. 4. See 968.
1053. 1054. With substantives denoting persans of like gender, a predicate adjective is of the same gender: 'A-yJJwv Ka! '2-wKp<irns o<rrol Agathon and Socrates are left P. S. 193 c. 1055. Wh en the persons are of different gender, the mascuJine prevails: ws <e rra.rpa re Ka! p:qrpa. Ka.! doerpos K< r?]v iavro j'VVCX.Ka a.lxp.a.wrovs -ye-yev7]p.vovs, eriKpv<T when he saw that his father and mothe1 and brothe1s and wife had been made JJ1'S01W1'S of war, he burst into teaTs X. C. 3. 1. 7. a. But persons are sometimes regarded as things: lixw arwv Ka! rhva Ka.1 -yvva.Kas rppovpouwva I have theil child1en and wives under guar X. A. 1. 4. 8. 1056. With substantives denoting things of !ike gender a predic<1te adjective is of the same gender and plural. A neuter plural with the singular ver!; is often preferred: EV')'vetal T Ka! VVaf.LELS Ka! rp.a! oiJ;',rf. EITTLV ya0 ovra. noble birth and power and honmtr are clemly good things P. Eu. 279 b. 1057. IV"hen the things are of different gender, a predicate adjective is neuter plural with singular verb : !llOot re Ka.! rr XlvOot Kal ~ua. Kai Kpap.os dr&.Krws lppip.f.Lva. oilv xP'>l<TLJ.La e<Tnv stones and b1icks and pieces of wood and tiles thrown togethe1 at 1andom are useless X. M. 3. 1. 7. 1058. When the substantives denote both persons and things, a predicate adjective is-a. plural, and follows the gender of the p8rRon, if the person is more important, or if the thing is treated as a person: -ypif.oux. Ka.! -yep6vna. Ka.l

278

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[rosg

1rp6{>a-ra ol')'a Kat {>os Ka-raefL}J,Pbovs old women anrl old men and a few sheep and oxen that had been left" ehind X. A. 6. 3. 22, 7} -rx'1 Kat <Pl<1r'1r'os 1j<rav -rwv ~p')'wv KVp<o< F01tune and Philip were masters of the situation A es. 2. 118, b. or is neuter plural if the person is treated like a thing : 7} Kalur'1 1rouli -re Kat Ka<<r-ros civ?]p 0<1r' av 7};.c:iv d'7 l'heMiv we should still have to treat of the noblest polity and the noblest man l 0 R. 562 a. 1059. The verbal and the adjective predicate may agree with the first of two subjects as the more important: Bpi<rlllis Kal -rb 7r'ij0os 1rl -r pnwpa -rfjs 1rOews Tpa7re-ro {>ovM;.vos Ka-r' liKpis v arf;v Brasidas with the bulle of his troops turned to the upper part of the city wishing to capture it completely T. 4. 112.
F~n

further uses of predicate adjectives, see 1150 ff., 1168 ff., 2647.

ATTRACTION OF PREDICATE NOUNS WITH THE INFINITIVE TO THE CASE OF THE OBJECT OF THE GOVERNING VERB

1060. When the subject of the infinitive is the same as a genitive, or dative depending on the governing verb, it is often omitted. 1061. A predicate adjective referring to a genitive regularly stands in the genitive, but a predicate substantive or pariiciple generally stands in the accusative in agreement with the unexpressed subject of the infinitive : K6pov Mov-ro ws 1rpo8}Wnl.-rov -yev<rOa' they entreated Cyrus to show himseif as zealous as possible X. H. 1. 5. 2, v1ro -rwv lleop.vwv 11ov 1rpo<rrar'f)v ')'V<r0a' by those who beoged me to become their chief X. C. 7. 2. 23, oo!la' 11wv 0fj<ral p.ov ciKov<ra<, 7roo'Y'Io!1vovs r 1rijOos rwv alnwv 1 beg of you that you be willing to listen to me, paying heed to the number of charges Aes. 2. 1. 1062. A predicate substantive, adjective, or participle referring to a dative stands in the dative or in the accusative- in agreement with the unexpressed subject of .the infinitive : vv <ro' ~~eunv civil pl ')'evf<Tea, now it is in your power to prove yourseif a man X. A. 7. 1. 21, AaKella,p.ovlo<S ~~e<rnv Dp.v <f!lovs ')'ev<rOa' it is in your power to become friends to the Lacedaemonians T. 4. 29, ltlio~ev aros . . . ~o1r',<rap.vo 1rpo'tfva< they decided to arm themselves jully and to advance X. A. 2. 1. 2, ltlio~ev a-ros 1rpocpvaKs Ka-ra<r-ri)<ravras <rv')'Kaev -ros <rrpancf:Jris they decided to station pickets and to assemble the soldiers 3. 2. 1, uv!l<f!peL a-ros <f!lovs eva< 11Xov ~ 1roep.lovs it is for their interest to be jriends rathe1 than enemies X. O. 11. 23.

For predicate nouns in the nominative or accusative in agreement with omitted s1tbject of the infinitive, see 1973-1975.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES <AND ADVERBS) POSITIVE

1063. The positive, used to imply that something is not suited or inadequate for the purpose in question, is especially common before an infinitive with or without .;;(J'Tf ( W) : ( TO vliwp) tf!vxpov

1o6g]

COMPAlUSO~

279
for bathing X. J\1. 3. 13. 3, T. l. 50, fLaKpov v l/:YJ p.oL And. 2. 15.

i<Tnv w<Tn ov<Ta<TOaL the water is too cold vi}<; {yaL &fLVLV slu]Js too .few ta rle.fend yav it would take too long for rrw ta state

1064. A positive adjective followed by the genitive of the same adjective has, in poetry, the force of a superlative: KaK. KaKwv woe of woe S. O. C. 1238. 1065.

tive:

fLov ~ rather than, more ... than 7rpo0fLW'i fLov {j cp{ws more prompt

may be used after a posithan kindly A. Ag. 1591.

COMPARATIVE

1066. The comparative expresses contrast or comparison. Thus, 3Unpo> is right in contrast to its opposite, .pL<Tnp> lejt. Cp. 1082 b.

Usually comparison is expressed, as

KaL xpov

well or ill T. 2. 35.

a. When the positive precedes, p,'A.'A.ov alone may stand for the comparative; as in hvol n IL~wt rralvov Kal gr, p,'A.'A.ov (i.e. ci~tC:.repot) o17raTpEs they are worthy of praise and still more wo1thy an ou1 fathers T. 2. 36. b. The persons or things with which comparison is made may include all others of the same class: 7}p,wv b -yepalnpos the elder ( = eldest) of us X. C. 5. 1. 6.
1067. The comparative is sometimes used merely as an intensive and does not differ essentially from the positive: rowwv Karaik<Trpo<; at a disadvantage with (inferior to) these men D. 27. 2. 1068. For the use of fLov instead of the comparative, and fLML<Tra instead of the superlative, see 323. \Vhen either form can be used, that with fLov or fLaL<TTa is more emphatic. Thucydides sornetimes uses r.ov ( n), ro r.ov instead of fLov. 1069. The comparative degree may be followed by the genitive (1431) or by ~ than: <Tocpwnpo> .lfLov or <Tocpwnpo> {j iyw wiser than L The genitive may precede or follow the comparative. With ~' the persons or things compared usually stand in the same case, and al ways so when they are connected by the same verb: cpLw yp ov <T fLov {j 36fLov<; ifLov<; for I do not loue thee rnore than rny own _house E.Med.327.

a. The genitive is usual if two subjects would have the same verb in cornmon ; as o! Kpfjres {3paxurepa r wv IIEp<rwv hb~wov the Gretans shot a shorter distance than the Persians ( = 7) ol IIp<rat) X. A. 3. 3. 7. b. When two objects have the same verb in common: if the object stands (1) in the accusative, the genitive is preferred, as ~,..ol ooKet Kpos, o<rrtvas av
op~ ci-yallous, </Jte'iv oov firrov avro Cy1ns seems to me to love all who1n he finds excellent q1~ite as mnch as he loves himself X. C. 2. 3. 12, but the accusative is not uncommon, as E . .Med. 327 quoted above; (2) in the dative, the genitive is frequent, as 1rpo<r1]Ket !J-O< ,..a>..>..ov hr!pwv ILpxv it behooves me rather than others to 1ule T. G. 16; (2) in the genitive, the genitive is very rare (X. M.4. 3.10). Here if is preferred to the genitive for the sake of euphony: o! "fp 11"DV1Jpol 1rO 1rEt6vwv EEp"(E<TtWV 77 o! XP>J<TTO! (not TWV XP1JG'TWP) oovrat for the wicked need more favm~1s than the good X. M. 2. 6. 27.

280

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

c. The genitive is often used where ii would be followed by sorne otller case tllan nominative or accusative, or by a preposition: TaTa -ros c!1rtTaLS ovx 'ljo-o-ov Twv va.uTwv ( =?) Tos vauTa) 7ra.pa.Keeuop.at I address these exhortations to the hoplites not less than to the sailors T. 7. 63, (e {J1r<tv) eis TTJV p.7retpli.v p.X"/..ov Tfjs peTf)s ( =?) fis TTJV <lpeTi}v) we rnust look at skill m01e than (at) conmge Aristotle, Politics 1309 b 5. d. 6.TTWv (xelpwv, voeo-TEpos, vo-TEpos, etc.) ovoev6s injerior to none, greater than all; l18re ii is not used). Thus, ooueuetv ouXeli.v oo<p.ts '/jTTov a.lo-xpav to endure a rnost disgTacejul slavery X. M. 1. 5. 6. 1070. The word following ii may be the subject of a new verb (expressed or understood) : -f!FJ.es u1r Kp<iTTovos tao-Kriou 1f<Tra.t<UFJ.<0a ?) ohot we have been eucate by a better teacher than they (have been) X. C. 2. 3. 13; but this word is more often attracted into tlle case of the preceding word: nvs Kat K etvoTpwv 1) Totwviie ( = ?) Totrie o-Tlv) o-wOTwav sorne have been ?'escue from dangers even gTeater than these T. 7. 77. The genitive is also common without ii: X{ywv /Jn ol!1rw TOUTou -f!tovt otv'l' 1ftT6xo< saying that he had never met with sweeter wine than this X. A. 1. 9. 25. 1071. ws for ii is rare, and suspected by sorne. But cp. A.Pr.629, P. A. 30 b, 3 d, R. 526 c. 1072. p."/.."/..ov # may be used though a comparative precedes : a.lpeTwTEpbP r;n W'-XOfJ.vous d7ro0vyjc;Ketv fJ.ov i) q,6-yovTa.s o-,P~eo-Oat it is more desiTable for men to die fighting (rather) than to save themselves by TUnning away X. C. 3. 3. 51. Here p.."/..ov # is to be taken with the verb. 1073. Instead of the genitive or#, the prepositions cl.vTl, 1rpb (w. gen.) or 1rp6s, 1ra.pri (w. accus.) are sometimes used with the comparative : Karep-yrio-ar;Oat alpeTWTEpov dva.t rov Ka'Mv OcivaTov avTl TO a.lo-xpo (3lou to make a noble death more desira/ile than (instead of) a shamef1tl life X. R. L.ll. 1, p.'IJ 1raZ/ias 7r<pl 1relovos 11:ow 1rpo To otKalou do not consier chil?en of mo1e account th an (bef ore) justice P. Cr. 54 b, XELfJ.WV J.LEi~wv rra.p TTJV Ka0CIT7JKUav wpi.v a col too severe for (in comparison with) the actual time of yea?' T. 4. G. 1074. In statements of number and measure ~ may be omitted after the adverJ;lial comparatives 1r<!ov (7r<v) more, ~Minov (FJ.<!ov) less, which do not alter their case and number: 1rp.rrEL oVK e"/..i.rTov oKa <f>povTas 1rp he sends not less than ten men carrying ji?e X. H. 4. 5. 4, 1r6 1rov Tr<vraK<o-xlliwv viipwv a city of more than 5000 men 5. 3. 16. Even when if is kept, 1rMov (1r"l>.ev), etc., remains unchanged: iv 1f<v ( Treloo-tv) il ti.two-loLS lino-tv in more than 200 years D. 24. 141, ro~6ri.s 1rev il efKoo-t fJ.Vpttias 'IJW?'e bowmen than 20 myrias x. c. 2. 1. 6. a. In place of the adverbial 7rov, etc., we find also the adjectival fon11s with or without if or with the genitive: To~6Ti.s 1relous il TETpetK<riXlous mo?e bowmen than 4000 X. C. 2. 1. 6, ~r7J -ye-yov<i>< 1relw i(3oofJ.i}Kovra. mme than 70 yea?s ol P. A. 17 d, 17rTri.s 1reious rpti.Koo-lwv mo1e than 300 ho?'Se X. H. 1. 3. 10. 1075. The genitive sometimes occurs together with -if, and either when the genitive has a separa te construction, or is a pronoun to which the ii clause stands as an appositive, or of which it is explanatory. Thns, 1rpoyjEL rr'illov ?) iiha o-Taiwv he avanCI:d ?JW1'1J than ten stades X. H. 4. (l. 5 (here 1rllfov is treated as a

COMPARISON

281

substantive), rls 'Yp ih 'Y'-o<ro ra6r17s p.avl p.d!;(,)v 1) i!!-Ls Kaxws 7T'OLEP; jo1 what madness could be greate1 than (this) ... to use us ill i' Is. 1. 20. Cp. 1070.
1076. Compendious Comparison. -'The possessor, rather than the object possessed, may be put in the genitive after a comparative: d S' ~Jl.S b7TLKOV KT'I')IJO.[jJ.EOa IL~ xpov TOVTWV ( = ro TOVTWV L7T7TLKov) but if we should mise a cavalry-force not inferior to theiTs X. O. 4. 3. 7. 1077. Comparison with a Noun representing a clause.- When one persan or tltiug is to be c_ompared, not with another person or thing in regard to its quality, but with an entire idea expressed by a clause (e.g. -1) fJ<J"n with the infinitive, ft ws with the potential optative, or 1} and a fini te verb), this clause may be abridged into a substantive or a participle. 'l'hus, 7rp')'!-La 1Tl5os xpG"G"ov an event beyond our expectations (too great to be expected) T. 2. 64, 1rporrwrpw ro Ka<po 1rpobvns advancing fuTther than the propm measure (i.e. fu1'ther than they should have gone) x. A. 4. 3. 84, WS TWV 'Y 7rapovTWV OVK av 11"pd~aVTS xepov in the beliejthat they could not fare worse than at present (-il T 7r<Lp6vra i<J"rlv) T. 7.67. 1078. Reflexive Comparison.- The comparative followed by the reflexive pronoun in the genitive is used to denote that an object displays a quality in a higher degree than usual. The degree of increase is measured by com pari son with the subject itself. avr> is often addecl to the subject: avrot avrJv E"p.a(}fTTpoL y{yvovraL they learn more easily than bejore 1.15. 267, 71"ovfTLwnpoL avrwv ytyvof.J.EVOL becoming richeT than they were bef01e T.l. 8. Cp. 1093. 1079. Proportional Comparison.- After a comparative, ~ Kara with the accusative (1690. 2 c), or ~ clfTre, ~ w>, rarely 7} alone, with the infinitive (not with the indicative), denote too high or too low a degree: o1ra ~TL 1rdw ~ KarJ. rovs veKpovr; .~cpe1J more arms were taken than there were men slain T. 7. 45, cf>of3ovJ.W.L Jl.~ TL !LE~ov ~ lo-n cf>pew 8vvafT8aL KaKov rfi 'll".et uvf.J.f3 1 fea1' lest the1e should befall the State an evil tao great fm it to be able to bear X. M. 3. 5.17 (2264). 1080. Double Comparison. -Two adjectives (or adverbs) referring to the same subject, when compared. with each other, are both put in the comparative; YJ is al ways used.: ~ <lp~vq dvayKatoTpii ~ Ka.twv a peace ine~Uable rather them honou1able Aes. 3. 69, rrvvroJl.wrepov ~ ~Jacf>~Jrepov &aexB>jvat to discourse briejly rathm than clea?ly I. 6. 24.

if before the second :

may be used with the first adjective in the positive (cp. 1065), and 11"pb8p.os f<ov 1) rrorpwr<pa with more a.ffection than prudence E. Med. 485. 1081. A comparative may follow a positive to mark the contrast with it: xal fJ-.Kp ~"'' 1-<<ll"w both srnall and great( er) D. 21. 14.
/-L.ov

a.

1082.

implie.

The comparative may stand alone, the second part being . .

a. 'l'hat which is exceeded is indicated by the sense only : ol G"orpwrepo< the wiser (th ose wiser th an the rest); ev flpfJvp al "IJ"om ,p.eivovs r> yvwJI.s l!xovrrv in

282

::iYNT AX OF TIIE 8l.MPLE SENTENCE

tirne of peace States are actuatecl by higher convir.tions (than in time of war) '1'. 3. 82. So r< vewupov something new (more recent thau that already known) P. Pr. 310 a ( often = a calamity or a revolutionwy rnovernent); xrrepov -tjKov they came tao lateT. 7. 27; and often where we supply is usual (right, fitting, etc.). b. The Hom. 07J!lrepa< "fVVCKes implies a cornparison with men. In Kpos . "f<'YVH JJ.7Jrps wlvovos, rrarps O rroowrr!pov Gy1us was born of a mother of supe1ior, but of a father of inferior 1ace (Hdt. 1. U1) the com]Jarison is between the qualities of mother and father respectively. Cp. 313 b. c. The comparative denotes excess: wi!;o<nv l!p"fo<s rr<xpovres o JJ.iKpos KaKos 1rep<rri1rroVtn by entering upon unclertakings tao great they encounter no slight t1ou.bles X. M. 4. 2. 35. d. The comparative is used to soften an expression (mther, somewhat) : "fpO<Krepov sornewhat boorishly P. G. 486 c, .JJ.irrrepov rropeero he proceeded rathe1 carelessly X. H. 4. 8. 36. Here the quality is compared with its absence or with its opposite. l.083. The comparative is often used where English requires the positive: ofl 'Yp xepov 1ro&K Kouv for 'tis not a bad tking to hear often P. Ph. 105 a. l.084. Strengthened forms. -The comparative may be strengthened by lfn, 7ro</1, JJ.aKp</1 (1513), 1roM (1609), rro lfn, etc. JJ.fiov is sometimes nsed with the comparative: airrxvvr7Jporpw JJ.fiov ro Movros '11W1'e bashful than they ought to be P. G. 487 b. So the correlative 5rr<p, 5rro~: Sere;; JJ.el!;ovs Elrrl r~s 6;j;m, rorrour<p JJ.fiov p"ffis IL~wi eirr< the brave1 they are to appearances, the ?1W1'e they deserve our anger L. 10. 29.
SUPERLATIVE
l.0~5. The superlative expresses either the highest degree of a quality (the ?'elati'ue superlative: o croc:f>wTaTos v?]p the wisest man) or a very high degree of a guality (the ausol?de superlative, which does not take the article : av~p croc:f>wr(l.ros a very wise rnan). The relative superlative is followe by the genitive of the person or thing surpassed (1315, 1434). On the agreement, see 1050.

a. The class to which an individual, mmked by the superlative, belongs, may be designated by a genitive of the divided whole (1315): o rro<j>wrarM rwv 'E>]vwv the wisest of the Greeks. So often by mivrwv: rrvrwv vOpwrrwv ."fvwJJ.Ovrrrarot the most senseless of all men Lye. 54. On the superlative with ilwv, see 1434. b. With two the comparative exhansts ali the degrees of comparison: he nee rrprepos and 7rpWTOS, verre po< and Verra ros, hrepos each Of tWO, and lKaffTOS each of several, are can"fnlly to be distinguished. l.086. Strengthened Forms.- The superlative may be strengthened by prefixing n or ws, ra rely ii (also orrov or o1rw< in poetry): on 7T<O"ro< as n~any men as possible, or< rx,rrra as qnickly f!.s JWsoillll', ii /Lp,rrrov the veTy bestway X, C. 7. 5. 82 (ihrws /Lp,rrra A. Ag. GOO). on or ws is al ways addecl wlJPn a preposition precedes the superlative : ws eis rrrevwrarov into as nm"To?n com]Jass as pn.sinle X, O. 18. 8. ws aml 8n may be used together: ws on {Jenrrrov JJ. ')'evrrOa, fo1' me to become as [fOOd as may be ]'. ::;, 21S cl.

1094]

COMPAIUSON

283

a. With W< and rare] y with lhrTI (not with !ln), a form of Uvap.aL or oU>< Tf elp.L, etc., tuay be employed: OL'J'YiJ<Jop.aL Dp.v ws v ouvwp.aL odL (3pa.xvT<iTWV I will 1elate to y ou in the briefest tenns I can I. 21. 2.
1087. ota< may streugthen the superlative: opwvTe< T 1rpti-yp.aTa ox oTa {3{/\rt!TTa lv Tfj 1roH 5vTa observing that a.tfai1'S are not in tite very best state in the city .L. 1:1. 23. If iliTos or o1ro1Tos take the place of oios, a fonn, or a synonym, of ouvap.aL is usually added: rf'Ya-yov ITVp.p.rixovs 011"0<JOUS 11"<JTOVS t!ouvrip.']V I IJ1'oug ht the very largest number of allies 1 could X. C. 4. 5. 29. 01roos is rare

n,

(Thuc., Plato).
1088. efs vf}p in apposition to the person designated may be added to strengthen the superlative: 'AvTj>wv 1r "1\erra s vi}p ouvrip.vos ch<f>EEv Antiphon being able to 1ender (most aid as one man) ai beyond any otl!er man T. 8. 68. 1089. iv rots is used before the superlative in ali genders and uumbers (esp. in Hdt., Thuc., Plato) : chil-I, i} <JTriiT ... 1!i5o~ p.ov, (hon t!v Tos 1rpwr7J l-ylvETo the revolution seeme the mme cnwl si nee it was the ji1st T. 3. 81, iv Tot< 1r"1\ITTa< il] vfje< iltl aTots l-yt!vovTo thry ha<l the ve1y largest nmn/Jer of ships 3. 17. 1090. p.a<ITTa, or 7rrJTov, p.-y<ITTov, occurs with the superlative: ol p.riLITTa vo7JrOTaro< the t>ery stupiest P. Ti m. 02 a. In poetry {3a8v- has the effect of a superlative: {3a8(nr"/\ouTos exceedin{f 1ich A. Supp. 555. 1091. Ka.i even, 1ro0, !ka.KpcfJ (1513), 1ro (1600), 1rap 1ro"/\, 1r<iwa (T 1rivra), the c<>rrelative 6<Jcp also strengthen the superlative. l.092. In poetry (rarely in prose) a superhttive may be strengthened by the addition of the genitive of the same adjective in the positive: w KaKwv K<iKune oh, vilest of the vile S. O. T. 334. 1093. Reflexive comparison (cp. 1078) occurs with the superlative: p.{3Mra.Ta aTos avTo op~ his sight is at its dullest P. L. 715 d. ADVERBS

Adverbs are of two kinds a. Ordinary adverbs, denoting manner, degree, time, place, etc. Ordinary adverbs qualify verbs, acljeeti v es, otl1er adverbs, and (rarely) substantives: o1ruTOw yEvofLEvos getting behind X. A.1. 8. 24, EMvs f.(36ii stra.ightway he shm~ted 1. 8. 1, c:f>av<.pov Yfo7J already clear L. 4. 6, 1rov O-rTov m1h more quiclcly X. A. 1. 5. 2, ti! fLaa veTy easay G. 1. 1, /(6-rw;; -rp61rov nva in a way reasonably D. 8. 41, !LMa O"vp.c:f>opa a g1eat mi.~fmtune X. C. 4. 2. 5, fa urpaTr/'Yo> an excellent general X. H. 6.2.39. b. Sentence adverbs (or particles) are adverbs that affect the sentence as a whole or give emphasis to particular words of any kind. Greek has many sentence adverbs, some of which are treated more fully under Particles.
1094.

Such are words of interrogation (~, &pa., p.wv) ; of affirmation and confidence (of} now, indeed, ofjTa s11rely, -y at least, even,~ 1eally, p.i}v in truth, vi} sU1ely,

284

SYNT AX OF THE SIM PL!~ SENTE!:\CE

[rogs

rol SUJ'ely); of uncert.ainty (f<Tws, ,-ou, ra x a pahrtps); of negation ( ov, p,~, oijrot, p,~rot, etc.) ; of li Ill i tati on ( dv 17l fi.).

1095. The equivalents of an ordiuary adverb are: an oblique case (f[3atrlevw efKOO"tV gT'f/ he 1'eigned j01' tWenty yea1'S, 1581, ]582; aKOUtV 0"7r0VOV tO listen attentiVely, rfi <Trepalq. 1ropeuovro they pruceeded on the next day, and many otber datives, 1527 b ; f]K< T?jv raxi<TT'f/V he came in the quickest way, and many other accusatives, 1606-1611) ; an oblique case with a preposition (ilt .,.&,xovs f]Me he rame quickly rax<ws, ,-' otKov bpp,wp,at I start from home otKo8<v, lv r{! ip,cpav clea1ly, fi!loov ,-ps T?jv a~liv he gave according to merit = ~iws, 1rpos (3!av jo1cibly = {3taiws); a participle ('Y<wv d,-e he said 1cith a laugh, laughingly). (Furthermore, a clause in a complex sentence, as ei<T7r'f/O~<Tavres . . B.Trov 1) &s ns /lv <ilero leaping in more quickly than one would have thought

X. A. 1. 5. 8; cp. 2189. 3.)

1096. In the attributive position an ordinary adverb may serve as an adjective: .v 'T< 7T"YJaiov 1rapaoder'f in the neighbouring park X. A. 2. 4. 16, oK()w /J.yyo> the rnessenger from that quarter P. R 619 b, 'Tapax!J ~ rarE the confusion of that Urne L. 6. 35. See 1153 e. N. 1097. a. An ordinary adverb qualifying a verb is often so used that it may be referred to the subject or object of the sentence where an adjective coul stand. 'l'hus, <fl<Tr< ,-oap,(3ave<TIJat p,etj6vws J) Kar T?jv ~iiv so as to be 1'fgarded as greater (lit. in a greate1 way) than ( acco1ding to) the ir deserts I. 11. 24. b. olxa and xwpls apart, has jar, <'Y-y>!s near and sorne other ordinary adverbs supply, with .Iva< or ')'l')'vE<TBa<, the place of missing adjectives. TlmR, xwpls <Tocpli o<TTlv vi!pdis wisdom is d~fferent from courage P. Lach. 195 a. 1098. For adjectives used adverbially, see 1042; for degrees of comparison, 345, 1068; for the genitive or dative after adverbs, 1437 ff., 1499 ff.; for adverbs used as prepositions, 1700 ff.; for a relative adverb used with nam es of things as an equivalent of a relative pronoun preceded by iv, Eis, t!;, see 2499.
THE ARTJCLE--ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT

The article o, ~' r6, was originally a demonstrative pronoun, and as such supplied the place of the personal pronoun of the third person. By gradual weakening it became the definite article. It also served as a relative pronoun (1105). (Cp. Germ. der, demonstrative article and relative; French le from le.) o as a demonstrative is still retained in part in Attic prose (1106), while the beginnings of its use as the article are seen even in Homer (1102).
1099.

o,
1100.

~' TO IN HOMER

In Homer o, ~' ro is usually a demonstrative pronc,un and is used substantively or adjectively; it also serves as the pmsonal pronoun of the third person : &.U TO eavp.d.tw but I nw.rvel at this 0 655, 'TOV w{3"Y)rTjpa i7TCT{3oov this prating brwler B 275, T~V o' yw ov ADcrw but her I will not release A 29.

uo8]

THE ARTICLE

285

1101. In its substantivai use o either marks a contrast or recalls the subject (the anaphoric use). But with .)..M, /lt!, cd17p the subject is generally changed. It often precedes au explanatory relative clause : rwv ot vv {3poro! .ZrH of those who a1e now rno1tal men A 272. 1102. o, .;,, ro often approaches to its later use as the definite article or is actually so used: rov pb . . . rov o' l!repov El45 (cp. 1107). a. The substantive often stands in apposition, and is added, as an afterthought, to the demonstrative ( especially o lit!) which is stiJl an independent pronoun: arp o rorn -ypwv oOilv 1,-yep,oveuev but he, the old man, was leading the way for them w 225. In sorne cases the appositive is needed to complete the sense : l1rel r6 -ye KaMv aKoup,ev J'TLP aotoo Si nee this- to listen to a minstrel- S a good thing a 370. b. Often with adjectives and participles used substantively, with pronouns, and adverbs; especially wh ena contrast or distinction is implied: oi /!.)..)..o, the others q; 371, r u1J'6p,eva the things that are to be A 70, ro ,.&,po< jonne1ly N 228. The attributive adj. bef ore the noun : ros IJ'DV< thy >Ir 572, r p,"(tura i!.e8)..a the g1eatest jJTiZCS 'lr 640 ; and in apposition :'lpov rov afJTTJP ]?us, the beggar IJ' 333. Hom. has 7rar1}p ovp,6s e360 (but do es not use o ,.ar1}p o lp,6s). 1103. In Hom. o contrasts two abjects, indicates a change of persan, or a change of action on the part of the same person. Attic o defines. 1104. The transition from the demonstrative to the article is so gradua] that it is often impossible to distinguish between the two. Ordinarily Homer does not use the article where it is required in At tic prose. The Epie use is adopted in general by the lyric poets and in the lyric parts of tragedy. Even in tragic dialogue the article is less common than in prose. Hdt. has o l and he, o-yrlp jo? he.

o,
1105.

"l' TO

AS RELATIVE

The demonstrative , ~' r6 is nsed as a relative prononn in Homer only w hen the antecedent is defini te (cp. that): m!xa 3' ~va pt~' Ta Ot 7r0p xaKWS "ApYJS he st1i:pped off the arms that bmzen Ares had given him H 146. The tragic poets use only the forms in r-, and chiefiy to a void hiatus or to produce position: KTE{vovua Tos o;; XP~ KTavEv slaying those whom it is not right to slay E. And. 810. (J =os E. Hipp. 525.) On the use in Herodotus, see 338 D. 3.

o, ,,

TO

AS A DEMONSTRATIVE IN ATTIC PROSE

1106. The demonstrative force of , ~' TO survives chiefiy in connection With particles (p.v, 3, yf., To{; an With if.a{ preceding o). 1107. o is a demonstrative commonly before p,lv, 0, and especially in contrasted expressions : 6 pb ... Oi the one, this ... the uther, that, as in oi p,i'v f'lrOpevovro, ol o' 'lrOPTO the 0116 party )noceeded, the othm followeil x. A.3. 4.16. 1108. The reference may be indefinite ; in which case rls is often added : ros p,v &,,.Kretve, ros o' l~l{3a)..ev some he put to death, and others he expelled X. A. 1. 1. 7, oi p,v nves ,,.Bvvcr~<ov, ol ' gq,w-yov some were killed, but othe1s escaped C. 3. 2. 10.

286
rd. (1663 a).

SYNTAX OF THE Sll\lPLE SENTENCE

[IIog

1109. With prepositions the order is usually inverted: K ph -rwv, <ls 0 1110. In late writers (but in Demosthenes) the relative is used as in 1107: r6Xm, s tv va<pwv, <is .is o -ros .pv-y&.as Kara-ywv destToying some cities, into others b1inging bacle their exiles D. 18. 71 (the first instance). 1111. Note the adverbial expressions: -ro (-r) pb . .. -ro (r) at! on the one hand . . . on the other hand, partly . . . partly (so also roO-ro pb . . . -roO-ro li 1256) ; r li n pmtly, -ri) pb . . rii o in this way . . . in that way, ro O whereas (1112), -r<i' ro< therejo1e. 11.12. o li, 1} at!, ro t! (without a preceding pb clause) often mean but( or and) he, she, this. In the nominative the person referred to is usually different from the subject of the main verb: Kpos olliW<nv atlr<l' p.plovs liipfLKovs o o Xaf3wv -ro xpcrlov K.T.. Cyrus gi'IJes him (Clearclms) 10,000 daTics; and he taking the money, etc. X. A. 1. 1. 9, -raO-ra cbra-y-yovcr< ros crrpanw-Ta<s -ros Iii! inro,Yli ?jv lin li-yo< 1rps f3acr<t!i they report this to the soldie1s; and they had a suspicion th at he was leading (them) against the king X. A. 1. 3. 21, -r ' otlK crn -rowrov

whereas this is not so P. A. 37 a.

VARIOUS USES OF o (os),~ (i\), To DEMONSTRATIVE 1113. As a persona! pronoun, chiefiy after Kal, and in the nominative: Ka! lis (11) and he (she) : Ka! ot <1rov and they said X. A. 7. 6. 4. Also in 1j ' lis and he said P. R. 327 c (792). So Ka! r6v (-r1jv) used as the accusative of Kal os, as subject of a following infinitive in indirect discourse: Ka! -rov <l1riv and (he said that) he said P. S. 174 a. 1114. In the nominative os, ;], are usually thus written. Sorne write li, ~' or, ar when these words are used as demonstratives ; but 8 p.v . . . 8 /U is rare. a. The forms os, ;], here apparently relatives with an older demonstrative force, may .be in reality demonstratives, lis being the demonstrative (article) o to which the nominative sign -s bas been added. From this lis may be derived, by anal ogy, the demonstrative use of li, and of ols, os in fixed expressions (1110). 1115. Also in rov Kal -r6v this one and that one L. 1. 23, -ro ~<al -r6 this and that D. 9. 68, -r Ka! raD. 21. 141, oi!u -ros oilu -ro'is neither to these noT to those P. L. 701 e. In the nom. 8s Ka! lis such and such an one Hdt. 4. 68. 1116. In an oblique case before the relatives lis, lieras, o[os: r6v u E!'JIJrJKp<-rov . Kal -rv s g</>11 1i<rnr6T'f/S -rou-rou il va<, p.rip-rvpas 1rap~op.a< and as witness I will p1oduce both Euthycritus and the man who said he was his master L. 23. 8. op-y<-ra< -roO 8 ecrnv r~rov he aims at that which is equal P. Ph. 75 b, and often in Plato in defining philosophical tenus. 1117. Rarely with prepositions, except in 1rpo roO (or 1rpo-roO) before this ti me T. 1. ll8. On iv ro'is with the superlative, see 1089.

o, ,;,
1118.

'T6 AS AN ARTICLE (the) IN ATTIC (ESPECIALLY

IN PROSI~)

The article b, ~' r marks objects as definite and known, whether individuals (the particulm article) or classes (the generic

1122)

THE ARTICLE

287

artiele ). article.
r!s (1267).

The context must determine the presence of the generic

a. There is no indefinite article in Greek, bul a, an is often represented by

THE PARTICULAR ARTICLE

The particular article denotes individual persans or things as distinguished from others of the same kind. Thus, JLa{v(raL iivOpw1roc; the man is mad (a definite persan, distinguished from other men) P. Phae. 268 c. 1120. Special uses of the particular article. The particular article defines
1119.

a. Objects well known : orwv hrr rrocpwraros ~6\wv Solon the wisest of the Seven (Sages) P. Tim. 20 d. b. Objects already mentioned or in the mind of the speaker or writer (the anaphoriC article) ; E1r"OP an TaPTOP ap-yuplou TOtj.WS d7]P OOVat . . 0 iJ a{3WV r ra\avrov K.T.. I said that I was ready to give him a talent of silve1 . . . and he taking the talent, etc. L. 12. 9-10. c. Objects specially present to the senses or mind (the deictic article): \af3 r f3<f3lov talee the boole P. Th. 143 c, f3ovMwvos r7]v JlaX7JP ?rotij<Ta< wishing to fight the battle T. 4. 01. Hence the article is regularly used with demonstrative pronouns (1176). N.-The foregoing (a-c) uses recall the old demonstrative force of the article. Words that ordinarily have no article may receive the article when this older force is present. d. Objects particularized by an attributive 'or by a following de~cription : 0 ofjJlOS 0 'A()7]valwv the people of the Athenians A es. 3. 116, f'YE r7]v ?rtrrTO-f}v, ;)v I?rEJl'fv 1ead the letter thrtt he sent D. 18. 39. Cp. 1178 d. e. Objects marked as usual or prope1 under the circumstances : ro Jlfpos rwv 1{1-f}<f;wv o ii<wKwv oDK ~\af3<v the pmsecutor did not get the (requisite) pa1t of the votes D. 18. 103. f. Objects representative of their class (the distributive article, which resem bles the generic use ; often translated by a, each) : fl?r<rrxviira< w(J"ELP rpla -iJJl<oiipK roii Jl7JPos r</i rrrpanwTT/ he promises to give each solclie1 three half-darics a rnonth X. A. 1. 3. 21. But the article may be omitted : Ka1 EZ\ovro iiha, gva. a,,.o cp\fjs and they chose ten, onef!orn (each) tribe X. H. 2. 4. 23.
1121. The article often takes the place of an unemphatic possessive pronoun when there is no doubt as to the possessor: Kvpoc; Kara7rYJ'0r:r.c; 1ro Tov pfLaToc; ,.v Owp.Ka v8v CyTus leaped dawn frorn his chaTiot and put on his bTeastplate X. A. 1. 8. 3.
THE GENERIC ARTICLE

1122. The generic article denotes an entire class as distinguished from other classes. Thns, o d.v8pw7roc; rnan (as distinguished from other beings), oi ypovTEc; the aged; OE rov r:rrp<tTLWTYJV <f>of3ii8aL JLov rov J.pxovra ~ Tove; 1fOEfL{ovc; the (a) sol dier slw-uld jeaT his cornrnander

288

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

rather than the enern.?J X. A. 2. 6. 10, 7rOV'Y/pov is a vile thing D. 18. 242.

oa-uKotj>avrr;>

the infonner

1123. In the singular the generic article makes a single object the representative of the entire cla.ss ; in the plural it denotes ali the objects belonging to a class. The generic article is especially common, in the plural, with adjectives used substantively: aOK if. v ns d1rot ws ros KaKoup"fous Ka.l &.liiKaus dii Ka.Ta."f<v no one could say that he pmmitted the malefactor and the W?'ongdoer to dmide hint X. A. 1. 9. 13. ll.24. The Article with Participles. - A participle with the article may denote an entire class: {3ovOJL(vos any one who wishes. Cp.

2050, 2052.

The same sense is expressed by 1ris o with a participle or adjective. On the article with a participle in the predicate, see 1152. a. When the reference is to a particular occasion, the article may be particular (2052) ; as o "fwv the speaker on a definite occasion.
THE ARTICLE WITH NUMERALS

o rvxwv any chance come1, o+nrw6p.<vos a guide, oK &:rropfw<r< rwv 8JE?J<r6vrwv 1rp bp.wv Ktvl!vdE<v you will not be in want of tkose who will be willing to encounter dange1 fm you D. 20. 166, oi o"fa7Towvus newsmongms 4. 49.

1125. The article may be used with cardinal numerals a. When the numeral states the defini te part of a who le ( expressed or understood) : 1Ti)<rav rwv Mxwv l!wliEKa 8vrwv ol rps of the companies, nurnbering twelve (in all), there were absent three X. H. 7. 5. 10, ls 1rap ras Mw. one man in (comparison with) ten X. O. 20. 16, rwv 1rvT riis ouo p.olpO.s two fijihs T. 1.1 0, ilo p.p?J two thiids 3. 15. (The genitive is omitted wh en the denominator exceeds the numerator by one.) b. W""hen the numeral is approximate: lfp.E<vav ftp.pi &.p.<jJI r.s rpdi.Kovra they remained about thirty days X. A, 4. 8. 22, 'Y'Yov6ns r 7Tvrf,Kovra. h?J about fi.fty years of age X. C. 1. 2. 13. c. When the number is used abstractly (without reference to any definite object): 81rws p.T} ipe<s lin l!<rnv r owoEKa ols ~ beware of saying 12 is twice 6 P. R. 337b. N. Ordinals usually omit the article and regularly do so in statements of time in the dative (1540) : ovrlp4J p.?Jvl r'T}v 71"6"/uv iulx<fov in the second month they fortijied the city T. 8. 64.
FLUCTUATION IN THE USE OF THE ARTICLE: OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE

1.126. The article is often omitted (1) in words and phrases which have survived from the period when b, ft, r6 was a demonstrative pronoun; (2) when a word is sufficiently definite by itself; (3) when a word expresses a general conception without regard to its application to a defini te person. The generic article is frequently omitted, especially with abstracts (1132), without appreciable difference in meaning. Its presence or absence is often determined by the need of distinguishing subject from predicate (1150), by the rhythm of the sentence, etc.

THE ARTICLE

289

1127. The article is omitted in many adverbial designations of time, mostly with prepositions (except ~p.pas by day, vuKTo> by night): 'l'hus, 1repl p.a-iis v6KrM about midnight, ip.a <<t> just before daylight, &pf! trous at the season of the year. So with 15p8pos dayb1eak, i'iel7J aj~enwon, ia-Trpii evening, ~ap spring; and eK 1rali'iwv frorn childhood. Most of the above cases are survivais of the older period when the article !lad a demonstrative force. 1128. The article is very often omitted in phrases containing a preposition : <v tl.pxfi ro {ryov in the beginning of the speech D. 37. 23, ~~w {J<i-.wv out of reach of the missiles X. A. 3. 4. 15, 'Htbva Toqv l1rl "1:-rpvJJ.bvt Eion on the 8t1ymon T.l. 98. 1129. Words denoting persons, when they are used of a class, may omit the article. So livOpwTros, nparrJ-ybs, 8<os divinity, god (o ll<os the pa.rticnlar god). Th us, 1rci.vrwv pb po v livllpw1r6s a-nv rnan is the measu1e of all things P. Th. 178 b. 1130. Adjectives and participles used substantively have no article wh en the reference is general: p.a-ov -l]p.piis rnidday X. A. 1. 8. 8, 'fvxp6v cold, ll<pp.bv heat P. S. 186 d, Trp.'fa< 7rpOKara7J'fop.vovs r. liKpa to send men to preoccupy the heights X. A. 1. 3. 14. Rarely when an adverb is used adjectively: rwv lxOpwv lipo7Jv 6e8pos the utter clest1uction of the enemy D. 19. 141.
THE ARTICLE WITH ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES

Abstract substantives generally have the article: 'tJ apf'T~ p.ov ~ 't] cpvy-1 O'<:Ja T:> !f!xiis valour mtlw1 tkan jligkt saves men's lives X. C. 4. 1. 5.
1131. 1132. The names of the vi1tues, vices, arts, sciences, occupations often omit the article: rl a-wq,poa-uv7J, rl p.avlii.; what is temperance, what is mad ness '1 X. M. 1. 1. 16, tl.pxoq </><li.s p.~v ~Tratvos, ~xOpii.s il .p6-yos ]J?'aise is the lieginning of friendshtp, blame of enrnity I. 1. 33. Similarly p.ova-<K-Q m~tsic, -y<wp-yli. agriculture. So also with il6~a opinion, vos mind, rxrJ a1t, vbp.os law. 1133: The article must be used wh en reference is made to a defini te person or thing or to an object weil known: -1] rwv 'E:>..Tjvwv <livo<a the goodwill of the Greeks Aes. 3. 70, (ilp.v) -1] ""Xo-fJ you1 usual idleness D. 8. 53. 1134. The article may be omitted in designations of space; as {Jci.Oos depth, v'fos height; also p.-y<Oos size, 1rM)Oos size, amou nt. -yvos and ovop.a, used as accusatives of respect (1600), may omit the article. 1135. The article may be omitted with sorne concrete words conveying a general idea, as 'fx-Q soul, a-wp.a body (but the parts of the body regularly have the article).
THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NAMES

Names of persans and places are indiviual and therefore omit the article unless previously mentioned (1120 b) or specially marked as well knowu: ovKvo[01J> 'A()1Jvao> Tlwcyrlides an Athenian T.l.l, To{.~ cnpanwTa> avTJV, Tos 7rap. K>..apxov 1r<0vras, Ela Kvpo> TC)v K>..apxov ~XW their soldiers who seceded to Clearchus, Cyrus ttllowed Clearchus to retain X. A..l. 4. 7, o ~6>..wv D. 20. 90, oi 'HpiiKf> the Heracleses P. 'l'h.l69 b.
1136.
SUEE!{ GRUL

-19

290

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[II37

1137. Names of deities omit the article, except when emphatic (vi] -rv Al<L by Zeus) or when detinite cults are referred to: r -rijs 'AIJ"I)viis /los the sanctuwy of Athena (at Atheus) 1. 15. ~- Names of festivals vary in prose writers (no article in inscriptions): Il<Lva!Jryva<a the Panathenaea (!.mt IIavaiJ"I)valo<s ros p.Kpos at the Lesser Panathenaea L. 21. 4). Names of shrines have the article. 1138. Names of nations may omit the article, but oi "E7Jves is usual when opposed to o! {3p(3apo< the arbarians. When nat.ions are opposed, the article is usually absent: o 7r6<p.os 'AIJ"I)valwv Kat li<o7roVv7Jcr{wv T. 2. 1 (but o 7r6<p.os rwv Il<o7rovv"l)crlwv Kat 'AIJ"I)v<Llwv l. 1). 'l'he name of a nation without the article denotes the entire people. Names of families may omit the article: 'AcrK7J7r<a< P. R. 406 a. 1139. Continents: 7} Eopw1r'1 Europe, 7] 'Acrlii. Asia. Other names of conntries, except those originally adjectives (as 1} 'ArnKry Attica), omit the article (A,f3v'1 Libya). -yi] and xwp. may be added only to snell naa1es as are treated as adjectives: 7} Botwrla (-yij) Boeotia. The names of conntries standing in the genitive of the divided whole (1:111) usually omit the article only wh en the genitive precedes the governiug noun: ~<K<l.s r 1r<crrov the most of Sicily T. 1. 12. The article is generally used with names of mountains and rivers ; bnt is often omitted with na.mes of islancls, seas (but Ilovros the Pontus), all<l winds. Names of cities usually omit the article. Names of cities, riveTs, and mountains often add 1r6, 1rorap.6s, 5pos (1142 c). The article is omitted with p1'oper nam es joined with <Lvr6s used predicatively (1206 b): avro)s 'AIJ"I)va.lou; the Athenians themselves T. 4. 73. 1140. Severa] appellatives, treated like proper names, may omit the article :
(3acrt<vs the king of Persia ( {3<Lcr<evs is anaphoric (1120 b) or refers express] y to a definite person). Titles of official persons: 1rpvr.vm the Prytans, crrpar7J-yol the Generais. Names of relationship, etc.: 1radp .(athe1, vryp husliancl, -yvvry

wife (but the article is neecled when a defini te individmtl is spoken of).

Thus:

1iKov r<fl p.v p.ryr"l)p, r<fl -yuv?j Kc 1ra<s to one there came his nwther, to another his wife and chil(lJen And. 1. 48. So also 1rarpis fathe!lancl.

1141. Similarly in the case of words forming a class by themselves, and sorne others used definitely : ~ws sun, ovpav6s heaven, wp<L< seasons, K<pauv6s tlmnder,
IJvaros death; lf.crrv, 7rOLS city, Kp67ro citadel, -yopfl market-plnce, T<txos city-wall, 7rpvrav<ov ]J!"lftaneum, vijcros island (ail used of definite places), IJ<Lrm sea as opposed to the mainland, but 7} IJarra of a definite sea; similarly 1'7 ea1th, land.

1142. When the name of a pers on or place is defined by an appositive (916) or attributive, the following distinctions are to be noted:

a. Persons: li<polKKiis 'A<~vpov Ptrdicc(ts, son of Alexander 'l'. 2. : the official designation mere] y stating the parentage. 7Jp.ocr8v"l)s o 'AK<crBvovs (the popular designation) distinguishes Demosthenes, the son of Alcisthenes (1'. 3. 91) from other persons named Demosthenes. (Similarly with names of nations.) b. Deities: the article is used with the mtrne anil with the epithet or (less often) with neither: r<fl ALI Tif '0)1.uJJ.7rl<p to Olympian Zeus T. 5. 31, <t wiJ<pl<p to Zeus guardian of freedom 2. 71.

II49]

THE ARTICLE

291

c. Geographical Names are usually treated as attributives, as o Er"ppdr'Y}s 1rora.p.6s the l'ive?' Euphrates X. A. 1. 4. 11, 1} B6f31J l\lp.v'YJ lake Bulbe 'l'. 4. 103. In a very few cases (six times in 'l'huc.) is omitted with the name of a river when 1rora.p.6s is inserted ; but Hdt. often omits o. \Vith the names of mountains the order is r Il?)<ov 6pos Mt. Pelion Hdt. 7. 129 when the gender agrees, but otherwise ls r 6pos r1)v 'Icrrwv'Y}v to Mt. Istone 'l'. 3. 85 (rarely as 1rb rii Afrvv r<;l 6pet at the foot of 11ft. Aetna 'l'. 3. lW). With nam es of islands, towns, etc., the order varies: rb ITa.piJvwv 1r6l\,crp.a. the town of Partheniurn X. A. 7. 8. 21; 1} 'i<vrral\w:t v?]cros the island of Psyttalea Hdt. 8. 95; Tpa.yli 1} v?]<Tos the island of T1agia 'l'. 1. 116; rou ITetpa.<ws ro <p.vos of thP. ha1bour of Peiraeus 'l'. 2. \)3; r <jJpovpwv rb Aafioa.l\ov fort La/Jdalon 7. 3. The city of Mende wonld be Mvo'Y} 7rO<S, 1} Mvo'Y} 1] 1r6l\ts, Mvo1J 1] 1r6l\ts.
OTHER USES OF THE ARTICLE

1143. A single article, used with the first of two or more nouns connected by and, produces the effect of a single notion: oi crrpar'Y}yoi Ka.i l\oxiyol the generais and captains (the commanding officers) X. A. 2. 2. 8, ros p.<yi<Trs Ka.l ll\a.xlcrris va. us the largest and the srnallest ships (the wh ole fieet) T. 1. 10, 1} rwv 1rowv o<a.fiol\1) r< Ka.l <jJIJ6vos the calmnniation and envy of the rnultitude P. A. 28 a. Rarely when the substantives are of different genders: 7r<pl rs ia.urwv >fvxs Ka.l crwp.a.ra. concerning theil own lives and penons X. A. 3. 2. 20. 1144. A repeated article lays stress on each word: 8p~~ Kal fiapfia.pos the Thmcian and the barbarian D. 23. l:J2 (here the subject remains the same), oi crrpa.r1J'}'ol mi oi l\oxiyol the genemls and the captains X. A. 7. 1.13. 1145. Instead of repeating a noun with the article it may suffice to repeat the article: filas rwv IO<wr<uovrwv i7 rwv rvpa.vvw6vrwv the life of persans in a Jni~;ate station or that of princes I. 2. 4. 1146. A substantive followed by an attributive genitive and forming with it a compound idea, usually omits the article: r<wr1) rou filou (the) end of his life (' life-end' as life-time) X. A. 1. 1. 1. (Less commonly 1} rel\wr1) rou filou X. A.l. 9. 30.) Cp. 1295 a. 1147. \Vhen the genitive dependent on a substantive is a proper name: p.<r E&fiolis iil\wcr<v afteT the captute of Euboea 'l'. 2. 2, and p.<r r1)v Acrfiov iiwcr<v after the captme of Lesbos 3. 51. A preceding genitive thus often takes the place of the article: o< xp6vou 7rl\?jl7os by reason of the extent of ti me 'l'. 1. 1. 1148. Con crete coordinated words f01ming a copulative expression may omit the article : 1rpbs oilv 1ralowv Kal yvva<Kwv iKer<w p.s by yonr children and wives I beseech yon L. 4. 20, 1ro<v KaJ olKiis -i}p.v 1ra.paoori surrender to us your city and ho uses 'l'. 2. 72, ifpa< Kal i<p<s priestesses and priests P. R. 461 a. Cp. man and wife, hone and ?'icler. 1149. An appositive to the persona! pronouns of the first and second persons has the a1'ticle when the appositive would have it (as third person) with the pronoun omit.ted: p.s oi -i)y<p.6v<s 1rpos p. 1r6.vr<s crup.fial\"1\<r< do you, captain.~, all confer with me (oi +n<p.ov<s <Tup.fial\"1\ovcr<) X. C. 6. 2. 41, ou cr<j;oopa. xpwp.eiJa. ol Kp?]r<s ros ~<v<Kos ?ro<?)p.a.cr<v we. Cretans do not make very much use of foreign

292

SYNTAX OF THE

SllllPU~

SENTENCE

[nso

poems P. L. 680 c, xaipw c:iKouwv D}J-wv rwv rroif>wv I delight in listening to you sages P. Ion 532 d.
THE ARTICLE AND A PREDICATE NOUN

A predicate noun has no article, and is thus distinguished from the subject : KaEt:rm ~ Kp6?Tot ~n inr' 'A(J-qva{wv ?T6t the acropo-, lis is still called 'c#y' by the Athenians T. 2. 15.
1150.
~15~. Predicate comparatives and superlatives, possessive pronouns, and ordinals have no article: l[JJ1-7JP r-l}v J1-auro oyuvai'Ka 1rarrwv O'Wif>pov<rrrrir7Jv fvat I thottght that my wife was (the) most virtuous of all L. 1.10, Xatp<if>wv Jl-OS irai'pos 'ljv Ghaerephon was a friend of mine P. A. 21 a. Cp. 1125 d. 1152. Even in the predicate the article is used with a noun referring to a defini te abject (an individual or a class) that is well known, previously mentioned or hinted at, or identical with the subject: o! o' ilot l7rtXetporrt (3ri)I.)I.Hv rP !l.l~t1r1rov c:ivaKaovTEs rv 1rpo06r7Jv the rest try to strike Dexippns calling him ' w traitor' X. A. 6. . 7, o!iTot 'ljrrav o! if><voyovTEs Tov ~eoyxov these men were those who (as I have said) avoided the inqni?'Y Ant.6. 27. oi TdJ}1-<vot Tos vbJl-ovs oi c:irr8<vs llv8pw1roi drrt Kal oi 1rool the enactors of the laws are the weak men and the multitude P. G. 483 b, 7rW1rTEV< o el vat TOP ota{3riovTa Mt!vwva he suspected that it was JJienon who traduced him X. A. 2. 5. 28 (here subject and predicate could change places). So also with avTbs the sa me (1209 a), Ori.T<pov one of two (69), TovvavTlov the opposite.

SUBSTANTIVE-MAKING POWER OF THE ARTICLE

1153. The article has the power to make substantivai any word or words to which it is prefixed.
a. Adjectives: rrorpbs the wise man, T i5lKatop justice. b. Participles ( with indefini te force) : f3ouhJ1-<Pos whoever wills, the first that o.ffers. Cp. 1124. N. 1.- Su ch participial nouns appear in active, middle, and passive forms,

and admit the distinctions of tense : o! fO<f}rrovTH p.lv<tv those who shall be willing to remain X. H. 7. 5. 24. N. 2.- Thucydides often substantivizes the neuter participle to fonn abstract expressions: Tfjs 'll'b<ws To Ttf.LWJl-fPov the dignity of the State 2. 63. Such participialnouns denote an action regulated by time and circumstance. Contrast To IJ<ot6s fem (in actual operation) 1. 3G with T i5fos (simply fear in the abstract). c. Preposition and case : o! l1rt Twv 7rp.'YJ1-<Twv those in power, the government D.18. 247, oi ev TV i))I.Kl<!- those in the prime of life T. G. 24. d. With the genitive, forming a noun-phrase (1200): T Twv rrTpartwTwv the condition of the soldiers X. A. 3. 1. 20, T Tfjs opoyfjs, the outbuTsts of wrath T. 2. 60. e. Adverbs: or T' gPOOV <FUVEap.(3rivovTO Ka! o! fKTOS KaTEK61r7J<rav those who were inside were arrested and those outs'ide ~vere eut own :X:. A. 2. G. 32. Similarly oi T6TE the men of that time, oi h the dead, oi 1rriat the ancients. N.- An adverb preceded by tho article may be used like an adjective: op8ws Kv(3<pvfJT7Js the good pilot P. R. 341 c. The article is rarely omitted.

n6o]

THE ARTICLE

293

f. Infinitives: KUO<Tl "/ ctKOU<Tliv ro inr rwv 7}ovwv IJ.pxe<TOaL they call intemperance being ruled by one's pleasltres P. Ph. 68 e. g. Any single word or clause : r {; p,e'is Sr av t!"fw, ri} v 7TO<v "fw wh enI say You, !mean the State D.18. 88, v1repf3as r lKiis u1rext!rw ro </J6vov ornitting (the words) 'let hirn submit to judgment for the rnu1der' D. 23.220. POSITION OF THE ARTICLE

Attributive Posion of the A1ticle

11.54. A word or group of words standing between the article and its noun, or immediately after the article if the noun, with or without the article, precedes, is an attribntive. Thus, o uo<f>o> v~p, o v~p o uo<f>o>, or vT]p ouo<f>o> (cp. 1168). 1155. This holds true except in the case of such post-positive words as p,v, Ot!, 'Y, rtl, 'Y<ip, ih), op,a<, oVv, rolvuv; and rls in Hdt.: rwv ns llep<Twv one of the

Pe1sians 1. 85. In Attic, rls intervenes only when an attributive follows the article : rwv {Jap{J&.pwv nvs l7T7Tiwv some of the ba1barian cavctl1y X. A. 2. 5. 32.
, 1156. Adjectives, participles, adverbs, and (generally) prepositions with their cases, if preceded by the article, have attributive position. 1157. (1) Commonly, as in English, the article and the attributive precede the noun: b <To<f>s v-f,p the wise man. In this arrangement the emphasis is on the attributive. Thus, rii 1rpwrn 7}p,t!pq. on the jiTst day T. 3. 96, tv rcii 1rpiJ ro xp6v't' in fOJmeT times D. 53. 12, TOV tK TWV 'E)..)..-f,vwv el~ TOUS {3apf3&.pous <f>6{3ov lowv seeing the tJ-ToT inspiJed by the G1eeks in the baTbaTians X. A. 1. 2. 18. 1158. (2) Less often, the article and the attributive follow the noun preceded by the artile : vi}p <To<f>6s the wise man. Th us, r <JTpareup,a r rwv 'Ae.,valwv the army of the Athenians T. 8. 50, tv rii 1ropelq. rii p,t!xp< brl Oaarrav on the jou1ney as far as the sea X. A. 5. 1. 1. In this arrangement the emphasis is O!l the noun, as something definite or previously mentioned, and the attributive is added by way of explanation. So ros Kvvas ros xae7Tos iht!icn they tie up the dogs, the savage ones (I mean) X. A. 5. 8. 24. 1159. (3) Least often, the noun takes no article before it, when it would have none if the attributive were dropped: vi}p <To<f>os the wise man (lit. a man, I mean the wise one). Thus, p,d.xa<s ra'is 7Teio<T< in the greate1 numbe1 of battles T. 7. 11, <Tve<p,< p,v Oeo'is, <TJie<f.LL &.vOpw1ro<s ro'is &."faOos I associate with gods, I associate with good men X. M. 2. 1. 32. In this arrangement the attributive is added by way of explanation ; as in the last example : ~vith men, the good (I mean). 1160. A proper name, defining a preceding noun with the article, may itself have the article: e<f>os ' ApeOo<Tws (his) b1otheT Arethusius D. 53. 10. Cp. 1142 c. An appositive to a proper narne has the article when it designates a characteristic or something well known: o ~6)-.wv o1raacs il </J<001//J-OS Solon of ancient times was a love1 of the people Ar. Nub. 1187, llii<Tlwv Mryapes Pas ion, the 1Jlega1ian X. A. 1.4. 7.

294

SYNT AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[u6x

1161. The genitive of a substantive limiting the meaning of another substantive may take any one of four positions:a. To Toii 7raTps f3<{3ioP the father's book (very common). Thus, .q TWP nOvewT<"v peTfJ the valour of the dead L. 12. 36. b. T {3t{3!ov T To 1ra.Tp6s (Jess common). Thus, .q olK!i. .q L;lp,wPos the hou~e

of Simon L. 3. 32. c. To 'Jra.Tpos T {3t{3'lov (to emphasize the genitive or wh en a genitive bas just preceded). 'l'hus, T?)s vfK"'< To p,yeOos the g1eatness of the vi ct ory X. H. 6. 4. Hl. d. TO {3t{Jio~ To 7raTp6s (very common). 'l'hus, .q T6p,a TWP ey6PTWv the ejfronte1y of the speakers L. 12. 41. The genitive of the divided whole (1306) is so placed or as in c. N. 1. -A substantive with no article is sometimes followed by the article and the attributive genitive: ~1rl rrK71v~v l6vns Ti! v '$.ePo</>wvTos going to the tent (namely, that) of Xenophon X. A. 6. 4. 19. Cp. 1159. 1162. The order bringing toge th er the sa me forms of the article (1repi To To 'JraTpos {3t{3lov) is avoided, but two or tl1ree articles of d({fe1ent form may stand together : TO T?)s To ~alvonos TXP"'S ~P"fOP the wo1lc of the art of the wool-ca~er P. Pol. 281 a. 1163. The attributive position is employed with the possessive pronouns and the possessive genitives of the reflexive and demonstrative. pronouns (1184)-, aT6s meaning same (1173), and 1ris expressing the sum total (1174). 1164. Two or more attributives of a substantive are variously placed : (1) fis Tas iJ.i.s 'ApKa.OtKs 1r6m to the other Arcaian cities X. H. 7. 4. 38. (2) TO lv 'Ap!Caolq. TO To tuos Toii AvKalov iep6P the sanctuary of Lycean Zeus in Arcaia P. R. 565 d. (3) <s TOP 1ri T<iJ rrT6p,a.TC TO tp,t!vos rrTEPO 6vTos TOP tTpov m'!p"fOP to the othe1 towe1 at the rnouth of the harbour which was 1la1'1'0W T. 8. 90. (4) lv TY oldq. Tll Xapp,loov TY 1rap, TO '0vp,miov in the house of Charmides by the Olyrnpieum And. 1. 16. (5) <ho Twv v Ti 'Arrlg 1r6ewv 'E?JPiowv from the GTeek cities in Asia X. H. 4. 3. 15. (6) 1rpos T~P lK T?)s ZtK<li.s TWP 'A071valwv p,<"f<I'IJP KaKo7rpi.'Yii.P with 1egar to the g1eat faihtTe of the Athenians in Sicily T. 8. 2. (7) TO TExos To p,a.poP To v6T<ov the long southe1n wall And. 3. 7. 1165. A relative or temporal clause may be treated as an attributive : L;6wv lp,ia-EL Tos oros oliTos vOpw1rovs Solon deteste men like this man here D. 19. 254. 1166. Position of an attributive participle with its modifiers (A= article, N = noun, P = participle, D = word or words dependent on P): (1) APND: Tov </J<rrT'1/K6Ta KiPovvoP TY 1r6<t the dange1 impending over the 8tate D. 18. J 70. (2) APDN: TOS 1rEptE(J"T'1/KOTa.S Ty 7r6L ICLVOVPOVS D. 18. 179. (3) ADPN : TOP T6T< TY 7r6EL 1rEptrrTaVT<i. KiPOVPOV D. 18. 188. (4) NADP: fTOLP,OV ~XEL ovap,LP Ti! v . KaTa.oovwrrop,lv"'P a1ra.vTas he has in reainess a f01ce to enslave all D. 8. 46. 1167 a. Especially after verbal substantives denoting an action or astate an attributive prepositional phrase is added without the article being repeated : Ti!v p,e"fa?JP a-TpaTEli.P 'A871Palwv Kai TwP ~vp,p,axwv ls At'YV'ffTOP the great expedition of the Athenians and their allifs to Egypt T. 1. 110. b. A word defining a substantivized participle, adjective, or infinitive may

THE ARTICLE

2(.)5

be placed before the article for emphasis : Kal TaTa -rails <i06Tas Ka.XoJJ.<V and we will summon those who have knowledge of this D. 57. 65, Tovrwv ros lvavrlo<s with the opposite of these 'l'. 7. 75.

Predicate Position of .Adjectives A predicate adjective either precedes or follows the article and its nonn: cro1>o> vr}p or .Wjp cro1>o> the man is wise.
ll.68.
if;iX~v (xwv T~v K<<f>a>]v

Th us, liT<<l Ti] viK-a vt~rrrJilav they 1etired with their victory incomplete 'l'. 8. 27, with his head bwe X. A. 1. 8. 6, Tas Tpi'IJp<<s <f><lXKu~rav K<vds they towed off the ships without their cretvs 'l'. 2. 93. a. 'l'his is called the predicate position, which often lends emphasis.

1169. A predicate adjeGtive or substantive may thus be the equivalent of a clause of a complex sentence: Oava.Tov TTJv 1repl aTwv, JJ.ViJJJ.TJ Ka.Ta.X<lif;ournv they will leave behind a 1emembrance of themselves that will neve?' die I. 9. 3, hfJp<TO 1rocrov n li"foL To ~rTpaT<UJJ.a. he asked about how large the force was that he WaS leading ( = 7r01rOV TL dTJ 'T irTpaT<V}J.O. li"(OL 2047) X. C. 2. 1. 2, 7ra.p' fKOVTWV Twv ~UJJ.JJ.ixwv TTJP TJ"f<p.ovliiv (X:~,f3ov tlwy ?'eceived the leade1ship from their allies (being willing) who ~ve1e willing to confer it l. 1. 17. 1170. A predicate expression may Rtand inside au attributive phrase: lietvs (pred.) Xe'Y6;J-evos 'Y<Wp"(os he who is ca/led a skilful ag1iculturist X. O. 19. 14. This is common with participles of naming with the article. 1171. The predicate position is employed with the demonstratives ohos, ooe, hevos, and liJJ.</Jw, JJ.<j;6T<pos, eKaT<pos, and gKa.lrTos; with the possessive 'genitives of persona! and relative pronouns (1185, 1196) and of a.T6s (1201) ; with a.T6s mea.ning self (120Gb); with the genitive of the divided whole (1300), as ToVTwv o! TrXe~rTo< the most of these X. A. 1. 5. 1!l, o! lip<~rTo< TW> 1repl a.T6v the bravest of his companinns 1. 8. 27; and with 1riis meaning all (1174 b). a. T'his wise man is oVTos ~ro</Js v{Jp, cro<f>s v~p oh os (and also ~ro<f>os
O~'TOS

v{Jp).
PECULIARITIES OF POSITION WITH THE ARTICLE

1172. Adjectives of Place. - When used in the prcdicate position (1168) nKpos (high) means the top of, p.o-os (middle) means the middle of, o-xa.Tos ( ext1eme) means the end of. C"p. summus, medius, ext?'C'IlWS.
AttJ"ib~t-tim3

Position

the top of the m.ountain the eentn of 7} JJ.f<YTJ "fop.i the central market the ma1ket the verge of 7} lcrxaTTJ v-fj~ros the farthest island the island 'l'hus, 7r<p1 liKpa.<s Ta.s x<p~rl x<<poes gloves on the fingP-TS (points of the hanrls) X. C. 8. 8. 17, ot p.~rov To 1ra.pa.oell]"ou pfi: flowv through the middle of the park X. A. 1. 2. 7. The meaning of the predieate position is also expressed by (T) liKpov To 5pous, (T) JJ.<Yov T-fjs "(opiis, etc.
T liKpov opos the lofty rnountain

Predicate liKpov T 5pos T 15pos liKpov JJ.flrTJ 7} ."(opd 7} ."(op JJ.EirTJ eO"xaTTJ 7} v-fjcros 7} v-fj~ros <~rxriq

Position

296

SYNTAX 01<' THE Sl.MPLE SENTENCE

1173. flOvos, ~flLo-vs.- (1) Attributive: op.6vos 1ras the only son, al i}p.lrrELa< xaptTS half-faVOU1'S. (2) Predicate: p.6vos 0 'lras (or 0 7raS p.6vos) 7ral!EL the boy plays alone, fi1urrvs o (3los (or o (3los fip.trrvs) half of life, r app.ara r i}p.lrra

half of the cha1'iots. a.vTos: (1) Attributive : o ars vf]p the same man. (2) Predicate: ailrs o vf]p or o v7]p ar6s the man himself 1174. 'll'as (and in the strengthened forms brii.s, rrp.1ras alltogether). a. In the attributive position 1riis denotes the whole regarded as the sum of all its parts (the sum total, the collective body) : ol ?ravres 1rorat the whole body of citizens, 7} 7rrra ~LKEia the whole of Sicily, 7rOKTVaL TOS a'!ravras Mvr<'l)Valovs to put to death the entire. Mitylenean population T. 3. 36. N.- Renee, with numbers, ol 1ravT<s, r rrp.?ravra in all: i~aK6<not Ka! xitot ol 1r&.vus 1600 in all ~ L 60. b. In the predicate (and usual) position ,.as means all : ,.&.vT<s ol 1rorat or (often emphatic) ol ?rora< 1ravT<s all the citizens (individually), 1rep ?ravras ros IJos i}rre{3f]Kiirrt Ka Els ii1riirrav r?]v 1r6t> i}p.aprf]KiirrtV they have committecl impiety towa1ds all the gods and have sinned against the whole State L. 14. 42. c. Without the article : 1ravT<s 1roTat all ( conceivable) citizens, p.trr!Jwtr&.p.PO< 1r&.vras .v!Jpw?rous hi1'ing eveTy conceivable persan L. 12. 60. N. L-In the meaning pttTe, nothing but, .,.s is strictly a predicate and has no article : KK't' <j>povpovp.evos 7ro 1r&.vrwv ?rop.lwv hemrned in by a ring of guards all of whom are his enemies ( = 1r&.VTS q,' wv <j>povperat 1ro!uol lrrt) P. R. 579 b. So 1rrra KaKiii utter baseness. N. 2. -The article is not used with ?rs if the noun, standing alone, would have no article. N. 3,- In the singular, 1rs often means every: rrv rrol 1rtra Ofis eiJ?ropos with y ou every road is easy to travel X. A. 2. 5. 9, ?rrra IJ&.arrrra. every sea T. 2. 41. 1175. .0os: (1) Attributive : r oov <nparwp.a the who le army; (2) Predicate: oov r trrpaTEvp.a (or r urpaTEvp.a oov) the anny as a whole, r7]P vKra o'l)v the entire night. \Vith no article : oov trrp&.rup.a a who le army, oa trrpaup.ara whole annies.
1176. The demonstrative pronouns O~TO>, ollE, iKvo<;;, and aw6<;; self, in agreement with a noun, usually take the article,. and stand in the predicate position (1.1G8): oTo> o v~p or o v~p ovro> (never 0 ODTO<;; v~p) this ?nan, avr<;; 0 v~p 01' 0 v~p avT6<;; the man himself (o avrs v~p the same man 1173).

o rovrov lfpws ro

1177. One or more words may separate the demonstrative from its noun: v!Jpw,.ov the love of this man P. S. 213 c. Note also rwv olKElwv nv<s rwv tKdvwv sorne of thei1 slaves ( some of the slaves of tho se men) P. A. 33 d. 1178. o-ro<;;, OilE, lKEVO<;; SOmetimeS Omit the article. a. Regularly, when the noun is in the predicate: aeT'l] lfrrrw lKav7} 'lroo')'lii let this be a sn.tficient efence P. A. 2cl b, op.at lp.7}v rar'lv "Trarploa dvat I think this is rny native co'llntry X. A. 4. 8. 4. b. Usually, with vropcr nnmes, E':lCCept when anaphoric (1120 b) : KEvos eovKvillo'l)S that (well-lmown) Thucydides Ar. Ach. 708.

THE ARTICLE

297

c. Usually, with de:finite numbers: TavTa.s Tp<dKovra p.vs these thirty minae D. 27. 23. d. Optionally, when a relative clause follows: bri -yfjv Tf]vo< fjXOop.<v, tv ii o!
'lrTp<s '/Jp.wv M f]owv tKpriT'fJ<Fv we have come against this land, in which our

fathers conquered the Mecles T. 2. 74. e. In the phrase (often contemptuous) ol!ros avf]p P. G. 505 c; a,nd in other expressions denoting some emotion: l1v8pw1ros otJTo<Jt D. 18. 243. f. Sometimes, wllen the demonstrative follows its noun : t'Irl"fpap.p.a. TM< T. 6. 59. So often in Ildt. g. Frequently, in poetry. 1179. llwJ>w, ap.<j>6npos both, h<iT<pos ech (of two), i!Ka.<JTos each (of severa!) have the predicate position. But with i!Ka.crros the article is often omitted: Kar T?]v '/Jp.piiv K<i<FT'f}v (day by day and) every day, Ka.e h<i<Fr'f}v 'iJpipiiv every day. 1180. The demonstratives of quality and quantity, rowTos, ro<O<Jo<, To<Joros, To<J6<Jo<, T'fJ<Koros, wh en they take the article, usually follow it: Twv To<Jovrwv Ka.l Towvrwv a-ya.Bwv of so many and such blessings D. 18. 305, roTo To Towrov reos such a p1actice as this 21. 123. o il<tva such a one (i:l36) regularly takes , the article. a. But the predicate position occurs: ro<Ja.VTTJ 7J 1rpwr'f} 7rapa.<FK<v?] 1rpos rv 7rO<p.ov <t'lr << so great was the first anna ment which crossed over for the war T. 6. 44. 1181. An attributive, following the article, may be separated from its noun by a pronom1 : 1) 1ra.a.< '/Jp.wv <j>v<J<S our old natu1e P. S. 189 d, il <FT<v?] ar'fJ o6s (for a.r'fJ 7J <Fr< vi] bObs) this narrow road X. A. 4. 2. 6. 1182. Possessive pronouns take the article only wh en a defini te

person or thing is meant, and stand between article and noun: JLov {3L{3{ov rny book, T ~p.npa (3t{3{a our books.

To

a. But names of relationship, 7r6LS, 'lra.Tpls, etc., do not reguire the article (1140). 1183. The article is not used with possessive pronouns or the genitive of persona! and reflexive pronouns (cp. 1184, 1185) : a. When no particular ohject is meant : lp.v (3<(3lov or {3t(3Xlov p.ov a book of

mine.
b. When these pronouns belong to the predicate: p.a.O'f}Ti]s -yl-yova. <J6s I have become a pupil of you1s P. Eu th. 5 a, ou 'M-yous lp.avTo .-ywv not speaking words of my own D. 9. 41.
POSITION OF THE GENITIVE OF PRONOUNS AND THE ARTICLE

1184. In the attributive position (1154) stands the genitive of the demonstrative, reflexive, and reciprocal pronouns. r r01hou {3t(3Xlov or TO (3t{3iov r rovTou his book, To lp.auro {3t{3lov. or r (3<(3lov T JLauro my own book; JL<TE'IrtJL!faro
T?]v auro 8u-yaTpa Ka.l Tv 7rai:i5a a.vrfjs he sent for his daughter and her child

x. c. 1. 3. i.

a. The type T (3<(3lov ToVTou is rare and suspected except when another attributive is added: Ti) vv J(3p rovrov D. 4. 3. The types To (3t{3lov lp.auro ( Hdt. G. 23) and ro aro (3t{3lov (T. 6. 102) are rare.

298

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

(II85

1185. In the predicate position stands a. The genitive of the persona! pronouns (whether partitive or not) : To {JL{3)\lov p.ov (<Tov, avTo, etc.), or p.ov (<Tov, avTo, etc.) To {3t{3lov when other words precede, as 8s ~XE< <Tov T1}v Jk<f>f}v who has your sister to wije And. 1. 50. b. The genitive of the other pronouns used partitively. N. 1. - I:l,omer does not use the article in the above cases, and often employs the ortr.otone forms (<To p."fa Kos thy great jarne 1r 241). Even in Attic E!J.O for !J.OV occurs (E~J.o TiL .popTla my wares Ar. Vesp. 1398). N. 2.- The differences of position between 1184 and 1185 may be th us illustrated : My boole is pretty: KaMv l<Tn TO {3t{3lov !J.OV.
KaAbv <TTl !J.OV TO {3t{3lov.

11Iy pretty boole: To KaMv !J.OV {3t{3lov. They read thei1 books: T iavTwv f3f3la va"fL"fVW<TKOV<TL.
INTERROGATIVES, 11.1\os, 1I'Ovs, L'yos WITH THE ARTICLE

1186. The interrogatives T{, 1roo may take the article when a question is asked about an object before mentioned: ~0. vvv or, Kva, 0 <PaOp, ovvap.d)a KpivLV. <PAl. T 1roa; SocR Now at last we can decide those questions. PH. (The) wltat questions? P. Phae. 277 a. 1187. So even with a persona! pronoun : A. o<po o1} <VB 7J11-wv B. 1ro "fELS Kal 1rap Tl vas Tos t11-.s; A. Corne hither straight to us. B .. Tf7ther

do you mean and who are you th at I am to corne to (y ou being who)? P.Lys.203 b. 1188. 11.11.1\os othe?'. -o lios in the singular .usually means the rest (7] IJ.'r/ 'Enas the 1est of G?'eece); in the plural, the othe?s (ol iJ.ot "E'r/v<s the other (cete1i) Greeles, but liot "En.,v<s othe? (alii) Greeks). A substantivized adjective or participle usually has the article wh en it stands in apposition to ol iJ.ot: T.ia r 1ronKa the other civic affairs X. Hi. 9. 5. On iJ.os, o lios (sometimes i!npos) besiiles, see 1272. 1189. 'II'Ovs, ii.Cyos: To 1rDM usually means the g1eat(er) part, ol 1rool the mult!tnde, the vulga1 c1owd; 'lr<lov<s seve1al, ol 'lr<lov the majority, the rnass; 'lrEt<TToL ve1y many, ol rrE<TTO< the rnost; l"foL jew, ol 6l'(ot the oligarchs (as opposed to ol 1rool). Note rroMs predicative : l1rd wpii 7ro. T Kpii wh en he saw that there was abundance of rneat X. C. 1. 3. 6.
PRONOUNS

THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS

1190. The nominative of the personal pronoun is usually omitted except when emphatic, e.g. in contrasts, whether expressed or implied: rrd -Dp.> p..ot o Oi.7" 1rd8w-Oat, yw avv -Dp..v tpop.m since you a.re not wilUng to obey rne, I will follow along with you X. A. 1. 3. 6. In contl'asts the first pronoun is sometimes omitted (930). 1191. Where there is no contrast the addition of the pronoun may strengthen the verb : El !J.'YJO roro f3oEL 7roKpivaG"8a<, <T ok TovvT<J8v 'f< if you do not wish to 1eply eve11 to this, tell me tlwn X. C. G. G. 21.

ng8J

PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

299

1192. The fmms ip.o, ip.ol, and p. and the accented fonns of the pronoun of the second person (:!:35 a) are used when emplmtic and usually after prepositions : Kat 1rel<riis lp. "Tr<<rr l!owK< fJ.O< Kat Ia{3H 1rap' liJ.o and ajter p1evailing on me ymt gave me pledges of faith an received them f1om me X. A. 1. 6. 7. Cp. 187 N. 2. On the reflexive use of the persona! pronouns of the first and second persons, see 1222-1224. 1193. l-yw, crv (p.6s, cros) are rarely used of an imaginary person ('anybody'): D. 9. 17, X. R. A. 1. 11.
lKevos (of absent persons), lioe, ouros (of present persons), o p.v . o l!f (at the beginning of a sentence), and by auros in contmsts. The olJlique cases of the foregoing replace ou, etc., which in Attic prose are usually indirect reflexives ( 1228, 1229). o and 1! in A ttic prose occur chiefly in poetical passages of l'lato ;

1194. The nominative of the pronoun of the third person is replaced by

in Attic poetry they arc persona! pronouns. is very rare in the orators.

The pronoun of the third person

1195. Homer uses l!o, oi, etc., as persona! pronouns ( = auro, aur(/J, etc., in Attic ), in which case they are enclitic: iJ, p.aPTMVP1J>, 7'1]> ol 1rbpe 'Po'i(3os by the mt of divination, which Phoebus gave to him A 72. Homer also uses i!o, of, etc., either as direct ( = avroD, etc., 1218) or a~ indirect reflexives ( = a&ro, etc., 1225). In the former case they are orthotone; in the latter, eit.her enclitic or ortlwtone. Thus, oi 1rai'oa o<Kora -yelva.ro he begat a son li/ce tmto himseU E 800, oli rtva </>1J<r<v OfJ.oov oi l!p.<vat l!.ava.wv he says there is no one of the Danaans like unto himself I 306. Hdt. agrees with Hom. except that <v, ol are not direct reflexives and orthotone; <r<J>lcrt (not <r<J>l) is reflexive.

THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS For the article with a possessive pronoun see 1182-1183.
U96. The possessive pronouns (330) of the :first and second persons are the equivalents of the possessive genitive of the personal pronouus : p..> = p..ov, <T<; = <Tov, ~p..npo<; = ~p..wv, ~p.npo> = ~p..wv.

a. When the possessives refer to a definite, particular thing, they have the article, which al ways precedes (1182); the persona! pronouns have the predicate position (1185). Distinguish !).os rj;los, o <j>!os o p.bs, o pio< J!.OV my frimd from rj;los p.6s, <j>los fJ.OV a frien of mine. b. A word may stand in the genitive in apposition to the persona! pronoun implied in a possessive pronoun. See 977.
1197. A possessive pronoun may have the force of an objective. genitive (cp. 1331) of the persona} pronoun: <f><l<f rii p. y out of friendship jo1 me X. C. 3. 1. 28. (</><lii Tj ip.f] usually means my .fi'iendship (fm others)).
U98. The possessive pronouns of the :first and second persons are sometimes reflexive (when the subject of the se11tence and the possessor are the same person), sometimes not reflexive.

300
1199.

SYNTAX .F THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

(II99

FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS SINGULAR

1. Not reflexive (adjective my, thy (yo,ur); prououn (yours)). ,

min~,

thine

p.6s, O'OS : op rp lp,/)11 <f>[ov he sees my friend, op~ TP trv 'lf'aTlpa she sees y our fathe1, <TTp"'fEL Tv <,.,v 'lf'arpa he loves my father (or Tv 7raTpa rv /16v or 'lf'arpa rv /16v; or Tv 'lf'aTlpa !LOU or !LOU rv 'If' a T pa), ol !Lol <f>{}a,p.ol Kaiov<s av Twv <rwv d7JrraP my eyes will prove to be more beautiful than yours

x. s. 5. 5.

2. Reflexive (my own, thine (your) own).

a. p.auTo, O'EaUTo, in the attributive position (very commoi1): ~Xa{3ov rv lp.auro p.ttre6v (or rP "''"() v rv p.au'ro) I 1'eceived my ( own) pay, rv alieX<f>v rv lp.avro ~7rep.'fa I sent m11 ( own) lnothe1 Aes. 2. 94, Kcl'11'l ros <ravrfjs KaKo<TI Kcl'11'l ros ~Los 'Y<ij,s; art thou lauglving at thine own mise1'1J

and at mine? S. El. 879. b. p.os, O'OS (Jess common): <rrlp'Yw rv !LV 'lf'arlpa I love my ( own) fathe1',
<TTP"'f<ts r?]v tr?]P p.7Jrpa you love you1 (own) mother, 7} <,.,?] "'fvv?] my wife X. C. 7. 2. 28, cilie<f>s rfjs /17Jrps rfjs p.fjs b1othm of my mother An. 1. 117. c. fLOS ai!To, O'OS ai!To (poetical): rv p.v aro 'lf'arpa ({3 45, S. O. T. 416). d. fLOu, O'OU (rare): rP 'lf'arpa /LOV A nt: 1. 23.

N.- When the possessor is not to be mistaken, the article alone is placed before the substantive and the possessive or reflexive pronoun is omitted (cp. 1121). Th us, <rrlp-ym TOP 'lf'arpa y ou love y our ( own) father, trrp-ye rv '11'arpa he loves his (own) father, trrp-you<r rv 'lf'arlpa they love their (own) father.

1200:

FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS PLURAL

1. Not reflexive (adjective ow, your; pronoun ours, yours).

a. iJfloTepos, .1fLTepos: fJ~Lh<pos <f>l/..os _ou1 friend (more common than <f>[os fJ!Lwv), o ~!LT<pos <f>l/..os you1 friend (more common than cpi/..os t,.,wv), Nr'I'J<Ttv 'lf'OIDV/1<vo ;) Dp.wP ;) rwv ~p.erpwv nv6s malcing a search for you 01' for

anything of yours L. 12. 30.

2. Reflexive (mtr mun, your own).

a. iJfLTEpos, .1fLTepos ( commou) : fTicnd, <rrp"'f<T< rop Dp.repoP b. Usually the intensive arwv is 7}p.wv (bp.wv) implied in the
trrp-yop.<v rv f}p.repoP <f>lXov we love our own <f>l/..ov you love you1 own friend. used witb 7J!Lrepos, Dp.repos in agreement with

possessive forms.

This gives a stronger form

of reflexive.

Th us:

~fLTepos ailTii>v, ~}lTepos aTwv: rrrlp"'fD!L<P rP 7}p.lTEpoP arwv <f>lov we love our own f1iend, olKoli6/17J/1a ;) rwv <f>l/..wv nvl ;) fJ!LT<pov arwv a house eit7ter .for sorne one of ott1' f1'iends o1 ou1 own P. G. 514 b; <rrp"'fere rv b,.,hepov arwv <f>loP you love you1 own f1iend, litocitTK<T< ros 1ralias ros b,.,erlpous arwv teach y our own child1en I. 3. 57. c. iJfLOlv, .1fL6>v (rare): alnw/1<1Jaros 'lf'arpas n~Lwv let us accuse our (own)fathms P. Lach. 179 c. d. iJfloOlv ailTwv, .1fLOlv aiiTO\v (very rare): lilKawv f}p.s . <f>alve<r()a p.f)re f}p.wv

xzoz]

POSSESSIVE Pl-tNOUNS

301

arwv ri7s M~'7s lvowrripovs it is not right for us to show owselves infe1io1 to onr own fame T. 2. 11, r. rwv l'll"trwv Kal r. p.wv arwv otra the equiprnents bath of yow horses and you1selves X. C. 6. 3. 21.

1201.

THIRD PERSON SINGULAR

1. Not reflexive (his, her, its).

a. o.-.\Toii, o.-.\Tf)s, a.-.\Toii in the predicate position (very common): bpw TOP rploP aro (ari]s) I see his (her) friend, 'YL'YPWITKWv aroD r-i)p dvopeiiiP knowing

his cou1age P. Pr. 310 d. b. KE(vou, etc., or TOvTou, etc. in the attributive position (verycommon): bpw 'TOP p.oP rp!ov, o rov KEivou I see rny jriend, not his, drpLKvovraL 1rap' 'ApLa'iov Kal r-i)v Kdpou IT-rpandv tlu'y corne up with A1iaens and his army X. A. 2. 2. 8, trapeK<<IT nvas Twv ro6rou trLT1)Elwv he summoned sorne of his friends L. 3. 11. c. os, iJ, ov, Hom. 6s, ifJ, i6v (poetical): ri}v 'Yilf'EP oP L. Kal..os he rnarried he1 becattse of her beauty l\ 282. Hom. has eli rarely for ailro, ari]s.

2. Reflexive (his own, her own).

a. a.u'l"oii, a.uTfts, in the attributive position (very common): tnp'Y<' roP iavro rploP he loves his uwn .friend, bp~ ri] v avrijs wqrpa she sees her own mothe1, r-i)P avro clile)vpi}v oliJwiT' :Z<l!On he gives his own sister in marriage to Seuthes T. 2. 101, (3pljet 'YVvaKa r-i) v auro he misuses his own wife And. 4. 15.
b. os (~os): poetical.

This is the only way in prose to express his own, hm own. Sometimes in Homer os ("6s) has the sense of own with no reference to the third person (1230 a). c. s a.-.\Toil, a.vTf)S (poetical): 8v aro tra.rlpa (K204).

1202.

THIRD PERSON PLURAL

1. Not reflexive (their).

a. o.-.\Tiv in the predicate position (very common): o rplX<Js a~Twv their .friend. b. ~Ke(vow, TOVTow in the attributive position (very common): oro6rwv (K<lvwv) rplos their !1iend, L<t r-i)v KEivwP cltrLIT-rliiv because of distrust of them

And. 3. 2.
c. CTcpwv (Ionie): Hdt. 5. 58.

2. Reflexive (their own).

a. a.u'!"iv (very common) : ITTfP'YOVITL ros iaurwv <f;lovs they love their own friends, rwv iavrwv ITVf'f.Laxwv Kanrpp6vouP they despised thei1 own allies

X. H.4.4. 7. b. crcpTEpos a.-.\Tiv, the intensive arwv agreeing with IT</>WP implied in ITrphepos (common): olKriis ros ITrpedpous arwv ltrtKaovraL they call their own slaves as witnesses An t. 1. 30. c. cr<f.iv a.llTwv, without the article (rare): r bv6p.ara ta'll"pdrrovraL IT<jJWv arwP trpOIT'Yparpijva, they cont1ivPd that their own names were added L. 13. 72. Cp. 1234. roP ITrpwP arwv is not used. d. cr<J>TEpos (rare in prose): Botwrot JLpos ril ITrphepoP trap<lxovro the Boeotians ftm~ishecl theiT own contingent 'l'. 2. 12.

302
e.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

li'Uoura.v <r</Jwv they were aj1aid of their own allies 5. 14.

[1203

occasionally in Thucydides, as Tos ~VtJ-J.uixous Cp. 1228 N. 2. 1203. Summary of possessive forms (poetical forms in parentbesis). a. Not reflexive my lp.Os our iJtJ-hepos iJtJ-Wv L <ros <rov th y you1 pbepos VtJ-WP his, he1 (lis Hom., rare) aToiJ, -i)s their aVrWv (<li Hom., rare) ( <rtplwv Ion ic) N. -i],.,hepos and DtJ-Tpos are more used thau iJtJ-wv and DtJ-wv. b. Reflexive my own l,.,os ( tJ-oS aTo, -i)s) tJ-avroiJ, -i)s our own i}tJ-Tpos aTwv iJtJ-repos th y own <ros (<ros aro, -i)s) <reavro, -i)s your own DtJ-hepos VtJ-Tpos arwv utphepos auTwv his, her their own u</JTpos EavrWv, rnj>Wv (rare) own (lis) (s aro, -i)s) iavro, -fjs (poet. und (rare),
~

o-4>wv in the predicate position,

Ionie)

utjJWv arWv

N.- In the plural iJtJ-wv aTwv, DtJ-wv arwv are replaced by iJtJ-T<pos aTwv, DtJ-Tepos aTwv, and these forms are commoner thau iJtJ-hepos, {i,_,hepos. utphepos aTwv is Jess common than iavTwv. utpT<pos in poetry may mean mine own, thine own, you1 own.
THE PltONOUN airrd~

1204. aim)s is used as an adjective and as a pronoun. It bas three distinct uses: (1) as an intensive adjective pronoun it means self (ipse). (2) As an adjective pronoun, when preceded by the article, it means same (idem). (3) In oblique cases as the personal pronoun of the third person, him, her; , them (eum, ern, id, eos, eas, ea). 1205. Only the first two uses aTe .HomeTic. In Hom. auTos denotes the principa,l person or thing, in opposition to what is subordinate, and is intensive by contrast: arv Kat Oeprrovra the man himself and his attendant Z 18 (cp. uwuau' arv Kr 1raoas P. G. 511 e and see 1208 d). On aros as a reflexive, see 1228 a; on aT6s emphatic with other pronouns, see 1233 ff. 1206. avros is intensive (self)

a. In the nominative case, w hen standing al one : a-ro'i r~v y0v axov they (the Athenians) seized the land themselves T. 1. 114. Here a-ros emphasizes the word understood and is not a personal pronoun. b. In any case, when in the predicate position (1Hi8) with a substantive, or in agreement with a pronoun: avro 0 v~p, 0 v~p a-ros the rnan himselj, avrov TOV v8pos, 'TOV vopos avTov, etc.
1207. With a proper name or a word denoting an individual, the article s omitted : a&Ts Mlvwv J11enon himself X. A. 2. 1. 5, 1rp aro f3au<ws in jTont of the Great ]{ing himself 1. 7. 11. 1208. The word emphasized may be an oblique case which must be supplied: I!Xeye o Kal aTOS 0 Bpii<rloas TV 80'uawv 'YB Kat auros (scil. TOS eeurraXos) tplXos wv UvaL and Bmsidas himself also said that he came as a friend to the country

I2I6]

THE PRONOUN

avror;

303

of the Thessalians an1 to the The.ssalians themsdves T. 4. 7R, < rolvuv rour' 1/7J <rko'lf'v (;;cil. i}p.s) arous we must furthwith cunsi<la this matter owsclves D. 2. :J.
1209. Specialrenerings of the emphatic auros: a. By itsez;; in itself, unaided, alone, etc.: auri) i} &.'A1j(Jna the naked ti'Uth A es. 3. 207, r '1f'ov rou xwplou aV-r kaprepv V'lf'fjpx the g1eater pa1t of the place was strong in itself ( without arti:ficial fortification) T. 4. 4. On auro'i:s avpa"' men and all, see 1025. ar6 with'a no un of any gender is used by Plato to denote the abst1act idea of a thing : aro rb kaMv idaal beauty R. 493 e, aro iltKatoO"Vv7J ideal justice 4 72 c. b. Just, merely: aro rb ilov just what we want X. A. 4. 7. 7, ar ra< merely this T. 1. 139. c. Voluntarily: ilvpas ot Ka! ro'Ls p.i) i'lf'tKaoup.lvo<s aro! i'lf't!FrpareuovO"L men . who uninvited turn their arms even against those who do not ask their assistance T. 4. 60. d. The Master (said by a pupil or slave): ATs l!<f> the Maste1 (Pythagoras) said it (ipse dixit) Diog. Laert. 8. 1. 46, ris ovros; Avr6s. ris Ar6s; "2wKpaT7JS Who's this? The Maste1. Who's the Master? 8ocmtes Ar. Nub. 220. e. With ordinals: ~plfi7J '1f'p<<rf3euri)s ilhaTos ar6s he was chusen envoy with nine otheTs (i.e. himself the tenth) X. H. 2. 2. 17. 1210. After the article, in the attributive position (1154), any case means same.
avr6<>

ili

Th us o ar< avf}p, rarely ( o) av1}p o ar6s the sarne rn an; rou avrou filpovs in the same summer T. 4. 58, r ar rara these same things X. A l. 1. 7, ol ros aros al<! 'lf'<pt rwv arwv 'A6-yov< 'Al-yovres the people who a1e continually rnctking the sarne speeches about the same things Ant. 5. 50. a. So as a predicate: t-yw p.v oar6s El p.<, tp.s p.era{3a<n I am the sa me, it is you who change T. 2. 61.
12~1. In Hom. aV-ros, without the article, may mean the same: 1iPx o rf/; aT1)v oo6v, ijv'lf'<p ol ll'A'Ao< and he guided him by the sa-me way as the othe1s had

gone /J 107.
1212. avr6 when unemphatic and standing a1one in the oblique cases means him, her, it, them. KEvov avrl]v 6.'1f'Lvat they oTdeTed heT to depart L. 1. 12.
12~3. 12~4.

Unemphatic avroil, etc., do not stand at the beginning of a sentence.

allrou, etc., usually take up a preceding noun (the anaphoric use): kal!Fs liap.v<'lf''lrov 'Al-yw 1rpos avrov rao< surnrnoning Darnnippus, I spealc to him as follows L. 12. 14. But an oblique case of ar6s is often suppressed where English employs the pronoun of the third pw:-son: p.7rm'A.s m:i.vrwv ri) v -yvW!J.7Jv &.11:bwrre having satisjied the rninds of all he dismissed them X. A. 1. 7. 8.
12~5. arou, etc., may be added pleonastically; 7r<~pd!Fop.a< r</) 'lf'a'lf''lf'I;J, Kpan<rros a, v l'lf'7r<us, !Fvp.p.ax<v atm~ I will try, si nee I arn an excellent ho1seman, to be

an ally to rny gmndjather X. C. 1. 3. 15. 1216. arou, etc., are emphatic ( = aro rovrou, etc.) in a main clause when followed by a relative clause referring to avro, etc. : dp7]kas ar6, ili !hep 1!-yw-ye

304

SYNT AX UF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[r2r7

r ~p. fp-ya 11"Ei<nou li.~<a vop.lfw Eva< you have mentioned the very quality for which I conside1 my wo1k tvorth the hivhe~t priee X. M. :l. 10. 14. But when the relative clause precedes, aoro, etc., are not e!ll]Jhatic: os M p.'f] iupunov, KEvoratpwv a6To'ls t71"oin<Fav they built a cenotaph fo1' those whom they could not find X. A. 6. 4. 9. 1217. aro, etc., are often used where, after a conjunction, we expect the oblique case of a relative pronoun : 8 p.T] oo p.no' ~X" arov <F<j>pa-yoa which he does not know nor does he have the seal of it P. Th. 192 a.

THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

1218. Direct Reflexives.- The reflexive pronouns are used directly when they refer to the chief word (usually the subject) of the sentence or clause in which they stand.
-yvwB< <FEaur6v learn to know thyself P. Charm. 16-i e, <F<j>arrE< avrf}v she kills herself X. C. 7. 3. 14, KaB' avroos fJovEvrJap.Evo< r o71"a 7rapoo<Fav Ka! <F<j>s aro6s afte1 deliberating apart by themselves they surrendered thei1 mms and themselves (their persons) T. 4. 38. Less commonly the reference is to the object, which often stands in a prominent place : ros o 7rEpwlKovs <j>f,KEv hd rs aurwv 7r6E but the perioe.ci he dismissed to their own cities X. H. 6. ii. 21.

1219. The direct reflexives are regular in prose if, in the same clause, the pronun refers emphatically to the subject and is the direct object of the main verb: lp.avrv (not lp.) 7ra<vw I praise myself. The usage of poetry is freer : <Frvw <F p.llllov ?) 'p. I mou rn thee rather than myself E. Hi pp. 1409. 1220. The reflexives may retain or abandon their di:fferentiating force. Contrast the third example in 1218 with 7rapoo<Fav <F<j>s aro6s they surrendered (themselves) T. 7. 82. 1221.. The reflexives of the first and second persons are not used in a subordinate clause to refer to the subject of the main clause. 1222. The persona! pronouns are sometimes used in a reflexive sense: wailing and saying much ~mwo1thy of myself P. A. 38 e ( contrast Ko<FE< 7rollll Ka! va~<a <Favrofi you will hea1much ww.Jo1'thy of yourself P. Cr. 53 e), ooKw pm ovaros eiva< I (s.eem to myself to be) think I am unable P. H. 368 b (less usually iloKw lp.avrfi,). Soin Hom.: l-ywv lp. liV<Fop.a< I will mnsom myself K 878. Cp. 1195. 1223. lp., <F, not lp.avr6v, <FEaurov, are generally used as subject of the infinitive : l-yw op.a< Ka! lp. Ka! "" r o<Kv ro o<KErJIJa< KaKov 1}-y<FIJa< I thinlc that both you and I believe that it is wone to do wrong than to be wronged P. G. 474 b. 1224. The use in 1222, 1223 generally occurs when there is a contrast between two persons, or when the speaker is not thinking of himself to 'the exclusion of others. Cp. 1974. 1225. Indirect Reflexives.- The reflexive pronouns are used indi1Jpnvovvr6s ri p.ou Kat -yovros 7rollll Ka! va~<a lp.o

rectly when, in a dependent clause, they refer to the subject of the main clause.

1229]

REFLEXJYE PROKOCNS

305

'OprrJS 1r<<<rev 'A8nmlovs /:avrv Kara')'Etv Orestes permtade the AthcJJJn.~ to restoTe h:im(self) T. ]. 111, <(:Joero I\apxos iirrav r urp&.nv11-a rrps avrw txnv ri) v 'YVWJ.L'I'}V GleaTchus wished the entire a1"11!Y tu ue devoted to hnself x. A. 2. 5. 29. Cp. siui, se.

1226. When the subject of the leading clause is not the same as the subject of the subordinate clause or of the accusative witll the infinitive (1975), the context must decide to which subject the reflexive pronoun refers: ( Karf}')'opos)
gcp'IJ . va1relBovra ros vovs afrrv ... ol,rw Otart8vat ros lavrW (flJpvras
K.T ..

the accuser said that, by persuading the yotmg, he (Socrates) so disposed his (i.e. Socrates') pupils, etc. X. M. 1. 2. 52. 1227. iavro, etc., are rare! y used as indirect reflexives in adjectival clauses: r vavti'Y<a, 5<Ta 1rps rfi avrwv ( 'Y') :r,v, clv<iovro they took up the wrecks, as many as we1e close to thei1 own land T. 2. 92. 1228. Instead of the indirect <!avrov, etc., there may be used a. The oblique cases of rdnos : rrpro ros 'A871valovs ri)s ls aorv op')'ijs 1rapaMetv he tried to divert the Athenians j101n theiT ange1 against himse~f T. 2. 65. When iavro, etc. precede, aroii, etc. are usual instead of the direct reflexive : ri)v avro 'YVWJ.L7JP cl7re<f>alvEro l;wKpar7Js 1rps ros oJ.Liovras ar0 8oC?a.tes was wont to set forth his opinion to those who conversed with him X. M. 4. 7. 1. b. Of the forms of the third persona! prououn, oi and rr<f>l<T< (rarely oV, <T<f>s, <T</>wv, and <Toj>s). Th us, i}pwr ari)v El 8<f}rro< lhKovi)<Tal ol he aslced her if she would be willing to do hirn a service Ant. 1. 16, ros 1raas hiwov TOV Kopov i5ir8a< w.1rpti~a<T8a< <r<f>l<T<v they oreTed their boys to ask Cyrus to get it done faT them X. C. 1. 4. 1, Kevou<r< 'YP iJJ.Ls Kowii J.Ler <T<f>wv 1rO<J.Lv for they uTge us to make warin common with them And. 3. 27, ~</>TJ , rr<-h o <[3i)va< ri) v >fxi)v cl<f><Kvf<T8a< <T<f>s Els ro1rov nv aLJ.LOP<Ov he said that when his soul ha depaTted out of him, they (he and others) carne to a myste1ious place P. R. 614 b. See 1195. N. 1. -<T<f>es may be employed in a dependent sentence if the pronoun is itself the subject of a subordinate statement, and wh en the reference to the subject of the leading verb is demanded by way of contrast or emphasis: Ei<Ta'Ya')'wv ros ltous
urpa'T''I}'}'OS . . yELv KUV aTos

Ort oi)v av 1jrrov ifJS )"&.'OLV Tl] v O'Tpo.rL~V 7} 'A<vo<f>wv afteT bTinging in the Test Of the generais he ttTged them to say that they could lead the anny just as weil as Xenophon X. A. 7. 5. 9. Here avrol ( ipsi) is possible. In the singular aros is necessary.

N. 2.- Thucydides often uses the plural forms in reference to the neaTest subject: ros ~VJ.LJ.Laxovs lUt<Tav <T</>wv they were a.fmicl of the ir own allies ( = <T<f>wv avrwv) 5. 14. N. :3.- auro, etc., are either direct or indirect reflexives, ol and <r</>l<rt are only indirect reflexives. 1229. ov, <Trpl<r<, etc., and the oblique cases of aor6s are used wl1en the sub ordinate clause does not fonn a part of the thought of the principal subject. This is usual in subordinate indicative clauses, <tnd very common in 5n and .;,, clauses, in indirect questions, and in general in subordinate clauses not directly dependent on the main verb: rwv rrprr(3ewv, o~ 6</>l<T< (1481) 7rpl rwv <T1rovwv ~ruxov clrr6vus, iJJ.Louv thl'y thrmuht nu more about th dr envoys, who were absent
GREEK GUAM.-

20

306

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

(I2JO

on the S?tbject of the truce T. 5. 44, <J>of3ovro 1-'TJ bnBovro aoros ol 'lf'O"iilp,IOI they we1e ajTaid lest the enemy should attack them( selves) X. A. 3. 4.1.
1230. The reflexive pronoun of the third person is sometimes used for that of the first or second : 31: ~p.c; vEpuOat avrovc; we must ask onrselves P. Ph. 78 b, 7rapa:yy..A roc; auro gi've orders to your rnen x. c. 6. 3. 27.
a. In Homer lis his is used for p,6s or qos : oifroL ~'YW"f rjs -yal'IS ovvap,cu "fVKpwnpov d.X\o {/5fqflat I can look on nothing sweete1 th an my own land ' 28.

1231. Reciprocal Reflexive.- The plural fmms of the reflexive pronouns are often used for the reciprocal AA~Awv, AA~Aot>, etc.: ~p.v avro<; &aE~op.d)a we will converse with (ourselves) one another D. 48. 6. 1232. But the reciprocal must be used wh en the idea ' each for or with himself' S expressed Or implied: p,.OV Xctipovcnv f1rl TOlS ?jWV KctKOS ~ TOLS ctVTWV llilots -yaBo'is ( = -iJ brl ros avro KaO"ros -yafJos) they take greater pleas~t1'e in one another's troubles than each man in his own good fmtune I. 4. 168, o~u -yp ~avros o~u XX?j\oLS ofLoo'yoqw they a1e in agreement neither with themselves n01 with one anothe~ P. Phae. 2:)7 c. Reciprocal and reflexive may occur in the same sentence without diffe1ence of meaning (D. 48. 9). The reflexive is regularly used wh en the re is a contrast ( expressed or implied) with 11\ot: q,flovoqw iaurois p,\Xov .jJ rois 11\oLS v8pw1roLS they envy one another mo1e than (they envy) the rest of mankind X. M. 3. 5. 16.
a.'ToS EMPHATIC OR REFLEXIVE WITH OTHER PRONOUNS

1233. Of the plural forms, i]p,wv avrwv, etc. may be either emphatic or reflexive; avrwv i}p,wv, etc. are emphatic only ; but q<J>wv aorwv is only reflexive (aorwv q<J>wv is not used). In Hom. avr6v may mean myself, thyself, or himself, and aor6v, ol aorcp, etc. are either emphatic or reflexive. 1234. i]p,wv (p,wv, q<J>wv) aOTwv often mean 'their own men,' 'their own side': q,uXaK'IJv q<J>wv T< avrwv Ka1 rwv ~up,p,rixwv Karat7r6vr<s leaving a garrison (consisting) of their own men and of the' allies T. 5. 114. 1235. auros, in agreement with the subject, may be used in conjunction with a reflexive pronoun for the sake of emphasis : avro1 p' auT wv <x wpouv they marehed by themselves X. A. 2. 4. 10, auros . . aurv ev p,rrrp Ka.urlfl<ro ro qrpc:tTo1rliou he located himself in the centre of the camp X. C. 8. 5. 8. 1236. aor6s may be added to a persona! pronoun for emphasis. The forms p, aor6v, aorov p,<, etc. are not reflexive like p,aur6v, etc. Tlms, ros 1raoas ros p,os if<Txvvo Ka! lp, aurv Df3p<O"< he disuraced my chilclren and insulted me myself L. 1. 4. Cp. aor0 p,o< l7reO"CTvro he sprang upon me myself E 459. Cp. 329 D. 1237. The force of aor6s thus added is to differentiate. Thus lp. aor6v means myself and no otlter, lp,rwr6v means simply rnyse(f wit.hont reference to others. p,iis avrovs is the usual order in the reflexive combin~ttion; but the differentiating you yomselves (and no othel's) may be p,s auros or a>lros Dp,s.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN8
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

307

1238. The demonstrative pronouns are used substantively or adjectively: ouro<;, or oUro<; 0 &.v~p, this man. 1239. A demonstrative pronoun may agree in gender with a substantive predicated of it, if connected with the substantive by a copulative verb (917) expressed or understood: a.VT'J1 (for roro) plrrr'1 odia.rrKa.lii this is the best manne1 of lea1ning X. C. 8. 7. 24, fi o TLS raVT1JV (for roro) Elp1}v1Jv inro)\a.p.(3v but if any one rega1ds this as peace D. 9. 9. a. But the unattracted neuter is common, especially in definitions where the pronoun is the predicate: ror' ~rrnv .q oLKruorrvv'1 this is (what we cali) justice P. R. 432 b. So ox v{3pts ra.r' rrrl; is not this insolence? Ar. lian. 21. 1240. ouro> and o8E this usually refer to something near in place,

ti me, or thought; iKlivo> that refers to something more rem ote. ovroCTi and o8f are emphatic, deictic (333 g) forms (this here).
1241. Distinction between oJTOS and oSe. -io hic points with emphasis tO an object in the immediate (actual or mental) vicinity of the speaker, or to something just noticed. In the drama it nnounces the approach of a new actor. oo is even used of the speaker himself as the demonstrative of the first person (1242). oJros iste may re fer to a person close at hand, but Jess vivi dl y, as in statements in regard to a })erson concerning whom a question has been asked. \Vben oo and oilros are contrasted, oo refers to the more important, o~ros to the Jess important, object. Th us, )lf>.' oo {Ja.rrts xwpi but lo! he1e comes the king S. Ant. 155, a.r'J17ra.s cro here she (the person you ask for) is near thee s. E. 147 4, Ka.l rar' Ko!!<tv Kiin rwv' kytova so that we obey bath in these things and in things yet more grievous S. A nt. 64. See also 1245. ovros has a wider range of use thau the otl1er demonstratives. 1242. oe is used in poetry for lyw: rfj<rU ( = lp.o) "f ~WrT1JS ~.. , while 1 still live S. Tr. 305. Also for the possessive pronoun of the first persan: d ns rourrif KoDrTTCtL Myous if any one shall hear these my words S. EL 1004. 1243. ohos is sometimes used of the second person: rls oro<rt; who's this he1e? (=who a1e you ?) Ar. Ach. 1048. Soin exclamations: oros, Tl 7rots; yon the1e ! what are y ou doing ? Ar. Ran. 198. 1244. rao, Tao< 1ravra (raDra 1ravra) are used of something close at hand: oK "Iwves rao lrrlv the JJeople here are not Ionians T. . 77. 1245. ouro> (rowvros, roCTovros, and ovrws) generally refers to what

precedes, o8 (rotoCTBE, rOCTOCT8E, rYJ.LKOCT8E, and JJ&:) to what follows.

Thus, ro<rio g)\e~v he spolce as follows, bnt rota.ra ( rorra.ra.) l1rwv after speaking thus. Cp. 0 Kpos Kovrriis TO rw{Jpvou TOLG.Ta. TOLa 7rpos aurov ~r..e; Cy1us aftm heming these words <(f Gobryas answered him as follo1vs X. C. 5. 2. 31. 1246. Kal auros meaning (!)he too, lilcewise; (2) and infact, and that too, points back: 'Ayiiis Kal 'ZwKpr'ls ... K< rovrw 7r0a.vh1Jv Agi as and Somates ... they too were putto derJ.th X. A. 2. 6. 30; 1r6pwv lrrrl ... Kal rovrwv wov1Jpwv it is chamcte1istic of rnen without l'esounes and that too woTthless 2. 5. 21 (cp. J320). On Ka! rara. see 947.

308

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1247

1247. But o~ros, etc. sometimes (especially in the neuter) refer to what follows, and ooe, etc. (though much less often) refer to what precedes: JLEr. o rorov ehre roG'orov but ({{ter him h~ spoke as jollows X. A. 1. 3. 14, rowvrovs 6-yovs e'll'ev he spoke as jollows T. 4. 58, rotrie 'll'apaKeevop.evos exhorting them thus (as set forth before) 7. 78, woe Oa'll'rovG'tv they bu1y them thus ~as described before) 2. 34, ovrws gX" the case is asfollows (often in the orators). 1248. ovros ( especially in the neuter roro) may refer fmward to a word or sentence in apposition: ws p.7) roro p.6vov evvowvrat, rl 'll'<iG'ovrat that they may not consider this alone (namely) what they shall s~(fer X. A. 3. 1. 41. So also ovrws. hevos also may refer forward : EK:vo KepoalvELv 7]-yerat r'!Jv i}oovf}v this (nam ely) pleasure, it yegms as gain P. R. 606 b. Cp. 990. 1249. ovros (rowros, etc.) is regularly, oi! (rod>G'oe, etc.) rarely, used as the demonstrative antecedent of a relative: orav rowra '}'YJs, ovoEts av </JfJG'eLEv vOpdnrwv when you say such things as no one in the wmld woulcl say 1'. G. 473 e. oi'iros is often used without a conjunction at the beginning of a sentence. 1250. When ooe retains its full force the relative clause is to be regarded as a supplementary addition: ov o1) ovv l!veKa M-yw rara 'll'vra r6o' l11'rl but here's the reason why I say all this! P. Charm. 165 a. 1251. The demonstrativs ovros, etc., when used as antecedents, have an emphatic force that does not reproduce the (unemphatic) English demonstrative those, e.g. in you releasecl those who were .present. Here Greek uses the participle ( ros '11'ap6vras wEVG'aTE L. 20. 20) or omits the antecedent. 1252. ovros (Jess often Kvos) may take up and emphasize a preceding subject or object. In this use the pronoun generally cornes first, but may be placed after al). ernr)hatic word: 'll'oti}G'avns G'rf}?JV 1{1~</>IG'avro els raVT?JV va-yp</>fLV ros .Xtr?Jplovs having made a slab they voted to inscribe on it the (names of the) o.tfenders Lye. 117, Il. av d'II'YJS, ep.wve rovrots whatever y ou say, hold to it P. R. 345 li. The anaphoric aurbs in its oblique cases is weaker (1214). 1253. roro, rara (and aur6) may take up a substantive idea not expressed by a preceding neuter word : ot r7}v 'EMoa 7JX<v0pw11'av 7)p.es M ouo' 7}p.tv aros
(3<(3iuop.v aur6 (i.e. r7}v eEvOeplav) 'Who jTeed GTeece; whe1eas we cannat secure

this (liberty) even jo1 ourselves T. 1. 122.

1254. auros (Jess frequently hvos) is used of well known persons and things. Thus, rop-ylas OUTOS this (famous) Go1gias P. Hipp. M. 282 b (cp. ille), TOUTOUS ros o-vKo</>vr.s these (notorious) ilzfm'1ners P. Cr. 45 a (cp. iste), rv 'AptG'relo71v K<vov that (famous) A1istides D. 3. 21, Kaiav lKvov that (infamous) Gallias 2. 19. KEvos may be used of a deceased person (P. R 368 a). 1255. When, in the same sentence, and referring to the same object, o\iros (or hEvos) is used more than once, the object thus designated is more or Jess emphatic : 0Es {~aLp0VfJ.POS TOVTWP -rv lov TOVTOLS xp?)raL V'II'?Jprats the god depTives thern of their senses and employs them as his minjsters l'. Ion 534 c. For the repeated ovros ( hvos) an oblique case of aur6s is usu11l. 1256. roro p.v . roro o .fi1st . . . secondl1f, partly . . . partly has, especially in Hdt., nearly the sense of rb p.v . . . ro li (1111).

DEMOXSTRATI\'E PROXOUNS

309

1257. Kcvo refers back (rmely forward, 1248), but implies rcmoteness in place, time, or tlwught.
KiJpos KaOopq. (3acrtii Ka! r wf) hevov rtj;os Cyrus perceives the king and the band a round him X. A. 1. 8. 26, vfjes Kevat 7rt11'iou<Ytv yonder are ships sailing up tous T. 1. 51. 1258. KEvos may refer to any person other than the speaker and the person addressed; and may be employed of a person not definitely described, but referred to in a supposed case. It is even used of the person already referred to by ar6s in an oblique case: !iv ar<P oto(is nupwv Kc 1reiOvs hevov if yuu give him money and persuade Mm P. l'r. :nod. he"os, when so used, usually stands in a different case than ar6s. The order Kevos . ar6s is found : 1rps JV heivous oK einv ;)v ~XOL 'fVWJ-L'f}V, X!\ d7rf7r<J-L'fev aros he did not tell thern the plan he hacl, but dismissed them X. H. 3. 2. 9. 1259. \Vhen used to set forth a contrast to another person, Kevos may even refer to the subject of the leading verb (apparent reflexive use) : 8rav iv r~ 'l~ opWLV iJJ-LS onovvrs TE Ka! rcKelvwv tj;Oelpovras when they (the Athenia.ns) see us (the Dorians) in their land plundering and desti'01Jing thei1propmty ( =r t!aurwv) T. 2. 11, ~e;e ros XaMaloLS iin fjKoL otre d1roe<Yat l1r<Ol-'wv iK<ivous ovn 11'0<J-LEV oE6J-LPOS he said to the Chaldaeans thctt he had cme neither ~vith the esile to clesti'01J them ( Keivovs is stranger thau arous) nor be cause he wante<l to war with them X. C. 3. 2. 12. 1260. In the phrase lie< K<vos, iloe 1narks a persan or thing as present, hevos a persan or thing mentioned befare orwell known: 8' hvos hw lo! I am he S. O. C. 138. Colloquial expressions are ror' hevo there it is! (lit. this is that) Ar. Ach. 41, and r6' KEvo I told y ou so E. Med. 98. 1261. Distinction between o1hos and KEtvos.- When reference is made to one of two contrasted abjects, oliros refers to the object nearer to the speaker's thought, orto the more important object, or ta the object last mentianed. Th us, {J;Q'TE 11'0 av LKaLOTEpOv fKEiVOLS TOS -ypJ-LJ-LalYLV i) TOTOLS 11'LTEOLTE SO that 1JOU inUSt with mme jttstice put yom t1ust in tlwse lists (not y et put in as evidence) than in these muster-rolls (already mentionecl) L. 16. 7, ei ror6 ot ooKE J-LKpv el vat, Kvo Karav07J<Yov but if this appem to y mt un important, conside1 the following X. C. 5. 5. 29. hevos may refer tiJ an object that has immediate! y preceded : Kat ( o.L') ro {31TLO'TOV dEi, J] r P<Yrov, ii7ravras "fELV . -n' hevo J-Lfv (i.e. r

pfj.rov) "fdp i) tj;O'LS ar1} (3aorat, 1rl roiJro 0 ( r {3enO'rov) rc;l O'i'f' E .rrpoci'fE8at o<O<YKovra; rv 'la6v 1rotrTJv it is necessary that all shcmld speak what is

always most salutary, not what is most agreeable ; fUi' to the latte1 nature herse~( v;ill incline; to the formel' a goocl citizen must dect by argument and inst1uction D. 8. 72.
THE INTERIWGATIVE PRONOUNS

1262. who? or

The interrogative pronouns are used substantively adjectively r> v~p; what rnan'! 1263. The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, 340, 346) are used i.n direct and in indirect, questions. In indirect questions

310

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

the indefini te rel ati ves oCTn>, etc., are generally used instead of the interrogatives.
rl {JovTaL Tjp.v xprweaL; fol' what pu1-pose does he clesi1e to mnploy us ? X. A. 1. 3. 18, oVK oloa o TL li v rLs XPTJO"aLro avros I du not know fur what service any one could ernploy thern 3. 1. 40, A. 'lr'T/vlK' O"rlv pa riis f}p.pas ; B. O'lr'T/PlKa ; A. What's the time of day ? B. (You aslc), what tirne of day it is ? Ar. Av. 1499. N.- For peculiarities of Interrogative Sentences, see 2066, 2668. 1264. rl is used for rlva as the predicate of a neuter plural subject when the general result is sought and the subject is considered as a unit : rara of rl O"TLP ; but these things, what are they 'i A es. 3. 167. riva emphasizes the details: rlv' ov O"TL rara; D. 18. 246. 1265. ris asks a question concerning the class, rl concerning the nature of a thing: ei1rf rls Tj rxv'T/ say of what so1t the a1t is P. G. 449 a, rl O"w<f>poO"v'T/, rl 1rol\nK6s; what is ternpemnce, what is a statesman? X. M. 1. 1. 16, <f>06vov of O"Ko1rwv 8 rL et'l considering what envy is (quid sit invidia) X. M. 3. 9. 8.

THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

1266. The indefinite pronoun Tt>, Tt is used both substantively (sorne one) and adjectively (any, sorne). Tt>, rt cannot stand at

the beginning of a sentence (181 b).

1267. In the singular, ris is used in a collective sense: eve1ybody(foranybody); cp. Germ. rnan, Fr. on: l\l\ fJ.O" ns hvov but eve1ybody detests him D. 4. 8. gKaO"ros ns, 1rs rLs each one, every one are generally used in this sense. rts may be a covert allusion to a known person: 15wO"L rLs olK'lJP some one (i.e. you) will pa'y the penalty Ar. Rau. 564. It may also stand for I or we. Even when added to a noun with the article, rls denotes the indefiniteness of the person referred to: !Jra.v o' o KDpws '11'apy ns, tp.wv O(]'TLS O"rlv TJ')'p.wv KT. but whenever your masteT arrives, whoever he be tltat is your leade1, etc. S. O. C. 289. With a substantive, rls may often be rendered a, an, as in ~npos ns /5vvaO"T'T/S anothe1' dignitary X. A. 1. 2. 20; or, to express indefiniteness of nature, by a sort of, etc., as in i p.v 0ol nvs dO" tv ol /5a.lp.ovs if the 'daimones' me a sort of gods P. A. 27 d. 1268. With adjectives, adverbs, and numerals, ris may strengthen or weaken an assertion, apologize for a comparisoD, and in general qualify a statement: otv6s ns vf}p a very te?Tible man P. R. 596 c, p.wf rLs a smt of gad-fly P. A. 30 e, O"Xoov TL pretty nearly X. O. 4. 11, rptiiKovra TLvs about 30 T. 8. 73. But in 1ra.peyvovr6 nvs oo vfj<S the numeral is appositional to rtvs ( ce1tain, that is, two ships joined them) T. 8. 100. 1269. rls, ri sometimes me ans somebody, or something, of impo1tance: ro ooKv nvfs va.L the seerniniJ to be sornebody D. 21. 213, ~oo~ TL X')'<tv he seerned to say sornething of moment X. C. 1. 4. 20. 1270. ri is not omitted in Oa.vp.Mrv Xh'm what yon say is ~vonde1:f1tl P. L. 657 a. 1j rLs -l} o0ls mcans few or none X. C. 7. 5. 45, 1j n -l} ofl/5v little o1 nothing P. A. 17 h.

311
THE AD.JECTIVE PRONOUNS ?1\.\.or; AND ['TEpor;
1271. a..\.\o~ strictly means other (of several), .i!n:po~ otlwr (of two). On 0 a.\os, Ot a.\ot see 1188. a. g.,.pos is sometimes used loosely for i!Ho<, but al ways with a sense of difference; when so used it does not take the article. 1272. i!Xos, and gupos (rarely), may be used attributively with a substantive, which is to be regarded as an appositive. In this sense they may be reudered besides, moreover, as well: o! i!Hot 'MJ7)vaoL the Athenians as well (the others, i.e. the Athenians) 'l'. 7. 70, ros 071"iriis Kal ros liovs 171"7rtiis the hoplites and the caval1y besles X. H. 2. 4. 9, "/pwv xwp f.L<f]' rlpov vivlov an old man cames with (a second persan, a young man) a young man besides Ar. Eccl. 849. Cp. " And there were also two other malefactors led with hirn to be put to death " St. Luke 28. 32. 1273. I!Hos other, 1est often precedes the particular thing with which it is contrasted : ni re lict trTtJ-1Jrr< Kal !J-lplovs ~ilwK< iliip<tKovs he gave me ten thousand darics besides honoUIing me in otlter ways (lit. he both honourerlme in other ways and etc.) X. A. 1. 3. 3, r<p ph liXI\ijJ err parC:, i}<Yvxa!;<v, haro v il tr<TaG"rs 7rpo7rp.11"EL with the 1est of the a1my he kept quiet, but sent jorwaTd a hundred peltasts T. 4. 111. 1274. lios followed by another of its own caoes or by an adverb derived from itself (cp. ali us aliud, one ... one, anothe1 ... mwthe1) does not require the second half of the statement to be expressed : i!Hos lia. )..f-y<L one says one thing, another (says) another X. A. 2. 1. 15 (lit. anothe1 othe1 things). So
liOL liws, i!OL i!o8<v.

a. Similarly ~npo<, as rrvp,<f>opti dpii rpovs 1rd!;<< one calamity opp1esses one, anothe1 others E. Ale. 893. 1275. After lia. an adjective or a participle used substaJJtively usually requires the article : r<iXXa r P-"fwra the other matter-9 of the highest moment P. A. 22 d. Here r tJ--rrra is in apposition to r&:a (1272). al dOL 7rli>T<s oi, r.iXXa 1rci.vra rci. sometimes on1it the iinal article. 1276. o i!os often means ?tsual, geneml : 1rap rv liov rp61rov contTai'Y ta my usual disposition Ant. 3. f3. 1.

THE RECIPIWCAL PRONOUN

w 3' when Abmdatas and his w1je saw each otlwr, they mutually embmced X. C. 6. 1. 47.
1277.

The pronoun &.~otv expresses reci proeal relation:

yvv~ KaL

f18r'Y)V &.~ov ~

o 'A{3pa'ra,

~u1r/;,ovro .~ovs

1278. To express reciprocal relation Greek uses also (1) t.he middle forms (1726); (2) the reflexive pronoun (12ill); or (;3) a substantive is repeated : .v+,p <> i!vopa man jell upon mcm 0 328.

On I{elative Pronouns see under Complex Sentences (2493 ff.).

312

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

THE CASES

1279. Of the cases belonging to the In do-European language, Greek

has lost the free use of three: instrumental, locative, and ablative. A few of the jonns of these cases have been preserved (341, 1449, 1535); the syntactical fnnctions of the instrumental and locative were taken over by the dative; those of the ablative by the genitive. The genitive and dative cases are therefore composite or mixed cases.
N. -The reasons that led to the formation of composite cases are either (1) formal or (2) functional. 'l'hus (1) xwpq. is both dat. and loc.; D)'ots re presents the instr. D)'o<s and the loc. D')'oun; in consonantal stems both ablative and genitive ended in -os; (2) verbs of 1uling may take eitl1er the dat. or the loc., hence the latter case would be absorbed by the former ; furthermore the use of prepositions especially with loc. and instr. was attended by a certain indifference as regards the form of the case. 1280. Through the influence of one construction upon another it often becomes impossible to mark off the later from the original use of the genitive and dative. It must be remembered that since language is a natnral growth and Greek was spoken and written before formal categories were set up by Grammar, all the uses of the cases cannot be apportioned with definiteness. 1281. 'fhe cases fall into two main divisions. Cases of the Subject: nominative (and vocative). Cases of the Predicate: accusative, dative. 'fhe genitive may define either the subject (with nouns) or the predicate (with verbs). On the nominative, see 938 ff.
1282. The content of a thought may be expressed in different ways in different languages. 'l'hus, 1f18w '" but penuadeo tibi (in classical Latin): and even in the same language, the sameverb may have varying constructions to express different shades of meaning.
VOCATIVE

The vocative is used in exclamations and in direct address: ~ ZEv Ka1 Ow{ oh Zeus and ye gods P. Pr. 310 d, av0pW7r my good jellow X. C. 2. 2. 7. The vocative forms an incomplete sentence (904 d). a. The vocative is never followed immediately by ;u or ')'ap.
1283. 1284. In ordinary conversation and public speeches, the polite ~ is usually added. Without ~ the vocative may express astonishment, joy, contempt, a threat, or a warning, etc. 'l'hus aKoVH< Al<rxlvrJ; d'ye hew, .Aeschines? D. 18. 121. Bnt this distinction is not always observed, though in general cl> has a familiar tone which was unsuited to elevated poetry. 1285. The vocative is usually found in tlle interior of a sentence. At the beginning it is emphatic. In prose ~<PrJ, in poetry ;;,, may stand between the vocative and an attributive or between an attributive and the vocative; in poetry cl> may be repeated for emphasis.

1294]

THE GENITIVE

313

1286. In late poetry a predicate adjective may be attracted into the vocative:
6X{Jte Kwpe -yvow blessed, oh boy, mayest thou be Theocr. 17. 66. Cp. Matutine

pater seu Jane libentius audis Hor. S. 2. 6. 20. 1287. By the omission of uv or ilps the nominative with the article may stand in apposition to a vocative : ,;) livilpes o! 1rap6vr<S you, gentlemen, who are present P. Pr. 337 c, ,;) Kpe Kai o! liXXot ITpuat Cyrus and the ?'est of you Persians X. C. 3. 3. 20 ; and in apposition to the pronoun in the verb : o1rai's, KoXoMet boy, attend me Ar. Han. 521. 1288. The nominative may be used in exclamations as a predicate with the subject unexpressed: ;;, 1rtKpos 8eos oh loatherl of heaven S. Ph. 254, rp!Xos ,;; MvXiie ah dear llfenelaus /:,. 18H; and connected with the vocative by and: c!i 1rots Ka2 Oijp,e oh city and people Ar. Eq. 273. In exclamations about a person : & "(evvaos oh the noble man P. Phae. 227 . a. ovros is regular in address: ovros, r! 1rtiuxets, ,;) :B:avOtii; ho thme, 1 say, Xanthias, what is the matter with you 't Ar. Vesp. 1; ,;) oiiros, Ariis ho there, I say, Ajax S. Aj. 89.
GENITIVE

1289. The genitive most commonly limits the meaning of substantives, adjectives, and adverbs, less commonly that of verbs. Binee the genitive hus absorbed the ablative it includes (1) the genitive proper, denoting the class to which a person or thing belongs, and (2) the ablatival genitive.

a. The name genitive is derived from casus genitivus, the case of origin, the inadequate Latin translation of "fEVtK-iJ 1rrwrns case denotinq the class.
THE GENITIVE PROPER WITH NOUNS (ADNOMINAL GENITIVE)

A substantive in the genitive limits the meaning of a substantive on which it de:pends.

J.290.

1291. The genitive Jimits for the time being the scope of the substantive on which it depends by referring it to a particular class or description, or by regarding it as a part of a who le. The genitive is akin in meaning to the adjective and may often be trans)aied by an epithet. Cp. urif>avos xpulov with XPI<Tois urrf>a.vos, if>6{Jos 1rOEp,iov With 1rOf.ltOS rf>o{Jos, ro evpos 1riJpov With ro evpos 1rEIJptaov (1035). But the use of the adjective is not everywhere parallel to tbat of the genitive. 1292. In poetry a genitive is often used with {Jiii, p,vos, u8vos might, etc., instead of the corresponding adjective : f3l'Yf Awp,f}eos mighty Diomede E 781. 1293. In poetry JLas forrn, Klipii and Keif>aXf} head, etc., are used with a genitive to express majestic or loved persons or objects: 'Iup,f}vns Kapii S. Ant. 1. 1294. xpfip,a thing is usedn prose with a gcnitive to express size, strength, etc. : urf>ev/ioV'Yfrwv 1rp,1ro?o. n xpijp,a a 'l!ery lmge mass of slinge?'S X. C. 2. 1. 5. Cp. 1322.

314

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1295

1295. The genitive with substantives denotes in general a connection or dependence between two words. This connection must often be determined (1) by the meaning of the words, (2) by the context, (:3) by the facts presupposed as known (1301). The same construction may often be placed under more than one of the different classes mentioned below; and the connection between the two substantives is often so loose that it is difficult to include with precision ail cases under specifie grammatical classes. a. The two substantives may be so closely connected asto be equivalent to a single compound idea: T<<uTi] Tou filou '!ife-end' (cp. lije-time) X. A. 1. 1. 1. Cp. 1146. b. The genitive with substantives has either the attributive (1154), or, in the case of the genitive of the divided whole (1306), and of persona] pronouns (1185), the predicate, position (1168). 1296. vVords denoting number, especially numerals or substantives with numerals, often agree in case with the limited word instead of standing in the genitive: <j>6pos Turrapa ni/..avra. a t1ibute of fou?' talents 'l'. 4. 57 (cp. 1323), ls Ts va.s, at l<j>popouv iivo, Ka.Ta.cpwy6vT<s fleeiny to the ships, two ofwhich we1e keepiny yuarrl 4. 1 Ul. So with oi pb, oi ii in apposition to the subject (981).
GENITIVE OF POSSESSION OH. BELONGING

The genitive denotes ownershi p, possession, or belonging: the honse of Simon L. 3. 32, KiJpov a-Tooc; the expedition of Cyrus X. A. 1. 2. 5. Cp. the dative of possession (1476).
129'7.
~ otKW 'YJ '2,[1-'wvoc;

1298. Here may be classed the genitive of origin : oi ~6/..wvos vb!lo' the laws, of Solon D. 20. 103, 7} hnrrTo/..1] Tou <f>t/..l71'7rou tlw lettn of Philip 18. 37, KV/la.Ta 1/'avrolwv clv!lwv waves caused by all kinds of winds B 396. 1299. 'fhe possessive genitive is nsed with the neuter article (singnlar or plural) denoting affairs, conditions, nower, and the like : To Twv lcpbpwv the powm of the epho1s P. L. 712 d, To Tijs Txv'Y/s the fu net ion of the wt P. G. 450 c, TO To ~b?..wvo~ the maxim of Solon P. Lach. 188 b, liii'Y!/..a T Twv 7ro!lwv the chances of war a1e uncertain T. 2. 11, T Tijs 7r6<ws the interests of the State P. A. 36 c, r Toii ii1J!lou <j>pov<L is on the side of the people Ar. Eq, 1216. Sornetimes this is almost a mere periphrasis for the thing itself: T Tijs TVX'f/S chance D. 4. 12 T Ti)~ O"WT'Y/pliis safety 23. 163, TO Tijs rrliis, oTLii1}7roT' lrrrl the quality of ho li ness, whateve1 it is 21. 12(), T Twv 7rp<rrf3uTpwv 7}1'-wv we elers P. L. 657 d. So T ToTou S. Aj. 124 is almost = oliros, as TO!lov is = l-yw or 11-. Cp. L. 8. 19. 1300. The genitive of possession may be used aft.er a demonstrative or relative pronoun: ToT6 l'ou ilLa.f36./../..<t he attacks this action of mine D. 18. 28. 1301. 'Vith persons the genitive may denote the rdation of child to parent, wife to husband, and of inferior to superior: eovKiilii'Y/s o 'OMpou 77tucydies, the son of Olorus T. 4. 104 (and so ui6s is regularly omitted in At tic official documents), Ll.ts ApT/lLS Art emis, danyhter of Zeus S, Aj. 172, 7} ~!lKuOlwvos M</..trrrlx'Y/ Melistiche wife of Smicythion Ar. Eccl. 46, Aiiiis o <l><p<Kous Lydus, the slave of Pherecles A nd. 1. 17, oi Mvwvos the t1oops of ])fen on X. A. 1. 5. 13
(ol To Mvwvos rrTpa.nwTa.L 1. 5. 11).

THE GENITIVE

315

o Tfa,uwvos)

a. In poetry we may have an attributive adjective: TfXa,uwvws Al:is ( = Afiis B 528. Cp. 846 f.

1302. The word on which the possessive genitive depends may be represented by the article: ,,.;, rijs iavrwv f1om theil own com1try ( -yijs) T. 1. 15 (cp.1027 b). A word foi' dwelling (olKi, Oh,uos, and also l<pov) is perhaps omitted after lv, fis, and sometimes after ~. Th us, lv 'Apl</>povos at Ariph1on' s P. Pr. 320 a, v Ll.wv6uov (scil. lfpc/j) at the shrine of Dionysus D. 5. 7, fis O<OaO"Kov </>OL'rv to go to school x. c. 2. 3. 9, fK IIarpoKovS l!pxo,ua< 1 come f1'0?n Patroclus's Ar. Plut. 84. So, in Homer, dv(fls) 'Aloo. 1303. Predicate Use.- The genitive may be connected with the noun it Jimits by means of a verb.
'J,.,.oKpr7]s lurl olKls ,Uf'Y7JS Hippocrates is of an influential house P. Pr. 316 b, Bo<wrwv 7] 71'0<s l!ura< the city will belong to the Boeotians L. 12. 58, 7] ZXEL un rijs 'Auls Zelea is in Asia D. 9. 43, ovM rijs avrijs 8p</.K7JS -yvovro nor did they belong to the same Th1'ace T. 2. 29, ouhKH roO if;7J<Plup,a7os, rar' ur lv the clauses in the bill which he attacks, me these D. 18. 56.

1304. The genitive with flp,l may denote the perB<m whose nature, duty, custom, etc., it is to do that set forth in an infinitive subject of the verb : 'lf'fvliiv <j>lpe<v o 'lf'avros, .XX' .vops uocpo 'tis the sage, not eve1y one, who can bear poverty Men. Sent. 463, ooK< O<Kalov ror' evat 71'oirov this seems to be the duty of a just citizen D. 8. 72, rwv viKwvrwv url Kal r iavrwv u<He<v Kal r rwv i]rrwp,vwv ap,five<v it is the custom of conqueJ'OI'S to keep what is theil' own and to take the possessions of the defeated X. A. 3. 2. 39. 1305. With verbs signifying to refer or attribute, by thought, word, or action, anything to a person or class. Snch verbs are to think, 1egard, rnake, name, choose, appoint, etc. o-ytrou r o' iL a rijs 7VX7JS deern th at the rest IJelongs to chance E. Ale. 789, rwv evOepwrrwv otKwv vop,<uOua deerned a daughteJ' of a hou.se most fne E. And. 12, p, -ypcpe rwv t71'11'uELv v11'<pe,.,Ovp,ouvrwv put me clown as one of those who desi1e exceedingly to serve on horseback X. C. 4. 3. 21, rijs 11'pwr7Js r~ews uraoy,uvos assigned to thefiJst class L. 14. 11, rijs .-yaOijs rux1Js rijs 71'0ews eva< rl07JfJ.' 1 reckon as belonging to the good fmtune of the State D. 18. 254, el M r<ves r-I] v 'Aulv a.vrwv 71'0LOvra< but if sorne are claiming Asia as thei1 own X. Ages. 1. 33, vo.utre< OiJ.S ia.vro dva< he thinks that you are in his powe1 X. A. 2. 1. 11.
GENITIVE OF THE DIVIDED WHOLE (PARTITIVE GENITIVE)

1306. The genitive may denote a whole, a part of which is denoted by the noun it limits. The genitive of' the divicled whole may be used with any word that expresses or implies a_part. 1307. Position.- The genitive of the wh ole stands before or after the word

denoting the part: rwv 8pq.KwP 71'raural taJgeteei'S of the Thracians T. 7. 27, ol IL11'opo< rwv 'lf'oirwv the needy among the citizens n. 18.104; rarely between the limited noun and its article: oi rwv .olKwv &.</><Kvovp,<vo< those of the unTighteous
who come here P. G. 525 c.

Cp. 1161 N. 1.

316

SYNT AX OF THE Sll\IPLE SE"STEKCE

130S. "\Vhen all are included there is no partition : so in oU7oc 1rvus all of these, all these, rhrapES -iJ"-ELS 'ljp.Ev there We1'C fom of US, ro 1rv 7r~djllos rwv 1r'Arwv the enti1e body of the hoplites 'l'. 8. V3, o<To< l<Fr rwv OJLolwv as many of y ou as belong ta the 'pems' X. A. 4. 6. 14. 1309. The idea of division is often not explicitly stated. See third example in 1310. 1310.

(I) The genitive of the divided whole is used with sub-

stantives.
p.pos re rwv (3ap(3d.pwv sorne part of the barbarians T. 1. 1, ol ilwpdjs Tjp.wv those of us who are Dorians 4. Gl. The goveming word may be omitted: 'Apxliis rwv 'HpiiK'AEtowv Archias (one) of the Iie1aclidae T. G. 3. To an indefini te substantive without the article may be added a genitive denoting the special sort: <Pepcu!:\iis IIp<r'J< rwv li1Jp.orwv Phe1aulas, a Persian, one of the common people X. C. 2. 3. 7. 1311. Chorographic Genitive.- r1)s 'ArrtK'i)s ls Olvb')v to Oeno in Attica T. 2. 18 (or ls OlvO')V r1)s 'ArnK1)s, not fS r1)s 'ArrtK1}S Olv61Jv), r1)s 'Iral\liis AoKpol the Locrians in Italy 3. 8G. The article, which is al ways used with the genitive of the country (as a place well known), is rarely added to the governing substantive (rb K?}vacov r1)s E{3olis Cenaeum in Euboea T. 3. 93).

1312. (II) With substantive adjectives and participles. ol ili5<KO< rGv <lvllpdJ,.wv the unjust among men D. 27. G8 (but al ways ol Ov')rol llvllpw7rot), JJ.VOS TWV 7rpvrvWV alone of the JJ1'ytans P. A. 32 b, o'Ai"{ot a.rwv few of them X. A. 3. 1. 3, rwv ll'A""'.wv 'E'A'A?}vwv (3ov'A6yEvo whoeve1 of the rest. of the Greelcs so desires T. 3. 92. So r KaTa.vr<Kp arwv ro <rrr1Jaiov the pa1t of the cavern facing them P. H. 515 a. :For nihil novi the Greek says oov Ka<vov. 1313. Adjectives denotiug magnitude, aml some others, may conform in gender to the genitive, instead of appearing in the neuter : IIryov r1)s -yi)s r-l)v 7ro"l\'!..?)v they ravaged most of the land 2. 56, r1) -y1)s i] pl<rr1J the best of the land 1. 2. This construction occurs more frequently in prose than in poetry. 1314. But such adjectives, especially when singular, may be used in the neuter: rwv 'Ap"{Eiwv 'Ao"{owv rb 1ro'AV the grertter pmt of the picked A1gives T. 5. 73, 1rl 1ro'!.. r1)s xd!pis over a g1eat part of the land 4. 3.

r.

1315. (III) With comparatives and superlatives. TJfl.WV "{Epa.iTEpo the elde1 of1!S X. C. 5. 1. 6 (10GG b), ol 7rpa-{36rarot rGv a-rpaT'J"{WV the oldest of the genemls X. A. 3. 3. 11, a-ir<p 7rvrwv vllpdJ,.wv ,.)I,El<Tr<p D. 18. 87.
xpd!fl.8' httrc\Kr<p 1ve malte u.se of impmted grain nw1e than all othm people So with a superlative adverb: Tj vas lipun JJ.O< l!7r'At 1ravros ro a-rparo1rov my ship was the best sail eT of the whole squa1on L. 21. G. 1316. In poetry this use is extended to positive adjectives : pcliElKEro vpwv conspicuous among men A 248, 6J <j;il\ii "{vva<Kwv oh dear among v;omen

E. Ale. 460. In tragedy an adjective may be emphasized by the addition of the same adjective in the genitive : 11pp7Jr' pp?}rwv ho?'1'01's unspeaka/Jle S. O. T. 465. Cp. 1064. 1317 ..

(IV) With substantive pronouns and nnmerals.

1322]

THE GENlTIVE

317

ol p,v avrwv, oi Il' o6 some of them and not others P. A. 24 e, ot i)(tnpov D..-fJrpOTJ<Tav rwv 1ro<p.lwv those of the enemy who were taken later X. A. 1. 7. 13, o/Jds vBprlnrwv no one 'in the world P. S. 220 a, ri rov nlxovs a part of the wall T. 7. 4, ris O<wv one of the gods E. Hec.164 (ris B<os a god X. C. 5. 2. 12), ~. rwv 1rowv one of the many things P. A. 17 a; rarely after demon~trative pronouns: rourots rwv d.v8prl>1rwv to these (of) men T. 1. 71. a. With oi-yot and with numerals 1r6 and ~ are rarely added : K rptwv ~. one of three S. Tr. 734. ~ with superlatives is also rare. See also 1688. 1 c. 1318. The genitive of the divided whole may do duty as the subject of a finite verb (928 b) or of the infinitive: (~rj;a<rav) 7rtp.<t-yvuvat <rcf>wv 1rpos helvovs they sa id that some of their numbe1 associated with them X. A. 3. 5. 16. 1319. Predicate Use. -'f}v Il' arwv <l>avos and among them was Phalinus X. A. 2. 1. 7, '26wv rwv 1rr. <ro</J<<rrwv K')o.1,0TJ Solon was called one of the Seven Sages I. 15. 235, rwv ro'll'wrcirwv &.v dTJ it would be very stmnge D. 1. 26; and often with verbs signifying to be, beeome, thinlc, say, name, choose. With sorne of tbese verbs ds with the genitive may be used instead of the genitive alone.
GENITIVE OF QUALITY

1320.

The genitive to denote quality occurs chiefly as a predicate.

lw v rp61rov i}<rvxlov being of a peaceful disposition Hdt. 1. 107, oi /l rtv<s ri)s auri)s -yvrl>p.TJs oi-yot Karrpv-yov but sonw few of the same opinion fied T. 3. 70, ravra 1rap.1rowv E<Trl M-ywv this calls fnr a thorough discussion l'. L. G42 a, O<wpf,<Tar' ar6v, p.i} o1rodpov ro M-yov, ' o'll'orlpov ro f3lov rrlv conside1, not the manner of his speech, but the manne1 of his life Aes. 3. 168, El lloK rara Ka! IJa'll'.vTJS p.<-y.TJS' Kai 'll'ovwv 1rowv Kai 1rpi.-yp.ar<liis ifvat if these matters seem

to involve great expense and nmch toil and t1ouble D. 8. 4.8. a. The attributive use occurs in poetry : x6prwv <llfvllpwv Epw1riis Europe with its pastures amid fair trees E. I. T. 134, wKijs x6vos 1rrpv~ a wing white as snow (of white snow) S. Ant. 114. 1321. The use of the genitive to express quality, corresponding to the IJatin genitive, occurs in the non-predic<tte position, only when age or size is exactly expressed by the addition of a numeral (genitive of measure, 1325). The Latin genitive of quality in mulieT miTae pulchl'itudinis is expressed by -yvv1, Oavp.a<Tlii K.os (or TO K.Xovs), -yvvi} 8avp.a<Tli. l/J<v, -yvvi} gXOV!fa Bavp..!TtoV <TXiJp.a, etc.
GENITIVE OF EXPLANATION (APPOSITIVE GENITIVE)

The genitive of an explicit word may explan the meaning of a more general word.
1322.
'Iiov 11'0<S E 642, as u?bs Romae, li<a< 1ravrolwv vp.wv blasts formed of winds of every soTt < 292. This construction is chiefly poetic, but in prose we find s p.-ya xpi}p.a a monste?' (great affair, 1204) of a boar Hdt. 1. 36, ro 5pos ri)s 'ID"rwvTJS lift. Istone T. 4. 46 (very rare, 1142 c). An a.rticular infinitive in the genitive often defines the applic<tt.ion of a substantive: !J.aOla i} ro ote<TOat El/Jha< . ovK oiil<v the ignorance of thinlcing one lcnows what one does not know P.A.29b.

318

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

a. But with 6vop.a the persan or thing named is usually in apposition to 6vop.a : r'R li vewrcLT'f' 8p.TJ> 6vop.a Kai<nparov I gave the youngest the name

Gallistratus D. 43. 74.

GENITIVE OF MATERIAL OR CONTENTS

1323.

The genitive expresses material or contents.

IJpKoS OOOVTWP the fence (cOnSiSting) Of the teeth tJ. 350, KpofJVTJ -I}OOS VOO,TOS a sp1ing of sweet wate1 X. A. 6. 4. 4, tYwpol tYirov, ~wv, l8wv heaps of corn, wood, stones X. H. 4. 4. 12, ~aK6tY,a rcLavra .p6pov six hund1ed talents in taxes T .. 2. 13 (cp. 1296). 1324. Predicate Use : tYretj>c!,vovs p6owv 5vras, aX}..' o XP"rlov crowns that were of 1oses, not of gold D. 22. 70, tYrpwp.v'fJ tYrl os Xl8ov a road was paved tvith stone Hdt. 2. 138, and often with verbs of making, which admit also the instrumental dative. Hdt. has rrotY8a' rr6 and h nvos.

GENITIVE OF 1iEASURE

1325.
OKrw

The genitive denotes measure of space, time, or degree. (}'ralwv re t'x os a wall eight stades long T. 7. 2, rrvre f}p.epwv tYrla pro-

visionsfor five days 7. 43 (cp. fossa pedum quindecim, exilittm decem annorwm). Less commonly with a neuter adjective or pronoun : hd p."'fa lxwpTJtYav livvc!,p.ews they advanced to a great pitch of powe1' T. 1. 118, rl i56~'f}s some honou1' ( aliquid famae) 1. 5, p.ofJxavov ea,p.ovl.s (something infinite in the way of happiness) infinite happiness P. A. 41 c (with emphasis ou the adj.). But the phrases s roro, fis rotYoro atj>IKtY8a ( ijKelv, l}..8fiv, rrpotY{3alvHv, usually with a persona! subject) followed 'by the genitive of abstracts are common: fis roro 8pc!,tYovs a<f>iKero he 1eached such a pitch of boldness D. 21. 194, lv rravrl 8p.l.s in utte1' despondency T. 7. 55, lv rorcp rra.pMKevfjs in this stage of p1'eparation 2. 17, Kar. roro Kr;upo at that c1itical moment 7. 2. The article with this genitive is unusual in classical Greek : s roro rfjs fJXKl.s ta this stage of /ife L. 5. 3. Sorne of these genitives may also be explained by 1306. 1326. Under the head of measu1'e belongs amou nt: vov p.vav rrp6!J'oi5os an incarne of two minae X. Vect. 3. 10. Cp. 1206, 1323. 1327. Predicate Use. -hHv rwv riS rp1ilKovra. when a man is thi1ty yea1s old P. L. 721 a, r. r<IXTJ ijv tYralwv oKrw the walls we eight stades long T. 4.66.

SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE

\Vith a verbal noun the genitive may denote the subject or object of the action expressed in the noun.
1328.

a. Many of these genitives derive their construction from that of the kindred verbs : ro aros lrr,Op.l. desire fo1' wate1 T. 2. 52 (1349), x6Xo< vi6s ange1 because of his son 0 138 (1405). But the verbal idea sometimes requires the accusative, or (less commonly) the dative. 1329. In poetry an adjective may take the place of the genitive : votYros o {JatYIXe<os the 1'eturn of the king A. Pers. 8. Cp. 1291.

THE GENITIVE

319

1330. The Subjective Genitive is active in sense: -rwv {Jap{J<ipwv q,b{Jo< the fear of the ba1barians (wbicb they feel: oi {J<ip{Japo< <j>o{Jovra<) X. A. 1. 2. 17, 7] {JM.-Mwr <nopKl. the perjury of the king ({Ja<r<es f-TnopKiL) 3. 2. 4, -r op-y<IOJJ.Evov -r?)s -yvwp,7Js their angry feelings T. 2. 59 (such genitives with substantive participles are common in Thucydides; cp. 1153 b, N. 2). 1331. The Objective Genitive is passive in sense, and is very common with substantives denoting a frame of mind or an emotion : q,6{Jos -rw E!w-rwv the fear of the Helots (felt towards them: <j>o{Jovrat -rous E1w-ras) T. 3. 54, -lj -rwv 'EX'Ijvw11 di vota good-will towards the Greelcs ( evofi -ros "E?)tr<) X. A. 4. 7. 20, 1} -rwv KaXw" o-vvouo-10. intercourse with the good (o-v11<1tr1 -ros Kaos) P. L. 838 a. a. The objective genitive often precedes another genitive on which it depends: p.e-r. -ri)s l;up.p.axt.s -rfjs ai-r'ljo-ews with the request for an alliance T. 1. 32. 1332. Varions prepositions are used in translating the objective genitive: o 8ewv 7rOep.os war with the gods X. A. 2. 5. 7, opKo< 6ewv oaths by the gods E. Hipp. 657' 8ewp evxal prayers to the gods P. I>hae. 244 e, cl.lltK?)P,UTWV Op"ff} anger at injustice L. 12. 20, ')'Kpan<a -ljilov?)s mode~ation in pleasure I. 1. 21, 7] -rwv -i]oovwv viK?) victmy ove~ pleaswes P. L. 840 c, -rpo1ru.w. f!ap{3apwv rnernorials of victory over barbarians X. A. 7. 6. 36, 1rapatvlrrm -rwv ~vvau.-ywv exho1t.ations to reconciliation T. 4. 59, f'VOos </Jlwv tlings about friends S. Ant.ll, o-o p.viJos speech with thee S. O. C. 11GJ. In 8ava-rov Mo-ts release fTo?n death ' 421, J.L<Ta7ravo-w'IJ 1rop.o<o respite from war T 201, it is un certain wh ether the genitive is objective or ablatival (1392). 1333. The objective genitive is often used when a prepositional expression, giving greater precision, is more usual: -ro Me-yaplwv 1{;-f}<j>wp,a the dec1ee 1elating to (1repl) the Megarians T. 1. 140, .1rb{3ao-<S -r?)s -yijs a des cent upon the land ( ls r'l}v "'ii) 1. 108, .1r6o--rarrs -rwv 'A6?)valwv revolt from the .Athenians (.1r0 -rwv 'A87Jvalw11) 8. 5. 1334. For the objective genitive a possessive pronoun is sometimes used: rr'i}v xap<P for th y sake P. Soph. 242 a, o1a(3o1} -1] lwf1 cahtmniation of me P. A. 20 e. ip,os <j>b{Jos is usually objective : the fear which I inspire. (But o-o p.viJos speech with thee S. O. C. 1161.) 1335. Pre;licate Use. -ou -rwv KaKO!Jp"fw oK-ros, . -rf)s OlK7JS compassin is not for w1ong-oers, but fm justice E. fr. 270.
GENITIVE OF VALUE

1336.

The genitive expresses value.

!ep. -rptwv -ra\av-rwv o.ffeTings worth three talents L. 30. 20, xil\iwv paxp,wv lK7J" rpev"fw I arn dqfenrlant in an action involving a thousand d1achrnas D. 55. 25. 1337. Predicate Use: ros alxp.aw-rovs -roo-o-rwv XP7JJJ.arwv Veo-6u.< to Tansorn the captives at so high a p1ice D. 19. 222, -rp<wv opu.x!J.wv 1rov7Jpos lfJv a threepenny

rogue 19. 200.

TWO GENTTIVES WITH ONE NOUN

Two genitives expressing different relations may be used with one noun.
1338.

320

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1339

o1 liv8pw1ro< ih r a.urwv oos ro 8a.varov Ka.ra."{lvoovra.< by reasnn of the ir fear of eath men tell lies P. Ph. 85 a, llwviJ<Jov 7rp<J{Jrwv xopos a chur us of ol!l men in honour of Dionysus P. L. 5 b, 1] ro Aax7Jros rwv vfwv pxf, Laches' comman of the jleet T. 3. 115, 1] <l'>a.<dKwv 7rpovolKTJ<J<s r?js I\.Eptc6piis the foimer occupation of Oorcyra by the Phaeacians 1. 2ii.

GENITIVE WITH VERBS

The genitive may serve as the immediate complement of a verb, or it may a1)pear, as a secondary definition, along with an accusative which is the immediate object of the verb (920, 1392, 1405). 1340. The subject of an active verb governing the genitive may become the subject of the passive construction: NK-r]paros lpwv rqs yvva<Ko> &vr{prat Niceratus, who is in love with his wife, is loved in retum X. S. 8. 3. Cp. 1745 a.
1339.
THE GEN!TIVE PROPER WITH VERBS

THE PAitTITIVE GENITIVE

A verb may be followed by the partitive genitive if the action affects the object only in part. If the entire object is affected, the verb in question takes the accusative.
1341.
'Apf,<Jroto o' g'YWL 8v"(a.rpwv he married one of .Adrastus' daughters :0: 121, rwv 1rwwv a.~J.fJavet he takes some of the colts X. A. 4. 5. 35, a.{i6vHs ro {Ja.p{Ja.p<Ko <Jrpa.ro taking part of the arbarian force 1. 5. 7, K1rrovTs ro 5povs seizing part of the mountain secretly 4. 6.15 (cp. ro povs K'A'fia.< TL 4. 6. 11), r?js 'Yils rrfiJ.OP'they l'a'Vage part of the lan T. 2. 56 (cp. r'fJv "(i)P 7r<JaP gTp.Ov 2. 57 and rTiJ.OP ri)s -yijs T'qP 7rOf,v 2. 56), Ka.Td'Y'I/ Tijs K</>ai)s he ha a hole lcnoclce somewhere in his head Ar. Vesp. 1428 (r'fJv K</>a.~v Ka.Hii-yva.< to ha'Ve one's head broken D. 54. 35).

1342. With impersonals a partitive genitive does duty as the subject: 7rbiJ.OV ov f.L<ri)v a.rfi she had no share in war X. C. 7. 2. 28, lp.ol o&,tp.60ev 1rpo<Jf,KL rovTov Tov 1rpd"(p.a.ros 1 have no part whate'IJer in this affair And. 4. 34. Cp. 1318. 1343. The genitive is used with verbs of sharing. 1ravrS 1-''~'<xov r?js opr1js all took part in the festi'Val X. A. 5. 3. 9, p.eHoLoo<Ja.v ci'ljo<s wv ( = Tovrwv &) fixov i!KMro< they slw1ed with each otlter what each had 4. 5. 6, r v8pw7r<vov -yvos p.eHl'I/</>fv lia.va.<J!iis the human l'ace has received a portion of immo1tality P. L. 721 b, crirov Ko<vwvfv to talee a sha1e of food X. M. 2. 6. 22, tKaLO<JP'YJS oov p.v 1rpo<Jf,KH you ha'Ve no concern in !'ighteous dealing X. IL 2. 4. 40, 'lrOtnfii, lv Yi 1rV7J<nv o pbE<Jnv pxijs a foTm of go'Vemrnent in which the poo1 have no paTt in the management of affahs l'. R. 550 c. So with p.raa.-yxavHv get a shme (along with somebody else), (fvva.lp<J0a.t and Ko<vo<J0a< talee part in, p.ra.trv and p.1'a7ro<<J8a.< deman a share in. 1344. The part received or taken, if expressed, stands .in the accusative. ol r-6pa.vvo< rwv p.-ylcrrwv d-yaOwv e6.x<crra p.rlxovin tyTants ha'Ve the smallest por-

1350]

THE GENITIVE

321

t'lon in the r;reatest lessings X. Hi. 2. 6, rorwv p.eratr ro p.pcs he demands his share of th; Ar. V es}). 972.
a. With p.hmr~ the part may be added in the nominative : phrr< xp.'iv rwv 'll'<wpi-yp.vwv p.pos ye too have had a share in these doings E. I. T.
1299.

1345. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to touch, take hold of, rnake trial of. (-1] vbcros) i]tj;a.ro rwv v8pw7rwv the plague laid hold of the men T. 2. 48, r~s "(VWf.<TJS r?js ar?js ~XOJLaL I hold to the same opinion 1. 140, EV rn XOJLfVYJ p.o Kiv'(J on the couch next to me P. S. 217 d, vnXtlflecrOe rwv 7rpa"fJJ.arwv take ou1 public policy in hand D. 1. 20, ihrws 'lT'etp{pvro To ulxovs to make an attempt on (a part of) the wall T. 2. 81. So with 'fau v tOl!Ch (rare in prose), vrlxecr8a.< cling to, 11'Lap.fltlvecr8at and crua.iJ-flavEcr8a.< lay hold of 1346. The genitive of the pa1t, with the accusative of the persan (the wh ole) who has been touched, is chiefiy poetical: rv 0 'll'ecrbvra. 'll'owv ~a.fle but him as he fell, he seized hy his feet 1l. 463, t\a.flov r?js twv71s rov 'OpbnO.v they took hold of 01ontas by the girdle X. A. 1. 6. 10 (but JJ.O afJhJJ.evos r?js XELpos taking me by the hand P. Charxn. 153 b), &y<Lv r?]s iJvlO.s rov f11'7rov to lead the horse by the bridle X. Eq. 6. 9 (cp. fiov ' tl"'{TTJV Kepawv, they led the cow by the horns -y 439). 1347. Verbs of beseeching take the genitive by anal ogy to verbs of touching:
p. tcrucr-Kero "fovvwv she besought ?ne by (clasping) rny knees I 451 (cp. -yEveiou d.tj;ap.vos XlucrecrBa< beseech by touching his chin K 454 ).

1348. The genitive is used with verbs of beginntg. a. Partitive : ~.P7J Kpav &px_etv ro M-yov ihoe he said that Cyrus began t11e discussion as follows X. A. 1. 6. 5, ro b"fau 1jpx_<ro wl!e he began his speech as follows 3. 2. 7. On &px <Lv as distinguished from &px<cr-Ba< see 17.34. 5. b. Ablatival (1391) denoting the point of departure: u.!o ii' &p~ofi-a< I will make a beginning with thee I 97. In this sense ti.71'6 or ~ is usually added: .p~tlp.evo< .1ro cro D. 18. 297, tip~ofi-a.< 1r ri)< !O.rp<K?i< o"fWV I will rnake a beginning by speaking of medicine P. S. 186 b.
1349. The geniti ve is used with verbs signifying to ai1n at, strive after, des1:re (genitive of the end desired).
v(Jpri>'II'WV crroxat<u0at tO aim at men X. C. 1. 6. 29, </J}Jo<VOt TWV Kepwv desiring gain T. 1. 8, 1ravrs rwv d."fa.ewv .,,.,(Jp.ocr<v aU rnen desire what is good l'. R. 438 a, ril ip.v rwv Ka.w v the passionate love of wh at is noble A es. 1. l!l7, 7rvwcr< XPTJiJ-rwv thfy are hungTy for ~vealth X. S. 4. 36, 71'6<s .vfkpl'O.s l!tl/n)cr.cr(}, a state .thi1sting .foT jreedorn l'. R 562 c. So with Oi'crTEvnv shoot at (poet.), <a.leuOat desi1e (poet.), "flxecr8a.< desire. .P<'Av love, 11'o0ev long for take the

accusative.

1350. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to reach, obtain (genitive of the end attained).

11 ws

r?]< .per?js l<fJ<Ku8a< to attain to virtue I. 1. 5, o! Kovncrra.t f3pa.xvrepa. -IJKbnt?"ov e~<Kvecr8a.< rwv u<fJevlioVTJTWv the }avelin-throwers did not lwrl far enough to reach the slingers X. A. 3. 3. 7, cr1rovwv hvxe he obtained a truce 3. 1. 28.
GRlK GRAM.-~1

322

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SE~TENCE

[1351

So with Kvpiiv obtain (poet.), K?Jpovop/iv inlwit, d1rorv-yxchLv jail to hit. rv")'xave,v, when compounded with v, 1rl, 1rapa, 1repl, aud CJvv, takes the dative. a-yxavfLv obtain 7Jy lot usually takes the accusative.
a. This genitive and that of 1349 form the genitive of the goal.
~351. The genitive of the thing obtained may be joined with an ablatival genitive (1410) of the person: ov o il?) 1ravrwv ol6p.e8a TEV~ur8a 1ralvov in a case where we e:r1Ject to win praisefrom all men X. A. 5. 7. 33. But where the thing obtained is expressed by a neuter pronoun, the accusative is employed.

1352. It is un certain whether verbs signifying to miss take a partitive or an ablatival genitive: os -fip.apravEv avop6s no one rnissed his nwn X. A. 3. 4. 15, u</>avres rijs o6~'1s disappointed in expectations T. 4. 85. 1353. Verbs of app1oaching and meeti11g take the genitive according to These verbs are poetical. Thus, dvn6wv ravpwv fm the purpose of obtaining (his share of) bulls a 25, dvT'l\CJw roo' dv.!pos I will encounte~ this man II 423, ?rE.ciCJaL vwv to approach the ships S. Aj. 709. In the meaning 1aw near to verbs of approaching take the dative (1463).
13:3 or 1349.

1354.

The genitive is used with verbs of smelling.

So 1rvev p.6pov to breathe (smell of)

SS"w p.6pov I smell of perjume Ar. Eccl. 524. pe11ume S. fr. 140.

1355. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to enjoy, taste, eat, drink.
d?ro\auop.v 1ravrwv rwv d-yaOwv we enjoy all the goo things X. M. 4. 3. 11, nlwxo ro \b"}'ov enjoy the discourse P. R. 352 b, 6\l")'ot CJirov "YMavro few tasted food X. A. 3. 1. 3. So (rarely) with ijoECJ8a talee pleasme in. a. Here belong tCJ8lELv, 1rfvELv when they do not signify to eat up or d1inlc up: J:ip.wv tCJIJlev aorwv to eat them al ive X. H. 3. 3. 6, 1rivELv otvow drink some wine x 11,- as boire _dlt vin (but -1rivELv ovov d1ink wine Z 5, as boire le vin).

W ords denoting food and d1ink are placed in the accusative when they are regarded as kinds of nourishrnent.

1356. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to 1emembe1, remind, forget, care for, and neglect. . TWV rl7r0VTWV q,l\wv p.p.V?)CJO l'emember your absent friends I. 1. 26, (3ou.of.LaL a'
p.is dvaf.LvijCJaL rwv lp.ol 7rE7rpii")'p.vwv I desire to l'emind you of my past actions And. 4. 41, O!ootKa p.-1) ?r,aOw,.,eOa rfjs otKao,E ooo I .fear lest we may fo1get the way home X. A. 3. 2. 25, 7rLp.E6p.evot oi p.v v?rofv")'lwv, ol 01: CJKwwv sorne talcing <'aJe of the paclc animals, others of the baggage 4. 3. 30, rijs rwv 1ro.\wv o6~'1s Mi 'l]p.is </>povrlfELv we must pay heed to the wmld's opinion P. Cr. 48 a, ri 'l]p.v rfjs rwv 1rowv o6~'Y)s p.le; what do we cme for the wmld's opinion? 44 c, ros CJ1rovoa!os ox ol6v n rfjs rlpErfjs aw\v the serious cannot dis1ega1 viTtue I. 1. 48, p.?JoEVs OL"fWpErE p.?Jo Ka.ra</>poven (cp. 1385) rwv 7rpoCJTEra-yp.lvwv neither neglect

noT despise any command laid on you 3. 48.

1357. So with p.v?Jp.ovEuELv 1emember (but usually with the accus., especially of things), ap.v?Jp.ovEv not to speak of, KT]oeCJOa carejol', vrp7rECJ8a give heed to,

THE GENITIVE

323

lvO!JJ.<O"Oa< think deeply of, 1rpoopv make provision for (in Hdt. ), JJ.<raJJ.EL JJ.O< it 1epents me, wraJJ.v neglect.

1358. Many of these verbs also take the accusative.

With the accus.

JJ.JJ.VrJff0a< meaus to l'emember something as a whole, with the gen. to 1emember

something about a thing, bethinlc oneself. The accus. is usually .found with verbs of 1emembering an cl forgetting when they mean to hold or not to hold in memol'Y, and when the object is a thing. Neuter pronouns must stand in the accus. 1rLavOciv<rr0a< forget takes either the genitive or the accusative, avOcivwOa< (usually poetical) al ways takes the genitive. JJ.fH it is a care, 7r<JJ.<rr0a< care jo1, JJ.<JJ.wi)rrOa< think about may take 1r<pl with the genitive. ooa generally means I 1emember when it hfts a person as the object (in the accusative).
1359. Verbs of rerninding may take two accusatives: rave' fl7rJJ.Jir}rr' bJJ.s I have 1eminded you of this D. 19.25 (16:28). 1360. With JJ.ti\H, the subject, if a neuter pronoun, may sometimes stand in the nominative (the persona! construction) : rara 0<0 JJ.<i}rrEL God will ca1e fm this P. Phae. 238 d. l~xcept in poetry the subject in the nominative is very rare with other words th an neuter pronouw;: xopo! 1rrn JJ.ourr< P. L. 835 e. 1361. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to hear an perceive: Kovav, Kvnv (poet.) hear, KpoafJa< tisten to, a1a(M.vw0a< perceive, 7rvvO<iv<a0aL hea1, lea1'n of, avvvaL understand, a.ppa{v<a0aL scent. The person or thing, whose words, sound, etc. are perceived by tl1e senses, stands in the genive ; the words, sound, etc. generally stand in the accusative.
nvs 1}Kourr' drrbvros I hea1d somebody say D. 8. 4, .KovrravTEs rijs rrci7rL')'")'os ]waring the sound of the t1wnpet X. A. 4. 2. 8, KavrravTEs rv ObpufJov hearing the noise 4.4. 21, .KpowJJ.EVOL ro 4oovros listening to the singer X. C.1.3. 10, Sera< i}wv ~uvi<O'av all1vho un!lerstoocl erich othe!' T. 1. 3, 7rELi5v rruvfi ns r <-yi>JJ.eva when one unde1stands what is sa id P. l'r. 325 c (verbs of understanding, rruv"ivru and l7rlrrrarr0ru, usually take the accus.), KpOJJ./)oVWV orrrppalvoJJ.a< I smell onions Ar. Ran. G54. a. A supplementary participle is often used in agreement with the genitive of the person from whom something is beard: M-yovros JJ.O .KpodrrovraL al voL the young men will listen when I spealc 1;. A. 37 d. b. The accusative is al most al ways used when the thing heard is expressed by a substantivized neuter adjective or participle, but the genitive plural in the case of ovros, 5o<, a&ros, and os is frequent. 1362. A double genitive, of the person and of the thing, is rare with .KovELv: rwv v1rp rijs -ypacpijs i5<Kalwv .KovELv JJ.ou to listen to my just pleas as 1ega1'ds the inrlictment D. 18. 9. 1363. .KovELv, <0'0av<rr0a<, 7ruv0av<rr0a,, meanin~ to become awa1e of, lean~, take the accusative (with a participle in indirect discourse, 2112 b) of a persona! or impersonal objeet: ol i5 llaraLijs, ws ifcrOovro gvoov r< 5vras ros 87JfJalous Kai KaTEL7J!'-JJ.V7JV r7}v 1rol-.tv but the Plataeans, when they l1ecame aware that the Thebans we1e inside and that the city had been captured 'l'. 2. ;), 7ruOoJJ.<vot 'Apra~p~7Jv TE0V7JKOra having learned that .Al'taxerxes was dead 4. 50.

32

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

a. To hear a thing is usually ciKolim 7< when the thing heard is something definite and when the meaning is simply hear, not listen to. 1364. <iKoEL, <iKpocrOa<, trvvOavecrOa<, meaning to hem from, l ea1n from, take the genitive of the actual source (1411). 1365. <iKove<v, KI<<v, trvvOavecrOal 7<vos may mean to hear about, hear of: el M "' T<8v7Jw7os ciKovcrps but if you hear that he is dead a 289, Kwv cro hea1ing about thee S. O. C. 307, ws trli0ov7o 7i)s ITvov Kau<7JJ1.11,fVT}S when they /ward of the captu1e of Pylos T. 4. 6. For the participle (not in indirect discourse) see 2112 a. 1repl is often used with the genitive without the participle.

1366. In the meaning heed, hea1ken, obey, verbs of hearing generally take the genitive: lL1<ove 1rav7wv, lKl'yov o' li crvp.<j>pe< listen to everything, but choose that which is profitable Men. Sent. 566, 7wv troep.lwv ciKolie<v to subrnit to enernies X. C. 8. 1. 4. trel0ecr8a< takes the genitive, instead of the dative, !Jy anaJogy to this use (Hdt. 6. 12, T. 7. 73). (On the dative with ciKolie<v obey see 1465.) 1367. alcr0averr8a< takes the genitive., or (Jess frequently) the accusative, of the thing imme.diateJy percei ved by the senses : 7i)s Kpav"(i]s ifcr1Jov7o they hea1d the noise X. H. 4. 4. 4, iicrOero r 'Y<"fv6p.eva he perceived what was happening X. C. 3. 1. 4. The genitive is Jess common than the accusative when the perception is intellectual: ws ifrrOovro re<x<.\ovrwv when they heard that they were progressing with their fortification T. 5. 82. Cp. 1368. 1368. Some verbs, ordinarily construed with the accusative, take the genitive by the analogy of alcrOavecrOa<, etc.: g'Y""' ll.ro1ra lp.o 1rowvros he kn~w that I was acting absurdly X. C. 7. 2. 18, <i"(voovHs <">)wv o T< "fop.ev each of us rnistakily,g what the other says P. G. 517 c. This construction of verbs of Jcnowing (and showing) occurs in Attic onJy when a participle accompanies the genitive. 1369.

of

The genitive is used with verbs signifying to jill, to be full The thing filled is put in the accusative.

oK p.trf,creTE r1}v OriaTTav rp<f,pwv; will yon not cover the sea with your t?iremes? D. 8. 74, civatri)cra< alnwv to implicate in guilt P. A. 32 c, rpo<j>i)s e1ropv to have plenty of provisions X. Vect. 6. 1, rpt">)p7Js crecra'Y!'-V7J <ivOpd;trwv a tri1eme stowed.with men x. O. 8. 8, vf3pews fJ.E<rTocrOaL to be filled with pride P. L. 713 c. So with trf,Oe<v, trT)poiJv, "fp.e<v, trovrev, ,BptOw' (poet.), {3p6Etv (poet.). a. Here belong also xElp crra(e< Ou7Ji)s 'Apeos his ha nd drips with sac1ijice to Ares S. El. 1423, w1Jvcr0e1s ro vKrapos intoxicatecl with nectar P. S. 203 b, -1} 1r7J'f>i pEi 1f!xpoiJ voaTOS the spring jlows with cold water P. Phae. 230 b. The instrumental dative is sometirnes used.

1370.

The genitive is used with verbs signifying to rule, command,

lead.
0E:ov rb OeX6vrwv lf.pxELv it is divine to l"Ule over willing sub}ects X. O. 21. 12, he wrtH rnaster of the sea I>. Menex. 239e, "Epws rwv Oewv (3acr<eet Love is king o.fthe (!Ods P. R. 19iic, 7J'YETo ri)s l~ilou he led the expedition T, 2. 10, rrrparTJ"{v rwv ~vwv to be yeneral oj the rnercenaries X. A.
ri)s 0aaT77JS f!CparEL

THE GENITIVE

325

2. 6. 28. So with Tupa.vvv be absolute rnast~r of, vatrtrELv be lord of (poet.), i]-y<p.ovdJELV be commander of. This genitive is counecteu with that of 1402.
~371. Severa! verlls of ?'uling take the accusative when they mean to conque?, oveTcome (so Kpa.uv), or when they express the domain over which the rule extends; as TT, v II<J\o7r6vv'1"ov 7r<tpitr8< 11-~ MO"trw i~'1'Ytr8a.t tT1f not to lessen you1 dominion ove?" the Peloponnese T. 1. 71. i]-yi:JOal nvt meaus to be a guide to a.ny one, show any one the way. Cp. 1537.

GENITIVE OF PRICE AND VALUE

The genitive is used with verbs signifying to buy, sell, cost, value, exchange. The priee for which one gives or does anything stands in the genitive.
clp"fuplov 1rpla.ir8a.t l) a7roo6tr8a.t z.,..,.ov to buy or sella horse fo1' rnoney P. R. 333 b, 8<p.LtrToKJ\i Twv JJ.<'YltrTwv owp<wv i]~lwtra.v they deemed Themistocles worthy of the greatest g((ts I. 4. 154, ovK vra.)\1\a.KTov p.o< TT,v q>LJ\oTp.liiv oli<vs Kpoous 1 must not barter my public spirit for any priee D. 19. 223. So with TarrELv mte, p.<tr8ov let, p.ttrOotrOa.t hire, <nar<trOa.t wo1k, and with any verb of doing anything for a wage, as oi Tfjs 1ra.p' i}p.lpiv xap<Tos T p.')'<trTa. Tfjs .,.61\<ws 7row<K6us those

~372.

who have ruined the highest interests of the State to purchase ephemeral popularity D. 8. 70, .,.6trou otoatrK<<; 1rvu p.vwv jo1 hmv much does he teach? for five minae P. A. 20 b, oi Xa.Ma.ot p.ttrOofJ trTpa.uvovra.< the Chaldaeans se1"Ve for pay X. C. 3. 2. 7. a. The instrumental dative is also used. With verbs of exchanging, civrl is usual (1683). ~373. To value highly and lightly is 1repl .,.ol\1\ofJ (7rl\dovos, 7rdtrTou) and 1r<pl 6/..l-yov (lt..iiTTovos, axltrTou) Tp..trOa.t or 7rottr8a.t: T 1r<ltrTOV li~La. 7r<pll/..a.xltrTov 7rO<<Ta<, T. Il </Ja.uMupa. 7r<pl 1r<lovos he makes least account of what is most impo1tant, and sets highe1 what is less estimable P. A. 30 a. The genitive of value, without 7r<pl, is rare : 1rol\/..ofJ 1rowp.a.t aK1JKOva.t K-IjKoa ITpwTa.-ybpou I esteem it greatly to have !ward what 1 did from Protago1as P. Pr. 328 d. a. The genitive of cause is rarely used to express the thing bought or that for which pay is demanded: oMva Tfjs truvoutrlis .nvpwv 1rpiiTuL you charge noody anything fo1 yottr teaching X. M. 1. 6. 11, rpiis p.vq. o,q,pitrKou tlwee minae for a small chariot Ar. Nub. 31. ~374. In legal language Tp..v T<v< Oa.vaTou is to fix the penalty at death (said of the jury, which is not interested in the result), Tp.itrOa.l nv< Oa.vaTou to p1'0pose death as the penalty (said of the accuser, who is interested), and rtp.itrOa.l T<vos to propose a penalty against oneself (said of the accused). Cp. Tp.iiTa.i iJ-OL 0 vT,p Oa.vaTOU the man proposes death as my penalty P. A. 36 b, a aT, </Jv"ffis Tp.-f}trwp.a.<; ftrws -yp /J.v p.o< TOUTou Tp.-f}tra.LT< but shall I propose exile as my penalty? for perhaps y ou (the jury) might fix it at this 37 c. So Oa.vaTov with Kp'tv<<v, o<WK<Lv, 7ra"f<<v. Cp. 1379.
GENITIVE 01!' CRIME AND ACCOUNTABILITY

With verbs of judicial action the genitive denotes the crime, the accusative denotes the person accused.

~375.

326

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SE~TENCE

alrt.ue~, XXo}:>.ou< ro 'Y<'Y<VYJJJivou to acC11se one anothe1 of what had lwppened X. AgE>s. L :)3, twKw fLv KaKrJ'Yopiii<, TV ' aTfi if!n<P<t> q>ovou rpev-yw I bring an accusation fo1' def(J:mation and at the same trial am p1osecut~d fo1 murder L. Il. 12, J-L o MirJTO< ue(Jeliis -ypriif;aTo JJfeletus prosecuted me ,fo1 impiety P. Eu th. 5 c, wpwv lKpl8rJuav they weTe tried for b1'il!ery L. 27. 3. On verbs of accusing and condemning compounded with KaTa, see Ull:l5. 1376. So with fLDveu8at and KoM_\e<v punish, eluri-yew and 7rpouKaeO'IJa< summon into court, alpii:v convict, rJ-Lwpe'riJa< take vengeance on. With riJ-Lwpv avenge and a-yxriv<<v obtain leave to bTing a suit, the person avenged and the person against whom the suit is brought are put in the dative. So with o<Kri!;eu8al rtvl nvo< to go to law with a man about something. 1377. Verbs of judicial action may take a cognate accusative (olKrJv, -ypatjJo}v), on which the genitive of the crime depends : -ypacpY,v f3p<w< Kal lKrJV KaKrJ'Yoplii< cpevl;era< he will be bTought to tTial on an indictment faT outmge and on a civil action (or slandm D. 21. 32. From this adnominal use arose the construction of the geniti ve with this class of verbs. 1378. /luKeu8a< ( .wva<) be convicted, otjJ<O'Kav<<v lose a suit, pev-y<< v be prosecuted are equivalent to passives: iriv n< .:>-0 Ko7rfi< .. KCiv urpaTElii< .,.,. 6tf>!I if any one be condemned for theft ... and if any one be convicted of dese1tion n. 24. 103, ue(Jeliis rpe{J-yovra 7r0 M-,]TOU being t1'ied jm impiety on the indictment of JJfeletus P. A. 35 d. ocp<<YKriv<<v may take lK'f/V as a cognate accus. ( wtfJ'f/KvaL olKrJV to be cast in a suit Ar. A v. 1457) ; the crime or the penalty may stand in the genitive (with or without olKrJv), or in the accusative: o1r6uot Ko1rij< ;) wpwv 6rpotev all who had been convicted of embezzlement OT b1'il!e1y And. 1. 74, cp' DtJ.WV Bava rou olK'f/P ocpwv having inClO'Ted thmugh yot!T ve1'dict the penalty .of death, u1ro rfi< rJOeliis w<f'f/KOT tJ.OX0rJpli.v condemned by the t1uth to sujfeT the penalty of wickedness P. A. 39 b. 1379. With verbs of judicial action the genitive of the penalty may be regarded as a geniti ve of value : Bavarov Kpfvovu< they judge in matteTs of l~(e and death X. C.l. 2. 14. So inra-y<< v nv. Bava Tou to irnpeach a man on a capital chaTge X. H. 2. 3.12; cp, rJ-L.v 8avrirou 1374. a. With many verbs of judicial action 1repl is used.
GENITIVE OF CONNECTION

The geniti ve may express a more or less close connection or relation, where 7rEp[ is sometimes aclded.
1380. With verbs of saying or thinlcing: ri Z.1r1rwv ote<; but what do you think of hnTses? P. H. 459 b. ften in poetry : Ei1r tJ.O< 7raTp6< but tell rne about rn y fathe1' 174, ro Kaut-yvo}rou rl tj>rJ<; what dost thot< say of th y brothe1'? S. El. 317. 1381. The genitive is often used loosely, especially at the beginning of a construction, to state the subject of a remark: t1r1ro< ;}v KaKovp-y?i, rov l7r7ri. KaKi!ioJ-Lev rfi< O 'fvva<KO<, el KaKo?ro<<: KT. if a hm se is vicious, we lay the fattlt to the groom; but as Tegmds a wife, if she condt;cts heTself ill, etc. X. O. 3. 11, wuavTws O Kal rwv liwv T<xvwv and so in the case of the othe~ mts too P. Charm. 165 d, ri rwv 1rowv Ka.wv; what about the rn any beautiful thinys? 1'. J>I1. 78 d.

THE

GE~ITIVE

327

GENITIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS

1382. The genitive depends on the meaning of a compound verb as a whole (1) if the simple verb takes the genitive without a preposition, as inrelwv withdraw, 1rapa"M1v release, 1rapaxwp:v surrende1 (1392), l<jJ:<r8at desi1e (1349); or (2) if the compound bas acquired through the preposition a signification different from that of the simple verb with the preposition : tbus 7ro'"fv6vTes Tijs .EUOepl despairing of freedom L. 2. 46 cannot be expressed by 'Yv6vns 1ro Tijs .evOepliis. But it is often difficult to determine whether the genitive depends on the cornpound verb as a whole or on the preposition contained in it. 1383. A verb compounded with a preposition taking the dative or accusative may take the genitive by analogy of another compound verb whose- preposition requires the genitive: so lJJf3aivflv 5pwv to set foot on the bounda1ies S. O. C. 400 by analogy to 1rt{3alvetv Twv 5pwv P. L. 778 e. 1384. Many verbs compounded with 1r6, 1rp6, inrp, l1rl, and KaTa take the genitive wh en the compound may be resolved into the simple verb and the preposition without change in the sense: Tovs <TVJJ-f"axovr 1rorpbf;awes ri)s 'YVWJJ:qs diss1tading the allies from thei1 purpose And. 3. 21, 7rpoa.7reiJ'T.'YJO'a.v Tijs tro<rniiJ'ews they were despatched b1jo1e the revoit T. 3. 5, 1ro..os 7} '"f.wrTa. 1rporpX" Tijs iltavoliis in many people the tongne outT1ms the thought I. 1. 41, (oi troJ.L<o<) V7repKa07Jvra< 7JJ.Lwv the enemy me stationed above us X. A. 5. 1. 9, Tt;> 1rtf3avn 1rpwr'l' To ulxovs to the jirst one setting foot on the wall T. 4. 116. This use is most frequent when the prepositions are used in their proper signification. Many compounds of vtrp take the accusative. a. This use is especially common with Ka. ra against or at: p.-1} f"OV Ka.n!.,.ys don't speak against me J>. Th. 149 a, Ka.re>feu<Jar6 JJ.OV he spoke falsely against me D. 18. 9, >fevoi) Ka.n'"f.wrn!;t JJ-ov he mouthed lies at me Ar. Ach. 380. The construction in 1384 is post-Homeric. 1385. The verbs of accusing and conclemning (cp. 1375) containing Ka.Ta in composition (Kara'Y<'YVWIJ'KELv decide against, KaTa.hd!;ELv adjudge against, Ka.Ta.>f;'YJ!f>l!;eO'Oat vote ct[!ainst, KaraKpivELv give sentence against) take a genitive of the pe?son, and an accusative of the penalty. Ka.T7J'"fopev accuse, Ka.Ta"'fL"'fVW<JKe<v and Kara>f'YJ!f>l!;eO'Oat take a genitive of the pe1son, an accusative of the crime: Ka.Ta'"fvwva.< owpoooKliiv JJ.o to pronounce me guilty of b1ibery L. 21. 21, rourov iletLiiv Ka.ra.>f'YJif>l\'e<JOa.t to vote him guilty of cowmdice 14. 11, Twv ilta.</Jv'"fbvrwv Oavarov KO.Ta.'"fvbvres having condemned the fugitives to death T. (). 60 ; persan, e~ime, and penalty: 1rowv ol 1/'aTipes JJ.'YJO<<TJJ.o Ova.rav Karyvw!Ta.v our fathms passed sentence of death against many for favourin[J the Pe?sians I. 4. 157. The genitive is rarely used to express the crirne or the penalty: 1rapa.v6J.Lwv auro Ka.T'YJ'Yopev to accuse him. of proposing 1mcunstitutional measures D. 21. 5; cp. vOpw1rwv Kara.>f'YJ</J<<J0vTwv OavaTov men who have been condernned to death P. R. 558 a. 1386. In general, prose, as distinguished from poetry, repeats the preposition contained in the compound; but Ka. Ta is not repeated. 1387. Passive.- Oavaros avTwv KaT<'"fVWIFO'YJ sentence of death was passed on

328

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

them L.13.39 (so KareifrYJ<j>Lcrpivo< 1jv }J.OU 0 OavaTO< X.Ap.27), KaT?)'YOPELTO avro ovx i)K<crra JI.'IJ<crJ1-6< he was especially accused of favouring the Persans T. 1. 95.
FREE USES OF THE GENITIVE

1388. Many verbs ordinarily construed with the accusative are also followed by a genitive of a person, apparently dependent on the verb but in reality governed by an accusative, generally a nenter pronoun or a dependent clause. 'l'hus, ni ' aTO a"faJ1-aL I admire this in him x. Ages. 2. 7' TOTO hraLPW ~A'Y?) cr<Mou I praise this in .Agesilaus 8. 4, avrwv ~v eavJ1-acra I was astonished at one thing in them P. A. 17 a, ,AO?)vaOL cr<j>wv Tara OVK a?rot!l;ovTaL the .Athenians will not be satisfied with them in this T. 7. 48, Il J1-J1-</Jovra< J1-aLcrT~ iJf.Lwv which they most censure in 1tS 1. 84, fi a"facra< ro ?rarpo< ocra ,.t!,.piix< if you admire in my father what he has do ne (the actions of my father) X. C. 3. 1. 15, i'haO<wf.L<Vo< avrwv !CJ'?)v xwpiv gxo<<v contemplating how large a country they possess X. A. 3. 1. 19, OauJ1-a!;w rwv crrpaT'fJ'YWV on ou 'Ir<<pwvTaL iJ11-v K71'opl!;<<v crr?)pcrLOv I wondel' that the generals do not try to supply us with money for p1ovisions 6. 2. 4,
<v<vb?)cr< aTwv Kai <1~< ?r?)pwrwv <iXX'IjXou< he took note also how oth~1 questions X. C. 5. 2. 18. So with 8<wp<v observe, v1rovoEiv of, <vOf.LcrOaL conside1, etc.

they asked each feel suspicious

1389. From such constructions arose the use of the genitive in actual dependence on the verb without an accusative word or clause : a"facraL aro y ou admire him X. M. 2. 6. 33, OauJI.a!:w rwv imfp T'ii< lolii< 156/;7)< &,.oOvricrK<<v O<bvrwv

I wondet at those who aJ'e willing to die in de.fence of their pe1sonal optmons The use in 1889 recalls that with alcr8av<cr8aL (1367). On a"facrOa<, OauJI.a!:<<v with the genitive of cause, see 1405. 1390. A form of the genitive of possession appears in poetry with verbal adjectives and passive participles to denote the persona! origin of an action (cp. 1298): Kfiv?)< o<oaKra taught of herS. El. 344, h15tl5axO<i< rwv Kar' oKov informed by those in 'the house S. Tr. 934, 11''IJ'Y<l< Ou"faTpb< struck by a daughter E. Or. 497. Cp. 15<6croTo< given of CJod; and "beloved of the Lord."
I. 6. 93.

On the genitive absolute, see 2070.

THE ABLATIVAL GENITIVE WITH VERBS

1391. The same verb may govern both a true genitive and an ablatival genitive. So fJ.px<cr0aL to begin (1348 a) and to stmt fTom, gx<cr8a< to hold to (1345) and to keep oneself fJom. In many cases it is difficult to decide whether the genitive in question was originally the trne genitive or the ablatival genitive, or wh ether the two have been combined ; e.g. in Kvv?) pivo ?rOL'IJT'Ij a cap made of hide K 262, K!J?r<ov il5~aro -17< Mxow he received a goblet .fJorn his wife 305. So with verbs to hear from, know of (13G4, 1411), and verbs of emotion (1405), the partitive idea, cause, and source are hard to distinguish. Other cases open to doubt are verbs of missing (1352), being deceived (1392), and the exclamatory genitive (1407).
GENITIVE OP SEPAHATION

1392. \Vith verbs signifying to cease, Telease, Temove, restrain, give ttp,jail, be d;tant jl'om, etc., the genitive denotes separation.

1399]

THE GENITIVE

329

"X-fryetv rwv 1rov'wv to cease j1orn toil L 1. 14, 7rta-T'f]p,7J xwptjop,ev7J otKatoo-vv7JS knowledge diVOTced from justice r. ~1enex. 246 e, P,ET<tO'TOS Tf)s 'A07]valwv ~vp, p,axliis withdmwing /Torn the alliance with the Athenians T. 2. 67, 1rctva-av1'Es a&rv rijs o-rpar7J"fliis removing hirn jTorn his office of genmal X. H. 6. 2. 13, dp"feo-Oat rijs "topiis to be excluded ftorn thejoTum L. 6. 24, o-wrrat KctKo to save from evil S. Ph. 919, iKwMiov rijs '11'opeliis arbv they p1evented him j1om passing X. Ages. 2. 2, 1rs rrKs ovo livopas ~~., ro p,7} KctTaovat each skin willlceep two men j1om sinking X. A. 3. 5. 11, 6"fOV u'Aevriiv to end a speech T. 3. 59, rijs l'AwOeplO.s 1rapaxwpijrrat <Pt'Al'11''11'4J to sur1ender their free<lom to Philip D. 18. 68, o 1r6vwv q,tero, o Ktvovwv ciq,trrraro, o XP7JP,rirwv l<t>eloero he di<l not 1'elax his toil, stand aloof from dange1's, or S'jJaTe his mo ney X. Ages. 7. 1, >fevrrOvres rwv l'A'1l'lowv disappointed of theiT expectations I. 4. 58 (but cp. 1352), 7J vijrros o 1ro'A otxovrra rijs 1}1relpov the island being not far distant ftom the mainland T. 3. 51.

1393. Severa! verbs of separation, such as l'AevOepov ( especial!y with a personal subject), may take ri1r6 or ~ when the local idea is prominent. Many take also the accusative. 1394. The genitive, instead of the accusative (1628), may be used with verbs of depriving: ri'1l'orrrepe p,e rwv XP'f/P,cirwv he dep1ives me of my JJ1'0peTty L 17. 35,rwv li'A'Awv ci</>atpovp,evot xp-fJp,ara talcing away pTope1ty jTO?n otheTs X. M. 1. 5. 3. 1395. The genitive of the place whence is employed in poetry where a compound verb would be used in prose: f3a0pwv trrrarrOe rise from the steps S. O. T. 142 (cp. v'1l'avlrrravrat OKwv they rise from their seats X. S. 4. 31), xOovs cielpiis raising from the ground S. Ant. 417. 1396. The genitive with verbs signifying to want, lack, empty, etc. may be classed with the genitive of separation.
r wv '1l'LT7JO<lwv oK 7rop-fJo-op.ev we shall not want provisions X. A. 2. 2. 11, l'1l'alvov oli'1l'OT< o-1ravljeu you ne1:e1' laek praise X. Hi. 1. 14, civopwv rti.voe '11'6tv KEvwrrat to empty this city of its men A. Su pp. 660. So with l'A'Al'1l'etv and o-rprrOat lack, p7Jp,ov deliver from.

1397. Mw I lack (the personal construction) usually takes the genitive uf quautity: 7ro'Xo "/ Mw nothing of the S01't P. Phae. 228 a, p,Kpo gOfOV lv x<prrl rwv 7r'Airwv dvat they 'Were neaTl?J at close quarters with the hoplites X. H. 4. 6.11, rorrovrov Mw !7J'Aov I am so jar from admi1ing D. 8. 70 ( also rorroiirov iilw ). 1398. oop,at I want, 1equest may take the genitive, or the accusative (regularly of neuter pronouns and adjectives), of the thing wanted; and the genitive of the person: lpwTWP,fVOS liTov iiOLTO, 'AG'KWV, ~</>7], OLG'X'Alwv oei}o-op,aL being aslced what he needed, he sa id ' I shall have need of two thousand slcins' X. A. 3. 5. 9, roro p,wv /Uop,at I aslc this of you P. A. 17 c. The genitive of the thing and of the person is unnsual : o6p,<vot Kvpov li'A'Aos li'A'f/s 1rpti.~ews petitioning Cyrus about different matters X. C. 8. 3. 19. 1399. oe (impersonal) is frequently used with genitives of quantity: 1fO'A'Ao oe oiffws ~X<Lv jar front that being the case P. A. 35 d, oil 1ro'A'Ao o D. 8. 42 (only in D.) and ollo' o'Ai"fov oe no, jar from it D. 19. 184. oev may be omitted (but not with 7l'o'A'Ao), leaving o'Al"(ov and p,Kpo in the sense of al most, all but:

~30 ol"fOV

SYNTAX OF TIIE SDll'LE SENTENCE

[r400

'1!"aPT<~ almost all P. R. 552 d, o)..l"fOU ELOV r7)v 'lrOLV they all but took the city T. 8. 35. On ov used absolutely, see 2012 d; on o.!wv with numerals, 350 c. 1400. o p.ol nvo~ means I have need of something. In place of the dative (1467) an accusative of the person is rarely allowed in poetry on the anal ogy of o with the infinitive (1985) : ou -;r6vov 'lroo p. o I have need of no great toil E. Hipp. 23 (often in E.). The thing needed is rarely put in the accusative: .rn Mot r{> xopp if the chorus need anything Ant. 6. 12 (here sorne regard ri as nominative). Cp. 1562.

GENITIVE OF DISTINCTION AND OF COMPA1USON

l.401.
lipxwv

The geniti ve is used with verbs of dijfering.

a"fall~

ovol:v otatppEL

'lrarp~

a"fallo a good ruler di.ffe1s in no respect

from a goocl father X. C. 8. 1. 1.

1402. With verbs signifying to surpa~s, be i1~{e1ior to, the genitive denotes that with which anything is compared.
rip.a~ rourwv 'lrEoveKr<TE you had the advantage ove1 them in honours X. A. 3. 1. 37, -IJnwPTo ro oaro~ they we1e oveTpowmecl by the water x; H. 5. 2. 5, - ur<pEv rwv ~nwv to be too late fm ope1ations D. 4. 38, iJp.wv t<PIIhr<~ in.ferim to us x. A. 7. 7. 31. So with 7rpeufle6ELV hold the jirst place, apLUTEUELV be bebt (poet.), p.ELoullat full sho1't of, p.ewveKriiv be worse off, arroullaL be at a disadvantage. PLKullal nvos is chiefly poetic. iJnulla< often takes {;.,.6. Akin to this geuitive is that with verbs of ruling (1370), which are often derived from a substantive signifying 1'Uler. 1403. Many verbs compounded with 7rp6, ,.,pl, {;.,.p denoting snperiority take th genitive, which may depend on the preposition (1384) : ra x" .,.,p,qivou a!lro you exclled him in speed X. C. 3. 1. 19, "fPWWO 7rpoxELv rwv vaPTlwv to excel the enemy in spi1it T. 2. 62, ros iJ,roLs avrwv 7reptppop.a we surpass tl~f-m in our in.fantTy 1. 81. So with .,.,p,va,, 7repX"" 7rpoT!J-v, 7rpoKpivnv, and .,.poatpulla< p1e,feT, 7rpoeurndvat be at the head of certainly take the genitive by reason of the preposition. 7repflaELv aud 7repflalvELv suTpass take the accusative. 1404. 'The object compared may be expressed by 7rp6, avrl with the genitive, or by 7rapa, 7rp6s with the accusative. See under Prepositions. That in which one thing is superior or inferior to another usually stands in the dative (1513, 1515).

GENITIVE OF CAUSE

1405. With verbs of emotion the genitive denotes the cause. Snch verbs are to wonder at, admire, envy, pmise, blame. lwte, pity, grieve for, be angry at, talee vengeance on, and the like.
fllaup.aua rT,s rbp.TJs rwv E"fonwv I wonclered at the hmclihood of the speaker:; L. 12. 41, rorov d"faullds ri]s 7rpq.6TTJTos admiTing him for his mildness X. C. 2. 3. 21, I"'w "' To vo, ri]s o oetlas rnu-yw I env y thee fo1' th y prudence, I ha te thee for-thy cowaTdice S. El. 1027, ul; n&oa<p.ovtua ro rpb.,.ov I thought y ou happy

THE GE:\ITIVE

331

because of your disposition P. Cr. 43 b, o-v-yxalpw rwv '<'WYff-'vwv 1 .ha re the .ioy at what kas happened D. 15. l!i, vxftJflat rwv olKfiwv &.,.,..ovf-'lvwv to pu.t up with the neglect of my houschold ajfai?s P. A. 31 b, rv ~lvov olKawv alvrat 7rpoO,.,.liis it is ?'ight to pmise the stmnge?for his zeal E. I.A. 1371, oi!1ror' vop! rii-o K7JpKwwirwv f-'J-''{1'[1 neve?' wilt thou blame me for rny tidings A. Sept. 651, ro 11'ti0ou t(,Krp<v aiov he pitied him fot his rnise1y X. C. 5. 4. 32, oi'/ fiK xa<11'w ppv arwv no1 is it 1easonable to gtieve about thern T. 2. 62, ovKh< wv oliro< K,.rovrnv op-yl!;f<JO, )..)..' wv aro! af-'f3&.vr xap<v fO'Tf you are no longe?' ang1y at theil thefts, but you ate gTateful for what you get youJ'selves L. 27. 11, T!lwp1wMOa, aros rfis ...<OO'<W> to lake ?'evenge on them fot theil' attack X. A. 7.4. 23. Here belongs, by analogy, O'v-y-y<-yvwO'Kf<v avros XP7J rfjs bnO,.,.ta, it is necessaTy to foTgive them foT their desiTe P. Eu. 306 c (usually O'V''<"(vWO'Kf<v r7}v lnO;J.!ii.v nvl or rfi 7r<8lf-'[. nv6> ). a. The genitive of cause is partly a true genitive, part) y ablat.ival. 1406. With the above verbs the person stands in the accusative or dative. Some of these ver'bs take the dative or{,.[ and the dative (e.g. )..-yv, O'rbf<v, 11.x8<0'8a<, <j>Oov<v) to express the cause of the emotion. See the Lexicon. 1407. The genitive of cause is used in exclamations and is often preceded by an interjection : p< ro vopos alas fm the man! X. C. 3. l. 39, rfis -rvx7Js rny illluck! 2. 2. 8. In tragedy, the genitive of a pronoun or adjective after otf-'0< or tiJJ-'0< refers to the second or third person. For the first person the nominative is used ( ot,.,.o< nia<va ah me, miserable! S. Ant. 564). 1408. Allied to the genitive of cause is the genitive of purpose in ro with the infinitive (esp. with ,.,.7}, 2032 e), and in expressions where l!v<Ka is usually employed, as i} 7r.O'' 1r&r7J O'Vv<O'KW<i0'8'Yf ro ,.,pl if>wds oMpou the wlwle fraud was cont1'ived fol' the puTpose of ntining the Phocians D. 19. 76. 1409. Closely connected with the genitive of cause is the genitive with verbs of disputing: o (3aO'ti: .vn7rowu,.,.e0a rfjs .pxfis we have no rlisJnite with the king abmtt his ernpire X. A. 2. 1. 2.'3, 1}p.</J<0'(31}r7JO'<v 'Epex8< Ti}> 7ro<w< !te disp1tted the possession of the city with Etechtheus I. 12. Hl8, Jp' ow ,.,.7] iJ!lv lvavnwO'<Ta< -rfir 1!'a-yw-yfjs; well then he will not oppose us about the rmnoval (of the army), will he ? X. A. 7. 6. 5. .vn7ro<f0'0a< claim may follow 1849 ( -r~s 1ro<ws .vre7rowvro they laid claim to the city T. 4. 122). V erbs of disputing are sornetimes referred to 1343 or 1340.
GENITIVE OF SOURCE

1410. The genitive may denote the source. ... lOwv'IJ</JvO'O'<To ovo> wine was I!Toacherl f1'011l the caslcs '{; 305, !iii.pfiov Kal ITapvu4nos -yl-yvovra< 1ra~s vo of Dmius and Parysat"is a1e born two sons X. A. 1. 1. 1, Tara ol O'ov Tvx6vre> obtaining this of you 6. 6. 32, ,.,.a.e. f-'OV Kal Taoe leaTn this also fTorn rne X. C. 1. 6. 44. 1411. With verbs of /waring frorn and the like the genitive is probably ablatival rather than partitive (13()4): t,.,.oD .KoV0'0'0< 1r.O'av T'i]v .i}OHa.vfrorn me you shall heaT the whole tTuth P. A. 17 b, rorwv 11'Uv0&.vop.a.< OT< oK 11.(3aT6v lO'n T 5pos llearn f?orn these men th at t/1 e monntain is not irnpassable X. A. 4. 6. 17, To<ar&.

332

SYNTAX OF THE Sll\IPLE SENTENCE

rou 7rapovros lfKXuor' wch a tale llu-m<l from smne one who was present S. El. 424, fl!Uvat <TOU XPrlfW J deshe to know of thee s. m. 68. a. Usually (except with 1rvv8<ive<r8at) we have 7rap<i (7r6 rarely), ~~ or 7rp6s (in poetry and Hdt.) with verbs of hewing from. b. The genitive with ivat in 1f'aTps ' dp,' -yal!oo I am of a goodfathm .P 109, rowrwv JJ.v <TTE 1rpo-y6vwv of sueh ance~to?'S we ~~ou X. A. :3. 2. 1:1 is often re-

gardee! as a genitive of source, but is probably possessive.

GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

The genitive is used with many adjectives corresponding in derivation or meauing to verbs taking the genitive.
1412. 1413. The adjective often borrows the construction with the genitive from that of the corresponcling verb; but wb en the verb takes another case ( especially the accusative), or when there is no verb corresponding to the adjective, the adjective may go vern the genitive to express possession, connection more or Jess close, or 'by anal ogy. Many of the geniti ves in question may be classee! as objective as weil as partitive or ablatival. Rigid distinction between the undennentioned classes must not be insistell on. 1414. Possession and Belonging (1297).- lfpws Kotvs 1rvrwv v8pw7rwv love cmnmon to all men P. S. 205 a (cp. Kotvwvv 1343), iEpos ToO aTo IJ<oiJ sacre to the sarne gad P. Pb. 85 b, o! Klv!Jvvot Twv <j><<TTTJK6rwv twt the dangers belong to thf commande?'s D. 2. 28. So with olKos and l1f'<xwpws peculiar to. Kotv6s (usually), oiK<Os inclined to, app1opriate to, and t!Jws also takethe dative (14D!l). 1415. Sharing (1:34:3).- <ro</Jliis }J.hoxos partalcing in wisdorn P. L. 689 cl, i<TOjJ.Otpot 7rVTWV having an equal Slza1'8 in eVe?ything X. C. 2. 1. :31, v{JpWS fi}J.Otpos hving no part in wantonness P. S. 181 c. So fiK'I..7Jpos without lot in, JJ.roxos not sharing in. 1416. Touching, Desiring, Attaining, Tasting (1:345, 1350, 1355). - fiif;au<rros hxovs not tou ching a spear S. 0: T. DG9, xpLS wv 7rpbl!vp.ot -ye-yevf,wlia g?atitude for the abjects of our zeal T. 3. 67, 7rati!Eis hrf,{Jo?..ot having attained to (possessed of) rultu1e P. L. 724 b, l?..w8Epis fi-yEu<rros not tasting freedom P. R. 57G a. So ov<r<pws passionately desirous of. 1417. Connection.- KoXoulia dXXf,Xwv dependent on one another X. O. 11. 12, r rorwv deX</Jri what is akin to this X. Hi. 1. 22, Twv 7rpoEtp1JJJ.vwv 7r6p,evat 7roi5Ei~m expositions ag1eeing with what had 1Jreceded P. R. 504 b, <f>ry-yos v1rvov toxov light succeeding sleep S. Ph. 867. Ail these adjectives take also the dative; as does <TU'Y'YVf,s akin, whichhas become a substantive. 1418. Capacity and Fitness.- Adjectives in -tK6s from active verbs, and sorne others: 7rapa<rKEVa<TnKv Twv Els rv 1roEp.ov Tv <rrpaT1J'YOP <va< xp'i} Kal 7ropt<TT<Kov rwv 1f'iT1J<lwv Tos <rTpanwTats the general must be able to provide v;hat is needed in wm and to supply p1ovisions for his men X. M. :3. 1. 6. So ti5a<rKatK6s able to instruct, 7rpKTLKos able to effect. Here may belong -y}J.Ov wpal ripe for marriage X. C. 4. 6. 9. 1419. Experience (1:345).- wv lfJJ.7rEtpos acqtwintal with the roads X. C. 5. 3. 35, rijs l!a<T<T7JS 7rt<TTf,p.wv acqnainted with the se a 'l'. 1. 142, li5tWT1JS roTov

THE GENITIVE

333

roi! ~p-you ?lnslcilled in this business X. O. 3. 9. So with rpl{Jwv slcilled in, ruqil\6f blind, li1r<<pos ?macquainted,. -yup,vcurros unpra<;tised, 1rai<vros uneducated, d:l)07Js unaccustomed, olf;tp,aOf}s .zate in lew:ning, </Jt.op,aOf}s fond of lemning. 1420. Remembering, Caring For (1356).- KaKwv p,vf}p,ov<s rnindful of C1'ime A. Eum, 382, 1r<P,<T,s rwv <jJl"l\wv attentive to friends X. M. 2. 6, 35, p,vf}p,wv rwv t<tvVvwv unrnindful of dangers Ant. 2. a. 7 ; and, by analogy, (fu-y-yvwp,wv rwv vOpw1rlvwv .p,apr7Jt.airwv foryiving of hunwn crro1'S X. C. 6. 1. 37. So p,<.f}s cmeless, of, &t"l\fwp,wv foJgetful of 1421. Perception (13Gl).- Compounds in -f}Koos from Kouw: M-ywv Ka.wv 1rf}t<oot heare1s of noble wo?'ds 1'. R 499 a, v1rf}Koot 8<(f(fa.wv subjects of the Thessalians T. 4. 78, v1rf}Koos rwv -yovwv obedient to parents P. R. 463 d, v1}Koo< 1rat<liis ignorant of culture Aes. 1. 141. So (fuvf}Koos hea?'ing together, Kar1}Koos obeying. 1r1}Koos, Karf}Koos, and V1rf}Koos also take the dative. 1422. Fulness (1369). - xaps iJ 1r6.LS 'fjv p,<(frf} the city was full of J'e_ioicing D. 18.217, 7rapo<<(fos -yplwv 07Jplwv 1r.f}p7Js a pwk full ofwild bcasts X. A. 1. 2. 7, 1r.ou(fLWT<pos </>pov1}(f<ws riclwr in good sense P. Pol. 261 e, <jJtMwpos <p,<v<liis generous of good-will P. S. 197 d, li1r.7J(fros XP7Jp,rwv g?'eedy of rnoney X. C. 8. 2. 20. So with ~p,7r<ws, {ffJ.1r<ws. 1r.f}p7J< may take the dative.

1423. Ruling (1370). - raurrJs KDpws Tijs xwpiis rnastm of this count1y D. 3. 16, Kpar>t,s op-yi}s 1m1'estrained in prtssion T. 3. 84. So with -yKparf}s 11WSter of, 'a.roKprwp complete maste1' of, KpriTwp intemperate in. 1424. Value (lg72). -r1r" ~lii ha p,vwv a 1ug wo1th ten minae X. A. 7. 3. 27, b~a XP7Jf1.rwv oK wvrJr1} 1eputation is not to l>e l>ought for mo ney I. 2. 32. So with vr~ws wo1th, l(fbppo1ros in equal J>ois<~with (T. 2. 42), ~t6xp<ws sufficient, v~<os U1WJ01'thy. a~<6v rtvL with the infinitive denotes it is meet for a pe1'son to do sornething or the like. 1425. Accountability (1376).-atnos rourwv accountable jo1 this P. G. 447 a, liable to a charge of desertion L. 14. 5, a(f<fJEliis v1rbotKos subject to a t1ial for impiety l'. L. 907 e, v7ror<T,s q,bpov S!tb.iect to tribute T. 1. Hl, rourwv V1r<v0vos ~p,v Tesponsible tu y mt foT this D. 8. ll9, &.Or)io< rwv datK7JfJ.rwv unpunished fo?' offences Lye. 79. ~ ''oxos usually tal~ the dative, and so v1r<0vos meaning dependent on or exposed to. 'l'he above compounds of i11rb take the genitive by virtue of the substantive contained in them. 1426. Place. -lvavrlos opposite and a few other adjectives denoting nearness or approach (1363) may take the genitive, chiefly in poetry: lva.vrlot ~(frav 'Axa<wv they stood opposite the Achaeans P 343. Cp. roii IIbvrov l7rtKap(ftat at an angle with the Pontus Hdt. 7. 36. lvavrios usually takes the dative. 1427. Separation (1392).- <jJi"ilwv -yaOwv ~p7Jp,ot dr.prived rif good f1iends X. M. 4. 4. 24, lflxT, lfl"IIT, (fWp,aros the soul separated fTom the body l'. L. 800 a, </><<w.oi XP7Jp,rwv spaTing of money P. R. 548 b (or perhaps uner 1356), fJ"I\rJs Ka0ap6v clear of undergrowth X. O. 16. 13, li.1rav<Jros -ybwv never ceasing lamentations E. Supp. 82. So with l"il<vB<pos fJee f?'om, .-yv6s J.nwe from, innocent of, op<jJav6s bereft of, -yup,v6s stripped of, p.bvos alone. 1428. Compounds of alpha privative.- In addition to the a,djectives with alpha privative which take the gronitive by reason of the notion expressed in the
~voxos .t1rora~iou

33-!

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SE~TE~CE

verb, or by analogy, there are many otl1ers, some of which take the genitive because of tlle idea of separation, especially when the geniti ve is of }>indred meaniug and an attributive adjective is added for the pmpose of more exact definition. 'rhus, arf.J.o< deprived of, :rra.IJf}s not su.tfring, r.'i)s fJee from (1:)92): as TL}J.i)S aT}J.O< deprived of honour P. L. 774 b, a7ra .ppvwv 7ralowv without male children I. 12. 126, ro Tjoitirou IJ<ii}J.aro< .Oiiro< not seeing the most pleasant sight M. 2. 1. 31, a</Jwvo< Ti)iJO ri)< .p< 'Without uttering this CUJ'Se S. . C. 865. This is more frequent in poetry thau prose. a. So when the adjectives are passive: </Jlwv aKavro< unwept by friends S. A nt. 847, cp. KaKwv i5vtid.wro< oi5El< no one is hard jo1 evil fortune to captme S. O. C. 1722. The genitive with adjectives in alpha privative is sometimes called the geniLive of J'elation.

x.

1429. Want (1396).- iip}J.ara KEv 7]v<6xwv chariots deprived of their d1ivers X. A. 1. 8. 20, lvliEv< .pEri)< lacking virtue P. R. 381 c. So with 1rP1J< poor, i<7r'i)< and 7r<OE'lj< lacking. 1430. Distinction (1401).- i5td.</Jopo< TWV awv d(tferent from the rest P. Par. 160 d, I!TEpov ro Tji5 ro -yaOo pleasme is di.ff1ent from what is good P. G. 500 d, aa rwv o<Kalwv at variance with jutice X. M. 4. 4. 25 (lio< is almost a comparative). So with oO< and .rpw< alien fJom (also with dat. unfavoumble to, disinclined to). o<</Jopo< with dative means at variance with. 1431. Comparison (1403). -Adjectives of the comparative degree or implying comparison take the genit.ive. The genitive denotes the standard or point of departure from which the comparison is made, and often expresses a condensed comparison when actions are compared. Thus, ijrrwv }J.a.8v< rro</Jo, oao_< .vopElov an ignorant man is injerior to a wise man, a coward to a brave man P. Phae. 2:39 a, Kprr6v tiTL b'You ro Kci.o< ri)< -yvvatK6< the be auty of the woman is too great for desc1iption X. M. 3. 11. 1, 'E1r1/a~a 1rporpii K6pov 1rvTE Tj}J.pa cl.<fJiK<ro E11yaxa arrived five days befoJe Cynts X. A. 1. 2. 25, KraoEEtirpiiv rvv oo~av ri)< f7rloo< 11a(3v the 1'eputatio.n he acqui1ed fell shoJt of his expectation I. 2. 7. So with oelTEpo<, utirEpao<, 7rEp<rro<. Comparatives with 1!, 1069. 1432. So with multiplicatives in -7ro< and -7rd.tito<: 0<7r<fti<a 1rowKEv wv ~a{3Ev it 1eturned double what it received X. C. 8. :3. 38. So with 7rootir6<. 1433. The genitive with the comparative often takes the place of 1f with another construction: iJ<wTEpov EIJTL l-'V -yw< tiWf.J.aro< ( = 1} l" V-y tiWf.J.aTL) l" V -y<E 'fxfl tiuvo<KEv it is more wretchcd to dwell with a diseased soul than a diseased body P. G. 479 b, .,. ElofTt vaUtJt rwv AO.,valwv ( = 1) oi Ae.,vaot) 1rapi)rrav they came with m01e ships than the Athenians T. 8. 52. 1434. The superlative with the genitive is both partitive and ablatival; the latter, when a thing is compared with many thillgs taken singly. Thus, qo<fJwraro< v8pw1rwv P. A. 22 c means wisest arnong men (part.) and wiser than any other single man. The partitive idea is the stronger. The comparative. and the superlative idea are both expressed in .vvp l7rLE<KV< viv 1rotiii< oftiE< p~tira rwv liwv ct 1ea~onable man will bea1 the loss of a son more easily than othe1 men (and most easily of all men) P. H. 603 e, tirpaTElii 1-'''YIIT'f/ rwv 1rpo ari)< an expedition greater than any preceding it T. 1. 10, rwv awv vtiraro< the last anwng nations D. !), 72. _ Cp. jj.bvo< rwv awv alone of all D. 21. 223.

1439]

'THE GENJTIVE

335

1435. Cause (1405). -eoalfJ-wv ro rpo1rov happy because of his disposition P. Ph. 58 e, oe[)\aws rijs IJVfJ-</>Dp.s wretched because of th y lot s. o. '1'.1347' (3ci.J\avoL IJavfJ-cl.o-taL ro f1-E'Y0ovs dates wonderful for their size X. A. 2. 3. 15, 1replq,o(3os ro Kara</JpoVYJIJijva< fewful of becmning an abject of contempt P. Phae. 239 b. So with rcl.l\ii.s and rfJfJ-wv wretched. 1436. Free Use.-a. Compound adjectives formed of a preposition and substantive may take a genitive dependent on the substantive: o-K7Jvijs 1l"avos under the shelter of the tent S. Aj. 796 ( = 1l"o a)\i/) . Frequent in poetry. b. Sorne adjectives are freely used with the genitive in poetry, as 'Y&.fJ-oL Ilcl.pt oos MIJptoL </Jl"l\wv the mwriage of Paris bringing ruin on his friends A. Ag. 1156. This is rare in prose: ro 1rp l7rl~eovpov 1fvxovs fire that protects against cold X. M. 4. 3. 7, KaKop'YoS fJ-v rwv /i)\7\wv, avro of KaKovp'Ybrepos doing evil to the others but more to himself 1. 5. 3, rijs 'El\Moos J\trfjpws the curse and destroyer of Greece A es. 3. 157. These adjectives are practically equivalent to substantives. Cp. amans patriae.
GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS

1437. The genitive is used with adverbs derived from adjectives which take the genitive, and with adverbs akin to verbs followed by the genitive.
r rourov ~ijs what cornes after this P. R. 300 a (1345), lpwnKws gxovo-t ro Kepoalvetv they are in love with gain X. O. 12. 15 (cp. 1349), do AvKElov straight fur the Lyceum P. Lys. 203 b (cp. f!Jo-e vebs he made straight for the ship 0 693 ; 1353), lvavrlov a1rcl.vrwv in the presence of all 'l'. O. 25, 1r7Jo-lov 87Jf3wv near Thebes D. 9. 27, NElJ\ov 7ras near the Nile A. Supp. 308 (1353), "fovwv fJ-<o-npov i!xm be too neglectful of one' s pwents P. L. 932 a (1356), lK 1rcl.vrwv rwv lfl-1relpws aro .lxbvrwv of all th ose acqnai1.te with him X. A. 2. 6. 1, fJ-'YJOEvos 1relpws lixv to be inexpe1ienced in nothing I. 1. 52 (1345), ~lws vops 'Yalio in a manner worth y of a good man P. A. 32 e, 1rp<1rovrws rwv 1rpii~cl.vrw>' in a manner appropriate to the doers P. Menex. 230 c (1:12), ota.</Jepbvrws rwv /i)\7\wv v0pW7rWV above the J'est of men X. Hi. 7. 4 ( 1401), "TrOV7Jplii ll.rrov IJavcl.rov 01: 'wickeclness fiies fast er th an fate' P. A. 39 a (1402), 7reviJtKws gxovo-a ro oq,o nwmning for lw brother

x. c. 5. 2. 7 (1405).

1438. An adverb with lixe<v or taKeo-lia< is often used as a periphrasis for an adjective with evat or for a verb. 1439. The genitive is used with many adverbs (a) of place, (b) of ti me, ( c) of quantity.

a. lP-f3aJ\ev 1rov rijs lKElvwv xwpiis to maTee an attack at sorne point of their countTy X. C. 6. 1. 42, alo-IJbfJ-evos ali -fi v KIJ.Ko peneiving what a plight he was in D. 23. 156, ol7rpo7\fJJ\vl! o-eJ\'YEliis to what a pitch of wanton anogance he kas come 4. 9, lvralla rijs 1roreliis at that point of the administ1ation 18. 62, dol vat 81rov 'Yiis lo-nv to lcnow .wheTe in the 'UJ01'ld he is l'. R. 403 e, 1r6pp"' ifo'IJ ro (3lov, IJav<irov of l'Y'YV' already far advanced in life, near eath P. A. 38 c, l1rl rcl.oe l>aO"fjtoos on this side of Phaselis 1. 7. 80, 1rpos ,Bopiiv ro 'i:,KIJp.(3pov north of Mt. Scombrus T. 2. 96, tiJ\'i>.ot liJ\7\u rijs 7rOews sorne in one part, others in another

336

SY~TAX

uF THE SL\lPLE

SEN'l1~NCE

pmt of the city 2. 4, 1ravr<Kp ri)s 'ATTLicijs opposite Attica D. 8. 36. So with ivr6s inside, et<rw within, KaripwiJcv on both sles, D7r<<TIJev behind, 1rpb<TIJcv before. b. 7rrJPlK' i<Trv /J.pa rijs i)pipiis; at what lime ofday? Ar. Av. 1498, rijs i}p,piis IJ>fl late in the day X. H. 2. 1. 23. c. rwv ro<orwv i.orJv enough of such matteTs P. Charm.l53 d, rorwv J.\<s enough of this X. C. 8. 7. 25.
1440. Most of the geniLives in 1439 are partitive. Sorne of the adverbs falling under 1437 take also the dative (li'YX' f'f's, 7r.rJ<Tiov in the poets, ~ijs,
if>c~ijs).

1441. The geuitive is used with adverbs of manner, especially with the intransitive l!xw, ijKw (Hdt. ). The genitive usually has no article: ws raxous gKacrros eix as .fast as each could (with what measure of speed he had) X. H. 4 .. 5. 15, ws 1roowv exov as fast as rny legs could carry me Hdt. 6. 116, l!xovres c if>pevwv being in their 1ight minrls E. Hipp. 462, ev <Twp,aros ~;e<v ta be in good bodily condition P. R. 404 d (cp. 407 c, ros f'te<vws l!xovras r <Twp,ara those who are sound in body: with the article, 1121), XPrJ!karwv ev i]Kovrcs well a.t!' Hdt. 5. 62, ro 1ro.p,ou Ka\ws ooK<< i) 1r6ts KaiJi<Tra<TIJa< . . . rijs re 1r 8pr/.KrJS 1rap6oou XPrJ<Tlp,ws ~;e<v they tho1tght that the city was well situated for the war and would prove useful fa1' the manh along Thl'ace T. :~. H2. 1442. This use is probably derived from that with adverbs of place: th us 1rws l!xm Oh~rJs; in wh at state of mind me you ? l'. R. 456 d is due to the analogy of 1ro o6~rJs; (cp. o1ro< 'Y>W!L'IJ' S. El. 022). 1443~ The genitive is used with many adverbs denoting separation. Thus, e<Tra< i) >fvx'IJ xwps ro <T<hp,aros the soul will exist tvithout the body P. Ph. ()6 e, tx"- ro Dp,erpou 7r.i}(}ous sepamte jium yom force X. C. 6. 1. 8, trpo<Tw rwv 7rrJf'WV faT from the sounes X. A. :3. 2. 22, p,1roowv 'Jjo 1ro..wv Kal )'a!Jwv if<T<T(} you will pTevent one annt1wr fmm enjoying many blessings X. C. 8. 5. 24, f.a!Jp~ rwv <Trpar<wrwv without the knowledJe of the soldiers X. A. 1. 3. 8. So with l!~w outside, Kr6s 1pithout, outside, rrp.v across, Kpu<j>a unbeknown to.
GENlTIVE OF TIME AND PLACE

Time.- The genitive denotes the ti me within which, or at a certain point of which, au action takes plaee. As contrasted with the accusative of time (1582), the,geuitive denotes a portion of time. Renee the genitive of time is partitive. Cp. rov JLv X(tJLwa ifa o 8(6s, rov 3 Bpw> XP"~/aKovTaL r<() -8an during the (entire) winter the gad rw:ns, but in (a part of) sumrna they need the water Hdt. 3. 117.
1444.
'l]p,lpiis by day, vuKrbs at or by night, p,WrJJ.<f3pli.s at midrlay, ci.rJS in the a.fte1'1won, <T7rpiis in the evening, IJpous in swnmer, x<<p,wvos in winter, 'ljpos in sp1ing, 1rwpiis in autumn, ro ooro in the future. The addition of article or attributive usually defines the time more exactly. Thns, ovKov i) p,v IJpous >fvxe<v7}v i!xew, i)o o/3 X<<p,wvos f..wv'l)v; is it not pleasant ta have (a house) cool in summer, and wmm in wintm? X. M. 3. 8. , ci>xcro riis vvKT6s he departed during the niuht X. A. 7. 2. 17, Ka! TJ!J.piis Ka! vuKTs IL)'wv hl ros 1ro.ep,ious both by day and by night leading against the enemy 2. O. 7, I!e)'ov ro .0<1ro J.<rJKT<

THE GENITIVE

337

;~.zvat vo;.Ll.s lLp~a, they said that for the futui'C ([tt any time in the future) it shuuld nu longer !Je pennitle<l to set an exmple of lawlestmess 5. 7. 34. (Distingui~h ro "hot1r6v j(n' the (en tire) juttt1e 3. 2. 8.) lv-r6s within is sometimes added to the genitive.

1445. The addition of the article may have a distributive sense: Tipax.p.nv
lMp.f3av< rfjs fJp.p.s he 1eceived a drachm a day 'l'. 3. 17.

1446. The genitive may denote the ti me si nee an action has happened or the time until an action will happen: oo<Ls p. 1rw iJpwnJK Kat.v oov1ro"h"hwv l-rwv for many years nobody has put a new q11estion tome l'. G. 448 a, {3ai1"<<s o p.ax.1-rat D Ka rJI.c.Epwv the king will IlOt fight fu1' ten days x. A. 1. 7. 18. 1447. The genitive may ur may not denote a definite part of tl1e time during which anything takes phLce ; the dative fixes the time explicitly either by specifying a definite point in a given period or by contracting the whole period to a definite point; the accusative expresses tl!e wl!ole extent of time from beginning to end: cp. -ri) o 11"T<paiq. o! p.v 'AO,va.Lot -r6 i 7rpoai1"Tnov dXov Ka.l r-l]v T,p.piv i?r.trav O?fouv T}]v 'i1v, o'
TE

rpt0.K6trtot rW11 ~KLwvalwv r?}s bnoUo-7Js vuK-rs :rrfxWp1JITa.11

on the next day the Athenians captu1ed the suburb and laid waste the land for that entire day, wh ile the thTee lmndred Scionaeans dr<)Jmtrd in the course of the following night T. 4. 180; +,p.lpq. o p~&.p.vot rplTYJ ws otKoO<v rJJpf.L"lJIIO.v, rauT"lJV TE <ip'Ya!;ovTO KaL r7!v TrapT1]V Kal -rfjs 7rJJ.7rT"lJS JJ.EXPL apIITOV beginning On the thi?d day after their departu1e, they continued their work (ali) this day and the fourth, and on the fifth until the mid-day meal 4. 90. . a. The genitive of time is Jess common than the dative of time (1539) with ordinals, or with o<, ou-ros, K<vo'; as Ta6T"lJS -ri)s vvK-r6s T. 6. 97, P. Cr. 44 a, helvou -ro p.1Jv6s in the course of that month X. M. 4. R. 2. For 8povs we find lv 8p<< rarely and, in poetry, Op<<. T. 4. 183 has both -ro a-rov Opovs and lv -rc;J ar<i} Op in the course of the same surnmer; cp. IIos p<L lv u 8p< Kal x<<p.wvt o "IIITpos Hdt. 4. 50 and "Jqrpos IIos p<t fNp<o' Ka.l x.np.wvos 4. 48 (the Iste1 fiows with the same volume in summer and winte1). 1448. Place.- The genitive denotes the place within which or at

which an action happens. prose.

This is more frequent in poetry than in

1r<low U4Kp.Ev to chase ove1 the plain E 222, l!;<v -rolxov -ro hpow he was sitting by the other wall (lit. in a place of the wall) I 219, <ovp.vos 'Keavoo having bathed in Ocean us E 6, o~u IIvXov l<pfjs o~-r An<os o~T< MvKojv,, neitheT in sacred Pylo8 noT in Argos nor in j}[ycena.e </> 108, rbv/ <ll1"<il~w T<<x<wv thou didst admit this man within the walls E. Phoen. 451, iva< -ro 1rp61Iw to go forward X. A. 1. 3. 1, 7r<raxvov rfjs oo ro, 11"")(Daiupov trpo11"t6v-ras they hastened on their way those who came up more slowly T. 4. 47; ats X.ELPI" olKoII< they dwell on the lejt hand A. Pr. 714 (possibly ablatival). 1449. Many adverbs of place are genitives in form ( av-ro there, 1ro where .P ooap.o nowhere). Cp. 341.

DATIVE

The Greek dative does duty for three cases: the dative proper, and two lost cases, the instrumental and the locative.
1450.
GREEK GHAM.

-22

338
u~e

SY~TAX

OF

TH~

SIMPLI<:

SE~TENCE

a. The dati1c derives its name (1, with oto6va< (14tiH).

oor<K1} 7rTwiT<~,

casus dativus) from the

1451. Th dative is a necessary complement of a verb when the information gi ven by the verb is incomplete without the addition of the idea expressed by the dative. 'l'hus, 'lrdfJ<-mt he obeys, calls for the addition of an idea to complete the sense, as ros v6JJ-ots the luws. 1452. '!'he dative as a voluntary complement of a verb adds something unessential to the completion of an iea. Thus, avro'i:s oi {3apf3apot rr~fJov the arbarians depaded- for thent (to their advantage). Here belongs the dative of interest, 1474 if. 1453. But the boundary line between the necessary and the voluntary complement is not always clearly marked. \Vhen the idea of the action, uot the object of the action, is emphatic, a verb, usually requiring a dative to complete its meaning, may be used alone, as 7rliJtra< he is obedient. 1454. With many intransitive verbs the dative is the sole complement. With transitive verbs it is the indirect complement (dative of the indirect or 1emoter object, usually a person); that is, it further deiines the meaning of a verb already defined in part by the accusative. 1455. Many verbs so vary in meaning that they may take the dative either alone or along with the accusative (Rometimes the genitive). No ru!es can be given, and English usage is not al ways the same as Greek usage. 1456. The voice often determines the construction. Th us, 7r<l8tw rmf topersuade some one, ?r<liJ<ITIJal n>< to pe1suade oneselj for some one (obey some one), K<<vt<v nv rara 1rot<v to order some one to do this, 7rapaK<<VtiTIJal T<P< rara 1ro<ev to exho1t sorne one to do this.
DATIVE PROPER

The dative proper deno.tes that to or for which something is or is done.

1457. 1458. It is either (1) nsed with single words (verbs, adjectives, and somtimes with adverbs and substantives) or (2) itserves to define an entire sentence; herein unlike the genitive and accusative, which usually moify single members of a sentence. The connection between dative and verb is Jess intimate thau that between genitive or accusative and verb. 1459. The dative proper is largely persona!, and denotes the person who is interested in or affected by the action; and includes 14Gl-1473 as weil as 1474 ff. The dative proper is not often used with things; wheu so used there is usually personification or semi-personification.
THE DATIVE DEPENDENT ON A SINGLE WORD
DATIVE AS DIRECT COMPLEMENT OF VERBS

The dative may be used as the sole complement of many verbs that are usually transitive in English. Such are
1460.

THE DATIVE

339

1461. (I) Ta benejit, help, injure, please, displease, be friendly or hostile, blarne, be ang1y, threaten, envy.

f3o11iv Toa-LV i}hK1Jpbo" to help the wronged E. I. A. 79, otlK av ~wxXe' vii v i}p.v he would not now be t1oubling us D. 3. , vTl To uvv<p"/<v o.vTos T uvp.<f>povro. i..-1Jpe&.rovutv ,jots instead of cooperating for their mutual interests, they revile one another X. M. 3. 5. 16, el Tos ..-ornv prKovrs rp.<V, TOfTo' av p.6vots otlK opliws ..-o.pia-Kotp.ev if 'lJJe a1e pleasing to the majority, it would not be 1'ightif we should displease them al one 'l'. 1. 38, euvov Tos Ko.K6vots to be friendly to the ill-intentioned X. C. 8. 2. 1. ip.ol ontrovTo.t they are angry at me P. A. 2a c, TeP 81]piip.ivet 1!..-elovv they threatened Theramenes 'l'. 8. 92, otl <t>Oovwv Tos ..-ovToiifTtv not che1'ishing envy against the 1ich X. A. 1. 9. 19.
1462. Sorne verbs of benefiting and inju1'ing take the accusative (w<f>e<v, {3M..-Tetv, 1591 a) ; p.fT<v nva. hate sonw one. fTLTeXev, fTVp.</>ipetv be of advantage take the dative. 1463. (II) Ta rneet, approach, yield. ..-el O ..-'ljvr1Jua.v <:<tlTos o! fTTpa.T1J"fol but when the generals met them X. A. 2. 3. 17, ..-eptTV"fxd.vet <f!toKparet he meets Philuc.mtes X. H. 4. 8. 24, ..-olots ov xP17 li1Jplots ..-e&.retv what wild beasts one must not approach X. C. 1. 4. 7, fT o' eK' vd."fK11 Ka.llieoa"t p.7! p.axov yield to necessity and wrzr not with heaven E. fr. 716. On the genitive with verbs of app1oaching, see 1353. 1464. (III) Ta obey, serve, pardo'n, trust, advise, camnwnd, etc. TOS v6p.ots ..-eLOov obcy the laws I. 1. 16, Tep f;p.erp<;J ~vp.q>6p<;J ...-a.Kouetv to be subservient to you1' inte1ests 'l'. . 98, !lv p.1Joep.t~ ooveuvs Twv i}oovwv if you are the slave of no pleasure I. 2. 29, l..-lurevov o.vTcp a.! ..-6m the cities trusted him X. A. 1. .9. 8, a-TpO.T1J"fcp a-Tpo.nwra.ts ..-a.pa.tvovn a general aclvising his 1nen P. Ion 540 d, Tep MiifTcP EfT~P.1J <f>dJ"fe<v he ortlmed the Mysian to flee X. A. . ~. 30, Tep Ked.px<;J l{36ii lhw he shouted to Oleanhus to lead X. A. 1. 8. 12:
1~65. Keeum co-mmand (strictly irnpel) may be followed in Attic by the accusative and (usually) the infinitive; in Hom. by the dative either alone or with the infinitive. Many verbs of cornmanding (..-a.po."f"fnv, ota.KeeuefTIJo.t) take in Attic the accusative, not the dative, when used with the infinitive (1996 N.). v..-o.Kouetv (and Koetv = obey) may take the genitive (1366).

1466. (IV) To be like or y,nUke, compare, bejit. otKva.t Tos TowvToLS to be like sttch rnen P. R. 349 d, Tl o v ..-pl..-et vop! 1rfv1JTL; what then /)ejits a poor man ? P. A. 36 d. 1467. 'l'he dative of the .person and the genitive of the thing are used with the mperSOHa]S O (1400), p.frMTL, JJ.fL 1 p.TO.J1-fet, 7rpM~KL. 'J'hUS, Jl-LfT(JO. </>bpwv vop! Tvpd.vvqJ oe a tyrant nees rnenena1ies X. Hi. 8. 10, ws ou p.eTov a.tlTos 'E..-tOd.p.vov .inasmuch as they hall nothing to do with Epidammts '1'.1.28, ovx wv (3td.fTa.ro p.<Tp.<<v a.Mep he did not repent of his acts of violence And. 4. 17, TourqJ Tfjs BotwTls ..-pou?jKH ovov he has not/ling to do toith Boeotia X. A. 3.1. 31. ~~efTTl p.ot it is in my power does not take the genitive. For the accusative instead of the dative, see 1400. Cp. 1344.

340
a.

SYNTAX OF THE SIIIlPLE SENTENCE

For ooK< fJ.O' it seems tome (mihi uidetu1), ooKw J-tO< (mihi uidco1) may be b. For otber cast-s of the dative as direct complement see 1476, 1481.

used.

1468. An intransitive verb taking the dative can form a persona! passive, the dative becoming the nominative subject of the passive. Cp. 1745.
DATIVE AS INDIRECT COMPLEMENT OF VERBS

1469. Many verbs take the dative as the indirect object together with an accusative as the direct object. The indirect object is commonly introcluced in English by to.
Kpo< Olwa-tv armi' g~ f'1/Vwv fua-(}6v Cy1us giues him pay for six rnonths X. A. 1.1.10, r.;> ''rpKavl't' twwov i!Owp1wa.ro he presented a hmse to the Hyrcanian X. C. 8. 4. 24, r. < ila otavf<aL ro< O"rpaT1/"fOL< to dist1ib~tte the l'est to the genemls X. A. 7. 5. 2, fJ-Kpov f<Yii'f' el/elia-at to compme a ~mall thing to a great thing T. 4. 36, 1r!J.wwv a ur{/> 11-y-yeov sending a messenger to him X. A.l. 3. 8, vwta-xvo1-'al O"OL OfKa Tliavra I promise you ten talents 1. 7. 18, TOTO a-oi o' q>lEf.'aL I lay this chmge upon thee S. Aj. ll, wap?ivet roi< 'Ae11vaio rottie he aduised the Athenians as follows T. (i. 8, f'oi wtrp'fat ravr11v r'l]v pxi}v to ent1ust this comma nd to me X. A. 6. 1. 31, -yetv rara ro< O"Tpartwra to say this to the soldiers 1. 4. 11 (M-ye< v wpo< nva Jacks the persona! touch of the dative, which indicates interest in the person addressed). A dependent clause often represents the accusative.

1470. Passive.- The accusative of the active becomes the subject of the passive, the dative remains: helv'f' ar11 7} xwpii l6(}11 this land was given to him X.H.3.1.6.
DATIVE AS DIRECT OR INDIRECT COMPLEMENT OF VERBS

1471. "Many verbs may take the dative either alone or with the accusative.
ouevi 1-'lwf>o!J.a' I find fault with no one D. 21. 190, ri liv J-tOL 1-'f.'l/>oto; what fault would yon have to fi nd with me? X. O. 2. 15 '; vw11prw ro< 8eoi:< I arn a seluant of the gods X. C. 8. 2. 22, "EpwTL 1rv h11p<rt he serves E1os in eue1ything P. 8.196 c; wa.pa.Keevovrat roi:s 1r<pl viK1!< p.<wf.'>o they exlw1t those who are striuing for victory I. 9. 79, rara ro< owira wapaK<euoJ-taL I ad1ess this exhmtation to the hoplites 'r. 7. 6:3; <iml\er< Toi:< d,o,Koa-tv you 1epToach the guilty L. 27.16 (also accus.), 811(3alo r'l]v f.'aeliiv oml\ova-t they upbraid the Thebans with theil ignorance I. 15. 248; 8eo< eut6.f.'EVOl hauing playecl to the gods T. 3. 58, eu~&.,..,. vot ro< 8eo< rd:-ya(}6. having prayed to the gocls for success X. C. 2. !3. 1 (cp. alrev nvti r<, 1628). So mTp.iiv (-yKa.e!v) rm to censure (accuse) sorne one, 1rtTf.'v (-yKa.ev) ri rtv< censure something in (b1ing an accusation against) some one: So wELv tlneaten; and J-tVvELv, c~ELv, pi}-yELv wmcl off ( rtvl rt in poetry, 148:l).

1472. rp.wpv (poet. r,..,wpa-Oal) TLvt means to ajJenge some one (take vengeanre .(01 some one), as Tf.'wpfJa-ELv a-at To wa<os vrna-xvoGp.a.< I promise to avenge you because of (on the murderer of) yow son X. C. 4. 6. 8, el rp.wpi}O"et<

1479]

THE DATIVE

341

IJarpOKlfl rP tj>OPOV you avenge the murder ~~r l'rtt1oc.lUB l'. A. 28 c. TL}l-Wp<rrOal (rarrdy r}l-wpv) nva means to aven ge oneself upon some one ( ptmish some one).

zr

1473. For the dative of pmpose (to what end?), common in Latin with a second dative (dono da1e), Greek uses a predicate noun: iK<iv4' 7} xwpi wpov 601) the count,.ry was given to him as a g~t~ X. H. 3.1. G. The usage in Attic inscriptions (f)o< ra'i's Ouprus nails for the doors C.I.A. 2, add. 83lJ, 1, 38) is somewhat similar to the Latin usagP. Cp. 1502. a. The infinitive was originally, at ]east in part, a dative of an abstract substantive, and served to mark pmpose: ris r' lip rrtf>w< O<wv gp<< ~vvf1JKE 11-rixerrOa<; who then of the gods b1'011_qht the twain togPther (for) to contend in st1ije? A 8. Cp. "what went ye out for to see?" St. Matth.ll. 8.
DATIVE AS A MODIFIER OF THE SENTENCE
DATIVE OF INTEREST

1474. The person for wlwm something is or is doue, or in reference to wh ose case an action is viewed, is put in the dative.

a. Many of the verbs in 14<11 ff. take a dative of interest. 1476 ff. are special cases. 1475. After verbs of motion the dative (usually persona!) is used, especially in poetry: xpas 11-ol opyovras 1'eaching out their hands to me 11- 2G7, 'fvx~s A< 1rpotaV;ev hUJled their souls on to Hades (a person) A 3; rarely, in prose, after verhs not compounded with a preposition : <Txovus ( scil. rs vas) 'P'I7lrp putting in at Rhegiurn T. 7. 1. Cp. 1485.
1476. Dative of the Possessor.- The person for whom a thing ests is put in the dative with dvat, y[yvwOat, -lnrpx(w, cpvat (poet.), etc., when he is regarded aa interested in its possession.
ao<s 11-<v XP1J11-ar6. rrn, -IT11-'i'v ii ~fi.!l-axo< -yaOol othms have riches, we have good allies T. 1. 86, rr LKalrp 7rap O<wv 0 wpa 'Yl'YV<TaL gzjts me licstowe ?!pon the just man liy the yods P. R. 613 e, lnrripxe< iJ11-v otloiv rwv tnT'I}i'i<iwv we have no supply of provisions X. A. 2. 2.11, 1riirr< Oviros grpv 11-6pos death is the natmallot

S. El. 860. 1477. So with verbs of thinking and perceiving: rv ri-yaOv IIpxovra f3"M7rovra v611-ov rivOpw7rO<S v6}1-<rrev Cyrus considend that a good l'Ulm was liviny law to man x. c. 8. 1. 22, OappoO"L }1-rt)\LtTra 11"0f}l-LOL, or av ros vavrlo<S trp&:y}l-ara trvv06.-vwvra< the enemy aJ'e most c01wageous when they learn that the junes opposecl to them me in trouble X. Hi pp. 5. 8. 1478. In the phrase ~vo11-6. (rrrl) nv< the name is put in the same case as ovop.a. Tlms, gao~a rtKOO"aL OVO}l-a avrr evru, A7ri0wva I thought 1 hea?d his name was Agathon P. Pr. 315 e. vo11-6. p.ol <TT< and /Jvop.a (<trwvv}l-iiv) hw are treated a.~ the passives of vo11-ri?"w. Cp. 1322 a.

of

all men

1479. Here belong the pluases (1) rl (rrnv) 11-ot Kal rrol; 1~hat have Ito do with thee '!; cp. ri rr v611-rp Kat ri) {3arr6.vrp; wliat have the law and tmture in cmmnon? D. 29. BO. (2) rl rar' tp.oi; what have I to do with this? D. 54.17. (:l) rl t}l-oltr~v; what gain have 1? X.C.ii.ii.!H.

342

SYNT AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

1480. The dative of the possessor denotes that something is at the disposa! of a person or has fallen to his share tPmporarily. The geuitive of possession lays stress on the persan who owns something. The dative answers the question what is it that he has ?, the genitive answers the question who is it that has something ? The uses of the two cases are often parallel, but not interchangeable. Th us, in Kilpos, o~ G" f<J"et r ci?r roilo Cyrus, to whorn you will he'nCPjo?th be long X. C. G. 1. 8, cp would be inappropriate. With a noun in the genitive the dative of the possessor is used (rwv Karpocs ~Vf.Lf.Laxwv T.2.1); with a noun in the dative, the genitive of the possessor (ros iavrwv ~Vf.LJL6.xocs 1. 18). 1481. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage incommodi).- The person or thing for whose vantage, anything is or is done, is put in the often has to be translated as if the possessive but the meaning is different.

( dativus comrnodi et advantage or disaddative. The dative genitive were used;

1rto'l] ai,ros ol {36.p{3apoc K ri)s xwpiis 1ri)Mov ajte1 the barbarians ha departed (for them, to their advantage) from their country T. 1. 89, tf'Ao G"Tparwf.La a.-rqi G"VvEyEro another aTmy was being raised jo1 him X. A. 1. 1. 9, tl.'Jl o rowilros 1rovTE, Ka.l ox iaurc"p such a manis Tich foranother, and not jO?' himselfP.Menex. 246 e, crrE<j>avovuOa< -r(p Oe(p to be cTowned in honou1 of the gad X. H. 4. 3. 21, q,,x,. G"rlo7Js f11"piirn <l><l11"11"4J Philistides was W01'king in the inte1est of Philip D. 9. 59, -r xpf,p.a.r' a.r7-.: vOpw1ros Ka.Kwv money is a cause of misery to mankind E. Fr. 632, ol ep~KEs ol rc A1Jf.LOG"0vet VG"TEpf,ua.vns the Thracians who came too , late (for, i.e.) to help Demosthenes T. 7. 29, 7/o.;, .qp.pii rots "E'A1JG"< p.E"fawv Ka.Kw tl.p~1 this day will be to the Gree les the beginning of gTeat sorrows 2. 12, &v -rls G"O< rwv olKErwv a1roop~ ~f any ofyour slaves 1uns away X. M. 2.10.1. a. For the middle denoting to do something for oneself, see 1719. b. In the last example in 1481, as elsewhere, the dative of a persona! pronoun is used where a possessive pronoun would explicitly denote the owner.

1482. A dative, dependent on the sentence, may appear to depend on a substantive: <J"ol o ow<J"w tl.vopa r il Ou-ya.r pl to you I will give a husband for youT daughter X. C. 8. 4. 24. Common in Hdt. 1483. With verbs of depTiving, warding off, and the like, the dative of the person may be used: ro G"uG"rpare6etv <j>Ev G"<j>l<J"<v oef}Orwav they asked him to 7'elieve them (lit. talee away jo!' them) j1om ~e1ving in the wm X. C. 7. 1. 44, Aavaou<v o<-yov tl.f.Lvvov wmd off ruin from (for) the Danai A 456. So 'A~Hv nvl n (poet.). Cp. 1392, 1628. 1484. With verbs of receiving and buying, the person who gives or sells may stand in the dative. In xe<J"Orzl rl nvc (cbiefly poetic) the dative denotes the interest of the recipient in the donor : ef.L<G"n oKro O11"as she to"olc the eup from (for, i.e. to please) Th emis 0 87. So with 1r6G"ov 1rplwf.Lal G"O< r xocploca; at what pTice amI to buy the pigs of you? Ar. Ach. 812. 1485. With verbs of motion the dative of the person to whom is properly a dative of advan tage or disadvantage: 'ljM ros 'A011va.lo<s .;, <i'Y'YElii the message came to (for) the Athenians T.l. 81. Cp. 1475. 1486. Dative of Feeling (Ethical Dative).- The personal pro-

THE DATIVE

343

nouns of the first and second person are often used to denote the interest of the speaker, or to secure the interest of the person spoken to, in an action or statement.
p)JJ.v7Jrr0i fM" wiJ OopvfJev pray 1emember not to make a distu1bance P. A. 27 b, JJ.ovrr6repoL -yev-f}rrovraL JJ.V oi vioL you1 young men will grow less cultivated P. R. 546 d, 'TO<O'To JJ.v lrrn i} Tvpavvls such a thing, you know, is despotism Hdt. 5. 92 71, 'ApTatj>pV7Js bJJ.v 'TrrTarr-rre6s rrn -rras A1taphenws, y ou know, is Hystaspes' son 5. 30. The dative of feeling may denote surprise: i!i p:Yj.,.ep, ws KaMs Jl.O' o,,..:~.,. ... os

oh mothe1, how handsome grandpa is X. C. 1. 3. 2. With the dative of feeling cp. "knock me here" Shakesp. T. of Sh. 1. 2. 8, "study me how to please the eye" L. L. L, i, 1. 80. Toi surely, often used to introduce general statements or maxims, is a petrified dative of feeling ( = rrol). a. This dative in the third person is very rare (a.,.ii in P. R. 343 a). b. This construction reproduces the familiar style of conversation and may often be translated by I beg you, please, you see, let me tell you, etc. Sornetimes the idea cannot be given in translation. This dative is a form of 1481.
1487. p.o\ ~ouop.v't' crTC, etc.- Instead of a senten.ce with a fini te verb, a participle usually denoting inclinaUon or aversion is added to the dative of the person interested, which depends on a form of flvat, y[yvfa()at, etc .
.,.;, 7r1}0eL 'TW> ITt.am<wvou fJovoJJ.><tJ 'ljv Twv 'A07Jvalwv rplnarrOaL the Plataean democracy did not wish to revolt fi'Om the Athenians ( = Ta -rrMjOos ouK lfJoue'To tj>lrr'Tarr0a<) T. 2. 3 (lit. it was not fui' them when 1vishing), !iv fJovoJJ.vo<sKoUeLv Y, 'TOV'To<rri, Jl.V7JrrO-f}rrof.LaL if these men (the jury) desire to heaT it, 1 shall talee the matte1 up lateT (=!iv o1iTo< KotieLv fJowVTa<) D. 18. 11, l-rravt.OwJJ.ev, et rro< i}oop<tJ lrr'Tlv let us go bacle if it is y ouT pleasuTe to do so P. Ph. 78 b, el p,'i) rr}Lvo<s DJJ.V rp-yJLaL if I have come against yuu1 will T. 4. 85, NKl'l' 1rporroexoJJ.v'l' 'ljv .,., -rrap.,. wv 'E-yerr'Talwv Nicias was p1epmed fuT the news fi'Om the Egestaeans 6. 46, 'ljv o ou .,.;, 'A-y7Jrr<ii4J xOop,v<tJ this waJ not clispleasing to .Agesilaus X. H. 5. 3. 13. Cp. quibus bellnm volentibus emt.

1488. Dative of the Agent.- With passive verbs (usually in the perfect and pluperfeet) and regularly with verbal adjectives in -r6> and -ro>, the person in whose interest an aetion is done, is put in the dative. The notion of agency does not belong to the dative, but it is a natural inference that the persan interested is the agent.
JJ.ol Kal 'TO'To<s -rr-rrpiiK'TaL has been clone by (for) me and these men D. 19. 205, l-rr<Lo'i] au'Tos -rraperrK<tlacJ'To when they hacl got their prrpamtions ready T. 1. 46, rorrav'Ta pm elp-f}rrOw let so much have been said by me L. 24. 4, bf7Jrplrr0o.< .,.V fJovt.fi let it have be en dec1eed by the senate C.I.A. 2. 55. 9. a. '\Vith verlxtl adjectives in -T6s and -Tos (2149) : Tos otKoL g-71t.wr6s envied by those at hume X. A. 1. 7. 4, iJJJ.v -y' 1rp .,.fis t.ev0epliis ')'wvLrr'Tov we at least must struggle to defend ow freedom D. 9. 70. For the accus. with -'Tov, see 2152 a.

1489. The usual restriction of the dative to tenses of completed action seems to be due to the fact tlmt the agent is representcd as placed in the position of

3-14

SYNTAX OF THE Sll\IPLE SENTENCE

viewing an already completed action in the light of its relation to himself (interest, advantage, possession). 1490. The dative of the agent is rarely employed with other tenses than perfect and pluperfect: "fera 7J!-'v is said by us P. L. 715 b, -ros KepKipalots ox iwpwv-ro the ships were not seen by (were invisible to) the Corcyraeans T. 1.51; present, 'l'. 4. 64, 109; aorist 'l'. 2. 7. 1491. The person b_y whom (not for whorn) an action is explicitly said to be done, is put in the genitive with {nr (1698. 1. b). 1492. The dative of the persona] agent is nsed (1) when the subject is impersonal, the verb being transitive or intransitive, (2) when the subject is persona] and the person is treated as a thing in order to express scorn (twice only in the orators: D. 19. 247, 57. 10). 1493. 1r6 with the genitive of the personal agent is used (1) wl1en the subject is a person, a city, a country, or is otherwise quasi-persona!, (2) when the verb is intransitive even if the subject is a thing, as -rwv u<xwv 1ro -rwv f3ap(3apwv 1rE1rTwK6-rwv the walls having been destroyed by the barba rians Aes. 2. 172, (3) in a few cases with an impersonal subject, usually for the sake of emphasis, as ws Talpi 'f}v 7r0 TWV liwv olKelwv Kat 1r0 rwv "fELr6vwv ,_.,.,_.,aprprJraL that she was an hetaera has been testified by the rest of his 1elatives and by his neighbou1s Is. 3. 13. a. viKcrOat, 7]rrcrea, to be conquered may be followed by the dative of a person, by 1r6 nvos, or by the genitive (1402). 1494. When the agent is a thing, not a person, the dative is commonly used whether the subject is persona! or impersonal. If the snbject is persona!, fl1r6 may be used; in which case the inanimate agent is persouified (see 1698. 1. N.1). 1r6 is rarely used when the subject is impersonal. v1r6 is never nsed with the impersonal perfect passive of an intransitive verb.
DATIVE OF RELATION

The dative may be used of a pers on to wh ose case the statement of the predicate is limited.
1495.
q,e{ryetv aros cr<f>acrnp6v Mn v ~ -iJ!-'v it is safer for them to flee than for us X. A. 3. 2. 19, rptfJpet lcrrlv fis 'HpdKe<av -i)p.pis 1-'aKp.s 1rovs for a trirerne it is a long day's sail to I-Ieraclea 6. 4. 2. Such cases as op6,_.,os f-yhero -rois crrpanwra<s the soldie1s began torun X. A. 1. 2. 17 belong here rather thau under 1476 or 1488. a. ws restrictive is often added : 1-'aKp!J. ws "fpovn ooos a long road (at !east) for an olcl man S. O. C. 20, crw<f>pocrvrJs o ws 7rfJ0et oo r ro<aoe 1-'"f<CTTa; for the mass of rnen me not the chief points of temperance such as these? P. R. 38\J d.

1496. Dative of Reference. -The dative of a no un or pronoun often denotes the persan in whose opinion a statement holds good.
"fal-'ovs -ros 1rpwrovs l"fate< II<!pcrycr< o D.ipeos Darius contmctecl marriages most .clistinguishecl in the eyes of the Persians Hd t. 3. 88, 1rcrL viKv ros Kptras to be victorious in the juclgrnent of all the judges Ar. Av. 445, 1roXocrtv olKrpos pit~ful in the eyes of rnany R. Tr. 1071. 1rapa is often used, as in 1rap D.ipel<f Kp<rii in the opinion of Dmius Hdt. 3. 160,

1499]

THE DATIVE

345

1497. The dative participle, without a noun or pronoun, is frequently used in the singular or plural to denote indefinitely the person judging or observing. This construction is most common with participles of verbs of coming or going and with participles of verbs of considering.
-;, 8pt/-K'TJ ia-r<v bd oe~t Els rov IT6vrov el<r71"ovrt Th?ace is on tke right as you sail into the Pont1lS x. A. 6. 4. 1, n..eyov OTt -;, oos ota{Javrt TOV 1l"Orap.Ov 71"l Aoliiv <l!pot they said that, when you had c1ossed the 1iver, the road led to Lydia 3. 5. 15, OOK oilv dro7l"OV otaO"ft!;o}JoVOtS r!ls owpe!ls vvl71"elovs if vat; is it not strange, when we rejlect, that gifts are '11W1'e frequent now ? A es. 3. 179, ro ph l!~w8ev 71"ropb<t> <rWJl.a oDK li"( ii v 8epJ1.ov 1jv if you touched the sto:face the body was not very hot T. 2. 49, 11"pos cJJ<petav <rK01l"OVJ1.V<t> o 71"atvT'T}s ro otKalov X'T}8dJet if you look at the matter from the point of view of advantage, the panegyrist of justice speaks the truth P. R. 589 c. So ( ws) a-vveMvrt el71"etv (X. A. 3. 1. 38) to speak b1iejly (lit. for one having brought the matter into small compass), a-vveMvrt DA. 7. a. The participle of verbs of coming or going is commonly used in stittements of geographical situation. b. The present participle is more common tban the aorist in the case of all verbs belongiug under 1497.

1498. Dative of the Participle expressing Time. -In expressions of time a partieiple is often used with the dative of the person interested in the action of the subject, and especially to express the ti me that has passed since an action has occurred (cp. " and this is the sixth month with her, who was called barren" St. Luke i. 36).
11"opovrt o' aorp l!pxerat ITpo}Jo'T}8evs Prometheus cames to him in his perplexity P. l'r. 321 c, S:evocpwvrt 11"opevoJ1.V<t> ol l71"71"etS vrv"(xci.vov<rt -rrpea-f36ratS while Xenophon was on the march, his horsemen fell in with some old men X. A. 6. 3. 10. The idiom is often transferred from persons to things: 7,}Jopat p.d.Xuna na-av T~ MvnX?)v17 iiiwKvlq. i-rrra, or' s r "Ep.{Jarov KarhXeva-av about seven days had passed since the capture of Mytilene, when they sailed into Eml!atum T. 3. 2\l. This construction is frequent in Hom. and Hdt. The participle is rarely omittecl (T. L 13.). a. A temporal clause may take the place of the participle: T~ err part~, q,' OU f~f71"VV els ~LKEiiiv, 7fo'TJ fTl DUO Ka! 71"VTTJKOVTa liTT) it. iS already fijty-tWO years since the expedition sailed to Sicily Is. 6. 14.

DATIVE WITH AD.JECTIVES, ETC.

1499. Adjectives, adverbs, and sub_stantives, of k:dred m_eaning with the foregoing verbB, take the dat1ve to define theu meamng.
{Ja<rte'i <j>lf..ot friendly to the kin[! X. A. 2. 1. 20, el!vovs rp OTJJl.~ well disposed to the people And. 4. lG, ros v6p.oLS l!voxos sub}ect to the laws D. 21. 35, ix8pov Xev8eplq. Ka! v6J1.oLS vavriov hostile to libe1ty and opposed to law G. 25, ~vp.Jl.axlq. -rrlcrvvo< 1elying on the alliance 'J'. 6. 2, cp6pcp -rrf}Koot sub,iect to tribute 7. 57, ?)v 71"otfire OJl.ota ro'i:s "fotS if you act in acconlance with ymw worcls 2. 72, a-r paros rO'os Ka! -rrapa-rrXf}crtos rp 11'poTp<t> an mmy equal or nea1ly so to the former 7. 42,

346

SY.NTAX OF THE SL\IPLE SENTENCE

[1500

i!l<f> -r. fJou"ii<JJ-aTa Tos ~p-yots plans like the dees L. 2. 64, "!IX?j"!lot< voJJ-olws in a way unlike to eaeh other l'. Tim. 3 tl. For substantives see 1502. a. Some adjectives, as <f>l"!los, lx8p6s, may be treated as substantives and

take the genitive. Some adjectives often differ slightly in meaning when they take the genitive. 1500. With o o.iiT<is the same.-TT]v airrT]v -yvWJJ-'YJV EJJ-ol li X"" to be of the sa me mind as I am L. 3. 21, To auTo EJJ-ol 7raTp6s of the same falher as I am D. 40. 34,
TavT <f>povwv JJ-Ol agreeing with me 18. 304.

1501. With adjectives and adverbs of similarity and dissimilarity the comparison is often condensed (bmchylogy) : DJJ-Oliv Tas lio"!lats EX< TTJv l<rO:ijTa she had a dress on like (that of) her se1vants X. C. 5. 1. 4 (the possessor for the thiug possessed,= TY irrOf}n Twv liou"!lwv), 'Op<f> -y"ilwrrrra 'l] lvavTli a tangue unlike (that of) Orpheus A. Ag. Hl20. a. After adjectives and adverbs of likeness we also find tw.l, iJrr1r<p ( &rr1r<p ). Thus, 1ra8Ev TavTv IJ1r<p 7ro"ilKtS 1rp6npov 7rE7r6v!Jan to suffer the same as you have often su.ffed before D. 1. 8, oux oJJ-olws 1fE7rot?jKirrt Kal "Op:YJpos they have not cornposed their poetry as Homer did P. lon 531 d. 1502. The dative after substantives is chiefly used when the substantive expresses the act denoted by the kindred verb requiring the dative: 7rt{Jou"!l1} lJJ-ol a plot against me X. A. 5. 6. 29, oui.ooxos K"!IEavop'Jl a s1tccessor to Clermder 7. 2. 5, 7} EJJ-TJ TlP Odp 7r1Jp<rrli my service to the god P. A. 30 a. But also in other cases: tj>t"!lli Tos 'AO'Y)valots friendship .fo1' the Athenians 'l'. 5. 5, JJ-vot !JEOs hymns to the gods P. H. 607 a, l<f>6ota Tos rrTpaTEVoJJ-vo<s supplies for the troops D. 8. iO, 'fi"!lot ms Oupats nails.for the doors (1473). a. Both a genitive and a dative may depend on the same substantive: 'l] To 8Eo ots fJJJ-v the gad' s gijt to y ou P. A. 30 d.
INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE

The Greek dative, as the representative of the lost instrumental case, denotes that by which or with which an action is doue or accompanied. It is of two kinds: (1) The instrumental dative proper; (2) The comitative dative.
1503. 1504. When the idea denoted by the noun in the dative is the instrltment or means, it falls under (1) ; if it is a person (not regarded as the instrument

or means) or any other living being, or a thing regarded as a person, it belongs under (2); if an action, under (2). 1505. Abstract substantives with or without an attributive often stand in the instrumental dative instead of the cognate accusative (1577).
INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE PROPER

1506.

The dative denotes instrument or means, manner, and

cause.
1507. Instrument or Means.- f{Jaf..M 11-< Xl!JoLS lw hil 1/l.(' with st"ues L. 3. 8, f'YJrr' Tfj ~tvv he hurls ltis axat !dm (ht11'ls with his ax) X. A. 1. l>. U, Tas JJ-axalpats

THE DATIVE

347

K01rrovus hacking them with their sworcls 4. G. 26, oi5v 7fvuE rovro<s he accomplished nothing by this D. 21.10, <truw<Tav xP1JJLa<Ttv they pwshed him by a fine T. 2. 65, Dovros 1ro'AX(/J (ili5an) during a heavy rain X. H. 1. 1. 16 (934). So with OXE<TIJaL: TWV 7rOWV ou OXOJl.fvWV auros :yop~ o/5 li<TT<, voan O Ka! BpJL'!J

as the cities did not admit them to a ma1ket nor even into the town, but (only) to and anchomge T. 6. 44. Often with passives: ~"ooop.'l)p.bov 1r Xlv/Jots built rf bricks X. A. 2. 4. 12. a. The instrumental dative is often akin to the comitative dative : 'AWJLvos v'l)l TE. Ka! r6.po<<T< wandering with his ship and companions 161, v'l)v<T!v olxfJ<Tovra< they shall go with theil ships 731, /Jp.t;i Ka! pwp.v rb 1rov lvavp.6.xovv ?) 7r<<Tr1Jp.v they fought with passionate violence and brute force 1ather than by a system of tactics T. 1. 49. b. Persons may be regarded as instruments: rpv'Aarrbp.VO< rpv'Aa~' defending themselves by piclcets X. A. 6. 4. 27. Often in poetry (S. Ant. 164). c. Verbs of raining or snowing take the dative or accusative (1570 a).
~vate1

1508. Under Means faU : a. The dative of p1ice (cp. 1372) : p.lpn rwv li<K'I'Jp.6.rwv rv Klvi5iivov l~7rplavro they freed themselves frorn the danger at the priee of a part of their unjust gains L. 27. 6. b. Rarely, the dative with verbs of filling (cp. 136!J): 156.Kpv<T< 1rilv r <Trp6.TEvp.a 1r 'fJ<TIJv the entire army being fil led with tems T. 7. 75. c. The dative of mate1ial and constituent parts: KaTE<TKVri<Taro lipp.ara rpoxos l<Txiipos he made chariots with strong wheels X. C. 6. 1. 29. 1509. xpfirr/Jat ~tse (strictly employ oneself with, get something done with; cp.ttti), and sometimes vop.ltHv, take the dative. Thus, ohE rovrots (ros vop.lp.o<s) xpfira< ol!IJ' ors i} li'I'J 'E'AMs voJLl)< neither acts accorcling to these institutions nor observes those accepted by the rest of G1eece T. 1. 77. A predicate noun may be added to the dative: rovro<s xpwvra< 15opv<j>6po<s they ma/ce ttse of thern as a body-guard X. HL 5. 3. The use to which an object is put may be expressed by a neuter pronoun in the accus. (1573); rl XP'I'J<rOp.6a rovr'l'; what use shall we make of it? D. 3. 6. 1510. The instrumental dative occurs after substantives: p.fp.'l)rrts rrxfJp.arr< imitation by rneans of gestures P. R. 397 b.
~511. The instrumental dative of means is often, especially in poetry, reinforced by the prepositions v, rruv, 1r6: lv b"(o<s 1rdiJE<v to pe1suade by wmds S. Ph. 1393, o! /Jw! lv ros !Epos rr-f}p.7Jvav the gods have shawn by the victims X. A. 6. 1. 31 ; rrv "(-f}pq. ~apes heavy with old age S. O. T. 17 ; 7rO<s Xprr!v q,' i}p.Erpvrr<v 'Aorra a city captured by our hans B 374.

1512. Dative of Standard of Judgment. -That by which anything is. measured, or judged, is put in the dative: ~uvp.Erpf}rravro ras 'Ir<f3oXas rwv 1rlv1Jwv they measu1ed the ladders by the layers of bi'icks T. 3. 20, r0QE oi)Xov ~v it was plain from what followed X. A. 2. 3. 1, ors 1rpos rovs liX'Aous 7r7rOl7JK o TEKp.alpErriJa< tve m~tst judge by what he has do ne to the i'est j) .. 9. 10, rlv< xpi] KpfvE<TIJa< r JLovra Kaws Kpt/J~crerr6a.<; J.p' ouK lp.7rtplq. T Kal </>povfJrrH Kr /yy'l'; by what standard must we judge that the judgment may be C01'i'ect ? Is it not by

348

SYNTAX OF THE SL\1PLE SEXTEXCE

Wth verbs of judging EK

experience an 11:isrlom and Teasonil!{t ? l'. H. 582 a. and cbr6 are commm1.

1513. Manner (see also 1527).- The dative of manner is used with comparative adjectives and other expressions of comparison to mark the degree by which one thing differs from another (Dative of Measure of Difference).
Ke<j>a't./ M.rrwv a head shorte1: (lit. by the head) P. Ph. 101 a, ou 71'oas f}p.pats rnepov '!]Mev he arriver! not many days later X. H. 1. 1. 1, iovHs oKa -lfp.pa<s 7l'po llava0')valwv coming ten da ys bejore the Panathenaic festival T. 5. 4 7, rorro{J7'4.' ;joov .lw li<r<(! 7l'elw KfKT'Jp.a< the more I possess the nw1e pleasant is my l({e 8. 3.40, 7/'0cP p.eljwv E/l/VE7'0 " f!o:Y, OIT<(! or, 71'elous !l!VOV7'0 the shouting

x. c.

became much louder as the men increased in nwnbe1 X. A. 4. 7. 23. So with 7/'on.;> by much, 6ll4.' by little, r.;> 11'avrl in every 1espect (by ali odds). a. With tl1e superlative: p.aKp.;> lipurra by jar the best I>. L. 858 e. 1514. With comparatives the accusatives (1586) rl, rt, oua .!v, ,U')ov without a substantive are al ways used: ovav 1jTTov nihilo minus X. A. 7. 5. 9. In Attic prose (except in Thuc.) 71'oM and ol1ov are more corn mon th an 71'on.;; and ol/4.' with comparatives. Hom. has only 7ro p.eljwv.
1515. Measure of difference may be expressed by i!v rm; rl's rc, Kar rc; or by i7l'l rcvc. 1516. The dative of manner may denote the particular point of view from which a statement is made. This occurs chie:fly with intransitive adjectives but also with intransitive verbs (Dative of Respect). (Cp. 1600.)
.v:Y,p f}cKlq. ~rc vos a rnan still young in years T. 5. 48, ros <TWJJ.a<T< r 71'eov irrxvovrra. 1) ros xp-IJp.a<Tcv a power st1onge1 in rn en th an in rnoney 1. 121, .rrOev:Y,s rip rrw,uarc \male in bocly D. 21. 165, rfi <f>wvfi rpiixus harsh of voice X. A. 2. 6. 9, <j>pov-l}<rE< oca<j>pwv distinguished in understrmding x. C. 2. 3. 5, TWV rbre ovvp.E< 7rpouxw supe1ior in powet to the men of that tirne T. 1. 9, v6,uarc <T7l'ovoal a

truce so jar as the narne goes 6. 10. a. The accusative of respect (1600) is often nearly equivalent to the dative of respect.
1517. Cause.- The dative, especially with verbs of emotion, expresses the occasion (external cause) or the motive (internai cause). Occasion: rii ruxy, l"l\71'lviis confident IJy 1eason of his good j01tune T. 3. 97, Oa.vp..\w ri7 .7l'oKV<TE< p.ov rwv 7l'Vwv I am astonishecl at being shut out of the gates 4. 85, rourocs ;j<TI'J he was pleased at this X. A. 1. H. 26, 7Jx06wOa ros /E/EP'JJJ.fvocs we weTe troubled at what had o<:curred 5. 7. 20, xa"l\e7rws .ppw ros 7l'apoiJ<r< 7rpd/p.a<T<v I am t1oubled at the present occwrences 1. 3. 3. Motive: </><lq. Kat euvolq. 71'6p.evoc jollowing out of .friendHhip and good will )):. A. 2. 6. 13. Occasion and motive: ol ,uv 7roplq. .KoouOwv, of Oi .11'<<Trlq. some (carried their own food) becaus.e they lacked servants. others thrcmrJh distrust of thern T. 7. 75, i;flpec Kal ovK otv4.' roiJro 7/'ocwv doing this out of insolence and not because he was dr1tnlc D. 21. 74.

THE DATIVE

il-Hl

1518. Sorne verbs of emotion take ~1ri (with dat.) to denote the cause; so al ways 1'-yo. <f>povev to plume oneselj; -and often xo.lpv re}oice, u1rr8a< grieve, ci')'avaKuiv be vexed, alrrxvverr8a< .be ashamed. Many verbs trtke the genitive (1405). 1519. The dative of cause sometimes approximates to a dative of purpose (1473): 'Ae.,vaot i<t>' 'h!kiis &pjJ-'fJVTa< Aeovrivwv Karo<Klrret the .Athenians have set out against us (toith a vieto to) to restore the Leontines 'f. 6. 33. This construction is common with other verbal nouns in 'fbucyides. 1520. Cause is often expressed by oui with the accusative, v1r6 with the genitive, less frequently by ci!'-</>l or 1repi with the dative (poet.) or il1rlp with the genitive (poet.).
COMITATIVE DATIVE

The comitative form of the instrumental dative denotes the persons or things which accompany or take part in an action.
1521. 1522. Prepositions of accompaniment (l'er ci with gen., rruv) are often used, especially when the verb does not denote accompaniment or union. 1523. Dative of Association.- The dative is used with words denoting friendly or hostile association or intercourse. This dative is especially common in the plural and after middle verbs.

a. KaKos o!'-wv Karos hfJfwv KaK6s if thon associate with the evil, in the end thou too wilt become evil thyself Men. Sent. 274, ci'Jocs ote<Y!kOa we have conve1sed with each othe1 P. A. 37 a, rcp 7r'J8o r p.,elvra Ko<vwO"avns comrmmicating to the peo1Jle 1vlwt ha been sal T. 2. 72, oeoMevo< ros <f>eu')'ovras ~vvcM~a, rr<Plrr< aslcing that they 1econcile thei1 exiles with them 1. 24, eis M')'ovs rro< iXOev to have an inteTview with you X. A. 2. 5. 4, wrerrxf,Ka!'-<v !k'iv OvO"twv we have paTticipated in yom festivals x. H. 2. '1. 20, af,o<S <J'IrOVOs bro<'J<JO.VTO they rnade a truce with one another 3. 2. 20, avro'is o< </><liis Uva< to ente1 into jriendship with them X. A. 3. 2. 8. So with verbs of meeting: 7rporrpxerr9a<, 11'porrrv')'xavLv and fvTv')'xdvet.v, cbravrv~ b. 1roos ol')'o< l'-ax6wvo< jew fighting wUh rnany T. 4. 36, K6p'JJ 7rOEjJ-ovres waging wm with Cy1us 1. 13, M<fJ<rrf!ryroO"< 1'-l;v ot' ei!vo<av ol <f>lo< ros <f>locs, ipljavrr< M al O<a</>opo< af,Xots j1iends dispute 1vith j1iends good-nat1tr~Jdly, bu.t adeersaries WTangle with one anotheT P. Pr. 387 b. lKiis cif,ocs o<Ka!ovra< they lning lawsuits a[!ainst one a110theT X. M. 8. 5. l, o<atj>perrOat rovrocs to be at vruiance with these men D. 18. 31 (and so many compounds of oai), oK gq,., ros M-yovs ros gp')'otS OjJ-oo')'v he said theiT words irl not ayTee 1vith their eeds T. 5.55. So also rtv! o< 7rof!'-ou (o< p.ax.,s, els xepas) Uvo.<, nv! D/J-OO'e xwp<v, etc. N. 1,-7rOfLv (1'-aXriOo.<) rrv -rm (wra nvos) means to wage wm in conjwwtion with sorne one. N. 2.- Verbs of friendly or hostile association, and especially periphrases with 7rorr8a< ( 7r6el'-ov, rr1rovci.s), often take the accusative with 1rpos.
1524. Dative of Accompaniment. -'rhe dative of accompaniment is used with verbs siguifying to aceompany, follow, etc.
KoovOv rif 'h'ovl'-"'l' to follow the /eade1 P. R. 474 c, ~1rrr8a.< flp.v f3oo,tLa<

350

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

p,era with the genitive is often used,

I am willing to follow you X. A. 3. 1. 25. as are quv and i.Jm. with the dative.

1525. With a:Tos.- The idea of accompaniment is often expressed by ar6s joined to the dative. This use is common when the destructi.on of a person or thing is referred to. Th us, rwv vewv p,la aros vop&,q,v one of the ships with its crew T. 4. 14, el'/I"EV -ljKELV els ras ra~ELS aros (J'T</>aVOLS he bade them r-ome to their posts, crowns and all X. C. 3. 3. 40. The article after ar6s is rare ; and quv is rarely added (X. C. 2. 2. 9). Hom. has this dative only with lifeless abjects. 1526. Dative of Military Accompaniment. -The dative is used in the description of military movements to denote the accompaniment (troops, ships, etc.) of a leader: l;ell.auvet r( qrpanup,an 11"avrl he 11w1ches out with all his mmy X. A. 1. 7. 14. quv is often used with words denoting troops (T. 6. 62). a. An extension of this usage occurs when the persons in the dative are essentially the same as the persons forming the subject (distributive use): iuv l<f>el11"ovro o! 11"op,w< Ka1 l11"11"<K( Kal 11"<ra(J'TLK<i' the enemy pursued us 1oith their cavalry and peltasts X. A. 7. 6. 29. b. The dative of military accompaniment is often equivalent to a dative of means when the verb does not denote th leadership of a general.

1527. Dative of Accompanying Circumstance. -The dative, usually of an abstract substantive, may denote accompanying circumstance and manner.
a. The substantive has an attribute: 71"o71.71.fi {Jofi 7rpoqtKELvro they attacked with loud shouts T. 4. 127, 11"avrl r10tvet with all one' s might 5. 23, ruxv &:yaOfi with gqod fortm~e C. I.A. 2. 17. 7. So 11"avr1 (ooev1, li'f', rour'f' rcp) rp611"'f'. Manner may be expressed by the adjective, as {Jtal'f' Oavar'f' 11"o0v?]crKELv to die (by)aviolentdeath X. Hi.4.3(=fJlrt) b. Ma1iy particular substantives have no attribute and are used dverbially: Oev opbp,Cf' to 1un at full speed X. A."l. 8. 19, fJlrt by force, okg justly, o6'f' by cmft, (rcp) gP'Y'I' in fact, i}qvxfi quietly, Kap,<ofi (with care) entirely, K6(J'p,Cf1 in orcler, duly, KUK'f' round about, (rcp) 71./ry'f' in word, 7rpo<f>aqe, ostensibly, qi'Yfi, (J'LW11"fi in silence, O":>rovofi hastily, with d~fJlculty, rfi li.7JO<lrt in truth, rcp 6vrt in 1eality, op'Yfi in anger, .Pv'Yfi in hasty jlight. N.- When no adjective is used, prepositional phrases or adverbs are generally employed: qv Kpav'Yfi, qv OIKIJ, p,Er olK7Js, 11"pos {Jliiv (or {Jtalws). c. Here belongs the dative of feminine adjectives witb a substantive (oocp, etc.) omitted, as raUT?J 'in this way, he10, /lIJ in anothe!' Wa?J, elsewhere, :>rfi, V in wh at ( which) way. So D7JJkOO"l'f at public expense, lOlr:t p1ivately, Ko<vfi in cornmon, :>r<sfi on foot. N.- Some of these forms are instrumental rather than comitative, e.g. ravrv.

1528. Space and Tinie.- The dative of space and time may sometimes be regarded as comitative.
a. Space: the way by which (qua), as 11"opeuEro rfi o( f,v 11"p6repov 11"ot-lj(J'aTo he marched by the road (or on the 1oad ?) which he had made befme T. 2. 98 ; b. Time : KaT7J'YOPEL ws helv71 rcp xpbv'f' 11"<Lr10l7J she charged that she had been

THE DATIVE
pe1'suaded in ( by) the cotrse of tirne L. 1. 20. mental rather thau comitative.

351
Rome of these uses are instru-

WITH ADJECTIVES, ETC.

Many adjectives and adverbs, and some substantives, take the instrumental dative by the same construction as the corresponding verbs.
1529.
uVfLfLrtxos a6Tos thei? ally D. 9. 58, x wpa ofLopos T' ArtK<Ort<fLo>lw> a country borde?ing on that of the Lacedaernonians 15. 22, .KoovOa To6To<S conformable to this 18. 257. So KOLPOS (cp. 1414), UfL<f>Wvos, ""'Y'Y<Vf}s, jLTa.lnos, and oul<j>opos meaning at 'Variance tvith.- hro}ibws Tep vOfJ-4' CO?l(01'?nably to the law P. L. 844 e, ofijs v6JJ.Os 'TOV'T<p the law next to this D. 21.10. Many of the adjectives belonging here also take the genitive when the idea of possession or connection is marked.- lLP-a. chiefiy in the meaning at the sa me tinw.- Ko<vwvla Tos .vopciut intercouTse with men P. R. 406 c, brtopofL'IJ -r(/J n<xluJJ.a.n attack on the fort T. 4. 23.

LOCATIVE DATIVE

The dative as the representative of the locative is used to express place and time.
1530.
a. On the instrumental dative of space and time, see 1528.

1531.

Dative of Place.- In

poetry the dative without a preposi-

tion is used to denote place.

a. Where a persan or thing is: u-rs JJ.CUI.f.' gpK<i talcing his stanil in the rnidle of the court 0 306, 'Yi! ~KH-ro she lay on the (J1'ound S. O. T. 12, >alH> 6p'"" to dwell arnong the mountains O. T. 1451. Often of the parts of the body (Hom. OJJ.(/J, Ka.pl71, etc.). "\Vith persons (generally in the plural) : .pmp<,.~s Tpw<uu<V conspicuous among the Tro,ians Z 477. ToIT< ' .vur'f/ A GS may be1ose up among them or a dative proper (fu?' them). b. Place whithe1' (limit of motion) : ,.,ol4' 7rfUE fell on the g?ound E 82, Ko<~ li op Oo ptt th y sword i nto its sheath K 333. 1532. After verbs of motion the dative, as distingnished from the locative, denotes direction towa?ds and is used of persons (1485), and is a form of the dative of interest. 1533. Many verbs capable of taking. the locative dative in poetry, require, in prose, the aid of a preposition in composition. The limit of motion is usually (1589) expressed by the accusative with a preposition (e.g. Eis, 7rp6s). 1534. In prose the dative of place (chiefiy place where) is used only of proper names: IIOo at Pytho, 'I"OJJ.O at the Isthrnus, 1;a.afJ.>< at Salamis, '0vJJ.71"lau< at Olympia, 'AOfJv'Y!u' at Athens (inscr.); especially with the names of Attic demes, as <'Pa.'f/po, 8op<Ko, MapaOGm. But lv Ma.paOwvt and > lla.-rata.s occur. Sorne deme-names require l>, as lv Kol71. 1535. Many adverbs are genuine locatives, as orKo<, ,.&.a.t, rravo'Y/fJ.<l, <'Pa'f/po; 'AOfJv17"'' ITaTa.<"' ; others are datives in form, as KfJKI.f.', lla.Ta<as. 1536. With names of countries and places, < is more common than the

352

SY~TAX

OF THE SD1PLE SEXTENCE

[1537

locative dative, aud, with the above exceptions, the place 1vlte1'C is expressed in Attic prose with lv. 1537. Verbs of ruling often take the dative, especial!y in Homer: MvpJ.I.L
6vea<FLP livatTtTE A 180, rt-yavr<tTtTLV {Jaa-l"evev '1} 59, 7Jpx< il' /J.pa a tf>< v kyap.p.vwv :E: 134. Rarely in prose: iyyii:aOai r<VL to serve as guide (leader) to some one, bnararev -nv< to be set ove1 one; iLpxELv nvi means only = to e archon (ITOowpov lipxovros 'AO'I}vaiots T. 2. 2). .Cp. 1371.

a. Only when stress is not laid on the idea of snpremacy is the dative, instead of the genitive (1370), used with verbs of ruling. 1538. It is not clear whether the dative with verbs of 1uling is a dative proper (for), a locative (among; cp. lv <Pat'IJ~<v /Lvaaae '1/ 62), or an instrumental (by). iLpxELv, f,"feaOat may take the dative proper, va<TtT<<v, {Jaa<<vELv, Kparev may take the locative dative. 1539. Dative of Time.- The dative without a preposition is commonly used to denote a defini te point of time (chiefly day, night, month, yea1, season) at which an action occurred. The dative contrasts one point of time with another, and is usually accompanied by an attributive. 1540. The dative denotes the time at wliich an action takes place and the date of an event.
raur'l}v p.v r'i}v f,p.piv a&ro ~iJ-<Lvav, rfi arepaiq. Kr . throughout that day they waited there, but on the day following, etc. X. H. 1. 1. 14. So rfi 1rpoupalq. the day before, rfi wrpq. the seconif, day, 'Ea<f>'I}{Jotwvos p.7Jvos I!Kry ( f,p.pq.) <f>Olvovros on the sixth of waning Elaphebolion A es. 2. 90, i!vy Kal vq. on the last of tlie month D. 18. 29; rplr'l' p.7Jvl in the third month L. 21. 1, 7r<p6vn r0 Ope< when summer was coming to an end T. 1. 30, l~7JKoar0 Ure< in the sixtieth year 1. 12; also with &pq. (XE<p.wvos &pq. in the winter season And. 1. 137). 1541. The names of the regular recurring festivals which serve to date an occurrence stand in the dative: llava01)valo<s at the Panathenaea D. 21. 156, ros !lwvaio<s at the Dionysia 21. 1, ras 7rop.1ras at the p1ocessions 21. 171, ros rpa"f'I'os at the representations of the tragedies Aes. 3. 176. v is rarely added. 1542. lv is added : a. To words denoting time when there is no attributive: lv r~ XELJl-WV< in winter X. O. 17.3; cp. 1444. b. Whet} the attributive is a pronoun (sometimes) : (lv) lKelvv ri f,p.pq.. c. To statements of the time within the limits of which an event may take place (where lvros with the genitive is common); to statements of how much time anything takes; with numbers, oi-yos, 1roMs, etc. Thus, lv rp<<Ylv -i}p.pa<s for (during) three days X. A. 4. 8. 8, o PrfJ!wv r lv 1.1ravn r0 xpov'l' 1rpaxOvra lv p.<(j. f,p.pq. 1Jw8fjva< it is not easy to set fo1th in a single day the acts of all time L. 2. 54, l';eaOaL r'l]v ta{Jo'l]v lv ovrws ol"f'l' XPOV4J to clear myself of calum~ny in so lnief a tirne P. A. 19 a. iv is rarely omitted in prose, and chiefiy when there is an attributive: !J-< vvKr! T. 6. 27. d. Al ways with adjectives or adverbs used substantively: lv r0 1rapovn, lv r0 ror<. e. To words denoting the date of an event, not a point of time: lv rfj 1rporpq. 7rp<a{Jelq. in the ji1st ernbassy Aes. 2. 123. Thuc. employs tv, as lv rfi v<Tr<palq. lKK7J<Tlq. in

THE ACCUSATIVE

353

the assen!bly held the day ajte1 1. 44, but usu. the simple dative, as p.axv in the baUle 3. 54, hdvv riJ tYfio'AiJ in ihat incu1sion 2. 20, ri '1T'podpq. lKKTJIYlr;. in the jirst assembly 1. 44. 1543. The dative and genitive of time are sometimes employed with only a slight difference (1447 a).
DATIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS

Many compound verbs take the dative because of their meaning as a whole. So vTXtY lwld out against, p.cf>trr/3'r)TE.v dispute with (1523 b). 1545. The dative is used with verhs compounded with uw (regularly), with many compounded with v, 71'{, and with some compounded with 'll'apa, 71'p{, 'll'pos, and ho, because the preposition keeps a sense that requires the dative.
1544.
iJ-{3'Atf;iis aonf! looking at him P. Charm. 162 d, 'lf'ilias p.'lf'otev ll.vllp<inrots to create expectations in men X. C. 1. 6. 19, auro<s l'1f'11'<1Y< ro 'E7JVLK6v the Greek jmce fell upon them X. A. 4. 1. 10, 11'KELvro aro<s they p1essed hmd upon them 5. 2. 5, tYvvatKetv aroZs to be theil accomplice in wr01!{J-doing 2. 6. 27, ~vvltYiiiYL M<'r4' 1f;euop.v4' they are conscious that Meletus is speaking falsely (i.e. they know it as weil as he does) P. A. 34 b, o!irot o 1rapry<!vovro {3M< these did not join the king X. A. 5. 6. 8, '1T'ap1Yrw Dp.Zv o K?)pv~ let the lwald come with us 3. 1. 46, 'E:,evo<t>wvn 'lT'pOtYrp<xov Vo v<iivltYKw two youths rem up to Xenophon 4. 3. 10, 'lt'oK<rOat rp fi.pxovrL to be subject to the TuleT l'. G. 510 c. a. So especially with verbs of motion and rest formed from UvaL, 11'1'1f'rv, TLIJvaL, rpX<Lv, elva<, ')'t'Y><tYOat, KetY8at, etc. 1546. Some verbs of motion compounded with 'lf'apa, 7repi, V'1f'6 take the accusative (1559). 1547. Some verbs have an alternative construction, e.g. 'lf'<p<fi.'A'A<Lv : nvl rL invest a peTson with something, ri rm surround something with something. 1548. Compounds of tYvv take the instrumental, compounds of lv take the locative dative. 1549. When the idea of place is emphatic, the preposition may be repeated: iJ-p.<lvavr<s lv -r?i 'ArrLK' remaining in .Attica T. 2. 23 ; but it is generally not repeated when the idea is figurative: -ros opKots ip.p.vwv abiding by one's oath I. 1. 13. p.era may be used after compounds of tYVv: p.er' lp.o IYVV'lf'EL he sailed in company with me L. 21. 8. 1550. The prepositions are more frequently repeated in prose than in poetry.

ACCUSATIVE

1551. The accusative is a form of defining or qualifying the verh. a. 'fhe accusative derives its name from a mistranslation (casus accusativtts) of the Greek ( 7j alniinKTj 'lf'rwtYts, properly casus e.tfectivus, 1554 a). 1552. A noun stands in the accusative when the idea it expresses is most GREEK GRAM. -23

354

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1553

immediately (in contrast to the dative) and most completely (in contrast to the genitive) under the influence of the verbal conception (in contrast to the nominative).
~553. The accusative is the case of the direct object (919). The accusative is used with all transitive verbs (and with some intransitive verbs used transitively), with sorne verbal nouns, and. with adjectives. ~554. The direct object is of two kinds: a. The internai object (object effected): o v~p -rv1r-rft 1ro.s ?T"I]yas the man stl"ikes 1nany blows.

N. 1.- Here the object is already contained (or implied) in the verb, and its addition is optional. The accusative of the internai object is sometimes called the accusative of content. The object stands in apposition to the result of the verbal action. The effect produced by the verb is eitber (1) transient, when the object is a nomen actionis, and disappears with the operation of the verb, as in p,dx7Jv p.<ixe<F8aL to fight a battle, or (2) permanent, and remains after the verbal action has ceased, as in retx_os T<Lxl!eLv to build a wall. The latter form is the accusative of result (1578). N. 2.- Almost any verb may take one of the varieties of the in tema! object.

b. The external abject ( object affected): vi]p

TV7rT~

Tv

1ra'ia the man strikes the boy. N. -Here the object is not contained in the verb, but is necessary to explain or define the character of the action in question. The external object stands outside the verbal action. ~555. Many verbs may take an accusative either of the external or of the internai object: TJ.tve<v lll\7Jv fell tirnber, TJ.tV<Lv Ts Tplxas eut a.t! the ha, Tlp.ve<v Oov open a raad, but <FTrovois or BpKLa TJ.tv<Lv, with a specialized verbal idea, to make a treaty by slaying a victim (pass. BpKLa TJ.t-IJ87J), TJ.tV<Lv o/56v make one's way (poet.), reLxljeLv xwplov fo7tify a place, but re<xl!etv Tetx_os build a wall. Cp. E. Supp. 1060: A. vKw<Fa viK7JV Tlva; p.a.Oev XPTi!w <FUev. B. Tril<Fiis "fvva"iKas, KT. A. Victorious in what victory? This I wm~ld lewn of thee. B. Over all women. Here the construction shifts from the internai to the exterual object.
1556. The direct abject of. an active transitive verb becomes the subject of the passive: 1ras v1ro -rov vops 'T'I1rnrat the boy is stntck by the man.

a. The object of a verb governing the genitive or dative as principal object may also become the subject of the passive (1340). 1557. In Greek many verbs are transitive the ordinary English equivalents of which are intransitive and require a preposition. So <F<WTriv TL, <F"fiv TL to lceep silence about sornething. 1558. Many verbs that are usually intransitive are also used transitively in Greek. Thus, a<F<{3ev sin against, ov<Fx<palvv be disgttsted at, xalpv 1ejoice at, 1je<F8at be pleasecl at, oaKpVv weep for. Cp. 1595 b.

THE ACCUSATIVE

355

a. Poetical : Q.(f(fE<v agitate, 1repv 1r60a pass on her way E. Hec. 53, 1r>.ev sail, KpoTai\e<v rattle along (KpoTEv strike Hdt. 6. 58), Mp.1re<v make shine, xopeue<v Oe6v, [(f(fELv Oe6v celebrate the god by cho1uses, by dancing. 1559. Many intransitive verbs are used transitively when compounded with a preposition, e.g. vap.rixe(f8a< fight over ag ain.- 1rop.rixe(f0at dtive off, d7rO(fTp<f>e(f0a< abandon, 1roxwpev leave. -15ta(3aive<v pass over, <a'lrev sail actoss, te~pxe(f8a< go thtough. -Ei(fLVa< come into the mind, el~r1rEv sail into.-eK{3aivE<v pass, KTp7retr0a< get out of the way of, il;avaxwpev shun, i~l~rra~rOat avoid.f'lrL(fTpaTEUELV march against.- KaTavavp.axv beat at sea, KaTa'll'oep.Ev subdue completely, KaTa7roireue(fOat reduce by policy. - !J.ETPXE(f0a< seek, pursue, p.eT<va< go in quest of. -1rapa(3aimv transgress. - 1repitva< go round, 7repd~rTa~r0a< surround. -1rpO(fO<KEv dwell in, 1rpo(f1ral!;ELv sing in praise of. - v1rep(3alvetv omit. V1re~pxe(f0a< escape from.- V7rpxe(f0at fawn on, v1ro6e(fOaL withstand, v1roxwpev shun, v<f>[(fTatr0aL Withstand.
1560. Conversely, many verbs that are usually transitive are used intransitively (with gen., dat., or with a preposition). Some of these are mentioned in 1591, 1592, 1595. Sometimes there is a difference in meaning, as dp~rKELv = satisfy, with accus., = please, with dat. 1561. The same verb may be used transitively or intransitively, often with little difference of signification. Cp. 1709. This is generaliy indicated in the treatment of the cases, e.g. al~rOve~rOal TL or T<vos perceive something, evOp.e~rOal n or T<v< consider something, p.p.<f>e(fOai TLva or T<v< blame sorne one. 1562. On ii p.o! T<vos and p. TLvos see 1400. With the inf. the accus. is usual ( dat. and inf. X. A. 3. 4. 35). xpfJ p. T<vos is poetical; with the inf. xpfr takes the accus. (except L. 28.10, where sorne read o<Kaiovs). (xpfJ is an old noun ; cp. xpew, xpeia need and 793.)
INTERNAL OBJECT COBJECT EFFECTEDJ

COGNATE ACCUSATIVE

1563.

The cognate accusative is of two kinds, of which the second

is an extension of the first. 1564. (I) The substantive in the accusative is of the same

origin as the verb.

1rol]v <t>>.vapiav <f>vapovTa talking mttch nonsense P. A. 19 c, ~vv<f>v-ye Tl] v <f>v-y?]v TaVT'lJV he shaTed in the recent exile 21 a, T?]v <v "2-aap.vL vavp.axliiv vavp.axf}(favres victorious in the sea-fight at Salamis D. 59. 97, Tas v1ro~rx~rm 8.s oros inri(fxvero the promises which he made 19. 47, 7} alTlii ;}v alnwvTa< the chmge they bring Ant. 6. 27. a. Sometimes the verb may be suppressed, as -i}p.'iv p.v exas Tli~re ( eilxop.a<) foT us these prayeTs A. Ch. 142. 1565. The cognate accusative occurs even with adjectives of an intransitive character: p.f}TE TL (focps O:.v r?]v helvwv ~ro<f>liiv p.f}TE dp.aO?]s Tl] v dp.aOiav being neithel' at all wise after the fashion of their wisdom nor ignorant after the fashion of the ir ignorance P. A. 22 e, rtp.ovs 1rol1J(fav rp.lav rolll.ve &~rre KT.

356
<ra.v, cp. 1598).

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[xs66

they disfranchised them in such a way that, etc. T. 5. 34 ( &.rtJ.tovs hroirwa.v = 1,riJ.tTJ1566. Passive : 'IT'O.<J.tos ho'A<J.t<To war was waged X. II. 4. 8. 1. 1567.

(II) The substantive in the accusative is of kinTed mean-

ing with the verb.

i~i)Mov H.'A'Ais Oous they went fo?th on other expeditions X. H. 1. 2. 17, rov lepov Ka.'AovJ.tevov 'IT'o.eJ.toV <rrpd.rev<ra.v they waged what is called the Sacred War T. 1. 112, 1,<r8vrJ<r< ra.urrJ r-l]v vo<rov he fell ill of this disease I. 19. 24, &.v8pw.,.ov <f>u<rv fJ'Aa.<rrwv born to man's estate S. Aj._760.

i568. Passive : .,.6'AeJ.tos lrapd.xBTJ war was stirretl up D. 18. 151. 1569. An extension of the cognate accusative appears in poetry with K<<rBa, <rrijva, Ka0lt"e.v and like verbs: ro'IT'ov, ovnva Kera the place in which he is situated S. Ph. 145, ri l!<rrrJK< .,.f7piv; why stands she on the rock? E. Supp. 987, rp[.,.ooa Ka.Olt"wv sitting on the tripod E. Or. 956. 1570. An attributive word is usually necessary (but not in Hom.) ; etherwise the addition of the substantive to the verb would be tautologous. But the attribute is omitted: a. When the nominal idea is specialized: rpv'Aa.K.s <f>v'Arlrre.v to stand sentry X. A. 2. 6. 10, <Popov </>pe.v to pay tribute 5. 5. 7. b. Wh en the substantive is restricted by the article: rv 7T'O<f1.ov 'IT'o.<(J.Eiv to wage the present war T. 8. 58, r-l]v 'IT'OJ.t'IT'-l]v 'IT'J.t'IT'v to conduct the procession 6.56. c. When a plural substantive denotes repeated occurrences: hpTJprlpXTJ<T< rprJpapxiis he performed the duty of t1iemrch D. 45. 85. d. In varions expressions: 'l\Uf''IT''a vK.v to win an Olympian victo?'Y T. 1. 126, r1}v vavJ.taxliv vKij<ra to be victorious in the sea-jight L. 19. 28, 06e.v r eva')'')'t'A<a to o.t}'er a sacrifice in hon01t1 of good news X. II. 1. 6. 37. e. In poetry the use of a substantive to denote a special form of the action of the verb is much extended: <rrclt"e<v alJ.ta to drip (drops of) blood S. Ph. 783, ApTJ 7rVV to breathe Wal' A. Ag. 375, 7rp oeoopKWS looking (a look of) jire T 446. This use is common, especially in Aristophanes, with verbs signifying the look of another than the speaker: {JM1re.v v.1rv to look m1tstard Eq. 631, {Jbmv 7r<<rrliv to look unbelief Co m. fr. 1. 341 (No. 309) ; cp. " looked his faith" : Il olmes. 1571. The substantive without an attribute is (rarely) added to the verb as more emphatic form of statement: 'Ai)pov .rJp<v to talle sheeT nonsense Ar. Pl. 517, vfJpv {Jplt'etv to insult grievo1tsly E. H. F. 708. Often in Euripides. 1572. The substantive may be omitted, leaving only the adjectival attribute: 1ra<rov ot,..ll.i)v (scil. 'IT'TJ'Ynv) stTike twice (a double blow) S. EL 1415, rovrov v-

Kpa')'ov WS oi'YiS (SCil. 'IT'TJ')'ti_s) 7ra{o-e<ev they Cal/ed OUt that he had dealt hi?n toci (1063) few blows X. A. 5. 8. 12. Cp. 1028. 1573. Usually an adjective, pronoun, or pronominal adjective is treated as a neuter substantive. Cp. J.teyclll.' fl.aprclvv to comrnit gmve m-ro?'s D. 5. 5 with J.''YL<rTa J.taprf,J.tara J.taprclvovrn P. G. 525 d. The singular adjective is used in certain common phrases in prose, but is mainly poetical ; the plural is ordinarily used in prose.

rs8r]

THE ACCCSATI\'E

3ii7

i}o 'Y<iiv poet. ( = i}Ov -yt'/l.wra -yo.. iiv) to Zauuh swectly, p.i-ya (if'<Doos) >f<vo<ra< he is a great liar, !J.'Ya rppovfwri.s hi rorcp highly elated at this X. A. 3. 1. 27, Mii!;ov rppov he is too proud 5. 6. 8, r rwv 'EXX?jvwv </>povEv to be on the side of the G1eeks D. 14. 34, !J.-yurrov iovvavro had the g1eatest influence L. 30. 14, oe<v {Jpl!;~<v to malt1eat terribly X. A. 6. 4. 2, raur f-rrperY{Jevowv we fulfilled ou1 mission as ambassadcws in the same way D. 19. 32, rl fJov<ra< iJ!J.v xpfw&a<; trhat use does he wish to make of us ii' X. A. 1. 3. 18 (=riva {Jo:X.era< xpelri.v xvrwBaL, cp. XPfi68al TLVL xp<lav P. L. 868 b).

1574. Passive : roro ouK >ferY81/rYav they were not deceived in this X. A. 2. 2. 13, rara ouods av ?rE<rYB<i'l no one would be peTsuaded of this P. L. 836 d. 1575. For a cognate accusative in conjunction with a second object, see 1620. 1576. Note the expressions O<Ka!;v olKT/V decide a case, o<Kaf<rYIJa.< olKT/v r<vl go to law with somebody, ouhK<<v -yparp?jv nva. indict somebody, </><'Y<<v olK71v nv6s be put on one' s t1ial fol' something; -yp&.rperY&a.l r<va -ypa.rp?jv indict one for a public o.tfence, </><-yv -ypa.rp?jv be p1<t on one's tl'ial fol' a public o.tfence. Also ci-ywvl!;erYIJa< rYr&.owv ( = ci-ywva <Traiilov) be a contestant in the mce-comse, vKv <Trao<o be 1Jicto1ious in the race-couTse, vKv 1ilK71v win a case, vKv 'YW!J.T/V cany a 1'esolution (pass. 'YWJ1.1! i}rrarY&a<), orpf...v olKT/V lose a case. 1577. The (rarer) dative (rp6{Jcp rap{Jv, fJ<a.lcp &av&.rcp ci?ro&vyfrYK<<v, rpe-ye<v rpv-yfl) expresses the cause (1517), manner (1513), or means (1507).
ACCUSATIVE OF RESULT

The accusative of result denotes the effect enduring after the verbal action has ceased.
1578.
~Kos our&.Ga.< to smite (and th us make) a wou nd E 361 ( so ou'A~v lf...avE<v y 74), ?rp<rY{J<E<v rT)v elp?jv11v to negotiate the peace (go as ambassadors (1rprY{Jm) to make the peace) D. 19. 134, but 7rp<rY{JE<<v 1rpw{Jelri.v to go on an embassy Dinarchus 1. 16, v6J1.<rYJ1.a K6..-r<<v to coin mo ney Hdt. 3. 56, rY?rovofis, or 5pK<a, -r!J.VE<v (1555).

1579. Verbs signifying to e,(fect anything (a.tp<<v raise, a.V~<<v exalt, o<oarYKE<v teach, rp</><<v rear, ..-a.<o<<<v train) show the result of their action upon a substantive or adjective predicate to the direct object: "' 8fjfla.l l ouK ha.lO<vGav Ka.K6v Thebes did not t1ain thee to be base S. O. C. 919, Torov rprp<<v r< Ka.! ali~<<P !J.-ya.v to -nurse and exalt him into greatness P. R. 665 c, t?ro<Kooo!J.?jrYavr<s aur v>f11Mr<pov ra ising it higher T. 7. 4. Snell predicate nouns are called prole)'tic. PaRsive : !J.-ya.s fiC JKpoD cf>l'A<..-..-os 11V~11ra.< Philip has g1own from a mean to be a mighty pe1son D. 9. 21. Cp. 1613.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

The accusative denotes extent in space and time. 1581. Space.- The accusative denotes the space or way over which an action is extended, and the measure of the space traversed.
1580.
i~<'Aa.v

IL-y v ( Grpar<fiv) rYr<vfis oos to lead an army ove1 1W1'row 1'0ads X. C. 1. 6. 43, ura.&!J.Os rp<Ls, ?ra.pa.Ga-y-yri.s <tKorY< Kai oo he advances three stages, twenty-

358

SYNT AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

two pamsangs X. A. 1. 2. 5, <hrXE< 7} IIMnua rwv 671f3wv a-ralovs [3op:f,1wvra Plataea is seventy stades distant jiom Thebes T. 2. 5.
a. This use is analogons to the cognate accusative after verbs of motion
(l~6ovs l~eB<v,

1rv liarrav).

Time.- The accusative denotes extent of ti me. lfp.etvev T)pipiis i1rr he remained seven days X. A. 1. 2. 6, ~vp.p.axliiv hOL'qa-avro Karv h71 they made an alliance fm a hund1ed years T. 3. 114. 1583. The accusative of time implies that the action of the verb covers the entire period. When emphasis is laid on the uninterrupted duration of an action, 1rapd with the accusative (1692. 3. b) and ilt with the genitive (Hl85. 1. b) are used. The accusative of time is rarely employed where the dative (1540) is properly in place: rf]ve rl]v 7}p.piiv Aes. 3. 7. 1584. Duration of life may be expressed by -ye-yovws: lfr71 -ye-yovws i(Jop.f]Kovra seventy yea1s old P. A.17 d. (Also by eva< and the genitive, 1327.) 1585. To mark (a) how long a situation has lasted or (b) how much time has elapsed since something happened, an ordinal is used without the article, but ofteu with the addition of oroa-i. The current day or year is included. Thus (a) il]v p.?)rpa rewr-lja-ia-av rplrovlfros rovrt my mothe1who died two yems ago L. 24. 6, t'lr<oef]p..,Ke rpir71v 1)71 7}p.piv he has been in the city since day befole yeste1day P. Pr. 309 d. (b) d7r7!'Y'Yfi71 <l>1t7r7ros rplrov 1) rhaprov hos rovri 'Hpat'ov rexos 7rowpKwv this is the third or fourth year since it was announced that Philip was besieging fort Heraeum D. 3. 4. 1586. On the accusative of extent in degree, see 1609. With a comparative we find 1roM and l-yov as well as 1ro.;; and )\l-y'l' (1514); and al ways rl, r!, olv with the comparative. 158'1. Time and degree are often expressed by prepositions with the accusative. See. Prepositions under O.p.rpl, avd, td, i1rl, Kara, 1rapa, 1rp6s, v1r6. 1582.
TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE (IN POETRY)

1588. In poetry after verbs of motion the accusative may be used without a preposition to express the goal.
ll.a-rv Ka!LEov p.owv having come to the city of Cadmus S. O. T. 35, 7rp.if;op.v v<v 'E!.a we will convey her to Greece E. Tro. 883. Of pe1sons in Hom. (especially with lKvop.a<, rKw, lKtivw = 1each) and in the lyric parts of the rama: p.v71a-Tf}pas O.rptKero came unto the suitors a 332. Cp. "arrived our coast" : Shakesp. In Hdt. 9. 26 rj>ap.v T)p.as lKv<a-fiat means we declare that it bejits us.

1589. The limit of motion is also expressed by -oe (ll.,rrve Hom., in prose, 'Aiif}vaje = '.A.81)vis +<; xap.j< or xap.je = xap.is + oe, Cp. xap.a-l; otKae) and, regularly in prose, by <is, l.,.L, 1rap, 1rp6s, (with a persan) with the

ws

accusative.
EXTERNAL OBJECT (OBJECT AFFECTED)

Of the many transitive verbs taking this accusative the following deserve mention:
1590.

THE ACCI.JSATIVE

359

1591. (I) To do anytlU:ng to or say anything of a person. a. ev (Ka)\.ws) ?rotii:v, piv (rarely with 7rpdTTELv), eep"ferev, vtvavat, tb</>EhE (also with dat. ), Oepa7rEVELP, KctKWS 7rOtev, KctKOVP, KctKOVP"fEv, {3)1.<l7rTELV, tKEv, vf3pl!<tv, {3tajEIJ"0a<, p.El{3eu0at requite, Tip.wpeuOat punish, )\.vp.alveuOat (also with dat.), )l.w{3iu0at (also with dat.). b. Ev (Kahws) h"fELI', e)l.o"fEv, KOhaKEVELv, Ow7rEV<tv, 7rpouKvviiv, KaKws )l."fEL>,
KaKOhO"f<v, KaKr(yopev, )\.ot/5opEv.

1592. uvp.q,{pELv and )\.vutre)\.v .)JI'Ojit, f3o7J0Ev help, hotopEirOat rail at take the dat., tKEv injuTe and vf3pljELv insult also take s nva or 1rp6s nva. 1593. 1594. 1595.
Eil

(KaKws) K~vELv, 1rauxetv are used as the passives of

(KaKws)

h"fELV, 'll"OLELP.

Cp. 1752.

Many of the above-mentioned verbs take a double accusative (1622).

(II) Verbs expressing emotion and its manifestations.

a. </>o{3EtiJ"0at, ett!va<, Tpev, iK7rh-f}rreu()at, KctTa7rh-f}Tre0"0at feaT, 7rT-f}O"O"ELV CTouch bejo1e, eu)\.af3r0at bewaTe of, Oappev have no feaT of (have confidence in), alr8at stand in awe of, rLluxvveuOat feel shame befoTe, livuxEprLlvE<v be disgu.sted at, l)l.eEv pity, 1ru8ev, 8p7Jvev, orLKpVELv, KM.e<> (K)I.alELv) lament, weep oveT. b. xalpeLP T~joice at and fjeiJ"8a< be pleased to heaT take the accus. of a person only in the poets and only with a predicate participle (2100). aluxvvEu0rL<, xalpELv, fjoeiJ"Oat, 15vuxEprLlve<v usually take the dat. in prose. 8r1.ppev may take the instr. dat. (Hdt. 3. 76). 1596. (III) Verbs of swearing. op.vvvrLt swem by ( ros Oeovs, pass. ZEs op.JJp.oTa<) and sweaT to ( Tov IJpKov, pass. 0 opKOS op.JJp.orat). So brtopKEV sweaT .falsely by. a. op.wva< Tos eeovs may be an abbreviation of op.vvvat IJpKov (internai object)
Twv 0Ewv.

b. The accusative is used in asseverations with the adverbs of swearing p.a, oU p.d, va.L p.d, v1]. Nay, by Zeus: ~J. (Tv) !lla, o p. (Tv) !lla. Yea, by Zeus: val~J. (rv) flla, vi) (ro) !lia. p.a is negative, except when preceded by val. p.a may stand alone wben a nega-

tive precedes (often in a question) or when a negative follows in the next clause: ~J. Tov 'A?ro)\.)l.w, oiix: Ar. Thesm. 261). p.a is sometimes omitted after o, and after val: ov Tv "Ovp.1rov S. O. T. 1088, val riiv K6p.v Ar. Vesp. 1438. c. The name of the deity may be omitted in Attic under the influence of sudden scrupulousness: !J. rv- o uv 'Y< not you, by- P. G.46e. 1597. (IV) Various other verbs. </>EV"fv flee .fi'Om, :rrotopiiiJ"Kv escape .fTom, tvEopEvELv lie in wait for, q,edvE<v anticipate, q,vM.rreiJ"8ru guaTd onesel,f against, p.6vEu8at defend oneself against, avedvELv escape the notice of, p.vELv wait foi', iK)I.el'TrEtv aud 7rtE17rEL> give out, fail (T O"Tparevp.a o IJ"ros 7r)\.<7rE com .failed the anny X. A. 1. 5. 6). l.598. The accusative is rarely found after verbal nouns and adjec-

tives, and in pe1iplm1Htic expressions equivalent to a transitive verb. (This usage is post-Homeric and chiefly poetical.)

360

SYNT AX OF THE SL111PLE SENTENCE

[1599

xo:s 1rpo1ropsrbs ( 7rpo7rf17rOUITa) escmting the libations A. Ch. 23, -r flETwpa <f>pontiTri}s a speculato1 about tl~ings abuve the earth l'. A. 18 b, 7r<<JTi}f1oves 1j<Jav -r 7rpo<Ji}Kovm they were acquainttd with their duties X. C. 3. 3. 9, 1rb"he!MJs l1.1ropa 7r6p<f1os war p1oviding difficulties (things for which there is no provision) A. Pr. 904, 1ro"hM <TvviiTrwp (a ho use) full of guilty secrets A. Ag.1090, <T <f>r!/;tp.os able to escape thee S. Ant. 787; l!l;apvbs p.< ( = /;apvop.a<) r. lpwrwp.eva say' no' to the question l'. Chann. 158 c, reiJviT< -ro/ Met ros 1ro<Jrb"hovs they are in mo1tal fear of the

envoys D. 4. 45 ; ot!Jer cases 1612.

1599. Elliptical Accusative.- The accusative is sometimes nsed elli ptically.
ohos,
1rp6s
<T

the no excuse 1 Ar. Ach. 345.

IT rot (scil. Ka"hw) ho 1 you there, I am calling you 1 Ar. Av. 274, tJ-17, IJdiJv r"hfis p.e 1rpooova< ( = P-1!, 1rps IJwv IT alrw) do not, I implo1e thee by gods, have the heart to leave me 1 E. Ale. 275, p.i} p.o< 7rp6<f>a<J<v (scil. wipx)

Cp. 946.

FREE USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE

ACCUSATIVE OF RESPECT

To verbs denoting a state, and to adjectives, an accusative may be added to denote a thing in 1espect to which the verb or adjective is limited.
1600. a. The accusative usually expresses a local relation or the instrument. The word restricted by the accusative usually denotes like or similar to, good or better, bad or wone, a physical or a mental quality, or an emotion. 1601. The accusative of respect is employed a. Of the parts of the body: o ll.vOpw1ros rv Krvl\ov l\)'e the man has a pain in his jinge1 P. H. 462 d, rv<f>Ms r r' wra r6v T vov rd r' OtJ-tJ-ar' d blind art thou in ems, and mi nd, and eyes S. O. T. 371, 1rbas WKs 'Axtl\"hus Hom. N. -The accusative of the part n apposition to the whole (985) belongs here, as is seen by the passive. Cp. rv ,.Mi( avxha Mm he snwte on the neck A 240 (f3dl\ Oopov. Ap'Y/a Kar' avxha <I> 406) with {3{3h'f/aL KPWPa thou art smitten in the abdomen E 284. b. Of qualities and attributes (nature, form, size, name, birth, number, etc.): o<a<f>tpe< 'Yvv1) vopos r17 <j>r!<J<v woman differs frorn man in nature P. R. 453 b, oi~ lioLKV OV'f/T:s aeavary)G"L ftJ-aS ml eoos pl!;LV 1W1' is it seemly that mOJtal vJomen should 1ival the immortals in form and appearance e 213, 1roratJ-6s, Kuovos ovop.a, vpos Jo 1r!Jpwv a 1iver, Cydnus by na me, two plethra in width X. A. 1. 2. 23 (so with fr.f;os, {3d0os, MhOos), 1r:ijOos ws <ITXiw< about two tho1tsand in numbe1' 4. 2. 2, )l..!i;ov o<Jr<s yvos tell me of what race thou art K Bacch. 460. c. Of the sphere in general: oHvol P-<ix11 ter1ible in battle A. Pers. 27, )'.!v<JIJ rl]v OLltPOLaV tTan.fer youtselves in thouyht Aes. 3. 153, TO fJ-EP f7r' p,ol orxop.a<, TO o' t1rl qol <J<YW<Tf~a< so fm as I myself Wlts eoncmnerl I was lost, but through you am saved X. C. 5. 4. i 1. Often of inddinite relations: ,.o.vra KaK6s base in all things s. o. T. 1421' rara yaeos ~KO:(JTOS iwwv, fi7rep ITO<j>os, a~ .ua81Js, rara 0~ KaK6s each one 1~( 11s is yuo!l in motters in whir,h he is ski/led, but bad in t/wse in which he is ignumnt l'. Lach. Hl4 d.

I6II)

THE ACCUSATIVE

361

1602. (thy) arrn 1603. employed,

.pen}v.

Very rarely after substantives: xepas alxp.7JT'fJs a warri01 valiant with ,. 242, ve.vlat T<is /Jif;m youths by their appearance L. 10. 29. For the acccusative of respect the instrumental datiye (1516) is also and also the prepositions els, KrtT&., 1rp6s, e.g. ota.if>lpetv .p<TY or els

1604. Not to be confused with the accusative of respect is the accusative after intransitive adjectives ( 1565) or after the passives of 1632. 1605. The accusative of respect is probably in its origin, at !east in part, an accusative of the internai object.

ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE

Many accusatives marking limitations of the verbal action serve the same function as adverbs.
1606. 1607. Most of these adverbial accusatives are accusatives of the interna! object: thus, in Tli,os o <?r< but at last he said, T{os is to be regarded as standing in apposition to an unexpressed object of tlte verb- words, which were the end. Many adverbial accusatives are thus accusatives in apposition (991) and some are accusatives of respect (1600). It is impossible to apportion al! cases among the varieties of the accusatives ; many may be placed under different heads. The use of adjectives as adverbs (p.ya ,. ovcnos very 1ich) is often derived from the cognate accusative with verbs (p.l-ya ,-ovTev). 1608. Manner. -Tp6,-ov Ttv&. in some way, Tlva Tp6,-ov in what way '! r6ve (Toi!Tov) Tov Tpbtrov in this way, trcivTa Tp6trov in every way (also ?rrtVTl TpO?r'fl), T?)v TrtXl<TT7JP (66v) in the quiclcest way, Ti)v <8av (606v) stmightforward, ?rpoKa, wp<liv gmtis (1616), lK7Jv after the fashion of (olK7Jv To~bTou lilce an archm P. L. 705 e), ,-p6if>arrtv in pretence (~1r<< ?rpoif>a<rtv tr' 'E7J<rtrbvTov he sailed professedly for the Hellespont Hdt. 5. 38), xciptv for the sake of (lit. favouT): o T?)v 'A87Jvalwv xciptv lrrTpaTeovTo did nut engage in the expedition out of good will to the .Athenians Hdt. 5. ()!J, To xciptv foJ what Teason ? Ar. Plut. 53, ri) v rri)v fjKw xcipLV for thy sake I have come S. Ph. 1413. Cp. 99;3. 1609. Measure and Degree. -p.ya, p.eycia gT~atly, 1roM, 1roa 1n11ch, To 1roM, T ,-oa for the most paTt, Bcrov as much as, o/Uv, p.~Mv not at all, rorroTov so rnuch, Tl somewhat, pxT,v or T-l) v pxT,v at all with o or p.f, (v T</) 1rapaxpfjp.a oK ~rrnv .pxi)v p()ws {3ovcvcrr8aL it is utte1ly impossible to deliberate co?'Tectly o:ffhand Ant. 5. 73). 1610. Motive.- Tl why ? TOTo, TaTa foT this Teason ( cognate accus.) : Tl -1j8cs q11ifl ( CUT) Venisti = Tf va i~tP 'ljOES; TOTO xafpw ( = TrtT'YJP Ti) V xapv xalpw) theJ~foTe I Tejoice, aT TrtTa fjKw foT this veTy Teason have I come P. Pr. 310 e, ToT' 1Lxe<cr8c fuT this 1eason you. aTe vexed X. A. 3. 2. 20. 1611. Time and Succession (1582) : To vv now, TO 1raat of old, 1rp6r<pov befoJe, T ,-p6Tcpov the formeT time, trpwToP fint, To KaT' .pxcis in the beginning, To 1rpwTov in the first plce, TO TEwTaov iu: tlw last place (for TO c6TEpov in a series use ~?rnTa. or i!,-c,Ta Oc!), To ottrbv foT the futuTe, .Kp.f,v at the point, just, Katpov 'il! seaso n.

362

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1612

-TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB

1612. A compound expression, consisting of the accusative of an abstract substantive and 7ro<ei~Oa.<, rlOe~Oa.<, lixe<v, etc., is often treated"'as a simple verb ; and, when transitive, governs the accusative : r-I] v xwpiv Ka.ra.pop.a.s eliv t7ro<ero ( = t:f)ero) he ravaged the country by his incursions 'l'. 8. 41, l!lou tf>Oops ifdJtf>ous i[Oevro ( = 1f!7Jif>l~avro) they voted for the destruction of Ilium A. Ag. 814, p.op,tf>?]v i[xw tv plv 1rpwr&. ~o< (=~v p,p,tf>op,a<) I blame thee first for one thing E. Or. 1069, r. ' v !L~'<' ?)~TLP r~xLS ( = 1rLavOriveL) what lies between thou hast no memo1y of S. O. C. 583. See. 1598. So with other periphrases in poetry: rva. p,7JKVvw M-yov ( = p,a.Kp6repov 7rpo~tf>wvw) I speak at length to my children S. O. C. 1120, el o p.' ci!' riel M-yous l~?)pxes ( 1fpxou -ym) if thou didst, always (begin to) address me thus S. El. 556.

EXTERNAL OBJECT AND PREDICATE ACCUSATIVE

1613. Verbs meaning to appoint, call, choose, consider, make, name, show, and the like, may take a second accusative as a predicate to the direct object.
~rpannv a.fJrv chre<~e he appointed him general X. A. 1. 1. 2, 1ra.ripa lp,~ Ka.ere you were wont to call me jathe7" 7. 6. 38, a.ipe~Oa< arv Tv 'Ivwv f3a~<i <KMrf}v to choose the king of the Indians himself to be arbitra tor X. C. 4. 8, o -y.p lKa.wv o6re Tos K<ZKOS p,rir7JV XP7J~ros vop.ljeLv o6Te ros XP7J~ros KaKos for it is not just to consider bad men good at random, or good men bad S. O. T. 609, Tp,60eov ~rpa.r7J-yov lxe<poTOV7J~a.v they elected Timotheus general X. H. 6. 2. 11,. r-I] v ~-y?)v ~ou ~u-yxwp7J~'" 8-f}~w I shall conside7' y our silence as consent P. Crat. 435 b, ia.uTov e~1r6r7Jv 7rE7rol7JK<v he has made himself master X. C. 1. 3. 18, lti~ lp, ~ v Oep&.1rovra. 1ro<ol~11 if you ma lee me y our servant X. O. 7. 42, els ro-s "E7Jvas ~auTo v ~otf><~r?Jv 1rapxwv showing yourself a sophist before the Greelcs P. Pr. 312 a, ep,a.O?] 1r&.vra. 1rapxev to rend er eve1ything easy to lea1n X. . 20. 14. Cp. 1579.

:a.

1614. The absence of the article generally distinguishes the predicate noun from the object: 7r7J'Y'Yero Tos KOaKas ros aliroiJ 7rou~<wTcirovs rwv 1rorwv 7ro<f}~e<v he promised to make his jlatte1ers the richest of the citizens L. 28. 4. 1615. Especially in Plato and Herodotus, after verbs siguifying ta name, to call, the predicate noun may be connected with the extemal object by (a redundant) eva.L (911); ~otf><~T?]v vop,a)ov~L Tov li,vpa eva.< thPy ca/l the man a sophist P. Pr. 311 e, l1rwvup,liv ~XEL ~p,Kp6s re Ka.l p,-yas eva.< he is called both short and tall P. Ph. 102 c. This is due to the analogy of verbs signifying to think or say (1041). 1616. A predicate accusative may stand in apposition to the object: liwKa wpe<v T. Mrpa. I gave. them the p7ice of thei7 ransom as a free g1jt D. 19. 170. 1617. This use is the source of many adverbial accusatives (993, 1606 ff.). 1618. Passive : both tl1e object and the predicate accusative of the active construction become nominative (1743) in the passive comtructiou: u.(!ros ~rpa-

THE ACClJSATIVE

363

'r'Y/"fDS ?ipt!B'Y/ he himself was chosen general J,. 12. 65, a!lrol vop.oOI-rat KX'Y/0-fJr;ovrat

they shall thernselves be called lawgivers l'. L. ()81 d.

INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL OBJECT WITH ONE VERB

Many verbs take both an internal and an external object. 1620. The external object refers to a person, the internal object (cognate accusative, 1563 ff.) refers to a thing. Here the internai object stands in closer relation to the verb.
1619.

o 7rOXp.os dlJJ,v'1r;rov 7ratildiv avroPs 7ralilV<7 the war taught them a lesson they will hold in everlasting remembrance Aes. 3. 148, ror;orov ~xOos <xealpw r;e I hate thee with such an hate S. El. 1034, MX'1r6s p.e -ypc!.lf;aro r?)v -ypaq/qv ra~T?JV Meletus brought this accusation against me P. A. 19 b, gxKos, -r6 JJ.tv {Jc!.Xe the wound that he dealt him E 705 (1578), Mt/..nc!.o'l}s o r?)v v MapaOm p.c!.x?Jv ros {Jap{Japovs vKfJr;is Miltiades who won the battle at JJfarathon over the barbarians Aes. 3. 181, rov livilpa T~1rTetv rs 7rX?J-y<is to strike the man the blows Ant. 4. 'Y 1, xaXor;l JJ.< roro ro ~voJJ.a they give me this appellation X. O. 7. 3. 1621. Passive (1747): 1r.r;av Oepa1reliiv Oepa1rev6JJ,evos receiving every manner of service P. Phae. 255 a, T~1rTE<70at 1revrf}<ovra 1r X?J"(ds to be sttuck jifty blows Aes. 1. 139, 7} Kplr;ts, ~}v Kple?J the sentence that was prono1mced upon him L. 13. 50, rs JJ.c!.xis, llr;is IT.!pr;at T]rrfJO?Jr;av w I omit the battles in which the Per:sians were defeated I. 4. 145, 5voJJ.a gv K<KX'1f.Lvot ~tKeXtwrat called by the one name of Sicilians T. 4. 64. 1622. So with verbs signifying to do anything to or say anything of a person (1591): 1roXM. d-yaOt JJ,.s 1rol'1r;ev he did you much good L. 5. 3, ravri JJ. 7rOto<Tt that's what they are doing tome Ar. Vesp. 696, rt rotara bratvw A-y?Jr;lX<iov I praise .Agesilaus for such merits X. Ages. 10. 1, roPs KoptvOlovs 1roXXc!. re xal KaKt ~Xe-ye he said many bad things about the Corinthians I-ldt. 8. 61. For the accusative of the thing, ev (KaXws), KaKws may be substituted; and els and 1rp6s with the accusative occur. 1623. The accusative orthe person may depend on the idea expressed by the combination of verb and accusative of the thing (1612) ; as in roPs 1roXep.lovs elp-yri<TOat KaKc!. to have do ne harm to the enemy L. 21. 8 (here elp-yc!.r;Oat of itself does not mean to do anything to a person ). 1624. Wh en the dative of the person is used, something is done for (1474), not to him : 1rc!.vra i1rol?]r;av rois d1roOavor;tv they rendered all honours to the dead X. A. 4. 2. 23. els or 1rp6s with the.accusative is also employed. 1625. Passive of 1622: lJr;a; liXXa 7} 1r6Xts i}iltKe'iro all the other 1vrongs that the State has sujfered D. 18. 70. 1626. Verbs of dividing (vlJJ,etv, KaravJJ,etv, iltatpev, -rJJ,vetv) may take two accusatives, one of the thing divided, the other of its parts (cognate accus.). Thus, Kpos ro r;rpaTEvJJ.a KarlvetJJ.< il wileKa p.lp?J Cyrus divided the army into twelve divisions X. C. 7. 5. '13. s or Kard may be used with the accusative of the parts. 162'7. Passive: ilqfp?JTO.t 7} d-yop rTrapa p.p?J the .Agom is di1,irlPd into four parts X. C. 1. 2. 4. s and Karc!. ma.y be used with the accusative of the parts.

364

SYNTAX OF TIIE SI:\1PLE SENTEXCl':

(162~

DOUBLE OBJECT WITH VERBS SIGNIFYING TO ASK, DEMAND, ETC.

1628. Verbs signifying to ask, clothe or unclothe, couceal, demand, (lej)7ive, pers1wde, 7'Wmind, teach, take two abjects in the accusative,

one of a persan, the other of a thing.

ov .,-o.,-' lpwT(:J < that's not the question I'm asking you Ar. Nub. 641; X<Twvo. Tov o.v.,-o K<vov iJfJ-</>i<< he put his own tunic on hirn X. C. 1. 3. 17, loo o' 'A-rr6wv auTos KoVwv EfJ-. XPTJT?'Jpliiv eOfj.,-a. lo Apollo himself divests me of rny omcular ga1b A. Ag. 1269; Ti) v Ov"'ta'T'po. ~KpV'Trn Tov OavaTov .,-o vopos he concealed frorn his daughter her husband's death L. 32. 7; Kpov alTEv 'Ti'oo. to ask Cyrus for boats X. A. 1. 3 14, ws hw 'Ti'OT T<va 1} 'Ti'pii~afJ-TJ" fJ-teov 1} fTTJG'a that I eter exacted or asked pay of any one P. A. 31 c; 706Twv Ti)v TfJ-i}v 'Ti'OT<p w he depri!Jes rne of the value of these things D. 28. 13; t!J-s ToTo o ,.e[()w I cannat persuade you of this P. A. 37 a; vo.fJ-viww t!J-s Ka.! .,-os Ktvoiivovs I will remind .yon of the dangers also X. A. 3. 2. 11 ; ooe!s loiOo.~l fJ-< TauTTJ> .,-i]v TX"'IJ" no body

ta11ght me this art X. O. 19.16. 1629. Both person and thing are equally governed by the verb. The accusative of the persan is the external object; the accusative of the thing is sometimes a cognate accusative (interna! accusative). 1630. Some of these verbs also take the genitive or dative, or employ prepositions. Th us lpwTv Ttva 'Ti'Epl nvos, aiTEv ( o.l.,-fJo.l) .,., 'Ti'apa nvos, cl.'Ti'ar<p<v
OI' rpatp<0a.l TLV<i 'TLVO$ (nvbs n) (1304), Or TLvl TL (1483) i VO.fJ-L}WrJKLV TLV<i nvos (1356); ,.a.,l5euetv Ttva nvt or TLv Els (or 'Ti'pos) with the accusative.

1631. The poets employ this construction with verbs of cleansing (a form of dep1iving) : xpbo. vifrro ii!J-TJV he was washing the b1ine flmn his skin !224, aLfJ-a Ka'OTJpov '2.a.p'Ti'7Joova. cleanse the blood from Sarpedon TI 6(i. And with other verbs (in tragedy), e.q. TfJ-wp8a.t avenqe on, fJ-ETE8v seek to avenge on, JLETLva< execute judgment on, 'Ti'LKi}'Ti'T<Lv charge. 1632. Passive (1747): ho {JaG'<lws 'Ti'E'Ti'pii"YJ-Lvos Tos q,bpovs havinq had the tri!mte demanded of him by the king 'r. 8. 5, iiot ,,.,.ovs rl7r<Tp7JvTa.t all who have been dep1'ivecl of theil horses X. C. 6. 1. 12, ovK 1f<l(}ovro T "Y'YEflVTa. they u;ould not aedit the news Hdt. 8. 81, p.ovtKi}v ,.a.toEVO<ls having been instTucted in music J>. Men ex. 23<l a (here fJ-OV<Kfl is 11ossible), ovov lio o<MK<Ta.< livOpw,.os 1} e'Ti'turi}p.TJv man is taught nothing else except knowlege P. Men. 87 c. 1633. The accusative of extent (1580) is freely used in the same sentence with other accusatives, as v7rEpEVqK6vTEs Tv AevKa.olwv lOJLv .,-;s vo.s havinq hauled the ships across the isthrnus of Le1tcas T. 3. 81.

On the accusative of the whole and part, see 985; on the accusative subject of the infinitive, see 1972 ff.; on the accus.ative absolute, see 2076. See also under Anacoluthon.
TWO VERBS WITH A COMMON OBJECT

1634. The case of an abject common to two verbs is generally that demanded by the nearer : oti 15 Tos 'Ti'a<oo.,-pl{3a.t> e-yKa."'Aev otiO' iK{Ja<<> lK .,.[;;,, 'Ti'oewv we must not accuse the trainer or banish him from the cities P. G. 460 d.

PREPOSITIONS

365

a. The farther verb may contain the main idea : 'TI"trip.fj. Ka.! d:troooK<p.a!e< rurl he censures some and rejects them at the scrutiny L. 6. 33. ~635. The construction is usually ruled by the participle, not by the 1illite verb, when they have a common object but different constructions, and especially when the object stands nearer the participle: rour'l' oos rryep.ova.s 1ropeve<TfJa< hll.ev/J"ev f,ITvxws having given him guides he ordered him to proceed quietly X. C. 5. 3. 53 ; and whcn the corn mon object stands between, as 7rporrrr<IJ"6nes roiS 1rpdrrots rp?roviJ"t falling upon the joremost they put them to flight T. 7. 53. a. Sometimes the finite verb regulates the construction, as xa.li..!ITiis 7ra.p<K<ll.euero roZs "Ell.li.?)<T< he summoned the G1eeks and exhorted them X. A. 1. 8. 11.
PREPOSITIONS

Prepositions define the relations of a substantivai notion to the predicate.

1636.

a. All prepositions seem to have been adverbs originally and mostly adverbs of place; as adverbs they are case-forms. Severa! are locatives, as 1r<pl.
163'7. The prepositions express primarily notions of space, then notions of time, and :finally ara used in figurative relations to denote cause, agency, means, manner, etc. Attic often differs from the Epie in using the prepositions to denote metaphorical relations. The prepositions define the character of the verbal action and set forth the relations of an oblique case to the predicate with greater precision than is possible for the cases without a preposition. ThuR, p.er. li p.v?)<Trf}piT<v 1171" he spalce among the suitors p 467 specifies the meaning with greater certainty than /.GP?)o'rf}p<T<v 1f11"e, So o 'E)..ll.'l)vwv q,6f)os may mean the jear jelt by the Greelcs or the fear caused by the Greelcs; but with ~ or 1rapa (cp. X. A. 1. 2.18, Lye. 130) the latter meaning is stated unequivocally. The use of a preposition often serves to show how a construction with a composite case (1279) is to be regarded (genitive or ablative; dative, instrumental, or locative). 1638. Development of the Use of Prepositions.a. Originally the preposition was a free adverb limiting the meaning of the verb but not directly counected with it: Kar' li.p' i'!;ero dawn he sate hi?n A 101. In this use the preposition may be called a 'preposition-adverb.' b. The preposition-adverb was also often used in sentences in wbich an oblique case depended directly on the verh withont regard to the prepositionadverb. Here the case is independent of the preposition-adverb, as in f))..Erpcl.pwv ll,1ro Mxpva. 1ri11"rEL from heT eyelids, away, tea?'S fnll ~ 12!l. Here f)ll.erpcl.pwv is ablatival genitive and is not ,qoverned by -1ro, which sm:ves merely to define the relation between verb and noun. c. Gradually the preposition-adverb was brought into closer connection either (1) with the verb, whence arose componnds sn ch as -7ro11"i11"rv, or (2) with the noun, t.he preposition-adverb having frerd itse1f from its adverbial relation to the verb. In this stage, which is that of Attic prose, the noun was felt to depend on the preposition. Hence arose maJJy syntactical changes, e.g.

366

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1639

the accusative of the limit of motion (1588) was abandoned in prose for the preposition with the accusative.

Prepositions have three uses. (I) Prepositions appear as adverbs defining the action of verbs.
1639. 1640. The preposition-adverb usually precedes the verb, from which it is often separated in Homer by 110u11s and ether words : i)p.v <bro ot-yv p.va.t to wqrd fdf destruction frorn (for) 7ts A 67, 1rpo -yp 'ijKe 0&- the goddess sent ber forth A 195, ~x Krl:ra. -ya.a. the earth held him fast B 699. 1641. So, as links connecting sentences, 1rps o Ka.l and Ka.l 1rpbs and besides, hr' i5 and besides, p.Er o and next, thereupon (both in Hdt.), lv o and among the nwnber (Hdt.). 1642. The verb (usually l~rl or El~l, rarely elp.l) may be omitted: o -yrip ns p.ra. roos v1,p for no such man is among them rp 93. Cp. 944. 1643.

The preposition-adverb may do duty for the verb in parallel clauses:

li vapes riv~ra.v, av p.v lip' 'Arpeti5.,.,s . . av a' lipa. MTtpt6v.,.,s the men rose up, rose up Atreides, rose up Me1iones 'Ir 886. So in Hdt.

1644. (II) Prepositions connect verbs and other words with the oblique c.ases of nouns and pronouns. 1645. It is often impossible to decide whether the preposition belongs to the verb or to the noun. Th us, K o Xpii~'11s v'1s f3fj A 439 may be Chryses went out of the ship or Ohryses went-out-frorn (l~f3'1) the ship. When important words separate the prep.-adv. from the noun, the prep.-adv. is more properly regarded as belonging with the verb, which, tgether with the prep.-adv., governs the noun : rip.rpt o xa.ra.t t:Jp.ots J.t~~ovra.t an his mane jloats-abvut his shoulders Z 509. The Mss. often vary : roi~ tv l-yw p.O' op.ieov (or p.Jop.i0>) with these I was wont to associate A 269. 1646. (III) Prepositions unite with verbs (less frequently with nouns and other prepositions) to fonn compounds. Cp. 886 ff.

a. From this use as a prefix the name 'preposition' ( 1rpOB~<s p1aepositio) is derived. The original meaning of sorne prepositions is best seen in compounds.
1647. Improper prepositions (1699) are adverbs used like prepositions, but incapable of f01ming compounds. The case (usually the genitive) following an improper preposition depends on the preposition alone without regard to the verb ; whereas a true preposition was attached originally, as an adverb, to a case depending directly on the verb. 1648. The addition of a preposition (especially otd, Kara, <rvv) to a verbal form may mark the completion of the action of the verbal idea (perfective action). The local force of the preposition is here often lost. So otarj>dJ-yftv sncceed in escaping, Ka.ra.otWKtv succeed in punuing, ~uvrev accomplish, ca1Ty into e.ffect (nX:v do, perfmm). 1649.

Two or more prepositions may be used with one verb, either sepa-

PREPOSITIONS

367

rateJy, as adverbs, or in composition with the verb. Thus, .rr;J 8 1ra.p~ (or 1ra.p' lO he stood forth beside hint A 486. When two prepositions of like meaning are used in composition, that preposition precedes which has the narrower range : .rvp.p.ertfxev talee part in with, p.<f>t11'EpLtJT<f>etJIJa. to be put round about as a crown. When two prepositions are used with one noun, the noun usually depends on the second, while the first defines the second adverbially ; as .p.<j>l 1rep! Kp1wqv round about a spring B 305. It is often uncertain whetl1er or not two prepositions should be written together. a. Such compound prepositions are .p.<f><11'Epl, 1ra.p~, v1rh, .TK, dK, ,.o,.p6, ota.1rp, 11'EpL1rp. Improper prepositim1s may be used with true prepositions, as p.XP' Els r .rrpa.r61reoov as far as (into) the carnp X. A. 6. 4. 26.
J.650. Tmesis ( rp.fj.r<s cutting) denotes the separation of a preposition from its verb, and is a term of late origin, properly descriptive only of tbe post-epie language, in which preposition and verb norrnally formed an indissoluble compound.. The term ' tmesis' is incorrectly applied to the language of Homer, since in t~e Epie the prep.-adv. was still in process of joining with the verb. J.65J.. In Attic poetry tmesis occurs chiefly when the preposition is separated from the verb by unimportant words (particles, enclitics), and is employed for the sake of emphasis or (in Euripides) as a mere ornament. Aristophanes uses tmesis only to parody the style of tragic cl10ruses. J.652. Hdt. uses tmesis frequent! y in imitation of the Epie; the intervening words are wv ( = ovv), enclitics, , p.v li, etc. J.653. In Attic prose tmesis occurs only in special cases : dvr' ev 1I'O<v ( 1T'<i.,.XE<v) and tJv eV (Ka.Kws) '1I'O<v (11'dtJXEv). Thus, l.rovs ev 1I'OL1J.ra.vra.s iJ ,.6ts vr' .li .,..,.ol7JKEv all whorn the city has 1equited with benefits for the service they rendered it D. 20. 64. Here ev .,. .,.ol7JKEv is alrnost equivalent to a single notion. J.654. The addition of a preposition to a verb may have no effect on the construction, as in h{Jfjva.L rfjs vEc.iJs, whereas (Jfjva.L rfjs vEc.iJs originally, and still in poetry, can mean go ,f1om-the-ship; or it may determine the construction, as in '11'EpL"fEvtJIJa.< lp.o to .swpass rne D. 18.236. Prose tends to repeat the prefixed preposition: lK(J;jva.L ft< r;js vec.iJs T. 1. 137. J.655. A preposition usually assumes the force of an adjective when compounded with substantives which do not change their forms on entering into composition, as tJuvooos a national meeting (oo6s). Otherwise the compound usually gets a new termination, generally -ov, -Lov neuter, or -ls feminine, as lvu.,.vwv d1earn (v7rvos), l11'L-yovvls thigh-muscle (-yovu). J.656. The use of prepositions is, in general, more common in prose than in poetry, which retained the more primitive forrn of expression. ].657. A noun joined by a preposition to its case without the help of &. verb bas a verbal meaning: d1J'o 1J'io<.Jv .pxwv lwiJEpl.i freedom frorn all1ule P. L. 698 a (cp. eviJepov ..,.6 nvos). 1658. In general, when depending on prepositions expressing relations of place, the accusative denotes the place (or person) toward which or the place over which, along which motion takes place, the dative denotes rest in

368

SYNTAX OF THE SIJ'Ill'LE

SE~TEXCE

[r659

or at, the genitive (:ctblativc) prtssing from. Tlms, i)Kw 1ra.plL a I have come to you T. 1. I:J7, oL tra.p' ia.vrc/i {3ap{3a.pot the barbarms in his own service X. A. 1. 1. 5, tra.p {3a.1niws troi\ol trj;s Kpov tri)J\Bov many came ove1' from the king to Cyrus 1. O. 29. The true genitive denotes varions forms of connection.

1659. Constructio Praegnans.- a. A verb of motion is often used with a preposition with the dative to anticipate the rest that follows the action of the verb: lv rc/i trora..u~ i!traov they fell (into and were) in the 1'ive1' X. Ages. 1. 32. This use is common with TL8va.t, LopVtv, Ka.8t~rrava.<, etc., and with tenses of completed action which imply rest ; as o! v ri) vTJITif livopes ha.f3f3rJKous the -men who had C1'ossecl to (and were in) the island 'l'. 7. 71. b. A verb of rest is often followed by a preposition with the accusative to denote motion previous to or following upon the action of the verb: tra.pfirmv els :!;ci.pom (they came to Sardis and were in the city) they a1rived at Ba1dis X. A. 1. 2. 2, es Kp1)vnv law8rwa.v they were savel by 1eaching Cy1ene T. 1. 110, rip8n 7rpEIT{3wr'l]s Els Aa.Keoa.lJJ.ova. he was chosen ambassadm (to go) to Lacedaemon X. H. 2. 2. 17. Cp. 1692. 1. a. 1660. action.
Stress is often laid on (a) the starting-point or (b) the goal of an

a. Ka.ra.o1)0'as tr ovopwv TOS ftrtrOUS tying his h01'88S tO (from) trees X. H. 4. 4. 10. By anticipation of the verbal action (attraction of the prep. with the article) : r'l]v tr arpa.rotroou rd.~< v 1{1\,tr<v he desertecl his post in the aTmy Aes. 3. 159, o! K rfis -yop.s Ka.rall.t1rovres r t}ma. ifq,u-yov the market-people (o! lv rn .-yop~) lejt thei1' wmes and jled X. A. 1. 2. 18. b. "\Vith verbs of collecting (.8poi\E<v, <rv-y<Lv) and emolling (-y-ypli</JE<v): els 'l!'eolov 8pol\ovra.t they we muste1ecl in(to) the plain X. A. 1. 1. 2, ds llvopa.s -y-ypliif!a. to enrol in(to) the list of men D. Hl. 230. 1661. So with adverbs: litrou lfi\TJM8a.p.ev tlJhe?e ( = whitheT, 5tro<) we have gone X.'C. 6. 1. 14, li!Jev trell.ltroJJ.v, .tra.v8wwv let us 1eturn to the point whence ( = whme, !!trou) we left o.ff l'. Ph. 78 b, -yvo rv KE8ev tr6.EJJ.OV oepo i)~ovra. he does not know that the war in that region will come hithe1 ( = rv he'i: troeJJ.ov KE8ev) D. 1. 15. 1662. Sorne adverbs and adverbial phrases meaning f1'0in are used with reference to the point of view of the observer: h~rpw8ev on eithe1' sie, i{v!Jev Kal ifv8ev on this sie and that, K oe~t.s on the 1ight (a dextra), o! tr rfis ITKTJv'ijs the acto1s, ro h To l<r!Jp.o rxos, r <!s r'l]v IIall.ll.1)vTJv re!xos the wall (seen) f1'0'1n the isthmus, the wall toward (looking to) Pallene T. 1. 64 (of the same wall).
1663. Position. -The preposition usually precedes its noun. It may be separated from it a. By }):ctrticles (JJ.v, D, -y, r, -y6.p, o v) and by ofp.<u I think: tv ovv ri) trb< P. R. 456 d, els li -ye oJJ.a.L rs li./\ll.iis tri>I\ELs to the other cities I think 568 c. Note that the order r'l]v p.v xwpiiv (1155) usually becornes, e.g. 1rps p.v r'l]v xwpiiv or trps r'l]v xJ,piiv p.v. Demonstrative oJlb and oD, when dependent on a preposition, regularly follow the preposition, and usually with order reversed (1109) : v p.v lipa. ros <rvp.rpwvofiJJ.ev, lv 0 To'i's oil in some things then we agree, but not in othe1s P. Phae. 263 b.

166g]

PREPOSITIONS

369

b. By attributives: El< Ka~a-rpov 7rei5lov to the plain of the Cayste1 X. A.l. 2. 11. c. By the accusative in oaths and entreaties (with 1rpo<): 1rp6s <Tf ri)o-iie p:qrpO< by my mother here I implore thee E. Phoen. 1665 ; cp. pe1 te deos oro and see 1599. N. - A preposition is usually placed before a superlative and after ,;, or lin qualifying the superlative: ,;, 1rt 1r.et:a-rov ro op.t.ov ovm the ve~y g1eatest part of the throng T. 2. 34. 1roM, 1ravv, p.a.a may precede the preposition and its case: 1roM <v 1r.elov< alrl<f with fa? ette1 reason T. 1. 35. 1664. ln poetry a preposition is often placed between an adjective and its substantive; very rarely in prose ( rot~oe v rd~et in the jollowing manne1 P. Cri ti. 115 c ). 1665. 7rfpl is the only true preposition that may be placed after its case in Attic prose: a-orplas 1rp< about wisclom P. 1'hil. 49 a, wv hw ouocv o~rf p.-ya o~re p.Kpv 7rp< i1ratw al;out which I unclmstancl noth'ing eithe1 rnuch or little P. A. 19 c. When used with two substantives 1rpt is placed between them: rou a-lov re 1rpt Kat ro vO<Tiov concerning both that which is holy ancl that which is unholy P. Euth. 4 e. 1rp< occurs very often in Plato, only once in the orators and possibly twice in Xenophon. On anastrophe, see 175. a. l!vaa and xdptv (usually) and livev (sometimes) are postpositive. The retenti on of the postpositive use of 7rfpl may be due to the influence of i!vfKa. In poetry many prepositions are postpositive.
VARIATION OF PREPOSITIONS

1666. The preposition in the second of two closely connected clauses may be different from that used in the first clause either (1) when the relation is essentially the same or (2) wh en it is different. Th us (1) ~K rf ri)< KepK6piis Kal 1r rijs 1}1relpov from Gorcyra and the 1nainland T. 7. 33, and (2) o~rf Ka.r -yijv olire iit OaMrro-n< neither by land nor by (the help of the, the medium of the) sea 1. 2. Cp. 1668.
REPETITION AND OMISSION OF PREPOSITIONS, ETC.

1667. a. For the sake of ernphasis or to mark opposition and difference, a preposition is repeated with each noun dependent on the preposition : Kara re 7TOfp.ov Kat Kar r1)v li..7Jv olatrav in the pU1suit of war ancl in the othe1 occupations of l1je P. Tim. 18c. b. A preposition is used with the first noun and omitted with the second when the two nouns (whether similar or dissimilar in meanb1g) unite to form a complex : 1repl rou O<Kalov Kat peri)s 'concerning the justice of om cause and the honest11 of our inteutions' T. 3. 10. c. In poetry a preposition may be used only with the second of two nouns dependent on it: Ae.<:/Jwv d1r Aa.vlii< f1'01n Del phi antl Dauli S. O. 'l'. 734. 1668. In contrasts or alternatives expressed by ~, ?) . ~. Kal Kal, etc., the preposition may be repeated or omitted with the second noun : Kat Karl!. -yijv Kat Ka-r Oa.arrav both by land a neZ by sea X. A. 1. 1. 7, 1rp< ixOpv ?) <:/Jl.ov to foe or friend D. 21. 114. 1669. Wh en prepositions of different meaning are used with the same nmm, GREEK GlU~!. -24

370

SYi'..jTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

the noun is repeated; thus neither upon (the earth) nor unde1 the eaTth is oifi' brl 'Yi1s oi!O' lnro 'Yi7s P. Menex. 246 <l. 1670. In explanatory appositional clauses (988) the preposition may be repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis ; as K 'TOV'Twv ol lwop.a.<J"Tol 'Yl')'voP'Ta.<, K Twv 7r<'T'f/o<V(fanwv gKa(f'Ta the men of mmk come from those who have pmctised each a1't P. Lach. 188 c, and commonly after demonstratives. The

preposition is not repeated when such an appositional clause is closely coHnected with what precedes : elKs J.''f/O voJ.<l<m< 1repl ivs J.<ovou, oov.el.s aii'T'
.w8<pl.s, a')'wvl{e(f8a< nor should you thinlc that you aTe contending fo1' a single issue alone: to a vert slave1-y instead of maintaining y our freedom 'l'. 2. 63. A

preposition is usually not repeated before descriptive appositional clauses (987):

1repl XP'YifLaTwv .a.s, afJ<f3alov 7rpd'YfLa'Tos you we tallcing about wealth, an unstable thing Cam. frag. 3. 38 (No. 128).

1671. Before a relative in the same case as a noun or pronoun dependent on a preposition, the preposition is usually omitted: Ka'T 'TaV'T'flv T'i}v i}.<Kl.v?iv ;)v t')'w vv he was at that age at which I now am D. 21. 155, </><.<'TaL 1r wv ( 'TOV'TWP wv) </>t.<'TaL is loved by whom it is loved P. Euth. 10 c. But the preposition iS repeated if the relative precedes: 7rps 0 'TLS 7rcpK, 1rps 'TO'TO gva 7rpOS ~V

gKa(f'TOP lfp')'ov oe KoJ.<ltv it is necessary to set each individual to some one worlc to which he is adapte by nature P. R. 423 d.

1672. In Plato a preposition is often omitted in replies: i}T'TWJ.Io<vos-u7ro Tl vos ; <f>-lw. To a'Ya8o, cp-fwoJ.<<V oveTcome- by what ? he will say. By the good, we shall say Pr. 355 c. 1673. The preposition is usually omitted with the main noun orpronoun wh en it is .used in a clause of comparison with ws (rarely tiJ(f7r<p) as: oe ws 1repl fLTJ'Tpos Ka! Tpo<f>o Ti1s xwp.s f3ov<V<<J8aL they ought to talee thought fo1' thei1 countTy as their mother and nu1se P. IL 414 e; so, usually, when the two members are closely imited: ws 1rps floo'T' p. (fu n.'f/811 'Y< speajc the truth to me as to one who lcnows Ar. Lys. 903. The preposition is often omitted in the clause with ws ( CJ(f7rp) as, fi than: o! 7rap' oi!Mv orws ws 'TO Tota'Ta 7rOL<v a7ro.w..(f<v who owe their Tuin to nothing so muchas to such a course of action D. 19. 263, 'll'<pl To
f-L~.ovTos p.fi.ov {3ov.<U<(f8a< l} 'TO 1rap6v'Tos to delibemte about the futu1e 1athe1' than the present T. 3. 44.

1674. A preposition with its case may have the function of the subject, or the object, of a sentence ; or it may represent the protasis of a condition. Subject: ~<f>v')'ov 7rpl oK'TaKo<Jlous about eight hund1ed toolc to jlight X. H. 6. 5. 10; (geu. absol.) (fVV.<-yp.vwv 1r<pl 7r'TaKo<JLous, .afJwv a'TOs Ka'Taf3alvL when about seven lwnd1ed had be<m collecte<l he '11W1'ched down with them 2. 4. f>. Object: odcf>8<tpav s OK'TaKo<Jlovs they killed about eight hun?ed 'l'. 7. 32. Protasis : 1rd o.&. 'Y' J.<s avTos 1ra.a< av &.7rw.wE<u fo1' had it depended on y ouTselves you 1vould have pe1'ished long ago D. 18.49 (cp. 2344).
ORDINAHY USES OF THE PUEPOSITIONS

1675.

Use of the Prepositions in Attic Prose.Witb the accusative only : &.va, els.

1681]

PREPOSITIONS

371

With the dative only : v, O"vv. With the genitive only: .vri, d.7T<S, ~, 7rp6. With the accusative and genitive: d.p.rj>i, ii<., Kami., p.era, 7rp. With accusative, genitive, and dative: 7rl, 7rap&., 7repl, 7rp6s, 7r6. a. With the dative are also used in poetry: .v., .p.rj>l (also in Hdt.), p.era. .7r6 (7ru), l~ (s) take the dative in Arcadian and Cyprian. b. The genitive is either the ,genitive proper (of the goal, 1349, 1350, etc.) or the ablatival genitive. c. The dative is usually the locative or the instrumental, rarely the dative proper (as with 7ri and 7rp6s of the goal).
1676.

Ordinary Differences in Meaning.GmnTIVE

AccrrsATIYE

.p.<jJl, 7repl OL. Ka rd.

p.~ra

7rp 7rl 7raprl.

concerning tMongh against with abovc, in behalj of

GENITIYE
DATIYE

round aliout, near owing ta along, over, according to afteT over, beyond
AC'Ct'SATH'E.

7rp6s
7r6

on from on the side of by, unde1

on with, near. at, besides under

ta, towmd, for ta, contm1vy to ta, toward

uneT

1677. Certain prepositions are parallel in many uses; e.g. .v. and Kara, x.vri and 1rp6, d.7r6 and h, .p.rj>l aud 7repl, 7rp and 7repl, 7rl and 7rp6s, O"vv and
p.era.

1678.. The agent is expressed by different prepositions with the genitive: 7r6 of persons and things personified (1698. 1. N.l): the normal usage in Attic prose. 7rapa: here the agent is viewed as the source. The action is viewed as starting near a person, or on the paTt of a person. o<a th1ough: the intermediate agent. 7r6: indirect agent and source (rare) to mark the point of departure of the action. Cbiefly in Thuc. l~ : chiefly in poetry and Hdt. In Attic prose of emanation from a source. 1rpo<: to mark the resultas due to the pTesence (before) of a person; chiefly in poetry and Hdt. 1679. Jlieans is expresRed by o<cl with the genitive (the normal usage in Attic prose), .1ro, ~~'iv, O"uv. 1lfotive is expressed by inr6 (gen.), o<cl(accus.), l!veKa. 1680. Prepositions in composition (chiefly &.,.6, o<cl, Kara, ~uv) may give an idea of completion to the action denoted by the verb (1G48). a. For the usage after compound verbs see 1382 ff., 1545 ff., 1559.
LIST OF PHEPOSITIONS

1681.

cl.p.cf>< (cp. c'1Jkcf>w, .Jkcf>6npos, Lat. ambi-, amb-, arn-) originally

372

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1682

on bath .~icles (either externally only, or inside and outside), hence about. Cp. the use of 7Tp{ (1693) tlll'oughout. Chiefly poetic, Ionie, and Xenophontic. In Attic prose chiefly with the accusative.
1. nJ.LcJ>C tvith the Genitive Local (very rare and doubtful): oi ap.rpi ra.v7"TJS olKt!ovns rfjs 1ro"luos dwelle1s 1ound about this city Hdt. 8. 104 (only here). Cause: about, concerning: ap.rpi <Tfjs )..t!-yw 7rato6s I spealc about thy chilcl E. Hec. 580, ap.rpl Wll elxov otarj>ep6p.VOL quarrelling about what they had X. A. 4. 5. 17.

2. O.J.LcJ>C with the Dative Local: ap.rp' JJp.o<<T<v gx <TaKos he has a shield about his shoulders A 527. Cause: rpo(3'r}0ds ap.rpl ri/ -yuvatKl afraid on account of his wife Hdt. 6. 62, ap.rpl rpof3q> by reason of (encompassed by) te1'T01' E. Or. 825; Means: ap.rpi <Torj>lq. 'with the environment of poetic art' Pind. P. 1. 12. Often in Pindar. 3. O.J.LcJ>C with the Accusative Local: .p.rpl Mir]rov about 211ilettts X. A. 1. 2. 3, ~opap.ov p.rp' 'Ax<fja they mn mound Achilles ~ 30; temporal: .JLrf>l iiel'r]v towards evening X. A. 2. 2. 14. N.mber: aJLrf>l ros ot<TXlous abmtt two tho usa nd 1. 2. 9; of occupation with an object: d.JLrf>l iii7rvov elxH he was busy about dimwr X. C. 5. 5. 44. ,, o! ap.rpl uva the attendants, followers of a person, or the person himself with his attendants, etc.: av'IJp rwv aJLrf>l Kvpov 7rt<Trwv one of the trusty adherents of Gy1us X. A. 1. 8. 1, o! aJLrf>l Xpl<Torj>ov Ghi1isophus and his men 4. 3. 21, o! a!J.rf>l Tlpwra-y6pav the sc!wol of Protagoms P. Th. 170 c. This last phrase contains the only use of ap.rpl in A ttic prose outside of Xenophon. 4. O.J.LcJ>C in Composition Around, about ap.if>Lf3aetv thTow around (on both sides), aJLrf>t"fv dispute (spe!flc on both sides). 1.682. 6.v6. (Les b. v, Lat. an- in anhela1e, Eng. on): originally _up ta, up (opposed to Kn5.). Cp. &vw_
1. O.v6. with the Dative Local only (Epie, Lyric, and in tragic chomses): av. <TK1}1rrpq> upon a staff A 15.

Usually avoided by Attic prose writers except Xenophon (tbree times in the orators). a. Local: To a higher point: v rv 1rorap.6v up stream Hdt. 1. 194 (cp. mr. TOII 1rOTajL6v). Extension: av. urpar6v thTough the carnp A 10, av 7r.<TaV r'IJv -yfjv over the v;lwle eaTth X. Ag. 11. 16, [3a<T<.fjas av. <Tr6}1 gxwv having kings in thy mouth B 250 (cp. t. <Tr6p.aros gxew). b. Extension in Time : av v6Kra tlwouyh the ni{tht S: 80. See c. {;. Othe1 relations: DistTibutively: av. harv avii pas by hund1eds X. A. 3. 4. 21, av. 7T.<Tall iJJLpav da il y X. c. 1. 2. 8. Mann er: av. Kparos with all thei1' might (np to their strength) x. A. L 10. 15 (better Attic x:ar Kparos), av M-yov p1opmtionately P. Ph. 110 d.

2. O.v6. with the Accttsative Up along; oveT, thl-ough, among (of horizontal motion).

PREPOSITIONS

373

3. .vO. in Cmnposition Up (ci.vlcrracr6a stand up, &.vacrrp</JLv twn upside duwn), back (&.vxwpev go back, &.vap.p.vr}crK<Lv rernind), again (&.va'll"vetv bTeathe again, &.vo.rrepcriJo. p1actise constantly), often with a reversing force force (civo.Mev unloose).
1683; .vT(: originally in the face of, opposite to; ClJ /J.vm, vavr{or:;, Lat. ante (with meaning infiuenced by post), Germ. Antwort, 'reply.'
1. .vT( with the Genitiv11 only Local: civiJ' wv crrTJKTEs standing opposite to (from the point of view of the speaker, i.e. behind) which (pine-trees) X. A. 4. 7. . In other meanings: Instead of, fOJ, as an equivalent to: civr1 'll"op.ou <lpfwTJ peace instead of war 'l'. 4. 20, r 'll"ap' p.ol 'Acr1Jo.t dnl rwv otKo< to p?efer what I have to offe1' you here instead of what ymt have left at home X. A. 1. 7. 4, r1}v re'Aeur?]v vrl rijs rwv )cfJvrwv CTWTTJplis -I}'A'Ari~avro they exchanged death fm the safe'ty of the living l'. Men ex. 287 a; in ?'etU?'n fm, bence civiJ' 5rov wherefore S. El. 585; for 'll"pos in entreaty : cr' vrl .,.o.lwv rwvoe iKereuop.ev we entreat thee by these child1en here S. O. C. 1326. 2. .vT( in Composition Instead, in retu1n ( civnotoovo.t give in retu1n ), agninst, in opposition to ( &.vn'A-ye~v speak against).

1684. .1t"6 (Les b. etc. 7l"v') from, o.ff, away front; originally of separation and departure. Cp. Lat. ab, Eng. off, of 1. .1T"6 with the Genitive only a. Local: KarO.'Il"TJ?)cris ci1r ro f1r'll"ou leaping down from his h01se X. A. 1. 8. 28, liJ?jpevev d,.,.b r.,..,.ou he used to hu nt (from a horse) on ho1seback 1. 2. 7, d.,.o 1Jo.'Aricrcr7Js at a distance from the sea T. 1. 7. Figuratively: ci'l!"o 6ewv apx6p.eVOL beginnin[/ with tlw g()dS X. A. 6. 3. 18. b. Temporal: cf) cr'll"pis afte?' evening liP[!an ( after sundown) X. A. 6. 3. 23, d,.,.o ro o.vro CTTJJ.Lelou on the same si anal 2. 5. 32, 'l!"o rwv ~trwv afte1' rneals X. R. L. 5. 8, ciq,' ou since. c. Other relations: (1) Origin, Source: in prose of more remote ancestry: ros J.Lv d,.,. Oewv, ros il' ~ o.vrwv rwv Oewv -ye-yov6ras senne descended (remotely) from gods, others bertotten (directly) of the gods thernselves 1.12. 81. (This distinction is not always observed.) Varions otber relations may be explained as source. (2) Author: as agent with passives and intransitives, when an action is done indirectly, through the infl.tl8IlCe of the agent ( .,.6 of the direct action of the agent himself). Not common, except in Thuc. (chiefl.y with 'll"p6.r.recr1Ja, -yecriJa<, and verbs of like meaning): brptixOTJ &..,.' o.vrwv o&<:v l!p-yov nothing was done w~de1 thei?' Tule T. 1. 17. The startingpoint of an action is often emphasized rather than the agent: d,.,.o 'll"owv Kal .,.ps 'll"o'A'Aos 'A6-yo -y<-yv6p.evo speeches made /Jy many and to many T. 8. V3.

374

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1685

(3) Cause (remote): chr rovrov ro rop.ruaros hrvviiJ'YJ he was praised in consequence of this bol eed 'J'. 2. 25, rara ovK 1r TVX'>JS i-yl-yv<ro, A 1r 7rapaa'K<vfjs rfjs lp.fjs this happened not from. chance but by reason of the prepamtions I made L. 21. 10. (4) Means, Instrument: G'rparevp.a a-vvi!ei;ev 1r XP"'P.arwv he raised an army by means of money X. A. 1. 1. ; rarely of persons : ,.' avrwv {3cilj;a< to do ii~U1'Y by means of them T. 7. 29. (5) Manner: 1r ro 1rpocj>avos open/y T. 1. 66. (6) Conformity: a'lrO TO ta-ov on a basis of equality T. 3. 10, a1rO l;vp.p.axlis aiJT6vop.ot independent by virtue of (according to) an alliance 7. 57. N.-.. 6 with gen. is sometimes preferred to the simple gen., often for emphasis: oi M-yo q} tp.wv the wors that p1oceed from y ou T. 6. 40, ol-yot ,. ,.onwv afew of the many 1.110 (cp. 1317a). Thuc. has many free uses of ci1r6. 2. .'lTo in Composition From, away, o.tf (ci,.dvac go away, c:t,.orELxl!;ev wall o:D'), in return, bacle (ci,.ofh06vat give bacle what is due, 1ratrv demand what is one's right). Separation involves completion (bence 1ravila-Ketv utterly consume, a7roIJ6etv pa y off a vow), or privation and negation ( 1ra-yopevetv forbid, a1rorv-yxcivELv miss). Often almost equivalent to an intensive (ci,.orpcivat speak out, ,.oiiELKvvvcu point out, ci1rorop.v dare without reserve).
1685. Sul. (Lesb. ~a) through, originally th1ough and out of, and apart (separation by cleavage), a force seen in comp. (cp. Lat. dis-, Germ. zwi-sche11).

1. SL. with the Genitive

a. Local: thrmtgh and out of (cp. Hom. ii th, ota1rp6), as

o'

t:Jp.ov ~-yxos ~Mev

the spem went clea1 through his shonlder Ll. 481, aKoa-a o ri!ovs to listen from beginning to end Lye. l. 'J;)~mugh, but not out of: odt 7T'O<p.lis ( -yfjs) 1ropeu<G'!Jat to march thrmtgh the enemy's country X. Hi. 2. 8 and often in figurative expressions: ot XELPOS ~XELV to control T. 2. 13, ot. (]'T6p.aTOS ~xv to have in one's mouth (be al-ways tallcing of) X. C. 1. 4. 25 (also civ
G'T6p.a.).

!J, Temporal: of uninterrupted duration, as ot. vvKr6s through the night X. A. 4. 6. 22, ot 1ravr6s constantly T. 2. 49. c. Intervals of Space or Tirne: i5t oha 1rci~ewv t intervals of ten battlements T. 3. 21, ot. xp6vov after an interval L. 1. 12, intermittent/y Aes. 3. 220, ot 1roo at a long distance T. 3. 94. d. Other relations: Means, Mediation ( pe1): auros o? avro ipse perse D. 48. 15, i5t rovrov -ypap.p.ara 1rp.'f;is sending a letter by this man Aes. 3. 162. State or feeling: with <Tva, -yl-yvea-!Jat, ~XELv, of a property or quality: t. cp6(3ov Ela-l they me a.(1aid T. 6. 34, o' .;,a-vxlis exev he kept in q~tiet 2. 22, Mev .;,,.,.v i5t p.cix1Js to meet us in battle 2. 11, aros at cj>tlis Uva.t to enter into friendshi}J'with them X. A. 3. 2. 8. Mann er: iit. raxwv q~tickly T. 4. 8. 2. SL6. with the Accusative a. Local: of space traversed, tlwough, over (Epie, Lyric, tragic choruses): o. owp.a.ra. thnntgh the halls A 600; OL VVKTa 8 510 is quasi-temporaL

I68S]

PREPOSIT10.NS

!375

b. Cause : owing to, thanks to, on ac co 1mt of, in consequence of (cp. p1opter, ob): 5u'< ros Oeos II'I'fop.'f/v 1 was sa,ved thanks to the yods D. 18. 249, rp.wp.evos p.'l) i avrov, o< b~cu 1rpo-yovwv honoured, nut fm himself, but on account of the 1'enown of his ancesto1s P. Menex. 247 b. Soin .Z p.i) ui nva (n) had it nut /Jeen for in statements of au (unsurmounted) obstacle: rpalvovra< Kparf}ITavns v rwv {3aii<iws 1rpa:yp.cirwv, .Z p.i) ot Kpov it seems they would have got the better of the potve1 of the king, had it not been for Cynts I. 5. 92. c. 1ci is rarely used (in place of P<Ka) to denote a purpose or abject: o< ri) v IT<j>eripav oo~ap fo1" the sake of their honour T. 2. 89, OL ....~pHaP for spite D. 39. 32 (cp. t volTa v ~P<Ka v-yt.CO.s on account of disease in o1der to gain health P. Lys. 218 e). d. tci with gen. is used of direct, out with accus. of indirect, agency (fault, merit, of a person, thing, or situation). o<ci with gen. is used of an agent employed to bring about an intended result; tci with accus. is used of a person, thing, or state beyond our control (accidentai agency). (1) Persons: r.,.pii~av rara i Epvp.cixov they e.ffected this by th.e mediation of Ewymachus T. 2. 2, r t rorovs 1row6ra what has been lost by (the fault of) these men D. 6. 34. The accus. marks a person as an agent not as an instrument. (2) Things: v6p.o<, ot wv eu8ipws o f3los 7rapMKEVaiTei}IT<Ta< laws, by means of which a life of freedom ~oill be provided X. C. 3. 3. 52, o< ros v6p.ous {JeTlOVS "(L"(P6p.EPOL aP8pW11"0L men beCO?n UCtte1 thanJcS tO the laWS 8. 1. 22. Sornetirnes there is little difference between the two cases: t' wv if.1ravr' 1rwero D. 18. 33, t' ovs if.1ravr' 1rwero 18. 35. N. -li Hi with gen. ( = thl-ough) is distingJiished from the simple dative ( = by): t' ou pwp.ev Ka! cf Koop.ev I>. Th. 184 c. e. For tci with accus. to express the reason for an action, the dative is sornetimes used (1517): ros 11"<rrpii-ypbOLs rpof3op.Evos ros 'A!J17valous fearin(J the Athenians by reason of wlwt had happened T. :3. 98. The dative specifies the reason Jess definitely than iitci with the accusative. f. When used in the same sentence, the dative may express the immediate, tci with the accus. the remoter, cause: cr!JevElq_ ITwp.cirwv lh r~v ITro.Ciiv IJ7r<xwpovv they gave yround from the fact that they weTe weak t111ough lack of food T. 4. 36. g. lit6; with accus. contrasted with 1r6 with gen.: <j>~ITop.ev avro i hfiva 1r rfjs avro KaKlas 1rowva< we shall say that it (the body) is dest1oyerl on accotmt of those (remoter) causes (as badness of food) by its own evil (immediately) P. R. 609 e. 3. Sul. in Composition Throug h, across, nver ( taf3alv<Lv cross), apart, asunde1 ( taK61rr<Lv eut in two, taKpiv<Lv discente1e, tarppELP di.ffer, lha'u-yvvvru disjoin), seve1al,ly (<ai5t06va< distrib1!te). lita- often denotes intensity, continuance, or fulfilment (tapbELv remain to the end, ta<j>!JelpELv de8t1ny complete/y). ta- is common in the reciprocal middle (1726), as in ow.-ywOo.< convr<rse; often of rivalry ( ol ta11"oirw6J.LEPOL 1ival statesmen, LaKovrleii!Ja< cuntend in th1owiny thejavelin).

376
].686.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

Ets, s

[x686

ab+ s).

into, tb, opposed to ;_~; from v + s (cp. Lat. abs from See on iv. On ds with the genitive by ellipsis, see 1302.

1. Ets with the .Accusative only In the Old Attic alphabet (2 a), generally used in Attica in the fifth century, EZ was written, and this may be either eis or s. In the fourth century EIZ was generally written. In Thuc. s is printed, but its correctness may be doubted; other Attie prose writers use Els, the poets /s or (Jess frequently) s. It is not true that in poetry s is used only before consonants, Els only before vowels. a. Local : of the goal : ZtKeol ~ 'Ira.iiis t(3.,0'av s ~tKeliiv the Sicels crossed over o~tt of Jtaly into Sicily T. 6. 2; with a persona! object: 7)Mev K Tfjs 'Afl'liis s tiv8po\.,.ous ti'11'opous he came from Asia to (a land of) po or men T. 1. , 0'1rp:rm "Yprip,p,ara s (v. l. 1rps) (3a.rn"illii he dispatches a letter to (the palace of) the king 1. 137 (of sendi11g, etc., to individuals ws or 1rpbs is used); against: ifl'TpriTeUO'a.v s T-ljv 'ATT<K{Jv they in11aded Attica T. 3. 1,

war between the Corinthians and the .Athenians 1. 55; with verbs of rest, 1659 b. The idea of motion holds where Eng. uses in or at: "TeeuT.v ets n to end in T. 2. 51. Extension : lleo1!'ovv"'fl'lous iitafJae'iv s Tos ''E"ii"'vas to l'aise a prejudice against the Peloponnesians among the Greeks T. 3. 109; in the presence of (coram): s "T Kotvv M"{e<v to speak before the assembly 4. 58. b. Temporal: of the geai: up to, until: s JJ-f up to my time Hdt. 1. 52, s Tfos finally 3. 40; at (by) such a tirne (of a fixed or expected time): 1!'po7re .ls TplT1JV -!jp,piiv 1rapva< commanded them to be present on the third day X. C. 3. 1. 42, .;;KeTe Eis Tp<iiKoO'TTjv fJp,lpiiv come on the thirtieth day 5. 3. 6. Limit of time attained : Eis TowTov Katpv a</J'Yflvo< a1'1'i11ing at such a time L. 16. 5. Extension (over future time): Eis 'TOP .Ot1!'011 xp6vov in all .future tinte L. 16. 2. c. Measure and Limit with numerals: eis xilous to the number of (np to) a thousand X. A. 1. 8. 5, Eis ilvo two abreast 2. 4. 26, is pu.xp,f!v to the amou nt of a drachma T. 8. 29. d. Other relations : Goal, Purpose, Intention : 7J 0'1) 1!'aTpls els fl' ti"TrofJh your country looks for help to you X. H. 6. 1. 8, xpf!O'Oat els Tas 0'</JEvilbviis to use for the slings X. A. 3. 4. ] 7, "Tra.tiJd,<tv els O.peT{Jv to train with a view to virtue l'. G. 519 e. Relation to: KaI>v els O'rpa.n&.v excellent for the army X. C. 3. 3. 6, often in Thuc. ( = 1rp6s with accus.). Mann er : els Ka<pbv in season X. C. 3. 1. 8, Eis iluvap,<v to the extent of one's powers 4. 5. 52. 2. Els in Composition Into, in, to (elO'f3alvE<v enter, el0'11'pd.TTv get in, exact a debt).
1r6ep,os Tos Koptv8lots es Tovs 'AO.,valovs

~687. v in (poetic v_{, dv, dvt), Lat. in with the abl., en-; opposed to ds into, ~ out of On tv with the genitive by ellipsis, see 1302.

1. v with the Dative (Locative) only a. Local: in, at, near, by, on, among: lv ~"TrapTYJ in Sparta T. 1. 128, 1) lv KoplvO'f' f.LaX"' the battle at Corinth X. Ages. 7. 5, "TrOLS olKovp,v"' lv rcr Eu~elv'f' 1rovr'J) a c.ity built on the Euxine X. A. 4. 8. 22, iv Tfj Kivy E<YT'r/KWS

1688]

PREPOSITIONS

377

standing upon the bed L. 1. 24 (lv of superposition is rare), v6p.o< v ?rcrtv evMKtp.o< ros "EJ\J\'7cr<v laws famous among all the G1eefcs P. L. 631 b, v bp.v l5'1P.'1"16P'1<T<v he made an harangue bejo1e (coram) you D. 8. 74. With verbs of motion, see 1659 a. Of circumstance, occupation, as oi v ros ""Pd'Yp.a.crtv the men at the head of a.tfairs D. 9. 56 (so lv elp~vv, ~P'Y'I' w<f>el\elq,, <f>tl\o!To<f>lq., <J>of34' eva.<; lv a.lrlq.l!xetv to blame, iv onfi ~xetv to be angry with); in the power of: lv rr/l Oer/l r rl\os 1) v, oVK p.o! the issue rested with God, not with me D. 18. 193, iv a.vrr/l 'YfV<To he came to himself X. A. 1. 5. 17. b. Temporal: in, within, du1ing (cp. 1542): iv 1rhre l!recrtv infive years L. 19. 2, iv 1T1rovoas during a truce T. 1. 55, iv cl> while. c. Instrument, Means, Cause, Manner (originally local) : v o<J>8al\p.o'i!TLV ro.,p.a.t see with the eyes A 587, v v! K<voveve!TfJa< to be endangered by (i.e. to drpend on) a single pe1son T. 2. 35, lv rorots -1) v1rop.evot ?) xalpovres either g1ieving or rejoicing at this P. R. 603 c, lv -rofm;> o'7J\w!Tat :to make clear by this 392 e, iv -rcii <j>a.vepr/) openly X. A. 1. 3. 21. Conformity: iv -ros op.olots v6p.ots 1rodwa.vres .,.&s Kplcrets deciding acco1ding to equal laws T. 1. 77, lv p.ol in my opinion E. Hipp. 1320.
N.- In many dialects, e.g. those north of the Corinthian Gulf (rarely in Pindar), lv retains its originalmeaningof in (with dat.) and into (with accus.). The latter use appears in vf~ta towards the 1ight.

2. ~v in Composition In, at, on, among ( p.1Ti?rrew fall in or on, iv-rv'Yxavetv jall in with, 'Y"t<J\v laugh at, va1TT<Lv bind on).

1688. ~, K out, out of, from, fiom ~oithin, opposed to v, El; cp. Lat. ex, e.. As contrasted with d?To away from, ~ denotes from within.
1. Ef, K: with the (Ablatival) Genitive only In Arcadian and Cyprian ls ( = lO takes the dative. a. Local: K if?o<vtK'1S ll\auv"'v mmching out of Phoenicia X. A. 1. 7. 12; of transition: EK 1rl\elovos gq,w"tov they fied when at (from) a greate1 distance 1. 10. 11. On ~ in the constntetio p1aegnans, see 1660 a. b. Temporal : K ro cipl!Trov after bleakfast X. A. 4. 6. 21, K 'tralo"'v f1"0m boyhood 4. 6. 14. c. Other relations: immediate succession or transition: ill\J\71v l~ /1J\J\'7s ?rol\<o.,s p.et{36p.evos exchanging one city for mwthe1 P. A. 37 d, iK 1roMp.ov 1Totop.evos dp-fJv'1v rnalcing peace after (a state of) war D. 19. 133, K 1TTwxwv 1rl\ocrto< 'Y l'lvov-ra< fTom beg gars they become rich 8. 66. Origin: immediate origin (whereas 1r6 is used of remote origin, 1684. 1. c): "tafJo! Ka! ~ "ta.Owv noble and of noble breed P. Phae. 246 a. Agent, regarded as the source: with pass. and intr. verbs instead of 1rO ( chiefly poetic and in Hdt.): 1r6J\m fK {3aCTLhfO)S OEOOp.vaL CitieS a IJ((t (haVing been give11) Oj (by) the king X. A. 1. 1. 6, wp.ol\o"te-ro K 1rdvr"'v it was agreed by all T. 2. 49 ; but. K is often used with a different force, as K -rwv Tvx6vT"'v v8pr.!J1r.,v !Tvvo<K<!TfJf,vat to have be en settled by the vulgar (as constituent parts of a whole) Lye. 62. Consequence: ~ a-ro ?"o gp"(ov in consequence of the jact itself T. 1. 75. Canse or ground of judgment (where the dat. is more usual with inanimate

378

SYNTAX O.F THE SIMPLE :SENTE.\'CE

[x8g

objects) : ~~ oli tf3a\\ev avdJV for which reason he accused him X. A. 6. 6. 11. Material: r J.-yKurrpov l~ clap.avros the hook of adarnant P. R. 616 c. Instrument and means: lK rwv 1r6vc,v ras peras KT<TOat to acque by labour the fruits of viltue 'r. 1. 123. Conformity: lK rwv v6p.wv in accorda nee with the laws D. 24. 28. Manner (rare): lK ro !<Tov on equal terms T. 2. 3. Partitive (cp. 1317 a) : h rwv vvapbwv el<Tl they bel01~g to the class that has powe1 l'. G. 525 e.

2. ~!;, K in Composition Out, from, off, away (cp. l~el\auvELv drive out and away); often with an implication of fulfilment, completion, thoroughness, resolution ( iK1rpOELv sack utterly, htri<TKELP teach thoroughly). Cp. 1648.
1689.
{J7To

hr! (cp. Lat. ob) upon, on, on the surface oj; opposed to under, and to i.nrp when inrp means above the smface of.
1. b! with the Genitive

a. Local: upon: oilr' i1rt -y?)s oM' v1r -y?)s neither upon the emth nor under the
earth P. Men ex. 246 d, i1rt Op6vov iKaO'ero he seated hirnself on a th1one X. C. 6. 1. 6 ; of the vehicle (lit. or figur.) upon which: li1rt rwv t11'7r"'v oxe<TOa to ride on horseback 4. 5. 58 (never i1rl with dat.), 11'1 r?)s p.i)s vews on my ship L. :.JI. 6 ; in the direction of: 1rl J:,rfpewv l!<f>ev-ye he jled toward Sa1dis X. C. 7. 2.1; in the p1esence of (cp. 1rap6. with dat.): hl p.aprupwv bejore witnesses A nt. 2. -y. 8. fl.,.l is rarely used of mere proximity in poetry or standard prose. N. -In expressions of simple superposition .!1rl with the gen. denotes familiar relations and na tura! position ; whereas 11'1 with the dat. gives clear and emphatic outlines' to statements of tbe definite place of an object or action, is used in detailed pictures, and marks the object in the dative as distinct from the subject of the verbal action. hl with the geu. is colomJess and phraseological, and often makes, with the verb or the subject, a 'compound picture. Even in contrasting two objects i1rl with gen. is used since no special point is made of position. With (unemphatic) pronouns of reference (aoro) i1rl with gen. is much more frequent than o!.,.t with dat. The distinction between the two cases is often the result of feeling; and certain phrases become stereotyped, now with the gen., now with the dat. b. Temporal, usua!ly with persona! gen.: in the tirne of: ht rwv 1rpo-y6vwv in the time of our ancestors A es. ::l. 178, ,.,., lp.o in my tirne T. 7. 86, hl ro Ll.eK<flKo 1r0p.ov in the Dea/ean wm 1). 22. 15. c. Other relations : p.evev l1rl ri)s voliis ri)s avrf}s to persist in the same folly D. 8. 14, li 11'1 TWV /i)\)\wv op'i.u, rar' .!<{>' bp.wv avrwv ')'POlr what you see in the case of otheTS, that Y01l fqnme in your own case I. 8. 114, hp' eaVTWI> <xwpovv they p1oceecled by thernselves X. A. 2. 4. JO, o!1rl urrO.pc,v jour deep 1. 2. 15, o! li1rl rwv 1rpii-yp.rlrwv the men in powe1 D. 18. 247. 2. 11' with the Dative a. Local : on, by: olKoaw br! r</] lrrOp.</) they clwell on the isthmus 'r. 1. 56, r i1rl OaM<Trrv rxos the wall by the sea 7. 4. 'l'he dat. with e1rl denotes proxim-

16go]

PREPOSITIONS

379

ity much more frequent! y than the gen. with brl; but denotes superposition less often than the gcn. with brl. b. Temporal (rare in prose) : 'fi ?)tos br! ouap.as the sun was new setting X. A. 7. 3. 34. c. Other relations: Succession, Addition : ro brl rovr'E' 'Y' &. ..6Kpvat answer the next question P. A. 27 b, .v.!ar7J br' art/3 he l'Ose up ajter hirn X. C. 2. 3. 7, bd r0 air'!' 5if;ov relish with b1ead X. M. 3. 14. 2. Supervision: lipxwv bd Tovrots :;;v there was a cornrnander over thern X. C. 5. 3. ()6. Dependence: Ka8' 15aov ~ar!v br' JJ-ol as jards is in my powe1 I. 6. 8. Condition: <p' ols rl]v Elp1Jv7Jv bro<7JCTaJJ-<()a on what tmrns we made the peace D. 8. 5. Reason, motive, end, as with verbs of emotion (instead of the simple dative, 1517) : 7r&.vra raTa eavJJ-rilw 7rl rt/3 Ka I am astonished at all these trees because of their beauty X. O. 4. 21, ouK 1r! r<xvTI gJJ-aOes .' bd 7rat15<lq. you learned this not to rnake it a p1ojession but to gain gene1al culture P. Pr. 312 b. Hostility (Jess common in prose than in poetry ; usually with accus.): :;; ~,.! rcp MT,o'l' ~uJJ-p.axli. the alliance against the Medes T. 3. 63. Priee: 7rl 7rOCT'iJ; for how much? l'. A. 41 a.

3.

.,.(

with the Accusative

a. Local: of the goal: ~<avv ~,.! rv 7rorap.6v he rnarches to the river X. A. 1. 4. 11, .<{>fKOVTQ ~77"~ TOV 1rOTajJ-6V they a7'TVed at the 1'Ve1' 4. 7. 18 (rare]y the

gen. with verbs of arrival), .v{Jatv<V l1rl rv z,..,.ov he mounted his ho1se X. C. 7. 1. 1. Extension : l?r! 1raav 'Aali.v O'YLf.LOL jamous ove1 all Asia P. Criti. 112 e. b. Temporal : extension: ,.! ,.on&s 1JJJ-.!pi.s for rnany days D. 21. 41. c. Quantity, measure : ,.! }J-Kp6v a little, ,.! ,. Mo v still more, l?rl ?r v in gene?al, 1raros gXWV 7rov 1) ?r! oua araota WideT than (up to) tWO stades X. C. 7. 5. 8. d. Other relations: J>urpose, abject in view: 7rp.?retv h! Kara~rKo?r~v to send for the puTpose of 1'econnoite1ng X. C. 6. 2. , ..,..!ar<Lav ,.! xp~p.ara they sent for money T. 6. 74. Hostility: ~?r<ov hl ros 'A()11va!ous they sailed against the Athenians 2. 90. Reference: r .,.' JJ-e (with or without evat) as far as I am concmned (more commonly ,.' JJ-ol) ; r6 'Y< ,.' iKevov .Tva< L.l3. 58. N.- To express pmpose l?rl with accus. is generally used when the purpose involves actual or implied motion to an abject; e1r! with dat. is used when the purpose may be attained by mental activity. 4. 'll'( in Composition Upon (l7rt"fpa<f>etv w1ite upon), ove1 (l?rt?reiv sail ovm), at, of cause (f?r<xalp<tv rejoice over or at), to, towmd (7r<{Jo7]1iiiv send assistance to), in addition ( l1r'hoovat give in.addition), against ( ?rt{Jouev<Lv plot against ), after (l-rn-rl'Yv<a()a, be born a,fte1, 1rLCTK<vai<Lv 1epair); causative (f?ra?Jiid;<Lv vmify) ; intensity (f7rtKpu?rr<Lv hide; e7r<{JoueuetJ(}a< j1trthe1 delioemte = reflect); reciprocity (?rLJJ-fl-yvuaOat .-f,o<s exchangej1iendly dealings).
1690. Ka.TO. down (cp. Karw ), opposed to &.va. With the genitive (the genitive proper (of the goal) and the ablatival genitive) and the

380

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SERTE~CE

[16gi

accusative. With the geniti ve, the motion is perpendicular; with the accusative, horizontal.
1. Ka..rci. with the Genitive a. Local: down from, dovm toward, ~mde1: a!J.<Vo< Kar ri)s 'lt'rpas having leapt downfrom the 1'ock X. A. 4. 2. 17, Kar' liKpas lltterly, complete/y (down from the summit) J>. L. 909 b, >fx'ti KM xeovs <ilx<ro his soul went down under the ea1th o/ 100, p.vpov Ka.r ri)s K<<j>afjs Karaxavr having pou1ed myrrh (doum) over their heads P. H. 398 a; rarely of rest: o Kar 'Yfis the man unde1 the earth X. C. 4. O. 5. b. Temporal (ve1y rare): Kar 'lt'avros ro alwvos fm all eternity Lye. 7. c. Other relations: against, as Kar' !J.a.vro p<v to :<peak artainst myself P. A. 37 b; rarely in a favourable or neutra! sense, as ol Kar A7Jf.l.DrFfNvovs l!1raLvoL the eulogies on Demosthenes A es. 3. 50, Kar 1ravrwv ')'<Lv to spealc with regard to all X. C. 1. 2. 16; by (with verbs of swearing), as O!J.vvvrwv rv lJpKov Kar l<pwv u?..elwv let them swem the oath by (lit. down over) fullgrown victims 'l'. 5. 47.

2. 1<aml. with the .Accusative

a. Local: l1reov Kar 1rorap.6v they sailed down-st1eam Hdt. 4. 44, Kar r.s
Elooovs it/><7rop.<voL following to the entmnces X. C. 3. 3. 04. Extension : KafJ' 7Jv r'qv 7rOLv throngho7tt the entire city I~yc. 40, Kar ')'fjv by land L. 2. 32, LWKOVTfS ros Ka8' avrovs pU1'SUing those stationed opposite them-

selves X. A. 1. 10. 4. b. Temporal (post-I:Iomeric): Kar 1rov d~tring the voyage 'l'. 3. 32, Kar' tK<vov TOV xpvov at that ti me 1. 139, ol KaO' aur6v his contempora1'ies n. 20. 73. c. Other relations: J>urpose: Kar Olv ~K<v came for the purpose of seeing T. 6. 31. Conformity : Kar rourous iriJTwp an orator ajte1 their style P. A. 17 b, t<ar ros vop.ous accoring to the laws D. 8. 2. Ground on which an act is based: Ka.r. </><(av otoing to friendship T. 1. GO. Comparisons: p.l1w Ji Kar. OciKpua 1rmov86r havin{J endured su.{[e1ings too great for (than according to) tears 7. 75 (cp. maior q1tam pro). Manner: Ka&' ;wuxlav quietly T. 6. 04. Distribution: Ka.r' i!Ov7J nation by nation T. 1. 122, ha pax!J.al Kar' livpa ten drachmae the man A es. 3. 187, Kar. ff<j>s arous per seT. 1. 79. Approximate nUiubers: Kar. 1l'<vrf,t<ovra about fifty Hdt. 6. 79. 3. KaTci. in Composition Down from abo'Ve (Kara1rt1rr<w fall doton), back (t<aTael,..<tv leave behind), against, adve1sely (Kara')'L')'vWKv condemn, decle against, KaTa.<j>povEiv espise), completely (Ka.ra.1rerpov stone to death, Kavw!Jf<Lv eat 11p), often with an intensive force that cannot be translated. An intransitive verb when compounded with Kara may become transitive (1559).
~691. p.eTc1: original meaning amicl, among (cp. Germ. mit, Eng. mid in midwife). Renee properly only with }Jlurals or collectives (so in Hom. with gen. and dat.). ttmi denotes participation, community of action. 7r~&a. (Lesb. and other dialects) agrees in meani.ng with 1ur&., but is of different origin.

r6gz]

PREPOSITIONS

381

1. fi-ETel. with the Genitive Usually of persons and abstract nouns. Local : anwng, together with, as Ka81il-'vos J-'er rwv /1}1.}\.wv sitting among the rest P. R 359 e, Ocra< 1-'r' lKelvwv to sacrifice in company with them X. C. 8. 3. 1 ; on the side of, as ol l-'fT K6pov {jap{japo< the barbarians in the mmy of Cyrus X. A.l. 7. 10, J-'ET rwv i]oLK71!-'vwv 7ro)..ei-'EP to wage war on the side of the w1onged D. 9. 24, o J-'er ro 1r }1.-qOovs without the consent of the people T. 3. 66; besides: -yev61-'evos p.er ro ~vv<ro Kal vvarbs showing himself powe1jul as well as sagacious T. 2. 15. Accompanying circumstances (concurrent act or state) : p.er K<vo6vwv KT71<rap.evo< ( r1,v ra~< v) having acquired their position amid dangers D. 3. 36, M1r71 p.er cp6{jov grief and tenor T. 7. 75. Joint efficient cause: p.er 1r6vwv )..ev8lpav 7rol.,crav rl)v 'Enaoa by (am id) st1uggles they f?eed Greece L. 2. 55. Conformity: p.er. rwv v61-'wv in acconlance with the laws 3. 82.
2. tLET6. with the Dative (Locative) Chiefiy Epie (usually with the plural or with the collective singular of persons or things personified, or of the parts of living objects): p.er wwrfipcr<V ~EL1rev he spake a mid the suitors p 467, J-'ET cppecrl in their hearts 245.
3. p.ml. VJith the Accusative Local: into the midst of: veKpoiJs ~pva-av 1-'r )..Ci.v 'Axa<wv they dmgged the dead into the midst of the host of the Achaeans E 573; with an idea of purpose: Uva< p.er Ncrropa togo after (in quest of) Nesto1 K 73. Extension over the midst of: p.er 7r'>!8v throughout the multitude B 143. Phrase: p.er. xpas ii x Lv to have in ha nd T. 1. 138. N.- :From the use in p.er' txv<a {jaZve 8eoo he went after the steps of the goddess -y 30 is derived the prose use: after (of time or 1ank), as p.er. r 'Tpwl"Ka after the Trojan war T. 2. 68, p.er OeoiJs if!vxl) 8E<orarov after the gos the soul is must divine P. L. 726. The range of p.Era with ace. in Attic prose is not wide.

4. p.ET6. in Composition Among (1-'eraotobva< give a slw1e), after, in quest of (J-'eTa7r!L7r<tr8a< sencl /01). When one thing is among other things, it may be said to come after another, to succeed or alternate with it ; hence of succession (p.e87Jp.<ptvbs cliurnus ; cp. p.ee' iJJ-'pav after daybreak), alteration or change (p.era-ypacf>E<v rewrite, p.<raJ-'ELv repent i.e. care for something else ). When contrasted with a-v, J-'ETa often denotes.. participation : o 1-'hoxos the partner, o crvvwv the companion. a-v often denotes something added. But p.era is usually the prose preposition for cruv, though it does not mean inclusive of.
1692. 1ro.p6. (Hom. 7rapa{, Lat. por- in porrigere) alongside, by, nea1. Except with the accusative 7rapa is commonly used of persans and personified things.
1. 1ro.pO. with the (Ablatival) Genitive Usually coming or procceding from a person, in Hom. also of things; cp. de chez.

382

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[x6g2

a. Local : ol avro!J.oovres 1rap. {Ja<nMws the desmters from the king X. A. 2. 1. 6. In poetry, where we might expect the dat. (1659 a): ~"/pero 1rap' "Hp'IJS lit. he awoke from the side of Hera 0 5. In standard Attic prose 1rap&. with the gen. of a thing is excessively rare. When so used, the thing is personified, or the thing implies a person (as 7rOLS, <lpx-IJ, Oii.rpov). b. Author, Source (cp. 1410) : with verbs of 1eceiving, taking, asking, learning, sending, etc. : 1ra.p. M-fJiiwv r'l]v <lpx'l]v iM~J.fJa.vov IUpcrat the Persians wrested the empiTe f1om the Medes X. A. 3. 4. 8, 1rap rro i~J.aiJowv we lemned from you X. C. 2. 2. 6; 7J 1ra.p. rwv 8ewv el!vota. the good-will on the part of the gods D. 2. 1 (less commonly 1rb) ; with passives and intransitives (instead of inro with the gen. of the agent) : r 1rap rf}s rvx'IJs owp'IJIJvra the gifts of Fmtune I. 4. 26, . rovro 1rap 1ravrwv O!J.Oo-yErat this is acknowledged on all sides (on the paTt of all) L. 30. 12.
2. 1rapcl. with the Dative Almost always of persons in standard Attic prose; cp. chez. a. Local: ou 1rap. !J.rJrp! crrovrat ol 1ralies, 1rap rel' otliacrKa<f! the boys do not eat 1vith theiT mothers, but with thei1 teache1s X. C. 1. 2. 8, 1rap' !J.ol <TK'I)vov to mess with me (as chez moi) 6. 1. 49; of things: r. 1rap. 8aarrv xwpla the places along the sea X. A. 7. 2. 25. b. Other relations: Possessor: r fLEV xpvcrlov 1rap rovr<f!, o! li Klvlivvo< 1rap' tJL'i:v this man has the gold, y ou the dange1s Aes. 3. 240 ; of the superior in command: ol 1rap {Jacr<E ~vres those under the king X. A. 1. 5.16; of the person judging: valrws 1rap. ros crrpa.nwrats blmeless in the opinion of the troops X. C. 1. 6. 10, o!J.oo"/<Tat 1rap rel' lifi/J-'1' it is ag1eed in the opinion of the people Lye. 54 (here 1rapa denotes the sphere of judgment); with the gen. after a passive (1692. 1. b) it denotes the source. 3. 1rapcl. with the Accusative a. Local; of motion to, in prose only of persons : 'ljKe 1rap' JLf come to me X. C. 4. 5. 25; motion along, by, past. (a place): 1rap "'ii 1rev sail along shore T. 6. 13; of parallel extent (along, alongsicle, beside) with verbs of motion and of rest (often the dat.), and often when no verb is used: i)V7rep ~a{Jov Pafiv, vMecrav 1rap r rpo1raov the ship they captuTed they set up alongside of the trophy T. 2. 92, e1rev aurel' !J.vetv 1rap' a.vTov he told hirn to remain close by him X. C. 1. 4. 18, r 1reolov ro 1rap. rv 7rOTa!J-6v the plain extending along the river X. A. 4. 3. 1, ijv 1rap. r'l]v oliv Kpf,>TJ there was a spring by the road 1. 2. 1:3. Cont1ary to : 1rap. ros v6!J.ovs i) Kar' aurovs contrary to (i.e. going past) the laws 01' in accordance with them D. 23.20; in addition to (along beside) : gxw 1ra.p. raTa iLo r t "'etv besides this I have to say something else P. Ph. 107 a. Phrase: 1rap' ol"'ov i1rowvro Kavlipov they treated Cleancler as of no ac cou nt (cp. 'next to nothing ') X. A. 6. 6.11: b. Temporal: ( duration) 7rap. "Jravra TOP xpovov th1onghout the tvhole tirne D. 5.2, (momentary) 1ra.p -r oetva in the hour of dangfT A es. 3. 170, 1rap' av-r rdlitK-fJJLa-ra. at the ti me of (i.e. immediate/y afteT) the o.tfences thernselves D.18. 13. c. Other relations : Cause.= lita: 1rap r'l]v .fJ~J.erlpiiv !J.etav in conseqnence of our negligence D. 4. 11, 1rap r 7rpoatcr0cr6at K<KW!rat if it was p1evented by being perceived in advance 19. 42. Dependence: 1rap roro "'"/OV< r

I693)

PREPOSITIONS

383

'Twv 'EXXo1vwv the f01tunes of the Greeks depend on this D. 18. 232. Mea.sure : 1rap p.Kpv -J"Mo}J.<v <~avipa7roourOfjvat we had a ?W?'?'Ow escape (came by a little) from being enslaved I. 7. 6, 1rap 1ro'M by jar 'l'. 2. 8. Comparison : i;racrov 1rap' f.1Ja contmst with each othm D. 18. 265, X"luJJv J1<l5wv 1rap T1)v Ka0<crT1JKvav &pav stormy weathe?' more severe than was to be ex-

pected at the season then present T. 4. 6. 4. 'll'a.pci in Composition .Alongsie, by, besicle (1raptvat go alongside), beyond, pa.t (1rap<'!l.avv<Lv d?ive past), over (1rapop.v overlook), aside, amiss ('11'apaKov<Lv misunderstand). \
1693. 'll'epC around (on all sides), abmtt; cp. 7rpt~ round about. Lat. per in permagnus. 1rEp[ is wier than &l-'cf>[: cp. X. Vect. 1. 7 ov 'II'EpppvToc; ol!o-o. Xr1rep v'Jo-oc; &.fL<f>t8&o.T'Toc; yap lo-n it (A ttica) is not, like an island, su?-rounded by the sea ... for it has ~he sea on two sides. On 7rEp{ post-positive, see 1GG5.
1.
"li'Ep(

with the Genitive

a. Local (poetic): 1repl TpO'II'tos f3f3aws ?'iding on (astride) the keel e 130.
b. Other relations: al! out, concen~ing (Lat. de), the subject about which an act or thonght centres: 'II'Epl 1rarpi!Jos Jl.axov}J.evot fighting fm their count?'Y T. 6. 69 (cp. 'II'p ), li<l<ras 7r<pl roO v!o jeming for his son X. C. 1. 4. 22, -yELv npl 'T'js elp-f,v1Js to speak about peace T. 5. 56; r 1repl rtvos instead of r 1repl nva is used in the neighbourhood of a verb of saying or thinking (wlch takes 1repl with gen.): r 7repl 'Tfjs cip<Tfjs the relations of virtue P. Pr. 360 e. Superiority (cp. 1402) : 1replean 'YV>atKwv <oos thon dost su?:pass women in beauty cr 248, 1repl 'll'avros 1TDLOIJ}J.EJJot regmding as (more than everything) all-impo?tant T. 2.11 (cp. 1373). 2. 'II'Ep( with the Dative a. Local : about: of arms, dress, etc., in prose : crrp<'ll'rol ?rE pl -ros 'Tpaxo7Xots collms about their necks X. A. 1. 5. 8, t 1r<pl roZs uwJl.a'"" ~xovutv the clothes about their persans l. ep. 9. 10 (on1y case in the orators), 'll'<pl iovpl A303. b. Other relations (usually poetic) : External cause : o<liTavres 1repl 'Tas vavcrlv ajraid for thei? ships T. 7. 53 (with verbs of jearing, 1repl with the gen. is jear oj or fear for). Inner impulse: 'll'<pl Tcip{3EL jromfear A. Pers. 694. 3. 'll'ep( with the Accusative a. Local : of position: a7rITrEL'Aav vas 1repl IT'!I.01rbvv7Jcrov they despatcheil ships round about Peloponnese T. 2. 23, c;lKovv 1r<pl ...auav r~v :ZtK<'Alav they settled all round Sicily 6. 2 ; of persons : o! 1r<pl 'HpliK'AELrov the jollowers of Heraclitus P. Crat. 440 c. b. lndefinite statement of time and number : 1repl 5p8pov about dawn T. 6. 101, 1repl {3io}J.1,KovTa about seventy 1. 54. c. Other relations : Occupation : ol ,.,pl r~v Jl.OV<TtK1}v 5vres those who a1e engaged in liberal pursuits l. 9. 4; connected with, of general relation ( with reference to) : o! vb}J.o< o! ...epl 'Tos 'Yri}J.ovs the laws about marriage P. Cr. 50 d, 1repl 8eos acr<(3ITTarot most i?npiatts in regard to the gods X. H. 2. 3. 53, 'T 1repl r&s vavs naval affairs T. 1. 13. Verbs of action ( except verbs of

384

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1694

striving) prefer 7r~pl with accus., verbs of perception, emotion, knowing, prefer 1ropl with gen. But the cases often shift. 4. ..,.Ep( in Composition A1ound, about ( 7r<pdxv s11r1'ottnd), beyond, over ( 7r<pte'Lva< excel; and 7r<pLOp.v look beyond, ovmZook, su,{f'el-), (remaining) ove1 (7r<p<-yl-yvo<r0a< remain over, result, and excel), exceedingly (7r<p<xap1}s ve1y glad).
1694. 1rp6 (Lat. pro, for) before.

Cp.

vT{,

which is narrower m

1. ..,.po with the (}enitive only a. Local : 1rpo rwv .JLa~wv in front of the wagons X. C. 6. 2. 36. b. Temporal: 1rp rijs JLUXTJS before the battle X. A. 1. 7. 13. c. Other relations: Defence or care (cp. inrp) : o<aK<voivo6v 1rpo {Ja<r<Mws to incur dangm in defence of (prop. in front of) the king X. C. 8. 8. 4. Preference (cp. avTl): o! ?r<uvovHs 1rpo o<KawrrPTJS ao<Kliiv those who laud injustice in p1efe1ence to justice P. R. 361 e, 1rp 1roo ?roteZ<rOat to esteem highly (in preference to much) J. 5. 1;38, <f>wviiv 1rpo rwvo< to spealc for them (as their spolcesman) S. O. T. 10 ( avTI Twvii = as theiT deputy, 1rp rwvoo as their champion). 2. ..,.po in Composition Befme, forward, forth ( 7rpo{JaXv put fmwa1'(l), fm, in behalf of, in defence of,. in public ( 7rpoa"(opo6e<v give public notice), bejo1ehand ( 7rp60TJOs ma nifest beforehand), in preference ( 1rpoa<p<rOa< choose in p1eference ).

meaning.

1695. 1rpos (Hom. also 7rport), at, by (fronting). but of different origin, is Hom. 7roT!.

Of like meaning,

1. .... pos with the Genitive a. Local (not common in prose): r 1rpos <r1rp.s rZxos the wall facing the ~vest x. H. 4. 4. 18, T. V7rOj6-yLa gxovTfS 7rpos TO 7rOTJLO having the pack-animals on the side towa1d the TiveT X. A. 2. 2. 4. b. Otherrelations: Descent: 1rponrarpbs on thefathe1'sside Aes.3.169. Characteristic: o -y.p 'ljv 1rpos ro K6pov rp61rov fo1' it was not the way of Cyrus X. A. 1. 2. 11. Point of view of a person : 1rpos avOpw1rwv al<rxp6s base in the eyes of men 2. 5. 20. Agent as the source, with passive verbs (instead of 1rb): oJLoo"(iira< 1rps 1rci.vTwv it is ag1eed by all 1. 9. 20; to the advantage of <Y7rOVOUS 7r0LTJ<Yri}LEVOS 1rpos 8TJf3alwv jLov ?} 7rpOs aVTWP making a tTUCe more to the advantage of the Thebans th(tn of his own pa1ty X. H. 7. 1. 17 ; in oaths and entreaties: 1rpos Oewv by the gods X. H. 2. 4. ill. 2. ..,.pos with the Dative In a local sense, denoting proximity (generally, in prose, of towns or buildings, not of persons): 1rpos ri) 1r6'A<t T'l]v JLUXTJ 7rotecr8a< to fight near the city T. 6. 49; sometimes like v, as 1rpos iepos ros Kotvoos avareOiJva< to be dedicated in the eommon shrines T. 3. 57. Occupation: 'ijv o'Aos 1rpos Tep i}JLp.o.TL he was wholly intent upon his gain D. 19. 127. In addition to: 1rpos auTos besides these T. 7. 57. In the presence of: 1rpos Tep iitaLTTJTV 'Y"'" to speak befo1'e the arbitrator D. 39. 22.

I6g6)

PIPOS1TJONS

385

3. 1rpos with the Accusative a. Local (direction toward or to, strictly f1onting, facing): ps li~opev -rrps a-rous we willlead you to thern X. A. 7. 6. 6, -rrps vorov (toward the) south T. 3, 6, Uva< -rrps ros -rroXep.lovs to go against the enemy X. A. 2. 6. 10. b. Temporal (rare): -rrps -i}pipiiv towaTd daybreak X. H. 2. 4. 6. c. Other relations : friendly or hostile relation : -rrps lp "fere speak to rne X. C. 6. 4. 19, qnXli -rrps DJLs friendship with you l. 5. 32, ~xOpi -rrps ros 'Anelovs enrnity to the Argives T. 2. 68, but 1} -rrps -iJJLS ~xOpi ouT enrnity 6. 80, 1} 6.-rrixOeta -rrps ros 8TJf3alovs our enrnity to the Thebans and the enrnity of the Thebans to us D. 18. 36. With words of hating, accusing, and their opposites, -rrpos is used either of the subject or of the object or of both parties involved. With words denoting wa11are -rrpos indicates a double relation, and the context must determine which party is the aggressor or assailant: vavJLaxlii KopwOlwv 1rps KepKpalovs a sea-fight between the Gorinthians and the Gmcy1eans T. 1. 13 (here Kal often suffices, as o AaK<Oa<JLovlwv Ka! 'HXelwv -rr6<JLOS X. H. 3. 2. 31 ). Relation in general : oM5v atm~ -rrps r7]v -rroX<v a-rlv he has nothing to do with the city D. 21. 44, -rrps ros Beos ea-e{3ws !!xnv to be pious towmd the gods Lye. 15. l'urpose : 1rpos rl; to what end? X. C. 6. 3. 20, -rrps xap<v "fe<v to spealc in arder to cou1t favour D. 4. 51 ; with a view to ( often nearly =ota): -rrps rara {3ovXeuea-Oe eil w.he1efoTe be well advised T. 4. 87, -rrps r -rrapovra in consequence of the p1esent citcurnstances 6. 41. Conformity: -rrps r7]v a~liv according to rnerit X. C. 8. 4. 29. Standard of judgment: oo 1rps ap-yupwv r7]v eoa<JLovliv l!Kpvov no1 did they estimate happiness by the rnoney-standard I. 4. 76, xcfJpi ws -rrps r 1rXf;Oos rwv -rrorwv lXaxla-rTJ a territoTy ve1y srnall in pTopoTtion to the nurnber of its citizens 4. 107; and hence of comparison: oi tj>avMupo< rwv avflpcfJ-rrwv -rrps ros ~vverwrpous . ilp.ELvov olKoa-t ros 1r6ELS the simpler class of rnen, in comparison with the moTe astute, rna nage their public a.ffairs betteT T. 3. 37. Exchange : -i}ooviis -rrp< -i}oovii< KaraXMrua-Oa< to exchange pleasures for pleasures P. Ph. 69 a. 4. 11'p6s in Composition To, towaTd (-rrpMeXauvELv drive to, -rrpoa-rpinw turn towar), in acldition (-rrpoa-aJLf3amv talee in addition), against (-rrpoa-Kpoue<v strilce against, b angTY with). Often in the general sense of aclditionally, qualifying the whole sentence rather than the verb.

1696. cr..Jv (Older Attic Lat. cum) with.

~vv;

cp. Ion.

~v

from Kovw>

= Kotv>,

1. crtiv with the Inst1umental Dative only. a. In standard (i.e. not Xenophontic) prose a-uv bas been almost driven out of use by p.era. It is used (1) in old formulas, as a-v ( ros) Oeos with the help of the gods, a-v (roZ<) li-rr o<s in arms, <>tc. (of things attached to a person), a-v v(/J intelligrntly; (2) of sum totals (along with, including), as GREEI~ GRA~f. -25

~86

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

tTfJv Tos ~p-yots 1r'Alov 1) filKa T<lavm ~X"

he has rnore than ten talents in-

terest included D. 28. 13.

b. tTvv is usually poetic (rare in comedy) and Xenophontic; it is often used in the formulas of a (1) and of persons and things personified. Its older and poetic meaning is along with (of something secondary or added to the action) and with the help of. So in Xen,: together with, along with: tT?Jv Ti) -yvva<Kl 1iEL1rvev to sup with y our wife X. C. 6. 1. 49.; to reinforce the simple dative: aKoovtlev <Tv TLVL, 1ropee<Ttlat <TVf nv< (1524); with the collateral notion of help: with the aid of, as <Tflv iK<lv'fJ JJ.axe<Ttlat to fight with his help X. C. 5. 3. 5. c. Means and Instrument (regarded as accompaniments of an action : the comitative instrumental): 7] KTf;<TtS aTwv ~<Tnv ooaJJ.ws <Tflv ri) fJlCf-, JJ.ov tTv Ti) evep-ye<TlCf- they (friends) are acqui1ed, not by fonible means, but by kindness X. C. 8. 7. 13. d. Manner: <Tflv -ywn 1jMov they went laughing X. A. 1. 2. 18. In conformity with (opp. to 11'0.pa): OUK 11'Tpe'fe T'ii ofJJJ.'I' 7rap TOS VO}J-OVS o/1J</>ltTa<Ttlo.t,
a <TiJV Tos v6JJ.ots i}vavTtwO., KT. he did not perrnit the people to vote contrary to the laws, but, in confonnity with them, opposed hirnself, etc.

X.M.4.4.2. 2. crvv in Composition Together with (<TvJJ.fJwv live with, <TVJJ.7ropee<Ttlat manh in company with), together (<TvJJ.fJaELv conicere), completely (G'VJJ.1T'1Jpov fill up), contraction in size (tTvvrJJ.vetv eut short), and generally of union or connection. Standard prose uses tTvv- freely.

1697. v"ll'lp
7r{,

(Hom. also inrdp) over, Lat. super. For the contrast with

see 1689.

1. wp with the Geniiive a. Local: frorn over: 011'p Twv liKpwv KaT{Jatvov they carne down over the heights T. 4. 25 ; over, ab ove: v...p rfis KWJJ.1JS -yf}o<jJOs 1j v ab ove the village was a hill X. A. 1. 10. 12. b. Other relations: in defence of, on behalf of: JJ.O.XOJJ.evos V7rp DJJ.wv fighting for you (standing over to protect) P. L. 64:l c; in place of, in the name of: -yw ~w Kal V7rp tTo Kal v11'p 7JJJ.wv 1 will speak both for y ou and for ourselves X. C. 3. 3. 14. Purpose : v1rp To miiTa a{Jev in order to get this D, 8. 44; concerning, about (often = 7repl in Demos. and the later orators; in inscr.. after 300 B. C.) : q,6{Jos V7rf:p To JJ.ovTo< .fear fm the future T. 7. 71, JJ.1J 11'epl Twv litKaiwv JJ.7Jo' V1rp Twv l!~w 11'pii"YJJ.6.Twv not about your. just claims nor about your fmeign interests D. 6. 35. 2. v11'p with the Accusative a. Local: 7rp ovliov fJfwero he passed over the threshold v G3, ol v...p 'E'l]tT7ronov olKovres those who dwell beyond the Hellespont X. A. 1. 1. 9. b. Temporal ( = 11'po) rare: u7rp T M'Y]o<Ka before the Persian wa1s T. 1. 41. c. Measure: 7rp ?iJJ.<G'V rnore than half X. C. 3. 3. 47, 7rf:p liv8pw11'ov beyond the power of rnan P. L. 839 d.

r6g8]

PIPOSITIONS

387

3. v1rp in Composition Over, above (inr<pf36..E<v c?oss over, lnrept!x<<v trans. hold over, intr. be above), in behalf of, jo1 (!nr<pp.axev poet. fight for), exceedingly (!nr<p<f>pov<v be ove1-pru ud). 1698. v1r6

(Hom. also v1rat, Lesbian lm-a-), under, by, Lat. sub.

1. V.... with the Genitive a. Local (rare in Attic prose) : out frorn under (poet., cp. irrrt!K): pE< Kpf}v1J inro crnlovs a spTing jlows out from a rave ' 140, a{3wv {3ov rrb p.a~1Js talcing an ox frorn a wagon X. A. 6. 4. 25; unde1 (of rest): T. inro ')'i]s (a fixed phrase) li:rravTa all things under the emtl~ P. A. 18 b. b. Other relations (metaphorically unde1 the agency of): Direct agent (with passives and with verbs haviug a passive force); contrast o<a, 1685. 2. d: crwOt!vns inro croii savul by you X. A. 2. 5. 14, alcrOop.<vos lnr' aTop.bwv i11fo?rned by deseTters 'l'. 5. 2, ev aKoELv tro civOpwtrwv to be well spolcen r!f by men X. A. 7. 7. 2:3. With passive nouns: i} vtro M<f}Tov ')'pa<f>f} the indictrnent brouuht by Meletus X. M. 4. 4. 4, Ki]rns rro ri]s f3ovMjs invitation by the Benate D. 19. il2. External cause : citrw<ro tro J.W peTished of hungm X. A. l. 5. 5, ouK ltr! rro tr rwv ltrtrwv l~tbvr<s not going out ja1 because of the cavalry '1'. 6. 37. Internai cause: tro rwv p.eylcrrwv vK1J8vr<s, rip.ijs Kal Movs Kal w<f><lis const?ainecll;y the st?ongest motives, honour and fear and pro.fit T. l. 7G. External accompaniment, as pressure, in lrb~<vov tr p.acrri')'wv they shot W!de1 the lash X. A. 3. 4. 25; sound, in vtro a1Jrwv to the accompaniment of jlute-playen T. 5. 70 ; light, in tr <f>ivo rrop<<crOa, to go with a torch X. R L. 5. 7. Manner : vrro crrrovoi]s hastily '1'. 3. 33. N. 1.- trb with the genitive of a thing personifies the thing. The things so personified are (1) words implying a person, as b')'ot, (2) ex:ternal circumstances, as <Tvp.rj>op{, Klvovos, vbp.os, (3) natural phenornena, as XELp.wv, (4) emotions, as <f>Obvos. The dative may also be employed. See 1493, 1494. N. 2.- On vtr6 to express the persona! agent with the perf. pass. see 1.493. 2. v1r6 with the Dative a. Local: under (of rest): crr&.vru 1rb nv< ovop4J to stand under a t1ee P. Phil. 38 c. trb of place is more common with the dative than with the,genitive. b. Other relations: Agent (poetic, except with verbs signifying to educate): tro rra<oorplf3v a')'a0(/) tr<tradiwp.t!vo, educated unde1 (the guida,nce of) a good master P. Lach. 184 e. Cotiperative cause (poet.): f3i7 tr' p.vp.ov< trop.trfi he went under a /Jlameless convoy Z 171. Subjection: o[ rr f3acr<< 5vr<s the subjects of (i.e. those under) the king X. C. 8. 1. 6, <f>' ari> tro<f]cracrOat to bring under his own power D. 18. 40.
3. {,.,.6 with the Accusative a. Local: Motion und er: rr' arov ( rv 'Ab<f>ov) crrf}cri r crrpar<vp.a halting the arrny 1mcle1 the hill X. A. 1. 10. 14. Motion down und er (poet.) : </1 rro ')'aav I shall go down uncle1 the earth ~ 33:3. Extension or position : at

388

SYNT AX OF THE SIMPLE

S~~TENCE

[t6gg

rr r /Jpos Kwp.a< the villages at the foot of the mountain X. A. 7. 4. 5. Proximity: rroKf1.V1J ii Eli{'lo<a &rr rijv 'AntKT]v Euboea lying close by (under) .Attica I. 4. 108. b. Temporal (of time impending or in progress): rr vVKTa at the approach of night (sub noctem) T. 2. 92, U'TrO VVKTa. d1b?'ing the night Hdt. 9. 58, rr rnv elp-fJV7Jv at the time of the peace I. 4. 177. c. Otber relations. Subjection: rro <r<j>fls rrotecr8a< to b1ing under their own sway T. 4. 60. 4. 1ro in Composition Under (rronOva< place under), behind (rro'Adrrm leave behind), sec1etly (cp. underhand; rrorrp.rrHv send as a spy), g1adually (rroKaTaf'lalvav descend by deg1ees), sliqhtly (inro<Palvetv shine a little); of accompaniment (u11'r/oHv accompany with the voice); of an action performed by another (rroK1JpVTre<r0a< have oneself pToclaimed by the hemld).
IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS

1699. Improper prepositions do not form compounds (1647). 1700. With the Genitive.
The list below contains some of the adverbial words used as prepositions. [The more important words are printed in fat type. An asterisk denotes words used only in poetry.] a-yxoO nem, poet. and Ionie (also witb dat.). iivEu without, except, besides, away f?'Om, ra.rely after its case. avTla., avTlov facing, against, poet. and Ionie (also with dat.). lirep without, apart from, away _f1om. iixp and ..XP' as jar as, w~til (of place, time, and number). olK1JV afte?' the manneT of (accus. of lK7J). olxa* apart from, unlike, except. yyvs neaT (with dat. poetical). Eto-"' (t<rw) within. hs faT f?om, poetic and Ionie. KaTpwOev on both sides of. KTos without. ~ .....poo-9ev befoTe. va.vT(ov in the pTesence of (poet. against, gen. or dat.). ~vEKa., vEKEv (Ion. vEKa., veKev) on account oj, for the sake oj, with regard to, IL~ually postpositive. From such combinations as TouTou i!voca. arose, by fusion, the illegitimate preposition ov<Ka. (found chiefiy in the texts of the dramatists). 1vep0<* beneath. VTOS within. tOl mtt of, beyond (of time), except. f19li straight to. KaTa.vnKpV over against. KpV</>a, XOp. unbeknown to. ..ETa.Ev between. ..xp WJ far as. v6<r</><* apart from. &... ,o-9ev behind. rrpos* before. rras* neaT ( also with dat.). 7rpi beyond (ultra). rrpiv across (trans). 1rT]v except, as rr'AT]v vopa.11'6owv except slaves X. A. 2. 4. 27. Often an adverb or conjunction : 11'avT! oi)'Aov rrl\ijv fl.ol it is cleaT to eveTYbody except me P. R. 529 a. 1rTJo-(ov near (also with dat.). rrbppw, 11'p6crw jar fTOm. 11'plv*bejore (Pindar). crxeo6v* neaT. Ti)l\e* jar jTom. xoi.pLv for the sake of (accus. of xp<s), usually after its case. x.,p(s without, separatejrom.

1701. With the Dative. a..a. together with, at the same time with.

o..o~

togethe?' with, close to.

1702. With. the Accusative . .:,s to, of persons only, used after verbs expressing or implying motion. Probably used especially in the language of the people.

THE VERB: ACTIVE VOICE

389

THE VERB:

VOlCES

ACTIVE VOICE

1703. The active voice represents the subject as perfmming the action of the verb : ovw I v:ash. a. Under action is included being, as i] 1704. 1705.
oo~

JLa.Kpti lrrn the way is long.

Active verbs are transitive or intransiUve (920).

The action of a transitive verb is directed immediately upon an object, as TV?TTW Tv ?Tai:8a I strike the boy.
1706. The object of a transitive verb is always put in the accusative (1553). 1707. The action of an intransitive verb is not directed immediately upon an object. 'rhe action may be restricted to the subject, as ..\yw I arn in pain, or it may be defined by an oblique case or by a preposition with its case, as ..\yw Tov> ?T68a> I have a pain in my jeet, <f>iKt:To d ryv 1r0tv he arrived at the city. 1708. Many verbs are used in the active voice both transitively and intransit,ively. So, in English, turn, move, change. Cp. 1557 ff. a. The distinction between transitive and intransitive verbs is a grammatical convenience, and is not founded on an essential difference of nature. 1709. Active verbs ordinarily transitive are often used intransitively:

a. By the ellipsis of a definite external object, which in sorne cases may be employed, as IL'Yv (ro urparevJLa.) mcueh, afpv (r-i}v IL-yKvpa.v) hoist the anchor, (rs vas) get under sail, stmt, 1ralpe<v (rs va.~, rov urpa.r6~) sail away, march away, ha'Y<<v (ri> v {3lov) live, ave<v ( rv f1r1rov) ride, ( r apJLa) d1ive, ( rov urpa.r6v) march, KCJ.Ta.DE<V (ros Z?T?Tous, r ?TOSV'Y<a.) halt, KCJ.TX<tv (r?jv va.v) put in sho1e, 7rpo(J'xe<v ( rv voiiv) pa y attention, T<evrv (ri> v {3lov) die. 'l'he origillal
sense has often been so completely forgotten that it becomes possible to say afpetv r</) (J'Tpa.r<;> set out with the anny T. 2. 12, a.vwv !ilpoiivr< r</) t7r7r'l' 1iding with his h01se in a sweat X. A. 1. 8. 1. b. 1rptirrELv, lfxELv with adverbs often mean to lceep, ta be: ev 1rptirrELv faTe well, Ka.ws lfxe<v be well (bene se halleTe), ~X"" orws be so. So wben a reflexive pronoun is apparently omitte: (x' a.ro stop the1e ! D. 45. 26. c. Many other transitive verbs may be nsed absolutely, i.e. with no definite object omitted, as vKv be a victor, ii<Kev be guilty. Cp. 'amare' be in love, 'drink' be a dTunlcanl. This is. especially the case in compounds, e.g. of
..ciT'TELV, ftv6etv, t6JI(J.L, K.fvetv, a}.l{3CbiLV, fi'TT'ELV, J.LEL"'/VfJvat.

d. In poetry many uncompounded transitive verbs are used intransitively. Many intransitive verbs become transitive when compounded with a prep., especially when the compound has a transferred sense, 1559. In some verbs lst aorist. and 1st perfect are transitive, 2d aorist and 2d perfect are intransitive. Cp. 819.

390

SYNT AX OF THE. SIMPLE SENTENCE

1710. Jnstead of the active, a periphrasis with -yl')'v<fJ'0at may be nsed, often to expl'CSS solemnity. p.7Jv!ra1 ')'l'fvovrat they tll1'ned injonne1s T. 3. 2, p.T] {Jpt<rr?)s 'YV!J 'do not be guilty of outrage' S. Aj. 10!.!2. 1711. Causative Active.- The active may be used of an action performed at the bidding of the subject: Kvpo 'Tdo (3acr{Eta Ka'TKaucrEv Cyrus burnt dawn the palace (i.e. had it burnt down) X. A.l. 4.10. So with d.?TOK'Tdvav put to death, 8.?TrLV bwy, o1Ko3oJJ-Ev build, ?Tat3Evnv instruct, &.vawfJpD'TrELV publicly proclaim. 1712. An infinitive limiting the meaning of an adjective is usually active where English employs the passive (cp. 2006).
MIDDLE VOICE

1713. The middle voice shows that the action is performed with special reference to the subject: ov0a' I wash myself. 1714. The middle represents the subject as doing something in which he is interested. He may do something to hhnself, fu?" himsel.f, or be may act with something belonging to himself. 1715. The future middle is often (807), the first aorist middle is almost never, used passively. 1716. The object of the middle (1) may belongin the sphere of the subject, as his propercy, etc.: 1\ovop.at r!Js xepas I wash my hands, or (2) it may be brought into the sphere of the subject : ros '"" 1\iriis p.<r<11'J1.'f;avro they sent fm the hoplites, or (3) it may be removed from the sphere of the subject : 1ro!Hoop.at r?)v olKliiv I sellmy house (lit. give away). Here the object is also the property of the su_bject. 1717. The Direct Reflexive Middle represents the subject as acting directly on hirnself. Se~f is here the direct object. So with verbs expressing external and nat mal aets, as the verbs of the toilet: &.d<j>Ecr8ut anm:nt oneselj, ovcr8at wash onesel;f; and KOUJJ-Ecr8at adorn oneselj, crT<f>avovcr8at c1own oneseif; yuJJ-vi.~Ecr8at exmcise oneself.

a. The direct reflexive idea is far more frequently conveyed by the active and a reflexive pronom!, 1723. b. The part affected may be added in the accusative: bralfJ'aro rov p.7Jpov he smote his thigh X. C. 7. 3. 6.
1718. So with many other verbs, as tcrra.a-Oa< stand (place oneself), rpt!7refJ'!Jat twn (lit. tun~ oneself), 07JofJ'!Jat show oneself, r&.rT<cr!Jat post oneself, 7roo'fi:crOat defend oneself (mgue oneself o.ff), <f>alv<cr!Jat show onesel.f, appem, 7ra.pafYK<v&.!;efY0aL p1epare oneseZf, 7r61\l\ucr0at destruy oneself, perish. 1719. The Indirect Reflexive Middle represents the subject as acting for hirnse~{, with reference to MmseZf, or urith sornething belonging to hirnself Self is often here the indirect object. So ?Top{~Ecr8at pTOvide for oneseif (?Top{~ Et v 1J1"ovide), <j>uI'Trw8at guard against (<j>u.rrEtv

1724]

TliE VEIW: MIDDLE VOICE

391

keep gnard), aipEcr8at choose (talee fot oneself), 7rapxEcrBat fumish (7raptxav offet, p1eseni).
1720. Cases in which the object is to be removed from the sphere of the subjct may be resolved into the dative fo1" oneselj (1483): -r~v pq.Ovp.IO.v ci?ro8hr8at to lay aside you1 indolence D. 8. 46, hpbf;av-ro -ros i?r?ras they routed the ca11alry T. 6. 98, -ros <x8pos cip.6vetr8at to ward off the enerny for themselves, i.e. to defend thernsel11es against the enerny 1. 144. 1721. The middle often denotes that the subject acts with something belonging to himself (material objects, means, powers). It is often used of acts donc willingly. Thus, 1rapxerr8at furnishj1orn one's own 1esources, i?ra'Y'YetrOat prornise, rnake profession of, -r!OerrOat r~v -.f;'ij<f>ov give one' s vote, riOetrOat r. o?ra g1ound arrns, ci7rooel~arr0at 'YvcfJp.TJV set forth one' s opinion, ap.fJavetrOal rtvos put one's hand on (seize) something. 'l'hus, itr1rarrp.vot -r. ~1</>TJ ha11ing drawn their swords X. A. 7. 4. 16,- 1raoas KKeKop.trrp.vot 7wav they had 1emoved their children T. 2. 78, -rpo1raov rrr'l)rra/).vot having set up a t1ophy X. H. 2. 4. 7, o?ra 1roplrrarr8at to p1ocu1e arrns fm thernsel11es T. 4. 9, o?rrO.s p.ere1rp.-.f;aro he sent jo1 hoplites 7. 31, 'Yvva'i:Ka 1J'Ya'Y6!1-"1 1 rnarried L. 1. 6. 1722. Under the indirect middle belong the periphrases of ?rotrrOat with verbal nouns instead of the simple verb (cp. 1754). ?rotv with the same nouns means to b1ing al! out, effect, jashion, etc. elp-f,v'r}v ?roteo-Oat rnake peace (of one nation at war witb another). elp-f,V'l)v 1rotev b1ing aout a peace (between opponents, nations at war: of an individual). fJ-f,pO.v 7rotrr0at ( = IJTJpv) hunt, 8-f,pO.v 1rotv arrange a hunt. 6'Yov ?roterrOat ( = 'Y<tv) delive1 a speech, 6'Yov 1rote'i:v compose a speech. vavp.axiO.v 7rotrr8at ( = vavp.axev) firJht a na11al1Jattle. vavp.axlO.v ?rote'i:v brin(! on a 1wt>al battle (of the commander). oov ?rOtrrOat ( = OOet!ELV) make a journey, ooov ?rOLeLV build a ?"oad. 1r6ep.ov 7roterr1Jat tvaye war, 1r6ep.ov ,.o,ev lning about a war. ,-,.ovis ?rote'i:rrOat conclwle (make) a t1eaty, or truce. a-1rovoas 1rotev b1ing about a t1eaty, or truce. 1723. Active and Reflexive.- Instead of the direct middle the active voice with the. reflexive prononn is usually employed; often of difficult and unnatural actions (especially with a-ino avTov, etc.).
T. 81ra 1rapoorrav Ka1 rr</>s aoros they SU1Tende1ed their arms and thernsel1Jes T. 4. 38, p.trrOwrris ar6v hi1ing himself out D. Hl. 29 (not p.trrOwrrap.evos, which means hiring jrn- himsel.f), KaratKe r~v avrs arofi ovvarrreiO.v he himself has put an end ta his own sovereignty Aes. 3. 233, 'l}rip.wKev iavrbv he has dishonoured himself D. 21. 103. But regularly ci7ra'Y.xerr8at hang oneself (1717). a. The active and a reflexive pronoun in the gcn. or dat. may be used for the simple middle wheu the reflexive notion is emphatic: Karael7retv a-V'Y'Ypd.p.p.ara iavrwv to lea1Je behind them thei1 written compoMtions P.l'hae. 257 d. 1724: Middle and Reflexive.- The reflexive pronoun may be used with the middle: iavrov ci7roKp,.rerrOcu to hide himself P. TL 393 c; often for emphasis, as in contrasts: oi !-dv </>O.rrt fJarr<MO. Keevrral nva i?rtrr<f>a~at arv KVpt;>, oi o'

392
iam/w

SYNTAX O.F THE

SIMPL~

SENTENCE

brunpcl.~au8at some say that the king issued orders for some one to slay him (Artapates) over (the body of) Gy1us, while others say that he sleto himself toith his own hand X. A. 1. 8. 29, cp. also rl r1}v 1r6'Atv 1rpoufjK 1f"OLEv, pxT]v Kat rvpavvla rwv 'E'A'Ao]vwv pwuav iavr<f' KarauKwat6p..vov 4.>lL1f"1f"O>; what did 'it beseem the city to do when it saw Philip compassing fo1' himseif dominion and despotic sway over the Greeks ? D. 18. 66.

1725. The Causative Middle denotes that the subject has something done by another for himself: E"fw "fcl.p O""e rara lta~cl.p:qv f01' I had you tauyht this X. C. 1. 6. 2, 1raparlOe0""8at O""Tov to have food scrved up 8. 6. 12, IJO""ot ihr'Aa q,rfp'Y/vrat, rax /l'AXa rroto]uovrat all who have had the ir anns taken f1om them will soon get othe~s made 6. 1. 12, avr,;1 CTK7Jv1-Jv KareuKevcl.O""aro he had a tent prepared for himseif 2. 1. 30. a. This force does not belong exclusively to the middle; cp. 1711. 1726. Reciprocal Middle.- With a dual or plural subject the middle may indicate a reciprocal relation. So with verbs of contending, conversing (questioning, replytg), g1eeting, embracing, etc. The reciprocal middle is often found with compounds of &a.
ol ciO'ArJrat n"fwvl!ovro the athletes contended T. 1. 6, KaraO""nivres ip.axovro when they had got into position they fouyht 1. 49, vT]p vpt !Le"foPTo they conversed man with man 8. 93, &tp.el"fvvuea, d"'A'Ao]Xots to have jriendly intercourse with one anothe1 X. C. 7. 4. 5, rara tavep.ovrat they will divide this up among themselves L. 21. 14. So alrtuOat accuse, "'Ap.alveuOat malt1eat, p.p.cpeu8at blame, .p.tO""Oat vie, 7rapaKe"'AdJe0""8at encourage one anothe1. a. The active may also be employed, as 7roep.ev wage wm. b .. Sorne of these verbs have a passive aorist form, as te"'Alx87Jv (812).

1727. The reciprocal relation may also be expressed (1) by the use of the reflexive pronoun (cp. 1724) with the active: q,Oovoutv iavros they a1e mutually envious X. M. 3. 5. 16 ; (2) by the nse of "'A'Ao]Xwv, etc., with the active : p.1><0""fJ"'rop.ev "'A'Ao]'Aotr we are at va1'iance with one anothe1 P. Phae. 263 a; (3) by repetition of the noun : 1rrwxs 1rrwx<!' q,OovEL = beyga1's envy each othe?' Hesiod W. D. 26. The reflexive pronouns and 'A'Ao]'Awv, etc., may also be added to the middle. 1728. Differences between Active and Middle.- As contrasted with the active, the middle lays stress on the conscious activity, bodily or mental participation, of the agent. In verbs that possess both active and middle : [3ov'Aeveu8at deliberate, {Jov"'AeuEtv plan, ura8p..v measure, ura8p.u0at calculate, O""K01f"ev look at, O"Ko7reu8at conside1', gxeuOat cling to, 1ra6Eu8at "Cease (1734. 14). The force of the middle often cannot be reproduced in translation ( KouwOat, rp..uOat, pt8p.e0""8a.t, a7rope0""8a<), and in sorne other cases it may not have been felt, as in opu8at in poetry (1rpoopu8at occurs in prose). a. Many such verbs form their futures from the middle : Km!O""oJI.at, 1/.0""op.at, p.apro]O""op.at. See 805. b. In verbs in -evw, the middle signifies that the subject is acting in a mann er appropriate to his state or condition : 1ro'Ardmv be a citizen, 1ro'Areue0""8at act as

1734]

THE VERB: MIDDLE VOl CE

393

a citizen, perjorm one's civic duties; 1Tpur{3dtttv be an envoy, 1Tpurf3dmr0at negoUate as en voy or se nd envoys (of the State in its negotiations). But this force of the middle is not al ways apparent.
~ 729. Middle Deponents (810) often denote bodil y or mental action (feeling and thin king): aHr8a~ fwnp, 7rmr8at fly, opx<a-8at dance,

oTx<a-8at be go ne, 8pK<a-8at look; f3ov<a-8at wish, a1a-8vEa-8J.t pmcei've, Kpoa-Ba~ listen, p..JL<P<a-Bat blarne, ow-8m cor\jecture, thinlc (lit. take omens for oneselj, from op>, Lat. avis, auspicium), ~ylrOat consider ). Ao<PDpEa-8at lament. .
a. Sorne of the verbs denoting a functional state or process have the middle either in ail forms or only in the future. b. Verbs denoting bodily activity regularly have a middle future, 805-806. ~ 730. Deponent verbs are either direct or indirect middles ; direct : 7Turxve'r8cu unde1take, promise (lit. hold oneself unde1) ; indirect: KrcrOcu acquile jo1 oneselj, "(wvlteCTOat contend (with one's own powers). ~ 73~. The middle may denote moTe vigorous participation on the part of the subject than the active: cre6ecr8at dart, but 8etv l'Un. ~ 732. The active is often used for the middle when it is not of practical importance to mark the interest of the subject in the action. The active implies wh at the middle expresses. So with iJ-<rcmiJI.'ITttv send jo1 T. 7. 15, 1Jwcra.nes rl]v 'Y>Wf.l1J" setting f01th theil' opinion 3. 37, rporra.ov crT'Ijcra.vns setting up a t1ophy 7. 5. ~ 733. The passive form may have reflexive force, as K"1J8fiva.t set onese{f in rnotion, '!Ta.a."(fjvat Temove uneseiJ~ lva.vnwOfjva.t oppose oneself, crw8fjva.t save <meself (crw87Jn save you1selj l'. Cr. 44 b). Some of these middle passives may take the accusative, as a.lcrxuvOfjvat be ashanwd before, <f>of31J0fivru be afm.id of, KaTCJ.'lr7J'Yf7val nva be amazed at some one. See 814 ff. ~ 734. List of the chief verbs showing important differences of meaning between active and middle. It will be noted that the active is often transitive, the middle intransitive. 1. a.tpELV talee; alpecrOat ehoose. 2. O.p.;ivuv ri nvt VJal'd o.tf something from some one, fJ-6vetv nvl help sorne one; ,.,.vvecrOa.l rt defend oneself against something, ,.,.vvecrOal nva. l'equite sorne one. 3. ci1roSovvcu give back; rl1ToaoCT8at sell (give away for one's profit). 4. O'!M'ELV attach ," a'!TTCT0a( Tl VOS tOUCh. 5. O.pxnv begin, contrasts one beginner of an action with another, as ilpxv rroMp.ou talee the aggressive, strike the .first blow (bellum movete), ilpxetv D"(ov be the jirst to spealc, 'f}pxe xttpwv oiKwv he beg an an unprovolced assault L. 4. 11 ; ilpxuOat make one's own beginning, as contrasted with the Jater stages, as ilpxecrOa.t 'lrOfJ-ov begin ~vmlilee OJ>rmrtions (bellum incipme), ilpxecr8a.< rov "'fou begin one's speech. 'lrOlffJ-ou oK lip~ofJ-, pxo!J.ivovs !J,vo61J.t0a we shall not take the initiative in the wa1, but upon tlwse who talee it 11p we shall ntaliate T. 1. 144. 6. -ya.p.ELV rna1'1'Y (of the nmn. ducere); 'YawcrOa.t mwi-y (of the woman, nube1e). 7. ypacj>etv vbJ!.ov p1opose a law (said of the maker of a law whether or not he is himself subject to it); "(parJ!<crOat "'fpa<f>f,v draw ,up an indictment for a public

394

SYNTAX .F THE Sll\iPLE SENTENCE

[1735

offence, -ypd.qmr8al nva bring suit against sorne one (have him written down in the magistrates' records). 8. Sa.vdteLv (make of anything a iid.vos loan) i.e. put out at interest, Zend; oaveljefTIJat (have a ild.vos made to oneself) have lent to one, bor1ow at interest. 9. SLKci.tELv give judgment; iltKd.jfTIJat (illK'fJ" nvl) go to law with a persan, .conduct a case (properly get sorne one to give judgment). 10. ~.,."l~''l<i>(tELv put to vote (of the presiding officer); 7rt1f'fJ</>l!efTIJat vote, decree (of the people). 11. xELv hold; ~xefTIJal nvos hold on to, be close to. 12. 6;jELv sacrifice; IJ6Etr0at take auspices (of a general, etc.). 13. p.Lcr6oilv (put a JL<IJ"IJ6s, rent, on anything) i.e. let for hc (locare); JLtiJ"Ooa-IJat (lay a JLttriJ6s upon oneself) i.e. hire (conduce1e). Cp. 1723. 14. 1ravELv malce to cease, stop (trans.); 7raVEIJ"IJat cease (intr.). But 1ra.e
'M-ywv stop tallcing.

15. mC9ew persuade; .,.EliJEIJ"IJat obey (persuade oneself); 1rf1rot!Ja 1 trust. 16. n6va.L v6JLov frame or propose a law for others (said of the lawgiver, legem fene or rogme) ; rliJeiJ"IJat v6JLov malce a law for one's own interest, for one's own State (said of the State legislating, legem sciscere or 'iube1e). avros
( 'Ypd.q,ovs vbJLovs) o! liv1Jpw1rot ~IJEvro . Oeos OlJLD.t ros v6JLOVS rovrovs ros vOpW7rots IJEivat

men did not rnalce the unwritten laws for themsel'oes, but 1 thinlc the gods made these laws for men X. M. 4. 4. 19. 17. T:p.wpeiv .rwt avenge sorne one, rJLwpev rmi nvt punish .A for B' s satisfaer tian; rp.wper8al nva avenge oneselj on (punish) sorne one. 18. TLvnv olK'fJP pa y a penalty (poenas da re); rlvetr6at illK'YJP exact a penalty (poenas swnere). 19. <j>ll.TTELv nvli watch sorne one; q,vd.rre<riJal rtva be on one's guard.against sorne one. 20. xp.v give an oracle, and Zend; xpiitrOat consult an oracle, and use.
P ASSIV'E V'OICE

The passive voice represents the subject as acted on: ~MJovv, ~w8ovvro, if1rawv, 7ra[ovTo they pushed, were pushed, they struck, were st1uck X. C. 7. 1. 38.
1735.

a. The passive has been developed from the middle. With the exception of sorne futures and the aorist, the middle forms do duty as passives: alperat takes for hirnself, i.e. chooses, and is chosen. (For this development of the passive, cp. the reflexive use in se trouver, sich finden.) So Kt!xvrat has poured itself, has been poured. In Homer there are more perfect middles used passively than any other middle tenses. Cp. 802. b. Uncompounded IJ"XDJL1J sometimes retained its use as a passive. trxt!O'fJ" is late.
173~.
~d."fovrt!s

The passive may have the sense allow oneself to be, get oneself:
re Ka1

~a"fop.evot car1ying and allowing muselves to be carried across the border. P. Cr. 48 d, rrex!Jfwn roP"flq. you will incur the hat1ed of Gorgias P. Phil. 58c. 1737. Many future middle fonns are used passively (807 ff.).

1745)

THE VERB: PASSIVE VOTCE

395

1738. The future middle forms in -rrop.at are dcveloped from the present stem, and express durative action; the (later) future passives in -i}rrop.at, -81}rrop.at are developed from the aorists in -"f}v and -8"f}v, and are aoristic. This difference in kind of action is most marked wh en the future mi<lle fonns are used passive! y, but it is not al ways found. ros IL.ots ~up.p..xo<s 1rapowyp.a rraq,<s KaTa<ni}rrau, 8s li v q,lrrr"f}-rat, Bavnl' f'1f-LLwrr6p.Evov give to the rest of the allies a plain example that whoever revolts shall be punished (in each case) with de ath 'l'. 3. 40, liiv )I.,;J, Oavr't' f'1f-LLw01}rrEra if he is convicted, he will be punishel (a single occurrence) with death D. 28. 80, o lilKaws p.arrT"fW<FETa<, rrrpEfJ"I\w<FETat, oEoi}rrErat, KKavOi}rrErat rw<P!Jap.w the }ugt man will be scowged, 1'aclced, fettered, will have his eyes bu1nt out P. R. 3Gl e, rp.i}rrop.at I shall enjoy honour, rp"f}!Ji}~op.at I shall be honoured (on a definite occasion), w</>Ei}rrop.at I shall 1eceive lasti'ng benefit, GJ</>E"f}Oi}rrop.at I shall be benefited (on a defini te occasion). Cp. 808, 809, 1911. 1739. The second aorist passive was original! y a second aorist active (of the -p.< form) that was used intransitively to distinguish it from the transitive fust aorist, as l!q,'1va showed, l<!>riV"fJv appeared; l!q,Bpa dest1oyed, lq,Brip"f}v am destroyed; l~br"f}~a was teJTified, l~E7rri"f"fJV was alanned. So lM'1v lemned, lppv"f}v flowed. Cp. l!rrr"f}rra placed, l!rrr"f}v stood (819). 1740. In Horn. all the second aorist forms in -"f}v are intransitive except briJ"f'YJV and hv1r'1v was struclc. Most of the f01ms in -IJ"f}v are likewise intransitive in Horn., as lq,v8"f}v appeaTed (in Attic was shawn). 1741. The perfect passive in the tbird singular with the dative of the agent (1488) is often preferred to the perfect active of the first person. Tlms 1rhrpiKral p.o< it has been done by me is more common than 1rhrpi'Ya or 1rbrp~xa I hqve done. 1742. The passive may be passive of the middle as well as passive of the active: aipi:ra is talcen or is chosen, f3dETa< does violence or su.ffers violence (is jorced), Jip8"1'} Was taken Or VJaS chosen, "fpri</>'1 WctS Wl"itten Or WaS inrlictfd ("fypap.p.at is commonly middle). The use of the passive as passive of the middle is post-Horneric. a. When deponent verbs have a passive force, the fnture and aorist have the passive form: l(3tdrrB"f}v 1 suflred violence ('Was forced), but l{3t<Lrrp."f}v I did violence. This ]1olds when there was once an active form. Cp. also rp.wprr8at,
!J-Ta7rf!J-7r<F8at, >/JTJ<!>lErr8at, KUKErr!Jat.

b. The aorist passive may have a middle sense (814). 1743. The direct object of, an active verb becomes the subject of the passive: ~ -rruno~ ho rov iMaaKaov ypacpEra~ the letter is written by the teacher (active a~aaaKao<; ypacpEL T~V E7r~TO~v). 1744. The cognate accusative may become the subject of the passive: -rr6i\.Ep..o> -rroEp..~()Tf war was waged P. Menex. 243 e (-rr6p..ov 1I"O.p..V, 1564). 1745. Active or middle verbs governing the genitive or dative may form (unlike the Latin use) a personal passive, the genitive or dative (especially if either denotes a person) becoming the subject of the passive.

396

SY.:-ITAX OF THE SIMPLE SEXTENCE

Kara-ye~.v, KaraiftrJ<Pl!e<v ( Karaift7J<Pl!w8at), aJ.L<~ev. b. With the dative: a?Tetev, a?Tt<Trev, -yKaev, ?T<{30V<tv, hnrp..v, vetol!v, ?T<<T1'v, ?TOEJ.L<v, tj>Oovev. c. Examples: oK iJ~lovv ol!rot 7}"yep.oveetr8a< q,' 7}p.wv they did not think it right to be gove1'ned by us 'l'. 3. 61, hevos areift7J</AtriJ7J he was condemned X. H. 5. 2. :l6, but Bava ros arwv ar<-yvwtriJrJ the penalty of death was p1'onounced against them L. 13. 39 (pass. of Kara-yvwva< IJavarov arwv), &pa i}p.v f3ov~evetriJat ?Tp 7}p.wv arwv p.7} KararppovrJIJwJ.L<v it is time fol' us to take counsel

a. With the genitive : ilpxe<v, TJ'YEp.ovevew, Kararppovev,

for ourselves that we may not be b1ought into contempt X. A. 5. 7. 12, ?To~< truFTOVTO.L o' Uq/ 7rdvTWV they are warred against by those who dwell wound thei1 count1y, and a1e distrusted by all I. 5. 4H, 1rws &v bre{3ovevtra n ar<fl, ii u p.'i] Kal 1re{3oveVIJ7Jv 1r' aro; how co?tld I have plotted against him, unless I had been plotted against by him? A nt. 4. {3. 5, tj>IJovrJIJ<ls u?T ro 'Oiivtrtrws envied by Odysseus X. M. 4. 2. 33 (contrast Lat. invidetur mihi ab aliquo).
p..ovrat p.fv inr rWv rTJv xWp.v arWv 7rEpLOtKoVvrwv,

N.- The above princip le does not hold when the accusative of an external object intervenes between the verb and the dative.

1746. A verb governing an oblique case rarely forms in Greek (unlike Latin) an impersonal passive: p.ol {3e{3o-1}87Jra< rcp re reiJvewn Kal rcp v6p.<tJ my aid has been given to the deceased and to the law Ant. 1. 31. The tense used is one from the perfect stem. 1747. An active verb followed by two accusatives, one of a person, the other of a thing, retains, when transferred to the passive, the ~ccusative of the thing, while the accusative of the person becomes the nominative subject of the passive. Examples 1621, 1625, 1~27, 1632. 1748. An active verb follo'ived by an accusative of the direct object (a thing) and an oblique case of a person, retains, when transferred to the passive, the accusative of the direct object, while the indirect objeet becomes the nominative subject of the passive. Cp. I have been willed a large estate. a. With verbs signifying to enjoin, entTust : o! Bo<wrol raOra 7retrrap.ho<
5. 37 (pass. of
riP)(wpovv the Boeotians having 1eceived these instr~tetions withdTew T. ?T<trr~v rara Tos Botwros ), Lo n p.ejov 7rtraxiJ-I}tr<triJe

ymt will have sorne gnater comrnctnd laid upon you 1. 140 (pass. of ?Ttrarrv /lo n p.e'i:jov Dp.v). Both accusatives are interna]; and so, in o! rwv 'AIJ7Jvalwv irnT<rpap.p.vo< r'i]v rjJvaK-Ijv those of the Athenians who had been ent1usted with the watch 1'. 1. 126, tj>vaK-I}v is equivalent to an internal accusative. The nominative of the thing and the dative of the person sometimes occur ("Iwves, rort 1rerrpa1rro i} rjJv~aK-1} the Ionians to whmn the guard had been entrusted Hdt. 7. 10). The dative is common when an inf. is used with the pass. verb: herhaKro ros trKevotj>6pots Uva< the baygrrgecarrieTs liad been commanded to (JO X. C. 6. 3.3.

THE VERB: PASSIVE VOICE

397

b. With other verbs: 1ro-rp:qiJvT<s Ti'is K<</>a"Ms haviii{J been decapitated (bad their heads eut off) X. A. 2. 6. 1 (pass. of 1ro-rfp.vE<v Tlis K<</>aMs TLO"< or nvwv). 1749. A passive may be formed in the case of verbs ordinarily il).trausitive but allowing a cognate accusative in the active: !Kav Tos 1ro)..ep.io<S ?)-rvx11-ra< the en emy has had enough good fortune '1'. 7. 77 ( -rvx<iv !Kava, 1573), KEK<voivEvO"ETa< the risk will hve been nm Ant. 5. 75. See 1746. This is common with neuter passive participles: -r iwe(3?)p.va aT<!J the irnpious acts comrnitted by hirn L. 6. 5, -r crol Krip.ol f3f3<wp.va the life led by y ou and by me D. 18. 265, T 7rE7ro-r<vp.va aTos theil political acts l. 28, p.apT?)IJvra enms committed X. A. 5. 8. 20. a. Some verbs describing the action of the weather may be used in the passive: v</>6!1-fvo< 1rfjMov Els r liurv they 1etumed to the city covered with snow X. H. 2. 4. 3. 1750. The cognate subject may be implied, as in the case of impersonal passives, in the perfect and tenses derived from the perfect. Thns, 7rE<ol) aTos 1rapeuKe6auro when their p1epwations we1e complete T. 1. 46. -yeTa< it is said, lo?)WIJ?) it was made known, followed by the logical subject are not impersonal : io'flWIJ?) r<!! rp61r'l' 1rwwe< r xp-l,p.aTa it was shown how the money had been lost Ant. 5. 70. See 935. 1751. Greek uses impersonals from intransitives (corresponding to Lat. arnlntlatur, itltr, c1MTitu1) only when the active is itself intransitive; as MooKra< it has seerned good (cp. ooKii:). 1752. The active or the mi.dle deponent of a transitive verb used

transitively or of an intransitive verb may replace the passive of a transitive verb.

.Koue~v (poet. KVELv) be called; be well (eu, Kal\ws) or ill (KaKws) spolcen of, = pass. of )..ye<v : vv KoaKES KO<!ov<nv now they are called jlatte1ers D. 18. 46, Tls lm' lp.o KaKws K-f,Koev i) 1r1rovOe; who has been ill spoken of or sujfe1ed at my hands? L. 8. 3. Cp. bene, male audire; Milton : "England hears ill abroad." n(crKecr9a.~ be cauyht = pass. of a!pev, as ii'iv a<fJs roTo 1rp&.TTWV if you are caught doiny this P. A.29 c. .,.o9vtfcrKEW (die) be kil led = pass. of 7roK-r<lve<v, as 7rfiJvTJ<rKov u1ro !1r1rfwv they we1e killed by the cavalTy X. C. 7. 1. 48. But not in the perfect, where the nncompounded -rfiJv'T}Ka is used. '{L'fVEcrea.~ be bont = pass. of TlKTELv beyrt, bring forth: 1railies ar<j) oK -y_l-yvovTo iK TaVT?)S he had no children by he1 X. H. 6. 4. 37. 8(K1JV Sovva.~ oe punished = pass. of !:'TJP.tov, as u1r' aTwv TouTwv OlK?)V ~ouav they were punished l1y the se very men X. C. 1. 6. 45. T]n.cr9a.~ be defeated = pass. of vK.v conque1, as u1ro rwv crvp.p.axwv TJTTW p.evo' WOTSted by theil allies And. 4. 28. Ka.T~va.~ (KarpxecriJa<) retmn .f1om exile = pass. of wTa-yetv testoTe from exile, as v1r ot-yapxis KaTEIJetv to be resto1ed Dy an oligrwchy T. 8. 68. KEicr9a.~ (lie) be placecl = pass. of the perfect of n6va<: 1rel1Jov ros v6p.ots ros u1r rwv {3a<r<wv Ketp.vo<S obey the laws established by kings I. 1. 36. O.'{XciVEW (ubtain by lot) !Je drawn /1y lut= paSS. Of K?)pOV: ~aXOP !Ep<VS 1 ecame priest by lot D. 57.47. 1r.crxELv (s1~(f'e1') be treatetl weil (e) or ill (KaKws) = pass. of 1rotev (~, l<aKws): e 1raiJ6vres 1r' arwv well treated by them P. G. 510 c.

398

SYNTAX OP THE Sil\lPLE SENTENCE

[1753

'lff'lfTELV in h7rhrretv (fall out) be expellerl = pass. of iK{3ci.(tP: o! lK7re7rTWK6res 1ro roi! of}fJ..ov those who had been expelled by the people X. H. 4. 8. 20. cj>evynv (.flee) be p1oseeuted pass. of otWKELv (be indicted "'fpdgmr8at passive); be exiled pass. of iK{3ci.ELv. DO &,,.o<f>e'YELV be acquitted = pass. of 1roVetv. Th us, a"ef3Elii.s <f>dJ"'fwv imo Mef}rou prosecutecl fo1' impiety by Meletus P. A. 35 d.

1753. Other equivalents of passive forms are ~X"" rv"'fxavHv, a.p.{3ci.vHv, used with a substantive of like meaning with the active verb: ovop.a. ~xe<v = ovop.ajetr8at, trV'Y"'fPWP,'l}V ~XELV Or trV"("(VWP,'l}S TV"(Xci.PttV ==: (J'V"("(t"(PWtrKttr8at, ~'lra.tPOP ap.f3ci.PELP or 1ra.lvou Tv"fxavEtv = 1rruvitrOru. So with middle deponents: alrlii.v l!xELv = al7tu8at. 1754. The passive of the periphrasis with 7rotitr8a.t (1722) is made with ylyvetr8a.<: so <lpf]v'l} 'Yl"fvera< peace is mae.

1755. The agent of the passive is regulady expressed by 1!7/'o and the genitive; sometimes by 1r6, 8ui, ~K, 1rapa, 1rpos with the genitive, or by v1r6 with the dative (in poetry). See 1678. 1756. The instrument of an action, when regarded as the agent, is personified, and may be expresse by v1r6 with the genitive: .{a-KErat v1ro rptf]povs he is capt'Ured by a trireme D. 50. 6. 1757. 'rhe dative, or a prepositional phrase, is regularly used wit.h the passive to denote the instrument, means, or cause (1506). The agent may be viewed as the instrument: in prose, when persans are regarded as instruments, the dative is usually that of military accompaniment (1526). 17?8. The dative of the agent used with t11e perfect passive and verbal adjective is a dative of interest (1488); on v1r6 with the genitive us~d instead of the dative, see 1493, 1494.
TH MOODS

Mood designates by the form of the verb the mode or manner (mod'Us) in whic.h the speaker conceives of an assertion concerning the subject. 1760. There are four moods proper in Greek: indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative. The infinitive (strictly a verbal nouri) and the participle (strictly an adjective form of the verb) may be classed with the moods.
1759.
THE PAltTICLE

av

1761. The })article av (Hom. Kv, K) limits the meaning of the

moods. lt has two distinct uses: a. In indepenent clauses: with the past tenses of the indicative and with the optative; also with the infinitive and participle representing the indicative or optative. b. In dependent clauses: with the subjunctive.

THE P ARTICLE

av

399

1762. No separate word can be used to translate /iv by itself; its force varies as it modifies the meaning of the moods. In gPueral !iv limits the force of the verb to pa1ticular conditions or circumstances ('und er the circumstances,' 'in that case,' 'th en'). 1763. In Homer ll.v is preferred hi negative, Ktv, Kt in relative, sentences. 1764. Position of Ilv. - l i v does not begin a sentence or a clause, except after a weak mark of punctuation, as ri ovv, /iv r d11"o<, rarcx '1-i-yHs -l,p.v vv; why then ( some one might say) do you tell us this now ? D.l. 14. In independent sentences with /iv (indic. and opt.) the particle is often separated from its verb for emphasis, and is attachee! to negatives (oK /iv), interrogatives (ris lLv, 11"ws !iv), orto any emphatic modifier. It is commonly attachee! to verbs of saying or thinlcing: crv Dp.v p.v v oJJ.a< eva< riJJ.<os if I should remain with you, I think I should be esteemed X. A.l. 3. 6. a. So with oK oli' v el (or oK v ooa el) followed by a verb to which /iv belongs: oK oo' v el11"elrraL/-U I do not lcnow whether I could persuade E. Med. 941 (for 7rel<ra<Ji.L !iv). 1765. Repetition

same sentence.

of llv. - d.v may be repeated once or twice in the '

a. lLv is placed early in a sentence which contains a subordinate clause, in order to direct attention to the character of the construction: ooKoJJ.ev o' lLv p.o< rm)r?J 7rpocr1rowup.evoL 11"pocrf3al\e!v p1/p.orlpv; /lv rif> ope< xpficr8a< if we should make a feint attaclc here it seerns to me we should jind the mountain to have fewer defenders X. A. 4. G. 13. b. For rhetorical emphasis lLv is added to give promineuce to particular words: rls -yp ro<ar' v oK v op-yl\o<r' g11"1/ KMw,,; and who would not be angered upon heaTing su ch words? S. O. 1'. 339, 1rws v ovK v lv olK?J Orho,l /iv; how should I not ,iustly die? S. fr. 673. 1766. 11v without a Verb. -dv sometimes stands without a verb, which is to be supplied from the context. So in the second member of a sentence with coordinate clauses: oila OTL 71"ol\l\os Jlfv'1neJJ.OVas.v ool'l, 71"0l\os o' v (ool'l) op.-f}povs I lcnow that he W07thl gite many guides and many hostages X. A. 3. 2. 24. Often with 71"ws tiv (d'l); how can (co1tld) it be? P. R. 353 c, r<ix' liv perhaps P. Soph. 255 c. a. So with ws !iv, fJcr11"ep v el (2480): 11"apfjv o raMriis owpcr. 71"ol\M <j>pwv, ws av ( scll. <f>po ns) <; of Kou JJ.E'Y<il\ov Gadatas came with many g1jts, su ch as one might o.ffer frorn large means X. C. 5. 4. 29, <j>of3ouJJ.vos fJcr11"ep av el 1ras fewing lilce a child (fJcr11"ep v l<j>of3ero, el11"ats 'fiv) P. G. 479 a. b. Kdv el is often used for the simple Kcx1 el (2372) ~nd without regard to the mood of the following verb ; sometimes there is no verb in th(' apodosis to which the /iv may be rcferred, as gcrnv lipa rf, X.,eet'!, Kdv el p.i) rv; ooKe, np 15vn rupavvos rif> 6vn ool\os the ve1y t11mnt is then in tru th a very slme even (f lu~ oes not seem HO to any one P. R. 579 d (here ml el p.'l] ooKe, et17 li v is implied). Kdv El may be also so used that li v belongs to the apodosis, wh ile Kai, though going with el in translation (even iJ)., affects the whole condit.ional sentence. Thns, vv at! JJ.OL ooKe, Kiiv a<r{3ew,v el ( TIS) KaTa'Yl'YVW<YKOI, r 11"pO<r-/iKOI'Ta 11"0LV but as it is, it see?nS tO ?ne thot, even if any one should condernn his wanton assault, he would be acting pToperly

400

:::lYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

D. 21. 51 (here d.v goes with 1rotv, i.e. 7rowl7J d.r). Kv if only, followed by a limiting expression, may generally be regarded as Ka.1 v ( = ifi.v) with a subjuuctive understood; as ciM p.oL wcipes K<iv O'JKpv <i-TI'Ev yet permit me to say but a WOI'd (= Ka.1 v wa.pii~) S. El.l482.
1 '76'7. Omission of O. v. -/Lv is sometimes omitted when it may be supplied from the precedlug sentence or clause. So often with the second of two verbs thatare connected or opposed: Tl iwolrJO'Ev /Lv;?) iii]ov oTL ifJ~J-OO'< (/Lv); what would he have done ,9 is it not clem that he would have taken an oath'? D. 31. 9, oi!T' l.v oi'iTo~ gxo' "fELV ol!8' ~w~ 7rEL0'8ElrJT< ne'ither can he asseTt nor cany ou be made to believe D. 22. 17. By retention of earlier usage the subjunctive is sometimes used without t'iv where it is commonly employed in the la ter language (2327, 2339, 2565 b, 2567 b). Here the difference is scalcely appreciable except that the omission gives an archaic tone.
DEPENDENT CLAUSES WITH

&.v

1 '768. Subjunctive with O.v.- Conditional, relative, and temporal clauses'requiring the subjunctive must have av, which is more closely attached to the conditional, relative, and temporal words than it is to the subjunctive.
w'IJv (brfi.v), ?rELOvfrom

a. Hence the combinations Utv (1jv, tlv) on which cp. 2283; OTtJ.v, w6Ta.v, .z, liTE, w6TE, w.t, wELoiJ +t'iv. When theparticle does not thus coalesce, it is usually separated ouly by such words as ~J-P, 0!, T<i, "fap. b. The force of /Lv with the subjunctive cannot usually be expressed in English. For /Lv in final clauses with w~, o1rw~, and 5</Jpa., see 2201. In Hom. t'iv (K<!v) is found in dependent clauses, 2334 c. THE MOODS IN SIMPLE SENTENCES
1'769. 1770-1849 treat of the use of the moods in independent sentences and principal clauses. The dependent construction of the moods was developed from their independent use. The use of the moods in su bordinate clauses was not originally different from th at in independent sentences and in the principal clauses of complex sentences. For the uses of the indicative, see also 1875-1958.
INDICATIVE WITHOUT

li.v

17'70. The fact; or asks came, ovK fJA.(h cm ; when will

indicative mood makes a simple, direct assertion of a question anticipating such an assertion: fJM he he did not come, .1.\eu<T-rat he will come, 7rn To.vra 7rot{r he do this ?

1 '7'71. The indicative states particular or general suppositions, makes affirmative or negative :tssertions, which may or may not be absolutely true. Thus, in assumptions, l~iJ~J-a.pT TL~ 11Kwv O'U"f"fVW!J-?) civr1 T.u.wpliis To6T4J suppose some one involuntarily committed an offence ; for Mrn there is panlon rather than punish-

1779]

INDJCATIVE WITHOL'T

av

401

ment D. 18. 274, and often after Kat o?), as Kat oq r8vrn and snppose tly are dead E. Med. 38G. 1772. The indicative may be used to express a doubtful assertion about a present or past action (negative Jl.'>) or Jl.iJ o) : ci)l.)l.' apa . . . Jl.iJ Kr?)u<71"71"os fi v o rai!r' el... wv but I suspect (i.e. perhaps) afte1' all it was Gtesippus who said this P. Eu. 290 e, )\)l. l'iJ roro o Kaws WJl.oo"'f-ljuawv IJut perhaps we did not do well in agreeing to this P. Men. 89 c. Such sentences are often regarded as questions with the effect of doubtful affirmation. 1773. The indicative may be used alone where in English we employ an auxiliary verb: 7I"<O"nvwv 0< Ow'is 71"ws oiJK ,Iva< 8EOs lv6J1.<1Ev; si nee he trusted in the gods how could (or should) he believe thme were no gods? X. l\1. 1. 1. 5, )l.l-rou /ov r'qv 71"0<v a little more anrl they wo1llcl have talcen the city 'l'. 8. 35, ...wVJ1.E8a we might have pe1ishecl (we we1e in dange1 of perishing) X. A. 5. 8. 2.
Cp. 2819.

1774. Unful:filled Obligation (Propriety, Possibility).- With the imperfect indicative of impersonal expressions denoting obligation, propriety, necessity, or possibility, the action of a dependent infinitive is usually not realized. (Examples 1775-1776.)

Such expressions are l!E<, xpi)v (or ixpi)v), 7rpoO"i)KE, Katps ;'jv, &~wv 1jv, EiKs 1jv, l~i)v, Kaws dxv, verbals in -rbv or -rov with 1jv, etc. a. For the use of these expressions (also with /iv) in the apodosis of unreal conditions, see 2313, 2315. J. 775. Present.- 'l'hus, IfoH O"E rara 71"o<ev you ought to be doing this (but are not doing it), rouuo Jl.'rJ li)v l!o" tliese men ought not ta be alive S. l'b. 418, rl O""'f~ s; ovK lxpi)v O""'fv wh y art tho~t sile nt? Thou shouldst not be sile nt E. Hi pp. 297, ElKs fi v DJl.s 1-''rJ iJ.aaKws, &0"7rEp vilv, ~VJl.!'axv you shoul not be slaclc in your alliance, as yo~t are at present 1'. . 78. 1776. Past. -ltoE< O"E railra 71"o<i)ua< (or 71"o<E:v) y ou ought ta have do ne this (but did not doit), ti~i)v O"O< lM<iv you might have gone (but did not go), ivi)v aiJrcp railra mi<i)O"a< he couleZ have do ne this (almost equivalent to the })Otential indicative ravra. 7I"Ol1JO"EV av, 1784), l!liE< r. lvxvpa TOTE afliiv I ought to have talcen the pledges then X. A. 7. 6. 23, a~wv fi v KovO"a< it would have been wo1th !waring P. Eu. 304 d, iJ.vE<v ti~i)v he rnight have 1emained D. 3. 17. 1777. The Greek usage simply states the obligation (propriety, possibility) as a fact wbich existed in the past (and may continue to exist in the present). In English we usually express the non-fulfilment of the action. 1778. Present or past time is denoted when the present infinitive is used. When the reference is to present time, the action of the present infinitive is al ways denied. Past ti me is denoted when the aorist infinitive is used. 1779. The expressions in 1774 may also refer to simple past obligation (propriety, possibility) and have the ordinary force of past indicatives: l!o" Jl.EVE<v he had to rernain (and did remail1) D. 19. 124. The context determines the meaning; tlms rl rv O"V!J.f3ou.ov lxpi)v 71"otiv; (D. 18. lfiO) by itself might mean either what was it the duty of the statesman to do or what was it the duty of the stntesman to have done ? GUEEK GRAM. -26
IVKawv 1jv, alO"xpv ;'jv,

402

SYNTAX OF THE SlMPLE SENTEKCE

1780. Unattainable Wish.- A wish, referring to the present or past, which <:annot be realized, is expressed by a past tense of the indicative with E'{l)f or with d yp (negative p..~) The imperfect refers to present time, the aorist to past time (cp. 2304, 2305).
erf)' elxes flertous </Jptvas woulcl that thou hadst (now) a bette1 heatt E. El. 1061, e!Oe crot rbre crvwyev6p:1Jv would that I had them been with thee X. M. 1. 2. 46.

1781. An unattainable wish may also be expressed by !:JtjJeov ( ought) with the present or aorist infinitive: t:J<jJee Kpos til woulcl that Cyrus wete (now) alive (Cyrus ought to be alive) X. A. 2.1. 4 (175). The negative is JLfJ: JLfJ7ror' &tjJeov L7rv rl]v '2-Kpov would that I had nevet left Scytos S. Ph. 969. etee or el -y.p (poet. atOe, ws) may be used bef ore t:JtjJeov: el -yp t:JtjJeov ofol Te iva< ol 1rool KaK p-y&.~ecr8a< would that the multitude wete able to do evil Pl. Cr. 44 d. 1782. lf3ou6p:1J> followed by an infinitive may express an unattainable wish : f3ov'Mw1J JLv ovK pl~m vO&.oe I would that I we;e not contending he1e (as I am) Ar. Ran. 866. (f3ou6JL1JV liv vellem, 1789.) 1783. The indicative is also used in other than simple sentences: in final sentences (2203); in object sentences after verbs of P.tfott (2211), of caution (2220 a), of [Pating (2231, 2233) ; in consecutive sentences with ifJtJTE so that (2274), in conditional sentences (2300, 2303, 2323, 2326) ; in temporal sentences (2395); in object sentences after lin and ws with a verb of saying, etc. (2577 ff.).
INDICATIVE WITH

IJ.v.

1784. Past Potential.- The past tenses (usually the aorist, less commonly the imperfect) of the 1ndicative with av (Kv) denote past potentiality, probability (cautions statement), or necessity: 8 oiJK <iv <{$ovro which they cottld not have expected T. 7. 55, T{<; yp i'iv ~00YJ TavTa yfv.!aOa.t; for who would have expected these things to happen ? D. 9. 68 (note that av does not go with yfvaOat by 1764), (yvw av TL<; one mJght (could, would) have known X. C. 7. 1. 38, 1nro KV ra.aa{rppova 7rfp ~o<; dfv fear m1:ght have se1:zed even a man of stout heart A. 421.

a. This is especially frequent with ris anrl with the ideal second person (cp.put?es, c?"ede1es): 7rt-yvws li v y ou would ( could, might) have obse,-ved X. C. 8 .. 1. 33. b .. The potential optative (182B) in Homer refers also to the past. 1785. A protasis may often be extracted from a participle, or is intimated in sorne other word; but there is no reference to any definite condition, bence a definite ellipsis is not to be supplied.
av (K.!v) may denote unreality: TOT ~ ~fJTo To 7rpyp..' i'iv KptvETo ~rp' avrov b~tt the case Would then ha-ve been decided On its own meTitS D. 18. 224, Ka{ KEV 7rov Kp8wv ~Ev and in that case it wer far better

1786.

Unreal Indicative.- The indicative of the historical tenses

with

41.

1787. This use of the indicative with /Lv to denote uureality is not inherent in the meaning of the past tenses of thn,t mood, but has been developed from the

1797]

SUBJUNCTIVE WITHOUT

av

403

past potential with which the unreal indicative is closely connected. On the com mon use of this construction in the apodosis of unreal conditions see 2303. On iflEL li v, etc., see 2315. 1788. The imperfect refers to the present or the past, the aorist to the past (rarely to the present), the pluperfect to the present (Jess commonly to the past). 1789. <{3ovMp.1Jv /iv (vellem) I should lilce or should have liked may express an unattainable wish: <{3ovp.1Jv av :3lp.wva -r1)v a-r1)v '"(vWp.1Jv Ef.I.OlifxELv I should have liked Simon to be (or I wish Sirnun w 81" e) of the same mi nd as my self L. 3. 21. On <{3ovp.1Jv without /iv, see 1782. 1790. Iterative Indicative (repeated action). -The imperfect and aorist with av are used to express repeated or customary past action (post-Homeric): OtYJpwrwv av 1 used to ask P. A. 22 b, llv ~etev he was wont to say X. C. 7. 1. l. 1791. This construction. is connected with the past potential and denoted originally what could or would take place under certain past circumstances. Th us, d:vaafJ-fJdvwv oU v arWv r 7rOL1jtJ.ara . .. Ot,pc.hrwv O. v airros 'Tl ')'OLEV accordingly, talcing up thei1 poems, 1 ustd to (would) ask thern (as an opportunity presented itself) what they meant P. A. 22 b. In actnal use, since the action of the verb did take place, this construction bas become a statement of jact. 1792. In Herodotus this construction is used with the iterative forms: Kal<rrK< /iv she kept weeping 3. 1 Hl, oL l av ITprra: MfJ<rrKov -r 7Ip6f3a-ra the Pe1sians we1e wont to seize the cattle 4. 130. 1793. Homer and the early poets use /iv (Klv) with the future indicative with a conditional or Iimiting force : Kal K ns w' <p!<L and in such a case some one will (may) say thus t. 176. This use is fouud also in conditional relative sentences (2565 b). In Attic !iv is fouud with the future in a few passages which are now generally emended. In P. A. 29 c there is an anacoluthon. 1794. li. v is not used with the present and perfect indicative.
SUBJUNCTIVE WJTHOUT

il.v

The chief uses of the independent subjunctive are the hortatory (1797), the prohibitive (1800), and the deliberative (1805).
1795. a. The name subjunctive is due to the belief of the ancient grammarians that the mood was al ways subordinate. 'l'hus, &rw shall I speak? (1805) was explained as due to the omission of a preceding fJovEL, i.e. do yuu wish that I spealc? 1796. The in dependent subjunctive refers to future time. It bas tluee main uses: (1) the voluntative, expressing the will of the speaker. This is akin to the imperative. (2) The deliberative. Tbis.is possibly a form of the voluntative. (3) The anticipatory (or futural). This anticipat.es an action as an immediate future possibility. \'Vhether the anticipatory is a form of the voluntative is uncert:tin (cp. ich will sehen, je ve11x voir, dialectal il veut pleuvoi1). 1 '797. Hortatory Subjunctive.- The hortatory subjunctive (present or aorist) is used to express a request or a proposai (negative p.~).

40-!

SYNTAX OF THE SI:\1l'LE SENTENCE

a. Usually in the first person plural: vv (wf.Lv Ka! Kouo-wJLev ro vpos let us go now and hear the man P. Prot. 314 b, JL~rrw heo-e twJLev let's not go there yet 311 a. li"fe, cppe (o?j), in Hom. li"fe (o?j), sometimes precedes, as li"fe ffKorrwwv come, let us consider X. C. 5. 5.15. re, (o?)) rarely precedes. b. Less frequently in the first person singular, which is usually preceded (in affirmative sentences) by </Jpe (?)), in Hom. by li"fe (o~): cppe 1} rrep! ro ifrq<jJlffJLaros ef1rw let me now speak about the bill D. 19. 234. ~ 798. The first person singular in negative exhortations (rare and poetic) ma.y con vey a warning or a threat: JL'lj ffe, "fpov, Kol')..vo-v 1rap. v'l}vrr! Ktxelw old man, let me not find thee by the hollow ships A 26. This use is often regarded as prohibitive (1800). ~ 799. The hortatory use of the subjunctive compensates for the absence of an imperative of the first person.
~800. Prohibitive Subjunctive.-The subjunctive (in the second and third persons of the aorist) is often used to express prohibitions (negative P-~).

a. Usually in the second person: JL'1i5ifv iJJL'ljO"'l]Te do not lose hemt X. A. 5. 4. 19. For the aorist subjunctive the present imperative may be employed (1840): JL1J ?rot?)<Y!IS (or JL1J 1role<) rafira do not do this (not JL1J 7rotfis). b. Less commonly in the third person, which usually represents the second : 1roM(3v li JL'l]i!els and let no one s~tppose T. 6. 84 ( = JL1J rroM(37Jre do not suppose). c. The third person of the present subjunctive is rare : JL1J rolvvv ns of7Jrat ( = JL1J olWJLeiJa) let not any one think r. L. 861 E. N. -ou JL'lj with the subjunctive of the second person in the dramatic poets occasionally expresses a strong prohibition: ou JL1J ')..7Jp'lj!IS don't talk nonsense Ar. Nub. 367. ~801. Doubtfu1 Assertion. -The present subjunctive with fL'lj may express a donbtful assertion, with JL1J ou a doubtful negation. The idea of ar>prehension or anxiety (real or assumed) is due to the situation. A touch of irony often marks this use, which is cbiefly J>latonic. \Vith JL'lj (of what may be true) : 1'-17 "fpotKorepov r ')..'fJIJs <lrriv I snspect it's rather bad .fonn (lit. too ntde) to tell the truth P. G. 4G2 e. With !L1J ou (of what may not be true) : i--M 1'-17 oux o..,.ws ~X'!! but I mther thinlc this 1nay not be so P. Crat. 436 b, 1'-17 oK li<oaKrv per?) virtue is pmhaps not a tlng to be taught r. Men. 94 e.

l.802. In Hom. JL'l) with the independent subjunctive is used to indicate fear and '"~'<tming, orto snggest danger: IL?) n xo')..w&.f.kePos p~'!l l(aKv vlas 'Axa<wv may he not (as I fear he may) in his anger do anght to inju1e the sons of the Achaeans B 195. Usually with the aorist, rarely with the present subjunctive (o 19). The constructions of 1801, 1802 are nsed as object clauses after verbs of feaTing (2221). ~803. lirrws fL'lj is occasionally so used with the aorist snbjunctive, and w1th an idea of command : /Jrrws IL1J cp?)o-v T<s may no one say (as I fe ar he may) X. S. 4. 8. See 1921. 1804. From the use in 1801 is probably developed the construction of ou JL~

t8II]

StJB,JUNCTIVE WTTHOCT

av

405

with the aorist (Jess often the present) subjunclive to denote an emphatic deniai; as o p.Tj 7rau<Ywp.a< <P<Xoaocpwv I will not cease from scwching jo1 wisclom P. A. 29 d, oKht p.Tj uv?Jrat f!aa<<s iJJLs KaraXafJ<v the king will no longe!" e able to ove?"take us X. A. 2. 2. 12.
1805. Deliberative Subjunctive.- The deliberative subjunctive (present or aorist) is used in questions whe.n the speaker asks what he is to do or say (negative p.~).

a. Usually in the first person: d1rwp.<P ?) <Y-ywwv; shrtll we speak 01" lceep silence? E. Ion 758, ri /ipd.aw; 1ro <jJu-yw; what am I to do? whithe1 shall I fly? E. Med. 1271, p.Tj cpwp.ev; shall we not say? P. H. 554 b. b. The (rare) second person is used in repeating a question: A. rl <YO< 7rt0w1-'<0a ; B. 8 n 1rlO?J<YO< ; A. In what shall we take your advice? B. In what shall you talee my advice? Ar. Av. 164. c. The third person is generally used to represent the fust person ; commonly with r!s, as rl ns <vaL roro cpfi; how shall anyone say this is so? ( == rl cpwp.ev;) D. 19. 88. N. -The subjunctive question does not refer to a future fact, but to what is, under the present circumstances, advantageous or proper to do or say.
1806. fJoX<L, f!ouXwO< (poet. OXm, OX<u) do y ou wish often precede the subjunctive: flo1 <Yo< d1rw; do y ou wish me to say to you? l'. G. 521 d. This is a fusion of two distinct questions: flou<L do y ou wish? and d1rw shall I say? 1807. The deliberative subjunctive may be replaced by a periphrasis with oe or xpfJ and the infinitive, or by the veTbal adjective in -riov t<Yrl. Thus, i)p.<s 7rpO<Yp.vwp.<v; ?) rl xpl] 1fov; mul shall we wait? or ~vhat rnust we do? S. Tr. 390, rl 1fOLTJrov; ( == rl 7roLwp.ev;) what me we to do ? Ar. P. 922. a. For the deliberative future see 1916. 1808. DeliberatiOJ; in the past may be expssed by g<t, xpfjv(lxpfjv), gp.<ov with the infinitive, and by -Top (verbal adj.) 7iv. 1809. The Negative in Questions.- The use of p.f} (not ou) in questions is due to the fact that the construction of 1805 is simply the interrogative form of the hortatory subjunctive: cf>wJ.L<P let ~1s say, p.Tj cpwp.<v; a1"e ~oe not to say? Distinguish 1f6T<pov f!lav <jJwJ.L<V?) wh cpwp.ev evat; shall ~ve say that it i.< fane 01' th at it is not ? X. M. 1. 2. 45, from cpwJ.L<V rar' opOws X-ywea, 1) o~ shall ~ve say that this is well said or not '? ( o~ == oK opOws X-y<<Y0a<) P. G. 514 c. 1810. Anticipatory Subjunctive (Homeric Subjunctive). - In Hom eT the subjunctive is often closely akin to the futme indicative, and Tefers y anticipation to a futu event (negative o) : ou -yap 1rw rolovs tov &.vpa<, o twp.a< .fo1 never yet saw I snch rnen, nor shall I see them A 262, Kal vu ns wo' d1f?IIT' and one will say ~ 25. ll.v (dv) usually limits this subjunctive in Hom. (1813). a. This futural subjnnctive is retained in Attic only in subordinate clauses (2327), and in rl1raOw (1811) 1811. The subjunctive is used in rl 1raOw; what will beco1ne of me; what arn I to do? (lit. what shall I undergo l') as P. Eu. 302 d. So rl -yvwJ.La<; quid me flet? Thus, t:J p.o< -yw, Tl 1raOw; rl vu p.ot p.i}K<<Yra "fV?JTt.; ah, woe's rne!

406

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

what is to become of me ? wh at will happen unto me at the last? e 465. The subjunctive here is not delille ra ti ve, but rcfers to a future ev eut. 1812. The subjunctive without /Lv is also used in dependent clauses of purpose (2196), after verbs of fearing (2225 ), in the protasis of conditional (2327, 2339) and conditional relative sentences (2567 b).
SUBJONCTIVE WITH il.v

1813. The subjunctive with /Lv (more commonly dv) is used in Homer in independent sentences and clauses (negative ou). Cp. 1810. 'l'hus, i-yw ot! K. IL"tw Bp<T?)loa but in that case I 1vill take B1iseis A 184, oOK Il v rot x.pal<Tp,TJ {3t6s of no avail to thee shall be thy bow A 387.
OPTATIVE WITHOUT il.v

1814.

without

p.~) : J:, 1ra'i:, yl.vow 7rarpos Evrvxlxrnpo'> ah, boy, mayest thou p1ove mo1e fortunate than thy sire S. Aj. 550. From this use is derived the name of the mood (Lat. opto wish).

av is used to express a wish referring to the future (negative

Optative of Wish.- In independent sentences the optative

a. So even in relative sentences: M.v ?Tore, Il p,Tj "fvotro, Xaf3w<Tt rl}v 1r6tv if ever they capture the city, which Heaven .forbid L. 31. 14. b. Under wishes are included execrations and protestations: l~o'-olp,?)v may 1 pe1ish Ar. Ach. 324, Kal .,. 1rLOel~w. ?') !'-7J !;cp?) v, owpoooKfJ<Tavra and I will P1'01>e that you took bribes, o1 may I not live Ar. Eq. 833. 1815. The optative of wish is often introduced by d ytfp, EUh (Hom. al ytfp, a'lrJ<), Or by d, w<;; (both poetical): d yp yl.votro would that it rnight happen x. c. 6. 1. 38, W> oOLTO may he perish s. EL 126. (ws is -properly an exclamation: how.) 1816. The optative introducd by 1 "fap, etc. is sometimes explained as a protasis with the conclusion omitted : etOe <f>lXos iJ1v "fvo<o oh, if you would become our friend X. H. 4. 1. 38. Cp. 2352 e. 1817. An unattainable wish, referring to the present, may be expressed by the present optative in Homer : ete' i]f3woLJU. would that I were young again H 157. 1818. Unattainable wishes, wh en they refer to the future, may be expressed by the optative: et p,ot "fvo<ro q,06"f"fos lv f3paxio<T< would that I had a voice in my arms E. Hec. 836. Wishes represented as hopeless are eXJJressed in the postHomeric language by the past tenses of the indicative (1780) or by t:Jq,eXov (1781).
~11'Hra i5f

1819. Hom. often uses the optative with a concessive or permissive force : Kal n 1raOo<p,< after th at I may (lit. may I) sujfe1 come wh at will <P 27 4.

1820. Imperative Optative.- The optative may express a command or exhortation with a force nearly akin to the imperative: XEtprocf>os ~yo'i:To let Ohin:sophus lead X. A. 3. 2. 37. 1821. Potential Optative.- The potential optative, which in Attic regu-

OPTATIVE WITH

av

407

larly takes liv (1824), is occasioually found in Homer and Jater poetry in an earlier form, without that particle : pea Oe6s 'Y' iOXwv Ka! rr]'MfJev livlipa trawtra< easily might a god, if he so wille.cl, lning a rnan saje even from afar -y 231, fJ.uuov ;) e"fo< ns quicker than a man could speak E. Hipp. 1186. This construction is suspected in prose. a. Usually in negative sentences or in questions expecting a negative answer (with ou) : ou pi v "f&.p n KaKwrepov liXXo 1r&.Oo<JJ.< for I couleZ not ( conceivably) su.ffei' anything worse T 321, uci.v, ZdJ, liva.u<v ris avlipwv V7r<pf3aulii Ka.rauxo; thy powe1, oh Zeus, what trespass of man can check ? S. Ant. 604.
1822. The optative after oOK i!unv 5trns (li1rws, 57ro<) in the dramatists is probably potential : ovK lfcrfJ' o1rws Xt!~a<;.t< r 1fevi5fj KaM I could not call false ticlings faii' A .. Ag. 620. liv is usually employed in this construction. 1823. The optative without liv (Kiv) is also used elsewhere, a.s in pmpose clauses (2196) and clauses of fearing (2225) after a secondary tense; in the apodosis of conditional sentences (2300 d, 2326 d, 2333), in relative sentences (256G, 2568) ; and as the representative of the indicative (2615) or subjunctive (2619) in indirect discourse after secondary tenses.
OPTATIVE WITH

l.v

1824. Potential Optative. -The potential optative with tJ.v states a future possibility, propriety, or likelihood, as an opinion of the speaker; and may be translated by may, might, can (especially with a negative), rm~st, would, shotd (rarely will, shall). Soin Latin velim, videas, cognoscas, credas.
"fvoi'l}s li' /lv on rove' ovrws ii x you. rnay see that this is so X. C. 1. 6. 21, fi1ravus av 0Jl.OO"f'YJITt<LV all would agree I. 11. 5, i]lifws av lpoi;.t'I}V I (would gladly ask) should like to ask D. 18. 6-1, o~K av Mf3o<s thou canst not talee S. l'h.103, f"fo<!l av ra lie I will tell this A. Supp. 928. The second person singular is often indefinite (on~), as "fvoi'l}s liv (cogno.~cas) ="fvoi'l} ns /iv.

a. The potential optative rauges from possibility to fixed resolve. The aorist optative wiih /iv and a negative is very common. b. When stress is laid on the idea of possibility and power, necessity and obligation, Greek uses liva}J-a<, Mi or xp-1, with the infinitive (statement of jact). c. The potential optative with liv is also used in dependent sentences; in purpose clauses (2202 b), in object clauses after verbs of e.ffoit (2216) and verbs of fearing (2232), in causal clauses (2243), in result clauses (2278), in the apodosis of conditional (see 2356) and conditional relative sentences (256(}). In indirect discourse the infinitive with liv or the participle with /iv may represent the optative with liv (1845 ff.).
1825. Usua.lly these optatives are not limited by any definite condition present to the mind, and it is unnecessary to supply any protasis in thought. In some cases a protasis is dormant in a word of the sentence (such as oLKaiws, eiK6Tws). Thus, in o\Js xaplurous dva< b<Kalws av 7roa;.t(36.votu whmn you would j~tstly considei' to /Je ~mgrateful Aes. 3. 196, O<Kaiws may stand for el liLKaiws 7roa;.t(3vo<r<: if y ou shot!ld consider the matter justly. So o~re iufJlovtr< 7r<iw i}

4:08

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

(1826

ovvavra< tj>petv. o<appa"(<<v "(p /1,v Kr . they neither eat more than they can bear, fol" otherwise (if they should eat moJ"e : El icr8lot<v 1r Xdw) they would burst X. C.

8. 2. 21. The potential optative is also used as the main clause of less vivid conditions (2329) in which the protasis has the optative by assimilation to the mood of the apodosis. 1826. The potential optative with /1,v is used to soften the statement of an opinion or fact, or to express iron y: i!rep6v n rovr' av d71 this is ( would be) another matter D. 20. 116, vocro'ip.' If. v, fi vdo-w<a ros ix8pos crru"(<v 1 must be mad, if it is madness to hate one's foes A. Pr. 078. So often with to-ws or rd, x a perhaps. a. With a negative, the potential optative may have the force of a strong assertion: o "(p av &:rriMo<}i, H K6'fw r~v Ovpav for I will not go away, but I will knock at the door Ar. Ach. 236. 1827. fJouXolJJ.7!V /1,v (velim) is often used as a softened optative of wish: fJouXolJJ.'YJV av rovro orw "(evtfcr8a< I could wish that this might be the J"esult (orw "(tfvotro may it result thus) P. A. 19 a. For (1oudJJ.71V lf.v see 1789. 1828. The present and aorist are used of what will be, or what will prove to be, true (future realization of a present fact) : dp'T~ lf.pa, ws ~o<K<v, "flet ns av et71 virtue then, it seerns, will (prove to) be a lei nd of health P. R. 444 d. The perfect is used of wh at will prove to be the case as regards a completed action: 1rws av XeX1}8o<; how can it have escaped my knowledge '! X. S. 3. 6. Usually the perfect is here equivalent to the present. 1829. The present and aorist are rarely used of the past: (a) in Hom. of past possibility: Kal vu Kev ~v8' 1r6otro and now he might have perished E 311 (Attic 1rwero If. v, 1784), XX -ri K<v ptf~a<f1.<; but what cmd I do? T 90. (b) in Hdt. of a mild assertion : ravra JJ.v Ka1 <j>86vcp v et1rotev they may have said this out of envy !J. 71, d71crav o' av ouro< Kpi]res these would prove to be (might be, must have been) Cretans 1. 2. Both uses are doubtful in Attic prose. 1830. The potential optative with lf.v may be used, in a sense akin to that of the imperative, to express a com1nand, exhortation, or request: '"fo<s v r~v otf71o-<v tell me (you may tell) yow request P. l'ar. 126 a, 1rpori."(o<s If. v rnove on P. Phae. 229 b. This courteous formula is used even where a harsh command might be expected: xwpos av d<Tw crv ra xE< go within with all speed S. El. 1401. a. In 'II'O i]r' av rpa.1roJJ.71v; whitlwr pmy shall I tum ? Ar. Ran. Il O the use is akin to the deliberative subjunctive (1805) or deliberative future (HH6). 1831. The potential optative with If. v is used in questions: ris oK av Dfl.oo'Y-IJcre<ev; 1/Jho wou l not a(f1"ee? (ooels: scil. oK av op.oo"(-f}<TE<<) X. M. 1. 1. 5. So even the optative of wish: ri ' opK<p r<;Je JJ.'IJ 'JJ.JJ.t!vwv 71'a0o<s; b1tt if thou dost not abide by thy oath what dost thou invoke upon thyself? E. Med. 754 (lit. may est thou s1((fe1 wh at?). 1832. 'll'ws lf.v, Tis lf.v with the potential optative may be uRed to express a wish (especially in the tragic poets) : 1rws v 'Aoip.iiv o/1, would that I rnirJht die E. Med. 97, rls av lv r&.xe< JJ.6'Ao< JJ.opa oh, that smne fate would speedily come A. Ag. 1448. Properly this usage is not a wish, but is simply a question how the wish may be fulfilled. 1833. The potential optative with /1,v (especially with negatives) may ex-

Il\1PEltATl VE

409

change with the indicative : rfJ7JJJ.L Kal oiJK c'l.v cipv7J8el7Jv I assel't ancl cannot deny D. 21. 191. It is often stronger, though more courteous, than the future indicative: oiJK av 1dpa q,prlrra<JJ.< I will speak nq more S. O. T. 343. 1834. The future optative with dv occurs only in a few snspected passages. IMPERATIVE
~835. The imperative is used in commands and prohibitions (negative P-iJ). All its tenses refer to the future.

a. Under commands are included requests, entreaties, summons, prescriptions, exhortations, etc. b. For the tenses of the imperative, see 1840 ; for the infinitive nsed as an imperative, see 2013.
POSITIVE (COMMANDS)

In exhortations O.ye, cppe, &t (usually with 3..], sometimes With vvv), often precede the imperative: aye Ory K01JO'U1' C011te listen X. A p. 14, O.yere Smrv..Jcmn yo now, talee yma suppe1' X. H. 5.1. 18, a, Z&t d1ri. but come, say P. G. 489 e.
1837. 'ffs is sometimes used with the second person in poetry: dKove 'ff.s heal', every one Ar. Thesm. 372. 1838. The third person may be used in questions: oVKov K<lrrOw raTa ; shall these points be establishecl ? l'. L. 820 e. Cp. 1842 a. 1839. The imperative may be used in assumptions (hypothetical imperative), to make a concession, orto grant permission : p.oD / ~vd g(JTOJ let it be assumecl as far as I arn concenwd D. 20. 14, orws lx hw ws <Jv t.rym wswrne it to be as y ou say P. S. 201 c. So even as a protasis: et~rlTw, K<i.')'w rrdp~w let hirn set it forth and I will be content D. 18. 112.
NEGATIVE (PROHIBITIONS)

~836.

1840. Prohibitions are expressed by !"fJ with the present or aorist subjunctive in ihe first person plural; by JJ.fJ with the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive in the second and tllird person singular or plural (cp. 1800). The aorist imperative is rare in pro1libitions. A. I Person.- p.~ wao/wp.ev (p.~ ypnlJ!wfl-EV) : fJ.TJ jJ.rJ.LVWfJ.E8a p.7]l!' alrrxpws cbro.WfJ.E&a let us not act lUce madmen nor perish disgmcejully X. A. 7. 1. 29. B. 2 Person.- p.~ wa<!>e (,.,.~ ypao/ETE): jJ.TJ /Jaup.aje rlon't be astonishecl P. G. 482 a, p.'!) 8opv(3eTe don't 1aise a distwbance P. A. 21 a, r fLP 1roi, T o fJ.TJ 'ffole< do this and Tej1ain from doinf! that P. I>r. 325 d, !<Tt fL')'a t7e don't boast so l'. Ph. 95 b. - 1'-TJ y pO.,Pus (flo~ yplio/']TE) : !17JO /Jau11rlrrys rboe and do not wonde? at this A. Ag. 879, 1-'TJ Oopv(3f}rr1JTE don't 1aise a disturbance P. A. 20 e, p.'q dt.-ws 11'o<fJrr11s don't do othe1wise P. Lach. 201 b, fJ.7JOa!1W> li!l.!l.ws '11'0tf}rrys Ar. Av. 133. N.- The type p.:q yp6.<!>ns iR ne ver usecl. p.Tj -yp6.t(tov occurs rarely in poetry { 410, ~ 134.-w 248, S. fr. 453 parodied in Ar. Tbesm. 870).

410

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

C. 3 Person.- fLTJ ypa.q,.,.., (p.Tj ypa.<f>vTwv) : p.rJo<ls otoaa-drw let no one tell rne T. 1. 86, p.rjods ror' ci:yvodrw let no one be igno1'ant of this fact Aes. 3. 6. p.~ ypa.o/O.Tw (p.~ ypa."'O.vTwv) : p.rJiJds .vop.urarw let no one think X. C. 7. 5. 73, p.nr' ci:rro-yvwrw p.rJov p.nu Kara-yvwrw let hirn neithe1' acquit 1W1' condemn in any way A es. 3. 60; and in five other passages giving the actual usage of the orators. In the third person the aorist imperative is much less common thau the present imperative. N. -The type p.Tj yp6.<!>n is used only when the third person represents the first person (1800 c). p.Tj ypO.o/n is much more common thau f1-7J -ypalf;arw in the orators, e.g. Jl-rJoels Oauf1-atr{l let no one be astonished D. 18. 199, fl-rJOfls vo!IF!l let no one think T. 3. 13, D. 23. 1. D. The perfect imperative is rare in prohibitions (p.'i) 1T'<tj>6{3TJIF0< T 6. 17) and is usually poetical. Cp. 698, 712. 1841. a. p.7, -ypat/J<, like don't W1'ite, is ambiguous and may mean, according to the situation, either cease W1'itin[f or abstain jiom W1'iting. Commonly f1-7J -ypatf>< means do not go on u1iting, write no m01e, and is an order to stop an action already begun. In many cases, however, fl-n with the present imperative does not refer to the interruption of an action already begun, but to an action stiJl in the more or less distant future against which the speaker urges resistance. Sometimes the reference to the future is directly or indirectly indicated by the context. b. p.'i) -ypalf!!ls usually has the force of (I beg that) you will not write, (take care that yon) don't w1ite, and is commonly a complete prohibition against doing something not already begun. Sometimes, and especially in expressions of a colloquial character, fl-n with the aorist subjunctive marks the speaker's interruption, by anticipation, of a mental (Jess often of a physical) action that is being done by the person he addressP-s; as p.~ Oaup.at:r!ls (P. L. 804 b) in reply to an exclamation of surprise. Here the type p.~ 1'Palf!!ls often expresses impatience. c. If P,'i] -ypat/J< elicits a reply, it is (ti:\:\') ou -ypatj>w, wb ile f1-7J -ypalf!!ls is answered by ( d,;\.ll.') ou -ypalf;w. Ths, p.n ,1 lKOliJat:rK< ro'is tj>lots dvat KaKnv. ti:\:\' ou IJtoaiFKw do not teach me to be base to my .f1'iends. But I do not S. El. 395,
fi OUP ~XHS Pap-yt:rTpov TJfl-lP E7rtil~cu WS otoaKT6P EIFT<P "' ap<rn, J1-7J tf>OovniF!IS tl,;\.;\.' brlil<t~ov. ti:\:\' .. ou tf>Oovnaw now if you can show us rno1e clearly that virtue

is capable of being taught, don't refuse, but shf!w us. Well, I will not 1'efuse P. Pr. 320 c. So p.7, -yp&.tj>e commonly answers 'YPatf>w, as Oaup.a?;w, 1jv a' -yw, Kal ar6s. a J1-7J Oa6J1-a\', lftjJrJ I myself am astonished, said L GAase yom astonishment, said she P. S. 205 b, cp. S. El. 395. So p.'i] -ypalf!!ls answers -ypalf;w, as in Hdt. 3. 140, Ar. Lys. 1036. d. p.'i) -ypat/J< and J1-7J -ypalf!!ls are often found in closely connected clauses, as fJ.rJoap.ws 06p.atP p.ot, P.'liO ,1 hnrpilf!!ls olt.'t be ang1'y with me at all, no1 ?'uin me Ar. Nub. 1478, p.-f;r' oKPfT< fl-nr' atf>fjT' tn:os KaKov do not sh1ink .{1om me nor utt~1 any harsh words S. O. C. 731. The second prohibition may be more specifie tb an the first, as IFtW'lrii p.rJIJv <f1rvs vn1rwv be silent, don't say anything childish Ar. Nub. 105. Less often f1-7J -ypalf!!ls is followed by J1-7J -ypatf><, as J1-7J fJorJflnaaT< rti) 1rmovf16n o<tva f1-7J <opK<T< (they will sa.y) 'do not come to the aid of one who hr!s sujj'e1'ed grievn?l-'l!i; have no 1'C[fct1'for you1 oath' D. 21.211. e. The difference between f1-7J -ypatf>< and p.'i) -ypalf!!ls is virtually a difference

INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE WITH

av

411

of ienses, the present denoting an a.ction continuing, in process; the aorist, an action concluded, suuunarized. So 1-'TJ <f>of:3o ilon't /Je jem:J'ul, 1-'TJ <f>ofJ7J8vs ilon'; bej1igltteneil. In ma.xims 1-'TJ with the present imperative is preferred: 1-'n Kbru don't be a thief, p.T] Kljlys don't steal this or that. Jlo7JK'TL may be used in either construction. The distinction is often immaterial, often a difference of tone rather than of meaning ; sometimes too subtle for dogmatic statement. 1842. The imperative may be used in subordinate clauses: Kp.rfjpls elin v wv Kpfir' ~pe>fov there are rnixing-bowls, the lnims of ~vhich thou must crown S. O. C. 473. a. Especially after oTcr8a. intenogative in dramatic poetry: ocrfi' 8 pcrov; do yo1t know what YO)l we to do ? E. Hec. 225, ocrfl' ws 1rolwov; do 11011 know how Ibid you act? S. O. T. 543. ocre' 8 has become a partially fossilized expression, and can be used as subject or be governed by a. verb: ocrOri vvv i fJ.o< "{evt!crew; do you know what I rnust have <lone fol' me ? R l. 'l'. 1203. 1843. The use of the imperlttive is to be explained as equivalent to /le or
xp.i} with the infinitive.

1844. /iv is not used with the imperative.

DH!'INITIVJ~ AND PAR'l'ICIPLE WITH

av

1845. The infinitive or participle with /f,v represents either a past tense of the indicative with li, v or the optative with /lv. The context determines whether the indicative or the optative is meant. The participle with iv is post-Homeric. 1846. The present infinitive or participle with U.v represents the imperfect indicative with d,v or the present optative with U.v. a. (inf.) UKOUW Aa.KOG.LJ1oOvious av ava.xwpv h' otKoV I heco the Laceclaemonians used to rett!?'n horne (==av avexwpovv, 1700) D. 9. 48, otEcrOE "{p TOV 'lrO.TfPO. OUK lv <f>urirn<v; for do y ou think my father would not have taken ca Te ? ( == oK av <f>VG.TTEV, 1786) D. 49. 35 ; vop.lsovus av TJ1ofjS rv-yxrivE<v in the belief that they would obtain reward (=av rv-yxvo<J1o<v) X. A. 1. 9. 29. b. (pa?'t.) 07rp i!crxe p.T] KG.Tt 1r6m a.OTOV 'lrL'lrfOV'TG. r'ryv Ile01r6VV7JCTOV 1r0p8ev, aVVriTWV v 6VTWV , , aTJOLS f7rL{Jo7]8v ~Vh-ich p?evented hi?n j?'O?n Sailing against the Peloponnese and laying it waste city by city when the Peloponnesians ~ooul<l have been unable to corne to the 1escne of one another ( = clllvva.ro< v 7jcra.v) T. l. 73, 7r6' av ~xwv ~np' el7rv, 1rG.pa.el1rW though I might be a~le to say much flse 1 prrss it by ( = lv i!xo<p.<, 1824) D. 18. 258, cro<f>l. <-yop.!v7J O<Ka.<bra.r' tf. v that rniyht most justly be called wis<lom P. l'hi!. 30 c ( ==;) cro<f>lii M-yo<ro li v). 184'7. The future infinitive and participle with /iv are rare and suspected. 1848. The aorist infinitive or paTticiple with /f,v repTesents the aorist indicative with liv or the aorist optative with /iv. a. (inf) Kp6s 'Y, e! i{3lwi7<P, d,pL!7ros av oo1 lipxwv -yev!crf!a., it se ems p?obable th at Cyrus, if he had live, would have prove<l hirnself a most excellent ruler ( == lv i"{vero) X. O. 4. 18, tf!crre Ka.1lo<WT7Jv v "{vwva.< so tlwt even a cornmon man could have unde1stoocl ( = v li"{vw) X. A. 6. 1. 31, rl lv olbp.<Oa. 1ra.8ev; what o tve think 01lr fate would ue ? ( = Tl av 1rri8oL{J.V;) x. A. 3. 1. 17
0

412

SYNTAX OF THE SL\lPLE SENTENCE

(r849

b. (part.) opw r trapaTElxurp.a pq.olw< il.P 7J</J86 seeing that the counterwall could easily ue captured (=a. 7J<fJ8el7J) T. 7. 42, llorfloa<av )..wv wi ovv7J8<ls av ars li x <Lv, fi l{Jov'A7}87J, -rrapiowKev aj~er he had seized Potidaea (tnd would have been able to keep it himself, had he wished, he gave it 1tp to them ( = ovv7}87J li v) D. 23. 107' o~re 5vra O~TE av -yevop.eva O"f07TOLO<HV they .fabricate sto1ies which neither a1"C, nor COUld be, ti"UC 'J'. 6. 38 (=a oiire li<TTLV OOTE av -yr!VOLTO). 1849. The perfect infinitive with liv represents the pluperfect indicative with /lv or the perfect optative with /lv: oo' on (av) </JTJ<T<Lev -rravra raO' -rr rwv {Jap{Japwv av T]'Awdva< I know that he would say that all this wmtld have been captured by the barbarians ( = av TJWKE<Tav) D. Hl. 312, T]-ye'iro ros d-yvoovras dvopatroowom av O<Kalws KEKfj<T8a< he thought that those who did not know this might }ustly be deemed servile in nature ( = KeK7JI-'r!vot a. eTev) X. M. 1. 1. 16.

For the infinitive and participle without l.v see 1865 ff., 1872 ff., and under Infinitive and Participle.
THE TENSES

1850. By the tenses (' tense' from tempus) are denoted: 1. The time of an action: present, past, future. 2. The stage of an action: action continued or repeated (in process of development), action simply brought to pass (simple occmrence), action completed with a permanent result. a. The time of an action is either absolute or relative. Time that is absolutely present, past, or future is reckoned from the time of the speaker or writer. Time that is relatively present, past, or future in dependent clauses is reckoned from the time of sorne verb in the same sentence. In dependent clauses Greek has no special forms to denote the temporal relation of one action to another (antecedent, concident, subsequent), but leaves the reader to infer whether one action happened before, at the sa1ne time as, or after another ac;tion. The aorist is thns often used where English has the pluperfect (1943). See 1888, 1944. Unless special reference is made to relative time, the expressions "ki nd of ti me," "time of an action," in this book are used of absolute time. b. In independent clauses only the tenses of the indicative denote absolute time ; in dependent clauses they express relative time. The tenses of the subjunctive, optative, imperative, infinitive and participle do not refer to the differences in kind of time. Thus -ypa</J<Lv and -ypaif;a< to write, -ye-ypu.</Jr!va< to finish wTiting, may be used of the present, the past, or the future according to the context. On the tenses of the optative, infinitive, and participle in indirect diAcourse see 1862, 186, 1874. 'l'he future infinitive may be used, outside of indirect discourse, to lay stres;; on the idea of futurity (1866 d). c. Even in the indicative the actual time may be different from, that which would seem to be denoted by the tense employed. Thns the speaker or writer may imagine the past as present, and use the present in setting forth an event that happened before his time (188:~); or may use the aorist or perfect of au event that has not yet occurred (1934, 1960).

r8sz]

STAGE OF ACTION

413

d. In the subjunctive, optative (except in indirect discourse), and imperative the kind of time is implied only by the mood-forms, not by t1Ie tenses. The relation of the time of one action to the time of another usually has to be inferred in all the moods. e. The stage of an action is expressed by all the t.enses of al! the different moods (including the participle and infinitive). f. The action of the verb of a subordinate clause may overlap with that of the verb of the main clause. See 2388.
KI::-\D OF TB

Only in the indicative do the tenses show time absolutely present, past, or future. a. Present time is denoted by 1. The Present: ypacf>w I write, am writ-ing. 2. The Perfect : yypa.cf>a. I have written. b. Past time is denoted by 1. 'rhe Imperfect : ypa.cf>ov I wrote, was writing. 2. The Aorist: ypa.ifia I w1ote. 3. The Pluperfect: yEypacf>YJ I hacl w1itten.
1851.
N.- The on! y past tenses are the augmented tenses.

c. Future time is denoted by 1. The Future: ypaiflw I shall write. 2. The Future Perfect: yEypalf!EraL it will have been written, rE6v~w I
shall be dead (shall have died).
STAGE OF. ACTION

Every form of the verb denotes the stage of the action. a. Continued action is denoted by the present stem : 1. Present: ypO.<j>w I am writing, 7rd6w I am penuading (t1ying to
1852.

persuade), vBE is in bloom.

2. Imperfect: :Jypa<j>ov I was wrlting, :J7ra6ov I was persuading (tryiJtg

to persuade), reign.
N.- Continued action is in complete: hence nothing is stated as to the conclusion. Thus qodry<L he fiees docs not state whether or not the subject suc~vea

1cas in bloom.

3. Future: ypaifiw I shall write (shall be writing), {3a(n/..dxm he will

ceeded in esca.ping.

b. Completed action with permanent result is denoted by the perfect stem : 1. Perfect: yf.ypa<j>a 7rt<no~v I ha.ve w1itten a letter (and it is now finished), "vBYJK< has bloomed (a.nd is in flower). 2. Pluperfect: ~yEyp.</>1] m<rro~v I had written a letter (an cl it was then finished), ~veT,w had bloomed (and was in flower).

414

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1853

3. Future Perfect : yeypijteTat it will liave been W1"itten, Te8v~~et he will be dead. c. Action simply brought to pass (simple attainment) is denoted by the 1. A.orist: lypaifta I wrote, l7rwra I peTsuaded (succeeded in persuading), 1.(3a{wrTe he becmne king or he was king, ~vB'f/cre burst into jlowe1 or was in jloweT. . 2. Future: ypijtw I shall write, f3rxmev<t he will beconw king.
N. -The aorist tense ( .6purros xp6vos from plk""' defi ne; unlimited, indefini te, or undefined time) is so named because it does not show the limitation (pos) of eontinuanee (expressed by the imperfect) or of completion with per- manent result ( expressed by the perfect). 1853. The present stem may denote the simple action of the verb in present time without regard to its continua!lce ; as eavp.a?OJ I am seized with astonishment, ,(frp.'ffrE< it lightens (once or continually), olo"'JJ.' 1 malce a p1esent. This is called the aoristic present. On inceptive verbs, see 526. 1854. The future stern may denote either continued action (as in the present) or simple occurrence of the action of the verb (as in the aorist). Thus ')'pa'fw I shall be writing or I shall write. See 1910 b. 1855. Some verbs are, by their meaning, restricted to the tenses of con~ tinued action, as pii.v behold, <j>pEtv ca1'1"Y; others are exclusively aoristic, as ioiiv properly glanee at, vE'YKEv bring. Verbs expressing different kinds of action in their severa! tenses (as pii.v, li!dv) unite to forma verbal system. 1856. The difference between the present stem (present and imperfect) and the .aorist stem may be compared to the difference between a line and a point (both starting point and end). Th us, gPXE(]'IJat go, tMEv corne, mrive; <t>p<tv carTy, !'E'YKEv bring; fi-yHv accompany, lead, <i'Ya-yv bring to a goal. 1857. For the 'progressive' tenses of English (is wallcing, has been giving, etc.) Greek bas no exact equivalent. The periphrasis of the present participle with i(frl, etc. is employed to adjectivize the participle orto describe or characterize the subject like an adjective, i.e. the subject bas a quality which it may display in action. Thus, d.p({Kovrls i(]'p.Ev we aTe acceptnble T. 1. 38, Ka1 1f'ctvr' avaoEx6p.evos Ka.t Els arov ...ow6p.Evos r. rourwv .p.apT'f]p.ar' f({Tlv and he talees upon himself and ailopts all thei'r misdeeds D. Hl. 36. (fr[ may be emphatic: g(fn 1f'ov olxa i!tatpovp.Evov there exists a twojulil di1>ision P. L. 8()5 d. Some participles have become completely adjectivized: (fup.if>lpwv usejul, ita<fJpOJv supe1ior. Cp. l!Jiil. 1858. Primary and Secondary Tenses. -The primary tenses refer

to present and future time (present, future, perfeCt, and future perfect), the secondary or historical tenses refer to past time (imperfect, aorist, pluperfect).
a. The gnomic aorist (1931 b) is regarded as a prirnary tense, as is the aorist when used for the perfect (1040), and the imperfect indicative referring to present time (1788); the llistorical present (188:-J), as a secondary tense. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative moods in their h1dependent uses point to the future, and all their tenses therefore count as primary.

x86x]

THE TENSES OUTSIDE 01<' THE INDICATIVE

415

THE TENSES OUTSIDE OF THE INDICATIVE

The tenses of the moods except the indicative do not express time in independent sentences. 1860. Subjunctive.- The subjnnctive mood as su ch refers to the futme. The tenses do not refer to differences of time, and denote only the stage of the action (coptinuance, simple occurrence, completion with permanent result).
1859.

Present (continuance): r aurwv lip.a fK7ropt!;dJp.eOa let us at the smne time keep developing ou1 resources T. 1. 82; A orist (simple occurrence) : 1ropurwp.eOa ov 1rpwrov r'r]v a1rciv'l)v let us procu1e the money fiTst T. 1. 83; Perfect ( completion with permanent result) : Yva, 1)v p.'r] v1raKovwrn, reOvf}KwCJtv tht, in case they do not submit, ihey may be putto death (lit. may be dead at once) T. 8. 74. The aorist commonly replaces the more exact perfect because the perfect is rarely used. a. The future time denoted by present or aorist (rl1rotwp.ev; or rl'J1'ot1}!JWf'P; what shall we do!!) may refer, aecording to the sense, either to tlle next moment orto some latcr time. Greek bas llO subjunctive form denoting an intention to do this or that. In dependent constructions (iucluding general conditions) the action of the present is generally concident (rarely Rubsequent), that of the aorist is generally anterior (rarely co incident), to the action of the leading verb : xae7ralvov!J<, 'lr<tv aro'is 1rapayytw 1riv<Lv ro q,&.pp.aKov they a1e angry wheneve!' 1 bid them d!inlc the poison P. Pb. 1J6 c, hmv a7ravr' dKO(J'l)TE, Kpivare when you (shall) have hemd eveTything, decide D. 4. 14. The use of the aorist of time relatively anterior to the action of the leading verb ( = Lat. future perfect) is, like its other references to relative time, only an inference from the connection of tbe thought (1850 a). b. Present and aorist subjunctive are occasionally used in tlle same sentence without any great difference in sense (X. C. 1. 2. 6-7, 5. 5. 13). c. An independent or dependent subjunctive may be ingressive (1924) : ?)v "(p Iloros vvvl {JftPYJ fm ~f now Pl11tus !'ecovers his sight Ar. Pl. 494. d. In general conditions (2336) the subjunctive refers to general time, delHiting what holds true now and at all times.
1861. Optative (not in indirect disc.ourse ). -The reference is al ways to future time. The tenses do not re fer to differences of time, and denote only the stage of the action.

Present (continuance): 1roCJLOP f vop.li'otp.< rv CJo<j>v may 1 (always) count the wise rnan wealthy P. Phae. 279b; Aorist (simple occurrence): el "(p "(lvotro would that it rnight happen X. C. 6. 1. 38; Perfect (completion with permanent result) : nOval'l)s die (lit. may you be dead) Z 164. a. lu general conditions (23::)6) the optative is used of past time. b. In dependent constructions (including general conditions) the action of the present is generally concident (rarely anterior), that of the aorist generally anterior (rarely concident), to the action of the leading verb: <t ns rcie 7rapa{3alvo<, iva"('r]s l!!Jrw ro 'A1r6wvos if any one violates this. let him be accu1'st of

416

SY)l"TAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1862

Apollo Aes. 3. 110, f7rL7} avo<xOd'lj (ro 01Tp.wrf,pwv), <iiTfip.<v 7ra.p rov :i:wKpar1J whenever the p1ison was opened, we (al ways) went in to Socrates l'. Ph. 69 d. The aorist is often preferred to the more exact perfect because the perfect was rarely used. c. An independent or dependent optative may be ingressive (1924): d 'ffO<p.f,ITa.tp.<v o' 'Opw.,.6v, oov .v i}p.iis 1ra.Ov i}"(ovp.a.< if we should ente~ upon a wa1' on account of 01opus, I think we should suffer nothing D. 6. 16.
1862. Optative (in indirect discourse).- When the optative in indirect .discourse represents the indicative after a past tense of a verb of saying or thinking, each tense does denote time (as weil as stage of action) reJatively to that of the Jeading verb.

a. The present optative represents the imperfect as well as the present indicative. b. The future optative (first in Pindar) occurs only in indirect discourse after verbs of saying and thinking, in object clauses after o1rws, 2212, and in other indirect expressions of thought. c. Wh en the optative in indirect discourse represents the subjuncti ve (2619 b), its tenses denote only stage of action.
1863. a. Present opt. == present indic. : v'l'JpWri. rl {3orfo<vro he emanded what they wanted (==ri f3ov<IT0<;) X. A. 2. 3. 4. b. Present opt. == imperf. indic. : o<'l'J')'ovro i!n l1r! ros 7rO<p.ious 1reov they explained that they kept sailing against the enemy ( = l7r\oJJ-fv) X. II. 1. 7. 6. c. Future opt. =future indic. : 0 Tl 'ffodwo< ooo rourots ehe he did not tell even these what he would do ( == 1ro<f,ITw) X. A. 2. 2. 2. d. A orist opt. = aorist indic.: fJpwri. ri 1raOov he asked what had happened to them (==Tl i1raO<r< ; ) X. C. 2. 3. Hl. e. Perfect opt. == perfect indic. : ~<"(ov 8n o! p.<r 'l'Jp.oiTOlvovs 7ra.pa.o<oWKO<V u<f>s a.oros they said that the troops of Dernosthenes had surrendeTed ( = 7ra.pa.o<owKi.IT<) T. 7. 83.

1864. Imperative.- The imperative al ways implies future time. 'I:he tenses do not refer to differences of time, and denote only the stage of the action.

a. Present (continuance): Tos ')'ov<"is Tipii honou1 thy parents I. 1. 16, 1ravra. TJ.)vYJOfJ \"f< tell (go on and teH in detail) the whole truth L. 1. 18, ros l1r1rovs EKfPOLS oiODT Ojfer the hOTSBS tO them X. C. 4. 6. 47. b. Aorist (simple occurrence) : {3Mf;ov 1rpos r i!p'l'J look (cast a glanee) toward the mountains X. A. 4. 1. 20, <l1r state (in a word) P. A. 24 d, i}p.l:v ros l'ff11"DVS obu [JVe the h01'SBS to US X. C. 4. 6. 47. c. Perfect (completion with permanent result): r<Taxew let him take his place (and stay there) P. R. 662 a, .Zpf,IT6w let it have been said (once for all) 603 b. N.- The perfect active and middle are generally used as presents (nOvarw let kim be put to death P. L. 938 c, p.wrwO rernemlm D. 40. 30). The perfect passive (in the third person) is used of a fixed decision concerning what is to be doue or bas been doue.

!866]

THE TENSES OCTSIDE OF TIIE Ii'i'DICATIVE

417

1865. Infinitive (not in indirect disourse). -The tenses of the infinitive (without av) not in indirect disconrse have no time of themselves and express only the stage of the action; their (relative) time depends on the context and is that of the leading verb (present, past, or future). The infinitive may have the article (2025 tf.). a. Present ( continuance): oo f3ou'Aeve<I1Ja< ~TL wpii, l-.M f3ef3ou'A..,IJa< it is time no longer to be malcing up one's mi nd, but to have it made up l'. Cr. 46 a. b. Aorist (simple occurrence) : ro 'Trtev i1r,IJp.lii the desi1e of obtaining drink T. 7. 84, 1}p~aro 'YvriJa< began to be 1. 103, but 1}pxero 'Yi'Y~rr!Ja< 3. 18 (the tense of 'Ylyvop.a< depends on that of lipxop.a< ; not 1}p~aro 'Yi'YverriJa<), oe ros 1ri:p aro yovras p.<Ifjrra< (ingressive) one must conceive an ave1sion fm those who speak in his behalf D. 9. 53. c. Perfect ( completion with permanent result): see a. Often of certainty of action. d. Future.- Wh en the context shows that stress is laid on the idea of futurity, the future infinitive, referriug to future ti me relative to the main verb, is sometimes used inste[ld of the present or aorist: oK 7roKwDrrHv ouvaro1 6vr<S not being able to p1event T. 3. 28, 7rOoiJ olw Kar' ip.avro lpv I am fa1 from intending to spealc to my uwn clisadvantage P. A. 37 b. On the future infinitive with p.w see 1959. N. 1. -The action set forth by a dependent present or aorist infinitive (without /iv) not in indirect diSQourse has no time except that which is implied by the context. With verbs signilying to advise or to commancl, and Vlhen the infinitive expresses pmpose, the reference is to future time. "Csually the action of the present and aorist is concident with or antecedent to that of the main verb. The action of an aorist infinitive with the article and a subject is not al ways relatively past. The perfect (without liv) has no time !tpart from the context; its action is usually antecedent. N. 2.- On the use of the present and 'aorist with verbs of p1omising, etc., see 1868; with p.w, see 1959. N. 3.- Observe that verbs denoting continuance (as p.vw remain) often appear in the aorist, wbile verbs of transitory action (as UvaL send, hu1l) often appear in the present.. N. 4.- Present and a orist occasionally occur in close conjunction without any great difference in meaning, as 7rpD<If,K Dp:tv rovrov Karfrqrp[jerriJa< , o ~p.!is IJavarov avro Karaif!TJrf>i<IaIJat it is fitting that ymt vote against him, it is necessary th at you pass a vote of death against him L. 13. 69 ; cp. vaup.axfj<Ia< and vaup.axfiv T. 2. 83, f3arrav<rrr1}s 'Yl'YV<IJat and 'YEVIJat A nt. 1. 10, 1. 11. 1866. Infinitive (in indirect discourse).- The tenses of the infinitive in indirect discourse denote the same time relative to that of the leading verb (present, past, or future) as was denoted by the corresponding tenses of the indicative in direct discourse which they represent.

a. The present infinitive represents also the imperfect, the Jlerfect infinitive represents also the pluperfect indicative.
GREEK GRAM.-27

418

SYNT AX OF THB SIMPLE SENTENCE

b. The action of the present is usually concident, that of the aorist anterior, to the action of the leacting verb. c. The future infinitive is found chiefiy in indirect discourse and in analogons constructions. With p.w, see 1959. lt may have the article (2026). 1867. a. Present= pres. indic.: <f>rJp.l TaTa }Jkv <f>vipi evat 1 ~ay this is nonsense ( = ii1'Ti) X. A. 1. 3. 18. b. Present= imperf. indic : KT'fJIJ'li i.IJ'Oat atlTi" To Tpap.a <f>'f/11'< J[tesias asseTts th at he himselj c.uTed the wound ( twp.rJv) X. A. 1. 8. 26. With li. v, 184() a. c. Future = fut. indic. : ~</>'f} 7} li.~etV AaK00.tp.ovlov 7} aOTO a'/rOKTVV he saicl

that he would eithe1 b1ing the Lacedaernonians OT kill thern on the spot ( = li.~w,
a'/rOKTevw) T. 4. 28.

d. Aorist = aor. indic. : iv-raOa 'yeTat 'A1r6XXwv hopat Map11'6iv the1e Apollo is said to have jtayed MaTsyas ( = i~oetpe) X. A. 1. 2. 8. With li.v, 1848 a. e. Perfect = perf. ind. : <f>rJ11'l l-yKwp.wv -yeypa<f>va.t he says that he has written an encomiurn (= -y'ypa.<f>a) I. 10.14, ~rf>Ma.v Te8vava.t Tov li.vopa they saicl the man was dead ( T8VrJK<) Ant. 5. 29. f. Perfect = pluperf. ind. : 'yeTat 11.vopa nv K7re1rMjxOat it is said that a ceTtain man had been fascinated ( = ~<7r1r'fJKTo) X. C. 1. 4. 27. With li. v, 1849. 1868. The construction of verbs of hoping, etc.-Verbs signifyi~g to hope, expcct, promise, thTeaten, swem, with sorne others of like meaning, wh en they refer to a future event, take either the future infinitive (in indirect discourse), or the aorist, less often the present, infinitive (not in indirect discourse). The use of the aorist and present is due to the analogy of verbs of will or desiJe (1991) which take an object infinitive not in indirect discourse. The same analogy aecounts for the use of p.T, instead of oo (2725). The present or aorist infinitive with li. v, representing the potential optative with li v, occurs occasionally. lv l'!l.rrlot cJJv T TlX'fJ TWV 'AO'f}VO.lwv aipTJ11'tV hoping that he would capture the walls of the Athenians T. 7. 46, lX ... l . KTpa.<f/ijvat hope of being brought up L. 19. 8, lX1rl\'et ovvaTs el va< ii.pxetv he expects to be able to 1ule P. R. 573 c, ~xm nv lX1rloa p.7} v T7}v vciv a7To11'a.t; have you any expectation that you would not shipwTeck the 'vessel? X. M. 2. 6. 38. l'!1.1ri\'w with the present infini tive may mean 1 feel sure that I am. b. TUX<IJ'TO. otlMva iK(,. IJ'v a.T~ {JovTJI1'eiJ'8at evat it is )JTobable th at very soon no one will wish to be with him X. C. 5. 3. 30, i]p.. <iKo l7rtKpa.Tfjrra.t it is lilcely that we shall succeed T. 1. 121, oK <lKos a.OTo 7r<pwvl1'iiv vewv ~X"" it is not likely tltat they will continue to have ships to spaTe 3. lB. With EiKos the aorist is preferree!. c. 7Tfi1'X<TO TaTa 7rO<TJI1'etv he promised that he would do this L. 12. 14, 7T11'X<To {Jou)l.ef,IJ'a.IJ'Oa.t (most Mss.) he promised to deliberate X. A. 2. 3. 20. The aorist infinitive is especially common with verbs Df promising and must refer to the future. With the present infinitive 7r<l1'xvop.at means I assuTe, pTofess, pledge my ward that I arn. d. t1relXet tKTptymv he thTeatened that he would destroy them Hdt. 6. 37, 1,7rel'f}IJ'O.V a7rOKTV0.( i'JrO.VTO.S they threatened to kill everybody x. IL 5. 4. 7. e. o<KaiJ'etv 6p.wp.6Kare you have swoTn that yo1t will gi1e judgment D. 39. 40,

a.

ai'O.')'Kci\'1 TOV Kep11'o{3'ilbrT7JV OpHTO.l . . elvat p.v r7}v tpx1Jv Kotv7}v . . , 1TUVTO.' 15' llp.'tv a?Toova< T7}v xwpiv he compelled OeTsobleptes to swear that the kingdom

THE TENSES OUTSIDE OF THE INDICATIVE

-!19

should be in common and. that they should all restore to you the territory D. 23.
170.
f. With 6p.vp.t a dependent infinitive may refer to the present, past, or future (e). Thus, op.vuvres {3hreLv 'AXLi 11'aLv swearing that they see Achilles again S. Ph. 357, op.vuovrn JJ 'K71'Lv they swear they did not drink Pherecrates 143 (Corn. fr. I. 187), iJJp.vve p.TJI5v elpTJKVa.t he swore that he had said nothing (direct:::: o615v etp'IJKa.) D. 21. 119. 1869. Verbs of will or desi1e (1991) regularly take the present oraorist infinitive not in indirect discourse ; but in some cases we find the future infinitive by assimilation to indirect discourse through the analogy of verbs of promising, etc. (1868). So with {3ovop.a.t, eOw wish, oyw meaning command, olop.a.L ask, lq,iep.a.t desire and sorne others (even 15uva.p.a.t amiable) that have a future action as their object. Th us, lq,Up.evoL lLp~v being desi1ous to gain control T. 6. 6, &.ouva.ToL 71'Lp.<s trrerrOa.L unable to be careful X. O. 12. 12. ota.voop.a.L may follow the analogy of p.w (1959) : TOP 71'6ep.ov oLevoovTo 7rpo0Vp.ws o(rr<Lv they intened to carry on the war with zeal T. 4. 121. In these and similar cases the future is employed to stress the future character of the action. Sorne editors would ernend many of these futures. 1870. Verbs signifying to foretell by oracle usually take the present or aorist infinitive like verbs signifying to command. 1871. A few cases stand in our texts of an aorist infinitive referring to the future after a verb of saying or thinking, e.g. v6JUrra.v pq.l5lws Kpa.rfjq-a., they thought they would easily master them T. 2. 3. Many editors change to the future or insert d.v.

1872. Participle (not in indirect discourse).- The participle, as a verbal adjective, is timeless. The tenses of the participle express only continuance, simple occurrence, and completion with permanent result. Whether the action expressed by the participle is antecedent, concident, or subsequent to that of the leading verb (in any tense) depends on the context. The future participle has a temporal force only because its voluntative force points to the future.

noonday meal while they continued their work, but took thei1 supper when they had stopped wo1k X. M. 2. 7. 12. . 1. Antecedent action ( = imperf.) : oi K6pewL .,.p6q-fiev rrv f}p.v Ta.rr6p.evoL vv .<f>errrfJKrrLv the jo1ces of Cyrus th at we1e jorme1ly marshalled with us have no~c dese1ted X. A.3. 2. 17, Tous r6re 1ra.p6VTa.s a.lrtd.(J'ovTa.L rrvp.f!ouovs they will accuse those who were their counsellors at that ti me P. G. 519 a, o! Koplv8wL !J.XP' Tovrov 7rpo06p.ws 7rpdrrrrovres &.verra.v rfjs if>LovKis the Corinthians, who ~rp to that time had been acting zealously, now slackened in thei1 vehemence T. 5. 82. An adverb ( 7rp6repov, 1rporrOev, T6re, 1ror) often accompanies the participle, which is sornetimes called the pwticiple of the imperjc<ct. 2. Subseqmmt action (especia.l!y wh en the leading verb denotes motion): g"Tr<p.'fa.v 11'pq-j3eLs <i.oyoyoVTa.s T7}v To IlTJp.vpiov fj'f<v they despatched messengers

a. Prese.nt (continuative). The action set forth by the present participle is generally concident (rarely antecedent or subsequent) to that of the leading verb: lpoyajbp.evat p.v iJplrrrwv, tpoya(J'ap.evaL M toel71'vovv the wornen took their1

420

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1873

to announce the capture of Plemyrium T. 7. 25. An attributive present part. w. vOv may refer to the absolute present, though the main verb is past : rTjv vliv Botwrti.v Kaouplv-qv ~K7'Jr>av they settled in the country now ca/led Boeutia 'l'. 1. 12. 3. The present participle denotes that an action is in process, is attempted, or is repeated. b. Future (chiefly voluntative): o tJ"uvf/MJop.ev ws {Jar><e 1f"oep.fwovus we have not come together for the purpose of waging wa1 with the king X. A. 2. ;-l. 21. c. Aorist (simple occurrence). The action set forch by the aorist participle is generally antecedent to that of the leading verb ; but it is sometimes concident or nearly so, when it defines, or is identical with, that of the leading verb, and the subordinate action is only a modification of the main action. 1. Antecedent: i5et1f"v1was xwpet after supper he advanced T. 3. 112, ros evfJpovs :rroKrdvavres .vexwpTJr>av afte? killing the f1ee men they withd1ew 6. 83. 1f"oJ1.6r>i.s ~</>1'/ he took an oath and said X. C. 4. 1. 23, -fTJ a' l1f"! rara 11"opdJtJ"op.at rar>orov arov pwrrwas I shall at once p1oceed to this matter ajter having put to him certain questions D. 18. 124. The aorist participle is often thus used when it takes up the preceding verb : vv }J.v oet1f"vire et1Tvi}r>a.vres o .:rreauvere take your supper now, and when you have done. so, depmt X. C. 3. 1. 37. 2. Concident : p.ij ,., ~ap.pTTJT lp.o Kara.!fTJ<f><tJ"ap.evot do not commit the error of condemning me P. A. 30 d, eil y' l1ToL7Jr>as JJap.vi}r>i.s p.e y ou did well in reminring me P. l'h. 60 c ( = d.v!p,vTJ11"d.s p.e ' 1rotwv). So also when an aorist participle is used with a future finite verb, as 7raaxOfwop.a.t (3lov fJavotJ"a by dying I shall be deUve~edfrom life E. Hipp. 356. See also 2103. 3. The action of an attributive aorist participle is rarely subsequent to that of the leading verb. Wllen this is the case, the action of the participle ifl marked as past from the point of view of the present (like the aor. indic.) : ol ''E7'JV<s vurepov KTJIJvres ovav 11"p0 TWV TpwKWV dfJpooL if11"pi~a.v the people later called Hel lenes carried out no joint ente1-prise prior to the Trojan wa1 T. 1. 3, ~d.Tupos Kal Xp!p.wv,. o! rwv rptd.Kovra. -yevbp.evot, Keo<j>wvros Karrn6povv Satyrus and Ch1emon, who (afterwards) became members .of the Thirty, accused Cleophon L. 30. 12; cp.
"'fPOJ1.VOS T. 2. 49, 4. 81.

4. The aorist participle is often ingressive or complexive (1924, 1927). d. Perfect (completion with permanent resnlt): Ka.raap.fid.vour>t Bpi.r>loiiv t1T<7J.u06ra. they found (historical present) that Brasidas had arrived T. 3. 69. A perfect participle may have the force of a pluperfect if accompanied by an adverb like :rrpor>Oev (cp. 1872 a. 1): 11"p6tJ"fJe K<KTTJp.vos he who possessed it before

S. Ph. 778. 1873. Construction of ~a.v86.vw, <f>Ociv>, TVyx6.vw.- A supplementary aorist participle with any tense, except the present or imperfect, of avfJd.vw escape the notice of, <j>Od.vw anticipate, ru-yxd.vw happen usually concides in time with the leading verb: ifa.fJov ip.avrv oi5v d-rrwv I was unconsciously talking nonsense P. Ph. 76 d, -l]<rop.ev :rr<1f"e~6vres we shall fall on them unawares X. A. 7. 3. 43. But the action of an aorist participle with the present or imperfect is generally prior to that of the leading verb: 6r>rt~ vret:rrwv -ye (rU)' x ave who chanced to have spoken in opposition L. 12. 27. See 2096. l.874. Participle (in indirect discou;'se). The tenses of the parti-

ciple . in indirect discourse after verbs of intellectua] perception

PRESENT INDICATIVE

421

denote the same time relative to that of the leading verb (present, past, or future) as was denoted by the corresponding tenses of the indicative in direct discourse which they represent. See 2106, 2112 b.
:rrunovp.evo< wh en they

a. Present = pres. indic.: the action is general! y concident: i!7mov 'Y>WG'<> fi nd out th at they are distrusted ( = &r, &:na-rovp.eOa) X. C. 7. 2. 17; rarely antecedent (when the 11resent =the imperf. ind.) :. oM <Te 'Ayovra ciel I know th at you al ways used to say ( = on g-,..<'Y<<) 1. 6. 6. b. Future = fut. iudic. : 'YVO rov 7rO1J-OV oevp 1j;ovra he is ignorant that the war will come he1e (=on owo'Aep.os 71;) D. 1. 15. c. Aorist = aor. indic. : rv Mijoov t<Tp.ev hrl ri-}v Il<0'71"0VV1JG'OV 'AOovra we know that the Mede cmne against the Peloponnese ( = on Mijoos If, Me) T. 1. 69. d. Perfect perf. indic. : o 'Yp iioe<Tav rrov reOv1JKOra for they did not know that he was dead (=on -r0V1JKE) X. A. 1. 10. 16. The perfect may also represent tlle pluperfect (cp. 1872 d).

TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. l'HESENT INDICATIVE

1875. The present represents a present state, or an action going on at the present time: .YJOij .yw I am telling the truth L. 13. 72.

a. On the present without any idea of duration, see 1853.

Present of Customary Action.- The present is used to express a eustomary or repeated action : oro<; p.f:v yp vwp, lyw ' oivov 7!'tvw for this man drinks water, whereas I drink wine D. 19. 46. 1877. Present of General Tru th.- The present is used to express an action that is true for all time : J.yu f: 7!'po'> cpw-; Ti,v .~Ouav XP6vo<; time brings the truth to light Men. Sent. 11. a. The present is an absolute tense in such sentences. The future, aorist,
1876. and perfect may also express a general truth. 1878. Conative Present. - 'l'he present may express an action beguu, attempted, or intended.
TT]v i5o~a.v ravr')v welOov<T<v p..s 1rof3a'Aev they a1e t1'Ying to persuade yo~l to throw away this renown I. 6. 12, oli5w}-tl <TO< a.ri-}v ravr')v 'YV>aKa I o.tfei' you this , woman hel'seZf as a wife X. C. 8. 5. 19, wpoi5li5oTov ri) v 'E'AMoa they me tTying to betmy GTeece Ar. 1'. 408. a. This use is found also in the infinitive and participle: <l'><'Al7r'1fov l,.t Bv\d.vuov 1rap<ovros when Philip is pl'eparing to advance against Byzantium D. 8. 66. b. The idea of attempt or intention is an inference from the context and lies in the present only so far as the present does not denote completion.

1879. Present for the Future (Present of Anticipation).- 'l'he presentis used instead of the future in statements of what is immediate, likely, certain, or tlll'eatening. p.era~v rv 'Ab-yov KaraMop.<v; shall we break o.tf in the middle? P. G. 505 c,

422

SYKTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[r88o

Ka! fi f3ov~EL, 1rapaxwpw <Jo< To f3111J-aTo<, 1!w< av dr.n< and if you wish, I will yield you the floor until yuu tell us Aes. 3. 165, &,.,.6~~vp,a< I am on the verge of ruin A nt . .5. 35 (so &.... w~~vTo 5. 37 ot past ti me), el avn1 r, ...b~ ~TJ</>O>j<JETa<, lx<Ta< Kal r, 1r.<Ja :::f,tKe~lii. if this city is talcen, the who le of Sicily as well is in their power T. 6. 91. a. Sometimes in questions to indicate that the decision must be 'made on the spot: 1) 1rw< ~tyop,<v; or how shall we say? (wh at must we say?) P. G. 480 b. ~880. Ep,< is regularly future (J shall go) in the indicative preRent. In the subjunctive it is al ways future ; in the optative, infinitive, and participle it may be either future or present. Cp. 774. In lwv -raTa ~h go and say this (X. C. 4. 5. 17) lwv is used of time relatively past. In Hom. <lp,< means both I go and I shallgo. ~88~.

sense.

lpxop.at, 7TopVOJLat, vlop.at (poet.) may be used in a future xlw means either I ponr or I shall pmu. ~8op.at I shall eat,

7I"top.at I shall drink, are present in form.

Cp. 541.

1882. Oracular Present.- In prophecies a future event may be regarded as present: xpbvo; d:ypc ptap,ov ... 6~tv &ii K~evOo< in time this expedition will capture P1-iam's city A. Ag. 12G. 1.883. Historical Present.- In lively or dramatic narration tl1e present may be used to represent a past action as going on at the moment of speaking or writing. This use does not occur in Home1-. il 8<p,tcr-roK~fj< </J<V'YEL i< KpKpav iltaKop,leTa< < Ti!v 7}7r<Lpov Themistocl,s fled (flees) to Conym .. was (is) transpo1ted to the mainland T. 1. 13G. a. The historical present may represent either the descriptive imperfect or the na1i:ative aorist. b. The historical present may be coirdinated with past tenses, which may precede or follow it : ap,a il ri) 'l,p,(pq, Ti) ... 6~., 7rpocrKe<ro Ka! alp< at day break he assaulted the town and toolc it T: 7. 29, ovTw 1517 7ro"/pa</JovTa.< ... &.vT vl~af36v TE -r. o1r~a accordingly they all enrolled themselves and .took the arms X. C. 2. 1. 19. c. The historical present is less frequent in subordinate clauses ('l'. 2. 91. 3).
~884. Annalistic Present.- Closely connected with the historical present is the annalistic present, which is used to register historical facts or to note incidents.

Aii.pdov KaliTapvcranilo< -yl-yvoV"TaL 1ra.il<s oo of Dmi11s and Pm1;satis were (a Te) bo1n two sons X. A. 1. 1. 1, 1rp AevTvxiil<w -yp (Zw~lo'Y)tJ.os) Teevr~, . AevTvxlo'YJ< -yap,EL Epvilcip,'Y)V, h Tfj< oi . -ytve'Ta.L ()v-yar'IP for Zettxidem11H died brfol'P Leutychides . . . L. married Eu1ydame, fTom he1 was bom to him a daughte1 Hdt. 6. 71, Kal ivtavTo< ~'Y)-yev, v rfj KapxTJiibv<o< aipocrt ilo 1r6~ELS 'E~~'Y)vlila< and the year came to an end in which the Carthaginians captured two Greek cities X. H.l. 1. 37.

l.885. Present of Past and Present Combined.- The present, wh en accompanied by a definite or indefinite expressioi1 of past time, is used to eX})ress an action begun in the paRt and continued in the present. The 'progressive perfect' is often used in translation.

x8go]

ll\1PEllFECT

423

Thus, 7r.aL &avJL'w I have been long (and am still) wondering P. Cr. 43 b. Cp. -iarndudum loquor. So with r.dpos, 7ror. This use appears also in the other moods.
a. So with verbs of heming, saying, learning, whose action commenced in the past, but whose effect continues into the present: <ii; wv .Kow from what 1 hear (have heard) X. A. 1. 9. 28; !Yrrrp 'A.-yw as I S(d P. A. 21 a. So with a.lrrOtlvop.a.t, -yt-yvwrrKw, p.a.v8rivw, -rruv8rivop.a.<. iipr< just is often found with tlHlse verbs. b. The perfect is used instead of the present when the action is completed in the prese11 t.

1886. Present for Perfect.- ~Kw I am come, I have arrived, olxoJLaL I am gone, have a perfect sense; as also lpxoJ.LaL, cp<KvoJJWL. Th us, EJ.LLtTroKTJ> .:jKw 7rap tTf. I Themistocles have corne to you T.1.137, oia o1r{} oxovraL I know where they have gone X. A. 1. 4. 8. a. i]Kw may be used in connection with the gnomic aorist(P. S.188a). 1887. The present of certain verbs often expresses au enduring result, and may be translated by the perfect: otKw 1 am guilty (llO<k6s elp.t), 1 have done
wTong, vKw, KpaTw, 1 am victrnious, 1 have conque1ed, i}TTwp.at 1 am conquered, qw!-yw 1 am the defendant or 1 am an exile ( oi cf><-yovTEs the fugitives and the exiles), 7rpoi5ii5wp.t I am a traito1, rKop.at I am capturerl, rrrpop.at I am deprived, -yl-yvop.aL I am a descendant. 1jKw s T'lW rrijv olK!iiv, JJitKw o' ovob I m1i come to thy house, but have clone no ?Tong L. 12. 14, cl.7ra-y-y'A.cT< 'Aptal4J on f}p.es -ye vKwp.<v f!arr<Mii repo1t to A1iaeus that we at !east have conque1ed the king X. A. 2. 1. 4. a. So, in poetry, -y<vvw, q,vw, TiKTw, IJv?icrKw, 'A.'A.vp.a<. Thus, i]ile TiK-r<< rr< this woman (has born thee =) is th y mother E. Ion 1560. 1888. In subordinate clauses, the action expressed by the present may be (a) contelll])Oraneous, (b) antecedent, or (c) subsequent to that set forth bythe main verb. The context alone decides in which sense the present is to be taken: (a) ~'Ae-y<V on hotp.os d'T} 7}-yii:rrOat avTos he sal that he was 1eady to lead them X. A. O. 1. 33; (b) when the present states an action begun in the past and continued in the present: hrdn Of: IIprrat ~xovrr< To KpriTos, ( TO w<oiov) rrTt To fi arr t'Alos from the lime thftt the PC1'Sians began to holcl sway, it uelongs to the king Hdt. 3. 117 ; and with the hist.orical present: ws il -yl-yvoVTa.t h' awr;J, IT7riwTovrrtv when they came toit, they 1'1;.,1wrl in T. 7. 84; (c) l-y<v<To p1,Tpii ... d 1rap TaTa. 7row<v, Ko'A.ri~etv an onlinance was passe!l . . if they act contrary to this, to punish the rn X. C. 1. . 33.
IMPERFECT

1889. The im1)erfect represents an action as still going on, or a state as stiJl existing, in the past: Kvpos oihrw T;Kw, AA' (n 1rpo(]'~.aw~ Cyrus hacl not yet aJYived (1886), but was still marching on X. A. 1. 5. 12, {3a(rCwev 'Avdoxo> Antiochus was nigni1~!7 1'. 2. 80. The conclusion of the action is usually to be inferred from the context. 1890. Imperfect of Continuance.- The imperfect th us represents au action as coutiuuiug in the past: &cpfhtpav 'A()Y]!Jawv .,..ivrE Kat KotTL,

424

SYNTAX OF TH.E SIMPLE SENTENCE

[r8gx

o~ ~vvE7rOtopKowro they put to death twenty-jive of the Athenians who were besieged (i.e. from the beginning to the end of the siege) T. 3. 68.
~891. The imperfect of verbs of sending, going, saying, exhorting, etc., which imply continuons action, is often used where we might expect the aorist of concluded action. Thus, in g1f<p:Irov, the.action is regarded a-s unfinished since the goal is not reached : li"f'Y<ov g1f<JJ-1fov Ka! ros veKpos 1fou1f6voovs .1roouav they sent a messenger and surrendered the dead under a truce T. 2. 6. In tK"Aevov gave orders, urged, requested the command, etc., is regarded as not yet executed. ln (Xe'{< v aros rotd.oe he spoke to them as follows X. H. 1. 6. 4 (followed by the speech and l1rel o rar' <1f<v 1. 6. 12) the speech is not thought of as a finisbed whole, but as developed point by point, as in 1fl>1J O o!iros rara g"Aryev, if"Ae~a but when he had sa id this, I said A nt. 6. 21. a. In messenger's speeches the speaker may go back to the time of receiving a command: lhat u' h"Awov o! urparn"fol 7"'r'J!J.<pov the genmals order yuu to depart to-day Ar. Ach. 1073.

1892. The imperfect, when accompanied by an expression of past time, is used of actions which had been in progress for some time and were still in progress (cp. 1885) : ro 'P?]'{wv 1rl 1ro"Av xpovov <urauia~e Rhegium had been for a long time in a state of faction T. 4. 1. If the action is :regarded as completed the pluperfect is used. 1893. Imperfect of Customary Action.- The imperfect is used to express frequently repeated or customary past actions: cl1rd Elll0v avTov ot1rEp 1rporrOEv 1rporrEdvovv, Kat TOTE 1rporrEK1rqrrav when they cauyht sight of him, the very men who be.fore this were wont to prostrate themr sel!Jes be.fore him, prostrated themselves on this ocwsion also X. A. 1. 6. 10, (~wKpaTrJ>) To;; avTov 7Tt0p,ovvTa<; ovK 1rpiiTnTo XP~fW.Ta Socrates was 1wt in the habit of demanding money from those who were passionately attached to him X. 1\1. 1. 2. 5. See also 2340. a. The repetition of a simple act in the past is expressed by 7foMKts with the aorist (1930). 1894. Iterative lmperfect. -IJ.v may be used with this imperfect (1790): ~n 1relw avro Konv people would (used to) desire to hear still more from him X. C. 1. 4. 8.
t7Td}D!J.<t /Lv ns

1895. Conative Imperfect.- The imperfect may express an action attempted, intended, or expected, in the past.
l1retOov avro~, Kat os l!7T<tua, Torovs 1xwv l1fopev6!J.'I/V I tried to persuade them, and I marched away with those whom I succeeded in persuading X. C. 5. 5. 22, 'AMvvnuov loli!ov o o' .1f"1J'/bp<v< I'-1J "Aa!J.f3avnv Philip o.tfered (proposed to give) Halonnesus, but he (Demosthenes) iS8ltaded them from accepting it Aes. 3. 83, e71 (3an KaT<oov"Aon' a&ros the 'J:hebans t1ied to enslave them D. 8. 74, 'Jj1fd'{ovro is r1}v KlpKipav they we1e for pushiny on to Oorcym T. 4. 3. a. Here may be plared the irnperfcct equivalent in sense t.o 11'-e"A"Aov with the infinitive. Thns, fol>VS OVP avrwv E'{t{Vb,U"fJV l'yw ,uT] l7TWV !J.V 8. f]Kovua. g.,., o Tptii.Ko<Ilovs 'AOnvalwv .1fWVQV I !Vas on the point "f /Jecoming their murde1er

1899]

IMPER.FECT

425

( interfectulus eram) had I not told y ou wh at I heard. And besides I threatened three hundred Athenians with death And. 1. 58. So 'lrwfL'fJP I was threatened with death.
1896. Imperfect of Resistance or Refusai.- With a negative, the imperfect often denotes resistance or refusa] (would not or could not). The aorist with a negative denotes unrestricted deniai of a fact.
r?jv 7rpoK7J<r<v oK UiX<<Tiie you would not aecept the proposal T. 3. 64 ( r?jv iKenliiv oK lli~ano they did not receive the supplication 1. 24 ), plv oK -yap.e<, li h7JfL<P the one would not rnarry, the otha difl D. 44. 17, oo <f>wv?jv f/Kovov, et ns liX.o n f3ou.otro -ye<v they would not even listen to a sylla ble if eve1 any one wished to say anything to the contra1y D. 18.43. So oK etii. he would not

allow (he was notfo7' allowing).

1897. If simple positive and negative are contrasted, the aorist is preferred with the latter: r<l, 1rcipxovr n <rc#tv (positive with present) Kal 'lr<'YvCwat fL7Jv (negative with aorist) to p1eserve what you have, and to form no new plans T. 1. 70. But where the verb itself contains or implies a negative idea, the present is used : 1rape'i:vat Kal fL~ 7roo7JfLE'i:v to be. present and not to be ab1oad Aes. 2. 59. 1898. lmperfect of Description. -The imperfect describes manners and customs; the situation, circumstances, and details, of events; and the development of actions represented as continuing in past time.
1rarpa <r~ovro

c:p' avrcf3 fJCJ7rep ia.vTO 1raas lrtp.., or T pxbJ.LEVOL Kpov Ws he (Cyrus) t1eated his subjects with honour as if they were his own child1en, and his S1fbjccts teverenced Cyrus like a father X. C. 8. 8. 2, lis
Kev6r;
T TOS

JJef3611a-&.v

/fE

?rvres Kal 1rpoa-1reCJ6vres ip.txovro, iWOovv, w0ofhno, ~7C'a.Lov, brctCovro

irnmediately all raised a shout and jalling upon each other fought, pushed and we1e p1!shed, struclc and were struck 7. 1. 38, 1re! o mra lpp~li7J, 1ropeuovro TWP li Q1rO.PTWPTWP o[ p.v 'trf8V7JITKOP, o[ o gq,,u-yov 1rLP Et<rw, o! o l~owv and wh en these words had lieen spoken, they pro~eeded to advance; and of those who met them some we1e lcilled, others fied bacle indoors, and others shouted 7. 5. 26, t<rrpad'Y" li avrwv 'Ap<<ruus .A1'isteus 1vas theil commande!' T. 1. 60; cp. X. C. 4. 2. 28, X. Ag. 2. 12, X. A. 4. -3. 8--25, Isocr. 1. 9, 7. 51-53, D. 18. 169 ff., A es. 3. 192. N.- The imperfect often has a dramatic or panoramic force: it enables the reader to follow the course of events as they occurred, as if he were a spectator of the scene depicted. 1899. The imperfect is thus often used to explain, illustrate, offer

reasons for an action, and to set forth accompanying and subordinate circumstances that explain or show the result of t.he main action. Descriptive adverbs are often used with the imperfect.
lvraOa lfp.ELPEP 1}p.piis 'lrfPTE Kat ros <rrpartwrats ch<f>d.ero p.urOs 1r.ov ~ rptwv fLTJPWP, Kai 1ro..KLS l6nes 1ri r~ Oupiis 7rrfTovv o tlvtrUias ".ywv ilfi'l Ka! ilfiXos ~ v<wwvos thme he l'emained for .five da!fs ; and the soldie1s whose pay was in

arreaTs for '11W1'e them three months kept going to headquarters and demanding thei1 dues; but he ke)lt expTessing his expectntion (of making payment) and was plainly annoyed X. A. 1. 2. 11. See also 1907 a.

426

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[xgoo

1900. Inchoative lmperfect.- The imperfect may denote the beginning of an action or of a series of actions: 7rft&r] 0 Katpos ~v, 1rpoU"if3aov but when the proper time arrived, they began an (proceeded to) attack T. 7. 51. 1901. lmperfect for Present. -In descriptions of places and scenery and in other statements of existing facts the imperfect, instead of the present, is often used by assimilation to the time of the narrative (usually set forth in the main verb).
uptKovro <hrl rv 'II'OTC1.fJ.OV 8s &p<!;e r1)v TWV Ma.Kpwvwv )(Wpiiv J<a.t -r1)v rwv 'I-KUIJ7JVWV they came to the river which divided the country of the Macro nes j'rom that of the Seytheni X. A. 4. 8. 1, !~e~auve< brl 7rora.p.v 7r~i}p7J lx!Jvwv, ovs o! 'I.vpo< Oeovs vop.<!;ov he marched to a rivm full of jish, which the Sy1ians regarded as gods 1. 4. 9. 1902.- Imperfect of a Truth Just Recognized. -The imperfect, usually sorne form of eva<, with /lpa, is often used to denote that a present fact or truth has just been recognized, although true before: ovv llp' 1jv 7rp:yp.a it is, as it appears, no matter after all P. S. 198 e, ror' llp' fi v ~'I}IJt!s this is true after all E. I. T. 351, llpa i)7rlrnw you know, sure enough X. H. 3. 4. 9. llpa sure enough, aj'ter all appears with other tenses (P. Cr. 49 a, P. Ph. 61 a, D. 19. 160). 1903. The imperfect may refer to a topic previously discussed : fiv 7] p.ov<T<K1) vrl<Trpo<f>os rijs -yup.va<Tr<Kijs el p.!p.v7J<Ta< music is (as we have seeu) the counterpart of gymnastics, if you remernber the discussion P. R. 522 ::t. This is called the philosophical irnperfect.

The epistolary imperfect is rare in Greek. See 1942 b. 1905. 8.., ~xpfiv.- The imperfect of verbs expressing obligation or duty may refer to present time and imply that the obligation or duty is not fnlfilled: U"y~(J"(i> ~v{K' /h yav keep1:ng silence when he m<ght to speak D. 18. 189. So with XPYjv it were proper, dKs ~v it were .fitting (177 4). But the imperfect may also express past obligation without Jenying the action of the infinitive, as lb P-ivav he was obliged to remain (and did remain) D. 19. 124, 07l'p 8tt &~at quod erat demonstrandurn Euclid 1. 5 (1779). 1906. Imperfect for Pluperfect.- The imperfect has the force of the pluperfect in the case of verbs whose present is used in the sense of the perfect (1886).
1904.
Thu~, -ljKov I had corne (rarely I came), ~x6p.7JP I had departed, as lviKwv I was victorious, 7}rrwp.7Jv I was defeated (17 52). So ('OMp.,.,a) ols' AvpoaNv7Js 7ra-yKpir<ov vtKii the Olympie y arnes, at which And1osthenes W<~s the victor ( = had won) in tlle panc1atiurn T. 5. 49. 1907. In subordinate clauses, the action expressed by the imperfect may l)e (a) contemporaneous wiLh or (b) antecedent to that set forth by the main verb: (a) ro<Torot ~<rav oi i;vp.11'avres ore r1)v 11'o~topKiiiv Kaet<Travro this was theil total nume1 when they began to be IH:sieged T. 2. 78; (b) r 'll'~oov -ljKev, lv 0 hr~op.ev the vessel mTived in which HM (had) sailed Ant. 5. 29. Greek has no special forru to express time th.at is auterior to the past.

I9II]

FUTURE INDrCATfVE

427

1908. Imperfect and Aorist.- The imperfect and aorist often occur in the same passage; and the choice of the one or the otlter often depends upon the manner in whicb the writer may view a given action. The imperfect may be represented by aline, along which an action progresses; the aorist denotes a point on the line (either starting point or end), or smveys the whole line from beginuing to end. a. The imperfect of 'contin nance' or 'duration' implies nothing as to the absolute length of the action; cp. 11'ci.tv Ka:r. Taxos h6p.t!e Ti) v ~Tpanv he took the army back as quickly as possible 'f. l. 114 with KaT. ,-&,xos vexwp7Jcre he 1'et1eated as quickly as possible 1. 73. The imperfect does not indicate 'proJonged ' action in contrast to ' momentary ' action of the aorist. b. The imperfect puts the reader in the midst of tl;te events as they were taking place, the aorist simply reports that an event took place : f11'etTa 'fi'Aol l!woeKa v{3atvov, wv -1]-yeL-ro 'Ap.p.as, Ka! .,.pw,-os vf3TJ then twelve light-armed men proceeded to climb up uncler the leadership of .Ammeas, who was the jirst to mount T. 3. 22. Cp. T. 2. 49, 3. 15. 1-2, 4. 14, X. H. 4. 4. 1, I. 5. 5--54, 8. 99-100. 1909. The following statement presents the chief differences between imperfect and aorist as narrative tenses.

1mpe1ject A orist mere fact of occurrence, general statecircumstances, details, course of action ment consummation (culmination, final isprogress, enduring condition, consue, summary process) tinued activity isolated points, characteristic exarnples general description attainment endeavour main actions, without reference to actions subordinate to the main action other actions Cp. ~uvecrTp<inuov they servecl with them in the war, ~uvecrTpaTeucrav they took the field with them (both in 'l'. 7. 57). ~... etOov I tried to persuade, f1retcra 1 succeeded in persuading (both in X. C. 5. 5. 22).
FUTURE INDICATIVE

1910. The future denotes an action that will take place at sorne future time: ~l/JETat JLtcrfJov Tcf.av,-ov he shall receive a talent as his re-ward X. A. 2. 2. 20.

a. The action is future according to the opinion, expectation, hope, fear, or purpose of the speaker or the agent. b. The action of the future is either continuative (like the present) or, like that of the aorist, expresses simple attainment. Th us .,.el<rw means I shall try to pe1suade, or I shall convince (resultative), {3acrtevcrw I shall be king, shall reign or I skall becorne ktng (ingressive). 1911. When a verb has two futures, that formed from the same stem as the present is properly continuative, that formed from the aorist stem marks simple attainment : thus, ~~w 1 shall have, crx-l,crw 1 shall get; as ;cal ra,-' ElK6Tws oiffws

428

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTE!'iCE

!rrreMi!LfJavov if~v and 1 supJ>osrd v;ith 1eason that this would ~ontinue so D. Ill 153, 61}{'Jaioc ~xova-c !LV c't?rexllws, ~TL iJ' <xllpoTpw< a-xfJa-ova-cv the Thebans me hos-

tile and will become still mme so 5. 18. (But l!~w uoually do(s duty for a-xf}a-w.) So, .xfUa-oJ.tac shall be angry, .xllea-11-lja-o!Lat shall get angry, cpo(31}1To!La< shall continue fearful, cpof31JIITJITO!La< shall be te1-rijied, ala-xvvo!La< shall feel ( continued) shame, ala-xvvllf}~Top.ac shall be ashamed (on a single occasion). Cp. 17:38.
1912. The future represeuts both our shall and will. When voluntative (will), the action of t!Je subject may be (1) the result of his own decision, as oll a?] -rrocf}~Tw ToTo that 1 never will do D. 18. 11, or (2) dependent on the will of another, as 7} {JovX?j !Lt/>.Xn aipe~TIIac 5G'T ipe hri Tos -rrollavaIT< the Benate is about to choose some one to spmk ove1 the dead P. Men ex. 2:34 b. The use of the future is often similar to that of the subjunctive, especially in dependent clauses. 1913. Verbs of wishing, asking, and other voluntative verbs may appear in the future where English bas the present: TOG'OTov oVv ~Tov Tv-yxavew {Jovf}IToJ.ta< 1 (shall) wish to obtain only so much at thy hancls R Med. 259, 'Tra.pa<Tf}a-o!La' il' ii~Liis p.1Jov .xfJe~TIHjvai !LO< 1 (shall) beg you not to talee any o.tfence at me D. 21. 58. Cp. Lat. censebo. a. ln many cases the use of the future indicates that the wish remains unchanged; and there is no reference to a future act. Sometimes the future appears to be a more modest form of statement than the present.
&.vqp imHK~' vtv &.-rroua prjuTa otun Tw a.\wv

Gnomic Future. -The future may express a general truth : a reasonable m(l.n, 1j he loses a son, will (is expected to) bear more easily than otlter men l'. R603e (cp.l434).
1914.

a. Hdt. uses the future in descriptions of customs and in directions to travellers (1..173, 2. 29).
1915. Future for Present.-The future may be used instead of the present of that which is possible at the moment of speakiug: <:vpft
O"OfLEV Tov cjnoTifLov Tw vopcv . . vTt TOV t~v &:rro&vyuK<:<v dJK<:w<;
alpovf1-vov>

Jlri~ference

we shall find that arnbitio1ts rnen choose a glorious death fn to lzfe I. 9. 3.

a. The future may denote present intention: ape -rrfjKTpov, el 1'-axe raise ymw spuT if you mean to fight Ar. Av. 759 (in this use 1'-fw is more common (1959)). Soin the tragic Tl Xl~m; what do yon mean ii' E. Med. 1310.
1916. Deliberative Future.- The future is often used in deliberative questions: T[ Jpovfi-EV ~ T cj>~(I'ofi-EV; what shall we say or what shall we propose? D. 8. 37.

a. The deliberative future may occlu in connection with the deliberative subjunctive (1805): d'!f'W!LEP f) IT"fwp.ev; f) Ti i5pli1Top.ev; shall we speak or keep silent? or'what shall we do? K Ion 758.
1917. Jussive Future.- 'l'he future may express a command, like the imperative; and, in the second person, may denote concession or

AORIST INDlCATIVE

429

permission. The negative is o. The tone of the jussive future (which is post-Homerie) is generally familiar.
t>s ov 7rOL'lj<TET you will do thltS P. Pr. 338 a, rivyvrl"rETat rov VOJWV- .va'll"fVW<TKE the clerk will Tead the law- Tead n. 24. 39, ars "fv<lJo-et you will judge fol' yoU!self P. Phil. 12 a, <T7rOUllj go-rat ri)s olo you tvill have to hurry on the rJW1'Ch 'l'. 7. 77, p.s ovv, <. v o-w<j>povi)n, o rou-rou ),)\ p.wv <f>io-Eo-IJ now, if
you a1e wise, you will spare, not him, but y01wsetves X. H. 2. 3. 34. 1918. The future with o interrogative is used in questions in an imperative sense to express nrgency, warning, or irony: oK g~'~'-'" ... oK l1rl rljv !KElvou 1r Xwo-6 p.E!Ja; shall we not go forth ... shall we not set sail against his country? D. 4. 44, o <j>vM~o-0; will yo1t not be on you1 guard? 6. 25. In exhortations addressed to oneself: oK :n:aXXaxO'ljo-op.at llp.o; shall I not cease from my passion? E. Med. 878. a. p.'lj with the future in a prohibitive sense is used in a few suspected passages (L.29. 13, D. 23. 117).
1919. o p.fJ with the second person singular of the future in the dramatic poets denotes a strong prohibition; as o p.lj iitarpi'fm clon't awlle (y ou shal/not dawdle) Ar. Ran. 462. o p.'lj with any persan of the future indicative occasionally denotes an emphatic futnre deniai; as ros 'lrOV'fJpos o p.fJ 7rOH fleXrious 7rot1Jo-n you will neve1 make the l!ad etter Aes. 3. 177. 1920: o1rws and ii1rws 1'-iJ are used with the future in urgent exhortations and pro hi bitions: o1rws ovv g"'"e' IL~w' Tfjs iX<VIIpiiis prove yourselves then worth y rd jieeclom X. A. 1. 7. 3, o1rws rolvvv TrEp1 ro 1roXp.ov p.TJov ipis say nothing thel'Pf(Jt'<' abou.t the tvar D. 19. 92. For the fuller form of this use after aK6TrE<, <TKO'IrEn. see 2218. 1921. o1rws p.fJ (negative o1rws p.l) o) may express the desire to a vert som<thing; as ii1rws p.l) alo-xpo1 <j>awoup.,ea mincl we dun't appear base X. C. 4. 2, :w. .XX' o1rws p.l) ox ol6s r' go-op.at but (l fear that) I shall not be able P. R. 506 d. Cp. 1802, 1803, 2229. 1922. On /Lv (K) with the future indicative, see 1793. On the periphrastic future see 1959; on the future in dependent clauses, see 2203, 2211, 2220 a, 2220, 2231, 2328, 2549-2551, 2554, 2568, 2559, 2565 a, 2573 c.
AORIST INDICATIVE

1923. The aorist expresses the mere occurrence of an action in the }Jast. The action is regarded as an event or single fact without reference to the length of time it occupied.
iviKTJ<Tav o! KEpKvpa'iot K< vaOs TrvrE Ka1 lt!Ka. ld<j>IJE<pav the Corcyraeans we1e victorious and clest?oyed.fifteen ships T. 1. 29, Tiat<lJvws lrrolTJ<T' Paeonitts fecit I. G. A. 348, l!lo~v rii f3ovXii it 1vas voted /)?J (seemed good to) the Benate C.I. A.l.32. a. The uses of the aorist may be explained by the figure of a point in time: 1. The starting point (ingressive aorist, 1924); 2. The end point (resultative aorist, 1P26); 3. The whole action (beginning to end) concentrated to a point. (complexive aorist, 1927).

430

SYNTAX O.F THE Sl.MPLE SENTENCE

1924. Ingressive Aorist.- The aorist of verbs whose present denotes a state or a coutinued action, expresses the entrance into that state or the beginning of that action. a. This holds true of the other moods. Greek has no special form to denote entrance into astate in prsent time (1858).
1925. Most of the verbs in. question are denominatives, and the forms axe chiefiy those of the first aorist : lipxw TUle (JarnXeuw am king, Tule fJXbrw look at liaKp6w weep ooveuw am a Sl<tve pw love Oappw am courageous
PO!TW

~p~a

becarne ruler the throne

am ill

{Ja<Tlev!T'a became king, ascended ~fJXe>fa cast a glanee /JO.Kp<Ta bu1st into tears o6Xw<Ta becarne 'a slave i}pa<TO'I)v fell in love l&app'I)(J'a plucked up coumge v6<T'I)(J'a fell ill br Xou'T'IJ<Ta becarne rich 11'oJk'IJ<Ta began the wa1 e<Ti'Y'IJ<Ta became silent

,.xovrw am rich 11'D<Jkw rnake wm <T-yw am silent

a. Rarely with the second aorist: i!<Txov took hold, took possession of, got, as Ilet(J't(J''Tparov r<evr-f7<Tavros 'l11'71'liis i!(J'x< r-i} v &.px-f7v when Peisistratus died Hippias succeeded to his powe1 T. 6. 54. So iJ<T06p.'l)v became awme, i!<Tr'IJP took rny stand (perfect /!(J'T'I)Ka am standing).
b. The aorist of these verbs denotes also a simple occurrence of the action as an historical fact: [:Ja<Tlw(J'a was king, ruled, vo<T'I)(J'a was ill. Th us, Kvot 1rvre Ka! rETrapaKovra i!r'IJ rwv 'EX-f7vwv ;p~av they held the sup1ernacy over Gree ce for forty-five years D. 3. 24 (cp. 1927 b).

1926: Resultative Aorist.- In contrast to the imperfect (and present) the aorist denotes the result, end, or effect of an action.

'l'hus, if-ya-y~v 1 b1ought, f3ouXev<Ta 1 decied (f3ouwov 1 was delibmating), 1 sharpene, ~7r<<Tov l stnwk in .fo.lling ((7rt11'rov 1 was in the act of falling), l!7r<t<Ta 1 succeeded in pe1snading (1895). a. The same verb may be a resultative aorist or an ingressive aorist. Thus, I!{Jal>.oP 1 let fly a missile (ingressive), and 1 hit (resultative); Kar<Txov 1 got possession of (ingressive), and 1 kept bacle (resultative). b. ~K'THPa <T< E. Ion 1291 means 1 t1ied to kill you, since Krelvw denotes properly only the act of the agent, and does not, like kill, also connote the effect of the action upon another.
~e'IJ~a

1927. Complexive Aorist.- The complexive aorist is used to survey at a glanee the course of a past action from beginning to end : rovr'l' ,.c rpon'l' r~v 7row l.rdxurav it was in this manne1 tliat they .fortijied the city T. 1. 93. It may snm up the result of a preceding narrative (often containing imperfects, as T. 2. 47.4; 3. 81). The complexive aorist appears also in other moods than the indicative. a. This is often called tlle ' concentrative ' aorist, because it concentrates the

AORlST INDICATIVE

431

entire course of an action to a. single point. When used of rapid or instantaneous action this aorist is often called ' momentary.' b. 'l'he complexive aorist is used either of a long or of a short period of time: T<T<Tapa Ka/ OKa fT"r) Pji.LPav al <T1rOVOa{ the peace {a8tAd fourteen yea?'S '!'. 2, 2, o["fOV xpbvov ~UVf!JkLVEV 1) Ojl.aLX!J.{i. the leagUe lastec/ a Short ti?ne J. lt\, 1j'AIJov, <loo v, viK7J<Ta veni, vidi, v ici (" Caesar's brag of came, and saw, and conquered ") Plutarch, Caes. 50.

1928. The aorist is commonly used with definite numbers. The imperfect is, however, often employed when an action is representee! as interrupted or as proceeding from one stage to another. 'l'hus, !vraiJa.lfp.ELv< Kpos *p.pi.s rpLi!.Kovra Uy?us remained thi?ty days there X. A. 1. 2. 9; rhrapas p.f}vas IJ/..ovs t<T0~ovro
oi. cf>wKES ro~ <Jrepov, 7] roUrov lf;evOoo-ylO. p.r ra.&' HJrepov aros d:rrWXaFev .fo1~

the fou? whole ensuing months the Phocians remained safe, but thefalsehood of this man ajte?wa1ds effected thei1 ruin D. 19. 78. 1929. The aorist enumerates and reports past events. It may be employed in brief continuons narration (X. A. 1. 9. 6). As a narrative tense it is often used to state the chief events and facts, while the other past tenses set forth subordinate actions and attendant circumstances.

1930. Empiric Aorist.- With adverbs signifying qften, a.lways, sometimes, already, not yet, neter, etc., the aorist expressly denotes a fact of experience (p:rmpa).
?roo11roaK<S !J.<~6vwv ?r<IJ!p.ovns r 1ra.pbvr' 1rw'Ae<Ta.v many men often lose what they ha1!e from a desi?e jo1 greater possessions D. 23. 113, .IJp.ovns d.vpes o~1rw rpo1raov lf<TT"r)<Tav faint heart never y et raisecl a t1ophy l'. Criti. 108 c. So with 1ro/..Vs: iJ "fW<T<Ta 1ro/../..ovs <ls 6/..eOpov -ljya.yev the tongue brings many a man to his ruin Men. Sent. 205. From this use proceeds 1931. a. The empiric aorist is commonly to he translatee! by the present or perfect. The statement in the aorist is often based upon a concrete historical fact set forth in the context, and the reader is left to infer that the thought holds good for all time.

1931. Gnomic Aorist (yvtJp..TJ maxim, proverb).- The aorist may express a general truth. The aorist simply states a past occurrence amlleaves the reader to draw the inference from a concrete case that what has occurred once is typical of what often occurs: 1ra6wv ll TE v~1rw> ~yvw a foollearns by experience Hesiod, Works and Days, 218, K<l.os p.. v yp ~ xpovo v~W<TV ~ VO<TO p.pa V fm bewlty is either wasted by time or withered by disease I. 1. 6.
a. The gnomic aorist often alternates with the present of general truth (1877): o "f.p 1] 11'"f/'Y'IJ 1rap<TT"r)<TE r'l]v on-fJv, ' 1] rp.li.. ooo TO TV1rTE<TIJa.L ros evOt!poLS <TT! OLV6v .. TO <<t>' vf3p for it is not the blow that causes ange1, but the disgrace; 1W1' is it the beating that is te?Tible to jre~men, b11t the insult D. 21. 72. Cp. P. R. 5()6 e. b. The gnomic aorist is regarded as a primary tense (1858): ol rvpa.vvo< 1rov<Twv 8v av f3ov'Awvra.L rra.paxpf};l rrol"r)<Tav

tyrants make rich in a moment whomever

they wish D. 20. 15.

432
tions.

~YXTAX

OF TIIE SIMPLE SENTENCE

1.932. Aldu to the gnomic aoriRt is the aorist employed in gm1eral descrip~ So in imagiuary scc1wR and iu llescriptious of manners and customs.
1ret0v c:jJlKwv-raL ot TT.VT1JKTS fls rOv ;(nrov, ol 0 Oalf.J.WJI fKaffrov KOJtt,

rrhus,

1rpwrov p.v i!L<o<Kaa-c.vro o re Ku;)< Kc.1 ixrlws {Jtw<ravn< Kc.l ol p.f} when the dead

reach the place whithe1 each is sevemlly conducted by his ge ni us, jirst of all they have juclgment pronouncecl upon them as they have lived well and devo1tt!y or not l'. Ph. 113 d, <j>pos li anJp.epv ~vcp~vavres o1 iph< Kc.r' wv ~ilrwc.v ivs c.rwv p.(rpTJ ros o</>Oc.p.o< ajte~ having w~Jven a mantle on the same clay the priests bi nd the eyes of one of their nwnber with a snMd Hdt. 2. 122. 1.933. Iterative Aorist.- With /iv the aorist may denote repetition (1790) : el1rev d.v he used to say X. C. 7. 1. 14. Distinguish 2303. 1.934. Aorist for Future. -The aorist may be substituted for the future when a future event is vividly represented as having actually occurred : ci?rwMJJ.'1JV d.p', .r p.e lii) ei"fm I am undone if thou dost leave me E. Ale. 386. 1.935. Aorist in Similes.- The a orist is used in si miles in poetry, and usually contains the point of comparison. It may alternate with the present. Thus, -/pm< ' w< ore "'" pfis -/p<.,.ev he .fell as falls an oak II 482, ofos ' h ve<t>lwv &.varpaiverat o~LOS trri}p 1 1l"C.J.LcpC.(vw~, rore 15' c.lins ~liu vl</>ea trK<O<vra, 1 &s "EKrwp KT.

and as jTom out of the clMtds all radiant appeaTs a baneful stw, a neZ then again sinks within the shadowy clouds, so I:Iectm, etc. A :Z. a. The aorist in li:l:31, 1935 is used of time past (in 1934 of the future), from the point of view of an assumed or ideal present. 1.936. Aorist for Present.- The aorist is used in questions with rl oiiv o and ri o to express surprise that something has not been done. The question is here equivalent to a comma nd or proposal: ri o v o x< Kc.1 a-~ {;.,.p.v7J<r&.s p.e; why don't you 1'ecall it to my mind? X. Hi. 1. 3. The (less lively) present, and the future, may also be used. 1.937. Dramatic Aorist.- The first persan singular of the aorist is used in the dialogue parts of tragedy and comedy to denote a state of mind or an act expressing a state of mi nd ( especially approval or disapproval) occurring to the speaker in the moment just passed. This use is derived from familiar discourse, but is not found in good prose. In translation the present is employed. Th us, f]a-0'1}v, yMc. I am deliyhted, I can't help la1tyhing Ar. Eq. 606, l!ie~ap.7Jv rb p7]0v I welcome the omen S. El. 668 (prose Oxop.a< rv olwv6v). So l11"Tfve<ra I appTove, ~vvf)Kc. I unclerstand. Sometimes this use appears outside of dialogue (.,.l,-ru<rc. I spum A. Pr. 1070, Ag. 119:3). 1938. Wth verbs of sweanng, commanding, saying, and advising the aorist llUty denote a resolution that bas already been fonned by the RJwaker and remains unalterable: a- 1rov rfia-oe 'l'fi< ~~w trepv 1 comma nd thee (once and for ali) to depart from out this land .E. Med. 272, 1rwp.oa-a 1 swear 'nay' tl. Ph. 1289. This use is not confined to dialogue. 1.939. So in other cases: .,..:;,, rofir' ~<~c.s; o Karoco' 5,-ws ')'m how saidst thou (what dost thon mean)? I clo not know lww thou meanest S. Aj. 270. Cp. viv with the aorist (B 11:~, r 4:30). 1.940. Aorist for Perfect.- In Greek the aorist, which sim ply states a past

I943]

AORIST IN'DICATlVE

433

occurrence, is often employed where English uses the perfect denoting a present condition resultiug from a past action. 'l'hus, 7rap<KaJa bp.s, livopes ljJiNJL I (have) summoned you, my fJiends X. A. 1. 6. 6, o p.v rolvvv 1r6f..ep.os 1ravrwv f}p.s
rwv dp7Jp.vwv 7rerrTp7JK<V Kat '"(p 1revwrpovs l1rol7Jrr< Kal 1rof..f..ous Ktvovvovs 1ropivetv fjva'"(Karre KO.L 1rps TOS "E7JVO.S ota(3{3f..7JK KO.L 1ravras Tp07rOVS TTO.O.L1rWp7JKP f}p.s now the war has deprived us of all the blessings that have been mentioned;

for it has made us poorer, compelled us to undergo many dange1's, has brought us into reproach with the Greeks, and in every possible 1MY has caused us suflring I. 8. 19. Sometimes the aorist is chosen because of its affinity to the negative, as rwv olKerwv oova Kart1rev f..f..' 11ravras 1ri1rpaKe he (has) left not one of his servants, but has sold them all Aes. 1. 99. This aorist is sometimes regarded as a primary tense. Where an active transitive perfect is not formed from a particular verb, oris rarely used, the aorist takes its place: <Pepalwv p.v <PrfPTJT~L r1)v 1rotv Ka! <f>povpi'iv lv rfl Kpo1r6f..et Kar<rr7J<r<v he has deprived the Pheraeans of their city and established a garrison in the ac1opolis D. 7. 32 (KaOrrriKe transitive is not classic). So tf'Ya'"fov is used for i]xa. b. ln Greek of the classical period the aorist and perfect are not coufused though the difference between the two tenses is often subtle. Cp. D.19. 72 with

a.

19. 177.

1941. The aorist may be translated by the perfect when the perfect has the force of a present (1046, Hl47): hr7J<rtLf1.7JV I hctve acquii"e(l (KTK7Jfl.O.L I pussess), fBavp.arra 1 have wonde~cd (reOap.aKa 1 admi1e). Thus, ~KT7J<ro ars rtl 1rep ars hrf}rrao lceep thyself what th y self hast gained Hdt. 7. 29. 1942. Epistolary Tenses. -'The writer of a letter or book, the dedicator of an offering, may put himself in the position of the reader or beholder who views the action as past: p.er' 'Aprafid!ov, ov rro< i!7refJ.'.fa, 1rprrrre negotiate with Aitabazus whom Ise nd (sent) to you 'l'. 1. 129, Tpolav vre> 'Ap'"(eiwv rrrof..os M,Pvpa. rara . 1rarrrraf..evrrav the Argive armament having captuud Troy hang (hung) up these spoils A. Ag. 577. Cp. 1923 (last two examples). a. 'The perfect is also used: 1rrrraf..Kti rrot r6voe rv '"(ov 1 send (have sent) you this disco1wse I. 1. 2. b. The imperfect ( common in Latin) occurs rare! y: Mv71rrlep-yos l1rrrrLe ros o(Kot xalpELv KCJ.l u'"(talvetv Ka.l aros orws i!,ParrKe [i!x<Lv J JJinesier[fUS sends g1eetings and wishes foJ good health to his jriends at home and says that he himself is weil Jahresheft des oesterreichischen Archaeol. Inst. 7 (1\.104), p. 94, rwv o rara 1rpii~tivrwv 11xpt oi'i ooe o '"(os l'"(pa,Pero T<Lrri,Povos 1rperr(36raros r:ov rwv lief..,Pwv r1}v px1Jv dxe up to the date of this po1tion of my wo1lc, Tisiphonus, as th~ eldest of the brothe1s who wruught this deed, maintained conti'Ol of the government X. H. 6. 4. 37. 1943. Aorist for Pluperfect. -'The aorist with many temporal and causal conjunctions, and in relative clauses, has the force of the Eng. pluperfect. So with <.,..fi, i1r<Lof] a.fteT th at, si nee, lire, ws when, on beca1tse; regularly with 1rplv before, ws, P.XP' until: l1rel lrra1rt'"f~<, i1r'rrav after the t1urnpeter ltad yiven the signal, they advanced X. A. 1. 2. 17, l1re! li rrvvi)Mov, i!f..e~e rotaoe and when they had come togetlwr, he spolce as follov,;,s X. C. 5. 1. 19, idf..wrr p.e r1}v 1rt<rrof..1}v !)v GREEK GRAM. -28

434

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

1!-ypa.>fa. otKo.oe i!oDm< he requeste me to give him the letter which I had written horne X. C. 2. 2. 9. 8o often in other moods than the indicative.
~944. In subordinate clauses the action expressed by the aorist may be (a) contemporaneous, (b) antecedent, or (c) subsequent to that set forth by the main verb. The context alone decides in which sense the aorist is to be taken. (a) iv re/) xpbv<;J 8v hrrrxe 8rra 156varo Kanv6'Y)rre du ring the ti me he wa'ited he learned all he could 1'. 1. lBS; (b) hpa1rovro s rv llavopp.ov, 88ev1rep <iv'11'a-

'fOl'To

they tu1ned toward Pano1mus, the ve1y plae j1om which they had put out

T.

92 (see 1943); (c) !Mixovro !LXP< oi 'A87Jvao< a1r1reurrav they kept fighting until the .Athenians had sailed away X. H. 1. 1. 3. PERFECT INDICATIVE

~.

1945. The perfect denotes a completed action the effects of which still continue in the present: ril o1wrnJ.ara <JKoOop.:qrat the rooms have been constructed (their construction is finished) X. O. 9. 2, r 7roa> avrwv 7rapitp7JTaL he has talcen WctJ! (and still holds) thei? cities D. 9. 2G, 1nrd'YJ<f.a. I have fonnerl (hold) the opi1on 18. 123, {3<.(3ovEvJW-t I hve (am) 1esolved S. El. 947, r{ {3ov.EvwBov 1T'OtEv; o~!v, ~<P'YJ o Xapf!{7Js, dM. (3<E{3ovdf!"Ba wlwt are yon con.~piring to do ? Nothing, saicl Charrnides; we hve alteady conspired P. Chann. 176 c.

a. The effects of a completed action are seen in the resulting present state. The state may be that of the subject or of the object : l<po{3f78TJv, Kal ~TL Kal vv n0opuf3wuu I was stntclc with fear, and even at the present moment am still in a state of agitation A es. 2. 4, oi 71'0f!J.<O< ras ff1rOVoas <MKii.ff<V the enerny have b?olcen the tiuce (which is now broken) X. A. 3. 2. 10.
1946. Perfect with Present Meaning. - When the perfect marks the enduring result rather th.an the completed act, it may often be translated by the present. . Thus, KfKrJp.a< (have received a name) am called, rny name is, KKr'Y)p.at (have acquired) possess, p.JJ.VTJ!J.a< (have recalled) rernember, rMv'Y)Ka (have passed away) am dead, d8<rr!J.a< (have accustomed myself) am accustomed, 'J!-"ple<rjJ.ttL (haVe C!Othed myseJf 11) have On, 1r1rOLIJa (have pUt COnfidence) trust, ~rrr 11 Ka (have set myself) stand, {3ef37JKa (have stepped) stand and am yone, lf)'vwKa (have recognized) lcnow, 1rl</JKa (natus sum) am by natu1e, ol/Ja (have found out) know. a. These perfecta praesentia do not in nature differ from other perfects. 1947. 'Intensive' Perfect.- Many perfects seem to denote an action rather than a state resulting from n action, and to be equivalent to strengthened presents. These are often called intensive perfects. Such are: verbs of the senses (15/JopKa gaze, 11'<f>piKa shudiler), of su.stained sound ( KKpii.)'a bawl, )l.l)l.rJKa shont, [3(3px a 1oa1'), of emotion ( 71'e</J6f3'1!-'a< am .filled with alarm, 7'f'f/8a am glad, !LEJJ.'f/e carPs ji,r), of yesture (KX7Jva keep the rnouth agape), and many others (rrerri711Ka am still, etc.).

1954]

PLUPERFECT

435

a. But most if not all of the verbs in quPstion may be regarded as true perfects, i.e. they denote a mental or physical state resulting from the accomplishment of the action ; thus, 1r</>pKa I have shudderecl and arn now in a state of shuddering. b. Certain verbs tend to appear in the perfect for emphasis : TliJV'qKa am dead, d.1rowa perish, 1r1rpiiKa sell (have sold). 1948. Empiric Perfect.-The perfect may set forth a general truth express! y based on a fact of experience: .;, aTa~lii 1roos 1}1i"' d.1roweK<v lack of discipline ere now kas been the ruin of many X. A. 3. 1. 38. Cp. 1930. 1949. Perfect of Dated Past Action.- The perfect is sometimes used of a past action wh ose time is specifically stated : vf3p<cr p.a.< I was insulted on that occasion D. 21. 7. This use approaches that of the aorist. 1950. Perfect for Future Perfect. - The perfect may be used vividly for the future perfect to anticipate an action not yet done : dh To0To vKCJp.ev, 1r1fvli' f,p.v 1r<1rol'1m' and if we conquer in that quarter, everything has been (will have been) accomplished by us X. A. 1. 8. 12. a. Especially with the phrase T 1rl T<v<, the perfect anticipates the certain occurrence of an event : To 1r1 TouT'!- &.1ro<i>a.JJ.v fo1 all he could do, we had perished X. A. 6. 6. 28.

,.a,.,

1951. In subordinate clauses, the action of the perfect is usually (a) contemporaneous, but may be (b) antecedent to that of the main verb. The context al one decides in whicb sense the perfect is to be taken. (a) o1 o 8epa1roVTes, brloi} is vTl7raa KafJeiTTfJKaf.J-ev, af!Top.ooviT< while ou1 attendants desert, now that we have been b1ought dawn to a leve.l with the Syracusans T. 7. 18. (b) li. !To< TVX'I KXPTJK<, Ta.OT' d.</>eleTo Fortune has talcen back what she has lent you Men. fr. 598.

On the epistolary perfect see 1942 a.

PLUPERFECT

The pluperfect is the past of the perfect, bence it denotes a past fixed state resulting from a completed action: (3E(3ouevp:qv I had (was) resolved.
1952.

a. 'Vhen the perfect is translated by the present, the pluperfect is rendered by the imperfect: heKT1Jf1-'1 was in possession, he&vi]K he was dead, aoTJ knew, ip.ep.v1JfJ-TJ 1.emembered. Cp. 1946. 1953. Pluperfect of Immediate Occurrence.- The pluperfect may denote th at a past action occurred so immediate! y or suddenly that it was accomplished almost at the same moment as another action : ws o :>..i]</>Orwav, vvTo a.1 cr1rovoa.l and wlwn they were captmed the truce was (already) at an end T. 4. 47 (the fact of their capture was equivalent to the immediate rupture of the truce). 1954. In subordinate clauses the pluperfect iR rarely used to mark an action as anterior to an action already past: f,Mov o! 'Ivoo1 h Twv 1rO<f1-lwv oils l1rm6f1-</> KOpos i1r! KCLTaiTKD'lrf,v the Inians returned whom Cyrus had sent to get news of the en-ernv X. C. 6. 2. !!. Tue aorist is usually employed (H!4:l, 1944 b).

436

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1955

FUTURE PERFECT

1955. The future perfect denotes a future state resulting from a com pleted action : vayypa!f!of1-at I shall stand enrolled, 8eB~u~rru he shall be kept in prison; ~ Bup KEK:O<TErat the dom will be kept slmt Ar. Lys. 1071.

a. Most future perfects are middle in form, passive in meaning (581). b. The active future perfect is usually periphrastic (600): r Mwr' rrbp,e!Ja "fvwKbres we shall have determined on our duty D. 4. 50. 1956. When stress is laid upon complete fulfilment, the future perfect may imply rapidity, immediate consequence, or certainty, of action accomplished in the future: </Jpat, Kat ?r7rpri~erat speak, and it shall be done instanter Ar. Pl. 1027, 1Js 'Aptaos <f>errr-f}~' wrrr <f>l?,os i)p,'iv oods XeX<l>frat Ariaeus will soon witl1r dra10, so that we shall have no jriend left X. A. 2. 4. 5. 1957. The future pcrfect mrty have an imperative force (1917): lpf,rrerat 7p rri.X1J8ls for the truth shrrll (let it) be spolcen I. 7. 76. 1958. Wh en the perfect hD,S the force of a present, the future perfect is used like a simple future (l94(i) : KeKXf,rrop,a.t I shall bear the name, fLfLvf}rrop,at shall 1emembe1, K<KT-f}rrowu shall possess. So in the two active forrns : re!Jv-f}~w I shall be dead, rrrf,~w I shall stand. a. The aorist snbjunctive with !Lv (2324), not the future perfect, is used to denote a past action in relation to an action still in the future.
PEIUPHHASTIC TENSES

On the periphrastic forms of perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect, see 599, 600.
1959. Periphrastic Future. -A periphrastic future is formed by fJ.w I am about to, intend to, arn (destined) to, arn likely to (strictly think) yrith the present or future (mrely the aorist) infinitive. 'l'hus, p,lXXw "fetv rro! 1raat ooK what I am going to say has long been your opinion X. C. 3. 3. 13 (cp. 1885), KXavapos p,et 1j~etv Gleande1 is on the point of coming X. A. 6. 4. lR, IJ-f}rrHv ~p,eXXev !lX7ea. he pU1')Josed to injlict su:{te1ing B H9, ~wXXov IJX{iw< ifva< I was destined tO /Je happy ff 138, d 'TrOT 7r0pel!OLTO Ka! 7retffTOL p,OLP IJ>ferr0a.t, 7rpOITK<lWV ro< <f>LXovs rr?rovaa.wXo-ye'iro if ever Cyrus was on the mmch and many were likel1J to catch sight of him, he summonefl his jriends and engaged them in eame8t talle X. A. 1. . 28. a. The present infinitive usnally occurs with p,&Xw as a verb of will, the future infinitive with p,XXw as a verb of thinlcing. b. The aorist is used when it is important to mark the action as ingressive, resultn,tive, or complexive : o1rep p,XXw 1ra8e'iv ~vhat I arn doomed to suffer A. Pr. 625. c. p,t!XXw I delay usually takes the present, rarely the aorist, infinitive. d. 1rws o fLXXw and rl o p,XXw menn why should I not? Thus, rl a' o p.XXet "t<o'iov dva<; how shoul it not be ridiculous ? P. R. 530 a.

THE INFINITIVE

437

1960. ~p.cl\l\ov is used of past illtention in lfJJ.EE KaraMetv he was about to stop for tlw 1ght X. A. 1. 8. 1, ros lf<nrl\ous K?f<r<tv lfp.cl\l\ov they intended to close the entmnees 'l'. 4. 8. lfJJ.<ov with the infinitive denoting an unfulfilled past intention is a periphrasis for an aorist indicative with ll.v. Thus, o uvtrrpardJ<<v ifJJ.o> they would not have joined jo!'Ces D. 19. 159 ( = oiJK av lfuveu-rpanvuav ). Cp. recturus eram, etc. 1961. With Etp.L -The present and perfect participle are freely used with the forms of ElJJ.i to form a periphrasis, especially when the participle has an adjectival character (1857): 7n o<a</JOELpoJJ.vous nvs dva<; do you thinlc that some me being !'Uined? P. R. 492 a, a! rt!xva< ow:{>Oappba< lfuov-ra< the mts will' be Tllinerl X. C. 7. 2. 13, 'f}v roro uuJJ.</Jpov this was advantageous Ant. 5. 18; fi Ol\ovua is stronger than Ol\v, S. O. 1'. 580. 1962. The aorist participle is ral'ely so used, sin ce it denotes a single act, not a characteristic : 'f}uav o rtves Kal "fEPOp.Evo< r(/; NiKi<;t M-yo< 1rp6npov trp6s nvas and communications between Nicias and some pe1sons had actually been held /Jejore T. 4. 54. a. With lfuoJJ.a< the aorist participle equals the future perfect: o u<w?TfJuO.s v; be silent, won't you, once and jo!' all? 8. O. T. 1146. 1963. With xro. -The periphrasis with lfxw and the aorist participle is analogons to the perfect in meaning, and emphasizes the permanence of the result attained ( chiefly in Hdt. and the drama): K"JpV~ii.s (xw !have p1oclaimed S.Ant.192. a. In Attic prose (xw usu. has a separate force : <l>pits 1rpw7JP lfx" Karaa{3wv he lately seized and now occupies PheTae D. il. 12. So with the (rare) perfect: T l?T<rfJoELa ixov d.vaK<KOJJ.<O'f.l.vo< they had Ca?'!'ied up to the forts the pTovisions and Jcept them there X. A. 4. 7. 1. 1964. With yi"{VOfLCI.L. -The forms of 'Yi'YVOJJ.a< often combine with a partir.iple to form periphrases. 'l'hus, p.'l] uau-rov . . KTElvii.s -yvv lest thou dest!'oy thyself S. Ph. 773; in prose this periphrasis has the tone of tragedy. On -yl-yvoJJ.a< with a substantive, see 1710, 17 54. 1965. With cj>a.(vofLa.L.- The aorist participle is used periphrastically with forn1s of cj>alvo)J.at. Thus, ox lnrp J.1.Wv oO rWv vbfJ.WV cf;povrlffa.s o/ d')"a.vaKr'l]a-O.s </Jav1wETa< it will appea1 that he toolc no hecd, noT felt any resentment, concerning you or the laws D. 21. 39.
VERBAL NOUNS
ll -TOS

1. The Infinitive. and -TfOS.

2. The Participle.
THE INFINITIVE

3. The Verbal Adjectives

1966. The infinitive is in part a verb, in part a substantive. a. Many substantives are closely related to verbs, but not al! verbs can form substantives. All verbs cau, however, form infinitives. b. The word infinitive denotes a verbal form without any limitations (finis) of number and person. 1.967. The infinitive is like a verb he rein:

438

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[rg68

a. It shows the distinctions of voice and tenjle (but not th ose of number and person). Having tenses, it can express different stages of action (action simply occurring, continuing, or finished); whereas the corresponding substantive sets forth the abstract idea without these distinctions. Contrast 7rO<ev, 1roLTj<Tflv, 1rOLfj<TaL, 1rf1rOL'f/KVaL Wth 1rOl'f/<TLr 'making. b. It can have a subject before it and a predicate after it, and it can have an object in the genitive, dative, or accusative like the corresponding fini te verb. Infinitives scarcely ever stand in the subjective genitive; and the object of an infinitive never stands in the objective genitive. c. It is modified by adverbs, not by adjectives. d. It may take !iv and with that particle represent ll.v with the indicative (1784 ff.) or /i,v with the optative (1824). e. It forms clauses of result with &<TH, and temporal clauses with 1rplv, etc.
1968. The infinitive is like a substantive herein: a. It may be the subject or object of a verb. b. With the (neuter) article it shows all the case forms (except the vocative): TO (-ro, -r0, ro) Vnv, V<H<v, etc. c. It may be governed by prepositions: 1rp -ro Mtw. 1969. Tl1e infinitive was originally a verbal noun in the dative (in part possibly also in the locative) case. The use to express pmpose (2008) is a survival of the primitive meaning, from which all the otber widely diverging uses were developed in a manner no longer al ways clear tous. But the to or for meaning seen in !J.av9avv fjKo!J.fv tve have come to lea1n (for learniny) can also be discerned in ouvaf-'a' loeiv 1 have potver .(o1 seeiny, th en I can see. Cp. 2000, 200G a. As early as Homer, when the dativa1 meaning had been in part obscured, the infinitive was employed as nominative (as subject) and accusative (as object). After Homer, the infinitive came to be used with the neuter article, the substantive idea thus gaining in definiteness. The article must be used when the infinitive stands as an object in the genitive or dative, and when it depends on prepositions. 1970. The infinitive is used as subject, as predicte, and to supplement the meaning of words and clauses. 1971. The negative of the infinitive is p:>]; but ov, used with a finite mood in direct discourse, is retained '(Vhen that mood becomes infinitive in indirect discourse. Sometimes, however, p.~ is used in place of this ov (2723 ff.).
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE NOUN WITH THE INFINITIVE

1972. In general the subject of the infinitive, if expressed at ali,

stands in the accusative; when the subject of the infinitive is the same as the subject or abject of the governing verb, or when it has already been made known in the sentence, it is not repeated with the infinitive.
1973. \Vhen the subject of the infinitive is the same as that of the governing verb, it is omitted, an a predicate no un stands in the nominative case.

1975]

THE INFINITIVE

439

oTp.a1 llva1 I think that I know P. Pr. 312 e, IUplT7JS ~</>7J e1vat he said he was a Persian X. A. 4. 4. 17, i-yw ox O!J.ooyfJO'w ILK7Jros i)~<nv I shall not admit that I have come uninvited 1:'. S.174d, OIJ.o'Ao-ys 1rep! ip; IJ.IiLKos -ye')'evqO'Oaq do you admit that you have been guilty as regards me? X. A. 1. 6. 8 (cp. 4. 2. 27 in 2263). a. The nominative is used wben the infinitive, expressing sorne action or state of the subject of the main verb, has the article in an oblique case. Thus, ro{rrwv cl.~LwiJe!s l< r 7raTp<Ks arri] </>l'Aas dviu justifying these requests on the ground that he was his hereditary friend Aes. 3. 52, rovro ' 1roln iK rov xa'A<'II's eva1 this he effected by 1eason of his being severe X. A. 2. 6. 9, l1r! r~ O!J.Oo ros Xn,.opbos eva K1rp.1rovra ( colonists) are sent out to be the equals of tho se who stay at horne T. 1. 34. b. The nominative stands usually in sentences with oev, xpijva etc., dependent on a verb of saying or thin!cing. 'l'bus, f}')'OV!J.7JV . 7r<p<Eiva ov arwv Kal J.I-E'"(C1.o'fx6repos cpalveO'IJaL I thought I ought to surpass them and to show rnyself more magnificent D. 10. 235. Here f}')'oVp.7Jv ilev is equivalent toI thought it p1oper. c. When the governing verb is a participle in an oblique case, a predicate noun usually agrees with the participle, and rarely stands in the nominative. Thus, <i1raa-yEls rovrwv TWP </JaO'K6vrwv otKatrrwv Evat being l'l of those who profess to be judges P. A. 41 a, ris apxlis iwtrt TOS <ie! ilb~atriP <iplO'TOIS EVCJ.I it dispenses the offices to those who always seern to be the most deserving P. Menex. 238 d. ~974. A pronoun subject of the infinitive, if (wholly or partially) identical with the subject of the main verb, is generaly expressed when emphatic, and stands in the accusative (cases of the nominative are rare and suspected); but the indirect reflexive tr</>es stands in the nominative or accusative. o!J.aL p. 1r'Aelw XP'fJ!J.aTa elp-ytrOaL J} liovs trVvovo I think I have made more mo ney than any two others together P. Hipp. M. 282 e, fJ'7Jtrdp.evo i~J.avrv E'II'LELKO'T<pov evat ( emphatic for f}-y7Jtra!J.Evos 1riLKtrrepos el va) deeming myself to be too honest P. A. 36 b, TOS o 87]{3alovs f}')'ETO 6.trEIV O'II'WS {3oVETaL 7rpdTTELV avr6v he thought the The bans wou/cl/et hiln have his oum way D. 6. 9, o O'<jJEs <io<KftriJa<, cl.'A'A' helvovs p.'A'Aov he said that not they (the speaker and the other Lacedaemonians), but they (the Toroneans) mther had been wronged 4.114 (but trcps in 1228 b). a. After a preceding accusative with the infinitive, a second pronoun referring to a different person, and also subject of an innitive, must also stand in the accusative whether or not it denotes the same person as the subject of the governing verb. Thus, <i. vo!J.l!m fJ11-s p.v v~etrOal O'ov, ars (see below) l5 rv'll'-f}trflv ; Kal f}p.s p.v a'II'Olf'YJ</JetrOal trou, tr (not tr) ' o 7r'avrJEtr0aL but do you thinlc that we are going to put up with you, while yon strike us yourself? and that we a1e going to acquit !JOU, while you will 1wt cease your outrageons conduct? D. 21. 204. avr6s, above and in K'Awv OK ~</>7] avr6s, ,)..)..' hevov <TTPCJ.T7]')'EV Cleon sal that not he hirnself, but that Nicias was in commnnrl T. 4. 28, is not the expressed subject of the infinitive, but ar6s of direct discourse ( ars rv1r1}trm, ars ov trrpaT'fJ'"fw) ; bence ar6s is not used bere for treavr6v ( avr6v). 1975. Wh en the subject of the infinitive is different from 1.bat of the governing verb, it stands in the accusative; and a predicate noun stands also in the accusative.

4-0

SYNTAX OF THE Sll\lPLE SENTENCE

vo~J-ljw ')'p DiJ-s iiJ-Ol .Tvcu Kal 1rarploa Kal cpl'Aovs for 1 think y ou a1e to me both fatherland and jiiends x. A. 1. 3. 6, rv ')'p Kav Kd-yafJv IJ.vopa evoal/)-Ova eval </>TJ!J-' for 1 maintain that the noble and goodman is happy P. G. 470 e.

1976. A predicate noun takes the case of the subject of an infinitive itself dependent on subjectless iqfinitive. Th us, iJ~J-tV o 1r0LOCTI OOKEV <rcp~ 1raVTO-

oa7rOVS cpalve<TOa< they manage it so that they seem to us to appear in va1ious

fonns P. R. 381 e.
1977. Several infinitives may be used in succession, one infinitive being the subject of another : 1repl 1ro'A'Ao 1rowiJ-evos iJ-7JOevl 6~a< uf3pljetv {3o'Ae<T0at reganl-

ing it of g1eat impoTtance not to seem to any one to wish to behave

outTageou.~ly

L.23. 5. 1978. When the subject of the infinitive is the same as the abject (in the genitive or dative) of the governing verb, it is often omitted, and a predicate noun is eitber attracted into the genitive or dative, or stands in the accusative in agreement with the omitted subject of the infinitive. See 1060-1062. ~e<Tuv iJ~J-v ')'aOos evat or ~e<Tuv -i)~J-v ')'a0ovs evat it is in our power to be good (lit. to be good is possible for us). Thus, oe6~J-e0' ovv DiJ-wv Kpoli<ra<TOat
lv0!J-7JOvras liu KT. we ask you thmejore to listen to what is Cp. vv <rot ~e<Tuv vopl ')'ev<TOat quoted in 10(12 with AaKeoat~J-ovloLS lf~e<Tuv D~J-v cpl'Aovs ')'ev<TOat it is in your power to rwv
'Ae')'o~J-vwv,

said, consirle1ing that, etc. 1. 14. 6.

become fl'iends to the Laceclaemonians 'r. 4. 29. The latter construction may be explained as ab breviated for ~e<Tuv ~J-v ( ~J-s) cpl'Aovs 'YEve<rOat. 1979. The subject of the infinitive is often retained when it is the same as the (omitted) oblique object of the governing verb. Thus, 1rap~'Y'YE<E r. li1r'Aa

rl0E<T0at ros "'E'A7Jvas he issued ordei'S that the G1eeks should get unde1 arms

X. A. 2. 2. 21. 1980. An indefinite or general subject of the infinitive (nva, rtvas, v0pw7rovs) is commonly omitted; and a predicate noun stands in the accusative. Thus, cptMvOpw7rov Eva< one (rtva) must be humane L 2. 15 (cp. 1984), p~ov 1rapatvev l} 1ra06vra KaprEpe'iv it is easiel' for a man to give advice than to endure su.trering Men. Sent. 471, llpwvras ')'.p 1) iJ-TJ opwvras ?)ov eavev for it is preferable to elie in action 1athe1 than doing nothing E. Hel. 814. 1981. The construction of the accusative with the infinitive seems to have originated from the employment of the infinitive to complement the rneaning of transitive verbs ; as in Ke'Aew <re 1re'AOE'iv 1 command you to dPpart. Here the accusative was separated from the transitive verb and felt to be the independent subject of the infinitive (1 command that you depart). Gradually the accusative with the infinitive was used even after verbs incapable of taking au object-accusative.
PEHSONAL AND IMPEI1SONAL CONSTHUCTION

1982. Instead of an impersonal }Jassive verb with the accusative

and 1fini ti ve as subj eet, Greek often uses the persona! passive construction, the accusative becoming the nom inati ve, subject to the leading verb.
Thns, Kpos 1}-y-ytJ,()TJ vd)<To.t Gy1us was TepoTted to ha-ve conque1ed instead of

xgssJ

THE INFINITIVE

441

iJ-y-y87f Kpov viKfi(J'a< it was reported that Cyrus ha(Z conquered, and olKa<6s elp. tbreMev I am justijied in going away instead of olKa<6v (J'7W ip. &:~reMev it is right for me to go away. English sometimes has to use the impersonal construction in place of the Greek persona! construction (cp. 2107). a. The persona! construction is more common with )..-y<7a<, d-y-yera, op.oo'Ye'irat and other passive verbs of saying (regular with passive verbs of thinking) ; with uvp.fJalv it happens; with va-yKaos necessary, IL~<os worthy, olKawsjust, ovvar6s possible, bnr-l]oews fit, etc., followed by a form of eva<, instead of dva-yKaov, lf.~wv, etc. Thus, 0 'A(J'(J'VptOS els 'TTJP x wpiiv aro p.{Ja<v -y"(ferat the Assyrian is reported to be about to malce an incursion into his country X. C. 5. 3. 80, 1ro1) ns do'Ylii ~up.f3alvet 'Yl-yve(J'{Iat much absurdity would 1esult P. l'hi!. 55 a, olKatos eT el1rev it is right for y ou to spealc I'. S. 214 c, r?]v alrlav ohos rrn lKatos ~X"" it is right for .him to bear the blame D. 18. 4. Both constructions together : (fol -yp aT) 'Y<Tat 1ravv -ye rdlepa?TerriJat 'A1rowv, Kal (fe 1r1ivra K<lvCj> ?TIJop.evov 1rpfirrLv for Apollo is said to have been g1eatly served by you, and (it is said) that you do everything in obedience to him X. C. 7. 2. 15. Cp. 2104. N.- ofiMs f(J'TL and .pavepos rrTL take OTL or the participle (2107) ; of)Mv <TTL and <f>avep6v E(J'T< take on, not the infinitive.

1983. The persona] constructions ooKw, ~otKa (2089 c), Mw are regular instead of ooKe, ~otK it seems, o it laclcs (much or little). So with <j>alvop.at for <j>alvrat. ooKw -yap p.ot lf.ovvaros va< for l seem to be unable P. R. 368 b, ooKop.v p.o< l<a!Jfi(J'!Jat it se ems to me that we are encamped X. A. 1. 3. 12, vii v -ye >,p.wv ~o<Kas f3arrtes eva< now at least you seem to be our king X. C.l. 4. 6, 1roo Mw 'YW vp lp.avroii ?Too-ye(J'IJa< larn far jrorn speaking in my own defence P. A. 30 d, p.Kpo o7f(J'V Kv ...pov if.?Tarrav Karacrxev he alrnost (lacked a little) occupied the whole of CyzJrus I. 9. 62, eu cr "ye<v <j>avet y ou seem to speak well Ar. Nu b. 403. a. ooKe ,i.ol TLva lIJv for ooKEi' rls p.o< lIJev it seems to rne that some one came is very rare. ooKe meaning it se ems qood, it is emeed al ways takes the infinitive (1984, 1991). ooKw believe has the construction of 1992 c. Cp. 1998.
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE

AS SUBJECT, PltEDICATE, AND APPOSITIVE

1984. As Subject.- 'l'he infinitive may be used as subject, especially with quasi-impersonal verbs and expressions (933a).
-yp&p.p.ara p.a8ev oe to learn to read is necesSa?'Y Men. Sent. 96, .Tl xp>, 7TOLP; what must be done? X. A. 2. 1. 16, Kbrrp.os (<rrrl) Kaws roiiro opv to pe1jorm this well is a Cl'edit T. J. 5, ?r(}' tV aov xae'lrOV (rTTL) to please eve1'Ybody is dijficult Solon 7, ~oo~ev aros 1rpovat it seerned best to them to p1oceed X. A. 2. 1. 2, uvp.<j>pe< avros <j>lovs evat it is for the ir inte?'est to be friends X. O. 11. 23. Cp.
1062, 1978.

1985. Such quasi-impersonal verbs and expressions are /Je it is necessary, xp-1] (properly a substantive with rrrl omitted, 70:3) it is necessary, ooKe it seems good, ~(J'TL it is possible, ~~<(J'TL it is in one' s powm, ol6v T i<rn it is possible, 1Tp1T<< and 1rpocrf,Ket it is jitting, rrvp.(3alvet it happens; and many expressions formed by frrrl and a predicate noun, as IL~<ov it is 1iyht, olKa<ov it is just, <iva-y-

442

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

(1986

Kaov it is necessmy, ouvarbv it is possible, ovarov (or ovvara) it is impossible, altrxp6v it is disgmcPj'ul, Ka"Mv it is honourable, tl!pa and Ka<pos it is time. With the last two expressions the old dative use of the infinitive is clear : tl! pa {3ouXeuetrOat it is timefor cunsidering P. Soph. 241 b. a. On the persona! t1.~t6s el1u, i51Kat6s <ip.<, ooKw, see 1982. For oe p.e roro X"(e<v we find the persona! Mop.a< roro Xhe<v. Note the attraction in r 7r"X1]0os rwv vovrwv 7rev the number of the things it is possible to mention I. 5. 110 (for TOUTWV /l i{yetrnv). b. o an XPiJ regularly take the accusative and infinitive (cp. 1562) ; .va-yK?]

it is necessary takes the accusative or dative with the infinitive. c. The subject of the infinitive is expressed or omitted accor!ling to the sense. d. Homer shows only the beginnings of the use of the infinitive as a real subject, i.e. not a grammatical subject, as in 1984.
1986. As Predicate.- In definitions the infinitive may be used as a predicate noun with a-r{.
r -yp -yvwvat httrrf}p.?]v Xa{3ev ltrnv fo1" to learn is to get knowledge P. Th. 209e. 1987. As an Appositive.- The infinitive may stand in apposition

to a preceding substantive, pronoun, or adverb.

els olwvs tl.pttrros, p.fJvetrOat 1rept 7rarp?]S one omen is best, to fight for our count1"1f M 243, E'/I"OV . TOVTO p.6vov opv '/l"avras, rp 7rp6tr0ev ~11"Etr0aL 1 told all ta pay heed ta this only, viz., to follo1V their leader X. C. 2. 2. 8, Kat bp.s o orws, w7rai5es, 7rali5wov, TOS JLV -yepatrpous 7rpOTJLv, TWV o vewrpwv 7rpOTTJL7jrJ'0aL and 1 have inst1ucted y ou, too, my chilcben (to this e.tfect) ta honour yom elde1s in preference ta yourselves ctnd to receive honou1 from the younger in prefetence ta them x. c. 8. 7. 10.

1988. The infinitive not in indirect discourse, and in indirect discourse, is often used as the object of a verb.
THE INFINITIVE NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

1989. 1'he infinitive as object not in indirect discourse is used after almost any verb that reqnires another verb to complete its meaning. The tenses of this infinitive are timeless, and denote only stage of action. 1990. The infinitive may be the only expressed object, or it may be one of two expressed objects, of the leaing verb.
7raioevrJ'<s Kai) otaatrKet xp7)rJ'Oru v6p.ots a goocl education teaclws obedience ta the laws X. Ven. 12. 14, o<a-y<-yvwtrKetv (]' ros -yaOos Kat ros KaKos lOloa~ev he taught ymt ta distinguish .the goncl and the bad X. M. 3. 1. 9. a. Verbs signifying to ask, bl, jo1birl, pennit, teach, etc., allow an infinitive as one of two objects. b. Many verbal expressions, forme by a substantive and a verb, take the infinitive. Thus, ros lious i5toclrJ'KLV TXV'1 fxoutr<v they possess the skill ta teach (the) others I. 16. 11. Cp. 2000.

1994]

THE INFI:\'ITIVE

443

A. Object InjiniUve njter Verbs of Will or Desire

1991. Verbs of will or qesire (and their opposites) are often fol-

lowed by an infinitive. The infinitive with a subject accusative denotes that something should (rnay) be or be deme. 'L'he negative is p.~ (see 2719-2721 ).
f/8<ov a.vTo KouELv they we1e willing to listen to him X. A. 2. 6. 11, if3ou<vovTo KL'lrv T.J]v 1r6tv they planned to leave the city Hdt. . 100, T.t ~ourTa. !TJTE 1roLEv he seeks to do what he lilces best X. M. 4. 5.11, {3a.a<s l;w cri 1ro1r<v the king asks that you sail away X. H. 3. 4. 25, iKh<ue piq 1roKuva.t he entreated that they should not put him (self) to death L. 1. 25, 7rJ1.7roua-tv a-Tpa.TEecr8a.t '"'' Kiipliiv they se nd orders that he shall march upon Owia X. H. 3. 1. 7, lfool;e 1r v Tov 'AKL{3to'l)v it was decided that Alcibiades should sail T. 6. 29.

a. Verbs of will or desire with an accusative subject of the infinitive form one of the classes of substantive clauses introduced in English by that, though the infinitive in English is often more idiomatic.
1992. Of verbs of will or desi?e that take the infinitive sorne have

an object
a. In the accusative (or are intransitive), e.g.: a.lpoilp.a. choose, a.lTiAl, a.lToVp.a. ask, ci~"' claim, ask, J3ol>Evop.a. resolve, J3ovop.a. wish, will, !>Ka..iAl c!eem 1ight, !>a.vooilp.a. intend, 6o> (poet. 6w ), wish, will, do>Oa. mn wont to, .,.,_ xupiA\ attempt, iAl permit, ttJTiAl seek, KEElio> command, suggest, invite, p.o> delay, 11'E<piAlp.a. try, 11'JL11'"' send, 11'po9'iip.oiip.a. am zealous, 11'poKa.oiip.a. invite, 11'poTp1ro> 1oge, 0'11'EV!>o> hasten, am eage1-, o-'ll'ouSci.t"' am eager, Top.iAl dare, cpiAl am wont to, >lttJci>(top.a. vote. b. In the genitive, e.g.: Sop.a. ask, 1rO'iip.iA\ and opyop.a.. desire. c. In the dative, e.g.: iixop.a. p1ay, 1ra.pa.yyo> and .,.poo-T.1To> command, 'li'J3ouEVo> pu1pose, O'l>JLJ3o"Evo> advise, 1rTp11'o> and O'"'YX"'P"' pe1mit, 11'a.pa.wiA\ exhort, OOKiAl p.o I have a mi nd to; and yw, Et'll'ov, cpo>viAl, cj>pci.to> tell (and J3oiAl

shout) in the sense of commana. N.- 1rel8w u?'ge to a course of action, takes the infinitive, 1rel8w convince generally has .:,,, rarely the accusative with the infinitive. Tbus, lf1reL8ev aVTv Ka8' a.Tov 7ropevecr1Ja.L he u1ged him to go by himself X. A. . 2. 13, ov -yp 1rela-ovTat o! 7rO'Jiol, ws cr a.VTos oVK i}IJe'l)cras ci1rdvaL for most people will not be convinr.ed that of y oU?' own free will y ou dl not desi?e to go away 1'. Cr. 44 c (infinitive X. M. 1. 1. 20). 1993. V erbs of will or desire not to do anything are e.g. : 0/loLKa, <Pof3ovJJ.a.L fear, pe-yw avoid, oKvw sc1uple, a.la-xvvoJJ.aL, a.loop.a.t (2126) feel shan~e to, 1ra.-yopew jorbid, KWVw hincle1, 7rEXOJ1.0.L abstain f1'0?n 1 eJ)'Jia{3ofJp.a.L 1 <f>vTTO}J.O.L betoare of. Thus, pof3oJJ.a.L oteyxetv a-e I .fear to 1ejitte you P. G. 457 e, aia-xvvoJJ.a.L DJJ.v ei1rev ,.J.).'fJ81) I am ashamed to tell you the t1uth P. A. 22 b. 1994. Un der verbs of will or desire are included verbs expressing an activity to the end that something shall or shall not be done. Th us, /ilow}J.L ojfer, give, ota.JJ.rixoJJ.a' struggle against, 1roLw, oLa.7rpd.TTOJJ.a.L, Ka.Tep-yjo}J.a.L manage, e.trect, 1ra.pxw ojfer (otl1ers in Hl92, 1993).

444

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[1995

1995. Severa! verbs of will or desiTe take li1rw< with the future or the subjunctive (verbs of ejf01t, 2211, 2214) ; or p.fJ with the subjunctive (verbs of fear, 2225); sorne take the participle (2123 ff.). 1996. The infinitive may be used witb the a. Genitive or dative when the expression of desire is addressed to a person and the genitive or dative depends on the leading verb. Here the sentence is simple. 'l'hus, Ot!op.at Dp.wv -r. olKata if;7J<f>l<rau0at 1 ask yuu to render a just verdict I. 19. 51, -ro< iiot< 1rut '1f"apfJ-y-yffv l~o'1f"l)fu0at he 01dered all the Test to arrn thernselves X. A. 1. 8. 3. b. Accusative when the action of a person is desired (example in 1979). Such sentences are complex. N.- Verbs of commanding allow either a or b; but only Kffvw with the accusative permits either meaning: Kffvw u rara p.'i] '1f"otv I tell you not to do this and 1 cornmand th at y ou shall not do this. Cp. 1981. 1997. Severa! verbs signifyiug to say are also nsed as verbs of will and then mean cornrnand. The agent commanded usually stands in the accusative subject of the infinitive. So with 'Yw, fl1rov, <f>pa)w, <f>wvw. Thus X-yw u' l-yw oo'l' <Pl.oKrfJ-r7Jv af3ev 1 say that thou shalt talee Philuctetes by crajt S. Ph. 101, -rou-rot< ~eyov '1f"fv 1 told them that they shuuld sail 1>.19.150, 1ravu< I!f-yov ro< -rov-rwv iip~av-ra< oovat olK7J> all said that the 1ingleaders should suifer punishment X. A. 5. 7. 34, fi7Tov -ri)v Ovpiiv KfK<TOat they cornrnanded that the door should be shut (and stay shut) X. 1-I. 5. 4. 7, f3autf< hpa>f;e 1r&.uii< -r:< lv -r~ 'EXXriot 71"6Xm av-rovbp.ov< dvat the king issued a written order that all the cities in GTeece should be independent (not: w1ote that they weTe independent) X. H. 6. 3. 12. a. The agent may stand in the dative as xaXv Xi-yw (Tot I bid thee let go s. o. c. 840. 1998. The present and aorist infinitive (both timeless) are the usual tenses of the infinitive after verbs of will or desi1e (see 1869). The perfect is rare; as d7f"ov -rl]P OupiiP tc<KeuOat (1097). ooKw and ooKw JI.O' signifying 1 have a mind to or 1 arn deterrnined to take the present or aorist like ooKe: -rv ovov l~a-yetv ooKw 1 have a mind to b1ing out the ass Ar. V esp. 177, l-yw ou v JI.O' ooKw </>7J'YfJuauOat Kr . now 1 have a rnind to show, etc. P. Eu. 288 c. Cp. 1983 a. When it is clearly denoted that the action resolved on is to follow without delay the future is used ; as in aa p.o ooKw o 1relu<TOa atm/! but 1 am determined that J will not accept his opinion P. Th. 183 d. a. Some verbs, as Keevw, which might be held to introduce indirect discourse, are classed under verbs of will or desi?e, because, like these verbs, they do not regularly take the future infinitive ; and because, unlike verbs of saying and thinking (which admit all the tenses of the infinitive) they introduce infinitives which do not show differences of time. The future infinitive does not express a command. For a few cases of the future after verbs of will or dese, see 1869. 1999. Verbs signifying to hope, expect, p1omise, threaten, and sweaT, when followed by the aorist (Jess often the present) infinitive (1868), have the construction of verbs of will or clesiTe. Wben such verbs take the future infinitive they have the construction of indirect discourse.

2005]

THE INFINITIVE

445

B. Infinitive after Otlter Verbs

2000. The infinitive follows many verbs, especially such as denote ability, fitness, necessity, etc. (and their opposites ).
iiUvaro (3wreve<v he was no longer able ta live T. 1. 130, IIEII bnlcnowing how ta swim X. A. 5. 7. 25, 7r<</JDKi<Tl re 117ranes . .p.aprdall men are by natu1e prone to m"r T. 3. 45, p.av!Jdvou<T<v IIpxetv re Kal they learn lww to govern and be govemed X. A. 1. 9. 4; also after the impersonals of 1985. a. <xw I can is derived from the meaning I have especially with a verb of saying. Thus, Ats 7ra')'v lfxov<TtP el1re'iP they can proclaim a strolce of Zeus A. Ag. 367. odn <Trdp.evos vetv and IIpxe<TIJat

C. Infinitive ajter Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substant?:ves

2001. The infinitive serves to define the meaning of adjectives,

adverbs, and substantives, especially tbose denoting ability, jitness, capacity, etc. (and their opposites), and generally those analogons in meaning to verbs which take the infinitive (2000). Here the datival meaning (znupose, destination) is often apparent. Op. 1969.
2002. Adjectives and Adverbs. -lKavol -l}p.s w<f>'1-.v able to assist us X. A. 3. 3. 18, oetvs yetv, KaKs f3<wvat slcilled in speaking, evil in life Aes. 3.174, otot </Jtev able to love D. 25. 2, l!rotp.ol el<Tt p.axe<TIJat they are ready to fight X. C. 4.1.1, IIpxetv ti~tc.hraros most wo1thy to govern X. A. 1.9.1, ooos . tip.f,xavos <l<TeMv <Trparevp.an a road impracticable fm an aTrny to enter 1. 2. 21, xae1rv ota(3alvttv ha1d to c1oss 5. 6. 9, f7rtvofj<Tat cl~es quick to conceive T. 1. 70. So also after pws easy, -l}ovs pleasant, olKaw< j11st, vayKaos necessmy, f'lrtrf,oos suitable, tiyaOos good, a!rws responsible fm, p.aaKos incapable of; cp. 6Xl')'os 1063. After ad verbs: Kat<Tra loev most splendid to behold X. C. 8. 3. 5. a. Sorne of these adjectives take the infinitive by analogy to the related verbs, as 1rpbep.os zealous (7rpo1Jp.op.at), 1rturf,p.wv knouing how (f7rl<Trap.at). 2003. olos jit, lo-os sufficient take the infinitive like the fuller expressions rowros olos, ro<Toros ll<Tos. Thus, o yp 'ljv C,pi ofi r 1reolov /l,poELv for it was not the p1oper season to ir~igate the plain X. A. 2. 3. 13, li<Tov d1rotfjv sufficient to live off of T. 1. 2, rowros olos 1reliJe<TOa< the ki nd of a man to be convinced P. Cr. 46 b. On ro<Toros C,<Tre ( ws) see 2263. Hom. has the infinitive after roos, r611os, etc. 2004. Substantives. -As, ol 1raoes bf.lv Xlyav -i}<Klav ~xov<T< 7ra<OVe<TIJa< your children are al most of an age to be educated P. I,ach. 187 c. With i11rl omitted : "Xof, ')' -l}p.v p.avMve<v we have leiswe to leam X. C. 4. 3. 12, tivdyK'I) 1reliJe<TOa< there is need to obcy X. H. 1. 6. 8, 1repalvE<v 1/o'l C,p it is high time to finish X. A. 3. 2. 32. Cp. 1985. 2005. The infinitive is added, like an accusative of respect (1601, 1602), to intra.nsitive verbs ( especially in poetry), to adjectives (more frequently in poetry), and to substantives (rarely). Tbn~, roos lev such in aspect (lit. ta look on) Theognis 216, opv <Truyvos of a 1epulsive expression X. A. 2. 6. 9, tiKoiJ..

446
<rat

SYNT AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[zoo6

.,-a-yKdl,ws i!xEL it is very fine to hem D. 19. 47, Oafip.a Kal Kouat a ?naJ'Vel even to hear of P. L. 606 d. 2006. The infinitive Ji mi ting the meaning of an adjective is commonly active (or middle) in cases where the passive is more natural in English. Thus, M-yos livvaTos Karavo?)uat a speech capable of being undmstood P. Ph. !JO c, ll.~ws Oavp.&,ua< 1/JOI'thy to be wlmlred T. 1. 1<38 (but ll.~ws Oavp.a!;eG"Oat X. C. 5. 1. 6). a. The active u,;e is due to the old datival function of the infinitive: vvaTos KaTavofjG"a< capnble ji JI undeTstanding.
~

2007. 'rhe infinitive, with or without w<T'T or ws, may be used with than after comparatives, depending on an (implied) idea of ability or inability. ~ ui<TT is more common than ~ or ~ w. Cp. 2264.

r -yp v6ir"t]p.a p.!;ov 1} <f>lpv fm the disease is too g1eat to be lwme S. O. T. 129)3, <f>of3op.a< p.f) n p.e!;ov :1) C:,G"Te </Jpv livvaG"Oat KaKv ri] .,-6)1.L G"vp.f3fl I fear lest snme calamity IJefall the State g1eateT than it can bea1 X. M. 3. 5. 17, f3paxvrepa
i) ws
~<Kveu8at too shmt to Tertch X. A. 3. 3. 7. a. The force of 1} iMre may be expressed by the genitive ; as, Kp<G"G"ov M-yov ('l'. 2. 50)= KpetG"G"ov 1} tJuu: )1./:-yeuOat. Cp. 1077. b. Words implying a comparison niay take the infinitive with C:,G"re or ws (1063).

D. I11ji1litive of Purpose and Result

2008. Infinitive of Purpose.- The infinitive may exp1ess pmpose (usually only with verbs taking the accusative).
TaVT"tJV T'>/V xwpCiv 1rTpeif;~ OtapTraG"at TOS "El\l\"t]G"<V he gave this land ove? to the Oreeks ta plu nd er X. A. 1. 2. 19, To 1)p.<G"V ( To G"TpaTevp.aTos) Ka.rfLTr< rpvl\aTretv T G"rpa.r6.,-eliov he left half (of the army) behind to g1wrd the camp 5. 2. 1, Uva.< bt! f3a<nl\Ci oK l-yloyveTo T lepa the sacrifices did not t1trn out (favourable) for going against the king 2. 2. 3, 'Apunapx'f' ~ilore -f,p..!pCiv Troo-yi}G"MOa., you gmnted a day to .ATistarchus to ranke his defence X. H. 1. 7. 28, 1} Ovpa .;, lp.'i] av'f'KTO . elG"dvat rej) ileop.lv't' n lp.o my dooT stood open jo? any petitioneT of mine to enter 5. 1. 14, .,-aplx.w lp.avTov lpwTv I O.tflw rnyself to be questioned P. A. 33 b, Ts -yvvaKas .,-,<L'v rpepovuCis the women bringing (somethiug) to drink X. H. 7. 2. 9. Cp. also 2032 e. 2009. The infinitive of pnrpose is used in prose especially after verbs meaning to give, entrust, choose, appoint, talee, Teceive. Verbs signifying to send, go, come nsually take the future active participle (2065) ; but T. G. 50 has li <Ka. Twv vewv .,-pov1rep.if;a.v ls Tov p..!-ya.v l\tp.lva. .,-t-eG"a< they sent ahertd ten ships to sail into the g1eat harbour; and in poetry the infinitive often denotes pmpose after these verbs, and <tfter eiva in Homer (A 20) and Hdt. (5. 25).

2010. After verbs meaning to lwve (or be) at one's disposition: al <rrpanwra p-yvpwv oK dxov bnG"irl!;eG"Oa the soldims did not have nwney by means of which they could p1ovision themselves X. A. 7. 1. 7, Ke G"Ktd T' uTl Ka.l .,-60. Ka.8l!ecr8a the1e is shade and gms.s to sit d01vn in P. Phae. 220 b.

2011. Infinitive of Result.- The infiuiti ve may be used with

w<TTf.

2012]

THE INF1NITIVE

4!7

(sometimes with w>) to denote a result, often an intended result. See 2260 ff.
a. Several verbs, substantives, and adjectives usually taking the infinitive also admit l!Jqre with the infinitive (2271); and the infinitive is found where l!Jqre with the infinitive might be expected: fJ.V'YJfJ.OvevoV17tlJ clrpefUvra Tovrov evOepov eTvat they recall th at he was emancipated (lit. 1'eleased so as to be jree) D. 29. 25. Here the redundant infinitive expresses an intended result. N.-This redundant use of ifvat is common in Hom. and Hdt.

E. Absolute Infinitive
2012. Certain idiomatic infinitives are used absolutely in parenthetieal phrases to limit the application of a single expression or of the entire sentence.

a. Verbs of Saying. - ws l1ros El1rev, ws el1rev so to spealc, almost; ( ws) 1rXws el1rev, ws 17VveMvn (1497) el1reiv, ws (lv {3paxei or) 17vvr61J.ws el1re'iv to spealc briefly, concisely; ws hrl 1rv el1rev, 7o 17V!J.1rav el1re'iv spealcing genemlly; 17Xeiiv el1rev soto say, alrnost (paene dixe~im); qv Oe</i El1rel:v in God'.snmne; and so ws with XyELv, <{>pciELv, eipfw!Ja, as ws v rV1rlf' eipijq!Jat in geneTal. Examples: &.X7JIJs 'Y ws t1ros el1re'Zv oiiv elp-f}Kii17tv not one word of truth, I may say, dicl they utter P. A. 17 a, cl"faiJv }v ,-Xws el,-e'Zv oMv 'Yf'Yove rfi ,-6Xet in a word the
State gained no advantage Dinarchus 1. 33. b. ws ((7ros) el1rev is often used to limit too strict an application of a general statement, especially ,-as or oUels. Thus, 1rcivus ws (,-os el,-e'iv nearly every one, oiiels ws (,-os el1re'iv almost no one. It is tlms used like paene dixerim; rarely, like ut ita dicam, to soften the strength of a metaphor. c. Especially common is the absolute <Tvat in Kwv eTva willingly, intentionally, if you can help it, usually in negative or quasi-negative statements (iKwv may be infiected). Also in 7o Kar 7orov (,-l rour'E') dva as far as he is conce1ned, ws elva< as far as ... is conce1ned, 7o vv nu at p1esent. Examples: oii ~hots Kw v dvat 'Ywra ,-aplxm 1W1' do you intentionally cause strangers to Zaugh X. C. 2. 2. 15, KoI7a evat oK cl.,-oXel?Tnat it is not willingly separated P. Phae. 252 a, 76 'Y hr' Kevov evat qwiJ'Y}s (/lv) so faT, at Zeast, as it depended on ltim you. would ltave been saved L. 13. 58. d. Other expressions : p.ol iioKev, ws !J.ol iioKev, ws f!J.Ol Kp'ivat as it seems to me, in my opinion, (ws) elKril7at to malce a g~tess, (ws) qup.f3ciXX"v to com}lare, (ws) riKoqa, to the ear, ws p.op.vijl7at to recall the matter, /Jqov "~'p.' elova< as faT as I know, etc.; ol"fou ilv, p.Kpo oev alrnost, ail b~tt (ileiv may be omitted, 1399). Examples: "fp Kr7}17<'lr'lrOS (ruxe ,-6ppw Ka0e6p.evos ro KXetvlou, ffJ.Ol iioKEZv for Ctesippus, it uerns to me, happened to be sittinr1 at a distance from Clinias P. Eu. 274 b, fJ.KpoiJ iiev rpla 7ciavra almost three talents
D. 27. 29. e. Some of these absolute infinitives may be explained by reference to the idea of purpose (2008) or result. Thus, quveMvn el,-ev frw one compressing the matter to spealc (cp. ut pa1tcis clicam), fJ.Kpo iiev so as to laclc little. Others recall the adverbial accusative (1606); cp. p.ol ooKe'iv with "fPWfJ.'YJ> fJ.-f}v.

448

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[2013

F. Infinitive in Commcmds, TVishes, and Exclnnwtions

2013. Infinitive in Commands.- 'l'he infinitive may be used for the second person of the imperative. The person addressed is regarded as the subject. This infinitive is commoner in poetry thau in prose ( w he re it has a solemn or formal force).
ea.po-wv viJv, !!t..top:YJo<s, hr! Tpwo-<Jt p.axo-Oat with good courage now, Diomed, jight against the Trojans E 124, o- ill, Ka.pllii . . rlis ,-uiis .vol~iis l,-K0v but do you, Clearidas, open the gates and sally j01th T. 5. 9. a. This infinitive may be used in conjunction with an imperative: .Koun ~ KaT . r. ,-rirpta. ros x6a.s ,-iv< v hear ye, good people! drink the Pitchei'S as our sires drank! Ar. Ach. 1000. b. The infinitive for the third person of the imperative often occurs in legal language (laws, treaties, etc.), and does not necessarily depend on the principal verb. Th us, gr'l) of va< rlis <J,.ovos ,.fvrf}Kovra. and the tTeaty shall continue for fijty yeaTs T. 5.18. In this construction the infinitive has the force of an infinitive dependent on l!oo~ (it was voted that) or the like. So in medical language, as ,-tPHv of owp it is well for the patient to d1ink wate1 Hippocrates 1. 151. c. The infinitive (with subject accusative) is rarely used for the third person of the impemtive when there is an unconscious ellipsis of a word like lJ6s grant, or flixop.cu I pray. Thus, T<uxw o-iif}<Fiis <f>phw Koiiis l,-1 vija.s, o-wp.a. Of ofKao' lp.ov /56p.va.< ,-ritv let him stTip o:ff my arms anrl cal'ry them to the hollow ships, but let him give back my body to my home H 78. d. In negative commands (prohibitions) p.f] with the infinitive is poetic and IoJlC: ols p.'l} ,.ri!<v do not appl'oach these (=p.'l) ,-la.!) A. Pr. 712, p.TJOf Kav ,-w 5{JLOv and do not call him happy yet Hdt. 1. 32.

rn y lot! A. Sept. 253, w Zf, h-yfvto-Oa.t p.o< 'AOT}va.lovs nl<Ja.o-8a.t oh Zeus, that it be gmnted to me to punish the Athenians! Hdt. 5. 105 (cp. wZ, o6s P. rflo-ao-Oa.t p.opov ,-a.rp6s oh Zeus, grant that I rnay avenge rn y jathm's m~t1de1! A. Ch. 18). This construction is very rare in Attic prose: ri> v KVP7J'YT7Jv gxovra l~dva.< la.<f>p.v l<FOijra. the hunter sho~d go fmth in a light dress X. Ven. 6. 11. Here no definite verb cau be supplied. a. The nominative with the infinitive (instead of the optative) after al "'frlP occurs in Homer (TJ 311, w 376).
2015. Infinitive in Exclamations.- The infinitive is often used in exclamations of surprise or indignation. The subject stands in the accusative.
lp.f ,-aOv rrio that I should S!{(fer this! A. Eum. 837, rowvro>t rpt<f> Kvva to keep a dog like that! Ar. Vesp. 835. On the infinitive with cf,' ~ (cf>' <fT) see 2279; with 7rp[v, see 2453.

2014. Infinitive in Wishes.- The infinitive with a subject accusative may be used in the sense of the optative of wish, usually with the same ellipsis as in 2013 c. 0o1 ,-orat, wfJ p. oouliis rvxv ye gods of my country, rnay bandage not be

.zozo]

THE IN.FDHTIVE
INFINITIVE AS OB]ECT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

449

The infinitive is used as the object of verbs of saying and thinking. Such infinitives denote both time and stage of action (cp. 1866).
a. The finite verb of a sentence placed in dependence on a verb of saying or thinking that requires the infinitive, becomes infinitive, which infinitive stands in the relation of a substantive as subject or object of the leading verb. Commonly as object: th us, Kpo~ vK~ Cytus is victmious, when made the object of </>'1/tTl he says, becomes a part of a new sentence <P7Jo-l Kpov vKv, in which Kpov vtK is the object of </>7Jo-l. As subject, when the verb of saying is passive: thus, in }..1-yerat Kpov vKv, the last two words form the subject of '/.ky<rat. 20~7. Verbs of saying are e.g.: say </>7J!.d, <Pao-Kw, }yw; conjess op.o'/..o"fw; ptomise {nr<o-xvoJlru, inrooxop.at, bra"{"fl'/..'/..oJla<, <j>lo-raJlaL; pretend ?rponrotop.at ; swear 6p.vvp.t; deny ?rapvop.at ; gainsay vn'/.."fw; dispute p.<jJurf37Jrw, etc. Some verbs of saying admit other constructions than the infinitive, and especially /Yn or w~ (2570). '/..ryw, E1rov, rppcijw, <j>wvw with on or ws mean say, with the infinitive cornrnand (109). a. </>7Jp.l say, asse1t, express the opinion that in classical Greek is almost always followed by the infinitive, but by lin very often in the later language. </>7J!ll on occurs in X. A. 7. 1. 5 (</J7Jp.l ws in L. 7. 19, X. H. 6. 3. 7; D. 4. 48, 27. 19 by anacoluthon). b. Xryw state (impart a fact) takes either the infinitive or IJn or ws. The infinitive occurs usually with the passive ('/..yra<, etc.) either in the persona] or impersonal construction (1982 a). The active forms of '/.."fw with the infinitive mean comma.nd (1997). c. ei1rov said usually takes on or ws ; with the infinitive, it commonly means cornmanded (1\)97). Cp. the double use of told. N.- .r.,.ov meaning said with the infinitive is rare, but occurs in good Attic prose: And. 1. 5, 80; Thuc. 7. 35; Lys. 10. 6, 10. 9, 10. 12; Xen. H. 1. 6. 7, 2. 2. 15, C. 5. 5. 24, S. 2. 13; Is. 2. 29; Lye. 50; Aes. 3. 37, 3. 59; Dem. 15. 18; Plato, G. 473 a, 503 d, Lach. 192 b, Charm. 174 a, Hipp. Maj. 291 b, Pol. 263 c, 290 b, L. 654 a, Clitoph. 409 a, 410 b. In poetry this use is frequent. 20~8. Verbs of thinking almost al ways take the infinitive. Such are: think +nop.at, otofJ.a<, ooKw, vop.ljw; hope i'/...,.[jw; suppose inro'/..ap.(3apw; suspect 7ro7r"TEvw; guess EiKcl.jw; jeel confident ?rto-r<uw; clisbelieve ?r<tTrw. The use of ws is rare, wh ile lin is very rare (2580). a. Verbs of perceiving sometimes take the infinitive by ana1ogy to verbs of thinking; as ci.Kouw, alo-IJci.Pop.at, 7rvvllcivop.at (2144).
20~9. Each tense of direct discourse is retained (with its proper meaning as regards stage of action) when it beQomes infinitive in indirect discourse; but an imperfect is represented by the present infinitive; a pluperfect, by the perfect infinitive. See 1866, 1867. 2020. An original ov of direct discourse is genera1ly, an original p.~ is al ways, retained in indirect discourse. But in some cases ov becomes p.~ (2723 ff.). '
GREEK GRAb!.-

20~6.

29

450

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTEl'\'CE

[2o.n

2021. The infinitive is the subject of the passive of verbs of saying and thinking (1982 a). So with 8oKE .~eems, cf>a{veraL it is plain, etc. 2022. The infinitive 1;epresents a finite verb after verbs of saying and thinking.
a. dival <Pa.<Ftv e"ivat they assert that they are loyal L. 12. 49, ooe!s ~cj>a<FKev 'YL"fVW<FKetv arov nobody said that he knew him 23. 3, ol 1neJJ.oves oli cj>.rnv (2692) elvat t11Jv ooov the guides say tl~ere is no other 1oad X. A. 4.1. 21, ?r<vres lporn r ot?rv p.1Jov eTvat K<poaewrepov r7is per7is everybody in tiine to come will say

that there is nothing more profitable than bravery X. C. 7. 1. 18. Other examples 1867. b. fJatnevs v'iKv inerat the king thinlcs he is victorious ( = vKw, cp. 1887) X. A. 2. 1. 11, otoiJ-aL {Jrurrov eTvat 1 think it is best 5. 1. 8, {;,.tfJ,.rwov hl fJaal. Uva they suspected that they were to go auainst the king 1. 3. 1, ('1;wKpr7Js) r "fvoev avrv "f"fVT<rw JJ.avlis o"fl)ero dva Socrates was of the opinion that for a man not to know himself was ve1y near to madness X. M. 3. 9. 6. c. When a word of saying is expressed or implied in what precedes, severa! infinitives may be usd where the indicative is employed in translation. So in the narration in X. C.1. 3. 5-6. 2023. The infinitive with /lv re presents an indicative with /J.v or

a potential optative with av. See 184U, 1848, 1849, 2270. 2024. V erbs signifying to hope, expect, promise, th1eaten, and swear take the future infinitive in indirect discourse, and the aorist (less often the present) infinitive not in indirect discourse (like verbs of will or desire, 1868, 1999). h{tw mvra 7rot'fa-ELv I hope tltat I shall do this, t.7rttw TavTa 7rOL~a-at or 7rOLEv I hope to do this.
TH.E INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE (ARTICULAR INFINITIVE)

2025. The articular infinitive, while having the character of a

substantive, retains the fun etions of a ver b. In its older use the articular infinitive is a subject or object; the nearest approach to this use in Homer is &.vtY) Kat ro cf>vaa-a-av to watch is also t1ouble v 52. In the tragic poets the genitive and dative are rarely used; in the speeches in Thucydides and in Demosthenes all of its four cases appear with great frequency. The articular infinitive may take dependent clauses. 2026. The articular infinitive aclmits the constructions of an ordinary subRtanti ve. Nmn. '1"0 'II"OLELV rnaking 01' fO 1nake, '1"0 '!I"OLfJ<TELV, '1"0 'lrOLijCTCJ.L, '1"0 1rE1rOL1JKVO.L Gen. '!"OV 'II"OLEV Oj making, 'I"OV 1r0LfJCTELV, '!"OV 1rOLijCTM, etC. Dat. '~"'> 1rotev for ma.king, by making, '~"'> 1rotf)crew, '~"'> 1rotijcra.t, etc. Ace. TJ 1rOLEV, T "''t'OLf}<rELV, Tfi "'rOLi]<ra.t., etC. 2027. The articular infinitive is treated as subject, predicate i10un, and object like the simple infinitive (1984-1986).

2032]

THE INFINITIVE

451

'rhe negative of the articular infinitive is P..~ 'rhe articular infinitive may indicate time (a.fter verbs of saying or tlnlcing, 2034 g), or may be timeless. 2030. The articular infinitive is in general used like the infinitive without the article, and may take av; as regards its constructions it has the value of a substantive. The article is regularly used wh en the connection uniting the infinitive to another word has to be expressed by the geniti ve, the dative, or a preposition.
2028. 2029.

a. The articular infinitive is rarely used, like a true substantive, with the subjective genitive: -r6 -y' <il if>povv aTwv JJ1-0'8< imitate at lest thei1 wisdom D.l9. 2G9. .
2031.
NOMINATIVE OF THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE

Subject (Hl84): vo" T O'-yiiv Kp<TT6v O'n -rov a.)\.<'iv in the young silence is better than speech Men. Sent. 387, -r ll<o7rovv1]0'lovs aTot's Ji-~ fJo178i)O'a.i 1rapO'X<V b1v ~a.p.lwv KoaO'<v the fact that the Pdoponnesians did not coine to their assistance enabled you to punish the Samians T. 1. 41.
2032.
GENITIVE OF THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE

a. The genitive of the articular infinitive is used to limit the meaning of substantives, adjectives, and verbs. b. Adnominal (1290) : To 1rv 1r<fivJ1-lr;t fiom desiTe to d1ink T. 7. 84, 1rpos -r~v 1ro<v 7rpo0'{3a.MvTEs s 1rla. 'fJMov -ro Xiv they attacke the city and enteTtained hop es of taking it 2. 5G. c. l'artitive (1300) : -ro 8a.pO'v -r 1rO'-rov <lX17.P6-rn hwving gained the f!1'eatest amotmt of courage 'l'. 4. 34. After comparatives (1431): -rl ovv O'TLv Tov -rot's <jJlo d.pfnv K<iiov; what then is nobler than to help one's fTiends? x. c. 1. 5. 13. d. After verbs: 7rO'xop.ev To a.KpVv we desisted fTorn weeping P. Ph. 117 e (cp. 1392). e. Purpose (cp. 1408), often a negative purpose: To Ji-+! 7t lKa.<a 1ro<ev in orde1 not to do what was just D. 18. 107, hetxl0'8'f/ 'ATa.MvT'7 -rov Ji-~ 1)0'-r.l:s . . KaKovp-yev -r~v Elifio<av Atalante was fortified to pTevent pi1ates frorn 1'avaging Euboea T. 2. 32. More common is the use with v1rt!p (2032 g) or Ev<Ka.. f. Genitive Absolute (2070): t1r' lK<lvo il oVTos a.ld -ro 7r<X.p<v Kal <q,' 1)}1-v el va.< Mi To 7tpoaJ1-6va.O'fia< since the power of attack is always in the hands, so in om hands should lie the power of Trpelling it in advance 'l'. 3.12. g. After prepositions, e.g. d.vTl To 1rl Kiiplav Uva< . . 1rl <f>pv-ylas 7ropdJ<To instea of going against CaTia, he marche towmYl Phrygia X. H. 3. 4. 12, lfvev -ro O'wif>pov<Lv v;itho11t exercising self-contml X. M. 4. 3. 1. To express purpose the genitive with 1rp is very conm1on : 1r'p TO -rov-rwv -y<v0'8a< KDpws 1rd.v-ra 7rpa-yp.a.T<v<Ta< he dwvotes his e11ery e.ff<n-t that h~ ma?! become mastm of these D. 8. 45, v1rp To p,i) To K<wop.evov 1ro<ij<ra< in o1eT nut to elu what was commanded 18. 204. :Furthermore, after d.7r6, 7rp6, ui, J1.Ta, 7r<pl, U1rD, ~V<Ka, xap<v, xwpls, 1r?jv, Ji-EXP'; and. after adverbs. In Hdt. -roD may be omitted after &.v-r!.

4.52
2033.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[2033

DATIVE OF THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE

a. With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs: thus, lva cl.'li"<O"TWO"L rri' lpl nr"ip:ijuOat 'll"o liat!J.Ovwv that they may distTust my having been honoured by divine powe1s X. A p. 14, Tep tfiv luri TL vavriov, C:,u7rep rri' '"tP"7'YOpvaL TO Ka8el!iietv; is it something opposed to living, as sleeping to waldng? P. Ph. 71 c, oulievl rwv 7rcl.PTwv 11")\ov K<Kpcl.r't)K< <I>i)..L'll"'li"OS 1) rri' 7rporepos 7rps ros 7rpd'YIJ.aO"L 'Yi"tveuOat Philip has conque1"ed us by nothing so mttch as by being bejo1ehand in his ope1"ations D. 8. 11, li.!J.a r9 T!J.v at the same time that we honou1" P. R. 468 e, ro-ov o ri 7rpoo-rlvetv equal to s01"1"0Wing be.f01ehand A. Ag. 252. b. After prepositions: e.g. ou 'Yp 71"1 r<i) lloi\o,, di\i\' t'li"! r<i) OIJ.OOL ros Xet'll"o!J.vots eTva< K'li"!J.'ll"ovraL ( ii'll"o<KOL) fol colunists me not sent Ottt on the basis of being inferio1"s, but on the basis of being the equals of those who are left at horne T. 1. 34, o p.fv 1rps rri' !J.'t)IIv K ri)s 7rpeu{JEiiis i\a{Jev, ros aix!J.a"!l.wrous l"AV.raro the one, in addition to gaining nothinif .frorn the embassy, mnsomed the prisone1s of wa1" D. 19.229, iv rri' <j>povv 'Yp !J.'t)Ov i}lituros {Jlos for life is sweetest in being ' conscious of nothing S. Aj. 553. 2034.
ACCUSATIVE OF THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE

a. Object (cp. 1989): oduiis T !;fjv fea?ing to live P. A. 28 d, }J-et!;ov pb <j>a}J-EV KaKv TO cl.OLKv, n.ii.TTOP TO aOLKeL0"0aL we call doing W1"ong a g1eate1" evil, being

1vrongecl a lesse1 P. G. 509 c. b. After prepositions: e.g. p.'Y<O"Tov 'Ya8v ro 11"<t0apxv <j>aiveraL els ro Kara7rpdTTfLV r'YaOcl. obedience appews to be an advantage of the gTeatest impo1tance with regard to the successful accomplishment of ex.cellent abjects X. C. 8. 1. 3, rwv a'll"a~rwv 7reploTrrol du< 'll"ap r v"iKv thPy me incl(tferent to everything in comparison with victory T.l. 41, 7rps ro !J.<Tplwv oerOat 'll"ma<oeup.t!vos schooled to mode1"ate neds X. M. l. 2. 1, 'll"ws ~xm 7rpos r i(}{eLv v UvaL ii.K't)ros 'll"l liei'll"vov; how do you feel abuut being willing togo itninvited to supper? P. S.174a (cp. t!Ot!"Ao v Uva<). Furthermore, after otcl., t'll"l, Kctra, jJ.fTC., 11"pi. c. The accusative of the i11finitive with r6 appears after many verbs and verbal expressions which usually take only the simple infinitive. Such verbal expressions may be followed also by a genitive of a noun. Thus, r u'll"el!oe<v of: uo< 11"apa.tvw I commend speecl to thee S. Ph. 620, mpoiiis o' i~lura.p.at T lipv I ~vith draw fnnn my resolution so as to (=and) do this thing S. Ant.1105, p.aOwv 'Yp ouK av cl.pvol!J.'t)V r opv when I am informed, I will not ?"efuse the deed S. Ph. 118, T 7rpo0v!J.E0"0a< o uuvav~Hv rv oKov 'll"a<oevo!J.ev aur-fJ.:' we t1ained her to show zeal in assisting to increase ow eslate X. O. 9.12 (cp. 1628), r lpv ~~apvos el you 1"efuse to love P. Lys. 205 a. d. So after adjectives. Thus, p.a.Kps TO KpvaL TaTa xw OL'li"OS xp6vos the future is long (i.e. time enough) to decide this S. E\.1030. e. This object infinitive after verbs is often an internai accusative. The accusative after verbs and nouns is, in many cases, like an accusative of respect (1600); as r lipv ovK fJOt!'t)O"av they i"f:(used to do it S. O. C. 442, aluxvvoPTa< r -roi\~J.v they a1"e ashamed to dmp P. Soph. 247 b, oU!:/ p.oi ro< routa.v<urdva< iur1 Ocl.puos no1 have I courage to remove thee S. . C.'47, r !J.v <s r?jv 'Yfi 17iJ.wv

2037]

THE INFINITIVE

45~

lrr{JrfXetv . . iKa.vol elen they aTe able to make an inToad into our count1y T. 6. 17. This infinitive alter adjectives (and so1uetimes after verbs) occurs when the simple infinitive expresses purpose or result, as in ris M">)liwv . uo :rreXeltp8'1} r p.o) rro< aKoov8v; what one of the Mecles ?'emained away f1om you so as not to attend y ou ? X. C. 5. 1. 25. f. Sorne verbs take the articular infinitive as an object when the simple infinitive COUld not be used: p.6vov opwv ro 1ra.le<v rov a<UK6p.evov taking heed only to strike any one he caught X. C. 1. 4. 21. g. Verbs of saying and thinking rarely take the articular infinitive (also with ch): l~op.e r p.'i} elliva.<; wilt thou swear thou didst not know ? S. Ant. 535, riis t?rllios -yp fpxop.a.< lielipa."fp.vos, 'TO p.'i} ?ra8v av tiXXo 1r1}v TO p}Jprr<p.ov for 1 come with good grip on the hope that 1 can sujfer nothing save what is my fate S. Ant. 235. h. On the use of the object infinitive with r p.o) and ro p.1} o6, see 2744 and 2749. i. The accusative with the infinitive may stand in the absolute construction: 1rel 'YE ro lX!Jv rorov, op.a< 8e6v nva. a.6rov hr' a(Jr'qv 'Ya')'fv r1}v rp.wpli.v as jor his coming, 1 believe that some god b1ought him to his very punishment Lye. 91.

OTHER USES 01:<' THE ARTICULAit INI<'INITIVE

2035. Apposition (cp. 1987). The articular infinitive, in any case, is often used in apposition to a preceding word, especially a demonstrative.
ror6 lrrn ro li<Kev, ro 1rXov rwv tiXXwv !1Jrev l!xe<v injustice is this: to seek to have more than other people P. G. 483 c, rl "fp rourov p.aKap<wrepov, ro yfi p.<x8iiva.< Kr X. fo1' what is more blessed than this: to be commingled with the ea?th, etc. x. c. 8. 7. 25, OOKE 'TOUT Cf' O<a.tppe<P v1}p 'TWV liWP t,Pwv, re;; rp.ijs op'Yrr8a.< man differs herein from other cretures that he aspires after honour X.Hi.7.3.

2036. In Exclamation (cp. 2015). -Thus, T~> n)x'f}> -ro p. vi:v

K'1)8f.v-ra

&vpo rvxEv my ill-luck! that I shmtld happen now to have been s1tmmoned lther! X. C. 2. 2. 3. 2037. With Adj'uncts.- The articular infinitive may take varions adjuncts including dependent clauses, the whole forming one large substantival idea.

'TO p.v 'Yp 7r6XX' a7rowXeKva.< Kar TOP 7r6ep.ov the fact that 1Ve have lost mu ch in the wa1 D.l.lO, ?r7re<rrp.a.< r 1rXelw rwv 1rpi.-yp.ri.rwv -ljp.s K1retpev-yt!va< r0 p.1) {JovXerr8a, r Ilon a. ?ro<v, 1} rc/1 p.1) uvvva< 1 am persuacled that m01e of y our advantages have escaped you from your not being willing to do yoU1' duty than from your igno1ance 3. 3, Ka.! -yp 7rrivv p.o< OOKEL licppovos av8pW1rOV eva< 'TO (p.e-yriou l!p-yov 5vros roi/ avr0 r liovra. ?ra.parrKevri.)e<v) p.1) pKv roro, XX ?rpoua.va.()u()a., ril Ka.! ros tiXXo<s ?roira.<s wv liovra< 1ropl)e<v and in jact, si nee it is a sel'i

ous business to provicle for one' s own necessities, it seerns to rne to be the pa1t of an utter fool not to rest content with that, but in acldition to take upon hirnself the burd en of providing joT the neecls of the rest of the community X. M. 2. 1. 8.

454

SYNT AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

CONSTRUCTIONS OF THE INFINITIVE WITH VERBS OF

hindering

2038. Verbs signifying (or suggesting) to hinder take both the simple infinitive and the articular infinitive. Such verbs may take the stiengthening but redundant negative J.L~ (2739) ; and some, when themselves negatived or appearing in a question expecting a negative answer, admit the addition of the sympathetic o (2742). Hence we have a variety of constructions (described in 2744 ff.)
THE PARTICIPLE

2039. The participle (J.Lrox~ participatfon) is a verbal adjective,

in part a verb, in part an adjective. 2040. The participle is like a verb herein:
a. It shows the distillctions of voice and tense. Its tenses mark action simply occurring, continuing, and completed. b. It can bave an object in tl1e same case (genitive, dative, accusative) as the finite forrns. c. It is modified by adverbs, not by adjectives. d. It may take av, and, witb tbat particle, represents /l,v with the indicative or /l,v with the optative (1845 ff. ).
2041. The participle shows its adjectival nature by being inflected and by admitting the article before it, both of which characteristics give it the character of a noun. It follows the rules of agreement like other adjectives (1020). Unlike the adjective, it represents a quality in action (cp. 1857). 2042. The participle is al ways used in connection with a substantive or a substantive pronoun, which may be contained in a verbal form, as 8u1yov<n J.LavfM.vovu they spend their tirne in leaTning. 2043. The tenses of the participle (except the future) not in indirect discourse are timeless, and denote only stage of action (1872). When they stand in indirect discourse and represent the indicative, they denote time relatively to that of the main verb. 2044. The future participle marks an action as in prospect at the time denote by the leading verb. Since it expresses an iea of will, it shows that an action is purposed, intended, or expected. With the article it denotes the person or thing likely (or able) to do something ( = J.Lwv with inf. 1959). The nearest approach to mere futurity appears in general only after verbs of knowing and perceiving (2106, cp. 2112 b). o o' v-l]p arf)s a-yws <iJx<ro ()1Jpduwv but h lwsband had gone to hunt hares X. A. 4. 5. 24, 7J'Y'YJu61J.evos oods ~crrcu the1e will be no one to guide us 2. 4. 5, r.o:\X . i.Z rv di <npaT'Y)'}"quo>ra ( == rov !J.oJJTa i o-rpa.T'Y)')'f}u<Lv) ~xv he who

zoso]

THE ATTRIBUTIVE PARTlCll'LE

455

intends to be a good geneml must have many qualifications X. M. 3.1. 6, ()avovpbTJ 'Y,P l~?iilTJ for 1 knew that 1 should (or must) die S. A nt. 460 (cp. 2106).
2045. The negative of the participle is av, except when the participle has a general or conditional force, or occurs in a sentence which req uires p.~. See 2728. 2046. The participle has tluee main uses. A. Attributive: as an attributive to a substantive. B. Circumstantial (or Adverbial): denoting some attendant circumstance and qualifying the main verb like an adverbial phrase or clause. C. Snpplementary: as a supplement to a verbal predicate, which, without such a supplement, would be incomplete. 2047. 'L'he circumstantial and supplementary participles are predicate participles.
2048. The attributive and circumstantial participles are commonly not necessary to the construction; but the removal of a supplementary participle may make the construction incomplete. The circumstantial participle is used by way of apposition to the subject of the verb and, though strictly predicative, may agree attributively with a noun or pronoun. An attributive participle may be circumstantial, as oi JJ ilvv&.l-'fvOL ilLant!craL r7}v oilv lvvKrt!pEvfJ'av /LcrroL those who (i.e. if any) we1e unable to complete the march passed the night without food X. A. 4. 5. 11. A participle may be bath circumstantial and supplementary, as ailLKovp.EvoL OP"fl\ovraL (T. 1. 77) they are enraged at being wronged or because (when, if) they are wronged. Circumstantial and supplementary participles often cannat be sharply distinguished; as with verbs signifying to be angry, ashamed, content, pleased (2100), i1~(erio1 to, do wrong (2101), endu1e (2098), come and go (2099). Th us, ailtKw mvra 1f'OLwv 1 do wrong in doing this or 1 am guilty in doing this: in the first case ravra 1f'OLwv is appositive to the subject of the verb ; in the second these words define the predicate adjective /LoLKos contained in aOLKW ( = iltK6S Eip.L),
THE ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE

2049. The attributive participle (with any modifier), with or without the article, modifies a substantive like any other adjective.

the clanger impending over the State D.l8.176, o1rapwv Ka<p6s the pTesent crisis 3. 3, ro Korvawv ovop.a\6p.EVov 5pos the mountain callefl Cotylaeum Aes. 3. 86, ai Al6ov vfjcroL KaoVp,va< the so-cctlled islands of Aeo.lus T. 3. 88 (cp. 1170). For the position of an attributive participle with its modifiers, see 1166. 2050. The substantive witb which the attributive participle (with the article) agrees directly, may be omitted, the participle tlms becoming a substantive (1153 b, and N. 1) ; as, o oYKaoe {3ov6p.Evos a1rdva< 1vhoever wants to go home X. A. 1. 7. 4. Neuter participles are often substantivai, as r ilt!ovra duties. a. Substantives or relative clauses must often be used to translate such parKlvilvos ril w6EL

o </>E<TT'f/KWS

oi 6vTEs ixOpol the existing enemies 6. 15,

456

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

(.2051

ticiples, as <f>drywv the exile or the defendant, 1 p..ov the future, oi vLKwvres the victors, K.brrwv the thief, oi 8av6vres the dead, o uwiJels the man who has been saved, o! o<oL6'Ts those who are afraid, o! oLKovp.evoL those who are (being) wronged, o r7]v "fVWJl.TJV raVTTJV Ei1rwv the one who gave this opinion T. 8. 68, o lvraviJ' avrv rd~is ri]s 1ro.ire!is fp.' l"fw the man who took this position in the State was I D. 18. 62. The participle with the article may represent a relative clause of purpose or result, as X. A. 2. 4. 5 cited in 2044. 2051. A participle may be modified by adjectives or take a genitive, when its verbal nature has ceased to be felt : r p.Kp uvp.<f>povra -ri]s 1r6.ews the petty inte1ests of the State D. 18. 28. Cp. ITup.cjJpov 1jv -rfi 1ro'JI.eL it was advantageous to the State 19. 75 (here the participle is used like a predicate). Thucydides often uses in an abstract sense a substantiva! neuter participle where the infinitive would be more common, e.g., r oiL6s fem, -r Oapuovv courage (for r oeodva, -r 8apuiv) 1. 36. See 1153 b, N. 2. Iu poetry many participles are used substantively, as reKwv father, 7} reKofiua mother, o! r<K6v'Ts parents. 2052. The article with the participle is either generic or particular (1124). Thus, o .rywv the definite speaker ou a particular occasion, or orator in general. So o o opd.uis the definite person who did not do something, o p.7} pd.uas any one who did not do something (a supposed case), o p.7} "f<tJ.LWV liv8pw1ros oK fx. KaKd the unmanied man has no troubles Men. Sent. 437. Generic are o-ruxwv, o{3ov'Ahwvos, 2050 a. a. Participles having an indefinite force may, especially in the plural number, be used without the article. Thus, KarauKe>fopbovs g1rEJ.L1rE he sent men to reconnoit1'e X. C. 3. 1. 2, oLKovvra 1rELpiu6p.eOa . p.6vauiJaL we shall endeavour to avenge ou1selves on any one who injures UA3 X. A. 2. 3. 23.
2053. A participle and its substantive often correspond to a verbal noun with the genitive or to an articular infinitive. Cp. post urbem conditam and Milton's "Since created man." r.;J utr<t> t1rL.El7rovrL brLlovro they s1~.ffered from the failure of the crops ( == ri)
-ro uirou bn'JI.Ei>f) T. 3. 20, o/ p.s p.ft ~vp.p.axfJuavras by 1eason ofyour notjoining the alliance ( == ot TO p.s p.7} ~vp.p.ax.fiuaL) 6. 80, {J.E'T ~vpiKoVuis olKLuiJeluis after the foundation of Syrac1~se 6. 3, lM1rEL atrrv 7} x.wpa 1rop8ovp.hTJ the ravaging of the country (Jrieved hirn X. A. 7. 7. 12, 7} p"f7} uv rc;i <f>bf3<t> .f]"{ovr< li1r<LUL his wrath will isappear with the cessation of his fea1' X. C. 4. 5. 21. a. Except in expressions of time, such as lip.a ~P' pxop.v'f' at the beginning of spring T. 2. 2, i1r! K6opov f3auevovros in the 1dgn of Cod1us Lye. 84 (cp. 1689 b), this construction is in place only when the part. is necessary to the sense. In poetry : Z<s "f<oos op.vvp.evos swearing y Zeus is ridiculous Ar. Nub. 1241 ; in Hom. A 601, I ()82.

THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE

The. circumstantial participle is aclded, without the article, to a noun or pronom) to set forth some circumstance under which an action, generally the main action, takes place.
2054.

a. The circumstantial participle thus qualifies the principal verb of the sentence like an adverbial clause or supplementary predicate. Cp. Jl.fT ravTa E1rE

. 2061]

THE CIRCU:MSTANTIAL PARTICJPLE

457

afterwards he said with "fEwv 7rf he sa id laughingly. Such participles usually have the force of subordinate clauses added to the main verb by conjunctions denoting time, condition, cause, etc. ; but may often be rendered by adverbial phrases or even by a separate finite verb, which brings out distinctly the idea latent in the participle. b. The circumstantial participle has no article. ln agreement with a noun and its article, it stands before the article or after the noun (i.e. in the predicate position). By the agreement of the participle with a noun or pronoun, the predicate of the sentence is more exactly defined.
2055. The circumstantial participle has two main constmctions each equivalent in meaning to a clause of ti1ne, condition, cause, etc. 2056. (l) The subject of the participle is identical with the noun or pronoun subject or abject of the leading verb, and agrees with it in gender, number, and case.
( ol llv8pW11"0L) t7r6PTS T7}v OOOP .pdryovns ol"(oL .7rOP'[lffKOP by leaving the road and malcing o.tf only a jew we!e lcilled X. A. 4. 2. 7, 7rpo7rJL'if;avTEs KijpvKa 1r6E}LOV 7rpopoVTa having sent a he!'ald in advance to p!oclaim war T. 1. 29. 2057. (II) Absolute participial clauses, in which a participle,

and not a finite verb, forms the predicate. Tliese are of two kinds. 2058. A. Genitive Absolute. -A participle agreeing in the genitive with its own subject, which is not identical with the subject of the leading verb, is said to stand in the genitive absolute. Cp. 2070.
Kpos vf37J l1rl T op7J ouovs KwMovros Cyrus ascended the mountains without any one p!eventing him X. A. 1. 2. 22. N. -The English nominative absolute is represented by the Greek genitive absolute. Cp. Tennyson : "we sitting, as I said, the cock crew loud" = -iJ~J.wv Ka87JJLvwv, iJ11"Ep ~E"(ov, JL"(a firrv

o eKrpvwv.

2059. B. Accusative Absolute.- When the participle has no defi-

ni. te subject (i.e. wi.th impersonal verbs), the accusative absolute is used instead of the genitive absolute. Cp. 2076.
rrvv/56~a.v T~ 7rarpl Kal TV JL7JTp1 "fCJ.!J.f ri)v Kva~apov 8v"(aTpa on the ap)J!'O'I!al of (lit. it seeming good to) his jather and mother he mwried the daughte!' of Cyaxares X. C. 8. 5. 28. 2060. The circumstantial participle expresses sim ply circumstance

or manner in general. It may imply varions other relations, such as time, manneT, means, cause, p1<Tpose, concession, condition, etc. But it is often impossible to assign a participle exclusively to any one of these relations (which are purely logical), nor can all the delicate relations of the participle be set forth in systematic form.
2061. Time. -The ti me denoted by the participle is only relative to that of the governing verb, and is to be inferred from the context. Each participial form in itself expresses only stage of action (1850). .KO<ra<rL TOS <rTpaT7J"(OS TctTct too~ r !JTpUTV}LO. !JVVct"(ct"(V On heaTing this it seemed best to the gene7als to collect the troops X. A. 4. 4. 11).

458

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[zo62

a. Severa! temporal participles have an adverbial force: .pxop.evos in the beginning, at jiJst, TEEUTWV at last, finally, La.vrrwv (or E1fUTXWV) xpovov aj~er a wh ile, LO.EL7l'WV xpovov at inteJvals, xpovttwv for a long tirne. Th us, i7rep Kal px6p.evo <1rov as I said at the outset T. 4. 64, re<urwv <xa1fatvev at last he became angry X. A. 4. 5. 16. Note .p~6.p.<vos .1r6 TLvos beginning with or especially. 2062. Manner. - 1rapf}auvov Tera-yp.vot they marched past in arder X. A. 1. 2. 16, Kpau-y'fJv 7fO'qv hrolouv Kaovre >..>..f}Xov they rnade a loud noise by calling to eaeh other 2. 2. 17, 1rpoelero p..ov roi' v6p.o" lp.p.vwv 1ro8avev '>} 7rapavop.wv t')v he p1ejer1ed mthe1 ta abide by the laws and die than to disobey them and live X. M. 4. 4. 4, if;ar p.v eruxes evat, ,;,, Kal l<n Kaw 1fotovres you claim to be javoured by fortune as happily y ou me in fact Aes. 3. 232. To characterize a preceding statement with the paniciple in apposition to the subject of the preceding sentence ; thus, op&w -ye mrrL Xf-yones yes, and saying this conectly X. O. l. 2. a. Severa! participles of mai111er have an idiomatic meaning, e.g. ci.vuuiis qnickly (lit. having aecornplished), xwv continually, persistent/y (lit. holding on), >..a.O~v secretly, Ka.(wv to one's soJ'J'OW (lit. weeping), xo.Cpwv with. irnpunity (lit. rejoicing), cppwv hastily (lit. caTrying o.tf), cp66.criis before (lit. anticipating). Thus, livot-y' va-iis hurry up and open Ar. Nub. 181, ifK1fouv 7rote'irat >..a&wv r'f!v if;uaKf}v he sailed out unobsetved by the gua rd T. 1. 65 (cp. 2096 f), <f>uiipei lfxwv yml keep t1ijiiny P. G. 400'e, rorov oaet, xalpwv otKf}rret no one will W1'0ng him 1vith impunity 510 d, v<tJ~as p.e <f>Oarriis you opened the door before 1 could knock Ar. l'lut. 1102 (cp. 2096 e). 2063. Means ( often the present participle ). - '!1.\6p.evot jwrrt they live by pillaying x. c. 3. 2. 25, ~~-~ Kp'iv' opwv TO Kaos, X)I. TOV rp67rOV judge by JegaTding not beauty, but (by ngarding) characte1 Men. Sent. 333. 2064. Cause. - IIapva-an . . 1rf}pxe r<IJ K6p<tJ, if;torra alirv p.ov '>} rov PctJysatis favomed GyTus because she loved hi rn more than she did A1taxerxcs the kin;.X. A. 1. 1. 4, 7rElxovro Kepowv altrxp. vop.l,\ovres vat they held aloof from gains because they thought them disgmce.ful X. M. 1. 2. 22, rl -y.p oe/Mr" trif;6i'ipa orw i7rei-yw8e; for what me y ou afTaid of, that you an! so despemtely in haste ? X. H. 1. 7. 2G. a. TL p.a.&~v whrtt induced him to (lit. having leamed what ?), TL ,.a.OC:,v what possesse<l him to (lit. havinrt expe1ienced what ?) are used with the general sense of wherefu1e il in direct (with a nin indirect) questions expressing surprise or disapprobation ; as rl p.a86vres ip.aprupre Dp.e'is; what put it into yow heads t() give evidence? D. 45. 38, rl 1ra86ne eatrp.eiJa; what possessed us to foTget? A 31:3. Cp. rl {3ouX6p.evos. b. Ti xwv; what's the matter with you ? (lit. having what ?)
{3aa-tX~vovra 'Apra~p~1Jv

2065. Purpose or Object.- The future (sometimes the present) participle is use to denote purpose, especially after verbs denoting to come, go, send, sumnwn, etc. Tlms, 7rpo7rp.1f;avr" K'IJpvKa .,.6Xep.ov 1rpoepovra having sent a herald in advance to proclaim wrw T. 1. 29, o {3ip(3apos <!7rl r'fJv 'Enoa oouwtr6p.evo 'ljXOev the barbarians proceeded against G1w!ce wilh the pmjiose of enslaving it 1. 18, O'UvKaerrav 1r Twv TrO<wv 7riia-wv Kova-op.vov (2052 a) rf} 1rap {3aa-tws E1f<tYToijs they swnmoned jium all the cities men to listen to the lette1 from the king

THE CIRCGl\!STANTIAL PARTICTPLE

459

X. H. 7. 1. 3D. Present: ~11'<iJ.11'ov '}'ovra; oTL KT. tlu<y sent men to say that, etc. X. H. 2. 4. 37.
2066. Opposition or Concession.- oMiv pw 11'ps rara ~xwv <l11'<v I will rnake no j'eply to this though I nght (speak) do so P. Lach. 197 c, 11'ool '}'p /Jvres dJ'}'evfis fitJ'<P KaKoi for many, albeit noble by bi7'th, are ignoble E. El. 5Gl. 2067. Condition (negative always iJ.'lJ). -tJ' Of KI)wv (== ivK(ras) fttJ'< raxa but if you listen you shall saon know Ar. Av. 1300, oK lv ouvcuo iJ.TJ KaiJ.wv ( = l iJ.TJ KaiJ.o<s) OatiJ.ovv yo11 cannot be happy unless you work E. fr. 461. 2069. Any Attendant Circumstance.- tJ'u~iis tJ'rpar<uiJ.a brotopKE< Mi?)rov having collected an arrny he lal siege to JJiilftns X'A. 1. 1. 7, 11'apa'}''}'E< Tep K<apx4' a{30PTL ijKHV OvOP nv aiJT<i; tJ'TpaTUiJ.U he gave orders to CleaTchus

to come with all the fmcc he had 1. 2. 1. a. ~X<W having, a:ywv leading, ,Ppwv C(t1'j'ying (mostly of ina11imate objects), xp<ilfLEvos using, a,j3Li>v takin{! are used where English employs with. 'l'hus, ~xwv tJ'Tpard5.v <{>tKPeTat he (tj'l'ives with an aTm y 'l'. 4. 30, f3oii XPWiJ.<Pot with a shout 2. 84, K<UtJ'< af3bvra /Lvii pas t!IOe'iv on 11' diJ'rous he onleTed him to corne with all the men he could (oTto talee . . . and come) X. A. 1. 1. Il. b. In poetTy participles ( especially) of verbs denoting motion are often added to verbs of giving, setting to mak.e the action more picturesque (H. 304, S.Aj. 854). .
2069. The force of these circumstantial participles does not lie in the participle itself, but is derived from the context. l:nless attended by some modifying adverb, the context often does not decide whether the participle has a temporal, a causal, a conditional, a concessive force, etc. ; and sorne participles may be referred to more thau one of the above classes. Tbus, 11'ar'i}p o' 11'etwv oK ~X" iJ.'}'av <j>bf3ov (Men. fr.454) may mean: a jathe1' by th1'eatening ( = when or because or if or thou{fh, he threatens) do es not excite much fear. GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE

2070. Genitive Absolute.- A circumstantial participle agreeing with a genitive nmm or pronoun which is not in the lllain construction of the sentence, stands in the genitive absolnte. Like other circumstantial participles, the genitive absolute expresses time, cause, condition, concession, or simply any attendant circumstance.

a. Time : ra.r' ~11'prixi7TJ Kvwvo< IJ'rpar'l-yoDPTo< tltese things. we1e e.tfected white Conon was in comma nd I. D. 5G, rovrwv exOvrwv vvrrwo.v this sai, they j'Ose X. A. 3. H. 1, 'H<6va . M'ljowv <xvrwv 1rowpKlq. elov they bloclcaed and captuTed Eon which was held by the J11edes T. 1. 98. b. Cause: rwv uwwi.Twv iJ'f]Vvopivwv Kal a! 1f;xc ppwvTOTEpat '}'l'}'vovrat by the enfeebling of the bodif, the spiTit too is made wealcm X. O. 4. 2. c. Opposition or ConceRsion : Kal iJ.<Ta'lrEfJ.1I'OiJ.vou aro oK 0Xw Mv even though he is sending for me, I am unwilling togo X. A. 1. 3. 10. KrLi11'ep is usually added (2083).
d. Condition : otoj.w.L
Kat vv ~TL

hravopOwOf]vaL lv r. 1rp&:y}J.aTa roUrwv 'YL'YVOJ.li-

460

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

PWP if these measures should be taken, I am of the OJ?inion that fven now ou1 situation rnight be rectijied D. !l. 76. e. Attendant Circumstance: Kpos P{:JTf i1rl 'Tet 6pTf o6evs KwiioP'Tos Cyrus ascended the mountains w-ithout opposition (lit. no one hindering) X. A. 1. 2. 22 (or since no one opposed him). 2071. Kcl>v willing, dKwv unwilling are properly participles and are treated as su ch (cp. 2117 c ). Th us, p.o o6x Kov'Tos without my consent S. Aj. 455. a. rKwv, .EKa?;op.evos, rj>pov{wv, 7r'TEWV, .vrf.pp.evos, vop.oO"(OVfJ.fVOS, 'Tl~WV are the only cases in Greek showing the earlier method of negativing the participle with alpha privative. Elsewhere o6 or p.i} is used.

2072. The geniti ve of the participle may stand without its noun or pronoun

a. When the noun or pronoun may easily be snpplied from the context. Th us, ol 7rotp.wt, 1rpornbv'Twv ( n7w 'E-f}vwv, previously mentioned), 'Tws p.v iJ~rvxla.~ov the enemy, as they were approaching, for a while remained quiet X. A. 5. 4. 16, lprfnii, lfr:J>TJ, w Kpe, ws ( p.o) 'Td7J8fj pov'Tos put your question (sa id he), Cyrus, on the supposition th at I will speak the tru th X. C. 3. 1. 9. b. Wh en the noun or pronoun may easily be su pp lied otherwise; here, e.g., v0pr.IJ7rwv or 7rpii"fp..'Twv is said to be supplied grammatically. Thus, lbvrwv fis p.&. x Tf v when (men) are going into battle X. C. 3. 3. 54, ro'Tov rov rp61rov 7rpiix8tvrwv rfjs 1r6Xews 'Yl"fvera.L r xp1Jp.a.ra. when (things) have happened in this way, the property belongs to the State D. 24.12; and in J:,ovros (.:lt6s, 934 a) 1ro~ when it was raining hard X. H. 1. 1. 16. Quasi-impersonal verbs (933) thus take the genitive rather than the accusative absolute: orws lfxovros in this state of things P. R. 381 c, infiuenced by ovrws <x6vrwv X. A. 3. 1. 40. . When a subordinate clause with on follows upon the participle in the passive. 'l'hus, tra.'Y'YXOlvrwv Sn f?olvttrtra.L vfjes l1r' allros .,.>-.<ovtrLv it having been ann.ounced that Phoenician ships we1e sailing against them T. 1. 116, o7JwOlvros Sn iv ra.s va.vtri rwv 'E:\Xi}vwv r 7rpd"fp.ara h<ve'To it having been shown that the salvation of the Greeks dezJended on their navy 1. 74. The plural is used when the subject of the subOTdinate clause is plural, or when severa] circumstances are mentioned. 2073. Exceptionally, the subject of the genitive absolute is the same as that of the main clause. The effect of this irregular construction is to emphasize the idea contained in the genitive absolute. Thus, f:JoTJ87Jtr&.vrwv tp.wv 1rpol16p.ws 1rotv 7rpotrX1}>fetrl1e va.vnKov lfxovtrav JJ-"fa. ~f you assist us heartily, you will gain to your cause a State having a la1ge navy '1'. 3. 13. The genitive absolu te usually precedes the main verb. a. The genitive absolute may be used where the grammatical construction demands the dative. Th us, ta.f:Jf:JTfK6ros IIeptKovs . TJ'Y"/f.BTf a6r~ Sn M<"fa.pa .rj>r!trTTfK when Pe1icles had al1eady crossee? ove?', news tvas b?'OU[Jht to him that Megara had 1evolted T. 1. 114 (in Latin: Pericli iarn transg1ess'o nuntiaturn est). b. The subject of the genitive absolute may be identical with the object of the leading verb: 'ljMov hrl r7Jv 'E.,.lavpov ws lpi}p.ov ol!IT?JS a1p1}trovres they carne against Epidaurus expecting to captu1e it unde.fended 'l'. 5. 56. 2074. Observe that the genitive absolute differs from the Latin ablative abso-

THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE

461

lute herein: 1. The subject need not be expressed (2072). 2. The subject may appear in the leading clause (2073 a). 3. With a substantive the participle iJJv is always added in prose, whereas Latin has to omit the participle. Thus, 1ralo01v 5vr01v ru;.wv nobis pueris P. S. 173 a. On i}J.o iiKovros me in'llito, see 2071. 4. Because it has a present participle passive and an aorist and petfect participle active, Greek can use the genitive absolute where Latin, through lack of a past participle active, has to use a clause with dum, cum, etc. 'l'hus, 51\?Js rfis 1roews . iv rois 1rOEJ1.tKos Ktviivvo<s E7rtrpE1rOJ1.v-qs ri! rnpar?J'Y<' ct~m bellicis in periculis universa respublica imperatori committatur X. M. 3. 1. 3, ro 1ra.tlis -yeM<Tavros curn pue? 1isisset. Latin uses the absolute case more frequently thau Greek because it employs the perfect participle passive where Greek uses the aorist participle active. 'l'hus, Kpos <rv-yKa<Tas ros trrpar?J-yos E1rev Cyrus, con'IJOcatis ducibus, dixit X. A. 1. 4. 8. 2075. The genitive absolute took its rise from such cases as ~ap1rf}oovn o' l!xos -yv<ro ravKov ci1rt6vros but sorrow came on Sarpedon for Glaucus- departing M 392. The genitive, here properly dependent on l!xos -y<v<ro, ceased to be felt as dependent on the governing expression, and was extended, as a distinct construction, to cases in which the governing expression did not take the genitive. Cp. the development of the accusative with the infinitive (1981). 2076. Accusative Absolute.- A participle stands in the accusative absolute, instead of the genitive, when it is impersonal, or has an infinitive as its subject (as under C). When impersonal, such participles have no apparent grammatical connection with the rest of the sentence.

A. Impersonal verbs: 8ov, J~6v, p.rov, 1rapov, 1rpocr~Kov, p.ov, p.rap.ov, 7rapf.xov, 7rapacrxov, 'TVXOV, 80KOVV) 1)6~av, 01' OO~QVTa (Tav'Ta)) 'YV6JA-VOV f.1r' f.p..o{ as it was in rny power.
ooeis r Jl.<!;ov KaKv a!pf}trerat t~v r narrov (a!piio"Oat) no one will choose the greater e'llil when it is possible to choose the less P. Pr. 358 d, ~s (f3ovfis) vv ci~w rvx<i'v o Jl.<rv ariJ to tvhich he now claims admission though he has no right L. 31. 32, fiov -yp on otr8a Jl.hov 'Y trot fm of course you know /1ecause it conce1ns you P. A. 24 d, IJ.ET<!Lovro on Ji-Er r tv ITv'f', Ka&< 1rapa<rxov; o ~vvf3?Jtrav they re:pented that a.f~er what had occ?M'?'ed at Pylos, altlwugh a favourable occasion had presented itself, they hacl not come to terms T. 5. 14. Cp. 2086 d, 2087. N. -A part from oo~av, rvx6v, the accusative absolute of the aorist participle of impersonal verbs is very rare.

dpYJp.vov, 1rpocrmx8f.v, 7rpocrTTayp.vov.

B. Passive participles used impersonally : yypap..p..vov, 8ooyp.f.vov, Cp. Eng. granted this is so, this done, which said.
eip?JJi-vOI' /j' aras ci1ravrv v!J&.o< evoov<rt Kox fjKovtrtv though it was told them to meet here, they sleep and have not come Ar. Lys. 13, wpo<Trax!Jv Jl.O< v1r ro of} !M'V Mvwva !.!-y <tv <is 'E-f}trwovrov a com?IU!nd having b~en given ( it having been commanded) rne by the people to convey 1llenon tu the Hellespont D. 50. 12.

462

SY~TAX

01<' TUE Sll\ll'LE SENTENCE

[2077

N. -The aorist participle passive is rarely used absolutely: dp.i'A1J8v, d-rrvpp1J Oiv, Karax<Lporov1J8v, KpwO<v, opLrr8v, 7rEpav8iv, -rrporrraxO<v, XP1J<T8v.

C. Adjectives with ov: &.li'YJov ov, livvarov Jv, livvo.Tov av, alux_pov ov, Ka.ov ov, XPWV (X,(JW ov), etc.

rr< ox !rrwrrap.<v . of6v r< ov Ka ouvar6v we did not rescue you although it was IJothfeasible and possible P. Cr. 4G a, ws oK dva')'Kaov (v) r K'i>.-rrr<Lv, alr Tv K-rrrovra on the ground that stealing is not necessary you accuse the thief

x. c. 5. 1. 13.

2077. The impersonal character of the above expressions would not be shown by the genitive since the participle in that case marks a distinction between masculine (neuter) and feminine. The accusative absolute, which occurs first in Herodotns and the Attic prose writers of the fllth century, is probably in its origin an interna] accusative, developed, at !east in 11a.rt, by way of <tpposition (9\l1-994), the neuter of a participle or of an adjective standing in apposition to an idea in the leading clause. Tlms, -rrporrraxOv aros oOK h6'Ap.71rrav Elrra')'a'YEV (Is. 1. 22) they did not dare to b1ing him in- a duty that was M~ioined ( alth07t[!h it was e~ioined) upon them. Cp. rri8eL o' 'Op<TTTJV P.'f/Tpa KTEVaL, -rrps ox irravras <iiK<Lav q,<pov he peTsuade<l Orestes to slay his motheT, a deed that brings not glory in the eyes of all E. Or. 80. 2078. The participle of a pe1sonal verb may be used absolutely if it is preced~d by ws or wrr7rEp. Thus, rJVxro rrps ros 8EDs r')'a8. oLi56vaL, ws ros 8EOs KaLrrra <liloro.s orroa .'Yo.llci lrrn (Socrates) pmyerl to tl>e (JO<ls that tlwy would give hirn good things, in the belief that the (JO<ls lmow best what soTt of things are good X. M.l. 3. 2, <TLwrrii. liJElrrvouv, CJrrrrep roTo rrporrrera'Yp.vov aros they were supping in silence just as if th i8 harZ been enjoined upon them X. S. 1. 11. .a. Cases without ws or &rrrr<p are rare. Thus, oo~o.vra p.'iv rara 'A<rr8 iivopas dKorrL on Teaching this concl7tsion you <Jhose twenty men And. 1. 81 ; cp. 06~av ;aro. X. A. 4. 1. 13 (by analogy to gOO~f -ara) and oo~civrwv TOVTWV x. H. 1. 7. BO. Neuter participles so used come chiefly from irnpersonal verbs, but T. 4. 125 bas Kipwllv oOv o! MdKEo6vs lxwpouv lrr' ot~Cou the Macedonians pToceerled homewmds, nothing having been accomplished. The neuter subject is a pronoun, very rarely a substantive (I. 5. 12).

ADVERBS USED IN CONNECTION WITH CIRCUMSTANTIAL P ARTICil'LES

2079. Adverbs are often used to set forth clearly the relations of time, manner, cause, concession, etc., that are implied in the partieiple. They occur also with the genitive and accusative absolute. 'l'hese adverbs modify either tl1e principal vel'b or the participle itself.
ADVERBIAL ADJUNCTS OF THE PRINCIPAL VERB
E''TI'ELTa. thmetrpon, TTE, dra. (less often lvraOa) then, i\81] al1eady, oikw so, wh en used with the verb of the sentence which contains a temporal participle, emphasize the tempoml relat,ion: (tf-Lwv oop.aL) .Kpoiirraf-Llvous o<. r'/..ous rfjs cirroo'Yliis r6TE 1jo71 if;7!<Pl!:err8o.L KT. (J /Jeu you) when you have hemd my defence .to th(, end, then and not till then to vote, etc. And. 1. 9, ~-rrp p.e"'ti<rTwv

2080. The adwr1s

2085]

THE

CilWUMSTA~TlAL

PARTIClPLE

463

Kal KaJ\i(J"Twv K<vlivdHravT<S oTw Tov f3lov Tfd;Trwav

they incu?red dange? for a great and noble cause, and so ended their lives L. 2. 70.

208l.. 8.11-a. at the same time, a.liTLKa. i?nmediately, ev91!s straiqhtway, p.eTa.E!! between, in the midst, thongh strictly modifyiug the main verb, are ofteu placed close to a temporal participle which they moify in sen.~e: li.p.a TaT' ei1rwv vl(J"T'r/ saying this, he ?'ose X. A. 3. 1. 47, n;> li<~<</i Kpq. Twv 'AIJ1Jvalwv e8s 1rof3ef31JKOTL . hrK<LvTo they jell upon the ?'ight wing r~f the Athenians as saon as it had disembarlced (lit. upon the right wing when it had rlisembarked) T. 4. 43, i~ava (J"TilvTfs p.<Ta~ li<L1rvovns getting up in the middle of supper D. 18. 169, 1roJ\axo p.e 1rf(J"X< l\f-yovTa. p.<Ta~u it often checlced me when the words we1e on my lips (in the very act of speaking) P. A. 40 b. 2082. A participle implying opposition or concession (2066) may have its meaning renered explicit by OfJ-WS yet, nevertheless (with or without Kal7r<p, 2083), et Ta. th en or 1TELTa. afterwards to express censure or surprise ( then, for ali that) : (J"v (J"ol op.ws Kal iv TV 1ro<p.iq. ovTfs 8appoJ1-fv with you, though we are in the enemies' count?'!J, neve1theless we have no jear X. C. 5. 1. 26, ~1rLT' 7ro<1rWV Tos 8eos vihili< p.<ves; and th en, th01(qh you desert the gods, will you rernain here? Ar. Pl. 1148. IJp.ws may attach itself more closely to the participle, though belonging with the principal verb : 7r<l8ov -yvvat~i, Kal1r<p ov (J"Tp-ywv /Jp.ws talee the aclvice of women 1l~ne the less though thou Wcest i.t not A. Sept. 712. 2083. With participles of opposition or concession (206G): KO.L1TEp although, Ka.( (infreqnent), although Ka.t Ta.ilTa. (947) and that too. Thns, (J"Vp.f3ov<uw (J"O< Kal1rep v<wTpos (f;v I give yo11 advice though I am your junior X. C. 4. 5. 32, 1ro1r' orKao< Kal1rep p.{(J"ov X<LJ!-wvos ovTos he sailrd off home though it was rnidwinti;r X. Ag. 2.31, Kl\wvos Kai7r<p p.avtWfi1JS oika 7} lnrO(J"X(J"LS 1rf31J Cleon's promise, insane th011f!h it was, was fzlljilled T. 4. :39, Kal ool\os C!v -yp Tip.ws 1rl\ovTwv vfJp fm, slave thuugh he be, the man of wealth is held in esteem E. fr. 142, li<KeLS OTL li.vlipa f]p.'iv Tov .(]"1rovoaLOTaTov liw.pBdpm -yel\iiv va1rd!Jwv, Kal TaTa ovTw 1rol\wov 5vTa T< -y"1\wTL yon llo 11:ron; in that you corrupt the most earnest man we have by tem)?ting him to langh, and that though he is such an enerny to laughter X. C. 2. 2.16. On iaiTo< see 2893 b. a. In Homer the parts of Ka.l7r<p are often separat~d by the participle or an emphatic word connected with it: Kal xvp.<voi 1rep although distressed lVI 178. 1rp may stand alone withont Kal: va(J"xco K7Joop.v1J 1r<P near up, though vexed A 586. Both uses occur in tragedy. The part. with 1rp is not al ways concessive. b: In a negative sentence, ovS (p.'I]S), with or witbout 1rp, takes the place of Kal ; as ')'VvatK11rd!Jov Jl-'r/D Ta1J!Jfj KMwv listen to a woman, though thou hearest 1 not the trnth K fr. 440. 2084. With participles of cause (20G4): o11Tros, Sc ToilTo ( Ta.ilTa), K TOVTOV. Thus, dv6J.1.7'0t 'Td.. vav!fta . . Ka~ lTL, aros . . . oK vrE1r1r'J\Eov, Ot raiJra Tpo1ra'iov g(J"T'r/(J"av br~:ausc they hrrd pkcd 1l}J the wrecks and bccause they (the enemy) did not sail a[!ainst them, (for this reason) they set up a tTOJJhy T. 1. 54. 2085. With p:uticiples of cause (20G.l): liTe (iiH o1J), ota. or o'i:ov (ofov ofJ) inasrnuch as, st:tte the ea.nse as a fact on tl1e authority of the spenker.or writer. Th us, o Kpos, iiT< 1rrs 1/;v, . . i]lieTo TV (J"Toy Cy1us, inasmuch as he was a chilcl, was pleasecl with the robe X. C. 1. 3. 3, i]Kop.<v (J"1r{pi5 1ro To (J"TpaTo1roov,

464

SY.NTAX OF THE Sll\1PLE SENTENCE

[2o86

otov dL xp6vou aif>'f!J-EPOS :Va bri r&s <Fuvf}em tarpt{jris I returned in the evening f?om the camp, and, as l a1rived afte? a lony a/Jsence, I }lToceeded to my accustomed haw~ts l'. Charm. 1fl3 a, ofa !) :novrwv 1rps <i1rvov rwv "Tr<racrrwv, "Tr<avvoucr< inasmuch as the peltasts weTe yoin[! o.ff to suppe1, they ?"ode against them X. H. 5. 4. a9. &erre bas the same force in Hdt.

2086. With participles of cause or pnrpose, etc. (2064, 206<'>) : O.S. This particle sets forth the ground of belief on which the agent acts, and denotes the thonght, assertion, real or presumed intention, in the mind of the subject oi the principal verb or of sorne other person mentioned prominently in the sentence, without implicating the speaker or writer. a. 'rhus, rl7ri)Mov ws vK-f}cravus may mean either they dcparted under the impression that they had been v:toriuus (though as a matter of fact they may have been defeated) or pTetendiny that they hrtd been victmious (when they knew they had been defeated). The use of ws implies nothing asto the opinion of the speaker or writer. On the other hand rl7ri)Mov vKf}cravus means that, as a matter of fact, and on the authority of the writer, they had been victorious. b. ws may be rendered as if (though therc is nothing conditional in the Greek use, as is shawn by the negMive ou, not !J-1}), by in the opinion (belief) that, on the gTound that, undeT p1etence of, undeT the i?np1ession that, because as he sai (or thought) ; in the hope of, with the ( avowed) intention of ( with the future participle). c. ivra()' ~f.'<Vov ws r liKpov Karxones oi ' ou Karixov, rlXX ~J-acrrs 7jv 1rp aurwv the1e they 1emained in the belief that they we1e occupying the summit; lmt in fact they were not occupying it, since there was a hill above them X. A. 4. 2. 5, raVr7JV r!)v xwpi.v ltrrp<'f< <ap7ra<Fat rois "E7]<T<v ws 1rO<!J-li.v ovuav he turned this count1y over to the G1eeks to 1avage on the gTound that it was hostile 1. 2. 19, r!)v 1rp6q,acrtv i1rotro ws II<Fiili.s f3ov6!J-<vos h{jaXElv he made his pTetence as if.he wished (i.e. he gave as his J1Tetext his desiTe) ta expel the Pisidians 1. 2. 1, 7rapeuKwritovro ws "Trof.'fJ<Fovus ~hey rnade p1eprtrations to go to war ( with the avowed intention of [!Oing to wa1) T. 2. 7, crua!J-{jrlvH Kpov ws ."TroKr<vwv he seized CyTus for the pwrpose (as he declared) of putting him to dea th X. A. 1. 1. 3, and often with the future participle. After verbs of motion ws is rarely used. d. ws with the absolute partfciple : ou ile rl8~J-<v ws ouK eurri.Krwv 6vrwv 'A87Jvalwv we must not be discou1aged on tlle [!TO!tnd that the Athenians are not well clisciplined x. M. 3. 5. 20, n,f'/ eappiv ws Karacrr7JCTO!J-ivwv rovrwv ts r Oov he bade him be of good cheeT in the assuTance that this wmtld arrange itself in the Tight tva!f x. A. 1. 3. 8, ws l(v 1j7] 1rOLEV afrros 5 7< [jouOLVTO, 1rOos a7rK7LVOV in the belief that it was alTeady in thei1 power ta do what they pleased, they put many ta death X. H. 2. 3. 21. Cp. also 2078, and 2122. 2087. <!>cnrep as, .iust as, as it we1e, an adverb of comparison, denotes that the action of the main verb is compared with an assumed case. Thns, KaraKeif.'e' &cr1rep ~ov -i)cruxli.v li.'fHv we lie inactive just as if it were possible to talee one's ease X. A. 3. 1. :3, wpxoiivro fJcr1r<p "Tr<KVV!J-<VO< they danced as it were malng an ex.hibition 5. 4. 34, ol o ws -!jKovuav, fJu1r<p cruos rl'fplou cpavvros, tevra< i1r' avrbv b1it whr'n they hea~d him, }ust as though a wild boar had appeared, they 1ushed against him 5. 7. 24. Cp. 2078.

zogr]

THE

SGPPLEME~TARY

PARTICIPLE

465

a. \Vhere a condition is meant, we have ii>rr1rp .v .t (wrrrrepo.vd). Cp. 2480 a. b. Hom. uses ws u, ws Ei, ws et re like wrnrep or ws. ws Ei, ws d Tf occur also in tragedy, and do not have a conditional force. 'l'hus, 't..orf;vp6wvot ws el Oavo.roPo< Ktovra bewailing !dm as if ke were going to death 328. Cp. 2481.
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE

The supplementary participle completes the idea of the verb by showing that to which its action relates. 2089. The supplementary participle agrees either with the subject or with the object of the main verb; with the subject when the verb is intransitive or passive, with the object when the verb is transitive.
2088.
oihror' bro.v6p.TJP -i}p.s olKripwv I neve~ ceased pitying ou?selves X. A. 3. 1. 19, rovs 'll'fVTJTO.S if'II'O.V<r' cl.!ltKOVp.fPOVS I put a stop to the pOO!' veing W!'onged D. 18. 102, wpwv ov KaropOovres Kal ros rnpartchrs cl.xOop.vovs they saw that they (themselves) wen not succeeding and th at the soldiers we1e indignant T. 7. 47, cl.!ltKovro. <Pll\t11'11'ov t!fl]l\e"(~a .I Jl1'0ved that Philip was acting unjustly D. 18. 136, ees t!l\e"fxO-fJIJ'ero.t "(el\oos t:Jv he will st1aightway !Je pToved to be ?'idiculous X. l\1.1. 7. 2.

a. When the object is the same as the subject, it is commonly suppressed, and the participle agrees.with the subject. 'l'hus, opw ~o.p.a.pravwv I see that 1 eJ'T E. Med. 350, to-e, v67Jros t:Jv Jcnow th at y ou are a fooZ X. A. 2. 1. 13, oK aliJ'Ocl.veiJ'Oe l~a'll'archp.evot; do you not peTceive that you me being decdved .9 X. H. 7. 1.12, oi}w1J'e rwv vop.wv Ka.ro.rj;povwv he showed that he despised the laws And, 4. 14. b. For the sake of emphasis or contrast (and to secure greater symmetry) the object may be expressed by the reflexive pronoun. Th us, o5a. J.I.avrv !ltKalws KEXP'TIP.vov o.ros I know that 1 have presentecl my case honestly 1.15. 321, ii~ov o 11'11'0LTJK6ro. ra.vro. o-a.vr6v show that y ou did 1wt do this youTself D. 22. 29, cl.J.1.rj;6rep' oi'lv oe, Ka.l aurv Df.Lv bn(fovevovro., Kal p.s o.io-Oa.vop.vovs now he knows both- that he is himself plotting against yo11 and that y ou are aware of it D. 6. 18. Observe iMvOa.vov o.rovs bd r,;J 6r/J'f' "(evop.evot (agreeing with the shbject) without Jcnowing it they fou nd themselves on the hill X. A. 6. 3. 22. On the use with o-uvot!la., see 2108. c. oKa. (the personal use for the impersonal ilo<K, 1083) usually takes the participle in the dative ; as, 1!otKo.s oKvovn l\"f"" you seem ?'eluctant to speak P. Il. 414 c; but also in the nominative (see 2133). 2090. Many verbs supplementing their meaning by the pa.rticiple admit of the coHstruction with the infinitive ( often with a difference of meaning; see 2123 ff.) or with a substantive clause with on or ws.
2091. The present or perfect participle is often used as a simple predicate adjective, especially with dp.L and y{yvop.at. The aorist participle is chiefly poetic.
]il1'av 1T<IJ'rovrs rtves <Ptll.i1T1T'fJ there we1e some who disttusted Philip D. 19. 53, (Kl\apxos) cptl\oKlv!Jvvos r' Ji v Ka.l -i}p.ps KO.l PVKTOS IL"(WV f'll'l rovs 'II'Oep.lovs Clear-

chus was bath fond of dange? and by day and by night led his men against the enemy X. A. 2. 6. 7, l"(w ro .,-p.-y}i elp.l roO' !Je!JpKws I am the one who has done GREEK GRA~!. -30

466

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SENTE~CE

[2092

this dPNl D. 21. 104, ~ roro ovK l!<rr< ')'L')'v6p,Evov wap' -i}p,v; 01' is not this sornething that takes place in us? l'. PhiL :J!l c. So with adjeetivized p:HCiciplL>H (HlGI), as ITU,'.L<jJpov Tjv TV 7r6L it ~V({S wlvanta!Jeous to the State D. 10. 7G. So with uwapxw am, am as.mme (D.l8.:!:!8). a. Here the p:nLieiple has the article when it <.lesignaLes the subject itself (third example; cp. 115:!). But the article is noL used wheu the participle marks a class in whieh the subject is i11clude.
2092. The supplementary participle after certain verbs represents a dependent statement.

In 1)Kov<re Kpov lv KtLidl' 5vra he hea1Yl that Gy1us was in Gilicia 5vra stands for l<rrl, what was heard being "Kpos lv Kt<Kll' l<rrl." This is shown by the fact that the sentence might have beerr, according to the principles of in<J,i1ect discourse, 1)Kou<revoTL Kpos lv KuKil' d'7 (or l<rrl, 2GHi). With verbs not introducing indirect discourse, however, the re is no such indirect statement; as in l1ra6<ravro p,ax6p,evot they ceased jighting L. 23. 9. 2093. Accordingly, from this point of view, the uses of the supplementary participle are two: (1) not in indirect discourse, and (2) in indirect discourse. a. Some verbs take the participle either in indirect iscourse or not in indirect discourse (2112). It is sometimes impossible to decide whetber a participle stands in indirect discourse or not (2113) ; and the difference, especially after verbs of pe1ceiving (2112 a, b), may be of no great importance to the sense.
THE SUPPLEMENT ARY P ARTTCIPLE NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2094. The supplementary participle not in indirect discourse ~s often like an object infinitive, the tenses denotiug only stage of action and not difference of ti me (cp. 1850). Th us, compare 1ravo0v uf yrwm we stop you frorn speaking (of continued action) with Kw~io0 iv (J"f yfLV we p1event .you frorn speaking (also of col!tinued action). 2095. With verbs denoting being in some moditied way (20962097). 2096. TV'{X. 6.vw (poet. Kvpw) happen, am just now, a.v96.vw escape the notice of, am secretly, q,ea.vw anticipate, am bej(nehanrl. a. With tltese verbs the participle contains the main idea, and is often represented in translation by the finite verb with an adver!Jtl phrase; thus, 1rapwv lni-yxav< he happened to be there, or he was theTe by chance X. A. 1.1. 2. b. The action of .p!JaFw and a.vOavw usually concides with that of the supplementary participle (present with present, aorist with aorist). But the aorist of a fini te verb is occasionally followed by the present participle wben it is necessary to mark an action or a state as continuing. ovK ~a.l/ov is Jike an imperfect and may take the present participle. The aorist of rv-yxavw very often takes the present part.iciple. Wth a present or imperfect of ru-yxavw, avllavw, <jJOavw, the (rare) aorist participle refers to an action or state anterior to that of the present or imperfect. Many of the cases of the present of ru-yxavw with the

zog8]

THE St:PI'LEMENTARY PARTICIPLE

467

aorist participle are !Jistorical presents; and in some cases the aorist participle is used for the perfect. With other tenses than present or nperfect, an aorist participle with these verbs refers to an action or state concident in time (cp: 1873). c. rvf'xvw often !oses the idea of chance, and denotes mere concidence in time (I am just now, I was just then) or sim ply I am (was). d. Examples. TuyxO.vw: 1rpo~vwv rvf'xvw I happen to be p1oxenus D. 52. 5, lipuna rv-yxvovcn 1rpi~avr' they happen to have fared the best 1. 4.103, nJ)'xavov "fwv I was just saying X.A.3. 2.10, lirrn' vrmr<ilv 'Y' lrfryxaV K< f'VWp.'YJV .,-oo.CieL)'p.vo' who happened to have S'[!Oken in opposition and to have decla?ecZ his opinion L.l2. -27, hvxov Jca.lhjp.evo' vr.,8a I was, by chance, .<itting there P. gu. 272 e. a.veD.vw : <f>ova ro .,-a<oo' Mv8av {J6<1Kwv he entmtained the murdere1 of his son without knowing it (it escaped his notice that he was, etc.) Hdt.l. 44, g'Aa8ov l11eMbvre' they got in sec1etly T. 2. 2, o~K g'Aa8H li'll'oo<opii<1Kwv you dicl not escape notice in atte?npting to escape (your attempt at escape clicl not escape notir-e) P. R. 457 e, t/..af!Ev ti.,-o5pi, he escape without being noticed X. H. 1. 3. 22; TJO'T .,-v8' 1rop.elvavr" you will sulnnit to eveTy possible calmnity e1e you are aware D. 6. 27. <f>eO.vw: o~ p8civEL l~a)'6p.vo' o l1r1ro' Kr . the horse is no sooner led out, etc. X. Eq. 5.10, piJvovO'tv (hist. pres.) .,-1 ri; liKptp -yev6p.evo< ro, 1rOfJ.[ov' they anticipated the enemy in getting upon the summit (they got to the summit /!(fore the enemy) X. A. 3. 4. 49, o~K ~<f>IJM<Lv .,-v06p.evo< rv 1r6'Aep.ov Kal ijKov scaTcdy hacl they heanl of the war when they came I. 4. 86, 0'/1'6repo< q,IJfJO'ovra< r'i}v 1ro<v ti'Ya86v n 1rOLTJ<1avr" which pa1ty shall antipate the other in cloing some service to the Btate I. 4. 79. Without regard toits mood, the present and imperfect of peavw are followed by the present participle (rarely by the perfect) ; the future, aorist, and historical present are followed by the aorist participle. e. oK av q,Ovo" ( q,Ovo<r) with the participle is used in urgent, but poli te, exhortations, as o~K av <f>Bvo<s "'fwv the soonm you S'peak the bette1' (i.e. S)Ji'llk at once) X. M. 2.3.11. Strictly this is equivalent to you would not be anticipating (my wish or y our duty), if y ou shmd speak. 'Ai-y <f>ed.O'.s might be said according to 2061. f. 'Aavevw and q,Oavw (rarely rv)'xvw) may appear in the participle, thus reversing the ordinary construction, as o<a'Aat!wv lO'pxera< l' r~v Mrv'AfJv'YJv he entered JJfitylene secret/y T. 3. 25, q,eavovr" 1io'YJ ovop.v r'T]v lKdvwv l'fi v we got the stmt of them by ravaging the ir ter1ito1'y X. C. 3. 3. 18. Cp. also 2062 a. The present participle is rare.
2097. 8t0."{w, 8to:y(yvop.a.t, 8La.Tew, Sa.p.vw continue, keep on, am contimt-

ally.
o<f'OV<f< fJ.av8vovrn they are contin11ally (they spenil their time in) learning X. C. 1. 2. 6, KpeO. lO'elovr" o[ O'rpanwra< oLe)'i)'vovro the soldie1s kept eating meat X. A. 1. 5. , omre'AeZ fJ.O'wv he continues to hate X. C. 5. 4. 35, Op7Jvovn' o<en'Aop.ev we lamenterl continually I. 10. 27, -ij'Aw' 'Aap.1rp6raro' cr,v o<CI.fJ.vEL the sun continues to be most brilliant X. M. 4. 7. 7.
2098. With verbs signifying to .begin, cease, endnre, grow weary of an action.

468
>..d.,...,,

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[2099

li.pxol'-o.' begin (2128), 1ro.vw cause to cease, 1To.vol'-o., ~'Y"' cease, .'ll"oI>Lo.Ehrw, 1TLE(.,..., leave off, E(.,..., fail, 6.v)(.oJLa.L support, KO.fl'I'Epi endure (do something patiently), KO.p.vw grow wea1y, :tra."iOPE""' give up, etc. lip~op.a.< 1r rijs iiirp<Ki)s ywv I will begin my speech with the healing art P. S. 186 b, 1ra.ucrw roro -y<-yvop.<vov I will put a stop to this happening P. G. 523 c, 1rrtcra.t -yovcra. lit. stop talking E. Hipp. 706, ol'nrw1ror< (hL1rov ~11rwv I never left o.ff seelcing X. A p. 16, vxov 1racrxwv support thy sujferings E. fr. 1090, avre r6r' Kaprpovv Kowv KT. neither then did llisten patiently, etc., Aes. 3.118, p.Tj dp.ns q,iov livopa e<p-yerwv do not g1ow weary of doing good to your friend P. G. 470 c, 1r<ip'I}Kr1. . r 81ra. q,pwv Ka.l fP ra~., lw v KG.L 4Jva.Ks q,vM.rrwv Ka.l p.a.x6p.evos I am tired of carrying my arms and going in the mnks and mount-

ing guard and fighting X. A. 5. 1. 2. a. Verbs signifying to suppo1t, endure ordinarily take the present participle; but there are cases of the complexiv'e aorist in reference to acts to which one must submit despite ali resistance: so, with v.fxop.a.<, X. C. 6. 2. 18, D. 41. 1 ; cp. OUK T,vcrx<cr8e aKOVCTO.VTfS L. 13. 8 (Hdt. 5. 89) with OK T,v<lxovro aKOOVT<S x. H. 6. 5. 49. The aorist participle seems not to be used with the object of vxop.at.
2099. With some verbs of corning and going the participle specifies the manner of coming and going, and contains the main idea.

fJij q,e-ywv he took to jlight (went jleeing) B 665, oYxovra.< o<wKovres they ha'Ve gone in pu1suit X. A. 1. 10. 5, ~XDf.L'IJV ava.-y6p.evos I put to sea D. 50. 12, oYxera.< Oa.vwv he is dead and go ne S. Ph. 414, o roro )l.~wv lfpxop.a.t I mn not going to say this X. Ag. 2. 7.
2100. With verbs of emotion (rejoicing and grieving) the participle often denotes ca1~se (cp. 2048).
xa.Cpw, ~SoJLa., Tp1roJLa., yy1J9a. (poet.) am pleased, take pleasure, ci.ya.1rc, am content, 6.ya.va.Kri, &.x9oJLa.<, xo.e11'cils <j>pw am vexed, displeased, PI!-SCws <j>pw make light of, \i.,..o:VJLa. grie'Ve, p"iCtop.a.< am angry, a.tcrx'vop.'?...., a.tl>oiiJLa.L am ashamed (2126), JLETa.JLOJLO.L, p.eTa.JLEL JLOL 1epent. (Verbs of emotion also take ou or ws, by which construction the object is simply stated ;
crTpy~

with the participle the connection is closer).

xa.ipw lha.e-y6p.<vos ros crq,60pa. 1rp<crfJ6Ta.<s I like to co1we1se with 'Very old men P. R. 328 d, OCTTLS 1jO<Ta.L "(WV aei, 'I)0v a.rv ros ~UVOCTLV lJv f!a.pvs he who likes to be always talking is a bore to his cornpanions without knowing it S. fr. 99, oVK a-ya.1rw ~wv 1rl rourots I am not content to live on these conditions l. 12. 8, ooK av xOoip.'l}v p.r:tvOavwv I should not be annoyed at lean~ing P. Lach. 13() a, xa.f1rws lf<Pepov olKliis Ka.nei1rovns they toolc it hard at abandoning their homes T. 2. 16, o<Kovp.evo< o! livOpw1ro< p.iiov op"fi~ovra.< ?) fJ<a.top.<vo< men me mfire angered at being the victims of injustice than of compulsion 1. 77, o -yp a.lcrxvop.a.< p.a.vOavwv for 1 arn not ashamed ta learn J>. Hi pp. Min. 372 c, p.<r<fkovro rs cr1rovos ov oe~ap.evo< they repented not ha'Ving accepted the truce 'l'. 4. 27, oli p.o< p.<ra.p.EL o~rws a1roO"f'IJ<Ta.p.vcp I do not 1epent ha'Ving made such a defence P. A. 38e. . a. The participle agrees with the case of the person in regard to whom the emotion is manifested: aKoovres xalpovcrtv l~era~op.vo<s ros olop.hots p.v dva.<

2105]

THE

SCl'PLEiv~TARY

PARTICIPLE

469

r1o<jlo,, oilr1< a' ol! they like to hear the examination of those who pretend to be wise, but are not soin 1eality P. A. 33 c. This construction must be distinguished from that occurring in poet1y, whereby verbs like xalpw and lixiJoJLru (which commonly take the dative) often admit the accusative and the participle: ro5 'Y.P dJr1<fMs IJ<ol 1Jv?ir1Kovras o xalpoM<.fm the gods do not rejoice at the death of the 1'ighteous E. Hipp. 1339. b. So witb verbs meaning to satiate onese~f: 1r<r1xvovp,evos oK lve1rlp,1rar1o you cou ld not satiate yourself with p1onses X. A. 7. 7. 46.

2101. '\Vith verbs signifying to do well or ill, to 81trpass or be inferior, the participle specifies the manner or that in which the action of the verb consists (cp. 2048, 2062). So with Kaws ( e~) 7rOLw, tKw,
ap.,apTrLVW; VKw, Kp::!.T~, 7rEpty{yvojJ.aL, ~TTWJJ.UL>
ev
d7TOjJ.UL.

t1rohwa' avap,vfwas p,e you did well in 1'eminding me P. Pb. 60 c (cp. 1872 c. 2), Kaw' l1rolTJr5ev orw5 r<eurrwa' rov (3lov he did well in ending his life th us L. 28. 8, ovfwe(J/Je aKoVovres y ou will jJ1'ofit by heming P. A. 30 c, aoLK<T< 1rop,ou i1pxovres (1734. 5) you do wrong in being the agg1essors in the war T. 1. 5:3, ox 7]rrTJr16p,eiJa eu 1roLovres we shall not be outtlone in well-doing X. A. 2. 3. 23. Here belongs lp,ol xapljou a1rOKpivap,evo5 do me the favour to l'eply (gratify

me by replying) l'. R. 338 a.

2102. With 7rELpwp,aL t1y, 7roi>s -yKELfW-L am urgent, mJ.vra 7rOLw do everything, the participle is rare in Attic; more common in Hdt. with 7rLpwp.-a.t, 7roos yKELfW-L, .,.o.<k dp,t am nrgent, etc.
7re<piir16JJ}a ~'Yxovres I shall try to p1ove Ant. 2. 'Y 1 ; he beggAd often and urgently Hdt. 9. 91.
1ro.s

ijv <r1r16p,evos

2103. \Vith 7rEpwpw (and sometimes with cf>opw, daopw, 7rpoifp.,at), signifying overlook, allow. (But not with w.) Cp. 2141.
p,eljw 'Y<'Yvbp,evov rv liv1Jpw1rov 1r<pwpwp,<v we allow the man to grow greater ind~(ference on his g1owing power) D. 9. 29, o 1rep<oov p,avrv lioo~ov 'Yev6p,evov I did not suffer myself to become obscu1e I. 12. 11, gTTJ11'av t'lr<oev . pfJp,TJV p,v T~V 1r'J..Lv 'YVOP,fvTJV, r-l]v M xwpiiv 1rOp8ovp,fvTJV they had the

(we look with

courage to look calmly on their city made desolate and their country being ravaged I. 4. 96. So even with the uncompounded pw in poetry. (Witb the infinitive 7T<pwpw no longer connotes perception and sim ply equals lw allow.) 2104. \Vith some impersonal expressions taking the dative, such

as those signifying the advantage or consequence of an action ( is .fitting, profitable, good, ete.), and those implying confidence or jear. (The personal construction is often preferred.)
t1rTJpwrwv rv 1Je6v, el ( aoro5) 7Toep,ofir1<V lip,ewov ~<1Ta< they asked the ~d whethe1 it would be bette1 jo1 them to make ww T. 1. 118, d r60' arcp <jllov ( lr1rl) KeKTfp,vrp if it is pleasing to him to be callecl th us A. Ag. 161. Persona! : ors 1rop,wv 'fiv r xwplov Knjp,evov to whom the seUlement of the place was a menace T. 1. 100, o(Ko< p,vwv (3<'J..riwv (r1rlv) he is ali the better by staying at home D. 3. 34 (for p,ve<v arv {3ri6v r1n).

2105. The participle occurs witb varions other verbs, such as OaJJ.l!w am

470

SYN'l'AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[2106

wont; uvp:rrt1rrw and uvp.(3alvw happrn; 7rol5elKvp.t, mOltw, 7rapatTKwritw, mell.ning render; pKw, iKav6~ elp.t am sufficient. On p.o2 {3ovop.v" rrrt, etc., see 1487. On ~xw and the participle

in periphrases, see 1963.

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2106. Verbs of Knowing and Showing.- After verbs signifying to know, be ignorant of, learn (not lean~ of), 7emember, foTget, show, appea7, prove, acknowledge, and annMtnce, the participle represents a dependent statement, e:1ch tense h:1ving the same force as the corresponding tense of the indicative or optative with on or w~, the present including also the imperfect, the perfect including also the pluperfect. Su ch verbs are : oHia., -y-yv<f>o-Kw, -rrLo-Ta.p.a., vvow, p.a.v96.vw (21:36), ( oi>K)
6.-yvoO>, p.p.v1Jp.a.L, -rra.v90.vop.a.L (21:34), 81JW, (1rL) 8e(Kv'iip.L, cpa.(vw, 0.-rrocpa.(vw, cj>a.Cvop.a. (2148), oKa. (2089 c, 2133), (t-)yxw, c\p.oll.oyw (mrely), .yyw, -rro w u.presen t ( 2115) .
o -yp tf15euav arv reOv'fJKOTa ( = rMv'fJKE) faT they did not know that he was dead X. A. 1. 10. 16, ~-yvw r1)v itT{3o1)v ~uop.v'fJv (=gurat) he knew that the invasion wmtlcl take placeT. 2. 13, 8v fl}J-~ hltTrauOe iJ!-'~ 1rpoo6vra ( = 1rpoMwKe) you know that he betrayed us X. A. 6. 6. 17, rl~ ovrw~ e-fJO'fJ~ tTTiv f-twv l!un~ -yvoe Tov heOev 1roep.ov oep' ?i~ovTa ( = 77~"); who of y ou is so simple-minded as not to know that the war will come hither f7om th at quarter? D. 1. 15, (Xeppov'fJITOV) KaTp.aOe 7rO<t~ ~voeKa ?} 15wi5eKa ~xovtTav ( = 'xet) he learned that Chersonesus contained eleven or twelve cities X. H. 3. 2~ 10, Jl.fiJ.V'fJJJ-a< aKovuii~ ( = -!jKovtTa) 1 remember to have heard X. C. 1. 6. 6, p.JJ-V'fJp.at KptTlq. Tc/ioe ~vvovTa IT< ( = ~vvijtTOa) [7ememl1er that y ou were in company with Critias he re P. Charm. lii a, hr(/l.e-IjtTJ1.Eu0' -IJMw~ -yl!povr~ ovTE~ ( = iuJJ.v) we have gladly f01gotten that we are old K Bacch. 188, od~w (aTv) 1fOwv Oavcirwv ovT' ( = t!uTl) li~wv 1 will show that he dese?ves to die many times D. 21.-21, oetxO-fJueTat TOTO 1r11"0t"T)KWS ( = 1f1fOl'fJK) he will be shawn to have done this 21. 160, roTo T -ypcip.p.a O'fJo '-f;woij T1)v ota0-IJK"TJV oi'Juav ( = tTTl) this clause shows that the will was forgerl 45. 34, iv 1!"o<f>alvwuL To~ <{Jev-yovra~ 1raa! 7rOV'fJpo~ ovTa~ ( = Elu!) if they show that the exiles were invetemte mscals L. 30. 1, iJ '-f!x7J OcivaTo~ <{Jalverat ovtTa ( = tTTI) it seems that the soul is immmtal P. Ph.107 c, otKovTa ( = otKe) <PIt1f1fov l~-lje-y~a. 1 cunvicted Philip of acting unjustly D. 18. 186, pq.olw~ <'YxO-IJuerat 1f;evi56p.evo~ ( = '-f;eoerat) he will easily be convicte of lying 27. 19, JJ.oo-yovwea Mbvre~ ( = f)Mof-tev) 1 acknowledge that 1 came L. 4. 7, aTc/i Kpov hanpaTEovTa ( = 1fturpaTEet) 1rpwTo~ -!i'Y'Yeta 1 was the jirst to announce that Cyrus was talcing the }ield against him X. A. 2. 3. 19. a. Except with -y-yw announce (what is certain), verbs of saying orthinlcing rarely take the participle in prose, e.g. 1r1Tt raTa odio'YJJ.va iJ!J.Zv v6JJ.t!e (=ev tuOL) think that this is our ~manirnous opinion P. R. 450 a. 2107. The persona] constructions 8ijMs dfLL, cpavep6s etp. 1 am plainly (impersonal oijMv and <{Javpov iunv ort) are followed by a dependent statement in the participle. Th us, oijo~ TJV ol6p.evos ( = oijov TJV OTt ototTo) it was clear that he thought X. A.2.5.27, Ovwv <{Javep~ 'fiv;ro<iKL~ (= <f>avepv 'fi v on OtJOt) it was

2112]

THE SUPPLEl\lENTARY PARTIC1PLE

471

evident th at he often sacrijiced X. M. 1. 1. 2, avtiOds iH)Xos nv ( = i)Xov nv in av<iilld1J) he showed his dissatisfaction x. c. 2. 2. 3. 2108. The participle with G"VvOLSa. or 0"1l'{')'L')'vci>O"Kw am conscious, accompanie by the dative of the reflexive pronom1, may stand either in the nominative agreeing with the subject, or in the dative agreeing with the reflexive. 'l'hus, uvmws ars arii ~pyov lnaupbos conscious (to himself) that he had done the deed Ant. 6. 5, fJ-aim~ ~vv;io1J oov 1n<Traf1-v't' I was consciuus of knowing nothing P. A. 22 c. a. Wben the subject is not the same as the abject, the latter, with the participle, may stand in the dative, or (rarely) in the accusative. Thus, ~vvlcriicrt 1\Ie?r't' fl-v 'if!evop.t!v't', ffJ-Ot f a1JIIevovn they know as well as Meletus that he is lying, and (as weil as I do) that I am speaking the tJuth P. A. 34 b, crvvetows rwv .I!Xwuirwv ovXous fJ-rt!xovras knmoing that slaves participate in the contests .D. 61. 23. (The force of crvv at times almost disappears.) 2109. The use of the participle to represent a dependent statement cornes from its circumstantial use. Thus, in o ")'p fiecrav aurov re8v1JK6ra (2106), 7'fliv1JKOra agrees with the object of iioecrav; and from they did not know him as dead the thought passes. into they did not know (the fact) that he was dead.
CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS OF PERCEIVING AND OF FINDING

2110. Verbs of Perception.- Verbs signifying to see, perceive, hem, learn (i.e. learn by inqui1y, hear of), when they denote physical (actual) perception take the participle. When they denote intellectual perception they may take the participle or on or ws with a fini te verb. (The Homeric usage is less strict.) 2111. Such verbs are, in Attic, op<il see, a.!0"90.voj.La.L perceive, nKOVW hear,
'II'Vv90.vofloii.L

learn.

The partieiple may stand either not in indirect discourse or in indirect discourse.
2112.

a. Not in Indirect Discourse.- Here verbs of petceiving denote physical perception- the act percei ved or heard of. With aKow and 1rvv8avopm the participle stands in the genitive; with alcr8civof.<a' it usually stands in the accusative (as with opw), but sometimes in the genitive. (See 13G1, 1367.) eoe KXt'apxov oavvovro: he saw CleaJchus n'ding thl'ough X. A. 1. 5. 12; alcrllbfJ-<vos Aaf1-7rpoKii 1rpos ri}v fl-TJTpa xaXe1ralvovra perceiving Lmnprocles angry with his motheJ' X. 111. 2. :!. 1, ficrOwa< 7rW7rort! fl-OU ?) 'if!evliop.aprvpovros?) crJKo<j>avrovros ; have y ou ever noticed me either bearing false witness OJ' playing the part of an informm? 4. 4. 11; fjKovcra;v aro <j>wvncravros they heard hin~ speaking X. S. 3. 13; ws 1rvllovro ri)s TivXov KarEL1Jfl-f1-EV1JS when they leamed of the capture of Pylos 'l'. 4. 6. N. Verbs of physical perception, pw (especially) and aKovw, regularly take the present participle in A ttic prose, which usually refus!'s to distingnish between I see a ho use uming and 1 see a house bu,rn. The complexive aorist, summing up the action, does however occur, as ws Eoev lfXa<j>ov K7r1J?criicrav . iilwKev when he saw a hi nd b1ealc cover he gave chase X. C. 1. 4. 8. Cp. 1recrovra eoov Hdt. 9. 22. b. In Indirect , Discourse. - !lere verbs of perceiving denote intellectual

472

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

[zng

perception- the fact tbat something is perceived or beard of. Witb Kouw and ,.vviJrivop.a.L the participle stands in the accusative (as with opw, a.l~IJ&.vop.a.t). Cp. 1363, 1365, 2144, 2145. opwp.ev ,.&,,.,.a. }..-YJIJfi aliTa. a Xf-yere we see that eve1"!fthing you say is true X. A. 5. 5. 24, a.l~IJavop.a.< Tara. ovrws (xovra. I perceive that this is so X. M. 3. 5. 5, -!iKov~e Kpov lv K\LKl~ ovra. he heard that Gy1us was in Gilicia X. A. 1. 4. 5, lira.v KV!J TLvos fi~ovr' 'Op~T'YJV when she hea1s from any one that Orestes will return S. El. 293, ,.v1J6p.evo< 'Ap'Ta~pbv re1Jv'Y}K6ra. having learned that .Artaxerxes was dead T.4.50. 2113. Verbs of Finding.- Verbs of finding and detecting (d;pl~Kw, (Kara.)Xa.p.f3&.vw; pass. aXI~Kop.a.<) in their capacity as verbs of peneiving take the participle (a) not in indirect discourse, of the act or state in which a person or thing is found ; or (b) in indirect discourse, of the fact that a person or thing is found in an act or state. a. Kf;pv~ </>tK6p.evos 'YJVpe ros livopa.s oLEtj;IJa.pp.vovs the herald, on his arrival, found the men al1eady put to death T. 2. 6, evp'Y}TO.L 1rL~TWS 7rpdTTWP he has been fotmd to have dealt faithfully D. 19.332, dv lip' aov TLv Xa.p.f3av-n >fevo6p.evov if then he catch any body else lying P. H. 389 d, 1} ht{3ovX.Uwv aI~K'YJTa< if he be detected in plotting X. Ag. 8. 3. b. o< T1jv "Iiov aw~<v epiffKov~< ~tf;[~, o~a.v r1)v px1)v rfis ~xOp'YJS they conelude that the beginning of their enrnity was on account of the capture of Iliurn Hdt.l. 5. 2114. It is often difficult to distinguish the two constructions of 2113. Th us, Ka.Ta.a.p.f3rlvov~< vew~rl ~ra~ ras 'TWV 'AIJ'Y}valwv lvavrlavs K7r7rTWK6ras (T. 7. 33) may mean they fou nd that the anti-.Athenian party had been recently expelled by a revolution (ind. dise.) or them recently expelled (not in ind. dise.). So Kara.ap.f3avov~< . rcia tj;e~T'YJK6ra they found the other cities in a state of revolt T. 1. 59 (that they had revolted would be possible). In the meaning discover, find Kara.dp.{3avw doeS not take the aorist particip]e, 2115. 1ra<w meaning represent has the construction of the verbs of 2113. Thus, 7r7J~<rilovras ros Oeos rots v1Jpw1ra<s olov r' arots 1ro<fi~a' it is possible for them (poets) to represent the gods as drawing nigh to men I. 9. 9. Cp. 2142.
OMISSION OF

.:lv

2116.

The participle

~vis

often omitted.

2117. After are, oia, ws, or Kal1rep, &v is often omitted in prose with predicate adjectives: ~vvoel1rvovs ~a{3ev dp.tj;adpavs 1rpos iavrv ws </JIovs 1fo7J (ovras) he took both to supper with him since they were now friends X. C. 3. 2. 25. Such omission is rare in prose except after these particles: el ijrrovs (5vns) rwv 7rOep.iwv 7JtfJ07J~op.eOa if we shall be cauuht at the mercy of our enernies X. A. 5. 6. 13. With predicate substantives, even after these particles, &v is very rarely omitted (P. R. 568 b). a. In the genitive and accusative absolute the particles of 2117 usually precede when &v is omitted. Wth the genitive absolute the omission is very rare in prose: ws hoip.wv (ovrwv) XP'YJP.rlrwv just as though the property was at their

2122]

THE l'AltTICIPLE

473

disposal X. A. 7. 8. 11; but ~1-dpiis 1fo'l (o6a-71s) it being already day T. 5.59. In poetry the substantive usually suggests the verb : vif>'l''ITJpos oo<vs (/!v-ros) if>l"A.wv with no friend to guide him S. O. C. 1588. Accusative absolute : ws Ko."A.v (ov) ')'opdJ<a-Oo.t o.-rov on the grou nd that it is admiral1le fo7 it (the speech) to be delivered T. 2. 35. Withotlt the particles of 2117, the omission of 6v is poetical (S. Ant. 44). The omission of 6v with adjectives ending in -o aids euphony. b. Kwv willing, tiKwv unwilling are treated like participles (2071): /-W p)v ox K6v-ros against rny will S. Aj. 455. c. I!Jv must be used when it has the force of in the capacity of. 2118. A predicate substantive or adjective, coordinated with a participle in the sarne construction, may omit I!Jv; as o !H/owv i]v !-''!) Mp6o<s Ko.l "A."A.?j:\ous rr<p<!-L<iviia-< o"A.Ov -r'!)v rro"A.!-Lliiv it was not easy for them to pass th1ough the enemy's country except in a body and after having waited fo7 one another T. 5. (J4. 2119. I!Jv may be omitted with verbs taking a supplementary participle ; so with verbs meaning to perceive (2111 ff.), know, show, announce, find, discovm, etc.; especially with cpo.lvo!-Lo.<, -rv')'x<ivw (poet. Kupw), l<o.n"A.w, o<a.')'l')'vo!Lo.<, rarely with rr<pwpw and a-v,.,f3o.lvw. Th us, opw !L')'o.v (i!v-ro.) -rv ')'wvo. I see that the contest is important T. 2. 45, il.v Xppov?j,np rrviJwYO <Pl"A.L'Tr'TrOV (5v-ro.) if you lea1n that Philip is in Ghenonesns D. 4. 41, if;euo~s cpo.lvoLTO (I!Jv) b rwftpuis if Gobryas seem to be jal se X. C. 5. 2. 4, d ns !!vous ( I!Jv) -ru')'x<iv< if any one happ ens to be friendly Ar. Eccl. 1141, xlrwv (I!Jv) o<o.n"A.fis you aTe continually without a tunic X. M. 1. 6. 2.

'fls

WITH A PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2120. ws- is often used with a participle in indirect discourse to mark the mental attitude of the subject of the main verb or of some other person mentioned prominently in the sentence (cp. 2086); sometimes, to denote emphasis, when that mental attitude is already clearly marked. ws 1-'TJfifv do6-r' ta-0< 1-' be assured that I lcnow nothing (lit. understand that you are to assume that I lcnow nothing) S. Ph. 253, of}Xos fjv Kupos ws a-rruowv Cyrus was plain/y bent on haste (Cyrus showed that it was his intention to make haste) X. A. 1. 5. 9. 1 2121. A participle with ws may follow a verb of thinlcing or saying though the verb in question does not take the participle. in indirect discourse without ws. Th us, ws -r f3huY-ro. f3ov"A.euovns icrxpljono they kept insisting in the beli~f that they wme 1eco1mnending the best course T. 4. 68, ws u-rpo.-r7J')'~uov-r' !-L -ro.UTTJ> -r'!)v urpo.TTJ')'liiv 1-'TJfiEls b,.,wv "A.e')'hw let no one of you say (i.e. spealc of me in the belie.f) that I will assume this command X. A. 1. 3. 15. 2122. So after verbs admitting the supplementary participle in indirect discourse we may have the genitive or accusative absolute with ws instead of the participle or a clause with Sn or ws. Th us, ws rro"A.!-Lov 6vros rro.p {j!Lw rro.')'')'<w; shall I 1eport j1om you (on the assumption) that the1e is war .P X. A. 2. 1. 21.
Ws
JM>

o v l6vros, hry Kcil [,J..I.s, orw T}]v

"jvWfJ.'YJP gxere

1nake up your 1nincls (on

the ass!<mption) that I am going whe1ever you go ( = be sure that I am going,

474

SYNT AX OF THE Sll\lPLE SENTENCE

[2123

etc.) 1. 3. 6 (he r1}v "fVWf.LTJV lixr could not take the participle without ws) ; ws 1ravv p.o' ooKov, orws (<J'fh !'est assuTed that it is my decided opinion (lit. on the assumption that this seems so to me, unde1stand acconlingly) X. M. 4. 2. 30. For ws with the absolute participle not in indirect dis course, see 2086 d.
VERBS TAKING EITHER THE PARTICIPLE OR THE INFINITIVE

2123. Some verbs admit either the supplementary participle or tl1e infinitive, sometimes with only a slight difference in meaning. Cases where the difference is marked are given below. (Most of the verbs in question admit also a substantive clause with on or w;;, 2577). 2124. Infinitive and participle here differ greatly when the infinitive expresses pmpose or result. \Vhere the infinitive shows only its abstract verbal meaning it differs but little from the participle (cp. 2144). 2125. A participle or infinitive standing in indirect discourse is indicated in 2126-2143 by O(ratio) O(bliqua); when not standing in O. O. this fact is ordinarily not indicated. 2126. at.,..x\hop.a and at8ovp.a with part. (2100) = I am ashamed of doing something wl>iuh I do ; with inf. = I am ashmned to do something which I have refrained from doing np to the present time and may never do. Thus, roro p.v oK a.l<J'x6vowu l')'wv ro o a.l<J'xvolp.TJV v l"f<Lv I am not ashamed of saying this; b~tt the jiJllowing I should 7Je a-~hamecl to say X. C. 5. 1. 21, a.l<J'xvvop.a.t ov &p.'iv l1rv r&:I\TJfifj, !Jp.ws o pTJTov I am aslwrnetl to spealc the t1uth _to you; neveTtheless it rnust be spolcr~1.' l'. A. 22 b. \Vith a negative the distinction may disappear: o&ri' alrrx6vH <j>Oovov iilKTJV El<J'd.')'ELP (v.l. l<J'd.')'wV), OVK aOtKf}p.a.ros oiiv6s, Ka.i vop.ovs wra..,-o,Gv; a1e yon not ashamed to l!Ting a cause into court out of envy -not fu1' any o.{fence- and to alteT laws? D. 18. 121. 2127. civxo!"a. (20!)8; rareJywith the inf.), *Tac.> and Top.w (both rarely with the part. in poetry), V1TOfJ.vc.>: with part.= enrlwP., subrnit to something that is present or past ; witll inf. ventwe or have the coumge to do something in the future. 'Th us, 7ra<J'xovrs f}veixovro they snbmitted to su.ffeT 'l'. 1. 77, civ.!<J'xovro TOP f7r,OPTa. hri TTJV xwpv M~a.(J'{Ia,, they had the CO!ll'age to Teceive the invacleT of theiT count1'y Hdt. 7.139; 1roa. . <j>rriv 'AKf.Lf}PTJS 1rpOvra. rM)va.t they say, that Alcm'ene's son bme up in bondage (lit. having been sold) A. Ag. 1041; hop. [3aMp.<vos he subrnitted to be stTuclc w 161, rOf.LTJG'Ov opOws </Jpovv srtpere aucle A. Pr. 1000; ovx u1rop..!v" w</Jovp.vos he cannot stand being i1npToved P. G. 505 c, vp.owv.!ov<J'< x'ipa.s p.oi civra.Hpop.Eva< if they shall daTe to mise thei1' hands against me Hdt. 7. 101. 2128. iipxo!"a., cp. 1734 (Hom. tipxw) wit.h part. (2098), begin to do smnething and continue with somethiug else; with inf. (usnally present, cp. 1865 b) begin to do something and continue with the sn.me tlring. Thus, tip~of.La.' o'oarrKwv K rwv O.twv I !Vill begin my instTuction with things divine (lat.er the snbject is the (](sire for wealth) X.\:. R. 8. 2, 1r6fiv 1fp~ar6 rr otiid.rrKHv r~v G'rpaTTJ"fiv; at u;hot point dl he berlin to /.11(('h yo11 ur:ueralship? X. M. 3. 1. 5. llpxop.a.t with the participle occurs only in Xenophon and l'lato.

2137]

VERI3S TAKING THE PARTICIPLI~ OR INFINITIVE 475

2129. yyvw<J"KO> with part. in O. O. (2100) = Tecognize that scnnething is; with inf.in tinee uses: (1) in O. O. =judge (dc!cide) that .~omething is (a verb of will), as t-yvwqav K<poa<ciJr<pov <va< they judged that it VJa:; moTe JWofiiable X. A.l. 9. 17 ; (2) not in O. O.= resolve, rleteTmine to do something, as 1!-yvw O<WKv ros h rwv <Dwvvp.wv 7rpouKp.vovs he resolved ta puTsue those who were hanging on his left X. H. 4. (i. 9; (3) not in O. O.= leam how to do something (rarely), as -yl-yvw(J'K< r?js 6p-yijs Kparv learn to cont1ol th y tempeT Men. Sent. 20. 2130. 8E(Kvp.L with part. in O. O. (2106) =show that somrthing is; with inf. ( a7roo<lKvp.<) not in O. O. = show how to do somethiny, inst1uct. Th us, ,.fli~av o! +n<p.ov<s f..ap.{Javv r 11"<r1,oa the guides di1ected them to talee pTovisions X.A.2.3.14. 2131. 81]c\l with part. (and inf.) in O. O. (2100) = sh01o that sometking is, indicate; with inf. not in O. O. = cmnm~Ynd, make known, signify; as in KTJpb-yp.au /5-f,f..ov ros <viJ<pls iiop.vovs ws 1rps qv.u.~axov avrv 11'apva< lw made known by pToclarnation that ihose tvho wantetl freedom should come to kim as an ally X. Ag. 1. 33. 2132. 8oKLp.6.t"' with part. in O. O. (2~0()) = p1ove to be, as o1rool uves i!vr<s aorol ,..pl r1)v 11'0<v UioK<p.auBTJT< what so1t of penons you p1oved youTselves to be

in Tega1d to the city J,. 31. 34 ; with inf. in O. O. = p1'0nounce an opinion to be eo1'1'ect. Thus, UioK<p.auap.Ev .vopl Ka'iJ re K-yaB0 p"{aul.v dva< . KparlurTJP -yewp-yl.v we app1oved the idea that tilling of the soil is the best occupation foT a gentleman X. O. G. 8. 2133. oLKa. (1 OS:J, 2089 c) with nom. part.= appear, oftener with dat. part. (strictly =am like), appeaT; with inf. = seem. Th us, olmn rvpavvlq< p.ov -1)7roirla.<s i]obwvo< you appea1 to take clelight in despotisrns Tather than in constitutional gove1nments X. H. 6. 3. 8, ~o<Kas oii<6u ros 1roolls strictly yo11 me like one who jea1s (i.e. you appea1 to feaT) the multitude P. R. 527 d, oK to<K<v <li5va< he seerns not to know X. A p. 29, go,Ka 11'0<Kripv u methinlcs I pity thee S. Ph. 317. 2134. 1fLa.v06.vop.a.L with part. in O. O. (2106) = fM'get that sornething is; with inf. not in O. O. = foTget (how) ta do sornething. Th us, ol'Yov 11'<a.86p.<B' El7rv I have alrnost foTgotten to mention P. R. 5G!3b. 2135. Eup(<I"KO> with part. in O. O. =juclge and not in O. O. (2113) =fincl that something is; less often with inf. in O. O. = judge, as lp<(J'K< raura Ka<p<ciJrara va< he jound (judged) that this was the most opportune way Hdt. 1. 125. vpl(J'KOiJ-a< rarely with inf. =find how to (E. Med. 196), p1ocuTe by asking (Hdt. 9. 28). 2136. p.a.v66.v01 with part. in O. O. (2106) = lewn that something is; with inf. not in O. O.= learn (how) to do smnething. 'l'hus, ii<a{J<{JTJiJ-hos ou p.avBavm you do not pe1ceive that vou have bPen calurnniaterl Hdt. 3. 1, &v hra~ p.aBwwv &:nol lijv if we once le.arn to live in idleness X. A. 3. 2. 25. 2137. p.E9t1Jp.L (let go), etc., with p<1rt. = leave o.tf; with inf. = neglect, peTmit. Thus, o -y.p avle< 11'<Wv for he dl not stop coming after them Hdt. 4. 125, p.eBq< r. oovra 7rpdTTLV they neglect to pm1orrn theil' duties x. M. 2. 1. 33, p.eBewa JLOL "fLV allOWing Jne tO spealc 8. EJ. 28.,

47H

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE

SE~TENCE

2138 fLfLV1JfLO.L wit.h part. in O. O. (2106) = 1emmnbe1 that something is; with iuf. uut in ( >. ( >. = re1nembe1 ta do sornething. 'l'hus, p.ep.vrw8w d.v1)p d.-ya8s <vat le.t hirn be miurlful to be a brave man X. A. 3. 2. 39. 2139. ot8a. and 11"L<TTctfLctL with part. in O. O. (2106) = lcnow that sornething is; with inf. not in O. O. =lcnow how to do something. Th us, brurrap.evos v<iv knowing how to swirn X. A. 5. 7. 25. In poetry (very rarely in prose, except with hrlCJrap.at in IIdt.) these verbs take also the inf. (in O. O.) in the meaning know or believe: "IrtCJrap.e8a. wh 1rw 1ror arv lf;Jos aK<"iv we know that he has never yet spoken falsehood S. A nt. 1094. 2140. 1ra.vw with part. (2098) =stop what is taking place; with inf. = p1event something from taking place. Th us, if1raVCJa.v <f>o{3ovp.vovs 1r Mj8os vewv they stopped theil te1T01" at the number of ships P. Men ex. 241 b, 1rav<Javns r p.1) 1rpo<J<8v -y-ys r1)v cJKaa. preventing the 1nerchantrnan jiorn dmwing near T. 7. 53. 2141. 11"EpLopc>, etc. (2103) with pres. part. = view with indifference, with aor. part.= shut one's eyes to; with inf. =let sornething happen through negligence, or simply pe1mit (<v). Thus, 7r<pto< rv aroiJ 1rarpa. Kal )wvra rwv d.va-yKalwv (J"Travl)ovra Ka.l r<<VTTj(fa.vr' o& rvx6vra TWV vop.lp.wv he looked on with ind(ffeJence while his own father was in want of necessities when alive and (shut his eyes) to his failure to receive the custornmy Tites afte1 he had passed away Dinarchus 2. 8, oi 'Axap"ijs . ou 7r<pt6if;eCJ8aL l06Kov" T CJ<f>npa. (itatp8apvra it did not seem likely that the AchaT1ans would shut theil" eyes to the destruction of their prope1ty T. 2. 20, ou' f(JtfVaL ~<f>a.CJav 7rpt61f;eCJ"8aL ovfva they refused to pe1mit any one to enter 4, 48. 2142. 1I"OLcil with part. (2115) = 1epresent; with inf. not in O. O.:= cause, ejfect; with inf. in O. O. =assume. 'l'hus, vwvvp.ovs ros 11.\\ovs <Tva< 1rot< causes the. othe1s to lose theil names Ht. 7.129, 1rotc!Jp.eOa. (conj. rl olwp.<Oa) rv <f>t\6CJo<f>ov vop.l)v Kr . let us assume that the phosophe1 hols, etc. P. R. 581 d. 2143. <j>a.Cvop.a.L with part in Q. O. (2106) = I am plainly; with inf. in O. O. = I seem or it appears (but may not be true) th at I. Thus, <f>a.lverat rd\7]0ij \-ywv he is evidently spealcing the truth, <jJalverat rrl\7JI3ij ')'ELv he appems to be speaking the tru th (but he may be lying). Cp. riJ <f>wviJ Ka.lnv l<f>a.lvero lit. by his voice it appeared that he was weeping (but he was not weeping) X. S. 1. 15. The above distinction is, however, not always maintained. 2144: The following verbs take either the participle or the infini-

tive (in O. 0.) with no (or only slight) difference in meaning:

alCJ8avop.a<, Kovw, 1rvv8avop.at (2112), d.-y-yw (2106), Ka8l)w (2105) and Ka8lCJT"fJfJ.'' 7rapaCJKEvajop.at, OfJ.oo-yw (210G), 7rpwp.a< (2102), E1rtrpt!1rw and ''OfJ.l)w (part. rare), 1roKap.vw (inf. rare), Oavp.&.)w wonder, rlO"fJfJ.' suppose, the expressions of 2104, etc. Both infinitive and participle with 1rvv8avop.at in Hdt. 5. 15,

8. 40,

2145. Verbs of intellectual perception (2112 b) take also Zn or So with dK01!w, aluBvop.at, 7rvvB&.vop.aL. Cp.

w.

d.Kovw with gen. part.== I hear (with my own ears). d.Kovw with accus. part. = I hear (through othem, i.e. I am told) that. Kovw with inf. ~ I hear (of general, not certain knowlege, as by 1eport) that,

2147]

IMARKS ON

SO~

T;SES OF P ARTICU'LES

477

" av represents the indicative with av (1784 ff.) or the potential optative with v (1824). The present participle with av thus represents either the imperfect indicative with av or the present optative with av; the aorist participle with av represents either the aorist indicative with av or the aorist optative with &.v. Cp. 1845 ff.
THE P ARTICIPLE WITH

2146. The participle with

av

REMARKS ON SOME USES OF PARTICIPLES

2147. The abundance of its l)articiples is one of the characteristic features of Greek. Their use gives brevity to the sentence (cp. 2050), enal>ling the writer to set forth in a word modifications and amplifications of the main thought for which we require cumbersome relative clauses. But an excessive use of participles, especially in close conjunction, marked a careless style. a. The participle may contain the leading thought, the finite verb the subordinate tlwught, of a sentence. Thus, ro ..pr,cpurp.a. roro 'YPacf>w . ros 5pKous
TTJV ra.xicrTTJV rro/..a.p.f3vew, x6vrwv TWV 8pq.KWV Ta.i!Ta. ni xwpia., Il. vv ovros odcrpe . , ovrw 'Yi'Yvotv8' ol lipKo< I moved this bill that the envoys should

tv

with all speecl 1eeeive Philip's oaths in OTdrw that when the oaths weTe taken the ThTacians might be in possession of the places which the plaintiff has just now been ridiculing (lit. while the Tlwacians we1e in possession, etc . . . . the oaths might unde1 these ciTcumstances be 1atified) D.18. 27, (3ou/..op.a.< o/..i'Ya. Ka.rpous vap.vf,criis Kara.f3a.lvetv I wish to 1ecall a few things to the memory of each party and then sit down (clescenll from the bema) L. 12. 92. Cp. also 2096, 2099. b. The participle may repeat the stem and meaning of the finite verb. Thus, Ka! evx6p.evos /iv ns rara el!~a<ro and sorne one might (praying) utter this prayer Ant. . 1. c. .A participial construction may pass over into a construction with a :finite verb. Th us, p.aprupa. p. v . . . ovMva rrapacrx6wvos . . rra.p<KEvero f KT/... lit. pToducing on the one hand no witness . . . on the otheT hand he exhorted, etc. D. 57. 11, rrpocr(:Ja/..ov Trfl ntxlcrp.a.TL, li'IJ re rp6rr'l' rretpd.cravns K< 1-'TJxa.vTjv rrpocrf}-ya")'OP lit. they attacked the rmn]a?t bath making tl"ial in othe1 ways, and they brot1ght ttp an engine (i.e. ancl afteT tTying otheT deviees bTought up an engine) T. 4.100. d. A participle may be usecl in close connection with a relative or interrogative pronoun. Thus, oi5' urrcp ota. 1rE'IrOLTJK6rwv v8p<.inrwv KLVOveV~Tf OLaO'Ytcrp.eVOL not even calculating what harZ been the wnrl1ct of the men for whorn you wme going tO 1'isk YOUT li'I!CS J). 18. 98, auvop.<!vwv Ka! {JptSO}J.vWV Kal ri KaKOV OVXl rra.crx6vrwv rra' Tj olKoup.vTJ p.ecrr-q 'Yhove the whole civili::::ecl ti'mld is filled with men who me haJTied to ancl fro and insulted, nay, ~11hat misety is theTe which they do not su.f/"e!-? 18. 48. e. In contrasta, two subjects may, by anacoluthon, belong to one participle in the nominative, though the participle belongs to on! y one subject (T. 3. 34. 3). f. Two or more participles may be coordinated without any connective.

478

SYNT AX OF THE SH.U'LE SENTENCE

This is common in Homer wh en one participle forms a contrast to, or intensifies, another participle. Cp. 1} Kat hwpT' 'Ax<i)< KvKwp.evos if;uu 06wv, fJ.OPf.LVpwv (uppcp KT l\. he spake, and swelling in tumult Tushed upon .Achilles, mging on h igh, Toming with joam, etc. <P :,)24. This is very rare in prose (Aes. 3. 114). g. In prose such coordination without any connective is incomplete, one participle, e.g., often defining another, as in o Kpos 1rol\a(3wv Tos <j>dryovTas crv)\l\~iis crTpaTEvp.a hol\t6pKEL Mi>JTov taking the exile$ wuleT his protection, Cyrus collected an army, and laid siege to 11filetus X. A. 1. 1. 7. Su even when the participles are uonnected, as ~>Jpii.viis Ti} v OLWpvxa Kat 7rapaTp"fiis /i.17 TO vowp by dmining the canal and (i.e. in consequence of) diverting the water elsewhrre T. 1. 109. One participle n:Jay be appositive to anotber. 'l'hus, !~hacr<v 7ro<1,cravres lv To'is br1recn, </>ritJ'Kovres Elva.t (3oV.e<r8at 1r6crot efev . . . , iKlevov :rro"'fprl.ped-Oat 1ravTas l1y making a review .in the presence of the cavalry, alleging that

they wished to find out how many they we1e, they orclered all to insc1ibe themselves X. H. 2. 4. 8. h. A participle with case absolute may be coirdinated with a participle not in m1 absolute case. Thus, o! il d.</J<KOIJ.fV'JS Tijs vews Kat d.ve7r<CTTov Ti}v eTvxliiv aKocravTEs 1rol\ heppwcr8'7crav they weTe nwrh encouraged on the arrital oj the ship and on heming of the success which was unhoped for T. 8. 106, !J.ETa7rE!J..p!Uvre~ 1f'Mo!J.EV?) oi5evs Ka.icravros we came summoned or at no one's call L.4. 11. i. A finite verb may have two or more participles attached to it in different relations. Thns, ol 1rTaCTTat 7rpoopa!J.6VTS i5ta(3avTS Ti)v xapaopiiv, opwvTES 1rp6(3ara 1rol\l\ 1rpocr(3al\l\ov 1rps To xwplov the light-armecl t1oops ajte1 running jorwarcl and crossing the mvine; Jlroceecl to attack the strongholcl on seeing quantitics of sheep X. A. 5. 2. 4. Of severa! aorist participles, one may be relatively earlier in time than another. j: A participle may be added .predicatively to another participle, and often follows the article belouging to the main participle. Thus, o! )wvres KaTaetTrowvo< those who were being le.ft liehind alive T. 7. 75. k. A participle is often omit.ted when it can be supplied from the context. Thns, wp!J.lcravTo Kat aTot . . . hredii] Kat Tos 'A8>7vaious ( op!J.LCTap.{vovs) eT~ov they too came to anchor wh en they saw th at the .Athenians had do ne so T. 2. 86.
2148. The participle often agrees with the logical, and not with the grammatical, subject. The participle thus often agrees with the subject of the fiuite verb which the writer had in mind when he be gan the sentence, but for w llieh he later substitutes another verb; or the participle may later be used as if in agreement with the subject of another finite verb than the one actually employed. a. A participle in the nominative m<ty belong to a finite verb requiring an oblique case. 'l'hus, d.7ro(3l\if;iis rrps 70TOV TOI' (J"TOOV . . , no~ !J.O< 7ra-yKaos el va< ( = 1J"Y11(Ja!J.'1V 1ra-yKal\ov eT va<) on looking at this expedition, it seem~d to rne to be very clmimble P. L. 686 d, lfxovTes . . d.pxi]v !J."YicrT>JV . . , Bf.Lws oiiv ToTwv i]!J.S hri)pe ( = ooevt TOTwv h-f,pO>Jwv) l~au.apTEv nlthongh we possesse<l the g1eatest empi1e . . . neve~theless none of tlwse 1easons inducecl us to ela ~mong I. 4. 108, l!oo~ev aTos ( = l(3ovl\ecravTo) ol Tovs 1rapov$ f.L6vov d.TrOKTEva< d.l\l\ Kat TOS aTravTaS MvT<>JPa[ovs brtKaOVTS Ti]P d.7r6CTTaCTLV KT. they decided

2149]

VERBAL ADJECTIVES JN -ror;

479

to rmt to cleuth not mmely those who wme the re but also all the Mytilenaeans, W'{ting against them their revolt, etc. 'l'. :t 30. b. 'l'wo or more substr~,ntives or pronounR with their participles may stand in partitive apposition (081) to the logical subject. 'l'hus, r 11'<pl liuov u1r' wf>ortfpwv Kar Kparos 11'o<pro ( = wf>6r<pot 'rrofjJ.ovv), 'AO'T)van ph . . . r-I] v vija-ov 7rEpt7rfovus . , lleo1rovv1]a-w< 0 lv ri) f]1r<ip4J a-rparo11'<i5w6J-'evo< the wa1 at

Pylus was vigoTously waged by both sides, the Athenians on their pmt /Jy sailing a1ouncl the island ... the Peloponnesians /,y encamping on the mainland 'l'. 4. 23. Cp. M-yo< i5' lv 'l}o<o-<v lpp68ovv KaKoi, <f;ua~ -yxwv <f;uaKa bittm wo1ds j!ew loueZ from one to mwtheT, watchman accusing watchman S. A nt. 259. As the sentence stands, we expcct <f;uaKos l-yxovros q,uaKa, but the first clause is equivalent to KaKos M-yovs d1I'OJ-'<V 'l}ovs. Cp. Oavp.a\ovus linos tL4J ~e-y<v one spolce to the other in astonishrnent P. S. 220 c. Cp. 982. c. Without regard to the following construction, a participle may stand in the nominative. The use of the genitive absolute would here be proper, but would cause the main subject of the thought to occupy a subordinate position. 'l'hus, 1rmEG'WV ri) <Papvaf3sov o-rparo1r<o<i!f, rfjs J-'V 1rpo</>vaKfjs a&ro Ma-wv 5vrwv 1rool ~11'<a-ov attacking the camp of Pharnabazus, he slew a Zmge numbe7' ( = 1roos 1rKu<ve) of Mysians who constitutecl his aclvance gua1cl X. H. 4. 1. 24. N. The nominative participle is sometimes found in clauses without a finite verb, but only when some finite verb is to be supplied (cp. >!J fA), as with el, leiv, IJrav (X. l\L 2. 1. 2:i); with oa-a p.'lj as far as is possible (T. 1. 111) ; in replies in dialogue, where it stands in apposition to the subject of the preceding sentence (P. Ph. 74 b); oris interposed as a parenthesis (<i'i 1rowv in D. 23. 143). d. Likewise a participle may stand in the accusative or (r,arely) in the dative when the construction demands another case. 'l'hus, a-o1 M a-vy-yvWJ-'TJ (=a-v-y-yvwp.'T) la-r1 a-) "'j<LV rao' la-ri, 1-'-IJ 1raG'XOV<TfLV WS l-yw KaKWS it is XC1tSab/e for thee to speak th us, since thou clost not s1t.ffer cruelly as I clo E. Med. 814, 1jv h ')'vWp:YJ ro 'Apurrfws ( == goo~E rti} 'AptCTTEl), r J.v }M:O' fauro crrpar61reov ~XOYTL lv r<P la-O~J-0 7r<r'T)peiv ros 'AO'T)vaiovs A1isteus clecidecl to lceep his own forces at the Isthmus and watch fm the Athenians 'l'. 1. 62.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN --ros

On verbal adjectives in -r6s, -r~, -r6v, see 425 c, 472, 473. 2149. Verbal adjectives in -ro<; express necessity. They admit two constructions: 1. The personal construction (-ros, -ra, -rov), passive in meaning, and emphasizing the snbject. 2. The (more common) impersonal construction (-rov, -Tf.a, 1052), practically active in meaning, and emphasizing the action. Both constructions are, used with the copula dfL{, which may be omitted. The agent- the person on whom the necessity restsis expressed, if at all, by the dative (never by ii7T6 and the geniti ve).

480

SY~T AX

OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

2150. Verbal adjectives from transitive vcrbs take the persona! construction when the su!Jject is emphasized; but the impersonal construction, when the emphasis falls on the verbal adjective itself. Verbal adjectives from intransitive verbs (that is, such as are followed by the genitive or dative) take only the impersonal construction. a. Oblique cases of verbal adjectives are rare. Thus, 1rep! rwv Dp,'iv 7rpiiKrwv concerning what need be done by us D. . 28.
2151. The Persona! (Passive) Construction.- The personal verbal in -r,os is used only when the verb from which it is derived takes the aecusative. The verbal agrees with the snbject in gender, number, and case. The agent, if expressed, must always stand in the dative.
-rrorap.6s rts i,p,v l<rn ota{3aros a l'iver must be crossed by us X. A. 2. 4. 6, roiiro o& -rroL17rov this must not be do ne by me ( I must not do this) X. A. 1. 3. 15, oi crvp,p,axev lOovres ev -rrot17rot those who would be allies rnust be well t1eated X. M. 2. 6. 27, o& rocrara 6p'T/ opTE Dp,v ovra -rropevra ; do y ou not see such

,;"peX11 rii cro' r, -rr6ts luri the State must be brnrfited by you X. M. 3. 6. 3, lp,o!

high mountains that rnust be trave1sed by you? X. A. 2. 5. 18.

2152. The Impersonal (Active) Construction.- The impersonal verbal stands in the neuter nominative, usually singular (-rov), rarely plural (-ra). Its object stands in the case (genitive, dative, or accusative) required by the verb from which the verbal adjective is derived; verbs taking the genitive or dative have the impersonal construction only. The agent, if expressed, must always stand in the dative.
rej) .ciotKovn oor.!ov olK'T/V the wrong-doer rnust suffer punishment P. Eu th. 8 c, -rr<crr Kai op,f}povs ooriov Kai 'T/'Irr.fov we must give and 1eceive pledges 'and hostages X. H. 3. 2. 18, rv Oavarov i)p.'iv p,er' e&ilo~lis aipert!ov lcrrlv we must prejer death with honow I. 6. 91, -rrELcrriov 1rarps b"fots I rnust obey my father' s corn' mands K Hipp. 1182, '/rELcrrov rrioe (crol) thou rnust obey in this S. Ph. 994 (distinguish 7rELCJrov lcrrl cre one must persuade thee), <f>'TI!LL o7] f3o'T/87Jrov elva ros 7rpli"fp,acrtv ilp.'iv I say that you rnust 1endm assistance to the interests at stake D. 1. 17, ros <piovs eVep"fEr'T/rov, r7]v 7rD<v clJrpe'T/rov . . , rwv fJocrK'T/P.d.rwv 'lrLp,E'T/rov you must do good to ymt1 friends, benefit your State, talee care of your jlodcs X. M. 2. 1. 28, i,p,v ~vp,p.axo a"faOol, os o 7rapa.oora. ros 'AO.,valots lcrrlv

we have se1viceable allies, whom we must not abandon to the Athenians T. 1. 86, i1f!'TI<f>lcravro . 7roep,.,ra evat they voted that they must go to war 1. 88. a. Since the impersonal construction is virtually active, and hence equivalent to oe'i with the accusative and infinitive (active or middle), the agent sometimes stands in the accusative, as if dependent on oe. The copulais (perhaps) al ways omitted when the agent is expressed by the accusative. Thus, rv fJovMp.evov e&oaip,ova eva crwrppocrvv'T/v otwKrov Ka! cicrK'T/Tov ( = oe'i ouiJKeLv Ka.! cicrKev) it is necessary that the rnan who desires to be happy should pursue and practice temperance P. G. 507 c ..

2155]

SUMMARY OF FORMS OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

481

SUMMARY OF THE FORMS OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

906-2152 deal, in general, with the simple sentence. The following summary shows the chief forms of simple sentences (921) used in Attic.
2153.
STATEMENTS

l. Statements of Fact (direct assertions) as to the present, past, or future are made in the indieative mood (negative o), 1770. A. Statements of fact include statements of present, past, or future possibility, likelihood, or necessity, which are expressed by the indicative of a verb denoting possibility, likelihood, or necessity, and an infinitive (1774-1779). B. Statements of customary or repeated past action are made in the imperfect or aorist indicative with av (negative o), 1790. 2. Statement of Opinion (usually cautions, doubtful, or modest assertions) asto what rnay be (might be), can be (could be), may (rnight, could, would) have been, etc., are made: A. In reference to the 1wesent or past: by {3ov6p.:YJv /J.v I should like or I8hould have liked (negative o), 1789. (Rarely by the indicative withont av, negative p:l] or p.~ o, 1772.) B. In reference to the past: by the aorist or imperfect indicative with av (negative o), 1784, cp. 1786. . C. In reference to the present (statement of present opinion the verification of which is left to the future): by the optative with av (negative o), 1824. D. In referenee to the future: by the present subjunctive with p.~ or p.~ o (1801); by o p.~ with the aorist subjunctive to denote an emphatic denial (1804).
2154.
ASSUMPTIONS

Assumptions, ineluding concessions, are usually expressed by the imperative (negative p..~), 1839. Other forms occur, as KUL s~ with the indicative (negative o), 1771; a verb of assuming with the accu sative and infinitive, etc.
2155.
COMMANDS (INCLUDING EXHORTATIONS)

1. Positive Commands are expressed by the

A. Imperative, except in the first person (1835). B. Subjunctive, in the first person (1797). C. Future indicative (negative o) 1917, 1918; with d7rW> (1920).
GREEK GRAM.

-31

482

SY~TAX

OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCg

[zxs6

D. Optative witlwut /lv (1820); potential optative with /lv (negative o, 1830). E. Infinitive used independently (2013). 2. Negative Commans (Prohibitions, 1840), including Exhortations, are expressecl by p.~ with the A. Present imperative (1840) or aorist subjunctive (second or third person), 1800. B. Present or aorist subjunctive in the first person plural (1840). C. Aorist imperative in the third person (rare), 1840. D. Future indicative with O?Tw> p.~ (1920); with o fL~ (1919). E. Aorist subjunctive with hw> p.~ (rare),1800; witho p.~ (rare), 1800, N. F. Infinitive used independently (2013).
2156.
WISHES

1. ,.._~ is the negative of a direct expression of a wish, and of all indirect expressions of wish except ?TW> /lv with the optative and a form of {3ovop.at with the infinitive. 2. \iVshes for the futuje, whether the. object of the wish is reasonable or unreasonable, attainable or unattainable, are expressed by the optative with or without !fh or d yap (1814, 1815). Indirect expressions are: ?TW> /lv with the optative (1832); j3Jvo{,u.1Jv /lv with the infinitive (1827). 3. Wishes for the present: that something might be otherwise thau it 1l.ow is, are expressed by the imperfect with (h or d yap (1780). Indirect expressions are: 0q,ov (with or without d() or d yap) and the pi.'esent or aorist in finit~ ve (1781) ; f3ovop.1Jv ( with or without av) with the infinitive (1782, 1789). 4. Wishes for the past: that something might have been otherwise than it then was, are expressed by the aorist indicative with d() or 1 yap (1780). Indirect: tiJrpov (with or without d() or d yap) with the present or aorist infinitive (1781). 5. Uuattainable w-ishes for the present or past may be entirely reasonable.
2157.
QUESTIONS

A simple question results from making any form of statement interrogative. Direct and indirect questions are treated in 263G ff. See also the Index.
2158.

EXCLAMA TI ONS

Exclamations frm complete or incomplete (904) sentences. Direct and indirect exclamatory sentences are treated in 2681 ff. See also the Index.

COORDINATION AND SGBOlWINATION

COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES

483

COORDINATION AND SUBORDINATION

2159. All sentences other than simple sentences are formed by

combining simple sentences either by coordination or subordination. 2160. Coordination produces compound sentences, subordination produces complex sentences. Complex sentences have been developed out of coordinate independent sentences, one of which bas been subordinated in form, as in tbought, to another.
2161. Comparative Grammar shows that, historically, coordination was preceded by simple juxtaposition and followed by subordination. Thus the simplest fonn of associating the two ideas night fell and the en emy depwted was v~ l-yvero ol 'ffoJLwt chi]Mov (or in reverse order). From this was developed a closer connection by means of coordinating conjunctions, e.g. v~ (11-v) l-yvro, ol
o 7rOJ1-Wt .1rijOop Oro! o 'ffOJLWt .'ffijIIOP' V~ t"(VETO (Or VV~ "(p -ylvero), Or

v~ t"(vero Ka! o! 'ffoJLWt .1ri]Mov. Finally it was recognized that one of these ideas was a mere explanation, definition, or supplement of the other, and bence dependent or subordinate. This stage is represented by the complex sentence : bre! ( 5re) v~ t"(vEro, ol 'ffOJLW< .1ri]Mov or v~ t"(vEro, i),rrrE o! 7roJ1-W< .7rij7111ov, and so on to express varions other relations. Since Greek inherited from the parent Indo-European language both the subordinate and the coordinate sentence, it must be cleruly understood that the above examples of the process of development of sentence-building, though taken from Greek, illustrate an earlier period of the history of language than Greek as we have it. Though it may be possible to reconstruct the form of the earlier, c<iordinate sentence out of the Jater, subordinate sentence, and though we have examples of parallel coordinate and subordinate sentences in Greek, the subordinate sentence did not in G1eek regularly go through the previous stages of simple juxtaposition and coordination. A subordinate construction produced by analogy to another subordinate construction may not be resolved into the coordinate form.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE

2162. A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sen-

tences, grammatically independent of one another and generally united by a coordinating conjunction. Th us, Tfj 8 ixrTEpa{a. 7ropo)ovTo 8W. Tov 7rE3ov 1 Kat 1 TtCTa>pv'IJ> EL7rETo but on the next day they proceeded throuqh tlte plain and Tissaphernes kept follmving them X. A. 3. 4. 18.
a. Abbreviated compound sentences, i.e. sentences containing a compound subject with a single verbal predicate or a single subject with a compound verbal predicate, are treated in this book as expanded simple sentences (B23, 924). 2163. Greek bas, among others, the following coordinating conjunctions, the uses of which in connecting sentences, clauses, phrases, and single words are described under }>articles. A. Copulative conjunctions: Ti (enclitic), Ka{ and, T . T, T . . .

484

SYNTAX OF THE CO.MPOUND SENTENCE

Ka{, Kal . Ka{ bath . . . and, o-8 (p:q8) and not, nm, olr~ olr( (p:/jrt: . . JL~Tt:) neil hm . . . nm. B. Adversative conjunctions: .M but, 8 (postpositive, often with JLW in the preceding clause) but, and, .rp .but, yet, howeve1, JLf.vrot (postpositive) however, yet, Ka{rot and yet.

C. Disjunctive conjunctions:

or,

...

either . .. or, dn . ..

t:lr( (without a verb) either . . . or. D. Inferential conjunctions: l.pa then, accordingly, oilv therefore, then, vvv (in the poetic and enclitic forms vvv and viiv) then, therefore, ro{vw now, then, rotyp (poetic), rotyaprot, rotyapovv sa then, therefore. E. Causal conjunction: yap .for.
21.64. Compound sentences are divided into Copulative, Ad versative, Disjunctive, Iuferential, and Causal sentences.

ASYNDETON
21.65. Two or more sentences (or words) independent in form and thought, but juxtaposed, i.e. coordinated without any connective, are asyndetic (from a<Tvv8~rov not bound together), and such absence of connectives is called asyndeton.

a. The absence of connectives in a language so rich in means of coordination as is Greek is more striking than in other languages. Grammatical asyndeton cannat al ways be separated from 1'heto1ical asyndeton. Grammatical asyndeton is the absence of a conjunction where a connective might have been used without .marked influence on the character of the thought; as especially in exp lanatory sentences (often after a preparatory word, usually a demonstrative) which take np the matter just introduced ; also where, in place of a conjunction, a resumptive word, such a.~ auros, Tow.,-os, Tocro.,-os, iVTa8CL, o.,-w, etc., is employed. Rhetorical asyndeton is the abs.ence of a conjunction where the following sentence contains a distinct advance in the thought and not a mere formal explanation appended to the foregoing sentence. Rhetorical asyndeton generally expresses emotion of sorne sort, and is the mark of liveliness, rapidity, passion, or impressiveness, of thought, each idea being set forth sepamtely and distinctly. Thus, OVK rl.crefhjs; OVK wp.6s; OOK riKa8CLpTOS; 00 CT!Ko<f>avTT)S; is he not impious? is he not brutal? is he not impure? is he not a. pettifogger? D. 25. 63.
21.66.

Asyndeton is frequent in rapid and lively descriptions.

ntel'lOCJcing their shields, they shovecl, they fought, they slew, they were slain X. H. 4. 3. Hl, 7rpocr?recr6vns lp.axov.,-o, iw8ovv lw8ov.,-o, ~7r<L<Ov f?rCLlovTo falling upon thern, they fought; pushed (and) we1e p~tshed; struclc (and) were struclc X. C. 7. 1. 38. A Iso with anaphora (2167 c), as in ~xm 1rbluv, ~xm Tp<fJpm, gX"S xpfJp.aTCL, ~xm ilvop<Ls Tocro6.,-ovs you ha1'e a city, you have triremes, you have rnoney, yo1t have so rnany men X. A. 7.1. 21. Cp. T. 7. 71, D.19. 76, 10. 215, P. S. 197 d.
CTVfJ.f3rLMVTS TaS aCT7rlOaS fW80VT0 1 EfJ.aXOVTO, ri1rKTHVOV 1 a?r8VTJCTKOV

21.67.

Asyndeton also appears when the unconnected sentence

a. Surnmarizes the main contents, or expresses the result, of the preceding.

2169]

PARATAXIS

48{)

Thus, 1ravr'

~xs O"fov y01.t have the whole stmy A. Ag. 582, KTJK6a.TE, iwp6.Ka.TE, ,.,,.bv!Ja.u, ~x<r< oLK<i~<TE y ou have heanl, you have seen, you have suffered, you have the evide nee; pronounce you.r judgment L. 12. 100, <f>vXa.Kii pbrot 1rpo rwv ,.v)lwv vr<v~6f.'E!Ja. ~IYTL "f.p d TETO."fp.fl'TJ oK &v J.tXXetv Mot, lt<f>TJ Kpos, d'liA Uva.t however, we shall meet with a gua1d in f1ont of the gates, for one is always

stationed theTe. We must not delay, but advance, said Cy1us X. C. 7. 5. 25. This is often the case when a demonstrative takes up the foregoing thought (as tiio!;e ra.ra. X . A.l. 3. 20) or continues the narrative, as in KoviYiiut ros IYrpa.rrJ'YOs rara. too~e ro 1Yrp6.revJ.ta. 1Yuva"fa."fev4.4.19 (cp. 2061). b. Expresses a reason or explains the preceding. Thns, p.iKpov a' v1rvov Xa.xwv eoev /Jva.p tao!; v a.vrcp . . O'KTJ7r.ros 7T1Yv KT X. when he had s-natched a little sleep, he saw a vision; a bolt of lightning seemerl to him to fall, etc. X. A. 3. 1. 11, lKo 1rpos otKovs 1rs ,.. Kaowclwv <ws Ka come home ; all the Cadmean folk calls thee S. O. C. 741. Here "fap or apa. might have been nse. So often after a preparatory wor ( often a demonstrative) ; as ra.vrov of) J.'OL ooKe ror' upa. Ka!
1rep! r?]v >fvx?]v evat gvorJa. 1rLvra. fiYTlv v ri7 >fvxi7 hetil.v "fVJ.tvwBi7 ro IYWJ.ta.ros Kr X. now it se ems to me that this is the smne with regaTd to the soul too ; every-

thing in the soul is open to view when a man is stripped of his body P. G. 524 d, ivl J.'OV<tJ 7rpOXOVIYlV o! !7T7rfS 1JJ.tiiS <f>U"flV a.UTOLS !Y<f>a.IY7pOV IYTLV l} 1JJ.tV in One point al one has the cavalry the aclvantage of us: it is safe! fo1' thern to run away than for us X. A. 3. 2. 19, and so wh en tfJIY7Tp is followe by orrTw Ka.l (P. R 557 c). Also when J.'f" 'Y . o.! take up what precedes, as 8p.otbs 'Y 'ZbXwv VOJ.tOiJTTJS Ka.i Tip.oKpLTTJS. r;b "f ru D. 24. 106. Furthermore after 7KJ.tf)pwv o (!194), as T. 2. 50. c. Hepeats a significant word or phrase of the earlier sentence (anaphma). Thus, KaL 8r4J OKE 'Tara, vaTetvd:rw rT,v xepa . vretvav li1raVTES and let him who a}?}JToves this, hold up his ha nd; they all held up their hands X. A. 3. 2. 33. In poetry a thought is often repeated in a different form by means of a jnxta.posed sentence (S. Tr.1082). d. Sets forth a contrast in thought to the preceding. This is commoner in poetry than in prose. Thus, J.tXovra rara Twv ,.poKetJ.tvwv n xrn 1rpd1YIYELV this lies in the future; the pTesent must be thy care S. A nt. 1334. e. Introduces a new thonght or indicates a change to a new form of expression. Thus, XX' iTov, ~<f>TJ. 1rpwrbv p.e 7TOJ.t>fJIYa.TE XyeTE but we must procee, sai he. Fi1st recall to my mincl what you were saying P. Ph. 91 c. f. Is introduced by a word stressed by emotion, as ra.ra. D.3.32, l'lw 4.29.

On juxtaposition of participles, see 2147.

COORDINATION IN PLACE OF SUBOIWINATION- PARATAXJS

2168. The tenu parat:cis (1rapd.Ta~ts aTranging side by side), as here employed, is restrictecl to the arrangement of two independent sentences side by sicle, though one is in thought subordinate to the other.

a. In Greek, 1ra.pcl.ra~'s means simply coi:hdination in general, as 1rbra.!;ts means subordination.

2169.

In many cases parataxis is a common form of expression

486

SYNTAX OF THE CO:\lPOUND SENTENCE

not only in the earlier language of Homer, but also in Attic prose and poetry.
So frequently in Attic prose with Kal, T KaL, ap.a Kal, E8v~ Kal, and with 15f meaning for. 'l'hus, 1}15'1} i: 'fi v '{;i: . Ka1 ol KopivOw 1rpup.vav hpouovTo it was already late and (for wh en) the Gorinthians started to row asten~ T. 1. 50, Kal1jil'l} Tf 'fi v 1r<pl7r'A1}8oV<rav :yopav Kal ~pxovrat . K1jpvK<~ and it 1vas

alrearly about the time when the ma1ket-place fills and ( = when) hemlcls arrived X. A. 2. 1. 7, Ka1 ap.a Tar' ~E')'E Kal 1r?i<< and as saon as he sal this, he cleparted X. H. 7. 1. 28, 1rlO'raO'IJE }Jo6vot TWV 'E'A'A1jvwv rov~ -yaiJo~ li.vpa~ T}Joiiv Epf}O'ETE ill: . . 1rap fl}Jo'i:v O'rpaT'I}')'ov~ -yaiJov~ ( vaKELJI.vou~) y ou, alone anwng the Cheeks know how to honour men of merit; for you will fi nd statues of rave generals set up wnong you Lye. 51. Cp. O'Kt!{;a<IOE Dt! 'l'. 1. 143. a. Temporal conjunctions, as i}vlKa, are rarely used to introduce such clauses, which often indicate a sudden or decisive occurrence or simultaneous action. b. Thucydides is especially fond of Kal or Tf to coordinate two ideas, one of which is subordinate to the other.
2170. Parataxis often occurs w ben a thought naturally subordinate is made independent for the sake of emphasis or liveliness. Such rhetorical parataxis occurs chiefiy in the orators and in Pindar. So especially when Jlofv and Ot! are used to coordinate two contrasted clauses, the former of which is logically subordinate and inserted to heighten the force of the latter. Here English uses whereas, while. 'l'hus, alO'xp6v O'T<, <l i-yw Ji.v T i!p-ya ;wv 1rp }Jowv 1r6vwv 7rfJioELva, &Ji.E'i:~ il p.'IJil Tov~ !..6-you~ aTwv vt!/;EG"IJ< it is a shame that, whe1eas I have undergone the toil of exertions in your cause, you will not endure even their recital D. 18. 160.

2171. There exist many traces in Greek of the use of the older coordination in place of wbicb some fonn of subordination was adopted, either entirely or in part, in the later language.

a. 'l'hus several relative pronouns and adverbs were originally demonstrative, and as su ch pointed either to the earlier or the later clause. So o, i}, T6 ( 1105, cp. 1114): TEX<a il' t!~<vclp<!<, T ol 1r6p< xci'AK<o~ Ap'IJ~ (H 146) meant originally he st1ipped him of his wms; these bmzr.n Ares had given hi m. Tt!w~ so long is properly demonstrative, but bas acquired a relative fnnction in Kat Tw~ t!O'Tt
Ka<p6~, vT<MfJ<0'8E Twv 1rp.')'JioTwv

and while there is time, talee our policy in

hand D.l. 20.

2172. Homer often places two thoughts in juxtaposition without any regard for logical connection. This is especially common with ilf, Tt!, Kal, aTp, 'A'A. Th us, 1roM~ il' pu}Jo"'"fil~ l1r' aTij; vilpwv 1]ili: Kvvwv, ,-6 Tf 0'</J<O'<V (for ot~) v1rvos
6'Aw'A<v and there is laud clamottr around him of men and of dogs, and sleep is go ne from them K 185. a. So also in clauses preceded by a relative word ; as <To~ o Tavrl c:lpp.a<v< , lK il' 'E'At!v'l} Oa'AJioow . 1)'Au1Jev while he was pondering on this, (but) Helen came fo1th f1om her charnber a120, o~ KE 6<o'i:~ 11"<1rEiiJ'I}Ta<, Ji..a ,. liK'Auov atlTo 'whor.ver obeys the gods, (and) hirn they he ar A 218. b. This use appears even in Attic prose ; as olKouG"< il' lv JI.'~ Twv vofwwv o

2180]

SYNTAX OF THE Co:\tPLEX SENTENCE

487

p.e-ya'/l.v, Ka'/l.ercu i (for ~ Ka'/I.<rat) At1rapii. they dwell in one of the islands that is not large, and it (which) is called Lipara T. 3. 88. Cp. also 2837.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

2173. A complex sentence consists of a principal sentence and one or more subordinate, or dependent, sentences. 'l'he principal sentenee, as each subordinate sentence, has its own subject and predicate. The principal sentence of a complex sentence is called the principal clause, the subordinate sentence is calle the subordinate Clause. The principal clause may precede or follow the subordinate clause. 2174. The principal clause may have any form of the simple sentence.

a. Parentheses belonging to the thought of the en tire sentence, but standing in no close grammatical relation to it, connt as principal clauses. So op.at, oKw, <PnJJ.l, opiis ; olia, oli' or< ceTtainly (2585), v t"O' lcnow well, alroJJ.alii< 1 beseech thee; 1rws (1ro1Iov) IJodis; and 1rws ot<L; in the comic poetsand Euripides, etc. Sorne of these expressions are almost adverbial.
2175. The subordinate clause is always introduced by a subordinating eonjuuction, as d ij, 1rd since or when, on that, w> unt, etc. 2176. A finite mood in a subordinate clause may be in:flenced by the tense of the principal clause. If the verb of the principal clause stands in a secondary tense, the verb of the subordinate clause is often optative instead of indicative or subjunctive, as it would have been after a primary tense. Dependence of mood after a secondary tense is never indicated by the subjunctive. 2177. Each tense in a subordinate clause denotes stage of action; the tne is only relative to that of the leading verb. A subordinate clause may be marked by change of person in verb and pronoun .. 2178. A subordinate clause in English may be expressed in Greek by a predicate adjective or substantive. Cp. 11G9, 2G47. 2179.

A subordinate clause may be coordinate in structure.

1rd li' -twiHv<L t.ii.p<os Kal 7rw7rr<V< r<<vr7]v ro f3lov, c!f3ou\<ro o1 rw 1rali 1rapivat but when Dwius 1vas ill and suspected that his end was new, he wished his two sons to be by him. X. A. 1. 1. 1.

a. So a relative clause, though properly subordinate, may be equivalent to a coordinating clause: li' Dp,<< ll\J\o TL -yvwii<IIO<, Il p.7) -yvotro, rlv ot<IIO' ar1,v 1fx7Jv ~~av ; but if you decide othenvise,- and m.ay this never come to pass!what do you thinlc will be her feelings? D. 28. 21. In such cases os is equivalent to Ka2 oVros, oVros Of, oVros "'f&.,p.
2180. A clan se d<:>pendent upon the principal c-lause may itself be followed by a clause dependent upon itself (a sub-dependent clause).

488

SYNTAX .F THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2r8r

oi ' ~<'YOV (principal clause) oTL 7r<pl G'1rovwv 1]KoL<v /1,vl5p<s (dependent clause) of-rtv<s i1<a.vol l!G'ona< ,-ai'i'<a< (sub-dependent clause) and they said that

they ha come with regard to a truce and we1e men who were competent to . . . repoTt X. A. 2. 3. 4.
2181. A verb common to two clauses is generally placed in one clause and omitted from the other (so especially in comparative and relative clauses).
1)1r<p (-rvx'7) d f3-rov (scil. f7r<iJ-<<Ta<) 1) 7}f1-S 7Jf1.wv a{rrwv f1r<f1-ovf1-<0a fortune, which always cares better foT us than 'We for ourselves D. 4. 12. Also as in English: li TL O fl-<-re (7rpd<T<Tv), <Ms . . 7rpd<T<T< but whateve1 you inten, doit at one~ T. 7.15. In comparative clauses with ovx fJ<T?r<p (or ws) the main and the subordinate clause are sometirnes compressed, the predicate of the clause with ox being supplied from the fJ1T1r<p clause, which is made independent j aS OX (ofv lv f"{l"fVTO) fJIT7rp VV TOVTWV OOII "fl"fV<TaL 1rpt ar6v it would not be as now, when none of these things is done for him P. S. 189c.

ANTICIPATION (R PROLEPSIS)

2182. The subject of the dependent clause is often anticipated and made the object of the verb of the principal clause. This transference, which gi ves a more prominent plac'e to the subject of the subordinate clause, is called anticipation or p1olepsis (7rpo:qtfl<> taking . bejore).
Moo<Ka. ' au-rf]v p.f} TL f3ovdJ<TY/ viov but I fear lest she may devise something untoward E. Med. 37, fia<< au-rv BTL fl-G'ovl!xo< -ro II<p<T<Ko <T-rpa-revfJ.a-ros he knew that he hel the centle of the PeTsian army X. A. 1. 8. 21, 7r<f1-<ro arwv hrws <l vp?roa w.-reo'iev he took ca1e that they shoul(l al ways continue to be slaves X. C. 8.1. 44. Note op~s -rv <v-rp:1r!;ov ws i]s f3ios thou seest how sweet is the luxurious life E. fr. 1052. 3. a. Anticipation is especially common after verbs of saying, seeing, hearing, knowing, fearing, e:ffecting. b. Wh en a subordinate clause defines a verbal idea consisting of a verb and a substantive, its subject may pass into the principal clause as a genitive depending on the substantive of that clause: '!JMe o Ka! -roZs 'A01JvaloLS <vOs 7} {'"f<i -rw 1r6<wv on <j><G'rrn an there came straightway to the .Athenians also the report that the cities ha 1evolted T. 1. 61 (=on al 1r6m d<j><<T-rrn). c. The subject of the dependent clause may be 1mt first in its own clause: ""'X"Pi}G'Wfl-<V l7r<Zv, vi5pi -rl 7Tor' fG'rlv let us try to say what courage is P. Lach. 190 d. d. The object of the subordinate clause may be anticipated and made the object of the principal clause. 'rhus, lpwra. o A.pe'ios -rl]v -rlxv'1v el 1rlG'rat-ro Da1ius aslce if he understood the art Hdt. 3. 130. e. A stiJl freer use is seen in fOa.viJ-al<v au-rv o A6G'avopos ws Ka. r. 15fvpa. f'7 Lysanm marvelle at the /Jeauty uf his t1ees (for -r. 1Uvpa avro ws Kr .)

X. O. 4. 21.

zr8S]

ASSIMILATION OF MOODS
ASSIMILATION 01!' MOODS

481)

2183. The mood of a subordinate clause which is intimately connected with the thought of the clause on which it depends, is often assimilated to the mood of that clause. Such snbordinate clauses may be simply dependent or sub-dependent (2180).

a. This idiom is most marked in Unreal and Less Vivid Future conditions where the mood of the protasis is the same as that of the principal clause. It is also very corn mon when a past indicative or an optative at;t.racts the mood of a subordinate clause iutroduced by a relative word referring to indefinite persons or things or to an indefinite time or place. But subordinate clauses standing in a less close relation to the main clause, because they do not continue the same mental attitude but present a new shade of thought, retain their mood unassimilated; e.g. a relative clause, or a temporal clause expressing purpose, after an unreal condition may stand in the optative (Is. 4. 11, P. R. 600 e). On the other hand, there are many cases where the writer may, or may not, adopt modal assimilation without any great difference of meaning. The following sections give the chief occurrences of mood-assimilation apal't from that found in Unreal and Less Vivid Future conditions (2302, 2:329) :
2184. An indicative referring simply to the present or past remains una'ssimilated.
~vv<vl-yKo' p.v rara ws (3ou"Mp.<8a may this result as we desire T. 6. jl, viK0'7 ~ li n 'JT'cnv p.{H <ruvol<r<ov but may that prevail which is likely to be jo1 the common weal D. 4. 51, 'lT'eov a,a'lT'pd~wp.a' fop.a,, ij~w when I shall have tmnsacted what I want, I willretmn X. A. 2. 3. 29.

2185. Assimilation to the Indicative.- The suhordinate clause takes a past tense of the indicative in dependence on a past tense of the indicative (or its equivalent) denoting unreality.

a. Conditional relative clauses: fi p.v -yp Tjv p.o' xpi}p.am, ETf.''I<Tdp.,.,v av fm 1j I hacl mon(J?f, I should have assessed my penalty at the full sum that I was likely topa y P. A. 38 b, .t ... Kanp.aprupouv a p.7] <ra<j>ws if ,., ciKoi) iwurrdp.'f'JV, OECV av~</>,., 'JT'ctCTX<OV 'JT'' p.ou if I O?'OU{!ht in as evidence against him matte1s which I did not know certain/y but had leamed by hemsay, he would have said that he was suffering a gmve injustice at niy hands Ant. 5. 74. b. Temporal clauses: oK av 1T'au6p.,.,v . . . , ~ws ci'lT'<'IT'ECpaO,.,v rfjs <ro<j>lis rauT'f'J<ri I would not have ce(!Sed w~til I had made t1ial of this wisdom P. Crat. 396 c,
XP'f'JP.drwv o<ra ~p.eov hnirn'v xpf)v ,.,.r, 'lT'ponpov 1T'p! TWV op.OO'(OUfJ.iVwv <rv.u.Bou<V<w, 11'p1v 1T'<p1 TWV cip.<j>,. <rf3'7roup.lvwv ?]p.s oi"~"v they rmuht not to hat'e uiven advice conce~ning the mat-

ters of common agreement bejo?'e they instructed us on the 1natte1s in dispute I. 4. 19. c. Final clauses: he re the principal clause is fln unfulfilled wish, an unfulfillerl apodosis, or a question with o ; anrl the indicative in the final clause denotes that the purpose was not or cannat be attained, and cannot be reached by the will of the speaker. Tlms, el -yp &q,,ov olol ,., fva' oi 7J'oot r p.l-y,crra

490

SYJ\TAX OF THE COl\lPLEX SENTENCE

[2186

KaKt lp"tri!eu8a<, va oiol r< ?juav Kat cl."fa8, r Jl."f<ura would that the many weTe able to wu1k the gTeatest evil in oTdeT that they might be able (as they are not) to woTk also the great est good P. Cr. 44 d, l{JovMJl.rJV /iv "J;IJ1.wva ri) v atlri)v "fVWJl.rJV lJ1.0t lfxv va pq.iJiws II"fvwre r oiKa<a 1 should have liked Simon to be of the sarne opinion as my self in o1de1 that you rnight easily have Tendered a just ve1dict L. 3. 21, If a rt lvxvpa r6r< Xa{Jev, ws Jl.rJii' El lf3ov"!lero liJvvaro i~a1rarv 1 ought to have taken secu1ity at the ti me in 01de1 that he could not have cleceived us even if he wished X. A. 7. O. 23, ri iJf)r' otlK lfpp-.j;' J1.avrv rf)criJ' cl.1r 1rrp".s, o1rws rwv 1rrivrwv 1r6vwv ci?rrJXri"frJV; why incleed dicl I not hznl my self from this 1ock, that 1 rnight have beenfreedfTorn all these toils? A.l'r. 747. N. 1. -In this (post-Homeric) construction, va is the regular conjunction in prose ; ws and o1rws are rare. ll.v is very rarely added and is suspected (Is. 11. 0, I>. L. 959 e). N. 2. -Assimilation does not take place when the final clause is the essential thing and sets forth a real future pmpose of the agent of the leading verb, or does not show whether or not the pmpose was realized. This occurs especially after va = eo consilio ut, rarely after o1rws (X. A. 7. O. 10) ; after ws only in poetry and Xenophon. The subjunctive or optative is used when the pmpose of the agent, and not the non-fulfilment of the action, is emphasized. 'l'hus, Kalro< xpfiv u , . . 1j rorov t-tYJ -ypujJEtv 7} iKe'ivov etv, ox, lv' 8 fJoVH u "'f'VTJTaL, trrivra -r 7rpd-yJ1.ara uvvrapri;cu you OU{Iht eitheT not to have pmposed this law m to have TepPaled the othe~; not to have th1own eve1ything into confusion.to accornplish yom desi1e D. 24. 44. ' d. Causal clauses (rarely, as D. 50. 07). Modal assimilation never takes place in indirect questions or in clauses dependent on a verb of feaTing.

2186. Assimilation to the Optative.- When an optative of the principal clause refers to future time (potentiiJ>l optative aud optative of wish), the subordinate clause takes the optative by assimilation in the following cases. .
a. Conditional relative clauses (regularly): 1rws -y,p li. v (1882) ns, 1. 'Y Jl.TJ l1rlura<ro, ravra uo<f>s d7J; foi' how could any one !Je wise in that which he cloes not lcnow? X. M. 4. O. 7, 7'1s J1.<TEv iJvvatr' li. v vcp' ov Elli<l7J Ka Ms;. Kat cl."faOs voJ1.<!6J1.<vos; who could hate one by whorn he knew that he was regarded as bath beautiful and uood? X. S. 8. 17, Ifpoo< ns Jv tKacrros EliJEirJ rxvrJv would that every man would practise the cmft that he undentood Ar. Vesp. 1431, rls av . J1.6llo< (188:2), ouns o<a-y"f<l< r6.J1.' uw KaKri would that some one would come to

report within rn y tale of woe E. Hel. 435. N. 1. - I f the relative has a defini te antecedent, assimilation does not take place ; but not all relative clau~es with an indefinite antecedent are assimilated, Cp. ti!<J?r<p av Dp..wv tKa!JTO< a.icrxvv8El'rj ri) v rri~LV L1rV 'l,v av rax.Oii lv rciJ 7rOEJ1.4J as each one of y ou would be ashamed to lerwe the post to which he may be appointed in war Aes. 3 ..7. N. 2.- A relative clause dependiug on an infinitive rarely takes the optative: ci)l)l, To Jl.fV atlrv e"fV p..i) ua<f>w< EloelrJ <p-yeu8a< il< one shoulcl abstain fmm saying oneself what one dors nnt know foi ceT tain X. C. 1. 6. 19. (See 2573.) b. Temporal chtuses (regularly) : re8val7Jv, ore Jl.O< J1.1)Kfr< ravra Jl.o< may I

2188)

ASSIMILATION OF l\WODS

491

die when these things no longer delight me Mimnermus 1. 2, b ph Kwv mvwv </><i-yo av rnr6rE f3o6"!1.otro he who stmves of his own jree will can eat wheneve1 he wishes x. M. 2. 1.18, El Of 1raVV 0"1rOV06..\ot <jJa-yv, d7rOLM av D'TL 7ro.p Ta< -yvvat~lv <Jnv, gw< 7rapaTElva<p.t rorov KTX. but if he was very desirous of eating, I would tell him that "he was with the wornen" until I had torturerl hirn, etc. X. C. 1. 3. 11, o"!l.ow p.i]1rw, 1rp!v p.aOotp.t perish not yet . . . until I learn S. l'h. 961. But OOK av a1rMotp.< 1rplv av 1ravrtitraO"<P ~ a"jopii. "!l.v8ll I shall not be leaving until the gathering in the market-place is quite dispersed X. O. 12. 1. c. Final and object clauses (rarely in prose, but occasionally after an optative of wish in poetry): 1r<<P~fJ.7JV (&v) p.i} 1rp6<Jw !J-wv Evcu, va, < 1rov Katp< dT}, brupavd7Jv I will try to keep not far away f1'01n you, in otder that, if there slwuld be any occasion, I may show myself X. C. 2. 4.17 (and five other cases in X en.); ~Mo< l;,rw< "fvotro rwvo' !J-ol "!l.vr1Jp<o< may she come to p1ove my libe1atol' from this affliction A. Eum. 297. Ordinarily the subjunctive or future indicative is retained, as KvO[T}V av el< r 7rOa !J-f3alVLV Kpo< iwv ooi7] MiJ -ljp.s KaTaODIJ?l I should hesitate to embark on the vessels which Gy1us might give us lest he sink U8 x. A. 1. 3. 17' nOvaiT} v, olKTJV f7rtO<ls r</J aOLKOVTL, va p.i} vOoE p.vw Kara-ya<Tros let me die, when I hoe punished him who has do ne me wrong, that I may not remain here a laughing-stock P. A. 28 d. d. Indirect questions, when the direct question was a deliberative subjunctive: oVK av ~xo<s l~<Mwv 8 TL xp</Jo <Tavr</J if you should escape, you would not know what to do with you1selj P. Cr. 45 b ( = rl xpwJLaL ;). But when a direct question or a direct quo tati on stood in the indicative, that mood is reta,ined, as el ci7roox0elTJ rivas XP1i "1"teJOa, ro 1rat<Tiov if it should be settled who must lead the square X. A. 3. 2. 36. e. Very rarely in relative clauses of purpose (P. R. 578 e possibly); after IJJ<Ju (X. C. 5. 5. 30), and in dependent statements with on or ws (X. C. 3. 1. 28). f. Assimilation and non-assimilation may occur in the same sentence (E. Bacch. 1384 fi.)

2187. An optative referring to general past ti me in a general supposition usually assimilates the mood of a conditional relative or temporal clause depending on that optative.
i!xa<p<v o1ror.- rax<<Tra ruxovra< &v O<otvro 1ro1!'f1.1rO< but he was wont to rejoice wheneve1' he dismissed without delay his petitione1s with theil' 1equests granterl (lit. obtaining what they wanted) X. Ag. 9. 2. But the indicative may remain unassimilated, as d"!l. o Ka! hiMii o1r6u nvs toot rowrbv TL 7ro<fJ<Javras avr< lf3ov"!l.ero 1rotei'v and he was wont to honour with an invitation any wlwm he saw practising anything that he himself wished them to do X. C. 2. 1. 30. So when the optative refers to past time through dependence on a verb of past time, as 7rpO<JKa"!l.wv ro< q,l"!l.ovs 0"7rovl!aw"!l.o-yero w< OTJOi'J ov< T!J-~ sumrnoniny his friends he used to carry on a se1ious con1Jersation with them in arder to show whom he honoured X.A.l. 9. 28 (here ri!"0TJ would be possible).

2188. Assimilation to the Subjunctive.- Conditional relative clauses and temporal clauses referring to future or general present time, if dependent on a subjunctive, take the subjunctive.
a. In 1;eference to future time: rwv 1rpii.")'p.drwv ro< f3ov"!l.euop.lvovs ( "1"Y<<J0a.,

492
ii<), tv'

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2189

iiv h<ivo<s iioKi), raura 7rptirr'YJra< men of counsel must guide events in mder that tvlwt they 1esolve shall be accomplished D. 4. ;-)\). b. In reference to general present ti me : oo'' l7r<L-v wv av 7rpl'YJ1"U! KDpws 'Yv'YJTUL, r,;l 7rpoo6rn a-vp.{JoU'f' 7r<pl rwv 0<1rWV l!rt XP'firat 1!01' tchen he has become master oftvhat he pwchases, does he any longer employ the tmito1 to advise hi11~ cmwe1'J!ing his plans for the jutu1e D. 18. 47. But the indicative may occur (D. 22.22).
CLASSES OF SUBOI'tDINATE CLAUSES

2189. Subordinate clauses are of three classes : 1. Substantivai clauses: in which the subordinate clause plays the part of a substantive and is either the subject Ol' the objeet: aijov ..jv 1 on yyv> 1rov f3a(J'LEv> ..jv it was plain tlw.t the king was somewhere hard by X. A. 2. 3. 6, o-K tG'TE J o n 7TOLErE you do not know what you are doing l. 5. 16. 2. Adjectival (attributive) clauses: in which the subordinate clause plays the part of an adjective, and contains a relative whose antecedent (expressed or implied) stands in the principal clause: yE oq T~V i7TL(]'TO~v 1 ~'v E7Tf1-f if?{L7T7TO> come 1'ead the letter which Philip sent D.l8. 39 ( = -r~v v1ro <"Pt{7T7TOV 7TEp.<j>8EG'av). 3. Adverbial clauses: in which the subordinate clause plays the part of an adverb or adverbial expression modifying the principal danse in like manner as an adverb modifies a verb.
Kpav'Y'iJv 1ro'qv l1rolovv Kaovns ci'Ijovs, wa-n Kal ros 7rO<p.lovs Kovv they made a loud noise by calling each other so that even the enemy heard thern X. A. 2. 2. 17 (here wa-u Kovv may be regarded as having the force of an adverb: and in a manner audible even to the enemy); 7rws av o v opOws i'itKd.a-a<re 7r<pl arwv; <l rourovs lda-<r< rv vop.tl6p.<vov opKov i'iwp.oa-ap.lvovs Kar'YJ"(opfja-a< Kr .

hotv then would y ou judge co1rectly about them? if y ou pmrnit (i.e. by permitting) them to malce their accusations ajter having sworn the customary oath, etc. A nt. 5. 90. Cp. 1095 end.
2190. Accordingly all complex sentences may be classified as Substantivai sentences, Adjectival sentences, and Adverbial sentences. This division is, in general, the basis of the treatment. of complex sentences in this book, except when, for convenience, closely connected constructions are treated together; as in the case of (adverbial) pure final clauses and (substantivai) object clauses after verbs of effort and of fearing.

a. Sorne sentences may be classed both as substantiva] and adverbial, as clauses witb wa-n and o1rws. An adverbial or adjectival clause may assume a substantivai cbaracter (2247, 2488).

Oomplex sentences are considered in the following ordcr: Adverbial, Adjectival, Substantivai.

PUlWOSE CLAl:SES

493

ADVERBIAL COMPLEX SENTENCES (2193-2487)

2191. In an adverbial complex sentence the subordinate clause denotes some one of the following adverbial relations: pmpose (219.'3), cause (2240), result (2249), condition (2280), concession (2369), time (2383), comparison (2462). _ 2192. An adverbial sentence is introduced by a relative conjunction denoting purpose, cause, result, etc.
PURPOSE CLAUSES (FINAL CLAUSES)

2193. Final clauses denote purpose and are introduced by Zva, 61rw>, w in order that, that (Lat. ttt); negative Zva p.~, <nw> p.~, w> p.~,

and

p.~

alone, lest (Lat. ne).

a. Also by l>cppa., strict! y wh ile, until, in Epie and Lyric ; and ws in Epie (2418). ~va. is the chief 1ilml conjunction in Aristophanes, Herodotus, Plat, and the orators. It is the only purely final conj unction in that it does not li mit the idea of purpose by the ide a of ti me (like 5<f>pa and i!ws), or of mann er (like o'Jrws and 6Js); and therefore never takes /iv (kiv), since the purpose is regarded as free from al! conditions (2201 b). o1rws is the chief final conjunction in Thucydides, and in Xenophon (slightly more common than va). .OS often shows the original meaning in which way, how, as (cp. 2578, 2989). It is rare in prose, except in Xenophon, and does not occur on inscr:iptions; rare in Aristophanes, but common in tragedy, especially in Euripides. 1'-TJ is very rare in prose, except in Xenophon and Plato (fl.~ oi> is very rare in Homer and in Attic: X. M. 2. 2. 14). b. ln ortler that no one is 11a (etc.) f1.7JOels or fl.~ r<s, in order that . . . neve1 is va (etc.) p.1rrron or fl.-IJ 1ron, and in 01der th at . . . not is fJ.7JOf after fl.~ 2194. Final clauses were developed from original coordination.
M'lrn fl.' orn rcixurra 7riis 'AliJiio 1rep7Jcrw bu1y me with all speed; let me pass the gates of Hades .Y 71, where we have a sentence of will added withont any connective ; and (negative) a'Jr6crr<x fl.-IJ r< vofJcru HP'I depart lest Hera obse1ve aught A 522 (original! y let Hem not obse1ve anything, 1802). Even in Attic, where subordination is regular, the original form of coordination can be (theoretically) restored, as in Kc:tl cr 'R"ps . . IJewv !KvofJ.aL fl.TJ rrpoiJos -i)p..s -yhu and I entreat thee by the gos J do not j01sake us S. Aj. 588. We can no longer trace the original coordination with Tva and ws.

2195. A final clause stands in apposition to rovrov vEKa or &. rovro expressed or understood. Thus, KKYJa-[iv rovrov vEKa ~vv~yayov 6?Tw> v1rop.v~crw 1 have convened an <fSsembly .for this reason that 1 may ?'e?nind you T. 2. 60. Here rovrov evKa might be omitted. 2196. The verb of a final clause stands in the subjunctive after an introductory primary tense, in the optative (sometimes in the sujunetive, 2197) after a seeondary tense. yp&.cf>w Zva Kp.6.() 0 , 1 write (on this account) that yo'u may learn.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX

SE~TENCE

[2197

ypa<Pw Zva P-~ KJJ-a8ys I write (on this account) that yotL rnay not learn. lypatf!a Zva KpA8ots (or iKp.arJ os) I wrote (on this account) that you rnight leam. lypa.tf!a Zva p.~ Kp.arJots (or K}J-d8ys) I wrote (on this account) that you rn1:ght not leam.
Kar&.JJ-eve lva Ka! 1repl cro fJovXevcrwJJ-e8a remain behind that we may consider yom case also X. A. 6. 6. 28, fJacrtXes alpiirat otlx lva iavro KaXws 7rtf1-EXfirat, <lXX' tva Ka! oi iMJJ-evot ai arov di 1rprirrwcrt a king is chosen, not that he may ca1e

for his own interest however nobly, but that those who choose him may prosper through him X. M. 3. 2. 3, 1rapaKaXes liirpos 57rws !1-TJ <i1ro06.vy y ou call in physicians in order that he may not die X. M. 2. 10. 2, q,vXaKas <TVf-'11"f-'11"EL (hist. pres., 1883) . . . 57rws <i1ro rwv ovcrxwptwv q,vMrro<Ev arbv he sent gua1ds along in arder that they might guard him from the ?'Ov.gh pmts of the country X. C. 1. 4. 7, Kal fip.a rar' Ei11"WV <ivcrT1J WS !1-TJ JJ-XXotTO <iXX. 7rpalvotTO r. oovra and with these wonls on his lips he stood up in O?'Cler. that what was needful might not be ddayed but be do ne at once X. A. 8. 1. 47, p.T) cr1reoe 1rXovT<v !1-TJ raxs 11"v1Js "'fP?l haste not to be rich lest thou soon become pom Men. Sent. 358. For the optative after an optative, see 2186 c.
2197. After a secondary tense, the subjunctive may be used in place of the optative.

a. In the narration of past events, the subjunctive sets forth a person's previons purpose in the form in which he conceived his pmpose. Th us ( r. 1r Xoa) , Af3poK6f.'iiS . . KaTKaVCTEV tva 1-'TJ Kpos otafJfi Alnocomas b1trned the boats in mder that Cyrus might (may) not Ci'oss X.A.l.4.18. Here the thought of A. was ; I will burn the boats that Cyrus may not cross' (tva P-TJ o<afJfi), and is given in a kind of quotation. N.- Thucydides and Herodotu~ prefer this vivid subjunctive; the poets, Plato, and Xenophon, the optative. In Demosthenes, the subjunctive and optative are equally common. b. When the purpose (or its effect) is represented as stiJl continuing in the present. See the example in 2195. This use is closely connected with a. c. After d o-6, TL o(iv o-6, and the aorist indicative: ri oi'iv ox1 r. p.v T<lX1J tjJvXa.Kfi ixvp. 7rot-ljcrap.ev o1rws li.v (2201) crot cri KTX.; why then do ~ve not make yom walls st1ong by a ga1rison that they may be safe for y ou, etc. ? X. C. 5. 4. 37. He re the sel! tence with 7rot-ljcraf.tev is practically equivalent to one with 7rot-ljcrwf.t<v.

2198. The alternative construction of final clauses with subjunctive or optative is that of illlplicit indirect discourse (2622). The snbjunctive is always possible instead of the optative. Observe that the subjunctive for the optative is relatively past, since the leading verb is past. 2199. After a secondary tense both subjunctive and optative may be used in the same sentence.
vo.s oi. Koplvfhot . . . 1r"A.1}povv 01rws vavJ.Laxls re. 7ro7retp&(J'wCJL . . , Kal r:s oXKci.oas aTWV 1icrcrov ol > rfi Nav1faKT<j! , AIJ"'va'iot KWVOLEV <i7ralpt<v the Gorinthians

l'URPOSE CLACSES

49;)

manned .. ships bath to t1y a naval 7Hlttle and that the Atlwnians at Naupactus might be less ale ta p1event theil t?'a1lS)J01'ts from }J1ttting out ta senT. 7. 17. a. In some cases, especially when the sul.Jjunctive precees, t11e subjunctive may express the immediate purpose, the realization of whieh is expected; while the optative expresses the Jess immediate purpose conceived as a consequence of the action of the subjonctive or li-S a mere possibility.
2200. The optative is very rare after a primary tense except when that tense implies a reference to the past as well as to the present.
otxoVTa< va Jl.r, oo.v olK'IJV they have gone away that they mi(!ht not su:[fe1 punishnzent L. 20. 21. Here otxovrat is practically equivalent to I!,Pv-yov, and the optative ooEv shows that the purpose was conceived in the past. On the optative (without l.v) by assimilation after an optative, see 218(} c.

2201.

b1rws with the subjunctive sometimes takes av in positive

clauses.
ToT' aon) vv lM-x', ihrws av KJ1-a8w tell me now this ve1y tlng, that I may learn S. O. C. 575, l.~m i~Jl..s B1rws av ElowJl.v you will guide us in order that we rnay know X. C. 5. 2. 21. a. cl>s and 5<!>pa. with l.v or K occur in poetry, especially in Homer. O::.s li.v (first in Aeschylus) is very rare in Attic prose, but occurs eight times in Xenophon ; a8 WS o' av p.aiJTJS > avraKOVtTOV but that YOU mcty lea?"n, /war me in tU1'n X. A. 2. 5. 16. This use must not be confused with ws d.v in conditional relative clauses (2565). -o1rws li.v is more common than simple wws in Aristophanes and l'lato, far Jess common in Xenophon. It is regular in official and legal language. -'lva. li.v is not final, but local (whmever, 2567). The original meaning of tva was local and denoted the end to be reached. b. ll.v (d) does not appreciably affect the meaning. Originally these particles seem to have had a limiting and conditional force (1762): ws ll.v in whatever way, that so (cp. so ::::: in order th at so) as in "Teach me to die that so I may Rise glorious at the awful day" (Bishop Ken), and cp. ws with Brcp rp61rcp in iK6p.rJ1' r II8tKOP p.aVTov, ws wieo<Jl.' Brcp Tp61rcp 1rarpl olKis d.polwYJ I came to the Pythian shrine that I might learn in what way I might aven ge my jather S. El. 33. With ll'lrws li. v cp. iiv 1rws. Both IJ1rws and ws were originally relative adverbs denoting manner (how, cp. 2578), but when tl1ey became conjunctions (in order th at), their limitation by &v ceased to be felt.

2202. wc; &v and o1rw tf.v with the optative occur very rarely in Attic prose (in Xenophon especially), and more frequently after secondary than after primary tenses.
~OWK XP-IJJl.ara 'AvTaKioq. i!,rws av 7rrJpwiJvros vaVTLKO or T 'AIJrJvaOL Jl..ov T?is lpi]vrJs rrpotrilfo<vro he gave money to Antalcidas in order that, if a

fleet were mannPd, the Athenians might be more disposed to peace X. H. 4. 8. 16. ll.v final must be distinguished from ws ll.v consecutive (2278). a. Homer has a few cases of ws ll.v (K) and 5</>p' ll.v (K); tva Ev once (Jl. 156). Hdt. has ws llv, BKws lv rarely. b. After primary tenses the optative with l.v is certain! y, after secondary tenses probably, potential. Its combination with the final conjunction produces

ws

496

SYNTAX OF TIIE C.MPLEX SENTENCE

(22C3

a conditional relative clause in which the relative and interrogative force of o1rws and ws cames to light. W ith li1rws /iv the final force is strollger th an with ws av. In the example quoted above, 7r7Jpw1Nvros vavr<Ko represents the protasis (el
VaVTLKV 7r7JpW8d'Y)) t0 il,v 7rpOITOfOLVTO.

2203. The future indicative is used, especially in poetry, after 67Tw> (rarely after wc;, o<j>pa, and p.~) in the same sense as the sub-

junctive.
oli o <' tv 11X'Ao -rpif>ovrat ~ o1rws J.Laxovvrat nor me they rnaintained for any other single purpose than for fighting (lit. how they shall fight) X. C. 2. 1. 21, IT'YQ.IJ', /J7rws Wil 7rVIT<Tal (fut.) TLS , 'YWITIT'Y)S xapiv o 'Jfavr' 'Jfa'Y'YeiTJ (subj.) -roe keep silence, lest sorne one hear and report all this jo1 the salee of talle A. Ch. 265. In prose the future occurs with il'lfws in Xenophon and Andocides. This usage is an extension of that after verbs of effort (2211).

2204.

The principal clause is sometimes omitted.

tv' iK rovrwv lipfwJ.La< to begin with this D. 21. 43. tva -rl, originally to what end (cp. 946), and ws rl are also used colloquially: tva ri rara Xi'Ym; why do

you say this? P. A. 26 d.

2205. By assimilation of mood, final clauses may take a past tense of the indicative without av (2185 c) or the optative without av (2186 c.) 2206. Equivalents of a Final Clause.- The common methods of expressing pmpose may be illustrated by the translations (in Attic) of they sent a he1ald to announce : ;,7Tftiftav Kf,pvKa tva (67Tw>) &.7TayyotTo (2196). ;,7Tftiftav Kf,pvKa 6anc; (8>) ?Ta)')'Et-rat (2554). ;,7Tftiftav Kf,pvKa tl.?Ta)')'Eovvm (~065), hantA.ov-ra (rare, 2065). t7Tp.J/tav Kf,pvKa ~<; .7TU)')'EOVVTa (2086 C). 7TEp.t/Jav Kf,pvKa <hayyUnv (rare in prose, 2009). t7TEp.iftav Kf,pvKaTov .?Ta)')'Ew (2032 e, often in Thucydides). 7TEp.iftav K~pvKa. V7Tp (tvEKa) Tov .7TayyUnv (2032 g). For 0aTE denoting an intended result, see 2267.
OBJECT CLAUSES

Two types of object (substantivai) clauses are closely connected in construction with final clauses. 1. Object clauses after verbs of e.ffort. 2. Object clauses after verbs of jearing. Both stand in apposition to a demonstrative expressed or implied.
2207.
oova ofi: 'TO'TO !1-'YJXavr;Oat, /i?rws 7rO</>EV~E'Tat 'lfv 'lfOLWV Oavarov no man Ott[Jht to contrive (this) how he shall escape death a.t any cost P. A. 30 a, P.'YJxavr;8at iiKws ro r;wp.a Kop.te to contrive how he might bTing home the barly Hdt. 2. 121}', aro roro <f>o{3op.a<, p.'tj . . , o ovv'Y)Ow OrJwr;a, 'lfepl rwv '11'p'Yp.rwv I arn

2210]

OBJECT CLAUSES WITH VEHBS OF EFFORT

497

afra.id of this ve1y thing, namely, that I may not e able to malec the case plain V. 41. 2, icpofJero . . fJ o avvatro . . <~eMEiv he was ajmid that he could not escape X. A. 3. 1. 12.

2208. Connection of Final with Object Clauses.- (1) Final clauses proper denote a pmpose to accomplisl1 or avert a result, which purpose is set forth in a de:finite action. (2) Object clauses after verbs of e.ffmt consider means to accomplish or avert a result; the action of the subordinate clause is the o~ject ptrrpose. Such clauses are incomplete final danses, because, though the pmpose is expressed, the action taken to effect the pmpose is not expressed. (3) Object clauses after verbs of jearing deprecate an undesired result or express fear that a desired l'esult may not be accomplished. According to the form of expression employed, the construction of these three kinds of clauses may differ in varying degree or be identical. 'rhus compare these usages of Attic prose:

(1)

7rapo.Ka.Ia:rpov 07TWS p.~ cho()d.v[J (common) 7rapaKa. UiTpov 01rws p.~ .7ro()av.mt ( occasionally) 7rapo.Ko.. laTpov p.~ .7ro()U.vo (rare)

he sunwwns a physician in orcier th at he may not die.

(2)

mp..mt 01rw p.~ .7ro()av.Tat ( common) mp..mt o1rw p.~ .7roe&.vn ( occasionally)

he takes care that he shall not die. (3)

op p.~ 'Tro()U.vo> ( occasionally) see to it that you <j>o{3.Tat p.~ .7To()&.vn ( common) <j>o{3.mt O'TT'W> p.~ ti'Tro()U.vo ( occasionally) <j>of3:ro.t O'TT'W> p.~ .7To&av.To.t ( occasionally)

do not die.

he is afraid lest he die.

OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER YERBS OF EFFORT
2209. Object clauses after verbs of effort are introduced by o7rw>, rarely by w (Herodotus, Xenophon), scarcely ever by 7va. The negative is p.-lj. 2210.

Verbs of ejfoJt include verbs denoting to talee ca1e or pains,

to strive.
'll'<fJ.EOfJ.ClL, p.E< p.o<, fJ.EETW, <j>poupw, 7rpovo<a.V EXO>, f3ovEVOfJ.OC<, fL'tJXVWfJ.O.<, 11'pO'KEuntop.o.<, 11'po9'Up.oilp.o.<, 11'pihTw, 11'clVT"- 11'0;, ( 11'0<oilp.a.<), 0'1rouS<ltw, etc.

a. The same coustruction follows certain verbs of will signifying to ask, comrnand, ent1eat, exho1t, and foTbid, and which commonly takc the infinitive ( a.lTw, Sop.o.<, 'II'O.po.yyw, tKETEVW, or 11'0.pO.KEE1OfJ.O.<, .1!'a"fOPE1w, etc.). ' b. Some verbs take, by analogy, but in negative clauses only, the construc-

s,.,._

tion either of verbs of f>.(f'oTt or of verbs of fewiny. These verbs signify to see to a thin(f; opw, O'K011'W ( -o\ip.c:u), O'KEo/clfJ.1]V, O'KE11'TOV O'TL, T1JPW; to be On One's g1wrd: evh.o.f3oilp.a.<, <f>povT(h'"' <j>vnTTO> ( -op.a.<). See 2220.
GREE!{ GRAM.-

32

98

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[22II

These verbs may take p:f] with the infinitive. eaf3o!J.a' and q,uMTTO!J.a< take ,the infinitive when they mean to onrtr<l against floing sonwthing.
2211. Object clauses after verbs of qffo1t take the future indicative with 61rw; after primary and secondary tenses (rarely the optative after secondary tenses, 2212). ~mp.Eovp.at 61rws TavTa 7rOt~(ft I take care th at he sha ll do this. 7rtp.EoJp.at 6rrws p.~ Tavm 1rot~Cfa I take ca1e that he shall not do thi.~. 7rJJ.ovp.YJv o1rws Tavra 1rot~<Ta ( 7rot0Cfot) I took ca re that lte slwuld clo thz:s. 7rEJJ.Eovp.1 v o1rw> p.~ TavTa 1rot~<Tt ( 7rot0Cfot) I took care that he shoulcl not do this.
el d.v&.')'K1J
crr~

p.rlXEfTOa.t, roro e wapcta-KEVl:i(JaG"Bac.

lhrw~

Ws Kpd:rurra p.axoUp.E8a

if it is necessa1y to fight, wc must prepa1e to jight lnavely X. A. 4. 6. 10, grrpiiG'G'ov o7T"ws ns f3ofJOELa ij~e' they weTe managing (this, that) how some reinf01cements shuuld come T. 3. 4, .rKoJrG'Oe Toro, lhrws 1'-h M-yous poG'tv f!.Ovov . aXX Kal l!p-yov n oe<Kvv<Lv g~ou"'" see to this, th at they not only make speeches but also a1e able to show some p1oof D. 2. 1:2, G'KE'lrrav !J.O< OOKE evat o1rws ws G'</JaG'rara a7rtf!.EV (774) Kal o1rws r 'lrtrf}oELa i!~awv it seems to me that we must conside1' how we shall depa1't in the gTeatest SPCUTity and how we shall p1ocute o1tr p1ovisions X. A. 1. 3. 11. In lieZ "e o1rws oei~m it is neer~{ul that thou Jn-ove S. Aj. 556 there is a confusion between /Je /iet:~a' and the construction of :2213,
2212

After secondary tenses the future optative occasionally

occnrs.
7re!J.fTO 07rWS !J.f}TE aG'TOL !J.f}TE a7rOTof 71'07' f.ratVTO he t00k Cal' that they shoid never be without food 01' drink X. C. 8. l. 43. a. The future optative occurs especially in Xenophon, and represets a though't that was originally expressed by the future indicative. Here the indicative would present the thought vi'Vidly, i.e. as it was conceived in the mind of the subject.

2213. o1rws and o1rwc; p.~ with the future indicative may be used without any principal clause, to denote an urgent exhortation or a warning. Originally the 61rws clause depended on <TK1ru ((fK07rn), op (opn) see toit; but the ellipsis was gradually forgotten and the construction usPd independently.
ll1rws o v I!G'eG'OE /lv/ipes li~wt r1js euOepliis f,s KKrr}G'Oe be men 1vmthy of the frerdom which ?JOU JlOS81"8S x. A. 1. 7. 3, O'lrWS Of TOTO 1-'h otlia~lS 1-'T/OIPa but don't tPll any/Jody thls Ar. Nu b. 824, and very often in Ar. This use is also preceded by /l-ye (X. S. 4. 20). The third person is very raTe (L. 1. 21 ).

2214. Verbs of e_ffort sometimes have the construction of final clauses, and take, though less often, orrw> with the present or second aorist subjunctive or optative (cp. 2196). The subjunctive may be used after seconclary tenses.
lf1rpiiMev . o1rws
7r6e!J.os

'YV1Jrat he t1ied to bring it about that wm should

2219]

OBJECT CLAt:SES 'IVITH VERBS OF EFFORT

499

be occasioned T. 1. 57, opa . . o1rws p.'IJ 1ra.p. ~a.v 6p.ol\o-yiJs see toit that it does not prove thot you cwquiesce in wh at you clo not 1eally think l'. Cr. 49 c, ou <t>vM~<<TIJ' o1rws p.'IJ e<T1f61'7JV ep7JH; will you nc1t be on you1 guarrl lest you jiml a master? D. 6. 25. Future and subjunctive occur together in X. A. 4. 6. 10. In Xenophon alone is the subjunctive (and optative) more common tl1an the future. a. The object desired by the subject of a verb of e.ffo1t is here expressed by the same constructiou as is the purpose in the mind of the subject of a final clause.

2215. av is sometimes added to o1rw with the subjnnctive to denote that the pmpose is dependent on certain circumstances.
iJ?rws av . . . ol
i7rep1e<T0a.t I
qrpa:rLWTa_L

1rpL

TO t1'rparoJecr8ar.

{JovEUwvra.t, roUrov

7rELpdop.aL

will endeavou1 to make it my wre th at the soldiers d1liberate about contim!ing the wa1 X. C. 5. 5. 48, P.7JXO.V7JTov otrws av lha.</>h71 plans must be made jo1 his escape P. G. 481 a (the same passage has otrws with the subjunctive anrl the future). In Attic this use occurs in Aristophanes, Xenophon, and Plato.

2216. ws and ws Lv with subjunctive and optative and o1rw< /Lvwith the optRrtive occur in Xenophon, ws ILv and o1rws ILv with the optative being used aft.er primary and secondary tenses. Hdt. has oKw< ILv after secondary tenses. The optative with ws ILv and ii1rws li.v is potential. 2217. After verbs meaning to consicler, plan, and t1y otrws or w< with the sujunctive (with or without Ki) or optative is used by Homer, who does not elllploy the future indicative in object clauses denoting a purpose. 'fhus, </>pci.!;ur6a.t li1rtrws K< p.v7JrrTfjpa.s . Knlv7J< conside1 how thou mayest slay the suitcl1's a 295, 1r<lpa li1rws K<v l] rriJv 7raTploa -ya.a.v tK"rJa.< try that thou mayest come to thy native land 545. Here Btrw< with the future indicative would be the normal Attic usage. 2218. Verbs of will or desire signifying to ask, command, entreat, exhmt, and forbl, which usnally have an infinitive as their object, may take o11'w> (o7rw> p.~) with -the future indicative (or optative) or the subjnnctive (or optative). The o1rw> clause states hoth the comma.nd, etc. and the purpose in giving it. Between take care ~o do this and I bid yon take care to do this the connection is close. Cp. impe1o, postula with ut (ne).
.,.a, taK<euovTat o1rws Tp.wp1w1'a.t they nrge him to talee revenge l'. R. 549 e, e-f}rr<o' bf.J.wv IJ1rws . olKTJV p.'IJ ol/i he v;ill entre at 1/0U that he may not sujfer punishment A nt. 1. 23, tra.pa')'')'OU(}'LV 01fWS av (2215) Ti)oe .,.y; Tjp.lpg 1'V1'1}<T7J they f/W! onle1s (to the end) tlwt he die to-da y l'. l'b. 59 e, AaK<oa.tp.oviwv 'l!ioVTo To f1J1><rrp.' o1rws p.<Ta<TTpa.</>l7J they begged the Lace(aemonians that the decree rnight /)e changed Ar. Ach. 536, a1f7J')'6pw<S o1rws p.'IJ TOTo troKptvolp.TJV y ou foTbade me to

give this answe1 P. R. 339 a.

2219. Dawes' Canon. -The rule formulated by Dawes and afterwards extended (that the ji1st aorist subjunctive active and middle after otrws. otrws p.-f}, and ou p.-f} is incorrect and should be emended) is applicable only in the case of verbs of e.ffmt. After these verbs the future is far more commmt than subjunc; tive or optative (except in Xenophon), and some scholars would emend the

500

SYNT AX OF THE COl\fPLEX SE:\'TEXCE

[2220

offending sigmatic subjunctives where they occur in the same sentence with second aorists (as And. 3.14) or even where the future has a widely different form (as Krr<vrr<ra<, subj. Krr<uv, cp. X. A. 5. 6. 21).
VERBS OF CAUTION

2220. Verbs .of caution (2210 b, 2224 a) have, in negative clauses, the construction either of a. Verbs of effort, and take orrws p..q with the future indicative:
<a{3011JJ-<VO< ihrws JJ-'tJ olx-fJuop,a< taking caTe that l do not depmt P. Ph. 91 c, pii Kws p,.fJ uw rrour.fJuovra< bewr!1'e lest they 1evolt j1om thee Hdt. 3. 36. b. Verbs of jea1ing, and take p,-IJ (p,'i] ou) or orrws p,-IJ (2230) witb the subjunctive (or optative): opT JJ-'tJ rrJ)wp,ev talee Ca1e lest We su:{fer X. . 4. 1. 15, <f>v.TTOV /irrws JJ-'tJ , <is rovavrlov gII?IS be on you1 guanl lest yott come to the opposite X. M. 8. 6. 16, vrrorrTEop,ev . DJJ-s JJ-'tJ ou Ko<vol rro(3fjTE we suspect that you will not prove impaTttl T. 3. 58, urrorrrdllriis p,Tj r'i]v 8v"'farpa "'fo<, t/pero KT. suspecting that he meant his claughter, he askecl, etc. X. C. 5. 2. 9. So with a past indicative (2233).

OBJECT CT,AUSES WITH VERBS Ol!' FEARING

2221. Object clauses after verhs of fear and caution are intr.oduced by p.~ that, lest (Lat. ne), p.~ o that . . . not, lest . . . not (Lat. ut= ne non).

a. JJ-n clauses denote a fear that something may or might happen; JJ-'tJ ou clauses denote a fear tbat sometbing may not or might nut happen. Observe that.the verb is negatived by o and not by JJ--IJ, which expresses an apprehension that the result will take place. p,-IJ is sometimes, for convenience, translated by whether_; but it is not an indirect interrogative in such cases. 2222. The construction of JJ-TJ after verbs of fearing bas been developed from an earlier coordinate construction in which JJ-TJ was not a conjunction (that, lest) but a prohibitive particle. 'l'hus, olow JJ-TJ r< rr6.8vrr<v (A 470) I fear lest he may su.{fer. aught was developed from I fear + may he not su.tfer aught ( 1802) ; <j>vaK'i] fi TLS gCTTW, JJ-'tJ Mx os elcrO?lCTL rr6LP 521) but let there be a guwcl, lest an ambush entm the city, where the clause JJ-'tJ- eluMyu< meant originally may an ambush not enteT. Here JJ-TJ expresses the desire to avert somethiug (negative desire). a. When JJ-1! bad become a pure conjunction of subordination, it was used even with the indicative and with the optative with /Lv. Some scholars regard p,-IJ with the indicative as standing for &.pa p,fJ (bence an indirect interrogative). Observe tbat the character of p,fJ after verbs of fearing is different from that in final clauses, though the construction is the same in both cases. 2223. For the use of the subjnnctive, without a verb of fearing, with JJ-fJ, see 1801, 1802; with p,Tj o see 1801, with o JJ-TJ see 1804. 2224. Verbs and expressions of fem are: cj>o~o!La., 8o<Ka. or 88La., Ta.p~w, Tpw and 'II'cj>pi:Ka. (mostly poetical); 6Ew6s .t.,.,, 8Ew6v ec:rn, Sos c:rT(, cj>o~pos ~LjLL, cj>o~p6v ec:rTL, etc.

ce

OBJECT CLAUSES \VITH VERBS OF FEAlW

501

a. Sometimes it is not actua\ feaJ that is expressed but only apJWehension, These are the verbs and expressions of caution : bKvw, .9tJoOi, .1!"Lo-Tw, .11"Lo-T(v X"' (1rap.!xw), \,.,..o.,..Teuw, v9f1oOf1oO.L, o.lo-xUvo.,.o. (rare), K(v8v6s o-n, 11"poo-8oK(i O"TL. He re be long also, by anal ogy, opw, O"K011"W, vvol, Evo.f3of'oo., cj>povT(tw, cj>u.no> (-oiLa), which admit also the construction of verbs of (ffort (2210 b).
anety, SU8JYicion, etc.
I. FEAR RELATING TO THE FUTURE

Object clauses after verbs of .fe(lr an ca:ution take the subjunctive after primary tenses, the optative (or subjunctive, 2226) after secondary tenses. <f>of3ovp.at p.~ -yv>JTat I fear it may lwJ?Jien. <f>of3ovp.at p.~ ov -yiv-qTat I jea,r it 1/l(i!J uot hazJpen. <f>o{3ovp.>Jv p.~ -yvotTo (or y&rrrat) 1 j(-l(jecl it might hap]?en. <f>o{3ovp.YJV p.~ ov -yvotTo (regularly -yl.v11Tat) I feared it miyht not happen.
2225.
Olio<Ka ILiJ . t1T<a0wtJ.E0a rfjs otKali< olio I am afraicllest we may foJget the way home X. A. 3. 2. 25, <f>of3Ta< IL~ . T ~G"XaTa ?T.Oy he iB afraicl lest he su.ffer the seve1est punishment X. C. 3.1. 22, <f>poVTllw ILiJ Kp.nG"Tov !J-O< G""fv I am thinking that it may prove (2228) best for me to be sile nt X. M. 4. 2. 3!J, ~oe<G"a.v o! "EX?)v<s ILlJ 1TpoG"."fOv 1rpos TO Kpas Kat aTos KaTaKO>f<.av the GJeeks we1e seized with fem lest they miglzt advance against their j!ank an eut thern clown X. A. 1. 10. 9, Mli<IL<V ILlJ o f3lf3aw< 'f}T< we fear you me not to be clepencled on T. 3. 57, o!l roTO liflio<Ka, !'-~ oK ~xw 5 n ilw K.G"Tcp Twv <f>lXwv . . XX ILlJ oK ~xw !Kavos ois ilw I am afmicl not that I rnay not have enough (lit. anything) to give to each of rny friends, ut that I may not have enough friends on whom to bestow my g({ts X. A. 1. 7. 7.

a. The aorist is very corn mon after ILfJ After secondary tenses Hom. usually has the optative. b. ILiJ o with the optative is rare and suspicions (X. A. 3. 5. 3).
222-6. After secondar-y tenses, the snbjnnctive presents the fear vividly, i.e. as it was COlJCeived by the subject. Cp. 2197.
they /Jecame femful that the army might (may) advance against thernselves too T. 2. 101. So when the fear extends up to the present time : l<f>of3~0'7v . . Kal vv T<8opvf'J'71La' IL-l, nv<s DILw "jvof,G"wG"l IL< I was str1wk with fea1 a neZ evm now I am in a state of agitation lest some of y ou may disrega1d me A es. 2. 4. The vivid use of subjunctive

x. s. 2. 11, i<pof3-f}Owav IL~ Kat E7T1 d</>iis G"Tpa.TOS xwpfJG"Y/

<f>of3ovTo p.-1} n ?TCLOy they femed lest she nght (may) rneet with sorne accident

is common in the historians, especially Thucydides.

2227. The optative after a primary tense is rare and suspected (I 245, Hdt. 7.103, S. Aj. 279). 2228. The subjunctive and optative after p.~ (or 61rw> p.~) may denote what may prove to be an object of fear (future ascertainment).
li.!lio<Ka ILlJ IJ.p<G"Tov Yi I am afraid lest it prove to be best S. Ant. 1114, ~oe<G"av IL7J liTTa ns . . . iJILZv liL7T1TTWKO< they fwJed lest some madness might prove to

.502

SY~T A :X.

OF THE C\1PLEX SE.\'TESCE

The aorist subjunctive refers to the past in

have fallcn upon us X. A. 5. 7.26.

i5Eloo<Ka . p.-lj <JE 1rapd1rrJ 1 fem it may p1ove th at she /;egu iled thee A 555 ; cp. K 99, v 216, w 491 (H-fter opw).

2229. The future is rare with verbs of jaring after JL~

<j>of3ovp.a< 0< p.f) nvas i}i5ovs i}oova!s evpf)<Jop.ev lvavrliis and I app1ehencl that we shall fi nd some plesu1es opposite to other plwsuTes P. l'bil. 13 a. So witb veriJs of caution: Bpii p.ry 1rowv iK6.trr4J -i}p.wv XHpwv oef)a-H see to it lest each one of

us may have need of many hands. X. C. 4. 1. 18. a. The future optative seems not to occur except in X. H. (). 4. 27, X. M. 1. 2. 7, P. Euth. 15 d.
2230. o1rw<; p.~ with the subjunctive or optative is sometimes usd instea of p.~ after verbs of .fwr and caution to imply fear that something will happen.
ou <j>o{J . 81rws p.'!J v6<Jwv 1rp'Yp.rt Tv'Yx6.vvs 7rpliTTwv; aTe you not afraid that you may chance to be doing an unholy deed? P. Euth. 4 e, i}Mws 'Y' ll,v (Opl'/la<p.< 'TOV ll,v'pa), El p.'!J <j>o{3olp.TJV 87rWS p.ry br' avr6v JJ. Tp6.7rO!'TO I shoulcl gladly keep the man if I cl id not fem lest he 1night turn against me X. M. 2. 9. 3; see also

2220 b.

2231. o1rw> p.~ with the future indicative (as after verbs of e.tfort) is sometimes used instead of p.~ with the subjunctive.
o.!otKa B1rws p.'!J . . <iv6.'YKTJ 'YEvf)<JeTrt< (v.l. 'YvTJTa<) lfear lest a necessily rnay arise D. 9. 75. The future optative occurs once (1.17.22). On p.f) or 81rws p.f) with verbs of caution, see 2220 a.

2232. The potential optative with

av is rarely used after p.~.

<O<OT<S p.'!J KaTavOEiTJ av (Mss. KaravOEiwav) i5fjp.os fearjul lest the people

should be put down L. 13. 51. Tqe potential use is most evident when an optative occurs in the protasis: El li r<ves <j>of3ovvTa< p.'i} p.rtTalii av 'Ytvo<To aTTJ i} KaTa<JKwf}, El 1r6ep.os 'Y<p0e!TJ, VVOTJ<J6.rw lin KT. {f some are afraicl that this condition of things may Jl1'0V6 vain, 1j wa1 wuld a1ise, let them (him) consicle1 that, etc. X. Vect. 4. 41.
Il. FEAR RELATING TO THE PRESENT OR FAST

2233. Fear that something actnally

is or was is expressed by

p.~

with the indicative (negative JLTJ ov).

oo<Ka . p.Tj 7r-.,.,TJ'fwv H I fem that yon 1wed a beating Ar. Nub. 493, &."!\")..' lipii p.'!J 1raltw; ~''Y'" but have a ca re th at he was not spealcing in jest l'. Th. 145 b, <j>o{Jm/i-<eOa p.Tj p.<f>orpwv ap.a i}p.rtpTf)Kap.Ev 'We are a,f1aid that we have failed of both objects at once T. 3. 53, op.re p.Tj ovK lp.ol ... 1rpoTf)KH D'Yo" i5ovva< have a ca1e lest it does not 1est with me to give an acomnt A nd. 1. 103. a. Contrast <j>of3op.a< p.Tj TJ(}t!s <Jnv I fear that it is true with <j>of3op.a< p.'i} "I\TJOs lfear it rnay )J7'0Ve true (2228). b. The anrist occurs in Homer : oli5w p.'!J 15'1 1r6.vTa 8e VTJp.eprt!rt <1rev I fear

thal ail the goddrss said was true e 300.

OBJECT CLAUSES WITH VERD::i OF

.FEARI~G

503

OTHER CONSTRUCTIONS WITH VERBS OF FEARING

2234. In Indirect Questions. -Here the ideas of fear and doubt are joined. Thus, rp6{3os El1rlirw o<r7rotva,v fJ-fJv (direct 1reirrw; 1916) 1 have my doul!ts whethe1 1shall (can) persuade my mistress E. Med.184, r'l]v 8ev o' 7rWS Mew OfOOLKa (direct 1rws Mew ; 1805) 1 am fearflll how J slwll escape the notice of the goddess E. I. T. 995, OlootKa, n m-oKptvofJ-a' 1 am af!'aid what tu answer P. Th. 195 c. 2235. In Indirect Disourse with ws (rarely ii1rws) that.- Verbs of fearing may have the construction of verbs of thinking and be followed by a dependent statement. This occurs regularly only when the expression of fear is negativ~d. 'l'hus, vops o ri) 8u"'{a,rpl M'lJ rpo{3o ws 7rop1wm do not fem that y ou will be at a loss foi a husband foi y our daughter X. C. 5. 2. 12. Here MiJ or o1rws MiJ would be regular. With ws the idea is je ar, thinking that. 2236. ith OTL ( ws) Causal. - rpo{3ro on m) f>rs .. 7'0 5~ap l06KEt ar[/! EvaL he was af1aid because the ream seemed to him to be from Zeus X. A. 3.1. 12. 2237. With a Causal Participle.- oiire r'l]v Kp67rotv . . . 1rpotos lrpo{3fJ8'T/ nor was he terrijied at having betrayed the Acn;polis Lyc.l7. 2238. With the Infinitive.- Verbs of feming often take an object infinitive (present, future or aorist) with or without the article; and with or without /)/" (2741). 'l'hus, rpo{3fJrnraL .OLKP he Will e a_(TaiCJ to i1~iure X. C. 8. 7.15, OU rpo{3ov}J-e8a {1\aa-~wrn~ea, we are not afra id that tve shall be beaten T. 5. 105 (the future infinitive is less commpn than p.fJ with the subjunctive), </JuaTT6p.evos r 1rij~al nva ( = p.'l] 7rfJ~w) taking ca re to o.tfend no one D. 18. 258, lrpu'/\<i~aro p.'l] 11rt~ros "'{ev~8aL he took pTecautions not to be come an-ol(iect of dist1ust X. Ag. 8. 5. a. With the articular infinitive, rpo{3o}J-at, etc. means simply J fear; with the infinitive without the article, rpo{3ofJ-cu commonly bas the force of hesitate, feel 1epugnance, etc. Cp. rpo{3ofJ-aL oLKEv and rpo{3op.a M'lJ oLKEv ; 1 fear tu do wrong (and do not do it.); rpo{3ofJ-a' r otKfv 1 fe ar tv1'ong-doing (in general, by myself or by another), li ke rpo{3o}J-aL r'l]v otKliiv. 2239. With wcrTE of Result (after a verb of caution).-f)v ov fMwfJ-<V hr' avros 1rplv rpvM~aa-ea, &~Tf p.'l] 'T/rf,Oi)va if then we move against thern befo1e they take precautions (so as) not to be caught X. A. 7.3.35.

CAUSAL CLAUSES

2240. Causal clauses are introduced by on, &6n, 3trnrp- because, ,.(, 71't3~, on, /nroTE since, w<; as, since, because. 'l'he negative is o. a. Also by poetic ovEK<l. ( = oli lveKa) and o9ovvEK(l ( = 70U Ive Ka) ber,c!llSe, .;:;.,.. since (poetic and Ionie; al~o temporal), and lJy o'li'ov since (l!clt.l. 68, X.C. 8. 4. 31, I. 4. 186). Homer has o or o TE ber:ause. b. ws frequently denotes a reason imagined to be true by the principal subject and treated by him as a fact (2241). 3.,., often follows l!t. roTo, ot T00e, K ToTov, roVT'fJ. 8L6Tl. stands for 0L ro0ro, OTt. 3TE and 01r6Te usually mean when (cp. cwn); as causal conjunctions they are rare, as ou rolvvv rove'

504

SYNTAX OF THE COl\lPLEX SENTENCE

orws ~X" since then this i8 the case, D. 1. 1, xaf'lr .. r 1rap6vra nr6r' vopwv f1'rpar7J'-ywv row6rwv tJ'rep61J.e8a the present state of a.ffairs is dijficult since we are dep1ived of such gene1als X. A. 3. :l. 2. Causal liTE, temporal liTE rarely, can begin a sentence. When they approach the meanng if, oTE and o'tf'6re take wfJ. In Attic prose inscriptions 1rl is rare, t6TL does not occur, and wv i!veKa. is generally used for liL61rep.

2241. Causal clauses denoting a fact regularly take the indicative after primary and secondary tenses.
f71'el b/).etS o fJo6etJ'fJe UV!J.11'0pe6eiJ'8at, v:yK'T) of} p.o', ;) bp.s 7rpo6v-ra rii Kvpov qJLl\l. xpi'JuOat Kr . but since you do not wish to continue the march with me, 1

must eitlzer re tain the friendship of Cyrus by renouncing y ou, etc. X. A. 1. 3. 5,

8 a' tf}WUO.S -iJ!J.ii.S WS TOS
~X
IJ.fV

<f>lOVS . , , e 1l'OLi:P OVPa/).efJa. , , > O Ta fi(/ O,:WS

but as to that which has excited your envy of us, our supposed ability (lit. because, as y ou think, we me able) to lienefit ow friends, not even is this so X. Hi. 6, 12, r{J"fXO.Pe "'fp lrp' !J.abs 11'0pVb/).POS otbTL frfrpWTO jor he happened tO be riding on a wagon ji'tJ?n the jact that he had be en wounded X. A. 2. 2. 14.
2242. But causal clauses denoting an alleged or reported reason (im plied indirect discourse, 2622) take the optative after secondary tenses.
( ol 'AfJ'T)vaw<) rv ITeptK't!ii KaK<!ov on urpar'T)"'fos !:>v oK 11'e~a"'fot the .Athenians reviled Pericles on the g1ound that, though he was general, he did not lead them out T. 2. 21, exe r!"'fetP .. ws AaKeatp.6vwt t roro 1roep.f}uetav aro'is on oOK leel\f}tJ'atev p.er' 'A"'f'rJU<fiov Me'iv h' ar6v Pelopidas was able to say that the Lacedaemonians had made ww ~l)lOn them (the Thebans) for the reason that they had not been willing to 'TIW1'Ch against him (the King of Persia) with Agesilau8 x. Ii. 7.1. 34.

av or the potential optative wit.h av.

224~.

Cause may be expressed also by the unreal indicative with

hel oHi 'Y' DiJ.ii< aro< 1raat v 1rol\wl\etre since you would long ago have perished had it depened on you?selves D. 18. 49, ot!op.at ovv (J'OU 11'apa!J.VO.L 1JiJ.P' ws hw oli' v vs fiov .Kovuat!J.< ;) uo accmdingly 1 beg y ou to stay with us; because there is no one (in my opinion) to whom 1 shoul mo1e gladly listen than to you P. Pr. 335 d. 2244. 1rEi may introduce a coordinate command (imperative S. EL 3'32, potential optative, P. G.474 b), wish (S. O. T. 661), or question (S. O. T. 80). Cp. the use of i!Jure, 2275. Sometirnes, with the indicative, 7rel has the force of although (P. S. 187 a). -A causal clause may have the value of "'fp with a coorinate main clause. So often in tragedy with ws in answers (S. Aj. 39 ; cp. X. C. 4. 2. 25).- A clause with lYre, appaJently introducing a consequence, may give the reason for a preceding question (6. 32).

2245. Cause may also be expressed by a relative clause (2555), by a participle (2064, 2085, 2086), by r0 or ot ro with the infinitive (2033, 2034 b). 2246. el or d1rep, wh en it expresses the real opinion of the writer or speaker,

CAL'"SAL CLAL'"SES

505

may have a causal force, as -yw i]iiop.cu p.l:v :p' bp.wv rp.wp.<vos, et7r<p /Lv8pw1r6s <lp.t I am pleased at being honou1ed by you, since (Jlt. if indeed) I am a man
X. A. 6. 1. 26.

2247. Many verbs of emotion state the cause more delicately with d (Uv) if as a mere supposition thau by on. The negative is JL~ or ov.
a. So with :yo.va.KTOl am indignant, l:ya.JJ-O.L am content, a.l<rxf!Ov ~<rTL it is a shame, a.t<rxvofLa.L am. ashamed, llx9of.Lcu talee hard, liewov ~<rTL it is a shame, liELvov 'II"OLoiip.a.L am indignant, 8a.up.O.tw am astonished, p.p.cpof.La.L blanw, cpllovcii am jealous, etc. The if clause is usually indicative, sometimes an unreal indicative, a subjunctive, or a potential optative. Thus, 8a.up.ci{;w d p.'IJ fJo1J8fJIJ'T bp.v aros I am surp1ised if you will not help yourselves X. H. 2. 3. 53, ci-yava.Krw l orwl1'i ii vow p.'!] otbs r' elp.t <i1r<v I am grieved that I am th us unable to say what I mean P.J~ach. 194 a, letvv 1rowuwvot l Tos 1r<fJoudmvras 11'</>Wr np 1rfj8et p.'IJ <tiJ'ovrat indignant that they co1d not discover those who were plotting against their commons T. 6. 60, /Lro1rov il.v d1], el P.'IJOv p.l:v }Joo ')'ovros a.OTol f3ore r'i]v
1rWVvp.liv TWV lfp-ywv . , p.o o ')'OliTOS brt'I)IJ'fJt, Kal 11-TJ J'liO}Jofll'f/S p.l:v Kplruws 1r<pl Toi! 1rpfJ.-yp.a.Tos i]w /Lv, ')'<')'ovbros iii: lM-yxov cl7ro<f><u~<Tat it would be absu7d ~(, wh enI say nothing, you shottt out the na me of what he has done, but when J do

speak, y ou forget it; and absurd if, wh ile he should have been condemned when no investigation was instituted conce7ning the matter, he should yet get o.ff now when the proof has been given Aes. 1. 86 (cp. 2904 b), p.'!] Oavp.a{;<T< ii' .v n <f>a.lvwp.at M-ywv do not be surprised if I seem to say something I. Ep. 6. 7, dpas rym, <l oK il.v ovvatvro aOv it is a mwvel yott we telling if they could be undetected P. Men. 91 d. b. After a past tense we have either the form of direct discourse or the optative, as in indirect discourse. Tlms, lOa6tJ-a{;ov et TL ~ r<> xpfJtral1'0at rc;3 b"f'l' aro I kept wondering if any one cou/cl cleal with his theory P. Ph. 95 a, 1r<1rev ws ovov d'l) el o p.v !E:avOlis 1roKpv6p.<vos oin-ws p.<-yaMlf!vxos -yr!votro he adde that it was a shame if a man who played the rle of Xanthias should p7ove himself so noble minded A es. 2. 157, <i!Krpov el .wiJ'o<vro they pitied them in case they should be captu7'ed X. A. 1.4. 7 (cp. 2622 a). Sometimes the construction used after a primary tense is retained after a secondary tense (X. C.
4. 3. 3).

2248. These verbs admit also the construction with 6n.

p.'!] Oavp.ci{;ere 5n xae1rws <f>lpw ela not be sw]Jrised that I talee it ha1d X. A. 1. 3. 3, f8a.6J1.al'ov 5rt Kpos ol!re iLov 11'fp.rm ol!re aTs <f>alvotro (implied indirect discourse) they were SU?')Jrised that Cyrus neithm sent sorne one else nor appearecl himself 2. 1. 2, i]Kop.ev cl-ya1rwvres on rit 11'WJ1.ara litel1'w<Yci}Joe0a we have reachecl hme, content that we have saved onr lives 5. 6. 13. The construction with 1rl TeP a'nd the infinitive (2033 b) also occurs: (2wKpdT'f/S) ifJaup.cijero

1rl rci> " dJKbws fjv Socrates was admired becanse he lived contentedly

X.M.4.8.2.
a. lin after verbs of emotion really means that, not. beea11se.

506

SY:\TAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2249

RESUL T CLAUSES <CONSECUTIVE CLAUSESJ

2249. A clause of resnlt denotes a consequence of what is stated in the principal clause. 2250. Result clauses are introduced by the relative word Wo-rf (rarely by ws) as, that, so that. In the principal clause the demonstrative words onus tlws, Towros su clt, roo-oros so g1eat, are often expressed. wo-n: is from ws and the connective ,.i, which has lost its meaning.

a. To a clause with oTws, etc. Herodotus sometimes adds a clause either with T or without a connective, where Attic would employ CurTe; cp. 3. 12.
2251. There are two main forms of result clauses: wo-r with the infinitive and wo-n with a fini te ver b. With the infinitive, the negative is generally p.~; with a finite verb, o. On the use in indirect discourse and on irregularities, see 2759. 2252. Consecutive ws occurs almost always with the infinitive (chiefly in Herodotus, Xenoplwn, AeschyluH, and Sophocles) ; with a finite verb occasionally in Herodotus and Xenophon. With the infinitive, the orators and Thucydides (except 7.34) have &IJ'n. 2253. Consecutive &IJ'Te (ws) with a finite verb does not occur in Homer, who uses coordination instead (cp. f in A 10). Two cases of &sTe occur with the infinitive (I 42; 121 may mean ancl so), where the infinitive might stand alone, since Homer uses the infinitive to denote an intended or possible result. 2254. A clause with C:So-n and the infinitive is merely added to the clause containing the main thought in Older to explain it. The consequence is stated without any distinction of time and only with difference of stage of action. a. Since the infinitive expresses merely the abstract verbal idea, its use with (as with 1rplv) outside of iudirect discourse cannot explicitly denote a jact. By its dativalnature (1909), the infinitive is simply a complement to, or expianation of, the governing word. &IJ'T< is one of the means to rein force this explanatory office of the infinitive. The origin of its use is suggested by the comparison with oiJ'os sujJicient fm, otos capable of (2003) and the infinitive, which was not original/y dependent on these words.
l!JIJ'u

2255. A clause with wO'n and a fin1te verb conta1ns the main thought, and is often so loosely connected with the leading verb as to be practically independent and coirdinate. wO'n may thus be sim ply introc1uctory and take any constnwtion found in an independent sentenee. The consequence expresses d1stinctions of time and stage of action. 2256.

Result may also be expressed by relative clauses (2556).

zz6o]

RESGLT CLAUSES

507

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

IJ:.a--re WITH THE INDICATIVE AND C.a--re WITH

THE INFINITIVE

2257. A clause of result with w<TT stating that something actually occurred as a jact must be expressed by the indicative. 2258. A clause of result with Wo-n stating that something may occur in consequence of an intention, tendency, capacity, and in general in consequence of the nature of an object or action, is regularly expressed by the infinitive. When a consequence is stated withont affirming or denying its actual occurrence, the infinitive is in place. The infinitive rnay therefore denote a fact, but does not explicitly state this to be the case; and is, in general, permissible in ali cases where the attainment of the result is expected, natural, or possible, and its actual occurrence is not emphasized; as it is emphasized by the indicative.

a. ffJrrTe with the infinitive does not state a particular fact. The infinitive is preferred in clauses containing or implying a negative. ffJrrTE with the indicative is preferred after els roro ijKet and like phrases when affirmative (cp. 2265, 2266, 2274). 2259. This difference may be illustrated by examples.
ifxw rptf}pm lJJrru v ro helvwv 1r Xoov I have triremes ( so as) to catch their vesseZ X. A.l. 4. 8 (C,rr'T eiXov would mean so tlwt I caught with an essentially different meaning), 1ranas ovrw litanllels &rr'T ar<ii evat rpi>.ovs tTeating all in suclt a

manner that they should be his jriends X. A. 1. l. 5 (an intended result, 2267),
ovrw otaKe<JJ-a< rp' DJJ-wv ws oM o1rvov ~xw iv ri/ JJ-avro xwpq. I am t7eated by you in such a manne7 that J cannot even sup in rny own count7y X. H. 4. 1. 33 (a fact), t:Jrrre 7rUpooov }J-1} EvaL 7retp 7rUp-yov, &.XX OL arwv jJ-<JWV otiirrav 80 that it

was impossible to pass by the side of a tower, but the guards went tMough the middle of them T. 3. 21' Kpav-y1)v 7rO1}v hoiovv KaO>TS af}ovs W<Y'T Kal ros 7rOeJJ-lovs d.Kouetv C,rrn ol JJ-V -y-yurara Twv 7roeJJ-iwv Kal ~<f>v-yov tly rnade a loud noise by calliny each othe?' so that even the enemy could hem; consequent/y thos of the enemy who weTe nearest actually fied X. A. 2. 2. 17. Here the fact that some of the enemy fied is proof that they actually beard the cries; but the Greek states merely that the noise was loud enough to be heard. Had the clause &rrn .. ~<f>v-yov not been added, we could only have infmred that the noise was beard.
lfltrT (RARELY

ws-)

WITH THE INFINITIVE

2260. The infinitive with wo-T denotes an anticipated or })Ossible result; but the actual' occurrence of the result is not stated, and is to be inferred only. The negative is JJ-~, but o is used when the wan clause depends on a clause itself subordinate to a verb of saying or thinking (2269). Cp. 2759.

508

SYNT AX OF THE C02\1PLEX SE:\'1'ENCE

[2261

a. lfluTe with the infinitive means as to, so as to; but with a subject necessary in English it must often be translated y so that. 2261. The infinitive with tJ"rre is usually present or aorist, rarely perfect (e.g. D. 18. 257). The future is common ouly in indirect discourse (D. 19. 72).
2262. Wo-n (w.;) with the infinitive is used when its clause serves only to explain the principal clause. Thus, 2263. (I) After expressions denoting ability, capacity, or to e.ffect something.
,-on ?rpd"fJ.I-aTa ,-apexov ol fJpfJapot . . la<jJpol yp 'Jjuav, &uu Kal lyyrJeev <jJeyovus 'ICo<jJe{,yELv the bararians caused great annoyance; for they were so

nimble that they could escape even thouuh they made o.tf ajte1 they had approached quite. near X. A. 4. 2. 27, o ?roTaf.'s TouoDTos fJOos ws J.I-7JO T o6paTa 7repXEL the 1'ivm of such a depth that the spears cuuld not even p1oject ab ove the suiface 8. 5. 7 (on rouoOros ouos et. see 2008), rouanw Kpavyl]v . (,-oi1J~Tav {f,!Tr< ros nt~Lpxous <XO<'iv they made such an UJWOQ1' as to bring the taxiarchs D. 54. 5. a. The idea of e.tfecting may be unexpressed: (KXapxos) ?fJ\avv<v ,-1 ros Mvwvos {f)ur' K<ivovs h,-e,-Xfjxllat Clearclws arlvanced against the soldie!'S of Menon so (i.e. by so doing he brought it about) that they weTe thmour;hly fiightened X. A. 1. 5. 13; cp. 22G7. Se veral verbs of e;{!'ecting take lfl<rre when the result is intended and where the simple infinitive is common (22G7 b).
2264. (II) After a comparative with.;; than.
fjuOovro aflrv Mrrw lfxovra ovaJ.I-LV 1) lflure ros <jJlovs w</J<<v they pmceived that he possessed too little power to benpfit his j1ienrls X. H. 4. 8. 23, ol Kovrt~Tra! fJpo:j(.r<pa rJK6vn'ov;) ws lgLKVU8at TWV U<jJ<voovrrrwv the javelin throwei'S hUiled the ir javelins too sho1t a dista nee to 1each the slinge!'s X. A. 3. 3. 7. After a comparative, ws is as comrnon as lfl<rTe. a. lflure may here be omitted : Kpeluuov' ;) q,petv KaK evils too gTeat to be end1tred E. Hec.1107. b. On positive adjectives with a comparative force, see 1068.

2265. (III) After a principal clause that is negatived. ofiK l{xoJ.I-eV pypwv &!Tre '}'op'etv r hnrf]oeta we have no money (so as) to bu y p'rovislons X. A. 7. 3. G, oOds 1rW7ror' fls rocroi &.vaLOelis LtjJiKero Wure rowr6v n roI-'fiuat ,-o,<'i:v no one ever i'eached such a degTee of shamelessness as to dme to do anything of the so1t D. 21. 62 (cp. 22G8 a). Here are included questions expecting the answer no: rls ovrws luri oetvs "fELv lfl<rTe IT< ?ruat; who is so eloquent as to pe1suade you? X. A. 2. 5. l:'i. After negative (as after comparative, 2264) clauses, the infinitive is used, since there would be no reason for the lflur< clause if the action of the principal clause did not take place. But the indicative occurs occasionally (L. 13. 18, Ant. 5. 43). 2266. (IV) After a principal clause that expresses a condition. 1 J.i-l7 els TOVTO J.l-avliis <fJKOf.'7]V lflure l,-d)J1-V ?rOOtS J.I- x<uliaL (f 1 had not 1eached su ch a degree of ma ness as to desil'e to contend with many L. 3. 29 (cp. 2258 a).

RESULT CLAUSES

509

226'7. (V) To express an intended result, especially after a verb of e.ffecting, as 71'otw, Ot.a7rpirTop.at, etc.
7riv 71'oto<Ttv &rrr< olKTJV JI oto6vat they use every e.tfo1t ( so as) to avoid being punished P. G. 479 c, oupOpas O'VVO''If'WV ws p.'i) !L'If'T0'0at r1js K.p<f>'YJS 'TO vowp they stitched the skins so that the water should not touch the hay X. A.l. 5. 10. a. The infinitive here expresses only the result, while the idea of purpose cornes only from the general sense and especially from the meaning of the leading verb. tva p.fJ in the above examples would express only purpose. b. A clause of intended result is often used where 8'1f'ws might occur in an object clause after a verb of e.tro1t (2211); as p.1Jxavs <p{Jrrop.<v &rr.,.' s Tb 'lf'iv rr< rC:wo' 'lf'aM~a< 'lf'6vwv we will fi nd means (so as) to free thee entirely from these t1oubles A. Eum. 82. The infinitive alone, denoting purpose, is here more usual.

2268. (VI) To state a condition or a proviso (on condition that, provided that).
'lf'O p.v av xpfJp.ar' 1fowK if>tLO''Tl'YJS tJJrrr' txLv '0p<6v Philistides would have given a lmge sum on condition of his holding Oreus D.l8. 81, V'lf'<Txvovro &rrre iK'If'<v they gave their promise on the condition that they should sail out X. A. 5. 6. 26. On condition that is commonly expressed by i<t>' </ or i<t>' </re (2279) with or without a preceding l'lf'i rov'T<f'.

2269. A result clause with w<TT and the indicative, dependent on an infinitive in indirect discourse, and itself quoted, takes the infinitive, and usually retains the negative of the direct form.
r,q,a<Tav TOVS <TrpaTLwra.s <ls Toro rpv<jJ1js li.Oetv &rrr' oflK illlv 'lf'iv<tv, <l p.'i) vOo<Tp.las d11 they said that the soldiers reached such a degree of daintiness as to be

1mwilling to drink wine unless it had a strong bouquet X. H. 6. 2. 6 (direct: with o retained in indirect discourse). See also 2270 b. So even when the principal verb takes on, as lvvo'YJ<Tcirw 8TL ovrws 1}ilTJ r6T< 'lf'6ppw Tijs i)tKiii.s 1j v liJ<Tr' OVK av 'lf'OlP VO'T<pov T<<vrijrrat TOV f3lov let him consider that he was then so jar advanced in yea1s that he would have died soon afterwards X. M. 4. 8. 1. a. The future infinitive here represents the future indicative: orerat ilp.is <is 'TOO'OVTOV <1J0<lQ.s 1j01J 'lf'po{3<{31JKvat CJJ<Tr< Kal rara ava'lf'LO'(){J<T<<T6ru he thinks that you have already reached such a degree of simplicity as to alZow yo~trselves to be persuaded even of this A es. 3. 256. Outside of indirect discourse, the future infinitive with &rrr< is rare ( y<vT,rr<rrOat D.I6. 4, d<T<rrOa.t D. 29. 5). b. liJ<Tr< with the optative in indirect discourse is very rare (X. H. 3. 5. 23, I. 17. 11).
liJ<TT< oflK 1!B<ov 71'ivv,

2270. /J.v with the infinitive expressing poss1:bility, and. representing either a potential indicative or a potential optative, occasionally follows lu'TE (ws).

a. Not in indirect discourse: Ka[ p.ot ol B<ol ovrws lv ros l<pos lrr1,p.1Jvav liJ<TT< Kal lotW'T'YJV av yvwvat ( == liitWT'YJS g"fl'W Il. v or yvol'f} Il. v) OTL rijs p.ovapxla.s 'lf'x<rr6al p. o<
and the gods rlrelared to rne so clearly in the sacrifices that even a common man could !tnderstand that I must keep alooj from sovereignty X. A. 6. 1. 31, lv rrj)

510

SY~T AX

OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

rr<fJa< 1iil'l7 g<rOJl.UL WS J1.'170v av l[n KaKv -rrafJv ( = oOv av I[TL ?rafJOLJl.<) 1 slwll soon be safe jTom su.ff'eTing any jU?theT evil X. C. 8. 7. 27. The difference in meaning is very slight between the construction with the potential optative and that with the infinitive with IJ.v representing the potential optative. N. - Rarely in other cases. 'fhus, r li vros owws halera l!Jrrre 7jiJL<rTa av S VWp tfXpv <r</Js a~TOS fJi7rTLll' ( = l[ppt7rTOV, 2304) bUt theiT intel'nal paTts we1e i1~fiamed to such a deuree that they would have been most glad to thi'OW themselves into cold Water (had they /1een permitted) 'l', 2. 4. b. In indirect discourse: 'J.p ovv iloKii T'fJ D}J.wv o<'YcfJpws owws I[X"" XP'17Jl.rirwv NZK6'17J1.0' l!JrrTE -rrapa<-rre'iv ( = -rrap.!<'lrEP) ii. v TL rwv row6rwv ; does it se mn to emy one of you that Nicodemus so despised money that he would have neglected any agreement of the so1t ? Is. 3. 37.

2271. wrrr" is often used with the infinitive when the infinitive without w<Tn is regular or more common.

a. So with many verbs, especially of will or desi1e. 'fhus,

valovs &rrre ii;a"(a"(Ev K II6ov Merrrr'17vlovs

1[-rrELrrav ros 'AfJ'I7-

tluy j)1"evailed ~tpon the Athenians (so as) to withdraw the Messenians from Pylus T. 5. 35, e'17fJt!vTEs . idrrrwv llq. l!JrrTE tf'l7<f>lrrarrfJa< rov -rr6EJ1.ov having begged each privately ( so as) to vote for the war 1. 119, hol'17rra l!Jrrre il6i;a< TOVT'fJ ro 1rps J1. ?roJl.OV -rra6rrarr8a< 1 bTO~tght it about so th at it seemed'best to /dm to desist from waning against me X. A. 1. 6. 6. N. - Such verbs are : ?rXOJl.a<, Ot!oJl.a< asie, il<a-rrpli.rroJl.a<, il<ilarrKw, il<Ka<w, uvaJl.a<, ffJw, etp'Yw, -rrla rLV ~xw, 'lra"("(oJl.a<, 1ralpw, ~xw am able, 8rr</Ja.TOP Tl TLVL LKVELTa<, a phrase with KaiJlrrTaJl.a<, ~V"fXWPW, -rrapalilW}J.L, ?relfJw (and -rraparrKevajw = 7rEtfJw), 7rf</JKa, -rro<w, -rrpofJJl.OJl.a<, 7rporp7rOJ1.a<,. </JvaTTOJl.a< (2239), tf'17</JlsoJ1.a<. b, When the infinitive is the subject : 1ravv "(ap Jl.O< J1.'I7rrev l!Jrrr Elil.!va< fol' it concerned me exceedingly to know X. C. . 3. 19. N. -.So with frrTL, 'Yi"fvera<, etc., obl;av when it was decTeed, rrvvf3'17 (Thuc.), rrvv-rr-rrTE, rrvvf}vELK (Hdt.), -rrporrf}K~L. Cp. l85. c. With adjectives, especially such as are positive in form but have a comparative force and denote a deficiency or the like (1063) ; as iJf.Le'is "(p (TL vo< l!JrrTE rorrorov -rrp"(Jl.a LErriJa< jo1 we a1e still too young to clecide sa impoTtant a matte?' P. Pr. 314 b. So with lo<cfJT'17<, ol"(os, tflxp6s, "(pwv; and with iKav6s, Uvaros (and with 6varr8a<).
2272. On the absolute infinitive with ws (less often with w<Tn)

see 2012.
lJJ(JT (

WS')

WITH A FI~ITE VEUB

2273. Any form used in simvle sentences may follow w<TTf (rarely w>) with a fiuite verb. w<Tn has no effect on the mood of a finite

verb.
a.

ws is found

especially in Xenophon.

2274. w<Trf so that with the indicative states the actlwl result of

the action of the leading verb. This is especially eommon in narrative staternents with the aorist tense. The negative is o!.

2278]
f.rrnrf7r'TL
XU~P

RESCLT CLAUSES
l'TrETOS IJJCJTE .1rKpv'fe

511

Kal r hrct Ka.i 'TOS vOpcfnroVS an

immense am01mt of snuw feil so that it buried /Joth the wms and the men X. A. 4. 4. 11, fls 'TOO'orov V~p<WS 1J)-,0ov tlJ<Tr' ~1rLO'av D!L.S taVVELV a~rov they 1'eached -'iiCh a pitch of insolence that they peTsuaded you to expel him l. Hi. 9 (cp. 2258 a), OV'TW O'KatS . . , JJO''T 0~ OUVaO'aL K'T, are YOU SO StUpid that yoU a1e 110t able, etc. D. 18. 120 (of a definite fact; with 1''17 iiuvacrOat the me:wing would be so stupid as not to be al1le, expressing a characteristic). So after the locution roaoVrov Ofw, as TOO"oUrov fw 7repL TWv J.J 7rpOCJ1]Kbvrwv LKavbs e1vaL 'YELv, !lJCT'TE /ifooLKa Kr . 1 am sn far from able to speak abo~Gt that which does not Jefer to my case that 1 fem, etc. J,. 17. 1. ws is very rare : vol'li'w ovrws ~xv ws d1rocrr1}crovraL a~ro ai 1r0m 1 consitle1 that it is the case that the cities will revolt from him X. H. 6. 1. 14. a. Sq when JJcrr introducing an independent sentence practically has the force of oilv, rolvvv, roryapov and so theTejfne, ronsequently. Tlms Ka! fis I'v r'i)v cr'Tfpaliv o~x f)K<v wcrO' oi ''E?Jv<s <f>p6vntov and on the next day he did not come; consequent/y the Greeks were anxious X. A. 2. 3. 25. Cp. 2275. This use appears sometimes with the infinitive: &err' iJ- liJ-avrv dvepwriv and so 1 kept asking mys~<lf P. A. 22 e.
0

2275. \Vith an imperative, a hortatory or prohibitory subjunctive, or an interrogative verb, a clause with w<ru is coordinate rather than suborinate, aml w<rT: has the force of Kat ovTw>. wcrn Od.ppEL anrZ so be not afrairZ X. C. 1. 3. 18, r;,,rr< . 1'7J Oav,....<Tys and so

do not

~conder

P. Phae. 274 a, &cru 1r60ev t<TiicrLv; and so how llo they know?

D. 29. 47.

2276. ,;;<T'TE (&>) occms rarely with the participle (instead of the infinitive) hy attraction to a preceding participle (And.4. 20, X.C. 7. 5. 46, D. 10. 4-0, 58. 23). 2277.

with

av (potential indicative and unreal indicative).

oK

<Va-u (w>) may be used with a 1)ast tense of the indicative

rowrbv n 1rol?Jcrv .;,, 11'is av l-yvw 8n driiJ-V'fJ -!jKovcr< she made a movement so that eveTy one could 1ecognize that she hemd the music with plesure X. S. 9. 3,
Karet:j:Jalvero 1r&. vra ar68ev W(JT lv E'Xa8ev arOv OpJJ.W}J.evos Ki\fwv rci)
O'T par((J

everything was clearly 1'isible f1'0?n it, so that Cleon could not have escaped his notice in setting out with his foTce T. 5. 6.
2278. o'l<TTE (w>) is 11sed rarely with the optative withont lJ.v (by assimilatiou to a preceding optative) and with the potential optative with d.v. er TtS T1]v -yvvaKa r1]v (J'1]V o~w Oepa7reUCJLV ?JJcr-re qy. .e'Zv ar'l}v f.J.fiov 7rOL-I](f'LV
iavrv 1) <T Kr . if some one should pay such attention to yom 1r{fe asto make her love hi?n bette1 than YOU1'Se(f 5. 5. 30 (cp. 22UG), 'TOrJOV'TQV oE< lov nvs li.~ws EvaL CJcrn I'LO''f)0Ei?JS av OLKatbrar' dv8prlnrwv ?JOU are so fm 117~W01'thy of compassion th at yo1t would be detestetl most ,i11stly of ail men D. 37. 4, ws /iv X. Ag.

x. c.

6. 7,

x. c. 7. 5. 37, 7. 5.81.

512

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SEXTEXCE

[2279

CLAUSES WITH

cp' ~

AND

<j>' ~TE

INTRODUCING A PROVISO

2279. cp' .iJ and cp' .iJrE on condition that, for the purpose of take the infinitive or (less often) the future indicative, and may be introduced, in the prineipal clause, by the demonstrative hl ro1lrce. Negative P-~
alpe!Uvres hp' ti)n "v-y-ypay;a, v6J.Wvs having been chosen fo1 the p1~rpose of compiling laws X. H. 2. 3. 11, g</>Mav 7To/iW(Je<P ( ros P<Kpos) q) ti) 1-''li Kale<v reis oiKliis the barbarians saicl they woulcl sur1encler the dead on condition that he would not bUIn thei1 hou.ses X. A. 4. 2. 19, <f>l<J1.v "' 1rl ro{rr'l' J1.vro,, <t>' ~r 1-''YJKn <f>'o(Jo<f>v we release you, on this condition however, that you no longer semch afte1' wisdom P. A. 29 c. Future indicative : J;uvf3'1"av <t>' ti)u l;liicnv K Il<o7Tovv?j"ov v7T6(J7Tov/io' Kal 1-''1/ibrore 7T,f3?j"ovra' avri]s they made an agreement on condition that they shmtld depmt f1"0m the Peloponnesus under a , tntce and neveT set foot on it again T. 1. 103. a. These constructions do not occur in Homer. The future indicative is used by Herodotus and Thucydides on the aualogy of relative clauses equivalent to consecutive clauses. These authors also use e1rl ro'i"li for 1rl ror<tJ.

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

2280. A condition is a supposition on which a statement is based. A conditional sentence commonly consists of two clauses : The protasis: the conditional, or subordinate, clause, expressing a supposed or assumed case (if). The apodosis: the conclusion, or })rincipal clause, expressing what follows if the condition is realized. The truth or fulfihnent of the conclusion depends on the truth or fulfilment of the conditioual elaus.

a. The protasis bas its name from 1rp6rM,s, lit. stretching jo1ward, that which is put forward (in logic, a premiss) ; the apodosis, from 7Tolio"'s, lit. giving back, retmn; i.e. the 1esuming or answe1ing clause.
2281.

The protasis usually precedes, but may follow, the apodosis. 2282. The protasis is introduced by E1 1j
a. Homer bas also al, which is an Aeolic (and Doric) form.
2283.

With the subjunctive mood, d commonly takes d.v (Epie Et or El. KEv, not av). a. There are three forms, civ, ~v, civ. Uv is the ordinary form in Attic

prose and inscriptions; r)v appears in Ionie and in the older Attic writers (the tragic poets and Thucydides) ; &:v, generally in the later writers (sometimes together with M.v), very rarely in Attic inscriptions. In Plato tf.v is commoner than liv. Xenophon has all tl1ree forms. b. 1fv is from el+ tiv, tf.v from n (another form of el)+ 11v. The etymology of dv is uncertain : either from + {lp or from el + tf. v.

zzBg]

CONDITIONAL CLAGSES

513

2284. 'Tl~e particle lv is used in the apoosis: (l) with the optative, to denote possibility (cp. 1824); (2) with the past tenses of the indicative, to denote either the non-fulfilment of the condition (1786) or, occasiona.lly, repetition (1790). 2285. The apodosis may be introduced by S or &.., less often by afml.p. See under Particles. vvv il as it is, as it was corrects a supposition contrary to fact. The apodosis sometimes has T6n, Thf &], ovTws (Hom. T<) comparable to Eng. then, in that case in the conclusion of conditional sentences. 2286. The negative of the protasis is p.~ because the subordinate clause expresses something that is conceived or imagined. p.~ negatives the conditional clause as a whole. On o adherescent in protasis, see 2698. The negative of the apodosis is o, in case the principal clause states the conclusion as a fact on the supposition that the protasis is true; p.~, when the construction requires that negative (2689). 2287. The indicative, subjunctive, and optative moods, and the participle may stand in protasis and apodosis. The imperative and infinitive may be used in the apodosis. The future optative is \10t used in conditioual sentences except in indirect discourse. The tenses in conditional sentences, except unreal conditions, have the same force as in simple sentences. 2288. Instead of a formai conditional sentence the two members may be simply coordinated, the protasis having the form of an independent clause.
U/Kpov 'Aa{3 7rapaevyp.a, Ka! 7rav-ra efuEL {3ovop.a< take an insignijicant example, and you will know what I mean P. Th. 154 c, 7rpd7"reral n Twv flp.v oKovvTwv uvp.<f>epELv /J.<j>wvos AluxlvrJs something is going on (of a kind) that seems to be to yottr advantage. Aeschines is dumb. D. 18. 108. Cp. " Take with you this great truth, and y ou have the key to Paul's writings" (Channing); "Petition me, perhaps I may forgive" (Dryden). Cp. 1839.

CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

A. CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO FORM

2289. Conditional sentences may be classified according to form or function (i.e. with reference to their meaning). Classifi.ed according to form, all conditional sentences may be arranged with regard to the form of the protasis or of the apodosis. Protasis:
el with the indicative.

Uv (rarely El) with the subjunctive.

el with the optative. Apodosis: with Il. v, denoting wh at would ( should) be or have been.
GREEK GRAM.

without IJ.v, not denoting what would (should) be or have been. -33

51

SYNTAX OF TIIE COl\1l'LEX

SE~TENCE

[2290

B.

CLASSikJCATION ACCOHDING TO FONCTION

2290. Greek possesses a great variety of ways to join protasis and apodosis, but certain types, as in English, are more common than others and have clear and distinct meanings. In the case of some of the less usual types the exact shade of difference cannat be accurately known to us; as indeed to the Greeks themselves they were often used with no essential difference from the conventional types. In the following classification only the ordinary forrns are given.
ACCORDING TO TIME

This is the only functional distinction that characterizes all conditional sentences. Here are inclnded also 2292, 2295, 2296.
2291.

J. PrPsent

Protasis: a primary tense of the indicative. Apodosis: any forrn of the simple sentence. d TavTa ?Tot~>, Ka.w> 1rot> ~f you do this, ymt do well.
2. Past

Protasis: a secondary tense of the indicative. Apodosis: any form of the simple sentence. TavTa ?To{Et>, Kaw> 7ro{n ~f you were doing this, you were do1g well, El Tavra ?To{'YJcra, Kaw> 7To{'YJcra<; ~f you did this, you did well.
3. Future a. Protasis: Mv with the subjunctive. Apodosis: any form ex pressing future time. &v TavTa ?Totfi> ( 7TOL~crn>), Kaw> ?TOt~cra<; if you do this, you will do well. b. Protasis: d with the future indicative. Apodosis: any form expressing future time. El Tavm ?Tot~crw;, 1rdcrn {( you do this, you will su.Jt~r fm . c. l'rotasis: d with the optative. Apodosis: av with the optative. d Tavm 7rowf'YJ> ( 7rOt~crna<;), Kaw> ll.v 7row['YJ> ( 7rOt~cr~w>) if you slwuld (were to) do this, you would do well.

According to Fuljilment or Non-ju{filment

2292. Only one class of conditional sentences distinctly expresses non-fulfilment of the action.

zzg6]

CO:\'DlTIOXAL CLAUSES
1. Present

515

01

Past

Protasis: d with the imperfect iudicative. Apodosis: av with the imperfect indicative. fi mil-ra 1..,-o{w;, Ka:;;> &v 1..,-o[H<; (f yon uere (now) doing this, you would be doing well; if you had been doing this, you would have been doing well.
2. Past

Protasis : d with the aorist indicative. Apodosis: av with the aorist in di cati ve. fi Tav-ra l..,-o{"YJ(ra<;, Kaw> &v f..,.of."YJCTa<; if you had done th-is, you would have done well.
N. -Greek has no special forms to show that an action is or was fulfilled, however clearly this may be implied by the context. Any form of conditional sentence in which the apodosis does not express a rule of action ma.y refer to an impossibility.

According ta Parcular or Geneml Uonrlitions

2293. A particular condition refers to a definite act or to several definite acts occuning at a definite time or at de:finite times. 2291:. A general condition refers to any one of a series of acts that may occur or may have occlll'red at any time. 2295. General conditions are distinguished from particular conditions only in present and past time, and then only when there is no implication as to the fulfilment of the action. General conditions have no obligatory form, as any form of condition may refer to a rule of action or to a particular act; but there are two common types of construction :

1. Present

Protasis: olav with the subjunctive. A podosis: 11resent indicative.

iiv mvm 7ToLfj> ( 7TOL~O"[J> ), CT 1ratvw

{f ev er you do tls, I al ways

p1aise you.
2. Past

Protasis: El with the optative. Apodosis: impedect inclicati ve.

fi -rav-ra 7TOto{YJ> ( 71"0L~r:Tfta<;), CT hr]vovv

if ev er you did this, I al ways

praised you.
2296.

Ta'Ta 7rOL,

But equal1y possible, thongh Jess common, are: <rf: 7TO.tVJ and d Ta:ra To{n, O"f: 1r:Jvovv.

516

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

TABLE OF CONDITIONAL FORMS

[2297

In this Grammar the ordinary types of conditional sentences are classified primarily according to ti-me. The Homeric and other more usual variations from the ordinary forms are mentioned under each class, the less usual Attic variations are mentioned in 2355 ff. The following tabl~ shows the common usage :
2297.
Tnm

FoRM

PROTASIS

AroDosis

Simple Unreal
PRESENT

El with present or perfect indicative El with imperfect indicative

{av with subjunctive

General

present or perfect indicative or equivalent imperfect indicative with n a. v present indicative or equivalent imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect indicative aorist or imperfect indicative with i.v imperfect indicati'Ve or equivalent fut. indic. or equiva1ent fut. indic. or equivalent i.v with optative

Simple Unreal
PAST

General

d with imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect indicative EL with aorist or imperfect indicative El with optative

FUTURE

MoreVivid av with subjunctive Emotional d with future indicative LessVivid EL with optative

PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS

First Forrn of Gonclitions

SIMPLE PRESENT AND P AST CONDITIONS

Simple present or past conditions sim ply state a supposition with no implication as to its reality or probability. The protasis has the indicative, the apodosis has commonly the indicative, but also any other form of the simple sentence appropriate to the thought. d -ravm 7rotE>, Kaw 7l'OL> if you clo this, yo1t do well. d -rav-ra -rro[r;cra<;, Kaw> 7ro[r;cra<; if you did this, you did well.
2298. a. This form of condition corresponds to the logical formula if this is so, then that is so; if this is not so, then that is not so; if .A = B, then G = D. The truth of the conclusion depends solely on the truth of the condition, which

2300]

CONDITION AL CLAUSES

517

is not implied in any way. In these conditions something is supposed to be true only in order to draw the consequence that something else is true. b. The conditional clause may express what the writer knows is physically impossible. Even when the supposition is true according to the real opinion of the writer, this form of condition is employed. In such cases ef1rep is often used for Ei. Both el and d1rep sometimes have a causal force (2246) ; cp. si quidem and quia. c. The simple condition is particular or general. When the protasis has et ns and the apodosis a present indicative, the simple condition has a double meaning referring both to an individual case and to a rule of action. When a present general condition is distinctly expressed, Uv with the subjunctive is used (2337.) 2299. There are many possible combinations of present and past conditions with different forms of the protasis and apodosis. Protasis and apodosis may be in different tenses, and present and future may be combined. 2300. The apodosis may be the simple indicative or any other fonn of the simple sentence appropriate to the thought. a. Simple Indicative: El ToT' fx_EL a'Aws, K<vo alux_pws if this is excellent, that is disgraceful A es. 3.188, el p. v (' AuK'1J1r<os) Oeo 1jv, oK 1i alux_poKeporis el /5' alux_poKepof,s, oK 1j v Oeo if Asclepius was the son of a god, he was not covetous; if he was covetous, he was not the son of a god P. R. 408 c, er T n lil\"1\o "fPETO 1r<Klvi5vov Tos "El\l\1Ju<, 1rClPTWP p.eTuxo~v and if any other danger befell the Greeks, we took our share in all T. 3. 54, 1j Kailv TXP1Jp.a lipa KKT1Jua<, Ef1rep KtKT1JUa< in truth y ou do possess a noble art, if indeed y ou do possess it P. Pr. 319 a, Ef7rEp "f tl.p<lou IJTL 7ratS OK ap.axel TaT' E"fW 'AT,>fop.a< if indeed he is a son of Darius, I shall not gain this without a battle X. A. 1. 7. 9, Kl\apxos El 1rap Tos l!pKous nv< Ts u1rovMs, T-hv i5lK1JP ~X assmning that Glearchus broke the truce contrmy to his oath, he has his deserts 2. 5. 41, El o ouo ~ vos <i'YWPOS "f"fP'1}1J00P, OVK E"fW arnos but if two trials have been made out of one, I am not responsible Ant. 5. 85. b. Indicative with O.v (unreal indicative, 1786): KalTo< TaTE rov 'T7r<p<lo"', f7r<p a'1}0fi p.ou PP KaT1J"fOp, p.l\)\op a. ElKOTWS ?} Tov/5' <MwKEP and yet, if indeed his p1esent charge against me is t1ue, he would have had more reason .fo1' p1osecuting Ilyperides than he now has for p1osecuting my client D. 18. 223 (here av olwK<v implies <l ii5iwK<v, 2303). So also an unreal indicative witbout {ip, 1774: TOTo, fl Kal TlLa 7raPT' a7rOIJTpOIJLP a7rOOOPaL 7rpoufjKEP even if they steal eve1-ything else, they should have restored this D. 27. 37. In the above examples each clause has its proper force. c. Subjunctive of exhortation or prohibition (cp. the indicative oe or x_pf, wi th the infinitive, 1807): I!OEP o a7rEl7rOp.<P 7rav)\()wp.ev, Ef (JOL i}oop.PCj) EIJTlP but let us return to the point whence we dig1essed, if it is agreeable to you P. Ph. 78 b, El ,.,... fiJT p. TOLOTOV P."' pwv1!v avci.IJX'1}1J0 if yott know that I am such a man . . . do not even endme the sound of my voice D. 18. 10. d. Optative of wish (cp. the indicative 7rlfw) : Kci.KL(JT, a7roolp.'I/P, :;;!avOl.v El p.'lj p<'Aw rnay I pe1'ish rnost vil ely, if I do not love Xanthias Ar. Ran. 579. e. Potential optative: Oaup.&.o<P: av el o<TOa I should be surprised if you

518

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SEXTEXCE

know P. Pr. 312 c. The potential optative (or indicative with !iv, above b) sornetimes suggests an inference (cp. the indicative lioKE and inf. with !iv). Thus, l fdv "fp TOTO X("fovrnv, op.oO"fO['YJV av ~'YW'Y o KaT TOUTOUS EvaL pf}rwp for if they mean this, 1 must admit (it seems to me that I must admit) that 1 am an orator, but not ajter their style P. A. 17 b (cp. ror6 'Y p.o< OOK<t Kav Eva<, d ns alos .,' <t'YJ 7rat<v<tv v1Jpw1rovs this seems to me a fine thing, if any one should be aille to train men 19 e), <l "fp ol!rot opiJws ,.<TT'YJ<Tav, Dp.<s av o xp<ciJv lipxo<r< f01' ~( they were right in 1evolting, you must be wrong in holding yOU1' empire T. 3. 40 (cp. oK lipa xp'TJ bf.Ls lipxv). f. Imperative (cp. the indicative K<<vw orde1, rha"fopevw jorbid): et ns vn"fe<, f'Yrw if any one objects, let him speak X. A. 7. 3. 14. 2301. If the protasis expresses a p1esent intention or necessity, the

future indicative may be used.

El 0~ Kal re;> 'h'Y<p.OVL 1rL<TTdJO"Of.LEV 8v av Kpos OL<f}, rl KWMEL Kal r liKpa .f]p.'tv K<<v<<v Kpov 1rpoKaraXa{Mv; but ~( we are going to trust any guide that Cyrus

may give us, what hincle1s om also o1dering Cyrus to occupy the heights in advance in our behalf? X. A. 1. 3. 16, alp< 1rijKrpov, El p.ax raise your spur if you mean (are going) to jight Ar. Av. 759. The future here has a modal force and expresses something besides futurity ; hence it is equivalent to p.XXs p.axirOat (1959), but not to v f.Laxv (2323) orto el f.Laxii: (a threat, 2328), both of which refer to future time. The periphrasis with p.XXw and the present or future infinitive is more common in prose.

Second Fo_1m of Conditions

PRESENT AND PAST U::\REAL CONDITIONS

In present and past unreal co11ditions the protasis implies that the supposition cannot qr could not be realized because contrary to a known fact. The apodosis states what would be or would have been the result if the condition were or had been realized. 2303. The protasis has d with the imperfeet, aorist, or pluperfeet indicative; the apodosis has av with these past tenses. The protasis and apodosis may have different tenses. Unreal conditions are either partieular or general. 2304. The imperfect refers to present time or (sometimes) to a continued or habituai past act or state. The imperfect may be conative. d Tavra bro~ts, Kaws liv bro{EL<; if you were (now) doing this, you would be doing well, or if you had been doing this, you would have been doing well. The implied opposite is a present (, ov 'lTOLE> but you are not doing this) or an imperfeet (&.X o'K 7ro{w;, but y01~ we1e not do~g this). The imperfect of past time empha&izes the continuance of the action.
2302.

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

510

2305. The aorist refers to a simple occurrence in the past. d TaTa 7rOLYJa<>, Ka.ws v 1ro[YJ; if you had done this, you would

have done well. The implied opposite is an aorist (ID' ovK 1rotYJa but you did not do this). 2306. The (rare) pluperfect refers to an act completed in past or present time or to the state following on such completion. fl TaTa 7rE7roL>)KYJ>, Ka.w &v 1re7roL>)KYJ> if you had finisld doing this (now or on any past occasion), you would have done well. The implie opposite is a perfect (&U' o 7r7ro[YJKa> but you have not done this) or a plnperfect (&>..>..' oK 7rE7roL>)KT)> but you had not done this).
a. The pluperfect is used only when stress is laid on the completion of the act or on the continuance of the result of the act, and generally refers to present time. In reference to past time, the aorist is generally used instead of the pluperfect. 2307. In reference to past time, the imperfect or aorist is used according as either teuse would be used in an affirmative sentence not conditional. The pluperfect is commonly used when the perfect would have been used of present time.
2308. In the fO!m of the protasis and the apodosis of unreal conditions there is nothing that denotes unreality, but, in the combination, the unreality of the protas\s is always, and that of the apodosis gimerally, implied. The past tenses of the indicative are used in un real conditions referring to present time, because the speaker's thought goes back to the past, when the realization of the condition was stilll)Ossible, though at the time of speaking that realization is impossible.

2309. Same Tenses in Protasis and Apodosis.- a. Imperfect of present time: TctVTct Of OUK av fOUVctVTO 1rOLv, fi !] Kai OLctlTTJ !J.fTplq. <xpwVTO but they would not be able to do this, if they were not also following a temperate diet X. C. 1. i. 16. b. lmperfect of past time: OUK av OUV vf,<FWV KpaTL, <l p.f, TL Kai VctUTLKOV dx<v acc01dingly he would not have ruled ove1 islands, if he had not possessed also some naval force T. 1. O. Present and past combined: fi p.?] r6r' h6vovv, vvv av oK <<j>paLvOp.?Jv if 1 had not toiled then, 1 should not be rejoicing now Philemon 153. c. Aorist qf past time: OVK av f7rohwu 'kyct<Flis ravm, <l p.?] tyw CLVTOV ht!Xw<Fa Agasias wo1tld not have do ne this, if 1 had not ordered him X. A. 6. 6. 15. 2310. Different Tenses in Protasis and Apodosis. -a. Imperfect and Aorist:
fi !J.fv 7rpO<F0<V i}7rL<FTap:rJV, oo' av <FVV?J~OoU07J<F <FOL if 1 had knOWTi thiS before, 1

would not even have accompanied you X. A. 7. 7.11. N.- With an imperfect of present time in the protasis, E1rov ll.v, ?r<Kpivrip.7Jv ll.v and like verbs, denote an act in present time (I should at once say). Thus, <l p.?] 1rar1)p rwe', <1rov li v <T' oK <il <j>povv if thou we1t not my .father, 1 would say (would have said) thou wast unwise S.Ant. 755. Often in Plato, as <l p.v

520

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

if now you were asking me any one of the questions with which we are now dealing, 1 should say etc., P. Euth.12d, cp. P. G. 514 d, X. A. 7. 6. 23. b. Imperfect and Pluperfect : Ka! TI1XX' a.v i1.1!"avr' aKoovOws TOVTOL< l11"7rpQ.Kro, t ns ....te.To p.ot and everything else would have been effected consistently with what I have said, if my advice had been jollowed D.19. 173. c. Aorist and Imperfect: d p.1] {;p.s -I}XOn, l7ropv6p.<Oa. a.v ... l {Ja.utXt!i if you had not come, we should now be marching against the king X. A. 2. 1. 4. d. Aorist and Pluperfect : d -yw ...axa., ...xlp 71ua. ...pd.rr<Lv T ...oXnK ...pa.-yp.ara, ...aXat a.v d.7row7J if 1 had long ago essayed to meddle with politics, 1 should long ago have perished P. A. 31 d, d p.la; if;f)<f>os p.<r11"<U<v, 7r<pWp<uT' 11v if one vote had been t1ansjerred to the other side, he would have been transported across the borders (and now be in exile) Aes. 3. 252. e. Pluperfect and Imperfect: 1] 7I"O<s Mp.f3a.vv a.v lK7Jv, .r T< i}lKTJTO the State would inftict punishment, if it had been wronged Ant. 6. 10. f. Pluperfect and Aorist: oK av 7rapt!p.<Lva, d lXMp.7Jv 1 should not have stayed, if I had been free Ant. 5. 13. 2311. Homeric Constructions. -In Homer the imperfect in unreal conditions refers only to past time. The apodosis may have K or /lv with the optative. a. The present unreal condition with l with the optative in the protasis and if.v with the optative in the apodosis (injoTm like a less vivid future condition in Attic) is very rare (-Y 274). In B 80, n 220 we have a combination of a past protasis (imperfect or aoris~ indicative) with present apodosis (with Kv and the optative). b. Past unreal conditions have, in the protasis, the imperfect or aorist indicatiye ; in the apodosis, either the imperfect or aorist indicative with /lv or K or the aorist or present optative with K. 'l'hus, Kal vu K<v ~vil' a....6XotTo Alvdis, <l p.1] if.p o~v vo7Ju< 'A<f>potTTJ and here .Aeneas had peJished, if .Aphl'odite had not quckly observed him E 311. 2312. Unreal conditions with if.v and the optative in apodosis (cp. 2311) in Attic are rare and sorne are suspected. Either the common reading is at fault (X. M. 3. 5. 8), or we have a simple condition with a potential optative (2300 e), as in And. 1. 57, L. 6. 39, I. 4. 102. In fi p.v Tolvvv ror' 7r<x<lpovv -y<Lv . , oK ~ull' /!uns oK a.v fiKorws 11"trp.fw., p.o< if now J were attempting to say this, there would be no one who would not censure me with good reason (D.18.206) the implied conclusion is ovK av~~~ liuns KT, a. The optative in protasis and apodosis occur in E. Med. 568 (present unreal). Hdt. uses the potential optative occasionally (e.g. 7. 214) where English uses a past expression.
oil' uv p.e i}pwTas TL Twv vv ?j, <7rov /lv KT.
UNREAL CONDITIONS -APODOSIS WITHOUT

!iv

2313. tl.v may be omitted in the apodosis of an unreal condition when the apodosis consists of an imperfect indicative denoting unfulfilled obligation, possibility, or propriety. Such are the impersoual expressions ~O<t, xrY,v, Y,v, dKo> :{jv, Ka.ov :{jv, etc., with the infinitive, the action of which is (usually) not realized.

CONDITIONAL CLAGSES

521

-raV.a .-1rolt, ~8a (~~~~) alnaBat avdw if he we?e doing this (as he is not), one ought to (rnight) blarne hirn. d -ravm bro[TJ<n, ~8n (l~v) aln&.uauBat (or alnuBat) alm5v if he had done this (as he did not), one ought to (rnight) have blamed

him.
a. Here lie< and l~ijv are auxiliaries and the emphasis falls on the infinitive. The impersonal verb bas the effect of a modifying adv~rb denoting obligation, possibility, or propriety: th us l!o"' alnfi<r8a' a.&r6v is virtually equivalent to /'iuca!wr av TJ'TLro, and eiKOr ?]v alnli<Ta.<T0a.L avr6v to eiK6rws av flnli07} he would propeTly have been blamed. b. If/le,, xpi)v, etc., may be used in simple sentences (1774 ff.) without any protasis either expressed or implied. But a protasis may often be supplied in thought.
2314. The present infinitive generally expresses what wo~d necessarily, possibly, or properly be done now. The aorist, and sometimes the present, infinitive expresses what would necessarily, possibly, or properly have been done in the past.
"YEV6f1.VOL E-yvwtrav

a. Present infinitive of present time: xr?Jv ?j7!"ov, etre nvs arrwv 1rpe<T{J&repm On, vlats otTI.P aro'is i')'W KaKP 1rW1rDTf Tt ~vvEf3o{i.wa-a., viivi a.VToVs

vaf3alvovras lp.o Karmopv if some of thern on gTowing olde1' had perceived that I ever gave them any bad counsel when they we1e young, they ought of course now to 1ise up in persan and accuse me P. A. 33 d. b. Present infinitive of past time: d nva. (1rpoKa.) iiiiov, eld>s fi Ka.l r-l]v ooil<TO.V {nr TWV 1l"O.pa"(ev<T0a. <f>a.<rdwrwv p.a.prvpii:<rilaL if he ha.d given any dowry, that which was actttally delivered would naturally have been attested by those who. claimed to have beenpresent Is. 3. 28. c. Aorist infinitive of past time : d l(3o6"1>.ero lKa.os eiva.< 1repl Tos 1ra.oa.s, l~ijv a&r.;J J.u<rew<ra' rv oKov if he had wished to be just in Tegard to the child1en, he might prope1ly have let the house L. 32. 23.

.2315. With the same impersonal expressions, ll.v is regularly used when the obligation, possibility, or propriety, and not the action of the verb dependent on l!ilet, etc., is denied. Here the main force of the apodosis falls on the necessity, possibility, or propriety of the act. el ra.ra l1role<, l!o (l~ijv) av a.lncrOa., avr6v if he were doing this (as he is not), it would be necessaTy (possible) to blame him; but, as the case now stands, it is not necessary (possible). Thus, El pb i}'lr<<TTri.JL<Oa <Tatj>ws 8n 71~ 1roa. lf."(wv lKav&, oi'i~v av l!oH wv JLt"I>.w t'fP if we knew faT certain that he would Tetu1n with a sufficient number of vessels, the1e wattld be no need to say what I am going to say (but there is nee'd) X. A. 5. 1. 10, ravra. El JLv a( cr8vav 7r<i<TXOJLev, <Trep'fv av fjv vri.'YK7J r-l]v rux1Jv if we had su.ffered this because of our ~veak ness, we should have (necessity would compel us) to rest content with our lot L. 33. 4.

2316. With ll.v, it is implied that the obligation does (or did) not exist; without it is implied that the action of the dependent infinitive is (or was)

a,,

522

SYN'_fAX OF TllE COl\ll'LEX

SE~TE~CE

not realized. Th us the first sentence in 2:115, without liv, would mean: if he we1e doing this (as he is not), one ought to lame him; but, as the case now stands, one does not biarne him.
2317. (3ov6p.YJV, or (3ovDjJ-YJV av, with the infinitive may stand in the apodosis. Cp. 1782, 1789. 2318. av is regularly omitted in an apodosis formed by the imperfect of JJ.O> and the infinitive (usually future) to denote an unfulfill ed past intention or expectation (cp. the Lat. future partici ple with eram or fui). Cp. 1895 a, 1960.
~ /'-fLa. /57)' kya.!'-f/'-VOPO> <j>IJtnrr!Ja.t KO.KOP oiroP b'L !1-<'fapot<rLP l!'-<ov, ei pl) . . . ~mr<> in sorJI.h I v:as lil to have perished in my halls by the evil fate of Agamemnon, hadst tho11 not spoken v 38:3 (periturns emm, nisi dixisses).

2319. av may be omitted with the aorist of K~v8'iivE1iO> run a risk when the emphasis falls on the dependent infinitive.
El 11-1 op611-tp 11-6'Ats ~<<f>v-yowv fis f>.<'A<j>ou>, htvilvoUo-ap<v rroXlrr!Ja.t if we had not escaped with dijjiculty to Dclphi by taking to our he el s, we ran the risk of perishing ( = we should probably have perished: !lv rrw'A611-<!Ja.) Aes. 3. 123. Contrast
!J.fPTOL TOT rrflov> rrvv-y7J<ra.v, fKLVOVPVfrP /lv ilm<j>!Jap'?Jva.t 1rO rov fTTpa.rovparo>
~f they had mustered in lwge1 force at this time, a lmge part of the troops would have been in danger of being destroyed X. A. 4. 1. 11.

2320. Some expressions containing a secondary tense of the indicative without av, and not followed by a dependent infinitive, are virtually equivalent to the apodosis of an unreal condition. . TOVT'fl o' fi 1'-1 W!J.Ob""fOVP il. OVTO> lf3ouro, OO<!J.L S7J!J-lrt- ~voxos ~p but if they

had not acknowledged to him wh at he wished, he toouhl have been (lit. was) liable to no penalty L. 7. 37. a. Imperfects (not impersonal.) without liv are often emended, as iwxv6!J-7J fJ-tvrot (some editors !J-vrliv), vrr rro<!J-iov -y< ovro> <~7Jrra.r-fJIJ7JP I shonld, however, be ashamed, if 1 ha l1een deceived by any one who was an enemy X. A. 7. 6. :!1. Cp. "Tybalt's deatlt was woe enough, if it had ended there" (Shakesp.). Cases like 189f> a do not belong here.
FUTURE CONDITIONS

Future conditions set forth suppositions the fulfilment of which is still undecided. There are two main for:tns of future conditions: More Vivid Future conditions. Less Vivid :Future conditions. A variety of the first class is the Emotional Future (2328). Future conditions may he particular or general (2293, 2294).
2321. 2322. The difference between the More Vivid Future and tbe Less Vivid Future, Jike the difference between if I (Rhall) do this and if I should do this, depends on the mental attitude of the speaker. With the Vivid Future the

CONDlTTOX AT. CLAUSES

523

speaker sets forth a thought as prominent and distinct in his mind ; and for any one or more of various reasons. 'l'hus, he may (and geHerally d.oes) regard the conclusion as more likely to be realized ; but even an impossible (2322 c) or dreaded result may be expressed by this form if the speaker chooses to picture the result vividly and dbtinctly. The More Vivid Future is thus used whenever the speaker clearly desires to be graphie, impressive, emphatic, a,nd to anticipate a future sult with the distinctness of the present. The Less Vivid Future deals with suppositions Jess distinctly conceived and of Jess immediate concern to the speaker, mere assumed or imaginary cases. This is a favourite construction in Greek, and is often uAed in stating suppositions that are merely possible and often impossible ; but the form of the condition itself does not imply an expectation of the speaker that the conclusion may possibly be realized. The difference between the two fonus, therefore, is not an inherent difference between JJ1'obable realization in the one case and po.~s1:ze realization in the other. The same thonght may often be expressed in either form without any essential difference in meaning. The only difference is, therefore, often that of temperament, tone, or style. a. &.v with the subjunctive and El with the optative are rarely nsed in successive sentences. In most such cases the difference lies merely in the degree of distinctness and emp!Jasis of the expression nsed ; but where the speaker wishes to show that the conclusion is expected or desired, he uses l.v with the su bjU:ncti ve rather th an the other form. Thus, 1 ovv roo "v Kt vii? Ka.Oti1T'ep Tos
'lf'oos

lv fJ-EIJ'f/fJ-fJplq. JJ otaeyop,bous, X>.t vUtJra1o,,Tas Ka.l K'f/ovp,lvous q) r1rwv

OL J.p')'laJ' ri)s OLrlVOlas, OLKrllws av KrlTrl')'<i!ev . lv

a'

opWITL

0Lrl')'0P,fVOUS ,

ra x' av oev ')'MfNvTEs if now they should see that 1ve, lilce the many, a1e not

conversing at noon-day but slmnbeTing and chmmed by them because of the indolence of our thoughts, they wottld Tightly laugh at us ; but if they see us conveTsing, they will, peTha]ls, out of admimtion ma lee us gifts P. Phae. 259 a. b. Cases of both fmms in successive sentences are I 135, Hdt. 8. 21, 9. 48; P. Cr. 51 d, Ph. 105 b, Plute. 259 a., l'r. 330 c-:'::il a, D. 4. 11, 18. 147-148. In D. 18. 178 both the desired and the undesired altemative have M.v with the subjunctive. c. Impossibilities may be expresse(] by M.v with the subjunctive. Thns, rl ovv, &v d'lf'wtTtv oi v6f.LOL; wh at, then, if the laws say ? l'. Cr. 50 c; cp. P. Eu. 299 b, R. 610 a, 612 b (opt. in 359 c, 30 h), Ar. Aves 1642, E. Or. 1593, Phoen. 121. Cp. 2329 a.

Third Form of Conditions

MOHE VIVID FUTURB CONDITIONS 2323. More vivid future conditions have in the protasis iiv (~v, !iv) with the subjunctive; in the apoclosis, the future indicative or any other form refening to future time. iiv ravra 7l'otfi> ( 'lf'OL~YJ>), Kaw 71'0t~<T<t> if ym~ do this, you will do well. 2324. This form of condition corresponds to the use of shall and will in conditional sentences in older English ("if ye shall ask ... I will doit": St. John).

524

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

Modern English substitutes the present for the more exact future in ordinary future conditions of this class ; and often uses shall in the protaRis with an emotional force. The English present subjunctive, although somewhat rarely used in the modern language, corresponds more nearly to the Greek subjunctive ("if she be there, he shall not need": Beaumont and Fletcher) .-Since ~(you do this may be expressed in Greek by ev ra.ra. 7ro<iis or el ra.ra. 'lrO<f}<Tm (2328), and by el rara 'lrOLEs (2298), the difference in meaning is made clear only by the apodosis. The form ev rara 7ro<iis in vivid future conditions must be distinguished from the same form in present general conditions (if eve1 you do this, 2337). lv rarci <Jo< oKi, 1rolE< may be particular or general: if (or if ever) this seems good to you, do it.
2325. The present subjunctive views an act as continuing (not completed); the aorist subjunctive as simply occurring (completed). Neither tense has any time of itself. The aorist snbjunctive may mark the action of the protasis as completed before the action of the principal clause (cp. the Lat. future perfect). Ingressive aorists (1924) retain their force in the subjunctive. 2326. 'fhe apodosis of the more vivid future condition is the future indicative or any other form of the simple sentence that refers to future time.

a. Future Indicative:

lv t11riis Kaws, Epf}<Tm

if yott seek well, you shall

ji nd P. G. 503 d, v ft ~xwp.Ev xpf}p.aO', ~~op.Ev tpl'Aovs if we have mo ney, we shrtll

have f1iends Men. Sent, 165, x<ip<v "fE d<Top.a<, l v <iKo1JTE 1 shall be gmteful. if y ott listen P. Pr. 310 a, iiv a{!'Tlp <oe>s .p"fpwv Kal 1rE lOTis arov, 7ro<f}<TEL J<al <T <Totpbv 1j' you give him mo ney and pe1suade him, he will malce y ou too wise 310 d, 1)v "f.p roro. MfJwJ.LEv, o vv-.j<Tovra.< pbE<v for if we take this, they will not be able to Ternain x. A. 3. 4. 41, < v KKOV E'lrL rijs 7rpLrj>EpEliis 1]</>0ii o rvxbvra <T1]1J.<a,"' 1rl r. <T1Jp.a 7r<i'W"fvvp.h1] EOEa. vrs 'lr<<TEra< ro KK>-.ov if any two points be talcen in 'the ccurnference of a circle, the stmight line which joins thern shall fall within the circle Euclid 3. 2. b. Primary Tenses of the indicative other than the future. Present (1879) : 1)v Oav71s uv, 1ras o' htpdJ"fEL p.bpov if thou art slain, yon boy escapes death K And. 381, lw<T' hw v KTflV<LV avrbv, 1)v raE lf<V<TOii f"/WV freely he offers himself to death, if he lies in speaking thus (lw<T< ==he says that he is ready) S. PhiL 1342. Aorist: see 1934, and cp. El ;dv K' aVOL p.vwv Tpwwv 1r6LV .tJ.</><p.a xwp.a<, liJXEro p.v p.o< v6<Tros if 1 tmry heTe a. nd wage war about the city of the T1ojans, rny 1etum horne is lost foT rne I 413. Perfect: see 1950. Cp. "if I shall have an answer no directlier, I am gone": Beaumont and Fletcher. c. Subjunctive of exhortation, prohibition, or deliberation, and with p.f} (p.T, o) of doubtful assertion (1801). Thus, P.11' iiv r< wvwp.a<, ~</>1], f)v 1rw>-. vewrEpos rpdKovra hw v, ~pwp.a<, inr6<Tov 1rw>-.; even i:f 1 arn buying something, said he, arn 1 not to ask 'what do you sell it f01'?' if the selleT is undeT thi1ty years of age? X. M.l. 2. 36, K<lv rj>a<vwp.EOa li<Ka ar p"fa?;6p.evo<, p.'l] o f!T/ 7ro>-.o"fli'E<T0aL Kr . and if we appea1 to do this unjustly, 1mtheT think it rnay not be necessary to take notice, etc. P. Cr. 48 d. d. Optative of wish, or potential optative with ii v (' something may happen' instead of 'something will happen '). Th us, 1v <TE ro >-.o<1ro 1ror' .q,>-.wp.aL xp6vov,

CONDITIOXAL CLACSES

525

KaK<rrr' tbro"'Aolp:qv ~f eve? in the futu?e I take them away from you, may 1 perish most vilely! Ar. Han. 586, < v KaT p.pos <jJu!iTTWJI-V , 'JjTTov av ilvvawro i)p.s o.,pv oi 1ro"'Ap.w< if we keep gua1d by tu ms, the enemy will ( would) be less able to harry us X. A. 5. 1. 9. See also 2856 a. e. Imperative, or infinitive for the imperative (2013) : ?)v 1r6>..ep.ov a!pfjrriJe, p:r]KTL ijKere ilJpo livev li1r"'Awv if you choose war, do not come here again 1oithout your armS X C. 3. 2.13, IJ o', ci v Tt gX?/S {J{T6v 7rOIJEV afJEv, 7rtp.rr1Jat Kat fji.O JI-Tailt06va< but (f you can find anything better from any quarter, try to communicate it to me tuo l'. Crat. 426 b.

2327. Homeric Constructions.- a. el alone without K or liv with the subjunctive with no appreciable difference from d K< (li v) : et 1rep -yap cre Kara-K'ravv, o!l <r' . . . Kavrrop.at for if he slay thee, 1 shall not bewail thee X 86. This construction occurs in lyric and dramatic poetry, and in Hdt., as urrTaatva rdp' -yw, et rrov uTep't)IJw w?etched indeed shall I be, if I am deprived of thee S. O. C. 1443. In Attic prose it is very rare and suspected (T.6. 21). b. Subjunctive with K in both protasis and apodosis (the anticipatory subjunctive, 1810) : el i5 K< p.~ iltbvucv, -yw il K<v aTos ~"'Awp.a< and if he do not give her up, then will I seize her myself A 324. c. er (ar) Ke with the future in protasis (rare): uoi . ~v<tilos ~rru<ra<, <t K' 'Axt"'A?)os i-rapov K6ves i"'AKfJo-ovu<v it will be a 1eproach unto thee, if the dogs drag the Cilmpanion of Achilles P 557. Some read here the subjunctive. 2328. Emotional Future Conditions.- \Vhen the protasis expresses strong feeling, the future indicative with dis commonly used instead of Etiv with the subjunctive, and may often be rendered by hall. The protasis commonly suggests something undesired, or feared, or intended independently of the speaker's will; the apodosis commonly conveys a threat, a waming, or an earnest appeal to the feelings. The apodosis is generally expressed by the future indicative, but other forms of 2326 are possible. El ravra X~m, lxOap<t p.v ; lp.o if thou speakest th us, thou wilt be hated by

me S. Ant. 93, Ei JL~ KaiJ;<<S -ywuuav, guTa< uot KaKa if yolt won't hold your tangue, there's tronble in store for you E. frag. 5, a7rOKTeVES -yap, d JI- -yf)s l!;w fJaes for thou wilt slay me if thou shalt thrust me out of the landE. Phoen.1621, El wil< urpaT<vu6JLeiJa, o ilvv-qo-61-'eOa p.ax<uiJat if we lceep the field th us, we shall not be a7J/e tO jight X. C. 6. 1. 13, d0tWTaToS iv -yevolp.71v (potential optative), ei <jJu-ys ciillKws KaTaurfJuop.at I should become most wretched, were I to be driven unjustly into exile L. 7. 41. a. When ei with the future indicative is directly contrasted with Uv with the subjunctive, the former usually presents the unfavourable, the latter the favourable, alternative. Thus,
-F,v p.v -yp liJWJI-EV ci,-oOv?iuKELV V7rp TWV OLKalwv, EOOK<p.fJrrop.<v . . , El il <jJofJ7!rr6JLeiJa Tos Ktv6vous, els 7roi\:s Tapax:s Karao-rfJuoJLev f!p.s ailrovs if we a1e ( shall

be) willing to die fo? the salee of justice, we shall gain renown; but if we aTe going to .fear dangers, we shnll lwing ourselves into great confusion I. 6. 107. Cp. X. C.4. 1.15, Ar. Nub. 586-591, L. 27. 7, 1. 12.287, 15. 130, 17. 9, D. 8. 17, 18. 176, 27. 20-22. Both constructions are rarely used in successive clauses with

526

SYNTAX O.F THE COMPLEX SE.:\TENCE

out any essential difference (X. A p. 0). Uv wjth the subjunctive, wh en used in threats or warnings, is a mildr iorm of statement th an el with the future ( Hdt. 1. 71). An unfavourable alternative may thus be expressed by ftiv with the subjunctive (A 135-137, Hdt. 3. 36, Aes. 3. 254). b. el with the future indicative may have a modal force like that of .t' or p.li.Xw (am to, must) with the infinitive: f3apa (K'f}p), fi rhvov liat~w hard is fate, if I must slay my child A. Ag. 208. The future of present intention (2301) is different.

Fourth Fonn of Conditions

LESS VIVID
I!'UTUI~E

CONDITIONS

2329. Less vivid future conditions (should ... would conditions) have in the protasis d with the optative, in the apoosis iv with the optative. d TavTa 7row{'YJ>, Kaws &v 7rOWYJ> or d TavTa 7rOL~CTtas, Kaws &v 7rOt~cr~tas if you should do this, ym~ would do well.
Et71s <f>op7]rs oK !iv, El 7rpdo<Y<Yo<s Kaws thou wouldst be unendurable shouldst thou be p!osperous A. Pr. 970, el o' civa'}'KO.LOV d7] otKEV 1) otKi;Oat, olp,1]V av p,.f.f.ov ciotKei<YOat 1) cilitKeiv b1tt if it should be necessa1y to do wrong or be wronged, I should prefe! to /Je wronged th an to do Wl"ong 1'. G. 409 c, lietv av d71v elp-yMp,vos, El i7ro<p,< T~v Ta~tv I should be in the state of having committed a dreadful deed, if I we1e to desert my post l'. A. 28 d. a. Anything physically impossible may be represented as supposable, hence this construction may be used of what is contrary to fact. Thus, rpal71 ' av i} Oa.vo<Jci -y' el rpwv'i)v Mf3ot the dead woulcl speak if gijkd with a voice S. EL 548. Cp. A. Ag. 37, P. Pr. 361 a, Eu. 299 d, and see 2311 a, 2322 c. 2330. Conditional sentences of this class arose partly from optatives of wish (18H, 1815), partly from potential optatives (1824). Cp. ete' ws i}{3cfJOLp,< .. T<i K< rcix' civn)<Y<<< p.cix11s . "EKrwp would that I were thu.s young .. in that case Hector would saon find his combat H 157 ; see also ~ 193. 2331. The present optative views an action as continuing (not completed) ; the aorist optative, as simply occurring ( completed). (The future optative is never used except to represent a future indicative in indirect discourse.) The perfect (rare) denotes completion with resulting state. In Hdt. 7. 214 it is used vagueJy Of the past: fl/iel1] fi-V -yp av TaT1]V r'i)v rpa1rov '0P'f}T1]S, fi rfi XWPQ. 1rof.f. wp.Th7]Kws et71 for Onetes might know of this path ... if he had been well acquainted with the catmtry.

2332. English would is equivocal, being used either in the translation of i1v with the optative or of /iv with the past indicative (2302). Tlms, cp. et rls <re 1fpero . . , rl av a1r<Kpivw ; ~f any one hacl adced y ou . . . , what would y ou have replied '? with Ei ou v ns i}p.s . . ~po<ro . , ri av aT,P a7roKpvalp.eOa; if then some one sh01tld (were to) ask us . . . , what would (should) we reply to him? P. Pr. 311 b, d. If 1 we1e may be used to 1ransla,te both fi with the optative and f..l with the past indicative. English shows exarnples of were in the protasis

CONDITIONAL CLACSKS
~

527

followed by woul, shall, will, is (was, etc.). !flere occurs also in apodosis (" should he be rouse out of sleep to-nigl!t, it wcre uot well": Shelley). 2333. The apodosis has the optative without av in wishes. <l p.v tivp.f3ovXeotp.< i f3X.n<J"Tri p.o< oKf, 7roXM p.o< Ka1 -ya8 -ylvo<To if I should give the advic that seems best to me, may many blessings fall to my lot X. A. 6.. 4.

On the optative with El followed by other fonns of the apodosis, see 2359.
2334. Homeric Constructions.-a. In the protasis, d K< (<1 !iv) with the optative with the same force as fi alone. This use is exclusively Homeric. Thus, o& p.l:v -yd.p TL KaKWT<pov liXXo 7r6.8o<p.<, oti' <Y K<V TO 7raTpos 1ro<jJ8tp.vow 1rveoip.'YJv for I could not su.tfer anythinrf wo1se, not even if I should learn of my father's death T 321. On 1/iv in Attic, see 2363. b. In the apodosis, a primary tense of the indicative: the present ('YJ 62), the future (I 388), the future with Kt (p. 345: but this may be the aorist subjunctive). c. In the apodosis, the hortatory subjunctive ('l' 893), the subjonctive with /iv or K (A 38G). d. In the apodosis, the optative wlthout /iv not in a wish, but with the same force as the optative witb li v. See T 321 in a. e. For K with Je optative in the apodosis where we should expect, in Homeric and Attic Greek, a past indicative with /iv (K) in an unreal condition, see 2311 b.
GENERAL CONDITIONS

General conditions refer indefinitely to any act or series of acts that are supposed to occm or to have occurred at any time; and without any implication as to fulfilment. The if clause has the force of ~f ever (n-lwnever), the conclusion expresses a repeated or habitua} action or a general truth. 2336. Any simple or unreal condition of present or past time, or any future condition, may refer to a customary or frequently repeated act or to a general truth. But for the present and past only (when nothing is implied as to fulfilment) there are two fonns of expression: either a special kind of conditional sPntence or (Jess frequently) the simple condition, as regularly in Englislt al1(l in Latin:
2335.

Present. Protasis: iiv ( = Jiiv 7roTE) with the subjnnctive; apodosis: the present in di cati ve (2337). Protasis: d ( = il 7TOTE) with the present indicative; apodosis: the present indicative (2298 c, 2342). Past. Protasis: tl with the optative; apodosis: the imperfect indicative (2340). Protasis: El with the i.!nperfect; apodosis: the imperfect (2298 c, 2342).

528

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2337

a. By reason of the past apodosis, the optative in the protasiR refers to the past. Only in this use (and when the optative in indirect discourse represents a past indicative) does the optative refer distinct! y to the past. b. The present subjunctive and optative view the action as continuing (not completed); the aorist subjunctive and optative, as simply occurring (completed). The tenses of the protasis have no time of themselves, but usually the action of the present is relatively contemporaneous with, the action of the aorist relatively antecedent to, the action of the main verb. c. The indicative forms in the protasis are more common in temporal and relative sentences. Observe that it is the character of the apodosis alone which distinguishes the special kind of general condition from the two forms of future conditions.

Fifth Form of Conditions

PRESENT G ENERAIJ CONDITIONS

Present general conditions have, in the protasis, Mv ({}v, tf.v) with the subjunctive; in the apodosis, the present indicative or an equivalent. ~. v ravm 1rotfjc; ( Trot~cryc; ), cr ~Tratvw if ever you do this, I always praise you. The conclusion holds true of any time or of all ti me.
2337.
?)v o' ~"Y"YS ~XOn OcfvaTos, oods {3oveTaL OvycrKeLv but if death dmws near, no one wishes to die E. Ale. 671, 'Y.fl o' 11-wpos, Kr.v TL JJ-TJ "Yeoov the fool laughs even if the1e is nothing to laugh at' Men. Sent.108, lav tcroLs tcra 1rpocru8fj, ,-. >Xa icr,-lv ter a if equals be added to equals, the wholes me equal Euclid, Ax. 2. 2338. The gnomic aorist is equivalent to the present indicative in apodosis. ?)v /if TLS TovTwv TL 1rapa.f3alvv, I7JJJ-liiv av,-os t1rlhcrav but if any one ever transgresses any one of these regulations, they always impose punishment upon them (him) .X.C.l.2.2. 2339. Homer and Pin dar prefer el to Mv or et Ke (A 81); and this elis sornetimes found in Attic poetry (S. Ant. 710). /l,v is more often absent in general conditions thau in vivid future conditions.

Sixth Form of Conditions

PAST GENERAL CONDITIONS

2340. Past general conditions have, in the protasis, d with the

ravTa 7rOtO{YJ<; (7roL~CTLac;), CT~ ~7rdvovv

optative; in the apodosis, the imperfect indicative or an equivalent. if ever you did this, I always pmised you.

et 1rov TL opo/7J {3pw,-6v, o<Eoloov if ever he saw anything to eat anywhere, he al ways dist1ibuted it X. A. 4. 5. 8, El 0 ns ml rivTEi'lro<, eVOs heOvf}KeL but if any one even made an oi~iection, he was p1omptly put to death T. 8. 66, el JJ-v

vanced, they retreated;

~'lrloLev oi 'AO'Y)va'ioL, V'lrexwpovv, el vaxwpoev, 1rfKLVTO if ~f they 1etired, they fell upon them

Ka.v 7rpdTTov, 7raptcr,-aro

o'

the Athenians ad7. 79, l,-tp.. o' et TL et Tts cruwpop <Tvp.{Jalvo< he honoured them if ever

o'

2343]

CONDITJOSAL CLAUSES

529

they pe1'furmed sume noble ar,tion, and stood by them in times of misfortunc (lit. if any misfmtune befell) X. Ag. 7. 3. a. The optative is here sometimes called the ite1ative optative. This mood bas however no iterative force in itself, the idea of repetition being derived sole! y from the context. In Homer the iterative optative after 1 (found only 0 768) is an extension of the iterative optative in temporal clauses where this use originated. 2341. The iterative imperfect or aorist with /iv (1894, 1933) : El al ns avre;; 7r<pt rou vrt/l.yot . , 1rl r1,v 1r68wtv l1rav'ij-y<v . v 1ravra rov /1.6-yov if ever any one opposed him on any matter, he would always b1ing the enti1e discussion bacle to the main point X. M. 4. 6. 13, d ns aro/ ooKoltJ . {JXii.KeEtv, h/l.e-yhJJ.Vos rov hrtr,-fJowv g7rct<cr<v liv if ever any one seemed to be lagging, he would al ways piclc out the lilcely man and strilce him X. A. 2. 3. 11. These cases are not to be confused with the apodoses of unreal conditions.
INDICATIVE FORM 01<' GENEitAL CONDITIONS

2342. Present: protasis, d with the present; apodosis, the present. Past: protasis, d with the imperfect; apodosis, the imperfect.

The protasis usually has d ns, d n (cp. 8crns, 8 n) with the indicative, as d ns oo 1) Kai n 1r /l.dovs 7J!J.pis o-yilrat, wirat6s lcrnv ~f ever any one counts upon two or even perchance on ?JW?'e flays, he is rash S. Tr. 944, "Aweipws .. 1fOlTfO!J.EP , o ot' op-y~s TOP 1rcts, ~~ Kct8' 7}15ov1Jv Tt op~, gXOVTS we are

tolrrant in our public l~fe, not being angry at our neigh/Jour if he acts as he li lees T. 2. 37, r !J.v rl"'W"ftp.a, d n Jj-yov, l~cttpop.evot <f>vaKas KaDicrracrav taking out the cargo es, if the vessels car?ied anything, they appointed guards X. "\. 5. l. 16, Et ris n 7r7Jpwri, a7r<Kpivovro if ever anybody asked any questions (for additional information) they answered T. 7. 10, !J.i<Tfl oK .r rtS mKws 1rrlcrxwv fJp.VVETO, rl/1./1.' et TtS fVEp"fETOVi-<EVOS x.pt<TTOS </JctlvotTO (2340) he hated not the man who, on su.tfering ill, retaliated, but him who seerned ungrateful though he had received ki nd ness X. Ag. 11. 3.
DIFFERENT FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN THE SAME SENTENCE

2343. The same period may show different forms of conditional sentences according to the exigency of the thought.
To.r TOlvvv TOT' &v f1rol't]IJ' <p(}..t7T7rOS, ef Tt Va TOUTwv Ee lK'11J' 6vra, Kal vv, tv toy, 1fot-fJcrEt this ve1y same thing then Philip would have done, if he had seen

<ii5va.t a {3oVfl 7rphntv. eti.v "'.P TOVTijJ OlV"fKiS TWV dXAwv f'lr<XflPV< r riis 7r6EWS 7rpdTTftV, OVK av 8avwlcrcttp.t El 'lrrlvu pq.olws TVXOtS wv 7rt8VJJ.ES if then you

any one of these men being punished; and will flo so now, if he sees it D.19. 138, fi othJ l1ft8ips ,ooKti-<v .. , 7rpw Karep-yaffacr8at ws p.atcrra rb

desi1e to enjoy an honQU?'Olile fame . . . , try to acquire as far as possible the knowl edge of wh at !fOU wish to do; fo7 if, Werin,q in this regard from other men, y ou attempt to deal with affairs of st11te, 1 shoultl not be surp1ised if yo1t were to attain the ol(ject of your ambition with great ease X. M. 3. 6.18. GIEK GltAM.- 34

530

SYNTAX OF THE Cmll'LEX SENTE:\CE

THE ORDINARY FORMS AND CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

[2344

VARIATIONS FROM

MEANINGS OF

MODIFICATIONS OF THE PROTASJS

2344. Substitutions for the Protasis.- For the protasis with d there m::ty be substituted a participle, often in the genitive absolute (2067, 2070), an adverb, a prepositional phrase, a relative clause (2560), or some other single word or phrase. The present participle represents the imperfect, as the perfect represents the pluperfect.
1TWS fjra DlK'qS o/J{}'7JS (=el lK7] f(J'Tlv) 0 Z<s OK 1TDWV TOV 1rarp' auro fwa.s; how, pray, if there is any justice, has Zeus not perished si nee he bou nd his own .fathe1? Ar. Nub. 904, o -yp 'f]v pm o1}7rOV J3twrv TOTO 1rOt1}(J'avra (=el f1TOl7J:ra) for of cou1se life had not been wmth living if I had do ne this D. 21. 120, o -yp av ef3:\fj87J rp<!J-[jwv Ka1 11-'iJ wrpcxwv (=fi f,rp!J-LJ Ka1 !J-'iJ drp<x<) for he WOU/d not have been hit if he had /,een keeping quiet ancl not ntnning a cross A nt. 2. {3. ii, tKalws av 1r8avov I sh01tld justly {i.e. if I had met with my deRerts) have been putto death D. 18.209, f!J-Ot D pKOV av EK1 <vat for myself (i.e. if I had to decide) it would ,eem to be sufficient T. 2. !10, t 'Y< 6J.<s aros (=el ~ws arol !J-vo< 'f]u) ,.Xat av cl,,.oXciJXflr< if y ou had been li'.ft to yourselves, y ou would have pe~ished long ago D.I8. 4!1, oXoO!J-at 11-'iJ !J-aOcfJv ( = iv 11-'iJ 11-l)w) I shall be unrlone if I don't learn Ar. Nu b. 7D2, VKWVTS (=el VLKcf<V) J.i.v oVva av KaTaKvot<v, -i}rr 71 8vrwv ( = <l-i}rr7J8<<v) ods av Xwp8<l7J shmd they be victmious they wnuld lcill no one, but if defeated no one would be left X. A. 3. 1. 2. ovrw (=El ovrws <xo<Ev) -yp 1rpos ro 1r<vat ros ivavrlots eif;x6rarot lv e<v for tlms they would be most cnurageous in regard to attacking the en emy T. 2. 11, o' av tKalw< h Ka.Kv 1rM1X1J-! n nor should I justly come to any t1ouble S. Ant. 240. a. Sometimes the protasis has to be supplied from what precedes (example in 1825) ; .or from a main clause with XM, which follows : ov/J K<v ars v7rKcf>v-y< KfJpa !J-atvav XX' "Hcpat(J'ros ipvro (=el 11-'iJ ~pvro) nor toould he hims!'lf have escaped black fate; but Hephaestus guarded him E 23 (cp. X. A. 3. 2. 24-2ii ).

2345. Verb of the Protasis Omitted.- The verb of the protasis is usually omitt.ed when the apodosis has the same verb. The protasis is often introduced by er n, e 1ron, 1rep (1ror).
rts Kai ltXXos vi)p, Kal Kilpos lt~c6s f(J'TL 8a.vf-Lfe1J"8a< if any other man (is worth y to be admired), Cyrus, too, is wwthy to be ailmi1ed X. C. 5. 1. G, cf>7J!J-1 ov . . . rci 1ro1J-1J' 1rpo1J"XELv, d1r<p 1ror (~on), Kal vv I say that we must now, if eve1, npply omselves to the war D. 1. 6.

2346.

So with certain special phrases:

fLTJ (if not) except: o -yp ... opwJ.<<V el 11-'iJ oXl-yovs rovrov< vOpcfJ,.ovs for ~ve do not see any excepta few men y onder X. A. 4. 7. 5, ou -yp /J.v 1rore l~TJpov op6ws r ~-t<rwpa. 7rpd'YJ.<ara, el 11-'iJ KPE!J-6.{}'iis r vbTJ!J-O. for I coul<l never have discovered a1'ight things celestial, except by suspending the intellect Ar. Nub. 229. So i.v 11-fJ D. 24. 45 (in a decree). b. El fL~ Et ( ~f not unless if) except if: f7rpd x07J Tf oov cbr' a.T wv EP'YOV ~t6o-yov, el 11-'iJ er n 1rpos ros 1r<ptoiKovs ros arwv iK(J'ro<s and nothing notewmthy

a. Et

zr,

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

531

was rlone on Uteir part except it might be (lit. except if there was done) something between each of them and his neighbours T. 1. 17. Here el p/IJ is adverbial. c. l p.f] s.a. (if not on account of) except for: (o) M<nao']v . is r fJapa6pov lp.{Jr1iv b/J7J</>lurLvro, KrLl el p.'!) t rv 11'pvravtv, lv71'<0'EV /Lv; did they not vote to th1'ow Miltiades into the pit, and except for the p1ytan would he not have been thrown tltere? P. G. 510 e. With fi p.'!) L<i the ellipsis (which was not conscions to the Greeks) is to be supplied by the negatived predicate of the main clause (he re ovK lv7!'euev). d. d S p..,j (but if not= si minus, sin aliter) otherwise, in alternatives, introduces a supposition opposed to something just said: a7!'1ir<t r rwv KrLX7Joovlwv xp7}p,r1Ta' el DE p,7}, 71'0.p,7}0'LV ~</>'] aTOLS he deJnande baCk the property Of the Calchedonians; othe1wise (i.e. if they should not restore it: El p.~ 71'ooo'L<V) he said that he should make ww upoh thern X. II. 1. 3. 3. N. 1. - l p.7} often occurs even where the preceding clause is negative and we expect fi il, as p.'!) 7!'o<fJO'TJ< rr1Dra El o p.'!) alrl.v l!~m do not do this; but if you do, you will have the /;lame X. A. 7. 1. 8. Conversely l llf, where wo expect El o p,f}, as El p,v fJov<ra<, Nhw El Il', li n fJov.<ra<, roro 71'0LELrw if he wishes, let hirn boil me; otherwise, let him do whatever he wishes P. Eu. 285 c. N. 2.- El p.f} is used where (after a preceding fiiv) we expect lv "'"'' as .v Jl-EV TL p.tv OKW d7J8fS "yELV, ~UVOP,OO"({JO'rlTE' 1 f p,{J, VTLTElVET if 1 SCe?n toy ou to SJ!eak the tru th, ag1ee with me; otherwise, oppose me P. Ph. 91 c. N. 3. -The verb of the apodosis of the first of the alternatives isoften omitted: tv P,EV fKWV 71'El67JTr1L (scil. KrlWS f~EL) fi p,'i) . , EeDVOVO'LV 71'ELhrlS ~f he Wi/lingly obeys (it will bewell); otherwise they stmighten him y threats P.l'r. 325 d. 2347. On ws El in comparative conditional clauses see 2484. 2348. In the Homeric El ' IL"(< come now, well! El probably has the force of an interjectional or demonstrative adverb (cp. Lat. eia age). Thus, El a' IL'Y rot K<</>rLf Karav<uO"op,rL< come now! 1 will nod assent to thee with my head A 524.
2349. Omission of the Protasis. -The potential optative, and the indicative, with av stand in.inJependent sentences; in many cases a protasis may be supp1ied either from the context or generally; in other cases there was probably no conscious ellipsis at all; and in others there was certainly no ellipsis. Cp. 1785, 1825.
71'0 fjr' lv E<v oi ~vo<; where, pray (should I inquire) would the strangers be found to be? S. El. 1450, p<6p,ov /if "{pa'fru . . oK lv ovvdp.1Jv Kp<fJws but to give the nurnber accurately 1 should not be able (if I were trying) T. 5. 68, ELvv o v 7} v 'fd'uM8at it had been teJ'lible to break my word (if it had been possible) D.l9. 172. ' MODIFICATIONS OF THE APODOSIS

2350. The apodosis may be expressed in a participle or infinitive with or without av as the construction may require; cp. 1846, 1848.
aireL aTv s Ourx'il\lovs ~{vous Kal rptWv f.tTJVWv p.,ur06v, Ws oiln'-'S 7rpt"'(EvJ.uvos

( = 11'<p<"f<volp,7Jv) ilv rwv vTLO"TaO"twrwv he as/rl him ,f01 pay for two thousrw.rl mercenaries and foi' thl'ee nwnths, stating that tlms he would get the better of his

532

SYNT AX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

adversaries X. A. 1. 1. 10. (Here ovrws represents the protasis, 2344.) oMEVos p.'f/ civaux<rOaL av rl]v iKKTJ<rlv no one spoke in opposition becattse the assembly would not have su:{f'ered it ( = El <VTE1re, oK av -l]vxero 1} fKKTJ<ri) x. H. 1. 4. 20, el (Tey) <rcj>i<rL 1TpO<F")'fv0LTO, vop,ljovres a1T<rav av lix<LV IIef..o1r6vv?;<rov they thought that, if Tegea too should come ovm to them, they would have the whole of the Peloponnese 1'. 5. 32. See 2616. 2351. Verb of the Apodosis Omitted.- The verb of the apodosis is often omitted, and especially when the protasis has the same verb (cp. 2345). Here a potential optative with llv is represented by llv alone (1764 a, 1766 a). Tlms, el ihj r4> <rocj>wrepos rou cpalT)v <vaL, rovr4> llv (cpalT)v eivaL) if I should say that in any respect I arn wiser than any one, (I should say) in this P. A. 29 b. Also in other cases, as rl/Jfjr' llv (f...i-yoLs), ~r<pov elm10ow ~wKprous cj>p6vTL<rp,a; what then would (you say), if you should hear another excogitation of Socrates? Ar. Nub. 154. On &<r1T<p el, if><r1rep av el, ws el, see 1766 a, 2478, 2484. 2352. Omission of the Apodosis. -a. When the conclusion is it is well (Kaws l!xEL) or the like, it is often omitted. So often when the second of alternative opposing suppositions is expressed by El o p,ofJ (2346 d, N. 3). Cp. "y et now, if thou wilt forgive this sin,-: and if not, blot me . . . out of thy book'' (Exodus 32. 32). b. when we should introduce the conclusion by know that or I tell y ou : el Kal o(EL p.e oLKovr TL ll")'errOaL, oi!re l!1rawv oOlva or< l!{3af..f..ov if you possibly think that I was taken for some ~c1ong-doing, know that I neither struck nor hit any one X. A. 6. 6. 27. Here the apodosis might be introduced by <rd'fa<rOe, lvOup,-I}OTJre, etc. c. Sometimes when the protasis is merely parenthetical : o xp<r6s, Ei {3ovf..ow rcif..TJOfi f..")'eLv, lfKrELv< rv ip,v 1raoa it was the gold- wouldst thou only tell the truth-that slew my child E. Hec. 1206. d. In passionate speech for rhetorical effect ( aposiopsis, 3015) : et 1rep ")'p K' OD:v(nv 'Of..Vp,1TLOS ci<rnpD1TTJTl]s ~ fwv rrrucpef..l~aL o ")'.p 1roV cppraros t<rrLv for if indeed the Olympian lmd of the lif!htning will to thrust us out from our habitations, thrust us he will ; for he is by far the most powerful A 581. e. There is properly no omission of an apodosis after clauses with 1, el ")'p, etOe, etc., in wishes (see 1816). In such clauses it is often possible to find an apodosis in an appended final clause : 1rorav.v er p, TLs Oewv KTl<ra<, L1r6rap,ov tva 1TOLv p,6f..w if only sorne one of the gods WP1'e to make rne winged so that I might come to the city of twin rivers! E. Su pp. 621.
ciVTeL1Tovros liL. ro

PROTASIS AND APODOSIS COMBINED

2353. et and &v both in Protasis.- The potential optative with d.v or the unreal indicative with d.v, standing as the apodosis ll- the conditional clause with 1, is the apodosis of another l)l'Otasis expressed or understood.
a. Potential Optative.- p.l]v
oK ll~wv ar6v
")'< cpuf..~o.rriJaL

( ")' P,T)Of ooov Kparf) ~alp,e0' llv, 1TWS rowrov ")'<verrOaL; and yet indeed if ~ve would not

accept even a slave ~vho was intrmperate, how is it not right for a rnan (the master) to guard against becoming so himself? X. M. 1. 5. 3. Here e~alp,EOa is

2354]

COXDJTIOX AL CLA CS.ES

533

the proiasis with ci; and also, with l!.v, the apodosis to an understood protasis (e.g. if we should think of so doing). The verb of tlte protasis may be contained in a participle, as JL1JOds av DJLWV a~LWCT1E ti) v U1TOCTTEpouwvos 'TijS 1TO.'Tpllios, 1rpocr1!K K'T. but if no one of you should think /ife 1vorth having if he we1e to be deprived of his country, it is 1'ight, etc. I. . 25. Such clauses form simple present conditions (if it is true that we wm!ld accept, etc.). The verb following the cornpressed condition stands usually in the preseut, at times in the fUtUre, indicatiVe, X. C. 3. 3. 55: iJO.VJLa(OLJLL av , . el av wrpE'J,.q<T<LE is an exception. b. Unreal Indicative.- el 'TOlvvv roro lcrxpv "'v av TOU'T'f' 1"EKJL1jpwv , Kd!J.Ot -yevcr8w 'T<KJL1!pwv if then this wou/cl have be en strong evidence fo1' him (if he hacl been able to bring it forwanl), let it be evidence jo1 me too D. 49. 58. This is a present condition (ijit is tnw that this wmtlcl, etc.) except in so far as the unexpressed protasis refers to the past. Such conditions may also be p~st. N. 1.- The real protasis is: if it is (or was) the case that something could now (or hereafter) be (or could have been), itfollows that. N. 2.- In sorne of these cases, el bas almost the force of 1rei since (D. 49. 58).
2354. Et, av, on the chance that. -(d or Eiiv may set forth the motive for the action or feeling expressed by the apodosis, and with the force of on the chance that, in case that, in the hope that, if haply.

After primary tenses 'in the apodosis, we have El with the indicative or M.v (1rws) with the subjunctive; after secondary tenses, El with the optative or, occasionally, Uv (1rws) with the subjunctive. Homer has sometimes the optative after primary tenses. The reference is to the future as in final clauses. The protasis here depends, not on the apodosis proper, but on the idea of purpose or desire suggested by the thought. The accornplisbment of the purpose may be desired or not desired, and by the subject either of the apodosis or of the proiasis. vv o.v.,.' -yxeln 1Tp1jcro!J.o.t, a.t KE ruxwJLL but now I will rnake t1ial with my spear on the chance (in the hope) th at I may hit thee E 279, iKovcrov Ko.l <JLO, liv crot n To.f1Ti:t ooK listen tome tao on the chance (in the hope) that you may still have the same opinion P. R. 358 b, 1ropw6JLEVOL s Ti] v 'A<rliiv ws {3o.crt<!ii, d 1rws
?Telcro.v o.rov going into .Asia to the king in the hope that somehow they might perMtade him T. 2. 67, 1rps ri] v 1r6<v, El ?TtfJorJIJo'iEv, <xwpovv they aclvanced toward the city on the chance that they (the citizens) shonlcl make a sally 6.100. N. -This use is to be distinguished from that of d /!.po. if perchance, el JLTJ lf.pa unless perchance (often ironical). a. This construction should be distinguished from cases like ?Tt{Joveuovcrtv . . ~EMe'Lv . ; . , ?)v ouvwvro.t f!tcicro.cr!Jo.< they plannecl to get out, ~( they migkt rnake their way by force T. 3. 20, where we have implied indirect discourse
(l~IMwwv,

?)v iJvvwwOo. {Jtcicro.cr8o.t).

b. Homer uses this construction as an object clause in dependence on olOo., e11Jov, or on a verb of sayinp. Th us rls a' oi', et dv o1 <rv oo.i;um IJJLv optvw 1TO.p7rwv; who knows if, pe1'chance, with God's help I may 1ouse his spi1it by persuasion? 0 403 (i.e. the chances of rousing his spirit, if haply I may), vlcr7rEs, er 1rws V1TEK1Tpo<j>u-yotJLL Xcipvf!tv tell me if haply I shall (might) escape Gharybclis !J. 112. Here the apodosis is entirely suppressed. Observe that this construction is not an indirect question.

534

SYKTAX OF THE C0:\1l'LEX SE:"<TENCE

[2355

LESS USUAL

C0;11BINATIONS

OF

COMPLETE

PIWTASIS

AND

APODOSIS

2355. In addition to the ordinary forms of correspondence between protasis and apoosis (229), Greek shows many other combinations expressing distinct shades of feeling. Most of these combinations, though Jess frequent than the ordin~try forms, are no Jess "regular." Shift of mental attitude is a known fact of all speech, though the relation of cause to effect must not be obscured. A speaker or writer, h~wing begun his sentence with a protasis of one type, may alter the course of his tlwught: with the result that he may conclude with an apodosis of another form, in sorne cases even with an apodosis "unsymmetrical" with the protasis and Jogically dependent upon a protasis that is only suggested by the form actually adopted. Since either protasis or apodosis may choose the form of expression best suited to the meaning, the student should beware of thinking that conditional sentences invariably follow a conventional pattern, departure from which is to be counted as viohttion of rule. Some combinations nre Jess usual than ot11ers: most of the more common variations from the ordinary type have been mentioned under the appropriate sections, and are here summarized (2356-2358). Special cases are considered in 2359-2365. 2356. The optative with tlv (the potential optative) may be used as the apodosis of

with the indicative in Simple Present and Past conditions (2300 e), with the past indicative in Unreal conditions in Homer (rarely in At tic, 2312), with the future indicative in Emotional Future conditions (2828), with the optative in Less Vivi Future conditions (2:329). In Present conditions .(2:353) : el Xl'YO<J.t.' tiv Sllpposing I wmtld say, whereas el Xl'Yo'~'-' means S1tpposing I should say. t!6.v with the subjunctive in More Vivid Future conditions (2326 d). a. When the protasis is a future indicative or a subjunctive, the optative with tiv sometimes seerns to be merely a mild future and to have no potential force. 'l'hus, ?}v ov !"riiJTJS !LOL TOV tilitKOV TOTOV XO'YOV, OVK av rhrolioi'l)V oli' av of3oXv OOVl if then y ou lemn this ttnjust reason for me, I will not pay even an obol to any/Jody Ar. Nub.ll.
el el el el

2357. The subjunctive of exhortation, prohibition, or deliberation, the optative of wish,and the imperative, may be used as the apodosis of
el

with the indicative in Simple Present and Past conditions (2300 c, d, f), d with the future indicative in Emotional Future conditions (2:328), Uv with the subjunctive in More Vivid Future conditions (2326 c-e).

2358. The unreal indicative with or without tlv may be used as the apodosis of

a. el with the indicative in Simple Present and Past conditions (2300 b). So after el with the future denoting present intention or necessity that something shall be done (2301), as el 'Yp 'YvvaK<s ds r61i' ij~ovcr<> fJpacrovs . . , 1rap' oiiv

CO~DlTlO.'\AL

CLACSES

535

aras ijv lv XMvat 1ro<rm for if women are to reach this height of boldness, it woulcl be as nothing fm them ta destroy theil husbands E. Or. 566. b. el with the past indicative in Present and Past Unreal conditions (2302).

d with the Optative, Apodosis a pri?na1y tense of the Indicative, etc.

2359. d with the optative (instead of liiv with the subjunctive) is not infrequent in the protasis with a primary tense of the indicative, a subjunctive, or an imperative, in the apodosis. The reference is usually either to general present time (with the present indicative), or to future time. When the apodosis contains a present indicative it frequently precedes the protasis. ,
a. Compare the analogons usage in English commonly with should, would: "There is some soul of gooness in things evil, would men observingly distil it" (Shakespeare). "If you should die, my death shall follow yours" (Dryden), "I shall scarcely figure in history, if under my guidance such visitations should accrue" (Disraeli). "If he should kil! thee .. ,, he bas nothing to lose" (Sedley). "But if an happy soil should be withheld .. , think it not beneath thy toi!" (Philips).

2360. Present Indicative. -a. In general statements and maxims. The apodosis is sometimes introuced by a verb requiring the infinitive. vopwv 'Yp <rw</Jpovwv pb <rrtv, El p.r, iitKovro, 7wuxcl.!:e.v for it is the paTt of prudr,nt men to 1emain quiet if they should not be wTonged T. 1. 120, et n Tu"fxdvo< KaKov, els op.p.ar' <iivou </JWTOS p.{JX<if;a< 'YVKU (<rnv) if any ill btide, 'tis siveet to look into the face of a loyal friend E. Ion 731, rl ii KaM)s "(uva<Kos, el p.r, rs if>pvas xp-rwrs i!xo<; what boots the beauty of a woman if she have not a mind that is chaste? E. fr. 212. b. The present indicative sometimes has the force of an emphatic future. Thus, 1rcl.vr' i!xts, d <re rourwv p.op' tjJlKo<ro Kawv tlwu hast ail things, should the pmtion of these honm.os come to thee Pindar, Isthm.4 (5). 14. Present and future occur toge th er in A nt. 4. tL 4. c. Other examples of the present: Hom. I 318, a 414, e 484, '1 51, e 138, ~56; Hesiod Op. 002 ( d KE) ; Pind. Pyth. 1. 81, 8.13, Isthm. 2. 33 ; Bacchylides 5. 187 ; Hdt. L 32; S. A nt. 10:32, O. T. 240; E. Hec. 780, fr. 212, 253 (v.l.) ; T. 2. 39, ;3. 9, 4. 59, O. 8(); X. C. L 6. 43, IL O. 3. 5, 6. 5. 52, O. 1. 4, L 5; P. A. 19 e, Cr. 46 b, Pr. 310 c, 329 a, b, L. 927 c ; Isocr, 14. 39; D. 18. 21, 20. 54, 20. 154, 24. 35; Antiphanes fr. 324. 2361. Future Indicative.- el <rwrra<p.l <r', d<rTJ f-'OL xcl.ptv; should I save thee, wilt thou be gmteful to me? E. frag. 120, rl rciJ w:\ftOe, 1rEp<-yevft<rra.< el 7ro<ft<ra<p.ev Il Kvo< 7rpo<rraTTow<v; wh at profit will theTe be foT the people, if we should do wh at they e1~ioin l' L. 34. 6. a. Other examples : Hom. I 388, K 222, 'l' 100 (B 488, p 539, /iv (K) with fut. or subj.); Pind. 01. 13.105; S. O. T. 851; A nt. 4. a. 4; T. 1.121; P.Meno80 d, Ph. 91 a, L. 658 c; Isocr. 2. 45, \1. G0; Aristotle, Nic. Eth. 1095 b. 6, 1100 b. 4 ; Lucian, Timon 10. 2362. Perfect Indicative (very rare) . -El , o<iid~mv ws ol OEOl li1ravrs rov

536

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

TOLOVTOJI flaPaTOV oryoVTaL fLOLKOJI ElPat, T[ p.ilhOV ')'W p.ep.afl'Y}Ka , , . r! '!rOT' icrrlP r lier toP; if he should )J!'ove that all the gods consider su ch a death unjust, how have

I learned anything more of the nature of piety ? P. Eu th. 9 c.

2363. Subjunctive (very rare).- el o {Jor!Xotb ')'<, Kal r1}v p.avnKT]v el PaL civ')'xwpf,crwp.ev 'lrtcrrf,fJ-TJV ro fJ-fhhwros lfcrecrOa.t but if yon will, let us agree that mantic

too is a knowledge of the future P. Charm. 173 c. Cp. X. O. 8. 10 ; A 386 ( fip with subj. ), ..Y 893, 388 (?). 2364. Imperative. -et rts rae 1ra.pa.{Ja.lvot , lPa')'1}s lfcrrw if any one transgresses these injunctions, let hirn be accursed Aes. 3. 110 ( quoted from an ancient imprecation)' TO fi-v o1} ap')'Uptav, el fJ-1! TLS hrlcrratTO arp XP'iJcrOa.t, OVTW 7r0ppw 1rwOelcr8w ifJcrre fJ-'YJO XP1if1-ara dvat but as !'eganls monr'y then, if a rnan does not know hml! to use it, let him !'ernove it so far from his considenttion as not to be regarded even as prope1ty X. O. 1. 14. Cp. P. Hipp. M. 297 e, L. 642 a.
2365. An unreal indicative in conjunction with d and the optative is very rare. el fJ-P ')'.p els ')'VVaKa crw<f>pOVECfTfpiiv ~l<f>os fJ-0J.f.P, OVCTKh1}S av ~JI </>OVOS (for a11 d'Y})

for if ~ve should draw the sword upon apurer woman, foul were the rnu1der E. Or. 1132. Cp. L. 10. 8, X. C. 2. 1. 9 (text doubtful) and X. Ven. 12. 22, P. Ale. 1, 111 e, Lye. 66.
TWO OR MORE PROTASES OR APODOSES IN ONE SENTENCE

A conditional sentence may have several protases and one apodosis or one protasis and several apodoses. Two such protases or apodoses are coordinate or one of the two is subordinate to the .other.
2366. 2367. Two coordinated protases with a single apodosis, or two coordinated apodoses with a single protasis, may refer to the same ti me or to different times.
el o J.I1Jr' lfcrrL (rt {JXrov) J.11Jr' ~v p.f,r' a" el7rvlfxot fJ-rJOels J.I'YJ'Irw Kal r1!!J.<pov, rl rv crr!J.IfJovXov lxpf}P 1rotev; but if thoe neither .is nor was any better plan, and
~f yet even to-day no one can suggest any, wh at was it tlle duty of the statesman to do? D.18.190, ml ')'p av Kal inrEp<f>vs d'Y}, el Kar fJ-V rwp'OXuvJiovs 7rpOOOVTWV 'lrO. Kal oelv' l/JrJ<f>lcracrOe, TOS O 7rap'. Dp.v aros otKOvras fJ-1J KOha)OVTS <PaivotcrOe and in fact it would be actually monst1ons !f, whe1eas you have passed many seveTe votes against the betrayers of the Olynthians, you appear not to punish the w1ongdoe!'S in yom midst n. 19. 267, el E')'W f'lr<xelp7Jcra 7rpliTTtV r 'lrOhTLKIL 7rpli')'fJ-UTa, 'Ir cl hat av 'lrOW'Y} Kal O~T, a D/).s w<f>e-f}K'Y} oOv oi!r' av ffJ-UUTOV if I ha cl tTied to v engage in politics, I shoulcl have long ago perished and benejited neither y ou nor myself at all P. A. 31 d. 2368. Wh en two or more protases are not coordinated in the same sentence, one is of chief importance and any other protasis is subordinate toit. Such protases may follow each other or one may be added after the apodosis; and may show the same or a different modal form.

a~top.ev, el !J.V TLVa opT <rWT"Y}piiiv 1,p.V (fcro/).VTJV), li'iv ta.KaprepWP,EV 1r0hJ.f.OVTS, if you sPe any safety fo!' 1ts if we pe1sist in rnakin[J ww, we beg that you will infoTm us too what it is X. H. 7. 4. 8 (here <v otaKaprepwJ.f.<V
iitoci~"' Kal i7p.s KT.

2372]

CONCESSIVE CLAUSES

537

depends on ei opTe); liv i]rNa 7rps 1r1Jpri (icrTVS ), ifiv p-v T v!i.p V1rfp{3a1JTaL 1r Twv i}ot!wv, Uv ,.. T y-ys 1ro rwv 1r6ppw Uv Tf T 1r6ppw 1r Twv l-y-yus, TaUT1JV TfJV 1rpii~LV 1rpiiKTEOV fV V v TLtT' vfi v o T i}Ot!a 1r0 TWV vtiipwv, OV 1rpiiKTa but if y ou weigh pleasures against pains, ~fon the one hand what is pain-

ful is exceeded by what is pleasurable ( whethe1 the near by the distant or the distant by the near), you must adopt that course of action in which this is the case; if on the other ha nd the pleasumble (is exceeded) by the painful, tl~e fmme1' must not be adopted P. Pr. 350 b (here to lfiv i}Ot!a icrTil< are subordinated lfiv p.v and < v at!, and to <li v p.t!v are subordinated av Tf . la v n) ; fi o cre f}php.rJv ti~ pxf)s
Ti O"TL Kahv Te Kal al<rxp6v, et p.ot i1rep vv '!reKpivw, &.p' OVK v pOws '!reKKpuro;

but {f 1 had asked y ou at the start what bea1tty and ugliness is- if you hacl answe1ed me as you have now do ne, woulcl you not have answe1ed me rightly ? P. Hi pp. M. 289 c ; f)v 1-'P 7r6ep.ov alpf)crOe, J.l.tfKTL 1)KT oepo ivev O'!rwv, el crw<j>poveTe ifyou choose war, corne no muTe hither without mms ifyou a1e wise X. C.
3. 2. 13, el p.eT 8rJf3alwv i}p.'iv -ywvtroi-'VOLS OVTWS eYp.apTo 7rp~aL, Tl xpf)v 7rporrooKv ei p.rJ TouTovs tcrxop.ev o-vp.p.cixovs }..}.. iPLl11'rr'f' 1rporr<Oev-ro; if it was decreed by

fate that we should fce th us with the The/Jans .tighting on our side, what ought we to have expected if we had not even secured them as allies b1tt they had joined Philip? D. 18. 195. a. A second protasis may be added to the first protasis to explain or define it. Thus, Kal av TOTO ~wv ~pxop.at ws 7rO 1-'fP O.TTOVS 'IrO Of xelpovas ~xwv
O/-'WS crvv{3aev el -yp TaTa "(OL!-'L, 'A-yrJ<Tliibv T' /iv p.ot ooKw lf.cppova 1ro<j>alvetv

Kal ip.avrv p.wpov, ei 1ratvol1Jv ToP rrepl TWP p.e-ylcrTwv elKiJ Ktvliveuov-ra and 1 am not guing to say that he made the engagement in spite of having much fewe!' and infmio!' troops; for ~f I shou.lcl maintain tMs, 1 think that 1 should be proving A gesilaus senseless and myse(f a fooZ, if 1 should p1aise the man who mshly incurs danger when the greatest inteTests are at stake X. Ag. 2. 7.

CONCESSIVE CLAUSES

Concessive clauses are commonly formed by Ka{ in conjunction with the d or Mv of conditional clauses: Kat d (Kd), Kat v (Ktf.v) even ij, d Ka{, v Ka{ alth01~gh. 2370. Such concessive clauses are conditional, but indicate that the condition which they introduce may be granted without destroying the conclusion. The apodosis of concessive clauses thus bas an adversative meaning, i.e. it states what is regarded as true notwithstanding ( op.w>) w hat is assnmed in the protasis. 2371. Concessive clauses have the construction of conditioilal clauses. The protasis, if negative, takes p.~. 2372. K<ll .t (even if) clauses.- Kat El commonly implies that the conclusion must be true or must take place even in the extreme, scarcely conceivable, case which these words introduce (even supposing tlwt, even in the case that). In such cases the sp~aker does not grant that the a1legecl condition rea)ly exists. On Kiiv d see 1766 b.
2369.
Kel 1-'~ 1rrrotOa, Tovr;ov ~rrT' lp"(a<TTov even if J have no confidence, yet the

538

SYNTAX OF THE C\lPL.EX SENTENCE

[2373

deed must be one A. Ch. 296, Kai !ti v p.i] i]p.iis 7rapaK<wwp.eiJa, (7] 7rO<s) iKavws E7r<!J.E1}ru-ra< and even 1j we do not use exh01tations, the city will talee sujficient ca re P. Men ex. 248 d, -yeX~ o' 6 p.wpos, KC.v n p.i] "fEoov Y, the fool laughs even if the1e is nothing to laugh at Men. Sent. 108, l\1<Tos (3a<T<Es 1roos p.v iJ'YJkovas . v 00[7J . . , KO.L i <TV V TEIJpl7r7rOLS (3oOLVTO 7r<VO.L the king WOUld {liVe many guirles to the N:ysians even supposing they should want to depmt with four-h01se chariots X. A. 3. 2. 24. 2373. The Kal of mi l may mean simply and, as K -rcio' d<TE-ra< Kpwv and (( Creon lea1ns this S. Ant. 229. 2374. Some scholars hold that the difference between Kal i and El Kal is that Kai El concedes a supposition and is used of an assumed fact, while ! Kal concedes a fact and is nsed of an actual fact. But this distinction cannot be supported. Kal El sometimes differs from l Kai only in being more emj)hatic. When an actual fact is referred to, we expect El Kal ; but Kai l sometimes occurs, as t<Tws -rot, Kl (3M1rov-ra p.i] '7r6eovv, 1Jav6v-r' v olp.w~nav pe1haps, though they did not miss him when a/ive, they will lament him now that he i8 dead S. Aj. 062, cp. .... ,.,.-r<ov, KEl p.7JOv i]o although it is in no wise sweet, I must obey S. O. T.151G.
2375. Et Ka( (although) clauses. -El Ka[ commonly admits that a condition exists (granting that);but does not regard it as a hindrance. The condition, t.hongh it exists, is a matter of no moment so far as the statement in the principal clause is concerned.
l Kal rvpavvs king though thou aTt S. O. T. 408, 7r6tv p.v, l Kai p.i] (3Xhm, <f>povs o' 8p.ws olq. v6<T<;> <TvE<TTLv tholt(}h thon canst not see, thou yet dost feel with what a plag1w our city is r(t)licted S. O. T. 302, d ml -r<;> <TJkKpo-rpov ooKii dvat althrmgh it seems too unimJ?ortant to some P. r~ach. 182 c.

2376. The verb is omitted in El Kai 'Y<ot6npov l7rv thmtgh the exp1ession be ridiculo1.ts l'. A. 30c (cp. H44). 2377. The Kal of El Kal may go closely with a following word. Here the meaning is either also or inclecrl; as l Kai ovvf}<TL 'Y if tho.u shalt also be able (besides having the will) S. Ant. 00, o<vov 'Y' El7ras, d Kal liis IJavwv a strange thing truly hast thou utte1ecl, zf, though slain, thou indeecl livest S. Aj. 1127. Wbere trajection is assurned ( lJ.L7J Kal for El Kai p.f}) the Kal is intensive, as l p.i] Kai vv ciXM 1/ not already ... at least 'l'. 2. 11. 6, El p.i] Kal oopi.KEv unless he has actually dune it . GO. 8. 2378. El (!tiv) Kal not infrequently means even if in prose as well as poetry.
e'{'A.70 p..ov !TVVt0fvat tJ.s, lv', i Kc {3oV}..oLTO KaKs vac., JLTJ ~d'f) a.Or~ he pre-

feried mtlwr that you should know of it, in onler that, even if he shoulcl wish to be base, it might not be )?Os8i/;le L. 20. 2:3, ciXX' l Kal Jk7JOv ro-rwv 1rfjpxev i)p.v, oua' &s xa.Xmov lrrn "fwva< .... pl avrwv a1r6npo< ni7JIJfj e"fovrnv but even if I had none of tlzese points to 1ely on, even so it is not rlijficult to jincl out 1ohich tells the tTuth D. 41. 16. Cp. also A nt. !i. 27, And. 1. 21, L. 31. 20; ls. 11. 2:3, D. W. 24, Aes. 3. 211. .Z Ka( for Kai .Z is especially common in TRocra.tes, who does not use Kai 1 or K<i ex ce pt in 21. 11. Demosthenes is not fqnrl of Kai el, and often snbstitutes Kiiv El for it (1\l. 2R2, 2-L 1()\l, 45 .. 12). Cp. 17()() b. 2379. El ( fliv) smnetimes lias a concessive force (X. l~q. 1. 17). d1r<p ( iv1rp)

TEMPORAL CLACSES
has, rarely in Attic, a sort of concessive meaning (l'. Eut,ll. 4 b), and especially wh en the tru th of a statement is nplicitly denied or ou uted. Cp. L. 16. 8. 2380. l1r<i, usual!y with a following -y, is sometimes translate although, where a speaker is strict! y giving the reason for his statement of a fact (or for something in that statement) an not for the fact itself. Here there is a thought in the speaker's mind which is suppressed. Thns, al!Ixvvolp:qv v ~-yw-ye TOTO op.aa-yv, i1r 7rOa( ')'t! </J.!It TWV vfJptJnrWV fm ?nf/ part f Bhould be ashmne to acknowledge this (and I say this for myself) since there are many men who do assart it P. l'r. 33;l c.

if. Here not (o--,

Negative concessive clauses have ov' (p..YJ') d or tlv not even fJilf) .belongs to the leading elause, wh ile eoen (-81, cp. KaC) belongs to the dependent clause. The uegative is frequently repeated in the leading clause.
2381.
oo' d 1r1ivTEs I!8otV IUp!Iac, 1rf,8<t ox v1rep{3aol!Lf()' v ros 7rOEp.lovs even ~f

all tite

Pe~sians should comP, we sholrl not exceed the enemy in numbers X. C. 2. l. 8, p.-1) Oopv{3f,II1)r, fJ.1lo' v a6~w re fp.'iv p.-ya f..-yv o not raise a disturance, even if 1 seem to y ou to be speaking p1esmnptuously P. A. 20 e. Cp. 2382.

2382. The idea of concession or opposition is often expressed by the partieiple alone (2066) or by the participle with Ka[.,..<.p or Kat railra (2083). The negative is ov. In negative coneessi ve sentences we find also the partieiple with. ovo (p.YJ), ov (!'-YJ) r.<p. ov!J< 1re1rov0ws KaKws lxOpov <val J.<Ot rorov op.oa-yw not even though 1 have been

ill-treaterl do 1 admit that he is my enemy D. 21. 205, -yvvarKl 1rel8ov p.TJ rJ.'fJOfi Kllwv listen to a woman, even if thou dost not hear the truth E. fr. 440.
TEMPORAL CLAUSES

2383. Temporal clauses are introduced by conjunctions or relative

expressions having the force of conjunctions A. Denoting time usually the same as that of the principal verb: orE, 7rorE, ~v{Ka, 7rYJVCKa when; cr<Kt> a.s often as; EW>, 1'-Xpt (rare] y x,JL), ocrov ;xpovov 80 long as; EW>, v <il (rarely v Ocrc.p and an) white .
. N. 1.- ~ws means so long as in reference to actions that are coxtensive ; while, in reference to actions not coxtensive. N. 2. -T)viKa., O'lrTJV(Ka. have the force of what ti me, at the moment when, when, (rarely wh ile), and are more precise th an liT. N. 3.-Poetic or Ionie are evTe (=lin) when, .qp.os (only with the indicative) when, Cl1rws when (oKw~ in Hdt. of antecedent action), icj>pa. so long as. Hom. has elos (i.e. i'jas) or etws for gws. N.4.-~<r'TE isused(rarely)in lyric, Sophocles, Euripides, Herodotus, Xenophon.

B. Denoting ti me usually prior to that of the principal verb:

l-rrE, l.,..et/)~ after, after that (Jess exactly when); J.,..d r.pwrov,

(r.Et) TUXLCFTa, (7l'n~ TaXLCFTa (rarely 07rW<; TaXtCFTa) aS SOOn as) ~ OD (ramly ~ tilv), ~ orov, &.</>' oi'! sin ce, ever sin ce; when, as soon as, sin ce. N. - r.eire a/ter is very comruon in Herodotus.

ws (or

ws

5-10

SY~T.-\X

OF TI CO.Ml'LEX SEXTEXCE

C. Denotiug ti me subsequent to that of the- principal verb: axrt), axpt o until: followed by a finite verb. 7rp{v, 7rpmpov Y} befme, until: followed by a fini te verb or by an infinitive.
lws, lem,, JLXP' JLXP' o (rarely
N.- Homer has also llcJ>pet (also final), ds liTe (KE), ets li (KE). Herodotus has s li, ~~~~s o.1, s o1! until. o11"1r6Te with the optative in Homer after a past tense of a verb of waiting or expecting means jo1 the time when (H 414). CTTE (firRt in Hesiod) is rare in lyric, tragedy, Herodotus, and Plato, very common in Xenophon. - 1'-XP' is avoided by the orators.- 1-dxp< and llxp< take the articular infinitive in Demosthenes. -TIIIS for i!ws is rare (2171). 2384. Demonstrative adverbs in the principal clause often correspond to the relative conjunctions, as oTE ToTE, lv c!j .. v TOVT'f', f!.w-, Tw<; (P-'XP' Towov ). So also 1r TOT, ws (oTE) .. vTa8a, etc.

Some temporal conjunctions also denote cause: 1rd, dln: (poet.), 7rt8~ since, whereas, w> because. w> means also as, asto, rarely, in prose, in orcler that. f!.w> in Homer has in part become a final conjunction (2419); for the Attic use, see 2420. 2386. A temporal sentence and a conditional sentence may occur in close conjunction without marked difference of signification.
2385.
OT,

mon,

5raP li PO<TtJI'W<TLP, irytS "(EPOf.LEPOL crcpfOPTaL" af.L{Jva atirous, r ivavria brt"fL"fVOf.LEPa ovlv71cr<v

fdV Tf

TLS /1'Y/ <TVf.Lrpop.

KaTa-

whenever they fall ill, they are saved by regaining their health; and if ever any other calamity overtakes them, the 1eversal ta prosperity that follows is to their benefit Ant. 2. {J. 1.
2387. A temporal conjunction is often used in Greek where English employs a conditional or a con:cessive conjunction.
OUK a~ ("(W"f Kpoviovos ifcrcrov !Koif.L'Y/V, BTE JJ.'iJ auros "fE KEEVOL I would not draw nearer to Oronus' son unless (lit. when not) he should himself bid me:;;; 248.
0 0 0

2388. The time denoted by a temporal clause is not al ways solely contemporaneous, antecedent, or subsequent to that of the principal clause, but may overlap with the time of the principal clause (before and at the same time, at the same time and after, until and after).
breL -l]a-BvH !l.U.peos
Ka~

inrW7rTV reevr1]v ro f3lov, lf3oero rW 1rae 7rapevaL

when Darius was ill and suspecte(] that his life was corning to an end, he wished his two sons to be with hirn X. A. 1. 1. 1 (here the situation set forth by iwOvE< and inrw1frEve occurred both before and after the ti me indic<tted in l{Jovero), rota.ra i1rolEL ~ws litelilliov 1ravra 8. ~a{JE Kpa he kept doing tlws until he saw that (and so long as) he was distributing all the meat he had received X. C.l. 3. 7 (the imperfect is rare with gws or 1rplv tmtil), li' ~v TE r,:P 1rapovn 1rpos r fJ.'Y/PDJJ.ara ct1fEo"(ro Kal ero}J.os 1jv 1rplv K1rEv KptvwOat he bath defended himself then and there against the charges and o:ffeTNl to Ile tTied befM"e he sailed T. 6. 29. a. Conjunctions of antecedent action usually take the aorist, rarely the imperfect except when tbat tense represents overlapping action, as in T. 5. 72. 3.. Cp. T. 1. 1:1. 5-with 1. 5. 1.

2395]

TEMPORAL CLA t:SES

541

b. A verb of aoristic action is used: in the temporal clause when complete priority, in the main clause when complete subsequence, is to be clearly.marked. 2389. Clauses introduced by relative adverbs (or conjunctions) of

time, have, in general, the same constructions as clauses introduced by relative pronouns (340, 2493 ff.) and by relative adverbs of place and manner. Temporal clauses are treated separately for the sake of clearness.
a. Temporal clauses introduced by a word meaning until differ from ordinary conditional relatives in sorne respects, as in the use of the optative in. implied indirect discourse (2408, 2420); and in the frequency of the absence of If. v (2402). b. Strictly lire, ltvOa, ws, etc., are subo1dinating co1~junctions when the clause introduced by them fixes the tne, place, or mann er of the main clause ; but arr; relative adverbs when they serve only to define the antecedent and introduce ::'o clause merely supplementary to the main clause. 2390. Temporal clauses are either dejin'ite or indejime.
2391. A temporal clause is definite when the action occtus at a definite point of time (negative ov, except when the special construction requires JL~). Definite temporal clauses usually refer to the present or to the past. 2392. A temporal clause is indefinite when the action (1) occurs in the indefinite future, (2) recurs an indefinite number of times, (3) continues for an indefinite period. The same clause may have more than one of these meanings. (3) is rare. The negative is JL~ Indefinite temporal clauses refer either to the future or to general present or past time. 2393. The same temporal conjunction may refer either to definite or to indefinite time; sometimes with a difference of ineaning. 2394. When the time is defini te, the indicative is used; when indefinite, the subjunctive with d.v, the optative, or (rarely) the indicative. . Temporal conjunctions with the subjunctive take d.v. (For exceptions, see 2402, 2412, 2444 b.) d.v is not uded with the optative except when the optative is potential, 2406, 2421 (cp. 2452).
INDICATIVE TEJ\fPORAL CLAUSES ltEFEIUUNG TO PRESENT OR PAST Tll\IE

2395. Present or past temporal clauses take the indicative when the action is marked as a fact and refers to a definite occasion (negative ov). 'fhe priueipl clause commonly has tlle indicative, but may take any form of the simple sentence. A. Temporal clauses denoting the same time as that of the principal verb (2383 A).

542
talcing place

SYNTAX OF THE C.:\ll'LEX SENTENCE

[2396

/)re rafira '!Jv, O"X<Oov fJ.ia< '/iO"av vuwr<s it was about midnight when this was x. A. 3. 1. 38, cp. 1. 1. 1, cited in 2888, -l]vlK:J. M ofl)..-'1 i-yl-y"no, tj>d.v'r) Kovwpr6s IJut 1vhen it was gAtting to be afte1noon, a cloud of d1t appear~d l. 8. 8, 1-J.fXP' d.1ro ro tO"ov -1]-yovro, 7rpoe,..ws <i7r6fJ.<0a as long as they led on e(jual terms we followed willingly T. 3. 10, oO"ov xp6vov haOjero . . . ppi r7Jv 1repi ro tj>povpwv olKovop!av, . 1r1}-yov r,-.,.ous as long as he was employed with regulations about the fo1'tress, tlwy lcept bringing hmses X. C. 5. 3. 25, iv <P o"r)l.ljovro, i)Kov oi O"Koirol while they we1e arming, the scouts came X. A. 2. 2. 15, gws iO"r1 Ka<p6s, vna(3eO"()< rwv 1rpa-yp..tirwv 'wh ile tlwre is opportunity, talee our public po licy in ha nd' D. 1. 20. N. p..w?JJ!-a<, ooa, aKovw often take iJre when instead of lin that. ThuR, ppv'l)p.a< oTE i-yw 1rps O" ~Mo v l1emember when (that) I came to ymb X. C.l. 6.12. -l]vlKa. (and ~11-os in poetry) has a similar use. oioa ore, aKovw oTE are probably due to the analogy of J!-J!-P'r/1-J.a' oTE, originally I rmnember (the moment) when.

B. Temporal clauses denoting time prior to that of the principal verb (2383 B).
nl o' ~i)f.OEV, ~1}-y-yH< ros tj>Io<s r-'qv KplO"<P ro 'Opovra ws i-yV<ro b1bt after he came out, he announced to his f1iends how the t1ial of Orontas harZ 1esultrd X. A. 1. 6. 5 (observe that the aorist, and not the pluperfect, is commonly used to denote time previous to that of the main verb; cp. Hl43), hnii~ o ir<evr'I)O"< tiapiios . . . , T<O"O"a</Jepv'l)s ii<a{3an rv Kfipov ajter Dari1ts die Tissaphernes calumniated Cyrus 1. l. 3, ws rax<O"ra gws inrtj>a<v<v, ()6ovTo as soon as daylight indistinct/y appeared, they samijice 4. 3. 9, <~ ov rplos eiva, 7rporr1To<EraL, iK rourou D11-ii.s l~"'wrir"''"" ever since Philip p1etended to be fTiendly, from that. time on he had deceived you D. 23. 193. (On ever since expressed by the dativ~ of the participle, see 1498.) '

C. Temporal clauses denoting time subsequent to that of the principal verb (2383 C).
gJ!-<LVav i!ws .tj>iKovro oi O"rpaT"J"'(ol 'they waited until the generals wrived X. H. 1. l. 2P, oJopoO"< rov 'J:wr'l}pioav i!O"re itva-yKaO"av . 7ropev<O"()a, they kept reviling SoteTida.~ until they fmcNl him to march on X. A. 3.4. 49, Kat Tara t!wolouv J!-fX.P' O"Kbros i-yvero and they kept doiug this un til dwkness came on 4. 2. 4, ros ''E7Jvas .?re.O"aro OouXdis Cxrr' f'Aev8povs tdvat JJiXpL oU 1rd..tv athoL aUros
Kar<oou~wO"avro she 1'eleased the (J?'eelcs from slave1y so as to be free until they enslavecl themselves P. Menex. 245 a.

2396. When the principal verb is a past indicative with av and denotes non-fulfilment, a temporal clause bas, by assimilation of mood, a past tense of the indicative denoting non-fulfilment. 07r"YjJILK 1 fj;a[JIETO TCLra 1r1rOL]KWs , WJ.LO.O')'r' av r, KO.T?J')'OplO. ros ~p')'OLS
auro if it appea1ecl that he had ev eT do ne this, his foTm of acwsation would tally

with his acts D. 18. 14 (here 1vheneve1 woulcl make the condition ambiguous), i(3aO"d.v<fov ilv J!-eXpL oli aVTOS OOKEL they W111 hm:e kr,pt qnesti11ning them Uner toTt1tTe as lonrt as they plNtsl'rl 5:). 2\ o1K av hrav611-"'v . . . i!ws arr<7rE<pli0'1)v Ti)s O"otj>ias ravTwi I would not cease 11 ntil 1 hall ma<le trial of this wisdom P. Crat. :306 c. See 2180 b.

2.401]

TEMPOHAL CLAC"SES

5-!3

2397. The negative is p.>] only when the temporal relation is regarded as conditioual.
OtrTe rb OlKaLOv JJ.T] oa, 0 crn, crxoXi7 etcrop.at ffTe perf, r.t':: oVo-a. TU)'x&vet (Te Ka.l ol! when (if) I do not know what justice is, 1 am scarcely lilcely to know

whether it is 01' is not a vi1tue P. H. 354 c.

TEMPORAL CLAUSES REFERRING TO THE FUTURE

The future indicative is rarely used in temporal clauses; and when used refers to definite time.
2398.
T7}VIKo.Ta. . liu ooo' 8 n xp'IJ 1r01iv g~en at that tirne, when you will not be able to do even what is necessary D. 19. 262. a. The future is rare because that tense does not usually make clear the difference between action continui11g and action simply occurring in the future. liTe with the future indicative has thus been almost entirely displaced by lha.v with the subjunctive. b. For the future with K in () 318 the subjunctive is probably correct.

2399. Temporal clauses referring indefmitely to the future take either the subjunctive with lv or the optative without av.

a. The addition of i!.v produces the forms oTa.v, o1r6Ta.v; 1rav, 'rr~v (both rare in Attic), ..-n8civ. iws O.v, f'-XP O.v, <rT' O.v mean as long as or until. 0.S when scarcely ev er takes il. v (for ws il. v wh ile i!ws il.v is read in S. Aj. ll17, Ph. 1830). b. The temporal conjunctions have here, in general, the same constructions as conditional ili.v or el. Thus o1rfno.v = Uv won, o1rbu = er ?TOT<. 2400. The present marks the action as continuing (not completed), the aorist marks the action as simply occurring (completed). The present usually sets forth an action contemporaneous with that of the Jeading verb; the aorist, an action antecedent to that of the leading verb. a. The present may denote time antecedent wh en the verb has no aorist, and in the case sorne other verbs : Th us, ( 0 w6<fJ-OS) s !7r'>}l51 fKMTOV, ?T10v ..-a.pii the war which will a.t!lict evety one whrn it comes D. 6. 35, 1reiv ci.Kon

of

. Tpovs KpivovTa.s, Tl Kal 11"Dt'>}l5l1; when he hears that they ate p1osecuting other men, what should he then do ? 19. 138.
FUTURE TEMPORAL CLAUSES WITH THE SUBJONCTIVE

2401. Temporal clauses referring to the future take the subjunctive with av in sentences corresponding to more vivid future conditious. The principal clause has the future indicative or any form of the verb referring to the future except the simple optative. 'l'he ne ga ti ve is fL~
T]vlKa. o' il. v ns p..s ci.iltKii, 7)p.s ?Tp p.wv !La.xop.eOa. b!lt when any one wtongs you, we will jight in yoto dejence X. C. 4. 4. 11, lha.v p.'IJ 158vw, 1r7ro.15op.a.t when my strength fails, I shall cease S. A nt. 91, ?T<~ov 1.1ra.vT' .KoI5'JT<, Kpivo.n when ymt have lward eveTything, decide D. 4. 14, fl-ot ooK<, 1rv TrLXLIJTa. d.p115T'>}15wp.<v, Uva.1 in my judgment we must go as soon as we have bTeakjasted X. A. 4.

544
6. !J, iJ.fXP'

SY:\1' AX OF THE CO!\IPI-EX SENTENCE

o' av 'yw 'jKW, ai <T'Ir'OVOai IJ.EV6vrwv but wail I return, lft the armistice continue ~. ;;, 24, Xi~w l!ws av &.,ovELv {3ovXTJ<T8e I will speak so long as you wish to listen D. 21. 130, 7rEp<p.iven I[<Tr' li v i-yw gxew wait until I come X. A. 5. 1. 4, p.'i/ v~p.elvwp.ev l!ws av 1rXelovs -l7p.wv -yvwvra< let us not wait until the enemy outnumbe1'S us X. C. 3. 3. 46, oK dval!<vop.ev (present as emphatic future) l!ws av i} +Jp.eTpO. xwpO. KaKwra< we do not wait until our land shall be ravaged 3. 3. 18. The present subjunctive is rare with l!ws w~til, and marks overlapping action (he re = WS av (WJJ.EV KaKOViJ.VT)V).
2402. The snbjunctive withont ilv (K) is sometimes found in poetry and in Herodotus; in Attic prose only with p.XP' p.<xp< oli until (and 1rplv, 2444 b). Thus, <{3ouXev<Tav <<Tp.o'is aros .pvM<T<TEtv iJ.XP' ov T< ~vp.{Jw<Ttv they decided to gumd them in fetters until they shoulfl reach some ag1eement T. 4. 41. The omission of Il vis more common after temporal conjunctions than after El (2327 a) and in writers later than Homer lends an archaic colouring to the style. 2403. The principal clause may be a potential optative, which is at times nearly equivalent to the future: i-yw f raurrJP p.iv Ti} v Eip'>}vT)v, l!ws av eis 'A8T)valwv .el'lr'T)TaL, OO'Ir'OT' av <TVp.{Jov.ErJ<TaLp.L 7r'OL'>}<Ta<T8aL Ti) 7r6L SO long aS a Single Athenian is left, I never would 1ecommend the city to make peace D. 19. 14.
FUTURE TEMPORAL CLAUSES WlTH THE OPTATIVE

2404. Temporal clauses referring to the future in sentences corresponding to less vivid future conditions usually take the optative without av. An optative referring to the future stands in the principa~ clause (2186 b). The negative is JJ-~
TE8valrJv, Sre p.o< JJ.TJKTL rara p.Xo< may I die, when I shall no longe!' care for these delights Mimnermus 1. 2, 'lr<<v<;;v .p&.-yo< &v /)7rore (3o6Xo<ro when lmngry he woul' eat wheneve1 he wished X. M. 2.1.18, <l o {3or1Xoto rwv .plXwv rtv 7rporp8fa<T8a<, O'lr'OT 'lr'OOT)jJ.OlT)<, 'lr'LiJ.CJ8.L TWV <Twv, rl av 'lr'OLOlT)S; should yott deS1"e to inuce One of YOUI' friends ta Ca re fOl' y our interests When y ou W1'e away from home, what would you ela? 2. 3. 12, ootro -y' &v aro p.ve<v, ~ws &.7rX8o he would beg him to Temain until yo1t shuuld depart X. C. 5. 3. 13 (here the temporal clause depends on p.ve<v, itself dependent on oo<ro ilv).

2405. The optative with ilv (K) in Homer, where Attic would have the simple optative, is potential or virtually equivalent to a future. Thus, arlKa. -y&.p p.< KaTaKr<lvEL<v 'AxLXXes , i1r1)v -y bou l~ tpov TJv foT let Achilles slay rne foTthwith, when I have satisfied my desiTe foi' lamentation 227. Cp. I 304, i'i 222, i!w< KE {3 78 (potential), eis o KE 0 70 (elsewhere this expression always takes the snbjunctive in Homer). 2406. The potential optative or indicative (with av) having its proper force may appear in temporal clauses (cp. 2353) .
.pvX&.Fis rv XELjJ.Wv' E7r'LXtpi:, 'hvlK' av 'hJJ-ES p.'i/ ovva.lp.e8' KE<T' .ptK<T8aL

by watching fOl' winter to set in he begins his operations when we are tmable (he thinks) ta reach the spot D. 4. 31. Cp. 2405.
2407.

The principal clause rarely bas the present or future indica-

2410]

TEMPORAL CLAUSES

545

tive, when the temporal clause bas the optative without 3..v (cp. 2360, 2361, 2573 b, c).
<j>povf,<FEWS OE 7I"O7js 1rps TOS 71"0 71".dovs , 071"6T Katps 7rapa7rTOL When the critical moment arrives, he must have yreat judgment to cope with joJces much more numerous than his own X. Hipp. 7. 4, al71"l1 ol <J"<J"<rat vi)as vt7rp7)<J"at, or< p.'IJ aor6s 'Y< Kpovtwv p.f3ll.ot al06wvov oiiMv vf,e<J"<J"t harit will it be for himto fire the ships unless (when ... not) Kronion himself hurl upon the ships a blazing brand N 317. a. Homer has ll.v (K) with the subjunctive; as ooK /J.v rot xpal<l"JJ.T/ KliJap<s , or' <v KovlTI"' JJ.<'Yel1Js th y cithern will not avail thee when thou grovellest in the dust r 55.

2408. After a secondary tense introducing indirect discourse (real or implied) the optative may represent the subjunctive with av as the form in which the thought was conceived.
7rap1J'Y'YELav, 7r<L07J oet71"Pf,<J"aLEv 1rvras civa7rae<J"0a< Kal g,.euOa< -IJvlK' /J.v Tts 7rapa'"f'Yli.Xv they issued orders that, when they had supped, all should rest and follow when any one should give the command ( = hmov o<t,.v-lj<l"1JTE civa7raeu0e) A. 3. 5. 18, f71"LJJ.vat Keuavres ~(J"T (3ove<J"aLVTO, ODOVTO order-

x.

ing them to wait until they had taken counsel, they proceeded to sacrifice ( = ,,.,_
wlvaTe ~(}"T' lh f3ov"llev<J"cfJp.eOa) 5. 5. 2, goo~ev aOTOS . . 7rpoivat . , gws K6p<p uvfJ-p.el~ELav they resolved to keep advancing until they should join Cy1us ( 7rpotwfJ-EV gOJS v <J"VfJ-fJ-[~WJJ.V) 2. 1. 2.

TEMPORAL CLAUSES IN GENERIC SENTENCES

2409. If the leading verb denotes a repeated or customary action or a general truth, a temporal clause takes the subjnuctive with av after primary tenses, the optative after secondary tenses. The negative is p.~. Cp. 2336.
a. A present tense denotes action continuing (not completed) and is of the same time as that of the leading verb ; an aorist tense denotes action simply occurring ( completed) and time usually antecedent to that of the leading verb when the action of the dependent clause takes place before the action of the main clause. In clauses of contemporaneous action the aorist denotes the same time as that of the main verb ;. in clauses of subsequent action, time later than that of the main verb. b. ws is i:are in these temporal clauses (Hdt.1.17, 4. 172; 5Kws with the optative occurs in 1. 17, 1. 68). c. On Homeric similes with ws lire, ws 01r6Te, see 2486. 2410. In temporal sentences of indefinite frequency the temporal clause bas the subjunctive with av when the principal clause has the present indicative, or any other tense denoting a present customary or repeated action or a general truth. Cp. 2337. Philemon 184, if>wvf, ns,
p.a<v6p.e1Ja 1ravres o1r6rav op'"ftlciJp.eOa we are all rnad wheneve1 we a1e 77, Brav '"fV1)Ta<, ciel ci1rorp,.et P-< a kind of voice
GREEK GRAM.-

angry which,

35

546

SY~T AX

OF THE C:\lPLEX SENTENCE

whenever it cumes, al ways deters me P. A. :nd, 8ra.v <Tnil?J ns a.rbs, xw 8es <Tvvatrrera.< wheneve1 a man is eager himselj, God too wurks with him A. Pers. 742, ~ws av <T<tJ!;nra.L 'TO <TKaif>os . . , XP17 Ka.! va.VT'f}V Ka.L Kuf3epvfJT'fJV trpo86p.ovs eTvaL ., ttredi.v o' i} 8aa.rra. vtrp<TX?J, p.a-raws i} <T'lroviJ as long as the vesseZ remains in sajety, buth sailo1 and pilot should exert themselves; but tvhen the sea has overwhelmed it, their (;fj'orts a1e jruitless n. . 69, trowp.ev ra.8' Katrro!J' , ~ws av a.&rov lp.(3awJ.L<v s KaK6v we do this on each occasion until tve plunge him into misjortune Ar. Nub. 1458. 241.1.. The verb of the main clause may stand in the participle, or in other tenses than the present indicative: Kaltr<p fwv av8pwtrwv, lv {f j.LV av troep.wtrL, rv trap6vra ( tr6<p.ov) a.t p.l-yunov Kpv6vrwv although men alwnys C01~8ide1 the p1esent war the greatest so long as they are engagecl in it T. 1. 21, 8ra.v o' rp4J rara trapa.li(ij, Kara.uKe r?]v a.-rs aro uva.trr<liiv but whenever he surrencle1s these rigbts ta mwthe1, he destro!Js once and j01 all his own sovereignty Aes. 3. 2:3;3, 7rOp.LOL . . . foTJ 5rav Ka.ra.oouw<Twvra.l nva.s, 1roous ?] (3eriovs iJva-yKa.<Tav eva.< enemies ere now have joreed imp1ove1nent upon those whom they have enslaved X. O. 1. 23 (cp. 28:38), tro<iK<s l8a.p.a.<Ta. ri)s rop.'fJ< rwv Xe-ybvrwv trp aroO, 1r?]v 5ra.v ivflwq8w Kr. I have ojten mmvelle1l at the e.ffrontery of the speakers in his behalj, except when(ever) Iconsider, etc. L.l2.41. 24l.2. l!.v (K) is frequently omitted in Homer, and occasionally in lyric and dramatic poetry and in Herodotus, e.g. trel ' .p.apr?J, Kevos oKh' gtrr' O.v?]p ll.f3ouos but whenever a man commits an 81"1'01', that man is no longe1 heeclless S. Ant. 1025. 241.3. The present indicative is very rarely used instead of the subjunctive with l!.v in temporal clauses of indefinite frequency. 'l'hus, trep1 rwv l!.XXwv rwv
d.OtK(n5vTwv, Jr (Orov conj.) LKcitovTat, e 7rap TWv Karrrybpwv ?rv0r8at wlth

regard to other rnalejactors, one has to learn dHTing theil tn:az (lit. tvhen they are tried) jrurn the accuse1s L. 22. 22. Cp. 2:342.
241.4. In temporal sentences of indefinite flequency the temporal clause has the optative when the principal clause has the imperfect or any other tense denoting a past customary or repeated action.
i81Jpvv O.tr ttrtrou ,-6u -yup.va<Ta< (3ovo<ro ia.vr6v he 1vas wont to lnmt on hmsebaclc, whenever he wanted to exeTcise himself X. A. 1. 2. 7, o1r6u !Jpii et?J &.pi<Trou, avp.evev a.rous I!<Tn ip.cpa-yodv TL whenever it was b1eakjast time, he used ta wait until they hacl eaten something X. C. 8. 1. 44, trepp.vop.<v hatrror< ~ws O.vo<x8el'f} ro <<Tp.wrfJpwv ltre<o?] 0 O.vo<x8ein, eltrflp.ev we used ta wait ah out on each occasion unta the p1ison 1oas cpened; but when(eveT) it 11;as opened, we u.sed ta yo in l'. Ph. 59 d. Observe thlLt O.vo<xfl<i?J marks a repeated past action (1mtil it was 1egularly opened) and represents the thonght of the subject ( 1wtil it should be opened, cf. 2420; i.e. direct= EW< av O.vo<x8i)). 2415. The optative is rare after a prirnary tense, and occurs only when that tense includes a reference to the past ( w 254; cp. 2573). -liu K<v with the optative occurs once ( I 525). 2416. Other tenses than the imperfect in the principal clause: O. XX' liu ?]

TEMPORAL CLAUSES

547

viit~e<V 'Oou<T<reus, O"TclO"K<V, inra.! o toeO"K KTI\. (cp. 495) but whenever Odysseus arase, he al ways kept his position and looked doton r 215, oTrou Trpoo-{31\if;et nva.s rwv ev ms T~e<nv, Trev li v KT . whenever he looked toward any of the rnen in the ranks, he would say, etc. X. C. 7. 1. 10. Cp. 2341. 2417. The indicative (cp. 2342) is rare in temporal clauses of past indefinite frequency, as Ka.! yoov Ka.l <xbpwov oTrou oi Troi\JLLO' a.Tovs 6if;eo-8a.< gJL<I\ov they both sang and danced wheneve~ the enemy toere likely to look at thern X. A. 4. 7. 16. So witb oo-ci.K<s referring to particular events of repeated occurrence, as oo-aK Kexopf(YrJKe vevt'I/K< as ojten as he has been choregus, he has gained a victory X. M. 3. 4. 3.

TEMPORAL CLAUSES DENOTING PURPOSE

Temporal conjunctionsdenoting limitas to duration (so long as, while) or limitas to termination (until, till) may imply purpose.
2418.

a. So lfws till, against the time when, in o1der that, 1rplv /Jejore, in o1der that not. 5</>pa. (poet.) is usually final (in 01cler that) rather than temporal (so long as, while, till, up to the time that). Sometimes in post-Hom eric Greek ws and the subjunctive (with or without /Lv) bas a touch of purpose. 2419. In the Odyssey l!ws, usually with the aorist optative after a secondary tense, is almost a final conjunction. Thus, wKev ~a.wv ws xuTWo-a.tro she gave olive oil that (againsi the time when) she migkt anoint he1selj ~ 79. So o 791), e 385, r 3G7. In ' 375 the present optative expresses durative action ( 8epJLa.lvotro gmdually get hot). 2420. After a secondary tense ~ws with the aorist optative sometimes in Attic prose imp1ies an expectation, hope, or purpose on the part of the snbject of the main verb that the action of the temporal clause may be attained. Since such optatives are due to the principle of indirect discourse, the subjunctive with liv, denoting mere futurity, might have been used instead. o-1rovoiis 7roti}o-a.vTo ws 7ra.'Y'YM<irJ T ex8vra. they made a t1uce (which they hoped would last) 1mtil the terms shoulcl be announced X. H. 3. 2. 20 (here we might luwe had lfws iv Tra.'Y'Y<Of)), T 11.1\a xwpla. dxov JLMvns ws o-<jJlo-< K<hvo< 7rO<T]o-eta.v ( = l.v 1ro<-f]o-wo-<) r EiP'T/JLha. they retained the other places, waiting until they (the Lacedaemonians) on their part shoulcl have per.furmed for them (the Athenians) what had been O{f1W<d on T. 5. 35. Compare i!ws av ra.ra. o<a.Trpli.~wv Ta.< <jJua.K'I,v . Ka.T1\me he left a ga1-rison (to remain there) until they should settle these mattms X. H. 5. 3. 25 (here lfws ota7rpd~a<vro might have been used). Other examples are L. 13. 25, Is. 1. 10, 7. 8 (ws o ?) , X. H.4. 4. 9, D. 27. 5, 29.43 (dws), 33. 8; cp. also Ar. Eq. 133. Present optative in T. 3. 102, X. H. 5. 4. 37. 2421. i!ws li.v with the optative occurs rarely where it might be thougbt that the simple optative or /Lv with the subjunctive should be used. Many editors emend, but li.v ma.y generally be defended as potential, expressing the conviction of the agent. Tlms, \erYB< /Lvopa.s dKOO"< TouTous Il brtJLeo-Oa< rijs TrO<ws, tws l.v o1 voJLo< uOe<v yon fleeteil twenty nwn whose dnty it shonld be to care for the State 1mtil S!tGh a time as in all probability the laws would be made And. 181. Cp. S. Tr. 687, 1.17, 15, P. Ph.lOl d. So oTa.v A. Pers. 450, 1rplv li.v X. H. 2. 3. 48, 2. 4. 18.

548

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX

SE~TlCE

SU:M:MAHY OF THE CONSTRUCTIONS OF lfw~ AND OF OTHER WORDS MEANING BOTH SO LONG AS AND UNTIL

so long as, while Temporal Lirnit asto Duration (during the ti?ne when)
2422. Indicative, when the action of the temporal clause denotes definite duration in the present or past. The })resent often connotes cause (while, now that, because). The imperfect is used of past action: the main clause has the imperfect usually, but the aorist occurs (T. 5. 60). 2423. Subjunctive (present) with av, when the action lies in the a. Future, and the verb of the main clause is future indicative or an equivalent form. b. Present, and the verb of the main clause states a present customary or repeated action or a general truth. 2424. The present optative (of future time) is very rare: in dependence on a past tense (X. H. 5. 4. 37, Aristotle, Athen. Pol. 28 end); by regular assimilation (2186 b) in a Jess vivid condition (P. Th. 155 a).
~>S

~>S

until, till

Temporal Limit os to Tennination ( up to the time when) 2425. Indicative, of a definite present or past action. The present connotes cause. The aorist is normally used of past action: the main verb is usually impet:fect, but the aorist occurs (1.17. 12).
a. Of a future action the futute is very rare: X. C. 7. 5. 39 (tis If Hdt. 9. 58). 2426. Subjunctive with when the action lies in the a. Future, and the main clause contains a verb referring to the future (except the optative without llv). The tense is usually the aorist: the present marks overlapping. b. Present, and the verb of "!!he main clause states a present customary or repeated action or a general tru tll. 2427. Optative (usually aorist), when the action lies in the a. Future, and depends on an optative with llv. b. Past, and depends on a secondary tense expressing or implying indirect discourse. Here the optative represents llv with the subjunctive after a primary tense. c. Past, and the verb of the main clause states a past customary or repeated action. N. -The present optative in b is rare ; the future optative occurs only in X. H. 4. 4. 9, where sot ne read the aorist. 2428. Conjunctions meaning untU may have, as an implied or expressed

av,

2434]

TEMPORAL CLAUSES (7rptv CLAUSES)

549

antecedent, JLfXP' Tot5rou 1t]l to the iimc. 'l'hus, JLXP' TOVTov Aiia-IJi V1JS <f>O..os wvop,d.!;<ro, tws .,.-poowK<v 'OXvviJov Lasthenr:s was callecl a fiiend (up to the time when) until he betm.yed Olynthus D. 18. 48. 2429. With conjunctions meaning until, wh en the principal clause is affirmative, it is implied that the action of the verb of the principal clause continues only up to the ti me when the action of the verb of the until clause takes place. 'l'hus, in the passage cited in 2428, it is implied that Lastheues ceased to be called a friend after he had betrayed Olynthus. a. When the principal clause is negative, it is implied that the action of the verb of the principal clause does not take place until the action of the until clause takes place; as in ou .,.-p6npov bra.t5a-a.vro tws TT, v .,.-6Xtv Els a-Taa-ELs KaTG'T1JG'av they did not stop until they divided the c.ity into factions L. 25. 26. In sentences like o JL1i 7r<pLJLEVELv /!ws av .,.-ta-rwa-t v we jil.Jtst not wait un til they are upon us (I. 4. 165), by reason of the meaning of 7r<ptJLVELv the action of the principal clause ceases before the action of the 1mtil clause takes place.
GENERAL RULE FOR

1TpLV

BEFORE, UNTIL

2430. rrp[v is construed like other conjunctions meaning until except that it takes the infinitive as well as the indicative, subjunctive, and optative. 2431. After an ajfiJnwtive clause 7rpv usually takes the infinitive and means befo1'e. 2432. After a negative clause rrpv means until, and usually takes the indicative (of definite time), the subjunctive or optative (of indefinite time).

a. The subjunctive or optative is never used with .,.-plv unless the principal clause is negative. b. When the principal clause is negative, .,.-plv is construed like /!ws and other words for until (o .,.-plv = /!ws ).
2433. When the principal clause is affirmative, the clause with .,.-plv simply adds a closer definition of the time. When the principal clause is negative, .,.-plv defines the time as before, but the closer definition serves also as a c.on(lition that must be realized before the action of the principal clause can be realized. Thus, JL1i rl'1fMrJr< .,.-plv av d.KoVG'1JT do not go away until you hear x. A. 5. . 12 (i.e. without !waring = l v ,.r, .KOVG'1]7E ). Cp. oliT< yp Elp-fJVrJV oro v
7E

"E1)VaS 1

f3f3aliiv d.'Ya'Y<v, 1) v JL17 Kotvfj TOS f3apf3d.pots 'lf'O<JL-fJG'wp,EV, oli9' p,ovofia-a.L TOS '1f pL V av 'TOS K<VDVOVS 1rpos TOS aroS '1fOL1]G'Wp,<IJa. neither is it JlOS-

sil,le to make a lasting peace unless we wm in c.ommon against the barbarians, nor can the Greeks attain unanirnity of sentiment until we enco1tnte1 ou1 perils in the jiont of the same enemies I. 4. 173. 2434. 1rplv is used with the aorist or (less often) with the imperfect indicative only when .,.-plv is equivalent to tws until ; but, when the verb of the main clause is negatived, .,.-plv rnay be translatee] by before or un~il. When .,.-plv rnust be rendered by before, it takes the infinitive.

5.50

SYNTAX OF THE CO:VlPLEX SEXTEXCE

TavTa brolovv 7rp1v ";!;wKpciT"'s cj>iK<To I 1clas doin(l this until 8oc?ate.< mTived (rare

even in poetry; cp. 2441 c).

ou Tavra E7rolovv 7rp1v ";!;wKpaT'Y/< <j>iK<TO I was not doing this until (or before)

Socrates anived.
'TavTa t11'olovv 7rp1v '%.wKpanJv cj>tKrOat (not '%.wKpaT'Y/S cpiK<To) I was doing thi.~

before Socrates a?'?'ivecl.

2435. It is correct to say ou 'IJ"ot'>}crw TovTo 7rp1v Il v K<<Vcr!Js, 7rot'>)uw (or ou 7rot'>)uw) TOITO 7rplv K<vcrat, but incorrect to say 7T0t'>}uw TOVTO 7rp1v av K<d!O"!JS. 2436. 'l'he action of an infinitive introduced by 7rplv before may or may not (according to the sense) actually take place at some time later thau the action of the Jeading verb. The clause wiih 7rplv signifies merely that the action of the infinitive bad not taken place at the time of the leading verb. 2437.

clause.

The clause with Cp. 2455.

7rp{v

may precede or follow the correlated

2438. 7rplv is originally a comparative adverb meaning be-fore, i.e. sooner or j01merly; and seems to be connected with 7rp6, 7rp6TEpov before. 'l'he adverbial force survives in Attic only after the article, as v ToZs 7rp1v "'foLS in the foregoin(! statements 'l'.~. 62. 'l'be adverbial and original use appears also in Homer wherever 7rplv occurs with the indicative, the auticipatory (futural) subjunctive (1810)' or the optative with K. Th us, Tl] v o' E"'(W o crw 7rplv /-'LV Kat "'(fjpas g'lrwnv b~!t her I will not ?'elease; sooner shall old age come 11pon he?' A 2fl, oua 1-''v civ~r'>}~fts 7rp1v Kat KaKov d.li.o 11'ciiJvcrOa nor shalt thou recall him to llf~'; somur (/Jejom this) thQu wilt su.ffe?' yet anothe1 a.tfiiction 0 551.- From this early coordination was developecl the construction of the conjunction 7rplv with the. finite moods; but in general only after Homer, who ne ver uses the indicative, and the optative only once (<l? 580), with 7rplv. The required sense was given by ~ws or 7rplv 'Y' DT< hf}. A finite mood was first used of the future, and after negative clauses (ou 7rp6npov 7rplv like o 1rp6TEpov l!ws).- Homer commonly uses the infinitive with 1rplv meaning /)(fore and until. Here the infinitive (as with w~n) simply states the abstrRct verbal notion, and thus bas no reference to differences of time or mood ; 7rplv being used almost like 7rp6 before as 7rp1v lov = 7rp To lofiv bcfOTe seeing (first iu Xenophon). This early use with the infinitive was, with some restrictions, retained in Attic, where the infinitive may sometimes be used instead of the finite verb. 7rplv came more and more to take the subjunctive with lv and to assume conditional relations (cp. 243.':); wbile the use with the infinitive was more and more confined to cases where the leading verb was affirmative. 2439. The comparative idea in 7rplv explains its negative force : an event A happened before another event B, i.e. A occurred when B bad not yet (o~7rw) occurred. Because of its negative force 7rplv comrnonly takes the aorist in all the moods. 'l'he aorist has an affinity for the negative because it marks simple and total negation of an action regarded in its mere occurrence ; whereas the imperfect with a negative denotes resistance or refusa! (1896) in respect of an action regarded as continuing. ''Vhen 7rpiv takes the present in any mood the actions of the correlated clauses usually overlap. The present occurs chieily in the prose writers of the fourth century.

TEl\IPORAL CLACSES (7rpv CLACSES)

2440.
7rpo-rEpov or 7rpo<Tfhv may be 11sed in the principal 7rp{v. Examples iu 2441, 2444, 2445.
1rplv 11'plv

551
clause as a

forerunner of

<j>Ofj<rovTaL 11'<<ravTs 1rpiv T-i] v ~ul-'<f>op6;v Xlous al<r0<r8aL

Attic bas also <f>e&.vw 1rplv, as they will succeed in making the ir voyage before the Chians hear of the disaster .T. 8. 12.
7rp{v WITH THE INDICATIVE

a. Homer has

B 348.

2441. 7rp{v in Attic prose takes the indicative of a definite past action when the verb of the principal clause is negative or implies a negative, rarely when it is affirmative.
oi5Te T6T Kvp<p UvaL -fBee 1rpiv iJ ')'vv-1] aTov lf11'eL<re nor was he tvilling then to enter into relations with Cyrus until his wife persuade(] him X. A. 1. 2. 26, o 7rp6Tepov 11'a<ravTo 1rpiv -r6v T 1!'aTp' K TOU O"TpaTo1roov /-LT7rI-'if!avTo Ka! TWP

o' K 7fjS 7r6WS E~f{3aoP they did not StOp until they sent jo1 his fathe!' f!'OTI! the camp, put some of his friends to death and expelle<Z others from the city I. 16. 8, o 11'p60"8ev 1l'a<ravTo 11'plv ~e11'oL6pK7JO"av Tov"Oovpov they did not cease from hostilities until they had captu1ecl Olurus by siege x. H. 7. 4. 18, oo' &s . . . f}~lw<rav PWTp6v TL 11'0LP s aT6v 11'plv ')' o7) v1]p 'Ap')'lws !J.'fJPT-I]s ')'l')'v<TaL (historical present= aorist) not even under thcse cilcumstances cli<Z they think it right to take any seve1e measuTes against him, until finally a man of ATgilus turned informel' T. 1. 132. a. The tense in the Jrplv clause is usually the aorist (the tense of negation, 2439, and of prior action); rarely the imperfect (of contemporaneous, overlapping action), as D. 9. 61. The historical present is also used as an equivalent of the aorist. 'l'he principal clause usnally has a secondary tense of the indicative. 1rplv with the indicative is not common until Herodotus and the Attic writers. b. The verb of the principal clause may be virtually negative, as Tos 'AO'f}vaious averlvou<rL 11'plv ii1] TV tlfj<p I!O"xov they escapecl the notice of the Athenians (i.e. ovx opwvraL) ttntil they 1eached Delos 'l'. 3. 29. Cp. T. 3. 104, X. A. 2. 5. 33. Observe that o 1!'a6ol-'aL (2441) is not regarded as virtually affirmative. c. The verb of the principal clause is affirmative in prose only in T. 7. 39, 7. 71, Aes. L 64. In all of these cases the leading verb is an imperfect, which emphasizes the continuation of the action np to the point of time expressed by the 11'plv clause. d. The use in Herodotus is the same as in Attic prose. Homer has the i.ndicative (after affirmative or negative clauses) only with 1rplv 'Y' oTe until. In the drama 11'plv with the indicative is rare. Euripides uses it only after affirmative clauses. Wh en 11'plv is = ws it often takes ofj.
<j>lWP aTOU TOS /-LV 11'KTLPaP, TOS

2442. A 11'p{v clause, depending on a past tense denoting non-fulfilment, itself denotes non-fulfilment and takes a past indicative by assimilation (2185 b).
xpfjv rolvvv Ae7rrlvrJI.! p.i] 7rp6repov
TL8lva.t

rv favro

vbf.J.OP

Trplv

'TOTOJI

ffXo-e

Leptines OU(Jht not then to have proposecl his own law until (before) he had Tepealed this D. 20. 96. Cp. 2455 b.

552

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2443

7rp{v WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE

2443. 7rp{v with the subjunctive and av refers to the future or to general present time. 2444. (I) 1rpiv takes the subjuncti ve with av to denote a future action anticipated by the subject of the leacling verb. The principal clause is negative, and contains any verb referring to the future except the simple optative.
o 7rpOTpov KaKWV 1rauo-ovrat. ai . 7rOLS 1rpiv av v aTas oi tptoo-orpot /ipi;w<Ttv

States will not cease from evil until philosophers become 1ule1s in them P. R.. 487 e, JJ a7r8rJT 1rpiv av riKouo-rJr do not go away un-til y ou he ar ( shall have lward) X. A. 5. 7. 12, o XP-fJ Jl.' v8voe ri1re8v 1rpiv av ilw illKrJV l must not depa1t hence until I have su.tfe1ed punishment 5. 7. 5, J1.1Jova rplov 1row 1rpiv av li;ercio-Tis 1rws KXP7JTa< rois 1rp6TEpov <{Jio<s make no one your j1iend until you have inqui1ed how he has treated his former f!"<nds I. 1. 24, J1.1J 'TrOT' 7ratv1}<TT/S 7rpiv av eiofis livilpa o-a.</J7Jvws never JJ!"aise a man 11 nt il y ou have come tu know him well Theognis 963. Observe that the last two exaniples con tain a general truth. a. The aorist subjunctive is usual (the tense of negation, 2439, and of action prior to th at of the principal clause); much Jess common is the present subjunctive (usually of contemporaneous, overlapping action) as X. C. 2. 2. 8 (2446). b. Homer does not use K or /iv in this construction since 1rplv is here adverbial and its clause is simply coiirdinated. But Hom. l1as 1rplv 'Y' /ir' /iv. The subjunctive without /iv occurs occasionally as an archaism in Hdt. and the dramatic poets. In Attic prose especially in Thuc. (e.g. 6. 10, 29, 38); but li v is often inserted by editors. c. The leading verb is rarely the optative with /iv (as a form of future expression): oK av &.7rMo<J1.< 1rplv .;,.r.tvr<i1rii<TLV 7) ri'Yop uOii (cp. b) I will not go away until the rnatket is enti1ely over X. O. 12. 1.
2445. (Il) After a negative clause of present time that expresses a customary or repeated action or a general truth, 1rpiv takes the subjunctive with av.
0

o 1rpoTEpov 1ra.uovrat 1rpiv av 1relo-wo-tv os i}olK7J<Tav they do not cease to endure until they have won ove1 those whom they have w1onged P. Ph. 114 b. a. The leading verb may stand in another tense than the present indicative, as ooeis 1rclmore 1r8ero (empiric aorist, 1930) 1rp6repov o-fJJl.ou Ka.raMo-EL 1rplv a~ Jl.f:ov rwv iltKa.<TrrJplwv lo-x6<111 no one has ever attemptecl the subversion of the people until he became ::~upe1ioT to the comts of justice Aes. 3. 235.

2446. A fter a seeondary tense in actual or implied indirect cliscourse, 1rpfv with the subjunctive and O.v is common instead of the optative without av (2449).
el1rov J1.1JOva. rwv 57rt<T0<V KvEo-Oa.t 1rpiv av o 1rpoo-Oev 'h'YiJro.< I 01deTed that none in the rem shoulrl move un tU the one be.(o1e him led the way X. C. 2. 2. H (here 1rpiv .;,'Yoro is possible).

2453]

TEMPORAL. CLAUSES (7rptv CLAUSES)

553

2447. The principal clause may be affirmative in fonn, but virtually ne gati ve.
alirxpv ( ou KaP or otl OEP) ' rryofJ.UL 7rp6npoP 7rUVrrUr5fJUL 7rp1P DtJ.ES 7rEp! at'nwv lin av {'Jo(/lvqrsfJe lf!'YJ<f>lrsrwee I consider it base (i.e. I do not consider it to

a.

be honourable) to stop nntil y ou have voted what you wish L. 22. 4. 6. 38, D. 38. 24, E. Heracl. 179.

Cf. Thuc.

7rp{v WITH THE OPT.ATIVE

2448. 7rp{v with the optative is used only in indirect discourse or by assimilation to another optative. 2449. (I) The optative withont av follows 1rptv to denote an action anticipated in the past when the principal clause is negative and its verb is in a seconda1'Y tense. The optative is here in indirect discourse (actual or implied) and represents av with the subjunctive, which is oftenTetained (244). Cp. 2420.
a7r'Y)"/6peue fJ.'YJva {'JELP 1rplv Kpos ffJ.1r'Y)rs8el'Y) 8'Y}pwv he jo1bade any one to shoot until Cyrus should have had his fill of hunting X. C. 1. 4. 14 ( = fJ.'Y)oEis {'JaTW 7rp!v Kpos ffJ.1r'Y)IJ'iJ[J), o! 'H\oL . ~'TrELIJOP (avros) tJ.'iJ 'lrOLEIJ'iJaL tJ.X'YJ 1rplv o! e'YJ{'Ja'i:ot 7rapa"fvotvro the Eleans persuaderl them not to engage in battle until the Thebans should have come up X. H. 6. 5. 19 ( = tJ.'iJ 7roLere JJ-X'YJP 7rpLP av 7rUpU"fPWPTaL).

a.

a. In indirect discourse the infinitive is preferred (2455 d). 2450. (II) By assimilation of mood, 1rpCv may take the optative when the negative principal clause has the optative. Cp. 2186 b.
El KOL TLS avr6v . . . Ka! 11-'IJ avel'Y) 1rplv ~K0riELP s r rofi 1}"1\lou <f>ws Kr . if one should drag him and not let him go until he had dragged him out into the sunlight, etc. P. R. ol5 e.

2451. The optative with 1rpCv in clauses of customary or repeated action seems not to be used. 2452. 7rp2v av with the optative is rare and suspected (cp. 2421).

7rp{v WITH THE INJTHTIVE

2453. 1rptv takes the infinitive in Attic especially when the principal clause is affirmative. The infinitive must be usecl, even with negative clauses, when npCv must mean only bejore (and not until). a. The infinitive is obligatOTy in .A ttic when the action of the 1rplv clause do es not take place or is not to take place (cp. &rsn l"n with the infinitive). b. The infinitive takes the accusative when its subject is different from that of the principal clause. c. The usual tense is the aorist, the tense of negation (2439) and of the simple occurrence of the action. Less frequent iR the present (chiefly in Xenophon), of action contiuuing, repeated, or attempted (uefure 1tnde1taking to,

55-!

SYNTAX OF TUE COMPLEX

SENTE~CE

befme proceeding to). is rare.

The perfet, of action completed with permanent result,

ol Kat 1rplv JL el1rfiv onoOv elo6r<s

who know even before I say anything at all

D.18. 50, truvurT< f-'v Kat 1rplv JL e-yv you know as well as I do even before I proceed to set forth in detail the matter of my speech Aes. 1. 116, 11"erpa1rovro
ls r1}v 1r6tv 1rplv 1repf3aivLv they turned back to the city befo1e they attempted to

scale the wall T. 3. 24. 2454. \Vhen the principal clause is affirmative, 7rpv before regu-

larly takes the infinitive.

7rl r liKpov vaf3aiv Xpitro</>os 1rpiv nvas altrOtrOat rwv 'II"O<JLlwv Chirisophus ascended the height before any of the enerny pe1ceived him X. A. 4. 1. 7, 1rplv KaTatraL TO trrpaTEUJLa 7rps apttrTOP fJatrt<VS </>aP7J before the army h !lted for b1eal((ast, the king appeared 1. 10. 19, 'lf'fJLif;is, 7rplv lv Te-y!Q' avrs evat, 7rps TOP lipxovra rwv ~vwv, lidw< KT. lit. before he himself mrived at Tegea, sending to the commander of the rnercenaries, he gave orde1s, etc. X. H. 5. 4. 37 (avr6s, by attraction to the subject of 'lf'fL'fiis). 2455. When the main clause is negative, 7rpv sometimes takes the

infinitive in Attic, and generally means bejo1e, rarely until. When before and ajter are contrasted, until is out of place, and the 7rpv clause often precedes.
a. In reference to present or past ti me: 1rplv 6Js "A<t>of3ov lMfiv fLLav iJfLpiv oK lxf,pevtrev bej'ore she came to Aphobus she was not a widow a single day D. 30. 33, 1rptv fLP roro 1rp~a' AewKpaT7JP /Uj7Jov '!]v o'lf'ool rtves lru-yxavov, vv o.! KT. before
Leocrates did this, it was uncertain what sort of men they were; but now, etc. Lye. 135, 7rplv va-yetrOal w eis r1}v Avov oOeis -rdrar6 fL< before I proceeded to setsail for Aenus no one accused rne Ant. 5. 25. b. In reference to action nufulfilled: os ('A6-yovs) et TLS t1re<t~ev aros 7rplv
fLf OtaexOfivaL 7r<pl arwv, OK
~O'TLP

O'lf'WS OVK av . OVO'K6ws 7rpos tr O!Tf87}trav

and 1j any one had shown these wms to them before I discussed them, it is inevitable that they woul have been discontented with you I. 12. 250. c. In reference to future time: ox oT6v r' t<Triv altrOtriJat 7rpiv KaKws nvas 'lf'a!Jii:v 1r' aurwv it is not possible to pe1ceive this bejore some su.ffer injmy at thei1 hands 1. 20. 14, Kal p.ot JL1J Oopvf3f,tr'{} fL7Joe1s 7rp!v Ko<rat and let no iJne 1'aise a isturbance bef01'e he hea1'S D. 5.15 (cp. 0'/I"WS JL1J OopvfJf,tr! fL7JOLS 7rpiv av a'lf'aVTa L11'W D. 13, 14). N.- l'Vith verbs of fearing, the positive being the thing dreaded; as ootKa f-">i 7rpiv 7rovoLS 7repf3a'!J JL -yfipas 1rp!v <Tiiv xapletrtrav 7rpotrtoev lbpiv I fem lest old age ovenome me with its t1oubles before I live to behold th y gracious beauty E. fr. 408. d. Infinitive instead of the optative after a leading verb in a secondary tense : idrevov fL7Joap.ws 7rorp7re<TIJat 7rpiv p.f3a'Aii:v els r1}v rwv AaKeatfLoviwv x wpi" they entTeated the rn by no means to tu rn as ide until they shou.ld in vade the te1-rit01y of the Lacedaemonians X. H. G. 5. 23 (here the optative might stand in indirect discourse to represent the snbjunctive with liv), o~r auros 'lf'OT 7rp!v lpwrat 'lf'vov [Jpro neithe1 was he eve1 accustomed to take his supper until he got into a sweat by exercise X. C. 8. 1. 38 (for lopwtr!, see 2451). e. Infinitive after an optative with /iv in a principal clause: .r rls rtva fL7JXav1}v

CLA Usgs O.F COMP ARISOX

lfxo' 1riJs roro

555

., ovK /lv '/rOT< 'M-ywv 71'l7roL rb rowvrov 11'plv brl Tos 0J; if ever any lawgiver should have any plan frw this, would he ever be weary of discussing such a scheme until he reached the end? P. L. 76 e. Here the subjunctive with /lv is permitted. 2456. The lyric poets and Herodotus use 1rplv with the infinitive as it is used in Attic prose and poetry. Homer has the infinitive after affirmative or negative clauses alike (before and until), and often where a finite verb would be used in Attic ; as vae M II 1)oawv ...plv Miiv v!as 'Axa<wv he dwelt in Pedaeon before the sons of the Achaeans came N 172, o~ p.' 1rorp.peLS 1rplv xaK~ p,ax0'a0'0a< ( = Attic llv p,a)(O'TI) thou shalt not dissuade me until thou hast fought with the spear 'Y' 257 ; often in correspondence with the adverbial 1rplv, as ovii rts l!r'IJ 1rplv 71'thLV, 1rplv Xe>f;a< nor durst any man (soone1) drink bejo1e he had offered a libation H 480. 2457. i\ 11'p(v than before, with a past tense suppressed after -/, occurs first in Xenophon (C. 5. 2. 36, 7. 5. 77).

11'p6Tepov ~. 11'p60'9ev -lj, 11'ptv -lj, 1!'6.pos

2458. 11'p6Tepov -lj sooner than, bejo1e is used especially in Herodotus and Thucydides. (a) \Vith the indicative: ou 7rp6Tepov vfOOO'CJ;V 7) avrol v O'rj>lO'LV avros O'rj>'I}O'av they did not succumb before they we~e ove1thrown by themselves T. 2. 65. (b) With the infinitive: rs o' liiis 7r6m l!rj>'t} o<Kv, a1 s 'AO'I}valovs 7rp6Tepov 7) 71'oO'rijva< v1)ovv he said the otlter Stateswere wrong, which, before they revolted, used to pay mo ney into the treasu1y of the Athenians T. 8. 4. (c) With the subjunctive (without llv) rarely (T. 7. 63). Clliefly in Hdt. 2459. So 11'p60"9ev -lj soone1 than, befme: 7reKpivaro liTL 7rp60'0<v &, ci'!l'oOavotev 7) T li'll'hCJ; 7rapaool'I}O'I1V he answeTed that they wou/ die before (sooner than

that) they would suTrene?' the arms X. A. 2. 1. 1O. 1JO"Tepov ~ later than takes, by analogy, the infinitive once in Thuc. (6. 4). 2460. 11'plv ~ sooner than, bejiJTe with the infinitive occurs in Homer (only E 288, X 266) and Hdt. (2. 2); and in Hdt. also with the indicative (6. 4) and subjunctive (7. 10 '1/, without /lv). 1rplv i is rare and suspected in Atttc (X. C. 1. 4. 23) ; but is common in late Greek. 2461. 1!'6.pos bejo1e in Homer takes the iufinitive (Z 348).
CLAUSES OF COMPARISON

Clauses of comparison (as clauses) measure an act or state qualitatively or quantitatively with reference to an act or state in the leading clause.
2462.
a. Comparative clauses with i than are used in disjunctive coordinated sentences. See under Particles (2863).

w> as,

2463. Comparative clauses of quality or manner are introduced by .Z(J'7J'Ep, Ka0a71'Ep just as, hrw>, fi, o71'?7 fj11'Ep as. The principal clause may coutain a demonstrative adverb (ovTw>, ti;llE so). W(J'71'p

may be correlated with

oavTo>.

556

SY~T AX

OF THE CO:\IPLEX SEXTENCE

ws, etc., are he]e properly conjunctive r!lative adverbR of manner, some uses of which fall under conditional relative clauses. a. Other comparative conjunctive adverbs are ixr-re as (poetic and Ionie), i)v-rE, Ev-re as, .like as (Epie). Demonstrative adverbs in Epie are &s, rws, roiws, a.lhws, Wo-a.VTws.

b. On other uses of ws, etc., see under Particles (2990 ff.). On ws, tJrnrep with a participle, see 2086, 2087. 2464. The verb of the comparative clause is commonly omitted if it is the same as the verb of the leading clause. 'l'hus, lav <Toi ~vvi5oK~ i!J<T1np f-'ol if it seems good also to you as (it seems) tome P. Ph. 100 c.
2465. The subject of a comparative clause with ws or ih<Tnp, the verb of which is omitted, is often attracted into the case (usually the accusative) of the other rnember of the comparisou. 'l'hus, ooa.l-'oG )'p g<Tnv 'A)'6pa.rov 'AOfJva.ov
dva.t tfJ<T7rEp 8pa.<Tu(3ovov it is in no wise possible .(o1 Ago1atus to be an Athenian as Thrasybulus is ( = 8pa.<Tu(3ovos 'AOfJva.os i~In) L. 1?.. 72. Attraction into the dative is Jess common: K6pcp -fioero . . . l:J<T1rep <TKUa.Kt )'evvrcp vaK?"ovn he

was delighted with Cynts, who set up a cry lilce a young and noble dog ( = <TKVa.~ )'Evvai:os va.KM\et) X. C. l. 4. 15. a. Usually, however, we have the nominative with the verb omitted: wl"Tret<Tf-'a.l <T p..OV woOa.vei:v av <TOa.t 7) lf}v l:J<T7rp E)'W I am pe1'Suaded that you v;ould p1e.(e1 to die mthm than live as I live X. M. 1. 6. 4. 2466. Comparative clauses of quality are often fused with the leading clause by the omission of the preposition in the correlated member of the comparison, but only when ws precedes. Cp. 16ll. 2467. The antecedent clause may contain a wish: o~rw (t:Js) ... ws (which maybe omitted); as ovrw vKfJ<Ta.tf-'L r' l-yrl! Kac vo!-'<!;oli-'"YJ" <Torpos, ws !-'.s +noup.vos eva.t {}fii.Tas oE~ws 1rpwrovs -t,~lw!I' va.)'II' Of-'.s as swely as I thought it prop1w to let you ji1st taste this comedy /)ecause I thought you 1VeTe elever speetators, so surely may I win and be accounted a rnaster Ar. Nub. 520. Cp. N 825, Ar. Thesm. 469.
2468. Comparative clauses of quantity or degree are introduced by (<T<p, 6crov in p1oporUon as. The principal cl anse usually contains the corresponing demonstratives rocr01!r<p, rocrovrov (r6cr<p, r6crov are usually poetic).

a. Greek, like Latin, uses the adjective relative pronoun B<Tos (quantlis) in the su bordinate clause in correlation to ro!Ioros agreeing with a substantive. Here English uses the conjunctive adverb as. So with rowros ofos.TO<TOUT<p, TO<TOTOV may be foJlOWed by ws, i!J<TT.
2469. rMorov 8<Tov or 8!Iov . ro<Torov denotes that the action of the main clause takes place in the same degree as the action of the subordinate clause. o<Tcp . ro<Tour'l' with a comparative or superlative adjective or adverb is equivalent to the more . . . the maTe, the less . . . the less. 2470. The demonstrative antecedent may be omitted, especially when its clause precedes: Ka1 xa.E"TrWTEpot ~<Tovra.t o<Tcp vewupol ei<Ttv ancl they 1vill be the mme severe the younge1 they a1e l'. A. 39 d.

CLAUSES OF COMPARISOI'I
017(f) "fp rot.~Orar' arcf' ( rt;J 6'Y4.J)

;)57

2471. Oue member may contain a comparative, the other a superlative; as

DKOJ.J.11 xpf}CF8at, TOtTOUT4J JJ.Xov .11"tUTOITt 1rcivrH a!m;l for the more we a1e thought to excel all others in ability ta speak, so

rnuch the more do all distrust it D. 2. 12.

2472. o<np (ocrov) may be used without a comparative or superlative wben the correlative clause has a comparative or superlative with or without rocror<p (rocrorov). Thus, fJcr.,.ep iv f71"7I"Ots, OVTW Ka:l lv vOp<fnrots ncrlv E')'')'l')'VTat, ocrtp av ~K11"ea r Movra lfxwcrt, TO<TOT<p v{3ptcrTlpots evat as it is in the natme of h01ses, sa it is in the case of certain rnen: in so far as they have thei1 wants satisfied, the more they are ~vanton X. Hi. 10. 2. ocr<p may stand for the logical on in rMo-T<p T.pwv KaKiwv P<ro, iicr<tJ T.pot l!<f>v')'ov he proved himself a greate1 coward than the Syrians all the nw1e because they fied X. C. 6. 2.19. 2473. The correlated clauses may be fused wh en both ocr<p (ocrov) and rMortp (rocrorov) are omitted and the predicate of the subordinate clause is a comparative or superlative with a form of evat. Thus, lvoeecrrlpots ')'p oilcrt Ta7retvodpots al!ros otovrat XPfi<TOat faT the more indigent they me so rmtch the mo1e submissive do they expect to fi nd them X. Hi. 5. 4 ( = ocr<p lvo<crTepol <lcrt, rocror<p Ta11"LIIOTpOLS ).
EXAMPLES OF COMPARATIVE CLAUSES

2474. The rnoods in comparative clauses are used with the same meaning as in conditional clauses or other conditional relative clauses. 2475. Indicative: in assertions and statements of fact: i!p~ov o1rws 0l)l.m do as thou toilt t. 37, ws o 1rps r-I, v ocriv ~piJ.oruv, ovrws Kcicrrots 1rpocrharrov bltt as was suitable to their p1opeTty, so they yave di1ections to each I. 7. 44, ~crnv ')'p ovrws fJcr1rep ovros lvvrt.,.., fm it is so even as he says S. Tr. 4 75, Serov a[
Kar r trWp.a 7]0ova~ d7rof.Lapalvovrat, rotJ"orov a~ovrat. al 7rpl ros 6)'ous 1n8V~J.lat.

in propo1tion as the pleasmes of the body wane the appetite for philosophical convenation increases P. H. 328 d, 'i]Kev li')'wv crrpanv 8<J1]V 7relffT1JII louvaro he came with an wrny as large as possible 'T. 7. 21 (cp.1087). a. With /iv and the potential or unreal indicative: el<T7r1Ji1wavres O.rrov J ws Tts av <Pro jurnping in qtticker th(tn (as) one c01d think X. A. 1. 5. 8,
fJ<T7rp ovv, el Ct1]0f} 'fi v rara L }J.OV KaT1]')'6p1]<Yav, i}J.o! av wp')'l!:ecrOe , OVTWS ttw Kr . foT just as you would be angry with me if thei1 accusations against me weie

t1ue, so I beg, etc. And. 1. 24.

2476. Subjunctive with Kv. -a. Of future time, as )l.)l.' liyeO', ws av lyw d1rw, 1r<t0w}J.e0a but corne, as I shall di?ect, let us olley B 139, &rws ')'.p av ros li)l.)l.ovs 1rps cravrov owOY,s, orw Ka! cr 1rpos iK<ivovs l!tm for as you dispose othe1s towa1ds yoU?self, so you too will fed towarrls them I. 2. 23, ros al!ros lvex<crOw KaOci.,.ep av rv 'A07Jvaov 1roKTeivn let lm !Je S71l!jwt to the same penalties just as if he kills the Athenian D. 23. 41, iv TOS pyvpEiots O<J'f'1r<p av 7r<iovs lpci!:wvTa.<, r6<T<j! 7r elova Td-ya0, evp-ljcrovcrt in si/ver rn ines the large!' the numbe1 1Vh0 COOpera te, so much the more abunclant 1vill be the !'iches they fi nd X. Vect. 4. 32, OKOV 5<Tip tl v TLS p.elSw ra8 rra8Wv }] 7ro(hci} xdpt.v, rouoVTlf d.OtKcl.JTepos lv frJ i thw will he be the rno1e unjust in propo1'tion to the ureatness of the benefits he

558

SYNTAX OF TIIE C.iPLEX SENTENCE

[2477

has 1eceived and fm which he does not 1'etu1n prope1 gmtitude ? X. M. 2. 2. 3 (cp. 2326 d). b. Of present time, as in general conditions: TO p.i:v -yp "Trpas, WS av 0 oalp.wv fiovX1JOi/, 1ravTwv -yl-yverat fo? the end of all events happens as God wills D. 18. 92,
'r0(TO(rr4_) xaE1fWrepov d.KoVELV

rWv eyop.fvwv, Outp

7rp

av

arWv TLS' dKpt{3fffrepov

W:rTrep aroL oflK av &.~ah{faLTE KaKWs .KoVnv inr rWv bp.erfpwv 7ral0wv, oVrw }J.'l'J TOVT'f' l"TrlTpe7re 1repi To "Tra.Tps fJXa.O"<f>1Jp.ev just as you youTselves would not think

it is the more difficult for them to pay heed to what is said in propo1tion tu the p1ecision with which their m-ro1s are scrutinized I. 11. 3. 2477. Optative. -a. With li.v (potential): ~CfT< p.eljw rri.Kelvwv fp-ya 1} ws Tell M-y<p rts av d1ro< their deeds are too g1eat for any one to tell in wo1ds D. 6. 11,

<~eTain Tas .p.a.pTlas

it right to be ill spoken of y your children, even so do not permit him either to utter slande1s about hisfather D. 40. 45. b. With li.v, as in Jess vivid future conditions: oO"<p o 7rpeO"fi6TEpos -yl-yvotTo, p.XXov d ciO""Trajotro av (xpi}p,a.Ta.) the older he grows, the nwl'e he would always l'espect wealth l'. R. 549 b. c. The optative without li.v in indirect discourse may represent li.v with the subjunctive of direct discourse; as vop.ljwv, oO"<p p.v Oii.rTov ~Mot, TOO"OVT<p 7ra.pa.O"Keva.O"TaTp<p fia.O"tXe p.a.xiio-Oa.t, OO"'f' O O"XaXa.t6Tpov, TOO"OVT<j) 1rXov O"uva.-yelpeC!Oa.t fJa.O"tXe tJ"Tpa<wp.a. in the belief that, the mme q1ckly he advanced, the more

unprPpal'edfm battle would the king be, 1<Jhile the slowe1 he advanced, the g1eater would be the mmy that was collecting for the king X. A. L 5. 9 (direct = otJ"<p v
OJ.Trov t!I.Ow . p.a.xop.at, OO"'f' v "XoX. gxew TatJ"oVT'f' 1rXov tJ"vva.-yelpeTa.<). d. 'Vitlwut li.v, of past time, as in general conditions. Tlms, ~vveTl0eO"av KMT6v n ~vp.fia.lvot they put the stones together as each happened to fit T. 4. 4.Also after a present tense: ElKfj KpartO"Tov lfjv, ii1rws ovva.<To ns 'tis best to live at

ws

haz1d, as one may S. O. T.l>7 (cp. 2573). 2478. il><T'lrEp d ( ci>U"1rpd)' WIT'lfEP av Et ( ci>U"7rpavl) .Just as if (=fust as

would be the case, ~f) fonn a qombination of a comparison and a condition, and are used with the indicative imperfect (of past time) or aorist or with the optative (commonly when Tt> is the subject). wU"7rp (av) here re presents the suppressed apodosis to the condition with d. In some cases the ellipsis may easily be supplied, but it was usua1ly unconscious.
a. When C!tJ"rrep li.v has its own verb it is used like jo1 instance, as CJ(J"7rp li.v (l70()a), d Tls p.e ~potro . . , d1rotp.' li.v fo1' instance, if any one were to aslc mP-, 1 ,,hould say P. G. 451 a. b. With C!O"rrp El, C!0"7rp iv ei cp. Ka.Oa7rp el, Ka.O7rp av el. 2479. il><r'lfEP Et: Oa.vp.ajw o (]" . X'A60pouy rr6Xtv KVpP Xe"YOVO"O.v, &tJ"7rp el 7ra.peO"TaTEts but 1 marvel that of a city speaking mwthe1 tungue thou dost as

truly tell as (thou woul<lst tell) if thou hadst always been dwelling therein A. Ag. 1201. 2480. il><r'lrEp av Et is more COll111lOn than &C!7rp el. Thus, 7rps p,bvous TOS

rrpo-y6vovs TOS i]}J.Ert!povs (J"Up.fia.X0vTs op.oiws Oteif>Oap1]tJ"O.P, C!0"7rp a. (lhe<{J0ap1)(J"O.P) el rrps i1.1ra.vTa.s civOpw1rous l7roXIp.1](J"a.P in contending against OUI' ancestors alm~A

they wel'e destroyed as completely as if they had waged waT against ali mankind

CLAUSES OF COMPARISON
I. 4. 09, iJpma -yap p.o< ooKo(Jt 1ra(Jxev &(J1rep (d.v ns 1f"a(Jxo<) eY T<S 1ro\\ i(J()[wv p."TJiibron lp.1rl1r\a.tTo foT they seem to nw to /Je in the sanw condiUon as 1j any one for all his eating weTe neve?" to /Je filled X. S. 4. :)7, 7}(J7ra)eTo a6rw W(J7rep v ( a<T7ra)otTo) d ns . 7rtta< </J<wv a(J7ra)o<To he greetell him as one woulll llo who had long loved him X. C. 1. 3. 2. a. With a participle i!J(J1rep v l is sometimes used with much the same force as &(J7rep, the el being added by a confusion of constructions. Thus, &<T1rep v i Kal KaTaKV(Jp.ov 'YE"Yevfwea, Twv 1rpa-yp.<LTwv -inoup.evo< as if you believed that theTe hall /Jeen also a ?'evolution in politics D. 18. 214: lit. as (y ou would think) ifyou believed (for W(J7rep v +ryoviJ.evo< or &<T1rep v el f}-y(J()e). Cp. 1766 a. Similarly I};(J1TEp el has virtually the force of &<T1rep alone (2087).
SIMILES AND COMPARISONS

d. n as ~{, w<; oT{, w<; o1rn as wh en are often used in poetry in si.miles and comparisons.
2481.

w<;, w<; d, w>

a. The present and aorist indicative and subjunctive (usually without d.v) are regularly use. The optative occurs only with ws i or ws Et TE. The verb of the [tpodosis may sometimes be supplied from the main clause, and the sense may be satisfied in other cases by supplying as happens, as is the case; but as early as liomer the ellipsis was probably unconscious, as it is in English as if, as when. Hence ws el, ws iJn are scarcely to be distinguished from ws. b. The tense of the main clause may be primary or seconda1-y without influence on the construction. Cp. 1935 and 1935 a.
2482. ws (<!.sTE) is followed by the indicative present (less often aorist) or by the subjunctive. Thus, ws li 7raT'i)p o 7ratlis olivpeTal OO"Tfa Kalwv . . ' &s 'Ax<Es hapow oli6peTo o<TT;. Kalwv a, nil as a fathe?' 'V;aileth when he bu?neth the bones of his son, so Achilles wailed as he /Jume the bones of his comrade \Y 222. 2483. ws is corn mon in Homer with the subjunctive (without li v) depending on the verb of the introductory clause, which is usually past. The simile may begin with ws or with a demonstrative ( o! or Tovs) after which ils Te is placed. Th us, ws .wv p.fJ.ot(JtV U0"7JfJ.rlVTO<<T<V 1Te()wv KaK <{Jpovwv i!vopoV<TYJ, &s p.v 8pfJ<Kas IJ.vlipas l1rc;Sxro Tiifos vlos and as a lion, coming on .tlocks without a shepherd, with evil purpose leaps 1tpon thern, so the son of Tydeus attaclced the men of ThTace K 485, ol ', JJs T' al-ymrwl . . . 1rTpYJ </J' u'f"TJY p.eyri\a KM)ovTE p.axwvTa<, &s o! KEKfJ-yovTEs 1r' <i\"AfJot(J<v 15pov(Jav anll they, like vultures who con tend with loud screams on a lo.fty cliff, even so they ?'!tshel screaming agailtst each other II 42H. Aiter the subjunctive with ws or ws oTE an indepenent iudicative may follow (M 167, II 296). 2484. W Et, commonly ws Et TE, in Homer is used rn.rely with the indicative and subjuuctive, more frequently with the optative; but usnally without any finite verb. Thus, aol g1rov8' ws et TE iJ.ET KTlov E(J1TETO iJ.iJ)..a the soldie?'S followed as sheep follow aftm the ram N 492 (the only occurrence irt Homer of the indicative), Ka.l iJ. <{Jl7J<T' ws er TE 7raT'i)p.8v 1ra'ia </J<TJ(JYJ and he loved me as a father lovPth his son I 481 (the only occurrence in Homer of the snbjunctive), ooK7J(Je li' li.pa (J<{Jl(Jt 1/p.s &s ~p.v, ws l 1rarpl' iKolaTo and theil' feeling seeme to be as (it would be) if they had come to theil own country K 416 (the optative

.160

SYNT.\X OF TIIE CO:\li'LEX SENTENCE

occurs only after a pa~t ten~e, except A :18H, a negative preRent) ; Tw i5f oi 6<T<H \a.p:rrr!J7Jv w< d T< -rrvp< <T<!a.< and hi" e!Jes jlashed lil gl eaming fi re T 366. 2485. Attie poetry does not use the Epie and Lyric ,;,, d n for ws el. In Attic ,;,, El (w<F<i) is practically equivalent to ,;,, as, like; thus, ~\\' oilv !volq. -y' a.ow, 11-liTTJP w<Tel T -rrt<Trci but at any mte I speak in good-will at least as some faitllful mother S. El. 234. 2486. .:.s c>Te, .:.s o'lroTE areused with the indicative (present or aorist) or the subjunctive (as in general conditions). With the subjunctive av is generally absent in Homer; but ws o' or' av (never Kv) occurs. The clause with ,;,, liT<, ,;,, o-rroT< generally precedes the main clause. ,;,, lire without appreciable difference from ws in 'Ept<f>v\iv, lipKwv ws liu -rrt<Trov, bvT<s OlK\eloq. -yvva.Ka. having given to the son of Oecles E1iphyle to wife, as a sure pledge Pind. Nem. 9. 16. 2487. A relative pronoun referring to a substantive accompanied by &,, &<TTe as often takes the subjunctive (without /iv). Thus, o o' lv Kovl;w< xap.a.< -rr<Tev a.t-yELpos &s, 'il p T' lv elap.evi/ 1!1\eos p.e-yl\ow -rreif;DKYI \el7J and he fell to the grotmd amid the dust lilce a pop lm that has grown up srnooth in the lowland of a great marsh 483.
ADJECTIVE CLAUSES (RELATIVE CLAUSES: 2488-2573)

2488. Relative clauses correspond to attributive adjectives (or

participles), since like adjectives they serve to define substantives. Like adjectives, too, they often bave the value of substantives and stand in any case.
8v -yp Oeol <f>to<Ttv ( = o !Jwcpt~s), 7To!Jvrf<TK vos for ~v horn the gods love, dies yow~g Men. Sent. 425, 'lj Olyw ilfj!J' ol IL' ~<f><Tav; ( = Twv p.e <f><T<ivrwv) amI to embrace him who beg at me ? E. Ion 560, <Tv v Tos IJTJ<Tavpos ol< o -rrar7}p KaTt-rrev ~ = TO< -rr To -rra.Tps Kara.etcp!J<Tt) with the tTeaswes which my jathe1 left x. c. 3. 1. 33, lv aTOL< OLS hJl,.<TBe ( = tv avra.s TU.S Tp.as) in the very honOU1'S which y ou Teceived D.19. 238, wv ~l\a.f3ev ii-rri<Tt !L<rowKev U sha1ed with all what it 1eceived I. 4. 29.

2489. Relative clauses are introdnced by relative pronouns or by relative adverbs of time, place, or mamw1 (cp. 340, 346), and refer to an antecedent expressed or implied in the main clause. a. Temporal clauses, which are like relative clauses in many respects, have heen treated in 2389 ff. On relatives used as indirect interrogatives and as exclamations, see 2668 ff., 2685 ff. 2490. Many relative clauses are equivalent to coordinate clauses (e.g. 2553). In such cases the relative has the force of a demonstrative or personal pronoun with a connective (Ka{, <ia, 3, yap, o~v, ll.pa, etc.). 'fhus, 'TT'W'> o~v llv (voxo<> et?) Tfj ypacf>if; o<; ( = oBTo<; yp) .. cf>av~po<; ~v ep7r1JWV TOV<; ewv<; how then cmd he be su~ject to the indictment ? Fm: he ?ru.m~festly worsldpped the gods X. M. 1. 2. 64. Greek often uses here the demonstrative (contrast Tavra 8 drrwv with q11ae wrn

dixisset).

2497]

AD.CTIVE CLACSES (RELATIVE CLACSJ<:S)

.SG1

2491. A relative must often be resolved into a conjunction and a pronoun (2555). 2492. A truly subordinate relative clause may precede the main clause or be incorporatecl into it (2536). The relative clause is often macle emphatic by placing after it the main clause with the demonstrative antecedent. Thus, o n f3overa~, rovro 7rou{rw whatever he wa.nts, that let hirn do P. Eu. 285 e. 2493. l>s who and the other simple relatives (e.g. o!os, o<Tos) refer to a particular and indiviclual person or thing.
1jv ns v rfi <rrpa.nfi. 'A<vo<f>wv 'A8'1)va.os, ts oiiTE <rrpa.T'I)'YOS oi!TE <rrpa.nWT'I)S <Dv <rVV'I)KooO<t tl~ere was in the arrny one Xenophon, an Athenian, who accornpanied it though he was neithe1 general nor soldie1 X. A. 3. 1. 4. a. On the relation of the relative os to the deu10nstrative os, see 1113, 1114. b. os is often used instead of o<rns (or olos) especi:ly with li, v or 11-n- Cp. 2508. lis whoeve1 with the indicative generai! y adds (in prose) of) 1roTE, of) 1ror' oliv (339 e ).

2494. o (sometimes 3.) at the beginning of a sentence may have the force of as to what (cp. q~wd), suggesting the matter to which it pertain s.
8 o' l-/jw<ras T}}J.s, ws ros 1'-fV <f>ll\ovs ' eli 'TrOL<V ovv&.l'e()a. o ra.()' ovrws ~X" as to what excited your envy of us-that we are able to benefit ou1 f1iends- not even is this as you suppose X. Hi. 6. 12. The postponed ante0 ,

cedent may be omitted (X. A. 6. 1. 29). a. An introductory relative clause with omay stand in apposition to an entire clause that follows. Thus, o 71'r.vrwv 8a.vfJ.a.IJrorarov, ~wKpr.r'l) p.<Oovra. oids 1rW1roTE iwpK<v v8pw1rwv what is most wond1;1jul, no one whatsoever ever saw Socrates drunlc P. S. 220 a. (So with an infinitive, L 14. 18.) The main clause, following snch a relative clause, may be introdnced by iirt or 'Yr.p. Thus, 8 f.'l:v
1r&.vrwv fJa.vp.aO"r6rarov KoOo-at, Ort

tv

Kacrrov Wv rrYJV<TaJJ.EV 1r6hVo-t rTJv ljixf}v

what is rnost 1JJonderfnl of all to hear, (th at) each one of the things we approved ruins the soul P. R. 491 b. Cp. 994, 995.
2495. oo-'l!'ep the sarne as (quZ: quidem) is especially defini te and denotes identity (338 c). os -ye (quippe q1) is causal (2555 a). 2496. llO"'T'tS whoever and the other compound. relatives (e.g. nroos, m)<To>) denote a person or thing in general, or mark the cla.ss, character, quality, or capacity of a person (less often of a thing).
J.l.a.K.pws ii<rrLS o<rli.v Kat vov ~X" happy is the man who possesses property and sense Men. Sent. 340. a. After a negative expressed or implied, o<rns (not lis) is used because of its general meaning. So oK ~<rnv ii<rns, ris lcrnv iiiJrLs; oviiEls IJTLv OIJTLS (rare] y oi!rts <rrtv os)' 7r.S o<rns (plun usually 7rr.VTS iilfoL) Cp. 2557. b. ~ iirov is common for ~ ou since. In Ionie (and 'l'buc. 6. 3) oiJns is used of a definite object. Cp. Hdt. 1. 7, 2. 99.
0

2497. otos of such sort as to, 111'0}_)er for, and oo-os of .s1h amount as GHiJ <lBAM. -36

SY.\"TAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

to, enough for, denote result and commonly take the infinitive (negative P-~).
Ka.Mv TE (ooKii) El va.< 17 1rurrrw"1 Ka.l orov lipxE<v rov v8pw1rov knowledge seems to be both a no/1/e thing an able to comma nd man P. Prot. :l52 c, oiJov JJ.6vov "fEIJaiJ8a< ia.ur,P Kara.<7rWv leaving himself only enough to taste X. A. 7. :3. 22. So ol6s TE able to (for rowvros oios re) ; thus, IJVp.{3ovEHv oTol r' IJ'op.E8a. we shall be able to [Jive counsel P. G. 455 d. a. On clauses with olos or oiJ'os following a main clause after which we supply a verb of r(/lection, see 21>8. b. oiJ'os is nsed elliptically in oiJ'a.< i!p.lpa.< (orrqp.pa.<) daily, oiJa.lir'r} yearly.

2498. Local clauses are introdnced by the relative adverbs o, ihrov, :lv8a, iva (nsually poetic, but sometimes in Plato) where, oi, 01T'Ot, ;[y{)a Whither, o8<v, 01T'O{)v, :iv8w Whence, fj, 01T''{) ~Vhich Way, Where, whither. o8t and o1ro8t where are Epie and Lyric, ~Xt wh,ere is Epie. :iv8a and :lv8<v are also demonstratives (there, thence). 2499. With names of things the relative adverbs ~vea., i9EV, ot, o.J are often used instead of the relative prononns preceded by v, Els, ~~. Thus, 1T''r}IJ'lov 1;v b 1Jra8p.s l!v8a. (=fis ov) lfp.EE Ka.raMEw the stopping-place was nea1 where he intended to make a hait X. A. 1. 8. 1, v r,P IJ'Ta.Op.,P 58Ev ( = '~ o1i) wpJJ.wvro at the stopping-place whence they set out 2. 1. 3. A relative adverb may also refer to a persona] antecedent, as Kara.f3a.lvE<v 1rpos ros /i)'..)\ous l!v8a. rd IJ1ra. itKf<VTo to escencl to the othe1s whae the arrned force was stationed X. A. 4. 2. 20. 2500. On comparative clauses of manner introduced by etc., see 2463 if.

n,

w>,

wfJ'1T'Ep

CONCORD OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS

2501. A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender,

number, and persan; its case is determined by the construction of the clause in which it stands.
olird< eiJT<v b v~p 8s 1jME this is the man who carne, a.r"' eiJTlv .;, :Yuv~ ;}v ik'"'rop.Ev this is the woman whom we 111e1e looking fo1", a.(3wv Tos i1r1rtiis ot 1;1Ja.v avT,P taking the cavalry which he hall, ltxwv ros o1rlriis wv eiJrpar-1}-yE< having the hoplites which he commandecl, rp<wv 8vpwv ouiJwv, 8.s llliH fLE o<E8Ev there

being th1'ee doo1s through which I hacl to go. a. If the main clanse as a whole is regarded as the antecedent, the relative stands in tlle nenter singular with or without a demonstrative. Thus, 1rv 1rt ::1::Evovra 7rd1Jl7 rn IJ'Tpanfl., cp' 07rEp p.a<IJTa f.rrlp.cp0'r}G'O.V to sail for Belin us with all their j(Jrce, for which pmpose especially they had een sent T. 6. 47. b. The person of the verb in a relative clause, in which the relative pronoun is the subject, is regularly determined by the person of the antecedent pronoun expressed or implied. Thns, ouK oiO' OIJT<S liv!Jpw1ros "fE"fV'r/fL"-' I do not know what sort of a penon I have brrome X. C. 1. 4. 12, w1 olKlii "fE 1ro p.elk'wv.;, DJJ.ETpii ri)s p.i)s, ot "fE olKlq. xpi)rT!JE yfi TE Ka.1 ovpav,P and your habitation is 11mch larger than rnine since you oecupy both heaven and emth as a habitation 5. 2. 15. The third person rarely follows a vocative (P 248) ..

THE AXTECEDEXT OF RELATIVE CLACtiES

563

2502. Variations from the law of agreement are, in general, the same as in the case of other pronouns (92G).
a. The construction according to sense (900, 1013) often occurs, as <f>lov
Oao<, 8v rKov aonj my dear child, whom I myse/f nouns, as r Ob~avra 1r k/jOEL, o1rep il<Ka<Tov<n wh at

bmoe X 87; so with collective is approved l1y the rnultit1tde,

who will,iudge P. Phae. 260 a. b. A relative in the plural may follow a singular antecedent denoting a wh ole class: lhwavpo7rot< av-f}p, av< .. 'Tf'atv T 7l'ij6o< rt man 1vho lays 11p a sto1e, the class of men which the rnultitnde app1oves P. R. 554 a. This construction is Jess common in prose than in po2t1y ; :ts 1j fJ.aa TL< OEIJ< l!voov, o! oopavv eopv l!xov<T<v in truth there is within so11W one of the gods who occupy the wide heaven T 40. c. A relative in the singular lmving a coll~ctive force may have its antecedent in the plural; as TOUTOU< f7l'ctLVZv, a, .v fKWV fJ."fJOv KaKv 7l'OL~ to I'O?nrnend those who voluntarily do nothiny <vil l'. l'r. 34ii d, rifnv< lvru'YxavoLEv . 7l'avra< liKrELvov they slew 1l whom th<'!! met X. A. 2. 5. 3::l. Here li< with the indicative is rare. d. The relative may stand in the n~uter, in agreement with the notion impliecl in the antecedent rather than with the antecedent itself; as ilt r~v 7l'OV~iiiv, a7l'ii<Ta <f>6rn< OLI.hKLV 'Tf'f</>VKEV ,;,, a'Ya.Oov for the sake of profit, a tbing which eveI"'J nature is inclined to pwsue as n yood l'. R. :300 c. e. The relative may agree in gender and number, not with the antecedent but with a following predicate nouu. This is common with verbs of naming; as O'YO< p.-f}v elrnv lv Ka<TTa f},~wv, &s )..1fio: vop.a\ofJ.ev; assuredly thmoe a1oe propositions in each of us which 1ce call hopes ? P. Phil. 40 a, ei7l'ev on . . .
(ha.'Y'YV"f]TctL 7rpiJ.rTWV r olKctLct Kai TWV iJiKWV 7rXOfJ.VO<, i]V7rp VOfJ.lsOL KO.L<TT"fJV p.Efr'YJV a'l!'oo'Ylii< elva< he sa.l that he had ointinued to do what was just and

to J'l'frain from what was ~m)ust, VJ!ch he thou y lit was the best practice for his defence X. M. 4. 8. 4. f. A relative may agree with a preclicate noun when it follows tbat noun immediately and not its own substantive: Kai olK"fJ <v v6pih7l'a<< ,..;J, of; KaMv, a 7l'avTa f}p.lpwKe T av8pW7r<va; a ml justice among men, how is not that something beautiful, which civilizes all human thing~; ? P. L. 037 cl.
THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

The demonstrative antecedents of the relative pronouns are commonly : o~ro> . . ;;,, rowvro> . . . ofo>, Toa-ovTo> . . oa-o>, 'T']tKOVTO<; . , ~tKO>, etC.
2503.

a. The antecedent of o< is often rowTos (1240). ofos, n1ay be Op.ows, 7rapa1r-/jcrws, fcros.

The antecedent of

15<, i!<T7l'ep,

2504. On comparative elanses of clegree with TOO"OVT<[' see 24G8 ff.

oa-ce,

etc.,

2505. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent.- The antecedent of a relative prououn or adverb may be definite or indef:inite.

564

SYNTAX OF THE C.:\IPLEX SENTENCE

[zso6

a. A dejinite antecedent refers to a definite or particular pmson, thing, time, place, or manner. When the antecedent is definite, the relative clause takes any form that occurs in an in dependent sentence (21) ; with o as the negative, unless the particular construction requires JJ.fJ. b. An indejinite antecedent refers to an indefinite person, thing, time, place, or manner. when the antecedent is indefinite, the relative clause commonly bas a conditional force, and, if negative, takes JJ.fJ like the protasis of a conditional sentence.
2506. In general when the relative elause has the indicative, the antecedent is either definite (negative ov) or indefinite (negative JL~). When the relative clause l1as the subjunctive with av or the optative (not in a wish), the antecedent is indefinite (negative JL~).
DEFINITE : rara Il (3o<Ta< 1rpiirrEL he do es wh at he wants (i.e. the particular thing he wants to do). Negative rara 8. o (3ol\era< 1rpiirre<. lNDEFINITil: rara anva (3ol\era< 1rplirre< he does whateve1 he wants (i.e. if he wants to do anything, he does it) ; negative rara anva 1-'17 (3overa< 1rplirre<. So rara anva av (3ov7JTa< 1rplirre< whatever he wants to (/o, that he al ways does, rara anva (3ov'!l.otro ~1rparre whateve1 he wanted to do, that he al ways dl, rara 8.TLva av (3o7JTa< 1rpli~H whatever he wants to do, that he will do, rara anva (3ovo<ro, 1rplirro< liv whatever he might want to do, that he would (will) do. In the last four sentences the negative of the relative clause is f.'fJ.

2507. When the verb of the relative clause stands in the indicative, the distinction between a definite and indefinite antecedent is commonly clear only in negative sentences .
.8, !-'17 oiJa oiJ ofof-'a< elva< whateve1 I do not know ( = d nva P-17 oiila) I do not even think I know P. A. 21 d. Here Il oK oila would mean the pmticnla1' things, I am ignorant of, and would have no conditional force whatever. So in o6K oiJ' p' ois "fp !-'7J cppovw (J"Z"f.v cp<W I do not know; for I am wont to be silent in matters which I clo not understand S. O. T. 569.

2508.

When the antecedent is definite, the simple relatives (os,

oios, ocros, etc.) al!e used; when indefinite, the compound relatives (o<TTL>, nroos, lnro<Tos, etc.) are used, but the simple relatives are often employecl iustead.. \Vhen the antecedent is indefinite, os usn-

ally has the subjunctive with av or the optative; while o<Tn> is preferred to os if the verb is indicative (2569).
2509. Omission of the Antecedent to a Relative.- The demonstrative prououn antecedent to a relative is often omitted: either when it is in the same case aR the relative, or in a different case from the relative. rrhe omission OCCUl'S when the antecedent expresses the general idea of person or thing, and often when the relative clause precedes.
"fw iJ Ka1 ( ovro<) wv Kparw wvol-'ev b1tt 1 and those whom I command will !'emain x. c. 5. 1. 20, Kav TO Ov'f(J"KELV ols (for TOVTOLS ois) v(3ptv TO fiiv cppeL de ath is $Weet to those to whom life brings contumely Men. Sent. 291, "fw 1ravTas

'l'HE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

565

dtT</JlpELv <f>' litTwv (for 1r ro<rorwv litT a) gKMros l!x" 1 say that allmust cont1ib-

ute according to the ability of each (from such means as each man has) D. 2. 31.
2510. In general statements in the subjunctive with /iv or the indicative, the relative, referring to a person, is often without an antecedent and bas the force of er T<s. In such cases the main clause con tains a substantive or a neuter adjective with ltTri (which is commonly omitted), and the relative is the subject of the sentence or in apposition to it. tTup.<f>op li', 8s av r6xn KaKfi< 'YVPaLK6s it is a calamity if a man gets a bad wife E. fr. 1056, Kal roro p.etov rfis 71IJ<lii.s KaK6v, litTrLs r p.'l} 1rpotT6vra KlKr71raL KaK&. and this is a misfo1tune exceeding the reality, {t'a man incurs the blame for evils that are not his doing E. Hel. 271, litTTL< . . 1rps IJ<wv KaKoraL, {Jap6 if a man sujfe1s ill-usage from the gods, it is gri~V01<S E. Hel. 207. a. The antecedent may be a genitive of quality (1320). Thus, 1r6pwv Mrl . , oZT<v<s liJown oL' brwpKlis 1rpiirrELv rL it is the characteristic of men without resou1ces to wish (lit. who wish) to accumplish their 1JU1')JOses by per,iury X. A. 2. 5. 21 (here liJlELv al one might be expected, but oZrLv<s !IJloutTL follows as if li1ropol eitTLv had preceded), roro inop.aL p.l'Ya r<Kp.~pwv lipxovros &.pTfis il vaL ~ av ( = fdp TLVL or aorl{j) h6PTS g11"WPT<lL I J'egard this as striking testimony to the me1it of a ruler if menfollow one (him) of theil' own free will x. 0.4.19. 2511. The antecedent of a neuter relative is often omitted, leaving the relative with the force of a conjunction. So l~ ou and <P' ou since, lv ([i while, <ls li till, p.lxpL (lixpL) ou until. viJ' wv and!~ wv because (cp. ovvEKa, 01Jo6v<Ka), l<f>' <[ir< on condition that (2279). 2512. A demonstrative adverb may be suppressed: li~w p.s ~viJa (for hiTe l!viJa) ro 1rp'Yp.a l'Ylv<ro I will bring you to the spot where the affair took place X. C. 5. 4. 21, 7roKEiovTEs liiJ<v (for heiJ<v o8<v) liv TL a{3<v ~ shutting them out from places whence it rnay be possible to take anything X. l\1. 2. 1. 16. 2513. IT'I'LV lo-TLs, do-tv ot.- The antecedent is omitted in the phrases

ouns (rarely os) there is some one who, somebody, plural etulv ol some (less often unv or), ~cra.v oZ (of the past).
i!tTTLP ov litTTL< {3o6<raL v1ro rwv tTvv6vrwv {3a7rTtT8aL; is there then any one who wishes to be ha1med by his cornpanions? P. A. 25 d, oVr<.. ~tTrLv oVr' ~tTTaL or cp .1-yw Karaell{lw rv lp.ov oKov the1e neithe1 is nor will the1e be any one to whom 1 rna y leave my property X. C. 5. 4. :30, <ltTI o Kal o . . . q,dryovtTLV some hOIses too run away X. Eq. 3. 4, EltTI li' aorwv oils ollo' av 1ravr&.1ritTL m{3ai71r< and some of thern y ou would not be able even to cross at all X. A. 2. 5. 18, ?i<>av li ot Kal 1rp 7rpotT</><pov and some b1ought ji1ebrands too 5. 2. 14, lftTnv orcp 1rEiw f11"Lrpl7r<Ls J) ri] "fVvaLKi ; is there any one to whom you entrust more than to you1 wife? X. O. 3. 12, l!<rnv o Kal h6'Yxavov Kal IJwp&.Kwv Kat 'Ylppwv some hit both the cuirasses and wicker-shields X. C. 2. 3. 18. i!tTTLv o is not an example of 961, but due to the analogy of l!tTrLv lir< (lv loTE), l!<rrLv ou, etc.

~unv

2514. The oblique cases of drrlv oZ there are those who= some (vwL) are regularly formed by rrnv ~v, crnv ois, <TTLV OVS (or ovcrrwac;), which are used also of the past and future.

566

SYXTAX OF THE Co:\1l'LEX SEXTEXCE

7r'ld1v 'Iwvwv . . ; K< ~crnv wv IJ.'A'Awv fevwv e1;cept the lonians and some othn nations 'l'. 3. D2, avxp.ol ~crn 7rap' ols p.eya'Aoc [!1'Nrt drouifh ts among sorne 1. 21l, gcrn p.v os avrwv Kar(3a'Aov some of them the!J st1'Uck down X. II. 2. 4. 6, ~crnv Kat 1ro'Aicrp.ara El'Av he ~aptured also some towns 'l'. 1. Gu. a. Xenophon also uses 'fjv or; th us, TWP o 1rOp.lwv 1jv ovs U'/l"OCJ"'/l"OVOOVS 1!"oocrav the1e we1e some of the enemy whom they1esto1Nl unde1' a truce X. H. 7. 5. 17.

2515. Here belong certain idiomatic phrases due to the omission of the antecedent: <TTLV o.i (o'I!"Oll) somewhere, sometimes, E<TTLV hl. some way, crTw oTe and von ( = lv~ on, cp. 175 b) sornetimes, o-Tw l>.,.ws somehow (in questions= is it possible that ?), oi!K <rTLv l>.,.ws in no ~oay, it is not po.~sible that (lit. there is not how).

(crn o' ov cr')'T) 6"fOV Kp.lcrcrwv )'vocr' /iv /Jut somctimes silence may prove better than speech E. Or. G38, ~crnv ore mt ols (2514) (3'Arov re8vavac;) !;ijv sometirnes and jo1 some people it is better to die thrm to live P. Ph. 62 a, ovK gere' o'/l"ws ... av iJJ.CS he 'Act8oc it is not possible that he shrmld elude us again A. Vesp. 21:l, ovK lcrnv 01l"WS ovK hc8fwerac i]p.v it is not possible tltat he will not attaclc us

X. A. 2.4. 3.
2516. o!lv OLOV (with the inf.) theTe is noth in[! lilce stands for ovolv ECJ"TL rocovrov, oiov crn. Tlms, oOv ofov r avrv pwrv the1e is nothing lilce questimng him P. G. 447 c. 2517. Relative not repeated. - If two or more relative clauses referring to the same antecedent are connected by a copulative COlljuuction and the second relative would have to stand in a different C?-Se from the first, it is either omitted or its place is taken by avn)> (less frequently by oro> or di:vo>) or a personal pronoun. Here, instead of a repeated relative, we have an independent sentence coor.inated with the relative clause .
Apcaos, v i)p.es ij8'Aop.ev (3acrc'Ai Ka8ccrravac, Kal (ci)) fOWKap.ev Kal (7rap' ov) l'A6.(3oJ,.ev 1l"<crr . . . i)p.s KaKws 1l"Ocev 11"Hprac A1ic1~s, whom we wished ta set

upas king, and to whom we [!I!Ve, and fmm whom we ?'eceived pleclyes, is attemptin[! to inju1e us X. A. 3. 2. ii, 1l"ov o1) hevbs crrw o vT)p 8s crvvdJijpa iJJ.Lv Kal cru p.oc 11-&.'Aa 06Km OavJ.Lcit;ecv aor6v; 1tere, Jnay, is that man who use to hunt with us and whom yon seemNl to rne to admire greatl!J ? X. C. :~. 1. 38, Ka! vv ri XP~ opv; Scrrcs p.cf>avws Oeos x8alpop.ac, p.cre o p.' 'E'A'A>)vwv crrparos and now what must 1 do '! Since 1 (lit. 1 who) arn man(festly hatqful to the gods, and the .army l!f the Greeks hates me S. Aj. 467. Cp." Whose fan is in His band, and He shaH thoroughly purge His fioor. '' a. The relative is sometimes repeated as in English (X. A.. 1. 7. 3, T. 2.

43. 2, 44. 1).

2518. If the demonstrative would have to stand in the nominative, it is commonly omitt.ed uuless the demands of emphasis require its presence: (rxvacs) s 7rt.UT1}JJ.G.S ,.v 7rO"f...ci.KtS 7rpO11rOf.UV Ot. r ~Bos, ovrar. Ov6;iaros d.X.X.ou arts which we have o,ten callecl sciences l!ecause it is usunl to do so, /,ut they Tequi1 e anothr1 name P. H. r,:J:] <1 (here avrac, not ar, is the Anbject).

THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAL'Sl%

567

2519. Preposition not repeated. - A preposition governing a relative pronoun is usually omitted if it stands in the same case as the preceding noun or pronoun before which the preposition bas already been used. See 1671. 2520. Verb omitted.-The verb of a relative clause is often omitted when it belongs also to the. main clause.
Med. 1153. Or tl1e verb of the main clause may be omitted : r "fp ll~~a. (1rol,) o<ra.1rep Ka.~ !J.ES l'lrotre [07' the Test he did just what y ou too we1e doing X. C. 4. 1. 3.
<{Jl~ovs VO!J.i!ov<r' OV!F7rp av 7r6<FLS ~vhom thy husband so regards E.

<rOEv (vo!J.l)y <f;l~ovs) Tega7ding as fTiends those

2521. Transition from a relative to an independent clause sometimes occurs.

(lxOvwv) ovs ol ::!:pot Oeos v6f1.t/;ov ml litKEV oK Efwv, o/i ris 7r<pL<rTEpds fish which the SyTians Tegar as gocls and which they will not peTmit to be injmed, nor do they permit the doves to be injured X. A. 1. 4. .

2522. Attraction.- A 1elative })l'Ononn is often attracted from its proper case into the case of its antecedent, especially from the accusative into the genitive or dative. A demonstrative pronoun to whose case the l'Ellative is attraeted, is usnally omitted if unemphatic. Cp. "Vengeance is his, or whose he sole appoints:" Milton.
a. Genitive. -ll.;w, ri)s ~ev0eplas 1/s (for ~v) KfKT7J<r0e wotthy of the f?'eeom which you possess x. A. 1. 7. 3, 7rp0 TWV Ka.KWV wv (for a) oila. instead of the evils which 1 know P. A. 29 , q,' wv (for TOTWV a) (<rTE fmm what y ou know n. 19.216, M'ljwv O!FWV (for o<rovs) ewpaKa. . 0 ff1.0S 7ra7r7r0S Ka~~L!FTOS my gmnfather is the hansomest iif all the JJieclPs 1 have seen X. C. 1. :~. 2, !J.~ u?roKEL!J.vwv otwv IJw~lwv (for rowrwv o(a. li ?roK<t<rOa.t) if the foundatiuns were not as they ought to be X. Eq. J. 2. b. Dative. -</Jof3ol!J.7JV av rcp 'iJ'YEJ.LOVL 4? (for 8v) ool7J lhre<rf;a.L I should jear to follow the leade7' whom he miyht r;ive x. A. 1. 3.17, ?ra.LvW <rf lep' OLS (for f7r1 rorots 8.) ~"fELS I C())mneml y-m j(n what yon say 3. 1. 4G, o~s (for rorots 8.) 7Jurux1)Kwa.v lv Ad,KrpoLS o !J.Erplws hXP7JVTo they ha not 11secl tvith moe7ation the suecess they gainecl at Leuctm D. 18. 18.

2523. A relative in the nominfl.tive or dative is very rarely attracted. Titus, rp' WV (fOl' 1r0 fKEiVWV a) iJ!J.V 7ra.p!FKEa.<rTa.t tO be lictr?ne by What has bePJ~ prepared by us T. 7. 6, ~i-yo< wv (for rorwv ols) f'Yw vrerX7JKa. a jew of those whom 1 have met with P. R. 531 e. 2524. The pronouns snbject to attraction are 5s, olos, o<ros, but not o<rns (except in 2534). Attraction is not necessaTy, and takes place only (but not always) when the relative clause is essential to complete tlle meaning of the antecedent. ''Vhen the relative elau8e is added merely as a remarl,, attraction does not take place. An attract.e1lrelative clause virtually bas the force of an attributive adjective. 2525. Predicate nom1s follow the case of the relative attracted to an antecedeut expres8cd or omitted (2531 b).
f3~a7rU<f0a.t

SYN'L~X

OF THE C0.\1PLEX SENTENCE

2526. An omitted antecedent to which the relative has been attracted may afterward be supplied in the main clause. 'l'hus, <fJ' wv (for 1r 'TOV'Twv a) . . . -,rpo<1'at'Tii Kat oavd~<rat, d,,. 'Tovrwv ouf')'<< from what he begs and borrows, frorn that he lives D. 8. 26. 2527. Before jlove, which with the relative is treated almost like one word (cp. quivis), attraction to varions cases from the accusative is rare. Tlms, ora Torwv 8s (for v) f3ovEL <(p')'M'Tat such deeds as any one you please of these has done P. G. 517 a ; cp. P. Crat. 432 a, Phil. 43 d. 2528. Attraction takes place also in the case of relative adverbs; as <<Kop.l_\ovio ii8ev (for h.ZOev or) iJ,.e~M<vro -,ral:oas they conveyed theiJ children from the places whe~e ( whither) they had deposited thern 'l'. 1. 89.

2529. Case of the Relative with Omitted Antecedent.- When the antecedent is omitted the relative either retains its own case or is attracted.
2530. When the omitted antecedent is nominative or accusative, the relative retains its own case. Tlms, ors fLi'l>.ur'Ta 'TtL 1rap6vTa pKe (ovTo<) ?)Kt<J'Ta 'Twv 'I>.Xorpiwv op')'ovrat those who are best satisfied with what they have, cavet leaBt what is theiJ neighbou1's X. S. 4. 42, <J''TU')'wv p. v ?j ( = iKelv'lv ?j) IL' linKr<v hating her who bore me E. Ale. 338. 2531. When the omitted antecedent is genitive or dative, the relative (if standing in a different case) is usually attracted into the genitive or dative. But a relative in the nominative masculine or feminine (sometimes in the neuter), or a relative depending on a preposition, re tains its own case. a. Genitive: wv (for rovTwv ors) vTv')'xivw 1ro p.<rJ'Ta 11-yap.at <1' of those wh:om I meet with, I admi1e yo1~ by far the most P. Pr. 361 e, OrJos 0 Kat ~ wv (for K 'Tovrwv Il) .Iii you show it also by the l(fe you leaa D. 18. I8. But elilfvat 'T'iJV ovvap.tv ( TOTWV) </J' os av fe.>(}' LV to discovm the strength of those 'against whom they me to proceed X. A. 5.1. 8. Cp. E. Ion 560 (in 2488)
where oY == ToVTwv o'i.

b. Dative: TOVTO o' iip.ot6v E<J''TLV rf (for 'TO'Tij) 8) vOv oiJ ')'ETO this is like that which was said JUSt now P. l'h. 69 a, fLfLVOJ-'EV ors (for roTo<s ) wp.oo')'Tj(}'ap.ev O<KaioLS o<J'tv ?) oli; do we abide by what we ag1eed was just, or not? P. Cr. 50 a. But it 'TO va')'KaOv auro's vat i5ta')'<1'8a.t ( TOVTO<S) 1t"ap' wv 'l>.f3oLV 'TOV fLL(}'86v because it is necessary fo1 them to give lessons to those from whom they expect to recei-ve their fee X. M. 1. 2. 6.

2532. The relatives oio>, oO'o>, ~o>, oU'n> 8~, OU''TLU'ovv (and some others) and a following nominative with the CO})ta may be attracted to the case of the antecedent. Thus, xapL,p.vo> Tow..!r'!' dv8p~ oio> U' fi showing favOJtr to snch a man as ?J01l aTe is commonly eondensed to xapL~p.EVo> oi<e U'OL dvSp{ (X. M. 2. 9. 3). Here the whole relative clause (with copula omitted) is attracted. The antecedent, if expressed, is often incorporated (2536) in the relative clause.
7rps 11vopas TOfL?)pos oZous Kal 'AO?)valovs (for olot Kal 'AO?)vaol elrJ't) to bold men such as the Athenians '1'. 7. 21, avir1'T'YJ 'A')'pti'O.< Kat 11'1>.'/..a o<J'a I!Ov'Y] llawvtK he called out the Ayrianes aud all the othe1 l'aeonian t1'i1Jes 2. H6, X<Lp.wvos ovTos

2535]

THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

569

oov 'm when the weather is such as you descTibe X. A. 5. 8. 3, aPtAap.>fv oiKlii . oTov T] iva>faVTos (for iv0.1ftaP76s Ttvos iirrns ?, 'ijv) the house burst into flames, sorne one or otlter having set it on jire 5. 2. 24. a. olos is often attmcted with superlatives: op-ros ?ra)'ov oov ELvonl.Tov (for Towvrov olbs lrrrt HvbTaTos) v>hen the frost was tremendous P. S. 220 h. Cp. 1087. b. The article may appear in this construction with olos and i)"hl<os, the relative clause being treated like a substantive: Tos oi'ots i)p.v to such as we are X.

H.2. 3. 25.

c. 'Ihe subject of the relative clause rarely stands in the nominative, not being attracted along with oios. Thus, avaioov' oovs1!'Ep rr rascals just like you A es. 2. 151. This occurs only when the number of the subject is different from that of the attracted relative. When the article precedes, as in l:owv lp.trm Tos olos ohos riP()pdnrovs Solon etested men like hirn (D. HJ. 254), editors generally

An antecedent nominative or (oftener) accusative may be attracted to the case of the relative. The attracted antecedent is often prefixed for empbasis to the relative clause, which thus separates it from the verb it governs or by which it is governed. Cp. urbem qua1n statno vestm est, and "Him ( = he whom) I accuse, By this, the city ports bath enter'd" (Shakespeare), where the antecedent is attracted into the case of the ( omitted) relative.
7dcro (for atJ) ' a<T1!'Ep e/rrop!js , /(WpOVrTl but the WOmen WhOm thOU Seest are coming S. Tr. 288, 11'o\uliiJJ (for 1roXrdii) otiiv eva< XPfJ 11'ocp. p.bvots i)p.f:v lurtv we alone have an ideal constitution (lit. such as ought to be) I. 6.48, ~eyov liu AaKeoa<p.bvwt wv i'!fovra.< mivTwv (for 1!'aPTa) 1TE11'pii"f6TEs elEv they said that the Lacedaemonians had gained all they asked for X. H. 1.4. 2.

read -ror olovs oVTos. 2533. Inverse Attraction.-

a. The main clause may contain a resnmptive demonstrativ pronoun; as

TP liPpa ToTov, 8v 1i'acu J7JTs . , oli76s (rrnv veao this man whorn you have long been semching for, this man is hme S. O. T. 449. b. The rare cases of the inverse attraction of the dative are suspected or

admit another explanation (E. Med. 12, S. El. 653, X. Hi. 7. 2). c. So with adverbs: Kat I!X"horr (for 1!\\oth) li11'o< v rplwo i"ta1r1)rrourrl ue and elsewhere, wherever you go, they will love you P. Cr. 45 c.
253~. oi>IMs o<TT<S oi. every one (lit. nobody who not) for ov8ds unv !uns ov, commonly shows inverse attraction, is treated like a single

bTOV ov, ov8vt bT<p ov, ov8iva bvnva ov. ooevs liTov ox< l\o'Ywrepov than which there is nothing m01e ir1ational P. Charm. 175 c, ovvl OT'f' oh a1!'oKpiv6p.evos replying to every one P. Men. 70 c, 1repl wv oulva Klvlvov llvnv' ox iJ11'p,etva oi 11'pb)'ovot for which our ancestors

pronoun, and inflected ov3fvo

underwent every danger D. 18. 200. a. Cp. ouMp.wv 'EXX7J><Kwv ri,v ou 11'o"l\\ov p.ijw his power was much greater than any Hellenicpower Hdt. 7.145 (== ouoap.O. CTTL rwv), ooap.ws WS ou <jJf}rrop.ev it can in no wise be that we shoull say no P. Pol. 308 b. 2535. o<Tos preceded by an Adjective.- Here the subject of the relative clause is identical with that of the main clause, and is omitted together with the

570

SYNTAX O.F THE CO.Ml'LEX

i::lE~TENCE

[2536

COpUla: XP'/1/;,a-ra, lia{3e !JaV}J-airT 5~ra (for !Javp,alrTOV ~IYTLV i~ra) he 1'CCVed a wonde1'jul amou nt of money P. Hi pp. M. 282 c, fJ-<T lipwTo< !Javp,a.~rTo l!~rov (for !Javp,a~rT6v ~~rnv p,<IJ' o~rov) with an astonishing amount of sweat P. R. 350 d. So !Javp,a.~rlws ws (for !Ja.v}J-a.~rT6v irT<v ws) P. Ph. !l2 a.
2536. Incorporation.- The antecedent taken up into the relative clause is saicl to be incorporated. The relative and antecedent then stand in the same case, the relative agreeing adjectively with its antecedent. If the antecedent is a substantive, it often stands at the end of the relative clause, and commonly has no article. An antecedent in the nominative or accusative is more frequently incorporated than one in the genitive or dative. 2537. A nominative, accusative, or vocative antecedent, when incorporated, usually conforms to the case of the relative. fli!.O'TW, i}v irCJ 1r(!OT(!0V t/.,ey.s d.pT'ljv, d.).."JIJ'ljs (for i!.O'TLV 7} d.per'f} a'l/0fJs, i)v) if the virtue which you were speaking of bf:foJe, is real P. G. 503 c, ds il i)v d.<t>iKovTo KWI'-"J" p,eyri71 1jv (for +, KW!J-71 els i)v) the village at which they mrived was la1ge X. A. 4. 4. 2, K/ll p.EV, xe,g-s !Jes Ji)..viJes (for lles or wll<i>s) hem me thou that camest yesterday in thy godlM;ad {3 2()2. a. An accuHative antecedent is incorporated in the accuRative when the verb of the rlative clause takes the accusative. 'l'hus, oK d7r<KpllwTeTo i}v ilx 'YVW!J-"JV (for TTJV 'YVWp,"JP i}v) he did not conceal the opinion he had X. M. 4. 4.1, p."Jo' rp'l/ir8 bp,wv aTWV i}v (h 'TI"aVTOS ad TO xp6vou OO~av KKT"Jir8< Ka1}V (for T7}V KaTjv 156~av i)v) do not deprive yourselves of the fai1 fame which yo!t have enjoyed throughout all time D. 20. 142. h. An accusative antecedent may be incorporated as nominative, genitive, Or dative, e.g. ef TLV<L Dp<h KaTa<TK<uatovTa ;js /ipxo< xcfJpaS (for TTJV xcfJpiiv 1}< lipxo<) if ever he satv any one imp1oving the district which he governed X. A. 1.9. 1\J. 2538. A genitive or dative antecedent, when incorporated, usually attracts the relative to its own case. wept o' ov 1rp6Tepov . i!.IJ71K< v6p,ov oMwv (for To v6p,ov v) dealing in detail with the law which he formerly passed D. 24. Gl, i1ropeueTo (J'Vv ii <X< ovvrip.n (for ~rvv T' ilwap, i)v) he advanced with what force he ha X. II. 4. 1. 23. Even wben the antecedent is omitted, the attraction takes place : wpos .; EX< O'JJVey< . . . ~rTpauup,a (for 1rps ToUT<tJ Tep (J'TpaTe!lp,aTL 8) he was collecting an army in addition to that which he had X. H. 4. 1. 41. a. But a genitive or dative antecedent, when incorporated, is attracted into the case of a nominative relative. Thus, v oLKa.lrTTJplo<s Kat orro< li.Xo< O"J!J-6~rw< ~ru)..)..o'Yo< (sc. <l~rl) in cou1ts and all the otlwr public assemblies l'. Phae. 261 a (forToO'ouTo<s IJ.)..)..o<s <1U6'Yo, o<ro' 'l/f1.6(fwl <li<). b. When an antecedent in the genitive or dative is incorporated, the place of the antecedent is UHually takeu by a demonstrative pronoun in the genitive or dative. Thus, ovo vu TWP 7rp P,f}J-V"Ja<, O(fa 'tj 7rri8op,ev K<J.I(rX nol' do yo?t 1'emember ail the evils we su.O1e<l <!> 441.

THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAGSES

OTHER PECULIARlT!ES OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

571

2539. Appositives to the antecedent may be drawn into the relative clause as the nearest construction or for the sake of empltasis. 'l'hus, vp1JCfe< Tos . . <Ka<rTds, otwep Ka! ')'OVTa< Ke O<Kci.)e<v, :litvws TE Kai 'Paoci.p,avOus KT. he will jind the ,iu<lges, who are sal to p1onounce judy ment t/1 ere, JJfinos an tl Rhadamanthys, etc. P. A. 41 a. 2540. A substantive, usually with the article, is often taken over into tl1e relative clause, to explain, by a necessary addition, the imt collveyed by that clause; and stands in the same case as the relative. Th us, El p,av&ci.ve<s 8 (3ouoiJ.a.' X<i-yetv T elos if y ou undmstan(l the class I wish to eseri/;e P. R. 477 c, o~TE aTo! aliTE ovs <f;ap,ev f],v wa<bwTov elva< Tos <f;u\aKas neither O?Lrselves nor the gumdians whom we say we must instruct 403 c. 2541. The antecedent may be reserved for the main clause, which follows the relative clause. Thus, Kae' os p,v ciw?)xO'lv, oK ~voxbs Elp,t Tos v6!J.O<S I am not subject to the laws in vi1tue of which I was a11ested A nt. ii. 8G. 2542. An attributive adjecti\e, or an attributive genitive belonging to a substantive standing in the m'ain clause, may be placed either in the relative clause (if either is emphatic) or in the main clause. Two adjectives may be divided between the two clauses. The substantives may rcmain in the main clause or be transferred to the relative clause. Thus, To TElX<<riJ.rt 81jv ain68t Twv ~upii.Kocrlwv a!pocrt they captwed the fort of the Symeusans which was the1e T. 7. 43, w f")'w f)Oe~ov Tovnp TaUT1Jv i)T<S <l1J iJ.E"yl<rT'I] 1rhrTLs oovcu of which 1 was willing to offer to the plaint{tf the assurance that was most solemn D. 52. 12, w<e;a, T1)v o<Kalii.v i)T<s <rTtv ciwoo')'lii tu sholJ? what the fai1' li ne of defence is 19. 203, ~<Pp<~ev Di!: p,6.x'1 -yxelvcr<v p,aKpfjs, ii.s exov Tap,ecrlxpoas and tlw battle bristled with the long spears, the fiesh-piening spea1s, which they yrasped N 339. a. From the transference of superlatives to the relative clanse arise such expressions as o/)')'a')'OV <rup,p,ci.xous ow6crous wXel<rTOUS ouvci.p.'I]V (1087). Similarly ws Tci.X<<TTa (scil. ovva<Ta< or the like) as soon as, as soon as possible, <wd (oTE) T<LX<<rTa as soon as. 2543. A participial or subordinate clause depending on a following main clause may be joined to a preceding clause containing the antecedent of the relative. 'l'hus, ~</>'7 elva< liKpov 8 el iJ.?J TLs wpoKa.Ta?)'fo<To, ciouvaTov ~<recrea, wapeM<'iv he said that theTe was a heiyht which would be impossible to pass, unless it was seized in advance X. A. 4. 1. 25. The case of the relative may be not that required by its own verb, but that of an omitted pronoun dependent on a participle or a subordinate verb inserted in the relative clause. Thus, KaTaXa.p,{36.voucr< TE;xos , . li 'lrOTE 'AKapvives TELXL<rrip,<POL KOLVcp ot<a<rTi]pl'f' <xpwVTo (for~ <xpwvTo TX<<Tci.wvo< aVTo) they seized a fort1'ess which the Acarnanians

once built and used as a cominon place of jwlgment T. 3. 105. 2544. When the relative clause contains a verb of naming, the main clause is fused with the relative clause. 'l'hus, fvBa. KaeTa< 'ApTiji.<os Tlp,evos (for lfvOa Tlp,ev6s <TT<, 8 Ka.eTa< 'ApTp.Lf5os) whe1e there is a precinct of ATtemis Simon ides 107.

572

SYNTAX OF THE C0:\1PLEX SE:\TEl\'CE

USE OF THE MOODS IN ItELATIVE CLAUSES

[2545

2545. The ordinary uses of the moods in relative clauses are as

follows:
a. The present and past tenses of the indicative without tiv express a factor the assumption of a fact. The future indicative is used to denote purpose, present intention, or an intended result. b. The indicative with tiv denotes unreality. c. The subjunctive with tiv expresses a possible or supposed fact in future time or a generality in presenttime. The subjunctive witlwut tiv is used in indirect questions ( 1805 b). d. The optative without tiv expresse~ a wish, a possibility less distinctly conceived, or a generality in past ti me. e. The optative with tiv is potential, and is used either in conditional relative clauses with an optative in the main clause, or alone, as p.l' l!"nv '>.:rrl<, ii p.bvv G'wfJep.ev tiv there is one hope by which alone we may be saved E. Hel. 815. f. The imperative occurs in relative clauses (1842, 2M3). g. The infinitive occurs in relative clauses in indirect discourse (2631).
THE USE OF THE MOODS IN CERTAIN RELATIVE CLAUSES

2546. An extension of the deliberative subjonctive not iufrequently occurs in relative clauses after such expressions as ovK l!xw, ovK lfa-n, etc., which usually denote baffled will, the existence of an obstacle to carrying out an act desired by the speaker or some one else. The subjunctive is much Jess common after the positive lfxw I have the means. The pronoun or adverb introducing such clause is an interrogative that bas taken on the function of a relative. 2547. The subjunctive bere follows primary tenses; the optative follows secondary tenses. to give to each of my friends, but that I shall not have enough friends to give to X. A. 1. 7. 7, ox g~oV<nv hevo< o1ro< rpu-ywG'<v they will not have any place whither to escape 2. 4. 20, ovKT' Ela' lv 1rloes 1!1ro< rpa1rbp.evo< !Jcivarov <jl{ryw I have no lonyer any hopes to which J may tum and escape death E. Or 722,_ ~~" 1! n l'TJ he will be ale to say something L. O. 42. b. oot!va -yp exov i!G'TL< ras p.as t11"LG'TO.< 11"!J.lfEL for I had no one to bring my letter E. I. T. 588. c. Attic never, or rarely, has the positive forms l!xw 1! n tiv, l!G'nv Ils tiv (K 170), 1rp.1rw l!a-n< tiv, witb th~ potential optative. 2548. The subjunctive with Ki in Homer does not involve will in ovK l!a-!J' OVTO< UVTJp . OVOf "(V"fJTO.L, i!< KV \!>at?jKWV ES "(aav tK7]1"0.L that ?nan liVeS not nor will ever be born who shall come to the land of the Phaea~ians !;202 ; cp. 756, 'Ir 345. \!> 103 involves ft different aspect of will from that in 2547 a. 2549. The deliberative future (l!llG) occurs in relative clauses; as 1!1rw< p.oXo6p.eiJ' < Obp.ov< ovK l!xw I do not !cnow how we are to go home S. O. C. 1742.
0

a. ou roro /Joo<Ka ,.r, OVK i!xw 8 n w KciG'rcp rwv <jJlwv lKavo< ol< ow I do not fear that I shall not have something

.,

,.r, OVK lfxw

2553]

ORDlNARY ltELATl VE CLAUSES

573

The deliberative subjunctive is more common ; as ovK l!x"' 'A6-yots 1 am not able to deal with your mgument P. Eu. 287 c.

ii.,., xpf}rr~p.ru Tos

2550. In a few cases the future is used like the subjunctives of 2547 a; and may be explained as a dependent deliberative future. Thus, o -y&.p ns IJpJLos l!rrnv, oo' l),.o, 1rlwv ~ep.,.of}"" Kpoos fol' there is no hmbour, nor is there any place to which a man may voyage and sell his wares at a profit S. Ph. 303,
1rPOJL'1J0l~s lir'f' rp61r'l' rijf1' KKvK<rrOf}rr" rvx?Js for thou thyself hast need of fmethought tvhereby thou shalt extricate th yself frollt this trouble A.Pr. 86.

a.rv -yap f1E e

2551. oi>K <rTw os (o.,.ws, ().,.ou, ros) are used with the futme indicative to introduce statements as regards the future. 'l'hus, o -yap ns I!<Tnv 8s 1rapodJ'
a.lpi}f1era.t r'i}v f1'i}v axpeov vva.JL<v avr' Epv<TO<!ws the1e is no one tvho will prefer th y feeble powe1 Tather than Eurystheus E. Heracl. 57, oK l!rrO' li1rws 6>fe< " ep' M6vra. p.e thou tvilt in no toise (lit. it is not possible how thou shalt) see me com-

ing heTe S. Ant. 329. The indicative present or aorist is also used in statements as regards the present or past. All these indicatives may be dependent deliberatives. Cp. 2557.
2552. The optative without li.v (probably potential) occurs in Attic poetry after oK lif1r<v 1Jf1ns (o1rws, li,.o,) and the interrogative ris f1rlv lis (lirrns) and l!f10' o1rws. Thus, oK l!rrnv offns 1r7}v JLo Kelpa.tr6 vtv there is no one except myself who could eut it A. Ch. 172, oK 1!"0' o1rws e~a.<p.< r >feullij Ka."M I could not (lit. there is no tvay how 1 could) call false tidings fair A. Ag. 620, ris rwvll'
wJLarwv l!x" Kparos, 5f1ns ~.!vous M~a.tro ; who has autho1ity in this house that .might receive guests? Ar. Thes m. 871, l!"r' oi'iv o1rws AK1Jf1TLS s -yijpa.s p.6Xot; is theTe a way by which Alcestis might 1each old age? E. Ale. 52. The potential optative with li. v occurs after these expressions (E. Ale. 80, S. O. C. 1168, P. Lach. 184c). Attic does not use the optative with li.v after the positive form l!rrnv
011'WS (

5<TTLS),
CLASSES Ol!' RELATIVE CJ,A USES

2553. Ordinary Relative Clauses de fine more exactly a definite antecedent, and show the mood and the negative of simple sentences. Indicative: ra.r' f1r!v et -yw oJLa.< this is what 1 want X. A. 7.2. 34, riJ of1riva. "{v7J fJporwv, o[s p.7} p.hpws a.lcfJv aZas, ill-starTed races of men, whose destiny is beyond due measure S. Ph. 179, oOev ovv p~f1ra. p.a.Oi}rref10e 1rep! a.rwv, vreOev p.iis Ka.! -yw trpwrov 7rLpd.<Top.a.t <iia<TK<w I will first t1y to infmm you (lit.) from the soune frorn which you will most easily leaTn about them D. 2~. 3, tra.p' JL a</JtKOf!-EPOS OV 1!'f1TO.I iJ.1rEp i)_p /f7ra1Jep IJ.l(J T'f' <TV"("/V0f!-EPOS TWP lJOI/JLf1TWV in C01n-

ing to me he will not rneet 1vith the treatrnent he wmtld have su:f!ered had he consorted with any other of the sophists P. Pr. 318 d. Subjunctive: Avvros lioe 7ra.p<Ka.O!ero, <P p.era.owp.ev rijs f?JrfJaews Anytus has taken his scat here (lit.) to whom let us give a share in the investigation P. Men. 89 e, KMwv Mouve Ka. . wfJr?Jp Il' lv otKo<s ijv " p.7} eltJ!is heaTing that ow motheT is in the house, (lit.) of whom have thou no feal' S. El. 1309.

574

SYNT AX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2554

Optative : otoJl.a< li v 1]11-iis TOLctTa 1raOiv, o1a Tos <xOpos oi Oeol 1fOL?j<T<Lav 1 think we should end~tre such things as I pray the yods rnay inflict upon our enemies X. A. 3. 2. 3, o6pa.Ta fxov'Tfs ii<ra .vi}p Il. v <j>po< Jl.O<s having speats, such as a man could ca11y with d~Uieulty 5. 4. 25, lf.p~oJl.a< il' ivnOev oO<v i-yw T<iX<<TT' Il. v o<Oci~a'Jl.' 1 will beyin at (j1om) that point ~vhe1e 1 can most quiclcly injorm y ou D. 29. 5. The potential optative without li v is very rare (2552). Imperative : 1r av-qv <J>pd.<Tw, i}v l-ycyp&..pov <T Jl.V'IjJl.O<T<v To<s <j>pevwv 1 will tell thy wandming; which do thou inscribe in the tablets of thy mernory A. Pr. 788. On o<T8' 8 opuov, see 1842 a. a. Ordinary relative clauses are explanatory, and (in sense) are equivalent to independent coordinated clauses. See 2490. . b. Homer has K or li v with the future : 1rap' J1.ol "Y Kal li.o<, ot Kl !1-' TwiJ<ToV<T< 1 have others by my side who will ho1WU1' me A 175. 2554. Relative Clauses of Purpose (Final Relative Clauses) regularly take the future indicative, even after past tenses (negative p.-Y,). 'l'he antecedent of final relative clauses is usually indefinite. ;;, 1s commoner thau oCTn;;. ('l'he construction with the future participle is more frequent: 2065).
</>7JJ1. /i-i} V -iJ!-'S . 7rp<T{3i0.v 1fJ1.1fLV, J} TOS Jl.foV ciLoa~L TO.Ta, TOS 7rapo-

1 say that we must send an ernbassy, which will injmm sorne of this and incite othms D. 2. 11, 1fJ1.if;ov nv' li<Tns <T7JJ1.avfi send sorne one who will announce E. I. 'l'. 1209, l!oo~e rci} o?jwt> TpLdKOVTO. livopas <T0aL, o? TOS 1feiTplous v6Jl.OVS <Tv-y-ypaif;ov<TL, Ka&' os 7ro"inv<Tov<TL the people voted tn choose thiTty men who should codify the ancestrallaws by which they were to conduct the government X. H. 2. 3. 2. So in loc~l clauses: Kplnj;w TbO' 1!-yxos h8a 11-fJ T<s oif;<Ta< 1 will hide this sword where no one shall see it S. Aj. 659. a. After a secondary tense the future optative occurs ra1ely: ol rp<dKovTa ifpl07J<TO.V J1.fV fi7r T<i.XL<TTCi T J1.CiKp T<lX7J K0.0T/pf07J. aipeiJ/:vns o' f</J' cpT ~u-y-ypa lfO.L v6!-'0vs, KaiJ' o~<TT<vas 1f<>n<To<~ro KT . the thi1ty were chosen as soon as the lony walls we1e destroyed; and having been chosen joT the purpose of coclifyiny the laws, accmding to which they were to conduct the gove1nrnent, etc. X. H. 2. 3.11. ln local clauses: S. O. T. 796. b. A past purpose may be expressed by fJl.<ov and the infinitive. Thus, vaapxov 1rpocrha~av 'AKliv, 8s 1!11-eu l7r<1fe<TE<T0a< they appointed Alcidas as adrniral who was to sail in cormnand T. 3. 16. c. Homer uses the subjunctive (with d, except r 287) after primary tenses, the optative after secondary tenses. Thus, Jl.avT<s l<<TETa<, lis KV To< t7r?I<T<v oobv a see!' will corne to tell thee the tcay K 538, li-y-y\ov 'ijKav 8s yyeO,m -yvva<KL they sent a messenger to tell the woman o 458. The future also occurs (~ 332). The present or aorist optative is rare in Attic (S. Tr. 903, Ph. 281).

~VV

2555. Relative Clauses of Cause take the indicative (negative o). ;;, is more common than oo-ns.
fJaUJ1.t1.<fTOV 7rOLs, Ils ( = Bn <T) i}iJ.V ovillv olows yon do a stranae thing in yiving us nothing X. M. 2. 7. 13, Ao~l<f o 1-'!1-'</>ofJ.a<, o<TTLS 11-' l1rrlpas l!pyov civQ<T"~TaTov TOs !J-v Myo<s TJI.!<J>piv< Kr . I blame Loxias, who after inciting rne to

2559]

RELATIVE CLA!JSES OF RESULT

575

a deed most unhallowed, cheered me with words, etc. E. Or. 285. So when the relative is a dependent exclamation (olo< =on rowros, etc., 2687). a. -ye is often added to os or o<J"ns. b. p.f} is used when there is also an idea of characteristic (of such a so1t) or condition (perhaps to avoid a harsher form of statement). Cp. 2705 g.
2556.

Relative Clauses of Result (Consecutive Relative Clauses)

usually take the indicative (for ota>, 6uo with the infinitive see 2497). The negative is ov when the relative elause approximates wur~ (o) with the indicative, as is generally the case when the main clause is negative, expressed or implied. Here 6un-. is commoner than 6-.. The negative is P-"1 when the relative clause expresses an intended (2557) or anticipated (2558) result, where wur IL~ with the infinitive would be less precise.
ris ovrw p.aiveraL li<J'TLS 00 fJoueraL <1'01 <f>0\0< evaL; who is so maa that he does not wish to be afriend tu you? X. A. 2. 5. 12, ol5v -yp ovrw {Jpaxv o1rov h&.repo< etxov ci oOK iFKvovro f}wv fm each sle did not have weapons so short that they could not reach each other X. H. 7. 5. 17. a. The indicative with /iv and the optative with /iv are rare. Thus, ris 15' ~v

oVrws . . . ~-t"icra81}vaws,

0<TTts

0vvfJ8'1J .v dra.Krov arOv 7rOJ.l.vaL lOev; who was

such a hater of Athens that he could endure to see himself not at Ms post '! Lye. 39, riS orWS l<J'Xp6s, 8s .. , p"/<L 15uvatr' av p.ax6p.VOS <J"rparefJC8aL WhO iS 80 vigurous that he could ca1'1'Y on war while battling with cold '! X. C. 6. 1.15. A potential optative with lis follows a potential optative in P. R. 360b.
2557. The indicative is normal in consecutive relative clauses introduced by OVK lunv d<TTL> (ov), ov8ds ~q-nv 6un-. (o), OVK Unv hrw> ( ov), fl<TtV ot, :O'rW o(-., etC.
oK ~<J'r<v ol5e1s o<J"ns oox arov </><E there is no one who does not love himself Men. Sent. 407, oK gtJ'TLP 81rws fjfJrJv Kr1}11''J .,.&.<v a8ts in no way canst thou regain thy youth E. Heracl. 707. See 2551. a. The indicative with /iv and the optative with /iv also occur. Thus, o -yp ~v lin av 11'o<er< for there was nothing that y nu could have do ne D.18. 43, wv oK gtJ'r<v li<J"ns oK v Kara<f>pov1}11'<v whom every one would despise 1. 8. 52. b. On the subjunctive and optative without !iv, see 2546, 2547, 2552.

2558. The future indicative is often used to express an intended result (negative P-~).
v6TJrov 1rl rotourovs Uva< wv Kpari}tJ'as p.~ Karat1'x1}11' rts it is senseless to attack men of such a kind that we shall not hold thern in subjection if we con. quer thern T. 6. 11, ouro< 15 rotar' V1I'OCJXfJt1'ovra<, ~ wv p.TJI5' v cmov KV1)81}<J'OVraL these men shall make p1vmises in consequence of which the Athenians will not bette1 themselves und er any ci1cmnstances (lit. even if anything occurs) D.19. 324.

2559. The future indicative is especially common when the main clause contains an idea of ability, capacity, or characteristic, and the relative clause denotes what is to be expected of the subject.

576

SINTAX OF THE CO.MPLEX SENTENCE

Kavol fftJ.V . p."iv 7rlp.lfat vas re Ka~ livpas olrt.v<:s uvp.p.axovral re Kai .-ljv ooov +ryi}trovTa< (cp. wtrTE trV!J-!J-riX<tr8at) we a1e alile to scnd you ships and men who will fight 1cith you and direct your journey X. A. 5. 4. 10, ol!TE 1roa lftrn .- ,.,.&,~ovTa ol!TE trros /> 8pe1f;o!J-8a. !J-vovTEs we have neithm ships to convey us away nor provisions to feed us while we ?'emain 6. 5. 20, o.-al nvos llons aiJ.-v ovi}tr he needs some one to imp1ove hirn P. Eu. 306 d, (lfo) 1{11}</><tr!J-a viKijtra.t rowi!.-o ot' oli iPwK<s 1rooiiVTat a bill had to be passed of such a chamcter

as to destroy the Phocians D. 19. 43.

2560. Conditional Relative Clauses may be resolved into if clauses, 6s (6<Tns) corresponding to t ns and 6s (o<Tns) av to Uv ns. The negative is JL~ a. The antecedent of conditional relative clauses is indefinite (2505 b). b. Such relative clauses, like temporal clauses, correspond in form to the protases of ordinary conditional sentences. Conditional relative sentences show, in general, the same substitutions permitted in the corresponding conditional sentences. 8s li. v is al ways generic, i&.v may be particular in prose. 2561. The correspondence in construction between the common forms of conditional, temporal, and conditional relative, sentences is shown by the following table:

Present
Simple: Unreal: General: Simple: Unreal: General: More Vivid: Less Vivid:

et (on, &)
e(

gXEL

(OTE, 8) Tt Uv n ( 5.-a.v n, B n) (liTE, 0) TL er (lin, Il) Tt e( (oTE, o) Tt

fixe v
i!xu

lwtrL lillilov li.v olilwtr lillilov (filwKe) /[iJwKev ( lillilov) li. v lillilov

Past
e(

exev (i[trxev) i!trx<v (<Txev)

gXOL

Fnture
dv
e(
TL

(lJrav
Tt

TL, ($TL

. v)

(oTE, o)

OWcreL i5ti5oi1} (ilol1J) li.v

N.- English cannot al ways, without obscurity, use a relative to translate oH or lin with an u:nreal indicative; in such cases when(ever) or whatever are best rendered by if ever. Cp. 2396.
PHESENT AND PAST CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

First Fonn
SIMPLE PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

2562. Simple present and past conditional relative clauses have the present or past indicative. The main clause has the indicative or any other form of the simple sentence (cp. 2298, 2300). oiJ "(p ~ 7rpdTTOVITLV ol O[KaLOL d' ~ ( = TL Va.) !J-i) 7rpdTTOVtrL, TaVTU. -yet< for
1

it is not what the just do, but what they do not do, that you keep telling us

CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAU:SES

Ta~m I!Oeov

577

X. M. 4. 4. 11, Twv 'EXX~vwv ot ( = et nve~) JLr, gTvxov lv Tll~ Ta~ecnv 8vTe~ el~ Tii~

tlwse of the Greeks who happened not to be in ?anie mn into their mnks X. A. 2. 2. 14, odfJa.XXev af1Tv ii T< lovva.To he slandered hira all he could 6. 1. 32, 11vopa~ Twv 'A07Jvalwv -rrKTetvav oO"o< JLr, l~vevO"av they killed all of the .A.thenians who had not escaped by swimming T. 2. 90, 8 O -ye JL~Iiv Ka.Kv -rrot oo' Il v T<vo~ d7J Ka.Ko atnov; and that which produees no evil cannat be the cause of any evil either? P. R. 37 b, li /Lr, -rrpoO"~Ket p.~T' liKove p.~O' opa neither hea1 no1 behold that which beseems thee not Men. Sent. 3, oO"T<~ !fil m0p., -rretptiO"Ow vKv whoever longs to live, let him strive to conquer X. A. 3. 2. 39. a. Since the antecedent of these clauses is indefinite, simple present conditional relative clauses with the present indicative in the main clause often have the value of general conditions. But general clauses with o~ (p.~) usually take the subjunctive or optative (2567, 2568), and those with lilfn~ (p.f}) the indicative (2569). 2563. If the relative clause expresses a present intention or neces-

sity, the future indicative may be used.

v TOVT<p ICKW0"0at (1050) lobKe< KO"T4J T -rrpti-yp.a.ra t; p.~ T<S afJTOS -rrapO"Ta.L each thottght that progress was surely impeded in any undertaking in which he tvas not going to talee part in pers on ( = lv rovT<p KeKwXTa.< r; p.t, -rraplO"op.a<) T. 2. 8. Cp. P. Th. 186 c. More common is p.XXw with the present or future infinitive: o<O"O' i n . . . L-rri.O"< lfvvolO"etv Dp.v p.XXet may you adopt whatever course is likely to be of advantage to you all D. 3. 36. a. Elsewhere the future indicative is not regular in conditional relative sentences.

Second Form
PRESENT AND PAST UNREAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

oiJT 'Yp av aTo! E1rXLp0p.ev -rrpfi.TTLV a ( = ( TL Va.) p.t, 1}1rLO"TUp.e0a KT . fm (if that were so) neither should we ou1selves be !tndertaking (as we are) to do what we did not understand, etc. P. Charm. 171 e, o! -rraoes p.wv, iicrot (=et nves) <vO&.oe ~O"av, u-rro TovTwv av DfJpl\ovro (if that were so) your childTen, as many of them as were present (but none were present), 1vould be insulted by these men L. 12. 98, 01r0Tpa. TOVTWV -rrol"Y}O"EV, ooevs av TjTTOV -rrXoVO"LOG ~(fflp whichever of these things he had done, they would be no less rich than any one 32. 23.

2564. Present and past unreal con(],itional relative clauses have a secondary tense of the indicative. The main clause has a secondary tense with av (cp. 2303).

FUTURE CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

Third Form
MORE VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

2565. Conditional relative clauses that vividly anticipate the realization of a future event take the subjunctive with av. The main clause has the future indicative or any other form referring to the future.
GREEK GRAM.-37

578

SYNTAX OF THE CO.:\fPLEX

SE~TENCE

[:?S66

Tfi, vpl 8v av (=Uv nva) I!A7JIT0< Tr<liTop.a< 1 will obey 1ohatever man you may choose X. A. 1. 3. 15, ois (for ) av o! /iAo< lp'f.twvrat, Tourots IT XPiJ"TI whatever others acquire by labour, that you shall enjoy X. M. 2. 1. 25, TretpdiTop.at lin av uvwp.a p.s '{a0v Trov 1 will try to do y ou all the yood 1 can X. A. 6. 1. 33, li1ro av lAOw, '{ovTos tp.o .Kpod!Jovra o! v<o wherever 1 go the young men will listen to my speaking P. A. q7 d, TroKpiva i Tl li. v If< tpwrw answer whatever I ask you L.12. 24, l!7r<IT8< oTry /iv rs -i}'{fjra follow whe1e any one may lead y01~ T. 2. 11, ws av ( &.v 1rws) 'fw <tTrw, Tr<OcfJp.<IJa let us all obey as 1 shall bid B 139. Potential optative: lJJITT' .7ro</JV'f01S av ijvnv' av f3ouy liiK7]P so that you can get o.tf in any suit you please Ar. Nu b. 1151. a. The future indicative is scarcely ever used in a conditional relative clause of this sort (T. 1. 22 lilfol f3ovAi)ITovra; cp. 1913). b. Homer has some cases of the subjunctive without KJ or /iv (e.g. N 234). Homer sometimes uses the future with d or /lv in the main clause: M K<v K<xoWIT<Ta, lJv K<v tKwp.a and he will be wroth to whom I shall come A 139.

Fourth Fo1m
LESS VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

2566. Conditional l'elative clauses that set forth less vividly the realization of a future event take the optative. The main clause has the optative with av.
OKVOl7JV av els T Troa p.f3alvlV ( = d TLva) -i}p.v Kpos ool7] 1 should hesitat~ to embark in the vessels that Cyrus might give us X. A. 1. 3. 17, 8 o p.'!] '[a1r(f5 .J, oli' av <fJo nor could he love what he does not desire P. Lys. 215 b. a. The main clause has the optative without /lv in wishes: owpa IJ<wv lxo, 6T",., /ilooev may he keep the gifts of the yods whatever they may give " 142. b. Homer sometimes uses K or li.v in the relative clause (<P 161).

GENERAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

Fijth Fonn
PRESENT GENERAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

2567. Present general conditional relative clauses have /J.v with the subjunctive. The main clause has the present indicative or an equivalent.
vos 15' 1rovO' 8vnv' (=et Tl va) av </JAfi Oeos 'he dieth young, whome'er a god doth love' Stob. Flor. 120. 13, os (=et TL VaS) av 00~ </J!OK<vitwws txovras 7rpS Tos 7rOep.lovs, Tip.ij. whome'Ver he sees zealous of danger in the face of the enemy, these he honours x. H. 6. 1. 6, '{ap.oITl T 07r68ev av f3ouWVTal, KOti560.1Tl T els ovs av ewlfl they both get a wife from whateve1 family they please and give their daughters in marriage to whomsoever they choose P. R. 618 d, 1rarp1S 'f.p ITTL 1ri1T' tv' av 1rpliTTT/ rs e for every land is a man's own country wheresoever he fares well Ar. Plut. 1151. a. Gnomic aorist in the main clause: lis Ke IJeos Tr<7r<i87Jra, p.aa r' lKvov aTo whoever obeys the gods, him they most do hea1 A 218.

CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

579

b. The suhjunctive without li. v (Kl) is usual in Homer and occurs occasionally in At tic and lyric poetry. Tlms, v8pw1rovs <j>opfj. Ka! TivvraL os ns p.dpTTJ he watches over men and punishes whoever tmnsgresses v 214, Twv o 11'7Jp.ovwv
p,rflurna J\ii1roo-' a <j>avwo-' a8alp<ToL but those griefs pain the most which are seen to be se(f-sought S. O. T. 1231. Cases of the sort appear in Hdt., but are very rare in Attic prose, e.g. 'T. 4.18. The subjunctive without ~v (K) is much commoner in Homer than in the corresponding clauses with l (2339). c. The apodosis here usually expresses a general truth, less often iterative action. In 2568 the apodosis refers to iterative action, usually on the part of designated individuals.

Sixth Form
PAST GENERAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

Past general eonditional relative clauses have the optative. The main clause has the imperfect or an equivalent.
2568.
d 1rps <P ( = l 1rp6s nvt) d7J l!n'f', ToTo l!1rpiTT<v whatever work he was engaged in, that he al ways pe1frmned X. H. 4. 8. 22, l!1rpiTTV o6~<tev an/i he al ways dl whatever he pleased n. 18. 2:35, 11'avras . O<TOVS oc{3otev OL<j>8<tpov they used to destroy as many as they captu1ed T. 2. 67, 8-fJpi o1rov 1rep 11'LTV"fXrivotev 8TJplots he used to hunt wherever they fell in with lmge game X. C. 3. 3. 5, vKpayov !Kenvovo-a 1rrivTas OT'f' vTv"fxavoLEv p.'ij <j>ery<Lv they screamed out, entreating all they met not to flee X. C. 3. 3. 67. a. An iterative tense with li. v in the main clause: 071'TJ p.l\o< .pt(J'T011'oti:o-8at T o-TpriT<vp.a . , 11'av1J"fa"(ev Lv T dpas, when the squadron was about to take breakfast, he would dmw bacle the wing X .. H. G. 2. 28.
INDICATIVE FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

2569. The present indicative instead of the subjunctive with if.v oceurs in general conditional relative clauses ( ep. 2342). 'fhis occurs chiefly after ocrru;, which is itself sufficiently general in meaning.
olTLVES 7rpOS Tlis ~up.<j>oplis "(VWfJ:{I {jKL<TTci v .. ovTaL, i!p"(4J f p.aL<TTa VTXOV<TLV

those who in feeling me least depressed at misfortunes, in action resist them most T. 2. 64, lio-ns il' 1rl w"flo-Tots T 1rl<j>8ovov J\ap.(3avet, op8ws {3ovl\e6eTaL he counsels wisely who incurs envy in a great cause 2. 64, lio-ns /if 1r J\oTov ?} <"(vELav <lo-towv yap.r 1rov'Y/pav, p.wp6s o-nv whoeve1 fixes his gaze on wealth or noble lineage and 'Weds a wicked woman, is a fool E. El.1097, o n Ka/iv ipll\ov &el whatsoeve1 is faiT is dem joTever E. Bacch. 881. a. Cases of the imperfect instead of the optative are rare and generally ill SUppOl'ted ! 011'0V cPTO T'ijv 1rarpioa TL W<j><TJ<TELV, O 1r6vwv V<j>iETO Whenever he thought that he could benejit his country in any respect, he did not shrink from toil X. Ag. 7. 1. Cp. X. A. 1. 1. 5, 1. 9. 27.
2570. The indicative is generally used in parenthetical or appended relative clauses with IJo-ns (lio-r<s 1ror). Thus, /5ovl\E>1op.ev 8<os, li n 11'oT' ela-lv o! 8eol we

serve the gos, whatever tlwse gods are E. Or. 418.

580

SYNT AX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[2571

a. The subjunctive with /Lv is a.lso used when the reference is to future time orto general present time. Cp. Aes. 1. 127, D. 4. 27.
LESS USUAL FORMS O.F CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENC.ES

2571. The potential optative with /Lv in the main clause with the indicative (2562) or subjunctive (2565) in the relative clause. 2572. Indicative with /Lv or potential optative with /Lv in the relative clause.
5v'Tn' tv flJJ.ES els -ra6TT)V 77}V rd.~LV KaTEcrT-IjaT . , OTOS rCJv (qwp arnos f)v KaKwv orrwV1r<p Ka! oros whomsoever you might have appointed to this

av

post, Sltch a one wo1d have been the cause of as many evils as this man has been D. 1\l. 29, ros il' br' 'Il\J\vplovs Kat 011"0L TLS av et7rOL 7rapaEi11"W rrrpaTElis I omit his expeditions against the Illyrians and many others (lit. whithe1soeve1) one might speak of D. 1. 13. Cp. X. Ag. 2. 24. 2573. The optative in the relative clause with the present or future indicative or the imperative in the main clause (cp. 2359). With the present this occurs especially in general statements and maxims. The main clause is often inkoduced by a verb requiring the infinitive. l\J\' 8v 1r6<s rrrf}rrm, roile XPTJ K<<v but whomever the State might appoint, him we must obey S. Ant. 666, ro 1-'fV avrv J\yE<v, JLTJ rra<fJws Elilfl71, etpyerrOaL oe one shoul refrain from saying oneself what one does not know for certain

x. c.

1. 6. 19.

a. The present indicative sometimes may have the force of an emphatic

future (!28G). Sometimes the optative indicates a case that is not likely to occur; as llft.J\<;> V<!-'<rriirov, ons ro<ar 'Y f>!o< you a1e 1eady to be wroth with another, supposing any one do such things ~ 494. b. Other examples of the present: Homer P 631 (doubtful) ; Theognis 68\l; Aes. Pr. 638; Soph. O. T. 315, 979; Lys. 12. 84; Xen. C. 2. 4. 10, 7. 5. 5(), H. 3. 4. l8, 7. 3. 7; Plato Charm. W4 a, Eu. 292 e ( doubtful), L. 927 c. Temporal: S. Tr. 92, P. H. 332 a. c. The future indicative occurs in r 510 (temporal N 317); the perfect indicative in .::l. 262 and w 254 (tempora.l) ; the aorist imperative in X. C. 1. 4. 14.
DEPENDENT SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES (2574--2635)

2574. A subordinate clause may play the part of a substantive in

relation to the main clause. Such clauses are generally the object, sometimes the subject, of the verb of the main clause .

.r,. on ov ,.6l\el-'ov 7ro<r,rr61-'evo< i)Kov he said that they had not come to waue war X. A. 5. 5. 24, ~1rpirrrrov o1rws ns (3o1}0E<a i)~e' they were managing how some 1'einfonements should come T. 3. 4, 0/Jo<Ka 1-'lJ 1r<aOwwea rfjs otKailt ooo I am aj1aid lest we may f01'[fet the way home X. A. 3. 2. 25 ; J\yero on IIwl\os orrov 90 1rapel71 it was sa id that Pol us had all but a1'rived 7. 2. 5.
2575. There are four main divisions of substantive clauses. 1. Dependent Statements: subordinate clauses stating that something is; as yEt W ovv <TTLV dLKwrEpov cf>V!LTJ'> he sa ys that nothing is more u.nj ust than talk abou.t a man's character Aes. 1. 125.

2577]

DEPENDENT SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES

581

2. Dependent Clauses of will or desire: subordinate clauses denoting that something should be or shou.ld be done. These clauses have been treated uuder the following divisions :
a. Dependent clauses after verbs of e.(lort (2209). b. Dependent clauses after verbs of fearing (2221). N. -On dependent voluntative clauses with the accusative and infinitive (indirect petition), see 1991 ff.

3. Dependent Questions: subordinate clauses asking a question; both p_arts of the sentence together forming a sta.ternent; as -YJpwTwv oTt (<rTt T 1rp:yp.a I aslced what the rnatte1 was X. A. 5. 7. 23. 4. Dependent Exclamations: subordinate clauses setting forth an exclamation; both parts of the sentence together fmming a staternent; as Stafhwp.Evo<> a&wv o<T"f)V p.v X.'l,piiv Ko.t oiiiv i!xotev observing how great the extent of their territory was and how excellent its quality X. A. 3.1. 19.
DEPENDENT STATEMENTS
25'76. Dependent statements, or subordinate clauses stating that something is, are expressed in various ways:

1. By an infinitive, with or without an accusative (explah1ed in 1972 ff., 2016 ff. ). Th us, vap.i)w "(p p..s p.ol <ivat Kal 7raTploa K< <f>lavs for I think thut y ou are both .(athe1land and f1'iends to 1ne X. C. 1. 3. 6, alp,at el ii hat I think that I know P. Pr. 312 c. 2. By a participle, with or without an accusative ( explained in 2106 ff.). Thus, o "(p fioecra.v a.Tov n(hrqKoTa for they did not know tlwt he was dead X. A.l. 10.16, p.<p.v-qp.at Kavcrs I remember that I heard X. C. 1. 6. 6. 3. By lin or ws (and sorne othcr conjunctions) with the indicative or optative. On this form of dependent statement see 2577 ff., and under Indirect Discourse. a. In any form of substantive clause the subject of the subordinate verb may be made the object of the principal verb (2182). b. A clause with Hn (ws) may precede the principal clause. Cp. 2586.
DEPENDENT STATEMENTS INTRODUCED BY ilT~ OR

ws

The conjunctions 1m or w> that introduce dependent statements in the indicative and optative After verbs of saying, lcnowing, perceiving, showing, etc. After verbs of ernotion (rejoicing, grie~.ing, wondering), etc. Or such dependent statements contain an explanation of the main clause or of a word in that clause, no special verb introducing the conjunction.
2577.
70To lf.~wv 7ratvv Twv vopwv Twv TbTE va.vp.ax7Jcr&.vrwv, 70P . <f>bf3av odvcrav Twv 'E>)vwv it is rirJht to pmise this in the men who engaged in the

on

sea-fight of those days, (namely) that they l'. Menex. 241 b.

di.~pelled

the fear felt l!y the Greelcs

582

SYi'ITAX OF TIIB C:Ol\IPLEX SENTERCB

2578. The conjunctions introducing dependent statements are C:r: (Homeric also OTTL, 0 and on), W>, LTL, O?rW> (rarely), oilvEKa aud OfJoVVfKa (both poetic).

a. h meaning that was originally, like Hom. perhaps an accusative of the inner object (cognate): pw 8 voa-s lit. J see what sickness you ct1'e sick (=;)v voa-ov voa-s ). But by the ti me of Homer bath and had become mere forma! conjunctions. Hom. that seems to be a weakened when; but this is disputed. b. Sor originally = i'it roro, on account of this, that = because (as T. 1. 52) ; then that in Hclt. and in Attic after Isocrates, who uses ton for to avoid hiatus. c. ws strictly an old ablative of (2080) meaning how, in what way, as in exclamatory clauses and indirect questions. The meaning how (cp. how that) may be seen in oa -yp lbs p.oL oowova-rat Kvrs lvvotrl-yaws for J know how (that) the famed ea1th-shake1 has been wroth ayainst me 423, and also in At tic (And. 2.14; I. 2. 3, 3. 10, l. 11, 16. 15; Aes. 2. ::;,); D. 24. lBfJ). The development of ws how to ws th at followed from the use of ws after verbs sigllifying to see, pe7ceive, know, and the like. Cp. "he sayed how there was a knight." d. l11rws (2929) that is common in Herodotns (oKws), rare in Attic, most uRed in poetry and Xenophon. From its original use in indirect questions ... ws hmv gradually acquired the meaning that. 'l'hus, .' ii... ws ~'-"" . i-yw d.xOo!J.a< Dp.is rpltpwP, P.'YJD' 7ro>ofT do not even ente1tain the thouyht that I am annoyed at maintaining yott X. C.B. 3. 20. e. ollveKo.: oli I!PfKa, for ro6rov vKa, 5, })ropeTly causal : on account of (as regards) this, that, and then = that, even in Homer ( Oyssey and A 21) and later in poetry. Thus, t!~a'Y'Y. ovK' Oliii1rovs rotar' lfv<Lf.< 7ratcrl ro'is aro -ylpi. announce that Oedipus has dist1ibuted such honours to his sons s. o. c. 1303. f. o9o.JvEKO. lirov fvKa, for TOTOV hKa, lin ; and then = that. Jt is found only in tragedy, as d.-y-yi'A. Oo6vKa rlOv'YJK' 'Opla-r'Y}s repu1t that Orestes is deacl S.EJ.47.

o,

or

on

ou

= on

on

on

os

2579. Some verbs of saying are followed either by lin or ws or by an infinitive (2017). In most cases the choice is optional with the writeT. Affirmative clauses usually take the infinitive or ln ; but ws is apparently preferred to lin when a writer wishes to mark a statement as an opinion, a pretext, as unt.rue, and so when the main clause is negative, or when the subordinate clause is negative (or both are negative). Th us, vo;.Lltova-tv o! eKdP7J d.vOpw1rot ws "Htp<wrros xa.KL the local belif is that I~ephaestus is working at his forye T. B. 88, ota{Ja.wv arovs ws oOiSP .'Y}0s iv v<i' i!xova-tv slanderously attackiny them on the sco1e that thei1 intentions we1e not sinceTe 5. 45, 7ro.aKts lOa.uf.<aa-a rla-t 1I"OT M-yoLS 'A8'Y}valovs g7rL<Ta> o! -ypalf;&.fJ.<voL "Z-wKp&.r'YJv ws li~ws d'Y} 8avdrov I have o.ften wondered with what posgible arguments the accusers of 8ocmtes succeeded in convincing the Athenians tlwt he deservecl death X. lVI. 1. 1. 1, oo roro .-yw ws o o< 1ror Ka.l i;>,.&.rrovL /{n f.<opl'fl UvaL I do not say (this) that it is not ever necessary to attaclc the enemy with a still smalle1 detar.hnwnt X. C. 5. 4. 20. on may be used of an untrue statement designed to create belief (S. m. 43).

zs8s]

DEPEXDENT STATEME;Ts 'VITH

on

(w'>)

583

a. Dependent statemnts in the optative in indirect discourse after verbs of saying are chiefiy post-Homeric. 2580. Verbs of thinking almost always take the infinitive (2018) but ws occurs; as with vop.lk'w T. 3. 88 (259), 0..11'lk'w 5. 9, otop.a.t X. H. 6. 3. 12, U'll'oap.(jd.vw X. C. 8. 3. 40. on is very rare (with otop.at in P. Ph. 87 c). o"flk'op.at (lin) is a verb of saying. a. p.aprvpw with on ( ws) expresses reality ; with the infinitive it denotes uncertainty. 2581. Verbs of intellectual perception usually take on (&s); less often the participle, which is normal after verbs of physical perception. A verb of physical perception, if followed by on (ws), virtually becomes a verb of intellectual perception. 2582. Many verbs take on ( ws) or the participle either in indirect discourse or not in indirect discourse (2100-2115). Here the construction with the finite verb is less dependent t!Jan that with the pa.rticiple ; but the rneaning is essentia.lly the same in Attic. Many verbs take on ( ws), the infinitive, or the participle, often without great difference in meaning in Attic (2123-2145). 2583. on (ws), wlwn separated from its clause by another clause, may be repeated. 'rhus, fE{fv On, el f.l.iJ Karaf3f]t1'ovrat . . . , Ore. KaraKa;UuEL . . Ts Kwpiis he said that, if thty did not descend, he would burn their villages ta the gTound X. A. 7. 4. 5. 2584. The persona! SijMs elfJ-L 111", >..o.v96.vw !ln, etc. are often used instead of the impersoual ofj'Mv JTLV on, av8d.v<t on, etc. Th us, OTt 11'0VrJp6rarol <l<HV OVO u av8d.vovutv not even y ou j'ail ta perceive that they are the ve1y worst X. O. 1. 19. 2585. Sij>..ov on (o7Jov6n) evident/y, ol:S' OTL (ev oLS' oT) su1ely, ev tcr9LOTL e assU?ed are so often used parenthetically and elliptically as to become mere formai expressions requiring no ver b. on here ]oses all conjunctive force. Tb us, ~X ai) orwut ofjXov lin rorwv 1rp, the case then stanrls clewly th us abput these matte1s l'. G.487 d, o~T' v i;fJ.<s oo' on 1ra.6ua.u8e nor asstt1'edly would you have ceased D. G. 29, K< 1rd.vrwv oo' on </>1Jud.vrwv 'Y' /iv (for Kal oo' on 'll'avus rp-f}uatv 'Y' /iv) an all assu1eclly would say O. 1. a. Plata (Sophi~tes and Leges) uses oi)ov (uriv) ws for fj"Xov on. 2586. on (and by analogy ws) are often attached loosely tothe main clause with the meaning as a Jmwf (in suppo1't) of the jact th at. Th us, on o' oln-w Tar' ~XEL, .'Y< p.ot TO ro Koour8vous 'f1}rpt<Jp.oo as a p1'0of of the fact thut this is so, read me the bill of Callisthenes D.18. 37. 2587. Verbs of emotion (to Te,ioice, g1'ieve, be angry, wonder, etc.) take lin (ws) with a finite verb (negative o), but more commonly the pa,rticiple (2100) when the subject is not changed. a. Hom. prefers on, ws to the participle or infinitive. b. The accusative and infinitive with verbs of emotion are rare; as with 8avp.d.jw E. Ale. 1130. (8avp.d.1"w may be followed by a dependent question: D. 37.44). c. On verbs of emotion with El instead of on, ws (negative, generally p.-1}), see 224. On the use in ependent exclamations, see 2087. 2588. fl-fJ-V"ll'-""' oH)o., .Kovw and like verbs, may take lin instead of on (2395A.N.). Cp., in Homer, <I> 300, 1r 4:24.

584

SY.NTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2589. The words or thoughts of a person may be quoted in direct or indirect form after verbs, or other expressions, of saying or thinking.

a. In reporting a speech, in making a quotation, or in dialogue, a verb of saying is often repeated (P.Pr.310b,345c, X.A.7.6.5-6). So also in such cases as IlavOeL<t e1rev, a71.M Oappet, ~</>1), c1J Kpe X. C. 7. 3. 13.
2590. (I) Direct Discourse (Oratio Recta).- In a direct quotation the words or thoughts quoted are giyen at first hand in the exact form used by the original speaker or thinker.
Me-ya.pes ~1rE}J.1rOV l7rl TOVS O'Tpa.T1J"'fOVS TWV 'E71.71.?jvwv K?)pKa., a1rLK6p.evos o 0 Kijpv~ 7rps a.roils ~e-ye Tcte " ME-ya.ps "'fOVO'L. 'i)p.s, li vapES O'Vp.p.a.xoL, o ovva.ro[ eip.ev rT]v Ilepu<!wv Z1r1rOV oKEu0a.L p.ovo'' " the Megarians sent a hetald to the generals

of the Greeks, and on his arrival the herald spoke as follows: " The Mega1ians say: 'we, oh allies, are not able to sustain the attack of the Persian cavalry by ou1selves'" Hdt. 9. 21 ; and often in Hdt. (cp. 3. 40, 3. 122, 5. 24, 7. 150, 8. 140). a. Direct quotation may, in prose, be introduced by liT., which has the value of quotation marks. Thus, o! 1rov on !Ka.vollup.<v but they said (that) "we cwe ready" X. A. 5. 4. 10. So usually wh en the fini te veTb is omitted ; as .?r<Kpiva.ro Bn ol5 he answe1ed (that) "no" 1. 6. 7. The use of direct speech introduced by on is, in general, that of familiar style. The first example is Hdt. 2. 115. ws for /ln is very rare (Dinarchus 1.12, 1.102). Cp. "the emperor sends thee this word that, if thou love thy sons, let Marcus . . . , or any one of yon, chop off your hand" Shakesp. Tit .Andr. 3. 1. 151.
2591. (II) Indirect Discourse (Oratio Obliqua) .. In an indirect quotation the words or thoughts ate given at second hand with certain modifications to indicate that the words or thoughts are reported.

a. The original form may be preserved except that there is a change from the first or second persan to the third person : so 1rctn' iOH o6p.eva.L H 391 reporting 1rctvr' l071.w o6p.Eva.L H 3G4. In such cases there is no grammatical dependence. b. The narrator may report in dependent form the words or thoughts of a person from the point of view of that person. This is the common form of indirect discourse. c. The nanator may report in dependent form the words or thoughts of a person from his own point of view. See 2624.
2592. The constructions of indirect di scourse are regulated by the character of the leading verb or expression.

a. Verbs of saying take either on or ws and a finite verb or the infinitive (2017, 2579). b. Most verbs of thinking and believing take the infinitive (2018, cp. 2580). c. Most verbs of knowinrJ, perceiving, hearin(J, showing take the participle (2106, 2110), but admit the construction with on or ws. Some are followed by the infinitive (2123 ff.).

INDIRECT DJSCOURSE

585

d. On the construction of verbs of hoping, p1omising, and swea1ing, see 1868, 1999, 2024.
2593. Indirect discourse is said to be i?nplied in subordinate clauses dependent on verbs which involve an idea of saying or thinking (2622). 2594. A speaker may state his own wor<ls or thoughts in the form of indirect discourse. Cp. 2614, 2615, etc. 2595. Clauses standing in indirect discourse are substantive clauses, and usually o~ject of the leading verb; its su~ject, when that verb is passive or intransitive. The infinitive in substantive clauses after verbs of saying and thinlcing retains the tirne of the corresponding :finite verb of direct discourse. 2596. Indirect questions (2677) have the constructions of indirect discourse.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2597. Simple and compound sentences, and principal clauses of complex sentences, introduced by on or w> are treated as follows: 2598. (I) After prirnary tenses, the original mood and tense are retained, except that the person of the verb may be changed. 2599. (II) After secondary tenses, primary tenses of the indicative and all subjunctives rnay be changed to tl1e same tense of the optative; but an indicative denoting umeality (with or without d.v) is retained. Imperfects and pluperfectsare generally retained (2623 b). 2600. The verb of simple and compound sentences, a11d of principal clauses of complex sentences, when introduced by a verb taking the infinitive or participle, passes into the infinitive or participle in the corresponding tense. av is kept, if it was used in the direct form.

on or w<; are treated as follows:

2601.

Subordinate clauses of complex sentences introduced by

2602. (I) Subordinate clauses of a sentence introduced by a leading verb in a p1irnary tense, must remain unchanged in mood and tense. 2603. (II) If subordi11ate elauses are introduced by a leading verb in a secondary tense, all primary tenses of the indicatiYe and all subjunctives (with or withont d.v) may be changed to the corresponding tenses of the optative witlwllt av. All secondary tenses of the indicative (with or without av) remain unchanged. 2604. Verbs standing in su bordinate clauses of sentences introduced by a leading vel'lJ requiring the participle or the infinitive, follow the rules o{2602, 2603.

58()

SYNTAX OF TIIE C.JIPLJ<:X SE:\TENCE

2605. The principal and subordinate clauses of the direct form retain the uames principal and subordinate in indirect discomse though the whole clause iu which they stand itself depends on the verb introduciug the indirect discourse (the leading verb). 2606. The change from direct to indirect discourse is almost always a change of rnoocl, not of tense. The time of a participle introducing indirect discourse is determined by that of the leading ver b. The penon of the verb is often changed. 2607. av of the direct form is retained in indirect discourse except when a dependent subjunctive with av beeomes optative after a secondary tense. Here Mv, orav, 1l'EL0av, E'ws av, ete., become El, OT, 1l'ELO~, ifws, ete. 2608. The same negative (o or p,~) used in the direct discourse is commonly kept in the indirect fonn. But in some cases with the infinitive and participle p,~ takes the place of o (2723 ff., 2730, 2737). 2609. No verb ever becomes subjnnctive by reason of indirect diseomse. The subjnnctive (with or without av) may, after a secondary tense, become optative without av. 2610. No verb ean be ehanged to the optative in indirect discourse exeept after a secon<lary tense, and since, even after a secondary teuse, iudieatives or subjunctives may be retained for vividness, no verb must become optative by reason of indirect discourse. 2611. All optatives with or without av in the direct form are retained (with or without av) in indirect dis course introduced by 07'L o1 ws. After verbs requiring the participle or infinitive, sch optatives in vrincipal clauses beemne participles or infinitives (with or 1rithout av), but re main unchanged in subordinate clauses.

a. The optative in indirect discourse may represent either the indicative or the subjunctive <tfter a secondary tense. b. A present opt<ttive in indirect discourse may represent (1) the prese11t indic<ttive; (2) the im11erfect (2623 b) indicative; (3) the present subjunctive with or without /Lv; (4) the present optative.
2612. The imperative is commonly replaced in indirect discoursw by a periphrasis with xp~vaL. Cp. 2633 b. 2613. The retention of the mood of direct diseourse, where either the Jireet or indirect form is possible, lies solely in the option of the writer or speaker. The vivid form reproduces the tirne and situation in whieh the qnotcd words were 11sea. Tlte vivid form is preferred by somc writers, as Thucydides; the indirect form by others, as the orat.on;, l'l<o, and Xenophon.

JNDECT D!SCOCIB

587

SIMPLE SENTENCES IN IXDIRgCT DISCOURSE

1. Indicative and Optative afer ;n., or

&,s

2614. After primary tenses, the verb of the direct form remains unchanged in mood and tense.
'yEt o' ws f3purrf}s fip. he says that I am an insolent pe1son L. 24. Hi ( = {3purr'l]s d), XX' hvoev XP'IJ roro p.v, ')'vvax.' on ~t/>flkv but we rnust Temembe1' on the one ha nd th at we were I!01'n women &, Ant. (i 1, oO' on oo' av roro p.o JJ.fP-<fJov 1 know that you would not /;lame me e1;en fo1' tls X. O. li. 15, :lr<Kpivaro ln oiJ15 v av rovrwv .r,.o, he 1eplied th at he woulrl say nothing of tlds x. A. 5. 6. 37 ( == av d1rOLjJ.L).

2615. After secondary tenses, an indicative without f.v nsually becomes optative, but may be retained uuchanged. An indicative with av and an optative with av are retained.

a. Optative for Indicative.- f')'vw<Tav iin KEviJs t/>6f3os d'J they recognized that thei1 jea1 was gronnrlless X. A. 2. 2. 21 ( == <Trl), n.d;av on 7rjJ.'fL <T</J.s o 'Ivowv f3a<TtEvs they said tlzat the king of the Indians had sent thern X. C. 2, 4. 7 ( = f1r<p.;f;a i}p..s), -IJ'Y'J'O'f/ lht i}TT'fJ/-'Po< flEv oi AaKcoatjJ.Ol'LOL Ka! IIfi<Tavopos rEIJval'J it was 1epo1ted that the Lacerlaemonicws had been dfjeaterl and thal Peisande1 was dead X. IL 4. 3.10 (== ijTT'J!-'fvO< Ei<Tt and Tl!llv'JK<). N.- The first example of the optative in indirect discourse is later thau Homer (Hymn to Aphrodite 214). Aeschylus has four cases. See 2624 c. b. Direct Form Ret-a.ined.- i'ilfjXII< b')'os /Jn ouhK<L avrovs Kpos a report sprea that Cyrus was pur.suing the1n X. A. 1. 4. 7, 7roKpvajJ.Evot /Jn 7rel-''fov<TL 7rp<T{3!s, lls 1rf}a~av they withdrew imrnediately on answe'ling that they would send envoys T. 1. 90 ( = 7rp.;f;op.<v). See also 2G2!3, 2625.

2. Infinitive and Participle

2616. The infinitive and participle are used in indirect discomse to represent the finite verb of direct discourse.
7rW7rTEvov l1ri (3a<Tt. Uvat they suspected that they we1e togo against the king ~t/>'f] 1) a;Lv AaKeoatp.ovlovs ?) aTOV 1rOKTVV he said thot he would either bring the Lacedaemonians or kill them on the spot 'l'. 4. 28 ( = li.i;w, 'Tl'oKT<vw), oo ')'p ifo<Tav aon\v T<0v'f]K6ra for they did not know tlwt he was dead X. A. 1.10. 16 (==lin rllvrJK \.

x. A. 5. 1. 8 ( = rwv ),

For examples of the infinitive, see 1846, 1848, 1849, 1867, 2022; for examples of the participle, see 1846, 1848, 1874, 2lOG, 2112 b.
COMI'LEX SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2617. When a complex sentence passes into indirect discourse, its principal verb is treated like the verb of a simple sentence and stands either in a finite mood (after 6-n or w>) or in the infinitive or in the participle.

588

SYNTAX OF THE COMl'LEX SENTENCE

2618. After primary tenses, all subordinate verbs retain the original mood and tense.
')'aV(fLV ws, breti)av TLS U')'a0os <JJv TEVT'Ij(f1J, !J.<')'a'f}V IJ.OlpO.V Kat Ttp.'l]v liX<L they say that, when a good man dies, he enjoys great esteem and honour P. Crat. 398 b, rrpoi')'W 6n, orroup' v arraKpiV'f}TaL, ;ee')'xBfwera.L I tell y ou in advance that, whichever answe1 he makes, he will be confuted P. Eu.~~ 5 e, rra.paoet')'!J.a (facps KaTO.(fT'Ij(fa.T, Ils av acpt(fTfjTaL Oavcl.r<tJ S'f/!J.LW(f01J.Vav give plain waTning that whoeveT 1evolts shall be punished with death T. 3. 40 (=on S'fJ!J.LW(J'<T<u).

2619. After secondary tenses, all subordinate verbs in the present, future, or perfect indicative, and all subjunctives, are usually' changed to the corresponding tenses of the optative, or they are retained. Subjunctives with av lose tf.v on passing into the optative.

a. Optative for Indicative and Indicative Retained. - erre . on llvlipa a')'at /lv elp~a.< oat he said that he was bringing a man whom it was necessary to lock up x. H. 5. 4. 8 ( li"'(w, o)' Kpos . . r/> KXeapx<tJ lf3oi U"'(<LV TO (fTpauvp.a Kar p.(J'av r rwv rraep.iwv, on K< f3aqtes d'f/ Cyrus shouted to CleaTchus to

(= tqrl), di IJf elovat l!q,a(J'av on rrapiqatvro foT they sa id that they knew tvell that
they would come X. H. 6. 5. 19 ( = (qwv on rra.pqavrat), i!<')'<v

lead his tToops against the enemy' s centTe becanse the king was theTe X. A. 1. 8. 12

on gratp.os d'Y} i]"'(q()a., atlras els ro ra . , l!vOa rra KJ."'(a.O )..'lj'f;atvra he said that he

was 1eady to be their leader to the Delta, wheTe they would obtain an abundance of good things X. A. 7. 1. 33 ( = gratJJ.6s <i}Jot, )..'lj'f;eq()e), i!e"'(av on 7)Kotev
inep.ova.s lfxavr<s, at a.rous, lv (J'Jrovaa.l ')'vwvraL, l~oV(J'LP l!vOev ll~ou(J'< r. bnriJoEta

they said that they had come with guides who would lead them, should a truce be made, to a place where they would get their supplies 2. 3. 0 ( = fjKap.ev, p.s, g~eu), <i')'rr'ljq<Lv p.< li<{>MKev, el r O'WJJ.a. O'W(J'W he sa id I might think my self well o:ff if 1 saved my life L.12. 11 ( = a"'(arr'lj(J'ets, el (J'W(J'm). N . ..:...Except in the future the change to the optative of the indicative after el is rare: as rrpO(J'fjXOov ).."'(wv on gratp.6s elp.t, d TLva f3avXatro ( = f3avEt), rra.pa.liavat f3Ma.vl5<Lv I went and said that I was ready to give up the slaves to be tortured, if he wisherl any one of the rn L. 7. 34, ef,.ev on Al;trrrrav !J-i: v ooK lrratvol'f}, el rara rrerra<'f/Kws d'f/ he said that he did not commend Dexippus, if he had done this X. A. 6. 6. 25 ( = lrra.tvw, drr<rrol'fJK<). b. Optative for Subjunctive and Subjunctive Retained. - errev 15n al~J-wi;atra, el JJ.'IJ O'Lwrr'lj(J'Et<v he sa id that he tvould srna1t fo1' it unless he kept quiet X. H. 2. 3. 56 ( = olp.W~<L, l v p.'l] (fLW'Tr'lj(J'lJS)' OK ~<Pa(J'a.V Uva.L, ev p.'lj TLS a.oros xp'ljp.ara i5to0 they refusecl togo unless a largess weTe given thern X. A. 1. 4. 12 ( = aK tp.ev), eTrrev on bnrlfJeO'fJat f.Lotev ar/P, 1rbre a7l'a')'o< r O'TparevJJ.a he said that they intended to attack him when he led his fmces away X. C. 7. 5. 2 ( = p.)..)..ovqt, (J'al, rrorav
.Jra')'l)S), ras lrrrrous lKwe <jJvarnw p.vavra.s ros ')'a')'6vras gws /iv TLS (J''f}p.alvn

he ordered that those who brought the horses should gumd thern and wait until orders were given 4. 5. 86, t!Jp.oqev A"'('fJCTLii<tJ, d (J'rrd(J'atro l!ws ifOotev olJs rrp.ljme rrpos {3a.(fLi a')'"'(ovs, OLa.rrpfil;e(J'Oat KT. he SW01'e to Agesilaus tliat, if he WO!tld make a t1uce until the messenge1s whom he wottld send to the king should a1'1'ive, he wonld lwing it a/Jout that, etc. X. Ages.l. 10 ( = lv {fJreL(fTJS gws .v IJMw(fLP ovs
lb rrp.'fw, i5tarrpiil;op.a.t).

INDIRECT DISCOURSE

589

.2620. Subordinate verbs in the imperfect, aorist (but see 2623 c, N. 3), or pluperfect indicative, and all optatives, remain unchanged.
1-rrune")..a.; u<f>lrnv aTos Tos <f>opovs <irrEv ws wv p.v 1rpou8<v rrolovv p.p.<f>otVTo a.ros KT-,.., they reported th at the ephors en}oined them to say th at they blamed them for what they had do ne before X. H. 3. 2. 6 ( = trro<<r<, p.<p.<f>op.<8a Op.v), 1/")..rrlov ros :3tK<")..os TaTy, ots p.<T-rr<fJ.'fav, rravTfJU<u8a they expected that the Sicels whom they had sent for would meet them here T. 7. 80, <rr<vlin gMo< av els Myovs, <l o!J-fJpovs M.f3o he said that he would enter into negotiations if he should receive hostages X. II. 3.1. 20 (fMotfJ.' !iv, el Mf3o<!J-<). See 2623 a, 2625.

2621. The following table shows where, after l1r<v on or ~epY), the optative (and infinitive after ~<PYJ) may be substituted for the indicative or subjunctive in conditional sentences in indirect discourse.
DIRECT
f7rfV

INDIRECT

OTi

f</>TJ

(){8wp.L EL 'TL ElX<V, 8{8ovv EL TL ~axov, f!<lwKa Mv n f!xw, 8w(]"w d n ~~w, 8w(]"w av n i!xw, 8{8wp.L

d 'TL

~xw,

lf.t n lf.t n d n El n Et n d n

xo<, (),()o{'YJ
<lXEV1 8t8ov i!a-x<v, 8o{'YJ * ffxoL, 8wa-o< ~foL, 8w(]"oL i!xo<, &&'YJ

(8t86vat) (8t86va<) (8ovva<)

(8w(]"<Lv)
( 8wa<Lv) (8t86vaL)

* The combination of aorist indicative aud aorist optative is unusual.

In the following sentences there is no change of mood after O'TL: lf.L TL <ixov, 8[8ovv av EL 'Tt <Ix<v, .8ov av (8t86vaL av) lf.L 'Tt l!a-xov, 1!8wKa av EL 'Tt E(]"x<v, 1!8wKV av (8ovvaL av) Et 'TL ffxo<p.L, 8t8o['Y)V av EL 'Tt <xoL, &8o{'Y) av ( 8t86vaL lf.v)
Temporal and relative sentences (cp. 2~Gl) are converted in tl1e same way. For an infinitive representing an imperative in the apodosis, see 2633 c.
F

IMPLIED INDIRECT DISCOUHSE

Indirect discourse is irnpliecl in the case of any subordinate clause, which, though not depending formally on a verb of saying or thinking, contains the past thought of a.nother persan and not a statement of the writer or speaker. Implied indirect discourse appears ouly after secondary tenses, and in varions kinds of dependent clauses.
2622.

a. Conditional clauses, the conclusion being implied in the leading verb.

Th us, after a verb of emotion, ol o' ciJKripov fi wrYotvro others pitied them lf thy should be captu1ed X. A. 1. 4. 7. The original form was 'we pity them thinking

what they will suffer el ")..wuovTa< if they shall be captu1wl.' In other l clauses, as r xpfJfJ.a.Ta TeP fJJL't' ~owK<v, rrws u")..wr*u<v li rra. h c rtave kis property to the people in case he died childless And. 4. 15 (i.e. that the people might have it, in case he should die: direct iv n")..eurf,rYw, and here <&v riXwnfuTJ might have been used).

.590

SYSTAX OF TIIE C01\1PLEX SEXTENCE

b. Temporal clauses implying purpose, expectation, or the like (cp. 2420). Thus, G'1rovoas hrodwavro, i!ws 1T'a"f"fe0el'Y] r <x0vra they made a t1uce (which they agTeed should continue) u.ntil what ha<l been said should have been 1eported X. H. 3. 2. 20 (i!ws av 1T'a"f"f<M9 would be the direct foTJn). Cp. ws o' av ravra ota7rpli~wvrat, qwaK'r}v . Kare<1T'< he left lwhind a gumd (which he intended should re main) until they should settle the se matte1s 5. 3. 25. c. Causal clauses. See 2242. d. Ordinary relative clauses. Thus, pero 1T'aaa, rov Evaovii. rot he aslced foT the child which Evadna had boTJW Pindar, 01. 6. 40. Here relative and interrogative are not shaTply distinguisbed. e. Clauses depending on an infinitive especially when introduced by a verb of will or desire, e.g. command, a.dvise, plan, ask, wish (1991, 1992). Here the infinitive expressing comma.nd, waming, wish, is not itself in indirect discourse. The negative is 1'--fJ- 'l'hus, <jJtKvovra< (historical present) ws :Z:miK'YJV f3ov6JL<vot 1T'EO"a.L aTov, El OVVa<PTO, , , , iiTpaT<rJa< f1f't T-i}v IloT<lOa<aV they Came tO 8italees with the desi1e of peTs?wding him ((f they could) to make an expedition against Poticlaea T. 2. 67 (=la v ouv<hJLe8a), cp. 2633 a. f. Clanses of purpose and object clauses after verbs of ejfo1t admit the alternative constructions of indirect discourse.
REMARKS ON THE CONSTRUCTIONS OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2623. Past Tenses in Indirect Discourse.- The following rules govern past tenses in indirect diseourse.
a. The potential indicative with li.v, the indicative in a condition denoting unreality with li.v or without /J.v (as lxpfiv, l[o, etc.), al ways remain unchanged in order to prevent confusion with the optative of the direct form. d.7r~o"fovTo ws oK li. v 1T'OTE o~n" }LWpot -ljrrav . el ifo<rrav they pleaded that they ne-ve1 would have been so .foolish, .~f they had lcnown X. H. 5. 4. 22 ( =ovK av -ljp.<v, El yrrp.<v), (I[<"f<v) on Kperrov -1jv almp -ron 7ro8avev he said that it would ha-ve been lwtter foT him to die then L. 10. 25 ( = Kp<TTov 'f}v JLO<). b. The impeTfect and pluperfect in simple sentences usually remain unchanged after secondary tenses to prevent ambiguity ; but when there is no doubt that a paf3t tense stood in ihe direct fonn, the imperfect passes into the present optative, the pluperfect into the perfect optative. Il~ subordinate clauses both tenses are retained unaltered. -i!Kov~r<v lin 7roaK<s 7rps rv 'Ivov ol XaXoao< 1rop<vovTo he heanl that the Chaldaeans often went to the lndian king X. C. 8. 2. 27, ex< "f.p e"fetv Kal on
~r-rpanvrra<vTo

p,Ovot TWv EXi\.1}vwv {3ac:ne <Tvvep.r:ixovro v II:X.arcuas, Ka2 Ort. xrrepov oerrdnrore (cp. c) l1T'i fiarrt"/l.t!ii. .fol' he was al!le to say both that alone of the

Clreeks they hrul fouyht on the sle of the !Linr; at Plataea and that lateT they had neveT at any tirne taken the field against the king X. I-I. 7. 1. 34 ( = rrvv<JLax6wea,
1I-rpo.TEVIIa}L<0a), 'T'. 1T'E1T'p<"fJLVa Ol'Y}"fOvro, OTL O.VTOl }LV . . 1T'ov, r'r}v o vaipe11'tv rwv vavii."fwv 7rpMra~atEv they Telate<l what had OCCUJ'l'ed to the effect

that they WPTe them.~elves sailing against the enemy an that they had given orde1s .foJ the 1escue of the men on ti111 wrecks X. H: 1. 7. 5 (:;;: brMop.ev,
1!j>OII<Ta~ap.ev).

INDllCT DISCOCRSE

581

N.- The change to the optative is not made when the time of the action of imperfect (and pluperfect) is earlier than that of a cordinated verb in the same quoted sentence; as /!eyv r' ws </><a81}vaws 1jv KaZ rv "J:.afl-'1' 1rpwros KaTEl7ro< he said that he both had IJeen a lover of .Athens and that (afterwards) he was the first to tell what had happened at Samos Ar. V esp. 282. c. The aorist indicative without /iv in a simple sentence or in a principal clause may be changed to the aorist optative after a secondary tense ; but in subordinate clauses (except those denoting cause, N. 3) it remains unchanged to avoid ambiguity with the aorist optative, which usually represents the aorist subjunctive. -1rEKpvap:qv arl/> Bn . . otl M{Jo<fl-< 1 answe1ed hirn that 1 did not take D. 50.36 ( = oOK ~a{Jov), ros lolo<s x.pf}tmr8a.t ~rp,.,, li 1ra.rr}p a or~ ~owKEP he said that he would use his own mo ney that his father had given hirn X. H.l. 5. 3

( = X.PTJ(J'Op.a<, ~OWKEv).

N. 1.- The retention of the aorist indicative is here the essential point of difference between subordinate clauses and principal clauses or simple sentences. N. 2. -In a subordinate clause the time of the aorist usual!y expresses an action prior to that of the Jeading verb. N. 3. -In causal clauses with lin or ws a dependent aorist indicative may become aorist optative; as x "fp )..f"'Hv . ws Aa<Eoo.tp.bwt tt roilro 7ro)..!l-1J(J'E<av aros, iu oK 8f}rra.<v p.a' 'A-yrw<dou lM:v 1r' arov for he was able to say that the Laceclaernonians hacl gone to war with thern (the Thebans) for the reason that they (the Tlwbans) had not been willing to attaclc hirn (the Persian king) in company with Agesilaus X. H. 7. 1. 34 (direct 1roMwrwa.v 7JfJ-'iv, on oK fJ8fJ(J'o.p.ev). Rarely in temporal clauses with e1rd (X. C. 5. 3. 26).
2624. lnserted Statement of Fact.- When the present or perfect indicative would have stood in the direct discourse, a past tense of historical narration is often used as a statement of jact by the writer from his own point of view, though the rest of the sentence may be given in indirect discourse after a secouda1'Y teuse from the point of view of the subject of the leading verb.

yile< liu ox olov r' 1j v t1ri7 (J'WIJfjva< she le new that it was not possible for her to be saved A nt. 1. 8 ( = ox. oi6v r' f(J'Ti fl-ol (J'wOfjva<. With ijv the sentence virtually has the force of ovx. o[bv T' ?)v rrwOfjvt1t Kat 'iioEL she could not be saved and she knew it). Ro ~<'Yo o Ka.)..Gis r?]v 'Eaoa levOpov a&r6v, llivopas odtfJOtp<V they said that he 1vas not freeing G1eece in the 1'ight way if he put men to death T. 3. 32 ( = lEUIJEpos, ota.rj>OdpLS), TOS </JU"/aOtlS KffV(J'f rrv aTCp (J'TpaTEV<r8a<,
V7ro(J'x.6p.<vos aro'is, El J<aws KaTa7rpii~Ev tj;' d <rTptlTEU<To, 11-'1/ 1rpbrr8ev 7raV(J'(J'I/at 1rplv aros Ka ro.-ya-yot otKo.O. he u1ged the exiles to make the expedition with hirn,

p1ornising them that, if he should succeed in accomr,lishing the pu1'Poses of his campaign, he would not cease until he had brought them back to theil' homes x. A. 1. 2. 2 ( = 1)v Kara.7rpfi~w <rp' a (J'TpardJOfJ-aL, o 1rO.VIIOfl-LlL 7rp1v v KaTa"/&. "'w), &1ro1Ja.vwv lof}w(J'<V liTL oK ,)..,.,IJfj ra.ra. 1)v he showed by his death that this was not t1ue L. Ill. 52 ( = E(J'rl), ~<P'1 Eva< 1ro.p' avTc;J 8<rov 11-'l 1jv &v?JWfJ-fvov he said that he had in his possession all that had not been e:r.pended D. 48. 16
(= 1rap' p.ol irruvo(J'ov 11-n ~(J'TLV v?]wp.vov), v
7ro)..y

ii?] &7roplq_'lj(J'a.V o! "E?]VH,

592

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

lvvooup,evo< !il v on br! ra.s f3a.<n'/liws 06pa.<s ~cra.v the G1eelcs v;e1e accordinpllf in gteat perplexity on rej!ecting that they were at the lcing's gates X. A. 3. 1. 2 (i.e. they were there in fact and they knew it). a. The use of past tenses of historicalnarration instead of present tenses of direct discourse occurs, in simple sentences, especially after verbs of ltnowing, pe?ceiving, showing, and verbs of emotion (rarely after verbs of saying w. or<). b. Such inserted staternents of fact are often difficult to distinguish from indicatives in indirect discourse; and the two forms of expression may occnr in the same sentence (X. C. 4. 2. 35-3G). The co mm on explanation of tl1e use of the imperfect and pluperfect for the present and perfect is that Greek had the same assimilation of tense as English. c. Except in indirect questions, the optative of indirect discourse is unknown to Homer. (el1rv ws fMo< w 237 may be considered as interrogative.) After primary or secondary tenses Homer employs, in the dependent clause, the same past tense that would have been used in an independent clause, from the point of view of the speaker, and not the tense which would have been used in direct discourse from the point of view of the subject of the main clause. Th us, 'Yhvw<TKov 8 (=on) 01} Ka.K p.f)OETO 1 JcneW that he VJaS planning evil 'Y 166 (i.e KQ.KCL p,-f}oEro Ka.l l'YiTvwcrKov he was planning evil and 1 knew it). In Attic we should commonly have p,f)ora< or p.f;ootro. After secondary tenses the future is usually expressed in Homer by gp.ov and the infinitive, as ooo ro i}o?), 8 o 1rlcrecr8a.< ~p.eev nor did he lcnow this, that she had no thought to comply 'Y 146. d. That this use of statements of fact standing outside indirect discourse is optional only, is seen from a comparison of the first example in 2624 with Kaws "t.p iioe<v ws lyw ra.urv KpriTLcrr6s lp.< jo?' he knew full well that 1 am first-mte in this line Ar. Vesp. 635 and with fiiie< a.orv on i-<crov lfxo< ro IIepcr<Ko <rrpa.Teup,a.ros he knew that he held the centre of the Persian arrny X. A. 1. 8. 21.

on (~.).

262~.

An optative with or without i.v is regularly retained after

ioioa.crKov ws . . cruvcrrpa.re6ovro o1ro< ino'ivro they showed that they always jollowed thern in their campaipns whereve1 they led X. H. 5. 2. 8 ( = cruvecrrpa.nu6p.e0a., o1ro< i}yo<crO, cp. 2568), .7rKptva.ro 5n 1rp6cr8ev lv chroOrivo<ev 7) r 81ra 1ra.pa.ooi?)cra.v he replied that they would soonm die than su1render thei1 arms X. A. 2. 1. 10 ( = lv cirroOvo<Ji.fv, 1ra.paoop.ev).

2626. In sorne cases the optative with !lv in temporal and relative sentences is used to represent the subjunctive with !lv; but many scholars expel !lv.
7ra.p-f}yyaV a.TOS p.1) 1rp6repov 1r<Tieecr0a.< 1rplv av TWV <T<f>Erpwv 7) 7rCTO< TLS 7) TpwOd?) they gave o1dms to them th~t they should not attack before some one of

their number had either fallen

OT

been wounded X. H. 2. 4. 18.

Cp. 2421.

2627. An optative occasioned by indirect discourse may stand after a primary tense wh en it is implied that the thought quoted l1as been expressed in the past.
"f< M-yos lin N07rTOE/-'OS Nlcrropa. fpo<ro the story goes that Neoptolemus asked Nesta?' P. Hi pp. M. 28() b. This may be expressed by "yera< el.,.ev on Cp. '1\l-yera< el1rev on f3ovo<ro it is repo1ted that he said that he wished X. C. 1. 4. 25.

INDIRECT DISCOCRSE

593

a. The historica.l present i~ a secondary tense: ol o -rrp.if>O!vrs '}'ovcrt K6pep /Jn J.cro.v ros 'Acrcruplous and those who had been sent tolrl Cyrus ihat they hatNl the Assy1ians X. C. 4. 2. 4.
2628. Indirect discourse may be introduced by ln (w>) and then pass into the infinitive as if th-e introductory verb had required the infinitive.
7} O a-rr<Kpivaro /Jn f3ovotro p.v i-rravra r'i> -rrarp! xapll<cr8at, rKovra p.lvro< rv 1rata xa\errov va1 vop.l!Hv ( = vop.llo) Kara"kt7r<v she answe7ed that she wished

to do eve7"!Jthing to oblige her father, but th at she considered it 7tnkind to leave the child behind against his inclination X. C. 1. 3. 13. a. It is unusual to have the infinitive first, and then lin (T. 5. 65). b. One and the same clause may even begin with on (ws) and then (sometimes after a parenthesis) be continued by an infinitive, Jess often by a participle. Th us, UKovw on ( omitted in one Ms.) Ka! crvv8fJpwrfis nvas rwv -rralwv crot 'YfVcr8at avroO I hear too that some of his sons became you7' companions in the chase X. C. 2. 4. Hi. Continuation with a participle in T. 4. 37.
2629. An optative dependent on on (w>) may be followed, in a parenthetical or appended clause ( often introduced by yap or oJv), by an independent optative, w hich is used as if it itself directly depended on ln (w)
n.eyov 7TOol iln 1TUVTOS ll.~ta M-yot '1:.<V0TJS . XEI!J.WV -yp dT} Kat ol!r< orKa ?To?T<v r</i rara f3ov\op.v'l' ouvarov dTJ KT. many said that what Seuthes saicl

was of mu.ch value; for it was win ter and neithe7' was it possible faT any one who so desirecl to sail home, etc. X. A. 7. 3. 13 (here we might have had xp.wva -yp Eva1 by 2628). a. Such an independent optative may also follow an infinitive in indirect discourse (L. 13. 78), an indicative after on (Is. 8. 22), or a participle (Is. 9. 5). After an optative in indirect discourse the appended clause may contain an indicative (X. A. 6. 2.10, 1.17. 21).
2630. An infinitive in indirect discourse may follow a sei1tence which merely involves the idea of indirect statement.
0 ii avros els AaKea.lp.ova K{W<V Uva<. ou -yp dval KVpws avr6s he recominended thern to go to Laceaemon; for (he said tlmt) he was not himself empowe1ed to act X. H. 2. 2. 12.

2631. In subordinate temporal and relative clauses the infinitive is often used for the indicative or optative by attraction to an infinitive standing in the principal clause after a verb of saying. In some cases e<f>'YJ may be mentally inserted.
g1>'1J 1THo-iJ -y<vcr8a< l1rt rii olKiq. TV 'A-ya8wvos, vE<tJ'Y!J.VTJV Karaap.f3vHv r7]v 8upav he said that, when he a1rived at the house of Agathon, he found the d007' open P. S. 174 d ( = bmli1) -y<v6p.'1)v, Kara\ap.f3d.vw ). See also the sentence quoted in 1228 b, end. So oiro< ~<-yov lin 7TOos <{>aiT} 'Aptaos Evat lUpcriis avro0 f3<riovs, os OOK av &.vaiJ'xcr8at avro f3arnVOVTOS anil they said that A7iaeus

said that tltel'e tvoe many Pmsians bette? than himself, who tvod not endme GI:EE!( GHAl\1. -38

594
his being king
lJLo {3. ).

SYNTAX OF TUE C\1PLEX SEXTEXCE

x.

A. 2. 2. 1 ( = 7rol\oi elut EJLO.UTO fl<Ttous, ot OK av <ivao-xo<VTO

Here the relative is equivalent, in sense, to K< TouTou~. The infinitive occurs even in clauses with el (T. 4. 98, and often in Ht. ), and with t6n (Hdt. 3. [Jf>). a. The infinitive is rare in snch relative clauses as wpijovut o-a.rpws lv ors
l~vat

<i1roKnvvvva.t they make a clear distinction in cases whe1e it is perrnitted

to kil! D. 23. 74.

2632. For the sake of variation, a mood of the direct form may be nserl in the same sentence with a mood of the indirect. The main verb may be kept in the direct form, while the subordinate verb becomes optative, or, less ofteu, the su bord in a te verb may be retained in the direct form though the main verb becomes optative.
OVTOt neyov lin Kpos !1-V T0P1/KEV, 'Apta.Zos o 7r</JV"(WS d1! these said that Cy1us was de ad but that Ariaeus had jled X. A. 2. 1. 3 (he re we might have had TEOVrJKO( or 1r</><V"f<), ai o <i'Tr<Kpivavro lin OVK vraOa. d"!, <i' <i7rfXH liuov 7ra.pa.ua"(')'1/V and they replied that he was not the1e but was a parasang distant 4. 5. 10 (here we might have lo-rl or d.,..<xo<), MKet oi)ov fva.< lin aip'>)o-ovrat arov et n~ 1r<'/11!<Pl!:o< it seerned to be clear that they would elect hirn if any one shouldput it to vote X. A. . 1. 25 (here we might hav0 a.lpiJUotvro or iv 1r<'/1"1Jf/J(STI ), i!e~as on p.')'LO"TOV et"l ~LG.Oev 01rWS oe ~ep-yd.fe~Oa.t i!Ka~ra. you said that it was essent'ial to learn how it 1:s neces~my to coni.l11ct each pro cess X. O. 15. 2

(here l~rl or Clot might have been used), 7ra.pf}-y-yeta.v, 7rHiYij H7rv'>)uatev, .va.1ra.6e<T8a.t Kat g.,..e~Oat, i)viK' /i,v rt~ 1rapa-y-yl"/\'Av they gave orde1s that, when they

hail supped, they should 1est and follow when any one gave the command X. A. 3. 5. 18 (here we might have had 1re<ov omrviwwu< or i)viKa Tra.pa-y-yo<). Other examples 2619. Subjunctive (in sorne Mss.), then optative: X. A. 7. 7. 57.
2633. The idea conveyed by an imperative or a hortatory (or even deliberative) subjunctive of d.irect iscourse may be set forth in the infinitive by a staternent asto what ought to be.

a. In an infinitive dependent on a verb of will or dese (such as ask, command, advise, forbid, etc. 1992) which does not pro:perly take the construction of
indirect discourse. er~ o il-1) el1re (1997) . . urp(f.T"f}')'os /1-v <>8at li'Aous and some one u1ge that they choose other generals X. A. 1. 3. 14 (cp. i!eo-Oe or i!'Aw11-ev), <i1r11"/6peve 11-"!Mva. {3anv he jo1bade any one to shoot X. C. 1. 4. 14 (cp. JL"lds {3a'A'Ahw ). N. - Here may be :placed the infinitive after -i)"(o/1-a<, vofJ.i!:w, oto11-a.' in the sense of ooKw 1 think it p1oper (or necessary) ; as ri)ovro Trtt!va.t they thOU(Jht that they should 1'etiTe X. H. 4. 7. 4 (cp. <iTriw!Lev). b. ln an infinitive dependent on ~</>"! xp7jvat (iiev), as if1>11 . xpi)va.t Tr<v i1rl "2vpiKoV<Ti he said that they ought to sail to Sy1acuse 'l'. 4. 9. c. In the simple infinitive, as r~ fJ.i!V Trturois . <iv"(vwua.v, lv afs 7rowv
IJ."/\wv -ye-ypa/1-Mvwv Ke<j>d.'Aa.tov 1jv
1rp~

AaKia.t/1-ovlovs o -yt-yvwuELv iJ TL f3ouovra.t

thPy read the dispatches, in which of much besicles thmein written to the Lacedaemonians the substance was that the king did not unde1stand what they wanted; if therefme
el ovv TL {3ouovTa.L uarpi!~ "(ELv, 7rfM1f;ru WT ro IIpuov /i,vilpa.~ ws a.r6v

INDIRECT DISCOUHSE

5D5

thm; wishNl tn make explicit statements, let thern send rnen to hirn in company with the Pe1'sian T. 4. 50. Cp. T.l. 27.1 pive< v= p,evhw.
2634. Long sentences (and even some short complex sentences), or a series of sentences, in indirect discourse depending on a single verb of saying or thinking, are uncongenial to the animated character of Greek, which resists the formalregularity of Latin. Some long speeches in indirect discourse do, however, appear, e.g. Andoc. 1. 3842, 'fhuc. 6. 49, Xen. C. 8. 1. 10-11, Plato R. 614 b (the en tire Symposium is given in reported form). To effect variety and to ensure clearness by relieving the sbain on the leading verb, Greek has varions deviees.

a. ~ifJ'1 (i!:>..e~e, E'II'Ev, fpero) is repeated, e.g. T. 7.48. b. 'l'Ile indirect form is abandoned for the direct form, e.g. X. A. 1. 3. 14, 1. 9. 25, 4. 8. 10; often with a change, or repetition, of the verb of saying (X. A. 5.6. 37, X.II.2.1.25). c. i!.P11 xpfjva< (oev) or Kw<u is inserted or repeated (T. G. 49. 4). N. 1. -Transition from direct to indirect discourse is rare (X. A. 7. 1. 39, cp. X. C. 3.2. 25). N. 2. -An interrogative clause always depends immediately on the introductory verb, hence such clauses do not occur in the course of a long sentence in indirect discourse. 2635.
EXAMPLES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE

i!cp'f'J -yp iiva< ph vopa7ro06v oi hl Aavpl<p, oev o Kop,l<ra~YOat 7rocpop&.v. va~Yrs O '~~'PeP 'if;EV<riJels TfjS JJpii.s {3ao[tE<v VaL Of 'JI'QPIY'f'JVOV. 'II' O 'll'ap T 7rp07rVaLOV TO fl.wvliiYov nv, pav

dvBprlnrovs

7TOos :1r To

'OLOelov
ffKtv

KaTa-

{3alvovTas Els T'~, v OpXTJIYTpav. oei~Yiis o

aroUs, elcreXOWP Urr ri}v

Kct8Se-

IY0a< f.LETa~ TO K[OVOS Ka! TfjS O'T-f}'f'JS cp' if IYTPaT'fJ"YOS IYTLV xaKOS. opav O vepw7rovs Tov p,v p<Op,v p,a<~Yra rpt..O.Kocrlovs, fcrrUvat Of KKc.p v rrfvre

Kal

Ka

&vpar;, ro> Of &.v

rrETTWV 'YL')'VWO'KEt..V.

efKO<TLV

pwv O aOTWP 7rpos T'l,v IY-f}V1)P T 7rpoCfW1T'a

rWv

Kai

7rpW-

TOV p,lv, (}) 11vi5p.s, ToO' 7riJ<To oE<v6TaTov 7rpa-yp,a, olp,a<, ii'll'ws lv KElvcp Ef'f'J iivnva fJouo<To 'A01)valwv cpriva< -rwv vapwv -roUrwv el vat, Ovrna f..LiJ f3oV"otro, 'YELV

JJrt.. oK 1jv. lWv rar' ~1>'1J bd Aa.Upwv Uvat, KaL rfl i11IrEpalq. <iKoVet..v Ort.. ol 'EpJJ.a ev rreptKEKOf.J..fJ.Ivot y11Wvat ov

Fo1 Dioclides said that he ha a slave at LauJtm, and that he had tu fetch a payrnent due hi rn. Rising earl y he rnistook the tirne and set out, an there was a full rnoon. When he was by the gateway of the sanctua1y 1~[ Diunysus, he saw a body of rnen curn ing dawn from the Odeum into the unhestra, and throuyh fear of them he betook hirnself into the shade ancl sat down between the colmnn and the block on which the B1'onze Geneml stands. Ile saw about tMee lwndrecl rnen, some standing round about in gToups of .fifteen, others in groups of WJenty. On see.ing them in the moonligh t he reCO(fnized the faces of most. In the .tirst place, gentlemen, he has concot:ted this rnn-<t extraonlina?'Y tale, in mdPJ', ns I believe, that it rnight be in his power to include amon(! these men any Athenian he wishPd, o1 to

596

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
exdude any he did not wish. On see![f this he said he went to Lawium, and on the day after lward that the statues of Hermes had been mutilated. 8o he lcnew .(o1thwith that it was the wmlc of these men. On his return to the city he fowid that commissione?s of inquy had al1eady been appointee! and that a hundTed minae had been offered as a 1eward.

EVOs 0TL ToVrwv ('1] rWv vpWv rb p"jov. ijKWV els liiTTU l71T1JTiS TE 1f11 1Jp.VOUS KaTaap.(3cfveLV Ka1 p.-f,v!Tpa. KK1JpV"(!f.va KaTov p.vs. -.Andocides 1. 38.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES (QUEST-IONS)

2636. Questions are either direct (independent) or indirect (dependent). Th us, r; ~E~<: ravra.; who said this? ~pwrw O<TTL> ~E~E rai!ra I

ask who said this. 2637. Questions may have the assertive form with the interrogation expressed sim ply by the tone of the voice, or may be introduced by an interrogative pronoun, adjective, adverb, or particle.
a. A question gains in animation and has its emphatic part clearly marked
if the interrogative word is placed late in the sentence. Thus, i]a Ka.s oo r i]ovijs p.erxona ; you call pleasant, do you not, that which participa tes in pleas~we ? .P.I'r. 351 d, ro 7retvijv i!l\e-yes 1roTpov i] 7) .vipov evat; did you say

that to be hungry was pleasant o1 painful ? P. G. 496 c.

2638. Yes and No Questions (or sentence-questions) are asked by the Verb (w hether a given thing is or is done). Su ch questions are commonly introduced by an interrogative particle. Pronoun-questions (or word-questions) are asked by an interrogative pronoun, adjective, or adverb (who, what, ~ohere, when, how). a. .A sentence-question may follow a ward-question; as Tl ooKoITtv bp.v, c:; ')' op.olws Dp.v 7rpl r'wv .OLKOVVTWV "(L"(VWITKLV KT.; what do you think of your ancestors, gentlemen of the }my ? Do they seem to enteTtain the same sentiments with youTselves abo~tt wTonq-doe1s? Lye. 119. 2639. Deliberative Questions ask what is to e done or what was to be done. Questions asking what is to be do ne in the present or future are expressed by the deliberative subjunctive (negative p.-f,, 1805), by e or xp-1, and the infinitive, by the verbal in -Tov with i~Trl (1808) or by the deliberative future (1916). Questions asking what wns to be done are expressed by xpfiv (lxpfiv) or i!oet with the infinitive, or by tl1e Yerbal in -rov with tjv. In diTect questions the optative is not used to denote what was to e done. 2640. Rhetorical Questions are questions asked for effect and not for information, since the speaker kuows the auswer in advance and either does not wait for, or himself gives, the answer. Th us, .J\1\' oiiK ~"" ra.iira. 7ro0ev; but this is not so. How can it be? n. 18. 47, Tl oi'iv a.tnov ilvat 1roa.p.(3civw; -yw Dp.v pw wlw.t then do I 1egaTd as the explrt nation ? lv;ill tell yon P. A. 40 b. Such questions are often introduced by ;;.1, (2651 b). Other exawples 2635 a, 2641.
/Lvpes; tp&.

r:t\TERHOGATJYE SEXTEXCES

597

a. Hlwtorical questions awaken attention and express varions shades of emotion; an<l are olten usc in passing to a Bew subject. Sueh questions are very rare in Lysias, sornewhat frequellt in l'lato, conm1on in lsaeus, highly developed in Demosthenes. The rhetorical question is much more favoured in Greek thau in English.
DIRECT (INDEPENDENT) QUESTIONS

Any form of statement (2153) may be used as a direct question. The interrogative meaning may be indicated only by the context, or it may be expressed by placing an emphatic word first or by the use of certain particles (2650, 2651). hw oi! <f>TJP.'; I say no? P. G. 446 e, o "f.p .,.eKpivap.TJv on dTJ 'lj Ka.X?..lqrTJ; for
2641.

did I not answer that it was the noblest art? 448 e, "EXXTJves 6vres fJa.pf3apo ilovXevqop.ev; shall we, who are Greeks, be snbject to barbmians? E. fr. 719, 1novp.e0a n rov Oava.rov eva.t; do we reg arel death as anytlng? P. Ph. 64 c. Cp. 1831, 1832. 2642. Questions which cannot be answered by yes or no are introduced by interrogative pronouns, adjectives or adverbs (:340, 34G), usually without any interrogative particle, and may have any fonn of the simple sentence. ri av v K<evw 7ro<ijqa.,; what then do I u1ge y ou to do? X. A. 1. 4. 14, 1r6qov li1l"<(jnv hOt! vil< ril qrparevp.a; how jar distant ;imn here is the mmy? X. C. 6. 3. 10, 1rws 1ras; what (lit. how) did you say? P. G. 447 d, rl v aorcj) E"Tr; wh at would y ou have said to him ? P. R. 337 c. 2643. An interrogative pronoun or adverb often depends on a participle and not on the main verb of the sentence. Thus, ri oi'!v 1rotf}O"avros Kanx<tporovf}qar< ro Eavopov; for what act then did yo~t condemn Evander? D. 21.176, ('OXVvOw<) ot rl 1l"E1l"DLTJK6ros auros .Pti1l"11"0V 11"WS a.rcji xpwvraL; for whom what has Philip done and how do they t1eat him? 23. 107. Cp. 2147 d. Onri1ra.Owv see 2064 a. 2644. A subordiuate clause introduced by a conjunction or a relative pronoun may suddenly change into a direct pronoun-question, thongh the construction of the clause remains unaltered. Th us, 11"<tii1) 1rep! ri vos 'AO"I)va.n ilwvoovra.< f3ov<eq8at, viqra.O"a< qvp.f3ov<wv; when the Athenians are intending to deliberate (lit. abmtt wh at?) do y ou get up to give them advice? P. Ale. I. 10() c, .,.bo' a xp-1) 11"p<i~ere; 1retilv rl "fV"I)ra<; when will yon do what you ought to do? in what event? (lit. when what shall have happened?) D. 4. 10. _ a. Here belong the elliptical phrases O:va. T, ws r( (scil. 'YvTJra.<, 946), 11TL r( ( scil. 'Yhvera.t). 'l'hus, tva ri ra.ra -ym ; wh y (lit. that what shall h.appen ?) do you say this? P. A. 26 d, gr, Ka! ror' ar(/; 7rpM01}q<re; on rl; will you give him this di'stiuction too in addition? for what reason? D. 2:3. 214. 2645. Two questions may be condensed into one in an interrogative sentence by placing an interrogative between the article and its noun. Thils, "fw oilv rv K 1roliis 1r6Xews O"rpa.rTJ"fOv 1rpoqoKw ra.ra. 1rpl~<tv; am I waiting jo1 a general to do this? From what city? X. A. 3. 1. 14. 2646. Two or more interrogative pronouns, without a connective, may occur in the same sentence (question within a question). 'l'hus, d1r 1ovrwv ris rivas atrt6s lqn "fevf}qerat <f>av<p6v from this it will become clem who is clwTgeable with

598

INTERROGATIVE SEKTENCES

what D. 18. 73, bmoav ri< nva. cfnXfi, 7rOTEpo< 11"ort!pou q,lXo< -yl"fvera.<; whenever one persan loves another, which one is the lor;er of which'? P. Lys. 212 a.
2647. With a substantive and the article or with a demonstrative pronoun an interrogative pronoun may be used as a predicate adjective. Here the interrogative sentence is equivalent to an interrogative clause with a dependent (relative) clause (cp. 116tJ). 11"oov rv ~J-IJov ~71"es; what is the word that thou hast uttered? A 552 (lit. the word being what? In fuller form = 11"oo< rr<v o ~J-IJos Bv 71"e< ;), ri< o 11"o8o< a.ro< Kero; what is this longing that has come upon them? S. l'Il. 001, ovro< o rl< Kpa.re; who is this man who holds sway? ti. . C. l:l, rivas ro{l(ro' E<ropw; who are these I see? E. Or. 1:347, o< rroq,lav nv roro r 6vo~J-a. <rX1JKa.. 11"olav o1} rroq,lav ra.ur1Jv; thanks to a lcind of wisdmn I obtained this name. ( Thanks to) this wisdom being what? (that is, what is this wisdom?) l'. A. 20d. 2648. ris, rl, 1roo< referring to something mentioned before may take the article; as A. 11"arrxe< li 8a.vp,a.rrrbv. B. r rl; A. A strange thing is happening to him. B. (The) what? Ar. Pax 690, A. vv /51} OKEva 1fo1J . . ovv6.w1Ja. Kpivetv. B. r 11"oa.; A. Now at last we me able to decide those matters. B. (The) what rnatters? P. Phae. 277 a. 2649. rls, 'II"OO< as adjective pronouns, and 71"W< etc., wh en followed by o, have the force of an affirmative assertion. Thus, 'll"olov< Xb"fov< oK av-qXwrra.~J-ev; what arguments did we not expend '? I. 8. 67 ( = 11"civra<), ri Ka.Kv oxl; 11"v KaK6v in 2147 d.

QUESTIONS INTRODUCED BY INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES

2650. ~ and d.pa introduce questions asking merely for information and imply nothing asto the answer expected (neither yes nor no).
?} r8vTJKev Olol,.ov 11"arf}p; is Oedipus' .father really dea? S. O. T. 943, ?} "fw ( delib.'subj.) ; shall I tell y ou? X. C. 8. 4. 10, 7j Kat oKo< rwv 11"Xovrrlwv ?}rr8a; were y ou really one of the rich men when y ott we1e at home? 8. 3. 30. l.p' elp,1 P-<ivn<; amI a prophet? S.Ant. 1212, l.p' 'Oilvrrrrlw< KMw; can it be that 1 an~ listening to Odysseus? S. Ph. 970, Jpa i8eXf}rrmv v iJ~J-v o<a"Xex8fiva<; will he really lie willing to talk with us'? P. G. 447 b. a. &.pa is from'lj + lipa.. ?} is chiefly poetic. Homer uses 'lj, not &.pa. Both parti cl es denote interest on the part of the question er ( often = really? sur ely?).

2651. ov, J.p' ov, ovKovv expect the answer y es (nonne), fL~, d.pa fL~, fLWV (=IL~ ov) expect the answer no (num). a. ox ovrw< tXE'fES; di you not say so ? P. R. 334 b (i.e. 'I think yon did, did yon not?'), l.p' ox vf3pt< rdoe; is not this insolence? s. o. C. 883, OKOV Et;""' ooKorr< (3ov"Xeuerr8a<; do they not then seem to you to plan weil? X. C. 7. 1. 8. oKov o expects the answer no. b. P-fJ n vewrEpov a"f"fiXXm; no bad news, I hope? P. Pr. 310 b, &.pa p,1} aluxvv8w~J-ev; su rely we are not ashamed, are we? (or can it be that we should be asharned ?) X. O. 4. 4, P-17 a7roKpivw~J-a<; amI not to answe1? P. R. 337 b, p,wv ri <r< ao<Ke; surely he has not w1onged y ou, has he ? (or can it be that, etc.) P. Pr. 310 d. p.wv ov expects the answer y es.

2657]

INTBlUlOGATIVE SENTENCES

599

c. p.Giv is confined to Attic. Since the fact of its composition was lost, we find p,wv oiiv (A. Ch. 177) and p,wv p.f} (P. Lys. 208 e). d. o after p.f} or ~pa p.f} belongs to a single word, not to the sentence (l' . .Men. 89 c, Lys. 213 d). On p.f} or p.~ ou with the subjunctive in half-questions, see 1801. e. &pa placed before o or p.f} gives greater distinctness to the question. o questions ask concerning facts; p.f} questions imply uncertainty or even apprehension, but sometimes are asked merely for effect. f. ou ,.ou; ou T! ,.ou ; o o'IJ ; o o'IJ ,.ou mean su rely it is not sa ? Here the negative belongs to the sentence. 2652. ao TL ~ ; is it anytlting else than '! and ..o TL; is it not '! are used as direct interrogat.i ves. 'l'hus, li?..?..o n?} olif.v Kwt ,.a.peva.<; there' s nothing ta hinde1 our passing, is there ? (lit. is there anythiny else the mise than this that nothing p1events, etc.) X. A. 4. 7. 5, li?..?..o TL </JteTa.L ;;,.;, IJewv; is it not loved by the gods? IJ. Eu th. 10 d. Cp. Tl '}'p li?..?..o ?} KtvlivevrYets f,.,fie~a.' KT.; for what othe1 risk will y ou r11n than that of showing, etc. ? (=for what el se will you do than that you will very likely show?) X. l\1:. 2. 3. 17. 2653. eha. and ~.,.ec.,.a. (more emphatic K~Ta., KJ.,..,Ta.) introduce questions expressing surprise, indignation, irony, etc. ; and often indicate a contrast between what a person has or has not done and. what is or was to be expected of hi m. Thus, eTa. ,.c;s ovK eu!Js '11"TJ"fetp&.s p.<; then why did you not rou se me at once '! P. Cr. 43 b. 2654. .X.X.O. (.).),.' -1\) introduces a question opposed to an expressed or implied thought of the speaker (especially an objection). Thus, i!Tovv Tl rY< Ka1 l'11"<lp.ot
OVK olliovs (,.a.Wv; .?..J.' a7ryTOVV; a '11"epl '11"G.LOLKWV p.a.x6p.evos; .?..?.. j.tEIJvwv f,.a.p<[)vrwa; did I a8k anythiny of you an st1ilce you whn you would not give it to me ? Or <lirl I demmul anything bacle 'i Or was I quarreling about an abject

of aJfection ? Or was I the worse for liqum and did 1 t1eat you with d1unken violence? X. A. G. 8. 4, .J.J.' 1j, To e'}'6p.evov, Ka.To,.Lv opTfjs ~Kop.ev; but have we m1ived, as the prove1b sa ys, late for a feast ? P. G. 447 a. Cp. 2785. 2655. 8 sometimes introduccs a suppressed thought, as an objection. Thus, <l,.tf p.oc, " li or, Tl Tf, v ,.6J.,. 1uv .'}'a.IJov ,.e1rolTJKa.s; tell me, (but) what yood, pray, have y ou done the State '! D. 8. 70.
DIRECT ALTERNATIVE QUESTIONS

Direct alternative questions are usually introduced by 1ronpov (1rorEpa) .. Tf whether . . . or (Lat. utrurn ... an).
2656.
'11"0Tepov Mlipii.Kev?} ov; has he done it m not? D. 23. 7!l. '11"oTEpov rY ns, AlrYxlvTJ, Tfjs ,.6<ws x!Jpov?} lp.ov el va< <Pli; shall I say, .Aeschines, that you a1e the enemy of the State o1 mine? 18. 124 (ns <Pli= </Jw, 1805c), 1r6upa. li' h-y . .. lip.e<vov P<lL rYv Tep rYcp .'}'a.O(p T!J.s Tip.wpiO.s '11"oLerY0a.L li rYvv Tli "li STJP.lq.; do you think that it is better to inflict the proper punishments in yonr own interest OT to your own

loss? X. C. H. 1. 15. 2657. 1f often stands alone without ,.6Tepov (as an without tttrum). Thus, (?..e T~v eipf}v-IJv f, ou; did he break the peace OT not ? D. 18. 71, ?)v xp'IJp.a.Ta. ,.o?..M

600
~XTh ~s

INTERROGATIVE SEXTENCES

..-ovr<v?) ..-brqra 11"o<s; if he has gTeat wealth, do you let hirn keep on being rich 01' do y ou rnake him poor ? X. C. 3. 1. 12. So when the first question expresses uncertainty on the part of the questioner ; as d.)l.)l. ris rro< oL1J"fTo ; ?) ars "ZwKpar1Js; bttt who told you the stoTy? (was it sorne one else) or was it Socmtes hirnself 'i P. S. 173 a. Cp. 2860.

2658. An alternative question may follow upon a simple direct (or indirect) question. Th us, ..-60o ..-)l.O' iryp K<vOa; 1f n Ka.r ..-pfj~<v ii p,a.'ftolws d.ci1J<r0<; whence do ye sail over the watery ways ? 01' is it peTchance on sorne enteryrise or l!y way of msh adventure that ye rove ? , 252. Cp. E 85 (cited in 2660). 2659 . ..-br<pov (..-bupa.) may stand alone when the second member of the question is implicit in another sentence. Thus, vvofwa.u o KclK<vo, riva. ..-pb</Ja.d.)l.)l.'

rr<v ~XOVTS .v 1rpornolp,<Oa. Ka.Kiov<S J} ..-p6o0V '""fVf<r0aL. 7r6npov Sn flpxop,<V; .. Sn <Ooa.tp,ovnpo< ooKop,<v vv 1} 11"poupov ilva.<; and conside1' this too: what

pTetence should we have forallowing ourselves to become less deseTving than heretofoTe? Is it because we are rulers? Or is it because we seern to be rnore prosperous than before? X. C. 7. 5. 83.
2660. 1roTEpov (1r6upa) was originally the neuter of 1r6T<pos which of the two? placed in front of a double question and later made a part of the first question. 'J'hus, pwrw 1roupov </J<E 1} p,rr o< I ask which of the two (is true) : does he love 01' does he hate you? Cp. Tiiodo11v l' oOK v "fvoi11s 1rorpo<rr< p,<r<l1J, 7] p,<r Tpw<rrrr<v op,o< ii p,r' 'Axaws yott could not tell on which side Tydides was, whether he consor-ted with Tmjans 01" with Achaeans E 85, rives Karfjp~a.v, 1r6upov "E1Jv<s, p,ax1Js, 1} 1ras p.6s ; tv ho beg an the battle- was it the Gr-eeks or rny son? A. Pers. 351, cp. X. C. 1. 3. 2. 2661. ~ (Tt) ... ~ (~e), or ii (ii) alone, occurs in Homer, who does not use 1!"upov. Thua, 1f prl TL tp,<v lvi cpp<rriv, ;je Kal ooKl; do v;e know aught in heaTt, or do we not? l G32, 'f6rrop,a< ii gr v p.o v pw; shall I speak falsehood or the truth? K 534. a. Ali the ancient grammarians attest the accentuation of these particles as given above. Modern editors often adopt other accents. i] and ii are derived from J-f and ii-F (whence 1f and ii) With this enclitic f, cp. Lat. -ve.
MOODS IN DIRECT QUESTIONS

2662. The ruoods used in direct questions are the sarue as those used in stateruents.

a. Inicative ( examples in 2642) : sometimes in a past tense with tl v, as ... w~ o 1ravus li}ovv v ros rvpavvovs; but 1vhy should all rnen envy despotic nder8? X. Hi. 1. 9, d ns g,a v6p,ov .. ~ad'fmv .. , .p' OOK v &.7r<Knlva.r' aor6v; if any
one should cancel a single law ... , wonld yon not have put hirn to death? Lye. G6. On ri o or rl ovv oo with the aorist, see 1()86. b. 8ul~iunctive: in deliberative questions (2639). On the anticipatory subjunctive in ri 1raOw, see 1811. c. Optative (potential), as ris cpprlrreLEv /lv; who can tell? E. I. T. 577. Without /lv this optative is rare, as ris ryo< ; who can tell? A. Ch. 595. Cp. 1821 a.

2668]

INTEUIWGATIVE SENTENCES

601

INDIRECT (DPENDENT) QUESTIONS

2663. Indirect questions are introduced by interrogative pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs, indefinite relative pronouns and adverbs (340, 346), or by certain interrogative particles (2671, 2675). 2664. The interrogatives of the direct question may be retained in an indirect question. But it is more common to use the indefinite relatives which (in interrogative sentences) are employed only in indirect questions.
f}pwrwv avros rlves eev they asked them who they were X. A. 4. 5. 10 ( = rlves itTrf; ), f}pwrwv li n tTrl r 1rp-yp.a I aslced what the matte~ was 5. 7. 23 ( = rl Mn;), f}pclJTa arov ?rOtTo v xptTlov ~xo< he asked him how nwch mo ney he had 7. 8. 1 (=?rotTo v ~xm; ), f}pwrwv avrv r tTrpriTevp.a o?rotTov et1J they asked him how large the army was 4. 4. 17 ( = ?rotTo v t1tTrl; ), a1ropwv 1ro rpa?rotro t11rl Mcpov nv Kararpev-yet being in doubt whither he should turn, he fied to a hill X. C. 3. 1. 4 ( = 1ro rpa1rwp.at ;), ifiiet Iii; ouliels o1rot tTrparevovtT<v but no one lcnew tvhe1e they were going to march T. 5. 54 ( 1ro tTrpareuop.ev ;).

2665. The use of the direct interrogatives is a relie of original juxtaposition, e.g. el1r p.o<, 1roZ6v rt vop.ljns eutTf3emv evat; tell me, what so1t of a thing do you think holiness is? X. M. 4. 6. 2. The interrogative force of the indefinite relatives is derived, not from any interrogative idea in these words, but from the connection in which they stand. 2666. An indirect interrogative is often used in the same sentence after a direct interrogative. Thus, OVK olia ol!r' a1J"O 7rolov v raxovs oi!T' li7rO! /iv T!S
cpefrywv a7rOrpV"(O! OlJT' eis 1r0LOV aV tTKJTos a1r00pal'f/ olJ/i' 07rWS v els EXVPOV xwplov a1r01Tral1J I do not know with what swijtness uf juot nor by jleeing to what quar-

ter a 1nan might escape nor into what da1kness he might 1un away nor how he could withdraw into any stronghold X. A. 2. 5. 7. The direct form precedes less often, as ou -yp altTiiavop.altTOV 07rOOV vop.tp.ov J} 7rOov lilKatov 'A-yets f01' I do not percei'IJe what y ou mean by 'conjormable to law' or what you mean by 'just' X. M. 4. 4.13. 2667. Two interrogatives may occur in the same sentence without a connective ; as 1rws oiJ<V o1ro':a o1rofoLS li v var Ko<vwvev; holV do es he know what Jetters are able to unite with what? 1'. Soph. 253 a. Cp. 2646. 2668. After verbs of saying, lcnowing, seeing, making known, percei'Ving, etc. (but not after verbs of asking) the simple relatives are found where the indefinite relatives (or the interrogatives) might stand in an indirect question. Where os is so nsed, it has the force of ola< (cp. qualis in such questions) ; and rarely follows a negative clause, because verbs denoting Jack of knowledge are allied in meaning to verbs of asking. The usual forms are e.g. olici tTe s el and ouK olici tTe otTns e. But we find oliJci IT OITTLS e1 and oK olicf ue 8s eL Th us, 7rffJ.7r" el1rwv 8s 1jv he sends . .. te/ling who he was X. C. 6.1. 46 (here 'ljv represents the point of view of the writer), ld)'..evtTE lie~at 8s et11 he orclereil him to explain who he was D. 52. 7, p.f]1roTE -yvof11s 8s .el mayest thou never come to know who thou

602

11\TElU:WGATIVE SENTENCES

[z66g

aTt S. O. T. 1068, op$s 7}p.s, iirrot lO'p.~v; do you see how many theTe me of us? P. H. 327 c. Sa with the adverbs lv8a, o, -Y; ws, 8ev; as -r'l]v oov ~<f>pajev if drJ he tuld where the Toad was X. A. 4. 5. 34. In sorne cases these sentences may be exclamatory (:J685). a. That the simple relatives are never thus used after verbs of asking indicates th at su ch clauses are not true indirect questions (as in Latin), and th at the pronouns have their value as 1elatives. But some scholars allow an indirect question after al! these words except os ; and others admit no such limitation. b. Only in late Greek are the pronouns or adverbs of the indirect form used in direct questions. c. ii1rws is used occasionally (often in poetry) in the sense of ws. Thus, p.-1} p.ot </>pri!:' ii1rws oK el KaK6s tell rne not that (lit. how) thou art not vile S. O. T. 548. d. 'l'he context must sometimes determine whether a sentence is an indirect question or a relative clause. Thus, withont the context, oK exov ii1rot 1rorr-rai'ev (X. II. 3. 5.10) might mean they did not lcnow to whom ( = iryv6ouv 1rps -rivas) to revoit or they had no allies to whom ( = 1rps os) to revolt. But the present or aorist optative in relative final clauses is rare ; cp. 2554 c.
2669. An indirect question may depend (especially in poetry) on an idea involved in the principal verb; or may depend on a verb to be snpplied. Thus, fJO're p.' wotvetv ri <Plis so that I am in t1avail to know thy meaning S. Aj. 794, 01rorpws ouv rro< .. p~rrKet in whatever way it pleases you (scil. r,Mws .v Ko6rratp.t) P. H. 348 b. . 2670. The indefinite relative is commonly used when a question is repeated by the respondent before his reply. Here you ask? is supplied in thought. Th us, A. '/..'J\. ris "(p eT; B. oG'ns; 1ro't..irrJs xprJrrr6s A. But who are you, pray? B. Who arn I? an honest bu.1gher Ar. Ach. 594, 1rws o?); cp?)rrw "(w. ii1rws; <f>?)rret how we y ou? I will say; How am I? he will say Hippocrates 1. 292 c. 2671. Simple indirect questions are introduced by El whether, less often by J.pa.

pwrwvres el TJG'ral elrrtv asking whether they are pirates T. 1. 5, -rofi-rov oTrre' is alive? S. Ph. 444, fi pe-ro arov el f3rJ8eirJ he aslced him whether he had veen struck X. C. 8. 3. 30 ( = lf3'/..1)8T}s ;), cp6f3os el 1reirrw Mrr7rotvav lp.?)v I an~ afraid (about the question) whether I can persuade rny mistTess E. Med. 184 (2234), towp.ev 6..p' ourw<7l "(["(verat 'JTavra let us see whether everything is th us produced P. Ph. 70 d. With the deliberative snbjunctive: t1ravepop.vou KrT}rrt<jJwvros fi KaITTJ rJp.orr8vrJv when Gtesiphon was aslcing if he was to call Demosthenes A es. 3. 202 ( =Ka~O'w ;). a. el bas an affirmative force (whether) or a negative force (whether . . not). The latter is seen e.g. aftcr vJrbs expressing uncertainty or doubt, as after oK oOa. Thus, el p.v '!] lilKata 1rot?)rrw, ovK oioa I don't lcnow whether I shall clo what i8 Tight X. A. 1. 3. 5 (i.e. I may possibly not do what is right). The assumption is alfirmativc in r lK1rwp.aTa . . . ovK olO' el Xpvrrvr'!' rovr41l ilw I clon't know v;hfthr-r I must 110t give the ct1ps to Ghrysantas hme X. C. 8. 4. 16 (i.e. I think I shall ~ive them). b. The interrogative use of ei is derive from the conclilioual meaning if, as
el twv 1wp; dost thou lcnow whether he

INTERROGATIVE SEKTENCES

603

in <r /5 q>pa<rat et p,e <raW<Jm but do thou tell me whether thou wilt save me A 83 (i.e. 'if thou wilt save me, tell me so '). 2672. Uv rarely, if ever, means whether, even after verbs of examining, consiclering (<rKo11'w ~<rKe'fap,7Jv, Ka8opw), where its use is best explained by 2854. In form sucl1 conditional sentences often approach closely to indil'ect questions. Th us, cp. <rK.!Y,at . iv lipa Kal <rol <ruvooK'ii a11'p p,ol consider if (in case tl1at, on the chance that) you too agree with me (P. Ph. G4 c) with ad.fa<r8e lipa 'I'O'I'o 11'1I'Od/Kii<nv ol {3ap{3apot considm whrther the barbmians have (not) done this x. A. 3. 2. 22. Cp. &.vap,tp,vi}<rK<J'8at la v a7JOfi -yw to 1'eCi!ll to yom recollection if I speak the truth And. 1. 37. a. Some scholars main tain that, in Greek, if was at an earl y period confused with whethe?' in such sentences as elp,t -yp es l;1rap'1'7JV . vo~Tov 11'u<J6p,evos '/T'a'l'pos tplov, 1jv '/T'ou aKo<rw strictly for I will r;o to Spartr! to inqui1e about the 1eturn of my dear father, in the hope that I 1n!!Y lwar of it {3 3ii9. Wh en the conditional clause was attached to 'IT'W<rjievos, 1jv acquired (it is claimecl) the force of whether. Cp. cf!xe'l'o 11'W<r6p,evos . et ( v.l. 1!) ,..ou 1{'1'' d7Js he had gone to inqui1e whether y ou wme stillliving v415. Cp. Gen;1an ob, once meaning if, now whether.
2673. Homer bas 1fv, et Ke, ar K with the subjunctive after verbs of knowing, seeing, saying (but noL after verbs of asking). Snell cases belong under 2354 b. 2674. p,f} is sometimes translated by whethe1 after verbs of fear and caution; but such dependent clauses with p,f} are not indirect questions (2221 a). After verbs of seeing, conslering and the like ( opw, <vvoop,a<, lv8p,ovp,at, <rKo'll"w) p,f} is properly a conjunction and not the interrogative particle. lll such clauses there is an iclea of purpose or desire to p1event something or a notion of .fear that something is or may be ilone. Th us, tppovTljw p,'T, Kpan<rTov !i p,o< <r-yv I am conside1ing whether it is not best for me to be silent X. l\1. 4. 2. 39, opwp,v p,'T, Ndiis oteTal n "f<Lv let us see whether Nicias is of the opinion that he is saying something impoTtant P. Lach. 196 c. Th at p,f} does not properly mean whether not (indirect question) is clear from the fact that, in these clauses, it is not used of something that is hoped foT. Cp. 2676 b.
INDIRECT ALTERNATIVE QUESTIONS

Indirect alternative questions are introduced by,, the parti,, cles signifying whether . . . or: 7T'onpov (7ronpa) .. 'YJl ELT , , , en, d . . . ~' d . . . Et'I'E. See also under Particles.
2675.

a. 'I!'OTepov ('11'6Tepa.) ... ~: Thus, t7Jpcfnii 'I'Ov Kpov '1l"O'I'pov {3ovo<'I'O p,.!vetv i) a'IT'dvat she asked Cyrus whether he wanted to stay o1 go away X. C. 1. 3. 15, eaup,ajw '1l"0'1'pa ws Kpa'l'wV {3a<rtS al'I' 'l' O'll"a i) WS OL rpt'Aliiv owpa I wondeT

whetheT the king asks for ow arms as a conquero1 01' as gijts on the plea of j1iendship X. A. 2. 1. 10. N. - .,..6Hpov if may denote th at the second alternative is more important than the first. 1I'O'I'pov is omitted when the introductory clause contains the adjective '1l"O'I'pos (X. C. 1. 3. 2). b. etTe . . etTe gives equal value to each alternative. Thus, T'T,v <rK'f<v '1l"otwp,e8a dTe tJJtpeliiv dTe {3'Aaf37Jv 'll"ap!xe let us malte the inqui1y whether it p1'0duces bene,tit o1 inju1y P. Phae. 237 d.

60-!

JXTERROGATIVE SENTEXCES

N. 1. -ln Homer 'u . . . drc (fi' TC . el' u) almost always rctains the meaning either . . . or (A OG ). N. 2. -The fin;t. du is mrely omittecl in proRP, as 1rlilus <tu llhwral rtv<s a State or ce1tain iiulividuals P. L. 864 a; more Pften in poetry, as 6"founv dr' lp"fo<u<v by words O!' deeds S. O. T. G17. c. d . . . 1j indicates that the second alternative is preferable or more probable. Thus, T,pcfJr. <l auros rol's .vlipd.ut U'Tf'vootro ros ioDut Kal d.1rwDutv, 1)
Kal ros d.o i!uotvro U7rovlial he aslced whether he was rnaking a tn.tee mere/y with the inividual men who weTe coming and going or whether the truce woul!l be with the 1est as well X. A. 2. 3. 7. d. Et . et-re is like du . . . <tn. Thus, d li' h' luri v ~1'-tf;xos "fVVfJ etr' o1iv li'/l.w<v, elovat {'Jou/l.ol!J-8' d.v we should lilce to Tcnow whethe!' the lady is still alive O!' dead E. Ale. 140. e. 1\ (T)) fi (-/je) occurs in Homer, as 15</>p' l <lliw 1,1: vov !J-<81f'm 1) Kal 1rarpwtbs i<un ~evos that I rnay know weil whether thou aTt newly a visitor or mt actually an ancestral guest-frien a 175. Cp. 2661. 1\ ... 1j is doubtful in

Attic.
THE NEGATIVES IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

2676. The nPgative of the direct fonn 1s usually preserved in

indirect questions.
dUO!J-U.L .. 7r0r<pov 0 ifx<ov rdrr oVK evoal/)-WV lurlv 1) evoal!J-WV I shall know whethe1 its possesso!' is happy Ol' not P. H. 304 c, ovK oli' ii1rws <j>w roro Kai!J-iJ q,:;; I Tcn_ow not how I am to say this and not to say it KI. A. 643 ( = 11'ws 1'-fJ if>w;).

a. Indirect single questions introduced by interrogative pronouns, adjectives, an<). adverbs, usually have ov. b. 1'--IJ appears after verbs of seeing, conside1ing and the like ( uKo11'w, opw, lvvooD!J-a<, lv8!J-O!J-a.<) wh en there is an idea of pnrpose or desire to pre vent something.. Thus, bpre iir(j) Tp07r<p K.LO'Ta d.!J-VVE<T8e avros Kal !J-TJT< Kara.<j>povf}O'U.VT<S d.<j>a.pKro< 7Jif>8f}u<u8e Kr . cdnsicler how you may best defend you1selves and rna y neither lie caught o.tf you1 guanl thnmgh contempt, etc. T. . 33. So also with the potential optative with d.v; as rl o v ou (fK01f'OV!J-V 11'WS il v avrwv 1'-fJ OLU.!J-aprd.vOL!J-V; wh y then do we not consler how we rnay avoid mistaking them? X. M. 3. 1. 10. Indirect questions with w1 th us be long un der 1'-TJ with verbs of fear and apprehension, where 1'-TJ is the negntive of the w'ill. Cp. 2674. c. Indirect questions introcluced by el have ov or p.f}. Thus, 7]p<TO rv /ifj!J-OV el ouK alux6votvro he aslcecl the people whether they were not ashamed A es. 1. 84, 7jper6 !'-< ... ei!'-'IJ !J-!J-V7J!J-a< he aslced me whetheT 1 did not mmembm 2. 30. d. In relative clauses joinecl by Ka.l and standing in an imlirect question (wh at . and what not), p.-fJ must be used when the verb is to be supplied with the second clause; but when the verb is repeated, either 1'-T,,or ou if the antecedent is defini te, may be used. Th us, OLa."fL"fVWO'KOU(fLV 7' liuva.vra< Kal il!'-fJ they distinguish between what they can do and what they cannat X. M. 4. 2. 2G, oTuea. ... o1rbuot n <j>poupollKa.vol elut Kal o1r6uo< 1'--IJ ei<T<v you know how many gct~'Tisons me advantageously situated and how many a1e not 3. 6. 10. The antecedent is definite in .11'O~<v os XPfJ O'YJ!J-7J'Yop.Zv Kal o1s o oel' "fv iv rcp OTJ!J-'l' he showed who must spealc in the assembly and who must not spealc bejoTe the people A es. 1. 27.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES

605

e. As the second member of an altemative question introduced by <i, or not is either ?) o or 1) p.f]. Thus, (]'K07rWP.EV El f]p.v 1rp1reL ?) off let us consider whether it is proper for us or not P. R. 451 d, vv l!p.aOov 8 M-ym el M 1)0s ?) p.f], 1feLpd(]'op.aL p.aOev now I have made out what you mean; and I will t1-y to make out whether it is true or not 339 a. f. A shift from p.f] to o in sequent alternative indirect questions appearS to be due to the desire to attain variety. Thus, o e p.s iK r wv ro KaT1)')'6pou
.6')'wv ros v6p.ous Karap.avOveLv, el Kaws Dp.v KEvraL ?) p.f], ' iK rwv v6p.wv rovs ro KO.T1)')'6pou 6')'ous, el pOws Kat vop.lp.ws Dp.s LilCTKOU(]'L ril 1rp')'p.rt. ?) oi! you must

not start f1om the pleas of the accusa to lea1n whether your laws have been established well or not, but you must stmt from the laws to learn ~vhetlr his pleas set forth the case failly and legally 01 not Ant. 5. 14. Cp. Ant. 6. 2, Is. 8. 9, D. 20. 83. Sorne scholars hold that o here lays stress on a negative fact or on something conceived as a negative fact, and that p.f] puts the question abstractly as a mere conception.
MOODS IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

2677. The moods and tenses of indirect questions follow the same

rules as govern clauses in indirect discourse. The person may be changed. After primary tenses, the mood and tense of the direct question are retained (indicative, past indicative with av, deliberative subjunctive, potential optative with av). After secondary tenses, the mood and tense of the direct form may be retained or the optative may be used instead. The latter is more common. But a past indicative with av always remains unchanged.
a. Direct Form Retained. -1rociKLS t(]'K61fet ri i'harppeL p.avias p.aelii he often considered in what respect ignorance dijfered from mad ness X. M. 1. 2. 50, 7J1ropero rL 1foL1](]'eL he was uncertain what to do X. A. 7. 3. 29 (=ri 1foL-i}rrw, deliberative future, 1916), ~f3oueOVTO e(re KO.TO.KO.V(]'W{]'LV dre TL liO xp-f}ITWPTO.L they deliberated whether they should burn them or dispose of them in some other rnanner T. 2. 4 ( = KaTO.KO.UITWjl.P, XP1JCTLhp.eOa ; ) , 7,pt!Jrrwe 7fO av tiioL IIp6~evov he asked where he could see Proxenus x. A. 2. 4.15 ( = 7fO av toLp.L ;). b. Optative: 1jpero et TLS lp.o et1J (]'orpwrepos he aslced whether any one was wiser than I P. A. 21 a ( = f(]'Tl; ), 1) TL i! 1fot-f}(]'oL o te(]'f]p.1Jve he did not announce public/y what he was going to do X. A. 2. 1. 23 (=ri 7rOL-f}(]'w ;) , rv Oev 7r1JpLhrwv el 1rapaoev KoptvOioLs ri] v 1r6LP they questioned the god whethm they should surlendm the city to the Corinthians T. 1. 25 ( =1rapaiiwp.ev ;) . Here npaiiolv might represent the aorist indicative, but that tense is usually retained to avoid confusion (exceptionally 7,pt!Jra TL 1raOoLeP X. C. 2. 3. 19; cp. X. A. 6. 3. 25, D. 5(). 55). An imperfect"relatively anterior to the time of the main verb is retained in D. 30.19. c. A dubitative subjunctive in an indirect question, when dependent on an optative, may be attracted into the optative; as lfe-ye< .. !TL oiJK v lfxoLs <~eMwv lin xp(j!o (]'aur(j! ?JOU we1e saying that if you went out you would not know what to do with yo!trself P. Cr. 45 b ( = rl xpwp.a p.aur(j! ;).

606

EXCLAMATOltY

SE~TEXCES

d. Homer has the optative for the indicative due to inrlirect dL~~onrse only in indirect questions ; as dpono ri< d'f/ Kat 1r08ev ~Mo< they aske whu he was and whence he had come p 368. E;ee 2024 c. 2678. After a secondary tense the mood of a direct question may be retained (usually for vividness) in the same sentence with the mood of an indirect question (cp. :zo:~2). Thus, OiJ.oo< ijll'av OaviJ.ate<v 13Jro< 1ror rpt!.fovra< or "E'f/V<< Kat ri <v v</l iixo<ev they seeme to be wondering to what cli1ection the Greeks woul tum and what they had in mind X. A. 3. 5. 13, ijpero il r< OavJ.Lrito< Kat o71'oll'o< aurwv TE8v'ill'<v he askecl what it 10as that he was astonishe at and how many n,fthern we1e ead T.3. ll:'l (=ri8aviJ.ajm, 7rOil'o< TE0v.ll'<v;). a. ln some cases there is no apparent reason (apart from desire for variety) for this use of the indicative and optative in the s<tme sentence. Sometimes the indicative m<ty ask for a statement of fact, the optative request an opinion of the persan questioned. 2679. P<tmllel to 2024 are cases like i}IJn il1rov ~Ke<ro 7] 71'<1J'ro'f} he knew when the letter had been put X. C. 2. 2. 9.
AiWERS TO YES AND NO QUESTIONS

2680. Yes and No questions may be answered in various ways, e.g. ; a. By repeating the verb or another emphatic word with or without one or more confirmative adverbs. Thus, .Prl< (J' <iiJ.<lvw 1roir.,v elva<, av IJ' ha<Vet<, 7)
av oyw ; ifJTJiJ.L oyp oilv ela y ou asse1t .that the citizen whom you app1ove is better than the one I app1ove? I do say so X. M. 4. G. 14, olll'O' ovv .!~a< cro< . O.!w; ouK oiiJa ost thon lcnuw what I fain would tell thee? No. E. Hec. 999. b. By "/w, ii'YW'Ye, ouK hw, ouK l!oywoye, sometimes with v-1) !J.ia or }lo !J.ia. c. Yes m<ty be expressed by val, val J.L rv !J.la, p,a<Il'ra, ifJTJJ.Li, 1rrivv oye, 1ravv J.LV oih,,eil "Ye, i!IJ'TL rara, ifiJ'nv orw<, ci'f/Oii .!'YH<, TJO.!IJ'rara, 6p0w< oye, KOiJ.<ofi, etc. No may be expressed by o6, oI lill'nv, ou oiira., ou iJ. !J.ia, ooaJ.Lw<, oii </>TJiJ.<, J.L1J oyap, of/K<IJ'ra, of/K<IJ'Ta 'Y, etc. d. ln the form of a question: ri J.LfJv; ri oyrip; <i rl; 1rw<; 1roO<v; 1rws oyp oii;

EXCLAMATORY SENTENCES (inependent) exclamatory sentences with a verb expressed (or easily su pplied) are formed 2682. (I) By the relative pronouns o!os, JO"o>, or by the relative adverh ws in exclamations of wonder. The sentences introduced by these words are commonly associated with vocatives or interjections. Cp. 340.
2681. Direct
ola 7ro<e<, whape wh at aTe you about, ?n!f.f1iencl! P. Euth. 15 c, .plo< , olTJv rep1rw~v Oeot i)oyaoyov < rooe IJwJ.La j1iends, such sport the' gocls have brouyht into this house! Il' 37, lill'., v lfxm r1)v IJvvaJ.L<v how great your power is! Ar. Pl. 748, w ,.a,,.,.., oll'a 1rplioyiJ.ara l!xe oh granc~father, hmiJ 1mwh t1ouble ymt have! X. C. 1. 3. 4, w <j;iraO' AliJ.ov, ih< cr' rtiJ.ai'EL 1rar1}p, oh rleare.,t IIrwrnon, how thy father insults thee ! S. Ant. 572, w< <ill'reo< o ilvOpw1ro< how cha1'1ning the man is !

I>, Ph. 116 d.

2686]

RXCLAl\IATOHY SEXTEXCES

607

a. Exclamatory w~ may be the relative w~; but if it is the demonstrative w, it means properly not how but so. Cp. 2998. b. Double otos (exclamation within an exclamation) marks a strong contrast (cp. 2646) in direct and indirect exclamations. Th us, oia. r.ps otwv vopwv r.<rxw what I su.ffer ancl at the hancls of what men ! S. A nt. 942, r. oti . aiJxf,p.aTQ TO 7rp<iJTOU fS ota v TUTTJ V Kal T<J.7rLVOT'f/T<J. ,PiKaTo f1'01n VJhat bOaSting at ji1st they had come to what a humiliating end T. 7. 75. Triple oio in Gorgias, Helen 10. c. Cp. 2647 for such sentences as otiv ~x<va.v rf,v' ~,P<ra what a viper is this woman whom thou hast begotten ! K Ion 1262. d. otp.' &sis common in expressions of impatience, anger, pity, grief, or fear; as otp.' ws Ka.Ta')'<$s ah me, lww !fOU moclc me! Ar. Nub. 12:{8, o/11-' ws <!o<Kas 6;f; rT]v olK'f/V io<i'v ah me, how thou seemest ail too late to see the right / S. Ant. 1270, otp.' ws ~o<Ka. ah me, how 1 fea?' ! Ar. Pax 173.
2683.

(II) Ry the infinitive (2015, 2036).

2684. Direct exclamations without a verb may be expressed by

the vocative or nominative (1288) or by the genitive of cause (1407). 2685. Indirect (dependent) exclamations form subordinate clauses in sentences which, taken as a wl1ole, are statements (2t575. 4). They are introduced by oio, oo>, olw>, w, oi, Zva. The negative is ov. It is often difficult to distinguish between indirect exclamations and indirect questions introduced by oio-; or oo>. But observe that dependent exclamations are not introduced hy the direct interrogatives 1rooc;, 7TOO'o>, 1rw, etc., nor by the indefinite relatives o1roo>, o7Too>, o1rw<;, etc., both of which classes of words may stand in indirect questions.
a. cmoZos in L. 30. 4 and o1r6<ros in P. G. 522 a are suspected. b. The introductory verb is sometimes omitted ; as wp.<ap<lJra.ros, lv' v7roooiiK<v oh the mscal ! (to think) whe1e he crept in ! Ar. Vesp. 188. 2686. Dependent exclamatory clauses follow, as regards mood

and tense, the same ru1es as goven1 indirect questions (2677). An original indicative remains unchanged after primary tenses of verbs followed by a finite mood, but may become optative after secondary tenses on the principle of indirect discourse.
a. Indicative: olov livopa. ')'HS lv K<vOVv'f' il va< what a noble man yo1t say is in danye1 ! P. Th. 142 b, <TK67rL tv' 1jK ro O<o ~-ta.vT<p.ara. j1tclge to what the omcles of the god have come S. O. T. 953 (cp. w8<wv~-ta.vr<iJ.a.Ta, Zv' terr 946), r ls oK oO<v l~ otwv <TUiJ.,Popwv ds D<T'f/V <aa.<iJ.Ovliv Ka.T<rrncrav ; who do es not Tcnow into what good fO?tune they came and after what .su.tre1ing_. f' I. 6. 42, lv8p.oLt<vo< o<rov 1rovv 1re<rrovro refiecting on hmo long a voyage they we1e on the point of being sent T. 6. 30, lvvon8vT<s oi T< 7rctcrxou<r<v v1r rwv 'A<r<rvplwv Ko.l /Jn vv re8va.ln o lipxwv arwv r~flecting what they we1e su.ffering at the hands of the Assyrians and that their ruler was now dead X. C. 4. 2. 3. b. Optative: OL0.8W,UEVOS aVTWV B<T'f/V 1-'v xwpiiv Kal oZiiv ~XOL<V observing how great the extent of their countl'!f was and how excellent its quality X. A. 3. 1.19,

G08
See also 2687.

NEGATIVE SENTEKCES

brhlKI!vrH oZii. er'l i] 1rop!ii. pointiny out what their diJ]iculty was 1. 3. 13.

2687. Verbs and other words of emotion (J}l'ase, biarne, wonder, etc.) and the expression of its results are often foilowed by a dependent exclamator'y clause with ofos, /Jrros, ws, etc. He re a causal sentence would have iin rowuros, Jn rorroOros, lin orws. English generally introduces such clauses by consi<le1ing, thinking, upon the 1'eflection how, etc. 'fhus, TW rr' au vfiv Olw 1TOTEL(f~P,V, lirrrra p.' l!op"jas the1'ejore I think now thou shalt in tuTn atone jo1 all th(!?! hast <lone 1mto me <P 39\1, 1rKaov rT]v lp,aurofi rx'lv, oZov a,,,(ips ralpou n<p'/p.~vos d71v 1 bewaile<l my fate consideTing what a companion I had lost (direct = oov vopos halpou (5vros) rrT~P'I!J-at) P. Ph.117 c, !J.aKap (Jj :Z:,rpe'flaoes, ar6s r' l!q,s ws rro</Jos xoiov rv vlov rprpe.s oh happy StTepsiades, how wise you me youTself and what a son you haV(', ! Ar. Nub. 120G, TO "ffipas up,vorrtv Q(JWV KaKwv <J<jJlrrtv anov they 1'ehea1'Se how many evils old aue occasion8 them l'. TI. 329 b, eoalp,wv !J-O< cf.v~p lq,alvero ... ws oews Ka! "fevvalws hel<evrii. the man seemed to me to be happy so feaTlessly and nobly did he die P. Ph. 58 e, ~rJW 'Y< rfis ervxiii.s ro 1rphrf3vv, oT p.<rrrri] ~rJpwv rp61rwv I envy the old fellow his jO!tune, how (lit. ,whither) he has changed his arid ways Ar. Vesp. 1451.
NEGATIVE SENTENCES

The simple negative particles are oJ and p.~. ov is the negative of fact and statement, and contmdicts or denies; p.~ is the negative of the will and thought, and ?'ejects or deprecates. The difference between the simple negatives holds true also of their compounds OVT p.~r, ovo P.YJO, ovods P.YJOds, etc.
2688.
a~ r oK 5vra is that which does not exist independently of any opinion of the writer: r oK IJvra o'fo1Totei:v to fai.Jricate what does not actually exist And. 3. 35. r MTJ llvra is that which is regarded as not existing, that which is dependent on the opinion of the writer, the whole sum of things that are outside of actual knowledge : r !J.TJ i6vra ol!re oprat olire "fvwrrKerat that which does not exist is neithe1' seen nor known Hippocrates, de arte 2 ; cp. ro p.T] IJv P.R.478 b. b. The rarer ofix( (o-xl) denies with greater emphasis than o. The form ft'IKr no longeT is due to the anal ogy of oK-n. 2689. p.f, as the negative of will and thought is used in varions expressions involving emotion, as commands, prohibitions, wishes, hopes, prayers, petiLions, promises, oaths, asseverations, and the like ; in expressions marking condition, purpose, effort, apprehension, cautions assertion, surmise, and fear ; in setting forth ideality, mere conceptions, abstractions as opposed to reality or to definite facts; in mmking ideas as general and typical ; when a person or thiug is to be characterized as conceived of rather than real. -wh is used not merely when the above notions are apparent but also when they are latent. Greek often conceives of a situation as marked by feeling where English regards it as one of fact ; and hence uses p,f, where we should expect. o. a. p.f, corresponds to the Sanskrit prohibitive particle m, which in the Rig Veda is used with the independent indicative of au augmentles~ aorist or imper-

26go]

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

609

fcct which has the force of the subjunctivc ; rarely wiLh the optative. In later Sanskrit mlf was used with the subjuuctive, optative, and imperative. b. JL-IJ was original! y used only in independent clauses; but later was employed, in subordinate clauses, and with dependent infinitives and participles. On the origin of JL-IJ as a conjunction, see 2222. In Homer JL-IJ is used especially with the subjunctive, optative, and imperative (i.e. in commands and wishes); rarely with the indicative (in JL'lJ ifl</><ov, in oaths, in questions, after verbs of feming referring to a past event); with the infinitive wben used for the imperative after a verb of saying, etc. when the infinitive expresses a command or a wish, and when a dependent infinitive is used in an oath; with the participle only in connection with a command (Z 48) or a wish ( o 684). c. In later Greek (Polybius, Lucian, Dio Chrysostomus, etc.) JL-IJ has encroached on o, generally by extension of usages occurring rarely in the classical language. Th us Lucian bas JL-IJ after causal ~"' Bn, t6n, i1r<i; in relative clauses (sometimes oM<v ITTLP on JL-IJ) ; with participles of cause (even ire JL-IJ) or of concession ; with participles without the article following an adjective; witl1 the infinitive after verbs of saying and thinking. on JL-IJ appears in indirect dis- course (complete or partial) wherc the classicallanguage would use the infinitive or or< with the optative or ws with the participle ; so aiLer verbs of saying and thinking, after verbs of emotion, and even after verbs of knowing .
. POSITION OF o AND p.~

2690. ob and fLV are generally placed before the word they negative; but may follow, when emphasis is laid on a particular word, as in contrasts.
1roMf3v M JL'f/<is but let no one suppose T. C. 84, o! o rnparmol i~?)yov JLP ol!, rrvv<Ka<tTav M and the genemls did not lead them out, but called them ltogether X. A. 6. 4. 20, ~up.p.axo' 'Y<POJL8a ovK l1rl KaraovWtT<L rwv 'E{Jvwv 'A8,7valots, ' l1r' iw8<pWrr<< a1r ro M-f}oov rots "E'f/<HP we bec arne allies, not

to the Athenians, for the purpose of enslaving the Greeks, but tu the (:heeks .fot the purpose offreeing thern from the ~lJfede T. 3. 10, 1r6oro ph JL-IJ perish indeed -rnay he not E. Med. 83. . a. A contrast must be supplied in thought when the negative precedes the article, a relative, a conjunction, or a preposition. 'flms, El o 7r<pl 'hJLwv "fPWIT<IT8< JL'lJ r, ElKora but if y ou pass upon us a sentence that is unjust T. 3. 57, 7ro<p.<v JL?J 1rps oJLoiiiv vn7rapaiTK<v?]v varot unable to carry on a war against a powe1 dissimilar in character to thcir own 1. 141, dp.vvotlJL<8a ros 1ro<p.lovs oK Els JLaKpdv we shall shol'tly (lit. in no long time) punish the enerny X. C. 5. 4. 21, o Kar, Korrp.ov disordmly B 214.
b. The order of the parts of a negative compound may be reversed for strong emphasis; as h' oK iflv ( = odn iJJv) S. Tr. 161, JLlav oK ( = o<JLlav) Hdt. 8. 119. c. The negative may be placed in front of an infinitive when English transfers it to another verb in the sentence; as El f3ov6JL<8' 7JJLEs p.}] 7rpOIT7ro<<IT8at
7rO<p.v arv 7JJLv if we wish to assurne that he is not waging war vJith us D. 8. 58, 7JJL.S o' lvavtiTO'lJvo.t hnrpi7r<LS yo1t do not permit us even to take up our qua1ters X. A. 7. 7. 8 ( = ovK 7rtrpi7r<<s KwMm).

GREEK GRAM.-

39

610

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

[2691

o ADHERESCENT 2691. ofl adherescent (or privative) placed before a verb (or other single word) not merely negatives the meaning of the simple verh but gives it an opposite meaning, the two ex pressing a single negative idea; as ov ~7Jf.LL I elen y, I refuse (not I say not). ol ~7Jf.LL is preferred to ~7JP..'- ov as nego is preferred to aio non. 2692. Adherescent ov is especially common with verbs of saying or thinking, but occurs also with many verbs of will or desire. In such cases o goes closely with the leading verb, f01ming a qnasieompound; whereas it helongs in sense to a following infinitive if au infinitive depends on the leading verb. In Latin actual composition has taken place in nego, nescio, nequeo, nolo.
oK g</>TJ UvaL he ?'efused to go X. A. 1. 3. 8, oli ljJ'iitr<v elva< li7Jv o6v they say that thme is no other road 4. 1. ~1 (cp. <f>vs i)oli; yes or no? P. A. 27 d), rivas o' oK <iJero oev l\ye<v; who were those whom he thought ought not to speak '1 Aes. 1. 28, & ouK lfire iJJJ.fis 'lro<Ei:v what you forlJid us to do X. C. 1. 3. 10, ovK ~w tj>drtovra TJJ.wper6a< he said that it was not right to avenge himseZf on an exile T. 1. 136. a. So with oll .PTJJJ.' and ou ljJa<YKw deny, refuse ( = 1rapvoJJ.a<), ovK oror~a<, o IIOJJ.itw, ov ooKw, ovK lw and ou Keevw f01bid (veto), ovK ~<w regard as unw111t!ty, do not expect tht, refuse, ovx 1rurxvop.a.< refuse, ov 1rpD<Y1rowp.a.< dissimulo, ou uvp.{Jovl\evw dissuade, advise not to, oK l8l\w am unwilling, ouK l1ra.<vw disapp1'0!>e. Th\s association often persists in participles, as oK lwv, ovK i6l\wv. Homer bas oli </>'1/!J.L, <f>7Jp.! ov, and oli </>'1/JJ.L o.

2693. ou with the principal verb may be equivalent in sense to p.f, with a dependent infinitive; as o <rvp.{Jovl\wv :E:iph/ <Yrpa.reve<r6a.< 1rl r1}v 'El\Moa. advising Xerxes not to rnarch against Greece (=trvp.{Jovl\evwv p.1} <Yrpa.reve<Y0a.<) Hdt. 7.46. 2694. Analogons to this use with verbs is the use of ov with adjectives and adverbs:
oK ol'Yo< =7rool, oK ctX<<rTos = p.ry<<Yros, ox firrov = p.ov, ox ijK<trTa. = JJ.rL<<rra, o Ka.ws basely, ovK q,a.vf,s .farnmts, oK elK6rws 1m1easonably, o& 1rep! {Jpa.xwv on important rnatters (cp. 2690 a), regularly o& 1ravu not at all, as o& 1ravv xa.l\e1r6v easy. '

2695. The origin of adherescent o is to be found partly in the unwillingness of the early language to use the negative particle with the infinitive, partly in the preference for a negative rather t,han a positive assertion, and to the disinclination to make a strong positive statement (litotes, as in sorne of the cases of 294), and parlly in the absence of negative compounds, the development of which in adjectives and participles (~071 a) was in turn restricted by the use of adherescent o. 2696. Adherescent ov is often found in a protasis with d and in other constructions where we expect p,~.

z6g8]

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

611

el o' 7rOCTTfjvaL. AO?]valwv oK f}8ef,<rap.ev . . , OK f}otKOp.ev but if we 1'efused to revolt from the Athenians, we weTe not doing wrong T. 3. 55, el oK {is if thou forbiclclest s. Aj. ll31 (=el KW!ieLS), el JLTJ IIpo~evov ox V7re0l~avro, e<rw8?]CTV /lv if it had not becn that they did not receive Proxenus, they would have been savecl D. 19. 74, ei JLv o 1rool ?j<rav if they were few L. 13.62 (emended by sorne to oi'iv p.f,). l v o is rare, as Uv Tf o(; tpfjre la v re tpfjre both if y ou den y it and if you admit it P. A. 25 b (cp. L. 13. 76, D. 26. 24).

2697. But p.f, often does not yield to o(;, as av T' E"'(W if>w dv re 11-TJ if>w both if 1 assent and if 1 do not D. 21. 205, oflK oo' li1rws if>w rovro Kal p.T] if>w I lcnow not how I shall say this and not say it E. 1. A. 643, l&v p.T] . re D. 16. 12, and in many cases where JLfJ goes closely with the following word, as el oloov Kplcrtv Kal p.T] tpypero if he were g1anting a trial and not talcing it away D. 23. 91.

o AFTER l ( ifv)
2698. otJ is sometimes found in clauses introduced by d (.lv). a. When o is adherescent (2696).
b. When there is an emphatic assertion of fact or probability, as where a direct statemeut is quoted. Th us, el 0 oflof:v i}p.ripr?]ral p.o< if (as 1 have shown) no eTror has been committed by me And. 1. 33, el, ws vv tpf}cr<L, o(; 1rape<rKdJa!fro if, as he will p1esently assert, he had not made preparations D. 54. 29. Cp. X. A. 1. 7. 18, quoted in 271)0. c. When ei (Uv) is used instead of lin that (because) after verbs of emotion (:.t247). Thus, p.T] flavp.ri<rvs el 7ro rwv elp?]p.vwv o 1rp1r<L <ro< do not be SU1'prised if much of what has been sa id does not apply to you 1. 1. 44. Here p.f, is possible. d. When el (v) approaches the idea of l.,.el since (cp. 2246,.2298 b). So ei -rou!foe o <rrp"'f 1rarf}p if (si nee) the ir father has ceased to love these children E. Med. 88 (often explained as o adherescent). Here p.~ is possible. e. When a single el introduces a bimembered protasis as a whole, the p..!v clause and the M clause of that protasis may have o. Such bimembered protases often depend on a preceding apodosis introduced by al<rxpov, l1ro1rov, oe<v6v, 8avJLarfrov lcrr< (avdTJ) and like expressions of emotion (c). Thus, elr' oflK al<rxpbv
el r jLV. Ap"'(Elwv 11"fj0os OK tj>oflf,O?] TTJV AaKeoaLp.ovlwv apx'IJv ' Dp.es O 5vres 'AIJTJvan fldpflapov 11v8pw'TI'ov tj>oflf},;ea-8e; is it not then disg1ac~{ul, if it is true that

whereas the Argive commons dicl not fertr the empi1e of the Lacedaemonians, you, who are Athenians, are gning to be afrairl of a barbmian? D. 15. 2)), al<rxpbv "'(rip, el 11"TTJP fV ~'(EV <l>pt!')'as, 8 0' /lvop' gy> O ovvf,a-eraL KTav<v for it S diS(!1'aCejHl th at, 'whe1eas the .(rtthe1 de~troyerl the Plwygians, the othe1 (the son) is not going to be able to dest1ny one foe E. El. 3))6, oetvbv v er'YJ, el oi p.v KElvwv ~VJL p.axo< f7ri OOVe[q. Ti) aTWV (xp~p.ara) tj>pOVTES OfJK 'TI'epoCTLV, i)p.ii:, o 'lrl rc;i , , arol rf<jjecriJat oK llpa /5a.,.avf}a-op.Ev it would be strange tf, whereas their allies will not fail to pay t1ibute for their own enslavement, we on the other hand will not expe-a,d it for the pU1'jJose of saving owselves T. 1. 121. N. 1.- The second member of such protases has o if the verb stands in the indicative, but p.f, (in cla~sical Greek) if the verb is in the optative. In Aes. 2. 157 o Karricrxo<p.< is due to indirect discourse.

612

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

[z6gg

N. 2. -In such sentences El may ( 1) have a conditional force in both clauses, as L. 30. 16, 31.24; (2) have a conditional force in the second member, but the force of hel in the first member, as L. 20. 36, Is.14. 52; (il) have the force of hrd in the first member, and that of ln in the second member, as D. 8. 55, Aes. 3. 242; (4) have the force of ln in both members, as T.l. 35, 1. 121, X. C. 7. 5. 84. f. A bimembered clause introduced by el may contain a negative clause with otl directly opposed to a positive clause; as el M rc;> pb, ro< o' o~ D. 2:3. 123. g. el whether in simple and alternative indirect questions takes either otl or p.fJ (2676 c, e). 2699. Homer has el and the indicative with otl (12 times) when the subordinate clause precedes the main clause ; but usually el p.f}, when the subordinate clause follows. Th us, [ o Jl.OL ov n<J'OV<H (3owv f7TLeLK' ap.o<f3f}v, oD<J'op.aL el< Aloio but (f they will not pay a fitting compensation for the cattle, I will go down to Hades p. :382, ~v!Ja Kev 'Ap-yelo<<J'<v v1rpp.opa v6<J'ro< <rux!J'YJ, el p.i] 'A8'Y)val'Y)v "Hp'YJ 1rpos p.!Jov l{et7Tev then in that case the retun~ of the A1gives had been accomplished against fate, if Hem had not spolcen a worli to Athena B 155. a. The Hom eric el ob with the indicative bas been explained either as a retention of the original use, p.f} with that mood being an extension through the analogy of the subjunctive and optative; or because o went with the predicate, whereas p.f} was closely attached to el. 2700. Homer has el otl (adherescent) with the subjunctive in el a otlK <e>..w<J'<v r 289, el M K' ovK lw<J'<v T 139. 2701. Herodotus has a few cases of el ov with the indicative, as 6. 9 ; ?)v otl with the subjunctive is doubtful (6. 133).

av . ..

G ENEHAL IWLE FOI-t p,~

2702. p.~

stands 1. With the imperative. 2. In clauses witb: d, Mv (exceptions, 2698). 3. \Vith the subjunctive, except after p.'>] lest, when ov is used. 4. With the optative, except after p.~ lest, or when the optative has av oris in indirect discourse. 5. With the infinitive, except in indirect discourse. 6. With participles when they have a conditional or general force.

o AND p,f, WITH THE INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE

SIMPLE SENTENCES AND INDEPENDENT CLAUSES

2703. Statements (2153) expressed by simple sentences and independent clauses take ov. Direct questions take either ov or p.~ (2651). The independent future indicative has p.~ only iu questions. 2704. In wishes p.>] is used with the indicative (1780-1781) or the optative (1814, cp. 2156).

NEGATIVE SENTE:\CES

(il3

.re. cr< J.dJ7ror' <ioop.iiv wonld that I had neveT seen thee S. O. T.1218, p.rJ7ror' IJJ<jJ<ov ).,,.,.,zv r-i)v ~Kpov would that 1 had never left 8cyrus S. Ph 96(), p.-i) N1Jv may 1 not live Ar. Eq. 883, dvcuo'i]s oi!r' p.1 p.i}T< "f<volp.1Jv I neither am nm may I become shameless D. 8. 68, oi!r' v ovvalp.1JP p.i}r' hncrralp.1Jv X"f<LP
neitlwr could I tell nor may I be capable of telling S. A nt. 686. a. That IJJ<jJ<Xov takes p.i}, not av, shows that it bas !ost to a certain extent its verbal nature. In late Greek it even became a particle like d(Je. b. Indirect expressions of wishing with ,..;:,s ILv and the optative (1832), f3ovXolp.1)v ILv (1827), {3ovX61-'1JV (/Lv) with the infinitive, take ov (1782, 178U). c. The use is the same in dependent clauses ; as f'lT"ELo'i] o' . p.i}?ror' IJJ<jJeX< (crvp.f3fjva<) uvvf31J but when that happened ~vhich 1 wotd had never happened D.l8. 320.
SUBORDINATE CLAUSES IN THE INDICATIVE OR OPTATIVE

2705. In subordinate clauses IL~ or o is used. a. Final clauses have 1-'iJ, as <jJIos [3o6Xro efvat ros 1-'"ftcrra ovval-'vots, tva dotKwv ~-t-i} oiol1J olK1Jv he wished to be on ji'iendly tmms with men in power in orrler that he might not pay the penalty f01' his wrony-rloing X. A. 2. . 21, gaEL rt vxvpa r6re Xaf3ev, ws p.1Jo' el if3o6ero liivaro l~arrariv quoted in 2185 c. b. Object clauses with o?rws after verbs of e.fj'o1t h::we 1-'iJ, as <jJp6vn!' iirrws I-'1Jov dva~wv rfjs rp.fjs raT1JS .,.pi.~m see to it that yMt rlo nothing unworthy of this h01wur I. 2. :17, l?rep.lero o'lT"WS p.i}r ILcrrot p.i}re li'lrorol 1rore glTotvro he took ca1e that they Hhoulrl neve1 be without food o1 drink X. C. 8. 1. 43. c. Conditional clauses regularly have p.i}. Th us, fi p.-i) tws i]Mere, '1T"opev61-'e0a av f'lr1 f3acrtXlii if you had not come, we should be mwching ayainst the king X. A. 2.1. 4, oVK rrefl1rro avro, fi p.i} n dva"fKaov d1) he never left him unless there was sorne necessity fol' it X. M. 4. 2. 40. So in concessive clauses (2869). On ov adherescent in conditional clauses see 2606. d. Relative Clauses, if condition al, have ov with a definite antecedent, 1-'iJ with an indefinite antecedent (2505). 1-'iJ is thus used when the case in question is typical of a class (p.i} 'generic '). Thus, rrpocr1JI-'alvovcrtv i Tf xp-i) 'lroLEZv Ka11i ov xpi} they sign{fy beforehanrl what one must rlo and what not X. C. 1. G. 4(3, li !-'1J ooa ovo otol-'a' elOvat wlwt I rlo not lcnuw, l do not even thinlc 1 lcnow P. A. 21 d. N. 1. -Homer has 8s (Bcros) o with the indicative (p.i} B :301). N. 2.- ov is regular in relative clauses wh en an opposition is expressed (T. 1. 11.2), and when a negative clause precedes; as ovK fcrnv 8ns (ii.,.ws) o, ovods Bcrns ov, etc. (X. C. 1. 4. 25, X. A. 2. 4. 3). e. The expression oroovros, os (o<TTLS, etc.), when preceded by a negative, takes o; as raJJ-t,Eov J.t'YJevL el vat }J:YJv rowrov, els 8 o 1rs 0 (3ov"X6p,evos efO"eun it is necessary that no one shall have (such) a st01ehonse that any/Jody who pleases may not enter it P. R. 41(3 d. But even wh en no negative precedes, we have o, when the relative clause makes an assertion or defines attributively ; as crv"f"fpa</J<s rwv M"fwv . . . rotoros, oios ovods liXos "f"fov such a write1' of speeches as no one harZ been I. 15. 35. When the antecedent is general or is thought of in .respect of its chamcte1 we have 1-'iJ; as f3ovX1)0e1s rowrov f.1-V1Ji-L<>v KaraX,;e'iv, l !-'1J rfjs dvOpw?rlV1JS <jJucrews crnv wishing to leave behin hirn such a memorial as ~vould surpass lmman natu1e I. 4. 89 ; cp. 2705 g.

614

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

f. Relative clauses of purpose take p.fJ, as Oa.X&.rnnov pf'f;a.T', gvea. p.-IJ1ror'

Eirr6'{;err0' ~,.. cast me out into the sea wlwre ye may never see me more S. O. 'l'. 1411, Kpu'{l&rr' a.uT-IJv, ~vea p.-IJ ns elrrl!Jo< hling he1self where no one might see

her S. Tr. 903. g. Clauses with a relative :pronoun referring to an antecedent thought of in respect of its chamcter (of such a sort) take p.fJ. The use of p.-IJ characteristic cames from the generic mea1ling of p.-IJ, i.e. the antecedent is not regarded simply as a :persan who does something but as a persan of s~teh a natu1e as, one who typijies a class. In such cases 8s p.fJ may refer to a definite persan or thing. So especially in relative clauses of cause and result, which ordinarily take o. 'fhus, TU.a.hrwpos lJ.pa. TtS <rU "f lJ.v1JpW7rOS f . . , ~ f.<iJT ()eol 7raTp(/Jol H JJ.iJT< lepa a w1etched being art thou then, who hast neithe1 ancestral gods no1 shrines P. Eu. 302 b, >/JTJtf>lrrarr8e To<a.ra .!~ wv JJ.TJO'TI"oH &p.'iv p.Erap,Ef}rrE< pass suclt a vote that y ou will never repent of it And. 3. 41, To<a.ra "fetv , ois f.<TJIJds av vep.errfJ<Ja< to use language at which no one coul feel just resentment D. 21.161, o . . . p.TJI!v av 6p.6rr&s the man who wottld not talee an oath M. 40. Sophocles is especially fond of the generic p.fJ. h. Consecutive clauses (and consecutive relative clauses) with JJrrTE take o with the indicative and optative. Thus, (AaKEoa.<JJ.6vw<) eis 'roT' ci7rlJ<rTl&s '!jMov iJJrrT' OK ~1JpK(TV aTOS ~XELV r1]v Kar 'Yi1 apxfJv the Lacedaemonians became so insatiate in thei1 desires that they were not satisjied with the empi1e on the land l. 12. 103, iJJrrT' oK av aTOV "fVWplrratp.' av Elrrtowv. so that I should not recognize him, if I weTe to see him E. Or. 379. On rowros 8s o see 2705 e. i. Oaths and protestations in the indicative with p,fJ exr)ress a solemn deniul or refusal, or repudiate a charge. Thus, t<Jrw vv Zes p.1) p.v Tos t7r7ro<rrw v7]p !7ro<x1Jrrerat lios let Zeus now know (i.e. I swear by Zeus) that no other man shall mount these h01ses K 329, 0"- T1)v 'AtppooiTTJv p.1) ''Yw <J' atpfJrrw by Aphrodite, far be it from me that I should release you Ar. Eccl. 999. Cp. 2716.

p,?}

WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE

2706. The subjunctive is a mood of will, and therefore takes p.~. 2707. Independent clauses take p.fJ : the hortatory subjunctive (1797), the prohibitive subjunctive (1800), the deliberative subjunctive (1805), the subjunc tive of doubtful assertion (1801). a. The anticipatory subjunctive in Homer takes o (1810, cp.1813). 2708. Dependent clauses take p.fJ : final clauses, as ooE p.o< KaraKa.rra.< Ts

it seems to me advisable to bu1n the wagons that our baggage-tTairi rnay not be our general X. A. 3: 2. 27. Object clauses after verbs of e.tfort, as o tpu"!la~""e' orrws p.7} IJErr7r6r'f)v iup'fJTE; will you not be on yo1tr guard lest you find a mastm? D. 6. 25. Soin conditional clauses with M.v, in conditional relative clauses and in relative clauses referring to indefinite time, :place, and manner. a. After J.LiJ lest, o is used (2221). 2709. The imperative is a mood of will and therefore takes p.-IJ in

p.&.~a.s . tva p.1) T S'U'Y'J f}p.wv rrr.parTJ'Yn

prohibitions (1840).
a. The future indicative after interrogative o hasan imperative sense (1918).

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

615

NEGATIVES OP INDIH.ECT DISCOUH.SE

2710. The negatives of direct discourse are retained in indirect discourse introduced by 6n or ws-.
v0p.1J0fjvat XP'IJ

on o/iels crnv dvOponrwv <f>vc;et ollre ())u"fapXLKOS ollre 01JiJ-OKpartK6s

it must be borne in mi nd that no man by nature is disposed eithe1' to oligmchy or to democracy L. 25. 8.
e1re . . on 00 7rpo 7rOre[iis ~p.V ~c;rat d'A. 7rp0 rrWT1Jpliis, el JL'IJ 7rOtf}crat0' /J. 8rJpiip.vrJs Ke'Aeot he said that the q11estion would not be about you1 constitution

but. about your safety, if you did not accfpt the p1opositions of The1amenes

ws JJ-rJi5ds Kvf}crotro K rfjs r&.~ews he gave 01ders that no one shoul move from his position X. H. 2. 1. 22 p.1Ji5els is due to the fact that the main verb denotes a comma.nd.
On the negative in indirect discourse with the infinitive see 2722, 2737, 2738; with the participle, 2729, 2737, 2738; and in indirect questions, 2676.

L. 12. 74. a. In 1rpoe'i1rev

ov
2711.

AND

jLry

WITH THE INFINITIVE

p.~ ;

The infinitive not in indirect discourse has tive in indirect discourse has o, but sometimes p:l]. infinitive has fL~ On the use with fL~ ov see 27 42 ff.

the infiniThe articular

a. The ordinary negative of the infinitive is p.f}, which could be so used since the infiniLive was employed as early as Homer in an imperative sense. o with the infinitive in indirect discourse is probably due to the analogy of ou with the indicative and optative in clauses of indirect discourse introduced by Sn ( ws ). o became the natural negative of indirect discourse as soon as the infinitive came to represent the indicative or optative. 2712. p.f} is used with the articular infinitive. 7rap&.OEL"fJJ-a ro p.'i} Dp.iis dotKev a warning not to in}u1e you L. 27. 5, 1rp ro p.'i} r Keev6p.evov 1rotfjcrat in order to avoid doing 'What 'Was commanded D. 18. 204. On r (roi!) p.'i} o, see 2744. 9. 10, 2749 b, d.
o AND

!"fJ

WITH THE INFINITIVE NOT IN. INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2713. wh is the regular negative after ali verbs, adjectives, acl verbs, and substantives, which take an infinitive not in inclirect discourse. Thus, after verbs and other words denoting ability, fitness, necessity (and their opposites). Cp. 2000-2007. elKos rro<f>v livopa p.'i} 'ArJpEv it is proper for a ~~'ise man not to talk idly r. Th. 152 b, r!is OJJ-Oliis x&.ptras p.'i} dvni5ti56vat alrrxp6v it is disg1aceful not to repay like se1vices T. 3. 63.
XP~ (xprJI', ixpl}v) takes either fL~ or xp'IJ p.'i} Karaq>povv ro 1r'Ai}Oovs one must not despise the multitude I. 5. 79, xpfiv o~ u' .p.apr.ve<v thou oughtst not to do wrong E. Hipp. 507, XPfi li' oli1roT'

2714.

ov.

616

NE'GATIVE SENTENCES

l1rev olv' ID..{'Jtov {'JpoTwv it is not right ever to call any son of man happy

E.And. 100. a. For original o xP1J was substituted (for emphasis) xpf} o, where the o was still taken with xpof] ; ultimately o was felt to belong with the infinitive and hence came to_be separated from xpf}. b. oe takes p.of], as p.f) 6Kvev oeZ aTovs they must not jear T. 1. 120. ov oe may be used for o p.of] (2,693). In oe ovx a1rws Ei1rev one must not speak in a general way 1. 15. 117 ox is adherescent. Note olp.at ov o&, </>'TJJLL xpfivat' o,
olp.at xpfivat p.of].

2715. p.of] is used with the infinitive in wishes and prohibitions. Thus, Oeo! 'II'OTa<, p.7} p.E oovdiis Tvxv ye gods of my country, may bandage not be my lot A. Sept. 253, ol"s p.f} 7rcl.~v do not app1oach these A. Pr. 712. 2716. p.of] is used with the infinitive in oaths and protestations. Thus, (O"rw vv r60E oyaa p.of] rl Tot aTrfj 1rfjp.a KaKov {'JoveuO"JLEP ilo let earth now

know this (i.e. I swear by earth) that I will not devise any harmful mischief to thine own hurt E 187. p. 2705 i.
2717. p.of] is used with the infinitive of pmpose (cp. 2719) or result (2260). Cp. 2759. On cp' r; p.of] see 2279; on &O''T o see 2269. 2718. p.of] is nsed when the infinitive stands in apposition (1987), and bence is like 'TO p.f} with the infinitive. Thus, TOVTO gp O'TLV wv </>"'P.'' P."'Pa av v
{'JpaxvTpo<s p.ou r ar l1rev this is one of the
tl~ings I maintain- that no one can say the ,ame things in fewm wmds than I can P. G. 449 c. Cp. A. Pr. 173,

431, 435, P. R. 497 b.

Such cases are not to be confused with JJ.1J after verbs of

asseveration or belief (2725).

2719. p.of] is used with the infinitive introduced by verbs of will or desi1e (1991).or by verbs expressing activity to the end that something shall or shall not be done ; as Tf}v KpKpav [3ou.ovro p.f} 1rpoO"IJat they wished not to give up Gorcyra T. 1. 44, <f>vaKf}v Elxe wfJr' K'lrfV JL"'DPa p.f}T' EO'TreLV he kept guard against any one eithe1 sailing out m in 'l'. 2. 69. 2720. Verbs of commanding and exho1ting (KeEvw, "fw, [3ow), asking ( a.lrw, cl.~tw), advising ( O"vp.f3ovEvw), and other verbs of w'ill or desire of like meaning, take p.of]. Keve p.f} pe8l~v he ordered him not to p1ovoke his wmth P. R. 393 e, n.Eoyov aTo< p.f} o<Kev they tol them not to commit injustice 'l'. 2. 5, t{'Jowv d.ll.ll.f}o<s p.t, 8v they shouted to each other not to run X. A. 1. 8. 19, IKTeve p.t, KTeva< he besought them not to lcill him L. 1. 25, O"up.f3ouEuw O'Ot . u.f} d.rf>a<p0"8at il. av oiiJs I advise yott not to take away what yo~! may have given

x. c. 4. 5. 32.

2721. o is used after verbs of will or desire only when it is attacbed to theJeading verb or to sorne particular word ; when it marks a contrast inserted parenthetically; where a compound nega.tive takes up ov used with the Jeading verb ; and when oOels may be resolved into o and Tt<, o& going with the Jeading verb, Examples in 2738,

NEGATIVE
o AND

SI~NTEXCES

617

!"fJ

WITH THE INFINITIVE lN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2722. V rbs of sa.ving and thinking take o with the infinitive in indirect discourse. Here o is retained from the direct discourse.
va'YK11) <j>ap.<v oO<va O<wv oiJu p.axerrOru r vv oiJn p.axerOa.l 7rou we declme that no one of the gods either now contends with necessity, o1 ever will P.L.818e (= oods . . . p.ax<rat p.a.x<ira.<), 'yovr<>oKEPa< a.rovop.o< saying that they were not indepenclent 'l'. 1. 67, ( = oiJK lrrp.<v), op.a.< 'Y.p av ovK dxaplrrrws p.o< lixHv for 1 thinlc it wuuld not be unattended with g1atitude to me x. A. 2. 3. 18 ( = OVK av lixo<), 'h'YfJrra.v;ro f}p.s o 7r<p<oferr8a.L they thought that -we shoulcl not view it with ind~tf'erence 'l'. 1. 3ll ( = o rr<p<ofovra.< ), JJ.Ol li iloKorrov ouro< o ro arnov alnrr8a.< but these persans seem to me not to blame the real cause P. R. 329 b, lvop.<rr<v oK av ou>a.rrea., J-LPELv ros 7rowpKovras he thought the besiegers would not be able to holcl the ir position X. A. 7. 4. 22 ( = oK av OVPG.LVTO ).

v(

2723 . Verbs of saying and thinking take p.~ in em1)JJ.atic declarations and expressions of thought which involve a wish that the utterance may hold good. So with rf>YJp.{, yw, T]yovp.at, vop.{,w, oip.at. Cp. 2725.
<j>a.l1}V /i' .v lf'YW'YE p.1JOEV! p.1JOEJ-Lla.v <va.L 7ra.lilwrrov 7rap TO p.TJ dplrrKOPTOS but fOT my pmt 1 would maint ain that no one gets any education from a teacher who is not pleasing X. M. 1. 2. 39, 7rdvns lpovrr< . p.1JOv <Ya.< K<poa.<wupov dp<ri)s ail will say th at nothing is nwTe pTojitable th an bmve1y X. C. 7. 1. 18, ris il' .v dvOpw1rwv O<wv p.v 7ra/ia.s 7J'Yoro <va.<, 8<os ilf p.f}; who in the world WO?tld think that they were the sons of gos and not yods f! l'. A. 27 , a7riirrav . vo;~a.vr p.i} .v h, imvol 'Y<vrrfJa< Kwvrra< rov l7rl ri]v Oau.rrrrav rx<rrp.ov they departed in the belief that they woulcl no longeT prove able to prevent the building of the wall to the sea 'l'. 6. 102. a. Cp. P. Th. 155 a ( </>1JJ1.l), 'l'. 1. 139, 6. 40, P. R. 346 e (l'Yw), X. M.l. 2. 41, D. 54.44 (op.a.<), X. C. 7. 5. 59 (voJ-Ll~w), l'. Soph. 280c (o<a.vooJl.a<).

b. Cases where the infinitive is in apposition, or depends on an imperative, or occurs after a condition, do not belong here.

2724. p.f} with the infinitive is often found after verbs denoting an oracular response or a judicial decision actual OT implied. Cp. 2725. Thus, dv<v 7)
IIOlii !-'1Jiilva rro<j>wnpov Efva.< the Pythian p1ophetess made answe1 that no one was wiser P. A. 21 a (in direct discourse oods rro<j>wTEpos lrrn ). So after Kptvw, as ihpiv< p.i} 'Aplrrrwvos eva.< .6.1JJ-Lctp1Jrov 7ra.lia the Pytbian prophetess gave decision that DemaT(Jtus was not the son of Atiston Hdt. 6. 66, KKp<rr8< . J-LOvo< rwv rravrwv p.1Jo<vs v Klpilovs r Koov. lilm<a. rwv 'E?If}vwv 7rpolrr8a.< you me adjuclgecl to be the only people who woulrl not betray fo1 lucre the commun rights of the Greelcs D. 6. 10. So Ka.Ta'Y<'YvwrrKw p.f} 'l'. 7. 51, X. C. 6. 1. 86.

2725. p.~ is often used with verbs and other expressions of asseveration and belie.f, after which we might expect o with the infinitive in indirect discourse. Sueh verhs are those signifying ta hope. expect, promise, put trust in, be persuaded, agree, testify, swea1, etc.

618

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

[2726

The use of p.lj indicates strong assurance, confidence, and resolve; and generally in regard to the future. Cp. 2723.
lX,.ls b~J.s iJ.'IJ brpiHjva< tbere is hope that you will not be seen X. C. 2. 4. 23, 7T"i<Txvovro !J.TJDV xae1rv airros 1T<l<Te<T0a< they promised that they should su:{fer no hatm H. 4. 4. 5, 1TI<TTVW 1-''IJ lfEV<TEIV p.e ravriis ras ')'aOas f1Tloas I trust that these good hopes will not deceive me X. C. 1. 5. 13, ()avwi~w l!1rws 1T<i<T87J<Tav 'A&7Jva'Lot 1;wKpdr7Jv 1r<pl Oeos iJ.'IJ <Tw</Jpov:v 1 wonder how the Athenians were pm-

x.

suaded that Socmtes did not hold temperate opinions regaTding the gods X. M. 1. 1. 20, op.oo')'< p.'IJ p.enval oi p.aKpoo-yliis he acknowledges that he cannat make a long speech P. Pr. 336 b, auros avro Kara~J-aprvp p.'IJ ~ KEivov ')'f')'EVfi<T()aL he proves by his own testimony that he is not his son D. 40. 4 7, i!J~J-G<T<v n p.'!Jv 11-'IJ dval o! viv ltov p.TJM ')'<P<TfJa< 1rcfJ1Tore he swore that he had no other son and that none othe1 harZ ever been bo1n to him And. 1. 126, i!Jp.vv< !J-TJP <ipTJKa< he swme that he had said nothing D. 21. 119, O!J-Op.at ~J--fJ1Tor' ae~?)<Tv KaKv np.ap I will swear that I will never ward off the evil day .P 373. Cp. Ar. Vesp. 1047, 1281, And. 1. 90, Lye. 76. With 6~J-Vii~J-< the infinitive may refer ta the present, past, or future.
2726. Such verbs are hope 1rtt"'; expect 'Iritc.~, 1rpo<rSor<.&, Sor<w, orop.a.~, dK6s o--r~; promise 'lrtrxvop.a.~, 'lrO."'{"'(OtJoa.; swear >tJol'VtJo; agree OtJoOo"'(.&, '"'"YX"'P"'; pledge yy"OlfLa.; put trust in 'lrL<TTww; am peTsuaded 'lr'IrEL<TfJ.a.; testify tJoO.pTupci> ; Tepucliate .va.Cvofloa.; threaten .'lreLci>, etc.
a. p.?) is regular after verbs of promising; common after verbs of lwping and swearing. With 6p.vii!J-<, 1T<<Tr<vw, 1Tel0o~J-a<, !J-aprvpw, etc. there is an idea of deprecation. 2727. 'lrLo-Ta.tJoa. and otSa. usually take p.o) when they denote confident belief ( == I. toaTrant from wh at I know; cp. 1T<<Treuw !J-1), 811-viip.< Mo7 ). Th us, i~l<Trap.a< p.-1} rov T<Ui' a-yX<ii'<TJla 1r'!Jv K<ivov p.o<v I a.~su1e JJOU this fair o.tfering has not come fi"Oin any one save from him S. El. 908 (cp. Ant. 1092). In ro<Tor6v 'Y' ooa /).1)-r /).1 av v6(J'OV p.?)r' ltO 1Tp<Jat JJ.T)V so much at least I know- that neithe1" sickness nor aught else can undo m (S. O. T. 1455) the infinitive may be appositional (2718). Cases of trJ"Ot p.?) (be assmed= I assu1e you) may bave p.iJ by reason of the imperative (2737 a). SoS. Ph. 1329.

ov

AND

!Li}

\VITH '.rHE PARTICIPLE

2728. 'fhe participle has ov when it states a fact, p...q when it states a condition. On p...q due to the force of the leading verb, see 27:37.
o 1T<<Tre6wv si nee (as, when, etc.) he cloes not believe, 1-''IJ 1Tt<Treuwv if he does not believe, avf37J bd rii IJpTJ ooevs KwMovros he went ttp on the mountains since no one hinclererl him X. A. 1. 2. 22, ovK av il>lvaw 11-'IJ K.a11-wv eoa<p.ovev thou canst not be happy if thou hast not toilerl E. fr. 461, ws i, r ~?]v 11-'IJ q:,eovov<T7JS r?js rvx7Js how stveet is life if foltune is not envious Men. Sent. 563. a. }lf, with the articular participle is the abridged equivalent of a conditional relative sentence. Thus, in o p.'IJ rara 1ro<wv lio<K6s <Tn, o 11-'IJ 1ro<wv is virtually the generic 8s av p.'IJ 1ro<i1 or o<Jr<s 11-'IJ 1ro<e compressed into a noun. 2729. o is used with a supplementary participle (in indirect discourse) in

2735]

NEGATIVE SE~TENCES

619

agreement with a noun (or pronoun, expressed or unexpressed) depending on a verb of knowing, slwwing, seeing, perrei11ing, eLc. (2106-2115) ; and also wiLh such supplementary participles (not in indirect discourse) after verbs of emotion (~100), etc. In most such cases oTt o might have been used. oot!va -y.p ooa JJ.<Tovra ros 7ratvovra.s for I lcnow of no one who <li~lilces his admi1ers X. M. 2. 6. 3:3, q,avepov 1r<TLV 1roirwav ouK liq. 1ro/l.ep.ovTEs they made it clear to all that they we1e not waging jAJar for thei1 own inte1ests Lye. 50, opw<TL ros 7rpe<T{Jurpous ou . a1rt'vras they see that theh eiders do not depart X. C. 1. 2. 8, os p.1]1ro8' evpT/ Ov /1./w</>Ov no one tv'll C'VI'1' jind that anything has been left unone D. 18. 246; K6p4J ijiero ou uva.p.P'J! <T"fv he Tejoiced that Gy1us was unable to remain silent X. C. 1. 4.15. 2730. .,.(O"Ta.p.a. and ol:Sa. denoting confident belief may take !lfJ for ou. Thus, ~~o<oa </>O'fL 0'< p.T] 1r<</>K6ra rotara tfiwvev KaKa well do 1 know that by natuTe thou art not adapted to utter such gu ile S. Ph. 79; cp. S. O. C. 656, T. 1. 76, 2. 17. This use of p.-1) is analogous to that with the infinitive (2727). 2731. !lfJ is used when the reason for an action is regarded as the condition under which it takes place; as ov ro wMovos 1'-TJ O'r<p<<TK6!J-evo< xaptv ~xou<Ttv they are not gratejul at not being depri'Ved of the greater pa1t of theil rights T. 1. 77 ( = fi !J-TJ (fTplO'KOPTO ). 2732. The participle with ~' C,a..n:ep, lLTe, otov, ota. (2085-2087) has ou; as l!Jopu{Jere ws ou 7rot1}0'ovres rara y ou made a distuTbance by tvay of declming that you did not intend to do this L. 12. 73. The use of ou shows Lhat there is uoth.ing conditional in the use of ws though it is often translated by as if. !lofJ occurs only after an imperative or a conditional word (2737). 2733. Participles of opposition or concession (2083) take o ; as 1rel1Jov -yvvat~l Kal1rep oo <Tr!p-ywv D/"WS hearken to women albeit thou likest it not A. Sept. 712. .
2734. The participle with the article has oil when definite persan or thing is meant, but p:r] when the idea is indefinite and virtua1ly conditional (whoever, whateve?); and when a persan or thing is to be characterized (of such a sort, one who; 2705 g). Cp. 20G2.
o! ovK ovres the dead T. 2. 44, o! ouK le/l.ovres the particularpersons (or patty) who are unwilling Ant. 6. 26, ol ou (3ov6!J-<vo< rai!ra orws exw the pmty of opposition And. 1. 9 ; ol p.T] uva!J-<vo< any who are unable X. A. 4. 5. 11 ( = onv<s I"TJ vavrat or O<TOL av 1'-TJ vvwvrat), 0 1'-TJ apds 6.v8pwwos o 1fQ.LOVTaL he who yets no jlogging gets no training Men. Sent. 422, 1'-TJ M-yw.v q,pove the nJan who oes not say what he thinks D. 18.282, !J-7Jov aotKwv oevos iirat v6!J-ou he who does no tvrong needs no law Antiph. 288.

AND

pi/j

WlTH

SU:BS'rANTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVELY

AD.JECTIVES

USED

2735. o and 1'-~ are used with substantives and substantivized adjectives with the same difference as with participles. Here the generic 1'-~ is much more common thau ov.
i] rwv "'f</>pwv . ou ui/l.u<TLs

the non-destruction of the b1idges T. 1. 137,

620

NEGATIVE SEXTE:\CES

Kar r?jv rwv xwplwv XX>)XoLs oK 1rbilo<nv ccause of theil' non-surrende? of tl!e places to each othe1 5. S5 (=on oK 1rO<Tav), oL r~v rwv KopLvOlwv odn 7rava')'w')'>)v ecause the Corinthians no longeT sailed out against them 7. 3G.

Cp. non-regardance (Shakesp.), nomesi<lences (Milton). So even wiLl! concrete nouns: o! oxl oiJoL K fr. 8:)1. iJ p.~ lp.nLplii lack of expe1ience Ar. Eccl. 115, o p.~ iiirp6s he who is not a physician (the non-physidan) P. G.450b, oi p.'l] 7rXov<noL whoevm me not 1ich (the non-r;h) P. Il. ?.00 a, oK ~G'TLV v ros p.'l] Kaos (3ovXd,p.aa-Lv oO' 1rls in schemes that a1e unwise the1e. is no place even for hope S. Tr. 725. a. The use of the negative here compens:ttes for the absence of negative compounds. Cp. ai oK va-yKaaL 1r6a-eLS unnecessmy potations X. R. L. 5. 4.
OVO{<;, flii]O{<;

oSd,, o8v denote that which is aetually non-existent or of no account; fh'YJ8d>, fh'YJ81v denote that which is meiely thought of as nonexistent or of no account. Both are usecl as the opposite of rl.> or rl. (dvaL) to be someboy (something, cp. 12G9). The nenter f01ms are often used of persons; r 0'YJ8v (indeclinable) is used of pers ons and things.
2736.

w vv p.v ooels, aVpLOv o' 1rlpp.e-yas oh thou who mt now a nobocly (an actual fact), but to-7JW!'TOW exceeding great Ar. Eq. 158, 5vres oOlves being noodies E. And. 700, o -yp 1)~lov ros J.L1]Dvas for he was not wont to esteem (those whom he regarded as) noodies S. Aj.lll4, r J.L1)v els ov p1rn what was thought to be nothing now inclines (shows itself) to be actually nothing E. fr. 5:32, Sr' oov wv ro p.1]v &.va-r17s v1r<p whcn though naught thyseZf (a fact) thou hast stood up jo1 him who is as naught S. Aj. 1231. So r oOlv ze1o, actually nothing, ril J.L1)t!v abstract nonentity. a. The construction may influence the choice between oels and p.1)oels ; as iv ooKwa-l TL eTvaL p.1]0v livres, ovHoljeu aros rebuke them if they think they me something when in reality they a1e nothing P. A. 41 e. Cp. 2737 b.
APPARENT EXCHANGE OF o .AND
2737.

f.J,/j

\Vllere 0-/; is used when we expect ov the negative expression usually depends on a verh that either has 0-/; or would have it, if negatived.
a. .After imperatives. Thus, a-<icp' ta-eL p.>) p.e Ow1reva-ovr a-e know well that I shall nui fawn upon thee E. Heracl. 983, vop.Lje p.1)ov eT vaL rwv cvOpw1rlvwv f3{3aLOv el vaL conside1 nothing in hu man life to be sec~we I. 1. 42 ( = p.'l] v6p.Lj TL Kr X.), ws ovv p.'l] p.6vov Kpivovres, XX Kat Oewpovp.evoL, orw r'l]v >f;f,cpov cpper< cast yow ballots then in the belief not only that you aTe passing judgment but also that the eyes of the world are upon you .Aes. 3. 247 (cp. 27:32). See also 2086 b. b. After conditional expressions. Thus, El i5f rLS vop.lj n p.'T} lKavws eipf,a-OaL but 1/ any one thinlcs some point has not been S1.f,"fjiciently rnentioned .And. 1. 70, Xva-ere U oM r:s AaK<a<p.ovlwv a-1rov/i.s ex6p.evoL ( =<:v X1)a-0<) -!Jp..s P.1/<rpwv livras ~up.J.L<ixovs and by receivin{! us, who are allies of neitheT,

NEGATIYE SENTENCES

621

you will not l1e violating the treaty with the Lacedaernonians either T. 1. 35. Cp. 2736 a. c. Other cases : K<eu pvat bd ro 'Tl'oratJ.o f.L'!) i5taf3d.vras he ordered them to 1emain by the river without crossing X. A. 4. 3. 28 (here wva<, if negatived, would take !-'1!, 2720), 71'eiJ"xero elp1!vrw 11'o<1!1J"<tv f"TJTE i!wqpa oos f.L1!re rit reix'IJ
Ka!Jewv

he promised that he would bring peace about without qiving hostages or d<Jstroying the walls L. 12. 68 (here 'Tl'otf}a-etv, if negatived, would take !"1!, 2726). N. -But o may assert itself even under the above circumstances; as f.L'I) 8 -ye ou xp'!) 1rol don 't do wh at is re ally w1ong P. Eu. 307 b, f) a<j>ter f.Le f) f.L'!) a<j>ieT< ws lf.Lo. oK av 1l'ot1!1J"avros /1a either acquit me or do not acquit me in the knowledrte that I should not act otherwise 1'. A. 30 b (cp. 2732), el vof.Ll)m ox q,~e<v r'!)v olK'f/V if thou thinkest not to su.tfa the penalty S. O. T. 551 ( = ox <j>~w ), el "fVWIJ"!JrwbtJ.e8a ~vveMbvres f.LEV, atJ.VVEG'IJat Of o (sorne Mss.) TOf.LWVTS if we shall be known to have conie together, and yet not to have the coumge to avenge ourselves T. 1. 124 (it would be said of them: ~uvf)Mov pb, af.LVveiJ"!Jat o ouK lr6tJ.wv, a contrast, cp. 2()00). d. On 1-'1! in questions where we might expect o, see 2676 b.
2738. is sometimes used where we expect 11-~ a. Where o stands i11 a clause introdiwed by l or other words after which !-'1! might be expected (2608). Thus, o<j>pa Kat oK l!Jt!wv TLS avayKalTJ 1l'Of.Ll)ot that eve1-y one must of necessity jight even though he woul not Li 300 (cp. 2692 a). b. Where ou goes strictly with the leading verb though it stands with the infinitive. Th us, f3ovoltJ.1JV o' av oK el vat Tooe 1 woulcl fain it wme not so (! sho!d not wish that this were so) E. Me. 72, OtJ.w!J.oKev ou xapterr!Ja< . . ai:L o<KtiiJ"etv KaTi:L ros vbf.Lous he has swo1n, not that he will show favour, but that he will judge according to the laws P. A. 35 c (some explain this as the ou of direct discourse). c. Where o in a contrast goes closely with a following word or words, or stands in a partial parenthesis. Thus, Keevwv oilK lv rfi lKKWiq. a' lv r(;) 8edrp4J r'i)v avd.pp'f}IJ"Lv -yi-yveiJ"Oat (he has violated the law) in ernanding that the proclamation be macle not in the Assernbly but in the theatre A es. 3. 204, Of.LOO"fOI'f/V av I-yw-ye o Kari:L TOUTOUS evat p1!Twp I should aclcnowledge that 1 arn an omtm, b11t not after theil style P. A. 17 b, DtJ..s vv a;wvres ou 'uf.LtJ.axev, aMi:L ~uvaotKe'iv denwning that you should be, not their allies, but thei1 partners in WTOng-doing T. 1. 39. d. 'Vhen a compound negative with the infinitive repeats o used with the leading verb. Th us, ( 0 v6fJ-oS) oK ;q_ elrnfvat, oU il v Y 0 TETeEVTTJKdJs, oOep.iav -yuvaKa the law does not pe1mit any wornen to enteT toheTe the dead may be D. 43. 63. e. When ovoels may be resolved into o and rts, o going with the leading verb. Thus, ooevos ( =ofi TL VOS) ap.aprev . olKatbs f(]"TLV there is nothing he dese1ves to miss A nt. 4. a. 6 (=he does not dcserve to misf> anytlling), a;<w l-yw wv f.Lwf.L6KaTe 11'apaf3ijvat ooiv 1 aslc that yrm do not b1eak any of the conditions to which yon have swo1n X. II. 2. 4. 42 ( =oilK a_;,r;, ... 11'apaf31jvat n ). Cp. S. Pb. 88.

ov

622

NEGATIVE SENTENCES
/.L~ AND /.Lry o WITH THE INFINITIVE
REDUNDANT OR SYMPATHETIC NEGATIVE

L With the Infinitive depening on Verus of Negative Meaning

2739. Verbs and expressions of negative meaning, such as deny, refuse, hinder,jorbid, cwoi, often take the infinitive with a redundant p.~ to confirm the negative idea of the leaing verb.
With this compare: "First Ile denied you had in him uo right" (Shakesp., Com. of Er. 4. 2. 7); and "La pluie ... empche qu'on ne se promne" (Hacine); "Verbot ihnen Jesus, dass sie Niemand sagen sollten" (St. Mark 9. 9). Karapvfj J] i'iipidva' r.oe; dost thou deny that thou hast clone this 'l S. A nt. 442, ?roKw<ra' ros "EXX?]vas p,'!] i!Mv to hinder the G1eeks from coming X. A. 6. 4. 24, Kf}pvKa ?rpo?rep,'fev avrot's . 1repovra p,'!] ?rev they sent a hemld to forbid them ta sail T. 1. 29, ea{HJ<Te<rOe p,'!] ?rowv i!va.vrlov M-ye< v y ou will bewaTe of speaking in public I>. Eu. 304 a, ?rxovro p,'!] i!?rl r'!]v harpwv -yi) v <rrpare<ra' they abstainedf7om manhing upon each other's territory T.5.25.

2740. Tl~e rednndant p,f, is nsed after ci.p.q,.Myw and ci.p.cj>o-131JT&l dispute, ci.vaTl9ep.a. TetTact an opinion, ci.vTLyw speak against, ci.,..ayopevw and C.1TEL1'1'Ev fmbid, .1TLCTT&l doubt, .1Toyyvci>a-Kw abandon an intention, C.1ToKpV1TTop.a. conc.eal, .1TOUw acquit, .1TOCTTEp&\ depTiVe, C.1TOCTTpcj>w divert, .1TOXELPOTOVcQ and n1l'O>jl1j!J>(top.a.L vote against, ci.pvoilp.a. (and compounds, and n1Tapv6s .tp., ~a.pv6s Etp.) deny, &a.p.ci.xop.a. Tefuse, <tpyw and p.1To&ci>v etp prevent, vavTLoiip.a oppose, u\l\aj3oilp.a bewa1e of, xw and .1TX"' prevent, ci.vTX"'' ci.,..xop.a, 11'X"' KaTX"' abstain from, Kwl\'\}., (and compounds) hinder, fLETaJ3oul\evop.a qlte1 one's plans, fL<Ta:.YyvwKw change one's mind, <iKvov 11'a.pX"' rnake hesitate, cj>evy"' (and compounds) escape, avoicl, disclairn, cj>uXci.TTop.a guaTd against, etc. 274i. Also after the following verbs: C.1Ta.u&&l jorbid, .1Tevxop.a dep1ecor, ci,,..o&oKe resolve not, .1Tpoa-&6KTJ~6s dp. do not expect, .cj>a.poilp.a prevent, .cj>t'l)p.L acquit, &&oKa. a11d cj>oj3oilp.a.. j'ear, lp'\}Kw hinde1, KaTo.Set laclc, fLETa&o~tet p.o change one's rnin, ,......,., put an end to, pvop.a. and o-.Ptw save from, V'll'EKTPX"' escape from, l!cj>t.ep.a give up, etc. 2742. \Vhen a verb of cleny1:ng, refusing, hindering, jorbidding, etc., is itself negatived, either directly or by appearing in a question expecting a negative answer, the infinitive has p.~ ov. Here both the introductory clause and the dependent clause have virtually an affirmative sense.
oOeLs- 7rdJ7ror' PTe1rev f.J.r, o KahWs gxfLv aOros ( ro~s vOJ.Lovs) no one ever denied

that they (the laws) were excellent D. 24. 24, riva ote< ?rapvf,r;e<rBat p,'i] oxl K< avrv 7rl<rra<r0a< r OiKa<a; who, tkink y ou, will den y that he too unde1stands wkat is just? P. G. 461 c ( = ovods 1rapvf,<rera.'). But p,'!j o is not used after ol! </>'11-''' OK w, OK OfW (2602 a). . a. p,'!j ou with the infinitive here, and elsewhere, is used only when the introductory word or words haR an actual or a virtualnegative. Since, in pvop,a' p,'i) To.ra op<ra' I deny that I id this, p,f, confirms the negative idea in pvop,a<, so

2744]

~EGATlVE

SENTENCES

623

in oK pvoJLa< /LTJ o 7a7a opii(Ja< 1 do not deny that 1 did this, o after the strengtheniug p.-f, confirms the o prefixed to the leaing verb. Cp. "Je ne nie pas que je ne sois infiniment flatt'' (Voltaire). In the iirst sentence 1'-fJ repeats the 'negative result' of pvop.a< (single sympathetic negative, untranslatable); in the second sentence o is repeated with the infinitive to sum up the effect of oK pvoJLa< (double sympathetic negative; both untranslatable). After verbs negative in meaning (den y, etc.) p.T, and p.T) o canuot be tranalated in modern English (see 2739). After verbs not negative iu character but precede by a negative, and after virtually negative expressions, p.-f, or p.T) o bas a negative force (2i4, 2746). b. !LTJ oo with the infinitive regularly indicates a certain pressure of interest on the part of the person involved. 2743. After deny, spea.k against, doubt, etc., followed by cils or on, a redundant o- is often inserted. Thus, ,;,, J-LV OVK .:r]IJ~ ravr' ur{v, ovx ~7'' &.vnii.ytv that this is tJ"ue you will not be able to den y D. 8. 31.
ws clause is an interna] accusative (accusative of content) after Originally the meaning seems to have been 'y ou will not be able to deny in this way- this is not true' where oil is not redundant. vn.')'ELv.

a. Here tl18

2744.

Sumrnary of Constructions after Verbs of Hindering, etc.

After verbs siguifying (or suggesting) ta hindeT and the like, the infinitive adrnits the article 76 or roi! (the ablatival genitive, 1392). Bence we have a variety of constructions, which are here classe under forma] types. The simple infinitive is more closely connected with the leading verb thau the infinitive with ro JL-fJ or ro p.T) oo, which often denotes the result (cp. W(JT p.-f,) of the action of the leading verb a11d is either an accusative of respect or a simple object infinitive. The genitive of the infinitive is very rare with KwMw and its compounds. a. Some scholars regard the infinitive with the negative as an interna] accusative, not as a simple object infinitive; and the infinitive without the negative as an external accusative. 1. e~pyn fJ.E tJ.-lJ yp6.cj>Hv (the usual construction : examples 2739). 2. e~pyn fJ.E yp6.cj>ew (less common). Sin ce the redundant p.* is not obligatory, we have the simple infinitive as object (1989), as el 7o76 ns etn /!pv oKvos if some scTuple prevents us fTom doing this P. Soph. 242 a, Sv Oa.vev <pp!(fUtJ.1J whom 1 saved jTom death E. Ale. 11, ol Oewv i}JLiis opKo< KwMov(J< 71'0IE/ovs eiva< <i:\.::1.-f,io<s the oaths swo1'1~ in the na me of the go!ls prevent ourJieing enemies ta each otl1er X.A.2. 5. 7, and so usually with Kw.Dw (cp. 244. 7). 3. E~pyEL fJ.E TO tJ.-lJ ypO.cj>nv (rather common ; cp. 1) : Einov ro p.T) KaKovpye'iv they Jl1'evented them f1'01n doing damage T. 3. 1, o[ol 7 r,uav KaTXELV r I"TJ liaKpVELv they were able ta restrain theil weeping I'. l'h.117 c. 4. e~pyn fJ.E To yp6.cj>nv (not nncorn mon ; cp. 2) : f7f'(Jxov ro eilOws 7os 'A07Jvalo<S f71'<XELPEv they refrained f1om immediately attackiny the Athenians 'l'. 7. 33, /!(Jnv ns, os ITE Kw.DEL r l!piiv there is some one who will prevent thee from the deed S. Ph. 1241. 5. etpyn fJ.E Toil tJ.-lJ yp6.cj>etv, with the ablatival genitive, 1202 (not so common as 3) : 71'iis yp .Kos /!Vo livopas ~~., 7o /LTJ Ka7aova< for each slcin-bag will pre-

624

NEGATIVE SE.:\'TEKCES

[2745

vent two men fTom sinlcing X. A. 3. 5. 11. Other cases are : Hdt. 1. 86, T. 1. 76, X. C. 2. 4. 13, 2. 4. 23, 3. 3. 31, I. 7. 17, 12. 80, 15. 122, P. L. 637 c, 832 b, D. 23. 149, 33. 25. Observe that this idiom does not have the logical meaning 'from not,' which we should expect. Sorne write r p.f] or p.fJ alone. 6. dp"( jl.E Toil "{pO.cj>ew (not common, and very rare with Kwow, as X. A. 1. 6. 2) : rou o opi7rerd;v oerrp.os cl1relp-yourrt; do they prevent their slaves f1'01n running away by fetters? X. M. 2. 1.16, i1rrrxop.ev rou oaKp6ELv we desisted from weeping P. Ph. 117 e (cp. 3). 7. ouK etp"(<L ..,. "{pncj>ew (not very common, but more often with o KwDw; cp. 2) : ooO OtaKWDOUrf! 'lrO!EtP WP .v ht!Jp.fis ; n01' will they prevent yo1t from doing what y ou desire? P. Lys. 207 e, rl KWD ( = ovov K.) Kat r i1Kpa T]p.v KEeuELP Kupov 7rpoKaraa{Jev; what hinders our ordering Uyrus to talee also the heights in advance for us? X. A. 1. 3. 16, rau-ra rtves ovK ~apvouvrat 1rpfirrv certaih people do not deny that they are cloing these things Aes. 3. 250. 8. ouK etp"(EL..,. 1'-iJ o "(pO.cj>ELv (the regular construction) : oK cll.ufJto-{J'T}Tw p.T} ooxt rr o-o<j>rfl'Tepov Ji p. I do not dispute that y ou me wiser th an I P. Hi pp. Min or 369 d, ooov ouvaro clvrxetv wiJ o xapljerrOat he was not able to resist granting the favour x. c. 1. 4. 2, ri p.7ro0rl!v ( = OVOfvfjl.'lrOOWV) p.-1} ox! ... v{Jptjopbous a7roOavv; what hinders our being p1tt to death ignominiously? X. A. 3. 1. 13, rl O?jTa p.E!S p.-1} OV "(E"(WViO"KLV TO 1rv; Wh y pray dOSt thOU hesitate tO declare the whole ? A. Pr. 627. 9. oh etp"(EL jl.E oro 1'-iJ "(pncj>ew (since occasionally the sympathetic o is not addecl ; cp. 3) : Kat cfJ'7P.1 opo-a< KOK cl1rapvoup.at ro p.f] ( opo-at) J both assent that I dicl the deed and rlo not deny that I dicl it S. Ant. 443, ris ... o-oiJ rl7reEi</>8'7 r p.f] (fOL aKoou8ev; who failed to follow you ? X. c. 5.1. 25. 10. ouK dp"(EL J.LE oro 1'-iJ ou "(pO.cj>ELv (very common ; cp. 8) : oK vavrtwo-op.at r p.-i]' o -ye-ywvev 1rv I will not refuse to declare all A. Pr. 786, r 1-"v o~v p.T} ovxt T]Ma .Ivat T T]Ma M-yos ooods clp.<j>to-.fJ'1TE no argument disputes that sweet things a1e sweetP.Phil.13 a.

Very unusual constructions are

11. OUK etp"(EL TO 'YPncJ>ew ( OK v apvolp.?}, TO opv I will not 1'efuse the deed
S.Ph.ll8). 12. o-K etp-y 1'-iJ "{pcicj>ew ( ol!T' -f,p.cpo-fJi}T?}rfE p.-1} rrxe<v neither did he den y th at he had the money D.27. 15). 13. o'K etp"{E -roll 1'-iJ ou 'YpclcJ>ew (once only: E. Hipp. 48, where r p.T} o is read by some).

On the negative afte:

w<Tn:,

see 2759.

II.

p.~

ov wtth the In.finiUve depending on Negatived

Verbs

2745. Any infinitive that would take p.!j, takes p.ry ov (with a negative force), if dependent on a negatived verb. Here ov is the sympathetic negative and is untranslatable.

oK v 1rt8olp.'7 v p.-1} o nia' hp.a.Ofi:v rracpws I cannat consent not to lea1n this exactly as it is S. O. T. 1065.
2746.

p.ry

ov with the infinitive thus often follows

verbs and other

'2750]

NEGATIVE SENTEKCES

625

expressions fonned by oJ (or a-privative) with a positive word and denoting what is impossible, impi'Obable, wrong, senseless, and the like.
ooels oi6s r' IJ'rlv liXXws rywv 11-1J o Ka.ra"'f!a.IJ'ros .Iva.< no one by speaking othenJJise can avoid being ridiculous P. G. 509 a, inrt!IJ'xov ?TJr-IJrmv &>s ox 51J't6v IJ'o< v p.i} o f3oTJ0Ev otKa.Lo<Tvv-o you Jn'omised to make the inquiry on the g1ound that it would not be 1ight fur yint not to assist justice l'. H. 427 e, ,.cf vu dv6YJrov iryop.a.< evrti <To< /1-TJ o Ka! roro xrtpisG'0a.t J thinlc it is utterly senseless for nll' not to gmnt you this favour also P. S. 218 c.

2747. Such expressions are, e.g. ollx -8rn6s r' d~J-1, ox oi6v t' <Tri, ollx !Ka. vos lp.1., aine gtT'Tr., 0var6s JJ.r., o OlK(Lt.l:w cr-rc., ox crt.v <n, o 1rpo<TOoKCO. crTl~ lio')'ov <TTL, oK veKr6v <Tn, d.votci IJ'TL, and many others. 2748. Some expressions denoting repugnance to the moral sense involve a negative idea, and may have the same construclion. Th us, iJJIJ're 'li'.<T<v al<TxVvTJv iiva.t 11-1J o <TVIJ''ll'ovOte<v so that all were ashamed not (i.e. felt it was not righl) to co'perate zealMtsly X. A. 2. 3. 11. So with al1J'xp6v IJ'TL (=o KrtMv <TT<),
OLVOV G'TL,

2749. Instead of /1-TJ o we find also p.-lj, r

/1-TJ o).

wft,

ro

wft,

ro p.~ o (but not ro

a. p.i) (rarely; cp. 2744. 1): I;'Xeyov lin ... o ovv?)IJ'otvro Jl.~ 7rei0e<T0rt< ros 8TJf3a.!oLS they saicl that they could not help submitting to the Thebans X. H. G. 1. 1, al<Txpv . "'fl"'fvEra< JJ. 'YE /1-TJ lOt'AELV it is disgraceful for me at least not to

be willing P. G. 458 d. b. To 1'-iJ (cp. 2744. 3) : l!<f>TJ ox olav r' e,,a., rb p.i} d7roKnva.l IJ- he said it was not possible not to conemn me to dea th P. A. 29 c. c. Toii p.i) (cp. 2744. 5): .;, &,.,.opiii roi! p.i} i,<Tvxci!m the inability to l'est T. 2. 49. d. TOp.~ o,', (cp. 2744. 10): o !J-fPTOL f1redN 'Y ro p.i} o J1.E'Ya.o7rpd'Yp.wv evaL he couleZ not, however, pe1suade them that he was not a man who entmtained grand designs X. H. 5. 2. 36, lilo.o"'fov r Jl.~ o riJJ.vELv o<x it is i1'1'ational not tu make a two-fold qivision P. Soph. 219 e.

f:LiJ

WITH

THE

P ARTICIPLE DEPENDING VEHBS

ON NEGATIVED

~750. IL~ oJ, instead of p,~, is sometimes found with the participle after expressions precedecl by oJ or iuvolving a negative, and 11sually when suclt expressions denote impossibility or moral repugnance. IL~ oJ here denotes an exception, and has the force of except, mdess (cp. d p,~, 2346 a).

oOK lipa IJ'r1v <{>iov rr'iJ <f><XovTL ooi:v Jl.~ oOK dvn<f><ov nothing then is beloved by a lover except it love in Jetum P. Lys. 212 d, OVG''YTJTOS -yp av etTJV roiiivoe JJ.'IJ o- Ka.ro<Krtpwv opav fo1' 1 should prove ha1d c~f heart, clid J not pity such a supplication as this S. O. T. 11 (oviJ'-yTJTOS = oK olKripp.wv, Jl.~ o Ka.TotKrip<>v =el 11-'IJ KG.TOLKTipotp.L),
GREEU: GUAM,

-40

026
p,f,

~.EUATlVE

SENTENCEI::l

AND f.L~ o WITH THE SUB,JUNCTIVE AND INDICATIVE

2751. 'l,he use of IL~ and JL~ ml with the subjunctive is different from that with the infinitive.
a. In doubtful assertions (1801-1802) expressing anxiety, suspicion, suTmiRe, 1-'r, oo of that which may not be true. b. After verbs of feaJ and caution, where 1-'fJ means lest, p.'lJ o means lest not, th at not ( 2221, 2225).
p.f} is used of that which may be true,

2752. p:lj and p.~ o are used with the indicative in doubtful assertions (1772). In questions with p.ry o the o belongs to a single word (2651 d). On ihrws !-'fJ, l!rrws 1-''l! oo with the future, see 1920, 1921, 2203.
REDUNDANT o "WITH 7r1}v, ETC.
~Kros, avv

Redumlant ov appears after the negative words 1r1}v, xwp(>, except, withmit, and after 1rptv (and JL.ov;; usually) pre ceded by a negative, which may 11e involved in a question.
2753.

VVP o <{JalvETa' (fJ vavs) .. 1rov<ra rraVTaXO<TE rrl\Y,v oVK ds 'AOf}vas but now it seems that the ship is sailing eveTywhe1e except to Athens D. 56. 23, rrp!v o' oO/Hv 6p0ws dliha,, Tl <ro' rrov rrovp.vTI -yvo,T' /iv; befoJe thou knowest the facts, what can soJTOW avail thee '! E. Hel. 322, ,t li' f<rTE on ov rrp! Twv p.wv lO.lwv 1-'.J\':..ov -r!-'wpi}<rE<rOE IlovKfii 1) ovx &rrp D~Lwv aVTwv but be assured that you will punish Polycles rather for your own good than for my p1ivate inteTests D. 50. 66. Cp. "j'iTai vous voir avant que vous ne preniez aucune rsolution," "le bon Dieu est cent fois meilleur qu'on ne le dit."

. o p,f,
2754. o p.~, and the compounds of each, are used in emphatic negative predictions and prohibitions. a. oo p.f} marks strong personal interest on the part of the speaker. In its original use it may have belonged to colloquial speech and as such we find iL in comedy ; but in tragedy iL is often used in stately language. o 1-'iJ is rare in the orators. 2755. (I) In negative predictions to denote a strong denial. a. With the (first or second) aorist subjunctive, less often with the present subjunctive (1804). Thus, i)v vKf}<rwwv, ov p.f} rroTE D!J.V IlEo7rovv1}<rw< <rf3.Xw<r<v ~s T>iv xwpav if we are victOJious, the Peloponnesiwis will never invade you1 teTritory T. 4. 95, oMids I-'7JKn 1-'EiVTI Twv rroXp.lwv not one of the enerny will stand his ground any longeT X. A. 4. 8. 13, olJn p.l) <f>V'Y7JTE you shall not escape (a threat) E. Hec. 103}}, ov 1-'fJ <roL ovvwvTa' clvTtfxHv ol rroI-''"' youT enemies will not be able ta withstand you X. Hi. 11. 15. b. With the future indicative (first and third person). Tlms, oll uo< 1-'>i p.EOI>fol-'a.l 7rOTE ne':!eJ" will I follow thee S. EL 1052, oo 1-'r, livvf}<reTa.' KDpos pv Cynts

2759]

NEGATIVE SE.:;'TENCES

627

will not be able to fincl X. C. 8. 1. 5. In indirect discoursc, the future optative or infinitive; as Eet!<T'JruHv . ws o w!J '/roTE 11"p<To<ev he p1ophesied that they neve~ would clest1oy S. Ph. 611, 71"ev o p:l) 1roTE dl 1rpti~e'v 1r6'Atv he declmed that the city would neveT prospe1 E. l>]JOen. 1590.
2756.

(II) In strong prohibitions (cp. 1919).

o p.'l] Kara{Jf7-

a. With the future indicative (second person singular). Thus, "" don't come clown Ar. Vesp. 397.

b. With the aorist subjunctive rarely (1800 N.). Thus o p.1) rJP-f7<TYJS clon't talk twaddle Ar. Nub. 367. Many editors change the aorist subjunctive to the future indicative.

2757. There are two cases in which o IL~ is not used in conjunction, but where each negative has its own verb.

a. A positive command in the future indicative (second person) may be joined by 'AM or o to a prohibition introduced by o 14 'l'hus, o p.1) 'Aa'Af7<Tets 'A'A' Koov!Hwm lp.ol don't prattle but follow me Ar. Nub. 505, o p.'i) oV<Tp.ev1}s ~<Te< ros q,I'Ao<s, 71"a<TEL o 8p.o do not be ang1y with thy f1'iends, but cease thy wrath E, Med. 1151. (In E. Bacch. 348 M with the future is followecl by ,.,..,M with the future.) In such sentences the force of o continues into the 'AM or f clause. Such sentences are generally printed as questions. b. A positive command with o and the future lldicative (second person) may be followed by the future in a prohibition introduced by !L'Y/li or Kat p.f7. Here the clause with o has the form of a question expecting the answer yes, while the whole sentence bas the form of a question expecting the answer no. 'l'hus, o <Ti:y' v<!~., P.'I/O oEL'Ali.v pii; tvilt thou not lceep silence anrl not win fo1' thyse[f the 1'eputation of cowaTdice? ( = lceep silence and do not.get the 1eputation of being a coward) S. Aj. 75, oKov Ka'Aes arv Kat p.ry </>~<Te<s; will you not call him and (will you not) send hirn away? ( = call hirn and don't send him away) r. S. 175 a. Here o is to be taken also with the following clause. Some scholars make the question in the second clause independent of o.
2758. The origin of the use of o p.f7 is obscure and disputed. See Kvicala Zeitschl'ift fT osteTreichische Gymnasien 185G, p. 755; Goodwin llioorls and Tenses 380; Gildersleeve Ame1ican .Tomnal of Phi/ology 3. 202, 23. 1:17; Jebb on Sophocles Ajax 75 (appenclix) ; Chambers Glassical Review 10. 150, 11. 109; Wharton o.c; 10. 239; Wllitelaw o.c. 10. 230, Hl. 277; Sonnenschein o.c. 16. 165; Khner-Gerth Gmmrnatilc cleT griechischen Sprache 2. 514, 8.
NEGATIVES \VITH !fJcrT AND THE INFINITIVE

2759.

la-re

with the infinitive shows the following nses of the

negatives.
a. p.f) in ordinary result chtuses including su ch as express an intended result; aS 11"V 11"0LO!TIV &<TT olK'Y/V p.1) odi6vaL fL'Y/O' t.71"a.<iTTE<I0aL TO fLE"fl<TTOV KaKO they

ttse every e.ffort (so as) to avoid being Jntnishecl ancl Teleased j1orn the g1eatest of etils P. G. 479 c. b. p.fJ sympathetic, after verbR of hinrlP.1"ing; as 11"ex6wPot &ne p.1) p.{J\w 1'efmining from attaclcing 'l'. 1. 4U (cp. 2744.1).

628

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

N. -After verbs of hindming fJO're is rarely used for fJO're p.f, (cp.2744.2); as fJO'T 'fp r7}v O'VVTOp.ov 7rpos TOPS Ile?)Viis a</>LKO'Oat 1] 7rpo TO ulxous rprlpa'f~ p'fe the ravine in front of the walls prevented them f1'om reaching the short eut to the Pellenians X. H. 7. 2. 13. Cp. P. Eu. 305 d. C. ov, when tlJe fJO'TE C]ause depends On a clause itself SUbOrdinate to a verb of saying or thinlcing (2269). d. p.~ ov after a negatived verb of hindering (cp. 2744. 8) ; as oliTe 0'</>as Eopu{3tcili?)S KaTXeLV ouvf,O'eTaL fJO'TE p.1) ou OLaO'KellaO'OfjvaL r7}v O'rpanf,v neither ~vill Eurybiades be able to p1event thej!eetfrom being scatte1'ed Ildt. 8. 57. Also when the tiJO'TE clause depends on a negatived verb (2745); as 1relO'op.ru 'fp oo roO'orov ooMv fJO're p.1) o& Kaws Oavev for I will su.ffe1' nothing so much as not to die nobly S. Ant. 97. e. OV p.~ (Cp. 27 54 a) i as OV'I'WS hreu8Dp.?)Ka aKOV<TaL fJ<TT . . . 00 p.f, <TOV a7roE<</>8w 1 have conceived such a desire to hear that 1 shall not fall behind you P. Phae. 227 d.
ACCUMULATION OF NEGATIVES

2760. If in the same clause a simple negative (o or p.~) with a verb follows a negative, each of the two negatives keeps its own force if they belong to different words or expressions. If they belong to the same word or expression, they make an affirmative.
oo lit ro p.1) aKovrlje<v oOK lf{3aov aOTov it was not because they did not thTow that they did not hit him A nt. 3. o. 6, ou 'TOL jt T1)P AofJ~J-'7TPa ova/)-aL IJ-7} 'f<v by Demeter I am not able to help laughing Ar. Ran.42, o6oe1s oK lf1rMX TL no one was not suffing sornething (i.e. everybody suffered) X. S. 1. 9 ( ooe1s oO'ns oo = evmybody is commonly used for ooods oo), oo!i To v if>opp.lwv' lKevos oox op~ nor does he not see Phmmio (i.e. he sees him very well) D. 36. 46, o&/5' et T<s ilos o-orp6s (lo-nv) o </><oo-orpe no?' if there is any other man who is wise, do es he love wisdom l'. s. 204 a, oOO 'f 0 lolq. 'ffOV?)pos oK av 'fPOLTO O?)p.OO'lq. XP?)<TTOS nor can the man who is base in ptivate prove himself noble in a public capacity Aes. 3. 78.

2761.. If in the same clause one or more componnd negatives follow a negative with the same verb, the compound negative sim ply confirms the first negative.
oMels ooov 1revlq. opdO'EL no one will do anything because of want Ar. Eccl. 605, p.1) 8opu{31,rrv p.?)ilels let no one raise an UJl7'0a7' D. 5.15, Ka1 o6Te 1rMero ooels oui5ap.6eev oiiTe 1rpos r7}v 'f</>pav ovoels f}Me and neithe7' did any one make an attaclc f?om any quarte1 ?W7' did any one come to thf! bTidge X. A. 2. 4. 23, TouTous <jJo{3op.EPOL ~J-ofJ7rOT a<re{3s p.?)OV p.?)O av6<TLOV !J-~T 7rOLf,O'?)T !J-~T {3ouO'?)T holding

them (the gods) in fe ar ne~> er do or intend anything eithm impious 01' unholy X. C. 8. 7. 22. So o ou li< non . . . ne . . quidem, oo p.1) v o&li (2768). oo/5 .,-oo oe, after a negative, means fa7 from it. Cp. "no sonne, were he never so old of years, might not marry" (Ascham's Scholemaster), "We may not, nor will we not sufier this" (Marlowe). a. ln ovS y.p ovS the first negative belongs to the whole sentence, while the

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

629

second limits a particular part. 'l'hus, oo< 'f.p oO roro bj;dHraro for he .iti not deceive me even in this X. C. 7. :.l. ~0 (cp. nUJite Pni1J~ . . . ne . . quidern). Cp. E 22, 0 32. So ouo p ouo B 703, Ki:i51. 2762. The negative of one clause is often re1)eated in the same or in another clause either for emphasis or because of lax structure.

a, ouK, hredin r,Pe l(3ovVITaS p.opov, p.ITaL TOO' gp-yov OUK lirf..7]S who did not, afte? you had planned his death, dme to do tliis deed A. Ag. 1034. The repetition S rhetorica] When t1lB negative S repeated directJy, as OU ITtJ.KpOs, OVX, a-ywv lie not t1ijting, is this struggle, no in truth S. O. C. 587.
SOME NEGATIVE l'HitASES

2763. 1"1J h, ovx l:hrws, rare] y ovx on and I"TJ o1rws, not to speak of, to say nothing of, not only, not only not, so fm frorn (Lat. tantum auemt ut) are idiomatic plnases probably due to an (early, and later often unconscious) ellipsis of a verb of saying. 'l'hus, ou -yw (or ouK lpw) 81rws, !Ln d1rw (M-ye or d,.TI,) on 1 do (will) not say that, let me not sa.y that, do not say that. p.n lin, etc. are often used where these verbal forms cannat be supp lied by reason of the form of the sentence. a. ovx on ( ovx ).,..,s, I"TJ on) . . . .. (Ka.() not only . . . but ( also). Thus, oux OTL fLOVOS 0 Kpirwv lv rwvxiq. ~v, f.. Kat oi <j>[oL auroO not only was C?ito in peace, but his f?iends also X. M. 2. 9. 8, ofJ.a.< .v p.n on luf!T7Jv nva, rv p.l:-ya.v (3a~r<I:i epv KT. 1 think that not rne?ely any private persan but the G1eat King would find, etc. P. A. 40 d. b. ovx o1rws (rarely ovx OTL) or 1"1J Cln . . . .. (Ka.l) is shown by the context to mean not only not (,,o far f1om) . . . but (also). Thus, ox IJ1rws xap<v aVros ~xets, . J.tu:rBWU'Os uaurv Kar rourwvt 1roLTEzlfL not only a1~e you not grateful to them, but you let yott1self out jo1 hi1e as a pulJUc man to thei1 prejndice D.18. 131 ; P-n lin P. R. 581 e. c. ovx 01rws (rarely oilx OTL) or l"~ on (tJ.1J o1rws) . . . I.' oiJS (tJ.1J) or I.'ov (tJ.i)) is shown by the context to mean not only not (so far f?om) . . . but not even. 'l'hus, ox o1rws ri)s Ko<vi)s eullplii.s p.erlxop.v, d.' oo ovElii.s p.erpli.s rvxe'Lv 7J~<w0np.ev not only do we not shme in the gene1al f?eedom, but we 1vere not thought worth y of o/Jtaining even a motlemte se1vitude I. 14. 5, vop.i!;H,avrv P.n OTL liaTa<a eva<, f..' oua' lf..ddiEpov. he considms hirnself not only not a Plataean but not even a free man L. 23. 12. N. When a negative precedes, the meaning may be not only . . . but not even; as rn v olK[i.v . ooev1 .v p.n on 1rpo'LKa ooins, f..f..' oua' giirrov ri)s ~li.s f..a(3wv you would o.tfe1 your house to no one not only gmtis, but not even for a lower priee than it is worth X. M. 1. 0.11. d. tJ.1J oTL (less often ovx 01rws) in the second of two balanced clauses, after an expressed or implied negative in the first clause, means 1nuch less (Lat. nedurn); as o&/'i 7rtv1 p.Tj on va<per0a< TOS /l,v/ipa.s ovva.rov .ryv it WaS not ]JOSSible even to sail, rnuch less to rescue the rnan (i.e. to say nothing of rescuing) X. H. 2. 3. 35. The preceding negative may be contained in a question or be otherwise implicit. 'l'hus, oKet ~ro< prf.wv eiva< ovrw rax fLaOev . onov 1rp.-yp.a, !Ln on ro~rovrov KT.; does it appear to you to be easy to learn so qui<kly any subject whateve?, ?nuch less a sullject of so g1eat i1npo1tance ? 1'. Cmt. 427 e; cp. D. 54. 17.

630

NE<:iATIVE SENTENCES

The rare ol>x iTL in the second member means though (P. Pr. 336 d). e. p.~ T( -ye, in the orators iustea<.l of JJ 8n, after a uegative means much less, after a positive much moTe. Cp. D.l9. ll7, 8. 27. 2764. ol> p.ovov . . . ci. Ka.( (negative a.n' oO) not only . . . but also (Lat. non solum . . . sed etiam). Kal may be omitted: usually when the ci.XXci clause either includes the first clause or is strongly contrasted with it. 'l'hus, ZiJ.cinov -IJiJ.<PI<IFat oo iJ.OVov <j>aDXov, .XXci r ar !Npovs TE Kai X<LiJ.WPOS yo1t put on a cloak that is not meTely wretched but is the same bath summer and winter ali/ce X. M. 1. 6. 2 ; cp. D. 18. 26. 2765. 8 TL p.-fj, l<rov p.~ except, unless. 8 TL (sometimes written 8n) wf!, and 131Fov JL"i!, 81Frx !l"i! are used, witlwut any verb, to limit a preceding assertion (cp. el !l"i! 2346 a). ou -yp ijv Kp-f,P"YJ, 8 TL iJ.TJ JL[a. i!v arfi TV ci.Kp07rOL for there WaS no spring, except one on the aCJopolis itself 'l'. 4. 26, 1rd8ov1Fa O K rourwv plv .vaxwpv, 81Fov iJ.TJ vci-yK1J auraiS XP"fiiFOat philosophy persuading the soul to withdraw from them, except so far as she has to rnake use of thern P. Ph. 83 a, rijs -yijs Kpcirovv 81Fa iJ.TJ 1rpoovres 1roX h rwv o1rwv they we~e maste1s of the count1y, so far as they cou,ld be without advancing fw from thei7 camp 'l'. l. 111 (131Fa. Kpari:v ouvavro).
2766. p.ovov o{J (lit. only not), l<rov o (of time) al most, all but (Lat. tantum non). Thus, iJ.Ovov o owr7rci1F07]v Iwas alrnost torn in pieces D. 5. 5, v6iJ.t!< ... I!IFov oK 1fo7J I[XELV ri} v 1rotv he tho1tght that he al1eady was all but in possession of the city X. H. 6. 2. 16. 2767. ol> p.T)v ciXO., o{J p.VToL cl.XXO. nevertheless, notwithstanding, cp. Lat. ue1um tarnen; the colloquial o -y.p ciXXO. has about the force of nay, f07 indeed, cp ..Lat. non enim ... sed. These elliptical phrases require a verb or some other word to be supplied from the context or general run of the thought; but they often resist strict analysis since the contrasted idea is too vague to be supplied. 'l'hus, ol7T7rOS . iJ.Kpo K.Klvov i!/;Erpax-f!XtiF<v o JLTJP (/;<rpax-f!X<IFEv) ci. 7rliJ.ELv<v KDpos the hmse was within little of thTowing him also over its head; (not th at it did throw him howeve1, but=) neve1theless Cyrus kept his seat X. C.l. 4. 8,
<t iJ.v o'iv ot 0' -IJwfrepot 1rp6-yovot Kat ArxKeoatJLOVLO< <j>toriJLWS 1rpos XX-f,Xovs Efxov, ou p.T]v (scil. 1TEpl KaKwv) .XX 7r<pt KaliFrwv .. t<f>toviK7]1Fav while our ancestors

ancl the Lacedaemonians wrre continuai/y .iealous of each othm (not indeed about base objects b11t =) nevertheless they we1e rivals alwut the noblest objects I. 4. 85,
Kat -yp v oo~ELEV orw -y' <tva.< lf.Xo-yov o iJ.fvrot (scil. li.o-ybv O"rtv) .XX' tiFws /[X" TLv Xb-yov and in fact put th us it would seem to /11; umeasonable , (it is not howeve7 unreasonable but =) nevertheless pe1haps it lias some sense P. Ph. 62 b, JLTJ O"KW1rrt! iJ.', iJJot!X<P', ou -yp .XX' i!xw Ka.Kws ilon't macle me, brothm, nay, for really

I am in a bad way Ar. Ran. 58 (lit. for it is not so but, i.e. it is not a case for mocking, but). In these phrases ci.XM seems to sh6w traces of its original force of otherwise (277 5). 2768. ol> fL~V o{J no1 (pet) a gain, not however that corresponds to the positive ou iJ.TJP (iJ.t!vrot) .XX. 'l'hus, ou iJ.TJP o&M (3o.p(36.povs Etp7]K< noT again has he spoken nf barbarians T. 1. 3, o& p.v ouo' 'AxXs no, nor even Achilles B 703,
o p.1jv oO dvo.ur81rrwt a:roVs KeeVw ros .
~VJ.J.f.Lcixovs

TjJ.LWv av j3X6.:rrTELV not

howeve1 that Ibid you tamely pe1nit thern to ?\}ure our allies T. 1. 82.

2774)'

l'ARTICLES

631

PARTICLES

Under the head of particles are included sentence adverbs (1094) and conjunctions. Many sentence adverbs remai11ed such, sorne sank to mere euclitics, others became pure conjunctions, while stiJl others ftuctuated in function, being now adverbial, now conjunctional, as Ka{ even and ancl, ov3 not euen and nor, y&p in jw:t and for, 7rplv sooner and until or bejore.
2769. 2770. Conjunctions are either co6rdinating or subordinating. The coordinating conjunctions with their several varieties are given in 2163. The subordinating conjunctions are Causal: on, 3u)n, 3~6rrEp, E7rd, rrn3~, OTE, orr6u, W> (2240). Comparative: w>, xrrrEp, KaBarrEp, o7T'w>, r;, 07T'[!, fjrrEp (2463; cp. 2481). Concessive: Kat E (Kd), Kat &v (K<iv), Ei Ka[, !iv Ka (2369). Conditional: d, av, ~v, liv (2283). Consecutive: wau, w> (22;!0). Declarative: on, 3~6n, OVVEKa, MovvEKa, W> (2578). Final: Zva, orrw>, w, fL~, etc. (2103; cp. 2209, 2221). Local: o, orrov, oi, 07rO~, l!.vOa, O()Ev, orroOEV, 07r'(j, etc (2498). Temporal: on, o;r6u, ~v{Ka, E7T'E, 7rt3r], .;,,, fLx.p~, ar, i!w, rrp(v, etc. (2383). Some conjunctions belong to more than one class.

v'

2771. Greek has an extraordinary num ber of sentence adverbs (or particles in the narrow sense) ha'ving a logical or emotional (rhetorical) value. Either alone or in combination these sentence adverbs give a distinctness to the relations between ideas which is foreign to other languages, and often resist translation by separate words, which in l':nglish are frequently over emphatic and cumbersome in comparison to the light and delicate nature of the Greek originals (e.g. ilpa, -y, rol). The force of sncb words is frequently best rendered by pause, stress, or alterations of pitch. To catch the subtle and elusive meaning of the se often apparen tl y insignificant elements of speech challenges the utmost vigilance and skill of the studlnt. 2772. The particles show different degrees of independence as regards their position. Many are completely independent and may occupy any place in the sentence; some may occur only at the beginning (prrpositive particles, as Ttip); others find their place only after one or more words at the beginning (postpositive particles, as -ytip, ) ; and some are attached closely to a preceding word or even fonn compounds with that word wherever it may occur (-y, T). 2773. Sorne verbal forms have virtually become particles, e.g. 11-ye used with the second person plural, opqs used of several persons, parenthetic ot-w.<, ili]ov
5n, ev oil'

on, i tO"IJ' on (258l>). 2774. As regards their mNminq, particles may be arranged in classes, e.g. a.dve1sative, affirmative, asseverative, concessive, confirmative, corljunctive, infer-

632

PARTICLES: "A,"A,a

ential, intensive, interrogative, limitative, negative, etc. These classes cannat always be sharply distinguished : some particles fall under two or more classes. Many particles, which serve to set forth the logical relation between clauses, had original! y on! y an intensive or confirmatory force that was confined to their own clause. The following sections deal only with the commoner uses of the most noteworthy partiales.

ci>..M
2775. .6., a strongly adversative conjunction (stronger than ok),

connects sentences and clauses, and eorresponds pretty closely to bnt; at times MM ueed not or cannot be translated (2781 b). In form (but with changed accent) J..U was originally the same word as the accusative neuter plural <i.a other things used adverbial.ly = on the other hand. J..U marks opposition, contrast, protest, difference, objection, or limitation ; and is thus used both where one notion entirely excludes another and where two notions are not mutually exclusive. ,\,\ is often freely repeated in successive clauses.
2776. The Antecedent Statement is Negative. -In its simplest use .XM introduces a positive statement after a negative clause. 'fhus, o&K .Pops opKo<
1ri<rns, . t-t-' 5pKwP .wljp

his oath is not the warrant of a man, but the man is warrant of his oath A. fr. 304, o& 'Yp Kpav"fii .t-X <T"f ws <hv<Trv rrpo<T<ra.P fur they came on, not with shouts, but with as little noise as possible X. A. 1. 8. 11.
a. After a question implying a negative answer or a question to be .refuted

ciX:\cl may have the force of (nay) 1ather, on the contm1y. 'fhus, rl o< <r< Uvat .. ' .XM ILXovs rrp.lj;ov what's the necd of your going? Nay rathe1 send athers X. A. 4. 6. 19. Here .XX' o (p.?j) has the force of and not mther (2781 b); as ri ii lp.f3av b"foP rr<p1 rorov, .:\ ' o&xtrrporr<P on ovrw ?ro<1)<Ts; why is it

necessmy to propose a discussion about this and not rather announce that you will have it so? X. C. 2. 2. 19.
2777. After a negative clause, or a question implying a negative answer,
XXa, or more commonly the colloquial .X:\' 1/, may mean except, the combination being equivalent either to ciXM orto -lj. In the preceding clause a form of /1:\os or i!TEpos is often expressed. Thus, g,.a<<T< v<v oliTLs .t-1-' l"fw no one smote him except myself S. O. T. 1331, oM!i!v i8{Xovres lrra.<P<v .XX' 1} rov rrXorov wishin[! to p1aise nothing except wealth P. R 330 c (here eiX:\' 1f is detached from oob), riva. ilXXov gxov<T< D"fov f3o1J8ovTEs p.ol X!-' 1) rv op06v Kr .; what other rea~un

have they fur suppmtin[! me except the true reason, etc.? P. A. 34 b. a. Distinguish the UBe of .XX' 1f except (=fi p.?j) in r "fOVP <r'f/p.<oP i!TEpov q,aiv<ra<, .t-1-' 1) o KaOopw the deviee at any rate appears different, unless I can't see
Ar. Eq. 953. 2778. oi>Sv .' ~ nothing but is also used elliptically, apparently by an original suppression of a form of 1ro<w or 'Yi'Yop.a<; in effect, however, the phrase has acquired a pmely adverbial sense (merely). Th us, o<<<P8<ipp.<8a. vrr' .opwv o&Mv .t-1-' 1} </><PiKl~ ovap.wv we have veen ndned by men who a1e able (to do) nothing except deceive (i.e. able mm ely to deceive) I. 8. 36.

P AH.'CLES :

"'J,:}..a

633

a. With the above use compare o~Sv lLXo ~ nothing else than, used without, and with, ellipse; as o! p,Dpwt !7r7r<s ovov tio 7) p,vpwl <nv liv0pw7rot your ten thousand horse are nothing more ( else) than ten thousand men X. A. 3. 2. 18, oUv lio i) 7rOtv Tl]v auTo 1romrwv ~KaoTos doing nothing else than each abandoning his oum city T. 2. 16. So also ovlifP 11:\o if D. 8. 27. Cp. o o~8v ij, as in lio ofv 7) K ")'ijs tvaup,cixouv they did nothing else than conduct (=they pmctically conducted) a sea-fight from the land T. 4. 14. Cp. 946, 2652. 2779. The origin of :\:\' if is disputed, some scholars regarding X\' as :\M (originally 11:\:\a, 2775), while others derive :\}..' directly from 1!:\:\o, which is thought to have lost its force and consequently its accent. In some passages the Mss. do not distinguish between :\ ' and liH' ; and H' if and 11\Xo if differ only slightly in meaning. In some of the above cases XI\ has an adjectival force, in some it hovers between an adjective and a conjunction, and in others it clearly has b'ecome a conjunction. 2780. After a comparative (p-fiov, To 1rt!ov) in a negative clause d:\M has the force of as. Th us, Kal fiTTtv o 7rO<p,os ox IJ1rwv TO 1rov ciM iia1r<iv1)s and war is not so mttch (lit. more) a matter of arms as (but rather) of money T. 1. 83. Here the clause with d:\M is more emphatic than if if had been used. Cp. "there needed no more but to ad vance one step" : Steele. 2781. The Antecedent Statement is Affirmative.- d:\M is sometimes found after an affirmative sta te ment. a. The antecedent clause often has a concessive force, and frequently takes p.h (2900). Thus, T p.v KaO' ftp.s fp,oqe OOKEl Kaws lix<lP. .:\:\ r ?rci"j'ta 7rE
p.< the pwt wheTe we we seems to me to be well disposed, but the 1oings cause me

uneasiness X. C. 7.1. 16. b. ci:\:\' o& (p.-1,) after an affirmative statement often has the force of and not, and not rathm, instead of (sometimes with a touch of irony). Thus, Ki0<v a' oK v1Jhi5< ftp7rauil11 she was cw-ried o.tr fTom the1e and not (or simply not) frorn hme P. Phae. 229 d, lp.ol anljovTat .\:\' ox aTos they a1e ang1y with me instead of (or an cl not ratheT with) themselves P. A. 23 c. In such cases Kal o (p.f,) would not repudiate the opposition. 2782. 6.1\1\6. in Apodosis.-After a concession or a condition expressed or implied, the apodosis 1i1ay be emphatically introduced by 6.1\M., cl.X1\. ... ye, cl.U' ov ye still, yet, at least. Tlms, El uwp,a oooP, a)\ , 0 POVS fEU0Epos if the body is enslaved, the mi nd at least is jTee A. fr. 854, El il' v 1ri1Tt TOJ!Tots TJTT'f)p.<Oa, :\:\ TO ")'t Tot 1rp Kp<TT?P Kap1ro ITT<v but if we should be bajj!ed in all these points, still, as they say, jl1e is st1onger than the j1uit of the field X. A. 2. 5. 19. So also in clauses other than conditional; as d:\:\' bd ... 1radpa Tovo' ip.v oK vh\T', . :\\' p, . olKTipaTE but since ye did not bea1 with my father, pity me at least S. O. C. 241. 2783. .XM. attached to Single Words.- dH., attached to a single word in an adverbial sense, may stand in the interior of the sentence (not in Hom.). Thus, cl.XX. vvv now at least, as in Tl oijT' av a. pi)p "' ~T' wif><op,' h<h, how pray, can I serve thee even now? S. Ant. 552. So w.ith ")', as iv ouv .:\M vv "Y' ~n . . . fiJ<1,1T1)TE if ther~{o1e y ou still desire even now D. 3. 33 (and often in D.). Here .\:\ vv implies El p,~ 1rp6TEpov. .:\M sometimes apparently implies ,; p.f,

634
n do

P ARTICLES : t._t._a

or <IJJ aoLs, etc., as f-y' }..M roro say this at least (say but this) S. E1.415. 2784. ci.a opposing Whole Sentences. - <l<i well, well but, nay but, however is often used, especially at the beginning of a speech, in opposition either to something said (or supposed to be meant) by another, orto a latent feeling in the mind of the writer or speaker himself. Thus, at 11"pwrov p.v Jl.V1!1J'0f)IJ'op.a. rewra.ov Kar' p.ov e71"< well, I will first allude to the charge against me which he mentioned last X. H. 2. 3. 35, ' IJJ<f>ee ph Kpos ti) v 71"<1 o rere<r1/K<v Kr . well, I would that Cyrus wme alive; but since he is dead, etc. X. A. 2. 1. 4. Often of remonstrance or protest, as ' p:fJxavov nay, it is impossible E. El. 529. d.}..M is also especially common wh en a previous train of thought or remark is impatiently interrupted, as t rara p.v rl oe -yELv; but what is the nee of recounting this? S. Ph. 11. Similarly in a. Iteplies ( often in quick, abrupt, or decisive answers) : f/pero 8 .,., et11 r 'n1v(111JJ.O.. 0 o' 1!"Kptvaro. Zes IJ'WT+,p Ka! viK11" 0 Of Kpos KoIJ's 'At o!xop.a.l re, ~</>11, Ka.l roro ~IJ'rw he asked what the watchwo1cl was; and he i'eplied : " Zeus the

saviour and Victo1y ; " and Cy1us, on heming this, said, " Well, I accept it and so let it be" X. A.l. 8. 17. b. Assent, with an adversative sense implied (cp. oh, well) : }..}..' el ooKe, xwpwp.ev well, if it pleases thee, let us be going S. Ph. 645. c. Appeals, exhortations, proposais, and commands: }..}..' twp.ev but let us go P. Pr. 311 a, }..}..' p.ol "el(lou Ka.! p.+, i!ws 1role nay, take my advice and don't refuse P. Cr. 45 a. The tone here is often impatient. d. Wishes and imprecations: ' ervxol11s well, my blessings on thee 1 S. O. T. 1478. e. Questions, to mark surprise: 1rws e7!"as; }..}..' fi Kal IJ'o<f>o< 11(ias tiJv; what dost 'thou mean ? can it !'eally be that thou mt subtle too and without my knowing it? E. Ale. 58. 2785. d.}..M is often used when a speaker introduces a supposed objection (either in his own name or in that 'of his opponent), and immediately answers it; as d,}..}..t v+, Tv Ala Ki:v' av tiJ'ws 7!"ot 1rpos rara Kr . but, by Zeus, he might pe1haps say in 1eply to this, etc. D. 20. 3. }..M. may here put the supposed objection and also give the answer. Thus, rl ')'p Ka! fiovMp.evot p.er<11"p.11"eiJ'8' av
aros v roT4J r</l KaLpfP; l1rl r+,v elpfwrJv; ' 7ri)px<v l!7riJ'LV 0,}..}..' f?rl rov 1!"6e!J.Ov; }..}..' arol 11"<p! Tijs p-f}v-qs lf3ov<eiJ'(Ie for with what possible desire would you

have been sending them at that jw~ctttre? With a view to peace? Why (but) peace was open to ail. With a view to war? Why (but) yott were yourselves delibmating about peace D. 18. 24. Cp. French mais introducing a reply to a question. a. So in rapid dialogue objections may take the form of questions, in which each }..M after the first may be rendered by o1. Cp. 2654. 2786. .a with other Particles.- For example : ci.>..M "ta.? 2816 ; on o{> "f.p .>..., see 2767. ci.. . . ye but at any mte. ci.a y TOL ( To( ye) y et at least, y et be sure. .. 81] well then.

2790]

PARTJCLES: llpa

63G

&.>.' ~; wh y how? can it reallyiJe thflt? whflt, can it be true? Here ,n,l\ marks surprise, while 1j a~kH the question. &.. p.vToL nay, but; well, however; yet trul.lf. On oil p.vToL &.6., see 2767. &.. p.f)v nay, but; but then; but su1ely. Often to introduce an objection, to reject an alternative, often merely to introduce a new idea or to resume an interrupted thought. On oil p.iJv &.M., see 27()7. &.' Of.LWS but still. Often without a verb, to introduce the reply to an objection. &.' oil5 is sometimes used elliptically, as in !nrp wv ohos 1r'J)yy< 1rpos fJJAs l\l\' oo JAKpbv nay, tlwe is not even eve1 so little (not only not a great deal but not even a little) conceming which he reported to you D. 19.37. &.' oii5 p.v 51] is often used to reject an alternative. &.' ovv (')'E) but then, well then, well at any mte; stronger than o' ou v.

O. pa.
2787. &pa. (Epie li.pa and enclitic d.p before a consonant, prf usually aiter monosyllables; all postpositive), a connective, confirmatory, and inferential particle marking the immediate connection and suecession of events and thoughts; the natural, direct, and expeeted eonsequence of a previous statement of the existing situation, or of the realizatiou of experienee of some sort; and agreement of varions kinds, as between assertion and reality, cause and result, premise . and conclusion, explanation and. what was to be explained.

a. /Lpct marks a consequence drawn from the connection of thought, and expresses impression or feeling; the stronger ovv marks a consequence drawn from facts (a positive conclusion).
2788. The etymology of /Lpa, and hence its original meaning, is obscure. Sorne derive it from the root p, seen in p-ctp-lcrKw fit, join, /Lpn just; and thus regard the proper sense as .fittingly, acconlingly. Others think the earliest meaning was truly, j01sootl! and connect /Lpct with a lost adj. pls, surviving in lipt-crros, pl-"fvwros. On this interpretation /Lpa would originally assert the truth of its own clause. lipct is found also in J.pct and ')'rip. 2789. /Lpct is used in Homer much more freely than in Attic, and often so as to defy exact translation. In general/Lpct in Epie marks immediate connection and succession, a natural consequence of something already said or doue; gives an explanation of an antecedent statement; or is used in recapitulations and transitions. Thns, ctr.p 1rfi p' 1f"f<pii<V . . . , {'J'ii p' tp.Ev <ls "fop'l)v but when they we1e collected, then he started to go tn the assembly (3 9, &s gq,all', o1 o' lipct 1rvr<s K>iv f')'vovro crtw1rfl tlws he spake, and all accordingly became hushed in silence H 92, crrov 0< cr</><v 1fvp.< M<crctVws, 5v pa <Tv(3wr'f!s avrs Krrwaro and JJiesaulius distributed food to them, a slave whom (and this was the reas on for his so doing) the swinehmd had acquired ~ 440, &s ILp' lq,wv-qrr<v Kal 1r ~o rb!;ov 1fii'YJK<v tlms then he spalce and put the bow from him 1> 163. So also in the later language; as pwrrw?Js 15 ctrov rijs JA'YJrpos .. 1rEKpivaro lipa o Kvpos on his rnother' s questioning him Cy1us natumlly replied X. O. 1. 3. 2. 2790. In Attic, and in part also in Homer, /Lpa marks an inference (r-onse-

636

PARTICLES: apa

quently, so then, therefore, it seems, after all, of couTse, etc.). Thus, ehev arn<;
OTL fJautES o p.axerat lUKa i}p.epwv. KiJpos o' 1fV. oK {ipa lin p,axerat, el v rarats o J.taXETa< ras i}p.pa.ts tl1e seer said to hiln that the king would not fight

within ten days. .And Cyrus answmed : " Well then if he does not fight within that time he will notfight at all " X. A. 1. 7. J8, oOels 1roro 7rt8vp., tL\\ XP'YJUTo 1roro , 1ravrEs -yp IJ.pa. rwv -ya8wv 1rt8p,outv no one desi?es d1ink merely, but good drink, since of course everybody desi?'es good things P. R. 438 a. 2791. lipa. is often used of direct logical conclusions in conducting an argument ( especially in Plato) ; as rl ovv 7rpl if;xfis ')'Of.'EV j op.rov ~ aop.rov <va.t j
ox op.r6v. dtos lipa. j va.i. Of.'OLOTpov lf.pa. if!xiJ uwp,a.r6s unv r(i, dto<, TO Of r<; op'.T(/J what then do we say about the soul? That it is visible or invisible fi' Not

visible. Then it 1:s invisible fi' Yes. ConHequently soul has a close1' resemblance to the invisiiJle than the body, and the latte~ to the visible P. Ph. 79 b. 2792. In the argument ex contrario set forth in clauses with p,h and O, {ipa., usually meaning in sooth, is commonly placed with the second clause (P. Ph. 80 d, R. 445 b), occasionally with the first (P. Cr. 46 d, L. 840 b), or with both (P. Ph. 97 a, R. 600 c). 2793. In direct questions iipa. adds liveliness, while at the same time it marks connection or consequence. So rls {ipa who then? 1rws lf.pa how then? In questions of anxiety iipa. marks increase of feeling. Th us, rl p,' iipa. rl p.' ofKe<s; wh y then, why dost thou dest?'oy me ? S. Ant. 1285. 2794. ilpa occurs in questions in which the admissibility of one opinion is inferred from the rejection of another. Thus, el'Jl' p.o<, lt<j>rJ, if) eeoo6r1J, ifuTL uot a-ypos j OK ~p.ot-y'' li<P'I a 1 ilpa olKl. 7rpour5oous lixouua. j 'tell me,' said he, ' Theodote, have you an estate?' 'Not I indeed,' saicl she. 'But pe?'haps then you havea house that brings in an income ? ' X. M. 3. 11. 4. Such questions are often ironical (P. A. 25 a). 2795. llpa. is often used to indicate new perception, or surprise genuine or affected ; as wh en the truth is just' realized after a previous erroneous opinion and one finds oneself undeceived either agreeably or disitgreeably. So, especially with the imperfect of Eva<, lf.pa. means after all, it seems, why then, so then, sure enough. See 1902. 2796. El &pa., :v &pa. if really, if ajter all, if indeed, are commonly used of that which is improbable or undesirable; Et (:v) fJ.TJ &pa. unless peThaps (nisi forte, nisi ve1o) is often ironical. Thus, <llf.pa -yt!-yov.v ws ovrot l!ryov if indeecl it clid take place as they said D. 56. 28, Kal p,-lfv El Kal ror' IJ.pa. oE p,' El1rEv pnd yet if I must after all say this too 18. 317, 7rO<iK<S ros 'AOrJvalots 7rctp'vE<, f)v lf.pa 1ror Kar -yfjv {JtaiT8wut .. ras vauul 1rpos a1ra.vras dv8liT-rau8a he often counselled the .Athenians, ~f after all they shou7d ever be ha1d pressecl on the land side, to fight the woTld with theil' jleet T. 1. 93, 1rws v ovv o rowros dv-lfp ota</J8Elpot ros vlous ; El ILTJ llpa 7] -rfjs dperijs l1rtp,Eta ota<f>Oopd euTLv how then could su ch a rnan cor1upt the young ? unless percha nee the study ofvirtue is coTruption X. M. 1. 2. 8. 2797. El (lv) lf.pa is common after ITK07rw, etc. See 2672.
2798. {ipa is often used, especially with ws, to introduce the statement of others which, in the view of the speaker, is (usually) to be rejecterl. Thns, <iKow

PARTICLES: lipa, Tap, av

637

arov lpii:v w~ lip' 'yw 'lf'ttVTWV wv KaT7J"fOPW KOLPWPO~ -y-yOPfL I heaT that he is going to say that 1 jorsooth (or if you please) have been a paTtne1 in all that I denounced D.19. 202. 2799. Attic has, in bimembral clauses, ehe &pa. . . . t,.e or d,-e ... et,-e l.pn, as dr' 't-.7Jil~ er' lip' ovv p,arTJV whether tntly OT a.fter all, it may be, falsely S. Ph. 345. Hom. has also a similar use with oi!re . ollu, and ;) ... 1]. Hom. has lipa lipa ('Y 887).

a. pa. "'
2800. clpn, a confirmative particle from~+ d.pa, is used in lyric and dramatic poetry in the sense of d.pa. J.pa is postpositive, except in New Comedy.
ciov ~pa roi!p-yov, oK lp,v KEK-f}<ura.t it shall then l;e called thy wo1k, not mine S. Aj.1368. Often with rl~, as rl~ cip' lp,o -yvotr' av a8)\Lwrepo~; who then could be more wretched than I am ? Trag. fr. 280. On _interrogative ~pa, see 2650, 2651. Epie ~ pn is both confirmatory and interrogative.

chcl.p

+ d.p) usually poetical, but found in Xenophon and Plato, is an adversative conjunction commonly used-to introduce a strong or surprising contrast (but, bnt yet, howe'/Jet); sometimes to introdnce a slight contrast (and, and then), but one stronger than that marked by 8. r.p is common as a correlative to ftv. It is often found in lively questions to introduce an objection; in rapid transitions; and sometimes it serves to introdnce the apodosis of a conditional sentence. d.T.p was largely displaced by the stronger .,\,\..
2801.

mip (prepositive; Hom. also avr.p from a~Tf

a..O
2802. n{) (postpositive), an adversative particle meaning on the othet hand, on the contraty (properly again). In Hom. it serves as a correlative to ftv or ~ -roL, and to introduce the apodosis of conditional or relative clauses.

au is often used with persona] pronouns, as <D. <Y av . .. "f<but do yon in tum tell us X. S. 3. 5; and is often added to i5, as ol "E't-.7Jve~ hri}<Yav . o! i5' av fJapfJapot oK li5xovro the Greelcs came on, but the barbarians un their part did

not wait to

rec~ive thern :X. A.l. 10. 11. tives n{),-e (poe tic) and a.{)Ss.

Connected in meaning are the deriva-

"{clp
(postpositive) in jact, indeed, and for, a confirmatory adverb and a cansal conjunction. As a conjunction, y.p usually stands after the first word in its clause; as an ad verb, its position is
2803.
y.p

638

P ARTICLES: rydp

freer. yp is especially common in sentences which offer a reason for, or an explanation of, a preceding or following statement. It may be used in successive clauses.
a. "(apis from 'Y + lip ( = 11pa), 'YI originally giving prominence either to the word it followed or to the wlwle clause, while /J.pa marked this prominence as due to something previously expressed or latent in the context.. 'l'he compound "fdp originally emphasized a thonght either as the result of existing circumstances or as a patent and weil known fact. In most uses of the word, however, the force of its component parts cannot be distinguished; nor is it clear in many cases whether 'YiiP is a conjunctiou or an aclverb marking assurance. 2804. Adverbial 'Ydp appears in questions, auswers, and wishes; and in many other cases where recourse is had to,conscious or unconscious ellipse by those scholars who hold that -ydp is al ways a conjunction. Ellipse is sometinws natural and easy, but often clumsy and artificial. 'l'hough wc find in pmallel use both incomplete and complete clauses with -ydp, it is improbable that the Greeks were conscious of the need of any supplement to explain the thought. In many uses "(ip has become formulaic, serving only to show the natural agreement with the existing situation. 2805. In questions, "fap asks for confirmation of a preceding statement, or expresses assent or dissent; asks whether an act before mentioned was not reasonable ; asks <t question prompted by some form of emotion ; and serves to indicate transition, etc. a. In qneBtions "fdp often marks surprise or indignation, and may frequently be translated by what, why, then, really, sure/y. Thus, TavTi "1-.f-ym <J <JTpannv 'lrTwxs &v; l-yw -ydp Elp.< 7rTwx6s; do y ou, beygar that you rtre, address your general thus? what! I a beugm? Ar. Ach. 593, 'lj tii -yp .wryp; is the man rPally alive 9 S. EL 12~1, otEL "fdp ""' p.ax<J8a< .. Tov i!E</J6v; do yon really think that yonr b1other is going tojight? X. A. 1. 7. G. So Tis -ydp; who then, why who? b. Brief interrogative fornmlae l)-Sking for confirmation of a preceding statement are: Tt y6.p; what then, how then, how else? Ti -yap also serves as a formula of transition (now, v;ell then, now what ... , furthe1"11W1"e). ~ y6.p; is it not so? surely this is so? (cp. n'est ce pas). Often of surprise. oil y6.p; is it not so? often in indignant questions; when not standing alone, why not? .,...;;s -y6.p; 1rollev -y6.p; imply that something is impossible (often of surprise). Cp. 1rws "fp oi!; in negative rhetorical questions. assent, assurance, sometimes dissent. Thus, iJE<vv 'Yp oU P'TJTOV dread indeed is the bwden of the disease. Aye dread indeed and beyond all wmds S. Ph. 755, of-Wo-ys oi'iv ?rEpi p. iJ.OLKOS 'YE"fEvfj<JBa<; 'lj "tp dvd-yK'J do you then conjess that ymt have p1oved yowself ~M~inst toward me? In truth I must incleecl X. A. 1. G. 8, p.7JiJ' ai JLTfTpEs T 1ra.Li!la KoE<p.aTovvTwv p.-lj -ydp, </J'TJ no1 let mothers j1ighten theil" children. No indeed, sal he 1'. n. 381 e, <P's Tai!' oilv; p.-lj </Jpovw -yp o& </J<w f""fE<v dost thou then cons<mt to this? No, fol" J mn not wont to utt<'r wonls 1 do not mean S. O. T. HJ20. 2806. In answers -ydp marks OE<v6v "fE TO7rl<Ja""(JLa. Tov vo<J-fJJLaTos.

P ARTICLES: rydp
a.

639

"'fdp- is common in brief answers, as after o, oe, gotK<, elK6s, l'Yw, wp.o'MyqSo in the rhetorical questions 1rws "'(ap; 1rws 'Yp oii; used as answers. 2807. In wishes : el 'Yp iv roDT'f' d7J wo1tld th at it depended on th at P. Pr. 310 d, Ka.Kws "'(p ~ooLO oh that you might peTish wl'etche<lly E. Cyc. ~61. Here "trip marks the agreement of the wish with the existing situation. 2808. Explanatory (or prefatory) yci.p has the force of now, namely, that is, foT example; but usually is not to be translated, and especially when the preceding sentence contaii\s a verb of saying, showing, etc. It usually introduces, as an explanation, the details of that which was promised in an incomplete or general statement; sometimes, without any such statement, it intwduces a new fact. Whether this 'Ydp is an adverb or a conjunction is uncertain. Thus, ooK< rolvvv !J.OL xa.pthrrepov eiva.t p.fJov tp.P "'(ELP. 1jv "'(p ?rOT< KT. I tl!inlc it will be ?nOTe intmesting to tell you a rnyth. Once 11pon a time the1e was, etc. P. Pr. 320 c, ovTw 'Yp o-Ko?reTE look at it in this light L. 19.34 (at the beginning of a new point in the discussion). 2809. Explanatory -yp often introduces a clause in apposition to a preceding demonstrative, to such expressions as r<Kp.-f;pwv li or p.apTapwv 0 now the pmof is this, ilfjl\ov 0 (eo-n v) it is clear, r M p."'f<O"Tov but, what is of the g1eatest npo1tance, orto relative clauses (995). Thus, ws o' lin p./-.1\ov fJappfls, Ka.! Tooe Ka.ra.vb7Jcrov o! plv "'(p (explaining rboe) ?rop.w< 1ro p.v dTTovb elrn vv i) 1rp!v 7}rT7JfJfjva.< vrp' -i}p.wv and that you rnay be still more enconraged, consider this fact too. The enemy (namely) are much feweT now than they were befme they -we?'e beaten by us X. C. 5. 2. 3ll, <vvo-f;crwp.ev o Kc Tyoe, ws 1ro~ 1rls <crnv &."'(afJv a.T ilva.t. ilvov "'fp fJiiTepbv io-n v T nfJvva.< Kr . let us consler the matte1 also in this way and we shall see that the1e is abundant reason to hope that it is a good: now cleath, nwst be one of two things, etc. P. A. 40 c, p.a.pTupwv ol A-f;ou "'fp Ka.8a.tpop.h7Js KT. and this is a J??'oof of it : now whm~.Delos ~vas being pur{(ied, etc. T. 1. 8, Of 7rrivrwv XET.uiJrarov. os ')'p btJ.oo'}'fwaL,U11 &v 'lrOP'Y}por&.rous elvat rwv ?roTwv, ToV7ovs ?r<o-TaT<iTous rpaaKa.s -i}"'(o6p.e8a Tfjs ?roITElis <va.r but the most aborninalJle C!( all is this: we conside?' the most t1ustworthy guaTdians of the State to be those men whom we shoul!l ag1ee we?'e the ~vo?'st citizens I. 8. 53. 2810. Causal -yci.p is a conjunction :fm (nam, enim). It serves to introduce a cause of, or a reason for, an action bef ore mentioned; to justify a preceding utterance ; to confirm the truth of a previous statement. Causal -yp often refers to a thought irnplied in wh athas precedcd. Th us, eKra. 'Y'"YPWIJ"Kw gp.?rELpos "'fp (causal) Eip.t KO.t Tfjs xwpis TWP ITarpa."'(6PWV Ka.! Tfjs ouvp.ews. txEL -yp (explanatory) p.<f>onpa., Ka.! 1reoia. Ktcrra. Ka.! 5p7J uyriJ6TaTa I must tell whclt I know, foT I am acquainted with the cmmt1'Y of the Paphlagonians ancl its 1esounes; now the co~mt1y has very fertile plains ancl very lojly mountains X. A. 5.li. G, loo, ovcrT7JPe roTo "'fp cr' i!xw p.6vov ?rpoo-Et?rev al as, ill-fatecl one! for by this name alone can I address thee S. O. T. 1071, ?r<IJ"Tevop.7Jv o ?ro Tw-v Aa.xeoat}-Lovlwv- o -yp /iv p.e l!?rEp.?rov ?rtv 1rps D}-Ls but I was truBted by the Lacedaemonians; fm ( otherwise, i.e. el p.~ ?rl<rTEvov) they would not have sent me a1k toy ou P. A. 30 c. 2811. Anticipatory -yci.p states the cause, justifies the u tterance, or gives the explanation, of something set forth in the main clause which follows. The main clause usually contains an inferential word, a demonstr:ttive painting backward, ra.t.

60

P ARTICLES:

rydp

[z8Iz

or Ka.l, Ol, XX<L; or stands without a connective. AnUcipatory -yap may often be rendered by since, but is often omitted in translation. 'l'bus, ~n rolvuv Ko<rau Kal raoe.
E1fL elv -yp p,wv K1ropeu<rovral
T<VE<.

op,aL vv f3t!Xrurrov evaL KT.

listen the1efore to this p1oposal also. Some of y ou will be going out to plunder. Now it is my opinion that it is best, etc. X. A. 5. 1. 8, l<reMwv o r1)v raxl<rrnv, 1j v -yap ol 1ra< ei< p,ovos , rorov h?rp,?reL and when he had come in sttaight~ way, he sent out his son, f01' he had one only son Hdt. 1. 119, wrploL, ou 'Y<ip r' tiip,ev li1r'!J !6</Jo< ovo' o1r?1 1jws XM </Jpa!wp,eiJa Kr. friends, since we do not lcnow whete is the place of darkness no1 of the dawn, let us conside1, etc. K 190, w rplrare, <r1rovoal -yap el<rl <ro< p,6v~;J, p,t!rpn<rov elp't)vn< rl p.o< my dear fellow, since you alone have got a truce, measure me out a bit of peace Ar. Ach. 102. a. In this construction -y<Lp may be an ad verb, not a conjunction. Cases of explanatory "(ap (2808) and of parenthetical -yap (2812), especially after vocatives, may fall under 2811.
2812. The clause with -yap since is often inserted parenthetically in the clause which it is intended to explain; as o o (Kpivov<rL -yp f3o?i Kal ou if;'t]<P'i') ouK ~<P"l OLa"(L"(vw<rK<LV TfJv f3o1)v 1rorpii p,el!wv but, since they decide by shouts and not by ballot, he said he could not decide which side shouted the louder T. 1. 87. 2813. Ka.t -y6.p has in general two distinct meanings according 'as -yap is an adverb or a conjunction. As Ka! -yap has become a formula, it is often uncertain which of the two words is the adverb, which the conjunction. 2814. (I) Ka.t -y6.p and in fact, and indeed, Kal being a conjunction, and 'Yc<p an adverb. Here the clause in which KaL -yap stands is added as a new and hnportant thought ; where 'Yap alone would state the reason or the explanation with lessindependence and with slighter emphasis. The negative is ooo -yap. Thus KVpos 0' OpWv ros .,E.1JPas PIKWvras rO Ka8' aros . 1rEf.J...ro 0 TL 7rOdJffEt
fJa(JL.eVs. Kal "'(p -Oet airrOv Ort piuov :txot ro IIEpUtKO crr.pareVJJ.a-ros on seeing

the Greeks victo1ious over the troops opposed to them, Cy1us watched to see what the king would do; and in fact he lcnew that he cormnanded the centTe of the PeTsian foTce X. A. 1. 8. 21 (cp. 1. 1. 6, 2. 5. 5, 2. 6. 2). So often in affirmative responses: 7} oK ')'a:rrf}aets rorwv rv'xdvwv; yW t-tv 'YP v :ya7rc.t!TJv. Ka~ "'fp "(w, ~<P"l or will you not be content if you obtain this ? For my paTt I shall be . .And so shall I, he said P. R.. 473 b. a. Ka.i '(.p Ka.( and even is Ka! 'Yap and in fact renforced by Kal. Thus, Kal -y.p Kal ii.Oa rpalveTo auro< and in fact it looked to thern as if there was perject safety in so doing T. 4. 108. The negative is ouM -y.p ouot! (2938).
2815. (II) Ka.i -y6.p .fo1' even, for also. Here Kai is an adverb affecting a single word, severa! words, or the whole sentence, and "{ap is a conjunction. The ngative is ouo 'YUP Th us, KC -yp OUTOL fo1' these too P. A. 22 c, Kai -yp 1joLK1/P.voL <r'Y"l<rop,e<riJa for even wronged as I am l' ll keep silent E. Med. 314, Kal -yp p.ovos +noT' .v ova<riJa< ?reliJE<v for, though quite unaicled, he would think that he was able to persuade X. M. 1. 2. 11. a. Ko.t -y.p . Ka.( fo1' both .. :and: here Kal is correlated with a second Kal; as Kai 'Y.P 'YLalvou<rLV oi T <rwpara eli ~xovus Kal l<rx6ou<rL .fo1' those who kecp their bodies in good condition me both healthy and st1ong X. M. 3. 12. 4.

2819]

PARTICLES:

rydp

641

2816. .~>... -ycl.p occurs both in conjunction and separated by one or severa! words, which are generally emphatic. 2817. First Form (often but since, since however): here there are two predicates. In prose separation is the rule. Thus, <iil.il.', ou 'YP g... e,ee, o<oo r q,pos but since he could not pe1suade he1, he gave her the mantle Hdt. 9. 109, <iil.il.' t<rws 'Yp Ka! I!I.I.OL raur lviJ!f.'OvraL, 1-'h UVO.f.'fVWf.'EV I!I.I.Ol!S lep' -iJf.'S lMev KT. since however others too perhaps entertain the same opinion, let us not wait for othe1s to come tous, etc. X. A. 3. 1. 24. In poetry the words are generally not separated. Thus, aI. 'YP Kplovra I.ITITW r6voe . 7rpos o6iJfJUS ITrelxovra, 1ra<rw ros .. 'Y6ous since however 1 see Creon yonder coming to the palace, 1 will cease my lamentations E. Phoen.1307. Here the clause coordinated by the conjuncti6n 'Y.p is parenthetical and gives, by anticipation, the reason for the <iii.M clause. Cp. <iii.'A' brel e 137, and Shakesp. Sonnet54: "but, for their virtue only is their show, They live unwoo'd." -The first form is found chiefiy in Homer, Pindar, Herodotus, and in the drama. 2818. Second Form (usually but indeed, but in fact, but the truth is, but be that as it may). Here there is a single predicate. Thus, Ka.1 ovx ws <irf.'..lwv I.'Yw .. <iil.'to. 'Yp lf.'ol rorwv .. oov f.<he<rn and 1 do not speak in dispamgement; but the tntth is 1 have nothing to do with these mattms P. A. 19 c, <iil.il. 'Y<'YVW<rKw 'Yp . lin Kr il.. b11t indeed 1 know that, etc. X. C. 2. 1. 13, <iil.il.' eliTopw 'Yp r6voe ITuil..o'lv op6p.<p <rnlxovra. but ineed 1 see Pylades yonde1 coming at full speed E. Or. 725, <iil.il.' ou 'Yp giTTL r.f.<<f>avij Kp7rntv but indeed it is impos.sible to hide what lies open S. O. C. 755. a. In this use 'Y.p may have preserved, or regained, its primitive adverbial ( confirmatory) force. Many schoh1rs, however, claim that there was a conscious or unconscious ellipse, after <iil.il.., of an idea pertinet to the situation ; and thus regard this form as logically equivalent to the form in which 'Y.P is a causal conjunction. In actual use dii.M 'Y.p was clearly a formula used without any consciousness of an omitted idea. 2819. <iii.M 'Yap has a great variety of uses, most of which may be classed as follows: a. In statements of direct opposition: Ka1 rar. <re 1roI.I.o oe EI.>)8lvat, aI. 'Yp olf.<aL 8 l!pn oK g</>'7<r8a 7roLEv, roro 7rOLs and yot~ are fm from forgetting this, but in fact 1 think you are doing that which you just denied you were doing P. Charm. 166 c. N. This use is post-Homeric, rare in the drama, common in the orators and , Plato. It is especially frequent in putting and setting aside an objection supposed to be raised by an opponent (hypophora). Cp, b. b. In real and assumed objections (cp. at enim) : Ka1 <iil.'78~ 'YE g;,.e'Yov, w :i:wKpa.res. (IJws. aI.I. 'Y.p, wEMcppwv, Ka! aI.I.. 7rOI.I. rf>'as ilvadiT!a yes, an 1 sai what was t1ue, Soc1ates. Perhaps, but in fact, Euthyphl-on, you say that rnany othe1 things too are holy P. Eu th. (J d, <iii.M 'Y.p, cpfJ<r1 r~<, ov pif,owv ad av8.vetv KaKI> v 5vra yes, but some one will say that it is not easy a/ways to conceal the fact that one is wiclced P. R. 365 c. c. In transitions.- (1) At tlw ~Jose of the discussion of an argument, where the force of aii.. is like that of a:,d yet or emphatic but. Thus, d'AM 'Y.p, w GREEK GRAM. -41

64.2

PARTICLES:

rye

(Jov)vf}, Ta.-a p.v ivllcl.< oK o' ii n

E ynv but, 8enatms, 1 do not k,ww why I should discuss these matters here L. 7. 42, . "fp fiii7J &pa .1rtvat /;at it ts already tirne to .depmt P. A. 42 a. (2) To restrain the expression of emotion; as .' li va~ "(ap n' p.6s, a-"(w but no, I arn silent fur he is my king E. El. 1245. (3) When the approach of a new actor is announced. Cp. 2817, 2818.

2820. Other Combinations. - y.p O.pa. for sure enough. y.p S~ fol of cou1se, for indeed, for you must know, as tpap.l:v "(p of, for of

course we say so. yclp s~ 11"0V for I piesurne, fOi' doubtless. yclp o{iv often of frank assent, as o "fp oilv ce~tainly not, "fw "(p oilv certainly, I do say so; less often to explain ( (o1 ce1tainly); Ka1 "(p ovv (not very common) is stronger thau Ka1 "(ap. ytip ....ov for 1 suppose. ytip .,.o, for su rely, for mark y ou; sometimes Ka1 "(ap .-o,.

y
2821. y (postpositive and enc1itic) is an intensive and restrictive particle with the force of at least, at any mte, even, certainly, indeed; but often to be rendered by intonatioll. y may indicate assent, coneession, banter, scorn, depreeation, irony, etc. y emphasizes single words or whole phrases or clauses.

a. Single words. So often with pronouns, as ~'YW'Y< I at least (excluding others), p. 'Y cp. rni-ch, li 'Y even he (Hom.), ov.-6s 'Y<, and with a repeated pronoun (S. Ph.ll7). Other words, as lin {Jol\n 'Y' whatever you like Ar. Ran. 3, ,.}..1,()" 'Y ox 7r<p{Jaolp.<8' av .-os 1roep.lovs in numbms at least we should not su1pas_s the enerny X. C. 2. 1. 8. b. With phrases or clauses. T.hus, ws p.f, p.' li.-p.ov, .-o 8eo 1' 7rpoa-.-aT7Jv, orrws tpfi p.e that he rnay not thus send me mvay in dishonour-who am the suppliant of the god S. O. C. 1278, .v8pw1rous .-tvua-8ov, 8ns y' hlopKov 6p.6<T<TT/ ye who punish men who swear falsely r 279.
2822. 'Y may be used twice in the same sentence. Thus, hel 'Y' pKov8' lKav .-os 'Y a-wtppoa-<v since indeed that -which sffices their wants is enough for

the wise E. Phoen. 545.

Cp. Hdt.l.187, Ar. Vesp.1507.

2823. 'Y stands between article and noun, as ot 'Y' livOpw1ro< (after a preposition, as ~v 'Y< .-1/i <f>av<p0); between noun and adjective, or after the adjective, as vf,p 'Y a-orp6s, or .v'i]p a-otp6s 'Y< ; after a 11ossessiYe pronoun, as lp.os 1 8vp.6s ; after p.v, ii, .-, as lin ii 'Y .7J8fJ )l.f"(w. 'Vlwn "' influences a whole clause it stands as near as possible to the introductory conjunction; as er 'Y<, 6.pa 'Y 2824. 'Y in contrasts and alternatives; as a-v ii' o l"fm 'Y' (ala-xpa), op$-s p.e thou dost not inclPed t;ay, but do sharneful things to me E. And. 239, -!To< Kptpa 'Y il tpav<pws eithe1 sec1etly or open/y T. 6. 34, il a-o<f>o1 il 'rip.w< il "fpons 'Y or wise or held in honou1 aye or old P. Hipp. M. 301 a (here 'Yf indicates a change in an alternative series ; cp. oliu . . . oli.-e . oii 'Y and Ka1 . 'Y< 2829).

P ARTICLES : ryov

6!3

2825. 'Y< in replies aud comment.~ (yes, well). Th us, lioK 7ra.petKaiJitv; licrov -y', d.va~, ,-cixtcrTa does it seern best to you that I should give way? .Aye, rny lord, and with all S)Jeecl S. A11t. 1102. Here ml ... oye is commort, as Kal ov 'Y' aTo1rws yes, and no wonder P. Th. 142 b. 2826. os ye ( rarely O(TTIS ye) bas a causal force, mu ch like qui quidem, quip)Je qui. 'l'hus, li.To7ra. 'A"/E<S lis 'Y< KE'AEO<<S lp. vEcfJupov 6vra. Ka.IJ'Y}')'ETIJa.t you a1e talking absurdly in biddiny me who arn the younge1 take precedence X. M. 2. 3. 15. So with other relatives, as olos, lieras, {},cr7rep. 2827. 'Y sometimes marks an ellipse (S. Ph. 1409). When the verb of the apodosis is omitted, the protasis often has 'Y (so usually in Aristophanes, e.g. Nub. 267). 2828. When 'Y is followed by other particles, it belongs with the emphasized word, and the other particles reLain their original force; as ,-o6s 'Y' p.vrot -ya.llo6s yet the /Jrave at /east x. A. 1. n. 14. So ')' ofJ, "/ ph lifJ, ')' TOL ( often used like ')'ov in giving a reason for a belief), 'Y rot ofJ. With the imperative, 'Y is rare except when it is followed by another particle, as i3pii "/< p.fJv

s. o. c.

587.

2829. After other Particles. -For example : li ye: here 'Y usually does not emphasize il but either a single word or the whole clause; as 1)p.v 0 "Y< op,a.< 1ravra. 7rOL'TJTa but we at !east, in rn y opinion, should adopt every rneans X. A. 3. 1. 35. 01; "Y< is often used when two things are compared, in order to show that one is more important than the other. Ka.l 'fE sometimes means yes, and and sometimes "' emphasizes the intervening word. Th us, KoMv "Y lla.p.a. y es, and no wonder S. O. T. 1132, Ka.l crrlf3ov ')' oOEls KT61ros and of footstr-ps the1e is no sound S. Ph. 29. Ka.l "/< often , emphasizes one item in a serit>s, and especially the last item. Here Ka.l 'Y 1rpos (Ka.l 1rpos 'Y<) and besides is common. Cp. P. G. 450 d, 469 b. tJ.v 'YE lends force to a contrast (P. S. 180 d) ; sometimes it has the force of that is to say, for ex ample (T. 6. 86). Frequent combinations are .' o-lJv ... yE, p.vTot. .. yE, p.~v . yE, o'Kov "YE

-yoilv
2830. 'foilv (postpositive; first in Aeschylus) is a restrictive particle from y + ol!v. Its meaning varies according to the prorninence of the y or ol!v; often ce1tainly, at any mte (at all event8, at least). yovv commonly confirms a previous general assertion by giving a special instance of its trnth (the special instance may be a. seeming exception). yovv is thus used in bringing fmward a reason, which, while not absolutely conclusive, is the most probable explanation of a previous statement.
Ert "'(p oVrot KaKiov(s den rWv Uq)' i)p.Wv f}rTTJtJ.vwv g<jJev-yov ')'OV 1rps Kelvovs Ka.ra.'A11r6vres 1)p.'is fo1' they are even more cowanll!f than those who we1e beaten by 'liS, At any rate they deserted liS and souyht rejuye with them X. A. 3. 2.17.

644

P ARTICLES :

ua

2831. 'Yov may emphasize a pronoun ; as 1rp~ 'Yov ~p.o S. Aj. 527, r 'Yov S. El. 1499. 2832. In answers 'Yov means well, at least ; y es certainly; as elK~ 'Yov x. c. 5. 3.14. 2833. 'YOv finds the proof of an assertion in one of severa! possible facts or occurrences; 'Yap gives the reason in general, but gives no particular instance; il' ovv bas an adversative force: 'be that as it may, y et at any rate.'

6
2834. S (postpositive) was originally an adverb with a force not unlike that of on the other hand, on the contra1y; later it became a conjunction commonly represented by but or and, which are, however, mere makeshifts of translation. o serves to mark that something is different from what precedes, but only to offset it, not to exclude Ol' contradiet it; it denotes only a slight contrast, and is therefore weaker than .,Ua, but stronger tban Ka{. o is adversatiye and copulative; but the two uses are not al ways cleal'ly to be distinguished. 2835. Adversative S oHen marks a silent contrast, as at the beginning of speeches ( 'Yw M orw 'Y<'Y>tiJrJKw X. A. 4. 6. 10); in questions which imply opposition to something just said (S. O. C. 57); in answers (S. O. T. 379); in objections or corrections (S. Ant. 517) ; in r il, r /l on the contrary, whereas really, where a true opinion is opposed to a false one; similarly in vv ilt! b1tt in jact, but as the case stands. Wh en ilt! is balanced by p..! v (2904) it is antithetical rather than adversative. 'a. il after a pronoun following a vocative produces a pause ; as Nt6{3ii rJ~ il' li'Yw'Y vp.w IJebv ah Niobe, thee I regard as divine S. El. 150. b. /l instead of ,i;\M is rare except in t.he poets and Thucydides. Tlms,
1rpop.7J>DIJT1~ 'Y roro p.1Jo<vl rovp'Yo'v, Kpu<jJfj il K<v!Je make known this plan to no one, b'Ut hide it in secTet S. A nt. 85, oK e1rl KaKi;, e1r' e.wiJ<ptf:JrJ<< il rwv 'E")..")..'ljvwv 1ra.p<.'lj.uOa. I have come, not to ha T'Il~, b1tt to liberate, the Greeks T. 4. 86. Sometimes o p.v precedes when /l is used like ..a (T. 1. 50). c. But not is ")..:\' o or o p.vro<, not o il<!, in order to avoid confusion with oo nor, not even. But o and il may be separated, as o& {3ou.op.t!vwv /l . . . 7rporJxwp<v b1tt si nee they did not wish to SMrTendeT X. H. 1. 6. 13. 2836. Copulative 8 marks transition, and is the ordinary pa.rticle used in connect\ng successive clauses or sentences which add something new or different, but not opposed, to what precedes, and are not joiued by other particles,, such as 'Yap or ovv. Copulative li is' common in marking contilwation, especially when something subordinate is added. Thus, when a new phase of a narrative is developed (X. A. 1. 2. 7-8); where attention is called to a new point or person (as in rl il' l!rJnv;); wh en an interrupted speech or narrative is resumed (X. C. 1. 6. 41, S. Tr. 281); where a second relationship is added (p.'>Jr1Jp {3M<.w~, {3a.IJl.eta. il' p.'lj the mothe1 of the King, and my Queen A. Pers. 151, 'Ht6va. . . M<voa.lwv 1ro<Klii.v, 1ro.<p.lii." ot QVlTIIP he seized Eon, a colony of Mende, and which had been hostile T. 4. 7);

PARTICLES:

6-1-5
Ill and

when lit! has a force Jike that of "fap (X. C. 6. 3. 16) ; and in Ko.i also (Epie Kai ill), 28!11.

2837. Apodotic 8.- The beginning of the principal clause (apodosis) of conditional and concessive sentences is often marked by il. Apodotic 0 is found also in the principal clause of causal, temporal, comparative, and relative sentences ; and regularly gives greater emphasis to the main clause, which is th us distinctly set off against the subordinate clause. Apodotic D is very common in Homer and Herodotus, not rare in Attic poetry, but infrequent in Attic prose, where it is used especially after an emphatic persona! or demonstrative pronoun or wh en a participle represents the antecedent clause. Th us, <ios ro.fi8' &pp.o.<v< .. , 1]>-.8 il' 'A81wri while he was 1evolving these things, then came Athene A 193, <l oVv lqw p.'q 'Y<'Y>Wa-Kw p.f,re r Sena p.f,r< r illKa<a, bp.es ili' iltM~<T p.< accordingly {f I have no knowledg eithm of what is holy or what is just, do you then instruct me X. H. 4. 1. 33, brel -rolvuv oo ilvap.o.l a-< 1rel8Lv p.'q lJCOvat, a-v il wo< 1rol7Ja-ov since therefore I am not able to pe1suade you not to expose it, do you then do as follows Hdt. 1. 112, Ka8woov . . . wa-7r<p oi o7rro.t oTw o Kai oi 1r<Taa-Tal as the hoplites so also the peltasts sleep X. C. 8. 5. 12, l1r<Lil'q M <j><K6JI-<PO< p.axv Kp&.T7]U"d.P . . , if>alvoPTd.L li' ovo' VTafi8a 7rli.O'TJ rfi ovvap.et XP7J.a-ap.<POI

but when on theil' a1rival they had conque1ed in battle, not even, then did they appea1 to have made ttse of thei1 enti1e force 1'. 1. 11, Kal 1roT< 6vros 1ra"fou . oliros il' ev TOVTOLS l~?i and once when the1e was a frost he went out in the mist of this P. S. 220 b.

a. Apodotic il often. resumes a li in the subordinate clause and carries on the opposition expressed by th at clause; as el ili' fJoea-8 . Ke~aJI-evo< 81ro< !iv {3o7Ja-8 KaTo.a-x.Zv . . , 1ro'ia o' J!-'i:v .,.ap<O'nv but. if you 'Wish to select some place wherever y ou please and talee possession of it, you have ships at command x. A. 5. 6. 20, a Il' ala-xVV7JP '111-V lj>lpEL . , Td.VTa o Kd.T xwpav P,PL but the terms which ca11Se us shame, these 1'mnain in force I. 4. 176. b. 'fhe use of apodotic Ill should not be regarded as a survival of original coordination.
2838. 8 without p.v. -A clause with often has no correlative particle in the clause with which it is contrasted. Here p.lv is not used because the opposition in the fi.rst clause was too weak, or because the speaker did not intend to announce a following contrast or did not think he was going to use a contrasted Dl clause. Sometimes the en tire fi.rst clause may have to be supplied in thought from the general connection or from what has go ne before. lil without p.lv in such cases is common in poetry, but not rare in prose, even in brief antitheses, as 7ra>Ts el "flxovTa< "f<L>, ~lws il' oliil<ls el1rv oeilvv7JTO.L exploits which everybody continually desi1es to recmmt, but which no one has been able to set forth adequate/y D. 6. 11. See also 2835. a. When a relative construction passes over into a construction with a persona! or demonstrative pronoun, the relative clause usually has no p.v. Cp. Soph. Aj. 457, quoted in 2517. b. or il.!, wh en opposed to a larger number of persons or things, is often used without o! p.v, as 7rpo<7Ju86T<s e1rl x<Mv, oi il' e1rl ~va having gone for foddeT, and some for fuel X. C. 6. 3. 9.

646

P ARTICLES: ~

2839. S with other Particles. -For example : 8' ii.pa., which sometimes follows pb. 8' a..O and llfJowS li mark stronger opposition than li al one. S Sf) but then, but now, well but is often used in passing to a new point. Aristophanes this collocation is used almost al ways in questions.

In

ft
r6r) marks something as immediately present and clear to the mind, and gives greater precision, positiveness, and exactness. It sets forth what is obvious, acknowledged, and natural, and often corresponds to voil. 8~ is used with single words (especially adjectives, adverbs, pronouns, and conjunctions) or, as a sentence adverb, with whole clauses. 13~ usually stands after the ward it emphasizes, though it may be ~eparated from it by oue or more other words. 2841. Sf) of what is Obvions and Natural. -Thus, fo-re o-f] you know of
2840.
Sf) (postpositive except in Hom. 8~ yd.p and poetic ~

course, oe/51] itis manifestly necesswy. So ovx orws ~xe<; gxe< liT] is not this so? Of course it is P. A. 27 c, viJv o' opre of) but now yo1t certainly see X. C. 3. 2. 12, ITapoo-arts Jllv o-1] i} J.t1Jr7Jp inrfipxe r<P Kvpcp Pmysatis, his motiLer, naturally suppmted Cynts X. A.l. 1. 4.
2842. Ironical Sf). -Th us, "ZwKpriT'Y}S 0 o-o<j>s of} Socmtes the wise forsooth P. A. 27 a; often ls Sf), as ws li-1] o-6 J.I.O' ropavvos 'Ap-yelwv g.,.71 that y ou forsooth should be the lord and master o.f the Argives! A. Ag. 1633. '2843. Intensive Sf) emphasizes, and makes definite, adjectives, adverbs, pronouns, and other words. Thus, ii1ravres of) absolutely all, Kpanurot of) the very best, J.l,dvos of} quite al one, 6l\l"fOL of) ~'e1"Y few; OVTW o-f] just so, iJ0"7T<p of) exactly as, ,.ol\MK<s of) very often, ofjl\a of) quite plain, viJv o-f] just now, now at once; Kevos 51] this (and no other), Ils of) who indeed. With indefinite pronouns of) increases the indefiniteness ( 339 e) ; as lio-ns of) wlwever at all. With other words : el of) if indeed, o of) no indeed, va of) that in tntth. a. With imperatives and in questions 51] adds urgency ; as i!Kove of} pmy listen! rl of); why, pray? . 2844. may introduce emphatical!y the conclusion of a temporal sentence or of a narrative on passing to a new topic ; as lvraiJ8a. of), r6re of} then indeed, then and not till then, then it was that. Cp. X. A. 1. 10. 1. 2845. Temporal S.] often, especially with Ka.l, approximates in meaning to -lio7J already. Thus, 0 o 8avciw KV8t Krirw o1, "ffis but he is dead and already is e'YJPcF'YJS Ka.! 51] ovo iJJ.tpis when hirlclen beneath the earth s. o. T. 9G7' ov6re you have hunted ( already) fo1" two days X. C. 2. 4. 17, Ka! 51] "fw o-ot well I will tell thee (without further ado) S. A nt. 245. So also in dl\os of), vv f).- Of succession, of} means next.- Poetic Sa..OTE (o-1] ailu) means now again. 2846. Consecutive and Resumptive Sf) is used to set forth an inference, draw a conclusion, denote a consequence, and mark a transition (J.tv 51] . . o). Here f} is a sentence adverb: accordingly, then, of comse, clearly, you

on

2853]

6-!7

see, 1 say. Thus, n.eyov Karlootev VUKTWP ?1'0 11'Up .paivovra. tOKH i} TOLS trrparr{yos oK o"if>aes ii va< otaUK'7}vovv they said that they had seen many jires visible in the night; acca~dingly it seemed to the genemls tu be unsafe to encamp apa1t x. A. 4. 4. 10, <i><pavas !LfV i} orws El?1'EV. aviuro.vro KCI.L /1.)\:\ot 11'0oi Phemulas then spalce th us; and many others also ruse to spealc X. C. 2. 3. 16. 2847. Kc S~: (a) Introduces a climax, as Kal i} To !L'Y<urov ancl above all, what is the main thing P. A. 41 b. (b) In replies = well; as (3:\bfov Karw Kal i] (3l\?1'w look down! Well, 1 am looking Ar. Av.l75. This is akin to the temporal use. (c) lu assumptions =suppose (1771). On Kal ai] Kal see 2890.

on

Sa.(, Sf19ev, li'J1TO'U, Sf\Ta.

2848. Sa( is used in colloquial Attic after interrogative words to express wonder, indignation, etc. 'l'hus, ri al; ?1'ws al; what then ? how so ? 2849. 8f)&ev truly, jorsooth, is commonly used of apparent or preteuded truth, and mostly with an ironical toue. Thus, h<pr6f1.'Y/Uas fjB<v ws 11'a' 6vra fl.E thou hast moclced me j01sootl! as thongh 1 we1e a child A. Pr. 986. 2850. 8fprov probably, J presume, I shoulcl hope, doubtless, you will admit, is stronger than 11'ou perhaps, I suppose. o1]?1'ov often has a touch of irony or doubt in stating a case that would seem to be certain ; as ruTE o1]?1'ov oiJEv -ij:\m civluxH you lcnow, 1 prewme, tohere the sun rises X. A. 5. 7. 6. In questions o1]?1'ov expects the answer y es. o o1)11'ou catainly not and is it not so? ( wiih irony). 2851. Sf)Ta assu?edly, really, in truth, is rare outside of Attic. It occurs: (a) In answers, often when a word is repeated with assent; as "fL'YvwuK<O' bw'is ijr<s ~u&' ;jo' 7J 'Yvv'>]; 'Y''YvwuKop.v ofira do you lcnow who this woman is '! Yes indeed we do Ar. Thesm. 606; o ofjra surely not, in strong or indignant denia!. (b) In questions, to ma.rk an inference or consequence, as 11'ws ofjra; hoto in tru th? rl of! ra; wh at then? KO.t ofira TO!LCI.S; and didst thou re ally da re ? S. Ant. 449. (c) In wishes and deprecations (stronger thau o'>]), as uK611' fira only look 1'. G. 452 b, p.i} ofira, Ov!L, fl.n u 'Y' ip')!duy TaoE no ineerl, my heart, do not this deed E. Med. 10ii6.

2852. etTE (from e1 En . . . drE whether

+ r), a disjunctive particle, generally doubled:

. . . or (2675), if . .. or (siue . . . siue), giving equal value to each supposition.

a. With the subjunctive we find f:dv TE (-ijv TE, av T). Hom. has EfTE EfTE, but not o/jv rE . o/jv r, with the subjunctive. In the same sense Hom. has i) . . olj and o/jrE . olfr with the subjunctive.
2853. There are varions forms of EtTE clauses : a. Both .rTE clauses may have the same finite verb in common, which verb is used only once; as dTE (3ou<u0 11'0Ef1.Ev i}p.'iv dr< .pl:\o< Et va< whether you wish to wage war upon us or to be our friencls X. C. 3. 2. 13.

648

PARTICLES: .~

b. Each d-rE clause bas its own verb and its own main clause; as iK'Aevu o-e,
<f'Tf ?l"avTa< alnj., Kpivav-ra O' aTOV XPfio-0aL /)'TL av {Jo6J\'[1 1 <fT< va nv ?) QUO , , alnj., -rou-rov< ~too-t ?l"apao-xv uot av-ro< el< Kp!o-Lv the army requests that, if y ou

accuse all, y ou pass sentence on them and treat them as you rnay think best; or, if you accuse one or two, they think U right that these rnen shot!ld surrender thernselves to y ou fo1' judgrnent X. A. 6. 6. 20. c. One main clause refers to both d-r< clauses ; as -yaO< v7]p evoa!p.wv u-r! Uv -re p.-ya< Kat luxpo<, i&.v n o-p.Kpo< Kat u0ev7]< }i the good man is happy whethe1 he is large and st1ong or small and weak P. L. 660 e. d. Neither dn clause has a verb, which is to be supplied from the main clause; as 'A-yov-r, d-r' 'A'Y]O< d-r' IJ.p' ovv p.d.-r1Jv (li'Ae-yov) saying, whethe1 trttly or ajter all, it may be, falsely S. Ph. 345. e. One etn clause bas its own verb, while the other gets its verb from the main clause (rare) ; as p.ot o- paV'{l . XP'YJO' p.<tJoev, et-re ?l"ap' EMppovo<
?l"l?i"vov< -yev6p.evo< (XP'1JO'J1.4JO<<), efn Kat /J.'A'A'Y) Tt< p.oua ?l"aaL o-e ivoo-a i'Ae'Af,{)fL

you seern to rne to utte1 prophecies, tvhether y ou wem inspired by Euthyphron or .whether some other muse has long been present in you without your knowing it P. Crat. 428 c. 2854. Variations: Et't'E ~ (common): d-re Au!iis 17 TL< /J.'A'Ao< ,.cJ;,.o-re 1!-ypatf;ev ?) -ypd.tf;et K-r 'A. whetheT Lysias 01' anybody else whoeveT wrote 01' will write, etc. P. Phae. 277 d. 1\ ... E~TE: only in poetry (S. Aj. 175). E~'T'E et S: when the second member is more important (P. L. 952 c). On Et dTE see 267 5 d. On Et'T'E for efn . . . d-re see 2675 b, N. 2. 2855. dn may be strengthened by /J.pa, of,, Ka!, or ovv. ovv is usually placed after the first dn ; like Ka!, it may stand after the second also. When Kal stands only after the second dn, its clause is weaker than the first (D. 18. 57).

ii
(Epie ~) or (1tel, a1tt); and repeated: ~ ~ either . . . o1 (nel . . . uel, aut . . . aut) to connect the two merubers more closely.
2856.
-ya8v ?) KaKOV good 01' bad x. A.l. 9.11, 17 TL 1) ovv little 01' nothing P. A. 17 b. 17 with the subjunctive is often used wh en a speaker corrects himself ; as vv o' ar/ -rpl-ro< '!jM 1roOev uw-rf,p, 1) p.6pov .r,.w; a neZ now, ag ain, the thiTd has come, the delive1m- or shall I call it a deed of dea th? A. Ch. 1074. On 17 in questions, see 2657, 2675. 2857. Between ascending numbers 17 has the force of Eng. to, as iv t~ ?) e?I"T -l]p.pa in six to seven days X. C. 5. 3. 28. 2858. i]ToL may be used instead of the first 17 when the first member, as is commonly the case, contains the more probable choice. In English the order is often inverted. Thus, 17To< K'AVovua ,.a,o< ?) TVX!l 1rapa. she cornes eithe1 by chance 01' beca.use she has hearcl alwut heT son S. Ant. 1182. 17ToL may be followed by 17 severa! times. ~TOL -ye is more emphatic, as 17-ro< Kpupa '< ?) pavepw< eithe1' seC?etly 01' openly T. 6. 34. 2859. 17 often indicates .that a given result will follow in case the action of

Disjunctive ~

2865]

PARTlCLES: 1j
f J-'-IJ,

649
2346 d).

the previous clause is not realized: o1 else (cp. El

Thus,

B1rws

Df'ES f' 7ra<vrrere, i!-'o1 f'E-f)rrE< 7} f'TJK(m f'E Kilpov vof'l~ere it shall be my

conce1n that you commend me; 01 else rny name is no longa-Gy1us X. A. 1. 4. 16. 2860. 1f often does not introduce an alternative to a previous question, but substitutes instead another question which is more specifie and il1tended to anticipate the answer to the first (or ?'atheT, or precisely). Thus, "1>.<-y, -iJ!-'v 1rws f'E rf!Js
fharjJfJip<V TOS VWrpOVS; ' Of)ov /51) Or< .. fJEOS otfia<JKLV f'1J VOJL[~E<V OVS 7} 7r6<S vof'l~e<; tell us how you mean that I crnrupt the young? Or rathe1 cie arly you

mean that (I co?Tupt them) by teaching thern not to acknowlec?.ge the gods which the 8tate acknowledges? P. A. 26 b.
2861. 1f often introduces an argument e:J: cont1ario (D. 31. 14). 2862. i\ Ka.( is often used whe1e ~ would suffice (cp. 2888 a); as l) ~vos 7} Kal ns 1ror.irTJs either an alien or a citizen if y ou will (or as well) D. 20. 123. 2863. Comparative ~ than is used to matk difference. It stands after comparatives where the genitive or a preposition (1069 ff.) is not used, and after words indicating difference or diversity or having a comparative force, e.g., li.o> or f.rEpo> otlwr, :w> otllenuise, &O.cpopo different, 8w.<f>pELv to be dijferent, vavdo> contrary, ~t17"acno twice as much, 7rp[v sooner.
lJ.a 7} r 'fVOf'Va things di.ffent jTOm what OCCU?'red X. C. 3. 1. 9, tJ."/o."/o.o ov/iv ~ lK 'ffiS lvavf'axovv T. 4. 14 (2778 a), rfi <Jrepalq. o f' 7ro8vr}rrwv ' if .v t/\On r 1rowv I must die the day ajter (that on which) the ship arrives P. Cr. 44 a (here 1j or ii might be omitted), rvavrla . i) ros KVvas 1rowrr< clztfetently from the way they tTeat dogs X. A. 5. 8. 24, rv 1if'<<Jvv rrrov 7} 1rp6rrfJev half as much corn

as bejore X. H. 5. 3. 21. a. After ri or a negative, 1j may be used without 1/."1>."/o.os, as Ti 1rotwv 7) evwxovf'vos; doing what else exeept feasting? P. Cr. 53 e, e1re f'TJiiva 1rapdva< 7} ros rpl"lo.ovs he sa id that they shoulcllet no one pass except his j1iencls X. C. 7. 5. 41. b. Often after verbs of willing, choosing, etc. ; as Oavarov J-'Er' l"lo.w8epiiis aipou!Lvot 7) [3lov pn ooveiii.s prejMTing death With j1eeorn Tathel' than lije With servitude L. 2. 62. Here we might have f'ov if, which is usua.lly not separated, and especially when p.ov belongs to the whole sentence. c. If two clauses connected by 1f have the same verb it may be omitted in the clause fo1lowing 1j; as lhrpiirres "l>."l>.oov 7} ol 1rool ( 1rplirrovrr<) y ou behavecl ztferentl_q j'rorn the rest P. A. 20 c. d. On 7} wrrre ( ws ), or ~ alone, than so as to, see 2264.

2864. Asseverative ~(prepositive) in truth, in sooth, verily, upon my honour, etc. ; as~ KaW> yH> P. G. 447 c.
~

2865. 1j is usually associated with other particles. -y6.p when used alone in dialogue = is it not so 'l Cp. n'est ce pas, nicht wahr? Elsewhere it often bas the force of am I to unde?'siand that asked witli surprise. Thus, 1j -yp voeis Ba1rrE<v rrrp', rr6pp7Jrov 1roE<; what, clost

650

PARTICLES: ~D (A~D lo)

[2866

thou in t1uth inteud to bmy him, tchen it is foibidden to the citizens? S. Ant. 44. -1) 6~ expresses livelysurprise. -1) Ka.( is found in animated questions. Here Kal goes closely with 1j. -1) ,_..~v (Hom. 1j pb, 1j p.liv) prefaces strong asseverations, threats, and oaths, in direct and indirect discourse. Thus, 1j p.T]v -)w ~1ra06v TL rotorov in truth this was my experience P. A. 22 a, /Jp.vp.t O<os 1j p.'~] v p.f,re p.< 'A<votj>wvra K<<uat
TOP llvi5pa p.f,r< ilov tp.wv p.'Y)Va l stvear by the gods upon my honneither did Xenophon 7W7' any one else among y ou bid me i'escue the man X. A. 6. 6.17 . .jj '11'0'11 indeed, methinlcs, in poetry I ween. Here the shade of doubt indicated by 1rov is not reaL

atj><uOaL

OU1'

2866. Interrogative .jj (2650) is probably the same as asseverative ~

l]S
Ka{,

(AND

lo)
r, KaL . Ka{.

2867. ijS and (Epie, lyric, tragic); also in conjunction with ,.~

or

~JLV . . ~8

(Epie) is used like r ...

tS and (Epie, rare in tragedy) is used where 7]8 does not suit the

metre.
KQ.L

2868. Ka.! is both a copulative conjunction (and) connecting words, clauses, or sentences; and an ad verb meaning also, even.

Gonjunctional

Ka{

2869. Copulative Kal often has.an intensive or heightening force; as where it joins a part and the wh ole, the uni versai and the particular. Th us, lv 'AO'Y)valo<s Ka1 ros "E'YJU< Ar. Nub. 413, &! Z< Ka1 O<ol Ar. Pl. 1 (O<ol Ka1 Z<vs the gods and above ail Zeus), vrafJOa l!p.<<vav -i}p.lpiis rpiis Ka1 .)jr Mvwv X. A. 1. 2. 6. On Ka.l. Ta.lira., see 94 7, 2083. a. Here Kal often = narnely, for example, and so where an antecedent statement is explained either by another word or by an example. Cp. X. A. 1. 9. 14, 4. 1. 19, 5. 2. 9, 5. 6. 8. 2870. The heightening force is also seen where Kal with corrective force may be rendered by or; often to set forth a climax and not an alternative. Tl ms, uotj>lii ol-yov rtvos ;ta. Ka1 oo<vbs wisdom worth little or nothing P. A. 28 a,
p.axa<po1rowl . &.v 1rvr p.vs Kal
~~

sword-cutle1s worth five or six minas each

D. 27. 9, 1rpowut 6 Ka! d.7rtout Tr6'f..<p.os but war if we advance or reti1'e X. A. 2. l. 21, Ka1 olKa<a Ktlo<Ka ri(lht 07' wrong Ar. Nnb. 99, uos (-yb vos), Kfi p.>, ubs thy son, or if not thine S. O. C. 1323.

2871. Kal often has an adversative force; as where it joins a negative to an affirmative clause. Here Ka1 o (p.f,) is al most= but not, as in lp.' lx<<porbv'Y)uav Ka! aux p.iis they elected me and ( = but) not y mt D. 18. 288. So also where Kal

PARTICLES:

651

is like KalTot and yet; as xalpwv li1rt8t Kal rr' r.Kwv "fW l1rw ja1e thee well; and yet I leave thee unwilUngly Ar. Eq. 1250. To connect negative clauses ouM is used. 2872. ln questions, Kal before an interrogative expression marks an objection occasioned by surprise or indignation; as Kat rls 8av6vTwv 1}Mev ~ "Ati5ov Tra<v; and, pray, ~vho of the dead has come backjrom Hades? E. H.F. 297. So Kal1rws; pray, how co mes it that ? Cp. Eng. and when a speaker is stopped by an abrupt question. a. .Ajte1 an interrogative expression adverbial Kal asks for further information concerning a statement assumed to be true. 'l'hus, 1rolov xp6vov O Kat Tr<Tr6p81JTa< 1r6">-.ts; but when was the city captmed ? A. Ag. 278. Cp. 2884. ~873. ln imperative sentences Kal often means and now, just. 'l'hus, Kal p.ot va-yvw8t T !ff}<j>trrp.a and now 1ead me the bill L. 13. 35, Kal p.ot TroKpivat just answer me P. A. 25 a. 2874. Kal may mark a resnlt (P. Th. 154 c, quoted in 2288). 2875. After expressions of sameness and likeness Kal has the force of as (Lat. ac). Thus, oains p.v <1Toos <TTt Kat i}p.v your PXpBdition is the sa me as ows X. A. 2. 2. 10, ox op.olws Kat 1rplv not the same as before T. 7. 28, trra Kat KTat the same as suppliants 3. 14, rar Kal the same as X. C. 1. 3. 18. This use is commoner in prose th an poetry. 2876. In expressions denoting concidence of ti me Kal often has the force of when. So &.,.a. . Ka.( (2169), ~8'1 Ka( X. A. 2.1. 7, ou'!l'w Ka( P. Eu. 277 b, o\IK g<l>8'1v Ka( ( E\18-s) I had not got the start . . . when 1.19. 22, D. 43. 69. Cp. Kat . KaL in Kat ~KOJl.EV Kr i}p.Zv u;.Mwv 6 8upwps fTrH 7r<ptp.vftv as soon as we a1rived the doorkeepe1 caine out and told us to wait P. Ph. 59e. 2877. Kat . Ka( both . . . and, not only . . . lmt also, as . . . so, as well as . . . as also, sometimes ~vhether . . . or, emphasizes each member separately, and forrns a Jess close combination thau T Kai. Thus, Kat Tor< Kat vv not only then but also no w. So Tip.s oorov Kat twvn Kal T<<Vrf}rravn honou1s rnust be pa id hirn both when lining and after cleath P. R. 414 a, rr Kal OoopKas Ko (31rm thou bath hast S{Jht and (yet.) dost nnt see S. O. T. 413, Kri-rr<p.7l'6p.TJV 1rps Tavm Kat T 1rv <j>parrw as I was sent for this purpose so I will tell tlwe all S. El. 680, Top.v va')'K'YJ, Kiiv Tvxw Kil v p.'i] Tvxw I nwst da1e whethe1 I succeed or fail E. Hec. 751. 2878. In a series of more than two ideas Kal is used before each, where English would use and only before the last. 'l'hus, rrvvrv-yx&.vovrrtv ar(/> Kat "A.ap.f3&.vouiTLV afrrv KaL )'vvaKa. KaL 1ralOas Kal roVs 1T7TOVS' Kal 1rlvra r Ovra they fell upon him and seized him, his wije, his children, his h01ses, and ali his possessions X. A. 7. 8. 22. 2879. Adjectives of quantity, as 'll'oVs and >..(yos in the plural, are usually joined to an adjective in the sa me construction by Kal or r Kai ( also by T or r r in poetry). 'l'hus, 1roM Kat lima D. 37. 57 (oEtv Kal 1ro6. 37. 57), TroM re Ka! Hva X. A. 5. 5. 8. In 1roH. Kat p.<-y&.a -yaea (X. C. 1. 5. 9), the substantive is qualified by two adjectives; whereas in English the second adjec-

652

P ARTICLES :

ICa(

[288o

tive is taken with the substantive and treated as a unit modified by the first adjective (rnany goo(Hhings). a. 'll'ool. Knt ll.>..>..o, meansmanyothers also (with K<xi adverbial). For many others we find lio< 1rooi (very cornmon) or 7rooiiI.o<. 2880. Sorne combinations of conjunctional Kal are: Kc . JLVToL and howeve1, and of course (in Kal pbTot Kal the first Kal may be adverbial : yes indeed and). Knt . . . To(vuv and . . . further, in connecting a thought w_ith the preceding .

.Adverbial

Ka

f.

2881. Adverbial Ka! also, even (Lat. etiam) influences single words or whole clauses. Adverbial Kal stresses an important idea; usually the idea set forth in the word that follows, but sometimes also a preceding word when th at word stands first in its clause. Ka! often serves to increase or diminish the force of particular words; sometimes it gives atone of modesty. 2882. With single words : a. K~Ta then tao, Kal "tch I on my part, a-ov ?)
Krip.ov 'Yva> o,[J'sp1ing from thee or me eithe1 S. 9G5, fJovMp.evo> O Kal aVTo> ap.1rp6v n 7rOt?)ua< desimus of himself too doing sornething ill1tst1io1tS X. C.

m.

5. 4. 15. b. Kal 1rplv even before, Kal -.j;t! late though it be, Kal ovrws even so, Kal h< Kal vv and now too, and still even now, oKvw Kal "/e<v 1 fem even to say it, 1ro1, p.wpla Kal Ta e'lr<Xetpf,p.aTos the very atternpt is utter folly 1'. Pr. 317 a. On Kal though with a participle, see 2083. c. Often with adverbs of intensity, as Kat p.aa exceedingly, certainly, Kal KapTa very greatly, KrLI 1ravv absolutely. With comparatives and superlatives : Kal p..bv yet rnme, Kal p.wpomrav altogether the most foolish thing X. A. 3. 2. 22. 2883. With a whole phrase or clause ; as lip.q,w "tp aVTw Kal KaraKravev voel:s; what, dost thou indeed intend to put them bath ta death? S. Ant. 770. Other examples in 2885-2887. 2884. When Kal stresses a verb in interrogative and conditional sentences it is often to be rendered by a.n emphatic auxiliary, often by at all. Th us, 7rOaK<> uKe'fap.7Jv ri Kal f3oeu8e I have often asked
myse~f

the question what you

can want 'l'. 6. 38, Tl Kal xpiJ 1rpauoaKv; tdtat on earth is one to expect ? D. 4. 4G, cl 'Yp ti v ro. Kal 1raw /io; jo1 what else could one do ? l'. Ph. Gl e, el 1: Kal p.8ov f'Y<v KaMv ~fit is well to tell a fable at all P. Ph. 110 b. Cp. 2872 a. a. In affirmative inependent clauses or sentences Ka! often has an emphasis which is difficnlt to render; as Kivovos vv ii1, Kal b~etev liv etvs evat the danger must now indeed seem to be d1eadful P. Ph. 107 o. 2885. KnC of Balanced Contrast.- In order to mark the connection of thought between antecedent and consequent, Ka! also, too, is often placed in the subordinate clause or in the main clause or in both. a. Greek bas th us the following modes of expression where a comparison is instituted between the parts of such bimembral sentences: "What I do, that y ou also do" (as in English) or "vVhat 1 also ( = I on my part) do, that yon do" or " 'Vhat I also do, th at you also do." In the subordinate clause Kai seems superfiuous to English idiom.

PARTICLES: Ka(

653

2886. Kal of balanced contrast occurs frequently wheu the subordinate clause sets forth something corresponding to, or deducible from, the main clause; and wheu an antithesis is to be emphasized. It is fonnd especially in relative, causal, and final clauses, and has the effect of putting such subordinate clauses on a plane with the main clause. A relative word often adds -Tr<p or is fnllowed by o?). Thus, r O ri)< 7rOEW< g7rpi'Trov, wvrr<p livEKEV Ka! 2:-wKpaTEL 7rp01Yi)Mov they devoted themselves to those ajfairs of state on account of which they had in fact associated with Soc1ates X. l\1. 1. 2. 47, Ka! i!p.v mora ooK< iiTr<P Ka! {3a~rtf.. we hold exactly the same views as the king X. A. 2. 1. 22, TrELOTJ Kai 17 Tro'A<s ~rwe'YJ . . ~<w Krip.o! ~rWTTJpliiv -y<v~rea, since the city has been saved I beg that safety be {franted ta me as well And. 1. 143, gp.a.Oov Kal t?y fJ~r1r<p Kal oi iif..f..o, I (on my part) learned just as the Test dicl too P. Ale. 110 d, rp.wplii -yp ovK rvxf'i otKalw< on Ka1 otKEra< for vengeance is not successful in acco1dance withjustice, because it is taken upon a wrong T. 4. 62. 2887. In final clauses l'va Kal is common, and sometimes, like Eng. just, serves to show that the fact answers to the expectation, or the effect to the cause (or vice ve1sa). Thus, (3of.., oilv 1r<~rOa' l'va Ka! toy< ro~< 5vra< avroe,; do y01~ wish to go along then just to see those who are the1e ? P. Lys. 204 a, iip~op.a< o 1ro ri)< iiiTpLKi)< f..rywv fva Kal 7rpeof3<vwp.<v rTjv TxvTJV I will begin my speech 'With medicine in o1der that we rnay do honour to our a1t P. S. 186 b. 2888. Kal of balanced contrast appears also in coordinate clauses ; as ;)o'l) -yp ~-yw-y< Ka! <Pt.of..<iov i]Kovcra . . . ;)o'l) M K< iif..f..wv nvwv fm I have e1e now heard Philolaus . . . and e1e now certain othe1'S besicles hi1n l'. l'h. 61 e, Kar 1rof..f.. ph Ka! iif..a, ox f/KLcrra o Ka! Kar Ta.ra as in many other respects also and not least (too) in this Aes. 1. 108, 1r rwv rrivra.Oa. owcK?)~recv . . Kal 1rplv Tr<IYXTJJJvwv Kat vv o 1rp.rr6vrwv by those who hcul promised to manage things there before and are now also doing them D. 7. 5. The negative of Ka! Ka! . . li is oO . . oO . 0. a. So in disjunctive phrases or clauses. Thus, dre o< ro 1r<(3o'Y]p.a dr< Kal ar ti..f..o TL oo~av either because of the exclamation OT also because some other thought OCCU1'1'ed to hi rn T. 5. 6.:> ; and so "' Kal 2862. Cp. itTJTETO ovov TL p.ii.f...ov v1r rwv iif..f..wv fi Ka! 1r' p.o he was not semched for by the othe1s more than he was by me (on my part) A nt. 5. 23. 2889. Similarly the Kal of et "'S KCJ.L nos is superfiuous; as Et7rep TL Ka! iif..f..o Kal roro p.a0'1'}rov if any other thing is leamable, this is too X. S. 2. 6. But Kal is usually omitted in the main clause; as lTrl~rra.ra' o' d "' Ka! iif..f..o< he knows as 1~ell as anybody else X. A. 1. 4. 15. So c;,, r Ka! /io< as also any other X. A. 2. 6. 8. 2890. 1<a.\ S~ Ka.( and especially, and in particular, and what is m01e, lays stress on a particular instance or application of a general statement. Here the second Kal emphasizes the following word .. Ka! a~ Ka.l is usually attached to a preceding r or Kal. Th us, Ka! /51] K< ron 7rp<palT<pov ~rvv<f'Y'YJf"<V and on th at especial occasion we came together somewhat emlie1 th an usual P. Ph. 50 cl, iv tJ.Xf..oLs r< Trof..f..o< Ka! 61] K< lv ro'i< Kcip.vov~r'v in the case of many others and pmticulmly in thea of the sick X. C. 1. 6. 21. 2891. Ka.t . S~ and . . . also, and . . . m01eover. Here Kal empha-

65-!

P ARTICLES: Ka7rep, KaTOl,

p..a

sizes the important intervening word or words, while !5 connects. Thus, Ka.l rr o' iv rau-rocs 'A.!'yw an(l I connt thee also wnong these A. Pr. 973. And also not is oO . . . !5. Hom. has Ka.l ot! and .furthm, and even (H 113), not Ka.l o. Ka.l D (for -r) is different (S. Ant. 432).
KO.L1TEp

is common with participles (2083). As a conjunction (cp. quanquam) without a main clause it is very rare (P. S. 219 c).
2892.
Ka.C'I!"ep altlwugh
KO.LTOL

not in Homer, means and yet, although, rarely anrl so then. Here .,-o{ marks something worthy of note, whieh is commonly opposed to what precedE's. Ka{ToL is used in making a correction (sometimes in the form of a question), in passing to a new iclea, an in the statement of a conclusion. 'L'he common Ka(.,-oL yE is stronger than Ka{ToL.
2893. Ka.CTo
(Ka2

+.,-o),

Ka.lrat ouov on ovK L'A718s dp71Ka. wv 7rpoe1rav and yet the1e is nothing untrue in what I sa id be.fme P. Eu th. :3 c. a. A sentence preceding Kairoc is often !'estated by a clause introduced by 'AM ( H' ofJ-ws ), fi, or vv li<. Cp. P. Ph. 77 a, Chanu. 175 c, A. 40 b, G. 499 c. b. Ka.irot is rarely, if ev er, used with the participle in classical Greek. It is best attested in P. R. 511 d; ernendation is resorted to in L. 31. 34, Ar. Eccl. 159.

J.L.

(cp. fL~v, fL'-v asseverative) with the accusative of the divinity or thing by which one swears. In negative sentences we have o fLa or fLa alone with the accusative; in alnnnative sentences, val fLa, but more eommonly v~. The omission of the accusative may sometimes be due to indeeision or to indifference and not always to scrupulousness (159G c). }La means properly in t?uth, verily; but ap1}arently governs the accusative after the ellipse of such verbs as I call to witness.
2894.

.,.a. asseverative

J.LV

was originally an asseverative, emphatic particle (su?ely, ceTtainly, incleecl) and a weaker form of fL~v. Cp. Epie ~ fLv, Kat fLv, o fLv in asseverations and protestations. Asseverative fLv survived as fLV solitarium and iu cornbination with other varticles. Antithetical (concessive) fLv owes its origin to the faet th at, as emphasis may indicate a contrast, the clause in which fL!.v stood was felt as preliminary to an ad versati ve mem ber of the sentence. Through association with this ad versa.tive member fLv gradually lost its primitive <ts:;;everative force.
2895.
fl-v

:zgor]

l'ARTICLES: fi-V

65.1

2896. 11-< solitarimn occnrs when a clause with 11-v is not followed by a clause with lf. 'l'bis is especially common when the antithetical clause is to be supplied in thought, as when !J.P empllasizes a statement made by a person with reference to himself as opposed to others ( often wi th a tone of arrogance or of credulity). Here any possible opposition or difference of opinion, bowever justifiable, is left unexpresserl. 'l'hus, yw !J.v ouK oa 1 for my part o not know (though others rnay) X. C. 1. 4. 12, 1rbr'Aw<Jav, ws 11-l:v Tos 'li'fl<rTots loKouv, </>toT!J.7J8vrH they saile away sinee they were }ealous as it seerne to the rnajority at least X. A. 1. 4. 7. So in su ch phrases as oKw ph, ?yyo!J.aL pb,
op.at p.{v.

289?. Sometimes !J.fv solitmium merely emphasizes a word in its clause and does not imply a contrast. Thus, f!J.OI !J.V ol<TTfa TaO this must be bome by rne on my pmt S. O. C. 1360. 2898. !J.v solitmiurn is commonest after persona! pronouns; but occurs also after demonstrative pronouns (L. 25. 16), after relati,ves (Aes. 3. 209), after substantives without the article (D. 9. 15), or after the article and before its substantive (L. 29. 1), after adjectives (L. 1. 27), after adverbs (1. 12. 91), after verbs (D. 19. 231). In questions 11-<v al one is rare (P. Men. 82 b). 2899. In combination with other particles, especially -IJ and ovv, asseverative either has a simple confirmatory force oris used adversatively. The following cases must be distinguished from those in which p.tv is correlative to i5f. 2900. p.v SfJ expresses positive certainty, especially in conclusions. It is common in summing up aud in transitions, and is used either al one or with other partie!es (sometimes it is followed by 'AM or il). Th us, TaTa p.v -1) To<aTa so much fm th at A. Pr.iiOO. So also, e.g. a. p.v SfJ but ce1tainly in fact ( 'A),.' ou !J.v -IJ in rejecting an a.lternative) ; et p.v SfJ if inPed in tru th; i<a.\ p.v SfJ and in truth, ancl in fact (often in transitions); ov p.v SfJ certainly not at all, nor yet, in truth (often used adversatively). 2901. p.v o,)v lit. ce1tainly in fact, p.v being a weaker form of !J.iJv. p. v ovv has two common uses, according as the particles have a compound force, or each has its own force. a. The compound force of !J.v ou v is seen in affirmations ; as in replies: 1ravv (p.auJTa) p.v oilv yes, by allmeans; ce?tainl.1J, by allmeans , aye truly, ev p.v oilv oiJa nay, 1 am sure of it, ou 11-i:v ouv ineecl not, dp' ou Toile '!Jv T Mvpov iq,' o1rep 'fryes 'iJp.s; TOITo !J.v ou v auTo isn' t this the tree to tohich you were bringing us '! To /,e sme this is it P. Phae. 230 a. b. The compound force appears also when p.l:v o v indicates a correction ; nay 1atlter ('i?no vero) ; as f:')'e <r <r !J.v ovv !J.OL 'Af')'e do you say. Nay, ratlw1 you Ar. Eq. 13, liTo1rov T iv1rvwv, (}) '1:,wKpaTes. lvap-ys p.v ouv the rlream is stmnge, Socraus. Nay rathm, it was distinct P. Cr. 44 ll. c. Each particle has its own force especially where p.v ovv indicates a transition to a new subject. Here p.v points forward to an antithesis to follow and indicated by f, 'A'Aa, !J.fvTo<, while oilv (inferential) connects with what precedes. Here so then, therP,(o1'e mny be userl in translrtt.ion. Thns, KMapxos p.v oilv To<raTa e1re. Tt<J<ra</J<ipv7Js iJ we 11'7Jfl-Ei</>87J swh tlun wne the words of (J/earthus; an on the othe?' han Tissapliernes an~wrre as follows X. A. 2. 5.15.
p.v

65G

l'ARTICLES: p.ev

[zgoz

Sometimes plv ov (like igitur) shows that a subject announced in general tertns is now to be treated in detail (P. Ph. 70 c). 2902. Common collocations are ci. p.v (cn..M . . . pb) but for a fact, y p.v, ij p.v, Ka.t p.v. 2903. Antithetical (concessive) pb distingnishes the word or clause in which it stands from a following word or clause marked usually by IN or by other particles denoting contrast, such as cL\l\ci, cl.rap, pivroc, p.i}v ; and even by CO]mlative Tt!, Kal (Hom. -1]5<). p.fv never connects words, clauses, or sentences. 2904. p.v 8 serves to mark stronger or weaker contrasts of various kinds, and is sometimes to be rendered by on the one ha nd ... on the other han, indeed ... but; but is often to be left untranslated. The pb clause has a concessive force when it is logically subordinate (while, though, whereas, cp. 2170). Thus, ., p.v 1fvx'1 71"0vxp6vc6v ITTL, TO a ITWp.a cl.cr8VEITTpov Kal OL"foxpovcwnpov the sonllastsfor a long time, the body is weaker and laBts for a sho1ter tirne P. Ph. 87 d, Kal 11"p6rr8ev p. v 51]" 71"0ol -i}p.wv fJpxov p.!: v OVV6s, -IPXOVTO D. vv a KaTCfKaCJ8E orw 'll"dvres oL i-ap6VTes

Wa'Te tipxere oL f.v

1TetPwv,

ol O J.f.ELvwv and

whert<as in fact many of us hitherto commanded no one, but were sub}ect to the command of othe1"S, now howevM all of yon who me p1'esent are so placed that y ou have comma nd, some over mme, others over fewer X. C. 8. 1. 4. a. So !ioTe p.v . . . iioTe 8, iip.a. p.v ... iip.a. 8 at once ... and, pwtly ... partly, ~v6a. p.v ... v9a. !l, ivTa.ii9a. p.v .. iKet 8, 1rplTov p.v . 1TELTO. 8 (or 1r<LTO. alone). On o p.v . . o 8 see 1107. Instead of o (ol) 0 we find e.g. 1()\l\os at, gVLOL at, /[rrrc o' ot. So TOVTO ph ror' li.l\o (or av8cs).-p.P may stand with a participle, i5t! with a finite verb, in an antithetical sentence. Example in 2147 c. b. el, ov (p.i}) standing before p.v . . . i5t! exercise their force on both opposed clauses. 2905. When severa! verbs referring to the same person or thing are contrasted, or wb en severa! attributes are contrasted, the first bas p.v, the others o. Cp. Lye. 5, X. A. 3. 1. Hl. But p.iv is sornetimes omitted. 2906. ph . . . lf is used in successive clauses which contain either the same word (anaphora) or a synonymous word; as !7w 0 tJ"vecp.c p.f:v Ows, tJ"ve<p.< o "d.v0pw11"o<s ros cl.-yaOos quoted in 1159, f}O p. v 1<al ml rfjs 'EpuOpali d."f'Y<l.>, cl.rpKv'iro 5 Ka.l 11"avraxo0ev news came from the district of Erythrae itself and a1'7"ived also from all quarters T. 3. 33. But pb is sometimes ornitted, as rrri}rrw tJ"' ii"fwv, ITTi}ITw 5' ip.aur6v I will b1ing thee and stablish thee, and I will stablish myself S. O. C. 1342. 2907. If more than two clauses are contrasted, only the first clause has p.tv, wh ile each of the following clauses has M (X. A. 1. 3. 14, X. C. 4. 2. 28).
2908. A contrast indicated by pb and ilf may stand inside another contrast indicated in the same manner, as o p.v cl.v'tjp rocara j.c.v 11"11"olrJKe, rocara ii 'Y<< bp.wv o rr 11"pwros, w Kl\iapxe, ci11"6<fnJvac "fVWP.TJV /J rc ITO< ooK the man has acted thus, and spealcs tlws; but do you, Clearchus, be the first to rnake known what you thinlc best X. A. 1. G. 9. 2909. Two relative (or conditional) clauses each with p.v may be fo!lowed

2gi6]

l'ARTICLES: f.LEV

657

by two demonstrative clauses each wit.h 0; but the second M isusuallyomitted, and there are other variations. Thus, o1r6<Tot p.fv ourot p.v . o1r6<Tot o . rovrous opw x. A. 3. 1. 43, cp. X. O. 4. 7, P. A. 28 e.
2910. A clause with p.lv is often followed by a contrasted clause without li jbut with a particle containing an element of opposition, as 1rpwrov JJ.v
if1TLTa. ETa.,

2911. A shift in the construction may cause li to be omitted (S. Ant. 1199). 2912. p.v after an emphatic demonstrative may resume p.v of the antecedent clause (D. 2. 18). 2913. 11-v TE (and even Kal) is nsed where the second clause is merely added instead of being coirdinated by rneans of M. Thus, rax p.v o1rot go" 7r<p<'Y<"fv6fJ.d)a .Op6ot re r({! lJ.pxovn c1r6p.evot .vv11"d<Trarot 'ijp.ev we have quickly reached the places to which we had to go, and by following our leade1 in a compact body we have been invincible X. C. 8. 1. 3. 2914. Position of 11-iv (and Si).- pb and li are cornmonly placed next to the words they contrast, and take precedence over other postpositive particles. But when two words belong closely together, JLv and o are placed between. Thus, wh en nouns with the article are contrasted, JLv and li stand after the article ; if the nouns depend on prepositions JLv and li stand after the preposition and before the article. a. But tls rule my be neglected in order to emphasize the preceding word, as r fJ.v &v8pw1rtva. 1rap;r,.es, r oatfJ.6vta o <TKo1rovres neglecting hwnan affai?s, but speculating on things divine X. M. 1. 1. 12, .v r <TKoretvv JLv in the tlarlcness T. 3. 22. b. If the noun has no article and is governed by a preposition, li usually takes the third place. c. Postponement of li (and some other postpositive parti cl es) to the fourth place is only apparent after an introdnctory vocative, which is not regarded as forming an integral parL of the sentence. 2915. fJ.v and li are sometimes referred to the en tire clause orto the predicate and not to the words that are opposed to each other. This arrangement is often adopted to preserve the symmetry of the juxtaposed clause. JLv and li are thus often placed after persona! or dmonstrative pronouns. Thus, ~eye fJ.v ws ro 1roM, ros M fJovoJLvots lfi)v ciKovetv Soc rates for the most part was wont ta talle, while any who chose could lir,ten X. M. 1. 1. 10, 1rws av 1rool p.v hre06JLovv rupavvv .. ; 7CWS M 7rvres lt1)ovv TOS rvpvvous; wh y shmd many desire to possess despotic power ? why should everyody envy de~potic ?'ul<ws? X. Hi. 1. 9 (for 1rvres l: 1rws llfiouv li.v). Cp. lv fJ.v rovrots , . lv lKelvots li Lye. 140, 7rep1 arwv p.v . . . 7rep1 o TWV 00"1COTWV L. 7. 35, etc. a. The transposition is often designed to produce a chiastic (3020) order, as ~1ra8e JLv ovliv, 1roM o Ka.K lvbfJ.t!;e 1ro<i;<Tat he sujtered no loss, but thought that he had do ne a g1eat deal of damage X. A. 3. 4. 2 (here ovMv and 1roM are brought close togethcr).

av

2916. In poetry fJ.v and lU often have a freer position than in prose. l5 may often come third when an emphatic word is placed before it, and evenfourth. GRJK GRAM. -42

658

PARTlCLES: fLEVTol, f.LIJV

[2917

jlVTOL

2917. p.v-roL (postpositive) from p.v asseverati ve and ad versa ti ve particle.

( = ft~v,

2895) +rot, is an

2918. Asseverative pb-ro< certain/y, surely, of cou1se, in truth is very com~ mon in replies, where it expresses positive, eager, or reflective assent. Often with v~ (!") Ala. 'l'hus, -yw; ~ }J-vro< I? ce1tainly, you Ar. Eq. HiS, -rl yap,

l!tp1], }J-f!J-V1J~aL KEva ; vai p. Ala }J-f!J-V1J!J-aL }J-VTOL -routra Kou~i.s ~ov

weil then, said he, do you 1ecall those rnatte1s; Yes, by Zeus, certainly I do rccall that I heard things to that e.tfect f1om you X. C. 1. 6. 6, 'A1)8~-ra-ra !J-fvTOL 'Afym well, certain/y you say what is ve1y true P. Soph. 245 b. p.v-ro may strengthen asseverations or emphasize questions ; as o-rw }1-v-roL XPTJ XlyELv in t1uth we must speak th us P. Th. 187 b; often with demonstrative pronouns, as cJJ -ro-ro !J-fVTOL vi) Ala a-ronv 1n8oJ oh, by Zeus do oblige thern in this Ar. Aves 661. a. Asseverative !J-fVTOL in combinations, e.g.: .~~. flVToL bttt surely, but in fact (in 'A'A . !J-v-ro<, }J-vroL refers to the preceding word). Ka.t flv-roL and ... indeed, and ... in fa ct, and ... moreover, as tp<'Ao87Jpora-ros -Tjv Ka! -rrpos -r 81Jpla }J-vro< if><oK<vi5vvoraros he was very fond of hunting and rnoreover exceedingly fond of danger X. A. 1. 9. 6. o- flv-roL no indeed (also adversative: yet not). 2919. Adversative !J-EvTOL however, yet often marks a contrast or a transition; as tpi<p.v ~, ' ' " rovr'i' !J-vro< we let you go, on this condition however P. A. 29 c. !J-vro 'Y< is stronger. flV flv-ro is much stronger than !J-v M, as <j>t'Ao~6if>'l' J.I.V l!o<Kas . r~e, p.vro< vo7Jros &v you 1eseml!le a philosopherknow ho,wever that you are a fooZ X. A. 2.1. 13. On o- p.v-ro .~~6. (ye) see 2767.

JLllV
2920. p.1]v (postpositive): (l) asseverative, in t1uth, surely; (2) adversative, especially after a negative, yet, however. The fonns p.~v (Hom., Att.), fi-av (Hom., Lesb., Dor., lyric parts of tragedy), p.v truly (Hom., Att.) and p.a in oaths are all connected. p.~v emphasizes either a whole statement or a single word.
woe yp ~epw, Ka! }J-i)v reu'Ae~J.tvov ~~-ra< fm th us I will declare, and verily it shall be accomplishe 'Ir 410; Ka'Aov f"V 7J &:t..1]8ew . , ~o<K< }J-i)v o Prf.owv -rr18e<v t1uth is a fine thing, y et it does not seem an easy thing to persuade 1'. L. 6ll3 e, el 15' 11.-ye !J-YJV come now, on then A 302, oov J.tliv"Kw'AVH but nothing hindeTs l'. Phae.268 e. 2921. Combinations of fl~v : .~~. fl1Jv ( ... -ye) but surely; but yet; nay, indeed; well, in truth. Often used to add something of greater importance, or in transitions when a new idea is opposed to the foregoing. <i'A'A !J-YJV is often separated by a negative. ~ fl1Jv_ vmily, vmily. Often to introduce an oath or a threat.

P ARTICLES:
Ka.\ JLfJv

vvv, vvt, vDv, vvv, vu

65~

and ve1ily or and yet according to the context. Kai p.f}v frcquently introduces a new fact or tlwught and hence often denotes transition, sometimes opposition (further, howeve1, and yet). In tragedy this formulais used to mark the beginning of a new scene, as when the arriva! of a uewcomer is thus signalized (but here cames); as Kalp.T)v ava~ o5e and lo! herc is the king S. O. C. 549. In replies, Kalp.f}v usually confirms the last remark, accedes to a request, or denotes h<arty assent; sometimes there is an adversative sense (and yet; and (yet) swel!J; oh, but). In enumerations, Kal flfJ adds a new fact (and besicles). Ka.\ JL-lJv . -ye in transitions or enumerations marks something of still greater importance; but it is not so strong as Kal p.v of}. Here -y emphasizes the word or words with which it is immediately connected. In replies, and indeed, and yet or oh, but; as Kalp.T)v tro<f}<Fw 'Y and yet I will do it S. EL 1045. Ka.l. JL-lJv Ka.( (neg. Kalp.T)v olit!) ancl in tntth also. oil J.LfJv swely not, oil JL-lJv ciX\6. neve1theless (2767), oil J.L-lJv oS nor again (2768), oS JLiJv and certainly not. T( JLfJv; lit. what indeed (quid ue1o), as ci rL p.T)v ooKes; but what in t1uth is your opinio.n '? P. Th. JG2 b. rL p.f}v; standing alone, bas the force of naturally, of co1trse. Th us, -you<F<v i}p.i w's owMras, rl p.f}v; they speak of us as dead, and why should they not jl, A. Ag. G2. Often in Plato to indicate assent. TC J.L-lJv oil; ( why indeed not=) of course I do.

va.[, vi)
2922. va.C (cp. Lat. nae) asseverative (t1uly, yea), with tl1e accusative in oaths where it is usually followed by 11-ci (1596 b). val yes, in auswers, is fouml only in Attic. 2923. vi) (cp. Lat. n) asseverative (tny, yea), with the accusative in oaths, and only in an affirmative sense. vf} is found only in Attic. See 1506 b.
VVV, VVVL, VVV, VVV, VV
,.... .!.

.L

2924. vv now, at present often has a causal sense, as vv M b11t as the case stands, as it is; often to mark reality in contrast to an assumed case. 2925. vvi (vv + deictic <, 333 g) is stronger than vv: even now, at this moment ; rarely in a causal sense. 2926. vil'v (enclitic; lyric, tragic, Herodotus, rare and suspected in Homer), a weakened form of vv, is rarely temporal, usually infereutial, as now is used for then, the7q(o1e. vv th us marks the eounection of the speaker's thought with the situation in which he is placed. It is commonly used after imperatives, prohibitive and hortatory subjunctives. Thns, K8<!;e vuv p.e seat me, then S. O. C. 21. In Xenophon and Plata vuv is written by some editors, where the Mss. have vv (X. C.4. 2. 37, H. 4. 1. 39). 2927. vUv (enclitic) is adopted by some scholars in Attic tragedy where a long syllahle is required (S. O. T. 644). Others write vv (with tl1e force of vfiv). 2928. vil (enclitic; J~pic and Cyprian), a stiJl weaker form of vv, and less emphat.ic than iif}. It is common in questions nnd appeals; less frequent in statements ; as ris vu; who now '? Also after other particles, as Kal vu K<, 1j p. vu.

660

PARTlCLES: cnrwr;

01TOOS

2929. IJ.rrws, originally a relative adverb meaning how, is derived from the relative particle rrroo (with which Eng. sois connected), to which the indeiinite 1rws has been added. Hom. ii1r7rws from rrroo-1rws, as orn from rrroli-r< (81 D 2). a. The adverbial meaniug of o1rws is still seen in its use as an indeiinite relative and as an indirect intBrrogative; and by the fact that in its place O'lr!/, or'!) rp07r'J', ~ orov rpo1rov are sometimes used. By association with the snbjunctive o1rws became a conjunction (cp. p,f, 1rws) used with or without /lv in final clauses (see 2196, 2201 ). On the use as a conjunction in object clauses after verbs of e.ffo1t and of fem, see 2211, 2228. So in dependent statements o1rws passed from how into that (2578 d).

O', OiJTE (!J.'ll, !J.ltTE)

2930. ovS (JJ.TJS) is an adverb and. a conjunction, and is to be broken up into the negative o (p.~) and 3 meaning and, even, also, or but.

ov3 (p.'I'J'fd) as an Adverb 2931. Adverbial ov3 (p.'fJ3) not even, not ... eUher, also ... not, nor y et (ne . . quidern). Cp. the use of Ka{ even, also in affirmati Ye sentences; as oi13' w> not even in that case (Kat ws e11en in that case).
a' oo rorwv rrnpi,rrovra.< but not even of these shall they be deprived X. A. 1. 4. 8, fJr' ail' ovrw /H/wv 1jv when besides it was not so easy I. 18. 65 ( = Ka.t o also' not). With ov' l (Uv) not even if o belongs with the main clause, while /5 even goeS With the dependent clause. 'fhus, 000' c.v El f3oOLVTO, pq_o/ws 7rOV'T/pOt "(va<vra even if they wished, they could not easily become wiclced X. C. 7. 5. 86 ( = Ka.t <l ~oo<vro; oK v "fvotvro). Similarly with a participle: o .,. .,.ov6ws Ka.Kws xOpbv dva.l !J-O< rorov o!J.oo"fw I do not admit that this man is my enemy even though I have been ill-use D. 21. 205.

oil (p.YJ3) as a Oonj1mction

2932. oil (p.YJ3) as a conjunction

(and not, nor) connects two or

more whole clauses.

2933. In Attic prose oo is used only to join a negative clause to anotber clause itself negative; as oe!J.la. 'll'ls 1jv TL!J.wpliis oii d'lJ GWT'l)plii <f>a.lvETo the1e was no hope of assistance nu1 did any chance of sa.fety appea1 T. 3. 20. a. A negative clause is joined tc an affirmative clause by mi o (~J.iJ). 'l'hus, !J.!J.fVW rii ~u!J.p,a.xlq. . Kal oo 7ra.pa.f31wop.a.< I will abl,e by the alliance and l will not violate it T. 5. 47. Ka.t av (MiJ) may have an adversative force (but not). N. -But in poetry and Ionie proBe ooM may contin ne an affirmative clause; as ELvov "f.p ool5 p'1/r6v dread indeecl and not to be tttteTed S. Ph. 75G. 2934. o&M is used by the poets for lmt not, where Attic prose writers have ' o or Ka.l o. Th us, ~vO' ilo<s p,v 1rfiv<v 1,voa.vev, o 1roO' "Hpv oo IIoQ'EL-

P ARTICLES:

oO,

otiTE (fJ/I],

p,f]Te)

661

O<lwv< then it was pleasing to all the others, ln1t not to liera orto Poseidon 0 25, lf-La(jt oO (jat(j< ilv(jf3ovl\iats by my full y but not !J thine B. Ant. 1269 (cp. the negative form oK l,.,.Ov rbo' n (jbv this is not my part, but thine S. El. 1470). Cp. (jO raE KLVOVVEVELS, ,)l.)l.' oK p.ofi K1)KOtvaL yoa probably hea1'd this frorn

yourself and not from me P. Ale. 113 c.

2935. o/l may stand in an apodosis corresponding to apodotic Cp. S. O. C. 590.

(2837).

2936. oil~ may negative a preceding word also ; as ai 'Polvunra< v?i<s o o Tt(j(ja<f>pv7Js :fjKov the Phoenician shi:ps had not a1'1'ived no1 had Tissaphernes

T. 8. 99. Cp. 2943. In such cases we usually flnd another negative, which goes with the verb; as ,.,.-)l.ov p. v oo oiKawv ooicv &v El1ri:v gxo< he could say nothing straightforward nor just D. 22. 4.

oo (tL'YJo) with othe1' Negatives

2937. o-S . o-S commonly means n'Ilot even . . . nor yet (or no, nor), the first o being adverbial, the second conjunctive. ol: ol is not correlative, like oi!n . . . oi!u, and hence never means neithe1 . . . no?'. Tlms, oo ijl\wv oil (jEJ\-fJv7Jv lipa vop.lw OEOs <va<; do I then hold that not even the sun nor yet the moon a1e gods ? P. A. 2G c, (jV 'Y oil bpwv 'Y"YVW{jKfLS oiJ Kovwv p.p.v7JO'<u you <lo not even undeTstand though you see, 1W1' yet do yon 1emember thongh yon hear X. A. 3.1. 27. o o both copulative (and not nor y et) in X. C. 3. 3. 50. o-8 . . ovS . . . 8 is the negative of Kal Kal 0 in X. A. 1. 8. 20. a. So in both members of comparative sentences (cp. Kal 2885); as tfJ0'7rEP oo "t<Wp"to &p'Yofi oov 5pEXos, orws oo O'Tpar7J'YOV &p"tovros ovilv 5p<Xos as there is no good in an idle tiller of the sail, so the1e is no good in an idle geneml x. c. 1. 3. 18. 2938. ovS yip o-8 (negative of Kal -yp Kal) ; as oO -yp ov TOro fU(jaro for neithe1 dicl he <leceive me even in this X. C. 7. 2. 20. Here the first o negatives the whole sentence, the second oli negatives rofiTo. 2939. o- .. ollS: o/l not even as well as nor (2933) may resume a preceding o. Th us, v{3ptv "tp o O'rp-yoV(jLV o!J !Ja.ip.ovEs lit. not even the gods do not love insolence s. Tr. 280, o p.vra< gp7J vop.letv ov' El 1fCJ.P,1rOV7]pOs 'f}v ilt!~L1f7r<IS {3lq. xp?Jva< 1ra(jxfLv aTov he said however that he did not thinlc that, ecen if Dexippus was a dowmight rascal, he our;ht to suffer by an act of violence X. A. 6.6.25, oU e'i 01}.rowrov . Ka~pv iupevaL oUO rraOv rarv 07(p weJr0v8are we must not let such an opportunity go by no1 su.tfer the sarne as you have S7~tfered D. 1. 8. ov fJ-v1'oL o-S not by any rneans however. On ov fl-TJV o-8 see 2768. 2940. ovS . . . o-: oo may be resnmed by o; as oM 'lE l!Jlq. 1rov7Jpos oK &v -yvo<To 7JfJ.Mlq. XP7J(jTos 1to1' can the man who is bad in his private life
p1ove himself good in a publw capacity Aes. 3. 78.

2941. ovS ... oil'TE is rare (P. Charm.l71 b).

662

PARTICLES:

ovO,

OVTE

"

oih{
2942.
oll-re (fL~Te)

(p.~n)

is usually repeated: ollTE oilTE (JL~TE , fL~TE) neither ... nor (nec ... nec). ol!n . . oi5T{ is the negative of r . . T, and unites single words or clauses.
o~u

pla-o<f>os

l!a-nv oi!'T 1ror lia-rat neithe?' is no? eve?' shall be P. Phae. 241 c, o~re Xet'ijKEV oi!re 1roa iKav 1jv oi!'T r E1Ttri}o<ta {}v afJ.f3av<tv ht neithe1 had

Chirisophus conw n(w were thme enough boats no1 was it possible any longer to secure p1ovisions X. A. 5. 8. 1. After a negative clause: oK li1T<t8ev o~re ros a-rparrryos o~r ros a-rpanwris he could not pe1s?tade either the genemls m the soldie1s T. 4. 4. a. ollTE . fL~TE is found when each negative is determined by a different construction, as vato1)s oi!r' El!J.1 !J.iJre ')'<vol!J.'rJV neither am I nor may I become shmneless D. 8. 8. b. When oi!re oiire stands between o/5 .. o!i the members thus correlated are subordinate to those expressed by oo oiU. Cp. Aes. 1. 19. 2943. Sometimes the first oii'T is' omitted in poetry : v6a-ot o' oi!re "ffi pas disease nor old age Pindar, Pyth.10. 41, K6vra p.i)r' cZKovra willingly nor tmwillingly S. Ph. 771. Cp. "my five wits nor my five senses" (Shakesp.). 2944. For the first oi!re the poets sometimes have o, as o vt<f>ers oiir' llp xet!J.WV not snow nor storm o 566. 2945. ollTE .. T on the one hand not . . . but, not only not . . . but (cp. neque . . . et). The rtf clause often denotes the contrary of that set forth in the oi!re clause (so fm from). Th us, oi!re otevoiJ8'rJv 1rw1Tore 1roa-repfja-at 7roowrr'w re so far from ever thinlcing to deprive them of the ir pa y I will give it to them X. A. 7. 7. 48, GJp.oa-av p.i}re 1rpoowa-etv <i.i}ovs a-p.!J.axol re ~G'EIT8at they swore that they would not bet1ay one anotheT and that they would be allies 2. 2. S. So ollTe . . . oiTe . . T. T . ollTE is not used, a. Sometimes the negative may be added in the r clause : oiire Kvos ~rt Karevo'rJITE ro re !J.avr<ov oK 15i}ov neithm did he stop to consideT and the oracle wo1d not make it plrtin T. 1. 126. 2946. ovTE .. TE o~ S. Ant. 763. ollTE . . TE . . ovTE E. H. F. 1341. 2947. ovTE . . 8 is used when the second clause is opposed to the first;
as oiJre 1rod. O'TLJI or~ d7ro7ru66p.e8a, p.vov<Tt. O aro oVO J.Us i}p.pGs l!rrrt r bnri]i5eta we have no vessels by which we can sail away; on the otlwr hand, if we

stay he1e, we haven't p1ovisions even foT a single day X. A. 6. 3.16. Cp. E. Supp.
223, P. R 388 e, 389 a. 2948. oll-rE . . . o~ is rare in prose ; as oiire vt<f>er6s, oK fJ.f3pos neither 1ain nor snow Hdt. 8. 98. Cp. s. A nt. 249. oihE . . . oil . . ollTE A. Pr. 479. oil ollTE is generally changed to o . . ol5tf in A ttic prose. 2949. ollTE . . o~8 corresponds to the sequence of r . . . o in affirmati-ve clauses. The emphatic oo here adds a new negative idea as after any other preceding negative ; and is most common after of!re . . . oi!re: neithe1 . . . no1 . . . no, no1 yet (nor . . . eithe1). ol5tf is often followed by an

2953]

p AltTICLES:

OVICOV,

OVICOVV

663

ern1)hasizing particle, as ni'l, "t, p.-f)v. Tbus, ol!re 1r6<S o!Sre 7rOre!ii olii 'Y' v~p neither a State nor a constitution no1 yet an individual P. R. 499 b, p.-f]re 7rttdleiii p:r}re <Karrr-i]p<tt p.-f]re vbp.o< JI-7J va:)'K7J J1-7Jep.la neither education nor courts ofjustice nm laws, no nor yet restraint P. Pr. 327 d. 2950. A subordinate clause with o may come between oVre . oVr<. Thus, oi!Te ")'p ws o</Jovra !LE KarlEL7T'V 7rar't}p .1r'J7JVEV oO 7rap<J"X7JTa< iJ-aprvpas oi!r' av rv pdJp.v l1ravcpepev .for neithe1' dill he show that my .fathe?' left me in debt, nor yet has he adduced witnesses, nor did he jltlt into the accuunt the sum D. 27. 49.
O'KO'V, OVKOUV

2951. o'llKov interrogative: not the7efore ? not then? (nonne, igitur?

nonne e1go ?).

Here the stress lies on the inferential oJv and an affirmative answer is expected as a matter of course. ovKovv stands at the beginning of its clause.
OOKOV EV (J"OL OOKO<J"L f:JovEErr0a< ; 7rp6s '1 i.l opwrr< do 1fOU not then think th at they lay theil plans well ? Y es, with 1egmd to wh at they see X. C. 7. 1. 8. a. When a negative answer is expected we have otlKoiJv o (P. Phil. 43 d). b. otlKoiJv and oilv stand in parallel questions in X. A. 1. 6. 7-8. c. Sorne scholars write oVKovv or oK oilv for otlKoiJv interrogative (and inferential). 2952. o'llKov inferential: then, well then, therejbre, accordingly (e7'(JO, igitu.r). Inferential otJKovv was developed, probably in colloquial

speech, from the intenogative use, the speaker anticipating tbe affirmative answer to his question and emphasizing only the inference. From the negative question all that was left was an expression of his own opinion on the part of the speaker. oKovv has become so cornpletely equivalent to oiiv that a negative has to be added if one is required.
oKoiJv, 5rav 't) 1'-TJ rr!Jvw, 'll'7l'arro,.,_a, well then, when my st?ength fails, I shall cease S. Ant. 91, 7) . Tos &,,.,_6verr1Jru K<ovras 'll'EfJ-Ov 'll'O<ev q,f}rrop.<v; oKov 1r6omov 15ouVHv or shall we say that those who bid us defend ounelves make war? Then it is left fm us to be slaves D. 8. 59. otlKofiv is used even with imperatives; as otlKoOv . iKavws <x hw accordingly let it suffice l'. Phae. 274 b. a. Editors often differ whether, in certain cases, otlKoOv is interrogative or inferential.

2953. ollKouv not then, therefote not, so not, at any Tate . . . not, S1(rely not (non 1:gitnr, non ergo). Here o is strongly emphasized,

and oiiv is either confirmative or infere11tial. at the beginning of its clause.

o{Kovv

is usually place

a. In emphatic negative answers ; as oi!Kouv g,.,_o<-y< ooKE certainly not, in my opinion at least X. O. 1. 9. b. In continuons discourse (P. L. 807 a). c. oi5Kouv . 'Y' l'etnrns a negative answer with qualified acquiescence in a precediug statement. 'rhus, TOTWP tipa ZES f(J"TLV rriJevrrupos ; oVKOVV av K</JV")'OL

664
')'E r?]v 7rE7rP"-'f.LVrJV

P ARTICLES: ovv

[2954

is Zeus then wealce1 than these? Fate at least he su1ely cannat escape A. Pr. 517. d. In impatient or excited questions (non? non igitttr?). Thus, oi!Kovv ops 1ror', Eir' <braaxiJEis li1rEL ; tvilt tho tt not spealc and so clepa1t and be gone ? S. Ant. 244. 2954. o~K ( p.-lj) ouv is to be distinguished from ollKov or oi!Kovv. Th us, o1r6n
Ka17relpq- rou <rcf>aev, oK oi'iv K< r?]v 7TO<v ')'< ri)s <rcf>erlpas peri)s ~wOvns <Jrpl<rK<<V whenever they were foiled in any attempt they clid not for this 1eason thin!c it right to rlep1ive thei1 city of their valou1 T. 2. 43. (11-17 ouv 8. Dl). a. Hdt. has o~K &v (sometimes written oi!Kwv) to emphasize an idea opposed to what goes bef ore (non ta men). Th us, ra Or a -yovns ros Kporwv<i}ras oliK (f;v ~1T<<IJov by these words they did not however pe1suacle the men of Croton 3. 137.

o~v
2955. ouv (Ionie, Lesbie, Doric lv), a postpositive particle, is either confirmatory or inferential. o~v points to something already mentioned or known or to the present situation. 2956. Confirmatory ouv in fact, at all events, in tTuth belongs properly to the en tire clause, but usually, for purposes of emphasis, attaches itself to sorne other particle, to a relative pronoun, or at times to other words (P. A. 22 b). On -yov, see 2830; on p)v ouv, 2001; on ro<-yapoOv, 2987. In sorne of its combinations with other particles oi'iv may be inferential or transitional. 2957. ci.' ouv or ci.' ouv ... ye (stronger than o' obv) well, at all events; well, certainly, for that matter; as ' ou v 1TOvrJpol 'Y cf>a<v6f.1-<vo< well, at all events they.Zoolc lilce sony fellows, that they me X. C. 1. 4. Hl, ' ovv rD<ror6v -y' f<r8< well, at any mte you lcnow this at least S. Ph. 1305. ' o1lv may stand in the apodosil? to an hypothetical proposition (P. Ph. l b). 2958. y.p ouv (and Ka.t y.p ouv) for infact (indeed, in any case); as e1l -yp o1lv -ym fo1 indee!l thon sayest well S. Ant. 12G5, vfwe<riJ< Ko!ovres p.iw -yp o-~v lirra Dp,Zv lpeiv m1 lia ymt will profit by listening; for I am certainly going to tell yo1t some otlwT things P. A. 30 c. Also to mark a consequence (X. A. 1. 9. 11), and in replies, as o -yp o'{jv P. Phae. 277 e, and also when the speaker repeats an important word of his interlocutor, as cf>rJf.l-l -yp o1lv P. G. 466 e. 2959. 8' ouv but ce1tainly, at all events, anyhow, be that as it may with or witbout f.J-v in the preceding clause. Here ou v shows th at an unquestionable faet is to be set forth in its own clause; while the adversative f marks oppositioii to what has precedd and implies that the foregoing statement is uncertaiu and liable to dispute : 'be that true or not, at any mte what follows is certainly true.' o' ou vis used (a) to set as ide conjecture, surmise, or hearsay ; (b) to resume the main argument after long digression, and to eut short further discussion and come to the point; (c), wilh imperatives, to denote assent marked by unwillingness, impatience, or indifference. Tlms, (a) el p,v o?] O!Ka<a 1To<i}<rw, ollK oToa. a!pi}<rop,a< o' oiiv Df.J-.S whAther I shall do tvhat is right (or not), I do not know; be that as it may, J ?1Jill choose yon X. A. 1. 3. 5, Ka1 l-yero Kvpt;J ooOva<

P ARTiCLES:

ouv,

1rp

665

7fO xpfJJJ.ara. ri/ li' o v (J'Tpan~ rel re ci1fWK< KOpos }IM8ov r<r-r&.pwv p:1Jvwv and she is said to have given Cy1us a la rye sum; at rmy rate Cyrus then gave the a1my fom mrmths' pay 1. 2. 12; (b) cp. T. 1. 3, 6. Hi, 8. 81. Resumptive ' ovv may also set aRide doubtful statements. ( c) (J' o' oilv 'f<, d (J'OL -r.;J D'Y'l' -r<s noopf) well speak on then, if thou hast delight in spealcing s. EL sm, ~(J'TW o' ovv o1rws OJJ.i'v <j>lov howevm, be it as you wish S. O. C. 1205. el S' o.lv /mt ({ indeed, but if in point of fact; as tl o' ofi11 n d.KrpbroL-ro -ro 1rp6(J'e<P 6'{ov b1tt if he should deviate at all f1'01n his former statement S. O. T. 851.

2960. S~ o.lv certainly then; cp. oilv Sf]. tvell then pray'! 1rws ill) oi!v; how th en p1ay ?

'l'hus,
o{;v Sft'!'a.

-rl

o1) oilv; or -rl ov of,; 1'eally then.

2961. d'!'e oilv, oll'l'e oilv : in alternative clauses oilv (indeed) is added to one or both clauses as emphasis may be desired: .t.,.e ovv . El-re whethe1 indeerl ... or, et-re . e~-re oilv whethm ... 01' indeed, or .~.,.. oilv . et-re oilv whether indeed . . . or indeed. So also in exdusive clauses : oiiT< (JL~-re) . . . oiiTe (flof]Te) oilv neither . . . nor yet, o-re (JLfJTe) oilv .. oi!Te (JLfJ-re) neither indee . . . nor. 2962. oilv often follows interrogative pronouns and adverbs (in dialogue); as TLS o{iv; who pray ? .,.( oilv, generally with the aorist, in impatient questions asks why that which is desired has not been done (2197 c). 2963. oVv a:ffixed to a relative prononn has a generalizing force and makes it indefinite (339 e). Su ch indefinite relative pronouns are construed like the ihdefinite rls or demonstratives ; and do not introduce relative clauses (unlike whosoevm, etc., w hi ch are both indefinite and relative). So with ad verbs (34() c), as o1fw(J'ov in any way, no matter how ( = utique not= Htcunque). Thus, otlo' o1fw(J'o0v not even in the slightest cleg1ee. a. Simply placed a:fter relatives oilv has a strengthening force; as JJ(J'1f<P ovv as infact (often in parentheses), ot6s w<p ovv j1tst as infact. 2964. Inferentia1 o.lv the1'f({01'e, acco1dingly (igitur, e1go), usually cla.ssed as a conjunction, signifies that something follows from what precedes. Inferential ovv marks a transition to a new thought and continues a narrative (often after lwel, f1fHof,, on), resumes an iuterrupted narration 3. 42, X. c. 3. 3. 9), and in general states a conclusion or inference. It stands alone or in conjunction with other particles. Thus, ava.pxi<& /lv Kal a-ra~i<& fVfJ>L)ov ilfhS awo'!.(J'8a.L. /Jii oliv wo JJ.P ros lpxov-ra.s l1r<JJ.<(J'Tpovs 'f<V(J'8a.< -ros vv -rwv 7rpo(J'8<v they wrwe of the opinion that we would be overcome th1ough ou1 laclc of leacle1s and discipline. It is irnpen:!tive therefore that the leaclers we have now should be much mo1e watc/if11l than those we had bqfore X. A. 3. 2. 2. a. The inferential and transitional use is derived from the confirmative meaning, and is scarcely marked until Herodotus and the Attic poets. Cp. }Jkv oilv. 1r<l oi'Jv in Horn. is sometimes used in transitions.

cr.

1Tp

2965. trp (postpositive and enclitic) very, jnst, even.. Cp. Epie 1dp very 11wch, and 1fEp[ in composition. In Attie prose 7l'p is eom-

mon only with relatives (338 c) and eonjunctions.

666
ocf1r<p the veTy one who (i.e. none othe1), oi6s 1rep just such, gviJa 1rep just tvhere, &u1rep just as, in the very way in which, (sometimes not very different from ws, to wbich it is related as l!u7r<p to os), d1rep if really. Kal7r<p (Hom. Kal 1rep) howeve1 much, though, Epie iJ< 1r<p just as. a. After other words especially in Epie and Lyric and in Aeschylus ; as pbet r IJeov i'iov/..lq. 1rep v <j>p<vl the divine power 1ernains in the mind though it be enslave A. Ag. 1084, JLrixer', O.xvvJLev6s 1rep ralpov he fought, (though) sore g1ieving for his com1ade P 459, otj;{; 1r<p howbeit late Piud. Nem. 3. 80.

1T'l\v an adverb, is used (a) as a preposition with the genitive (1700) meaning except, save, when that which is excepted is a single substantivai idea; (b) as a conjunction, except, except that, save that, unle~s, only, but ( often al most = &U.a).
2966.
'II'f]v

&.<j>ELuriJKeuav . . 1ruat 1r7}v Ml\fJrov all the Ionie cities had revolted except Miletus X. A. 1. 1. 6; oli<ts &.1ryfEL 1rps (3autl\, 1r7}v 'Op6vrs 11'<X<lpnue no one went o.tf to the king save thctt Orontas rnade the attempt 1. 9. 29, 11'.7]v ~v JL6vov lifliotKa but the1e is one thing and only one th at I fear Ar. Plut. 199. A substantive-equivalent may follow wl\f}v, not in the genitive, but in the case required by the verb of the sentence, as uvvfjMov 1ravres 1r7}v ol Nwvos all assemble!) except the men unda Neon X. A. 7. 3. 2. a. 'II'~v o only not, except (27 53) ; 'II'~v 1\ except, as o -y,p /1)\)\cp -y' 7raKouuaLJLEV 1rl]v;) llpoLKcp we would not listen to any one (else) except Proicus Ar. Nub. 361; 'II'~v on except that; '!I'~v Et except if, cp. el JLfJ (nisi si), after a negative 1r7}v el JL1J; often with the verb omitted, as o&ets oioev 1r\7}v et ns l1p' opm no one knows except pe1haps some birfl Ar. A v. 601. b. 'll'i}v may be followed by the infinitive, as TL ua< 1r11'piiK-rat 1rpi-yl-'a. 1r-/jv reux Kaf'O. ; what hast thou accomplished save to work mischief? A. Euro. 125.

and (postpositive, and enclitic as -que) 1s generally used with a carrelati ve conjunction.
2967.
T

2968. r alone sometimes in prose links whole clauses or sentences which serve to explain, amplify, supplement, or to denote a consequence of, what precedes (and thus, and therefore, and as a result). Thus, li' <xa.l\7ratvev . , hl\wu r' avTv h To JL<rov e~lcrra.uiJcu but he was angry and (therefore) onlerecl him to get o~tt of the way X. A. 1. 5. 14. Cp. 2978. a. This use of r (Tt! conseq1eential) s quite common in Herodotus and Tlmcydides, rather rare in Xenophon, and infrequent in other prose writers. It occurs also in poetry. N.- In poetry r alone (cp. -que) often connects single parallel nouns and pronouns so that the two connected ideas form a whole; as uKfjwrpov TJLiis TE scept?e and p1e?oyatives A. Pr. 171. I1i prose, participles and infinitives are occasion ally linked by r; as Ka.fho,rp ooua. 1rpewovrws TE JL'Al\ov iJJL<PL<<rJLoV'fl being fai1'e1 and (tTPsse(lJlto1'e becorningly X. O. 10. 12,

PARTICLES:

G67

2969. Tf (or Kal) meaning oth may be followe by asyneion (S. Ant. 2\JG). 2970. Homer often, and Herootus sometimes, ads T to relative pronouns and conjunctions introducing subordinate clauses, which are usually postpositive. So after ils, ilcros, olos, ws, lire, f7l"fi, tvea, se,, etc. Thus, </>l'Y)0Ev f< /:u6s, ils TE Oeocrt vcrcrE< they 1vere loved by Zeus, 1oho 1ules ove1 the gods l:l 669. This untranslatable Tf is probably connective (not incefinite), and belongs to the whole clause. It has the effect of showing that its clause corresponds in some way to the preceding clause. ils TE is found in lyric poetry and in the lyric parts of tragedy (rarely in dialogue parts). t:JcrTE, ol6s Te became common. 2971. This connective force is also seen when T stands in the principal clause, sometimes both in the principal and in the snbordinate clause, e.g. ils K< Oeos 7rL1l"El01JTat, p.a .,., ~Kvov aTo whosoeve1 obeys the gods, him especially they hear A 218, li71"1l"YJ T' te6crYJ, Tll T' etKovcrt crTlxes vopwv whe1esoever he 1'!!shes, the1e the ranks of men give way M 48. 2972. Homer has Tf after the coordinating conjunctions Kal, of, ob, M, 1j ; after i}, f.J.fv, 7rfp, "!p, and bef ore Il pa in questions. 2973. 'I" 'I" usually serves to connect clauses, Jess frequently single words. In English and often suffices, but as . . . so is often in place. T Tf is more corn mon in poetry than in prose, but in prose more common thau Tf standing alone. Th us, 7rari]p vopwv Te Oewv Te fathe1 of men and gods A 544, p.ol T< "/p 7rOfJJ.to< 'Acrcrupw<, crol T< vv lxOiovs elcrtv i) ip.ol joT the Assy1ians a1e enemies to me, and they are now 'I'IW1'e hostile to you than to me X. C. 4. 5. 2:3, 1r<p1 wv elUvat T< K"i-.tcrTov p.i] elOvat Te atcrx<crTov lcnowledge of which is must excellent and ignomnce most disgmcejul P. G. 472 c. a. One clause may be negative, the other affirmative ('r. 2. 22) ; but we usually have oilTe instead of T o. 2974. 'I" Ka.t or 'I" Kn( often serves to unite complements, both similars and opposites. T . Kal is not used when one clause is subordinate to another. The two words or clauses thus united may show a contrast, or the second may be stronger than the first. Tf is commonly separated from Kal by one or more words. r Kal is weaker than KaL . ml, and will not easily bear the translation both . . . and. It is rare in colloquial Attic. Thus, llpxELv TE Kat 11pxw0a.< to ?'ule and be ruled X. A. 1. 9. 4, K<crT6v T< Ka! lip<crTov fai1est and best 2. 1. 9, T6 T' llpx<Lv Ka.t TO oov<uELv to rule and to be a slave A. Pr. 927, {3lq. T< Kox Kwv by fotce and not willingly S. O. C. 986, 'YVP.vcra.< i!avr6v Te Ka.L Tos Z7r7rous to exercise himselj and his hors es X. A. 1. 2. 7. Clauses dissimilar in form may be linked by T . Ka.l; as 111l"EKpivaTo {j, {3paxfwv T< Kat aT~ T lpwTwp.eva he ans1veTed b1iefly and only the q11estinns put to him P. Pr. 386 a. 2975. T Kal is often used of actions concident in time, or of actions standing in a causal relation to each other ; as -i]p.fpi. r< crxeoov 7r</>atve Kat els T p.fcrov 1jKov o! llpxovTes day was just b?"eaking and ( = when) the officers came into the centre of the camp X. A. 3. a. 1 (temporal parataxis; cp. 2169). 2976. T Kal is sometimes used of alternatives (for et7< dT<). Thus, {Jeo Te "fp OovTos Kat p.i] 0fovTos whethe1 God wills or not A. Sept. 427. Here Ka1 Kalis more common (2877).

668
2977. We 11nd
'f' . '1" Ka.(,
T

P ARTICLES: T
KQ.). . . . T, T . , , Ka.\

(T),

'T" .... T KO..t T~,

T . KO.'i.. , , Ko.l. T.

But in prose r befon~ and after Kai is rare. 2978. When r follows r . Kai, r does not point back to Kal, but denotes an addition to the preceding member (and besides). 'l'hus, relx'IJ r 7r<pL<"Mvrs Ka1 vas 1rapaoovns </Jopo v T 'ra~ap.<vo< l1oth destroying the ir walls anrl sunendering the ships an<l besides assessing tTibnte on themselves '1'. 1.108. Cp. 29G8. 2979. Ka.C TE is Rpic; elsewhere the Kai of Kat . re belongs to the whole clause (A. Ch. 252 ). 2980. ll...O>S TE Ka.( bath in athe1 ways and especially, on otheT g1ounds an(l particulwly, or simply especially. Th; combination usually stands before conditional cl~tuses (or clauses with a condition al pltrLiciple), causal, and temporal clauses. 'l'hus, xa<"Trov op.a< lhaf3aivHv ILws r Ka1 1roEp.iwv 1rowv ~p.7rpo8<v 6vrwv I think it h(nd ta cross, espPcially when the enemy faces us in full f01'Ce
X. A. 5. G. 9, 1ravrwv .. 7rorepe<J8ru 7r1Jp6v l<Jrt . . . , lws r Kdv im' <x8po r4J roro <Jup.f3alvTI it is g1ievons to be df]ll'ived of unything, especiully if this huppens to uny one at the hands of a personal enemy D. 18. 5. Cp. ra r' li.a lrtp.'f]<JE Ka1 p.vplovs ~owK< oiipHKous he both honou1ed me in othe1 ways and gave me ten tho usa nd du1ics X. A. 1. 3. 3.

2981. T 8 is used when a writer begins as if he were going simply to add the second member (buth . . . und), but instead cont1usts it with the first. This combination of copulative and adversative particles is often rendered less harsh by the form of the M clause and by other reasons. (a) The o clause contains a Kal; as llf.J.a (7rLra, rt., 1roXXaxo, WcraUrws) O Kal; e.g. v re rfl rWv l1rwv 7rO<f,<JEL 'l!'oaxo o Kt lio8<, lit. both in the construction of epie poetTy but also in many othe1' cases P. R. 394 c. (b) The second clause con tains a formula with D but not with Kal; as ~n D, -rl M, r o KE</Jaawv, p.er!t o rara. Thus, 'lT'f6Tpbv re . . . vv D (bath) f01'1ne1'ly ... bnt now X. H. 7. 1. 24 .. Cp. P. L. GG4 b, 947 a, 9G7 d. (c) Afte.r a considerable interval occasioned by the extension of the r clause, it is natural to resume with M. So T. 6. 83. 1, X. A. 7. 8.11, X. C. 2. 1. 22, L. 2.17. 2982. Rare combinations are, e.g. : 1j .. T instead of i) . . . 1]. Thus, i) 'lT'aoes veapo! xfJpo.l r< "'fuvaK either young child1'en and ( = OT) widowe!l women B 280. T 'i is often emended in X. O. 20. 12, P. Men. 95 b. T ov8 (p:q8) with ri instead of o~re (p.f,re) ; as E. I. T. G97, P. Pol. 271 e. r is not followed by o~r (p.f,T). 2983. Position of T.- r usually follows the word with which the sentence or sentence-part to be connected is most concerned. Apart from many il'legularities there are certain exceptions to this rule which are commonly observed. a. r may come between two words which go closely together, as between article (preposition, attri.butive genitive) and its noun. 'l'hus, rb re f3apf3ap<Kov Ka! -rb 'E.1JV<Kbv the .ba1barian and the G1eek foTce X. A. 1. 2. 1, p.< 'lT'pbs re ov-rp!t Ka1 E<p.wvas I will go to the lmthinu places und the meaduws S. Aj. 654 (for 1rps ovrpti T). But 1} 1r6. re Ka1 'l}p.s ol vop.ot the Stute and we the laws P.Cr.5:3a.

PAHTICLES: Tot

66fl

b. d connecting an entire clause stands as near as possible to the beginning. Cp. X. A. 1. 8. 3. c. T may stand after a word or expression which, though common to two members of a clause, is placed either at the beginning ( especially- after a preposition) or in the second member. Thus, li Te o q,i\ca Kc (Il. o<?) 'Tf'ohi;ua T]p.iis vop.iecv what we nwst conside1 as belonging to our friends and what to our ene?niPs X. C. 5. 2. 21, gv T< Tcj) 8epp.oTp'fJ Kat lf;xpoTP'I' in the hotter and coldPr P. Phil. 24 b, li'Tf'iia-c q,l\ov ilvopa Te a-oq,wmTov a man dear to all and most wise Ar. V esp. 1277. d. The freer position of d is often due to the fact that severa] words are taken as forrning a single notion. Thus, i) Ka.'/I.ia-n1 o1) 1roATeiii T< Kal o KaA\ca-Tos vi)p the ve1y noblest constitution and the noblest man P. H. 5G2 a.

TOl
2984. To( (postpositive and enclitic) in tTuth, su1'ely, cloubtless, rna1'k you, be assu1'ed, you (m11st) know, was originally the dative of feeling (1486) of av.

a. This Toi (Sanskrit t), fou nd in all dialects, is to be distinguished from Doric Toi ( = a-ol) from T fOl (Skt. tv~). Tol may th us occur in the same sentence with a-ol ; as TocavTd TO[ <J'OC Af-yw S. fr. 25. 2985. Toi is often used in statements of a general truth and in expressions of personal conviction (sometimes with a tone of hesitation); in remarks of a confidential nature ; to introduce an explanation ; and in general where the special attention of the person addressed is desired. Toi often gives an easy and familiar tone to a reply. Thus, Twv TOt p.aTalwv v/ipda-cv q,pov1fp.6.Twv 1} "fhwa-a-' AYJ017s "fl"fV<Tac KaT1J'Yopos true it is that of men' s vain conceits their tongue is the tTue accuse!' A. Sept. 4:)8, ei Toc Kf37Js 6"fovs rcvcs vepeuv~ jo7' Cebes, yon know, is always investigating some speculation or other P. Ph. 63 a. a. Toi may emphasize particular words, as "fw Toc, ip.ol To<, <J TO<; and other words not pronouns.
2986. Toi is frequently used after other partiales, as }..}.., "frl.p, 'Yi, /i?j (and 'Yf Toc o?); cp. o-f} Toc . . . "fe), 'Tf'El because, p.-1}, ou (ol!Toc). On ifroc, see 2858; on KaiToc, 2893 ; on p.vToc, 2017. 2987. The inferential conjunctions rot.yap, rotyapol!v, -rotyproL, ro{which case had vvv contain ro{, the loeative of the demonstrative the meaning of rc{i (Tw) tlte1efore, on this account, so lit. by that,

To,

therein. (This rc{i is chiefly Epie, and stands at the beginning of the verse. Cp. r6 there.fote r 176, S. Ph. 142.)
TovyO.p (prepositive; Ionie and poetic) therefoTe, tvlwefore, sa then, that is

suTely the 1eason why (often to announce a pmpose). The final syllable of To<'ydpToc is the Toi of 2984 . .,.o(vuv (postpositive aud post-Ilomeric; -vvv 2027) is tra,nsitional (now then, furthe?') or infereulial (the!'<'fore, ac.eoringly; less emphatic titan TOL"f<ip). Totvuv is common when a speaker refers to something present in his miud, wnen
Totyo.poilv, TotyO.p-ro (both prepositive) are more emphatic than TOL"fp.

670

P ARTICLES: &<;,

w<;

he continues or resumes what he has been saying, and when he passes io a new aspect of a subject. It is often found with imperatives (<rK67m rolvvv P.Cr.51c).

is, chs
2988. Demonstrative /f)s (also accented w, <1>) thus, sois originally an ablative from the demonstrative stem o- (from uo-), from which come the article and b<; he in Ka~ o>, ~ 8' o<; (1113). For the -<;, see 341. Cp. also 0-8E thus.

So Kc ws even so, neveTtheless, ouo' (p:qo') c:fs not even thus, in no wise, ws ai!rws (w<rarws) in the same way, just so (ablative of avrbs). ws rpws (lit. thus otheTwise, in that other way) quite othe1wise and ws )vq&ws (lit. thus t?"uly) in

ve1y truth also probably belong here. a. In some cases it is uncertain whether ws is demonstrative or relative ; e.g. ws in exclamatory clauses. Cp. 2998, 3001.
2989. Relative ws as, Jww is originally an ablative (in which way) from the relative stem !:o-, whence e01ne also Js, -:], :For the->, see 341. Relative w> has varions uses as an adverb or a conjunction, aU of which represent the primitive meaning.

o.

Relative

as an Adverb

2990. In comparative clauses, often correlated with orws. Thus, 'lrL<rros i]v, ws p,e'is l1rli:rra<r&e I was faithful, as y ou know X. A. 3. 3. 2, Kev<re ros "E?Jvas,
ws vbp.os auros eis f.UXX'Y/>', ovrw raxOfiva.L he OTdeTed the GTeeks (thus) to be stationed as was thei1 custom foT battle 1. 2. 15. Cp. 2462 ff. In similes and comparisons, 2481 ff.

2991. ws is rarely used for fi aft:er comparatives ; as p.?j fJ-OV 7rpoK1}oov ws lfJ-ot -yvKil care not .(o1 me .fuTther than I wish A. Pr. 62U. Cp. 1071.

~J-rr<rov

as it seems to me.

2992. In adverbial clauses ws is often used parenthetically ; as ws p,o! ooKet Instead of ws ooKe, ws ~oLKE the persona! construction is often preferred; as ci7rf7rEV<rav, ws p,v ros 'II'elrrroLs looKovv, rfJLorp.?J&lvres they sailed away out of jealousy, as it seemcd to most people X. A. 1. 4. 7. 2993. ws restrictive foT (cp. ut), involving the judgment of the observer, often in eliiptical phrases; a.~ (Bpirrlois) 'Y} v ovo ovaros, ws Aa.KEOaLp,bvLOs, el1rev Brasidas was, foT a Lacedaemonian, not a bad speake1 eitheT T. 4. 84, rara Ko<ris Zlp~?JS w~ h KaKwv lxap?J on heming this Xmxes Tejoiced as much M could be expected consideTing his rnis.fortunes Hdt. 8. 101. On ws restrictive with the dative, cp. 1495 a, 1497 ; with the absolute infinitive, 2012. 2994. ws is often used to heighten a superlative (1086). 2995. With numerals and words indicatinr; degree ws means about, neaTly, not fw fTom; as O'II'iris ~x wv w~ 11'V7aKorrlovs hviny alimtt fi VI! lwndrecl hoplites X. A. i.. 2. 3, ws 1r! 1r0 .(01 the most pa1t P. H. 377 b (lit. about ove1 the g1eat(m)
pan).

OCCl1l'S

PARTICLES:

ro>, a,,

671

2996. ws often iudicates the tlwught or the aBsertion of the subject of the principal verb or of some other person prominent. in the sPntence. Here ws expresses a real intention or an avowed plea. So often with participles (2081i) ; and also with the prepositions els, l1rl, 1rpos; aH fi7r7rEov .. oK ri)s -z;,KEiiis ws ls rs 'AIJijviis they saile(Z away jrurn 8icily as thouyh bouwl ,trn Ath ens 'l'. 6. 61. 2997. tca.<TTos means each ,ti11 hhnRelf; as d:rr11'u<Jav <~ 'E'1<J11'6vrov ws ~Ka<Jro< (a7r11'Eu<Jav) Kar 71'61\m they sail1d away jrorn tlw Hellespont each to his

ros

own 8tate T. 1. 89. 2998. ws exclarnatory (2682) may be the relative adverb ws how, the relative clause originally being used in explanation of an exclamation. Exclamatory ws has also been explained as ws demonstrative (so). 2999. On ws in wishes, see 1815.

Relative 61., as a Conjunction

3000. 61, conjunctive is found in dependent clauses. Declarative : th at, like lin. Cp. 2577 ff., 2614 ff. Final : that, in onler that ; like lva, but not used in standard Attic prose. Cp. 2193. Object clauses after verbs of e,(fort : that, like li1rws ; cp. 2209. Rarely after verbs of jearing: that. Cp. 22%. Causal : as, inasrnuch as, since, seeing that, like lin, l11'El, etc. Cp. 2240. Consecutive: sa that, like &<JH, L:'sually with the infinitive, sometimes with the indicative. Cp. 2260. Temporal: ajte1, like l7rl; sometimes when, whenever. Cp. 2382. 3001. ws is often found before sentences apparently iudependent, where it is sometimes explained as a conjunction with the verb suppressed. Thus, ws ri)<Jii' hoi<Ja 7ratlios oll p.E01j<Jop.at ( know) th at of my own acc01d 1 will not 1'elinquish my childE. Hec. 400, ws liT] <J p.ot rpavvos 'Ap-yiwv if<JEL (do yuu mean) that youforsooth shall be lo1d and master of ATgives A. Ag. 1633. Some scholars regard this ws as causal, others regard it as demonstrative, others as comparative.

w,
3002.

as, like

for

fW"'

jS' as, like (postpositive) in Hom., as opvOEs ,;;, which is of uncertain origin.

2, stands

ws

to
111

3003. 61, to, a lJreposition with persous (once obscure in origin.

Hom., p 218) :.s

SOME GRAMMATICAL AND RHETORICAL FIGURES

Anacolthon (&.vaKo)I.OvOov inconsequent), or grammatical inoc~J sistency, is inad vertent or purposed deviation in the structme of a sentence by which a construction started at the beginning is not followed out consistently. Anacoluthon is sometinws real, somf'times
3004.

()72

FIGClS

[3005

only slight or apparent. It is natuml to Greek by reason of the mobility and elasticity of tltat language; but iu Euglish it could not be tolerated to an equal extent be~amJe onr tongue- a speech of few infleeted for ms-- is much more rigid than Gree k.
3005. Anacoluthon is, in general, caused either (a) by the choice of some form of expression more convenient or more effeL-tive titan that for which the sentence was grammatically planned ; at tim~s, tuo, the disturbing influence is the insertion of a brief expression of an additional thought not foreseen at the start. Or (b) by the intrusion of sorne exphwatio11 reqtliring a parent.!tesis of such an extent that the connection is obscured or the co11tinuation of the original structure made difficult. In this case the begiuning tnay be repeated, or what has already been said may be summed up in a dii'!'erent grammatical fonn and sometimes with the addition of a resumptive parlicle, such as of,, o v well then, then, as I was sa!fing (X. A. 1. 8. 18, i:l. 1. 20, X. C. 3. 3.ll). So with M (T. 8. 29. 2). 3006. Anacoluthon usually produces the ei'fect of natnralness and liveliness, sometimes of greater clearness (as after long parentlteses), or of brevity, force, or concentration. 3007. Anacoluthon is either natural or artificial. Natural anacoluthon is seen in the loose and discursive style of Herodotus; in the closely packed sentences of Tlmcydides, who hurries from one thougltt to another with the ]east expenditure of words; and in the slovenliness of Andocides. Artiticial or rhetorical anacoluthon is the result of a deliberate pmpose to g-i ve to written language the vividness, naturalness, and unaffected freedom of the easy tlow of conversation, and is best seen in the dialogues of l'lato. Such anacoluthon is usully gTaceful and free from obscurity. 3008. There are very many fmms of anacoluthon, e.g. a. l\irany cases are due to the fact that a writer conforms his construction, not to the words which he has just" used, but to another way in which the antecedent thought might have been expressed : the construction np~ riJ voovp.<vov (or a"f)p.a.,vop.evov) accorcling to what is thuught. Cp. 2148 and X. H. 2. 2. 3, S. O. T. 353, E. Hec. 970. b. Some cases are due to changes in the subject, as T. 1. 18. 2. c. Many cases occm in connection with the use of a participle (2147, 2148). d. Coordinate clauses connected by rf ... Ka.i, Ka.! Ka.i, odr< . o6TE, 1) 1f often show anacolut!wn, especially when a finite verb takes the place of a participle. Cp. 2147 c, and T. 5. 61. 4, 6. :12.:3, 7. 47.1-2. e. The nominative "in suspense" may stand at the head of a sentence instead of another case required by the following construction. This in volves a redundant pronoun. Thus, ITpo~evos of Ka.! Mlvwv, i7I"<in<p elcr!v Dp.TEpo< <ep"(ra.< . 7I"p.if;a.re a.ros <po (for ITpo~evov w! Mvwva. 1I"p.if;a.re liepo) X. A. 2. 5. 41. Cp. " The prince th at feeds great natures, they will slay him :" Ben .Jonsml. f. The accusative often stands absolutely when at the head of a sentence. Thus, .)\)\, p.'i)v Ka.! rfp.tis "( ' 'TWP fJ.fV p.0f~L KC "fcrera.< Kwv, ils av 'i)"(fjra.c
p.dvw a.rov 7ra<f7!T<<v, &~

o' . . . <j>evi;<ra< hut .fmthennore as 1'Pf;arcls hn1W111"S, those he will partalce of and be glacl to taste v:hich he thinlcs will make him a

30II]
bl'tl~<1' man, lmt others oMv 1rw ITa</>s X-ycrat

FIGURES

673

he will shun P. H. 5\ll e, ''E"-"-11vas rovs lv rfj 'AIFlq. oiKovras El 1rovrat (for )\<!-you!Tw <i 1!1rovrat or f'Y<Ta< 7r<IT8at) asto the areeks who clwell in Asia the1e is as yet no ceTlain intelligence whethe1' they me to accompany the expedition X. C. 2. 1. 5. g. A main clause may take the construction of a parenthetical clause (T. 4. 0:3. 2). flere belongs the attraction into the relative clause of a verb that Hhoul have been principal. So after ws #,Kou!Ta, ws op.a<, ws i-youiJ't, etc. Thns, r615e 'Y< wfJv, ws of).a<, 1rep! aro va-yKatrarov evat (for IJ'r!) "-<-yetv this incleed is, as I thinlc, most necessaTy to state about it P. Phil. 20 d. Often in Hdt., as ws il' l-yw fjKov!Ta elvat arov :roav8vp~Fou . 1rd.rpwv but as I have hea1' he was the uncle of lclanthyrsus on the fathe1's sie 4-. 70. A construction may be introduced by iJn or ws and then pass to the infinitive, or the infinitive may precede and a finite verb follow (2028). h. After a subordinate clause with parentheses the main clause sometimes follows in the form of an independent sentence (P. A. 28 c, cp. 36 a). i. An infinitive may resume the idea set forth by t!Je principal verb; as ro
O 8eo Td.TTOVTOS, WS 'YW ~-f,817V
T

Kal 7r)\a{3ov, </>tOITO</>OVTa

/L

0 <v

ffi v

KT.

whereas wh en Gocl onle1s me, as I think and bclieve, to pass my lije in the pursuit of wisum, etc. l'. A. 28 e. Cp. X. Il. 7. 4.:-35. j. Anacoluthon is sometimes due to the desire to maintain similarity of form between contrasted expressions ; as ros !Lv -yp i1r1roKevrapous o!La' g-yw-ye 7ro"-o<s !LV :7ropv TWV viJpW7rOLS '1VPTJf.I.VWV -yaiJwv 01l"WS o XPTJIFIJat, 7rOos il TWV l7r7r0LS 7r<j>K6rwv -i]Uwv 11"WS arwv xp'!] 1!"o)\aUELV j(Jr I think that the hone-cen-

taurs we1e at a loss how to malce use of many com:eniences devisecljo1' men and how to enjoy many of the pleasures ntmal to h01ses X. C. 4. 3. 19. Here 7roos a< is used as if it were to be governed by XPTJIF8a<, instead of which arwv 1roav is substituted.

3009. Anadiplosis (va8{1l'wn doubling) is the rhetorical repetition of one or se veral words. Cp. "The Isles of Greece, the Isles of Greece, where burning Sappho loved and sung : " Byron.
8Tjf3a< M, 8Tj(3at 1r6LS iJ'ru-yelrwv, p.<O' ftf.!.lpi.v f).lav K !LIF'7S rijs 'EMoos v-f,p1rMTa< Thebes, Thebes, a neighiJouTing city, in the course of one clay has

been exti1patecl from the midst of Gteece A es. 3. 133.

30W. Anaphora (.vacpopii canying back) is the repetition, with emphasis, of the same word or phrase at the beginning of several successive clauses. 'l'his figure is also ca.lled epanaphora or epanalepsis. Cp. "Strike as I would Have struck those tyrants! Strike deep as my curse! Strike! and but once:" Byron.
ouro< -yp 1roovs !Lv rwv 1rorwv fis ros 7rOf.1.ious l~-f,aiJ'av, 1roovs il' olKws 1I'OKTelVaVTS .raif'OUS f11'0i'71J'aV, 7rOOVS il' f7rLTif.LOVS 6vras rip.OUS KCLTJT"Y}IJ'av many

of the citizens they 1ove out to the ennny; many they slew unjustly and left unburiecl; many who wae in possession of theil civic rights they deprived of them L.12. 21. Cp. D: 18. 48, 75, 121, 310.

3011. Anastrophe (va~npocp~ retum) is the use, at the beginning of one clause, of the same word that concluded the preceding clause.
GREER GRAM.

-43

67--1:
Also called epanastrophe. shall fill his eup."

FIGURES

[3012

Cp. "Has he a gust for blood ?

Blood

o o1}7roU KT1JC1"l</JW11Ta av vara< Ol<iJKlll ot' p.l-, p. ' i'71"p ~I-')'~lP lvbp.tjev, aTOP oK av l')'pa>faro for surely it cannat be that he is Jnosecuting Ctesiphon on my

account, and yet would not have indicted me myself, if he had thought that he could convict me D. 18. 13.
3012. Antistrophe (&.vn(]"rpocfn} tnTning abm~t) is the repetition of the same word or phrase at the end of successive clauses.
OC1"1"LS ' v rc) rrpc.h<tJ 6')'<tJ -rl]v 'ffj<f>ov a.lr' OpKOV a.iu'i, vop.ov alu'L, 'f/jJ.OKparliv a.iT<'i wlwever in his ji1st speech asks f01' your vote a::; a favour, as/cs the SUI"?"ender of your oath, aslcs the surrender of the law, aslcs the surrende1 of the

democmtic constitution A es. 3. 1HS. 3013. Antithesis (d.vT[(h(]"t> opposition) is the contrast of ideas ex-

pressed by words which are the opposite of, or are closely contrasted with, each other. Cp. "\Vit is negative, analytical, destructive; Humor is creative:" \Vhipple.
<' wv iK XP'f/(J'TWV <f>a..a T 7rpd')'/-'O.Ta.-rfjs rroEws ')'')'ovE, t -ro6rwv l.rrijETE Twv a.rwv rrpd~Ewv lK <f>auwv ar XP'f/(J'T "fEvfwE(J'Oat; do you expect that the

a.tfairs of state will become prosperous instead of bad by the same measures by which they have becomc bad instead of prosperous? D. 2. 20. a. Antithesis is sometimes exteuded to a parallelism in sense effrcted (1) by the use of two words of opposite meaning in the expression of one idea, (2) by the opposition of ideas which are not specifically contrasted in words.
3014. Aporia (-71"op{ii. doubt) is an artifice by which a speaker feigns doubt as to where he shall begin or end or what he shall do or say, etc. Qp. "1'hen the steward said within himself, What shall I do? " St. Luke 16. 3.
cl:Jropw ro 1rpwrov /-'P'f/(J'Ow I am unce1tain what I shall recall first D. 18. 129. When the doubt is hetween two courses it is often called diapoTsis.

3015. Aposiopesis (&.7ro(]"u.fm..rwt> becom.ing silent) is a form of ellipse by which, under the influence of passionate feeling or of modesty, a speaker comes to an abrupt halt. Examples 2352 d, D. 18. 3, 22,195, S. O. T.1289, Ar. Vesp. 1178. Cp. "Massachusetts and her people ... hold him, and his love . . . and his principles, and his standard of tru th in utter- what shall I say?- anything but respect:" Yvebster. 3016. Asyndeton ( &.(]"vvileTov not bou nd together) is the absence of conjunctions in a series of coordinate words or phrases. See 2165 ff.

a. Here is sometimes placed the omission of tl1e verb after '-'" (p.l] (J'V 'fE, !-'1J "fap, etc.); as 1-'lJ rp<fllis ~T< (rrot<'i(J'OE) no nw1e delays! S.Ant. 577, Tls oxl Kar71"rvcrEv v (J'o'; 1-'lJ "fp ( Eirr) r?)s 'li"Ews 'fE, 1-''f/O' fJ.o who wmtld not have reviled fOU? Do not say the 8tate, nor me D. 18. 200. Cp. 940, 159H.
3017. Brachylogy (.fipaxv.\oy[ii. bre1,ity of diction, abbreviated exp?"ession or constn{ction) is a concise form of expression by which an

3018]

FIG "CRES

675

element is not repeated or is omitted when its repetition or use would. make the thought or the grammatical construction complete. The suppressed element must be supplied from some corresponding ward in the context, in which case it often appears with some change of form or construction; or it must be taken from the connection of the thought.
a. B1achylogy and ellipse cannot always be distinguished sharply. In ellipse the suppressed word is not to be supplied from a corresponding word in the context; and, in general, ellipse is less artificial and less dependent on the momentary and arbitrary will of the speaker or writer. Compendious Comparson (1501), Praegnans Constructio (3044), and Zeugma (3048) are forms of brachylogy.

3018. There are many forms of brachy logy; for example: a. One verbal form must often be supplied from another ; e.g. a passive from
an active, an infinitive from a finite verb, a participle from an infinitive. 'l'hus, r'>Jv TWV 1C{aS iJ-yoV /kOV 7} r'>Jv aVTWV opv (o'!/OV/kV?JV) 1athe1 tO ravage the ter1ito1y of their neighbours th an to see their own (being ravaged) T. 2. 11, rara (yw G"OL OU 1rd8o/kaL . , OWJ.L Of OUOf i1OV v1JpW1rWV oQva ( 7rl8<Y8a( <YOL) Of this 1 am not pe1suaed by you and 1 do not believc that any other human being is either l'. A. 25 e, oi!re 7rC<Yxovres KaKv oui5v oi!u 1koJI7"~s (1raa-xELv) neither suf fering, nor being likely (to su_tf'eT), any evil I.12. 103, vexwpwav o Ka! ol AfiTJvaot . . , 7reti5'>J Ka! iKelvovs eoov (vaxwp?j<Yavras) and the Athenians too withdrew when they saw that they (the I,acedaemonians) had done so T. 3. 16. b. A verb must often be supplied from a coordinate or subordinate clause either preceding or following. Tlms, 1!-yELpe Ka! <Y r?)vo', lyw o <Y do you wake her, as I (wake) you A. Eum. 140, <iv o a{m5xe<p !kh 1'-1) (!i), f3ov<UfT'!I i5 fiavarov ns 11XXos Tp4J if a pe1son shall not kill with his own ha nd, but if some one shall suggest mu1der to mwthe1 P. L. 872 a; q,lXovs vo!kl\ovfT' o<Y1rep v 1r6<Y <YB<v (vo~Ll\v) 1egarding as friencls even those whom th y husband (so regards) E. Med. 1153. A verb is rarely supplied from the subordinate to the main construction. c. In clauses with oe, xp?) etc.: rva <flalvrwfi !kvvovns ols oe ( .J.LVmv) th at y ou may seem to assist those you ought (to assist) 'l'. 3. 13. When a form of rvyxvw stands in the subordinate clause; ,.(,.ev<Yav ws gKa<Yrot l!rvxov (1ro1riovns) they sailed away as each best couleZ 1'. 4. 25. , In conditional clauses when the protasis indicates that the assertion.made in the apodosis holds true of a person or a thing more than of any other person or thing ( d~rep ns KL 111-Xos, d1rep 1rov, e'trrep 1ror, ~s rts Kat Lf...os, etc.) ; as CTVf..UfJpet ' tp.v, d1rp T4? Ka.t lf). cp, -r v.Kv victory is of advantage toy ou, if it ( is of advantage) to any X. C. 3. 3. 42. Renee d ns (1rov, 1roOev) is alrnost = r!s, etc. (T. 7. 21. 5). d. Compound verbs ( especially th ose compounded with wra and ~) are often so used that the force both of the compound and of the simple verb is requisite to the meaning. Th us, ( ol 'AIJTJvao<) wr-yvw<Yav KepKpalo<s ~V!k!kaxlav p.'>J 7ro<1)<Ya<Yfiru the Athenians changetl their minds and decided not to make an alliance with the Gonymams 'l'. 1. 44. e. A compound verb on ils second occurrence often 0111 iiN the preposition (rarely vice vena) ; as .7rEP')'U\TJrat Elpya\<ro P. Ph. 104 d. Euripides is

G76

FIGURES

[30I8

fond of such collocations as inraKov<rov ii.Kov<rov Ale. 400. Cp. the difference in metrical value of repeated words in Shakespeare, as "These violnt desires have violent ends." N. -In Kai ~VJ-'J-'E'rl<rxw Kal <jJpw rf)s alrliis I share and bea; alike the guilt (S. Ant. 537) </Jpw, though capable of taking the partitive genitive, is intluenced by ~VJ-'}-tri<rxw and has the force of ~v!-'</Jpw. f. From a following verb of special meaning a verb of more general meaning, such as 11'Dt<iv, -yi-yv<<r!Jcu, dvat, must be supplied with the phrases o&ov ii..o 7/, lio n .;;, ri ii..o .;;. Examples in 946, 2652, 2778. g. A verb of saying or thinlcing must often be supplied from a foregoing verb of exluwtin/, commanding, announcing, or from any other verb that implies saying or thinlcing. Th us, Kptrof3ov.os Kai 'A11'o.oowpos KE<vov<rl !-'< rpuKovra J-'VWv r:J-'-If<ra<TOat, ailrol Qi: -yyv<TOat Urito!mlus and Apollodorus u1ge me to set a penalty of thi1ty minae, ancl (.~ay) that they them8elves me sureties P. A. 38 b. h. \Vhen two verbs taking the same or different cases have an object in common, tbat abject is expressed only once, and usually is dependent on the nearer verb. See 1634, IG35. i. A substantive or a verb is often to be supplied from a substantive or a verb related in meaning: va.vl-'a.x1wavra.s }-'lez v (vav}-'axiiiv) having fought one (sea-fight) Ar. Ran. 693, 7] J-'v ~11"LTa Eis lia d.ro , ZES o v 11'ps OW}-'a (~f3TJ) she then sp1ang into the sea, but Ze<ts (went) to his aliocle A 532. j. The subject of a sentence is often taken from a preceding abject or from sorne other preceding noun in an oblique case without a pronoun of reference to aid the transition. Thus, ~<<j>of311<rav J-'v ros 11'o.os o&K elo6ra.s r 7rpii<T<T6}-'<va, Kai ~<jJ<v-yov ( o! 11'o\.ol) they frightened away most of the citizens, who <eeTe in ignniance of the plot and began to fly T. 8. 44. Cp. 943. k. In general an abject is frequently omitted when it can readily be supplied from the context. Thus, -yxv (rv ovov) K<v< he gave o1clers ta pouT in (the wine) X. A. 4. 3. Vl. An unemphatic pronoun in an oblique case is often omitted when it can be snpplied from a preceding noun. Cp. 1214. 1. A dependent noun must often be supplied, in a different construction, from one coirdinate clause to another. Th us, opKovs ~a{Jov Kal ~oo<Tav 1rap iPapmfJa!;ov they receivecl oaths from Pharnabazus ancl gave him theirs X. H. 1. 3. 9. So in contrasts where one rnember is to be supplied from the other, as oitK lKvos ( hdv11v), ti' K<iv"l K<vov v!Jd.o' -1/-ya-y<v he did not bTing (he1) he1e, but she bro<tght hirn E. Or. 742. m. From a preceding word its opposite must often be supplied, especially 'an affirmative after a negative. Th us, Li}-'<.-f}<riis wv1r<p of 1rooi ( brLJ-'<ovra.t) neglecting the ve1y things which most people ( caTe foT) P. A. 36 b. This laxity of expression is especially frequent in the case of KaO'ros, r1s, or ,.d.vTEs, to be supplied after ods (IL"'OEis), as J-'1/0ds rl]v inr<pf3ol]v IJa.u}-'a<rv, Li. J-'ET' <Ovoliis "fw IJ<wp1/<rd.rw let no one wonder at the extTavagance of rny staternent, but let (every one) considi'l" lcindly what I say D. 18.190. Cp. "No person held to service or labor in one state ... , esca.ping into anot.her, shall . . . be discharged from said service or labor, but shall be delivered up, etc." : U. S. Constitution. n. 'l'he same word thnugh placed only once may stand in two difkrent constructions; as aivw o Ka1 r6vo (v6}-'ov) p.-f}T TWV liwv ll<p<r<iwv }J-1/iiva. TWV

3022]

FIGURES

677

wurofi olKedwv vfJKeurov 1fCl.eos ~poe<v and I app1ove also this C1tstom that no one of the other Persians shall do iTremediable hurt to any one of his own servants Hdt. 1. 1:37. Here p.TJOva is both subject and abject of ~poetv. o. An assertion may be made concerning an action or a thing when the absence of that action or thing is meant (res pro rei defectu). 'l'hus, et r' lip' or' eoxwi}s hnp.p.<f>era.< whether then he /!lames us on accvunt of an (unjitljilled) vow A 05, tv i] Kal -rrepl XPTJp.<irwv Ka.l -rrepl rp.ias liv8pw1rot Ktvi'iver!ovu<v on 1rhich charge men run the risle both of (loss of) money and civil degradation D. 29. 16. So ovap.<S poweTlessness, <f>ua.Kf] neglect of the watch, p.eh!Jp.a lack of libeTal exe1cise. 3019. Catachrsis (Ka-ra:xpYJaL misuse of a word) is the extension of

the meaning of a word beyond its proper sphere; especially a violent metaphor. In English: "a palatable tone," "to take arms against a sea of troubles."
atp.6vtos extTaordinanj, IJaup.<iuws decided, strange, capital, i'TJxavws and v-rrep<f>uws decidedly, v-rro-rrrew expect, vav<Jrov xiJova E. Med. S2. Such usages

are less often occasioned by the poverty of the language thau by the caprice of the writer. 3020. Chiasmus (xaaf.Lo rnarking wUh diagonal lines like a X) is

the crosswise arrangement of contrasted pairs to give alternate stress. By this fignre bath the extremes and the means are correlated. Cp. "Sweet is the b1;eath of morn, her rising sweet": Milton.
~V uwp.' gXWV Kal 'fvx'i}v p.[av having one body and one soul D.19. 227.

So rocrofirov cr p.o cro<f>wrepos e T'7<Korou llvros TTJ<Ko<Jo' t/,v; a1e you at your age so much wiser than I at mine? P. A. 25 d, -rriiv plv ~pyov 1riiv o' l-rros "Yovr<is re Ka.! 1rpdrrovras lit. doing every deed and utte1ing every woTd P. R. 494 e, ooueELv Kal lipxe<JIJa< lipxELv K< oeu-rr6f:ELv to be a slave and be ruled . . . to Tule and be a master P. Ph. 80 a.
3021. Climax (KfLa~ ladder) is an arrangement of clauses in succession whereby the last important word of one is repeated as the first important word of the next, each clause in tnrn surpassing its predecessor in the importance of the thought. Cp. "But we glory in tribulations also : knowing that tribulation worketh patience ... and experience, hope; and hope maketh not ashamed": Romans v. 3-5.
OOK ebrov p.v rara, OK ~ypa>fa oc!, ooo' ~rpa.l{;a p.v, OOK l-rrpc!u{3eucra. c!, ooo' -rrp<J{3eucra p.c!v, ouK li-rrELua 8'1f3a.lovs I clid not uttm these words without pTopos-

ing a rnotion; noT dicl I propose a motion without bfcorning ambassadoT; nor did I become ambassadoT without convincing the Thebans D. 18. 179 ; cp. 4. 19. This figure is Vei:J rare in Greek. 3022. Ellipse (gw{lt lea1>ing out, defect) is the suppression of a

word or of several words of minor importance to the logical expres-

678

FIGURES

sion of the thought, but necessary to the construction. brevity, force, and li veliness; it is usually readily to often unconscious, and appears especially in common structions; and expressions of popular speech (such >..ovra to judge a lion jrmn his claws).

Ellipse gives be supplied, p!Jrases, conas ~ vvxwv

a. Ellipse occurs in the case of substantives and pronouns, subject, object, .:finite verbs, main clauses, and (less often) subordinate clauses. See the Index under Ellipse.

3023. Enallage (iva>..>..ay~ interchange) is the substitution of one grammatical form for another, as plural for singular (1006-1008). Th us: "They fall successive, and successive rise": Pope. 3024. Euphemism ( d;c:f>'YJJLUTJLO> lit. speaking ja.vourably) is the substitution of a less direct expression in place of one whose plainer meaning might be unpleasant or offensive. Th us: "The merchant prince had stopped payment '' (for "became bankrupt ").
uvp,tj>op&. occu1rence for rvxwa rnisfortnne, hpws otheTwise = not well, tj>p6v'YJ ' the kindly time' for vv~ night, dJ<fJvvp,os left (lit. of good omen, whereas the left was the unlucky side), dr< 1r8o< if anything shoul happen to him =

if he should die.

3025. Hendiadys (<:'v & /)uov one by two) is the use of two words connected by a copulative eonjunction to express a single eomplex idea; especially two substantives instead of one substantive and an adjective or attributive genitive.
xp6v<jJ Ka! 'TrOwpKlq. by length of time and siege by a long siege D. 19. 123, lv &,X! KVp,aul T in the waves of the sea E. Hel. 226, u1rli'iwv re Ka! urparo = w7r<up,vov urparo armed fmce S. ~1. 36.

3026. Homoioteleuton ( DJLDWTevTo<; ending alike) is end-rhyme in

clauses or verses.
r1Jv p,v px1Jv .Zs rov 7r6p,ov KaTUT'YJUav ws ()..w8epwuovns TOVs "E'f/vas, t1r! i'if reevri)s ovrw 1roovs arwv lK06rovs 1rolrwav, Ka! ri)s p,v +Jp,erpas 1r6Xews rovs "Iwvas 7rlu?-.,uav, ~ 'ijs mpK'YJuav Ka! i'i<' ~v 7roK<s uw871uav in the beginning

they entered ttpon the 10a1 with the avowecl abject of liberating the Greeks, at the end they have betTayed so many of them, and have causee/ the Imans to Tevolt f>'07n our State, fTom which they ernig1ated and thanks to which they we1e often saved I. 4. 122. Cp. S. Aj. 62-65. Hornoioteleuton is most marked in pa1omoiosis.

3027. Hypallage (1nraay~ exchangr-:) is a change in the relation of words by which a word, instead of agreeing with the case it logically qualifies, is made to agree grammatically with another case. Hypallage is almost al ways confined to poetry.
p,<i K-f}liea Oup,o the t1mtbles of my spitit ~ 197, veKos vi'ipwv ~vva<p.ov lcind1ed strife (~f men for st11je of lcindred men S. Ant. 794. Here the adjective virtually agrees with the rest of the phrase taken as a compound.

FIGUlU~S

679

3028. Hyperbaton (:nrp{3arov transposition) is the separation of words naturally belonging together. Such displacement usually gives prominence to the first of two words thus separated, but sornetimes to the second also. In prose hyperbaton is less comrnon thau in poetry, but even in prose it is frequent, especially when it secures emphasis on an important idea by plaeing it at the beginning or end of a sentence. At times hyperbaton may mark passionate exeitement. Sometimes it was adoptecl to gain rhythmical effect. Th us : " Su ch resting found the sole of unblest feet" : Milton.
~ o avr6<, Jj 7rpOS (IE{Jv, Mt'vwv, Tl <P'< peT-i)v evat ; but what do you yomseif, in heave~~'s nwne, Mena, say virtne is? P. Men. 71 d, w1rp6< ~e -yovaTwv (946) by thy knees (I entreat) thee E. Med. 324, u<{J' t!vs TOtara 7r'IrOV0V i} 'EX}.., vOpW7rOV frorn one rnan G1eece endmed such S!~{ferings D. 18. Hi8, KpaTwv ro< o7rowv~o7}1roO' Dps ~e7r!J.7rETe ~TpaT1J')'O< conquering the generals you kept sending out- su ch as they we1e 18. 146.

a. The displacement is often caused by the intrusion of a clause of contrast or explanation. Th us ro< 1rept 'Apxliiv . . . o tf;fj<{Jov ve!J.elvaTe XX' .
h!J.wpf}~MOe you did not postpone you1 vote but took vengeance upon A1chias and his company X. H. 7. 3. 7.

b. Adverbs and particles may be displaced.

Thus, ovTw ns fpw< oetvo< a

paRsion so te1Tible P. Th. 169 c, 1roM -yp rwv l1r7rwv (Tpexov OTrov foi' they ran much faste1 than the horses X. A.l. 5. 2; so ev, p.aXa; on liv see 1764. c. Prepositions often cause the displacement (1663, 2690). On displacement

in connection with participles see 1166, 1167 ; with the negatives, see 2690 ff. d. Similar or contrasted words are often brought into juxtaposition. Here a nominative precedes an oblique case. Thus, 1r Twv Dp.ert'pwv Dp.v 1roXep.e! uup.p.axwv he wages war on yonfrmn the resources of your allies D. 4. 34, o -yap Tls
unwilling H 197.
p.e (Jin -ye hwv t!Kovra ol1JTa< for no one shall chase me by fone, he willing me Note 1/,XXo< liXXo (11XXo!Jev, dXore, etc.), aTo< aoro. e. Construction :rro Kowoil. -In poetry an attributive genitive or an object, common to two coordinats words, is often placed with the second only, as <{Jpawv iXw~<v!IXiou r' va~ra~tv telling of the captu1e and overtMow of Ilium A. Ag.

587.

3029. Hypophora (lrrrocf>opii putting u.nder) is the statement of an objection (together with its refutation) which a speaker supposes to be made by an opponent or makes himself. Both objection and reply often take the form of questions (2654, 2785, 2819). Cp. "But I hear it continually rnng in my ears ... 'what will become of the pream ble, if you repeal this tax ? '" : Burke.
Tl ovv, liv T ef1ro<, TaTa Xi!-yE<s i};v vv;

will say, clo you tell us this now?

tva -yvwT' KTX. why then, some one In ordm that you may know, etc. D. 1. 14.

3030. Hysteron Proteron (vunpov 7Tponpov later eal'lier) is an arrangement reversing the natural order of time in which events occur. It is used when an event, later in time, is regarded as more important than one earlier in time.

680

FIGlJRES

[3031

rpa<j>tv i]o< -yvovro were bre and born A 251 (so rpo<j>1} Ka.! -yv<<TLS X. M. 3. 5. 10 ; cp. " for I was bred and born " : Shakespeare), iJ.a.rtf r' aiJ.</>L<Ta<Ta. Ovwota. Kal ov<Ta<Ta. having put on fragmnt robes and washed 264.

3031. Isocolon (laoKwov having eqnal mwrnbers) is the use of two or more sequent cola (clauses) containing an equal number of syllables.
ro iJ.fP hrl1rovov Ka.l </><OKlvovov rov fJlov Kar<TT'TJ<T<v, r?js o 7TtplfJ<7TTov Ka.! 7T<p<iJ.aX'TJTOP r1}v <j>u<T<P ~7Tol'TJ<T<v the life of the one he rendered full of toil and

peril, the /Jeauty of the othe1 he made the object of universal admiration ancl of universal contention I. 10. 16.
3032. Litotes (TOT'YJ'> plainness, simpz.icity) is nnderstatement so as to intensify, affirmation expressed by the negative of the eontrary. Cp. 2694. Jl[eiosis (f.Ldwcrt> lessening) is ordinarily the same as litotes. 'rhus : "One of the few immortalnames That were not born to die": Halleck. 3033. Metonymy (fLTwvufL{ii change of name) is the sub~titution of one word for another to which it stands in some close relation. 'rhus: " We wish that infancy may learn the purpose of its creation from maternallips": \Vebster.
iJ.<Tos toathed objert, IJ KaliapiJ.a. you sc.um! <IViJ.iJ.a.Xla allies, lv BotwroZs in Boeotia, .earpov spectc~tms, iJ.aX'TJ battlefield, r,.,.os caval1y, lxOvts fish-marlcet. 3034. Onomatopoeia ( vop.aro?Todii maldng of a. name or wo1d) is the

formation of names to express natural sounds.

{J'TJXWiJ.a< bleat, fJoiJ.fJw buzz, fJpxwl"a.' roar, Koci.l; quaclc, KU.KKa{Jl)w cackle, KOKKvi; cuclcoo, Kpa)w croalc, rrl)w cheep, 7Tt7T7Tl)w chirp. Sometimes the sound of a whole verse imiiates an action ; as ans ~1rttra. 1rloovoe KUlvo<ro .as . va<o?)s dawn ag ain to the plain 1olled the shameless stone 598 (of the stone of

Sisyphus). 3035. Oxymoron (~vftwpov pointedly or clwverly foolish) is the juxtar-

position of words apparently contradictory of each other.

POiJ.OS livoiJ.OS a law that is no law A. Ag. 1142, lixap<S xap<S a graceless grace A. Pr. 545, ,.[,ns ,,.,,roraT'TJ most .faithless faith And. 1. 67, a.orol <P<v-yovra.s q,eu-you<T< they themselves are flying from th ose who fly T. 7. 70.

3036. Paraleipsis (?rapM.wfJL> passing over) is pretended omission for rhetorical effect. TO.S o' h' 'Iuplous Ka.l ITa.lova.s aOTO Ka.l 7TpOS 'ApvfJfJav Kal 01TOL T<S av d7TOL
1rapaei1Tw <Trpanlas I omit his e):peditions to fllyria and Paeonia and against

Arybbas and many others that one might mention (lit. whithersoever one rnight spealc of) D. 1. 13. 3037. Parechsis (1rap~X'YJL> likeness of sound) is the repetition of

the same sound in words in close or immediate succession. tion is initial rhyme.

Allitera-

11-yaiJ.os, lir<KJos, li7To<s, IJ.<j>tos E. 1. T. 220 (cp. "unwept, unhonoured, and u.nsung"), 1rvos 7TOV<f 1rovov <j>p<< toil upon toillnings only toil S. Aj. S, ru</JS

FIGURES

G81

nf T' WTa. roP Te PoP Ta T'.op.JJ.aT' el bli_nd a1t thou in thy ears, thy reason, and thy eyes s. o. T. 371, ol oua . ols d.r.o0a.POPTS olK'JV OOPIJ.i ouva.LvT' (J.p who would not be able to give satisfaction even by dying twice L. 12. 37, ii<Tw<Ta <T' ws t<Tii<TtP 'Ef.f.?)PwP o<Tot Krf.. I saved thee; as all of the Greeks kno~c who, etc. E. Med. 4 76, Oa.PaTOV O.rrOP ()e wickedness 'flee th fast er than fa te, P. A. 39 a.

3038. Parisosis (rra.pt<T(J}O't> alrnost eqnal) is approximate equality of clauses as measured by syllables. Parisosis is sometimes regarded as synonymous with isoclon. 3039. ParomoiOsis (7rapop.o((J}<TL<; assimilation) is parallelism of sound l>etween the words of two clauses either approximately or exactly equal in size. This similarity in sound may appear at the beginniug, at the end (homoioteleuton), in the interior, or it may pmvade the whole.
JJ.a.xop.ePovs JJ.P Kpelrrovs elPa.L rwP -rrof.ep.lwv, >f'l<Pt!:op.epovs o ~TTovs TWv ixOpwP by flghting to be su:perior to ow public enemies, and by voting to be weaker than 01f1' private enemies L. 12. 79.

3040.

Paronomasia (7rapovop.a.O'tii) is. play U])On words.

p.er?)f.'Aa~ev for he changed not his disposition Often in etyrnological word-play; as Ilp60oos Oo6s B 758, M.''A1Jros . . ip.e1J<TP P. A. 26 a, ITa.v<Ta.Plov -rra.v<Ta.JJ.evov P. S. 185 c, els r611'ov . . etiii), els Atoov to an invisible place, to Hades P. Ph. 80 d. Cp. "Old Gaunt indeed, and gaunt iu being old" : Rhakespeare. Sometimes this figure deals with the same word taken in different senses (homonyms): ilp.a.

ou -yp rop Tpo-rroP d.f.h TOP rlnroP

but his position A es. 3. 78.

-yp 7JJJ.e; re Ti]s d.pxiis d.tre<TnpouJJ.EOa. Kal roZs "E'A'A'l'"" d.px1] Twv KaKwv i-yl-yvETo

' no sooner were we deprived of the ji1st place than the flrst disaste1 came upon the G1eelcs' I. 4. 119.
3041. Periphrasis (7rp[4>par:n circwnlocution) is the use of more words than are necessary to express an idea.
Opfp.p.ara. Neif.ov nurslinas of tlw Nile = the Egyptians P. L. 953 e, 01/ll,.ov Kapi. Oedpus S. O. T. 40 ( Kapii. expresses reverence or affection). The substantive on which auother substantive depends often stands for an adjective, as s
T1Jep.d.xo~o

= rniglity Telemach (cp. 1014).

For various other periphrases, see

the Index.
3042. Pleonasm (7r.wva<Tp.o excess), or red un dancy, is the admission of a word or words which are not uecessary to the complete logical expression of the thought. Such words, though logicalJy superfluous, enrich the thought by adding greater definiteness and precision, picturesqueness, vigour and emphasis; and by expressing subtle shadings of feeling otherwise impossible. Cp. "Ali ye inhabitants of the world, and dwellers on the earth."

a. Adverbs or adverbial expressions combined: of time, as 71'tf;>..,, a.v, ave,s a.v

7r&.LP, 7Tcl..LV

p.er TctTa rl(fTpov, E7ret.ra IJ.T rara,

o,. Tovs Tv 1rcivTa xp6vov;

of

manne1, as Ka.T Ta.UT W<TUUTWS, p.aT'JP (J.f.)\ws, e/s OVVO.TOV OTi ;.o..iO'Ta.; Of in[1'-

682

FIG CRES

ence, aS TOL"(pTOL ()L TaTa, K TOUTOU . OL TaTCt ; 'of Ver!jication, as .'/o.'Y)0WS T.;J !Jvn; and varions other expressions, as rcrws Tx' !Lv, M-yt;J el1riiv. b. Adverb and adjective combined (usually poetical) : K<To p.-yas p.e-ya'AwcrTl huge he lay with his huge length rr 776. c. Adjective and verb : ws /J p.7] p.aKpos T<lvw M-yous but not to speak at length E. Hec. 1177. d. Adjective and substantive in the dative : vi]cros p.e-yii<L p.v o p.-y&.'A7J an island not la1ge in size Hdt. 5. 31. e. Verb with an abstract substantive in the dative or accusative (1516, 1564): {Jacr,'/o.es <j>VCT 7r<</JlKva to be a t1ue-born king X. C. 5. 1. 24. f. Compound verb or substantives with substantives: oKov Ka'Aws olKovop.iv to build a house well X. M. 4. 5. 10, 1J Twv veo-yvwv TKvwv 7ra,/JoTpo<fJlri. the Teming of young child1en X. O. 7. 21. Here the force of the first rnember of the compound is quiescent. g. Compound verb and adverb: 1rpou-ypmf;a 1rpCJTov I Wl'Ote jiTst T. 1. 23, .1ra-ya-ywv 15' p.s IL1rwOev .Tro To K'Ap.p.aTos having dive1ted yom attention away fTom the fraud A es. 3. 100. h. Verb ftlld participle (2147 b): Tl o7] ryOVTS od{Jaov oi oafJ'A'AovTS; in what words then did my calumniators calumniate me'! P. A. 19 b. . i. Amplification by synonymous doublets ( especially common in Demosthenes): .i;w Kat i5fop.a I beg and beseech D. 18. 6, vap-ys Kal crarps visible and cleaT 14. 4. j. Parallelism of positive and negative: ws ~xw 7rpl TouTwv, 'A!;w 1rpos p.s Kal oK .7roKpvlf!op.a, I will tell you ancl I will not conr.eal my opinion on these matteTs D. 8. 73, oK ILK'A7JTO,, TrapaKrJOvres lU not tmbidden but invited T. 6. 87. k. A persan and a characteristic or quality connected by Kal or Tf; as KaTaoelcravus TOVTOV Kal TO TOUTOU Op&.cros feming him and his a!ldacity D. 21. 20. 1. A relative clause takes up a preceding expression : Kal evx'i]v f T<ves aTo !;rpepov ws ei!xoTo KT 'A. and some Teported also a pmyer he made, etc. (lit. how he p1ayed) X. A. 1. 9. 11. m. ' l'olar' expressions may be placed here. These are opposites placed in pairs so as to intensify such ideas as all, no one, at all times, everywhere, eveTything possible. Th us, Kc v Oeos Kal v .vOpw1roLs oth among the gods and among men 1:'. G. 508 a, ol!Mv oi!re p.-ya ore p.Kpov nothing either great o1 small = absolutely nothing P. A. 19 c, v 'Y'ii Ko.l OarlTTTJ on land and sea D. 18. 324, oi!re ooos oi!T' ev8Epos nor bond nor free T. 2. 78, PrJT Kat /LpprJTa fanda nefanda D. 18. 122. For other cases of pleonasm, see the Index.
3043. Polysyndeton (cp. Asyncleton) is the repetition of conjunctions in a series of coordinate words or phrases.
Kal TOO""OVTWV Ka.L rfpwv KaKCJv KaL al(]"xpWv Ka/. 1rcfhaL Kctl VWCTTl Kal JKpWv KaL f-'<'Y'Awv alTiov 'Y<'Y<YrJp.vov who has shown himself the guilty cause of so many

other base and disgmceful acts, lJoth long ago and lately, bath small and great L.12. 78. Cp. D. 4. 36.
3044. Praegnans Constructio is a form of brachylogy by which two expressions or rJauses are codensed into one.

llere belong, apart from 1G,D ff., such cases as eis To {Jaaveov (3ovop.a, I want

FIG GRES

683

to go to the bath Ar. Ran. 1279 (cp. "he will directly to the lords": Milton, Samson Agon. 12GO) and q,a.veps 1jv ofKa.ll< 7ra.parrK<va.!;ofJ.evos he was evident/y prepming togo home X. A. 7. 7. 57. In 7rapayy{'A<< brlr.li1ra he o?dered them to get unde?' anns X. A. 1. 5. 13 the command was 1rt r. lhra. to arms !

3045. Prolpsis (rrpo'Y)l{M taking be.fore) in the case of objective predicate adjectives or nouns is the anticipation of the result of the action of a verb. Examples in 1579.
On the prolepsis of the subject of dependent clauses which is put into the main clause, see 2182. Soin" Consider the lilies of the field how they grow." Prolepsis is also used to designa"te the anticipation of an opponent's arguments and objections. One variety is p?'odimthosis or preparatory apology (l'. A. 20 e, D. 18. 199, 256).

3046. Symploce ( crvp:rroK~ interweaving) is the repetition, in one or more successive clauses, of the first and last words of the preceding clause.
brl O'rLVTOV KrLEs, f7rL TOS v6p.OVS KrJ.Es, 7rL r7}v OT)Jl-OKparlav KrJ.ES it is agaiitst you?self that you me summoning him, it is against the laws that you are swnmoning him, it is against the democratie constitution that you are swnmoning him Aes. 3: 202.

3047. Synecdoche (O"vv<Koox~ understanding one thing with another) is the use of the part for the whole, or the whole for the part. The name of .an animal is often used for that which comes from, or is made from, the animal. Cp. "they sought his blood"; ''Belinda smiled, and all the world was gay " : Pope.
oopv ship for planTe, beam, ciW11'7J~ fox-skin for fox, X<cfJV'fJ tortoise-shell for t01toise, 1ropcpvpa purple dye for pu1-ple-jish, ~</Jas ivory for elephant, p.elO"O"a. honey for bee.

3048. Zeugma (tExyp.a junction, band) is a form of brachylogy by which two connected substantives are used jointly with the same verb (or adjective) though this is strictly appropriate to only one of them. Such a verb expresses an idea that may be taken in a wider, as well as in a narrower, sense, and therefore suggests the verb suitable to the other substantive. Cp. "Nor M.ars his sword, nor war's quick fire shall burn The living record of your memory."
oilr< cpw1J oilu rov p.opcf>1J (Jporwv IJ'j/tt thou shalt know neithcr voice nor form of mo?tal rnan A. Pr. 21, ci)..)..' ?} 11'voaG"t> ?} {JaOvO"Ka<f> KO>"<' Kpv>fo vtv no, either give them to the winds or in the deep-dug sail buJ'!I them S. El. 435, ~oovG"i u 1riova p.f}a, ofv6v r' ~~atro they eat fat sheep and drink choice wine M 319. a. Different from zeugma is syllpsis ( (]'VTJ'f taking togethe1), by which the same verb, though governing two different objects, is taken both in its literai and its metaphorical sense; but does not properly change its meaning. Thus, xp-fJp.a.ra r<ovres rovroLS , Kat xriptra.s paying money anrl renerin[! thanlcs to them P. Cr. 48 c.

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

THIS List in general includes the common verbs showing any formai peculiarity of tense. The forms printed in heavy-faced type belong to standard Attic, that is, to Lhe language used in common speech and in ordinary prose; others are poetical, donhtful, dialectal or late. Many regular f01ms are omitted because they do not appear in the dassical writers; though their non-appearance in the extant texts may often be accidentai. La.ter forms ate usually exclucled, but reference is made to Aristotle, and to Hippocrates, though many works.ascribed to him are of later date. The determination of the forms of Attic prose as distinguished from those of poetry is olten difficult because of insuffieient evidence, mtd in many cases certainty is not to he attained. The tenses employed in the dialogue parts of Aristophanes and other early writers of Attic comedy are usually to be regarded as existig in the spoken language except when the character of the verb in question is S]!Ch as to indicate horrowing from Epie or tragedy. Sometimes a tense attested onlyin tragedy and in Attic prose of the latter part of the fourth centnry may have been used in the best Attic prose. The expression in prose means 'in Attic prose. A prefixed hyphen indicates that a formused in prose is attested generally, or only, in composition; and that a poetical form occurs ouly in composition. Ri~id consistency would have led to too great detail; besicles, many tenses cited as ex1sting only in composition may have occurred also in the simple form. For the details of usage on this and other points the student is referred to Veitcb, Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective, and to Klmer-Blass, Griechische Gramm,atik. The tenses citee! are those of the principal parts (3G9). Tenses iuferred from these are omitted, but mention is made of the future perfect, future passive, and of the future middle when it shows a passive sense. An assumed form is marked by * or has no accent; the abbreviations aor. and pe~f. denote .tirst aorist and .tirst perfect; of alternative forms in rr or <ur (7~), that in rr is given when the verb in question belongs to the classical spoken language. In the citation of Epie forms, futures and aorists with <r<r, and severa! other Epie pecu.liarities, are usually not mentioned. The appeuded Roman numerals indicate the class (497-529) to which the present system of each verb belongs; all verbs not so designated belong to thefirst class (498-504).

*d.aw ( apJ.-w), M!w ha1'1n, i1lfatuate : pres. only in mid. d.rat ; aor. tl arr a ( tlirra or tlarrrra), tlrra, riarrdp:YJV (and d.iirrd!i-7JV or arrrrr.!I-7JV) erred; aor. pass. r.rr07Jv; v. a. in &.-<faros, -.tii.ros, liv-ii.ros. Chiefiy Epie. ci.ya~A> (cl:ya.-) aclorn, honour (act. in Corn. poets): cl.ya.w, ~YTJa.; mid. .y6.oll.a.. glo1y in, only pres. and imperl. (III.) O.ya.-ll.a. admi1e (725) : aor . ..jy6.a-e'lv ( 489 e), rarely ..jya.a-&.ILTJV, v. a. .ya.a-Tos. Epie fut. d.-yr.rr(rr)o11-a<, Epie aor. irrarr(rr)a!i-7JP. Hom. has also d.-yr.o11-a.< admi1e and -yalo11-a' (<i-ya.- for -yarr-) envy, am indignant at or with. .yy~A> ( d.-y-y<-) announce: .yyeMl, ~yye.a., ~yyeKa., i]yyejl.M, ,;yy6TJv, .yyee~a-oll.a., .yyeT<is. 2 aor. pass. 1,-y-y7Jv rarely on A tt. inscr. (III.) ci.yE(p.., ( d.-y<p-) collect: i\ye.pa.. Epie are aor. mid. fuv-7J')'Etpr.!1-7JP; 2 aor_ mid. -ypovro assemblecl, i)-yp<ro (Mss. ~')'pero), -yeprrOa<, 425 a, D. (some read with llSS. <i-yp<rr8a.L), -yp611-<vos; plup. 3 pl. d')'7J')'paro ; aor. pass. 1,-yp07Jv. Epie by-form 1,-y<pOo!i-a.L. (III.) d.-yvw Epie and Ion. = O.y..,. Inf. d.-yvfJ-evat Epie. ci.yvo"' not to know: regular, but .yvo~a-oll.a.' as 11ass. (808). Hom. -yvodw. 0.-y-v'iijl.< ( d.-y- for frJ.')'-, 733) break, in prose generaJJy KaTa')'VV!I-<, KaT.')'PVW in ali

()84

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

685

tenses: -6.tw, -a~a (431), 2 perf. -liya (443), 2 ~or. pass. -Eiy'lv (434), -<>KT6s. Epie aor. 1j~a, and 2 aor. pass. iiJ:"(TJP and a"(TJP; Ion. 2 perf. (?J"fa. (IV.) li.yw lead: li.~w, 2 aor. ~yo.yov, -ijxo., -ijyf'oo., ~X91Jv, .x6fJCTof1oa, .Kros. Fut. mid. a.;o.,.o.t, also = fut. pass. (809). Aor. 1j~cx suspeeted in Att., Hom. ~ap,?Jv: Hom. has mixed aor. li~<u, ~t!wva<, a;ewv (542 D.). do<- or J.o- be sated in Epie aor. opt. J.of}O"mv and perf. o?JKous. 48w sing: q:.,.o.,.o. (80()), U<Ta., U"'l"a., 1'(<T9TJV, 4crros. Uneontraeted forms in Epie and Ion. are <low, flO"w and dO'op,at, ?jetO'a. e- rest, sleep: Epie aor. leO"a, .iO"a. <lpw : see o.tpw. t!~w: Hom. for o.llgw ( o.g6.vw). {T}jLt (a?J-, a-1 724, 741) blOW.' 3 S. ltT}O't, 3 du. li?JTOP1 3 pl, atO't, inf, f}p,evcxt, ijvcu, part. els, imperf. 3 s. liTJ ; mid. pres. l?Jrat, part. f}p,evos, imperf. liTJTD. Poetie, chiefiy Epie. at8io~~oa.. (<llo<- f <oe<J'-) 1espect, je el shanw : o.l8CTO!I-M ( 488 a), if8E<rf1o<>L ( 489 c), ti8<T6TJv, a.t8.,.6fJ<Tofloa rare (812), ti8e<r6.f1o1JV pa1don a c1ninal in prose, otherwise Tragic. Imper. aloo Hom. (650). Poe.tic aroop,at. a.lKtto~~oa. outrage: atKw~~oa, tKtCTcl.f'oTJV, 1'{Kt<rf1o<>L, K(0'9Tjv was out1aged. alKl!w act. plaque poetic. Epie etKl!w. 512. (III.) utvlw p1aise, usu. eomp. w. brl, 1rapa, etc., in prose: -<ltvO"w (in prose usu. -o.LV<Tofloa, 488 b, 806), -'rive<Ta, -'riv<Ka, -nVTJfu, -vv8?Jv, -<>LV<<T9fJ<TOf10.L, -a.LVETos, -ros Aristotle. Epie and Lyric are alvf}O"w, iP?JO'<l. ar-vu!"''-' talee: only pres. and imperf. (alvVJ.'TJv). Epie. (IV.) a.tpw (alpe-, -) take, mid. choose: a.tpf)O'w, 2 aor. <tov (431), P'lKa., PTJf'o<lL (mid. or pass.), p9Tjv (usu. was chosen ), o.tp<0fJ<Tof1<1L, a.tp<r6s, -Tos. Fut. perf. PfJ<Tojl.a.L rare. Hdt. perf. apalpTJKa, O.palp?Jp,a<; Hom. v. a. ['Aeras. (Vl.) a.tpw (544 c) raise: .ipw, -ijpo. (cipw, dpo.LfloL, cipov, i.p<1t, cipas), ~pKo., ~PflO.L, ~p61]v, .ip6{j<T0jl.O.L, dprt!o,, Ionie and poetic elpw ( d.f<p-): aepw, o/fetpa, 1}p8'Y}P, Hom. plup. lwpro (from -l}opro) for ?jepro. Fut. apop,at and aor.-l)pp,?JV belong to lipvviJ.a' ( ap-) <cin. (III.) a.t<T6-6.vojl.O.L ( airr8-, aiO"Oe-) perce ive : o.t.,.6i)O'Of10.L, 2 aor. '!CT96f1TJV, if<T6TJfJ.O.L, o.tao9TjT6s. The by-form arrrOop,at is doubtful. (IV.) dcurw 'rush: see (itrTw. o.t<TX-~V"' ( alO"xvv-) clisgrace, mid. je el asharned: at<TXvvw, <TX'iivo., "!O"xvv9'1v jelt ashamed, o.tcrxuvros. On fut. mid. o.tcrxuvo,.o.t and fut. pass. o.tO"xuv61].,.o.,.o., see 1911. Hom. perf. pass. part. ?'wxvp,p,t!vos. (IlL) O.tw hear, with ii usu. in Att. poets, i1. in Epie, Lyric, and in some Att. poets : imperf. Hom. o/ji'ov, li'ov and aov, aor. 7r-VO'< Hdt. (Mss. 7l'fjtO'e), v. a. 'ffaiO"ros Hdt. Poetic and Ion. Hom. has also elw, of which wv (Mss. twv) may be the 2 aor. 'tw breathe out: imperf. aov Epie. aK-ax-l!w ( aKaXtO-, aKaX- 1 aKaxe-, fr0111 a x- redu pl,) ajftict, gJ'eVe .' aKaxf}O'w, aKaXTJO'a (rare), 2 aor. ?jKaxov, aKaXTJJ.'at arn grieved (8 pl. aK?Jxt!oarat), inf. aKcLX?JO'Oa, (425 a, D.), part. K<lXfJp,evos and KYJxt!p,evos (425 b, (2) D.) Cp. ax!w, ax<vw, lxvup,at. Epie. 512. (IlL) K-ax-p,vos ( aK-; cp. "'liK-pov peak) sharpened; Epie redu pl. perf. part., with no present in use.

686

APPE~ DIX:

LIST OF VERBS

Kop.<u (K<- for Keo--; cp. r dKos cme) heal: .jKE<rcl.tJ-1JV, C.KE<rros. Hom. has also KElw. K'r/il<fw ( K"'il- for K'r/oeo--, 488 D.; cp. K'r/ons uncared fm) neglect: K7}oeo-a

Epie.

Epie and poetic.

.Ko1lw ( KOV-, KO!(-, 48) he a?'; C.K01l<TOJ'oO.L (806), ~KOV<Ta., 2 perf." C.K~KOO. ( 562 a), 2 plup. 'K1JK01J Or C.K1JK01J, >iKo1l<r91JV ( 489 e), C.KOV<T9~<TOtJ-O.L, C.KOV<TTOS, -TOS. aa_\w (aa')'-) raise the war-c1y, usu. poetic or late prose: aM~op.a< (806), >lMXa.sa.. (III.) .X.i.otJoa. wander, rare in prose: pres. Epie imper. Mov (Mss. Mw, 643), perf. Epie M'r/!J.a< as pres. (d.M'r/o-o, M'r/o-8at, a7}p.evos), aor. Epie 7}8'r/v. a7Tci.\w (d.a7Ta')'-) destroy, plunder: Epie are d.a7Tci~w, M'ITa~a. By-forms a'ITci.\w, a'IT<i<To-w. (III.) Malvw (d.Mav-) with the by-forms Mvw, d.M?)o-Kw, nourish: Epie 2 aor. (or imperf.) ~Mavov, v. a. Epie /i,v-ahos insatiate. Poetic. (IV.) .<l<J>w (ciHrp-, d.<rp-) anoint: .lo/w, ~ELo/a., C.1T-a.~<J>a. (477 a), ci.~LtJofJ.a.L, >lXd<J>91Jv, ci.ncp9~<rotJoa., j;-nEL1TTos. 2 aor. pass. i}l<f!'r/v, 1}l<f!'r/v are duuLt-

ful.
~w

and KW (d.<h ae~e-, aeK-, aK-) wa1d o_ff': fut. a~w poetic (rare), Xen., Soph., <ie~?)o-w Hom., ae~?)o-op.aL Hdt.; aor. ije~a Aesch., f}X~"'i7a Epie, f}e~p.'r/v Ion., Xen., i}<~'r/o-cip.'r/v (?) Xen., 2 aor. iLaKov poetic (549). By-form ci.Ka8w poetic (490 D.). aop.at a void: aor. i}eap,'r/v ( 43, 607). Cp. aevw. Poetic. aevw avert: ijevo-a. Usu. in mid. <ieuop.a< avoid, aor. i}wap.'r/v, subj. ~-aeu-o- wp.a< (~-aM~wp.a< ?). Poetic. Other forms with like meaning are aefivw,
<i~op.aL

<iV<TKW, <iV<TKctjw, d.UO"Kalvw. C.w giind: ci..;) (539), ~E<ra., C.~EtJ-O.L (<i7}wp,at, 489 b). By-form a1]8w. ai)va<: see etw. /LMop.at (aM-, <iMe-) am healed: Epie 11Mero and 'IT-aM7]o-op.a<. Hippocr. bas aor. -"1Mo-8"1v. <itvlw ca<Se to roll (also atva.!w; aiw), usu. comp. with ;: -1j:<ra., -ijKa., >lX(v61Jp.a.L. <itw is a pres. derived from ijo-a ( = 1}<voi7a). ci.-(<rKOtJ-11 ( .- for fa-, .o-, 486) am caJ?tured (used as pass. of aipw) : c\.Xcl><rop.n, 2 aor. Eawv or i]Xwv ( ci.Xcli, c\.o(1Jv, ci.wva., c\.Xovs, 687), Eci.wKa. (44:3) or iJwKa., c\.wrc\s. Epie 2 aor. subj. .ww. Act. .lo-Kw is not used, but see <ivalo-Kw expend. (V.) tratvop.a< (atr-, <itrav-) sin: Epie are aor. ~trov (-6p,'r/v), perf. part. <itr?)p.evos sinning. Mostly Epie. Epie by-form d.trpalvw. (III. IV.) ci.XXO.rrro ( aa')'-) change, often comp. w. 7T6, ota, p.erci : ci.XXO.sw, ~a.sa., -ijXXa.xn, ~nyp.n, >1XMx91Jv (usu. in tragedy) and >lXMy1Jv (both usu. in comp. ), fut. paRs. C.1T-a.a.x91J<rop.a. (so in tragedy) and ci.1T-nny1j<rotJoa., fut. mid. -a.ci.Sop.a., fut. perf. C.1T-1J6.top.a., v. a. C.1T-a.a.Kros. (Il I.) ii.op.a. (. -) leap : c\.Xovp.a., TjXO.p.1Jv. 2 aor. ~M!L'r/V rare and un certain in A tt. Epie 2 aor. &:o-o, <iho, iLp.evos (688). (III.) <ivKTci.\w am dist1essed Ion., <ivKrw am anxim<s late Ion.: Epie aaVKT'r/p.a< w. reduplication. 512. (III.) aV<TKW (avK-, 526 d) avoid: aM~w, iju;a. Hom. haR also vo-Kajw and av<TKavw. Poetic. (V.) <i<f>-avw (a<f>-) find, acque: Epie 2 aor. TJ<f!ov. (IV.)

APPENDIX: LTST OF VERBS

G87

O.p.a.pT-nvro ( p,a.pT-, p,a.pn-) er?' : p.a.pT~o-op.a. (806), 2 a or. ~p.a.pTov, -!JfLnpT1]Ka., -!Jp.npT'JfJ.O.L, -!JfLa.pn'JO'lv, .v-a.p.npT1jTos, 'II'E~-a.fLa.pT')Tos. Epie 2 aor. ijp,{JpoTov

(for {3, see 130).

(IV.)

O.fJ.f3-Lo-K"' ( ap.{J-) and .!'f3M"' miscarry; reg. in eomp. w. ~ : -"IJ!'f3"'o-a., -1J!'-f3wKa., -1JI'-f3>..ro,.a.L. Other forms are la te. (V.) .fJ.d(3w change, rare in A tt. prose: .,_e(ljlw, 1\!'-EL.jla.. Mid. .!'-e(f3ol'-a.L make retum, rare in prose and eomedy: .I'-EC.Vol'-a.L, Tjl'-e.V6.1'-1JV. In the meaning answer
i}p.e<fap.7Jv and i}p.el<P87Jv are poetie. ap.dpw ( ap.ep-) dep1ive, on!y in pres. Poetie. (III.) .p.pl5w deprive: -lfp.epffa., i}p.lp87Jv. Poetie. .p.1r-lxw and rare .p.7r-lffxw (.p.<f>l ~xw, 125 d) pnt about, clotlw: imperf. .p.7rexov (Hom. .p.1r-lxov), .p.<f>-~w, 2 aor. ijp.'lr-<ffxov. Mid. .!'-'II'XO!'-a.L (.p.7r-iffxop.a.< and .p.</J-<ffKvop.a<) wea?': imperf. Tji'-'II'ELXOfJ.TJV (451), fut. 6.1'-<1>-~ol'-a.L,

2 aor. 'JP.'~~'-eo-xo!''lV and 'J!'"'o-xoi''IV

See xro and

la-x"'

p.7raK-lffKW ( cip.7rctK-, cip.7ra.KE-) en, miss: 2 aor. -/fp.7raKov and ijp.{JaKov (part. p.7raKt!Jv and 7ra.Kt!Jv), i}p.7r&.K7Jf1-a<, v-a.p.7raK7JTos. Poetie. (V.) /ip.7rVV, .P,1rV~V87JV, /ip.7rVTO (Epie) : -888 'II'VO). .,_'i}v., (p.vv-) ward o.tf: fJ.uV>, i\1'-iva.. Mid. .,_;ivo,.a.L defend myself: .!'-uvoilp.a., 'Jf.Livnf.L'lv, v. a. .,_vvTos. By-form ,uivciew, 400 D. (III.) p.vTTw ( cip.vx-) sc1atch: J.Lll~w, -lfp.v~a. Poetie and Ion. (Ill.)

.!'-<I>L'YVOOI dou/Jt; imperf. -II'-<I>-E'YV001JV ( ~1'-<I>L-j'VOOlJV ?), aor. -)fl<f>-Ej'VO'JO'"O.. 451. 6.1'-<I>L-vv\ii'-L (late p.<f>tevvw) clothe: o.,.q.,. (5:39 e), .q,_q,C-eo-a. (460), TJI'-<!>C-eo-1'-0.L. Mid. fut. .I'-<1>-o-o,.a., aor. p..</JL-Effa!J-'IJV poetie. (IV.) 6.fL<I>o-f3'1.,.w isp?tte: the augmented (451) i)p.cl>eo-j3~Tovv, ..jp.cl>eo-j3f]TTJO"O. (inser.)

are better than i}p.<f><- (Mss.). (III.)

Fut. mid.

.p.<!>o-f3'JT~o-op.o.L

as pass. (808).

.va.(vop.a.L ( va v-) refuse, only pres. and imperf. in prose; aor. -i)va.vcif-L'I)v poetie. .v-ii-(o-KOI ( X-, Xo-, 486) and .vaM., expencl (from .va-Fa-) : imperf. 6.vfJLCTKov (6.vf]ouv, rare), .va>..C:.o-.,, .vf)01o-a., .vf)OIKct, 6.vf).,p.o.L, .v1]&61]v, fut. pass. .va>.."'O-Ijo-op.o., 6.viiOITos. Att. inser. prove the Mss. forms viiwffa,
v<iwKa, vdwp.a<, dvi.w8'1)v to be late. KaT7JVdwffa, -7Jvdwf-La<, 7Jvi.Xw0'1)v are also late. See .to-Kop.a.L. (V.) voavw (o- for ffFao-, 123, and .Oe-) usu. Epie and Ion., but the pres. oeeurs in Att. poetry: imperf. Hom. probably avoavov and ll.voavov (Mss. u,voavov and -ijvoavov), Hdt. -i)voa.vov (sorne write avoavov); fut. Hdt. l5fww; 2 aor. Hdt. l!aoov, Hom. eliaov (for lf raoov from lff Faoov) and li.Oov; 2 perf. Hom. l!i.oa (443). Adj. lio-p.evos pleased, in common use. Chiefly Epie and Ion. (IV.) tlv-xw hold up, poetie and New Ion. : dv-exov, civ-~w and dva-O"X?ffw, dv-hrxov. 6.v-XOfLO.L enclu1e: 'ljv-nxop:qv (451), .v-top.o.L and .vn-o-xfJ<rop.nL, 2 aor. i}vEO""X6fJo1]V, .V-EKT6s, -TOS.

dvi}vo8 ( dvB-, dvo8) mounts up p 270, sp1ang forth A 266. prep. Cp. -ev?jvo8e.

dv- is probably the

.v-o(y-vp.L and 6.v-o('Y"' open: imperf. .v-<t>)'OV (431), .v-o(~w, 6.v-<t>~ct, 1 perf. .v-<t>xo., 2 perf. .v-<t>YO. (rare, 44:1) have opened, .v-'f'YfJ.ctL stand open, .v-E,PxO'lv, fut. perf. .v-e<jl~op.a.L, .v-oLKTos. Cp. 808. o-yvi!l< and o-yw (q.v.)

poetie. Imperf. dv</l-yov ;a: 168 may be written dvlrnov w. synizesis. -/fvwyov and ifvot!;a in Xen. are probably :vrong; Hom. has (/,~a (oi~a ?), and t:Jet~a (Mss. t.~a.) from oel-yw (Lesb.); Hdt. ll.vo<~a and dv</l~a. (Mss.). (IV.)

688

APPENDIX: LIST OF YERES

[.vop96w

.v-op96w set upright has the regular augment (.v-wp9wa-o.); but 1r-o.vop86w bas double augment: 11'-TJv-<i>p9ouv, 11'-TJv-&p9wa-o., 'IT-TJv-&p9wp.a.t (401). .vTL(3ow mett, /Jeseech often has two augments: ..;vT-e{36ouv, ..;vT-e{36TJtTO. (451). .vTL6LKw am defendant may have double augment: .ftvT-e6(KolJV, ijvT-e6LKTJtTO. (4iil). .vvw and (rarer) .vvTw (531) (often written vuw, vurw) accomplis!!: .vva-w, ~vuc:ro., ilvuKo., 6t-t1vua-p.o. (?) Xen., .vua-Tos, v-'ljvv(<T)ros poetic. Hom. fut. -avvw. Poetic forms are livw, .vw (pres. and imperf. ), and livvw ( ~vvro e 243), hr-'YJVU<T8'YJV Epie. livw'"(a (439 D.) Epie 2 perf. as pres. cormnancl (1 pl. livw'"(p.ev, imper. livwxEh, vwxew, livwx8e), 2 plup. as imperf. 1,vw'"(ta, 3 s. 1,vw'YH and vw'"(H. To vw'"(w, a pres. developed from the perf., many forms may be referred, as pres. vw'"(, subj. vw7w, opt. vw'"(o<p.<, imper. livw'"(e, inf. vw'"(p.ev, part. vw'"(wv, imperf. #vw'"(ov, fut. vw~w, aor. ~vw~a. Poetic and lon. .'IT-O.VTaW ?neet: .'IT-O.VTtltTOp.O.L (806), .11'-tlVTTJtTO., .'IT-fjVTTJKO., .1!'-0.VTTJTOS. .'ITo.Tciw deceive: regnlar, but as fut. pass. .'ll'o.Tf]a-op.o. and ~-a.11'o.TTJ9fJa-op.o.t (809). Cp. 454 a. 1r-avpaw take away, found in the imperf. ?r'YJupwv (with aoristic force), fut. ?rovp'l)<Tw, aor. part. ?roupis (as if from ?roup'YJp.<), ?rovpap.evos. The root is probably fpi, ?r'YJupwv representing 1r-wpwv for a?r-<fpwv (with 'YJ for e by mistake), as ?roupiis represents 1ro-Fpas. Poetic and Epie. ?r-a<f>-l<TKW ( ?r-a</>-, ?r-a<f>e-) deceive, comp. w. ~: -a?ra<f>'l)<Tw rare, -a?ra</>'YJ<Ta rare, 2 aor. -'1)7ra<f>ov, mid. opt. -a?ra<f>olp.'YJP. Poetic. (V.) .'IT-ex9-6.vop.o. (xO-, lx8e-) am hated: .'IT-ex9f]a-op.o.t, 2 aor. .11'-TJX96p.TJv, ..,..f]x9TJp.a.L. Simple forms are ~xew, fxOop.a<. (IV.) 1r6-(F )ep<T< swept off: ?ro-prru, ?ro-p<Tm. Epie. ..,..o4..o.vw enjoy (the simple auw is unused) : .'ITo-o.va-op.o. (806), .'IT-a.ua-o., .'ll'o-O.UKO. ( 450). ii.'IT-TW (</>-) jasten, kindle, mid. touch: il.o/w, ..j.J!a., ..jp.p.o.L, il<f>9TJV, 'ITTOS, -TOS. (II.) .pciop.a.L pray (Epie apaop.a<), often COmp. W. 1rl or Kara: .ptia-op.o.L, .ftpiLtTcltJ.TJV, -f]p<Lp.o.t, piirbs poetic. Epie act. inf. p-f)p.eva<. Ion. pop.a<. p-ap-l<TKW (p-) fit, join trans.: 1jp<Ta, 2 aor.-lfpapov trans. and intrans. (448 D.), 2 perf. lipapa in trans., aor. pass. ~p8'YJv. Ion. and Epie 2 perf. lip'YJpa, plu p. pfjpea and f}p'ljpea. 2 aor. part. mid. lipp.evos, as adj., fitting. Poetic. (V.) .pciTTw ( pa'"(-) st1ilce, comp. in prose w. 1r6, ~, 1rl, Kara, <Tu v; -a.pci~w, -f]po.~o., -TJpcix9TJv. Cp. p&.rrw. (IlL) .p-a-Kw (pe- for pe<T-; cp. r lipos help) please: .p<Tw, 1\pea-o.; mid. .pa-Kop.o.t appease: .pa-op.a., .ftpEa-cip.TJv, 'pa-9'1v (?), .pea-Tos pleasing. (V.) &pT/p.lvos opp1essed. Epie perf. mid. of uncertain derivation. -ipKw (pKe- for pK<T-; cp. r lipKos defence) assist, stt_tfice: .pKa-w, ~pKE<Ta.. .p~,.s ....., and poe tic pp.6rw ( pp.o/5-) fit: .pp.oo-w, i\pp.oa-a., iJpp.oa-1'-o., i]pp.oa-e,v. Aor. <Tvvcipp.o~a Pind., perf. 1jpp.oKa Aristotle. 51. (III.) ii;;-vvp.a< (p-) win: dpop.a<, 2 aor. 1,p6p.'YJP (inf. pl<TOat). Chiefly poetic. Cp. atpw. (IV.) .i.pow plough: aor. act. -lfpo<Ta and aor. pass. 1,p60'YJv are, in Attic, attested only in poetry; perf. mid. ap'ljpop.a< Epie and Ion. cip.,.citw (ap?ra'"f-) seize, snatch: .p..,.~a-op.o. (80G), Jess oftcn &p..,.cic:rw, ilp.,..a.a-a,

APPENDIX: LIST OF VEnDS

689

i)p1ra.Ka., i)p1ra.<rp.cu, ~p1f6.<r91]v, ci.p'!l'a.a-9~a-op.a.t. Fut. .ptrd.(w Epie, aor. fiptra~a. poetic, aor. pass. f}ptrd.xOTJv Hdt., v. a. .p7raKT6s Ilesiod. 516. (III.) ci.pr'ilro (Hom. prvw) p1epare: in prose often comp. w. f:~ or Kar: cipnicrro, jprlicra., -ftpTliKa., -ftpT'iip.a.~, -1]p.,.;J6'1v. Cp. Epie prt;vw ( pruv-): pruvlw,
ifprva., i,pn/8flv. .pvw ( .p-UTro) d1aw water: ijpvcra., 1f']pv9'1v, .1r-a.pvcrTos; t,pv"OTJv Hippocr. 531. lpxw begin, 1'Ule, mid. begin; nptro, ~pfa., f;pxa Jate, ~p)'p.M mid., 1jpX61]v, .pKTos, fut. mid. np~op.a.t sometimes as pass. (808), pxMwop.a< Aristotle. .crTp6.1t"-TW ( Mrpa1r-) lighten, jlash: <rrp.>J;w, ijcr.,.pa.>jta.. (II.) r<T.w (nra.-) 1ea1, Epie and I-yric: rlTTJa. (III.) q..,..,."' (/."""'; from F"'fLKJW) 1'Ush, rare in prooe: lf.~ro, {t!;a.. From Ion. and poetic .i'""w (Hom. t"""') come 't~w, 1)~a. (-.p.TJv), -l;txOTJv (with act. mean-

ing). (III.) a.va.(v<o> and aalvOJ (auav-) d1'y: auavw Soph., TJlflVa or aTJva Hdt., TJU.vOTJv or aMv8TJv Aristoph., fut. pass. auavOfwop.aL Aristoph., fut. mid. auavop.aL as pass. Soph. Mainly poetic and Ion., rare in Att. prose. (III.) a.v~-6.v<o> and (less often) a.l!!;<o> ( ai;-, ao~E-) malec ilwease, f!i'OW: imperf. 1]\l!;a.vov or '11ltov ( 'ltlta.vop.1Jv or 1Jt'lt6f11JV), a.t'ltftcrOJ, 'Jtflcra., 'J~']Ka., 'll!t'lP.a., 1]-l>!;ft9'1v, a.t'1!;1]6~crop.a.t (fut. pass. also a.tlt{lcrop.a.~, 80\l), a!lb1ios Aristotle. Cp. Epie and [on. ~w ( -op.a1), imperf. II.E.fov. (l\T.) <f>."""' (515 a) fee.l, handle (Hdt.): 1)<f>a1J'a. Cp. Ion. and Epie a<{>.w or .<f>d.w handle (rare in A tt.) ; Hom. .q,6wv, Ion. E7l"a<f>rww, E7r-1J<f>TJ"" (III.) .cj>t'lP.L let rto : in the imperf. 1}4>-t'lv or .cj>-t'lv See 450. <J;v"""' (<J;wy-) dip up: <f>v~w. l'oetic, chiefly Epie. (III.) <f>vw dip ttp: -i)<J;uO'a ( -.p.TJv). Poetic, chiefly Epie. i.x8op.a.t am vexerl; as if from *xOoiJ.a< (IL x(),. for xB<IJ'-; cp. r lixOos distnss) come .x8aop.a.t, 1}x9cr8'1v (48\l e), fut. pass. a8 mid. cix6ecr9~crop.a.~ (812). !!x-vvp.a< (x-) am tToublPd, imperf. tixvvro ;e 38. Poetic. (IV.) lixop.at ( d.x-) am trou bled. Epie present. *liw satinte (cp. i-OTJV sujficiently, Lat. sa-tis): diJ'w, .iiJ'a, 2 aor. satiate rnyself (subj. l!wp.Ev or wp.Ev, from f}op.ev, inf. li.p.Eva<). Mid. lia.Tal (better a<Ta<), J.O'op.a1, .O'tZ!J.TJP, <iras (11.-aros ?). Epie. liwpro : see a.tpro.
J3a.8Ctoo go: f3a.8~oJI.a.< (806), (3E{3l5tKa Aristot.le, f3a.8~cr.,.os. 512. (III.) (3.!;w ((3aK-) spealc, utter: (3d.~w, {3(3aKrat. Poe tic. (lii.) (3a.tvoo (f3a-, {3av-, 523 h) go: -J3~crop.a.t (806), 2 aor. -f3'1v (551, 682 a, 687), f3(31]Ka., 2 perf. J3ef3i.<Tt ( subj. -(3ef3wcr~, 704 a), -(3f3a.p.a.t rare, -ef36.6'1v rare, (3a..,.os, 8ta.-(3a.Tos. The simple verb appears in Att. prose only in the pres. and perf. act. Epie aor. mid. lf3TJrr.p.TJv (rare) and l(3TJ"biJ.'1V (42 D.). Causative (make go) are {3-IJ"w poetic, ((3rwa poe tic and Ion. prose. Cp. also (3.<JKw, (3t(3d.w, (3lf3Y!P.'- 5:)0. (III. IV.) (36.OJ (f3a\-, {31\TJ-, 128 a, {3a<-) tMow: J3a.w in good prose in comp. ((3a.~crro Aristoph. of continued action), 2 aor. (3a.ov ( -6vTJv usu. in comp. ), f3f3TJKa., J3f3'Jp.a.t (opt. ota-{3<{31\O'Oe, 711 d), ~(3~8'Jv, fnt. pass. f3'18~crGp.a.t, fut. })erf. (3ef3ftcrop.a. usu. in comp., &,,.o-f3'lTo<;. Epie forms of the fut. are ~ViJ. {3\-fJ"m'; of the 2 aor. acL. ~up.-{3-IJT7JV (088), ~vp.-(31\-i}p.evat ; of tllf' 2 C<)!' GREEK GRAM. -44

690

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

[(36.r.Tw

mid. as pass. fJ"AftfJ.TJV (suhj. f3Xfterru, opt.. {3'/\~o or {1'/\fi:o, inf. f3Xijrr0at, part. {1'/\f}fJ.EVos); of the perf. 2 s. f3f3XTJa< and 1 s. f3f36X7JfJ.at. (III.) j3cbr-Tw (f3a<f;) dip : p.-j3cl.ljtw, j3aljta., f3f3a.p.p.a.., 2 aor. pass. f3cl.cj>1JV (1 aor. pass. {1a<f;OTJv Aristoph.), j3ar.T6s. (IL) j3a.p'iivw (f3apvv-) load, annoy: f3a.pvvw, f3apvv91Jv. (III.) f3auKw (f3a-) go: poetic form of (3a.(vw. f-rnf3arrKfJ.EV B 234 cause togo. (V.) f3auTajw (f3auTao-) carry: f3auTauw, if3arrmrra. Poetic. La te forms are from f3auTa'Y- (III.) j3f)TTw (f3rJx-) cough. Ion. are {Jf}~w, ~f3'1~a. (3tf36.tw (f3a-) malce go: usu. comp. w. &.va, o<a, etc. in prose: -(3t(3cio-6> (-op.a.t) and -f3tf3i (539 d), -e(3(j3a.o-a., {1tf3d.u07Jv Aristotle, -f3tf3ao-Tos. 447 a, 512. (III.) {1tf3aw (f3a-) step: part. {1<f3wv. Epie. f3if3TJfJ.' (fla-) go: part. {1t{1as. Epie. {1t-{1p<.iJ-uKw (f3pw-) eat: f3f3p6>Ka. (2 perf. part. f3f3pws poetic), f3f3pwp.a., f3pw07Jv Hdt., fut. perf. f3e{Jp<.iJuofJ.a< Hom., f3pwT6s Eur. Epie 2 aor. ~f3pwv (688). In Att. other tenses than perf. act. and pass. are supplied from o-9(w. (V.)
(:Mw live (for pres. and imperf. t6.w and (3.oTevw were preferred): f3~o-op.a. (806),

(3(wo-a rare, 2 aor. j3(wv (687), j3e(3(wKa, f3e(3(6>Ta (with the dat. of a pronoun), (3twT6s, -Tos. (f3<<.iJCJKofJ.a<) usu. cl.va-f3L<i>o-Kop.a. 1eanimate, Tevive in trans.: d.v-ef3lwua late A tt., intrans., 6.v-e(3t6>o-cl.p.1Jv 7"eanimate, 2 aor. 6.v-e(3(6>v intrans. (V.) j3ll.ci11"-TCII (f3af3-) huTt, in}l!Te: j3a\jt6>, (3a.>fta., (3j3a.cj>a, j3(3ap.p.a., (3ll.cicj>91]V and 2 aor. (3cl.f3tjv, fut. mid. (3>-.cl.>ftop.a. (also as pass., 809), 2 fut. pass. j3aj3f)o-op.a, fut. perf. f3f3at/JofJ.at Ion. Cp. f3Mf3ofJ.a< am injured T 82. (II.) j3ao-T-6.vw (f3auT-, f3XauTE-) sp7uut: 2 aor. j3ao-Tov, j3ef3M.o-T1JKO. (Jess often f3M.o-TTjKa., 440 a). f3MuT7J<ra Ion. and poetic. (IV.) j3-rrw see: (3>-.tjtop.at (806), (3eljta., (3e-rrTos, -T6s poetic. Hdt. has fut. d.va{J't..f>fw. {11rofJ.a< is rare in pass. sense. (3(TTw. for fJ.(fJ)<T-~w (from fJ.tr-, cp. fJ.<, fJ.<Tos honey, 130) talee honey: (3to-a. (III.) {1<.iJ-<rKw for fJ.(f3)w-<rKw from fJ.O-, fJ.w- (130 D.) go: fut. fJ.Oovp.a< (806), 2 aor. IfJ.Oov, perf. fJ.p.{1wKa. Poetie. (V.) j3ocl.w shout: f3o1]o-op.a.t (806), f361Jo-tt.. Ion. are {1<.iJ<rofJ.at, ~f3w<ra, f3t!f3wfJ.a<, {1<.iJu0TJv. Cp. 59 D. 1, 489 g. j36-o-Kw (f3o-, f3orrK-, {Jo<rKE-) feed: j3oo-Kf)o-oo and f3oo-K1JTos Aristoph. j36o-Kop.a.t eat. (V.) j3ovop.at (f3ov-, f3ovE-) w. augment {3ov- or i,{Jov- ( 430) will, wish: f3ov'Ijo-op.at, f3ef3ov1Jp.a.t, j3ov1]91]v, f3ov1JT6s, -Tos Aristotle. Epie 2 perf. 7rpof3f3ov"J..a p7efe7". Hom. has also {16'/\ofJ.a<. j3pax-: 2 aor. (l!)f3paxe, f3paxet:v resound. Epie. j3pxw wet: f3pe~a., f3f3peyp.at, f3px91Jv. f3pl!w slumbm, am drowsy: l!f3p<~a. Poetie. 512. (III.) {1pt8w am heavy: {1pi<rw, lf{1pi<ra, f3t!f3pi8a. Mainly poetie. f3pox- swallow, often w. va, KaTa : -f3po~e, 2 perf. -f3f3poxe, 2 aor. pass. part. -f3poxEis. The eomrnon verb is Ka.Ta-f3pox9Ltw ( Aristoph.). Epie. j3p'iiKw bite, g1ind the teeth: f3pu~w (147 e), l!f3pv~a, 2 aor. if{1pvxov. Chiefiy Ion. j3pvxciop.a. (f3pvx-, 486) Tow: f3t!f3pvxa as pres. (poetic), 6.v-ef3p'x1Jo-cl.p.1jv Plato, f3pixTJOEis Soph.

APPENTX: LIST OF VERBS

691

{Jpw-Ow eat: 2 perf. opt. {Jef3pw8ots tl. 35. Cp. {Jt{JpwriKw. fJiiv> ({Jv- for {Jvri-) stop up, often w. hri, 1rp6: -j36<rw, -j3<ra., j3ij3u<TfJ.~, 1Tap6.j3il<rTos. Hdt. has w.-{JDvETa.t. Comic and Ion. (IV.)
)'O.~W ("ta.JL-, "/U.JLE-, 485) ma1'1'Y (of the man): fut. ya.f!.Ol, r)'t]f-'0., )'E)'tlf.'TJKO.. Mid. ya.f.<Of.<n~ (of the woman) : fut. -ynp.oiip.n, YtJf.<Up.TJv, -ye""jUf.<tJP."'' v. a.

)'!lfl.ETOS ( ynp.ETfJ Wife), -TOS. -yti-vvJLa.t (-y a.-) rejoice: Epie fut. -yavvririo;uxt (w. vu of the pres. stem). Chiefiy poetic. (IV.) -y-ywva. ( -ywv-, -ywve-) 2 perf. as pres. shout: part. -yqwvws Epie. Other forms may be referred to -yeywvw or -yeywvw; as subj. -ye-ywvw, imper. -y-ywve, inf. -ye-ywvJLev (Epie) and -ye-ywvev, nperf. -ye-ywvet and -y-ywve, 1 pl. -yeywvevv, fut. -ye-ywv1)riw, aor. l-ye-ywvrwa, v. a. -ye-ywv'tfTos. Poetic, occasionally in prose. By-form yeywvla-Kw. -y<lVoJLa.t ("tE>-) am born Epie; aor. l-yELvLiJL'tf" begat (poetic) yields in Hdt., Xen. -yetvLiJLE>os, -yetvap.v'tf parent. (III.) -yeM.w ( -yea- for -yeM-) laugh: -ye6.a-op.n (806), yna-n, yeaa-01Jv ( 48H c), KO.T-)'a.<TTOS. 488. -yvTo seized, Epie 2 aor. 2: 476. Also = yveTo (yiyvop.n). "t'tf8w ("t'tf&-, "f'tf&e-, 485) rejoice: -y)'TJiln as pres. ; 'Y'181ww and l-yi{Orwa poetic. )'1Jpa-a-Kw and less corn. yt]paw ( "f'tfpa-) g1ow old: YtJpa-op.nL (806), less often Y'Jpa-w, yijpiia-n, yqi]piiKa. am old. 2 aor. l-yi{p. Epie and L:ln., inf. 'Y'tfpvat poetic, part. 'Y'tfPfi.s Hom. (687). (V.) 'f'YJpDw (500. 1. a) speak out: nprioJLa< (806), -y1)pvria, ly7JpV87Jv. Poetie. -y(-yvop.n (-yev-, -yeve-, -yov-, 478) become, am: yevi]a-op.nL, 2 aar. yev6p.tjv, 2 perf. -y-yova. am, have be en, yeyvt]p.nL, yev1J&i]a-op.a. rare. -yivoJLat Do rie and New Ion. (89). 2 aor. 3 s. -ylovro Epie; aor. pass. -yev1}07Jv Doric, Ion., lateAtt. comedy; 2 perf. part. yey&.s (other -JLL forms w. -ya- for "tf- 479, 482, 573, 704 b). -y--yv&.-a-Kw ( ')'Vw-, -yvo-) know: -yv&.a-op.at (806), 2 aor. yvwv (687) perceived, yvwKa, yvwa-p.n ( 489 e), -yv&.a-91jv, yvwcr9i]a-op.o., -yvwa-Tos (-yvwTos poetie), -<TTos. 1 aar. .v--yvwria. pe1suaded Hdt. Doric, New Ion. -yvwrrKw (89). (V.) -yvcj>w carve: yyllp.p.n and )'llp.p.a. (440 a). Hdt. has vyu'fa.. Other forms are 1ate. -yvLiJL'ff-TW ( -yvaJL7r-) bend: -yvtip.'f;w, ~')'PaJL'f!a, v-eyvtiwpe7Jv. Poetic forKap.,.Tw. (II.) ')'oaw bewail: inf. -yoi{JI-EPat Hom., 2 aor. -ybov (-yo-) Epie. Mid. yoaoJLa< poetie: -yo1)rioJLa< Hom. -ypO.<j>w w1ite: ypa.jlw, ypo..jln, -yypa.cj>n, yypnp.p.n, 2 aar. pass. ypacj>1Jv, 2 fut. pass. ypn<!>'i]a-op.n, fut. perf. pass. -yeypa.jlop.n, ypn'lTTos, -Tos. -ye-ypd<f>7JKa, ~-ypaJLJLat, and -ypd<f>{)TJv are late. ypvtw ( -ypvy-) grunt: -ypii~op.a (806, late -ypui;w) ; ypll~n, ypllKT<is. Mostly in A tt. comedy. (III.)
qa- teach, learn, no pres. : 2 aar. gaaov leaTned, redu pl. liaov taugl~t, ?. aar. mid. eariOat (eoaariOat Mss.), 1 perf. Eoa7JKa (ae-) have lewned, 2 }Jerf. part. eaws having leanwcl, perf. mid. lieoa7JJLa< have learned, 2 aor. pass. as intrans. iiti'Y)v lemned, 2 fnt. pass. as in trans. a1)rioJLa< shall learn; -liti7Jros. Cp. Hom. lii{w shall ji11d and 8d'i6.<TKw. Poetie, mainly Epie. oa<-tiw (a<a-, atliao-) eclc out: l'ind. bas perf. part. Eoa<liaJLvos, aar. part. ataMels, and fut. inf. oa<oawri~Ev. Epie and Lyric. (III.)

692

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

[oat'_\w

a.tw (ai'-y-) rend: at~w, t!ci.i'~a, o<oci.-yp,a,, atx0TJv. Epie, Lyric, Tragic. (III.) oal-vP,L (caL-) entertain: oalv Epie imperf. and pres. imper., alcrw, l!oa.tcra. Mid. oa.lvup,aL jeast (opt. aaLVTO 0 665, cp. 750 D.), oatcrci.p,'Y}V, aor. pass. part. oa<crB<is, li-oatros. Poe tic, rare in Ion. prose. (IV.) oa[OfJ-UL divide: perf. 3 pJ. ofi)a[a.Ta.L a. 23; SUbj. Oci.'Y}TaL 'f 316 (fOr oa.['Y}Ta.L) frOID oalop,a.L or oalw ? Cp. arop,a.L. Poetic. a.lw (af-}W) kindle: 2 perf. Oo'Y}a. burn intrans., plup. O<o-f}<L. Mid. oalop,at

burn intrans.

Mainly poetic.

(III.)

MK-vw (oa.K-, OTJK-) bite: SfJ~otJoa. (806), 2 aor. lia.Kov, S!i"l'YtJoa., SiJx&'IJv, 8a.x9fJ<rotJoa.L. (IV.) Sa.JL-.tw tame, snbdue: fut. oap,ci.crw, oap,ci.w, oap,w (Hom. 3 s. oap,(j and ap,<i'!-, 3 pl. ap,6wcr<, 645), aor. 0ci.p,acra. A tt. prose has only Sa.tJo.tw, Ka.T-e!ia.Jloa.<r.Jlo1JV, !ia.JL.0"9'1Jv. Mostly poetic, rare in prose. 512. (III.) Oci.p,-vTJ-p,L (and ap,-vci.-w ?) (ap,-, p,TJ-) tame, subdue: perf. mid. Ot!op,'T)p,a<,

pass. 1 aor. t!p,-fJOTJv and (more commonly) 2 aor. lOci.p,'Y}v, fut. perf. o<p,f}crop,a<. Poetic. 737. (IV.) ap8-ci.vw (oapO-, apB<-) sleep, usu. in comp., espec. w. Karci.: 2 aor. -8a.p9ov (Hom. l!pa8ov), perf. -Se!i.p&'I]Ka.. (IV.) aTO!J-aL (oaT- 1 OaT<-) dividC .' acr(cr)op,at, 6.v-e8a.O'.flo'I]V rare in prOSe (oacr(cr)fip,'Y}V Epie), ooacrp,a<, vci.-acrTOS. aTacrBaL in Hesiod should be oarcr8at. Cp. oalop,at divide. Mainly poetic and New Ion. Map,aL appear, only imperf. MaTO r 242. From a kindred root aor. oci.crcraTO N 458. 88ta., !i!iotKa., o<iw (703) fea1': see lit-. 8e8CTTotJoa. j1'ighten (rare in A tt. prose): 8e8t~.Jlo1JV rare. Poetic, mainly Epie, are <lilcrcrop,cu, oilcrKO!J-U<, ELlcrcrop,a<: fut. E<l~op,at, aor. i<<L~ci.p,'Y}Vo Derived from 88ta. (o<-). (III.) <lo.<Kro greeted I 224, xara< 'YJ 72 ( -aro ~ 4) are refened by sorne to the inid. of o<iKvip,<. Others read OTJK- from another root. Cp. E<Kavowvro welcomed 0 86. oELolcrK6p,a< greet, only pres. and imperf., to be read OTJOlcrKop,a< (445 D., 527 b). Epie. (V.) . !ieCK-V'iiJJo and 8ELK-vv-w (iJK-) show (418): SeC~w, Set~a., !iSHxa., S!iELyfloa.L, SeCx9'1Jv, Snx9i)<Tofloa.t, SetKTos. Hdt. has forms from o<K-: -O~w, -o<~a (-cl.p,TJv), -Oi!<-yp,a.<, -eMxBTJv. (IV.) Mp,w (o<p,-, op,TJ-) build: lfi!E<p,a., oi!p.TJp,a<. Poetic and Ion. 0/pKop,a.< ( o<pK-, oopK-, opa.K-) see : 2 aor. i!pa.Kov, perf. t!oopKa as pres., pass. 1 aor. pxBTJv (in tragedy) saw and 2 aor. t!pci.KTJV saw, p,ov6-<pKros. Poetic. Spw (o<p-, o<Lp-) flay: Sepw, 8npa., S!ia.pJJoa., 2 aor. pass. SO.p'IJv, pa.r6s Hom. Pres. o<lpw (o<p-;w) 1-Idt., Aristopb .. SxotJoa. receive, await: S~oJJoa., 8e!;.JL1JV, S!ieyJJoa., et<T-eSxe'IJv, 6.'!fo-8EKTos. hop.a< New Ion., Pindaric, and Aeolic. Fut. perf. as act. <fi;o~J-a.'- poetic. On Epie 0-yp,TJv, 0~""'' MxiJa<, o-yp,nos, Hom. Mxara.t (3 pL), see 634, 688. Sw bind (3\l7 a): S~<Tw, S'IJO"a., S!ieKa. (o'YJK<L doubtful), SSetJoa., 89'1Jv, fut. pass. 8e9fJO'Ofloa.L, fut. perf. 8e8i)<Tofloa.t, <Tvv-Seros, 6.v-v'!f6-8'1]TOS, <Tvv-SeTos Aristoph. Mid. in prose only in comp., as 'ITEpt8fJO"ofloa.. Sw (!Je fW ; <-, oe<-) neerl, lac le (807 a) : SefJ<Tw, S'l<Ta., 8e8'I]Ka., 8e8'I]Jloi1L, llef)61Jv. Epie aor. Oi}cr<v ~ 100, <odJ'Y}G'fl' ' 540. Mid. SotJoa. want, ask (Epie oevop,a.<): SefJO"op.a. (Epie ~uf}crop,a.<). Impers. Se~ it is necessary: 8et, !iei)<Tn, ~!i"lo-~ (397 a).

APPEN"DIX: LIST OF VERBS

693

o1Jpulw a11d OTJpiw contend: of}prnx Theocr. Mid. o1Jp<o~J.r'-' and o'r}piop.a< as act. : 'r}pirro~J.a< Theocr., o7Jpirri-LTJ" e 76, o'r}plve"'" II 756 contended (as if from 'r}plvw), <lf-L<fu-oftpros 'l'huc. Epie and Lyric. oftw shall find, Epie pres. w. fut. meaning. Cp. oa-. lit- (of'-, Of<-, ofO<-) jear (477 a): 8ncra., 8l8oLKa. as pres., 2 peri. SlSa. as pres. (rare in the sing.; inflection, 70:3). Epie fonns: oeiow (from o<ofo<a, 445 D.) as pres., oei<TOf-LO.L (806), ~OL<Ta (== E0fLrra), 15dotKa, oel{ha (703 D.). Hom. has imperf. lov jeared, jled from an assmned pres. Olw. 8<a..T6.w a1bitrate (from ola<ra, but augmented as if a comp. w. double augment in

perf., plnp., and in comps.; cp. 461): S<a.LT'Ijcrw, SvrlT'lJcra. (but .1T-Ef)<'!f-r'l)cra.), l>Sn-r1JKa. (plup. Ka.T-ES&n-rfJK'lJ), 8ESvrlTTHJ.a.< (plup. ~-S& 1 T'lJTo), Sn-rfJ&'lJv. Mid. pass one's lije: S<O.<Tf]crop.a., KO.T-ESLUT'lJcr6.p.'lv ejfected wbitmtion. StliKovw minister (from otdKOVOS) :. Stlii<OVOUV, StliKov'ljcrw, l>EOLliKV'l)KO., 8E8LliKOV'I)J.LO.L, 8tliKovfJ91Jv. Forms in oeo<'r)- are wrong, forms in o<'r}- are Ion. and late (uncertain in classical poetry). &t-86.-o-Kw (for toax<TKw, 97 a) teaeh, mid. cause to teach, leam: 8<86.fw, 8a.~a, SeSLSo.xa, s.Sa.yp.a., StSO.xe'lJv, s.sa.~op.aL (808), St8a.KTOS, --ras. Epie aor. lotorf,<TKTJ<Ta (o<oa<TKe-) 447 a. (V.) ol-o"'-f.L' (o7J-, oe-) bineZ, ])res. and imperf. Poetic for Sw. Xen. has o<Miirr<. -8-Spa-o-Kw (opii.-) run away, only in comp. w. 1rb, ~~: -Splio-op.a (SOG), 2 aor. -8pav ( -Spiil, -Spa.lT)v, -opii8t late, -Spava.L, -Spci.s, 68), -88pii.Ka. Hdt. has -odJpi)<TKw, -lipi)<Tofi-a<, -op1J (but -opiis ), -o.!p7JKa. (V.) St-Sw-p. ( ow-, oo-) give: see 416, 421. Fut. Sdicrw, 1 aor. Sw11a in s., 2 aor. 8oTov dual, 8oi'-EV pl. (756), SSwKo., SSop.a.L, lSoe.,v, So61]o-op.a, 8oTos, --r-os. See 747 ff. for pres. in Hom. and Hdt. Fut. o<owrrw Epie, 2 aor. itm-. ob<TKov (492 a). ol-)'1)1-'a< (from OL-OfTJ) seek (cp. I7Jrw) keeps TJ throughout in the pres. (imperf. o<liJ~J.7J"), t)i}<Tof-La<, lliL1Jrrf-LTJ" Poetic and Ion. 726 a, 741. ol1J-f.L' cause to flee, only in imperf. lv-ole<Tav set on 2: 584. Mid. ief-La<jlee, cause to flee, subj. olwf-La< (accent 424 c, N. 2), opt. owif-L1JV (accent 424 c, N. 2), inf. Ole~J8a< referred by some to the middle of olw. Epie. otK- only in 2 aor. ~li<Kov threw. In Pindar and the tragic poets. 8t.jt6.w (15tlf!a-, otlf!TJ-) thirst: pres. see 394, 641: St.jt'ljo-w, St.Jt'lcra. Olw : see <-. StdiKw pwsue: s,.:,~OflO.L (806) and (less weil supported) Stdi~w, !>(w~a, 8e8Cwxa, 86>xe1Jv, 8<wKTos. For otwKa!lov see 4DO D. SoKw (oaK-, ooKe-, 485) seem, think: So~w, 8o~a, SSoyp.a., KaT-E&ox e'l)v, .-SoKT]~ TOS. Poetic forms are OOK-f}rrw, lfo6K1Jffa, oeo6KT)f-LaL, oox1}87)V. In trimeter Aristoph. uses only the sho1ter forms. oou1rw ( ooU?r-, oou1re-) sound heavily : loo67r7f<Ta, 2 perf. ooov1ra fell. Epie aor. E-yoov'ff1J~Ya. Poetic. opri-r-rof-La< (opa:y-) seize: opa~&.fJ.TJV, opayfi-at. (III.) Sp6.w do: Spao-w, Spao-a, SSpliKa, 88p.p.a. (Ooparrf-Lat, 489 e, doubtfnl), 8pacr9T)v, Spi.crTos. 8p1rw pluck: SpE.jta, 2 aor. ~opa1rov Pinel., li-15perr-ros Aesch. Cp ..opbr-Tw poetic. Svvap.a< am able, can (augment nsually lovv-, but also ~iuv-, 430): Suv~o-op.a., 8eSVV1JflltL, 8uv1]e,v, SuvCITOS. Pres. 2 s. Svva.o-a.<, ilUVI(- poetic, ovwa Ion. (465 a, N. 2), imperf. ~Svv., (lovva<To late), aor. pass. louvaff!I1Jv Epie, New Ion., Pind. (48.9 g).

694

APPE~DIX:

LI1:>T OF YERES

S'w ente7, go down, sinlc, cause to ente7 (trans. generally in comp. w. &,,.6 or Kara (819): also -Yw (Ion., poetic, rare in X en.) ente7: -SUuw trans., -Sua trans., 2 aor. l!Sv intrans. (p. 140), S!iKa intrans., -S!iuKa trans., -SSvfloL, -e8v91Jv, -8u9i]<roJioaL Aristoph., -8vTos. Fut. mid. 8\SuoJioa, aor. mid. -e8<rcl.Jio1JV (Epie also Uirr6JJ.7JV, 542 D.). Hom. 2 aor. opt. 671 and KJJ. (758 D).
U<t>87J N 543, aor. pass., was hurled (?), possibly from fO.?T- (lci?Trw); sornetimes referred to l1.1rrw or to I!?ToJJ.a<. O.w permit, let alone: auw, e~iiua. (431), etiiKa (443), eCiiJioa., da91Jv, auoJ~oa. pass. (808), iiTos. Epie pres. also elaw, imperf. ge;, E 517, aor. ~a<ra; Hdt.

does not augment.

y-yut.w pledge: the forms in 1ry-yu- are better thau th ose in he-yu- or -y-ye-yu- ;

see 453 a.
-y<Cpw (-y<p-, -yop-, -yp-, 36) walce, l'OUSe: -yepw, Tj-y<tpa, 2 perf. e-ypi]yopo. 478, 705 am awalce (for "f-7J"fopa, but pis also redupl.), -yi]-ypfloO.L, ~yp91Jv, 2 aor. mid. T)yp6J1o1JV awolce, -yep-ros, i-yepr6> Aristotle. Hom. 2 perf. 3 pl. 'YP7J'Y6p8arr<, imper. -yprnop8e (for --yop<r8<), inf. i-ypf}-yop8a< or 'YP7J"f6p8at (for --yoprr8at). (III.) yKO!JioLnbOI j)7'aSe : yKO!JioLcl.<TOI and yKO!JioLcJ.<rOJioO.L (806), VEKO!JioLit<T0. 1 yKEKO!Jio(O.K<t 1 yKeKO!JioLO.<Tfloa., iv<KWJJ.<arre71 v Hdt.. 512. (III.) i!w eat : poetic for tr9Cw. ~tofloa.' ( 5- for rreo-, cp. seeo) sit, usu. Ka.O-toJ~oa. (which is less eommon than Ko.O-CtofloL) : Ka.9-t6fL'1V ( 450 ), Ka.9-e8oi!p.o.t ( 539 b), etuO.Jio'lV rare in prose, Ko.O-e<rTos. Fut. <t>-rrrroJJ.at trans. , 455, aor. irrrraJJ.7J" and errrraJJ.7J" Epie. Act. aor. Epie elrra (imper. l!rrrrov or efrrov, inf. l!rrrrat, part. i!rrii.s). See fjw. (III.) O~w (l8el\-, 8el\e-) and 8l\w wish: imperf. always Tj9el\ov in Att. ; 9el\i]<rw, or Oel\i]<rw (rare) ; T)OTJ<TO. (sn bj. Oe~<rw or Ol\i]<rw, opt. 9el\i]tro.tp.t or Oel\1]uatp.t), T)OTJKO.. The commoner Att. form is 9e'l\ro exeept in the iambic trill)eter of tragedy, and in formulas as ih 8es e'TJ. 9Ctw (for tJf<8-to~w, 123) accustom: 9tw (539 e), eCOtuo. (431), eC9tKo. (443), eC9t<TJ1oO.L (1946), et9Cu91Jv, 9ttrTos, -r6s Aristotle. 512. (III.) i!8w (for tJf<8w, 123) am acwstomed: pres. part. i!8wv being accus#t!me only in Hom., 2 perf. eCwaa. (44:>, 56:) a) am accustomed, 2 plup . tw91J (perf. ~wea, plup. UJ8ea Hdt.). See 9Ctw. etSov saw : see li5- and opcl.w. etKt.tw ( elKao-) liken, conjecture augments to VK- rather th an to elK- in A tt. prose (437): Ka.tov, dKt.uw, UKO.<ra., KO.<TJioO.L (dmrrJJ.a< ?), Kn<rOTJv, etKa.tr9i]trop.o.t, etKa.trTs, <i:rr-ELKO.<TTos. Fut. mid. -e.Kt.<rop.a. sometimes as act. eCKw yiel: d~w, et~a., -rr-ELKTos. On efKa8ov see 490. dKw (elK-, olK-, lK-; for ftK-, etc.) resemble, appear (no pres. in use): eC~w rare, 2 perf. oKa. as pres. 443, 502 a (impers. otKE it seems): o(Kw, o(Kotp.t, oLKva.t (poet. eldvat), otKws, neut. etKos fitting ( <iKws chiefiy poetic ; also Platonic); 2 plup. <tlKTJ and UKTJ. eiKe seemed lilcely (l: 520) may be imperf.; sorne regard it as perf. or plup. For i!otKa, iolKw, o<KWs Hdt. has oKa, o(Kw, olKws. Forms of the JJ.<-conjugation are iiKrov, tKT7JV Hom., ~o<"fJJ.v Att. poets, er;a.rr, mainly in Att. poets (704 d.). Cp. trrKw. eiew or e1Xw roll up, pack close, mostly Epie. ell\oJJ.a< Hdt., rruv-ftXoJJ.a< X en.: a.,.-e[7JJJ.O.< Hdt., cl.v-ELTJO'lv Thuc.

~YX"']

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

69

dOl roll pres. act. and pass. in Att. (rare). Cp. rnw. l'Mw (Fotu- for 11-pu-) roll, cover, gather up: <lMIJ'w, <(.f.<a<.

Cp. uw. Poetic and lon. <tw ( - for f<-, cp. vol vere) roll ~tp, d1ive together: no pres. act. (etoi<a.< Hom.), ~IJ'a. and ~eIJ'a., ~i<a.<, 2 aor. pass. a.7Jv and i7)v (3 pl. tfJ>.ev, inf. .i)vat, .fJ!'eva.<, part. eis). Homeric. tJ.LprL it is jated: see ,.etpo!'a.<. lp.C am: fut. ~O'OJ.L (806). See p. 211. ELfLL go : see p. 212. El'll'ov ( ,;.,._ for f71'-,) said, 2 aor. ( et'll'.,, ehrop., el'II', el'll'etv, et'!l'~v), Epie lfmrov and t7rEIJ'Kov. J!'irst aor. El'll' rare in Att. (et'II'CLLfLL, imper. et'll'ov, inf. e1rat Hdt., pa tt. e(.,.ii.s Hdt. and late A tt.), 1[...,.a poetic ; 1 am. mid. .7!'-<7rcti'7J" New Ion. Other tenses are supplied from dpw. 528. (VI.) etpyw shut in or out, also e'lpyviip. and (rarely) etpyvvw (with e<- from -, cp. Hom. l(f)p'Yw): E~p~w, etp~, <Lpyp., etpx6TJv, etpKr6s, -Tos. Fut. mid. e~peoJ.La. is pass. or reflex. (808). The distinction that the fonns with the smooth breathing mean shut out, those with the rongh breathing mean shut in, is late and not always observed in classical Att. Hom. has Unw (in pres.) and 1fp'Yw shut in or out: lfp~a., 2 aor. lfna.eov and Up'Ya8ov, lfnp.a< and (p'Yi<a.< (3 pl. ~px ara.<, 439 D., plup. 1[pxa.ro, Upxaro ), 1[px87Jv. Hom. bas Unvv K 238. Hdt. usu. has 1fp'Yw (in comp.), with some forms from -p'YVVI'' and lnvuw: Old A tt. forms in P'Y-, <n- are doubtful : Soph. has -p~w, ~p~era.< ; Plato -lp~.s. etpoi<a.<_(elp-, Elpe-) ask: elpf}IJ'op.a.< Hom. and New Ion. Hom. has also (rarely) p(F)w, subj. pelo~< (= pdJoi'ev) A 62; and p(F)oi<a<, imper.lfpew or pew A 611 (650). Att. fut. pf)O'op.a. and 2 aor. T)p6p.1)v presuppose a pres. lfpop.a.<, wbich is snpplied by pwrO..,. Etpw (lp- for IJ'ep-, cp. Lat. sera) join: rare except in comp. w. .1r6, otcl, IJ'uv, etc.: aor. -epa. (Ion. -epiJ'a.), perf. -epKa, perf. mid. (epi<a< Epie. etpw Hom. say (ip-, p7J- for fp-, FP7J-, cp. Lat. veriJUm), for which pres. Att. uses "[w, <I>TJfLC and (esp. in comp.) .yopev"': fut. pw, aor. suwlied by el'll'ov, perf. e~plJKa. ( = F-FP7J-Ka.), perf. pass. etplJp.a., aor. pass. pp~9lJv, fut. pass. pTJ9iJO'oJ.La., fut. perf. etpT)O'o!Joa., v. a. plJr6s, -T~os. Ion. are plw fut., elpl81)v (but p7J8fjva<) aor. pass. iliJ'a. seated: see ttw. tiJ'KW ( = f<-f<K-IJ'Kw, from redupl. f<K-) liken (also (IJ'Kw): imperf. Hom. -ljiJ'Kov and n(]'KOV; perf. mid. 7rpOCJ'f}~aL art like Eur., plup. Hom. -lji'KrO and nKrO have been referred by sorne to etKw. Poetic, chiefly Epie. (V.) e~wea.: see ~Ow. K,KTJO'Lntw call an assernbly: augments ~-eKlJO'Ca.tov or TJK-KTJO'Lo.tov, etc. (4fi3 a). a.vv"' (from .a-vu-w, 523 e) drive, mar ch: w (53() b), ~o.O"a., -E~a.Ka. (w. .7r6, <o, iJa.p.a.L, T)0.6Tjv, a.ros, ~-i}a.TOS Hom., ea.T6s Aristotle. Aor. mid. ~a.O"cl.fLTJV rare. Fut. aMw 'f 427, lMwiJ'< Hom. (ti45), MIJ'w rarely in MSS. of Xen., perf. .f}M!'a< Ion. finn late, plup. ?j7J.cli'7J" (Hom. 3 pl. 7JMoaro or 7J.aro or 7Joaro), i}Mcr07Jv Hdt., Aristotle (489 g). .clw is rare and poetic. (lV.) 'YX"' examine, conji<te y~w, 1\ey~a., ~ewa. (407), T)Myx.61Jv, eyx6~0'o
p.a., E"{KTOS.

696
XeXltw eltw

APPE:\DIX: LIST OF VERBS

raise the war-c1y, shout: ?jXX<~a Xen. 512. (III.) whirl, turn i'ound: <~a, eXlx01Jv. Poetic. 512. (III.) XlTTw (X<K- for [<<K-) Toll (rare! y dLTTco) ; sornetimes written -: (j;co, e~~a. (431), yfla. (443), et).!x&'lv, ~-<X<xOfwoJLa< Aristotle, etLKT6s. Epie aor. mid. <~aJLrJv. Epie <Kro, <lX01JtJ"av should be <-. <llrrrrw is the usual form in Hdt. (III.) ~Kw draw (K- for rr<K-; most tenses from Kv-; iXKilw late), often w. va, ~, Kara, tr<!v : -~w, KU<TO. ( 431), Ka.9-ELKUKa. ( 443), -ELKU<Tfla.L ( 489 C), -ELKu<r91Jv, -eKu<r9i]<rofla., KTos, <ruv-eKu<rTos. Fut. iXd,tJ"w Ion. and late. By-form iXKt!w Epie. I!X1rw (f7r-) cause to hope, mid. ( also UX7roJLa<) ho1Je like 1r!tw : 2 perf. as pres. o1ra. (= f<fO7ra.), 2 plup. w7r<a, v. a. i1-<7rros. Mainly Epie. w roll: MrrOrJ Hom. ( = -[V-IT01Jv), 489 e. Cp. dMw. fl"' vomit : flOJ:LO.. (806), ~J:LE<ra.. balpw (vap-) kill: 2 aor. #vapov. 1 aor. mid. v1JpaJL1JV as act. Poetic. (III.) vapljw slay, spoil: vapl~w, vap<~a, Kar-'Y)vap<ITJLa<, Kar-'Y)vaplrr01Jv. Poetic. 512. (III.) v-e5peuco waylay, lie in ambush regular: fut. mid. as pass. (808). v-r!1rw and vv7rw ( v + rrm-, IT7r-, IT7r<-) say, tell: v<-IT7r?rrw and vl1f;w ( vl-IT11'W ?) , 2 aor. liv<-tJ"7rov (fvl-IT7rw, vl-IT7rO<J1.<, imper. vl-tJ"7r<S or lfvt-IT7r<, 2 pl. IT7r<T for V-tJ"7reu, inf. v<-tJ"7rfiv and v<-tJ"7rJL<V). Poetic. v?voOe defect., w. pres. and imperf. meaning: sit on, be on, grow on, lie on. In comp. w. hl in Hom. Epie. Connected by sorne w. v?voOe. vl1r-rw (fv-<11') chide: 2 aor. vv1rov and 1,v-t7r-a7rov (448 D.). Epie also vltJ"tJ"W. Poetie, chiefly Epie. (II.) lv-v1u (- for [<IT-, cp. ves-tio) clothe, pres. act. only in comp., in prose .J:LcfnvvliJ:LL: 6.11-cf>-<il (539 e), iJJ:Lcf>!-e<ra. (450), iJflcf>L-E<rJ:La. (489 d). Epie forms: imperf. Kara-tlvvov, fut. ~CJITW and -tJ"w, aor. #tJ"CJa and -<~Ta., mid. pres. inf. 7r-<ivvrr0a< Hdt., fut. -ITITOJl.a<, aor. IT(IT)aJL'YJV and <ITITaJL'YJV for -f<ITITaJl.'Y)v, perf. giTJl.a< and <[JLa< (part. dJ1.Pos in tragedy). Cp. 439 D. The simple verb is poetic, mainly Epie. (IV.) v-ox<il hamss bas double augment (451) : i]v-wxouv (v-wxXovv Aristotle),
v-oxiJ<r"', i]v-wx1J<ra., i]v-wx'lJ:La.. teT.t"' investigate: ~eT.<rw (rarely teTOi, 539 d), tfJTO.<ra., EtiJTa.Ka., Et..JTa.<rp.a., t'JT.<T91]V, tETa.<T9fJ<TOJ:La.L, EtETO.<TTOS. 512. (III.) oLKa. seem, resemble : see <tKw. opT.tCil keep festival: wprMa (for -f,op-, 34). Ion. oprcijw.
1r-avpw

and 7r-avpliTKW ( ap-, ap<-) enjoy (Epie and Lyric) are both rare : 2 aor. 1ravpov. Mid. 7ravpliTKOJ1.a< lon., poetie, rare in A tt. prose : 7ravp?ITOJ1.a<, 11'1JVpaJ1.1JV rare, 2 aor. 11'1JVp6vqv. (V.) iTrevf}voOe: see vf,vo8e. 11'Lf3ouEv<il plot against: regular, but fut. mid. as pass. ( 808). 1rC<rTa.J:La. unde1stand (725): 2 s. 11'L<TTa.<ra.t, 7ri1Tr" and 7rliTrYI poetie (465 a, N. 2), -<7rlCJua< Hdt. ; subj. 11'L<TTWJ:La.' (accent, 424 e, N. 2), opt. 11'L<rTa.CJ:L'lv, 1rC<rTa.Lo (accent, 424 e, N. 2), imper. 1rCrrTw U1rl1Trarro poetie and New Ion.), irnperf. oq11'L<TTnfl1]V, ~11'L<TTa.<TO and oq11'L<TTW (450, 465 b, N. 1), fut. 11'L<TTfJ<TO):LQ.L1 aor . .q.,.,<TTTJe'lv, v. a. 11'L<TT1JTs. Distiuguish </J-liTraJLa< from <jJ-iiTr'YJJL' l1rw (IT<7r-, rr7r-) am b1My about, usn. w. rlJ1.</Ji, il<ci, 7rl, Jl.<rci, 7r<pl (simple only in

lpvw]

APl'ENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

6\J7

part.): imperf. -1rov (Epie also -e1rov w. no augm.), fut. -l,Pw, 2 aor. -lu1rov for l-u(e)1rov (-u1rw, -IJ'If'D!<t, -u1rwv, -u1rv), aor. pass. 7rept-ltj>8'Yfv Hdt. The act. forms are poetic, Ion. (imperf. and fut. also Xenophontic). Mid. i1rop.a. follow : EL1T<lp.1Jv ( 481), ljiop.a.L, 2 aor. cnr6Jl'lv ( <r'll'wp.a., <r'II'OLfJ.1]V, <r'll'oii, <r'II'u9a.L, <r'TI'OJlevos). Hom. has IJ7r<o for <J7ro. :For lu'lf'w!"at, u1roli<'Yf"' u7rlu1Jw, etc., following an elided vowel in the uss. of Hom. we probably have, not a redu pl. aor. without augment ( 1J1r- for u<-IJ7r-), but wrong readings for IJ'If'wp.at etc. with the vowel of the preceding word unelided. 'll'pu1p.1]v bottght: see 1rpw.- (416). ~pa/<at (poetic) deponent pass., pres. in prose supplied by p6.w (<pa- for ipa<J-): imperf. i\pwv (i]pd.i<'Yf" poetic); aor. ..jp6.u9rrv fell in love, 480 e (1}pa17(u)awJv poe tic), fut. pa<J8-/juof1.at poetic, pll0"'1'6s, ipa-rbs poe tic. py<itop.a (ep-y-) work, augments to 1}- and fl- (431, 432), redupl. to el- (443): ..jpya.t6p.1]v, pyO.a-op.a.L, ...jpya.u6.p.1]v, etp-ya.up.a.L, ..jp-y6.a-9']v, p-ya.o-9ija-op.a.L, p-ya.fT'I'os. In Hdt. without augment and reduplication. 512. (III.) ~P'YW : see etp-yw. ~pow (from ep'w = f<P'Y-~w, 511) work, do (also i!pow): ~p~w, ~p~a, 2 perf. ~ona eop'Ya.), 2 plup. l<f!p'Yea. ( <eop'fea.) Epie, <6nea. Hdt. Ion. and poetic ; cp. pi'w. (III.) pew p1'op: iJpna-a., p-/jpe<11f1.at Hdt. (for Hom. ip'Yfpoarat, -a.ro some read p'Yfploara.t, -aro)' plup . i]p{jpe<IJro, 1}pelu8'Yfv, pE[IJOf.'O.L Aristotle, pwFd.f1.'YfV Hom. Hippocr. has -7]pe<Ka, -{jpnup.a<, ip'Yfpduera<. Mainly poetic. ipelKw ( ipnK-, iptK-) tea1, bu1'st : 1}pet~a, 2 aor. 1}ptKov trans. and intrans., ip{jpt'Y!"at, Poetic and New Ion. pel1rw ( ifpwr-, pt7r-) th1'0W down: pel'{lw, -ljpet,Pa, 2 aor. 1}pt7rov, 2 perf. -ep1]pt7ra. have fallen Epie (plup. ippt11'ro :;;; 15), 'fJpeltpiJnv, 2 aor. pass. lpl11'7JV. Ion. and poetic. ipuuw (lper-) row: ot-fJpeu(u)o. Hom. Late prose has ipluuw and prrw. (III.) ipw ask Epie : see etpo/<"-' iptlialvw (p<oav-) contend Epie (III. IV.). lp/5-/juarrfJat ir 792 (v. 1. ipt'-/jiJauiJat) as if from pi5fop.at. By-form pti<a.lvw Epie. ipl'w (fpto-) contend: 1}pt11(u)a, ip{jptup.at, pturo~. Poetic. (III.) ~pop.a< ask : see dpo!"at. ~p1rw (uep1r-) and p7r6{w creep augment to ei- (431): Etp'!l'ov, <J>-pljiw, etp'll'v<ra., p1rerov a beast. ~ppw (pp-, pp<-) go away, go (to dest1uction), perish: ppija-, TJPP'IJ<ra., elcrijpp'I]Ka.. pvy-y-<i.vw cast forth, e1'Uct: pres. A tt., poetic, New Ion., 2 aor. ~pv-yov. Cp. lpev'Yoll-a' Epi'C, New Ion.: ifpev~ol"a' Hippocr. (806). (IV.) p6Kw hold back : ifpv~w, -ljpv~a ( also X en.), 2 aor. -ljpVKaKov ( 448 D.). Epie, poetic, New Ion. Hom. has also pKavw, ipKavcf.w. ~P!<at (for epi<a<) and etpvf1.a.< (for ipp.aL) p1'otect Epie: pres. 3 pl. elpvarat and elpVa.raL (for etpvvra<), inf. e(Y)pvuOat; imperf. e(t)pro, elpvaro (for dpvvro) ; fut. e(l)pu( 11)of1.o.t; aor. e( l)pvu(u)d.I-''Yf" perf. ~piJro Hesiod. The pres. and imperf. are often taken as l"t-forms of pvof.'a.t. By-form pfJo-

(=

1-'at, q. v. lpuw (epv-, fp-) draw: aup;ments to el- ( 431 D): fut. ipvw Hom. ; aor. e(r)pvu(u)a Hom. Mid. t!pvof1.a.< d1aw to one's self: t!puufJ'o/1-at, e(l)pvu(u)d.f.''Yfv,

698

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

etpp.a.< and dpvq-p.a.< 489 d (3 pl. Elpva.ra< and p6ara<), plup. flpDp.tfP (3 pl. lp6a.ro), e(l)pv<r8rtv Hippoqr., lpv<rr6s Soph. Epie and Ion. flpuw is poetic (esp. Epie) and New Ion. Late fut. ipv<r(<r)w. l!pxop.a. (fpx-, lM-, eve-, lXvO-) go, come: lXev<rop.a., 2 aor. ~>..9ov, 2 perf. O.T]>..,ea.. In Att. ~pxop.a.t is common only in indic.; subj. Epie and Ion.;

opt. (in comp.) Xen.; imper. Epie; inf. Epie, Tragic, Ion., in eomp. in Att. prose rare! y ; part. poetie, in eomp. in A tt. prose. Imperf. i}px61-'rt" uncomp. is rare. For the above tenses A tt. prose uses tw, OLJLL, ta., tva.L, t.t>v, ua. simple and in eomp. (but not inn~va.< for inrpxOe<rOa.t flatter). Fut.: Att. prose uses etp. (774), a..pcgop.a.L or -i)gw for iXd1<rop.a.t (which is Epie, Ion., Tragic); 2 aor. -ljXuOo poetic; 2 perf. lXf,XovOa. or 1Xf,Xou8a. Epie, nf,Xvp.e>, -uT in Comie and Tragic fragments; 2 plup. <XrtMOEL Epie. (VI.) o--9(w (for lo-8<-w) eat: imperf. iJo-9Lov, fut. Sofloa. (541, 806), 2 aor. l!cl>a.-yov, perf. l&T]SoKa., Ka.T-eST]&o-p.a., lSeo-,-6s, -Tos. Epie are Uip.e>a.< pres., lortows 2 perf. part., lof,oop.a.< (?) perf. pass.; i}o<r8rt Comic, Hippoer., Aristotle. (VI.) l!<rOw Epie and poetic, l!ow Epie, poetic, and Ion. o-TL6.w entertain augments and reduplicates to d- (431, 443). evow sleep, rare in prose, which usually has Ka.9-e.JSw: imperf. K6.9-E,Sov and Ka.9-TJiiSov (450), fut. Ka.9-roST]o-w, Y. a. Ka.9-e"STJTos. ev/Jw is chie:fly poetic and Ion. (imperf. d;aov and 7Juoov). e{>ep-yeTw do good. The augmented form <rJp- is to be rejected (452). Wp-(o-KW (<p-, <p<-) jind: eiJpT]o-w, 2 aor. TJ.Jpov Or e.Jpov (imper. eiJp, 424 b), TJilpTJKO. or eilpTJKa., eilpTJ)J-O.<, eilp9TJv, eilpe9T]o-op.a., eilpeTos, -Tos ; epa!-'7JP Hesiod. The augment is rJV- or <- (43). (V.) e{>c!>pa.(v., ( di<f>pa.>-) chee1: e{><J>pa.vw, TJ<J>pava.. Mid. 1e_ioice : e{>c!>pa.voii)J-a.L and e{><J>pa.v9T]o-ofJoa.L, TJ{,<J>p6.v9tJv. The augment is also <- ( 437). (III.) exo)-La. pray, boast: ellgop.a., TJ{,EO.fl-TJV, TJ{i-yp.a., e{>K,-6s, -ras Hippocr., ?r-<ux<ros Aesch. The augment is also <v- (437). <xOa.lpw-(<xOa.p-) hate: <xOa.pw, <xOapoO,.,.a.t (808), ilxOrtpa., lxiJa.prlos. Epie and poetie. (III.) l!xew hate, l!x8op.a. : on!y pres. and imperf. Poetic for 0..,--ex 96.vo)J-a.L. l!xw (<x-, for q-ex-, and <rx-, "X-) have, hold: imperf. etxov (431), ~Ew or o-xT]o-w (1911), 2 aor. l!o-xov for l-<r( )x-o (o-xw, o-xoLTJv or -o-xo'fl-' o-xs, axetv, o-x.t>v ), o-XTJKCL, 1ra.p--O""XTJfl-O.L, KTos, O.va.-o-xeT6s, -Tos. Mid. XOfl-O.L hold by, am near: go,.a. (sometimes pass., 808), and o-xT]o-o,_a.. (often in comp.), 2 aor. o-x6fl-TJV usu. in comp. (o-xwfl-a.L, o-xoLp.fJv, o-xoii, o-xo-6a.L, o-xop.EVos), used as pass. for l<rxfertv (late). Epie fon11s are perf. <rv>-6xwKa. (for -oK-ox-a) B 218, plup. pass. l,--wxa.ro 'Were shut M 340. Poetic is 2 aor. l!<rx<Oov (490 D.). See a..,..,.)(w, vxw, .,-o-xvop.a.L. By-form to-xw for (jt-<r(e)x-w. >jsw (ft!;-, bf;-) cook, boil: >jsT]o-ofl-a.' (bf;f,uw Comic), 1\lftTJo-a., <J>96s (for bf;Oos), o/TJT6s, 1/>frJp.a.< Hippocr., irj;-IJOTJ Hdt. The pres. >f;lw is not Att;

*N.w (tw) live (ta-, t7J-, 395): (t'fis, til): imperf. <twv, fut. tT]o-w and tT]o-ofJoa.L.
For late ~trJ<ra, l!!;rtKa. Att. has ~(wv, j3ej3Cw1<a.. j3Cwo-ofl-a.' is commoner than t-.Jo-o)J-O.L. !;ww Epie, New Ion., dramatic. See 522 b, 641 and :b. tv-y-v'iifl-L (!;EU')'-, !;u-y-, cp. Lat. j1tgum) yoke : tevgw, te,ga., l!tEVVfl-O.L, tevx a, v rare, 2 aor. pass. ltv-yTJv. (IV.) tw (!:- for !;e<r-) boil (intrans. in prose): ~a.va.-to-w, l!teo-a., a?r-!;<<rl-'a.' Hippocr.

9pv1TTW]

APPE:'\fDIX: LIST OF VERBS

~twcra., ~twJLa.

699
~tw<rJLO.<

t.Sv-vJL (!w-, 731) giril: MSS.). (lV.)

(Att. inscr.) and

(preferred in

~pii-crKw come to rnanhood, ~po.., arn at rnanhoocl: cj>-1JPfJcrw, iP'la-a., 1ra.p-f]P1JKO..

Epie 1}(3wovra, etc. (643). (V.) 1ry<pl8op.at arn collecteil : see :ydpw.
1j8oJLO.L am pleased: ~cr9f]croJLa.L (812), 1jcr91Jv, aor. mid. T]a-0-p.-qv ' 353. ~w (~a-a) is very rare. ~8\lvw ( T]uv-) sweeten : 1j8va., 1j8vcrJLa., ~8vv91Jv, )8vv.-os. (III.) -IJ<pl8op.at arn raised : see oXpw. ~p.at sit : see 789. -JJLL say : see 792. iJp.uw sink, bow : -ljp.fi<ra, 11'-ep.v-1}p.K< X 491 from lp.-TJJJ.VK< with v inserted. Poetic, mostly Epie. )rrwJLO.L from i}rniop.at (Ion. <r<rop.at from i<r<roop.at) arn vanquishecl: regular, but fut. )rrfJ<roJLa.L and )TT1J9fJcroJLo. (812). eD.w (fJa.-) bloom, rare in prose: gea..< made grow Pind., 2 perf. r87J.a (as pres.) is poetic. By-form 8a.l8w ( 490). (III.) 90.11'-Tw (fJa<{J-, 125 g) bury: 90..Jtw, ~9a..Jta., .-90.JLJLa.L, 2 aor. pass. .-O.of>1Jv, 2 fut. pass. .-a.cj>f)croJLo., fut. perf. n90..J!oJLo., 9a.'li'Tos ; 1 aor. pass. l8&-<f>87Jv Ion. (rare). (II.) 9a.vJLO.tw ( 8aup.-ao-) wonder, admire : fut. 9a.vJLO.<roJLa. ( 806), otherwise regular. 512. (III.) fJdvw (8<v-) srnite: 8Hw, geELva Epie, 2 aor. l8<vov. Poetic (and in Att. comedy). (III.) 9w wish : see Ow. 8epo.1revw se1ve, heal : regnlar, but fut. mid. 9epa.1TEV<rOJLO.L is usu. pass. (808). 9poJLO.L warm rnyself (in prose only pres. and imprf. ), fut. 8/p<rop.at r 23 (536), 2 aor. pass. as intrans. i8lp7Jv (only in the subj. 8<plw p 23). 9w (fJ<u-, 8<[-, Ou-, 508) run: 9evcroJLo. (806). Other forms supplied by other verbs ( see .-px.w). 871- in 8firr8at rnilk, l/J7J<rap.7Jv sttcked. Epie. 87111'- : see ra</J-. Oey-"(-avw (8t"f-) touch: 8l~op.at (806), 2 aor. gfJ,"(ov, 11-0tKros. Poetic, rare in prose(Xen.). (IV.) 8Mw bruise, break: OMrrw, ge.arra, rlOJ\a<rp.at (489 c) Theocr., l8Mrr87Jv Hippocr., 8.a<rr6s. Ion. and poetic. See <f>.aw. 9tpw ( Ol\{3-, 0X(3-, 501) press : ~9i:.Jta., .-9'i:cj>a., 9Mcj>91Jv, Tl8.tp.p.at and t8.t{37Jv Aristotle. Fut. mid. 0.it{lop.at Hom. ilvrf-crKw, older 9vf)-crKw (8av-, OvTJ-, 492, 526 b) die: ci.1To-9a.voilp.<i.L (806), 2 aor. ci.1r-Oa.vov, .-9v1)Ka. am dead, 2 perf. -r9va.-rov (704 c), fut. perl. -re9vf)~w (659 a, 1958), 9v1J-r6s. In prose regnlarly ci.1To-9vtfcrKw in fut. and 2 aor., but always .-9v1)Ka.. (V.) 9pii-r-rw ( Opiix-, Tpiix-) disttwb: 9pa~a., l0pilx07Jv Soph. See -ra.pO.nw. Mostly poetic. (III.) 9pa.vw break, bru ise: 9pa.vcrw, ~9pa.vcra., .-9pa.vJLa. and .-l9pa.vcrp.a. ( 489 c), 9pa.vcr91Jv. 8pv1r-Tw ( 8pu<{J-, 125 gand N.) crush, weaken : -r9p"JLJLa., l8pv<{J07Jv Aristotle, 2 aor. pass. iTpv<{J7Jv Hom., ~v-Opv1r-ros. 6pv1r-roJLa. p~lt on airs. (II.)

700

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

e;i., evw and evvw

Op<P-o-Kw and Opw-IYKW, ( Opw-, Oop-, 492) leap: -OopofLCJ.L (80G; W. inrlp) poetic, 2 aor. ~Oopov. Mainly poetic. By-form Oopvuop,at Hdt. (V.) (Ou-, O-, 500. 1 a) sacrifice : e.io-w, 9o-a., T9tJKa., T9t!fLO.L, hu61]v, 9uTos.

1ush poetie : in the classieal language only pres. and imperf.

Ovlw Hesiod. lalvw (lav-) warm: f71va, l&.v871v without augm. Epie and Lyric. (III.) iaw (ia-) and law send: -taw, f71a.without augm. Epie. Poetic (comp. with brl in Aristoph. ). (III.) la x lw and lcixw (for f'Faxw) sound, shout: laxf,o-w, ictx>Jo-a, 2 perf. part. p,<f!taxua. Hom. has both faxov and 'axov. For iii.x- in tragedy iaKx- is eom-

monly written.

Poetie, mainly Epie.

485 d.

lo-, <li5-, olo- (for fL-, etc.) in .t8ov saw from l-t15ov 431 (tSw, tSoLfLL, tS, tS.tv, tS~v), fut. Eto-olla. shall know (Epie df,o-w), plup. 1'{81] or 'llv knew (794 ff.), to-Tos. Mid. dop,at seem, resemble Epie, poetic, New Ion. : do-d.p,71 v and ' to-d.p,7)v, 2 aor. <l6p,71v saw Epie, poetic, Hdt., 1rpo-LSo-6a.L Thuc. ol- in otSa., 794 ff. !op6w sweat: !opwo-w, opwo-a. For the contraction to w instead of ou (iopwo-t, etc.) see 398. Epie !opww, !opwovo-a, etc. i.Sp'w place (Epie !op"w): oft.en comp. w. Kard.: -L!lp'o-w, -tSpo-a., -tSpKa., tSpfLO.L, t8pU91Jv (iopuv071v Epie), i.SpTos. 't<-p,at (<-, cp. Lat. in-vi-tus) st?ive: usu. in comp., as 1rap-iep,at beg. The forms are like those from the mid. of 'i71P-' send (cp. 778). Epie aor. l<to-d.p,71 v and
elu&.J.LTJP.

Ztw (for o-<-<r(e)-w, cp. sedeo) seat, usu. sit, mid. ttop,at sit, classic only in pres. and imperf. Mainly Ionie and poetie. See Ka.9(tw, Ka.9(to!La.L, the usual forms in prose. See also tofLa.L, Koi91JfLO.L sit. By-form itd.vw seat, place. (III.) t1]jLL (o-t-o-7)-p,t) seneZ: ~o-w, ti~<a., 2 aor. ELTov, etc., ELKo., ELfLO.L, E91Jv, 91]o-of1o.L, Tos, ~os (except pres. ail forms in comp. in prose). For inflection and syn-

opsis, see 777 ff.

lKvlop,at (iK-) come, in prose usu. .c!>-LKvojla.L: ..p..(~ollo.L, 2 aor. ..p-;;K6jl1JV, ..p-tyfLcu. Uncomp. .KvO'jLEvos suitable (rare). The simple forms lKvlop,a<, Z~op,at, iK6p.71v are poetic. Connected forms are poetie 'iKw (imperf. TKov, aor. U;ov) and IKivw, only pres. and imperf. (Epie and Tragic). (IV.) t;...O.-o-Ko-1'-o.' (ia-) p1opitiate : ~O.o-ofLO.L, to.o-O.fL'JV, tM.o-e'lv ( 489 e). Epie aor. iao-o-d.p,rJv, Epie pres. also !Mop,at. (V.) f71J.I.' (i7)-, la- for o-t-o-7)-, o-<-o-a-) arn p1opitious: pres. imper. f718< or laOt, perf. f7)Ka. Mid. tap,at p1opitiate. Epie. fw (fop.a<) Toll: a. See Elew and dw. (III or IV.) !p,cio-o-w (ip,avr-) lash: lp,ao-( o- )a Epie. (III.) ip,elpw (tp,ep-) and lp.elpop,at clesire: ip,<tpd.p,7)v Epie, lp.lpOrJv Hdt., lp,epTk Poetie

and Ion.

(III.)

l7rTap,at fly: (725, 726 a): see 'ITTOfLO.L. to-ii.p,t: Dorie for oiSo. know: tffq.s (or to-ats), fo-iin, to-ap,<v, to-are, fo-avn, part. fo-iis. to-Kw liken (= f<K-o-Kw): see Uo-Kw. ~ITT1Jf1L ( o-rT}-, o-ra-) set, place : o-Tf]o-., shall set, crT1]o-o. set, causecl to stand, 2 aor. o-T1JV stoorl, 1 perf. ~CTT1JKa. stand ( = <re-o-rrJKa), pl np. elo-T1]1<1] stood (Eo-T1]K1], rare, 444 b), 2 perf. crTo.Tov stand (417), perf. mid. o-Ta.fLO.L rare,

I<<alltw]

Al'I'E::\DIX: LIST OF YERES

701

fut. perf. o-T~~"' shall stand (754 a, 1058), aor. pass. o-T6.91Jv was set, v. a. o-Ta.Ts, -Tos. For the infiection see 410, for dialectal forms of present see 747 D. ff. Epie 1 aor. 3 pl. if<Traa-av and i!<TT7J<Tav, 2 aor. 3 pl. if<Trav (inf. <Tr-f7p,evcu), 2 perf. inf. <Tr&,p,ev and <Trcip,evat, part. <Traw~ and t<Trew~. Iterat. imperl. 'i<TT<TKe, 2 aor. crrci<TI<e (41Jii a). 819. to-xva.(vw (i<Txvav-) make dry or lean: -L<Txvavw (-op,<u), f<Txvi.va..Aesch. (544 a, crxv7Jva Ion., also .Att. ?), f<Txvci.v87Jv Hippocr., -t<Txa.vro~ .Aristotle. (III.) t<Txw (for crt-cr(e)x-w), have, hold: see xw. 1<a.il- (~<a.ile-) in Hom. KeKaowv dep1iving, KeKa.orww shall dep1"ive. Not the same aS Ka-(K>)iiw). KKUOOP,7JP WitJulrew may be from xafw. Ka.9a.(pw (Ka8ap-) purijy: Ka.6a.p61, Kcl91]pa. (and fK&,8i.pa ?), I<EKcl9a.pJ:1-0.I 1 Ko.96.p91]V 1 Ka8apdos Hippocr. (III.) Ka.9top.a. : see ~top.a.. Ka.9ev!>w sleep : see eow. K6.91Jp.a.: see 790. Ko.9!tw set, sit : imperf. K6.9tov ( 450), fut. Ka.961 ( 539), aor. K6.9o-a. orKa.9to-o.. Mid. Ka.9!top.a. sit: Ko.9top.tjv, Ka.9t1Jo-op.a. (ii21 ), Ka.6~r6.p.1Jv. Hom. has imperf. Ka8tfov or Ka8lov, aor. Ka8ecra. and Kci8tcra, Hdt. Karecra.. See tlw, ~top.a.L. (IV.) Kal-vvp,at excel: perf. Kha.crp,a.t (KeKa.op,vo~ Pind.) .. Poetic. (IV.) Ka.lvw (Ka. v-, Kov-) kill: Ka.vw, 2 aor. i!Ka.vov, 2 perf. KKova. (Ka.ra.-KeKovbre~ Xen.). Poetic. (III.) . Ka.(w (for KO.tfW from Ka.:-~w ; Ka.v-.~ Ka.f-, Ka.~-) and ~a., (unc?nt~acted, 39~) burn, 0fte11 W. fV 1 KO.TO. : KD.U<r(O), EKa.uo-a., -KEKQ.UKO., KEKO.UfL<lL, EKO.V9tjv, -Ka.U97JCTOp.a.L, -KauTos. 2 aor. i!KTJa. Epie, poetic (part. K-f7is I~pic, Kiis A tt.), 2 aor. pass. "l7Jv burned (in trans.) Epie and Ioll. The ~rss. show Kalw in tragedy, Thuc., and in X en. usu., Kclw in Aristoph., Iso cr., Plato. 520. (III.) Ka.w ( Kae-, KTJ-) call: Ka.<II ( 539 a.), K6.eo-a., KK1JKa., KK')p.a. am called (opt. 711 c), K1J61Jv, fut. pass. K1]9f]o-op.a. (Kaop.a. S. El. 971), fut. perf. KEK~crop.a.. shall bem the name, K1JTos, -Tos. Aeolic pres. Ka7Ji-<'' Epie inf. Ka.-f7p,eva.t; fut. Kalw Hom., Ka.!crw Aristotle, aor. iKci)l.ecr<Ta Hom. Iterative Ka<crKov, Ka.crKero . Epie pres. Kt-Kh1}-crKw. Ka.v'lr-TW (Ka.uf3-) cove1 (in prose usu. in comp. w. .1rb, !v, etc.) : Kavo/w, Kclu,Ya, KEKclUp.p.a.L, Ka.v<J>91Jv, KD.U'Ir'tOS, CTV')'-KO.V?rTO~ poetic. (II.) K6.p.-vw (~<a.p,-, Kp,TJ-) labo1, am wemy or sick: Kap.oilp.a. (806), 2 aor. gKap.ov, KKp.1JKa., cl.'lro-Kp.1JTos. Epie 2 aor. subj. also K<Kcip,w, 2 aor. mid. Kap,6p,TJv, 2 perf. part. KeKp,7Jws. (IV.) KclfJ.'Ir-TW ( KO.P,?r-) benrl ; K6.p.o/w, Ka.p.o/a., KKa.p.p.a.L, K6.p.cp91]V 1 KD.Jl.'lrTOS. (Il.) KD.TfJj'Opw accuse : regular. For augment, see 453. xacf>-- pant, in Epie 2 perf. part. KeKa.cprJw~. K0QV-VVP,t: See O"KEI>clVWfJ.L. Kei:-p.a. lie : Ke(o-op.a.. See 791. Ke(p., ( K<p-, Ka.p-) she<~,r: Kep<ll, Ke.pa., KKa.pfi.a.t, ci.'!ro-Ka.pTos Comic. Epie aor.i!Kep<Ta. (544 b), aor. pas~. ldp87Jv Pind., 2 aor. pass. hap7Jv (Hdt.) prob. Att. (III.) xelw split: Epie Keiwv !; 425. K<iw and dw wish to lie down. Epie. Cp. Kep.a. . .!'ea.ow Toar: K<ao1]crw, KeMi57Jcra., By-form Hom. K~Mow in pres. part. Epie and Lyric.

702
KEEVCI)

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

C01nmand .'

KEEvcrw, KE\Jcra., KEKE\JKO., KEKE\Ja'f'-0.~ ( 489 C), KEEucr61]V,

'II"O.pa.-KEE\Ja''TOS, ~~~0.-KEE\Ja''TOS.

D., Poetic = Att. Keeuw. KEPTW (Kevr-, Kevre-, 485) goad: Kevrfww, tKVTTJ<ra, KeKVTT}p.at Hippocr., KevrfJBTJV late A tt., <rv-y-K<PTTJBf}<Top.a< Hdt., K<<Tr6s Hom., aor. inf. Kv<Ta< Hom. for Kevr<ra<. Poetic and New Ion. Kepcl.v-vlifl-~ and Kepav-vuw (Kepa-, Kpa-) mix: Kpa.cra., KKplifl-a.~, Kp~e'lv and Kepncre'lv (489 g), KpliTos. Ion. are gKPTJ<TO. (Kpa<r<Ta poetic), KKpT)p.at, hpf}8T)v. By-forms Kepaw and Kepalw, and KlpvT)p.< and Ktpvaw. (IV.) KEp8a.(vw (Kepo-, Kepoe-, K<pliav-) gain: Kep8a.vl, Kp8ava. (544 a), '11"pocr-KeKp81]KO.. Hdt. has fut. Keplif}<Top.a<, aor. KpoT}va and KpoTJ<ra ( 528 h). (III. IV.) Keu8w (Keve-, Kv8-) hie: Kev<Tw, gKev<Ta, Epie 2 aor. ~Kv8ov and redupl. 2 aor. in subj. K<KvBw, 2 perf. KKevea as pres. (in Trag. also am hidden, and so Kevew in trag.). Epie by-form Keveavw. Poetic. K?jow (KTJo-, KT}oe-, Kali-) distress: KTJOf}<Tw, hfJoTJ<ra, 2 perf. KKTJiia as pres., sorrow. Poetic. Mid. Kf]8of'-a.~ mn conce1ned: KeKalifwop.a< Hom., KTJiie<TciP.TJ" Aesch. K1]p;j'T'TW (KTJpVK-) proclaim .' K1]pV~W (147 c), K'Ijpv~a., 11'L-KEK'Ijp'iixa., KEK'Ijp'ii)'fl-a.L, K1JP;jXeT)v, fut. pass. KT)piix61]crol'-a. and (Eur.) KTJpu~op.a< (809). (III.) K<--y-x-avw (K<x-, K<x<-), Epie K<xlivw, come ttpon, 1each, fi nd: K<XfJ<Top.a< (806), 2 aor. ~K<xov, Epie K<XTJ<Tap.T)v, d-KlxTJros. Hom. has 2 aor. pass. hlxTJ as intrans.: KLX?jw (~1SS. -elw), KLXElT}v, K<Xi)VaL and KLXiJJ-'EVaL, K<X<ls and (mid.) K<x?]p.evos. These forms may come from a pres. KlXTJP.< (688), but they ali have aoristic force. Poe tic. (IV.) Klli-vT)p.t: see crKe86.vv'iif1-~ (IV.) Ki-vp.a< move myself. Pres. and imperf. Epie. A tt. Kvw. (IV.) Klp-vTJp.< and Ktpv.w Epie: see Kepol.vvlifl-' KL-XpT)-f'-~ (XPTJ-, xpa-) lend: XpT)cra., KXP1JKa., KXPTJJl.O.~. Fut. XPiJ<Tw Hdt.' probably also A tt. Mid. barrow: XP'lcrcl.fl-TJV. K'Aa\w (K'Aa-y-y-, K'Aa-y-, 510) resound, clang: K'Aa-y~w, lK'Aa-y~a, 2 aor. ifK'Aa-yov, 2 perf. KKa.-y-ya. as pres., fut. perf. KEK6.-y~ofl-a.L as fut. shall scream (581, 806). Epie 2 perf. KeK'Af}-yovres (557 D. 2, 700 D.). By-form K'Aa-y-yavw. Mainly poetic. (III.) K'Aalw weep (for K'Aa<fW from Ki..a.F-!."'' K'Aav-, K'Aaf-, K'Aat-, K'Aa-), Kiw in prose (not eontracted, 520): Ka.~f]crw or Klif]crw (Ka.vcrofl-a.L shall 'suffer for it), Ka.vcra.. Poetic are K'Aa.v<Top.a< ( 540), KK'Aavp.a<, KK'Aav<Tp.at, K'Aavr6s, K'Aav<Trbs (?). The )fSS. have K'Aa.lw in Xen. usu., KMw in Aristoph. (III.) Kcl.w b1ealc, in prose w. va, 1r&, hrl, Karci, 1rp6s, <Tvv: -Ka.cra. (488 a), -KK~a. a'fl-O.L ( 489 c), -EK6.<T6TJv, va-K'AM0f}<Yop.a' Aristotle. Ke(w shut (Older A tt. Ktfw): Ke(crw and KU<Tw, KELcra. and Kucra., .7roKK'[IKO., KKE~fl-0.~ and KK'[IfLO.~ (KKELa'fl-0.~ haS SOlllC SUpport), EKE(cr6T)V and ~ticr6T)v (489 e), K~EL<TT6s and K'[IcrTos. K'ATJi'w is Ion. K'II'-TW ( K<7r-, K'Ao1r-) ste al: K.Jtw (Jess often K>Jiofl-a.L), Ke>)Ja., KKo,Pa., KKEfl-fl-O.L, 2 aor. pass. K~n1MJv, Ke.,.ros, -Tos. 1 aor. pass. h'A<pOTJv Ion. and poetic. (II.) K'Au\w celebrate in $On[!: K'Ali<Tw, KV<TJ, (Dor. h'A~a from K'Aet\w). Polltic. 549 D.).

K'A'Aw (Ke-) land: K<rw (G36), gK<'A<Ta. Poetic = Att. Kw. (III.) Kl'Aop.at (Ke'A-, Ke'Ae-, K'A-) comma nd: Ke'Arwop.a<, Ke'ATJ<Tcip.T)v, 2 aor. lKeK'A6i-'TJ" ( 448

512.

(III.)

Kpii1TTW]

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

703

K}l.iv(l) ( KtP-) be nd, USU. COIDp. W. Kct'TU ; -K}I.ww, ~K}I.LVO., KfKtKct Jate., KK}I.~flii.L (491), 2 aor. pass. -<K}I.(v'!Jv, 2 fut. pass. -K~vofJO"op.a.~, 1 ao1. pass. lKMOJ

poetic, lK\!v01Jv Epie, poetic, ,,.o-KtTos Aristotle. (III.) hear: imperf. ~Kvov is an old 2 aor. from an assumed pres. K<vw; 2 aor. imper., without thernatic vowel, KBt and (Epie) t<h\vOt; perf. KtKVKct rare; part. KMp.evos as adj. fa mous == KVT6s. Poe tic. Kvo.!w scratch, usu. comp. w. ouf: -Kvaifyw Eur., -Kvo.uro., -KKVO.~K!I., -KKVO.~O"!LO.~ ( 489 C), -EKVO.LII'6'1JV1 -KV0.10"6ofJO"OfLO.~. *Kvaw ( Kvw) se~ape ( Kva-, KV'IJ-) (on pres. contraction Kvfis, Kvfi, etc. see 394, 641) often comp. w. Ka'Ta: Kvi,U"w Hippocr., KV'IJII'a., -KKV'IJII'fLO.L ( 489 c), -<Kvof]11'6'1Jv. Cp. KVQ.L(I), KOLa.(v(l) (Kot-av-) hollow: KOLa.v61, KoLiiva. (544 a), K<Ko!ctU"p.a< (489 h) and hotMv87Jv Hippocr. (III. IV.) KOp.(t(l) ( KOfJ.LO) Ca re for.' KOfLIW, KOJ.I.IO"O., KEKOJ.I.IKO., KEKOfliO"flO.I (USU. mid.), KOjlo(0"6'1JV, KOJ.1.10"6ofJO"OfL0.1, KOJ.I.III''I'OS. (Ill.) KO'II'-'1'(1) (Ko'll'-) eut, usu. in comp. in prose: Ko>jlw, Ko>jfa., -KKo<!>o. (otcf, ~, O"vv, etc.), KKOJ.I.p.o., 2 aor. pass. -EK011''1JV ( a,.6, 'll'<p!), 2 fut. pass. -Ko'll'of]O"OJ.I.a.', fut. perf. KEKOljTOJ.I.O.I, KO'II"TOS. .Hom, bas 2j)Brf. part. KKD'II'ciJS. (JI.) Kopv-vp.t ( Kope- for Kopw-) satiate : fnt. Kopw Hom., KopU"w Hdt., aor. iK6peU"a poetic, 2 perf. part. K<KDPTJW> satisfied Epie, perf. mid. K<K6p0'p.a< (48!J c) Xen., K<KbpTJfJ."' Ion., poe tic, aor. pass. lKop0'8TJv poetic ( 489 g) cl-K6p1J'TO> and d-Kbpe(u)To> insatiate, both poetic. Ion. and poetic, rare in prose. (IV.) Kopvuuw (Kopv8-) a?"'n with the hel met, ann: act. only pres. and irnperf. Hom. aor. part. KopvO'O'afJ.fvos, perf. part. K<KopvfJp.bos. Poetic, mostly Epie. (III.) Ko'Tfw am angry: tK6'TU"a (-ap.rJv) and K<KD'T7JW> Epie, Kpatw (Kpii"(-, Kpa"f-) cry out: 2 aor. ~r<po.yov, 2 perf. r<Kpiiyo. as pres. (imper. 698, 704 e), fut. perf. as fut. KEKpi~oJLa. shall cry out (581, 806). By-form Kpa.uy6.tw. (III.) Kpalvw ( Kpav-) accornplish: Kpavw, ~Kpiiva, perf. 3 s. and pl. Khpav"Tat, hpav01)v, KpavOrwop.at, li-KpavTos. Epie by-form Kpataivw (Kpaaivw ?) : tKpi,T)va (iKpri't]Vct ?), perf. 3 s. K<Kpliav'Tat, plup. K<KpriavTo, aor. pass. hp6.a.v0ev Theocr., -KpriavTos. Poetic. (III.) KpJ.I.O.J.I.O.I (Kpep.a-) hang, intrans., used as pass. of Kp<JLcl.vviJ.I.' Pres. inflected as luTap.at (snbj. KpJ.I.Oifla., opt. KP<J.I.O.LJ.I.'l" 749 b, 750 b), KpE!J.'III'Ojloa.. Cp. Kp[p.VT)fJ.L and KpEJ.1.6.VV'J.I.I. Kp<j!ocl.V-VJ.I.I (Kpep.a-, 729) hang, trans.; Kpep.w, KpJ.I.II.II'O., Kpep.6.0"91jV, KpEJ.I.O.II'TOS. Mid. intrans. see KpJ.I.<lJ.I.O.L. Fut. Kpep.uw Comic poets, Kpep.6w Epie. (IV.) Kp(t(l) (p<K- or p<"f-) c1eak: 2 aor. Epie Kp!Ke (v. l. Kp!)'e), 2 perf. KKp;;ya. Aristoph. (III.) Kplp.-VTJfJ.' (Kp<p.-vTJ-, Kp<p.-va-) often miswritten Kpi,p.PTJIJ.t, hang, tra11s., rare in act. Mid. Kplp.vap.a< am suspended = KpJ.I.<lJ.I.O.L. Poetic. (IV.) Kptv(l) (Kp<-v-) ,iudge : Kp1116l, KpLvo., KKpiKO. ( 491), KKpLjloO.L, KpL6'lv ( iKplvOTJ Epie, 491), KpL6of]O"op.a. ( KpLVoilfJo"' rarely pass., 809), Kp<Tos, Kptrbs poe tic. (III.) KpOV(I) beat .' KpOVO"OI, ~KpOVO"O., -KKpouKa., -KKpOUfl<ll and -KI<pOUO"J.I.O.L ( 489 g),
KMw

-EKpOV0"6'1JV, KpOUII''I'OS. Kpu'll'-'1'"' (Kpvtj>-) hide: Kputlfw (prose w. ,.b, KaTa), ~Kpu,Ya., KEo<pup.jloa.L (prose w. cl?r6), Kpv<l>6'l" Kpu'II'Tos, Kpv7r"Tos poetic. Poetic 2 aor. pass. hp6<P11 is rare

(Soph.),

K<Kp(r{lop.at

Hippocr.

(Il.)

704

APPENDIX: LIST OF VBIWS

[ !CT(lO fl.O.L

KTcl.OJLO.L acquire: KT'Ij<TOJLO.L, KT1J<Tcl.p.1Jv, K~KTljfl.O.L (.J42 N.) pOSSCSS (subj. KEKTWfLO.L, -i), -i)Ta., 70 ; opt. KEKTUfL'JV, -fto, -nTo, 711 ; doul>tful are KEKT<ifL"lJV, -'i>o, -ipTo); fut. perf. KEKT.fJa-op.a. shall possess ( 581) ; KT"Ij6t]v pa~s. ; KTTJT6s, -Tos. Aor. mid. KTTJ<Tcl.t~-'lv usn. == hwve poss<JSsf'd. Ion. perf. mi. ifKTrJp.at (442 D.) and fut. perf. iKTf)trop.a.t shall possess (both in l'lato). KTe!vw (Kuv-, KTov-, KTa.-v-, 478, 480) kill, in prose usually comp. w. a1rb, in poetry w. Ka.Tci.; .-rro-KTE(vw : KTevcl, KTELva., 2 perf. :IT-KTova.. Ion. fut. KTEvw (KTa.vw from KTa.lvw). Poetic 2 aor. i!JCTa.vov and liKTa.v (551 D.) ; subj. KTwp.<v MSS. x 216, inf. KTci.p.eva.t, part. KTii.s ; mid. KTap.rJv was killed (687). Epie aor. pass. KTa81Jv. In Att. prose .'Tro-6vticrKCo> is generally used as the pass. of .'Tl"D-KTE!v... By-forms .'Tro-Kn(vJL and .'Tro-KTELvv"' (sometimes written Knlvvp.t, -uw, KTivvp.t, -uw, 733). (III.) KT(t., fou nd: KT(a-w, KTta-a., liKTurp.a.t l'ind., KT(cr6t]v, E'-KnTos poetic. Epie 2 aor. mid. part. KTljJ.fVOS ( KTL-) as pas s.' fuuncled. Gl2. (III.) KTv1rw (KTV7r-, KTV?r<-, 485) sound: KTV7r1Jcra., 2 aor. ifKTV?rov Horn. (546 D). Poetic. Kvoa.lvw (Kiio-a.v-) hono1: hDorJva. Epie. Hom. bas also Kiii'Jci.vw and Kvotci.w.

523 h.

(III. IV.)

Kvw (Kv-, KV<-, 485) am pregnant: KV1Jcra. conceived, KEKVTJKO.. Fut. Kuf)crw Hippocr., aor. pass. ?r-<Kuf){J7J" Aristotle. Mid. bring forth. Connected forms are Kvw (usu. poetic): liKvcra. impregnated Aesch. (Kiitra.p.vrJ being pregnant), caus. 1wcrKw im,pregnate and conceive, Kvto-Kol'-a.' conceive. Kv(vl)w and KVLVSw, later KUiCo>, !'Oll : KVi:cra., KO.TO.-KEKVi:crp.a.L ( 489 C), KVl\.tcr6t]V, K-Kv.i:cr61]crot~-a., Kui:o-Tos. :From Ku't.:itra. ( = hu?uvotra.) the pres. Kvtw was formed. Connected is Ka.'iuvOoJJ.a.<. Kv-v-w (Ku-) kiss: Kvvf)crop.a.t (?), i!Kucra.. Poetic. .,.pocr-Kvvw render hamage to: 'TrpOCT-KVv'ljcrw, 'TrpOCT-EKVVt]<TO. ( 7rpO<T-KVCTa. lJOetic). (lV.) Ku?r--rw (Ku<f>-, cp. Ku(3oa. ; or K</>-, cp. Kv<f>6s) stoop : .va.-Kv.J!ot~-a. (806), Kv.J!a., KI<licj>a.. If the verb-stem is Kv</>- the u is long in all forms. (II.) Kvp<!w (Kvp-, Kvp<-, 485) meet, happen is regular (poetic and Ion.). KDpw (Kvp-) = KVP"' is mainly poetic: Kvpcrw (5~6), i!Kvpcra.. (III.) KWKVw (500, 1. a) lament: KwKiltrw Aesch., KwKilcrop.a.t (806) Aristoph., hwKiitra.

poetic.
Kwli.\Jw hinder: regular, but (rare) fut. mid. Kwli.\Jcrop.a. as pass. (808) T. 1. 142. ll.a.-y-x-6.v"' (\a. x-, \rJx-) obtain by lot: >....]sot~-a. (806), 2 aor. ll.a.xov, 2 perf. etTJX"- (445), dTJ'/1'-"-' li...Jx61Jv, t]KTos. Ion. fut. M~op.a.t, Ion. 2 perf. o-yxa. (also poetic). Hom. 2 aor. i!)l.)l.a.xov (redu pl. )l.)l.a.xov made partakeT).

(IV.)
M[;op.a.t and Mf:u!J.a.t (Epie and Ion.)= >..a.p.f3avt. ll.a.-t~--13-cl.vw ()l.a.(3-, rJf3-) take: ll.{j.J!ot~-a. (80), 2 aor. .a.f3ov, et"ljcj>a. (44G), et>..'lt~-1'-"-' >..{jcj>9t]v, t]cj>91Jcrot~-a., }.."l).,.Tos, -Tos. Fut. Mp.'fop.a.t (better M,Pop.a.) Ion., i'fop.a.t Do rie ; 2 aor. inf. ea.(3cr8a.t Hom. ; perf. eci.{3rJKa. (a.{3<-) Ion. and Doric ; perf. mid. f1Jp.p.a.t poetic, a.p.p.a.t Ion. ; aor. pass. Mp.<f>OrJv Ion., M.<f>{}TfP Do rie ; v. a. KaTa.-.a.iJ.?rTos Hdt. (IV.) M.p.1rw shine: cl.t~-.J!"', ll.a.t~-.J!a., 2 perf. a.p.1ra. poetic. ll.a.-v-6-Q.v., ()l.a.O-, 1]8-) escape the notice of, lie hid: .{jo-.,, 2 aor. .a.9ov, 2 perf. .t]9a. as pres., v. a. 11-ll.a.crTos poe tic. Mid. in prose usu. 11"L-a.v6cl.vot~-a. f01get ()l.a.vOci."op.a.t poetic, rare in prose; )l.f)(Jop.a.t poetic): 1rt-ll.{jcrop.a., 2 aor

APPE:\DIX: LIST OF VERBS

705

'I1"-Ea.96p.TJv, perf. mid. 'll"l-TJ<rp.a.t. Hom. has 2 aor. Xt!l..aJJov caused to forget and XeXaOop:qv jorgot ( 448 D.), perf. mid. arrp.at. 1\eTjO"op.aL is poetic. By-forms are 1\TjOw, -op.at, cbiefly poetie : gx.,wa poetie; and lvqedvw cause to forget Epie, poetic. (IV.) M,--Tw (af3- or a</J-) lap, lick: pres. late: K-M.Ijtop.a. Aristoph., ~-a.ljta. Aristoph., a.<!>a. Aristoph. Fut. Mlflw Hom. (II.) &.O"KW, for aK-O"KW, 526 d (aK-, aKe-) S)Jeak ." aKTjO"OJI-aL (806), 2 aor. gaKOV (MK7JO"a rare), 2 perf. as pres. f7JKa Epie= iKa Tragic (part. e.Kva Epie), 2 aor. mid. eaKOiJ.7J" Epie. Poetie verb. By-forms hn-X71dw Epie, aKdlw Tragie. (V.) Mw see: only part. Mw v and imperf. <k Epie. *Mw (w) wish (a-, 7J-) : conti'. Xfis, Xfi, inf. Xi) v. Dorie verb. Also Xeiw. Cp. 394. -yw say: ~w, e~a., perf. etpTJKa. (see under dpw), e-yp.a., X9"r]v, fut. pass. EX 9i]crop.a., fut. perf. etop.a.<, EKTos, -Ts poetie. Fut. mid. ~op.a. as pass. is poetie (809). 8a.--yop.a.l discuss : 8a.-~op.a.. and 8a.-ex9i]crop.a. (812), 8H(eyp.a., 8Hx9TJv ( oL--y 71 v Aristotle), 8a.-eK-ros. -yw collPct, count, usu. in comp. w. ~ or O"Vv: -~w, -e~a., 2 perf. -doxa. (445), -e(e-yp.a. and -e-yp.a.l, 2 aor. pass. -e"Y'l" (-EX9'1" rare in Att.), fut. perf. -eyi]crop.a., -EKTos, <KTos poetic. 2 aor. mid. X"fp.7JP, 335. e(.,.., (Xmr-, OL7r-, t7r-, 477 a) leave, often in comp. w. a7rb, KaTa, {;.,.b, etc. : e<IJ!w, 2 aor. L'!l"ov, 2 perf. oL'Il"a. have l~ft, have fai/ed. E(.,.op.a. mid. l'emain, pass. am left, am inje1ior: np.p.a., e(tj>91Jv, fut. pass. ELtj>91]crop.u, fut. perf. Ee(ljtop.a.., mr-ros. Fut. mid. e(>jJop.a. is rarely pass. (809). 2aor. mid. XL7rOI'-7J" in prose onlyincomp. (as pass. A 693). By-form KTu-Lp.11'avw. On the illfiection of the 2 aor. see 384. Xe7rTDVW (Xe7!'Tuv-) thin: '11"TVU 1 e'Il"Tl!<l"IJ.a.L (489 h), E'I1"onJV91JV. (JII,) M7rw (X'71'-, Xarr-) peel, usu. comp. w. am\, K: -ijtw, -e>jJa., ap,p.a. (inscr. ), -E<I.'Il"TJV. evw stone to death, usu. comp. w. Kar&. in prose : -evcrw, -ieva-o., -eevcr9'1v ( 489 e), -evcr91]crop.a.. Xex- lay to l'est (cp. Mx-os bed) : Xl;op.a<, (Xel;a ( Xel;p.7Jv went to rest, imper. M~eo, 542 D.), 2 aor. athematic forms (688) feKTo went to rest, imper. Xl;o for Xex-cro, inf. KaTa-MxOaL for -1\exO"OaL, part. KaTa-ryp.evos. Epie. fj8w : see a.v96.vw. L-alop.a' (Xa- for XM-, 624 a) desi1e eagerly only pres. and imperf. ; with perf. eI7Jp.aL (XLa-). Epie. Cp. Mw. (III.) XIO"O"op.aL rarely iTop.aL (LT-) sttpplicate: fXXLO"ctJ1.7JV Epie, 2 aor. XtTOiJ-71" Epie, 'll'oMXLO"Tos. Poetic, rare in prose. (III.) LXp.w (and x,xp.\w) lick: perf. part. XeLXJl.OTes Hesiod. Usually poetic. Xolw ( = Of<W) wash: ocrcrop.aL, X6e( cr )<Ta, -ap.7Jv. Epie. See o..J.,, ouw wash !oses v before a short vowel and then con tracts (398 a) : ouw, ouels, ove<, oilp.ev, oil-re, oilcr, ~ovv, oucrop.a (Xovcrw late), ~ov<ra., ovp.a., t-ov-ros. Hom. bas Mw, Xow : XoO"O"op.aL, XoCTa 1217, MeO"CTa ( -a.ro ), Hippocr. lXoiO'f/v. iip.alvw (Xp.av-) abuse: usu. p.a.Lvop.a. as act. : p.a.voilp.M, Uf'-t]Vnp.1Jv, eiip.a.crp.a. (usu. mid. 48H Il), l\.p.v/J'f/v Tragic. (III.) ;>,.;)., (Xv-, Xii-) loose. 'l<Tw, cra., vKa., .vp.a, u91]v, v9i]<Top.11L, e\J<rop.a.l, GREEK GllA~!. -4;}

706

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

[p.a.(vC~~

>,.,mss, -Tios. Inflection p. 114. On 2 aor. mid. Epie lMp:qv as pass., see 688. On perl. opt. <ro, see 711 D.
p.o.(va~ (p.o.v-, JJ."f/V) madden, act. usu. poetic: ip.1Jva., fLfL'l"a. am mad. Mid. p.a.(vofLO.L ?"age: p.o.vop.o.t Hdt., 2 aor. pass. p.6.V!Jv. (III.) p.o.lop.o.t (for p.o.( o- )-~op.o.t, 624 a) desire, strive : p.ao-o-op.o.t, p.o.( o-) o-ap."f/v, hrl-p.o.o-ro~. Epie. Conneeted are Aeol. p.aop.o.t (p.wro.t, opt. p.tpro, imper. p.wo-o) and

p.o.tp.aw, Epie, poetic. (III.) (p.o.O-, p.o.O<-) learn : fla.61jcrofla.L (806), 2 aor. fla.6ov, fLEp.6.61JKO., p.a.61)"'6s, -'I"os. Hom. has 2 aor. fp.p.o.Oov (429 a, D.). (IV.) p.a.pa.(va~ (p.o.po.v-) cause to 1vither : p.6.piiva., p.o.pavO"T/v Hom. (III.) p.ap-vo.p.o.< (p.o.p-vo.-) fight: only in pres. and imperf., subj. p.apvwp.o.t (749 b), imper. p.apvo.o. Poe tic. (IV.) p.aptr-rw (p.o.ptr-) seize: p.apif;w, !ip.o.pif;o., 2 aor. !ip.o.ptrov (?)and redupl. p.lp.o.ptrov (?) Epie, 2 perl. p.lp.o.ptro. Epie. Poetic. (li.) flclT'T'al (p.o."(-) knead: fL6.~w, p.a.~a., flfla.xa., flfLO.j'flO.L, 2 aor. pass. fLclj''JV ( trpoo-ep.axOrJv Soph. ). (III.) fLclXOfLO.L (p.o. x-, !J-O.X<-)fight: fLO.XOVfLO.L (539 b), fLO.XECTclfL1JV, flEfLclX1Jfla.L, fLO.XETOS. Pres. Hom. 1'-o.xop.o.t (part. p.o.x<ovp.<vos and p.ax<tOp.<vos, fut. Hom. p.o.xfJo-op.at (-o-o-o}'-o.L ?) and p.o.xop.at, Hdt 1'-o.xf}o-op.at; aor. Epie J'-o.xw(o-)ap."f/v (v. l. -"f/<TrlJ'-rJv), Hdt. lp.o.x<o-rip.rJv; v. a. p.o.x"T/ros Hom., -p.ax<ros Aesch. p.w and J'-<w rule ( 485 d). Epie and poetie. p.oop.at am concerned about. p.e6u-crKa~ make drunk: p.9ucra.. fLE&ucrKop.a. get drunk, p.e9u cr61Jv got drunk (489 e). (V.) fLE&ua~ am drunk: only pres. and imperf. ; other tensesfrom the pass. of p.e6vcrKC~~. fLELj'-VfLL (J'-<L"(-, J'-L'Y-) mix ( often written p.i"(vp.t), also flELj'ww, and Jess corn.
p.a.-v-8-6.va~

fL~CT'"' (526 c): fLE~w, fLEL~a., fLfLELj'fLO.L, fLELX61Jv, .va.-fle.x&f]crofLO.L rare, 2 aor. pass. fLt'1JV, flELKTos, -Tos. The forms with <L are restored on the authority of inser. Epie 2 fut. pass. J'-L"ff}rrop.o.t, Epie 2 aor. mid. ~P.LKro (~JJ.<LKro ?), poetic fut. perl. p.<p.<il;op.at. (IV.) }'-<ipOJJ.O.L (J'-<p-, for o-p.<p-, p.op-, p.ap-) obtain pa?t in: 2 perf. ~p.p.op< (442 D.) has a share in. Epie. e'lfla.pTa.L it is fated (from o-<-rrp.ap-rat, 445 a). (III.) fLw (p.<-, p.<<-) intend, augments w. <, rarely w. '1/ (430): fLE{jcrw, p.-

1Jcra., fLE1JTos.

}'-w (p.<-, p.<<-) care for, concern poetic: p.<f}o-w poetic, p.<f}rrop.at Epie, 2 perf. p.p."f/a Epie, p.<p.f'fJp.at as pres. poetic (Epie ;.dp.-{3-<rat, 130 D. ), p.<fJ0rJv poetic. Impersonal: fLeL it is a care, fL<{jcrEL, fL1Jcre, fL<p.1JKE, fLE1JTos. Prose 11"L-fLoflO.L or 11"L-flEofLO.L ca re for (the latter form is far more co m.

on Att. inscr. after 380 n.c.): 11"LfLE{jcrofLo.L, 11"LfLEfL1JflO.L, 11"-EflE{j61Jv, 11"L-fLE1JTos. p.p.ova (p.<v-, p.o v-, J-La-) desire: 2 perf. as pres. ; sing. p.p.ovo.s, -ov<; otherwise J-LL-forms (705), as p.p.arov (573), J-LJ-Lo.p.ev, -aT<, -rii<n, imper. p.<p.arw, part. p.<p.iws and p.<p.i'J.ws, p.<p.au'io., inf. p.<J-Lovvat Hdt. Epie, poetic. 1'-fl<f>OfLO.L blame: flflo/OfLO.L, fLEfLo/6.fl1J", flfl<f>&'lv rare in prose, flEfl11"T6s. fLVw (p.ev-, p.<v<-) re main: fL<vl, fLELva., fLEJ:l.V1JKO. ( 485 c), fLEVETos, fLEVETos. Byform p.l-p.v-w Epie and poetic. fl.P-!'-'f/Pllw ponder, devise : dtr-<p.<pJ-LfJp,rra Aristoph ., p.<pp.f}pt~o. Epie. Poetic. 512. (III.)

Al'PEXDIX: LIST OF VERBS

707

tJ.fJop.n.< devise : tJ.fJo-otJ.a<, tJ-'1/<rdfJ.'YJV. Poetie. WYJK<otJ.aL (!J.'YJK-, p.aK-, 486 D.) bleat: pres.. and imperf. not used; Hom. 2 aor. part. p.aKwv, 2 perf. part. !J.EIJ.7JKWs, J.1.p.aKva, 2 plup. tJ.!J.7JKov ( 557 D. 3). !J.'YJT<ciw (!J-'YJTL-, 486 D., cp. p.fjns) plan: also !J-7Jndop.n.< and (Pind.) fJ.'YJTlop.a<: -tcro!J-a<, -ffd!J-7JV. Epie and Lyric. p.La.Cvw (tJ.tav-) .stain: floU:wOl, p.(iiva., J:.Lep.(a.<rp.a.L (489 h), tJ.L6.v91]v, p.La.v9~<rop.a.L, -tJ.lanos poetic. (III.) p.-p.vtf-<TKw and f'oL-floV~-<rKW (wa-, 526 b) remind, mid. remembe1. Act. usu. cha.or 7rG-fLLp.vr(<rKw (.the simple is poe tic except in pass.) : -p.v~<rw, -p.v1J<ra., perf. p.p.v1Jp.a.L =pres. (442 N.) 1'em.embet, p.v~<r91Jv (489 e) as mid. temembered, mentioned, fut. pass. =mid. floV1J<r9i}<rofLa.L shall ?'emember, fut. perf. f'oEp.vi}<rop.a.L shall bem in mi nd (581 ), v. a. 'TI'L-JioV1J<rTos, li-tJ.vacrTos Theocr. p.floV'JfLO.L has subj. floEp.vOlfloa.L (709), opt. floEf'oVtJflo'lV (f'oep.vcifL'lV douj:Jtful, 711 b), imper. p.p.v1J<rO ( Hdt. f.tp,v<o), inf. p.EfloVfi<r9a.L, part. p.EJioV1JJiovos. Fut. p.vf}crw ( -op.at), aor. g!J.V7Jcra ( -&.p,7Jv) are poetie. Epie tJ.vao!J-a< in Hom. tJ.vwovTo, tJ.vw6tJ.<vos

(643).

(V.)

p,ltJ.vw rmnain : poetie for flovw. p.L<r)'"' (for tJ.L-(tJ.)o--yw, 526 c) mix, pres. and imperf. See p.eCyviip.L. tJ.Vtw suck, Ion. tJ.u!t!w, late h-p,ujciw. Hom. h-Mul'flcras squeezing out. p.utw (!J-V"f-) gntmble : p.vta.. (III.) p.'K6.op.a. (p.ilK-, p,K-, !J-Ka-, 486) bellow: flo'K1J<r6.p.1Jv, Epie 2 aor. Jl.DKov (546 D.), Epie 2 perf. !J.fl.Ka as pres. JloUTTW (p,vK-) wipe USU. CO!llp. W. 1r6: -flollta., -Ep.EfloU'YJio1JV. (IIJ.) p.vw shut the lips or eyes ( late, uneertain in A tt.) : p.vcra., p.p.'~ea. valw (vacr-,;w, 624 a) dwell: gvacrcra caused to dwell, vacro-&.!J.7JV took up my abode and caused to dwell, lvacr87Jv was settled or dwelt. Poetic. (III.) valw (var-,;w, 624 b) swim: vaZov' 222 (v. l. >ov). (III.) v6.-r-r., (vao-, va-y-, 514 a, 515 b) comp1ess: ~vata Epie and Ion., vva.<rJioO.L Aristoph. ( vva-ytJ.a< Hippocr. ), va.o--r6s Aristoph. Mostly Ion. and poetic. (III.) vciw (var-w) flow only in 11res. Epie. Cp. valw swim. *vaw (vOl) spin (va-, P'Y}-, 394): pres. v'fis, v'fi, v<il<rL, inf. vijv, part. voilv, fut. ~o-w, aor. v1J<ra., aor. pass. viJ91Jv. vELdw (vELKe- for vHK<cr-; cp. To viLKos str~fe) chide, usu. vHKelw in Hom. : v<<Ke~Yw,
vElK<o-(~Y)a.

Epie (also Hdt.).

(III.)

vet<!>EL (vwp-, v<</J-, 477; better form thau vi</><<) snows, covers with snow: Ka.TveL>jte. Pass. vet.peTa.L. VfloW (vEf.t-, VEP,-) ctist?i/iute, mid. a)SO go tO pastUTe .' VEfloOl, EVELJl-C!, LO.-VEVf'o1]KO., VEVf11]JioO.L, vep.'I'J91JV, LO.-VEf'-1]TOS. "otJ.a< (><cr-) go, come, only in pres. and imperf.: usu. in fut. sense. Mainly poetic. Cp. vicro!J.a<. 541. ve..J., nod: -veu<rOJJ.O:L w. vri or KaTa (806), vevcra., vvevKa.. Hom. has fut. ve6crw

and

ICaTa-veVffop,at.

vO> (v<u-, v<r-, vu-, originally crveu-, etc.) swim, often comp. w. tci, ~: vev<rOVfloO.L Xcn. (540, 806), -vevo-a., -vvevKa., vev<rTos. Cp. v-f]xop,at. vw heap ~p, pres. in comp. and only in Hdt. (Att. usn. has xow): v1J<ra., . vV'l]floO.L (vv1Jfflf.a'? 48il g), V1JTOs Hom. Epie P1JW. vltw (v<[:J-, v<-y-, 509 a) wash, in Att. usu. eomp. w. 1rb, i~: -v(ljtofloC!L (vl>f;w poetic),

708

APPEND!X: LIST OF VERBS

vl1r-rw is late, vl7TTOf-'at Hom. (III.) viO'of-'a' go or will go: from vt-v(<)O'-f,.Of-'a<, cp. v60'--ros return. Often printed vlO'O'of-'aL (Mss. often have vdO'of-'a<). Poetic. (III.) vo., think, perceive, regular in Att. Mid. vooiip.a. nsu. in comtJ., fut. 8La.-vof)o-op.a.. (rare) and 8ta.-vo1)9T)o-op.a. (812). lon. con tracts o7J to w i~ ~vwO'a, vl'vwKa, vlvwJla.L. vop.ttw believe: vop.iA> (1i39 e), vop.to-a., VEVOfl.LKa., vevop.<o-p.a.L, vop.tcr91Jv, vop.to-9T)-

-vva., -vvLf!.fl.O.L, -evlrjJ07Jv Hippocr., /l,-v<7TTOs Hom. = .v-a.'lr6-vL11'Tos.

o-op.a.<, VOjJ.LO"TOS.

512.

(Ill.) (III.)

Ea.tvw (~a.v-) scratch: Ea.viA>, ~E11va., l!~aJlJlaL late Att., lf~M{La.< Hippocr.

Ew (;e- for ~0'-) scrape : Eeo-p.a ( 489 d). Epie are l!~eO'a. and ~O'O'a., ~e0'-r6s. t1Jpa(vw (~7Jpa.v-) dry: ETJpaviA>, tiJpava., ETJpao-p.a (489 h), t1Jp6.v91JV. Ion. lb]P7Ja, late l~f}pa.!-'1-'a.t.
~vw

(IV.)
l!~vO'{Lat

polish: to-a., Evo-91Jv (489 c),

Aristotle,

~v0'-r6s

Hdt.

8o<1ropw travel: regular, but observe ooo<7TE7T6p7JKa for wot7r6p7JKa.. See 453. So1roLw malce a way: regular, but woo7T<7TOL7Jf'lvos in X en. for woo7r0<7Jf.'vos. 453.
ov- am ang1y: in Hom. aor. wov0'(0')&.!-'7J, perf. owovO'Ta.t as pres. (489 d). lltw ( 6il-, o.('e-) smell: otijo-w, ~t1JO"Cl. Hippocr. o.('O'W and t:J.('eO'a., Epie plup. oowoet as imperf., Aeolic iJO'ow. (III.) ot-yw open: ot~w, c[,~a., olxOels Pinel. Poetic, as is also ot-yvl-'' In prose .v-o(yw and .v-o(yvp.<, q. v. The older form is el-yw, found in Hom. aor. t:Jet~a. (MSS. t:Ji'~a.). Hom. bas also wi'yvV{L7JV ( WEt'Y- ?). otSa ( olo-) : see lo- and 794. otSw swell: ~S1Jo-CL, ~81JKCL. By-form olO&.vw poetic. olKTtpw (olK-r<p-, 620. iii) pity: ~K-r;;pa. olic'Tlpw is a late spelling. (III.) otp.ci>tw lament: otp.ci>Eop.a. (806), <i)p.wEa, otJJ.W'Yf.'O.L (?) Eur., t/J1-'wx07Jv poetic. 512.

(III.)
otvox.o.w and -xoevw Hom. pour wine : imperf. olvox6et, </lvox6et ( 1fvox6et, tl 3, is incorrect for fo<v-), otvox.oijo:w, olvoxoi)O'a.t. Epie and Lyric, and in X en. otop.a (ol-, oie-) think: 1 pers. in prose usu. otp.a.: imperf. ~fl.1JV (rarely tti6tL1JV), otijo-op.a, <jloq91Jv, ot1JTos. Epie iw, Mw, and otw, OioJJ.a.L (500. 2. D.), oO'&.JJ.7JV, wt0'07Jv (489 e). otfl.a.L is probably a perfect (634).

oto-w: shall bear. See <f>pw. otx.op.a ( olx-, olxe-, olxo-, 486) am go ne as perf. (1886) : otx.T)<rop.a., otxwKa.

poetic and Ion. (sorne l1SS. <iJxwKa), 7rap-<#X7JKa. (?) K 252. otxwKa is probably due to A tt. redupl. Ion. -olx7Ji-'a' is doubtful. Kw (OK< -) r~tn asho1e: &IKe<a. Cp. Kw. (III.) t<r6-6.vw (o<O'O-) slip, also St-oLo-Oa.(vw: 2 aor. t:JXtO'Oov Ion., poetic; /!t-wl0'07JO'a an~Xlcr07JKa Hippocr. (o<O'Oe-). (IV.) 6-JJ.< destroy, ruin, lose, for o-vi-f.'< ( o-, oe-, 6Xo-) also -oMw, in prose usu. cornp. w. 1r6, also w. ot&. or ~: -oiA> (539 b ), -ci>e<ra., -oooeKa. have ruined, 2 perf. -Owa am ruined. Fut. oO' ( 0') w Epie, olO'w rare in co m. edy, Xlw Hdt. Mid. llvp.a pArish: -ooiip.a, 2 aor. -wOp.1Jv, part. o6f'<vos ruinons (o- Epie), By-form oKW Epie, poetic. (IV.) b-outw ( oXov-y-) shout, rare in prose: ou!;op.at (806), wOvEa. (III.)
Oo.p'pOjJ.ClL ( Oopvp-) bewail .' Oo<j>vpoilp.CLL, roo<j>pclf1.1JV, Woq,vp91JV
?nCid6

tO

larnent Thuc. 3. 78.

(111.)

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

709

OtJ.-ViitJ. ( O!J--, o~J-o-, 486) and p.vvw swear : tJ.oiip.a. (806) for O!J-OtYo!J-a<, OitJ.ocro., OtJ.<i>tJ.OKO., OfJ.<I>fJ.OfJ.O.L and OtJ.<i>fJ.OCTfJ.O.L (489 g), WfJ.091JV and Wp.6<T61JV, p.ocr9i)crofJ.O.L, .'ll"-<i>p.oTOS. (lV.) o!J-6p-y-vI!J-< ( O!J-op-y-) wipe, usu. comp. w. l~ in poetry : -o~J-6p~w, t!J!J-op~a. ~-op.opyvu p.o.: -op.6ptotJ.a., -wp.ops6.p.1Jv, -wp.opx91Jv. (IV.) vi-v'l-fJ.' ( v17-, va- ; for v-ov17-!J-', but the redu pl. bas no regard for the o) benefit: vi)crw, WV1JCTO., 2 aor. mid. WVlJfJ.1JV 1'Ceived benefit ( opt. vO.ifJ.1JV), wvi)91JV, cl.v-6v1JTOs. 2 aor. mid. imper. 6v17cro Hom., w. part. ovf}wvos Hom.; 1 aor. mid.
wva~J- 17 v is late. /Jvo-!J-a' (vo-, 7'J5) insult: pres. and imperf. like oloo!J-a<, opt. /Jvot-ro Hom. ; v&crcro~J-<L<, wvocr(cr)a!J-17, aor. pass. subj. Kar-ovocrOfis Hdt. (489 e), 6vor6s Pind., vocrr6s Hom. t!JvaTo P 25 may be imperf. of a by-form ova!J-a<. ~vw ( ~vv-) sharpen, in prose 'll"a.p-osuvw provoke : -osuvcAi, OiSva., -&>~fJ.tJ..,

-wsvv91Jv. (III.) 07r- in fut. o>JtotJ.O.L, perf. mid . .:;fJ.fJ.O.L, aor. pass. Oicj>91Jv, 'II"EpL-O'II"Tos. See p6.w. 1rvlw (1rv-) take to wife (later o1rDw): ,..vcrw Aristoph. Epie, poetie. (III.) p.w (opa- for fOpa-) see; mperf. <i>pwv (434), fut. o>JtOfJ.O.L 806 (oo/EL 2 S.), 2 aOl'. dSov (lo- for f!o-), 1 1)erf. 6piiKa. (443) and oopii:Ko. (plup. wpRK1J), oopatJ.o. and .:;fJ.fJ.""'' Oicj>81Jv, cj>9i)crotJ.o., pa-ros, 'II"EpL-O'II"Tos. Aeolic 1Jp17!J-'' Epie p6w (643), New Ion. opw. lmperf. wpwv Hdt., fut. l7r-61J;o~J-at in Hom. = shall look on, l7rt-61J;o~J-at shall choose, aor. mid. l7r-w:f"XWJ saw Pind., hn~w:f;a!J-17" chose Plato, 2 perf. li1rw1ra poetic, Ion. See io- and o1r-. (VI.) . p-yalvw (p-yav-) am angry: t!Jp-yava (544 a) made angry. Tragie. 523 h. (III) pyitw emage; s-opyLcAi, wpyLcrO., wpyLCTfJ.O.L, wpy(cr81JV, opyLcr9i)crOfJ.O.L, pyLcrTOS. 512, 815. (III.) opyw 1each Epie, poetic, 6py-v!J-t Epie (only part. 6peyv6s): op~w, OipEso. rare in prose. pyofJ.<LL st1etch myself, desi1e : psofJ.o. rare in prose, wps6.fJ.1JV but usu. wpX 91JV as mid., pKT6s Hom. Perf. tfJp<"(!J-0.! Hippocr., pwp<"(!J-0.! (3 pl. opwpxaTa! n 834, plu p. pwpXaTO A 26). By-form pt-yvci.o!J-a!:
WpLyv!J91JV. 15p-vI!J-< (op-) raise, rouse: opcrw (536), Jpcra, 2 aor. trans. and intrans. t!Jpopov Epie (448 D.), 2 perf.opwpa as mid. have roused myself, am 1oused. Mid. lipvv!J-a< rise, rush : fut. pofi~J-a< Hom., 2 aor; wp6wqv (Epie are wpTo, imper. li pero, opcrw (542 D.) and opcrv, inf.opea,, part.op!J-vos), pert pwp<!J-a< Hom. Poetie. (IV.) OpVTTOl (opvx-) dig, Often e0mp. W. Ota, KaTa: -op\Jsw, Wpvso., -Opoopvxo., OpOOpVyfJ.O.L (OipvyfJ.<LL ?), wpvx81Jv, -opvx9!JcrofJ.O.L, 2 fut. pass. -opvx!Jcrop.<LL Aristoph., pvK-r6s. Mid. aor. wpv~a!J-11 caused to di}! Hdt. (III.) crcj>po.ivOfJ.O.L ( oG"rf;pa.v-, OG'</Jp-) snwll : ocrcj>pi)o-OfJ.<LL, 2 aor. wcrcj>pfJ.1JV, WG"<jJpavO'I)V late Com. and Hippoer. Hdt. has WG"</Jpa!J-17 530. (III. IV.) 6-roTv.\w lament: oTOTV~o!J-at (806), wT6Tv~a. 512. (III.) opw make wate1: ovpovv, o-pi)crofJ.O.~ (806), v-Eovp1Jcra., v-Eovp'JKO.. New Ion. bas op- for Att. lovp- (as opf}077v Hippoer. ). ora.\w wou nd: oraG"w, oUTacra, o6Tacr!J-at. Epie and Tragie. 512. (III.) oTaw wound: ol!T17G"a, 2 aor. (~J-t-form) 3 s. ora 551 D., 634, 688 (inf. ora!J-Eva< and ora~J-v), 2 aor. mid. oTa~J-evos as pass., v-ouTaTos. Epie and Tragie. cj>EI~w ( rpe'A-, orf;H'A<-) owe: bcj> ..~i)crw, wcJ>i)\:!]cro., 2 aor. Oicj>Eov in wishes, would that! wcj>EI1JKO., aor. pass. part. ocj>EL~1J6Eis. Hom. usu. has <jJHw, the

Aeoliel form.

(III.)

710
q,XXw (o<f><X-

APPENDlX: LIST OF VERBS 5l a) incTease: aor. opt. q,<XX< Horn. Poetie, mainly Epie.

(III.)
.j>~-L<rK-6.vw

(o<f>X-, q,Xe-, o<f>X-<rrK-, 530) : owe, an1 guilty, incu1 a penalty: .J>MJcr"', lOcpt]<rO. (rare and suspeeted), 2 aor . .llcpov, lOcpt]Ka., lOcp"IJfl.O.L.

:For 2 aor. o<jJ"A<v, oq,Xwv Mss. often have 5<jJ")..v and 5q,")..wv, as if from 5<jJ")..w, a late present. (IV. V.)
1ra.Ctw ( ?ra<-, ?ra< "Y-) spoTt: 11"a.Lcra., 1!"11"G.LKa., 11"11"a.LcrfJ.a.L, 1!"0.LcrTos.

A tt. fut. prob. ?ralrrop.a< (800). 7ra<top.a< in X en. S. 9. 2 is used by a Syraeusan. 1ra.Cw (?ra<-, 7ra<<-) stTilce : 1ra.Ccrw and 1!"0.LfJ<r"' A ristoph., 1ra.Lcra., v1rep-1r1rO.LKa. ; for halrriJ7Jv Aeseh. (489 e), A tt. usu. !ms 1rf)'{t]V, as 1r1r"IJ'{fl.O.L for 7rbratKa. 1!"0.~a.(w WTestle: 11"cl~O.Lcra., 7raalrriJ1JP Eur. (489 e), 7raXalrrw Epie, ovrr-7rd")..tu(J"TOS Aeseh. 7rdX")..w ( 7ra")..-) shake, bTandish : if11"7Ja, 11"11"af.1.a<. Hom. has 2 a or. redu pl. d.f.l.-11"7raWP and 2 aor. mid. (lf)7raTO. Epie and poetie. (III.) ?raop.a< ( 7ra-) acqniTe~ become mast eT = KTclOfl.tlL ; pres. not used: 7rdrJ"Of.1.a<, 7riirraf.1.1JP, 7rbriip.a<. Dorie verb, used in poetry and in Xen. Distinguish ?ritrrop.a<, 7rf.rrf.1.1JV from 7raTof.1.aL eat. 1ra.pa.-vop.w tTansg1ess the law augments 1ra.p-evop.- rather than 7rap-7Jvop.- though the latter has support (T. 3. 67. 5), perf . .,.a.pa.-vevfl.t]KO.. See 454. 1ra.p-ow;., insu.lt (as a dnmlcen man): 1ra.p-,Pvouv, 1rap-,Pvt]cra., 1l"E1ra.p-,Pvt]Ka., 1ra.p-'f'v-!JO'lv (best Ms. 7rapcpv1}07Jv D. 22. 68). See 454. 11"cl<rXw 8t~{fer ( 7rfPfi-, 7l"OPfi-, 7ra0-) for 71" ( ) r,IJ-rJ"KW (86 b, 526 d) : 1!"E(<rOfJ.a.L (806) for ?r<viJ-rrop.a<, 2 aor. 1ra.Oov, 2 perf. 1r1rovOa. (Hom. 1rbrorrfi< or ?r?rarrO< 573, 705 and fem. part. 7r<?ra1Jva); Dorie ?rhrwrxa. (V. VI.) 7raTrrrrw stTike: pres. and imperf. Epie (for whieh A tt. bas TV1!"Tw and 1ra.Cw), 1ra.T~w, 1rclTa.ta, K-?r<?rTa"(f.l.aL Hom. (Att. 11"1r~'J'Ifl.a.L), ?raTXfiTJ late (A~t. 1r~TJ'I'lv). (III.) ?r'aTop.a< (?raT-, ?raT<-) eat, taste :. ?rirrof.l.a' (?) Aesch., br arr( rr)af.1.7JP Hom., plup . .,..,.,..&,"f.1.1JP Hom., li-?rarrTos Hom. Mainly Epie, also New Ion. 1r6.rrw (?raT-, 515 a) SpTinlcle: usu. in comp. w. v, 1ri, KaT: 1rcl.crw, -1ra.cra, -E1!"cl.cr0t]v, 1ra.crTos. Hom. has only pres. and imperf. Often in comedy. (III.) 'I'I"O.ti(l) stop, cause to cease: 1Ta.Ucr(l), 1T'a.ua-a., 1r1ra.vKa., 1T1Ta:up.a.t., orra.U9TJv, -rra.u9~ crop.a, fut. perf. 1!"E1!"a.vcrofl.aL ( 581), 0.-.,.a.ucrTos, 1ra.ucrTos. Mid. .,.a.vop.a. cease: 1ra.vcrofl.a., 1ra.ua'cl.fJ.t]V. In Hdt. Mss. have ?rauiJ7Jv and ?raurriJTJv. 1rdOw ( ?rELIJ-, ?rotiJ-, ?rtiJ-) pe1suade: 1!"e(crc.o, 1rELcra., 1r11"ctLKa., 2 perf. 1r1rotOa tTnst, 1l"1!"EL<rp.a., me(crOtjv, 1!"EL<r01jcrofl.a.L, 1!"LC7"TOS, 1!"EL<rTos. Mid. 1!"E(60fl.a.L believe, obey: 1rdcrofl.a.L. 2 aor. g.,..,IJov and ?rt06p.1JP poetie; redupl. 2 aor. ?rbniJov Epie, 448 D. ( ?r<?rliJw, -otf.i.L); 2 plup. 1 pl. ~?r?rtiJp.<v ( G73) for ir<?rol6ap.ev; 2 perf. imper. ?rf?rELrJ"IJ< Aesch. Eum. 59() (1rbnr;6, ?). From .,..,IJ<- come Hom. 1rtiJ1}<J'w shull obey, 1r<?rtiJ1}rrw shall persnade, 1rtiJ1}rriis tTusting . .,...vcl.w (?rELva-, ?rPTJ-) hunge1 (for contraction in pres. see 394, 641): 1l"ELvijcrc.o, 1rECvtjcra., 11"E1ra.Cvt]KO.. Inf. pres. ?r'Elv1}p.evat Horn. 1r<lpw (?r<p-, 1rap-) pierce, Epie in pres.: lf?r<<pa, 1rf7rapp.at, 2 aor. pass. v-e7rap1Jv Hdt. Ion. and poetic. (III.) ?r'EKT--w ( 7reK-, ?r<KT-<-, 485) comb, shea1 = Epie pres. ?rel Kw : l!?reta Theo cr., l1re~p.1Jv Hom., l?rXfiTJ Aristoph. For comb Att. usn. has KTevCtw, ta.Cvc.o; for sheaT KECpw.

Al'PENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

711

'li"<<i.\w ('ll"as nem) bring ne.a1', app1oach: '/l"eMuw and Att.'li"<w (538), i'll"taua (Epie also brXciuua, and mid. hXauap:YJv), 'll"f'li"'YJf.LO.L Epie, i'li"<MuO'YJv Epie (i11"<i8'YJv in tragedy), 2 aor. mid. t'li"f}f.L'I}P approached Epie (688), v. a. 'li"aur6s. Poetic and Ion. Kindred are 'li"<<iw (7r<a-, 1ra-) poetic, 'li"<MOw and 11"ii8w dramatic, 1rlvaf.La' and 7r<vriw Epie. Prose "II"TJCTLcl.t"' (cp. 'li"'YJulov). 512. (III.) 'll"tw and 'll"fOf.La' ("~~"X-, 'li"-) am (orig. turn, move myself): g'li"<ov and i'li"<bf.L'YJ>, 2 aor. ~'li"<, ~'li"ero, -'li"6f.Lvos. l'oetic. "II"flo"ll""' ( 'll"<f.L'll"-, 'li"Of.L'll"-) send: 11"floo/w, mflolf!a., 2 perf. "II""II"Oflocj>a., "II""II"EflofloaL, "II"flocj>91Jv, "II"Eflocj>9'1jCTOfloO.L, 11"Eflo"II"TS, 11"Eflo'lTTOS. "II"E"rra.Cvw ( 7r'1rav-) make soft or 1'ipe : "lt""It"O:va. (544 a), 1!"eozrcl.v91Jv, ozreozra.v9'1j<TOfloO.L; pmi. inf. .,. .,.dv!Jat Aristotle. (III.) 11"E7ropev or '1r1rapv show : see 1rop-. .,..,.pwraL it is fated: see 1rop-. 'II"Epa.Cvw('ll"epav-, cp. 1rpas end) accomplish: 1repa.vw, ozrpava., ozreozrpa.CTfloO.L (489 h), 1repcl.v91]v, .-"lt"pavTos, SLa-ozr<pavTos. (III.) 1rpSofloa. ( 7repo-, 7ropo-, 1rapo-) = Lat. pedo: ci.'lro-ozra.pS-.J.,.ofloa., 2 aor. .ozr-1ra.pSov, 2 perf .,..,.opSa.. 'll"pOw ( 7rep!J-, 7rpa8-) saclc, destroy : 1rpuw, ~1repua, 2 aor. g.,.paOov, and 7rpa86f.L'YJV (as pass.). Inf. 1rpOa, for 1rEp8-u8a< (688). 1rpuof.La< is pass. in Hom. Poetic for prose 1rop6w. 1rtp-v'YJ!J.' sell, mid. 7rcpvaf.LaL: fut. 7r<paw, aor. t'll"epau(u)a, perf. mid. part. 'll"m<p'YJf.Lvos. I'oetic, main] y Epie, for 1rww or .ozro8ofloa.L. Akiu to 'll"epaw (cp. 1rpiv) go over, cross (1rep&.uw, etc.) ; cp. 7rL1rpduKw. (IV.) 'Trfraf.Lat fly : see 1rTOfloO.L. 1rETcl.v-vifloL (7rera-, 1rra-, 729) and 'lrETa.vvvw (rare) expand, in prose usu. comp. w. va : -'lreTw ( 539), -eozrTa.CTa., -1rozrTa.floa.L. Fut. K"'ll"erauw Eur., perf. mid. 'll"<'ll"trauf.LaL poetic (489 g), aor. pass. 'll"erarr!J'Y}v Hom. (489 e). By-forms: poetic 'll"lTV'YJf.L' and 'll"trvaw (only pres. and imperf.). (IV.) 'lrTOfloO.L (7rT- 1 W"TE-, 7rT-) jly, in ])l'OSe USU. COlllp. W. vrf, f~: -1rT1\CTOfloO.L (Aristoph. also 'Trerf]uof.La<), 2 aor. -e1rTflo1JV. Kindred is poetic 'li"raf.LaL: 2 aor. ~W"T'YJV (poetic) and ozrT6.flo1JV, inflected like t'll"p<rff.L'YJP (brrrif.L'YJP is often changed to brr6f.L'YJ>), 687. Poetic forrns are 'll"oraof.La< and W"oTof.Lat (7r<W"6T'YJf.Lat, t1rorf]O'YJv, W"OT'YJT6s) ; 1rwraof.La< is Epie. Y1rraf.La< islate. "II"TTW (7r<K-, 7rEW"-, 513 a) cook: "II"o/w, ozreo/a., 1r11"EflofloO.L, ozrcj>9'!}v, ozre1!"TS. (III.) 11"<v8of.Lat (7reu8-, 7rv8-) learn, poetic for ozruv96.vofloa.L. 'll"rj>vov slew: see rj>ev- . .,.1\y-vlflo ( 'Tr'YJ')'-, r.a-y-) fix, make fast: "~~"1\sw, 1rTJsa., 2 perf. ozrW"TJYO. am fixed, 2 aor. pass. 1r6.y1Jv intrans., 2 fut. pass. 1rayfJ<Tofloa.L. Epie 2 aor. 3 s. KarfW"'YJKTo stnclc (athematic, 736 D.), hr'Y}~rif.L'YJ" poetic and Ion., tW"fJXO'YJv and 11"'YJKT6s poetic. "~~"'YJ'Yuw rare ( Hdt., X en.). 1r'YJ')Ivro (Plato, Ph. 118 a) pres. Opt. for 1f?)')'PU-L-TO (sorne MSS. 'lr'YJ')'VUOLTO); Cp. 819. (JV.) 'li"'YJrfw leap, ofte.n comp. w. avci, .Zs, <~,hl: -11"TJ8~<Tofloa.L (806), -er.f]orwa, 7r<'ll"fJo'YJKa. 1ri:a.Cvc.o ( 1riav-) fatten : r.iavCJ, t1riiva, KO.Ta-1rE1rta<TfloU.L ( 489 h). Mostly poe tic and Ion. (IV.) 7rl-V'YJf.L<, 11"1"1\-vaf.La<, 7r<-vciw, approach: sec 7reri_\w. .,.(-flo-1rTJ-flo (7r'YJ-, 1r"l\a-, 741; w. f.L inserted) jill. In prose comp. w. iv (727): p.-orrfJ<Tw, v-ozrTJCTO., p.-1r'li"T]Kct, flo-11"1rTJCTfLO.L (489 c), v-eozr1)<T9Tjv, flo1rTJCT9fJ<TofloO.L, p.-ozrTJCTTos. 2 aor. mid. athematic t'li"iJf.L'YJV (poetic):

712

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

1rfjro and 11'fjvro Epie, v-11'rJro Aristoph., opt. EJ1--11'Tlf1-rJV Aristoph., imper. ~f1-11'rJG"O Aristoph. By-forms: 11'<f1-11'vof1-<J.L Hom., 1r1}8w am full poetic (2 perf. 11'11'rJ8a) except in '11'f)9ovcra. -yop<i, 'II'1')9vw abou nd, 11'rJ8VvoJ-La< Aesch., 'II''Ijpow. .,.(-p.-.,.p'IJ-11' (11'prJ-, 1rpa-, w. J-L inserted) bu1n. In prose usu. comp. w. lv (cp. 727): -1rpf)crw, -1rp'ljo-a., -'II'1rp'ljf1CL<, -E1rpf)cr9'1jv (489 e). Hdt. has fl--11'7rprJG"J-La<, and J-L-1rP'JG"OJ-La< (as pass.) or J1-7rE11'pfja-oJ-Lru (6. 9). 7r11'prJa-J-La< Hdt., Aristotle. By-form Ef1-7rpf}Ow Hom. 1rcvv-a-Kw (1rcvv-) make wise: e1rlvva-a-a. Poetic. (V.) 1rtvw ( ,.,_, 1ro-, 1rw-) dTink often comp. w. ~ or Kara: fut. 1riof1a.' 806 (usu. after Hom., 541) and (rarely) 'II'<Oilf1a.<, 2 aor. 1r<ov 548 a (imper. 1r'i8c, 687), 'II''II'OJKa., -'II''II'op.a.<, -e'll'69'1jv, -'ll'o9f]o-op.a.t, 'II'OTos, 'II'OTos, 7rta-r6s poetic. Aeolic 1rwvw.

(IV. VI.) give to d1ink: 1ria-w, ~1ra-a. Poetic and New Ion. Cp . .,.tvw. 819. (V.) 11'<-7rpli-a-Kw (1rpii-) sell, pres. rare= Att. 1rww, a..,.oSop.a.<: .,..,.piiKa., .,..,.piifl-a.<, 1rpiO'IJv, fut. perf. 'II'E'II'pio-op.a.<, 1rpiiTos, -Tos. In Att. 'll'wf]a-w, a..,.oSci>crop.a.<, a..,.eS6p.'IJv are used for fut. and aor. (V.) 'l!'i-'II'TW (1rer-, 1rr-, 36, 1rrw-) jall for 7rt-11'(e)r-w: 'II'Eo-oilf1a.< (540 c, 806), 2 aor. 1reo-ov ( 540 c), 'II''II'TwKa.. Fut. 1rea-oJ-La' Ion., 2 aor. ~1rerov Do rie and Aeolic, 2 perf. part. 11'E11'rws Soph., 7rE11'r1JriJs and 1re7rrerlJs Hom. 1rlr-vrJJ-L' and 7r<r-vw sp1ea out: poetic for 'II'ET6.vv'iip.<. (IV.) rrlT-vw fall: poetic for .,.t.,..,...,, (IV.) rrMl'w (rrXa-y-y-, 510) cause to wandm: ~11'a-y~a. Mid. 1rMl"op.a< wander: 11'ri')'toJ1-a<, i1rM-yx8rJv wande1ed, 7ra')'Kr6s. Poetic. (III.) 1rX<i8w: dramatic for 7r<Ml'w, 'II'1')o-<6.tw. 'II'clTTo> ( 7r ar-, 515 a) mould, jo1m : 'II'a.o-a., 'II''II'a.crp.a.<, 'II'clo-91')11, 'II'CLCTTOS. Fut. va..,.Ma-w Ion. (III.) 'II'Kw 07r'h<K-, 7roK-, 1r'haK-) weave, bmi: 'II'esa., 'II''II'eyp.a.<, 1rX9"1v rare, 2 aor. pass. -E'II'clK'IJV (lv, <rvv), 2perf. lJ-L-7r7roxa Hippocr., probably Att., and J1--7r7r<xa Hippocr., fut. pass. J-L-7rh<x8fJ<roJ-La< Aesch., 1rXEKr6s Aesch. 'II'w (1rXw-, 7r<f-, 1r'l>.v-, 503, 607) sail (on the contraction see 397): 11'Evo-op.a.< Or 'II'E\JCTOVfJ-CL< (540, 806), 'II'E\JCTCL, 11''II'E\JKCL, '71''II'E\JCTf1CL< (489 d), '71'evo-Tos. l1rEV<r87Jv is late. Epie is also 1r'helw, Ion. and poetic 1rXww: 7r'hriJa-oJ-La<, ~7rwa-a, 2 aor. ~1rwv (Epie, 688), 7r<!7r'hwKa, 1r'hwr6s. Att. by-form
11'<-11'i-a-Kw (1r-)

529.

7r<Hw.
'11'f]nw ( 7rhrJ-y-, 1r'ha-y-) strike, in prose often comp. w. fi~, l1rl, Kara : -1rXf]sro, -'II''IJ~a., 2 perf. 'II''II''I')ya., '71''71''IJYf'-a.t, 2 aor. pass. 'II'fJY'I'J" but in r.omp. al ways -E'II'clY'IJ" (<~, Kara), 2 fut. pass. 'II''IJ'P]CTof'-a.< and K-11'a.yf]crof1-a.<, fut. perf. '71'E'II'f]~of'-a.<, Ka.Ta.-'11''IJKTos. 2 aor. redupl. (f)7r7rhrJ)'ov Hom., mid . .,.,_ 1rXf}-yero Hom., l7rXf}x8rJv poetic and rare, -e7rf}-yrJv Hom. 'l'huc. 4. 125 has K-1r'hf}-yvva-8ac (7rXf}-yvf1-t). In pres., imperf., fut., and aor. act. Att. uses .,..,.,..,."', .,.a,(w for the simple verb, but allows the compounds lK7rf}rrw, 7r<7r'hf}rrw. In the perf. and pass. the simple verb is used. (III.) 'JT''vw ( 1r'hvv-) wash: 'II'vvw, 1r'va., 'II''II'Vfi-O.L ( 491 ), -.V8rJv Ion. (pro b. also Att.), 1rvTos, 1r'Avr6s Ion. Fut. mid. ~K-'II'vvoilf1CL< as pass. (808). (III.) 1rXriJ"' sail: see 1rw. 1rvw( 1rveu-, 11'v<r-, 1rvu-, 503, 607) 1eathe, blow, often cornp. w. vci, lv, ~, l?rl, <rvv:

APPENDIX: LIBT OF VERBS

713

'l!'veucrop.a.L ( 540) and -1rveucrop.a.L (806), ~11'veucra., -11'11'veuKa.. Epie also 1r~Elw. From ~a-1rvt!w take breath: 2 aor. imper. lipr11'VV< X 222. See 1rvii-. 'R'viY"' ( 7rV'Y-, 1rvq-) choke, usu. corn p. w. d.1r6 : -1rvCf., (14 7 c), -'R'vLfa., 'li''R'vtyp.a., -E'II'VL'{1JV 1 -'R'vLyf]crop.a... 'n'vii- to be vigorous in mind or in body: Epie forms lipr7rviiro, d.p.~7rv601}v (v. 1. -1rvv~87Jv), 1r1rviip.at am wise, 7rE7rviip.vos wise, plup. 1r1rviirro. Often referred tO 7rVEW or 7r!VV<T KW. 'R'o&o> desi1e, miss: 'R'o6f]a-"' or 'R'o6rrop.a.L (806), 'l!'66t]rra. or 'l!'o6ecra. (488 b). Ali other forms are late. 'R'ov"' labour, in early Greek 1rovop.ru: regular, but 1rovrrw and 1r6verra in MSS. of Hippocr.; Doric 1rovclw. 1rop- (and 1rpw-) give, allot: 2 aor. lf1ropov poetic, 2 aor. inf. 1rmopiv (in sorne MSS. 7rE7rapiv) Pind. to show, perf. pass. 1r1rpwra< it is fatecl, 1] 1rE1rpwp.v7J (arra) fate. Poetie. 'R'piTT"' ( 1rpi'Y-) do: .,.pi~.,, 11'piifa., 2 perf. 'II'11'piixa. (pro b. late) have done, 1r'R'piiya. have ja1ed (well or ill) and also have done, 'II''II'piiyfl-a.L, 'll'pix6tJv, fut. pass. '11'piix6f]rrop.a.L, fut. perf. 'II'E'II'pi~op.a.L, 'll'piiKros. Fut. mid. 'R'p~op.a.L is rarely pass. (809). Ion. 1rp1Jrrrrw, 1rp1J~w, etc. (III.) 1rpiiUv"' (1rpiiv-) soothe: 1rpi\Jva., 'R'piiilv6tjv. (III.) 1rp1rw mn conspicuous: 1rpif;w poe tic. Impersonal1t'p1t'eL, 11'p.jteL, 'R'pe.jte. 7rpta- btty, only 2 aor. mid. 'R'pL6.Jl1JV (p. 138). Other tenses from wvop.a.L. 'R'pt., saw: 1rptcra., 'R''R'p:crp.a.L (489 c), 'R'pfrr91Jv, 1rpoi'rrrrop.at ( 7rpoK-, cp. 1rpol~ gift) : pres. in simple only in Archilochus: fut. Kara-7rpol~op.at Aristoph. (Ion. Kara1rpoi'~op.a< ). (III.)
1't'TO..Loo

St?..l-mble :

11'TO.LO"'ro1 "ll"TO.L<Ta., ~'J'I'TO.U<O., 8.-'J'I'TO.LCT'TOS.

'I!'T6.p-vvp.a.L ( 1rrap-) sneeze: 2 aor. ~'ll'ra.pov; 1 aor. -rrrapa and 2 aor. pass. i1rrclp7Jv Aristotle. (IV.) 'R'rf]a-a-"' (7rT1JK-, 1rraK-) cower: 'II'TTJ~<l, ~'II'TtJXa.; 2 aor. part. Kara-7rraKwv Aeseh. From 1rra- Hom. has 2 aor. dual Kara-,.r1Jr7Jv (688) and 2 perf. part .,..,,.T1JWS. Ion. and poetie also 1rrwrrrrw ( 1rrwK-). (III.) 'R'TLTTO> (1rrtrr-) pound: 1rnrra Il dt., 'II'EpL-'II'TL<rJl<lL Aristoph., 7rEpt-E7rrlrr81}v late A tt. ( 489 e ). Not found in elassie prose. (III.) 'n'ria-a-"' ( 1rrvx-) fold usu. comp. in prose w. &.va, 1repl : -71'Tuf.,, -'II'Tufa., -'II'Tuyp.a.., -E'II'rux91Jv, 2 aor. pass. -e1rr'Y1JV Hippocr., 1rrvKr6s Ion. (III.) 'R',.;i., ( 1rrv-, 1rr-) spit: Ka.r-'II'Tucra., Ka.r6.-'l!'rva-ros. Hippoer. has 'lrTrrw, 7rrurr81Jv. =-v-6-civop.a.L ( 1reve-, 1rv8-) learn, inquire : 'II'Eucrop.a.L (for 1rev8rrop,a,), 7rEV<Top.at A. Prom. 990, 2 aor. 'll'u06p.t]V, 'II''II'ucrp.a.t, 'II'Eurrros, <ivcl-7rV<TTo! Hom. Hom. has 2 aor. opt. redu pl. .,..,.,..{;Ootro. 1re8op,a< is poetic. (IV.)
palvw (pa-, pav-, 523 h, perhaps for pao-v~w) SJJ1'inkle: pavw, eppiiva, l!ppct<Tp,a<, (489 h), ppclv07Jv. Apparently from pao- come Epie aor. l!pct<Trra, Epie perf. ppcloara< and plup. ppcloaro. l'erf. ppavrat Aesch. Ion., poetic. (III. IV.) palw strike: palrrw, l!ppa<rra, ppalrr81}v ( 489 e ). Fut. mid. as pass. ota-ppalrr<rrOat fl 355. Poetie, mainly Epie. p6.'11'-TO> (pa<j>-) stitch : 6.'11'o-pp6..jt.,, ppa..jta., ppa.p.a., 2 aor. pass. pp6.<j>1Jv, pa'l!'ros. (II.) parrw (pa'Y-) throw flnwn (he pres. for 6.p6.rrw) : fup-p6.f.,, pp<J4;!l. (III.) p~!;w (rpey-~w, 511) do: p~w, l!pe~a (less often gppe~a), aor. pass. part. pexOels, li-peKros. Poetic. Cp. l!pow. (III.)

714

APPKNDIX: LIST OF VERBS

{>iw (peu-, pf-, pu-, and pue-) flow (on the contraction in Att. see 397) : puf]crof1a. 806 (2 fut. pass. as act. ; pd;<rowu rare in A tt.), ppv1Jv (2 aor. ; pass. as act. ; lfppw<ra rare in A tt.), ppvT)Ka., pur6< and peu<rreo< poetic. peu<rofJ.a< Aristotle. p 11 - stem of ~p1JKO., ''P1Jf10.L, ppfJ91Jv, pt]9f)crof1a.L, Elpf)crof1a.<. See erpw. pf)-y-vlif1 (P'f/"h for fP1J'Y-, pwy-, pay-) break, in prose mostly in comp. w. v, !it : -PfJtw, pp'Jta., 2 perf. -Eppw-ya. am broken, 2 aor. pass. pp.-yt]v, 2 fut. pass. -pa.-yf)crop.a.; -pp1J'"ff1.a< and -eppf,x011v Ion., p1JKT6< Hom. (IV.) pyw (Py-, pye-, 485) shudde1: pyf,<rw, ppi'"f1J<ra and pty1J<ra, 2 perf. lfppya aR

pres.

Chiefly poetic.

{>;;-y6w shive1. On the contraction in the pres. see 398: py<fJ<rw, ppiyw<ra. pt'lrTw (p1f'c, pt1f'-) and p;;'lr-T-w (485 d) throw: {>tlj!w, pp;;lj!a., 2 perf. pp;;q,a., pp;;f1p.a., ppt<!>9'Jv, 2 aor. pass. pplcp1Jv, fut. pass. .'!ro-pp;;q,Gf)crop.a., pi1f'ro< Soph. (II.) po<f>w sup up: {>o<!>f)crw and pocpf)crop.a.L (806), ppo<i>'lcra..

(Epie also pvofJ.a<, rare in Att.) for fp!ofJ.a<, defend: pV<rofJ.a<, pp<rCf1.7]v, and pu<raf1.7}V 0 20, pro<. Athematic f01ms are lfp(p)ro, 3 pl. p6aro, p<rOa<. See lfpvfJ.a<. Chiefiy poetic. pu7t'6w soil: Epie perf. part. pepu7t'wf1.Vo< (442 b.D.). Cp. pv7t'w am dirty. p<fJv-v!fJ.L (pw-) st1engthen: 1r-ppwcra., ppwp.a. (imper. ppwcro fmewell, part. ppwp.vos st1ong), pp&cr9t]v (489 e), 8.-ppwcr-ros. (IV.)
pVofJ.a< <ralvw (<rav-) jawn ~~pon: lf<r1Jva. Poetic, prob. also in prose. (III.) <ralpw ( <r7]p-, <rap-) sweep : 2 perf. crcr1Jpa. grin : lf<r7]pa Soph. (III.) cra.'!rltw (<ra.7f'<'Y'Y-) sound the tT~tmpet: crn'Ir<)'tCJ. (also crn'IrLta. ?). (III.) <ra.6w (cp. <rafo< safe) smH!: <ra<fJ<rw, l<raw<ra, l<ra<fJ07]v. Epie and poetic (but not A tt.). Epie pres. subj. <r01J<, <r61J, <r6w<r<, which editors change to <rai&< (<r'f'<,

Forq&.w pres. imper. and 3 s. imperf. editors usu. read <rov ( = <rao-e ), but sorne derive the form froin Aeolic <rCWfJ.<. Cp. cr<itw. crnTTw (<ray-) pack, load: cra.~a., ircrCJ.)'f1CJ.<. (III.) <raw sift: lf<r7]<ra., <r<r7]<rf1.a<. New Ion. Here belong perl. lfrr1JfJ.O.< and Sa.-r-r.w Att. for <a-<r<rw. crj3v-vip. ( rT{Je- for <r{!e<r-, 523 f. N. 1) extinguish, usu. corn p. w. 7t'6 or Ka.r: crj3crw, crj3Ecra., crj31JKO. intrans. have gone out, crj3cr9'1v (489 c), 2 aor. pass. li<rf!1J" in trans. went out ( 415, 756 a), crj3f)crop.a., lf<r{Je<rfJ.a< Aristotle. 819. (IV.) cr!3w 1evere, usu. crj3of1a.L: aor. pass. as act. lcr<!>91Jv, <re1f'r6< Aesch. CTE(w shake ." trELO"ro, O"UC"'a., crO"ELKa., a-o-ELCTJJ.O.I. ( 48!-) C), o-eLo-9T)V, CTEUTT6S. <revw (<ru-, <Tv-) ~wge, dTive on, mid. TllSh: I<r<reva (543 a. D.) and <rea, ~<r<rufJ.aL as pres. hasten, <r(<r)V071v Tushed, 2 aor. mid .. l<r(<r)Vf1.1JV 1ushed (~<r<rvo, l!<r<ruro or <rvro, <rvwvo<, 688), 1f'l-<r<ruro< Aesch. Mostly poetic, esp. tragic. Here belongs a7f'-<F<FVii. (or U1f'-f<FCfOUa.) he is gone in Xen. Probably from (TQfOfJ.aL (<r6o<, dol!< motion), or from <r6of1.a<, come dramatic <rofJ.a< (Doric <rwfJ.a<), <rol!<rOe (ind. and imper.), <rovvTa<, <ro, <rov<rOw. I<'or <Tera< (S. Trach. 645), often regarded as from a form EfJ.a.<, <rora< mfty be read. cr1Jp.a.Cvw ( <r7]f1.av-, cp. <r'i)!ka sign) show: CT'Jp.a.vw, crf)p.t]va. ( t<rf7f1.ii.va not good A tt. though in MSS. of X en.), crecrfJJLacrp.a.L ( 48\l h), lcrTJf16.v9t]v, 'lr<-CT'Jf10.V9f)crof1a.<, a-<rf7f.LU.PTO< Horn., 7f'L-<F7}f1.ai'TO< Aristotle. (III.) crf)1rw ( <r7]7f'-, <ra7f'-) cause to 1'0t : 2 perf. crcrt]'~<O. mn !'Otlrm, :3 aor. pass. crn1T"1Jl! '<Ta.os, a-oci}s), ua4} (ud.'f', uao, O"oci)), a-a.WO't (o-UwO"t, u6wa-1.).

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

715

rotted as intranfl., 2 fut. pass. Ka.'T"a.-o-a.'lrijo-ofL' <rfp(w Aesch., al<rrwp.a< Aristotle, <rrrrrrbs Aristotle. 81D. o-i:y.ro am si! f-Ut: o-i:yijo-Ofl-O.L (80fl), o-fy1}o-a., o-eo-ty1}Ka., o-ecrty1}fl-O.L, cri:yiJ91Jv, o-i:y1J91jo-op.a.<, fut. perf. o-eo-i:yijo-op.o.L, <J"frJrfO< poeiic. <Jtvop.a< ( <J<v-) injure, very rare in A tt. prose : <rv~<Jol'-a< (?) Hippocr., l<rvai'-'YJ" Hdt. (III.) o-<w,..O.w am silent: o-LW1rijo-op.o.< (806), o-O>,.Tto-a., o-eo-<ci>,.1JKO., cnw,.iJ01Jv, o-to>1r1J9ijcrofl-<, o-Lo>11"1'J'T"os. o-Ka.,._,..., (<JKa<j>-) dig, often comp. w. mra: o-K.ljJw, -crKa.o/a., 2 perf. -o-Ka.cpa., ~crKfl-fl-O.<, 2 aor. pass. -eo-Kncp1Jv. (li.) o-KeS<iv-vp.t ( <rKEoa- ), rarely o-~<Sa.vviiw, scatter, often corn p. w. rrb, oui, Kan<: -crKeSoo ( 539 c), -eo-KSa.o-a, o-KSa.o-1'-a.' ( 489 c ), o-Ke&6.o-01Jv, o-Ke&a.cr,.6s. Fut.

poetic. By-forms: Epie KeMvvvl'-': Kiia<r<Ja, heoa<rOnv; main! y poetie <JKlo-VrJI'-' and <rKlo-va11-a<; poe tic and Ion. idli-VrJI'-' and Klo-val'-a<. (IV.) <JKw (a-Ke-, a-KTJ-) d1y up: pres. late, Epie aor. g<JKrJa (a-Ka-; as if from tTKaw) made d1y, 2 aor. intrans. rr-t!tTKrJv (687) Aristoph., ga-KrJKa am dried up Ion. and Doric. (III.) uK1r-'T"Ofl-O.< ( tTK'11'-) view : o-Ko/ofloa.L, o-Ke1jl6.f1-1JV, ~o-KEfLfl-O.< ( sometimes pass.), fut. perf. crKijJop.<, pass. <rKE1r'T"os. For pres. and imperf. (Epie, poetic, and New Ion.) A tt. gen. uses uKo1rl, crK61rouv, crKo,.oiifl-a.<, o-Ko,.oufl-TtV A or. pass. tTKpfhJv Hippocr. (II.) crKfj,._,.., (<JKTJ'11'-) p1op, gen. comp. w. l1rl in prose: -crKfjo/w, -<rK1Jo/a., -crK1Jp.p.a., -EcrKfJ<I>91'Jv. By-form a-Klp:irrw Pind., Hippocr. (II.) <JKlo-v'TJI'-' ( tTK<o-vrJ-, a-K<o-va-) a-Klo-va11-a< scatteJ: mainly poetic for crKEScivvfl-' (IV.) O"K011"w view: good Att. uses only 1)res. and imperf. act. and mid., other tenses are supplkd from O"K1r'T"OfJo<U. a-Ko1T~a-w, etc., are post-classical. crKW11'-'T"w ( <JKW'11'-) je er : o-Kwo/op.a. (806), <rKwo/a., EO"Kwcp91'Jv. (II.) *a-11-aw (crp.oo) smeaT (<JI'-a-, "1'-'TJ-, 394, 641) Ion., Comic: pres. cr!'-fis, O"fl-fl, <rfJoij'T"a.t, etc., ~O"p.1Jo-a., la-1'-'TJITal'-rJV Hdt. By-form a-11-~X"' chiefly Ion.: II<JI'-'T/~a, otec!I'-1Jx8rJv (?) Aristoph., veb-a-1'-rJKTos Hom. <Jol'-a' hasten : see a-euw. o-1r<iw ( a-1ra- for 0'7raa--) dTaw, often w. va, 1r6, o<a, Kara : -cr1r6.crw ( 488 a),
<JKeoa<Jw

and Ion.

CT'It'Q.O"'O.)

6.v-0'"1T'Cl,KO.,

o-'1t'O.<rtJ-D.L,

-ECT'lT.CT9TJV,

8LO.-O'"'Tt'0.9f}a-ol!-a.L,

dvrl-ff1l'O.ffTOS'

avrt-<J7raa-rlos Hippocr. cr1re!pw ( a-1rep-, G''lra.p-) sow : <T1rEpoo, ~u,.E<pa., cr,.a.pp.a.L, naprbs Soph. (III.)

Soph.,

2 aor. pass. cr,.6.p1Jv,

]JOUI' libation, o-1rv&op.a.L make a treaty: Ko.Ta.-cr1re!crw (for a-1revii-a-w 100)' ECT1rELO"<t, ~O"'II'EL<rfl-O.L. 0"1rOuS<itw am eage?': 0"1rouScicrop.o.L (806), ~cr1rovSa.cra., o-1rov8a.Ka., cr1rovSa.cr(J-<1< cr1rouSa.o-'1"6S, -'T"os. 512. (III.) a-rajw (a-ra-y-) drop: l!a-rafa, v-t!tTra-yfJ.a<, l7r-ea-rax8rJv, cr'T"a.K'T"OS. Fut. a-ra<Jw late, a-ra~<Ji.a< Theocr. Ion. and poetic, rare in prose. (III.) a-relf3w ( a-r<Lj3-) tread, usu. only pres. and imperf. : Kar-a-ret'fa., a-ret7Tr6s. Poetic. From a-n{J<-, or from a by-form <Jrt{Jt!w, comes r!a-rlfJ'TJI'-a.' Soph. a-relxw ( <Jretx-, <Jnx-) go: rrept-a-ret~a, 2 aor. l!a-nxov. Poetic, Ion. cr'T"}..w ( <Jre-, G'ra-) se nd, in prose often comp. w. 1r6 or hrl: a-rew poe tic, <r'T"ELa., -o-,.a.Ka., crTafl-L, 2 aor. pass. uTU'Jv, -crTa.fJo-ol'-a.' (III.) cr'T"Evcitw (a-r eva-y-) groan, often comp. w. clva: -a-r<vci~w poe tic, u'T"va.~a., a-T eva-

o-1rv&w

716

APPE;-.;DIX: LIST OF VERBS

Kr6s and -rlos poetic. By-forms : Epie and poelic ITr<vaxw, Epie ITrevaxltw, poetic urovaxlw, mainly Epie and poetic ITrvw. a-Tpyw (ITrep-y-, ~Trop-y-) love: a-Tpi;w, a-Tepf;o., 2 perf. ~ITrop-ya Hdt., a-TepKTos, ITrepKros Soph. ITreplw (usu. :rro-a-Tepw in prose) dep1ive: a-Tepfia-w, a-Tpl'ja-o., -Ea-Tpi']Ka., <rTpT)p.a.L, a-Tepfi9TJv. Aor. ITrpeiTa Epie, 2 aor. pass. o1Trp7Jv poetic. Pres. mid. .'l!'o-a-Tepoi!p.o. sometimes = am dep1ived of; a-Tepfia-o!La. may be fut. mid. or pass. (809). Connected fonns: a-Te pla-Kw deprive (rare in pres. except in mid.) and <rTpop.o. have been dep1ived of, am without w. perf. force, 528, 1887. urev- in ITrera<, urevra,, ITrero a;O!nn, pledge one' s self, threaten. Poetic, mainly Epie. a-Tltw ( <TTL"f-) priclc: a-T(i;w, <Tnyp.o.. ~ur,~a Hdt., ur<Krbs Soph. (III.) CTTop-vp. (~Trop-, <Trope-) SJn'e<ul out, in prose often w. Kara, 1rapa, ITvv, 1r6 (in prose usu. CTTp<f>vvp.): 'l!'o.po.-a-Topcil Aristoph., a-Topea-o., Kar-e<TropIT87Jv Hippocr. (489 e). Fut. ITropITw in late poetry (ITropeiTw Theocr.). (IV.) a-Tpcj>w ( <Trpe<f>-, urpo<f>-, ITrpa<f>-) tuTn, often in camp. in prose w. va, 1r6, o<a, etc.: -a-Tp>jtw, ea-Tpe>jta., <TTpa.p.p.o., CTTpcj>9TJv (in prose only a-Tpecj>901, a-Tpecj>9els), usu. 2 aor. pass. as intrans. <TTp6.<!>TJv, cl.va.-a-Tpa.<!>fia-op.o., a-Tpe'II'Tos. l'rose bas KO.T-Ea-Tpe>Jt6.tJ.'lV 2 perf. v-ITrpo<f>a trans. is doubtful (Comic), aor. pass. l<Trpa<f>87Jv Doric, Ion. a-Tp<i>v-vp. ( urpw-) spTead out: V'II'O-CTTp<i>a-w, ~<Trpwua Tragic, Hdt., E<rTp"'fl-o., urpwr6s poetic. Cp. a-Topvi (IV.) uru-yiw (~Tru-y-, ITrv-ye-, 485) hate: tiTrV-y7JITa (l!ITrv~a Hom. made hateful), 2 aor. Kar-ITrv-yov Epie (546 D.), 7r-EITrV-y7JKa Hdt., l1Trv-yf,87Jv, fut. mid. iJ"rv-yf,uop.a< as pass. (808), urv-y71r6s. Ion. and poetic. uru<f>ii':-itw ( ITrv<f>eXL-y-) dash: t<JTv<f>{h,~a. Mostly Epie and Hippocr. (III.) a-pLTTw (<Tp<-y-y-) pipe, whistle: <T'pl;a.. By-form <Tpltw. (III.) a-'pw ( uvp-) draw, in comp. in prose es p. w. 1rb, lita, 1rl: -a-pa., -a-a-upKCL, -uluvpf.a< and -uvpros Aristot.le. (Ill.) a-.pO.;>,.;>..., ( <T</>aX-) t1ip up, deceive: a-.pa.ll.<il, <T<!>TJll.o., a-.pa.fJ.a.L, 2 aor. pass. a-<j>6.T)V, <T<!>o.ll.fi<TOfJ.O.L. (III.) <T<!>6.nw ( u<f>a-y-) slay, often in comp. w. a1r6, Kara : ~r.PO.~c.o, <T<!>etta., <T<!>o.yp.a., 2 aor. pass. -eCT<j>cl.yT)v, -<T<j>o.yfi<TOfLO.L, lu<f>ax87Jv Ion., poetic, u<f>aKr6s poetic. By-form u<f>a!w (so al ways in Trag. ). 516. (III.) ~rx.O.tw eut open, let go : .'I!'O-<r)(6.<Tw, <TX. o.<To. Trag. ( <TX.o.CT6.fJ.TJV Comic), luxau871v Hippocr. From <TX 6.w co mes imperf. <TX wv Aristoph. 512. (III.) uxe8e'iv : see X c.o. <T~tw (<Tw- and uwL-, uws safe), later <T<i>tw, save; many forms come from <Ta6w: <r<i><Tw (from uawiTw) and <rw<il (A tt. inscr.), e<Tw<To. (from luawua w. recessive ace.) and <T<t><Ta. (Att. inscr.), <T<TwKo. (from *uuawKa) and <T<T<t>KCL (?), <T<Twp.a. rare (from *ueiJ"awp.a<) and <Ta-<t><TtJ.a. (Mss. ul<Twup.aL), <T<i>O'lv (from l<Taw87Jv), a-w9fi<TofJ.o., <T<t><TTos (Mss. ITW<J'ros). By-forms: Epie <Tww (cp. uws) and <Ta.6w (cp. ua os), q. v. 512. (III.) ,'a-y- seize: 2 aor. part. rera-ywv Hom. Cp. Lat. tango. ra-vuw (for rf-vvw, 35 b; cp. Te(vw from rev-) stTetch, mid. ra-vvp.a< (734): ravuw (539 D.) and -ravuuw (?), lravvu(u)a, reravvup.a<, (489 c), havviT87Jv; fut. pass. ravv<J'<Top.a< Lyric. Poetic, rare in New Ion. (lV.)

API'E:\DIX: LIST OF VERBS

TO.pnTTIII

717

(rapax-).diSlU1'b ,' TO.ptLflll, Tapa.!;a., TETnpa.yp.a.L, TO.ptLX9'1JV, Ta.ptLfOfl-O.L a8 pass. (808). Epie 2 perf. in trans. rhpTJxa am disturbed. Cp. &pi..TIIl. (III.) TtLTTIII (ra-y-) aT1'ctnge ,' TtLflll, Ta.!;a., 2 perf. TTO.XO., TTa.yp.a.L, T6.X9'1JV, 'I1'L-TO.x91J<rop.a.L, fut. perf. ,-e,-cl.!;op.a.L, 2 aor. pass. ini)'TJ (?) Eur ., TO.KTos, -Tos. (III.) ratj>- (for Oatj>-, 125 g; cp. ra</Jos and Oa~J-{Jos) astonish: 2 aor. ha<flov poetic, 2 perf. r.!OTJ11"a am astonished Epie, Ion., plup. ln01j1rea. d-y-yw wet: r.!-y~w, i!re-y~a, h.!-yxOTJ 11are in prose. ,-e(vlll (nv-, ra- from r~:-, 35 b) stretch, in prose usu. comp. w. va, clml, ta, .!~, 1rapa, 1rp6, etc.; Tevw, -TELVa., -TTo.Ko., TTo.p.o.L, -e,-6.0'1)v, -Ta.O!]uop.o.L, -To.Tos, rar6s Aristotle. Cp. ravvw an cl nralvw. (III.) TEKp.o.(pop.O.L ( rEK!J-ap-) judge, injeT ,' TEKp.o.poiip.o.L, TEKfl-'l)pcl.p.'I)V, TEKfl-O.pTOS Comic, T<K!J-apros Hippocr. Poetic TEK!J-alpw limit, show: TK!J-TJpa. (III.) TEW ( TEE- fOl' TEEff-; Cp. TO r{l\os end) finish.' TEw, TE<rO., TETEKO., TETEO"fl-O.L ( 489 c), TE<rO'IJv, 'lrL-TEeo-Tos. Fut. re<rw rare in prose, 7ro-ree<r81}<ro!J-a< Aristotle. Epie also reelw. rw (re -, ra -) accomplish: i!reta Pind. ti.vo.-Tw cause to Tise, 1'ise: ti.v-TELo.; v-Top.o.L (iv-Tw poetic) cmmnand: v-ETELU.p.'l)v, v-TTo.p.a.L; f71"<-rw enjoin, rise poetic: 71"-TELa; l-rr-ava-rw usu. Tise, poetic and Ion. (III.) re~J-- (in T!J--) find: Epie redupl. 2 aor. i!rer~J-ov and rr11-ov. Tp.-vw ( re~J--, ra~J--, r~J-TJ-) eut: ,-ep.O>, 2 aor. TEp.ov, -TTfl-'IJKO. ( va, a1r6), TTfl-'IJfl-O.L, Tp.i]&'l)v, fut. perf. -TETp.l]<rop.o.L ( clrr6, l, Tfl-'IJTos. ra~J-vw Doric and Epie. r11-w Epie, 2 aor. i!ra11-ov, Doric, Ion., and poetic, T!J-TJ81J"ol1-a' Aristotle, T/1-TJr6s poetic, Aristotle. Cp. also rp.fJ-yw. (IV.) Tp'11'w (rep1r-, rap1r-, rpa1r-) amuse: ,-p,Yw, Tep>Jto., Tp<j>O'I)v (rare in prose) amused myself. Hom. 2 aor. mid. hap7ro!J-TJV and redupl. nrocp1r6p.T]v, Hom. aor. pass. lrap</JOTJv and 2 aor. pass. hapTrTJv (s1ibj. rpa1r1}owv; Mss. rap7relo!J-<>). All aor. forms in Horn. with a have the older rneaning satisfy, satiate. rep<raivw (np<r-av-, cp. tor1eo from tmseo) d1y: rip<rT}va trans. Epie. (III. IV.) rip<ro/1-a' become dry. Mainly Epie. 2 aor. pass. hip<r7Jv as intrans. became dry. rera)'WV: see TOC)'-. rerlTJ!J-a< Hom. perf. : see TL<-. rrP,ov: see re/1-- T<-Tpo.Cv-w (rer pa v-, and rep-, rpTJ-) bore: ETETpa.vo. and ~TP'IJ<ro., TTP'!Jfl-O.L. Fut. o<a-rerpavw Hdt., aor. lrirpT}va Epie. By-form ropiw, q.v. Late presents rl-rpTJ-1-'', r<-rpa-w. (III. IV.) revxw (revx-, rvx-, TVK-) prepme, make (poetic) : rev~w, i!rev~a, 2 aor. rhvKov Hom., 2 aor. mid. rervK6!J-'YJV Hom. (as if from *re6Kw), 2 perf. r.!revxa as pass. in rerwxws made M 423, rrv-y!J-at often in Horn. =am (3 pl. nnvxara< and plup. herevxaro Hom.), fut. perf. nrev~o!J-a' Hom., aor. pass. hvxOTJv Hom. (hevxOTJv Hippocr.), v. a. rvKr6s Hom. Hom. rrv-y/1-rJ.< and rvxOTJ often mean happen, hit (cp. rerVXTJKa, i!rvxov from Tl!yxcl.vw). By-form r<-rv<rKo/1-a' Epie. ri) he1e! talee ! in Hom., often referred to ra- (cp. relvw, teneo), is prob. the instrumental case of the demonstr. stem ro-. It was however regarded as a verb, and the pl. rfire formed by Sophron. Ti] Kw ( TTJK-, raK-) melt: Tij(;w, T'J~o., 2 per. TT'IJKO. mn nwlted, 2 aor. pass. as intrans. T6.K'I)v melted, T'IJKTos. Aor. pass. h!]xO'IJv 1.vas mrUe rare.

718

APl'E.i\DlX: LIST OF VEIWS

ne-, in Hom. ~ perf. rer<7JWs troubled, dual mid. rerlwOov are troullled, mid. part. TTt1Jf1.VOS. TC-9tJ-I-" (0"1-, Oe-) place, put: 9f)uw, 9fjK11 (iniiection 755), 2 aor. 9ETov, etc. (756), T9fjKO. (762), T9ELJ.1.11' (but USU, instead KEJ.l.l1', 767), T9t)v, TE9f)<rOJ.l.0.'' 9ETos, -Tos. For infiection see 416, for synopsis 419, for dialectal forms 747 ff. T(KTW (for TL-TK-W j TK-, TOK-) beget, b1ing forth." TtOJ.l.l1' (806), 2 aor. TEKOV, 2 perf. TToKa.. Fut. r~w poetie, reKOfl-a< rare and poetic, aor. pass. hlx87Jv

poetie (late) .
rlHw ( r<-) pluclc: nw, ~ra, rlrtfJ.a<, lrlM7Jv. Mostly poetic. (III.) nvatTtTw swing: often w. ota: rtvai;w ( -r<vai;ofJ.a< reflex. or pass. ), hlva!;a, rerlva-yp.a<, h<vax01Jv. Mostly poetie. (III.) -rtvw (rfL-, n-) pay, expiate, often comp. w. 11'o, ~: mid. (poetic) talee payment, avenge : TELcrw, TELcra., TTELKet., -TTELO'"JJ-O.L ( 489 c), -ETELCTS'l')v, &.1ro-THO'"Tos (Hom. 11-rros unpaid). The spelling with et is introduced on the authority of inscriplions; the MSS. have ritTw, etc. Hom. has rivw from *rlvfw, alw rlw. Poe tic and Ion. Connected is rel-vu fl-a' (Mss. n-) avenge myself: reltTop.a<, rfLITUf1.1Jv (rare in Att. prose). Cp. rlw. (IV.) n-ralvw (nrav-, i.e. rav- redupl.) stretch: lrlr7Jva. Hom. Cp. TE(vw. (III.) .,.,. .,.pti>-<rKw (rpw-) wound: 1'pti>crw (w. Kara in prose), Tpwcra., 1'1'pWfL11', 1'p0091Jv, Tpwlh]crop.a. ( rpwtTop.a.< as pass. M 66), rpwrbs Hom. Epie rpww is rare. (V.) rlw and rtw (relw ?) ho1WU1'." rtr1w, grr1a (7rpo-rir1is S. Ant. 22), rhp.at, li-nros. Mainly Epie. In the pres.. A tt. has r, Hom. or r. Cp. -r!vw. -ra.-, r7]-, raa- endure: rkljiTop.a< (806), lra.ar1r1a Epie, 2 aor. l!r7Jv (687), rr.TJKa usu. as pres., 2 perf. (athematic) -rrafJ.<v, etc. (705), T7Jrbs. Poetic, rare in prose, which uses 1'0JJ.nw. T!'-TJ"f.W (rf1.7J"Y-, Tfl-a"Y-) eut: rp.-f}~w, grp.7Ji;a., 2 aor. t-TtJ-a-yov, 2 aor. pass. Tfl-ct"Y1JV. Poetic for Tp.vw. -ropw (rop-, rope-, 485) pierce: rop-l}r1w, and (redupl.) rerop-f}tTw utter in apiercing tone Aristoph., h6p7JITa., 2 aor. l!ropov. Cp. 1'E1'pa.Cvw. Mainly Epie. ror- l!it, ji11d in t11'-roiTtTe Pind. Tp'Il'w (rpe1r-, rpo1r-, rpa.11'-), turn, mid. flee: Tp>jfw, Tpe>jfa., mid. Tpe>jf6.JJ.t)V usu. put to flight, 2 aor. mid. Tpa'11'6p.tJv tunwd or jted (intrans. or reflex.; rarely pass.), 2 perf. 1'1'pocf>a. (and 1'1'pa.cf>a. ?, rare), 1'1'p11J.l.J.l.l1', Tp<l>9'1v fied or was turned (rare in A tt.), 2 aor. pass. hp6.m1v usu. in trans., 1'pE7r1'os, -rperrros Aristotle. In Att. 1'pa.11'6p.1Jv was gen. displaced by TPcl'~~'fjV. -rp7rw New Ion., Dorie, 2 aor. l!rpa1rov Epie and poetic, aor. pass. hpa<fJ01Jv Hom., Hdt. 7p1i'w has six aorists. Cp. 55-1 c, 595, 596. Hom. has also rpa1rlw and rpo1rw. -rp.pw (rpe<fl-, rpo</J-, rpa<P-; for Opeq,-, etc., 125 g) support, nourish: 6p>j.w, 6pe>j.a., 2 perf. 1'1'pocf>a., 1'9pa.JlofLO.', 9pcf>6'1v very rare in Att. prose, usu. :3 aor. pass. 1'pncf>1Jv, Tpa.<!>f)crof'oa.L, 9pm1'os. Fnt. mid. 9p>jfoJJ.a.' often pass. (808). rpa<flw Doric, 2 aor. Epie hpaq,ov yrew up, was nou.1ished. Cp. 595. TPX"' (rpq- from Opex-, 1~5 g, anrl opatJ--) Tttn: 8pa.p.oJJ.a.' (806), 2 aor. 5pa.fJ.ov, -5e8p6.JJ.'1Ka. (Kara, 1repl, r11h), 'lt'.-8e8p6.J.1."11'-a.', '~~'"P-9peK1'os. rpaxw Doric, ci'lt'o-llp~oJLM Aristopll., I!IJp<~a rare and poetic, 2 perf. -oN!pop.a (vci, 71'1) poetic. Poe tic opap.w. (Vl.) Tpw (rpe- for rper1-; cp. Lat. terreo for te1seo) tTemble: E1'peua. (488 a), li-rpetT-ros poetic. Hare in prose. -rptj3w ( r pf3-, rp<f3-) ntb ; Tpt>j.w, 1'p~>j.a., 2 perl'. 7'1'p<f>a., 1'1'P~f'op.a., 1'pt.p91jv, but

<f>pw)

APPE:\DIX: LIST OF VERBS

719

nsu. 2 aor. pass. Tp(~!]v, -TpL~~CTOfLa.L (i;, Kan!,), fut. perf. 1rLTETpilfiofLa.L, li-rptrrros Hom. Fut. mid. -rpi>Jiof!-O.L :tlso as pa~R. (ROS). rpilw (rpt-y-, rpi-y-) sqneak, ehir}J: :2 perf. rhpi-ya as pres. (part. nrpi-ywns, rerpi-yv7a, Hom.). Ion. and poetic. (III.) rpx6w exhaust, waste: pres. poet. and rare, usu. comp. w. i;: -Tpx&>crw, ETpUXW<ra., TETpiixwfLa., irpxw81J Hippocr. Also Tpxw: rp;w (147 e) Hom.; and rpvw: Tp(Jw Aesch., TTpfLa.L, li-rpros poetic and Ion. . Tpci>yw (rpw-y-, rpa-y-) gnaw: TpC:.~ofLa.L (806), 2 aor. Tpa.yov, 8La.-TTpwyfLa.L, TpwKTos, Kar-rpw;a Hippocr. Tu-y-x-cl.vw (Teux-, rvx-, rvxe-) hit, happen, obtain: TEv~ofLO.L (806), 2 aor. Tuxov, TETVXIJKO.. Epie also irx1J(fa, 2 perf. n!rEVxa lou. (the same form as from nxw ). rlrv-yp.a< and irx81Jv (from nxw) often have almost the sense of TETVXIJKO. and huxov. (IV.) TV1T-Tw ( rvrr-, rvrrre-) st1ike : TU"IM"~crw, TU1TTT)Tos ; other tenses supplied : aor. 1Tci.Ta.~a. or 1ra.Lcra, perf. 1T1TT)y, 1T1TIJYJ10.L, aor. pass. 1T.~yT)v. ~rv'fa Epie, Ion. and Lyric, ir{nrT1J(Ja Aristotle, 2 aor. ~rv1rov poetic, rhvp.p.at poetic and Ion., 2 aor. pass. h7r1J> poetic, fut. mid. as pass. rv7rr1}(Jop.a<, or 2 fut. pass. rv1r1}'op.a<, Aristoph. Nub. 1879. (II.) TU<f>w ( r<j>-, rv<j>-, for 8<j>-, 8v<j>-, 125 g) raise smoke, smoke : .,-9fLI'-""' 2 aor. pass. as intrans. 1T-ETv<f>'lv, EKTu<f>~crofLa.L Com . .,..,ea.tw tmmt: Tw9cl.crop.a. (806), TC:.9o.cra.. 512. (HL)
'yLO.LVW (v-y ta v-) am in health, rewver health: uyLa.vcil, .Jy(O:va., tJ-y,dv81)P Hippoer.

(III.)
u1T-crx-vol'-a.' ( l(Jx-, a by-form of ix-; (Jx-, (Jxe-) promise: u1To-crx~crofLa.L, 2 aor. u1TECTX6f1T)v, u1T-CTX'lfLO.L. Ion. and poetie usu. vrr-l(Jxol-'"' Cp. xw and tcrxw.

(IV.)
u<f>a.(vw ( v<j>av-) weave: u<f>a.v6l, {l<f>'IJVO., ilcj>a.CTJlO.L ( 489 h), .J<f>cl.v9!]v, u<f>a.vTOS. Hom. also v<j>dw. (III.) ilw rain: ilcrw, V(Ja Pind., Hdt., Aristotle, cj>-CTfLO.L (489 c), D(J81)v Hdt., l\(Jop.at

as pass. (808) Hdt.

rpaelvw (<j>aev-) appear, show: aor. pass. l<j>aaviJ'f}v (w. aa for ae, 643) appared.

Epie.

(III.)

'

<f>a.(v., (<j>av-) show: <f>av6!, <f>'IJva., perf. 1rcj>a.yKa. (rare in good A tt.) have shown, 2 perf. 1rcj>'lva. have appeared, 1Tcj>acrfLa.L ( 489 h), cj>~v9'1v (rare in prose) was shawn, 2 aor. pass. <f>D.v'ljv as intmns. appeared, 2 fut. pass. cj>a.v~CTOfLO.' slwll appeaT; fut. mid. <f>a.vofLaL shall show and shall appear.

On the trans. and intrans. use see 819; for the infiecon of certain tenses see 401 ff. Hom. has 2 aor. iter. <j>tve(Je appeaTed, v. a. li-<j>a,vros; and, from _root <j>a-: <jJte apJleared and fut. perf. rre<jJ-f}(Jerat shall appear. Conneeted fonns -rr<-</Ja(Jw, <j>a.elvw, <j>avrasof.ta.<. (III.) cj>cl.-crKw (<Pa-) say: only pres. and imperf.: see <f>'llfl'- (V.) cj>Et!)ofLa.L ( <j>eto-, <j>di-) spare: cj>elcrofL, cj>ELCTcl.fL'IJV, cj>ELcrTos. Epie 2 aor. mid. redupl. rre<j>di6f.t1J" (448 D.).- Epie fut. 7rE<j>to1}(Jop.at (<PLile-). <j>ev-, <j>v-, <j>a- (for <Pg-, ;)(} b) kill: 2 aor. ~1re<jJvov and rrl<Pvov (part. Kara-1rerpvwv, also aeeented -1rl<j>vwv), perf. mid. 1r<j>ap.a<, fut. perf. 71'<</>-fJ(Jof.ta.<. Epie. Cp. <j>6vos rnurder and Oelvw(8ev-) smite . .ppw ( </Jep-, oi-, ive-, ve-yK- for v-e vEle, 529) bear, carry: fut. otcrw, 1 aor. ~vEy Ka,

720

APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS

2 aor. ~vEyKov, 2 perf. v~voxa., perf. mid. v~vEyJJ.a. (::1 s. -"(Kra< inscr.), aor. pass. ~vx0'1v also intrans., fut. pass. Ka.r-evExOfJo-oJJ.a. and ot<TO~<Top.a., v. a. oto-T6s, -ros. Other A tt. fonus are: o~o-op.a.. fut. mid. and pass. (809), ~veyK6.p.T)v 1 aor. mid., ~veyK6p.T)v 2 aor. mid. (rare: S. O. C. 470). Poetic and dial. forrns are: 2 pl. pres. imper. <j>pT (for <j>t!pere) Epie, 1 aor. imper. o<F< for o<Fov Epie (and Aristoph.), 1 aor. inf. .v-o<Fa< or .v-<;><Fa< (once in Hdt. ), . fut. inf. ot<Fe<v Pind., olG'fJ-<v(a<) Hom., 1 aor. ?jv<<Ka, -afJ-1/V Hom., Hdt., ?jv<Ka Aeol., Dor., etc., 2 aor. ?jve<Kov rare in Hom., perf. mid. lvf}v"'(fJ-a< Hdt., aor. pass. ijvelx871v Hdt., v. a. <j>epr6s Hom., Eur., .v-w<G'ros Hdt. (li.vot<Fros ?).

flee: cf>e..J~oJJ.a.L 806 (cj>e"~op.a., 540, rare in prose), 2 aor. 'II'cj>e"ya., cj>e"Kr6s, -ros. Hom. has perf. act. part. 7r<<f>v~6res as if from a verb <P~w (cp. <f>la flight), perf. mid. part. 11"<</JV'YfJ-vos, v. a. <fJvKr6s. By-form <f>v'Y-'Yrivw, New Ion. and Att. poetry, in comp. in prose. cf>TJ-p.C ( <f>TJ-, <j>a-) say, infl.ected 783 : cj>~o-w, <f>1Jo-a., cf>a.r6s, -ros. Poetical and dial. fonns 783 D. ff. <!>86.-vw ( <f>87!-, <j>Oa-) anticipate : cj>O~o-oJJ.a.L (806), cj>Oa.<Ta., 2 aor. cp91Jv (like ~<Fr 71 v). Fut. <j>Oa<Fw doubtful in Att., 2 aor. mid. part. <j>Oa0 evos Epie. Hom. <j>Oci.vw = *<f>Oavpw. (IV.) cj>OE!pw ( <j>Oep-, <j>Oop-, <j>Oap-) C01'1'Upt: cj>Oepw, cp0ELpa., cp8a.pKa., but usu. 2 perf. 8-cj>Oopa. am 1uinecl (have C01'1'Upted in Att. poetry), cj>Oa.pp.a., 2 aor. pass. lcj>86.p1Jv, 8a.-cj>9a.p~<Top.a., <j>Oapros Aristotle. Fut. o<a-<fJOfp<Fw N 625, ota. <f>Oept!w Hdt. (III.) <j>Olvw ( q,fh-) waste, peTish, mostly poetical and usu. in trans., Epie <j>(Jivw <fJO<vpw): fut. <j>OlG'w poetic (Hom. <j>OiG'w) trans., aor. ~q,O,G'a poetic (Hom. ~<j>O<Fa) trans., 2 aor. mid. athematic l<j>8lf1-7JV pe1ishe poetic (<j>Olw11-"'' <f>{JifJ-1/V for <j>Ot-fJ-1/Y, <j>8l<F0w, <j>8L<F8a<, <j>Olwvos), ~<P8<f1-a< poe tic (plup. 3 pl. l<j>8laro ), l<j>8l871v Hom., <j>8tr6s Tragic. The form <j>8lw in Hom. is assuined on the basis of q,Olns ~nd f<j>8tev, for which <j>8lea<, ~<P8<ro (or li<F8<<v) have been conjectured. Hom. q,ekw, ~<j>O<Fa are also read <j>8el<Fw, etc. Byfoi-m <j>8<v8w. (IV.) cJ>~lw love: regular (cp. 385) ; fut. mid. cJ>~fJ,o-op.a. may be pass. (808). Hom. has <j>i'AfJfJ-<va< pres. inf. and l<j><if1-7JV (</><-) aor. mid. Aeolic <j>l'/1.7!11-' </J<iw bTuise (cp. 8Mw): </JaG'<Fw, for <j>M<Fw, Theocr., ~<j>'/l.a(<F)G'a, 11"<j>a<Ff1-Cl< (489 c) and l<fJM<F81/v Hippocr. <j>Mw eat g1eeily, swallow: only pres. and imperf., and only in Comedy. cpyw b~t1'n, trans. and intrans: ~-cpe~a. Aristoph., Ka.r-ecpXOT)v, 11.-<j><KTo> Eur. Very rare in prose. By-form <j>e"'(!!Jw poetic. cj>p6.y-viJJ.L ( <j>pa'Y-) and cj>6.pyv'iiJJ.L jence, mid. cj>p6.yvuJJ.a.L; only in pres. and imperf. Cp. cj>p6.TTw. (IV.) cj>p6.tw ( <j>pao-) tell, point out, eclaTe, mid. consieT, devise : cj>p6.o-w, ~cj>pa.<Ta., 'II'cppa.Ka., 'II'cj>pa.<Tp.a. rarely mid., cppti.o-91Jv as mid., cj>pa.<TTos. Epie 2 aor. (f)1r<j>paov 448 D. (part. 7r<</Jpai'i~J-vos). Mid. fut. <j>pa<F(<F)ofJ-a< Epie, l<j>pa.<F ( <F) rLfJ-1/V l)Oetic and Ion. (III.) cj>p6.TTw (</Jpa'Y-) jence: ~cj>pa.~a. (and ~cj>a.p~a. Att. inscr.), 'II'<j>pa.yp.a.L and 'II'cpa.pyp.a., <j>p6.x9TJv, 0.-cj>pa.Kros. The forms with ap for pa are common and are Old A tt. See cppti.yv'iip.L. (Ill.)
(<j>w"'(-, <f>v'Y-)

""'' Y"' 2 perf. cj>"yov,

(VI.)

(=

APPEXDIX: LIST OF VERBS

721

o/pfTTw (fpK-) slwder: ~<I>P~~a. (147 c), ,.q,p,Ka. am in a shwler (part . .,wpptKovTas l'ind.). (III.) .pp;jyw ( <{Jpv-y-, <j>p-y-) toast: o/pv~a. (14 7 c), ,..ppylla.~, o/p'KTos, 2 aor. pass. tpp{;-y'f1 v Hi ppocr. <!>v6.TTw (</JvaK-) gumd: <!>v<i~w, <.p.Jusa., 2 perf. ,..q,.Juxu, ,..q,.Ja.yjla.. am on my gumd, <<!>v<iXOIJv, <!>va.KTos. Fut. mid . .Pv<isollu~ also as pass. in Soph. (808). (IlL) <j>6pw ('f>vp-) mix, knead: ~<{Jvp<ra Hom., ,..pvpjla.~, <{Jup8'1v Aesch., fut. perf. 1fe</Juptrop.at Pind., trup.-<{JvpTos Eur. cp'p6.oo mix is regular. (III.) cpilw ( <{Jv-, <j>-; Hom. <j>'i!w, rare in A tt.) produce: q,\i.,..,, o/'<ra., 2 aor. o/'v grew, was (687), ,..pKa. am by nature, am (693), o/vTov plant. 2 aor. pass. </JV'f/P late ( doubtful in A tt.). 2 perf. Epie forms : -;retpitr<, J~--7re'f>v Theognis, 1fe<j>v<hs, lp.-1re<j>vva; 1 plup. with thematic vowel rrltj>vKov Hesiod.
xctw (xao-.) force back, usu. xctoJ~-a< give way. Pres. act. in prose only ava-xatw Xen., xatrtrOJI-at, av-{xacrtra Pind., OL-Xatrap.'f/P Xen. See also Kao-. Poetic,

chie:fly Epie. (III.) xa.Cpw (xap-, xape-, xa<pe-) j'~ioice: xa.~pf)<rw, KEX<iPT]KO., KEX<iP'IJI-aL and K<xapp.at Att. poetry, 2 aor. pass. <x<ip'l]v intrans. Jejoiced, xa.pTos. Hom. has 2 perf. act. part. Kexap'l<hs, 1 aor. mid. X'IP<f.L'f/P, 2 aor. mid. Kexap6p.'f/v, fut. perf. Kexap1ww and Kexap1wop.a<. (III.) xa.<iw loosen: X<ia.<ru, xa.<i<r9T]v (489 e). Fut. xaMtrw Hippocr., aor. <xca~a Pind., perf. KeX<aKa HiJJpocr. XO.ma.(voo (Xae'Tfav-) am o.ffene: Xa.E'ITO.vw, Xa.'IT!]VO., X a.E'IT<iv9T]V. (III.) xa-v-o-avw (xevo-, xovi5-, xao- for x go-, 35 b) contain: Xfltrop.at for xevotreTa<., 2 aor. i!xaoov, 2 perf. K<xavoa as pres. (dxovi5a? cp. v. l. 0 192). Poetic (mostly Epie) and Ion. (IV.) X<i<TKO> (X'IP-, xav-; xao-KW for Xg<TKW? 35 b) gape: y-XUVOVjlCl~ (806), 2 aor. xa.vov, 2 perf. KX'IJVO. am. agape (698). Ion., Epie, and in Aristoph. (V.) xltw (xei5-, xoi5-), =Lat. caca: XE<roiljla.~ (540, 806), rarely X<TOjla.~, <xe~ra., 2 aor. XE<Tov rare, 2 perf. KxoSa., KX<r!la.~. (III.) xw (x ev-, x er-, xv-) pour; on the contraction see 397. In prose usu. in conp. (;, v, KaTa, trv, etc.): fut. xoo (541, 1881), aor. xea. (543 a), KXVKa., KX"Ila.~, x119'1]v, xv9-f]O'olla.~, xvT6s. Mid. xolla.~ pres. and fut., <xe<i!l'IJV aor. Epie forms : pres. (rarely) xflw (Aeolic xeuw ), fut. xevw (?) (3 222, aor. also i!xwa (543 ii), 1 aor. mid. <xev<p.'f/P = Att. xe<ijl'I]V, 2 aor. mid. athematic <xp.'f/P as pass. x:\a/5- in 2 perf. part. Kex:\al!<hs swelling, pl. KexMI!ovTas, inf. Kexl.iii!ELv. Pind. x oro ( = XOfW) heap Up: X~<rw, Xw<Ta., ci.va.-KXooKO., KXW<TjlO.L, X~<r9T]v, X<D<T9~0"0jlO.~, x oo<TTos. Cp. 489 a, c. xpattrp.w (xpattrp.e-, xpattrp.-) profit, pres. late: xpat<TJ!-f,trw, <xpal<TJ!-'f/<Ta, 2 aor. i!xpa<trp.ov. Hom. *xpcop.a< (XPwlla.~) use (xpa.-, XP'I-): pres. xp, XPfiTa.~, etc. 395, xp-f]<rojla.~, XP'IJ<r<ijl'I]V, KXP"llla.~ have in use (poetic also have necessary), xpi)<T9'1]v (489 e), XP'IJ<TTs good, XP'IJ<TTos. Hdt. has xpmt, 3 pl. XPWPTaL (from xp-l,ovTat), subj. xpwJ~-a.<, imper. xplw, inf. xpo-Oa< (Ion. inscr. XPfitr8a<), part. xpe<hJ!-POS. Cp. 641 D. Fut. perf. Kexpf,<TOJI-L Theocr. *xpcw (xpw) utter an oracle (xpa-, XP'I-): pres. xpns, XP, 394 (sometimes in GIEI' GHAM.- 46

722
XP~<T9']v

Al'PEND! X: LIST UF VERBS

[XP~

the meauing of xrrits, xrtfte), XP~,..'"' <xP'l<Ta., KXP'lKa., Kxprwp.a< Hdt., (48H e). Mid. xpri.op.at (xpOip.a.L) 1:onsult an 01acle: xpfJcrop.a< Ion., lxp'flcrri.p.'f/v Hdt. Cp. XPtfto>. 522 b, 641 D. Hdt. has xpt!wv. XP~ it is necessaTy, ci-lro-xr'l it su./tlces: see 7H8. XPUt"' want, ask, Att. chieiiy pn-s. and imperf. : xprfcrw. Epie and Ion. XP'f/t"!w (la.ter xpei'jw) : XP'f/tcrw, lxpf}cra. 512. (III.) xptw (xp"i- for XPLG"-) anoint, sting : XPt<Tw, Xpi:<Ta., KXpi:p.a.L (and KXpi:<Tp.a.L ?) 489 b), <xptcrO'f/v ( 489 e) Tragic, xp"icrr6s Tragic. xr<tltw (for xpw-ljw; cp. xpw-s complexion) colom, stain: KXP"'<TJ1"'' (489 c; (better KXP'I'ITJ.LO.L ?), xp~<T9'1jv (xp<tl<T9']V ?). Poetic xpotjw. 512. (III.) x wpw give place, go : regula.r. Fut. x wp~<To> and x wp~<Top.a. 806 a.
*if"iw (.J!OI) 1ub (if!a-, if!'fl-): pres . .J!fls, .J!fl, etc., 394; a..,.o-.f!~<Tw, .J!'lcra., perf.

Ka.T-.fl'lYI'"'' from the by-form .J!~X"' .J!yw blarne: .f!~w, .J!e~a., Neyp.a< Hippocr., .fleKT6s . .J!ev&w deceive, mid. lie: .flevcrw, .fleu<Ta., .fleucrp.a. usu. have deceived 6r lied, but also have been deceived, .fleu<Tll']v, .flw<T9~crop.a.L .fl\Sxw (if!vx-, if!x-) cool: .f!v~w (147 c), .flu~a., .flvyp.a., .fl\Sxa"IJv, if!x81Jcrop.a< (?) Hippocr., 2 aor. pass. 0.1!"-e.flvx'lv as intrans. cooled, if;KTos Hippocr. w9w (w8- for rw8-, w8<-, 485 a) push: imperf. M9ouv (431), wcrw, w<Ta. (431), wcrp.a.L (44~), ~<T9"1jv, w<T9~<Top.a.L. Fut. w81}crw only in Att. poetry, aor. WG"a and perf. wcrp.a< Ion., :rr-wcrr6s Ion., poetic, ci.1r-wcrros poetic. covop.a. (rwve-; cp. Lat. ve-num) buy: imperf. wvoup.')v (431), wv~<Top.a., ~v'l p.a.L ( 443) have bought or been /Jought, wv~O'lv was bonght, wV')T6s, -Tos. For lwv'flcrap.'f/v (la.te), Att. has .,.p,O.p.'Jv (p. 138). Imperf. wve6p.'flv Hdt., <lJvovp.'f/v Att. in comp. (dvrl, (VI.)

<o.

ENGLISH INDEX
Ability, adjs. denoting, 858. 6, 9; vbs. Accompanying circumstance, dat. of, 1527. of, w. inf., 2000; adjs., advs., and Accountability, gen. of, 1375-1379; substs. of, w. inf., 2001-2007. adjs. of, w. geu., 1425. Ablatival use of genitive, 1289, 1348 b, Accusative case, 251, 260, 264 b; gen1351, 135:3, 1391-1411. eral statement of uses, 1551-1562; Ablative, fnnctions, how supplied, 203, of the part, 985, 1601 aN.; w. vbs. of 280, 1279 ; ad vs. w. force of, 341. Absolnte, super!., 1085; and rel. time, rernernbering, etc., 1357-1350; hear1850; int., 2012; geu., 2032 f, 2058, ing and perceiving, 1361-1368 ; rul2070-2075; ace., 2050, 2076-2078. ing, 1871; separation, 130::!; w. Abstract, nouns, gender, 190 c, 840; oop.at, 1398; w. e, 1400 ; of time, suff. f01ming, 840, 85. 1, 2, 6, 861. 1447, 1580-1587; w. vbs. of l!e1w./it2, 863 a 2, 3, b 2, 865. 1 ; in ccming and injU1iny, 1462; of cvmmandpos., 890 ; pl. of, 1000, 1004 ; part. ing, 1465; w. internai and ex tema! w. article used for, 1025, 2051; w. object, 1554, 1555, see Interna! obarticle, 1131-1135. See Quality, ject and External object ; of content, 1554 aN. 1; of result, 1554 a N. 1, Action. 1578, 1579; cognate, 1563-157!l, 9ill Numbers, 354 e. b N., 1377, 1378, 1620, ]()29, 1744, Abundance, adjs. denoting, 858. 3. 1749; of extent, 1580-1587, 162;); Accent, general principles, 149-170 ; see Recessive accent ; as affected terminal, 1588, 1589 ; w. tr. vb~, by contraction, crasis, and elision, 1558, 1559, 1561, 1590-1597; w. vbs. of swea1ing; 1596 b, 2894 ; 171-174; anastrophe, 175; change after verbal nouns and adj s., 1598; of, in decl., inflec., and compos., elliptical, 1599 ; of respect, 1516 a, 176-178, 773 b, 791 b, 8()9 b, 893, 804; on proclit., 180; enclit., 1811600-1605, 2034 e; adverbial, D!l3, 1606-1611; two aces. w. one v b .. 187 ; of nouns, general rules, 205209; substs., 1G3 a, 213, 223, 236,230, 1612-1633; two vbs. with a couJmon obj., 1634, 1635; general force 252, 264 a, e, 271; of adj., 287 a, 289 b, 290 c, 292 c, 293 c, 295, 2()9 b ; after preps., 1658; w. prep., after v b. of rest, 1659 b; subj. of inf., 1972, parts., 304, 305 a, 309 a, 425 b, 1974, 1975; origin of constr. of 425 b N., 773 b; pers. prou., 325 a, f; ace. w. inf., 1981 ; of artic. inf., interrog. prou., 334; vbs., 423-427, 2034; absolute, 2059, 2076-2078; 746 c, 750 b, 768 b, 773 b, 791 b; agent expressed by, w. verbal adj., dimin., in -wv, 852. 1; words in -os 2152 a. denoting agent, 859. 1 b; words in -ii or -7), 859. 2 b; of compounds, 893- Accusing, vbs. of, constr. with, 13751379, 1385. 894. Accompaniment, dat. of, 1524-1526, Acknowledge, vbs. sig:nifying, w. part., 2106. 1757. 723

72

E.NGLlSH Il\DEX
Adverbial, expressions, 1020, 1111, 1527 b; ace., 993, 1606-1611 ; clauses, 2189-2206, 2240-2487 ; sent., 2190; part., see Circumstantial pariiciple. Adverbs, proclit., 179, 180; enclit., 181 b; comps. and superls. derived from, 320; origin, 341; of place, 341, 342, 346, 1535 ; of manner, 341, 343, 346; from preps., 342 c; endings, 344; comp., 345, 1063109:3; corre!., 346; of time, 346 ; of way, 340; numeral, 347; of division, 354 g; in compnds., 870, 884, 896, 897 ; ordinary, and sentence, 1094, 2709; equiv. of ordinary, 1095 ; in attrib. position as adjs., 1096, 1153 eN., 1156; taking place of adjs., 107; as nouns, 1153 e ; gen. w., 1315, 1437-1443; dat. w., 1440, 1499-1502, 1529, 2033; preps developed from, 1638; preps. as, 1639-1643 ; point of view w. advs. of place, 1661, 1602; w. inf., 20012007 ; w. part., 2079-2087 ; for prot., 2344 ; rel., an tee. of, 2505 ; rel., attraction, 2528 ; inverse attraction, 2533 c. Adversative particles, 2163 u, 2774, 2775, 2801, 2802, 2834, 2835, 2917, 2920. Advising, vbs. of, w. dat., 1464; w. aor., 1938; w. !L-ri, 2720. Aeolic, dia!., Intr., C, D. Age, expressed by gen., 1321, 1325. Agent, suff. .enoting, 889, 859. 1, 10, 860. 1, 861. 18, 863 a 2, 5, 7, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16; dat. of, 1488-1494, 1758, 2149. 2, 2151, 2152; expressed by gen. w. prep., 1491-1494, 1678, 1684. 1 c (2), 1685. 2 d, 1688. 1 c, 1605.1 b, 1698. 1 b, 1755 ; by ace. w. prep., 1685. 2 d; by dat. w. prep., 1608. 2 b; in ace., w. verbal adj., 2152 a. Agreeing, vbs. of, w. IL-ri, 2725. Agreement, the concordR, 921); of finite vb. w. subj., 925, 04D-I:l72; of word in appos., 925, 976-995 ; of pred.

Action, suff. of, 840, 859. 2, 861. 1, 8G5. 2, see Abstract nouns ; time and stage of, 1850-1857, 2016, 2094, 2177. Active, verbs, 1704. Voice, 356; endings, 462-464, 466, 4G7, 4G9, 470; function, 17031707 ; tr. and intr. use, 1708-1709 ; periph. for, 1710; causative, 1711 ; of inf. limiting mean. of adj., 1712 ; for mid., 1732 ; to replace pass. of tr. v b., 1752. Address, voc. in, 1283 ; o!iTos in, 1288 a. Adjectival, clauses, 2189, 2488-2573 ; sentences, 2190. Adjective pronouns, agreement of, 1020 ; iios and g,.epos, 1271-1276. Adjectives, general rules for accent, 205-209; used substantively, 232 b, 1021-1029, 1130; decl., 286-299; declined like parts., 305 b ; of irregular decl., 311 ; of one ending, 312 ; comp., 313-324, 1063-1093; a.vT6s, 328 ; pronom., 337, 340 ; numeral, 347 ; verbal, see Verbal adj. ; formation, 857, 858 ; compound, 886890, 8!J3-899; pred., see Predicate adj.; attrib., 912-914, 1019; agr., 925, 1020, 1030-1039, 1044-1062; fnnction, 1018; as preds., for Eng. ad v. or prep., 1042, 104!1; pred: position, 1168-1171; of place, w. article, 1172; gen. with, 1412-1436, 1529; dat. with, 1499-1502, 1529, 2033; cognate ace. with, 1565; as cognate ace., 1572, 1578 ; fol!. by ace. of respect, 1600-1605; w. inf., 2001-2007; w. ace. of artic. inf., 20M d, e; w. wrYn and inf., 2271 c; nsed substantively, o and !LTJ with, 2735. See Compound adj., Compound nouns. Adjunctive apposition, 982. Adjuncts, of artic. inf., 2037; w. part., 2079-2087. Admiring, vbs. of, w. geu., 1405. Adnominal genitive, 1290-1296. Advantage or disadvantage, dat. of, 1481-1485.

ENGLISII TKDEX

725

adj., 925, 975, 1020, 1044-1002; of 1 ieserved for subsequent main clause, attrib. adj., H25, 1020, 1030-1030; 2541. apparent violations, 926; of pred. Antepenult, 139. See Accent. subst., 973-975; of adj. or part. w. Anticipation, pres. of, 1879; or prolepsubj. of pl. vb., of single pers., 100!1; sis, 218:t. accord. to sense, 1013 ; of parts., Anticipatory subjunctive, 1810, 2707 a. 2148; of verbal in -Tiios, 2151; of Antistrophe, in rhetoric, 3012. rel. pron., 2501, 2502. Antithesis, 3013; pb in, 2903-2910. Aim at, gen. w. vbs. signifying, 1349. A orist tense, 359; secondary, 300, 1858; Alcmanic construction, 905. flrst and sec., 301; one of .prin. Allusive plural, 1007. parts of vb., 368-370; iterative in Alpha privative, adjs. compounded with, -<TK%-, 495; ) ( imperf., 553, HJ08, w. gen., 1428; part. negatived w., HlO; fmms ll -'l)v, 803; of pass. 2071 a; see a-privative. form but act. or mid. mean., 804, Alphabet, 1-3; as nmnerals, 347, 348. 811, 812; of mid. form but act. or Alternative questions, dir., 2056-2601; mid. mean., 810 ; of deps., in pass. ind., 2075, 2670 e, f. mean., 81!~; act. vbs. with aor. pass. Amount, denoted by gen., 1326. in mid. sense, 814-818; force, 1851, Anacoluthon, 300-i-3008. 1855, 1856, 1858. Active, first, inflec., 382, 383, Anadiplosis, 3009. Anaphora, 2167 c, 2906, 3010. 665-671, 755; accent of inf., 425 a; Anaphoric, article, 1120 b, 1142, 1178 b; system, 455, 542-545. use of aro, etc., 1214, 1252. Active, second, accent of imper., Anastrophe, 175, 3011. 424 b, 426 b; of iuf., 425 a N.; of Anger, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405; w. dat., part., 425 b; redup. in, 439, 448, 1461; w. on (ws), or part., 2587; 448 n, 494 b; system, 455, 546-554; ofJJ.' ws in expression of, 2682 d. ) ( flrst aor., 554; infiec., 384, 079Animals, grammatical gender of, 198. 088, 756-761. Annalistic present, 1884. Middle, flrst, stem, 542-545; inAnnonnce, vbs. signifying, w. part., fiee., 382, 383, 665-671, 755. 2106. Middle, second, accent of imper., Answers, to Yes and No questions, 424 b, 426 c; of inf., 425 a, 420 d; 2680; a&. in, 2784 a; -yap in, 2804, inflec., 384, 679-688, 750-761. 2806 ; "f in, 2825 ; "fOv in, 2832 ; Passive, flrst, inflec., 382, 383, il in, 2885; Kac o-lj in, 2847 ; llf)ra 672-678; accent, 426 d; w. and within, 2851; JJ.P ouv in, 2901 a; JJ.vroL out inserted cr, 489; stem, 585-588; in Hom., 1740 . in, 2918; Kac JJ-fJ; in, 2021; Ka1 JJ-TJP . "/ in, 2921 ; val in, 2922 ; ovKov Passive, second, stem, 50-5\l13 ; in, 2953 a; "fp ouv in, 2958. inflec., 672-678 ; origin, 1730; in Antecedent, of rel. clauses, 2503-2544 ; Hom., 1740. of rel. prons., 2503; def. and indef., Indicative, in unatta.inable wishes, 2505-2508; omission of, 2509-2510, 1780; w. il.v, past potent., 1784; w. 2535; attraction of rel. to case of, il.v, of unreality, 1786-1788; ex2522-2528 ; case of rel. w. omitted, presses mere occurrence of a past 2529-2532 ; incorporation of, 2532, action, 1923 ; ingressive, 1024, 1925; 2536-2538; attracted to case of rel., resultative, 1026; complexive, 1927; 2538-2534; appos. to, 2539; taken w. def. nmnbers, l\J28; enumerating over into rel. clause, 2540, 2542 ; and reporting past events, 1929;

726

ENGLISH INDEX
Apocope, 75 n. Apodosis, defined, 2280; "!\M in, 2782; rap in, 2801; av in, 2802; iU in, 2837 ; ouo in, 2935. See Conditional clauses. Apodotic O, 2837. Aporia, 3014. Aposiopesis, 3015. Apostrophe, 70. Appeals, na in, 2784 c; vu in, 2928. Appear, vbs. signifying, w. part., 2106. Appointing, vbs. of, w. pred. gen., 1305; w. two aces., 1613; w. inf., 2009. Apposition, definition, 916; agr. of word in, 925, 976-982; in gen. in agr. w. implied pers. pro1i. or w. adj., 977, 978, 1196 b; partitive, 981-984; distrib., 1181 ; adjunctive, 982 ; constr. of whole and part, 985; attrib., 986 ; descriptive, 987 ; explanatory, 988-990; to o, r,, rD" in Hom., 989, 1102 ; to a sent., 991995; equiv. of attrib. adj., 1019; to proper name, 1160; w. {1,"1\"1\os and hepos, 1272; nom. to a voc., 1287; inf. as, 1987, 2i18; artic. inf. as, 2035; drawn into rel. cl., 2539. Appositive, defined, 916; gen., 1322. Approaching, vbs. of, w. gen., 1353; w. dat., 1353, 1463. Article, crasis of, 68 ; proclit. forms, 179 ; decl., 332 ; agr., 1020 ; origin and develop., 1099; , 7}, rb in Hom., 1100-1104, 332 a; in tragedy and lyric, 1104; as rel., 1105; as demons. in Att. prose, 1106-1117; indef., ris as, 1118 a; particular, 1119-1121; anaphoric, 1120 b, 1142, 1178 b, see Anaphoric article ; deictic, 1120 c ; distrib., 1120 f ; instead of unemphatic possess. pron., 1121 ; generic, 1122-1124; w. parts., 1124, 1152, 2052 ; w. numerals, 1125 ; omitted, 1126-1152, 1207 ; w. abstract substs., 11~1-1135; w. proper nam es, 11361142, 1207 ; w. two or more nouns, 1143, 1144, 1145 ; w. appos. to pers.

empmc, 1930; gnomic, 1931, 2338, 2567 a ; in general descriptions, 1932 ; iterative, 1790, 1933, 2341 ; for fut., 1934 ; in similes, 1935 ; for pres., Hl3G; dramatic, 1937; w. vbs. of swearing, etc., 1938; w. other vbs., 1939 ; for perf., 1940 ; translated by perf., 1941; epistolary, 1942; for plup., 1943; in subord. clauses, 1944; of rv'Yx<ivw, "1\avOavw, if>Oavw, 2096 b ; after JJ.1J and vb. of jearing in Hom., 2233 b; after t:"rre, 2274; in unreal condit., 2305, 2307-2311; in apod. of vivid fut. condit., 232(5 ; after 1rplv, 24::34, 2441 a; in sim iles and compar., 2481 a ; in subord. clauses in ind. dise., 2G20, 2G23. Subjunctive, in prohib., 1800, 1840, 1841, 275G b; JJ.1J with, in Hom., to indicate fear, etc., 1802; lhrws J1.1J w., to express command, 1803; ov JJ.1J w., of emphatic deniai, 1804; J1.r, ou w., 1801, 2221, 2225; delib., 1805; force, 18GO; after 1rplv, 2444 a; force, in condits., 2325, 2336 b. See Subjunctive. Optative, of fut. realization of pres. f.act, 1828 ; of past possibility, 1829 ; of mild assertion in past, 1829 ; force, 18G1-18G3 ; force, in con dits., 2331, 2336 b. See Optative. Imperative, in prohibs., 1840; force, 1864 ; in condit. rel. sent., 2573 c. See Imperative. Infinitive, force, 1865-1871 ; after vbs. of hoping, etc., 1868, 1999, 2024; w. &trre, 2261 ; after 1rplv, 2453 c. See Infinitive. Participle, force, 1872-1874; w. elJJ.l, i!xw, etc., 1962-1965 ; rare in ace, abs., 2076 AN., B N. i W, rV'Yxavw, "1\avOavw, if>Oavw, 2096 b ; as pred. adj,, 2091 i after opaw, KOUW, 2103, 2110-2112 a N. See Participles. Aoristic present, 1853. Aphaeresis, 46, 76.

ENGLISH INDEX
pron. of first or sec. person, 1149; and pred. notm, 1150-1152 ; subst.making power of, 1153; attrib. position, 1154-1167; pred. position, 1168-1171 ; w. arrr6s, 328, 1163, 1171, 1176,1204-1217; w. ?l's, 1163,1174; w. demons. pron., 1163, 1171, 11761181, 1184; w. possess. pron., 1163, 1182, 1183, 1196 a ; w. gen. of reflex. pron., 1163, 1184; w. gen. of pers. pron., 1171, 1185; w. gen. of rel. prou., 1171 ; w.IJ.Kpos, }Ji(J'os, ~(J'x a ros, 1172 j W. JJ.OVos, ?}}J-t(J'VS, 1173 j W. <ios, 1175; w. geu. of recip. pron., 1184 j W. interrog., iJ.os, ?I'OUS 1 o[')'OS1 1186-1189, 2648; agreeing w. pers. pron., 1187 ; w. iJ.os and grepas, 1271-1276 ; w. oios and 7}iKos, 2532 b. Articnlar infinitive, subst.-making power of article in, 1158 f; use, 2025-2030; nom., 2031; gen., 2032, 1322; dat., 2033 ; ace., 2084 ; in appas., 2035 ; in exclam., 2036; w. adjuncts, 2037 ; w. vbs. of hindering, etc., 2038, 2744; w. vbs. of fearing, 2238; after JJ.XP' and IJ.xp<, 2383 c N.; JJ.iJ w., 2711, 2712 ; after negati ved vbs., 27 49. Asking, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628 ; in fut., 1913; w. obj. clauses, 2210 a, 2218; W. JJ.iJ, 2720. Aspirates, 16 a, 2fi, 441. Aspiration, 124-127. Assent, marked by na, 2784 b ; by ")'ap, 2806 j by ')' 1 2821 j by }J-fVTOt1 21J18; by Ka.1 JJ.iJv, 2821 ; by rl JJ.iJv, 2921 ; by il' ovv, 295\J. Cp. 2680. Asseverations, ace. in, 1596 b, 2894; JJ.a in, 159(J b, c, 2894; w. JJ.iJ, 2725 ; ~ JJ.iJv in, 2865. Asseverative particles, 2774, 2864, 2894, 2895, 2917' 2!120, 2!)22, 2923. " Assimilated " forms in vbs., 643-64 7. Assimilation, of vowels, 45 ; progressive and regressive, 51 ; of conss., 75 n, 77, 80 a, b, 81 n, !l5, 98, 105 a, 105 n, 429a N., 517,544 n; of mood, 2183-2188, 2205, 2442, 2448, 2450.

727

Association, dat. of, 1523. Assumptions, imper., in, 1839, 2154; otherwise expressed, 2154; Ka1 !-1} Kal in, 2847. Asyndeton, 1033, 2165-2167, 3016. Attaining, adjs. of, w. gen., 1416. Attic, dial., Intr. C-E; decl., 163 a, 237-239, 289; fut., 310, 538, 530, 645, 659; redup., 446, 477 aN., 56. Attraction, causing apparent violation of concords, 926 ; in camp. clauses w. ws and /JJ(J'?I'ep, 2465 ; of rel. pron., 2522-2528 ; of rel. clause, 2532 ; inverse, 2533, 2534. Attributive, advs. as, 1019, 1096, 1153 e and N., 1156; defined, 1154; position, 1154-1167; adjs. and prons. as, 1172-1182, 1184. Adjective, defined, 912, 1018; equiv., 1019; agr., 10:.!0, 1030-1039; used substantively, 1021-1029. Apposition, 986. Participle, 1019, 2046-:-2053. See Participles. Position, 1154, 1155. Augment, accent cannot precede, 426 ; syllabic and temp., 428-437, 444, 448 n ; double, 434, 451 ; omitted, 438, 495 ; position, in compound vbs., 449-454. A voiding, vbs. of, use of negs. w., 27392744. Barytone, 157, 158 ; stems, of third decl., ace. sing., 247; voc. sing., 249 b. Befit, vbs. meaning, w. dat., 1466. Beginning, vbs. of, w. gen., 1348; w. part., 2098. Believing, vbs. of, w. inf., 2592 b. Belonging, gen. of, 1297-1305; adjs. of, w. gen., 1414. Benefiting, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461 ; w. ace., 1462. Beseeching, vbs. of, w. gen., 1347. Blaming, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405; w. dat., 1461. Brachylogy, 1501, 8017-3018. Breathings, 9-14, 18, 125 e, 153.

728

ENGLISH INDEX
and compos., 176-178; euphonie, in perf. and plil.p. mid., 409; in vb.stem, 474-495; of root-vowel, 831; in stems, when suff. is added, 834. Chiasmus, 2915 a, 3020. Choosing, vbs. of, w. pred. gen., 1305; w. two aces., Hil3; w. inf. of purpose, 2009. Chorographic genitive, 1311. Circumfiex accent, 149-17 4. See Accent. Circumstantial participle, 2046-2048, 2054-2087. See Participles. Cities, names of, gender, 199 b, 200 a; sometimes pl., 1005; use of article wi.th, 1139, 1142 c. Class, of present stems, first or simple, 498-504, 723-727 ; second or T, 505, 506 ; third or iota, 507-522 ; fourth or N, 523-525, 728-743; fifth or inceptive, 526-528 ; sixth or mixed, 529-531. Clauses, principal and subordinate, 2173-2181. See Subordinate clauses, Causal clauses, Result clauses, etc. Cleansing, vbs. of, w. two accs.,.1631. Climax, Kal o">) w., 2847; 3021. Close vowels, 4 a, 7. See Vowels. Clothing, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628. Cognate, accusative, the appos. ace. often a, 991 b N. ; w. vbs. of judicial action, 1377, 1378, 157() ; of same and kindred origin, 15()3-1568; with adjs., 1565; may become subj. of pass., 1566, 1568, 1574, 1744, 1749; w. Kfff()a,, ffrfjva,, Ka.Oi~Etv, etc., 15()9; w. no attribute, 1570-1571 ; omitted, leaving adj. at tribute, 1572 ; adj., pron., or pron. adj. treated as neut. subst., 1573-1574; ) ( dat., 1577; combined with external obj., 1620, 1629. Subject, 1566, 1568, 1574, 1744, 174!J, 1750. Words, Intr. B. Collective words, 1} l1r,-os, 1} ff7rls, 351 ; numbers, 354 e ; substs., sing., w. pl. vb., 950; substs. neut. pl., w. sing. vb., 958 ; substs. and adjs., U6,

Buying, vbs. of, w. gen., 1372; w. seller in dat., 1484. Calling, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1613, 1615. Capacity, adjs. of, w. gen., 1418; adjs., advs., and substs. of, w. inf., 20012007. Cardinal numerals, 347; decl., 284, 349, 350 ; article w., 1125. Caring for, vbs. of, w. gen., 1356-1360; w. 1repl and gen., 1358; adjs. of, w. gen., 1420. Case, agr. in, of words in appos., 925, 976-995; of adjs., 925, 1020; of pred. substs., 973. Case endings, 210, 212, 229. Cases, meanings and forms, 201-203; of third decl., formation, 241-251; composite, 1279; uses, 1279-1635; see Nominative, etc. Catachresis, 3019. Causal clauses, assimilation of mood in, 2185 d; after vbs. of jeming, 2236; treatment, 2240-2248; particles introdncing, 2240, 2244-2248, 2770, 2810 ; denoting fact, 2241 ; denoting alleged or reported reason, 2242; w. unreal. indic. or potent. opt. w. /Lv, 2243 ; rel. cl. as, 2245, 2555. , See Cause. Causative, vbs., 866. 3; act., 1711 ; mid., 1725. Cause, gen. of, 1373 a, 1405-1409, 2684; adjs. of, w. gen., 1435; dat. of, 1517-1520, 1757; expressed by prep., 1681. 1, 2, 1684. 1 c (3), 1685. 2 b, f, 1687. 1 c, 1688. 1 c, 1691. 1, 1692. 3 c, 1693. 2 b, 1698. 1 b, 2 b ; by r<iJ or o' r6 w. inf., 2033, 2034 b, 2245; by part., 2060, 2064, 2070, 20842086, 2100. Caution, vbs. of, w. obj. clauses, 22202232. Ceasing, vbs. of, w. gen., 13fJ2; w. part., 2098. Change, of vowels, 27-45; of conss.. 77-133; of accent, in decl., infiec.,

ENGLISH INDEX

729

clanses of, 2462-2487. See Compara997, 1024; neut. part., 996 a ; part. 1 tive degree, etc. referring to, may be pl., 1044. Compendious comparison, 1076. Comitative dative, 1521-1529. Command, expressed by lhrws p.f} with Compensatory lengthening, 37, 38, 90 n, 105, 242, 519, 544. aor. subjv., 1803; by opt., 1820, 1830; by imper., 1835-1839; by fut., Complement, of vb., necessary and voluntary, 1451-1456; dir., 1460-1468; 1917 ; by rl ov ou, and rl ou w. aor., 1936 ; by fut. perf., 1957 ; inf. in, ind., 1469-147:3, 1454. 2013 ; summary of forms, 2155; Completed action w. permanent result, introd. by hrel, 2244; d,}.)l.ci in, 1852. 2784 c. Complex sentences, 903; development, 2159-2161; syntax, 2173-2588; in Commanding, vbs. of, w. gen., 1370; w. ind. dise., 2507-2613, 2617-2621. dat., 1464 ; w. ace., 1465 ; w. dat. or ace. and inf., 1465, 1996 N.; in aor. to Complexive aorist, 1872.4, l!J27, 2112 aN. denote a resolution already formed, Composite cases, 1279. 1938 ; w. obj. clanses, 2210 a, 2218 ; Compound, adjectives, in -ws, accent, Hi3 a ; decl., 288-289 ; in -ros, acw. p.f}, 2720. cent, 425 c N. ; possess., 898; w. Common, dial., see Koin; quantity, alpha priv., gen. w., 1428. 145; gender, 1!l8. Nouns (substs. and adjR.), acComparative, compounds, 897 (1) b. cent, 178 ; formation, 886-890 ; Conjunctions, 2770. mean., 895-809; determinative, 896, Degree, decl., 291, 2!l3, 313 ; 8!)7 ; descriptive determinative, 897 forms, 813-324, 34(i, 1068; expresses (1); copulative, 8;)7 a; comp., 897 b; contrast or compar., 1066 ; as intendependent determinative, 897 (2) ; sive, 1067 ; w. gen. or 11, 1069-1070 ; prepositional-phrase, 899. W. WS 1 1071, 2991; W. fl-.OV 11, 1072; Prepositions, 1649. w. prep. phrase, 1073; omission of 11 Sentences, 90i:l; relation to simafter 7rfov (1rv), ~iirrov (p.ov), ple and complex, 215!)-2161; syntax, 1074; 11 retained after 7rfov (1rev), 2162-2172; in ind. dise., 2597-2600. 1074; adj. forms in place of ad v. Substantives, accent, 236 c, 261 ; 1reov, etc., 1074 a; w. 1j and gen., proper nam es, heteroclites, 282 a N. 1075; w. J} Kar, J} wrrre (nuely J} Verbs, accent, 178, 423, 424 b, ws), 107!l, 2264 ; foll. positive, 1081 ; 426; place of aug. and redup., 449standing al one, 1082; denoting ex454; formation, 891, 892; gen. w., cess, 1082 c; to soften an expression, 1382-1387, 1408; ace. w., 1384, 1082 d; for Engl. positive, 1083; 1403; dat. w., 1544-1550. strengthened by ~n, 7rOcfJ, etc., fl-.ov, lirrcp, orrov, 1084, 1586; dat. Compounds, defined, 827 ; rough breathing in, 12; formatim1, 869-899; acw., 1513; ace. w., 1514, 1586. See Comparison. cent, 860 b, 8H3, 894; fiectional, 87!). See Compound adjectives, etc. Compare, vbs. meaning, w. dat., 1466. Comparison, of adj s., 313-324, 1003- Conative, pres., 1878; imperf., 1895. 1093; of part., 323; of advs., 345, Concealing, vbs. of, w. two aces., 162tl. 1063-1093; compendious, 1076; w. Concentrative aorist, 1927 a. noun representing clause, 1077 ; re- Concession, expressed by opt. in Hom., 18Hl; by imper., 1839,2154; by fut., flex., 1078, 10!J3; proportion al, 1079; 1917; by part., 20(JO, 2066, 2070, double, 1080, 322; gen. of, 14012082, 2083, 2882, 2733 ; by clause 1404; adjs. of, w. geu., 1431-1434;

730

ENGLISII INDEX
Conjunctions, accent, wh en elided, 174; proclit., 179 ; coordinating, 2163; subordinating, 2770. Connection, gen. of, 1380, 1381; adjs. of, w. gen., 1417. Consecutive, conjuncs., 2770; i?f, 2846; clause, see Result clauses. Considering, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1613; w. obj'. clause, 2217. Consonant, decl., of substs., 204, 240267; of adjs., 291-293; cons. and vowel decl. of adjs., 294-299. Verbs, defined, 376; conjug., 400411, 614-716. Consonants, divisions, 15-22; pronunc., 26; assimilation, 75 n, 77, 80 b, 81 n, 95, 98, 105 a; changes, 77-133; doubling of, 78-81 ; w. cons., 82-108; w. vowels, 109-117; final, 133; movable, 134-137, 399. Constituent parts, dat. of, 1508 c. Constructio praegnans, 1659, 3044. Construction according to sense (agreement), 926 a, 1013, 1014. Contact of vowels, how avoided, 46. Content, ace. of, 1554 aN. 1. Contents, gen. of, 1323, 1324. Continents, names of, use of article w., 1139 .. Continuance, imperf. of, 1890-1892. Continued action, 1852. Contracted, adjectives, decl., 290. Participles, decl., 310. Substantives, 227, 235, 263, 266, 267, 268, 270, 273, 276. Verbs, defined,376; conjug., 385399; accent, 424 c; thematic vowel, 460 a, 461 b; pres. stem, 522, 611613; infiec., in pres., 635-057. Contraction, 46, 48-59, 171, 172. Contrast, pers. pron. expressed in, 1190; avr6s in, 1194; preps. in, 1668; indicated by aM, 2775; by drap, 2801 ; by D, 2834 ; Kal of balanced, 2885, 2886, 2888 ; expressed in pv clauses, 2903-2916; marked by J.<vrot, 2919; by vv, 2924; in clauses w. r .. D, 2981. See Emphatic,

antec. to M, 2781 a, 2782 ; by pb, 2781 a, 2904; by "t, 2821. See Concessive clauses. Concessive, clauses, 2369-2382, 2705 c; conjuncs., 270, 21!03-~916. Concords, the, 2(i ; apparent violation of, 926 ; of subj. and pred., 949; of pred. substs., 978-975; appos. w. noun or pron., U7G-980; of adjs., 1020; of rel. pron., 2501-2502. See Agreement. Condemning, vbs. of, constr., 1375-1379, 1385. Condition, denoted by part., 2060, 2067, 2070, 2087 a; by tlJ!Tre w. inf., 2268; defined, 2280. See Conditional. Conditional, clauses, pf} w., 2286,2705 c. See Conditional sentences. Conjunctions, 2283, 2770. Relative clauses, assimilation of mood in, 2185-2188; tlle neg. w., 2705 d. Relative sentences, correspondence between condit., temp., and local sentences and, 2560, 2561 ; simple pres. and past, 2502-2563; pres. and past unreal, 25<34 ; vivid fut., 2565 ; Jess vivid fut., 2566; general, 2567-2570; Jess usual forms,
2571.:.~573.

Sentences, treatment, 2280-2308; classification, 2289-22!J6 ; table of, ~2!J7; simple pres. orpast, 2298-2301; pres. and past unreal, 2302-2:~20; fut., 2321-2:334; general, 2335-2342, see General conditions ; different forms of, in same sentence, 2343; modifications of prot., 2844-2349 ; of apod., 2350-2352 ; prot. and apod. combined, 2353-2364 ; Jess usual combinations of complete prot. and pod., 2355-2305 ; two or more prots. or apods. in one sentence, 2!~06-2368. Confirmatory particles, 2774, 2787, 2800, 2803, 2953, 2955. Conjugation, defiaed, HlO; of w-vbs., 381-411, 602-<1:24; of pt-vbs., 412422, 717-743. Sec Infiection.

ENGLISH INDEX

731

Coiirdination, and subordination, 21591012; of manner, 1513-15](), 1527 ; 2161; use, 2165-2167; in place of of measnre of difference, 1513-1515; subordination, 2168-2172. of respect, 1516; of cause, 1517Copula, 917, 918; omitted, 944, 945. 1520, 1757; comitative, 1521-152\l; of association, 1523; of accompani Copulative, compounds, 897 (1) a; conjuncs., 2163 A, 2834, 2836, 2868. ment, 15:24, 1757; w. afiT6s, 1G25; of military accompaniment, 1G26; of Coronis, 62. Correlative, ad vs., 346; prons., 340. accompanying circumstance, 1527; Cost, geu. w. vbs. signifying, 1372. of space, 1528 ; loc., 1530-1G43; of Countries, names of, gender; 199 b. place, 1531-1G88; of time, 1125 N, Crasis, use, 46, 62-69; effect, on accent, 1447, 1528, 15;30-1543; w. vbs. of 173; wi1T6s (Hom.), etc., 327 n; motion, 1532, 1475, 1485; w. emuaT6s, etc., 328 N.; li.Hpos, 8!iupov, pound vbs., 1544-1550; general force, etc., 337. after preps., 1658 ; w. pre p., after Crime, gen. of, 1375-1379, 1385; ex: vb. of motion, 1659 a; use, w. preps. pressed by ace., 1385. (see under the varions preps.); of Customary action, expressed by imperf. artic. inf., 2033. or aor. indic. w. Il v, 1790; by itera- Dawes' canon, 2219. tive forms w. /Lv in Hdt., 1792; Declarative conjunctions, 2770. by pres., 1876; imperf. of, 1893. Defective, subst., 283 ; compar., of adjs., 320. Danger, suggested by fJ.iJ w. subjv., 1802. Definite and indef. antec., 2505-2508; Dative case, origin of name, 1450 a; w. article, see Article. TfJ.wpw, i\a-yxavw, 1376; w. advs., Degree, denoted by gen., 1325; by ace. 1440; as necessary and voluntary and prep., 1587; by adverbial ace., complement, 1450-1456; general ] 609 ; degree of difference, see Measstatement of uses, 1457-1459; as ure of difference. dir. complement of vb., 1460-1468, Deictic, article, 1120 c; suffix, -i, 333 g. 1471-1473; act., made nom. in pass., Deities, names of, use of article w., 1468, 1556 a, 1745, 1748; as ind. 1137, 1142 b. complement of vb., 1409-1473; of Deliberation, expressed by ~il, xpfjv interest, 1474-1494; of possessor, (xpfiv), ~fJ.fov, -Tov 1jv, 1808, 1476-1480 ; of advantage or disad2680. See Deliberative. vantage, 1481-1485; of feeling (etbi- Deliberative, fut., 19W, 2G39; fut., in rel. cal dat. ), 1486; lfJ.ol (3ovi\ofJ.VCf! icrTl, clauses, 2549-2550; questions, see etc., 1487; of agent, 1488-1494, 1758, Questions; subjv., 180ii-1808, 2U39; subjv., in rel. clauses, 2546-2549. 2149. 2, 2151, 2152; of relation, 1495-14\J8; of reference, 1490; of the Demanding, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628. observer, 1497; of part. expressing Deme-names, loc.-dat. of, 1534. time, 1498; w. adjs. and ad vs., 1499- Demonstrative, adverbs, 340, 2088. Pronouns, decl., 333; as rel., 1502, 1529, 1417' 1421, 1422, 1425, 338 D; reJ. USed as, 388 b, 1110 i list, 1430; w. substs., 14!l9-1502, 1510, 340; , 7], 76, as demons., 1099-1117, 1529; instrumental, 1503-1529; of 3:32 a; attrib. position of article w. instrument or means, 1507, 1508, possess. gen. of, 1163, 1184 ; position 1511, 1757; of priee, 1508 a, 1372 a; of article w., 117li-1181; used aF w. vbs. of jilling, 1508 b, 13li9 a; of material and constituC'nt parts, subst. or adj., 1238 ; agr., 1239; usr of the varions, 1240-1261. 1508 c; of standard of judgment,

732

E~GLISH

I:\'DEX

!ost, in vbs., 307 b, 503, 624 b ; fO, Den i~l, emp!1atic, e'xJ;re~Rec: ~~ o JL1J 1 WJth SUbJV., 1804, 27,,4-, 27ilD a; by f, snff., 8i>fl. 7 ; rov, snff., 8(il. lD ; o iJ-1} w. fut. indic., Hl Hl, 2764,2755 b. rwv, suff., 8l. 21; f<VT, suff., 863 a 24. Denominative, words, defined, 828 b, Diminutives, in -wv, neut., 197 b, 199 d; 829; vbs., 372, 806-868, 892; substs., suffixes forming, 852-856, 850. 5, 10, suffixes forming, 840, 843-852, 8598fll. 19, 802, 863 b 16, 804. 2, 3 ; 865; adjs., suffixes f01ming, 857-865. mean., 855, 856. Dental verbs, 37G N., 405, 406, 409 b, Diphthongs, 5; improper, 5; genuine and spurious, G, 2f>, ii4, 59; pronunc., 508, 537' 545, 560, 587. Dentals, 16; before dentals, 83; before 25 ; contraction, 48, 52-50, 59; syni/Jo, 86, 87; before cr, 98, 241 b; conezesis, GO, 61; crasis, 62-69; shortspondingw. labials, 131; suffixes w., ened, 148 D ; -a< and -o<, 1G9, 427 ; 863. stems in, 27 5 ; aug., 435-437. Denying, vbs. of, use of neg. vy., 2739- Direct, complement, 1460-1468. 2744. Discourse, defined, 2590; lin w., 2590 a. Dependent, clauses, see Subordinate clauses; determinative compounds, Exclamatory sentences, 26812084. 897 (2) ; statements, 2575-c-2588. Deponents, defined, 356 c ; prin. parts, Interrogative. See Interrogative. 370 ; of -/Jo< vbs., 725 ; w. act. forms, Object, in ace., 919, 1553, 1706 ; 801 ; act. vbs. w. dep. fut., 801, 80G; interna! and external, 1G54 ; of act., mid., 356 c, 810, 813 c, 1729, 1730; becomes subj. of pass., 1550, 1748; pass., 3G6 c, 811, 812 ; w. pass. mean., of mid. voice, 1716-1722; of act. re1 tained in pass., 1748. 813, 1742 a. Depriving, vbs. of, w. gen., 1394; w. Reflexive middle, 1717,1718,1730. dat., 1483; w. two aces., 1628. Reflexives, 1218-1224, 1228 N. 3. Description, imperf. of, 1898, 1899. Disadvantage, dat. of, 1481-1485. Descriptive, appos., 987 ; determinative Disappearance, of vowels, 43, 44; of compouuds, 897 (1). spirants, 118-123; of cons., 129 b. Desideratives, formation, 868. Disjunctive partiel es, 2l3 c, 2852, 2856. Desiring, vbs. of, w. gen., 1349; w. Displeasing, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461. inf., 1869, 1991-19()9, 2719; w. obj. Disputing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1409. clause, 1995, 2210, 2218 ; other Dissimilation, 129. constr. w., 1905 ; w. !J.1J, 2720 ; w. Distinction, gen. of, 1401-1404; adjs. ov, 2721; adjs. of, w. gen., 1410. of, w. gen., 1430. Detecting, vbs. of, w. part., 2113, 2114. Distraction of vowels, 640. Determinative compounds, 895-897. Distributive, appos., 981 ; sing., 998 ; pl., Development, of vowels, 35 b, 42 ; of 998, 1004 ; article, 1120 f. cons., 130. Distributives, place how supplied, 354 a. Divided whole, gen. of, 928 b, 984, Diaeresis, 8, 8 D. 108ii a, 1139, 1161 d, 1171, 1300-1319. Dialects, Intr. C-F. Dividing, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1626. Diaporesis, 3014. Differing, vbs. of, w. geu., 1401. Division, advs. of, 354 g. Digamma, Intr. C, N. 4, 3, 37 D, 1, 72 D, Doric dial., Intr. C, D; contr. vbs. in, 122, 123, 132 D, 146 D, 347 D 3; 65:3 ; fut., 540, 659. omitted in infiec. of nouns and adjs., Doubling of consonants, 78-81, 429 a, 442 b, 534 D l.J, 544 D; in pronunc., 267, 270, 274, 278, 2D7 ; in prons., 140 ll. . 325 D 4, 32; as numeral, 347, 348; i

ENGLISH INDEX
Doubtful, assertion, expressed by pres. subjv. w. p.1}, 1801; negation, expressed by pres. subjv. w. p.7, o, 1801. Doubting, vbs. of, w. ws, on, and redundant neg., 2743. llrinking, vbs. of, w. gen., 1355. Dual, rare, 195, 999 ; two forms, 202; dial., 214 n, 230 n; third decl., dat., 250; in adjs., 287 b; in article and prons., 332 b, 333 f, 338 a ; first pers. supplied by pl., 364 a; subj., w. vb. in pl., 954-957 ; vb., w. subj. in pl., 962 ; vb., w. two subjs. in sing., 964; vb., w. pl. part., 1045; vart., w. pl. vb., 1045; subj., followed by vl. adj. or part., 1046. Duty, imperf. of vbs. of, 1005. Eating, vbs. of, w. geu., 1355. Effecting, vbs. of, w. ace., 1579. Effort, vbs. of, w. obj. clauses, 220722Hl. Elision, 46, 4 7, 70-75 ; inverse, 76 ; effect, on accent, 174. Ellipse, of aug., 438, 4D5 ; of redup., 439 n; of v in vbs., 491; of subj., 029-935, 937 ; of vb., 944-D48 ; of subst., 1027-1029, 1153, 1301, 1302, 1572; of adj. w. p./o.ov, 1060 a; of article, 1126-1152, 1207; of pers. pron., 1190 ; of vossess. or reflex. pron ., 1199, 2 N. ; lv, Els w. gen., 1302; in plu ases w. ws, 1495 a, 14n7, 2993 ; of name of deity, in oaths, 1596 c; of vb., leaving elliptical ace., 15\J9 ; of preps., 1667-1673, 2460, 2619; of vb., leaving lfv, ws !iv, fJ<Trrep lv el, 1766, 2087 a, 2478-2479; of If v, 1767; Of Vb. like o6s, elJXOfJ.CH, leaving illf. w. subj. ace., 2013 c, 2014; of C,v, 2116-2110; of part., 2147 k; of princ. clause, 2204, 2213; of vb. of prot., 2346, 2346 ; of prot., 2349 ; of vlJ. of apod., 2H51 ; of apod., 2:352 ; in comp. cls., 2404, 2405, 2478-2487 ; of demons. antec. to o<T<tJ, 2470 ; of antec. of rel., 2494 a, 2609-251(); in o<Tac i}p.pac, 2497 b ; of rel., or de-

733

mons. standing for rel., 2517, 2518 ; of v b. of rel. cl., 2520; of main vb. bef ore rel. cl., 2520; case of rel. w. omitted antec., 2529-2532; in ouods ii<Tns ou, 2534 ; lli)ov Bn, etc., 2585; tva Ti, ws Ti, Bn Ti, 2644 a; interrog. as pred. adj., 2647; in ifo TL if and li/o.o n, 2652 ; in p.'lj (o x) liTe, ox (p.1}) orrws, !'-1! Ti "'(e, 2708; in li n p.>), o<Tov 1'->i, 2765; in p.6vov ov, o<Tov o, 2766; in ov 1'-TJ" ciM ( "'fdp, fJofVTOl) > 2767 j OVIifY )\}.' o/j, 2778 j OVIJV lf)\)\o 1), 2778 a; with dlo.' ovo, 2786 ; explains some uses of "'(p, 2804 ; maTked by "(t, 2827 ; of ace. w. p.ci, 1596 c, 2894; of 1'-v, 2905, 2906 ; of ilf, 2\Jll ; of oUTe, 2048; ) ( brachylogy, 3017 a; defined, 3022. See Avosiopesis, Brachylof.''Y Elliptical accusative, 159. Emotion, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405, 1518; w. dat., 1517 ; w. l'11'i and dat., 1518 ; w. ace., 15H5; w. part., 2100,2587; w. iin or ws, 2100, 2248, 2577, 2587 ; w. el, 224 7; w. ace. and inf., 2587 b; exclam. cl., 2687. Emotionai future conditions, 2328. Emphatic, enclit., 187 a ; prons., 325, 1190, 11H2, 1204, 1200, 1209, 12331237, 2518 ; -, 338 g ; position of voc., 1285 ; repetition of w, 1285 ; use of tmesis, 1650; repetition of pre p., 1667, 1670 ; act. voice and reflex. pron. for mid. voice, 1723 a; mid. voice w. reflex. pron., 1724; position of li v, 1764; repetition of lfv, 1765; o /J.>i, 1919, 2754; subj. of inf., 1H74; reflex. pron. w. part., 2089 b ; 1}arts. coirdinated, 2147 f; verbal adj s., 2150; position of appos. to an tee. in rel. cl., 2539 ; position of ov an cl 1'-n, 21\00; repetition of neg., 2702. See Intensive. Em1)iric, a"r., 1n::o; perL, 1948. Emvtying, vbs. of, w. gen., 1:396. Enallage, 3023. Enclitics, the, 181, 181 n, 325, 825 n, 334, 334 D, 1195 ; accent, on preced-

734

ENGLISII INDEX
oK av rp8vos, 2096 e ; summary of fmms in, 2155; M in, i/81 c. Exhorting, vbs. of, use of imperf., 1891 ; w. obj. cl., 2210 a, 2218 ; w. p.'>), 2720. Expectation, implied w. /!ws, 2420. Expecting, vbs. of, w. fut., aor., or pres. inf., 1868, 1999, 2024 ; p.?), 2725. Experience, adjs. of, w. gen., 1419. Explanation, gen. of, 1322. Explanatory appos., 988-990 ; "fp, 2808, 2809, 2811 a. Extent, ace. of, 1580-1587, 1633; gen. of, see Measnre. External object, 1554 b, 1555; uses, 1590-1509, 1613-1638.

ing word, 182-18() ; successive, 185; at end of compounds, 186 ; accent, retained, 187 ; -7Tep, a38 c; 'TE, 338 d; prons., 340 ; ad vs., 346; v b. forms, 424 a, 784. Endings, and stem, 1\H ; case, of nouns, 210 ; adjs. of three, 280, 294; adjs. of two, 288, 2()1, 425 c N.; adjs. of one, 312 ; of compar., 313-318; of place, 342 ; of manner, 343; various, 344 ; of vbs., 366, 462-4()8; of inf., part., and verbal adj., 469-473. See Infiection. Enduring, vbs. of, w. part., 2098. Enjoining, vbs. of, in pass., 1748 a. Enjoying, vbs. of, w. gen., 1355. Entreating, vbs. of, w. obj. cl., 2210 a, 2218. Entreaty, expressed by imper., 1835. Entrusting, vbs. of, in pass., 1748 a; w. inf., 2009. Envying, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405; w. dat., 1401. Epanalepsis, 3010. Epanaphora, 3010. Epanastrophe, 3011. Eperlthesis, 111. I~pic dialect, Intr. D. Epistola-ry tenses, 1904, 1942. Ethical dative, 1486. Euphemism, 3024. Ruphony, of vowels, 46-70; of conss., 77-132, 40(). Exchange of quantity, see Transfer. Exchanging, vbs. of, constr., 1372. Exclamations, ovros in, 1243; voc. in, l:l83, 2682, 2684 ; nom. in, 1288, 2684; gen. in, 1407, 2684; inf. in, 2015, 2036, 2683; artic. inf. in, 2036; form complete or incomplete sent., 2158 ; dependent, 2575. 4; ws in, 2682, 2998. Exclainatory sentences, 2681-2687. Execrations, 1814 b. Exhortation, expressed by subjv., 1797, 1798 ; by opt., 1820, 1830 ; by imper., 1835, 1836 ; by o w. fut., l!ll8; by 07TWS Or 07TWS p.?) W. fut., 1920, 2213 j

Failing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1392. Families, names of, article w., 1138. Fear, expressed by p.f, w. subjv., 1802; otp.' ws in expressions of, 2682 d. Fearing, vbs. of, w. obj. cl., 2207, 22212233; other constr., 2234-2289. Feeling, clat. of, 1486. Festivals, names of, article w., 1137 ; in dat. of time, 1541. Filling, vbs. of, w. gen. and ace., 1369 ; w. dat., 1508 b. Final, clauses, assimilation of mood in, 2185 c, 2186 c; denote purpose, 2193 ; particles introducing, 2Hl3 ; origin, 2194; in appos. to rovrov l!vEKa or i5dt roro, 2195 ; moods in, 21962203, 2205; /lv in, 2201-2202; principal cl. omitted, 2204; equiv., 2206 ; connectim1, w. obj. cL, 2208; rel. cl., 2554 ; 11-i, w., 2705 a. Conjunctions, 2770. Consonants, 133. Finding, vbs. of, w. part., 2113, 2114. Finite moods, 357. Fitness, adjs. of, 858. G, 9; w. geu., 1418; vbs. of, w. inf., 2000 ; adjs., advs., and substs. of, w. inf., 20012007. Forbidding, vbs. of, w. obj. cL, 2210 a, 2218; use of negs. w., 2739-2744.

ENGLISH INDEX
Foretell by oracle, vbs. signifying, w. : pres. or a or. inf., 1870. Forgetting, vbs. of, geu. w., 1856-1358; ace. w., 1358; w. part., 2106. Formation, of tense-systems, 474-601, 717-743; of words, 822-899; of substs., 838-856 ; of adjs., 857, 858. Fractions, 353. Frequentatives, formation, 867. 1 I<:riendliaes~, vbs. of, :' dat;, ~461. li ulness, adJs., formatiOn, 8oS. 3, 16 ; w. geu., 1422. Future conditional relatives, 2565-2566. Future couditions, 2321-2334. F~ture perfect tense, 359, 368 b; primary, 360, 1858; redup. in, of completed action, 439 ; force, 1851, 1852, 1858, 1955-11158; perf."for, 11150. Active, 584, 600, 659 a. Passive, 359, 580-583; periph., 601 ; infiec , 659 a. Future tense, 359; primary, 360, 1858; first and sec., 361 ; formations by analogy, 516; fut. indic. and aor. subjv. identical, 532, 541 a, 667 D; Att., 538, 539, 645, 310; Dor., 540; w. pres. form, 541 ; force, 1851-1858. Active, system, 455, 532-541 ; infiec., 658-662, 754. Middle, infiec., 658-662, 754; w. act. mean., 801, 805, 806, 1728 a, 1729 a, b; w. pass. mean., 802, 807-809, 1715, 1737, 1738; pass., 1738. Passive, first, 589, 663, 664. Passive, second, 597, 663, 664. Indicative, w.lf.v, 179:3; pres. for, 1870; fut. action, 1910; two, sorne vlJs. w., 1911; shall and tvill, 1912; where English bas pres., 1913; without reference to fut. act, 1913 a; modest form of statement, Hll3 a; gnomic, 1914; for pres., 1915; delib., see Deliberative future ; jussive, 1917-1921, 2709 a, 27G6; aor. for, 1934 ; fut. perf. for, 1958; p~riph., 1959; after lhrw< (rarely after w<,
5<f>pa, and

735

J.tiJ), in pmpose cl., 2203; in obj. cl., 2211-2220; after i!1rw< and a,.w, J.tiJ w. no princ. cl., 2218, HJ20 ; after f.'n w. vbs. offear and caution, 2229; after i!1rw< J.tiJ w. vlJs. of fea.T and caution, 2231; after <rp' <P and <rp' ~T<, 2279 ; in pres. condit. of Jnes. intention, 2301 ; in apod. of vivid fut. condit., 2323, 2326; in prot. of vivid fut. form, 2227 c, 2328; fol!. prot. and apod. combined, 2353; in apod. of co nd it. of type <l w. opt., 2359, 2361 ; in tem p. cl. referring to def. fut. time, 2398; in princ. cl. to fut. temp. cl. w. subjv., 2401; in princ. cl. to fut. temp. cl. w. opt., 2407 ; delib., in rel. cl., 254!1-2551 ; in final rel. cl., 2554; in rel. cl. to express intended result, 2558 ; in rel. cl. denoting wbat is to !Je expected of the subj., 2559; of pres. intention or necessity, in condit. rel. cl., 2G63; in fut. condit. nl. cl., 255 a; in main cl. of condit. rel. sent., 2565 and b ; w. o wf], expressing emphatic denia!, 27G5 b. See Indicative. Optative, where used, 1862 b, 1863 c; w. vbs. of ~tfmt a.fter o'lrw<, 2211-2212; w. vbs. of commanding, etc., after iJ,.w,, 2218; in ind. dise., 2287,2331 ; in w< cl., 2427 N. ; w. vbs. of jeaTing after p.,], 2229 a; w. vbs. of feaTing after o1rw< !'~, 2231 ; in rel. cl. af pmpose, 2554 a. See Optative. Infinitive, w. av, 1847 ; when stress is laid on idea of futurity, 185 d; chiefiy found in ind. dise., 1866 c, 1867 c; w. vbs. of hoping, expecting, etc., 1868, 1999, 2024; w. vbs. oi tvill and desi1e, 1869, 1998 ; w. J.tXXr, 1959 ; after &a-H, 2261, 2269. See Infinitive. Participle, of liquid vbs., d.ecl., 310; w. li v, 1847 ; chiefly voluntative, 1872 ; in ind. dise., 187 4 ; denoting purpose, 200, 20GO, 2065; general force, 2044 ; w< w., 208 c. See l'articiples.

736

ENGLISH INDEX
hea1 and perce ive, 1361-1368, to jill, be full of, 13UH; of actual source, 13M; w. vbs. of ruling, commanding, leading, 1370, 1371 ; of priee and value, 1372-1374, 1379; of crime and accountaility, 1375-1379, 1385; of connectiou, 1880, 1881; w. compound vbs., 1382-1387; of person, dependent on ace., 1388 ; origin of gen. dependent on vb., 1389; ablatival, 1391-1411, 1348 b, 1351, 1352; of separation, 1i3fl2-1400 ; of distinction and of compar., 1401-1404; of cause, 1405-140\l, 1373 a, 2684; of purpose, 1408 ; w. vbs. of disputing, 1409; of source, 1410, 1411; w. adjs., 1412-1436, 1529; of relation, 1428; w. advs., 1437-1443; of time and place, 1444-1440, 1543; w. prep. to expressagent,14fl1-1404, 1678,1755, see Agent ; general force after preps., 1658; w. prep. to express instrument, 175G; of artic. inf., 20:32; absolnte, 2032 f, 2058, 2070-2075. See under separate preps. Gentiles, suif. f01ming, 844, 859. 5, 861. 11, 863 a 2, b 12, 864. 1. Geographical names, article w., 1142 c. Giving, vbs. of, w. inf., 2009. Gnomic, aor., 1931, 2338, 2567 a; fut., 1914; perf., 1948. Going, vbs. of, use of imperf. of, 1891. Gradation, quantitative vowel, 27, 475; qualitative vowel, 35, 36 ; in third decl. of substs., 253, 262 ; in vbs., 373, 47(1-484, 622 ; stem, in sec. perf., 573; stem, in 1u-vbs., 738-743; in suff., 833 e. See Change. Grieving, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405; w. part., 2100, 2587; w. lin or ws, 2100, 2577., 2587.
Haplology, 129 c. Hating, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405. Hearing, vbs. of, cases w., 1361-1368; w. J;Jres. of past. and pres. combined, 1885a; w. part., 2110-2112, 2592 c;

Geuder, HlG-200; of first clecL, 211; of sec. "clecl., 228, 232; of third decl., 255; different in !ling. and pl., 281 ; agr. of adj. in, 925, 1020 ; agr. of pred. subst. in, 974; peculiarities in use, 1018-1015; agr. of pred. adj. and part. in, 1044-1059; agr. of rel. prou. in, 2501, 2502. See Agree. ment. General, conditions, 2293-2297, 2303, 2821, 2335-2342, 2359, 2360; condit. rel. cl., 2567-2570. 'l'ruth, pres. of, 1877; expressed by fut., 1914; by aor., 1931; by perf., 1948. Generic article, the, 1118, 1122-1124; omitted, 1126. Genitive case, general statement of uses, 1289 ; in appos. w. possess. prou. or adj., 977, 978; after comp., 10691078; attrib., position, 1161; of prons., w. article, position, 1163, 1171, 1184, 1185; w. substs. (adnominal gen. ), 1290-1296; of possession or belonging, 1297-1305, 1390, 1411 b; gen. of possession and dat. of possessor, 1480; of origin, 1298; of divided whole (partitive), 13061319,-928 b, 984, 1085 a, 1139, 1161 d, 1171 ; chorographic, 1311 ; as subj. of vb., 1318; of qnality, 1320, 1321; of explanation (appos. gen.), 1322; of material or contents, 1323, 1324; of measure, 1325-1327; subjective and objective, 1328-1335; of value, 1336, 1337 ; two, w. one noun, 1338; w. vbs., general statement of use, 1339, 1340 ; of act. construction made nom. of pass., 1340, 1556 a, 1745, 1748; partitive, w. vbs., 1341-1371; w. vbs. of sharing, 1343; w. vbs. signifying to touch, rnake trial of, 1345, 1346, to be.seech, 1347, to begin, 1348, to aim at, desire, 1349, to reach, obtain, 1350, 1351, to miss, 1352, to approach and meet, 1353, to smell, 1354, to enjoy, etc., 1855, to remember, etc., 1356-1360, to

ENGLISH INDEX

737

w. on or ws, 2110, 2592 c; w. inf., ' 2843 a; Kai w., 2873; vv w., 2926 ; 25!J2 c. ovKov w., 2952; ii' oilv w., 2959 ; Hearing from, vbs. of, constr. w., 1364, -roivvv w., 2987. Imperative optative, 1820. 1411 ; hearing of, 1365. Helping, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461. Imperfect tense, 359; second., 1858 ; Hendiadys, 3025. iterative, 495, 1790, 1894, 2341 ; Heteroclites, 282. inflec., 627, 634, 635, 647-657, 748. In unfulfilled obligation, 1774Hiatus, wbere allowed, 46, 47,47 D. Hindering, vbs. of, constr. of inf. w., 1779, lf10G, 2313-23 ; in unattain2038; use of negs. w., 2739-2744, able wish, 1780; w. li> in past potent., 2759 b N. and d. 1784 ; to denote unreality, 17 86Historical tenses, 360, 1883. 1788 w. /iv to express customary or Homoioteleuton, 3026. repeated action, 1790, 1894, 2341 ; force, 1851-1852, 1856, 1889-1909 ; Hope, implied in ~ws cl., 2420. of continuance, 1890-18!)2; of cusHoping, vbs. of, w. fut., aor., or pres. tomary action, 1893; conative, 1895; inf., 1868, 1999, 2024; w. p.f,, 2725, of resistance or refusa], 1896, 1897 ; 2726 a. Hortatory subjunctive, 1797-1799. of description, 1898, 1899; inchoative, 1900; for pres., 1901; of truth Hostility, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461. just recognized, 1902 ; of topics Hypallage, 3027. previously discussed, 1903 ; epistoHyperbaton, 3028. Jary, 1904, 1942; Ifil<<, <xpfJv, 1905; Hyphaeresis, 44 a. Hypophora, 2819 aN., 3029. for plup., 1906; in subord. cls., 1907 ; Hysteron Proteron, 3030. )( aor., 553, 1908, 1909; in unreal condits., 2804, 2807-2311; in unreal Impatience, expressed by prohib., 1841 condits. without llv, 2313-2:320, 1905; b; otJ.t' ws in expressions of, 2682 d. in apod. to past general condits., Imperative, 357, 359, 1760; persons, 2340-2342; in prot. of indic. form 364; accent, 424 b, 426 b, c; endings, of past general condits., 2342; in 466 ;pres., 631, 751; first aor. act. princ. cl. of teinp. sentence of indef. and mid., 669; first and sec. aor. frequency, 2414; in gws cl., 2422, pass., 676, 125 b, c; sec. aor. act. 2425; after 1rpiv, 2434, 2441 a; after and mid., 684, 759; first and sec. c:,<F1rep el, c:,II1r<p h el, 2478; in main perf. act., 382, 697, 698, 765; perf. cl. of past gelieral condit. sent., 2568; in past general condit. rel. cl., mid. and pass., perf. periph., 599 g, 697, 712-714. 2569 a; generally retained in ind. In commands and prohibs., 1835dise., 2599, 2603, 2620, 2623 b. 1844. ; hypothetical, 18:19; in subord.l lmpersona] verbs, their subj., 905, 932cl., 1842, 1843; force of tenses, 1864; 935; cases with, 1467; pass., rare, 1746; forms, from intr., 1751; ace. fut. perf. w. force of, 1957; inf. used for, 2013; after C:,<Fre, 2275; in apod., absolnte w., 2059, 2076-2078. See 2287 ; in apod. of simple pres. or Quasi-impersonal. past condits., 2300 f, 2357, of more Impersonal and persona] constr., w. inf., 1982, 1983; of verbal adjs., 2149vivid fut. condits., 2326 e, 2357, of emotional fut. condits., 2328, 2857, 2152. of condits. of type El w. opt., 2359, Imprecations, <i&. in, 2784 d. See 2364 ; in rel. cl., 2545 f, 2553 ; in Oaths. ind. dise., 2612; p.-f} w., 2709 ; ii-f} w., Inceptive class of pres. stems, 526-528. GREER GRAM. -47

738

ENGLISH INDEX

of condits. of type el w. opt., 235\JInchoative, pres. stems, 526-528; imperf., 1000. 2:362; in temp. cls., 2394-2398, 240U, Incorporation, 2532, 2536-2538. 241:3, 2-H 7, 2422,2425; w. 1rplv, 2430Indeclinable, nouns, 19H d, 284 ; va, 2442 ; w. 1rpbnpov 1/, 2458 ; w. 1rplv 1), rarely, 336; numerals, 347 n 2, 2460; ordinary use, in rel. cls., 2545; 349 g, 349 n, 350; xpf,, 703. in ordinary rel. cls., 25ii3 ; in consec. Indefinite, adverbs, 181 b, 346. rel. cls., 255, 2G57 ; iu rel. cls. to And defip.ite antecs., 2505-2508. express intended result, 2558; in Tel. cls. denoting what is to be exArticle, place sometimes supp lied pected of the sul.Jj., 2559 ; in simple by Tls, 1118 a. pres. or past condit. rel. cls., 2562, Pronouns, 181 b, 3:34-34.0; uses, 2i5G3; in general condit. rel. cls., 1266-1270 ; in ind. questions, 26632560-2572; in iml. dise., 2-399-2615, 2674, 339 f. 2Gl7-2621, :W28, 2<524, 2629 a; in Independent, nom., 940 ; subjv., 1705dir. questions, 2ii62 a ; in ind. ques1811. tions, 2677-2679; in exclam. sent., Indic<ttive mood, 357, 39, 1760; end2686 ; o w., 270:)-2705 ; p,f, and p,i} ings, 366 b; pres. and imperf., G27, o w., 2752. 628, G35, 747, 748; fut. act. and mid. and fut. perf., 058, 650, 7&4; Indignation, inf. in exclams. of, 2015; questions expressing, introduced by fut. pass., 663, 6G4, 754; first aor. ETa (K~Ta), lf1rLTa (d7rLTa), 2653 j act. and mid., 665, 66, 755; first marked by yrip in questions, 2805 a ; and sec. aor. pass., 672, 673; sec. by oa[, 2848 j by Ka[ before interrog. aor. act., 682, 756 ; first and sec. word, 2872. perf. act. and plup., 680, 690, 702705, 762 ; perf. an'd plup. mid. and Indirect, complement (object), 920, 1454, 1460-1473. pass., 700, 707, 767. Discourse, tenses of opt. in, 1862, In simple sent., without ltv, 17701863; inf. in, 1866, 1867, 2016-2024, 1783 ; of unfulfilled obligation ex27G, 2579, 2G80, 26JG, 2617; fut. inf. pressed by, 1774-1779; unattainable in, afteT vbs. of lwping, expecting, wish expressed by, 1780-1782; 'in etc., 1868, 1990, 2024; fut. inf. in, other than simple sent., 1783 ; in after vbs. of willing and desi1ing, simple sent., w. &v, 1784-17P4, 2349; 186fl; part. in, 1874,2002,2093,2106unreal, 1786-1789; iterative, 17901792; tenses, their use, 1875-1H65, 2145, 257G, 2616, 2G17; constr. w. see Present, etc. ; assimilation to, vbs. of saying and thinking, 20162185, 2205 ; in pmpose cl. w. 5.,.ws, 2022, 2377, 2570, 2580, 2580, 2592; etc., 220:3 ; in obj. cls. aiLer vbs. of w. vbs. of perceiving, 2018, 21102112, 2577, 2692; neg. of, 2020, 2G08, effo1't, 2211-2213, 2218, 221D; after vbs. of feming and caution, 2220, 210 ; iuf. w. 11v in, 2023 ; constr 2220, 2231,2233; in causal cls., 2241w. vbs. of knowing and slwwing, 2243; in result cls., w. &<J'Te ( ws), 2106-2109, 2577, 25P2; w. vbs. of 2251-2259, 2273-2278 ; after i<tf 0, finding, 2113, 21 J 4; omission of IJJv iq/ 0TE, 2279; in simple pres. OT in, 2110; ws w. part. in, 2120-2122; past con dits., 2298-230 l ; in pres. or vl.Js. which take either prtrt. or inf., past unreal condits., 2302-2320; in 2123-2145, 2582; w. ws (rarely 117rws) fut. condits., 2823-2;)28 ; in general after vbs. of jea1'ing, 2285 ; &<J'Te cl. condits., 233G-2842; as apod. to prot. in, 2269, 2270; cls. w. 11'plv in, a:J.d apod. combined, 2353; in apod. 2446, 2448, 2449; introduced by 5T':!

ENGLISH INDEX

739

ws, etc., 2576-2588, 2017, 2018, 2110, omission of subj., 937 ; pred. adj. belonging to ornitted subj., 1060-1062; 2123,2614,2615,2l7;defined,2591; implied, 2593, 2622; speaker's own ip., cd, not ip.cturbv, <recturbv, as subj., 1223; limiting mean. of adj., is act. words or thoughts may be stated in, where Eng. uses pass., 1712; w. /Lv, 2594 ; cls. in, are subst. cls., 2595 ; 1845-1849, 2023; not in ind. dise., general principles, 2597-2613; simple force of tenses, 1865 ; in ind. dise., sent. in, 2597-2600, 2614-2616; comforce of tenses, 1866, 1867, 2019, plex sent. in, 2601-2605, 2617-2621; 251J5; w. vbs. of hoping, expecting, imper. in, 2612, 2633; past tenses in, etc., 1868, l99, 2024; in part vb., 2623 ; inserted statement of fact, in part subst., 1966-1970; mean. of 2624; opt. w. or without !Lv reguthe word, 1966 b ; uses, 1970 ; neg. larly retained after lin ( ws), 2625 ; of, 11J71; subj. and pred. noun w., opt. w. li.v representing subjv. w. li.v, 1972-1981 ; origin of constr. of ace. 2626 ; opt. after primary tense, w. inf., 1981; pers. and impers. 2627 ; passing into inf. from lin ( ws) eonstr., 2628; passing from inf., constr. w., 1982, HJ83, 2017 b ; without article, 1984-2024; as subj., 2628 a; passing into part., 2628 b; indep. opt. in, 2629 ; indep. indic. in, l84, 1985 ; as pred., 1986 ; as ap2629 a; inf. following sent. involvpos., 1987; as obj., 1988-2024; after ing idea of ind. dise., 2630 ; inf. in vbs. of will or desire, 1991-1999, temp. or rel. cl., 2631 ; mood of dir. 186fJ ; after other vbs., 2000 ; after form used in same sentence w. mood adjs., advs., and substs., 2001-2007, of ind., 2632; idea of imper., etc., set 2497; w. or without JJcrrE or ws, forth in inf., 2633, 2634. after compar. and ~' 2007; of purExclamatory sentences, 2685pose and result, 2008-2011; absolute, 2687. 2012; in commands, 2013, 2326 e; Interrogatives, 330 f, 340, 346, in wishes, 2014 ; in exclams., 2015, 1263, 2663-2674. 20;36, 2683; in ind. dise., 2016-2023, 2570, 2580, 2589, 2592 a ; w. vbs. Reflexive mid., 1719-1722, 1730. Reflexives, 1225-1229, 1194, 1195. of knowing, pe1ceiving, etc., 2018 a, Inference, suggested by patent. opt., 2592 c ; see Articular infinitive; vbs. 2300 e ; marked by /Lpa., 2i0 ; by which take either part. or inf., 2123of}, 2846; by lif]rct, 2851. 2145, 2582; w. vbs. of jearing, 2238; Inferential partiales, 2Hi!'l n, 2774, 2787, in result cls., 2251-2272; w. iq) <P. 226, 2952, 2958, 2H55. and lq) ~r, 2279; w. or without 11,,,, Inferior to, vbs. signifying, w. gen., for apod., 2350 ; w. 7rplv, 2430-2440, 1402. 2453-2457 ; w. 7rpbrpov if, etc., 2458Infinitive, 357, 359; verbal noun, 358, 2401;. w. ovOv ofov, 2516; ordinary 1760; accent, 425 rt, 426 d; endings, use, in rel. cls., 254-5 ; in dep. state46fJ ; pres., 632, 632 n, 752; fut. act. ments, 2576. 1 ; ace. and, after vbs. and mid., 661 ; fnt. pass., 663, 664; of emotion, 2587 b ; in ind. dise., first aor. act. and mid., 670 ; first and 2000, 2004, 2611' 2616, 2617' 2628, sec. aor. pass., 677 ; sec. aor. act., 2G80, 26!'!1, 26!'!3; o{, and p.-1} w., 27112727, 1fJ71 ; p.-lj and p.7] ov w., 2739685, 760; first and sec. perf. act., 2749; summary of constr. after vbs. 69fJ, 702, 766 ; 11eriph. perf., 599 h; perf. mid. and pass., 715. of hinering, 2744; JJcru and negs. History, 358. 1 x. 469 N. 2, ()70, w., 2759; after 7rl\~v, 2966 b. 1473 a, 1969; subj., in ace., 936; Infiection, defiued, 190, 365; how shown,

740

ENGLISH INDEX
Iota class of present stems, 507-522. Iota subscript, 5, 65. Irony, expressed by pres. subjv. w. 1-'fJ and I-'7J otl, 1801 ; by potent. opt. w. dv, 1826; by otl Vf. fut. indic., 1918; by d !-''!] dpa, 2354 N.; questions expressing, introduced by elra (K~ra), li?rELTa (K<11'EITa), 2653 j by an' ov, 2781 b; by &pa, 2794, 2796; indicated by "'{, 2821 ; by o?], 2842 ; by /Hjllev, 2849 ; by o?).,.ov, 2850. Irregular declension, of substs., 281285; of adjs., 311 ; compar., of adj s., 319; vbs. of sixth class, 529, 530; 1-'<-vbs., 768-799. Islands, .names of, gender, 199 b; use of article w., 1139, 1142 c. Isocolon, 3031. Iterative, vbs., without aug. in Hom. and Hdt., 438 c, d; imperf., 495, 1790, 1894, 2341; aor., 495, 1790, Hl33, 2341; indic., 1790-1792; opt., 2340 a. Judicial action, constr. w. vbs. of, 13751379. Jussive future, 1917-1921. Kindred meaning, ace. of, 1567. Knowing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1368; w. part., 2106-2100, 2592 c; w. IJn or ws, 2577, 2592 c; w. inf., 2592 c. Koin, Intr. F; -nin sec. pers. mid., 628. Koppa, the letter, 3; as numeral, 348. Labial vbs., 376 N., 405, 406, 409 a, 505, 537, 545. Labials, 16; before dentals, 82; before !-', 85; w. " 97, 241 a; corresponding w. dentals, 131; suffs. w., 862. Lacking, vbs. of, w. gen., 1396. Leading, vbs. of, w. gen., 1370. Learning, vbs. of, w. 1)res., 1885 a; w. part., 2106, 2110-2112; w. on or ws, 2110. Lengthening, metrical, 28, 28 D, 503 n, 703 D, 768 D j COil1pnds., 29, 887 j corn pen s., 37, 38, 90 n, 100, 105, 242, 250 a, 519, 544; in compar., 314; in vb.-stem, 37 4 N., 4 75 a, 484, 487, 488,

191 ; of vbs., preliminary remarks, 355-380; of w-vbs., 378, 379, 602716; of 1-'-vbs., 378, 379, 744-767. See Conjugation. Ingressive aorist, 1865 b, 1872 c 4, 1924, 1925, 2325. Injuring, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461; w. ace., 1462. Insertion, of " in perf. and plup. mid. and first aor. pass. system, 489; of " between root (or stem) and suff., 836; of r, before certain suffs., 837; of 'f/, in compounds, after prep., 884 c. Instrument of action, suffs. denoting, 842, 860. 3, 863 a 7; denoted by dat., 1503~1511, 1757; by dat. w. prep., 1511, 1687. 1 c, 1696. 1; by ace., 1600 a; by gen. w. prep., 1684. 1 c (4), 1688. 1 c, 1756. Instrumental case, functions, how supplied, 203, 280, 1279, 1450; advs. w. force of, 341. Instrumental dative, 1324, 1369 a, 1372 a, 1503-1529, 1548. Intensive particles, 2774, 2821, 2843; perf., 1947; see arnbs. Intensives, formation, 867. Interest, dat. of, 1474-1494. Internal object, defined, 1554 a; or. external, w. the sq,me v b., 1555; uses, 1563-1589, 1605, 1607, 1619-1627, 2034 e, 2077. Interrogative, advs., 346. Particles, 2650-2655, 2663-2674, 2866, 2951. Pronouns, decl., 334 ; ind., 339 f; list, 340 ; w. article, 1186, 1187 ; used subst. or adj., 1262; in dir. and ind. questions, 1263; ri for riva, 1264; -ris ) ( ri, 1265. Sentences, see Questions. Intransitive and transitive senses, mixture of, 819. Intransitive verbs, defined, 920 ; pred. adj. w., 917, 1040 a; and tr. vbs., 1553-1562, 1708, 1709. Inverse, attraction, 2533, 2534 ; elision, 76.

ENGLISH INDEX
524, 534, 537 a, 543, 557; in temp. aug., 435; in redu pl., 440; in 'assimilated' fonns, G43, G44. Letters, the, 1 ; neut., 199 d; as numerals, 347, 348. Like, to be, vbs. meaning, w. dat., 1466. Limit of motion, expressed by dat., 1531, 1532; by ace. and prep., 1533, 1589; by ace., 1588. Linguals, 16 a. See Dentals. Liquid verbs, 376, 310, 400-402, 407, 409 d, 517-519, 535, 536, 544, 559, 614-619, 620, 659. Liquids, 15 a, 18, Hl b; doubled, 81 n 1, 146 n; between two conss., i. developed from, 482; suffs. w., 860. Litotes, 3032. Local clauses, 2498; conjunctions, 2770. Locative case, functions, how supplied, 203, 280, 1279; -?)G't, -iiG't, 215, 342 a; in -ot, 229 b; 7raV?]JLEl, 229 b; ad vs. w. force of, 341; as ad vs., 1535. Locative dative, 1450, 1530-1543.

741

Metaplastic forms, 282 b. Metathesis, 128, 49~, ii49, 559 d, 586 f. Metonymy, 3033. Metrical lengthening, 28, 28 n, 503 n, 703 n, 768 D. Metronymics, 849. Middle voice, :356 a, 1713, 1714; depon., 35fl c, 810, 813 c, 1729, 17:30; end ings, :3()6 a, 4G5, 466, 468, 470; forms, nsed w. pass. mean., 802, 807-809, 1715, 1735 a, 1737, 1738; fut., w. act. mean., 805, 806, 1728 a, 1729 a, b; passives, 814-818, 1733, 1742 b; uses, 1713-17:34; dir. and ind. reflex., 1717-1722, 1730; causative, 1725; recip., 1726; act. usedfor, 1732; vbs. w. difference of meaning between mid. and act., 1734. See Present, etc. Missing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1352. Mixed, class, of vb.-stems,529-531; aor., 542 n. Modesty, pl. of, 1008. Momentary aorist, 1927 a. Month, day of, how desig11ated, 350 d; Majesty, plural of, 1006. 1540. Making, vbs. of, w. pred. gen., 1305; w. Months, nam es of, gender, 199 a; suff. dat., 1324; w. two aces., 1613. denoting, 861. 20. Manner, ad vs. of, 341, 343, 346; dat. Mood suffixes, 457-461. of, 1513-1516, 1527 ; expressed by Moods, four, 355,357, 1760; meanings, 380 ; function, 17 59 ; in simple sent., ace., 1608; by prep. w. case, 1682. 2 c, 1684. 1 c (5), 1685. 1 d, 168(). 1 d, 1769-1849; dep. constr. of, developed, 17 69 ; as affected by tense of 1687. 1 c, 1688. 1 c, 1690. 2 c, 1696. princ. vb., 2176; assimilation, 21831 d, 1698. 1 b; by part., 2060, 2062. Material, adjs. denoting, 858. 4, 12, 861. 2188, 2205; in rel. cl., 2545; in ind. dise., 2597-2()35; in dir. que~tions, 11 ; gen. of, 1323, 1324; dat. of, 1508 c. 2662; in ind. questions, 2677-2079; Maxims, J.tn w. pres. imper. in, 1841 e; in exclam. sent., 2686. See Indica<lw. opt., pres. indic. inapod., 2360. tive, etc. Means, suffs. denoting, 842, 863 a 8; denoted by dat., 1503-1511, 17 57 ; by Motion, dat. w. vbs. of, 1475; limit of, prep. w. case, 1679, 1681. 2, 1684. see Limit of Motion. 1 c (4), 1685.1 d, 1687. 1 c, 1688. Motive, expressed by dat., 1517; by ace., 1610; by prep; and case, 1679. 1 c, 1696. 1 c ; by part., 2060, 2063. Measure, gen. of, 1325-1327; of differ- Mountains, names of, article w., 1139; ence, dat. of, 1513-1510 ; expressed 1142 c. by ace., 1609. Movable consonants, 73, 134-137, 399. Meeting, vbs. of, w. gen., 1353 ; w. dat., Multiplication, how expressed, 354 d N. 1463, 1523. Multiplicatives, 290 a, 354 b, 1432. Meiosis, 3032. Mutes, see Stops.

742

ENGLISH INDEX
Number, in noum;, HJ5; in vbs., 355, 363; agr. of v b. in, 925, 049-972; agr. of adj. and part. in, 25, 1020, 1030-1039, 1044-1062; agr. of pred. subst. in, 974; non-agr. of appos. in, 979; expressed by prep., 1681. 3 ; agr. of rel. pron. in, 2501, 2502. See Singular, Dual, Plural. Numerals, 347-354; in compnds., 870, 883; equiv. of subst., 908; article w., 1125, 1174 aN.; Tls w., 1268; w. gen., 1317; ws w., 2995. Oatbs, p.&. and val in, 1596 b, c, 2894, 2922; vi} in, 1596 b, 2894, 2923; in indic. w. p.f}, 2705 i; in inf. w. p.f}, 2716; 1i p.f}v in, 2865, 2921. See Swearing. Obeying, vbs. of, w. dat., 1464. Object, 919; see Direct, Interna!, Ex. ternal; two vbs. with common, 1634, 1635; inf. as, 1988-2024; denoted by part., 2065. Object clauses, assimilation of mood in, 2186 c; of effort, 2207-2219, 2705 b; of caution, 2220; of jearing, 22212233. Objection, expressed by <i}..M, 2785, 2786; by <iM "{ap, 2819 b; by ot, 2835; by Kal, 2872. Objective, genitive, 1328-1335. Obligation, imperf. of vbs. of, 17741779, 1905, 2313-2317. Oblique cases, defined, 201 a. Observer, dat. of the, 1497. Obtaining, vbs. of, w. geu., 1350. Occasion, expressed by dat., 1517. Official persons, titles of, omission of article w., 1140. Omission, see Ellipse. Onomatopoeia, 308!. Open, syllable, 141; vowels, the, 4 a, 7. Opposition, denoted by part., 2066, 2070. Optative mood, 357, 359, 1760; final -a< and -o<, long, 169,427; endings, 366 c, 464; mean., 380; -<?)- and --, 393, 459, 460, -as, and -a<s, etc., 461; of athematic, accent, 424 c N. 1 ; of

Naming, vbs. of, w. pred. gen., 1305; w. two ace., HH3, 1615. Nasal vbs., 37, 400-402, 407, 409 d, 517-519. Nasals, 15 a, 19; doubled, 81 D 1, 146 D; a developed from, 482; suffs. w., 861. Nations, names of, article w., 1138, 1142 a. Necessity, expressed by verbals in -Tt!os, 473; imperf. of vbs. expressing, 1774; expressed by past tense of indic. w. IJ,v, 1784 ; by oe'i:, xpf}, 1824 b ; vbs. of, w. infin., 2000. Negative, sentences, 2688-2768; phrases, 2763-2708. Negatives, w. p.&., 1596 b; w. inf., 1971; in questions, 1809; in ind. dise., 2020, 2608 ; of artic. inf., 2028 ; of part., 2045; in ind. questions, 2676; of ind. dise., 2710; redundant or sympathetic, 2739-2i4}); w. Curn and inf., 27 59; accumulation of, 27602762. See o, 11-fJ, etc. Neglecting, vbs. of, w. gen., 1356. Neuter gender, abstracts of, 840; neut. pl. subj. w. sing. (sometimes pl.) vb:, 958-960; in appos. to sent. or cl., 994; pl., of single idea, 1003; adj. or' part., used substantively, 1023-1026, 1153 b N, 2; pred. adj.' in neut. sing., 1047, 1048; in neut. pl., 1052. See Gender. No, how expressed, 2680. Nominative case, subj. of fin. vb., 927, 938, 939; indep., 940; in place of oblique case at beginning of sent., 941 ; in letters, of the writer's name, 942 ; in appos. w. voc., 1287 ; in exclams., 1288,2684; w.inf., 1973,1974, 2014 a ; of M'tic. inf., 2031. Non-fulfilment, see Unreal. "Non-thematic" conjugation, 717. Notation, 348. Noun, verbal, see Verbal noun. Noun-stems, 826; in compnds., 870-879. Nouns, defined, 189; accent, 205-209; verbal, 358; suffs., 859-865, See Predicate adj s., nouns, \ltC.

ENGLISII IKDEX
compound vbs., accent, 426 f; pres., 630,637-640,750; fut. act. and mid., 660; fut. pass., 663, 664; first aor. act. and mid., 668 ; first and sec. aor. pass., 675; sec. aor. act., 683, 758; first and sec. perf. act., 694-696, 702, 764; perf. mid. and pass., 710, 711. Without li v, 1814-1823; of wish, 1814-181\J ; imper., 1820; patent., see Potenti<tl ; w. IJ.v, 1824-1834; tenses, 1859, 1861-1803; assimilation to, 2186, 2187, 2205; in final cl., 219G2206 ; after vbs. of e;-ffort, 2211, 2212, 2214-2219, of fear and caution, 2220-22:32; in causal cl., 2242; i!JCJrE wi th, 22G9 b, 2278 ; in apod., w. prot. of simple pres. or past form, 2300 d, e, 2356; in unreal condits., 2311, 2312, 2356; in fut. condits., 2322; 2326 d, 2356, 2329-2334 ; iterative, 2340 a ; w't. prat., 2349 ; as apod. to prot. and apod. com bined, 2353, 2356; in temp. cl., 2394, 2399, 24032409, 2414, 2415, 2418-2421, 2424, 2427; w. 1rplv, 2430-2440, 2448-2452 ; ordinary ust>, in rel. cl., 2545 ; after oK I!CJnv liCJns, etc., 2552; in ordinary rel. cl., 2553 ; in final rel. cl., 2554 c; in consec. rel. cl., 2556, 2557 ; in condit. rel. cl., 2566, 2568-2573 ; in ind. dise., 2599-2615, 2617-2621, 2624 c, 2025-2627, 2629, 2032 ; in dir. questions, 2662 c; in ind. questions, 2677-2679; in exclam. sent., 268G; ov w., 2703-2703. Oracn1ar present, 1882. Oratio Obliqua, see Indirect discourse. Oratio Recta, see Direct discourse. Ordinal nnmerals, 34 7, 350, 1125 d, 1151, 1209 e. Origin, gen. of, 1M8 ; expressed by prep. w. case, 1G84. 1 c (1), 1088. 1 c. Orthotone, 181 d N. Oxymoron, 3035. Oxytone, 157, lGO. See Accent.

743

Palatals, 1G ; before dentals, 82 ; before ~' 85 ; w. CJ, 97, 241 c ; suffs. w., 864. Paraleipsis, 3036. Parataxis, 2108-2172. Pardoning, vbs. of, w. dat., 1404. Parechesis, 3037. Parisosis, 3038. Paromoiosis, 3039. Paronomasia, 3040. Paroxytone, 157, 160. See Accent. Part, ace. of the, 085, 1601 aN. Participles, accent, 209, 425 b, 426 d ; decl., 300-310, 287 lJ; compar., 323; verbal nouns, 358, 17Ci0 ; endings, 470; pres., 33, 753; fut. act. and mid., GG2; fut. pass., G63, G64; first aor. act. and mid., 671; first and sec. aor. pass., 678; sec. aor. act., 68G, 761; first and sec. perf. act., 700, 702, 766; perf. mid. and pass., 71G. Predicate and attrib., 914, 015, 1166 ; agr., 10:20, 1044-1062, 2148; dat., used as dat. of relation, 1497, 1498; w. IJ.v, 1845-1849, 2146; tenses, 1872-1874, 2043, 2044; w. Ei}ll, <!xw, 'lhvo}lat, <j>alvowz<, 1961-1905, 2091 ; nature, 208\J-2042; neg., 2045; attrib., circumst., supplement., 20402048; attributive, 2048-2053; w. article, as subst., 2050-2052, 1124, 1153 b, 1188; without article, as subst., 2052 a; w. snbst., corresp. to verbal noun w. gen. or to artic. inf., 2053; circumstantial, 2054-2087; gen. absolute, 2058, 2070--207 5, 2032 f ; ace. absolute, 205\J, 2070-2078; expressing time, 20GO, 2061, 2070; manner, 20GO, 2002; means, 20!)0, 2003; cause, 2060, 2064, 2070 ; purpose, 20GO, 2065; opposition or concession, 20GO, 206G, 2070, 2082, 208\l ; candit., 2060, 2067, 2070; any attendant circumstance, 20GB, 2070 ; ad vs. with, 20792087 ; Kal, Kal1rEp w., 208:3, 2382, 2882, 2892 ; ws w., 2080, 299G ; general Palatal verbs, 37G N ., 405-407, 409 c, statement concern. supp1ementary, 2088-2093 ; uot in ind. dise., 2092!)13-516, 537' 545.

744

ENGLISI-1 INDEX

2105, 2112-2115; w. Tv')lxavw, a.v818, 1733, 1742 b; f01ms, w. reflex. 11dvw, <f>l1avw, 2096, 1873; of a.vlldvw force, 1733; uses, 1735-1758; origin, and <f>l1avw (rarely Tv')'xavw) w. finite 17;35 a. vb., 2096 f; w. otd')'w, ota.')li')lvof.La., Past or present, conditional relative ota.Tew, ctf.lvw, 2097 ; w. vbs. sigsent., simple, 2562, 2563; un real, nifying begin, cease, endure, grow 2564 ; general, 2568, 2569. weary of, 2098 ; w. sorne vbs. of comConditions, simple, 2298-2301; ing and go~g, 2099; w. vbs. of emounreal, 2302-2320; general, 2337tion, 2100 ; w. vbs. signifying do well 2842. or ill, surpass or be infetio?, 2101; w. Past potential, 1784, 1785. 7rttpdoj.i.at, TrOs li')'Kttp.at., 1rdvra 7rodw, Patronymics, suffs. forming, 845-848, 2102; w. 1reptopdw ( l<f>opaw, elrropaw, 861. 11, 19, 863 b 1, 4, 10, 12, 13, 18. 1rpotef-1a.), to ove1Zook, allow, 2103; Penalty, gen. of, 1385; ace. of, 1385. w. sorne impers. express. taking dat., Penult, 139. 2104; w. other vbs., 2105; in ind. Perceiving, vbs. of, use of t:Jvand pred. dise., 2106-2145, 2576. 2, 2600, 2604, adj. after, 1041; cases w., 1361-1368; part. w., 2110-2112, 2581, 2582, 2592 2611, 2616, 2617, 2628 b ; with vbs. c; w. lin or ws, 2110, 2145, 2577, of knowing and showing, 2106-2109, 2592 c, of perceiving and finding, 2581, 2582, 2592 c; w. inf., 2592 c. 2110-2115, 2581, 2582, 2592 c; omis- Perception, adjs. of, w. gen., 1421. :sion of t:Jv, 2116-2119; ws w., 2120- Perfect tense, 359; primary, 360, 1858; 2122 ; vbs. which take either part. first and sec.,361, 554; a princ. part., or inf., 2123-2145, 2582 ; remarks on 368-370; rednpl., 439. sorne uses of, 2147, 2148; after vbs. Active, first, 382, 383, 689-700, 762-766 ; system, 455, 555--560; of feming, 2237 ; after t!Jrru, 2276; for prot., 2344, 2353 ; for apod., change of e to a in, 479 ; periph. forrns, 599. 2350.; Ka.iro w., 2893 b; in main cl. of sent. containing temp. cl., Active, second, 384, '689-700, 2411 ; t!Jr1rep il.v 1 w., 2480 a; oo 702-705, 762-766; system, 455, 561and 1-'fJ with, 2728-2734 ; depending 573 ; change of e to o in, 478 ; change on negatived vbs., pli} o w., 2750; of a to 11 (ii) in, 484 , mean., 568; aspirated, 569-571. w. pb, finite v b. w. o.!, 2904 a; ovU (wqo) w., 2931. . Middle and passive, of cons. vbs., 382, 383, 403-411, 706-716, 767; acParticles, 2163, 2769-3003. Particular, article, the, 1119-1121; concent of inf. and part., 425 a, 425 b ; dits., 2293-2298, 2303, 2321. mid. system, 455, 574-584 ; w. and Partitive, apposition, 981-984. withont inserted rr, 489; periph. Genitive, w. nouns, 1306-1319, forms, 599, 707-714; pass., dat. of w. vbs., 1341-1371; of artic. inf., agent w., 1488, 1489; pass., w. dat., 2032 c. used instead of perf. act., 1741. Parts of speech, 189. Force, 1851, 1852, 1945 ; pres. Passive, forms those of mid. except in for, 1886; aor. for, 1940; epistolary, 1942; w. pres. mean., 1946; 'intenaor. and fut., 356 b, 366 a ; dep., sive,' 1947; empiri~,, 1948; of dated 356 c, 811, 812; first, system, 368, past action, 1949; for fut. perf., 455, !i85-589; sec., system, 368, 455, 590-598; aor. and fut. mid. sorne1950; in subord. cl., 1951; in apod. times used witll mea.n. of, 80:3, 807of vivid fut. form, 2326 ; in condit. 809, 1737, 1788 i mid. lJRSS., 814rel. sent., 2573 c. See Iudicative.

ENGLISH INDEX
Subjunctive, 1860. Optative, 1861-1863, 2331. Imperative, 1840 n., 1864. Infinitive, 1849, 1865-1867; w. 1rplv, 2453 c. Participle, 1872-1874, 1961,2344. Periphrasis, 3041; possess. gen. w. neut. article, 1299 ; expressions equiv. to tr. vb. w. ace., 1598 ; w. "flvop.a< and subst., 1710, 1754; w. 1rodop.a< and 'lrO<w, 1722; w. oe and xpf], 1807 ; w. elp.l and pres. part., 1857, 1961, 1962; fut. (w. p.w), 1959; w. ~p.eov, 1960; w. l!xw and part., 1963; w. 'Yl"fvop.aL and part., 19()4; w. <f>alvop.a< and part., 1965. Periphrastic forms, perf. and plup. mid. and pass., 405, 408, 599, 707710, 714; fut. perf. pass., 583, 601, 659.a; fut. perf. act., 584,600, 659 a, 1955 b; perf. and plup. act., 599, 690-701. Perispomenon, 157, 160. See Accent. Permission, expressed by opt. in Hom., 1819; by imper., 1839; hy fut., 1917. Person concerned, suff. denoting, 843, 859. 1, 861. 13, 83 a 2, 863 b 12, 865. 1, 11. Person, in vbs., 355, 364; agr. of v b. in, 925, 949-972; subj. pron. of fj.rst or sec., when omitted and wilen expressed, 929, 930, 1190, 1191; nom. subj. of third, omitted, 931 ; third, of writer or speaker, 942; ris or 1rs w. sec., 1016; sec. used of imaginary person, 1017, 1193; in directions to travellers, 1017 a; agr. of rel. pron. in, 2501, 2502; in ind. dise., 2591 a, 2598, 2606; in ind. questions, 2677. Persona! and impers. constr., w. inf., 1982, 1983; of verbal adjs., 21492152. l'ersonal endings, of vb., 366, 462-468. Persona! pronouns, enclit., 181 a, 181 n, 187 N.1,-2, 325, 1195; decl., 325,326; substitutes for, of thini person: K~LVOS 325 d, 1194 j 00, ovros, 1194, CI.vr6s in oblique cases 325 d, 328 b,

745

1204, 1212, , i], Tb, 1099, 1100, (Ss), i] (ii), 1U:l, 1194, 1195; gen. of, in pred. position, 1171, 1183, 1185, 1196 a; w. article, 1187 ; wh en omitted and when expressed, 1190, 1191 ; the forms ~p.o, etc., when used, 1192; of imaginary person, 1193. Persans, names of, article w., 1136, 1142 a; as instrum., 1507 b. Persuaded, be, vbs. signifying w. p.f], 2725. Persuading, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628. Pindaric construction, 961. Pity, otp.' ws in expressions of, 2682 d. Pitying, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405. Place, advs. of, 341, 342, 346, 144; nam es, suff., 844, 851, 860. 3, 861. 20, 86:3 a 16,21, 24, article w., 113; adjs. of, use w. article, 1172; gen. of, 1305, 1448, 1449; adjs. of, w. gen., 1426; dat. of, 1531-1538. See Locative. Planning, vbs. of, w. obj. cl., 2217. Plants, gender, 199 b, 200 a. Pleasing, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461. Pleonasm, p.ov w. compar., 1084; p.d.<o-ra, etc., w. sup., 1090; of prep., 1386, 1549, 1550, 1G54 ; of interna! obj., 1554, 1564,1570, 1571, 16:l0; of mid. voice w. reflex. pron., 1724, 1727; of !lv, 1705; of inf., 1615, 2011 a and N.; in hw v .Tva<, etc., 2012 c; w, part. and vb., 2147 b; of vb. of saying, 2634; reduudant neg., 27392749, 2753; ou p.f], 2754-2758; in expressions connected by M, 2757 a; in !Ja-u cl., 2759; in accumulated negs., 2760-2702 ; defined and illustrated, 3042. Pluperfect tense, 359, 368 b; secondary, 360, 1858; first and sec., 361; augmented, 428, 429, 444; redu p., 439, 444. Active, first and sec., 382-384,467, 701, 762 a ; first, stem, 555-560 ; sec., stem, 561-573; periph. forms, 599. Middle and passive, 382, 383, 403411, 468, 707 ; stem, 574-584; periphrastic forms, 599, 707.

746

ENGLISII INDEX
past tense of indic. w. lfv, 1784; by opt., 1824--1834 ; by lfv w. inf. after fJ(J'T, 2270. Postpositive, prep., 1665; particles, 2772. Potential optative, with lfv, 1824--1834, 2349; in causal cl., 2243; in apod. of simple pres. or past condits., 2300 e, 2356 ; in apod. of unreal condits., 2312, 2356; in apod. of more vi vid fut. condits., 232() d, 2356 ; in apod. of emotional fut. condits., 2328, 2356 ; in apod. of Jess vivid fut. condits., 2329-2334, 2356; in prot. and apod. combined, 2353, 2356 ; in prin. cl. to fut. temp. cl. w. subjv., 2403; in fut. temp. cl. w. opt., 2406; in l!ws cl., 2421; in consec. rel. cl., 2556 ; in condit. rel. sent., 2571, 2572. Potential optative, without lfv, 1821, 1822 ; after ou1< ~(J'TLV 5(J'ns, etc., 2552. Potential, past, 1784, 1785. Praegnans Constructio, 1659, 3044. Praising, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405. Predicate, 902 ; a vb., 909 ; expansion, 924; omission of v b., 944--948; subj. and, concord of, 92;:), 949-972. Accusative, and external obj., 1013-1618. Adjectives, 010 b, 1018; belonging to omitted subj. of inf., 975, 10601062 ; w. what vbs. used, 1040 ; w. vbs. of sayinrJ, thinking, perceiving, showing, 1041; where Eng. uses adv., 1042, 1043; agr., 976, 1044-1069; position, 1168-1171; equiv. of cl., 1169; attracted into voc., 1286 ; part. as, 2091, 915. Nouns, 910, 911, 913-915; agr., 918 d, 939, 975, 2525; and article, 1150-1152; in agr. w. dat.., 1509; proleptic, 1579; w. inf., 1972-1()81 ; inf. as, 1986. Participles, 914, 915 ; agr., 10441059 ; belonging to omitted subj. of inf., 1061, 1062.

Force, 1851, 1852, 1858, 1952; imperf. fOT, 1906; aor. for, 1943; of immediate occurrence, Hl53 ; in subord. cls., 1954 ; in unreal condits., 2306, 2307, 2310; in ind. dise., 259(), 2603, 2620, 2623 b. Pl ur al : first pers., used for d ua], 364 a ; vb., w. sing. subj., 950-953 ; vb., w. dual subj., 954--957; subj., w. vb. in sing., 958-961; subj.; w. vb. in dual, 962 ; vb., w. two subjs. in sing., 964, !lli, 967, 971; distrib., 998, 1004; peculiarities in use, 1000-1012; of majesty, 1006; allusive, 1007; of modesty, 1008; shifting w. sing., 1012; part., w. sing. collective noun, 1044; part., w. dual v b., 1045; pred. adj. or part., w. dual subj., 1046; pred. adj., w. two or more substs., 1053. Sce Agreement. Polysyndeton, 3043. Position,syllable longby, 144,145,314 a. Of article, attrib., 1154-1167 ; pred., 1168-1171; w. gen. of pron., 1163, 1171, 1184, 1185; w. words which vary their mean., 1172-1175, 1:?,04-1217; w. demons. pron., 11761181; w. possess. pron., 1182, 1183, 1196 a; yr. interrog., lfXXos, 1roMs, ol"(os, 1186-1189 ; w. gen. of divided. whole, 1307. Positive degree, uses, 1063-10G5. See Comparison. Possession, gen. of, 1297-1305, 1390, 1411 b; gen. of, ) ( dat. of possessor, 1480; gen. w. adjs. of, 1414. Possessive, compounds, 895, 898. Pronouns, decl., 330; place, taken by article, 1121 ; w. and without article, 1182, 1183, 119G a; position of article w., 1163, 1182, 1196 a ; uses, 1196-1203; w. force of objective gen. of pers. pron., 1197 ; of first and sec. persons, reflex. and nonreflex., 1198-1200. Possessor, dat. of the, 147G-1480. Possibility, exprt>ssed by imperf. indic., 1774-1779, 190G, 2313-2317; by

E~GLISII

E\DEX

747

Position, of adjs., 1168-1171 ; of possess. gen. of pers. and rel. prous. and of gen. of divided whole, 1171, 1185 a, b, 1196 ; of words varying in mean. accord. to position of article, 1172-1175, 1204-120\l, 328 c; of possess. pron., 1196 a. Substantives, defined, 910 a; agr., 973-975; belonging to omitted subj. of inf., 975, 1060, 1062; equivalent of cl., 1169. Predictions, neg. o p,f, in, 2754, 2785. Prefixes, inseparable, 870, 885, 896 a. Prepositional, compounds in -ro<, accent, 425 c N.; expressions, 1029, 2!344. Prepositional-phrase compounds, 899. Prepositions, accent, when elided, 174; anastrophe in, 175; proclits., 179, 180; comp.and superl.der:ived from, 320; aug. and redup. in vbs. compounded w., 449-454 ; in compounds, 870, 884, 896, 1655 ; origin, and development of, 891, 1636-1638, 1646 a; as advs. (prep.-advs.), 801, 1636 a, ]6:38-164:3; constr. w. vbs. compounded w., 1382-Vl87; function, 1637 ; three uses, 1639-1646; improper, 1647, 1649a, 1690-1702 ;compounded, to complete action of verbal idea, 1648, 1680; compound, 1()4!l; tmesis, 1650-165::3 ; prefixed, repeated, 1654; connecting nonns, without vb., 1657 ; mean. of gen., dat., and ace., w., 1658; vbs. of motion w. dat. and, 1650 a; vbs. of rest w. ace. and, 1659 b ; stress laid on starting-point or goal, 1660 ; position, 1663-1665; variation, 1666; repetition and omission, 1667-1673, 2519; of different mean. w. the same noun, 1669; w. case, as subj. or obj. or prot., 1674, 028 a; use, in Att. prose, 1675; ordinary differences in mean., 1676; parallel, 1677; use of the different, 1681-1698. See Agent, Means. Prepositive particles, 2772.

Prescription, expressed by imper., 18:35. Present or past, condit. relative sent., simple, 2562, 2563; unreal, 2564 ; general, 2567-2570. Conditions, simple, 2298-2301 ; unreal, 2302-2320; general, 2:3872342. Present system of verbs, 455, 406-581, 722-743. Present tense, 359; prima1-y, 360, 1858; one of princ. parts, 3()8-:370 ; intlec. 382,627-657,747-753; redupl., 414 A, 439, 447, 494, 504, 526 c, 726, 727. Indicative, force, 1851-1858 ; aoristic, 1853; uses, 1875-1888 ; of customary action, 1876 ; of general truth, 1877; conative, 1878; for fut. (of anticipation), 1879 ; oracular, 1882 ; historical, 1883 ; annalistic, 1884 ; of past and pres. comLined, 1885 ; for perl., 1880; expressing enduring result, 1887; in subord. cl., 1888; imperf. for, 1901 ; fut. for, 1015; aor. for, 10:36; in apod. of vivid fut. fonn, 2326; in apod. of general condits., 2337, 2342 ; in prot. of indic. form of general condits., 2!342 ; in apod. when prot. has l with opt., 2360; in princ. cl., wh en temp. cl. bas opt. without /!.v, 2407 ; in temp. sent. of indef. frequency, 2410 ; in temp. cl. w. /!.v, 2413 ; in gw< cls., 2422, 2425 ; in 1rplv cl., 2441 a; in similes and comparisons, 2481 a, 2482 ; in condit. rel. sent., 2562, 2567, 25ll, 2573 a, b. Subjunctive, w. 11-oq, of doubtful assertion, 1801 ; to indicate fear, warning, or danger, 1802; w. ou /l.q, of empbatic deniai, 1804 ; delib., 1805; in prohib., 1840, 1841 ; general force, 1860 ; in more vivid fut. condits., 2:325; in general condits., 2336 ; in temp. cl., 2400, 2401 ; in l!w< cl., 242:3 b, 2426 b ; in 1rplv cl., 2444 a; in sim iles and comparisons, 2481 a.

748

ENGLISH INDEX
Pronominal adjectives, 337, 340. l'ronouns, decl., :325-340; nnemphatic, omitted, 029, 1121, 119\l. 2 N.; contrasted, generally expressed, 930 ; , -1}, ro as rel., 1090, 1105; o, -1}, r6 as demons., 10()9-1104, 1106-1117 ; use of article w., 1163, 1171, 1173, 117G-1189 ; pers., 1190-1195 ; possess., lli)(l-120;); pron. auro<, 12041217 ; reflex., 1218-1232 ; demons., 12:38-1261; interrog., 12G2-1265; indei., 12G6-1270 ; /Lo< and i!repo<, 1271-1276; recip., 1277, 1278; w. gen., 1317 ; as cognate ace., 1573. See Persona! pronouns, etc. Pronunciation, 23-26 ; of vowels, 24 ; of diphs., 25 ; of cons., 26. Proparoxytone, 157, 160. See Accent. Proper names, accent, 178 a, 261; in-'l)<, 222, 263, 264, 282 a, N.; in -a<, w. Dor. gen., 225; use, pl. 1000; w. article, 1136-1142, 1160; omission of article w., 1207. Properispomenon, 157. See Accent. Propbecies, pres. in fut. sense in, 1882. Proportionals, 354 c. Proposa], expressed by hart. subjv., 1707 ; by ri ouv o& or ri o&, 1936 ; aM in, 2784 c. Propriety, expressed by imperf. indic., 1774-1779, HJ05, 2313-2317; by opt., 1824-1834. Protasis, defined, 2280. Protestations, expressed by opt., 1814 b ; in indic. w. p.f}, 2705 i ; in inf. w. p,?/, 2716; 1j p.v, etc., in, 2895. Prothetic vowels, 41. I>rove, vbs. signifying, w. part., 2106. J>roviso, expressed by CJrrre w. inf., 2268; by </>' i[> and </J' 'fre, 2279. Punctuation, marks of, 188. Pure verbs, defined, 376. Purpose, gen. of, 1408; inf. of, 20082010, 2717 ; expressed by gen. of art!c. inf., 2082 e ; by part., 2060, 2065 ; cl., see Final clauses; methods of expressing, 2206 ; temp. cl. denat-

Optative, general force, 18611863; in less vivid fut. condits., 2331; in general conditR., 233H ; in i!w< cl., 2424, 2427 N.; in ind. dise., 2611 b. Imperative, in prohib., 1840, 1841 ; general force, 1864. Infinitive, in unfulfilled obligation, 1778 ; in unatta.inable wish, 1781 ; w. liv, 184() ; general force, 1865-1870; with vbs. of hoping, etc., 1868, 1991), 2024; w. p.{I>.w, 1959; w. vbs. of will and desire, 1998; w. CJJrrre, 2261 ; in unreal condits., 2314 ; after 1rplv, 2453 c. Participle, w. liv, 1846; general force, 1872-1874; w. elp.l, Jll61 ; as pred. adj., 2091; w. rv-yxavw, avOavw, <f>Oavw, 2096 ; w. vbs. signifying to support, endu1e, 2098 a; w. opaw, aKow, 2112 a N. ; substituted for prat., representing imperf., 2344. Priee, gen. of, 1372-137 4 ; dat., 1508 a. Primary, tenses, 360, 1858; endings, 463, 465, 466 ; stems, 825 ; suffs., 829 ; suffs., of substs., 839-842, 850-865; suffs., of adjs., 857-865. Primitive; vbs., defined, 372 ; words, 828 a ; substs., suffs. forming, 839842, 859-865; adjs., 857-865. Principal parts, 369, 370, 387. Principal tenses, 360. Proclitics, the, 179, 180, 183 e. Prodiorthosis, 3045. Progressive tenses, 1857. Prohibitions, expressed by subjv., 1800, 1840-1844, 2756 b; by imper., 1835, 1840-1844, 2709; by p.?j w. fut., 1918 a ; by ou p.?j w. 2d pers. sing., 1919; by fut., 1919,2754, 275G a; by li1rw< or li1rw< p.f} w. fut., 1920; by p.f} w. inf., 2013 d, 2715. Prohibitive subjunctive, 1800, 2707, 2756 b. Prolepsis, 2182, 3045. Proleptic predicate nouns, 1579. Promising, vbs. of, w. fut., aor., or pres. inf., 1868, 1999, 2024; w. p.?/, 2725, 2726 a.

ENGLISH INDEX
ing, 2418-2421 ; rel. cl. of, 2554, 2705 f.

749

Quality, roost words denoting, fern., 199 c; suffs. denoting, 840; adjs. denoting, 858. 7; gen. of, 1320, 1321. Raining, vbs. of, w. dat. or ace., 1507 c. See Abstract nouns. Reaching, vbs. of, w. gen., 1350. Quantity, transfer, 34, 238 c, 434; of syl- Heceiving, vbs. of, w. the giver in dat., lables, 142-148; variation, in third 1484; w. inf., 2009. decl., substs., 254; variation, in vb.- Recessive accent, 159, 162 n, Intr. C, stem, 374, 475. See Variation, GraN. 1; incompos., 178,893; invoc. 233, dation, Lengthening, etc. 261, 262, 264 a, 292 a; in compnd. adj s. in -'ls, 292 c; in adjs. in -wv, Quasi-impersonal verbs, 933, 1984, 1985; take geu. absolute rather than ace. 293 c; of vbs:, 423-427, 773 b, 791 b; absolute, 2072 b. in sorne fern. adjs. used as substs., 840 d. Questions, direct, interrog. prons. and ~Jdvs. in, 1263 ; indic. in, 1770; delib. Reciprocal, middle, 1726. subjv. in, 1805-1808; Tl 1rcWw; 7l Pronoun, decl., 331; gen., in at'YPWJJ-at ; 1811 ; potent. opt. w't /iv trib. position, 1184 ; use, 1277, 1278. in, 1821 a, w. /iv in, 1831 ; 1rws lLv, Reflexive, 1231, 1232. Tls /iv in, 1832 ; imper. in, 1838, Relations, how expressed in 1842 a ; pres. for fut. in, 1879 a ; Greek, 1277, 1278, 1726, 1727. delib. fut. in, 1916, 2639; fut. w. o Redm1dancy, see Pleonasm. interrog. in, to express urgency, etc., Redundant negative, 2739-27 49, 27 53. 1918; 7l o v o and 7! o in, l\l36; 1rws Heduplication, F !ost in, 122; of initial (Tl) o p.w; 1959 d; Tl p.a.Owv; Tl 'Ira.<f>, o, x; 125 a; in p.t-vbs., 414 A, 726, Owv; Tl i!xwv; 2064 a, b; simple, 2157; 727 ; accent in, 420; how formed, after 1rel, 2244; after o<ne, 2275; 439-445; in pres., 439, 4.14 A, 447, how expressed, 2()36, 2037 ; Y es and 494, 504, 526 c, 723, 726, 727; in perf. No questions (sentence-questions), and plup. act., 439, 444, 555, 501, 2638, answers to, 2080 ; pron.-ques572; in perf. and plup. mid. and pass. tions (word-questionR), 2638; deand fut. perf. pass., 439, 444, 574; lib., 2639; rhetorical, 2640; not in sec. aor., 439,.448, 494, 549; A tt., introd. by interrog. particles, 2641444 a, 446, 477 a N., 566; position, 2649; introd. by interrog. particles, in compnd. vbs., 449-454; substs. 2650-2655; alternative, 2656-2601 ; formed by, 835_. moods in, 2662; negs. in, 1800, 2703; Heference, dat. of, 1496. .H in, 2784 e, 2786; lipa. in, 2703, Reflexive, comparison, 1078, 1093. 2794; rp in, 2801 ; ."(p in, 2804, 1 Pronouns, decl., 3:W; oi, etc., as 2805, 2806 a; <! in, 2835; fJ in, ind., !{25 d, 187 N. 1 ; attrib. position 2843 a; oa.l in, 2848; 7J1rov in, of article w. possess. geu. of, 1163, 2850 ; ijra. in, 2851 ; 'fi Ka.l in, 2805 ; 1183, 1184 ; possess. prou. sometimes Ka.[ in, 2872; p.v aJone in; 28!J8; reflex., 1108-1203; omitted, 1199. 2 p.b7ot in, 2918; v in, 2928; oi!Kovv N.; dir., 1218-1224,1228 N. 3; pers. prons. in reflex. sense, 1222-1224 ; in, 2953 d ; ov in, 2!JG2. Indirect, introductory words, ind., 1225-1229, 1194, 1195; of third 1263, 2%3-2674; asRimilation in, pers. for that of sec. or third pers., 2186 d ; after vbs. of jearing, 2234; 1230 ; recip., 1231, 1232; a.r6s em-

subst. cl., 2575. 3; have constr. of ind. dise., 2596 ; alternative, 267 5 ; neg. in, 2676; moods in, 26772679.

750

ENGLISH INDEX
339 f, 2668 ; o, 7}, r6 as rel., 109, 1105; as demons., 1110, 338 b; pred. position of article w. possess. gen. of, 1171; prep. omit. or repeat. w., 1671 ; resolved into conjunc. and pron., 2491; concord, 2501, 2502; antec., 2503; def. and indef., 25052508; omission of antec, 2509-2516; not repeated, 2517, 2518; prep. w., omitted, 2519; attraction, 25222528; case, w. omitted antec., 25292532. See os, etc. Releasing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1392. Rernembering, vbs. of, w. gen., 13561358; w. ace., 1358; adjs. of, w. geu., 1420; vbs. of, w. part., 2106. Reminding, vbs. of, w. gen., 1356-1358; w. two aces., 1359, 1628. HemoYing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1392. Repeated action, expressed by pres. indic., 1876; by imperf. or aor. w. liv, 1790, 1791 ; by iterative forrns w./iv in Hdt., 1792. Request, expressed by hort. subjv., 1797 ; by potent. opt. w. /iv, 1830; by imp., 1835. Resistance, imperf. of, 1896, 1897. l~espect, dat. of, 1516; ace. of, 1516 a., Hi00-1605, 2034 e. Hestraining, vbs. of, w. gen., 1392. Hestrictive particles, 2821, 2830. Hesult, of action, suffs. denoting, 841; ace. of, 1554 aN. 1, 1578, 1579; inf. of, 2011, 2717. Result clauses, 2249-2278 ; w. <ba-r, after vbs. of fea?iny, 2239; neg., 2260 ; rel., 2556, 2705 h. Hesultative aorist, 1926. Hhetorical questions, see Questions. Hhotacisrn, 132 D. Ri vers, narnes of, gender, 199 a, 200 a; use of article w., 1139. Root-determinatives, 832. Root-stems, 193, 823. Roots, 191-193, 371, 830, 831. Huling, vbs. of, w. gen., 1370, 1402 ; w. ace., 1371; adjs. of, w. gen., 1423; vbs. of, w. dat., 1537, 1538.

phatic or reflex. w. other prons., 1233-1237 ; w. act. voice, instead of mid., 1723; w. mid., 1724, 1727. Refusai, imperf. of, 1896, 1897. Refusing, vbs. of, use of neg. w., 27392744. Regarding, vbs. of, w. pred. gen., 1305. Rejoicing, vbs. of, w. part., 2100, 2587 ; w. ir; or ws, 2100, 2577, 2587. Relation, adjs. denoting, 858. 6 ; gen. of, 1428; dat. of, 1495-1498. Helationship, names of, suffixes forming, 845-850 ; article omitted w., 1140. Relative, ad vs., 346 ; antec. of, def. or indef., 2505 ; attraction in, 2528. And absolute tirne, 1850. Clauses, as nom. pred. of follow. sentence, 995 ; correspond to attrib. adjs., 1165, 2488 ; how introduce, 2489, 2498, 2499; sometimes equiv. to coirdinate cl., 2490 ; position, 2492; w. ls, 2493 ; i, as to what, 2494 ; ornrEp, ls ')', 2495 ; o<rns, 2496 ; olos, o<ros, 2497 ; vb. of, omitted, 2520; transition from, to indep. cl., 2521 ; attraction of wh ole, 2532 ; inverse attraction, 2533-2535 ; incorporation, 2536-2538; appos., drawn into', 253; subst., usually w. article, drawn into, 2540 ; antec. reserve for main cl., which follows rel. cl., 2541; attrib. adj. or geu. in sent. w. rel. cl., where placed, 2542 ; transference of sup. to, 2542 a; participial or subord: cl. depending on fol!. main cl., joined to preceding cl., 2543; main cl. fused w., 2544; use of moos in, 2545-2552; delib. subjv. in, 2546-2540; delib. fut. in, 2549, 2550 ; ordinary, 2553 ; of purpose (final rel. cl.), 2554, 2705 f ; of cause, 2555 ; of result ( consec. rel. cl.), 2556, 2705 h ; condit., see Conditional relative clauses and sentences. Pronouns, 338-340 ; used in exclam. sense aud as ind. interrog.,

ENGLISII INDEX
Sampi (San), 3, 348. Satiate oneself, vbs. meaning, w. part., 2100 b. Saying, vbs. of, foll. by <ivu.< and pred. adj., 1041; w. aor. inf. referring to fut., 1871 ; pres. of past and pres. combined in, 1885 a; aor. of, used of resolution, HJ38 ; pers. and impers. construction w. pass. of, 1982 a; command, w. ace. or dat. and inf., 1997; in absolute inf., 2012 a, b; inf. as obj. of, 2016-2022, 2579, 2592 a ; inf. as subj. of pass. of, 2016 a, 2021 ; w.lTL or ws, 2017, 2577, 2579, 2592 a; w. artic. inf., 2034 g ; rare! y w. part., 2106 a; w. part. and ws, 2121; fol!. by dir. or ind. dise., 2589 ; repeated, in dialogue, etc., 2589 a; w. o and inf., 2722 ; w. JL1J and inf., 2723. Seas, names of, use of article w., 1139. Secondary, tenses, 360, 1858; endings, 464-468 ; stems, 825 ; suffs., 829 ; suffs., of substs., 843-852, 859-865; suffs., of adjs., 857-865. Seeing, vbs. of, w. part., 2110-2112; w. lTL or ws, 2110. Selling, vbs. of, w. gen., 1372. Semivowels, 15 c, 20, 43, 109-117, 148 D 1. Sending, vbs. of, use of imperf. of, 1891; w. part. and w. inf., 2009. Sentence, ad vs., 1094 b, 2769; questions, 2638. Sentence, defined, 900 ; complete and incomplete, 901-905 ; simple, compound, and complex, 903, 21592161 ; appos. to, 991-995; see Complex, compound, simple sentence. Separation, gen. of, 1391-1400 ; vbs. of, w. ace., 1393; adjs. of, w. gen., 1427. Serving, vbs. of, w. dat., 1464. Sharing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1343 ; adjs. of, w. gen., 1415. Shortening of long vowels, 39, 40. Showing, vbs. of, foll. by i!Jv and pred. adj., 1041; w. gen., 1368; w. two aces., 1613; w. part., 2106-2109,

751

2592 c; w. liTL or ws, 2577, 25!l2 c; w. inf., 25!l2 c. Shrines, names of, w. article, 1137. Sibilants, 17. Sigmatic aorist system, 542-545. Similarity, adj s. denoting, 858. 16. Similes, aor. in, 1!l35 ; ws, ws <l, etc., in, 2481-2487. Simple sentence, defined, 903 ; syntax of the, 006 ff. ; expansion of the, 922-924; summary of the forms of, 2153-2158; in ind. dise., 2597-2GOO, 2614-2616. Words, 827. Singular, subj., w. v b. in pl., 950-953; vb., w. subj. in pl., 958-901; subjs., two or more, 963-972; collective, 996, 997 ; distrib., 908 ; shifting w. pl., 1012. See Agreement. Size, exact, expressed by gen., 1321, 1325. Smelling, vbs. of; w. gen., 1354. Snowing, vbs. of, w. dat. or ace., 1507 c. Sonant consonants, 15 a. Sonant liquid or nasal, 35 c. Source, gen. of, 1364, 1410, 1411; expressed by prep. w. case, 1684. 1 c (1), 1692. 1 b. Space, denoted by gen., 1325; dat. of, 1528 ; ace. of extent of, 1580, 1581. Specification, ace. of, see Respect. Spirant, 15 b, 17, 26, 118-123. Spiritus asper, lenis, see Breathings. Spurious diphthongs, 6, 25, 37 c, 51 a, 54, 59. Stage of an action, 1850-1857. Standard Attic, Intr. E, N. 1. Standard of judgment, dat. of, 1512; expressed by prep. and ace., 1695. 3 c. Statements, summary of f01ms in, 2153 ; dependent, 2575-2588. Stems, and roots, 191-193; variation of formation of, in tllird decl., 253, 278; substs. w. two, 282; of vbs., 367-380; of vbs., changes in, 474495 ; how formed, 824 ; primary and secondary, 825 ; changes in, wh en

752

ENGLIS!I DEX
dits., 2300 c, 2357 ; in fut. condits., 2822-2324; in apod. of more vivid fut. condits., 232ii c, .2327, 2357; in apod. of emotional fut. condits., 2328, 2357 ; in apod. of less vivid fut. condits., 23:34 c; in general condits., 2336, 2337 ; in a])Od. of condits. of type el w. opt., 2359, 2363 ; in temp. cl., 23n4, 23})9, 2401-2403, 2407 a, 2409-2412, 2418-2421, 2423, 2426; w. 1rplv, 2430-2432, 24432447 ; w. 7rp6T<pov 1), 2458; w. ?Tptv 1), 2460 ; ordinary use in rel. cl., 2545; delib., in rel. cl., 2546-254}); in ordinary rel. cl., 2553 ; in final rel. cl. in Hom., 2554 c; in vivid fut. condit. rel. cl., 2565 ; in general condit. rel. cl., 2567, 2570 a, 2571; in ind. dise., 2599-2(113, 2618-2621; in dir. questions, 2662 b; in ind. quest., 2677-267}); p.?] w., 2700-2708; p.?] and p.7) o with, 2751. Subordinate clauses, assimilation of mood in, 2183-2188; classes, 218, 2190. Subordination, and coordination, 21592161 ; coordination in place of, 21682172. Subscript, iota, 5, 65. Substantivai clauses, 2189, 2207-2233, 257 4-2687 ; sentences, 2190. Substantives, rules for accent, 205208; formation, 838-856, 859, 865; compnd., 886-890; pred., 910, 911, 915, 973-975; dat. w., 1499-1502, 1510, 1529; preps. compounded w., 1655; w. inf., 2001-2007; ov and p.-IJ w., 2735. See Nouns. Suffixes, added to roots to form stems and words, 193, 824-828; tense, 455; mood, 457-461; primary and secondary, 829; definition and function, 833 ; origin, 833 a--d; gradation in, 833 e; denoting agency, 839, 859. 1, 10, 860. 1, 861. 18, 863 a 2, 5, 7, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16; forming names of actions and abstract substs., 840, 859. 2, 6, 861. 1, 11, 863 a 2, 9, 17,

suff. is added, 834. See Gradation, Variation. Stop verbs, 537, 545, 560, 621, 622, 623. Stops, how sounded, 15 b, 16; divisions, 1G ; doubled, 81 D 2; before stops, 82-84 ; before p., 85-87 ; before v, 88-90; aspiration, 124-127; before liquids, effect on quantity, 145, 146 N. See Labials, etc. Striving, vbs. of, w. gen., 1349; w. obj. cl., 2210. Subject, defined, 902 ; a subst. or equiv., 907, 908; expanded, 923 ; of finite v b., 927, 938, 939 ; nom., replaced, 928; nom., omitted, 929-937 ; of inf., 936, 1972-1981; ace., omitted, 937; use of nom. as, 938-943 ; and pred., concord, 925, 949-972; sing., w. vb. in pl., 950-953; dual, w. vb. in pl., 954-957 ; pl., w. vb. in sing., 958-961; pl., w. vb. in dual, 962; two or more, 963-972 ; inf. as, 1084, 1985, 2016 a, 2021 ; of dependent cl., made obj. of vb. of princ. cl., 2189. Subjective genitive, 1328-1335. Subjunctive mood, 357, 359, 1760; endings, 366 c, 463, 465, 636 ; meaning, 380; of compnd. vbs., accent, 426 f; t]lematic vowel, 457, 458 ; and fut., identical, 532, 541 a, <367 D; pres., 629, 749; first aor. act. and mid., 667 ; first and sec. aor. pass., 674; sec. aor. act. and mid., 682, 757; first and sec. perf. act., 691-693, 702, 763 ; perf. mid. and pass., 708, 709. With /Lv, 1768, 1813 ; in simple sent., without /Lv, 1795-1811 ; bort., 1797-1799;prohib., 1800,1840-1844, 2756 b; of doubtful a.ssertion, 1801; of fear, warning, da.nger, 1802; of emphatic deniai, 1804, 2755; delib., 1805-1808; anticipa.tory (Homeric), 1810, 2707 a; tenses, 1859, 1860; assimilation to, 2188; in final cl., 2196-2199, 2201; after vbs. of e.ffo?t, 2214-2219; of jea1 and caution, 2220-2232; after &ITn, 2275; in apod, of simple pres. or past con-

ENGLISH INDEX

753

b 8, 865. 1, 2, 7 ; denoting result of Synizesis, 60, 61. action, 841, instrument or means, Synopses of verbs, 382, 388-392, 419422. 842, 860. 3, 863 a 7, 8, 12, 16, person concerned, 843, 859. 8, 861. 13, 863 Syntax, defined, 900; of simple sent., a 2; forming gentil es or place names, 906-920 ; of compound sent., 2l6221'(2; of complex sent., 2173-2687. 844, 859. 5, 10, 861. 11, 863 a 2, b 12, 864. 1; patronymics, etc., 845-850, Systems, tense, see Tense-systems.
861. 11, Hl, 22, 23, 863 b 1, 10, 12, 13, 18; denoting place, 851, 860. 3, 861. 20, 863 a 8, 12, 16, 21; forming diminutives, 852-856, 859. 5, 861. Hl, 863 b 15, 16, 864. 1, 2, 3, 12; adjectival, 857,858; denotingfulness, 858. 3, 16, 863 b 19, material, 858. 4, 12, fitness, ability, relation, 858. 6, 9, quality, 858. 7 ; noun, 859-865.

Superiority, compnd. vbs. denoting, w. gen. , 1403. Superlative degree, 287, 313-324, 345 ; uses, 1085-1093; strengthened by on, etc., 1086, 2994; w. gen.' 1434; dat. w., 1513 a; use in comp. cl., 2469-2473; olos attracted w., 2532 a; transference to rel. cl., 2542 a. Supplementary participle, 2046-2048,
2088-2145.

Surd consonants, 15 b. Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen., 1402. Surprise, inf., in exclams. of, 2015; expressed byrl p.a.fJwv, rl1ra.fJwv, 2064 a; by particles w. part., 2082; questions expressing, w. dra., etc., 2653; expressed by d.;\M in questions, 2784 e, 2786 ; by d.pa., 2795 ; by 'Yap in questions, 2805 a ; by :q 'Yrip, 2865 ; by :q o1,, 2865 j by Ka.[ before interrog. word, 2872. . Swearing, vbs. of, w. ace., 1596; w. p.ri, 1596 b, c, 2894; w. fut., aor., and pres. inf., 18Ci8, 1990, 2024 ; in aor. to denote resolution, 1938 ; w. p.T,, 2725, 2726 a. See Oaths. Syllables, 138-141; quantity, 142-148. Syllepsis, 3048 a. Sympathetic negative, 2739-27 49, 27 59 b. Symploce, 3046. Syncope, 44 b, 129 c, 476 a, 493, 549. Synecdoche, ::1047.
GREil li GUA~!.

Taking, vbs. of, w. in!., 2009. Tasting, vbs. of, w. gen., 1355 ; adj s. of, w. gen., 1416. Teaching, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628. Temporal clauses, assimilation of mood in, 2185 b, 2186 b, 2187, 2188; use, 2383-2461 ; words and expressions introducing, 2383-2385; def. and indef., 230-2394 ; referring to def. pres. or past time, 2395-2397 ; to fut., 2398-2408 ; in generic sent., 2409-2417; denotiug purpose, 24182421 ; summary of constrs. of ~ws, etc., 2422-2429 ; w. 1rplv, 2430-2457 ; w. ... p6r<pov jf, etc., 2458-2461. Particles, 2770, 2845. Tense-stems, 3()7-379. Tense-suffixes, 455. Tense-sy.stems, 368; formation, 474601, 717-743.

Tenses, number, 355, 359; primary and secondary, 360, 1858 ; and tense-systems, 368 ; and moods, meaning, 380 ; uses, 1850-1965 ; tilne and stage of action expressed by, 1850-1858; of subjv., 1860 ; of opt., 18(il-1863; of imper., 1864; of inf. not in ind. dise., 1865; of inf. in ind. dise., 1866, 1867, 2019 ; of part. not in ind. dise., 1872, 2048, 2112 aN.; of part. w. a.vOavw, <j>Orhw, ru-yxavw, 1873; of part. in ind. dise., 1874, 2106; of indic., 1875-1965; epistolary, 1942; periph., 1959-1965; in ind. dise., 2597-2635 ; in ind. questions, 2677-2679; in cxclam. sent .
2686.

Terminal accusative, 1588, 1589. Testifying, vbs. of, w. p.T,, 2725. Thematic, conjugation, 602.

-48

754

ENGLISH JNDEX

Vowel, defined, 377; in w-vbs., Transfer, of quantity, 34, 238 c, 434; of aspiration, 120. 379, 412; pres. w. and without, 4HH, Transition, marked by /J.pa, 2789; by 503, 504 ; of sec. aor. in first aor., ciTap, 2801; by 'Yap, 2805 ; by ci\M in Hom., M2 D ; lacking in sec. aor. 7 ap, 2819 c; by a, 2836; by aT], of w-vbs. in Hom., 547 D; lacking in 2846 j by ,u.P aTj, 2900 j by ,U.fP OVP, \ sec. aor. of ,u.c-vbs., 550; in perf. 2901 C ; by ,u.vroc, 2919 ; by .XM ,u.Tjv mid., in Hom., 574 D; in infiec., ( .. 'Y), 2921; by Ka! ,u.T]v, 2921; by Kal fLTJP '"/, 29Jl1 ; by ovv, 625-767' 776. 2956, 2964 ; by rolvvv, 2987. Theme, 371. See Verb-stems. Thinking, vbs. of, fol!. by evac w. pred. Transitive and intransitive senses, mixture of, in same vb., 819. adj., 1041; w. pred. gen., 1305; w. aor. inf. refetTing to fut., 1871 ; pers. Transitive verbs, defined, 920 ; and intr., constr. w. pass. of, 1982 a; inf. as 920, 1553-1562, 1708, 1709; pred. obj. of, 2016-2022 ; inf. as subj. adj. with, 1040 b; w. ace., 1590-1597, 1706. of pass. of, 2016 a, 2021 ; w. artic. inf., 2034 g; rarely w. part. in ind. Transposition, 128. See Metathesis. dise., 2106 a; w. part. and ws, 2121 ; Trees, names of, gender, 199 b. foll. by inf., on, ws, 2580, 25il2 b; Trust, put, vbs. signifying w. ,u.T], 2725. foll. by dir. or ind. dise., 2589; w. Trusting, vbs. of, w. dat., 1464. o and inf., 2722 ; w. ,u.T] and inf., Trying, vbs. of, w. obj. cl., 2217. 2723. Threat, expressed by voc., 1284; by Ultima, 139. first pers. sing. of subjv., 1798; by Unclothing, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628. El w. fut. indic., 2328; by U:v w. Unlike, to be, vbs. meaning, w. dat., subjv., 2328 a; by ;j ,u.?)v, 2865, 1466. Unreal, indic., 1786-1789; in causal 2921. Threatening, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461; w. clause, 2243; in apod. of simple fut., aor., .and pres. inf., 1868, 1999, pres. or past condit., 2300 b, 2358 ; 2024. in unreal condit., 2302-2320, 2358 ; Time, advs. of, 346; gen., dat., and in prot. and apod., 2353 ; in conace. of, distinction, 1447, 1543; gen. junction w. l and the opt., 2365; of, 1444-1447, 1325; expressed by after 71' plv, 2442 ; condit. rel. cl., 2564. dat. of part., 1498; dat. of, 15311- Urgency, expressed by o w. fut., 1918. 1543, 1447, 1528; expressed by gen. and prep., 1583, 1685. 1 b; by lv w. Value, gen. of, 1336, 1337, 1372-1374, dat., 1542; ace. of extent of, 1580, 1379; adjs. of, w. gen., 1424. 1582-1585, 1447; expressed by ace. Variable vowel. See Thematic vowel. and prep., 1583, 1587; ace. of, where Variation, of stem formation, in third dat. is in place, 1583; expressed by decl., 253, 278; of quantity, in third ad v. ace., 1611; by part., 2060, 2061, decl., 254; in vb.-stem, 475-495, 373, 2070. 37 4, see Gradation, Change,' QuanOf an action, expressed by tenses, tity, etc.; of preps., 1666. 1850-1857. Vau, 3; see Digamma. Vengeance, vbs. of, w. gen. and ace., Trnesis, 1()50-1653. Touching, vbs. of, w. gen., 1345-1347; l:H6, 1405--1409. adjs. of, w. gen., 14Hl. Verb-stems, 367,371--375, 826; changes Towns, see Cities. in, 474-495; and pres. stems, 496-

:nu a, 456, 457, 602; not in 1u-vbs.,

ENGLISH INDEX
531, 723-743; and fut. stems, 532541; and first aor. stems, 542-545; and sec. aor. stems, 546-554 ; and sec. perf. stems, 554, 561-573 ; aml first perf. stems, 555-500 ; and perf. mid. stems, 57 4-584 ; and first aor. pass. stems, 585-581! ; and sec. aor. pass. stems, 590-598 ; in compounds, 870, 880-882. Verbal, adjectives, in-r6s, camp., 323 a ; meaning, 358. 2, 4 72 ; accent, 425 c ; how formed, 471 ; in pl., 1003 a, 1052; agr., 1059; dat. w., 1488; w. ace., 1598. In -ros, meaning, 358. 2, 473, 2149; accent, 425 c; how formed, 471; in pl., 1003 a, 1052; dat. w., 1488, 2149. 2, 2151, 2152; constr. of, pers. and impers., 2149-2152. Nouns, defined, 855, 358; w. ace., 1598 ; use, 1966-2152. See Infinitive, Participles, V erbal adjectives. Verbs, infiec., preliminary remarks, 355380; stems, 367-380; primitive, 372; denom., 372, 866-868, 892; conjug., 381-422, 602-024, 717-743; accent, 423-427 ; aug. and redu pl., 428-454; tense-suffs., thematic vowel, and mood-suffs., 455-461 ; pers. endings, 462-468; endings of inf., part., and verbal adj., 469-473; fom1ation of tense-systems, 474-601 ; in -aw, -ew, -ow, 499, 522 ; in -<w, -vw, 500, 500 D, 501, 522; in -1rrw, 505, 50() ; in -lw, 508-512; in -rrw (Ion. and later A tt. -<urw), 513-516 ; liquid and nasal stems, 517-522; of N class, 523525 ; in -<rKw, 52G-528; inftec. of wvbs., 625-716; infiec. of ,u<-vbs., 744767 ; irregular ,u<-vbs., 768-799 ; peculiarities in use of voice-forms, etc., 800-818; mixture of tr. and intr. senses, 819-821 ; compound, see Compound verbs; impers., see lmpersona! verbs; tr. and intr., see Transitive verbs, Intransitive verbs ; concord, 925, 949-972, 2501 b; omission, 944-948, 2520 ; gen. w., 1339-

755

1411; syntax, 1703-2152. See V'aices, Moods, Tenses, etc. Vocative case, 201, 202, 204, 223, 226, 233, 248, 249, 2()1 ; uses, 1283-1288, 2682, 2684. Voice-forms, peculiarities in use, 800818. Voiced consonants, 15 a. Voice~ess consonants, 15 b. Voices, three, 355,356; uses, 1703-1758. See Active, etc. Vowel, declensions, of substs., 204, 211-239; of adjs., 286-290; cons. and vowel decl. of adjs., 294-299. Stems, w. rr in perf. and plup. mid. and pass., 404, 407, 409 e and N. Suffixes, 859. Verbs, defined, 376 ; conjug., 382399, 404, 407, 409 e and N. ; fut., 534; first aor., 543 ; first perf., 557, 558 ; tenses, 606 ; not contracted, stems, 607-610; contracted, st.o,ms, 611-613. Vowels, the, 4; quantity, 4; pronunc., 24; vowel change, 27-45 ; compens. length,, see Compensatory lengthening; shortening, 39, 40, 148 D. ; addition, 41; development, 42; disappearance, 43, 44; assimilation, 45; euphony, 4G-76; contact, 46; contraction, 48-59 ; absorption, 56 ; synizesis, 60, 61 ; crasis, 62-69; elision, 70-75 ; apocope, 75 D; aphaeresis, 7() ; conss. w., 109-117 ; thematic, see 'l'hematie vowel. See Change, Gradation. Want, adjs. of, w. gen., 1429. 'Vanting, vbs. of, w. geu., 1396. Warning, expressed by voc., 1284; by first pers. sing. of subjv., 1708; by ,u-1} w. independent subjv. in Hom., 1802; by o w. fut., Hll8; by li1rws or li1rws ,u-1} w. fut. indic., 2213 ; condit. w. el w. fut. indic., 2328, w. <!tiv w. subjv., 232R a. Way, advs. of, 346. Whole and part, constr. of, 981-085.

75()

ENGLISH INDEX
cl. introd. by 1rel, 2244 ; p.fj in, 2704, 2715 ; expressed by vb. of saying or thinking. w. p.f}, 2723; M in, 2784 d ; -ytip in, 2807 ; ilijra in, 2851. Wishing, vbs. of, in fut., 1913. Wondering, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405; w. el, 2247; w. lin or ws, 2577, 2587; w. part., 2587.

Whole, gen. of, see Divided whole. Will, vbs. of, w. inf., 1869, 1991-1999, 2719; other constrs. w., 1995 ; w. obj. cl., 2218; w. w6, 2720; w. o, 2721. See Desiring. Winds, names of, gender, 199 a; use of article with, 1139. Wish, unattainable, expressed by indic. w. etee (poet. a tee) or el -ytip, 1780 ; by lJJ<jJeov w. inf., 1781 ; by (3ovbp.71P and inf., 1782 ; by (3ovMp.71v l!.v, 1789; opt. of, 1814-1819; expressed by (3ouolp.71v li v, 1827, by 1rws !Lv, rls av w. potent. opt., 1832 ; inf. in, 2014; summary of forms, 2156; in

Yes, how expressed, 2680. Yes and No questions, see Questions.

Yielding, verbs of, with dat., 1463. Yod, 20. Zeugma, 3048.

GREEK INDEX
The references are to the sections. Verbs included in the List of Verbs are, in general, not cited
except when a special form has been referred to in the Gra.mmar.

A, pronunc., 24 ; quantity, 4, 170 ; .yyw, perf., plup. mid., 407; aug. in lengthens to ii after e, ,, p, 217, 218, Hdt., 438 d; pers. constr. w. pass., 484, elsewhere, 28 D., 30 a, 37, 96, 1982 a ; w. part. or inf., 2106, 2144. 476 b, 544; lengthens to "'' 27, 217, :ye(pw, red., 44 ; :ype<T0a<, 425 a n. 435, 446, 484, 487 ; a: E o, 36, 478, .y;;vw, no aug. in Hdt., 438 d; a-yv<p..eva<, 657. 479, 483 a; a: ii ('11): w, 36, 476, 477 c; from sonant liq. ornas., 35 b, .yvow, fut. mid. as pass., 808; w. part., 2106. 482, 573, 840. 2, 885. 1 a; prefixed, 41; ad v. end., 344; added to verb- lyviill- aug., 431, 434; plup., 444. stem, 486 ; at end of first part of cpds , .yopevw, aug.- in Hdt., 438 d. .yopij8ev, 342 D. 873 c. a., nom. sing. 1 decl., 219. .ypoTepos, 313 b. .- or .v-, priv., 885. 1; w. gen., 1428. llyx, w. gen. or dat., 1440. .- or .-, copul., 885. 4. .YX ov, 1700. a, for '1/ after e, ,, p, 31, 286 a, 484 ; lyw, 2 aor., 448; as perl., 1940 a; mix. subst.-stems in, 204, 211 ff. ; replace aor., 542 D ; perf., 446 b, 571 ; fut. o-stems in cpds., 872 b. inf. in Hom., 661 D; aug. in Hdt., ii : w : a., 36. 438 d; w. gen., 1346; intr., 1709 a; a (Dor., Aeol.) for TJ, 30, 32,36 d, 738 a, 11-yop..a< -yvvai:Ka, 1721 ; fut. mid. as 214 D 1, Introd. c, N. 1. pass., 809; 11-ye, /1-yere, w. subjv. or a, gen. sing. (Dor., Aeol.) 1 decl., 214 D imper., 1010, 1797 a, b, 1836; 11-ywv, 5, 225. with, 2068 a; cpds. of, 887. .ywv, decl., 259. a, from a< < af', 38. ii, suff., 858. 1, 859. 2, 859. 3. .ywvCtoJl"' 1726; with pass. mean., ,, 5, pronunc., 25; in aug., 436. 808, 813 a; w. <Jrc!.ilwv, 1576. CL<1 1 iiCL, a,, ii,, for a, a<; a17, 643, a.S, suff., 840 b, 5, 845, 863 b, 8. O.f3poTos, 130 D. a.Sa, suff., 845. . y a-, pref., 885. 7 .. .Secpos, v oc., 233; adj. w. case, 1417. .ya86s, decl., 287 ; comp., 319; adv. eu, .Sews, 44 a. 345. .SLKw, intr., 1709 c; as perf., 1887; cl:ya11-a., 488 a, 489 e, f; subjv., opt., 749 fut. mid. as pass., 808; w. ace., 1591; b, 750 b; pres., 725; pass. dep., 812; w. Eis, 1rp6s, 1592 ; w. part., 2101. w. ace. and gen., 1405; w. 1, 2247. 18LKOS 1 decJ., 289. 'AYl111-fLVWV, voc.' 261. a.SLo, suff., 863 b, 11. .yava.KTw, w. l-rrl and dat., 1518; w. .SvvCLTOS, a/iuvara for -rov, 1003 a, 1052; part., 2100; w. el, 2247. w. fut. inf., 1865 d. .ya.1r6.w, w. lin, 2248; w. part., 2100. a.e to aa, 643. 757

758

GREEK INDEX

.e9~c.>, no aug. in Hdt., 438 d. , o.1pc.>, 520; 2 aor., 431; perf., 435; mid., ci<t, from a.l1, 38. 1734.1; w. gen. and ace., 1376; w. .ELKLtc.>, fut., 539 D. two aces.; ]()13; pass., 1742. .EKa.to !J-EVOS, form, 2071 a. -ntpw, vbs. m, 518. .Kc.>v, see :Kc.>V, a.tpw, aor., 544 c; w. two aces., 1579; aETOS, from a.l<r6s, 38. intr., 1709 a. -a.te, 342 a. -a.ts, Aeol. ace. pl., 214 n 10. -a.tc.>, vbs. in, 866. 6; fut. of, 53() d. -a.ts, -a.t<ra., Aeol. part. end., 305 n, .TJ<i>v, decl., 279 c. 310 n, 671 n. &1JfL' 724, 741; Hom. forms, 752 n. l -O.LS, -a.L<rL, -~<TL, dat. pl., 214 D 9, 215 a. .i]p, 259 n, 283. -a.ts, -n, -o.tev, opt. end., 461 a. 'A8ijva.t, 1005; -a..\<, 26, 106, 342, 1589, a.I<ra., 113. -7]()<v, 342; -7]<Tt, 342, 1535; 'A07]v, a.t<r8.vofLa., mid. dep., 1729 ; pres. as -alii, 227 ; 'A()7Jval7], 227 D. perf., 1885 a; 2 aor. ingress., 1925 a; .Opo(tc.>, w. fis, 1660 b. w. ace. or geu., 1361, 1367,2112 a; .8p6os, not contr., 290 e; comp., 316. w. part. or inf., 1363, 2110-2112, .8'fLc.>, w. obj. cl., 2224 a. 2144; w. on (ws), 2110-2112, 2145. 1 -a.t<rt, dat. pl., see -a.ts. "A8c.>s, 282 a; 'A()6ws, 238 n. a.t, pronunc., 25; in crasis of ~eal, 68; a!<r<rc.>, w. ace., 1558 a. elided, 74; wh en short or long for a.t<rxpos, comp., 318; al<rxp6v, w. " 2247. accent, 169, 213, 427, 162 n 2; aug. to '!], 435; no aug. in Hdt., 438 d. a.t<rx\)vofLa., mid. pass., 815; w. ace., -a., pers. end. for -<rat, 465 a. 1595 a; w. dat., 1595 b; w. hrl and dat., 1518; w. part. or inf., 2100, 2126; -a., inf. end., 469 b. w. obj. cl., 2224 a; w. El, 2247 ; fut. a.t, for El, 2282 a; at '" w. subjv. after ollia, etc., in Hom., 2673. mid. and pass., 1911; iwxuve7Jv, as mid., 815. Atas, v:oc., 249 a and n. a.lSofLa.L, 488 a, 489 c ; w. ace., 1595 a; -O.LTEpos, -O.LTO.TOS, 315 a. w. inf. or part., 2100, 2126; pass. a.t.,.w, w. two aces., 1613; n 1ra.pti nvos, 1630; w. p.f}, 2720. dep., 812, 802 n. '.A:CS1Js, 8 n; iv ( <is) 'Atoiio, 1302 ; a.lTt.op.a.t, mid. dep., 810,1729; w. pass. 'AL"Ii6<Tii<, 342 D. mean., 813; w. ger1., 1375. a.lS<i>s, decl., 26G and n. O.TLOS, W. geu., 1425. a.lF<(, 3D. <LK, suff., 864. 4. a.t8e, accent, 18G; w. opt., 1815. -o.~<(s), advs. in, 344. a.l81jp, defect., 283. C.KO~ov9w, w. dat., 1524. Al9totjl, decl., 256. C.Ko~ov9os, w. geu. or dat., 1417. -O.LLV 1 dual, 214 D 7. C.KOVTLtw, W. geu., 1350. -O.LfLL, for -aw, 656. ci.Koiic.>, tenses w. a: inserted, 489 e, f; -a.w, dual, 212. 2 perf., 446 b, 562 a; mid. fut., 806, 1728 a; w. gen. or ace., 1361-1366, a.va, suff. 843 b 5, 861. 13. 1411, 1465; w. dat., 1366; pres. as a.lvc.>, 488 b. perf., 1885; w. <v (Ka.Kws) as pass., a.lv(.,..,.ofLo ,, de p. as pass., 813. 1593, 1752; w. part. or inf., 2110-a.w%, tense-suff., 523 i. 2112, 2144 ; w. an (ws), 2110-2112 ; a.tvu}La.t, form, 734. w. Bu, 2395 A, note. -a.wc.>, vbs. in, 518, 866. 7. .Kpo.op.a.t, fut. and aor., 487 a; w. gen., a.t!;, decl., 256. 1361, 1364, 1411. -a.i:os, adj. end., 354 f., 858. 2 a.

' l

GREEK INDEX
&Kpos, position w. art., 1172.
aK<AIV1 decl., 805 b j

759

a!LLf3op.a., w. ace., 1591 a. gen. abs., 2071, ap.<Lvwv, &.pcr.,.os, 319; mean., 319 a. 2071 a, 2117 b. .!LLci.ojL<, pass. dep., 812. /I.a.8E, ci.68Ev, 842 D. li.p.p.E, Q.Jio!LES, li.p.JioL( V), 105 D, 184 D, ci.yuv6s, comp., 818. 325 Il 1, 3. &eL<j>a.p, 258 c. .jLVt]JioOVIIl, W. gen., 1357. .EVOJiocu, as fut., 541 a; aor., 548 D. cip.s (sometirnes printed p.Os), 330 n l. .w, short vow. in tenses, 488 a; tenses ciJio;vw, fi.OVofi.a<, mean. and constr., w. u inserted, 489 b, f. 1370, 1471, 1fiH7, 1734. 2. .1]9ua., -E(ii, 219. 2 b, 220; rii 'I}Oei. .p.cj>(, .p.cj>Ls, 130 n, 175 a, N. 1 ; use, in truth, 1527 b. 107 5-l!l77' 1681. .t]81]s, decl., 292; comp., 313; .'IJOs, .p.cj>Lvv'p.L, perf. with pres. mean., 1D40. 292 a. .p.cj>L'yw, w. redundant p.-1}, 27 40. .Jiocj>L'li'Ep(, 1640 a. cit]9w6s, 834 d, 858: 12. 6-LEVS, decl., 276. .!LcJ>crf3tJ.,.<l>, w. redundant p.f7, 2740. II.Ls, w. geu., 1439 c. .!'-cJ>6.,.epo, 849 e, 962 a, 1171, 1170. 6-L<rKoJioa.L, aug., 481, 434; stem, 528; .p.cj>oTpw9Ev, -9, -cre, 342. fut., 486; sec. aor., 682 a, 687; as Q.l'-cj>w, decl., 340 e; with pl. subj., vb. pass. of aipw, 1378, 1752; pres. as in pl. or dual, 062 a ; w. dual au pl., perf., 1887; w. part., 2113, 2114. 999; in pred. position, 1171, 117n. aM, 2775-2786, 2654; &xl\ ~. 2654, &.v, force, 1762, 1768 b; position, 17()4, 2786; M (Kal), after ox lin, etc., repeated, 1765; without vb., 1766; 2768, 2764; otl p.Tjv (p.brot) na, K&v El, 1766 b ; omitted, 1767 ; de2767, 2921; M 'Yap, 2786, 2816pendent subjv. w., 1708; w. indic., 2819; p.v, 2902 ; M ph f], past potent., 1784 ; w. indic., denot2900 ; .. p.vro<, 2786, 2918 a; ing unreality, 1786-lS(); w. iterative p.f}v, 2786, 2921; ' o v, 2957. indic., 1700-1702, 1894, 138, 2341; anTTIIl, pres., 514 j perf., 571 j W. w. fut. indic., 1793; w. anticipatory gen., 1372. subjv., in Hom., 1810, 2407 a; w. Ua.x68Ev, OcrE, -oil, 342. subjv., in Hom., in in dependent sent., ata.L, 75 D. 1813; w. potent. opt., 1822, 182}&'I]KTOS, 81 D 1. 1834, 2405; w. inf. and part., 184:;U'I]OLV, decJ., 331 USe, 1277. 1849, 2023, 2140, 2270; in final &o9Ev, -o9L, -OcrE, 342. clauses, 2201, 2202; in obj. clauses, aOLOS, W. geu. Or dat., 1430. 2215, 2216, 22il2; w. WITT<, 2270,. Lo!Lcu, mid. dep., 1729; ciTo, 9 n, 2277, 2278; apod. without, in unreal 688 j a<Tat, '682 Il. condit., 2313-2320; in apod. of Iss li.os, decl., 385; use, 1271-1276; aos vivid fut. condit., 2!129; w. temp. Tf Ka[, 1273, Cp. 2980 j .os ao, partiel es, 2399 ; w 7rplv, 2444-2447, etc., 1274; .o n (1/), 2652; aT/, 242; in indir. dise., 2600, 2603,2607, 1527 c. 2600, 2611. .61"pLos, w. gen. or dat., 1480. ti v, the form, 2283; see av. a..a., improper prep., 1701; w. pan., -.v, in gen. pl., 214 n 8. 2081 j ap.a Kal, 2876. &.v (for va, prep.), in Hom., 75 D. .p.up.,.O.vw, w. part., 2101. O.va, for vauT'IJO<, 72 n, 175 b N. Q.p.{3p01"0S, Q.(3poTOS, 130 Il. &.vu, voc., 72 n, 240 n. ci.fJ., &.,_..s, dJ.Lwv, dp.Wv, d.p.Lv, d:p.Lv, .vn, pre p., 354 a, 1675, 1()77, 168:2. 325 j) 4. .vu'YyvwcrKw, two aors., 820.

760

GREEK INDEX

1.'!rocrj3vvii!'-, tr. and intr. tenses, 819. .vo:y~<a.<os, pers. constr. w., 1982 a. VO.'YI<'IJ, W. ace, Or dat, and nf., 1985 b. '!rOCTTEpW TLVct TL VOS ( TLVOS TL), 01' TLV[ .vCvol'-a., followed by JJ.iJ, 2726. n, 1630 ; w. redundant p.f}, 2740. .va.I'-L!'-vtfcrKw nva nvos, 1630. .'!ro.j>n)yw, used as pass. of 1roMw, 1752. .vcl.crcrw, w. geu., 1370; w. loc. dat., .1r6XP'I infiec., 793 a. li'lrTw, meaning of act. and mid., 1734. 4. 1537, 1538. ii.vEu, 1665 a, 1700; w. redund. o, 2753. .1rv, prep., 33 n, 1675 a, 1684. .vxol'-"' w. part. or inf., 2098, 2127. ll.p, 2787. .vi)p, 130, 262 D; as appos., 986 b. ll.p, 2787-2799; -yp /!.pa, 2820; o' /!.pa, ll.v6pw1ros, 231; as appos., 986 b. 2839. .vCCTT'IJI'-' tr. and intr. tenses, 819 N. cl:pa., interrog. particle, 2650, 2671 ; Jp' -vv'l'-' fut. of vbs. in, 539 c. o, Jpa p.f}, 2651. -a.v%-, tense-suff., 523 b, c. clpa., confirmative particle, 2800. .voCyv!'-, fut. mid, as pass., 808. .pa.pCcrKw, redup., 26 c; sec. aor., 688; .vTC, 175 aN. 1, 1073, 1675, 1677, 1683. tr. and intr., 820, 821. .vT(a., .VTov, improper prep., 1700. .pcrKw, 488 a, 489 e. .vvw, 488 a, 500. 1 b and 1 n, 489 e, f; .pi)v, decl., 285. 1. fut., 539 D; vvcriis, q~tickly, 2062 a. "Ap'l)s, decl., 285. 2. ll.!;os, pers. construction more common .p-, 885. 6. .pLcrTos, 319, 319 a. w., 1982 a; 11.~6v nv w. inf., 1424. .!;L<iw, w. o~<, 2692 a; w. JJ.n, 2720. .pKw, 488 a, 489 f. .1r, 75 D. .pvo!'-a.L, pass. dep .., 812; w. redundant 1ryopevw, w. part., 2098; w. redunp.f}, 2740. dant JJ.iJ, 2740. .p6w, 488 a. li1ras, see 1rcis. ll.pp'IJv, decl., 291 a. .'lra.Tci.w, 454 a, 809. .pvw, .pvTw, 488 a, 489 f, 500. 1 b, 531. .1ra..j>CcrKw, redup., 526 c. -pxos, compounds of, accent, 894 N. ll.'!rELI'-' accent of fut., 426 e. ll.pxw, fut. mid. w. pass. mean., 808; w. 1r1<, 1649 gen., 1370; W. dat., 1537, 11)38; dpi(O1rXW, form &,,.6crxwJJ.a, 42(1 f; and p.a, w. geu., 1391; meaning of act. &,,.tfxoJJ.a, w. redundant p.f}, 2740. and mid,, 1734.5; ingress. aor., 1925; '!rLcrTw, aug., 454a; w. obj. clause, ll.pxoJJ.a w. part. or inf., 2098, 2128, -O.s, numeral words in, 354 e. 2224 a; w. redundant JJ.iJ, 2740. .1r6, rare w. ol-yo and w. numerals, -as, for iis, in ace. pl., 162 D 2. 1317 a; cpds. of, w. gen., 1384; use, -as, words in, w. -ii in geu., 225; w.

a.

1675, 1677-1679, 1684, 1755; mean. in cpds., 1680. .'lro8C8wl'-' mean. of act. and mid., 1734. :3. .1ro6vyfcrKw, as pass. of 1ToKrelvw, 1752. '!roKO.I'-vw, w. part. or inf., 2144. .'lroKptvol'-a.L, pass. dej)., 812 b, 813. .1rovw, 489 f ; mid. fut., 806. 'lrOEL'II'W, W. part., 2098. .'lro'!'-L, tr. and intr. tenses, 819. .'l!'ooyol'-a.L, pass. dep., 812 b, 813 cl. .'11'o1rp6, 1649 a. ,.,.opw, 454 a; 1TopoJJ.a<, 812 c.

voc. in -ii, 226; parts. in, decl., 306.

-acr, -lier, 3d pers. ending, 463 d and D. -lier ( 'IJCTL), in A stems, loc., 341. ll.cri'-Evos, comp., 316 b; pred. use, 1043. O.crcra., 334 D.

f,crcrw, w. ace., 1558 a.

.CTTu, decl., 268 and n 2; accent, 271. -ClTa.L, -a.To, pers. endings, 465 f and n. Tci.p, 2801. liTE (liTE 81)), w. part., 2085; omission

of t:Jv after, 2117.

a.TEp, improper prep., 1700. liTTa., 339; /!.rra, not enclit., 181 b, 334 a.

GREEK IXDEX
a.u, pronunc., 25; aug., 435 (cp. 437) ; stems in, 275. a.{;, 2802 ; S' a.{;, 2839. a.MLs, 2802. 0.\ml.p, 2801. a.{TE, 2802. a.vT(Ka., modifying part. in sense, 2081. a.vTcls, ob.lique cases used as pers. pron. in A tt. prose, 325 d, 328 b, 1171, 1201. 1 a, 1202. 1 a, 1204, 1212; decl., 327 ; meanings, 328, 1204; crasis, aT6s, etc., 328 c N. ; aTo, etc., introduc. following subst., 990 ; same, attrib. position, 1163, 1173, 1204, 1210; self, pred. position, 1171, 1173,1176,1204, 1206 b; in Hom., 1205, 1211, 1233; emphatic (self), 1206-1209; unemphatic aTo, etc., not at beginning of sentence, 1213, 1217, 1228 a; emphatic or reflex. w. other prons., 12331237 ; dat. w. o aTos, 1500; aros civpcirn, etc., 1525. .<!>a.LpOfloO.L nvcf TLVOS (nv6s Tt), Or Ttvl T<, 1630 ;. w. redundant wfJ, 2741. .<l>t"ll'-' aug., 450; w. redund. wfJ, 2741. .<I>Kvofloa.L, w. perf. sense, 1886. li.x&o.,.a., 488 b, 489 e, 812, 1911 ; w . .z, 2247; w. part., 2100. li.xp, 12 c, 1100, 2383. -a.w, vbs. in, pres. part., 310; conjug. of pres. and imperf., 385; pres. system, 499, 522 ; infiec., 635-657 ; in dialects, 642-653 ; denominatives, 8GG. 1; frequentatives and intensives, 867 ; desideratives, 868. -wv, -.v, in gen., 214 D 8, 287 D.

761

(3ETfwv, (3TL<rTos, 319; mean., 319 a. (3.tofloa., dep. w. pass. mean., 813; w. ace., 1591 a; as pass., 1742. (3ow, 687; fut. mid. w. act. mean., 806. (3)1...,..-w, w. ace., 1462, 1591 a. (3o.w, 489 g ; mid. fut., 806; w. }lf}, 2720. (3o"J9w, w. dat., 1592. Bopp.s, forrn, 117 ; decl., 227. (3o-uofloa.L, aug., 430; {JouE<, 628; pass. dep., 812; l{jovMwrJ (ll:v), expressing wish, 1782, 1789; {joi/1\Et, {jou<r8E before delib. subjv., 1806; {jovolflTJ ltv, expressingwish, 1827; w. fut. inf., 1869. (3os, decl., 275. (3po.-os, 130 D. (3vw, fut., 488 c; w. u, 489 d, f.

r, nasal,

B, bef. dental stop, 82 ; bef. Il, 85; bef. v, 88 ; developed between Il and p (or ), 130. (3a.Cvw, 488 c, 489 b, f; sec. aor., 551, 682 a, G82 n, 683 a, 684 a, 687 ; perf. subjv., 693; sec. perf., 704 a and v; mid. fut., 806 ; tr. and intr. tenses, 819; perf. w. pres. mean., 1946.

(3.w, 521, 682 D, 688, 711 d. (3a.a-LE-us, 275, 27'1, 278; w. and with2129. out article, 1140. yfVOfloO.L, 89.

15 a, 19 a, 22, 81, 84, 92; before dental stop, 82 ; before ~' 85 ; for {J, dia!., 132 D; suffixes w., 864. y.a., decl., 285. 3. ya..,.w, mean. of act. and mid., 1734. 6. y.p, 2803-2820; o "fp cl)I.M, 2767,2786 ; c\;\M "f&.p, 2786, 2816-2819 ; ) ( "fov, 2833 ; or, "fap, 2840 ; r; "f&.p, 2865 ; "f.p ovv, 2958. y, 181 d, 2821-282!) j }l~ Tl "fE, 2763 e j ct. "fE, 2786 j c\)1.)\cf "f TOL ( TO[ "fE), 2786 j "f }l V, 2902 j Ka! }l1,V "fE, 2921. yy"J&a., w. part., 2100. YELVOfloa.L, tr. and intr. tenses, 820. -yELos, -yEws, cornpounds in, 888 e. yE.w, 488 a, 489 e, f ; "fEww, 641 D, 643 N.; mid. fut., 806; dramat. aor., 1937. yws, decl., 257 D, 285. 4. yij, in Hdt., 227 D; omitted, 1027 b, 1302. -y'L, deictic suif., 333 g. y(yvofloa.L, 573, 704 b ; copulative, 917 a ; periph. w., 1710, 1754, 1964; as pass. of TlKTw, 1752; pres. as perf., 1887; part. as pred. adj. w., 2091. yyvwa-Kw, 489 c, 681-687, 806; of past and pres. combined, 1885 a; perf. as pres., 1946; w. part. or inf., 2106,

762

GREEK INDEX
SpKop.o., 812; form ~opa.Kov, 128 D. Secrp.s, o, 'l'. Secrp.cl., 281. SevTepo.tos, pred. use of, 1042 a. 8xop.o. and 8Kop.cu, 127 and D; oeM~o1'-a', 580 D ; mid. dep., 813 c; dramat. aor., 1937. S:.~ and Sop.o., contr., 397 a; oo}lat, pass. dep., 812; Olov, copula omitted w., 944 b; ow, lack, w. gen., 1397; oop.at, constr. w.' 1398 ; oo}lat, w. fut. inf., 1869; ow, pers. constr., 1983; Mov, ace. abs., 2076 A. See Set. Sw, bin, 397 a, b/488 c. 8~, 8~'11'0Te, w. indef. pron., 339 e ; 2840284 7 ; o of], o ofJ .,.ou; 2651 f; &M of], 2786 ; 'Yp of], 2820; 'Yp ofJ .,.ou, 2820 ; o of], 2839; Kal of], 2847; 'li 151], 2865 j Ka! 01} Ka[, 2890 j p.P of], 2899, 2900 ; /51} ovv, 2960. Sij9ev, 2849. 8ijMs rrn, w. or part., ijMv rrn w. Sn, 1982 N. ; oijMs Elp.t, w. part., 2107; o. elp.t lin, 2584; oijov OTt (orJOPOrt), without vb., 2585. S1J6w, 385, 387, 392, 809; w. part. or inf., 2106, 2131. -Stjv, ad vs. in, 344. ~11'0V 1 2850. Sij'l'o., 2851 ; ovv oijra, 2960. -8i:, deictic suff., 333 g. s.a., no anastrophe, 175 a N.l; in cpds., 1648, 1680; use, 1675, 1676, 1678, 1679, 1685, 1755. s, ..y(yvop.o., w. part., 2097; &v omitted w., 2119. Stcl:yw, intr., 1709 a ; w. part., 2097. s.a.sox.os' w. gen. or dat., 1417. So.pw, w. two aces., 1626. Stcl.Kep.o., w. adv., in periph., 1438. So.yop.o.., pass. dep., 812. SL11EL11'W, W. part., 2098. 8to.p.vw, w. part., 2097. S11voop.o.., pass. dep., 812; w. inf., 1869, 1992 a ; w. p.f], 2723 a. 8o..,.p6, 1649 a. So.'Tew, w. part., 2097; &v omitted w., 21Hl. 66.cl>opos, w. gen., 1430; w. dat., 1430.

yi:vW<TKw, 89. yvwp:l], implied, 1027 b ; 'YVW!J.?'JV f}rr.rrOat and VK.V "(VW!J.?'}V, 1576. yoiiv, 2830-2833. ypo.iis, decl., 275; in Hom., 275 D 2. ypo.cj>~v, w. vbs. of judicial action, 1377, 1576. ypci.cj>w, act ) ( mid., 1734. 7; "(p&.<j>errOal nva "(pa<j>1)v, 1576; pass., 1742. yvv~, decl., 285. 6.

bef. dental stop, 8il ; bef. p., 8<l; eveloped, between v and p, 1BO; for {J, dia!., 132 D; suffixes w., 863 b. So.(, 2848. So.(v'p., 489 e. Sci.Kpvov, decl., 285. 7. So.KpUw, 500. 1 a; w. ace., 1595 a. Sci.p.vtJp., fut. oap.6w, 539 D ; o&.p.viis, 747 D 4. So.vdtw, act. ) ( mid., 17:34. 8. So.peci.vw, fut. mid. w. act. mean., 806. So.{iTe, 2845. S, 2655, 2834-2839 j K< . , Ol, 2891 j p.v . M, 2003-2916 ; oiiTE . o, 2947; o' olv, 2959; T . M, 2981. SSo., 703. -Se, enclit., 181 d, 186, 3!2 and a, 1589. Se-((K)-crKop.o., welcmne, 526 cD. Sei:, contr., 397 a, 651lt; quasi-impers., 933 b, 1985; w. gen. of quantity, 1399 '; w. dat. of pers. and gen. of thing, 1400, 1407 ; w. ace. of pers. and gen. of thing, 1400 ; w. ace. of thing, 1400; ~oet, of pres. or past time, 1774-1779, 190[;, 2313-2.315 j ~Oft tiv, 2315; w. ace. and inf., 1985 b; neg. w., 2714 b. See w. SeCSw, 70~ n ; w. ace., 1595 a ; oootKa, w. redund. wf,, 2741. SE(KvVfLL, :308, 418, 422, 571,733,744-767 j w. part. or inf., 2106, 2130. Sevo., decl. and use, 336, 1180. Sew6v, w. .z, 2247. SvSpov, decl., 285. 8. Se~(Tepos, mean., 313 b. io;, 'Lei., 285. 9. Sip'J, ~18 a.

~.

on

GREEK INDEX
SLScio-Kw, 99, 80,8; w. ace., 1579. -88pao-Kw, 87 ; fut. mid., 806. 8L8wp., ~07, 41, 421, 488 c, 726, 744-767. 8LK, 1{)49 a. 8LK6.tw, <Ka!;eiTOal nvl nvos, 1376; LKa!;e<v lK7JV, OLKa!;eiTOaL olK7JV nvl, 1576, 1734. 9. 8!KnLOs, pers. construction w., 1982 a; w. lrrrl om., 944 c; olKaLov ~ w. and w't /Lv and inf., 1774, 1774 a. 8!Kt], implied, 1027 b ; lK7JV w. vbs. of judicial action, 1377, 1378; otpL<rKavw lK7JV, 1576; PKaW olK7JV, 1576; TlVW ( Tlvop.aL) lK7JV, 1734. 18 ; olK7JV OVaL, as pass. of !;7]p.wv, 1752 ; ka, 1527 b; olK7JV, improper prep.' 1700. See 8LK6.tw, 8L<i>KW. 8L~S, 354 D. 8Lo, suff., 863 b 5. oviio-n, defect., 283. 8L01TEp, 2240. 8LOTL, 2240, 2578. 8LTTOS, double, 354 d. 8!xn, and s,xea., 354 n, 1097 b, 1700. s.va..,, 394, 641 n. 8L<i>Kw, LC!JKw OavaTov, 1374; OLWKw -ypatpf}v nva, 1576. SoLo!, 8oLw, in Hom., 349 D. 8oKOl, l seem, pers. constr., 1983 ; l belie'Ve, 1983 a; i5oKw p.o<, 1467 a, 1992 c; ooK w. inf., 1983 a, 1985; ooK<L p.o[ nva 8Ev, rare for ooKE rls p.o< Ov, 1983 a ; ooKw, ooKii p.o<, I have a mind to, w. pres. or aor. inf., 1998; ou ooKw, 2692 a; w. p.f}, 2726. 8oKLp.6.tw, with part. or inf., 2132. !iOjlos, omitted after certain preps., 1302. -8ov, advs. in, 344. 8opu, decl., 285. 10. 8pCLTos, -8npTos, 128 D. 8p6.w, 489 b, e, f, 641; w. ace., 1591 a. 8p6cros, gender of, 232 d. 8vvnp.n, 488 c, 489 g, 812 ; pres. subjv. and opt., 424 c, N. 2, 749 b; w. superl., 1086 a; w. fut. inf., 1869. 8uvnTos, persona! constr. w., 1982 a; w. ITTl om., 944 c; w. inf., 2001 ; ace. abs., 207G c.

763

Stlo, 349; w. pl., 349 d, 962 a; with dual and pl., H99. Suer-, cpds., 103 a, 105, 885. 3, 898 c ; aug. of vbs. cpd. w., 452. 8vcrxepn(v.,, w. ace., 1595 a; w. dat., 1595 b. 8iJw,. goiiv, 418, 682 D, 685 D, 687, 758 D; quantity of v, 500. 1 a and 1 D; tr. and intr. tenses, 819. 8i0pov, decl., 231.
E, sign, 2 a; name, 1 b; pronunc., 24 ; interch. w. 71, 27, 36, 37 D 2, 39, 278, 435, 446, 534, 543, 738 b, 887 ; lengthens to '' 96, 100, 102, 544; syll. aug., 429, 431, 444; them. vow. in indic., 456, in Hom. subjv., 457 n; expelled in weak stems, 36, 44 b, 262, 476 a, bef. vow., 44 a, from -leaL, -leo, 650 a ; prefixed, 41 ; added to vb.-stem, 485, in forming cpds., 882 ; e : o, 229 b ; e : o : a, 36, 483 a, 831 b ; E : 7J : w, 36, 831 a ; E : 0 : W, 483 b ; dial. for a, 71, o, ' " 33 D. , pers. pron., 181 a, 187 N. 1. -en, for -7Jv, 214 D 6. ei, from 7Ja, 34. av, 1\v, 1768 a, 2283, 2247' 2323, 2336, 2337 ; if haply, 2354; iv Kal, Ka1 Uv, 2369-2381 ; l v ou, 2696, 2698; l v /!pa, 2796, 2797; lit v TE ( 1)v re, cJ..v re), 2852 a. ~nuToil (auroO), decl., 329; uses, 121S1237, 1201. 2 a, 1202. 2 a. See cr<PiOv

av,

a:TWv.

6.w, 431, 43S d; mid. fut. as pass., SOS; oK lciw, 2692 a. yyu6..,, aug., 453 a; ly-yvwp.a< p.f}, 2726. yyvs, comp. of, 345 b ; for adj., 1097 b ; w. gen. or dat., 1439, 1440, 1700; improper prep., 1700. ye(pw, 446, 549, 693, 705, 819. yKnw nvl and rl n><, 1471. yci>, E-yw( v), 134 n, 325 D 1 ; enclit. forms, 181 a; p.ov a11d lp.o, etc., 187 e N. 2, 325 a, 1192; decl., 325; g-yw-ye, etc., 325 b ; imagil1ary person, 1193. ee>..w, w. inf.' 1860, 1902 a.

764

GREEK INDEX
2076 c; hw v El vat, 2012 c ; lfiTr<, quasiimpers. 1 1985 i fiTTtV liiTTLS, fl!T!v oY, 2513; lf~Tnv wv, etc., 2514; l!unv ov, etc., 2515; ovK l~Trtv lis, etc., 2551, 2552, 2557. See tEtr'TL. ELJ.LL, forms, 773-776, cp. 463 d n, 747 n 1, 2; 'ijs, 464 c n; mean., 774, '1880; re, w. hort. subjv., 1797 a; w. imper., 1836. Etv, Etv!, 1687. -Evw (Aeol. -Evvw), vbs. in, 519. Eio, 325 D 1. no (nom. -etov), suff., 842. 5. -ELos, 846 f, 858. 2. Et1TEp, 2246, 2379. E!1rov, thr accent, 424 b ; El7rp.eva.t and el7r~J.I.v, in Hom., 680 n ; sec. aor., 549; el1rt! of more than one person, 1010; command, w. inf., 1992 c, 1997, 2017; say, w. 8rt or ws, 2017; say, w. inf., 2017 N. ; ws (lf,.os) el1rfiv, 2012 a, b. Etpyw, constr. of inf. w., 2744; p.f), 2740. Etp1)KO., 445, 529. 3. -ELfl"' (Aeolic -Eppw), vbs. in, 519. Els (s), 179, 180 b; use, 354 a, 1675, 1686; eis roro </JtKOa.t, etc., 1325; els lire (Ke), els 8 (K), s li, s o1i, 2383
C. N.

6Ev, 181 D, 325 D 1. 6!tw, aug., 431. u, diphth., 5; genuine and spurious, 6,

25 ; pronunc., 25 ; for in verse, 28 Di Et: Ot: t, 36, 477, 555 b, 564, 576, 586 c, 738, 831 a; by compens. length. for e, 87 ; in aug., .435, 437 ; instead of redu p., 446 ; !oses ,, 43, 270 b. El, proclit., 179; w. opt., to express wish, 1816 ; tiJI1'7r<p ( ilv) el, 2087 a, 24 782480; ws et (u), 2087 b, 2347,24812485; in caus. cl., 2246, 2247; condit., 2282, 2283, 2328, 2329, 2336, 2339, 2340 ; 1 -yp, 1780, 1781, 1815, 1816 ; d J.l.iJ, el o p.i}, El P.1! ot<i (El)' w. v b. omitted, 2346 ; El a' 6.-ye, 2348 ; El and opt. w. ll.v, 2353 ; if haply, 2354 ; El Ka.t, Ka.! Ei, 2369, 2374-2381; in ind. quest., 2()71 ; et Ke, w. subjv. w. vbs. of knowing, etc., in Hom., 2673; El 7/ (dre), 2675; el oti, 2696,26982701 ; d !.pa, 2796, 2797; 1r.'i7v el, 2966 a. -EL and -n, inflectional endings, 628. -n, advs. in, 344. -ELa., substs. in, 219. 2 a and b. -na.s and -a.s, in opt., 461 a, 668 and n. E8ov, 72 D, :'124 b, 431, 529; w. part., 2112 a ; w. <1, 2354 b. ~EL1JJ.LEV and -ELJ.LEV, in Opt., 67 5 a. Et9E ( a.rl1e) or El y&.p, w. indic., 1780, 1781; w. opt., 1815, 1816. ElKUtCAI, aug,, 437 i Tl Tt>t, 1469. ElKos, copula omitted w., 944 b ; aor. inf. preferred w., 1868 b; elK6s ITTt, w. j.l.f}, 2726; KOS J}v, 1774, 1905, 2313. El,...!, enclit. forms, 181 c, 181 n, 424 a; accent if~Tn, when used, 187 b ; forms, 768-772, cp. 463, 464, 466, 747 n 1; fut. mid. w. act. mean., 806; copulative, 917 a; forms, often omitted, 944, 2116-2119; evat redundant w. pred. noun, 1615; w. part. forming periph., 1961, 1962; w. part. as pred. adj., 2091; J}v w. adjs. and verbals of unfulfilled obligation, 177 4 ; geu. w., 1303, 1304; dat. w., 1476; 6v ace. abs.,

ds, decl., 349; e's 1lv~p, 1088. -ELS, adj s. in, 299; parts. in, 307. EtTw (l!Tw), improper prep., 1700. E!Ta., 2082, 2653. EtTE, accent, 186 ; <Yre . . . du, 267 5, 2852-2855; w. il.pa, 2799, 2855; erre ov, 2961. -nw, v bs. in, 650 b. K, 82 c N. 2, 133 a, 136. See e. ~ens, 1097 b, 1700. ~Ka.cr.,.os, 337 ; w. pl. verb, 951 ; in appos. to pl. subj., 952; w. and w't art., 1171, 1179 i WS ~KQ.ITTOS, 2997. KnTEpos, 337, 952, 1171, 1179. Ka.Tpw9Ev, improper prep., 1700. Kd, 341, 346 i KEI1<V1 346. KELVOS, 325 d, 3:33 i USE!, 1238-1261, 990, ll71, 1176-1178, 1201. 1 b, 1202. 1 b; for repeat. rel., 2G17.

GltEEK INDEX
EKEta-E, 346. KEI.,...,, with ace., 1597. KOV<TLOS, pred. use, 1043. K11'f.rrr..,, as pass., 1752. KTOS, 1700; KTOS otJ, 2753. ~Kwv, 305 b; comp., 323; Ev (nom. -'lv), suff., 861. 15. -EVctL, inf. end., 469 N, 1, 469 D,

765

pred. use, 1043; eKWP evat, 2012 C; a part., 2071, 2117 b. Eii, suff., 860. 1. aTT..,v, ia-a-... v, 319, 319 b ; w. or w't .;j, 1074. a\Jv..,, 488 a, 489 f, g; tr. and intr., 1709 a. YX"' perf. mid., 407; w. part., 2106. K..,, 431, 488 a. EL1r..,, w. part., 2098. "EtJV, as adj., 986 a; 'E')PLKOv, W. art., 996, 1024. 1rCt..,, 866. 6; w. dat., 1517; w. inf., 1868 a, 2580; w. ws, 2580; w. p.f}, 2726. 'II'Cs, decl., 257. p.ctuTo, decl., 329; use, 1199. 2 a, 1200. 2 d, 1218-1237. p.8Ev, 325 D 1 ; f.L8ev ar1js, 329 D. jLELO, p.o, p.os, jLE, jLES, 325 D. p...,, 488 a, 489 f; mid. fut., 806. jLE(A)tJTO, etc., 329 D. p.(v, 325 D 4. p.p.v..,, constr., 1549. p.ot f3ouop.vq> a-TC, construction, 1487. p.os, decl., 330 ; use, 330 a, 1182, 1183, 1196-1199, 1203. p.os, 325 D 4. jL'II'ELpos, decl., 289 a; w. gen., 1419. jL11'L11't)jLL, 727; EfJ-1f1f')8t, 751 D. jL11'L'11'pt)jLL, 727. p.1roSci>v, 341 ; w. p.f}, 2740. p.11'poa-8Ev, improper prep., 1700. v, in cpds., 91-95, 101 a, 449 a, 727; proclit., 179, 180 b; v roZs, bef. a super!., 1089; uses, 1511, 1542, 1675, 1679, 1687; w. dat. of place and time, 1534, 1536, 1541, 1542; cpds. of, w. dat., 1544-1550; v o<, 1641 ; w. dat. for eis w. ace., 165(). -Ev, inf. end., 469 a, 469 n. -v, for -')uav, 590 a n, 673 a.

685, 699, 760. vctvT(ov, improper prep., 1700. VctVTLOOjLctL, paSS. dep., 812; W, p.f}, 2740. vctvTCos, opposite, with gen., 1426. vauitop.a, pass. dep., 812 a. vSEf)s, 292 d. VEKct, ivEKEV ( efveKa, ElVEKEV), enc!it. prons. after, 187 eN. 2; postpositive, 1665 a, 1700; motive expressed by, 1679. vtp8E, improper prep., 1700. v6a, 342 b, 346, 346 a, 2498 ; instead of rel. pron., 2499. v86.8E, 346. vSctTa, in Hdt., 126 n, 346 n 1. v8Ev, 346, 346 a, 2498. v8v8E, 346. v6trEv, in Hdt., 126 n, 346 D 1. v9p.op.a, pass. dep., 812, 813 d; w. gen., 1357; w. obj. cl., 2224 a. v(, for v, 17 5 b, 1687. v, for l!ve~rTL, l!vetut, 175 band N. vvo..,, w. part., 2106; w. obj. cl., 2224 a; lvvoiop.at, 812. vv'iip., 105 a, 489 d, 523 f N. 1. -Evv'iip., fut. of sorne vbs. in, 539 c ; stem, 730. -Evv..,, pres. in, 519 D. vox..,, aug., 451; w. dat., 1461. voxos, with gen. or dat., 1425. EVT (nom. -m), suff., 868. 3. VTct6ct, 346, 2080. VTEV6Ev, 346. vTos, improper prep., 1700. vTp1rop.a,, give heed to, w. gen., 1357. <~, in cpds., 104; bef. vow., 136; proclitic, 179; accented, 180 b; bef. aug., 449 a; w. super!., etc., 1317 a; use, 1675, 1677-1679, 1688, 1755. See K. ~Ea-TL, quasi-impers., 1985. ~ijv, w. and w't 11.v, 1774, 2313, 2315. ~ijs, 341; w. gen. or dat., 1437, 1440. ~ov, 2076 A. ~"'' improper prep., 1700. o, o, ot, 181 u, 325 D 1, 1195. EO, EOtJ tO EU, 59 D 2, 465 b D.

766

GREEK INDEX
1ros, .Os 1ros et1retv, 2012 a. 1rpLClflot)V, 424 C N. 2, 749 b. pci..,, 488 a, 489 e, f. pej3Evv6s, 105 n. pe(.,..,, 446 n, 820. p-, 885. 6. 'EpfLijS, decl., 227. -epp.,, pres. in, 519 n. pp.,fLvos, comp., 316 b. piTIJ, 220. p\)K.,, followed by p.f}, 27 41. pv.,, 488 b, 489 d, f, 500. 1 n. pxol'-a., {MU, accent, 424 b; sec. perf., 460 e, 565, 705 ; relation to elp.<, 77 4, 1880 ; as fut., 1881 ; as perf., 1886; w. dat., 1485; w. part., 2099. p.,s, decl., 257 n, 285. 11. s (eis), see ets. es (nom. -os), suff., 840a8, 841.1, 865. 9; (nom. -f}s, -s), suff., 858. 5, 865. 9, 834 d; e<T stems, 263-265, 292. <rO(.,, 488 a, 500. 2; fut. ~i'iop.ru, 541; w. gen., 1355 a. . .,.e.,v, -o<TO.,v, 456 a. -ECTCTO., adjs. in, 114 a. -ECTCTL, dat. pl., 250 n 2. <rTE, 2383. -E<TTEpOS, -E<TTO.TOS, 316. <rXa.Tos, 320 a, 1172. lTepos, crasis of, 69; w. and w't art., 337; and ios, 1271, 1271 a, 1272. eu, 5, pronunc., 25; eu: ou: u, 36, 477 b, 565, 576, 586 c, 831 a; aug., 435; subst.-stems in, 27 5 ; for <o di al., 59 n 2, 465 b, n; !oses u, 43, 270 b, 1 278, 503. e{i, comp., 345; aug. of vbs. begin. w., 452; w. ~xw intr., 1441, 1709 b; w. 1rpdTTW intr., 1709 b; w. 1rodw ('Af'Yw) and ace., 1591 a, b, w. part., 2101; .~ riKow ( ?ra<Txw) as pass. of <li ryw (1rodw), 1593, 1752. e.J, e{>, 181 n, 325 n 1, 2, 1195. eu (nom. -es), suff., 839 a 5, 843 a 1, 844. 1. evaSe, 123 n. : ev6a(!'-CilV, decl., 293. eve1rs, decl., 291 a, 292.

eo, suff., 858. 4 ; stems in, 235. OLKO., 444 b, 573, 693, 696, 704 d and Di pers. constr. w. inf., 1983; w. part., 2089 c; w. part. or inf., 2106, 2133. opya., in Hom., 561 n. ros, in Hom.' 330 D 1 and 2. o, os, 325 n 4. 1ra.w.,, 4tl9 i; mid. fut., 806; dramat. aor., 1937. 1riv, 1768 a, 2309 a. 1ra.vop86.,, ag., 451. 1ra.CTCTVTepos, in Hom., 320 n. 1rEi, w. aor. for plup., 1943; in causal cl., 2240 ; in temp. cl., 2383 n; w. force of although, 2244, 2380; and 1rel 1rpwTov (nixuna), 2383 n; 1rel o~v, 2964 a. 1rn6ci.v, 1768 a, 2399 a. 1rn61J,w.aor.forplup.,1943; incausal cl., 2240; in temp. cl., 2383 n; E'1rELo7} nix<<Tm, 2383 n. 1rELfLL, accent of fut., 426 e. ~11'ELTa., w. part., 2080, 2082; K5.7rELra., 2653. 1rELTE, in temp. Cl., 2383 B N. 1. 11"TJKoos, w. gen. or dat., 1421. 1r1)v, 1768 a, 2399 a. 1r(, 1675-1677, 1689, 350 d; VhS. Cpd. with, w. gen., 1384, w. dat., 15441550. 1rLj3ouevw, fut. mid. as pass., 808. 1rL8lifL.,, w. gen., 1349. 1rLa.v8ci.vol'-a., w. gen. or ace., 1358; w. part. or inf., 21 0(), 2134. 1rLe(.,..,, w. ace., 1597; w. part., 2098. 1rLfLol'-a., 812; w. gen., 1356; w. obj. cl., 2210-2212. 1rLopKw, w. ace., 1596. 1rL<TTa.l'-a., 450, 812; w. part. or inf., 2106, 2139; w. p.f}, 27:l7, 2730. 1rLCTT.,, pass. constr. of, 1748. 1rLTci.TT.,, pass. constr. of, 1748. 1rLT1]6eos, in pers. constr., 1982 a. 1rLTl'-ci.., nvl and Tl Tm, 1471. 1rLTp.,..,, pass. constr. of, 1748; w. part. or inf., 1992 c, 2144. 1rLo/t)cp(t.,, -0!'-0.L, 1734. 10. 1rOfLa.L, w. gen. or dat., 1417.

GREEK INDEX
{,pye'TIII, w. ace., 1591 a. {,9vs, eMv, 136 a, 1700, 2081 ; Os Kal, 2169. e{,ll.ctf3op.ct, 812; w. ace., 1595 a; w. obj. cl., 2210 b, 2224 a; w. inf., 2210 b; w. redund. p:f}, 2740. {,ll.oy.,, w. ace., 1591 b. vpCcrK.,, eur , ace en t, 424 b ; aug., 437 ; w. part. or inf., 2113, 2114, 2135. e{)pvo'll"ct, 214 D 4. -vs, substs. in, decl., 275-278. eu'Te, 2240 a; 2388 A, N. 3, 2463 a. eilxctps, clecl., 201 a. eilxop.a., 813 d ; aug., 435, 437 ; w. dat. anrl ace., 1471. ,.,, vbs. in., 866. 4; mean. of mid., 1728 b. l~e!;ijs, w. gl'n. or clat., 1437, 1440. lcj>tp.a., w. fut. inf., 1869. lcJ>opO.w, w. pn.rt., 2103. l<4>' ~. l<j>' ,;.,.., introducing proviso, 2279. xw, iorm l!crxov, 426 b, 460 e, 549, G87, ingress., Hl25 a ; crx6p.'Y)v as pass., 802 n, 1735 b; ~op.at as pass., 808; two futs. of, rneaning, 1011 ; w. adv. and gen., 1441; w. adv. in periph., 1438; intr., 1700 b; forms periph. w. aor. part., 599 b, Hl63; w. subst. equiv. to pass. vb., 17/i.'l; w. inf., 2000 a; w. redund. p.f}, 2740; l!xwv, continually, 2062 a, with, 2068 a; rl l!xwv, 20G4 b ; oK l!xw, constr. of, 2546, 2668 d ; clist. from mid., 1734. 11; l!xop.at w. gen., 1301. .,, vbs. in, decl. of pres. part., 310; conjug. of pres. and imperf., 385, 397 ; pres. system of, 4fJfl, 522; inflee. of, 685-657; in Hom., ()50; in Hdt., 651 ; in Doric, 654; in Aeolic, 656; denom., 806. 2 . .,, from 'Y}O, 34, 214 D 5 b and 8, 238 c, 278, 641 D, .,, gen., 1G3 a, 214 D 5. ~w9ct, loo9ea., ~ .. e.v, 444 b n. -wv, gen., 39 n, 214 D 8, 287 D. ~ws, w. aor. for plup., 1043 ; in temporal cl., 2383, ofpurpose, 2418-2421; summary of constrs , 242:2-24:W.
~~~~s, decl., 2B8 d, 2GG lllu'Toii, G8 11, 320 n .
JJ

767

F see Digamma. Z, 21, 116; prommc. of, 15 a, 26. ta.-, 885. 8 ; cp. W85. -te, expressing motion toward, 342. t<vyvp.L, 524 a, 7!)3, 742, 746 D, 752 D. Zevs, decl., 285. 12; omitted, 934 a. tw, 488 a, 489 f. tTJMw, w. gen., 1405. tTJp.L<iw, fut. mid. as pa,ss., 809. -tw, vbs. in, 508-512. toovviip., 48fl b, d, f ; stem, 731. toos, twos, 289 D

H, sign, 2 a, 14; pronunc., 24; interchanged w.<, 27, w. a, 27; for orig.
ii, 30, Intr. C, N. 4; in nouns, for A tt. ii, after e, ' p, 30 n 2; intercha,nged w. w and e or a, 30, 738 a, b, 831 ; length. from , 37 n 2 ; in nom. of ii-stems, in Ion., 214 D 2; as aug., 433, 436. See A, E. TJ/, tense-suff., 455. 9. iJ, (1) comp. (than), 281)3, 972; after comp., 10!39-1075, 1080; ?) Kar&. after comp., 1079; ?) (,;;crn, ws) w. inf., 1079, 2007 ; ?) 1rplv, 2457 ; 1rp6repov (1rp61J"O<v, 1rplv) ij, 2458-24Ci0; X"X ij, 2777-2779;?) Kal, 2862; 1r1)v ij, 2966a. (2) disjunc. ( eitheT, ot): 1r6repov ( .,.6npa) . ,. ij, 2656; fj alone, 2657, 285(), !l71; ?) (-ft) ... -1, (77), 2061, 2675 e; ?) ... ij, 2852 a, 285G ; ,r.,.. ... ij, ?) ... dn, 2854 ; ?) ... r, ri . . . ij, 2982. ~ or, 2G61, 2676 e. ~. interrog., 2G50, 2866; eiX;\ .;,, 2786; asseverati ve, 2864 ; .;, (of}, Kal, 1rov), 2805 ; 1j pa, 2800 ; ~ 'Ycip, 2805 b, 2865; -1, p.f}v, 286G, 2021 ; ~ p.v, 2002. 11> diphth., 5; pronunc., 25. ~' where, 34G D 2. rel. ad v., which wa.y, as, 34G, 2498; to strengthen superl., 1086; introduc. clauses of comp., 2468; used instead of rel. prou., 2499. -n and -EL, infiectional endings, 628.

n,

768

GREEK

I~DEX

tjyojL<L~, 813; w. dat., 1371, 15:'li, 1588; '~rrwv, ~<T<Twv, comp., 3Hl; mcau.,3Hla

w. J1.~, 2723. oq5, 2867. i]Se, accent, 1G4 a. -lj61J, w. part., 2080; -/ii'IJ Kal, 2876. i]So!Lo.~, 812 ; rarely w. gen., 1355 ; w. ace. of person, 1505 b; w. dat., 1595 b; w. part., 2100; dramatic aor., 1937. it!i\iv"', 489 h, 518 c. -i)6-.)s, decl., 297. 'J, ~ 2661. -f)Koos, compounds in, w. gen., 1421. i]Kco>, w. adv. and gen., 1441 ; pres. for perf., 1886. Tj!Kos, carrel., 340; attracted, 2532. ~jL<L~, 720 A N., 724, 789. ..jjL<Lp, decl., 258 c. -i)jLElc.>v 1 -IJI'-c.>V 1 -ljjL<LS, 325 D 1, 2. 1JjLEVa~, inf. ending, 657. -iJ!'-pii, implied, 1027 b. -IJI'-repos, decl., 330 ; force of ending, 313 b; w. and without article, 1182, 1183, 1196 a; equiv. to gen. of pers. pron., 1196 ; reflex. and non-reflex., 1200, 1203; TJJ1.repos arwv, 1200.2 b, 1203 band N. .q.,.t, say, 792. ~ ... ~-, 885. 2. -iJ!'-lv, .q.,.a.s, 325 f. i].,.~.rus, in fractions, 353 ; positin, 117 3. iJ!'-oS, 346 D 2, 2383 A N. 3. iJ!'-c.>v, .jp.~v, ..jp.M, 325 f. -i)p.cv (DfJ.wv, a-<j>wv) <Lilrcv, 1234. -ljv, the form, 2283. See iv. -1]v, inf. ending, 469 n, 032 n, 661 n, 680 n, 699 n; aor. ending, 802, 803. -i)vLK<L, 346, 2383 A. 1JO, 1J, becoming <w, <ii, 34. TI1r<p, introduc. clauses of comp., 2463. -ijs, in nom. pl. of words in -<vs, 277 b. -1]s, proper nam es in, decl., 263-265, 282 a N. ; compound nouns in, 888 c. -1]s, -ES, compound adjs. in, 888 b, 893 b. -i\re . . -i\re, w. subjv. in Hom., 2852 a. 4\ro~, 2858. i)rr6.op.<L~, dep., 812 ; w. dat., gen., or inr6 and gen., 1402, 1493 a; of enduring result, 1887 ; w. part., 2101.

and b; 'i]nov w. positive, 324. '1"' diphth., 5, 5 n, 25 ; pronunc., 25.

~vr<, in clauses of comp. (Epie), 2463 ~x~ (Epie), w. local clauses, 2498.

a.

0, pronunc., 15 b, Hl, 26; before dental stop, 83 ; bef ore p., 86 ; changed to r in redup., 125 a; for r, dial., 132 n ; addition of, in pres. stem, 490; suffixes w., 863 c. 9a.vci.rou, w. Kpivw, TJ1.aw, etc., 1374. ea.,.r..,, 125 g and N., 594. 9appc.>, w. ace., 1595 a; w. dat., 1595 b. 9aul'-ci.tw, 806; W. <i, 2247 ; W. lin, 2248; w. brl, 2248; w. pa1t. or inf., 2144, 2587 b ; followed by depend. question, 2587 b. -9e, 134 n, 342 b; in <f0< ( atOe), 186; -9ev, 342. e.a.op.a~, mid. dep., 813 c. 9ns, 9ETE, before delib. subjv., 1800. 9p.LS, decl., 285. 13, 250 D 2. -9ev, for -07]<1'av, 583 a n, 673 a. 6epa1revw, 808; w. ace., 1591 a . 9w, 397, 503, 007, 806. 91JUvw, 489 h. 9~v, enclit., 181 D. -91Jv, aor. pass. ending, 489 a, 802, 804. eb 113, 114. -e~, ending denoting place where, 342. .e,, in imper., 125 b, 466. 1 a and n. e, yy6.vw, 523 c, 806. 96.w, 488 a, 489 c. 9t~w, 501, 570, 571, 595. 9vu'<rKW and 9v~<TKc.>, 526 b, 693, 696, 704 C j T0VWS, decJ., 309 a; TE0v~~w, 659 a; -Ovrfa-Kw, fut. mid. w. act. mean., 800 ; expressiug euduring result, 1887 a; perf. w. pres. mean., 1946; fut. perl. w. fut. mean., 1958. 6p<Lvw, tenses w. inserted a-, 489 c. 9p1Jvw, w. ace., 1595 a. Ope~, decl., 256. 6pv1rrw, 125 g and N. 9p~<TKc.>, fut. mhl. w. act. mean., 806. 9vy6.T1Jp, decJ., 262 and D.

GREEK I::\!DEX

769
vbs. in, 500, 500 n, 501, 522.
318,

io>, sac1i,{ice, 488 c, 500. 1 a and 1 n;

act. )(mid., 1734. 12.

tx~. 254 a, 268, 272, 273.

-L<~J, -uw, -t<~JV, LO''I'OS,

Jo>, rush on, 500. 1 D. >~'II'Ev<~J, w. ace., 1591 b.

K, bef. dental stop, 82 ; bef. fi., 85; bef. rough breathing, 124 and D ; for ,. , , pronunc. 24; quantity, 4, 500; sutT, dial., 132 n, Intr. C, N. 4; suffixes script, 5, 25; semivowel, 20, 109-117; w., 864. cons. before, 109-117; interchanged w. <, 27, 37, 501; for e, dial., 33 n; ~ea.9ci.11'Ep, w. clauses of comp., 2463, , :": o<, see E<; elided, 70-73; subst.- Kli91J!L4L, 450, 790. stems in, 268-27 4; class of vbs., 507 ff. ~ea.6Ctw, 450, 521 ; extension of cognate ace. with, 1569; w. part. orinf., 2144. ' ending denoting place where, 342. -L-, -Lh suff. of opt., 393, 459, 460, Ka.9Lo-T1Jfl-' Kc:tTauTf]u.s l!xw, 762; w.part. or inf., 2144. 460 D. Ka.t, in crasis, 68 ; Kc:tl Ta.Tac, 94 7, 2083 ; i, remains unchanged in ang., 436. strength. snperl., 1091; after adjs. and :;;, deictic suff., 333 g. advs. of likeness, 1501 a; paratactic, -<a., suff., 840 b 1, 2, 843 b 1, 844. 3, 2169; conjunc., 2868-2880; ad v., 858. 2, 85!). 6. 2881-2891; Kc:tl<i (Uv), concess., 2369, tci.ojloa.L, mid. dep., 813 c. 2372-2374 ; d Kal, 2763, 2764; Ka! -~a.w, vbs. in, 868. -ycl.p, 2813-2815 j Kc:tl of}, 2847 j Kc:tl a?] tS, 286i Kc:tl, 2890 j ~ Kc:tl, 28(i5 j Ka! , , p.vTOL 1 tLos, w. gen. or dat., 1414.
tp6w, 398, 641. lpiw, 500. 1 a, 586 e n. tEpov, omitted after certain preps., 1302. -Ltw, vbs. in, fut., 539 e ; denom., 866. 6.
~'J!loL,

aug., 431, 450, 725 a, 77-782.

lKvojloa.L, etc., w. ace., 1588. t},ci.CTKO!LO.L 1 488 a, 489 e.

f}I.E<~JS,

decl., 289. tva., 2193, 2209; rel. adv., 2498; fva Tl, 2644 a; in exclam., 2685. -wv<oJ, pres. in, 519 n. -Lv%-, tense-suff., 523 h. -tvw (Aeol. -<vvw), vbs. in, 519. -Lov, diminutives in, neut., 197 b. -<os, -<ii, gentiles in, 844. 3. -Los, indicating descent, 846 f. -tp<~J (Aeol. -<ppw), vbs. in, 519. -Ls, geu. of nonns in, accent, 163 a. LCTKW, VbS. in, 526-528.
-LCT'I'EpOS, LIT'!' O.'l'OS, 317. cr'I''JjloL, LuT<is, decl., 306; uni>s,

decl.,

309 a ; conjug., 416, 417 ; cp. 431, 696, 738-740, 744-767; tr. and intr. tenses, 819 ; ~<TT'I)tca, perf. w. pres. mean., 1[)46. -L'I'OV and -L1'}Tov, etc., in opt., 461 b. GREEK GRAM.- 49

2880, 2918 a ; Kc:tl Tolvvv, 2880 ; Kc:tL , , , 2891 j Kc:tl p.v, 2902 j p.v , , , Kc:tl 1 2913 j Kc:t! p.f}v, 2921 j Kc:t! p.?Jv -ye, 2921 ; Kal p.i}v Kal, 2921 ; T Kc:tl, Ti: , Kc:ti, etc., 2974-2978 j Kc:tl T<, 2979 ; 1/."ws T< Kc:tl, 2980. Ka.l'II'Ep, w. part., 2083, 2382, 2892; omission of rf,v after, 2117. Ka.Lpos, copula omitted with, 944 b. KQ.('I'OL, 186, 2893. Ka.L<~J (Kd.w ), 396, 489 f, 520, 543 aD. KO.K1J"fOp<oJ, w. ace., 1591 b. Ka.Kos, comp., 319. Ka.Ko-up-yw, w. ace., 1591 a. Ka.Kow, w. ace., 1591 a. Ka.Kci>s, 7To,w, w. ace., 1591 a ; 'A-yw, w. ace., 1591 b; 7T<iuxw, as pass. of Kc:tKWS 7TOLW, 1593, 1752 j riKOllW, as pass. of Kc:tKws M-yw, 1593,1752. Ka.)..w, 488 b, 539 a, 580 D, 711 c, 1613, 1946. Ka.Ms, comp., 319; Kc:tMs Kd-ya86s, 1034 a. Ka.)..is, 71'odw, w. ace., 1591 a; M-yw, w. ace., 1591 b; dKovw, as pass. of Kc:tws ""fw, 1752; 'lrO<w, w. J?a,rt., 2101. KlijJoVW, 80() j W. part., 2098,

770

GREEK INDEX
Ktfw, tenReR w. inRcrLcd <r, 48(1 b, e_.
Kivw,

Knpii, decl., 285. 14; w. gen., 1293. Ka.pTepw, w. pari., 20H8. KclpTLCTTOS (KpclTLCTTOS), 128 D. KclT, 75 D. Ka.T6., 354 a, 1515, 1675-1677, 1690; 1) Karcl., 1079; cpds. of, w. geu., 1384;

491, 58 e " 595.

j

KVW, W. gen., 1;)61, 1365 f"/W, 17ii2.

Kv6.w,

as paSS,

Of

394, 48\l c, 641 n.

Ko, suff., 858. 6, 864. 1. cpds. of, w. geu. and ace., 1385; in KoLp..w, mid. pass., 815. cpds., denoting completion of action, KoLv6s, w. dat., 1414 ; w. gen., 1414. Ko.tw. w. geu. and ace., 1376. 1648, 1680. Ka.Ta.yyvC:.crKw, w. geu. and ace., 1385 ; ' K6p1], 31. 1. w. redundant p.fJ, 2724. K6pus, decl., 247 n, 250 n 2. Ka.Ta.6LK.tw, w. gen. and ace., 1385. Kopvcrcrw, 515. Ka.Ta.Kpfvw, w. gen. and ace., 1285. Kocros, 340 n. KO.TO.a.p.f3.vw, W. part., 2113, 2114. KOTE, ;:)46 D 1. KO.TO.)J-Eo>, W. geu., 1357. I<OTEpos, 340 D. Ka.Ta.vp.w, w. two aces., 1626. Kovpos, 37 n 1. Ka.Ta.vTLKpv, improper prep., 1700. Kpa.'l"w, w. geu., 1370; w. ace., 1371; KO.'l"O.'II'fj'l"'l"w, tr. and intr., 8l!l ; Karapres. as perf., 1887 ; w. part., 2101. 'IT'fJrrop.a<, w. ace., 1595 a. -Kp.'l"'I]S, names in, ace. of, 264 b. Ka.'l"a."''l<I>Ctop.a.L, w. geu. and ace., 1385. Kpa.s, 264 n 3; pl., 1000. K.'l"eLp.L, replacing pass. of KaTcl."fw, 1752. Kpei'l"Twv, Kpe(crcrwv, 78, 31\l. 1 and a. KO.T'I]yopw, w. gen. and ace., 1385. Kpfvw, w. gen., 1375; fut. mid. as pass., KO.'l"i)Koos, w. gen. or dat., 1421. 809; Kp. p.f}, 2724. l<e1:p.a., 713, 724, 791; cognate ace. w., Kpv'II'Tw, w. two aces., 1628. 1569; forperf. pass. of rl87]p.t, 1752. Kpvcl>a., w. geu., 1443, 1700. Ke1:vos, see ~Ke1:vos. KT.op.a.., perf., 442 N., 709, 711, as pres., Keevw, 489 c; use of imperf, 1891; l!l4; aor. as perf., 1941; plup. as constr. w., 1465, 1992 a, 1996 N.; otl imperf., 1952 a; fut. perf., 1958. Keevw, 2692 a; w. p.f}, 2720. KtJpw, w. part., 2090. K(v), 134 n, 181 n, 1763. See &.v. Kvwv, decl., 285; comp., 321. Kep.vwp.L, 489 f, g, 729. KwUw, w. inf., 1993; neg. w., 2740. Kpa.s, 258, 258 n ; implied, 1027 b. A, changing to p, 129; , 77, 95, 110, Ki)Sw, 821; Kf}oop.at, w. geu., 1357. 311 b, 81 n; suffixes w., 860. Kijvos, see Ke1:vos. .a.s, decl., 285. 16. Kijp\i~, quantity of v, 147 c, 254 b. a.yx6.vw, w. ace., 1::\50; w. gen., 1350, K1]pU'l"TW 1 513, 809. 1376 ; replacing the pass. of K7]p6w, Kb 112. 1752. KLeC:.v (xrwv), 126 n. KLv6uvevw, aor., without ll.v, in apod. of a.yws, 238 c, d, and v.

unfulfilled prot., 2319.

.ep~,

ill1)roper prep., 1443, 1700.

a.p.f3.vw, 424 b, 693; w. subRt. equiv. KLv6uv6s <r'l"L, w. obj. clause, 2224 a. to pass. verb, 1753; Xaf3wv, with, KLXivw, 688, 757 D 1, 806. 2068 a. K<ltw, 557 D 2, 700 D, 806. Kaw (.alw), 38, 396, 489 c, f, 520, a.v9.vw, 693, 69 ; mid. w. gen., 1358, w. ace., 1358, 1597 ; part. w., 183, 521, 80; w. ace., 1595 a; Ka[w,, to 2096 ; a8wv, secrAtly, 2062 a ; in part. one' s sorrow, 2062 a. w. finite vb., 200() f ; XavOcl.vw 8n for Ke(w, tenses w. inserted <r, 489 b, e. avl1ci.vet 8n, 2584. -Kijs, proper names in, decl., 264 b, 265.

GREEK Ii\DEX

771

">..yw, .~ ).f-yw, w. ace., 15nl b; 'Al-yra<, 1 p.nTTw, li14, 571, W5. . constr. w., 198:la, 2017 b; r.rnnmand, 1 p.O.xol'-a., 488 b, 489 f; fut., 539 b; <Ivv w. inf., 1869, 1992 c, Hl97, 2017 b; TLVL (p.ml. nvos), 1523 b N. 1. state, w. inf. or liTL or ws, 2017 ; p.ya.s, decl., 311 ; comp., 319; p.-ya

command, w. p.f}, 2720 ; say, neg. w., 2722; 2723. e('ll"w, 819; Xl1rop.o.< w. part., 2101. Xf)yw, w. part., 2098." Xf)Ow, 502 a, 549 D. }, 110. -X">..w, vbs. in, 517. Xoy(top.a., w. lir<, 2580. oL6opw, w. ace., 1591 b; o<iiopop.a< w. dat., 1592. OL'II"OV and TOV o'II"OV, 1444. oliw, contr., 398 a, 634. <r, 102. 'p.a.(vop.a.L, 489 h, 813 a; w. ace. and w. dat., 1591 a. 1rop.a., a mid. 'pass., 815; w. hi and dat., 1518; w. part., 2100. <rLTEe'i:, w. dat., 1462, 1592. 'i"', decl. of part., 305, 306, 309; conjug., 382, 383 ; , 37 4 N., 488 c, 500. 1 a ; sec. aor., 688 ; eTo, 711 D. w~O.op.a., .dep. w. pass. mean., 813; w. ace. and w. dat., 1591 a. .p'wv, ~<r1'0S, 319.

<f>povv,

1518.

p.yur1'ov, used with a super!., 1090, -p.eOov, dual ending, 465 c. p.eOli<rKw, 488 a, 489 e, f, 527 a. p.e(yvjLL, 524 a ; WYfJ<I<IBa<, 597 D ;
~p.LKTO,

736

l>.

p.E(wv, 319 and b; p.eov w't .q, 1074. fliis, decl., 2D8. jLEL, 1358, 1360, 1467. jLw, aug., 430; inf. w., 1959; 1rws OV p.W and r[ o p.w, 1959 d j

M, 19 ; stops bef., 85-87; final, changed to v, 133 c; suffixes w., 861. p.O., 1596 b, c, 2894, 2920. p.a.Kps, corn p., 319; p.o.Kpfii, 1091. p.ci.a., cornp., 345. ,.a..,.,,u,.a., 323, 1068, 1090. jL.ov, 323, 1066 a, 1068, 1084; p..ov -If, 1065, 1072, 1080 a; (o) p.. -lj, w. redundant o, 2753. -p.av, for -p.rJP, 462 D. p.av, ~ p.av, 2865, 2920. p.av&O.vw, pres. of past and pres. combined, 1885 a ; Tl p.o.Bwv; 2064 a; with part. or inf., 2136. jL<lpT\Jpw, fut. mid. as pass., 809 ; w. Sn and ws, 2580 a ; w. p.fJ, 2726. f'cl.p1'vs, decl., 285. 17. jLO.<r1'y6w, fut. mid. as pass., 808. jLD.T (nom. -p.o.), suff., 841. 2, 861. 2.

use, 1960, 2318. 130 D. jLjLova., p.p.o.p.v, 573, 705. p.ev (nom. -p.rJv), suff., 861. 3. -jLev, inf. end., 469 D, 67 D, 752 D, Intr. C, N. 2. p.v, 28ll5-2916, 2920; ~ p.v in Hom., 2865. -p.eva., inf. end., 469 D, 677 D, 752 D. -p.evos, part. end., 4 70 c, 861. 4. p.VToL, 2917-2919; ov p.vTo< Ha, 2767; "I\M. p.vTo<, 2786; Ka! p.fnot, 2880 j O p.EPTOL oO(, 2939. jLEp(s, implied, 1027 b. -jLes, for -wv, 462 D, Intr. C, N. 2. jLE<ra.(1'epos, flEO""D.LTC11'0S, 315 a. jL<ra,.os, jL<ro-aTos, in Hom., 320 D. p.E<M]fl~P(a, form, 130. -p.e<rOa., for -p.eBa, 1 pl. end., 465 d. p.<ros, position, ll'i2. ,....a., 1675-1677, 16()1. flE1'a.60KEL fJoOL, W. redund. p.f}, 2741. jLE1'ClfJoEL fJoOL, 1357, 1467, 2100, jLET<ljLop.aL, 812, 2100. jLETa.~li, 1700 ; w. part. , 2081. p.1'E<r1'L TLV[ TL VOS, 1467. -p.TPTJS, compounds in, 224 a. p.ev, 181 D, 325 n 1, 2. 1'-Xp, not elided, 72 c; and p.xp<s, 136 D; w. gen., 1700 ; w. aor. for plup., 1943 ; and p.xp< ov, w. temp. cl., 2383. jLf), 2088 ff.' 2702. ( 1) In indep. clauses: dir. quest.,
p.p.~WKa.,

~p."I\ov,

772

GREEK INDEX
P.TJ'~', see ollTE. P.TJ'~'"'P, decl., 262

180\l, 2651 ; with indic. in doubtful assertions, 1772, 1801; in unattain. wishes, 1780, 1781; w. subjv., 2706; hort., 1797, 1798; prohib., 1800, 1802; to indicate fear (Hom.), 1802; delib., 1805 ; w. opt. in wishes, 1814 ff.; w. i1nper., 1835-1841, 2709. (2) In dep. clauses, 2708; purpose, 2193 ff., 2705 a; obj. cl. w. vbs. of effort, 2209 ff., 2705 b; w. vbs. of caution, 2220, and of fear, 2221 ff.; result w. inf., 2251 ff., 2759 a; proviso, 2279; condition, 2286, 2705 e; concession, 2371 ; temporal, 2392, 2397, 2401, 2409; reL w. indef. antee., 2506, 2705 d, e, of purpose, 2554, 2705 f, of cause, 2555 b, of result, 2556, of condit., 2560; in oaths, 2705 i; in indir. quest., 2676; in indir. dise. (finite moods), 2710. (3) With inf. not in indir. dise., 1971, 1991,2013, 2014, 2028, 2713ff., 2759; in indir. dise., 2722; with part., 2045, 2067, 2728 ff.; w. substs. and adjs., 2735; redundant, after nega~ive vbs., w. inf., 2739-2749. (4) Apparent exchange w. o, 2737; accumul. of neg., 2760. ( 5) Phrases p.T] 5n ( 57Tws ), 2763; iJ TL (5(J'OV) p.fJ, 2765, p.f} Ti 'Y, 2763 (6) p.~ oil, w. indic. in doubtful assertions, 1772; w.subjv. in doubtful negations, 1801, 2751 a; in purpose cl., 2198 a; in obj. eL, 2220 b, 2221, 2225, 2751 b; w. inf. after neg. vbs., 2742, 2744-2749, 2759 d; w. part. after neg. vbs., 2750; w. li7rws, 1921 ; in questions, 2651 d, 2752. See c;,..,s, oil p.ij. flo"ll>, 2163 A, 2688; w. part., 2083 b. See oi!S. flo"ll><s, 337, 349 b; p.rJI!vfs, 1002 ; p.rJIJv, 1609; w. comp., 1514; mean. )( oods, 2736. f.L"'KTL, form, 137 b, 2688 b. p.ijv, 2920-2921 ; o p.T]v aM, 27 67 ; o p.T]v oo, 2768; d.;I.M p.fJv, 2786 ; 1j p.f}v, 2865, 2921.

e.

and n. flo"l1'LETa., 214 D 4. P."lxa.vO.op.a., dep. w. pass. mean., 81:3 d. p., suff., 861. 5, p.-verbs, 379, 412-422, 717-767; irreguJar, 768-799. -p., vb. end., 463 a and D. p.a.Cvw, 489 h. p.i:Kpos, comp., 319; p.iKpo, alrnost, 1399. p.tp.op.a., dep. w. pass. mean., 813. p.p.vtf<rKw, redup., 442 N, ; 489 e, 526 b, 581; p.p.vf}(]'(]'1Ja,, 582; mid. pass., 816; perf. with geu. and ace., 1358, w. pres. mean., 1946, w. part. or inf., 2106, 2138, w. Bn, 2395 AN. p.Cv, 181 n, 325 D 1, 2, 325 n 3. p.w (nom. -p.s), suff., 861. 6. p.<r96w, and Ju(]'8op.a<, 1734. 13. p.va, 227. p.viop.a., 641 n, 644. P.V"'JLOVEvw, w. gen. and ace., 1357. p.vo, p.vii, suff., 861. 7. p.o (nom. -p.6s), suff., 840 a 5, 858. 8, 861. 1. p.o(, elision in, in Epie, 72 n. p.otpa., decl., 216; implied, 1027 b. fLOV (nOm, -p.wv, -p.ov), Sllff., 858. 10, 861. 8. p.ova, suff., 861. 9. p.6vov, o p.6vov . d.;l.;l. Ka[, 2764; p.6vov o, 2766. p.6vos, 337, 1173. p.ou, p.o, etc., 187 e N. 2, 325 a, 1192. p.'iipo, 10,000, p.'iip(o, countless, 352. p.vw, 488 b, 500. 1 a. p.O>v.--2651; p.wv o, 2651 b; p.wv o~v, p.wv p.fJ, 2651 c. -p.wv, Cj)d. adjs. in, 888 d. p.wv (nom. -p.wv), suff., 861. 10.

N, 19 ; movable, 73, 134 and n, 135, 399; cons. bef., 88-90; bef. cons., 91-96; for , dial., 132 D ; suffixes w., 861.

GREEK INDEX

773

v, class of pres. stems, 523-525. vi>v, v'iivt, vUv, v.Jv, v.J, 134 D, 181 n, -va., -vt], tense-suff., 414 c, 523 g. 2924-2928. -va., inf. en ding, 469 c, 469 n, 677, 752 voi, v~ v, 325 D 1. and n; elision in, in Epie, 72 D. z, 21. va.t, 1596 b, 2894, 2922. ~a.(v, 489 b. va.t, tenses w. inserted <T, 489 f. ~.,, 397 b, 488 a, 489 d, f. vcl.rr, 514 a, 515 b. ~1]pa.Cv, 489 h. va.ils, 275; implied, 1027 b. ~.Jv, Intr. E, N. 2. See o-.Jv. vcl., 394, 489 f. ~vos, 1696. vS, before <T, 100. ~"' 489 c, 500. 1 a and 1 n. VELKi, 488 D i VfLKeiw, 650 b. vfl-"' w. two aces., 1626. 0, 2 a; pronunc., 24; interchanged -ve%-, tense-suff., 523 d. w. w, 27, 36, 738 c; for a dia!., 33 n; viofloa., used in fut. sense, 1881. interchanged w. e and a, 36 ; length. vios, uneontraeted, 290 e. to ov, 37 ; length. to w, 37 n 2 ; bev:.>, heap up, 489 f, g. comes w in aug., 435 ; subst.-stems vw, swim, 503, 540, 607, 806. in, 228 ff.; added to v b.-stems, 486. ves, deel., 238; forms, 238 c. , i}, .,..;, o, i], ol, .al, proclit., 179; as v'lj, in asseverations, 1596 b, 2894, rel., 180 d N., 1105; decl., 332 and n; 2923. use in Hom., 338 n 1, 1100-1105 ; Vt]-, 885. 5. in lyric poetry and tragedy, 1104, -V1Jfl.' vbs. in, 720 c, 737. 1105; as demons. in A tt. prose, 1100va, before <T, 100. 1117 i aS perS. prOU. (Ka! O<, etc.), vLKcl., constr. w. pass., 1402, 1493 a; 1113; as article in Att., 1118-1125, viKclw "fVWp:YJv, etc., 1576; as perf., see Article; ro 1rl rm, 1950 a. 1887; w. part., 2101. S, ) TE, in Hom., 2:.l40 a, 2578. vtv, enclit., 181 n, 325 D 4; use, 325 e. &Se, 333,340; pred.position, 1171,1176, -v%-, tense-suff., 523 a. 1177; w't art., 1178; use, 1238vofJ-Ct, w. dat., 1509; w. ace., 1613;' 1261; )(ouro<, 1241; iioe hevo<, 1260. w. part. or inf., 2144; w. inf., 2580; St, 75 a, 333 g, 1240. w. w<, 2580; o& vop.l!;w, 2692 a; w. p.-1}, oSos, 231, 232 c; implied, 1027 b. 2723. !io.Js, decl., 243 n. -VOS, -v'lj, gentiJeS in, 844. 3. oS.Jo-o-OtJ.O.L, 489 d, f. voo-qn, improper prep., 1700. -0 /E-, them, VOW., 455,455 D, 456,457 D. -vovs, comp. of adjs. in, 316. -ot, vbs. in, 86. 6 b. VT, J.wfore cr, 100 i .SUff., 863 a 23. o9ev, 346, 2498, 2499. -VTL, in 3 pl.' in Dor., 462 D, 463 d. o9, poetic for o, ll46 D 2, 2498. -vTov, imper. ending, 46. 3 D. ci9o.JveKa., 2240 a, 2578. -vT, imper. ending, 466. 3 n. o, pronuuc., 25 ; for o in verse, 28 n ; -vTo-a.v, imper. ending, 466. 3 N. ., : o<: ,, 36, see '; elided, 74; 4? in -vv (-vvv), tense-suff., 523 f. aug., 435 ; final, usu. short in A tt., -v'iifJ-L, 414 n, 418; sec. aor. (~crf3TJ), 415, 169 and a, 22ll a, 427 ; ad vs. in, 229 b, 736, 756 a; subjv., 457 a, 719; opt., 341; stems in, 279. 460 c, 719; vb.-stems in -a, -e, -w, -o, loc. dat., 1534, 1535. 728-731 ; tenses, 7:36; v and vu, ot, enclit., 181 a; when not enclit., 187 e 742, 743; -vvw, 746 a; mid. subjv., N. 1; indir. reflex. in A tt. prose, 325 d, 749 a. 1228 b ; dir. or indir. reflex. in Hom. v1ltJ.cpd, in Hom., 214 D 3. and Hdt., 1Hl5.

774

GREEK INDEX
lp.wp., 488 a, 489 g, 525 b, 733, 746 n, 751 D.; fut. mid. w. act. mean., 806; w. ace., 1596 and a; w. inf., 1868 f; w. p.-1}, 2726. op.69ev, -6o-e, 342. op.oo-yCJ), fut. mid. w. pass. mean., 808; w. dat., 1523 b; pers. constr. more common w. pass., 1982 a; w. part. or inf., 2106, 2144; w. p.-1}, 2726. op.oil, 342, 1701. Of!-CJ)S, w. part., 2082; a. iip.ws, 2786. veSCt(J), 808; case w., 1471. lvEpos, decl., 285. 19. OV(V'Jf!-L1 726, 424 CN. 2, 750 b; WV-f}Jl.'Y}V, 756 c; w. ace., 1591 a. 8vop.a., gen. w., 1322 a ; subst. in appos. to, 1478; by name, 1601 b, 1134; v6p.a.n, 1516; 5vop.a. Ka.(J) rtvd, 1620. 8vop.a., 489 e, 725. -ovs, in ace., 230 D 4. -oo, in gen: sing., 230 D 1. oo to o(,), wo; oot to o4' ; oou to ow, 652. ci'.,..n, 346, 1086 a, 2463, 2498. 011'1jVCKa., 346, 2383 A.. 8TrL<r9ev, improper prep., 1700. oTr69Ev, OTr69L, ci''7l'OL, 2498. oTroi:os, 1r6o-os, 340, 1087. oTr6Ta.v, 1768 a, 2399 a. 01\"0TE 1 346, 2240, WS 0'1!'6re, 2431 1 2486 j introduc. temp. clanses, 2383 A.. ci'1rou, 346, 2240 a, 2498. oTrTrotos, 340 D. 01\"1\"0TE, 346 D 1, 2383 0 N. l~Tr'II"CJ)S, 346 D 1, 2929. o1rws, 346; w. super!., 1086; w. fut. indic. in exhortations and prohib., 1920, 2213, with desire to a vert something, 1921, in purpose cl., 2203, in obj. cl., 2211-2213, 2218; w. subjv. or opt., 2196 ff., 2214-2217; w. subjv. w. idea of command, 1803 ; in purpose cl., 2193 ff.; inobj. cl., 2209ff., 2220, 2228, 2230, 2231; l!<7rtv I'lrws, 2515, 2551-2552; s,.ws and li7rws raxt<FTa., in temp. cl., 2383; in corn p. cl., 2463; introduc. depend. statement, 2578 ; in indir. quest., 2608 c; ox (JJ.'Y!) ii'll'ws, 2763; originally rel. adv., 292V.

ot, adv., 346, 2498, 2409, 2685. ota., otov (oiov of}), w. part., 2085; cp. 2117. otSa., 794-799; mean., 795, 1946; mid. fut., 806 ; imper. ot<FII' li, 1842 a; w. part, or inf., 2106, 2139 ; w. ei, 2354 b ; w. lire, 2395 AN., 2588; o' on, w't vb., 2585; w. p.-1) and. inf., 2727; w. p.-1) and part., 2730 ; oM <Te 8s e, 2668. OlSCTrous, decl., 285. 18. OLLV 1 in dual, 2;J0 D 2, 250 D 1, otKa.Se (oK6vi'ie), 342, 1589. o!Ketos, w. gen. or dat., 1414. olKCJ), fut. mid. w. pass. mean., 808. o!Kln, omitted after certain preps., 1302. otKo9ev, otKo9, 342. otKoL, 169, 229 b, 341, 342, 1535. o!Krlp(J), 519; w. geu., 1405; w. el, 2247 b, cp. 2248. otp.o, w. elision, 74 ; otp.' ws, 2682 d. -oo, -oo, -ou, -Cl), in gen., 230 D 1. otop.a.L and op.a.t, 398 b, 628, 634, 802 D, 812; between prep. and noun, 1063 a; w. inf., 2580; w. ws (on), 2580; ovK o!op.a.t, 2692 a; w. p.-1}, 2723, 2726; otop.a.t, 500. 2 D, oios, otos TE or oT6sre, 186 a; 340, 1985; w. super!., 108.7; w. inf., 2003, 2497, 2516; antec., 2503 ; attract. to antec.-, 2532 ; in exclam., 2682, 2685. OLS, in ace., 230 D 4; part. ending in Aeol., 305 n, 310 v, 633 v. ols, decl., 274; in Hom., 274 D. -oo-a., Aeol. part. ending, 305 D, 633 D. -oo-(v), dat., 230 D 3, 234; loc., 341. otxop.a., as perf., 1886; w. part., 2099. ot(J), 489 e. oKvCJ), w. obj. clause, 2:?24 a. (o)Kotos, (o)Koo-os, (o)K6Tepos, 340 v. >..C-yos, cornp., 319; w. and without article, 1189; ol"fot rarely w. ci?r6 and<~, 1317 a; Ol"fou, almost, 1399 ; ol"foP and 6i'Y4>, w. cornp., 1514, 1586. !'Up.L, 90, 488 a, 539 b, 733 ; tr. and intr. tenses, 81\J; aup.at, expressing enduring result, 1b87 a. oos, in attrib. and pred. position, 1175.

GRJK I:\'DEX

775

pci.w, 431, 434, 45 an, 52!), 628; fut., 1943 ; o, 5 u, because, in Hom., 806; w. part., 2103, 2110-2112; w. o-n 2240 a; giving reason for preceding question, 2244 ; introduc. temp. (ws), 2110-2112; w. obj. cl., 2210 b, clauses, 2383 A ; ws or, 2481-2486 ; 2224 a; w. 11-fJ and inf., 2210 b. py(tol'-o., 815; w. gen., 1405; w. dat., that, in Hom., 2578 a; w. iJ-iJ-V7JP."''' etc., 2588. 1461 ; w. part., 2100. p!'-ci.!, -Ltop.o., a mid. pass., 815, 815 a. on, not elided, 72 b; strength. super!., 1080 ; w. aor. for plup., 1943; w. vbs. llpv:s, decl., 285. 20. of saying, 2017, 2592 a; w. vbs. of /lpvli!'-L, 53(), 574 D, 733, 736 D, 746 D1 thinking (very rare), 2018; w. vbs. 751 D; tr. and intr. tenRes, 820, 821. of peneption, 2110, 2145, 2592 c; opos, w. proper name, 11.3!), 1142 c. w. other vbs., 2123; causal, w. vbs, os, rel. pron., decl., 388; demons. in of jeaTing, 2230 ; w. causal clauses, Hom., 338 b; w. -li'Ep, 338 c; w. -n, 338 d; and corre!., 340; introcl uc. rel. 2240 ; introduc. depende11t statements, 2577-2588; use compared w. clause, 2493 ; instead of 817rLS (or olos), that of ws, 2579 ; introduc. dir. quo2493 b ; o, as to what, 2494 ; os 'Y, tation, 2590 a; indic. and opt. after, 2495, 2555, 2826 ; antec., 2503; and in indir. dise., 2614, 2615; l!TL rl, o<rns, w. def. and indef. antec., 2508. See dp.L. 2644 a; 11-'IJ ( ox) l!TL, 2763 ; 5 n p.f}, 2765 ; 71'7}v l!TL, 2960 a. os, i], rf v, possess. pron., de cl., 330; in Hom., 330 D 2, 1201. 1 c, 1201. 2 b, ().,..,., (Homeric), 2578. o\1, genuine and spurious, 6, 25, 54; 1230 a; as a,ro, 1201. 2 c, 1203 b. -os, for -ovs, in ace. pl., Hl2 D 2, 230 D 4. pronunc., 25 ; for o in verse, 28 D ; V : ou :v, see Ev ; by compens. length. -os, -'1], -ov, compound words in, 888 a. for o, 37 ; stems in, 275; never aug-os, compounds in, accent, 894. a-ci.o<Ls, introduc. temp. clauses, 2383 A. mented, 437. -oa-6wv, in the imper., 45U a. ov (ouK, ox, 133 a, 137' OVKl, ouxl, 127 D, 137 a, 2688 b; proclit., 179, o6, 180 a, oa-os, 340; 017'1', 0170V, w. comp., 1084; strength. super!., 1080, 1087, 1091; 904 b), 2688 ff.; in statements, 2703; ol7os, w. inf., 200:3, 24!)7 ; 017'1', ol7ov, in w. jussive fut. as question, 191-7, 1918; comp. cl., 2468-2473; 817a ~r7J, 2497 b; w. anticip. subjv., 1810; in rel. cl., attracted to case of antec., 2532 ; 2506; causal cl., 2240, 2247, 2555; preceded by adj., 2535; introduc. result cl., 2251, 2260, 2269, 2556, 2567 ; con dit., 2696-2701 ; interrog., exclam. sent., 2682,2685; 817ov (o<ra) 2651 and f., 2676; adherescent, iJ-f}, 2765; 0170V ov, 2760. oa-'ll'ep, 1501 a, 2495, 2503 a. 2691 ff. ; w. inf. not in indir. dise., l>a-a-e, decl., 285. 21. 2714, 2721; in indir. dise., 2711 a, oa-ns, o.Twos, etc., accent, 180; decl., 2722, 2759 c; w. part., 2045, 2729, 339 ; and correl., 340 ; in indir. ques273~-2734; w. substs. and adjs., tions, 1203; introduc. rel. clauses, 2735 ; apparent exchange w. 11-fJ, 2496; and os, use, w. def. and indef. 2738; redund., 2753; o p.r!., 1596 b, antec., 2508; ~<rnv ol7ns (or), 2406, 2894; ox l!7rws (oTL), 2763; o p.6vov 2513, 2552, 2557; O(TT<S of} attracted . . . )\J\ Kal, 2764; p.6vov ( l!17ov) ov, to case of an tee., 2G32 ; oods o<rns 2706 j OV p.'~) v ("fp, iJ-eVTOI) rJ.J\J\rJ., 2767, ou, 25il4, 2557 ; O<TTLS "(, 2826. 278o, 2921 ; ou p.'l]v ouM, 2768, 2921; <T<j>po.(vop.o., w. gen., 1361. o "fd.p, 280G b; o p.lvro<, 2918 a ; o P,fVTOL OOf, 293() j OU .. , O, 2939 j oTo.v, 1768 a, 2399 a. oo .. o, 2040 ; o .. o~TE, 2944, oTe, and correl., 34; w. aor. for plup.,

776

GREEK INDEX
2961 ; after interrog. prons. and ad vs., 21162 ; inferential, 2964 ; brel oilv in Hom., 21164 a. oilvEKa., 1700, 2240 a, 2578. o~s, accent, 252 a; decl., 285. 22. -ous, from -ovs, 230 n 4; parts. in, decl. of, 307. ollTE, accent, 186; oi!re . . . olire, 1170, 2942 ; ovO . . olire, 2941 ; OVT . . . p.f}re, 2942 a ; ol!re ... re, 2945, 2946; oliu ... Ot!, 2947 ; ouu . oll, 2948 ; oll . . . ol!re, 2948; oilre . . . ovt!, 2949 ; olire . . . ov . . . oilre, 21150 ; oilre oilv, 2961. ollTs, accent, 164 a. o.JTos, decl., 333 and n ; and corre!., 340; Ka! Tctra, 947, 2083; rovro,
avr rovro, introduc. follow. subst.,

2948; oilu oll, 2948; -;r"/1.7]v ou, 2753. o<r 1'-TJ w. fut. indic. or subjv. in prohib., 1800 c N., 1919, 2756; w. subjv. or fut. indic. in strong denia!, 1804, 1919, 2754,2755; where each neg. has its own vb., 2757. See also oirK cT"rw l>s, etc., under Et!'-!, and 1'-TJ o<r. o.J, etc., prou., 181 a; when not enclit., 187 e N. 1; decl., 325; indir. reflex., 325 d, 1228, 1229; in dia!., 325 n; o, 1!, pers. pron., 1194, 1195. -ou, geu. sing., 229, 230 n; of place where, 342. o~Sas, decl. in Hom., 264 n 3. oirS, w. part., 2083 b, 2931; o!l' (p.'TJ') el (leiv), in neg. concessive cl., 2381 ; o!lfi "(p ovot!, 2761 a, 2814 a, 2938; ov p.7)v ovt!, 2768 ; aA oUt!, 0."!1.)..' o!l p.v lif}, 2786; o!li5 "(ap, 2814, 2815; o!lli p.f,v, o!l p.7]v oulit!, 2921 ; as adv., 2931; as conjunc., 2932-2936; ouO . . . ouiJt!, 2937 ; ov . . . o&i'it!, 2939 ; 00 fJ.VTO< OV, 2939; OQDf , oll, 2940; o& . oilu, 2941 ; oure . . . o&t!, 2949; oilu . . ol oi!re, 2950 ; r . . . oMt!, 2982. oir8E(s, 337; decl., 349 b ; 1/ T<S f) o&els, 1270; OVV Ka<v6v, 1312; OVV w. comp, 1514, 1586; ovels IJ,yns o&, 2534; and p.'T]i5els, meaning, 2736; neut., of persons, 2736; o!li5v 0.)..)1.' 1/, 2778 ; ovi5v /1.)\.o 1/, /1.)1.)\.o ovi5v 11, 2778 a. oirSTEpos, 337. oliK, see oV. oirK( (o&xl), 127 n, 137 a. See o<r. oilKouv and oirKoilv, 186 a, 2951-2953; ovKov expecting answer yes, 2651, 2951 ; ovKov inferential, 2952; ouKou v, 2953. o~v, added to pron. or ad v., 339 e, 346 c, 2963 ; o.n ou v ( "'~'), 27 86 ; "tp ovv, 2820; p.v oilv, 2899, 201 ; oVK oilv, 2954; confirmatory, 2955-2963 ; 0.)..)..' oilv, ri"/1.)..' o1iv . . . "(<, 2957 ; "(p oiiv (and Ka! "(p o v), 2958 ; o' o v, 2833, 2959 ; el i5' ou v, 2950 ; 57] ou v, 2960; o v M)ra, 2960; du oilv, ouu ou v,

9110; w. art., 1171, 1176, 1177; w't art., 1178; rourou, rourwv, in attrib. position, 1201. 1 b, 1202. 1 b; use, 1238 ff. ; for repeated rel., 2517; in address, 1288 a. o{JToCTt, 333 g, 1240. ollTQI, oilTQIS 1 136, 324 1 346 1 1245 1 1248 ; w. part., 2080, 2084. o<rx!, see o<r. cpEG\,..,, 519 a; stems, 521; tlJcpe)..ov in wishes, 1781, 1818 ; tJ.fJ w. IJJcpeXov, 2704 a. cp"' for ocpel)..w in Hom., 519 a. ocps, 254 a, 255. 2 c. cpLCTKclVQI 1 1378, 1576. iicppa., 2193 a, 2383, 2418 a. -oxos, cpds., 878; accent of, 894 N. -ow, vbs. in, decl. of pres. part., 310; conjug. of pres. and imperf., 385; pres. stem of, 522 ; in:fl.ec. of, 635-657 ; in Hom., 652 a; in Hdt., 652 b; in Doric, 655 ; in Aeolic, 656. -ow, vbs. in, denominative, 860. 3. ow for ao, aw, aov, 643 ; for oo, oov, 652; O'J' for ao<, 643 ; for oo<, 652.

TI, bef. dental stop, 82 ; bef. p., 85 ;

bef. rough breathiug, 124 and D ; for r, dia!., 132 D; suffixes w., 862. 'll'a.LSa.ywy..,, fut. mid. as pass., 808.

GREEK lNDEX
1rO.LSeVw, ?ra.5t:Uw nvd 1rp6s, 1579, 1630.
'TLPL

777

Or

'TLP.

Els, 'II'p, en elit., 181 d, 186, 338 c ; w. part.,

2083 a ; Att. use, 2965.

'II'pO., 'II'pO:v, improper preps., 1700 . '11'p9w, sec. aor., 549 n, 688. 'II'Ep!, when elided, 72 c; after its case,

.,.Q.a.L, loc., 341, 1535. 'll'a.cuos, comp., 315. .,.Q.w, in compounds, before cr, 101 b. 'll'a.vS']jJ.EL, loc., 229 b, 341, 1535. .... a.v-ra.xo9tv, ....a.v-ra.xo, ....a.v-ra.xocrt, 342. '11'6.v-ro9tv, .,.O.v-rocrt, 342. 'll'ap, 75 D. .,.O.pa., for 1rcipecrn, 1rcipwn, 1rcipetp.<, 175 b. 'll'a.pO., use, 1073, 1496, 1675, 1676, 1678,

l5 a, 1665; in compos., 449 b; 1rep! 1ro?..Xo Ti,ucio,ua.<, etc., 1373; use, 16751677, 1693; gen. w. vbs. compounded w., 1408; dat. w. v)Js.compounded w., 1544-1550; ace. w. vbs. compounded w., 1546. '11'EpLy(yVOjJ.4L, W. part.> 2101. 'II'EpLopO.Cll, w. part. or inf., 2103, 2141; t:Jv omitted w., 2119. 'II'ETaVWjJ.L, 36 N, 2, 489 e, f, g, 729, 'II'-ro!La., sec. aor. 687, 756 c n. ...tf, 181 b, 346 ; 'II', 346. 'II'~'YVVjJ.L, 524 a, 595, 733, 736 D, 750 Di tr. and intr. tenses, 810. 'll'ijxvs, gender, 255. 2 c; decl., 268, 270 c N. 1 ; accent, 271. 'II'LjJ.'II'1JjJ.L, 489 c, 726, 727, 741. 'II'Ljlo'II'P1JJ:loL, 489 e, f, 726, 727. 'll'ivw, 529 >488 b j li1r LO 11, 529 j 1r0L, 466, 1 a, b, 687 ; fut. ,.to,ua.<, 500. 2 n, 541, 806, 1881 ; tr. and intr. tenses, 819; w. gen. and w. ace., 1355 a. 'II'LO'TEvCJl, followed by p.~, 2726. 'II'LTVT)J:loL, 36 N. 2, 737. -'II'a.crLos, 354 c, 1432. 'II'EcrTov, used with super!., 1090. 'II'E(Cll, 503 D, 650 b. 'II'ov (TL), TO 'II'ov, for ,uov, 1068; 11'eov (11'ev) w. case, 1074. 'II'Cll, 397, 489 d, f, 503, 607, 806. 'II'~v, improper prep., 1100, 2966; ad v., 1700, 2966; w. red und. o, 2758; conjune., 2966; 71'i)v ov, 1rl]v 1], 11'l]v 5Tt, 71'i)v el, 2966 a; w. inf., 2966 b. 'II'~p1Js, w. gen. or dat., 1422. 11'1Jcr(ov, 1437, 1440, 1700. 'II'~TTCll, 514, 593 a, 595, 819, 1740. -'II'olls, 290 a, 354 b, 1432. 11''vCJl, 491. 'II'VE(w, 503 D, 650 b. 11'Vw, 397, 489 f, 503, 607, 806. ITvv~, decl., 285. 23. 'II'09Ev, 346 ; 7!'68ev "(cip, 2805 b.

..

1692, 1755; dat. w. vbs. cornpounded w., 1544-1550; ace. w. vbs. compounded w., 1546. 'll'a.pa.crKtvO.to!La.L, w. part. or inf., 2144. 'll'a.p~, 1649 a. '11'6.pos, 1700; w. inf. in Hom., 2461. '11'a.pp1Jn6.to!La.L, 454 a, 813 d. ...as (biis, crvp.1riis), in cpds., 101 b, 874; decl., 299; pron. adj., 337; w. 2d pers. of imper., 1016; 1rcivTa, T ,.civTa w. super!., 1091 ; position, 1163, 1171, 1174. .,.a.crxw, 463 b (1) n, 526 d, 529, 557 n2; 573, 693, 696, 705, 806; ,.cicrxw ev as pass. of 71'oLlw ei'i, 1593, 1752; Ti 71'a8wv, 2064 a~ _.,.a._;!g;p;'on]:>O"und adjs. in, 888 d. '11'4vw, 489 b; act. ) ( mid., 1734. 14; w. part. or inf., 2098, 2140; 1ra.vop.a< w. part., 2098; w. redundant,u'>), 2741. 'II'ES6., 1691. 'II'E!ew, 489 D, 573, 502 a, 549 D, 705, 815, 819 ; 1rel8o,ua< w. gen., 1366; act.)( mid., 1734. 15; perf. w. pres. meaning, 1946; u1ge, w. inf., 1992 N.; convince, generally w. ws, rarely w. ace. and inf., 1992 N. ; ,.,.etcr,ua.<, w. ,u'>], 2726. 'II'ELVaw, 394, 641 D, 657, 'II'ELp6.o!L4L, a pass. deponent, 8]2 c; w. part. or inf., 1992 a, 2102, 2144. 'II'4S, improper prep., 1700. 'II'OjJ.CtL, 549 D, 756 CD, 'II'jlo'II'W, 569 n, 571 ; use of imperf., 1891. 'II'Ev9w, lament, w. ace., 1595 a. 'II'p, prep., 72 n.

778

GREEK INDEX
1) 1rplv, 2457 ; 1rplv -!j, 2460; after ueg., w. reduudant o, 2753. 1rpfro, 489 c, 500. 2. 'll"po, o not elided, 72 c ; cpds. of, 449 b,

'!l"o9v, enclit., 181 b, 340. '!l"o9ro, 488 b, 80G ; w. ace., 1il-W. '11"69, 346 v 2 ; 'll"o9C, enclit., 181 b. 'II"OL, enclit., 181 b, 346; '11"01:, 346. 'II"OLro, 385, 390 ; perf. subjv., 603, and opt., 696; periph. w., 1722; w. part. and inf., 2115 ; 1r. di (Kaws) w. ace., 1591 a, w. part., 2101; (J"v i 1r., 1653; 1rrlvra 1r. w. part., 2102. 'II"OLOS, 340 i 'II"OLOS, 340, 1186, 2648. 'II"OEfJ.ro, fut. mid. w. pass. mean., 808 ; (J"Uv rm (p-ETa nvos), 1523b N. 1. 'II"OLopKro, fut. mid. as pa.ss., 800. 'll"os, 268, 270 c, 271 ; added to proper

name, 1139, 1142 c.

'II"OtTeuofLa., dep. w. pass. mean., 813 d. 'II"Ous, decl., 311; comp., 319 and c; 7ror/), 1rov, 1rap 7roM w. su perl.,

1091; w. and w't art., 1189 ; ?roM or ?rorfJ w. comp., 1514, 1586; 7rOol JCai lio<, 2879 a. 'II"Ovro, 488 b; perf. subjv., 693. 'II"OpEUOfJ.a.L, 815, 1881. -'11"op9os, compounds of, accent, 804 N. 'll"oppro, comp., 345 a; prep., 1700. 'II"OCTOS, 'II"OCTOS, 340, 'II"O'T (fOl''7rorl), 75 D. 'II"OTa.fJ.s, w. a proper name, 1139, 1142 c. 'II"OT, 174 a, 181 b, 346 Ci 11"DTE, 181 b, 346. 'II"OTEpov ('11"6Tepa.) .. ~' 2656-2660,2675. 'II"OTEpos, 11"0Tep6s, 340. 11"0T(, 1695, 'II"OU, 1roil, 181 b, 346 ; oi! 1rov ; oi! rl ?I"OV i O o-f} 11"0V; 2651 f i -yp o-f} 1I"OV 1 2820 ; -yap 1rov, 2820 ; ij 1rov, 2865. 'II"OVS, 255. 2 b, 311 d. '11"pi'iytJ.a.TEUOfLO.L 1 812 a, 813 d. "~~"P'-OS, decl., 311 C, 'll"piinro, 514, 571, 809,- 819; w. advs., 1709 b. '11"p11"EL, quasi-impers., 1985: '11"pECTj3EU'T~S, decl., 285. 24. 'll"p(v, improper pre.p., 1700; w. aor. for plup., 1943; temp. conjunc., 2383 c; implying purpose, 2418 a; w. indic., 2430-2442; w. subjv., 2430-2441, 2443-2447; w. opt., 2-t30-2441, 24482452; w. inf., 2-130-~441, 2453-~-1G7;

884 b; use, 1073, 1675, 1677, 1694; geu. w. verbs compounded w., 1384, 1403. 1rpo9'iifJ.OfLa., a pass. dep., 812. '11"pot1JfLL, accent of forms, 426 f, 746 c ; 1rpoiep.at w. part., 2103. 'll"poopci.ro, w. geu., 1357. 'll"pos, use, 1073, 1675-1678, 1695, 1755; dat. w. vbs. compounded w., 15441550. 1rpoa-8oK6.ro, followed by p.-1}, 2726. 1rpoa-8oKCa: a-.,.(, w. obj. clause, 2224 a. 1rpoa-~i<EL, w. dat. of pers. and geu. of thing, 1467 ; quasi-impers., 1985. 1rp6a-6ev, 2440 ; 7rp6(J"Oev -!j, 2459. 1rpOCTKUVW1 W. ace., 1591 b. 1rpOCT'TU'YXclVW, W. dat., 1523 a. 1rpa-ro, improper prep., 1700. 1rpTepov, 1042 N.; 1rp6repov -!j, 2383 c, 2458 ; 1rp6repov . 1rplv, 2440. 1rpOTEpos, 320, 349 C, 1042 b. 1rpOT(, 1695. 1rpoci>a.a-CtofLa.L, a mid. dep., 813 c. 1rpWTOS, 320, 349 c, 1042 b. .,..,. for r, 131. .,..,.a.(w, tenses w. inserted (J", 489 f . .,..,.~a-a-ro, 571, 688 ; w. ace., 1595 a. 11"TOEfLOS, "''TOLS, 131. .,..,.ua-a-ro, form of pres., 514 a . .,..,.;1..,, 488 a, 500. 1 a and 1 D. _.,..,...,, verbs in, 505, 506. .,.uv9c1vofL<LL, he ar, lea1n of, w. gen., 1361 ; become aware of, learn, w. ace. and part., 1363, 2112 b, 2144; hear fTorn, w. gen., 1364, 1411; hear about, w. gen., 136:j ; of past and pres. combined, 1885 a; w. lin or ws, 21102112, 2145; w. inf., 2144; w. gen. and part., 2111, 2112 a, 2144. 1rilp, decl., 254 b, 285. 25 ; cp. 255. 1 d. .,..:,, en elit., 181 b. 1r&s, enclit., 181 b, 346. 11"WS, 346; -rrws o p.ew; 1959 d i 11"WS -yap ; 2805 b, 2806 a.

GIU~EK

INDEX

779

P, initial, 13, 18; pp, see pp; for cr, dial., 'o-K11"TOfl.UL, dep. w. pass. mean., 813 cl. 132 D; subst.-stems in, 259-262; ini- -o-K%, iterative imperfs. and aors. in, tial, doubled after aug., 420 a, after 495. redup., 442 b; suffixes w., 860. o-Ko11"w (-op.a.c), w. obj. clause, 2210 b, pO., 72 n, 181 n, 2787; 1j pa., 2800. 2224 a; w. p,f, and inf., 2210 b. p~8,os, comp., 319. -O"Ko>, vbs. in, 526-528. . pq;8(o>s <!>pELv, w. part., 2100. -ro, 2 pers. ending, 4()5 b, 466. 2 a. ptw, 511. -O"OfJ.UL, -~rop.a., -6firop.uL, 1738. pw, 105 a, 503, 594, 607, 806. o-os, decl., :3;30; w. and w't art., 1182, p'lj"{VfJ.L, 524 a, 504, 733, 742, 819. 1183, 1196 a; use, 1190-1199, 120:3. p"L"{ow, 398, <>41. . r'JI"nw, 488 a, 489 c. pp, 13, 80 ; and pcr, 79, Intr. E, N. 2. rr, and TT, 78, 112, 114, Intr. E, N. 2 ; pr, 79, 102. crcr in Hom., 81 n 3, in fut., 534 b n, p'iiop.u, 500. 1 a and 1 n; w. redundant in aor., 544 n, 545 D. !J-1}, 2741. -o-rL, in dat. pl., 250 D 2. pC:.vv'fJ.L, 489 e, 731. -o-o-w, vbs. in, 513-516. o-T6.8Lov, pl., 281 ; v<K<i< cr-r<io<ov, 1576. l:, two forms (cr, s), 1 a; pronunc., 26; rTp"{w, peri., 570; w. part., 2100. cons. bef., 97-102; bef. cons., 103- rTpop.u, of enduring result, 1887. 108 ; disappears, 118-121, 123 ; for -r, O"Topvp.<, 489 e, f. 0, dial., 132 n ; movable, 136, 136 n; rTpnTos, implied, 1027 a. subst.-stems in, 263 ff.; suffixes w., o-Tp<I>w, 125 g N., 586 band n, 595, 816. 865; inserted in perf. and first aor. o-v, croi, elision in, in Epie, 72 D; enelit., 181 a and n; decl., 325; of pass. system, 489; between root (or stern) and suff., 836; cpds. of words imaginary pers., 1193. begin. w., 878. O"l!"{"{<v'ljs, w. dat., 1417. -ra<, 2d pers. ending, 465 a. O"li"{'Y'YvC:.rKw, w. part. and dat., 2108. cr~vv'fJ.L, 415, 480 c, 52!3 f N. 1, 558, O"l!'YX wpw, followed by p.f,, 2726. 730, 736, 756 a, 769, 810; cr(3fj0<, 759. i ru"{w, with Els, 1660 b. -o-8w, Aeol. for -!;w, 508 n. -o-v;\.os, compounds of, accent, 894 N. -o-<, denoting place whitlw, 342. rufL~n(v.,, 1982 a, 1985. O"EUl!TOV 1 329, 1199. 2 a, 1200. 2 d, 1218- O"l!fl.~Ol!E1JW, W. p.f,, 2720. o-vp.1ris, see 1fiis. 1237. cr6ev 1 O"Eto, o-o, O"E0 1 O"EV 1 O"El!, 325 D. o-up.<I>pEL, W. dat., 1462, 1592. <T<Cw, 429 a n, 480 c. o-\iv, in cpds., bef. cr, 101 a; use, 1511, -reLw, vbs. in, 868. 1675, 1677, 1670, 11396; dat. w. vbs. revw, 425 b (2) n, 442 b n, 477 b N., compounded w., 1544-1550; in cpds., 543 an, 688. denoting completion of action, 1648, <T'IJf!-alvw, tenses w. inserted cr, 480 h. 1680; crv di 1rodw, 1653. -r6nL, inf. ending, 460 d; cp. 72 n. o-uvt'l]fl.L, w. gen., 1361; w. ace., 1361 ; -o-9e, -o-6w, -o-9ov, -rr9o>v, -r6a., 468. dramat. aor., 1937. -r9ov, for -<TOTJv in dual, in Hom., 465 c. o-\ivoL8a, w. part. and dat., 2108. -o-9w, -o-6wv, 4GG. 3 l). o-cpiis, indir. reflex. in A tt. prose, 1228 b; -o-6wrav, 466. 3. O"<j;as for, 325 f. -o-, in dat. pl., 250; denoting place 1 o-cj><, 32.S c and D 1, 325 D 4. whe1e, 242; 2d pem. end., 4(;3 b. . o-cj>en, rcpa.s, r<j>ens, 325 n 1, 2. rtTos, o, T r'LTa, :lSl. [ o-<j>e'Ls, as iudir. r~fiex., 1228 band N. 1. Q'Kw, GS7. 1 o-<j><lwv, :cl:!5 v 1, 4.

780

GlEK INDEX
-Tos, verbal adjs. in, 426 c, 471, 473; in -Tov, 933 b ; copula omitted w. -Tov, 944 b; dat. of agent w., 1488. -Tepos, comp. end., 313. Tp'II'U>, aor. pass., in Hom., 586 b D ; Tp7rop.at, w. part., 2100. Te.JxU>, 502 a, 693. TXV'J, implied, 1027 b. orr, orr8e, 346. TijKw, 595, 816; tr. and intr., 819. Ti\e, improper prep., 1700. T'JLKO<r8e, 333 d, 340. T'JLKOVTOS, 333 e, 340, 1180, 1180 a. -T'Jv, rarely for -Tov in 2 dual, 464 d. T')V(Ko., T'JVLKcJ.8e, T'JVLKO.VTO., 346. -T')p, -T']S, cpd. nouns in, 888 c. T'Jpw, fnt. mid., 808 ; w. obj. cl., 2210 b; w. wfJ and inf., 2210 b. Th 113, 114. -TL, 3d pers. ending, 463 c. -TL, -<rTL, advs. in, 344. -TL, -6<, in imper., 125 b, 676. T(6'1fLL, form nOf}p.evos, 28 D; decl. of part., 307; conjug., 416; analysis of f01ms, 744-767; TOetp.at, 767; w. part. or inf., 2144. T(KTw, pres. as perf., 1887 a. Ti:fLcl.w, de cl. of pres. part., 310 ; inflec., 385; fut. mid. w. pass. mean., 809; Tp.t.w ( Ttp.t.op.al) Ttvt Oa.vt.Tov, and Tp.t.op.a.i Ttvos, 1374. Ti:fLi\S, TLjLfJELS, 299 D, Ti:JLwpU>, uses of act. and mid., 1376, 1472, 1591 a, 1734. 17. T(v, TfV'], 325 D 4. TLVU>, 488 c, 489 c, 523 f N. 2; Tivw iiiKrp ) ( T(VO/.<O.L O(K'f}V, 1734. 18. TLS, accent, 154, 334; decl., 334; w. art., 1186, 2648 ; subst. and adj., 12621265; Tl w. comp., 1514, 158(); Ti' o p.{/\t..w; 1959 d; Tl p.aOwv; Ti 1ra.Owv; 2064 a; Tl ~xwv; 2064 b; fva Ti, ws Ti, 5Tt Tl, 2644 a; Tl '/ap; 2805 b Ti p.fJv; Tl p.'qv oil; 2921. Tts, accent, 154, 174 a, 334; enclit., 181 b; decl., 334 ; w. o7rTepos, etc., 339 d; w. sec. pers. of imper., 1016; position, 1155, 1266; use, 1266-1270; w. comp.,

a-c!>Tepos, 330, 1202. 2 d, 1203 b N. a-c!>Tepos a:TOlv, 1202. 2 b, 1203 band

a-4>wv, 325 D 1, 2; 1202. 1 c, 1203 a. <rc!>L, for aTos, -as, in Hdt., 325 D 2.

N.

a-cj>C(v), 134 D; rarely sing., 325 e. a-cj>Ca-L(v), enclit., 325 D 1; as indir. re-

flex. in A tt. prose, 325 d, 1228 b, 1229 ; in Hdt., 326 D 2, 1195. a-cj>6s, in Hom., 330 D 1. a-cj>clli:, a-<I>Oii:v, 325 D L a-cj>wtTepos, in Hom., 330 D 1. a-cj>Oiv, as indir. reflex. in Att. prose, 1228 b; as dir. reflex., 1202. 2 e, 1203 b; q<j>wv aun;Jv, reflex., 1202. 2 c, 1203 b. a-xE!iov, improper prep., 1700. a-xCtw, fut., 539 e. a-<t"tU>, 489 b, f, 508 a, 818; (J'. p:f}, 2741. a-cils, decl., 289 c, 289 D.

T, bef. dental stop, 83; bef. p., 86; change to ~r, 115, Intr. C, N. 1, 4; bef. rough breathing, 124 and D; for ~r, dial., 132 D; inserted, bef. suff., 837 ; suffixes w., 863. T-, class of pres. stems, 505. Tcl.is, decl., 298. To.v.JU>, 489 c, 500. 1 D, 541 a. -To.Tos, superl.. ending, 313. TO..JTn, 346.
Tci.xl.a-Ta.,

w.

Ws-,

lrrEl,

hret.O-Ij,

lhrws,

2383.
To.xtwv or e.TTwv, from Oa.xwv, 125 f. To.xvs, comparison of, 319. T, pron., enclit., 181 n, 325 D 4. T, particle, enclit., 181 d ; added to rel., 338 d, 2970 ; <iJs TE, ws Et TE,

2087 b, 2481-2485 /.<V . T, 2913 j oi!Te . T, 2945, 2946; uses, 2967298:3. -Te, advs. in, 344. Tet v, 325 D 1. TEELU>, 650 b. TEw, 391, 409 e and ){., 488 a, 489 c, 539 a and n. TfLvU>, w. two aces., 1626. To, Tos, TEoii, TEoiis, TEii, Teiis, 325 D 4. TEos, in Horn., 300 v 1.

GREEK INDEX
1514, 1586

781

-rq>, therefore, 2987. TWS, 346. TXa.--, 551, 682 n, 687, 705, 806; hX71v -Twcra.v, imper. ending, 466. 3. TCiJ"1", 'Tt'TO' 1 68 D. w. part. or inf., 2127. TOL, Ta.(, 332 D, 338 D l. ToL, in crasis, 68; elision, 72 D; enclit., Y, pronunc., 24, 24 D; qmi.ntity, 4, 181 d, 1486, 2984-2087 ; XX "f TOl 500 ; semivowel, 20 ; not elided, 72 e ; interchanged w. ii, 27, 37, 501; for, (TOI ')'E), 27 86 j "Yp TOl, 2820 j TOl')'ap, 28 D dia!. for a, o, 33 D j V : EV : ov, etc., 2987. TOL =<Toi, 825 D ] , 2, cp. 1486. see ev; subst.-stems in, 268; in aug., oro~ya.poilv, oro~y.pTo~, 2987. 435. To(vvv, 2880, 2987. j3pCtw, fut. mid. as pass., 809 ; w. ace., ,.o,os, 840; w. inf., 2008. ds nYa., or 7rps rtva, 1591 a, 1592. T0~6CT5E, 333 d, 340, 1180, 1245, 1249. v8wp, decl., 253 b, 285. 26. TO~OVTOS, 333 e, 340, 1180, 1245, 1249. te~, 500. 1 a, 934 a. Top.G.<, w. pa1't. or inf., 1992 a, 2127. vt>, vbs. in, 866. 6 b. -Tos, verbal adjs. in, 425 c and N., 471, u~, diphth., 5; pronunc., 25. 472, 1488. ut6s, 285. 27 and n ; olllitted, 1301. Touos, 840; w. inf. in Hom., 2003. ,}p.as, 325 D 1, 2. TOCToCTSe, 333 d, 340, 1180, 1245, 1249. ,}p.e(wv, 11p.>v, 325 D 1, 2, 4. TOCTOVTOS, 333 e, 340, 1180, 1245, 1249 j ~p.s, ,}p.(v, ,}p..s, 325 f, 325 n 4. TO<TOV'Tip, 'TOITOrov, COrre). to li<Tlp, /J<Tov, ,}p.-rpoS, 313 b, 330, 1182, 1183, 1196, 1197; reflex. and non-reflex., 1200, 2468-2473. 1203. TOCTCTOS, 340 D. TaTe, w. part., 2080; ?] r6re, 2840. ,}p.-repos a.imilv~ 1200. 2 b, 1203 b and N. TOT, TOT JV , , TOT , 346 b. ~p.p.es, etc., 10 n, 105 n, 134 n, 325 D Towi, derivation, 75 a. 1, 3. TpTrOI, 554 C, 571, 586 b, 595, 596. ,}p.s, in Horn., 330 D 1. Tp.pw, 125 g, 595, 808; w. ace., 1579. llp.wv, \fp.w, vp.a.s, 325 f, 325 D 4. Tpxw, 125 g, 529, 806. UVVW, pres. in, 519 D. Tpw, 488 a; w. ace., ] 595 a. -uv%-, tense-suff., 523 e. Tpij3w, 501, 570, 571, 595, 808. 'iivw (Aeol. -vvvw), vbs. in, 518 c, 519, Tp~ftpi']S, de cl., 264, 866. 8. TP~TT6s, treble, 354 d. Tr (7r6), 75 D. TpCxa. and Tp~x9., 354 D. Tra.(, Tra.-, 1698. '~'P~xos, for Bp<xos, 125 f. Tra.C6pos, pred. use, 1042 a. Tp&,s, accent of dual, 252 a. Trii.Kovw, w. gen., 1465. ,.,., and crcr, see cru. , vTra.-ros, 320 a. -TTw (Ion. and Later Att. -u<Tw), vbs. TreCp, 1697. in, 513-516. TrK, 1649 a. ,.-u, thou, thee, 181 n, 325 n 4. Trp, cpds. of, w. gen., 1384, 1403; -rvyx.vw, w. gen., 1350; tivTv"txvw w. cpds. of, w. ace., 1384; use, 1675, dat., 1350; w. subst., equiv. to pass. 1677, 1697. vb., 1753; part. w., 1873, 2096; in Trepj3a.Cvw, surpass, w. ace., 1403. part. w. finite vb., 2096 f; &v omitted VTrpj3ci.XXw, surpass, w. ace., 1403. with, 2119. Trp-r(pos, TrpTa.oros, 320. T'l1v,, 325 D 1, 4. Trev6vvos, w. gen. or dat., 1425. -rvpa.vvw, w. gen., 1370. 1rftl<oos, w. gen. or dat., 1421. of
T( 7i"OV;

2651 f

p,l]

Tl

'YE, 2763 e.

82

GIEK JNDEX

hastily, 20G2 a ; cjJ{pwv, with, 20(i8 a ; u'JTo-xv0!'-0.., w. inf., ]8()8 c; w. p.f), 2726. <{Jpw X<\errws, pg.lws, w. part., 2100. u1r6, use, 1491-1494, 1511, 175, 107(), <j>evyw, fut. mid. as act., SOG; be p1ose1678, 1679, 1698, 1755; cpds. of, w.. cuted, equivalent to a pass., 1378, dat., 1644-1550; cpds. of, w. ace., 1752; jleej1om, w. ace., 1597; <j>dryw 1546. i'ilK-qv ('YpatpiJv), lo/(J; pres. forperf., 1 u1roa.p.f36.vw, w. inf., 2580; w. ws, 1887 ; w. redundant p..'IJ, 2740. 4>1Jf.1.C, form tp6.1h, 125 g N. ; enclitic 2580. u'!Toi'-vw, w. part. or inf., 2127. forms, 181 c, 424 a, 784; rpyfs, 463 b; u'lro'!TTeuw, w. obj. clause, 2224 a. 1>fitr8a, 463 b (2) n; infiec. of, 783-pw (Aeol. -vppw), vbs. in, 519. 786; mean. of tenses, 787-788; oV {s, gender cif, 255. 2 c. </>TJP.<, 787, 2691, 2G92 a; g</>7J betw. voc. and attrib., 1285; w. inf. (Bn, -lis, parts. in, decl., 308. -vs, gen. of nouns in, accent, 163 a. ws), 2017 a; rp7Jp.l p.f), 2723. q.eO.vw, 374 N., 488 b, 489 f; sec. aor., -us, numeral words in, 354 e. G82 a, G82 n, 687 ; fut. mid. as act., ilo-TEpov i\. 2459. 'O"'TEpos, 'a-Ta.1"0S 1 320 i (JTd.TLOS 1 320 D. 806; w. ace., 15!)7; vart. w., 1873, 209(); in part. w. finite vb., 2062 a, u.pa.Cvw, 4811 h. 209() f; as forerunner of 1rplv, 2440 a; u.Ptf.l.a., followed by redundant p.f), OK ~rpiJ7JV . Ka[, 2876. 2741. ilw, 500. ln, 934 a ; fut. mid. as pass., cp6eCpw, tr. and intr., 8W. 808. .pecvw, 488 a, 688; Hom. <j>8'Lro, 758 D. -uw, -w, vbs. in, 500, 500 n, 501, 522, -cp~, -<j>w, 134 n ; cases in, 280. ()08, 866. 5. <P~w, form rp7JJ1.<, rplfltr<, 4()3 D; <j>I7J, Aeolic imper., 4()() a D; rp<fJp.<vat, .P, pronm1c., 26; bef. dental stop, 82; 657; fut. mid. as pass., 808. bef. p.., 85; bef. v, 88; changed to .,. <j>Cos, comparison of, 315, 319. in redup., 125 a; for IJ, dial., 132 n; .PoTi:!'-ol'-a.., a pass. deponent, 812. suffixes w.,. 862. .pcv, 325 n 4. cl>a.Cvw, form i<p6.viJ7]v, 125 g N.; 1r<rp6.v8a<, .p;;.,;J.,, 500. 1 a. 125 g N. ; 1f'E<p6.~r1Jw, 713; tenses with cpo/, decl., 256. inserted ~r, 489 h ; aors. pass. of, cpo, .pa, suffix, 862. 3. 595; a mid. pass., 814, 817 ; tr. and .Pof3w, fonn 1nrp6{37Jtr8<, 713 ; aor. pass. intr., 819; persona! constr. w., 1983; as mid., 815; rpo{3op.a< w. ace., 1595 w. part., 2106; ipaiPop.a< w. part. or a; <f>o{31JO'op.a< and rpof37J81Jtrop.a.<, 1911; inf., 1965, 2106, 2143; IJJv omitted rpof!op..a<, w. redund. p..f), 2741. w., 2119. .Po,v'i:t, quantity of ' 254 b. q.O.a.y~, decl., 256. .popw, <j>opytr<, 463 c D ; Hom. inf., cj>a.vep6s <TT,, w. 5n or part., <j>aP<p6v 657. trn w. on, 1982 N., 2107. .pp6.yvlifL, 595, 733. ci>O.Os, decl., 258 D. .pp6.tw, form 1rtj>paop.vo, 409 b n, 489 ci>O.o-Kw, 787 ; o ip&.O'Kw, 2692 a. D; hrppao<, 549 D ; command, w. c!>eCSof.l.a.., 502 a; rreipdJfJ~rerat, 580 D. inf., HJ92 c, 1997, 2017 ; say, w. <I>pTO.TOS, .pp<TTOS 1 319. lin 01' ros, 2017. cl>pw, aors., 448, 544 d ; <J>pTE, 634; fut. .ppa.<T!, 259 D. mid. as pass., 809; rppE, of more than .pp6.TTw, 514 a. one person, 1010; w. hort. subjv., cj>pap, decl., 253 b, 258 c. 1797 a, b, w. imper., 1836; rppwv, 1 cj>pijv, gender of, 255. 1 c.

GREEK
q,piTTw, form ;wppiKwv, 557 JJ 2, 700 n. q,povw, fut. mid. as ])ass., 80H. q,povTCtw, w. obj. cl., 2210 b, 2224 a; w. ~J-fJ and inf., 2210 b. 4>po8os, 124 a. q,pollpos, 124 a. q,"-y-f], decl., 216. 4>\JLW 1 522 N. q,ua.~, decl., 256. cpli<LTTw, act. ) ( mid., 1597, 1734. 19 ; </JV<iTTOIJ-UL W. inf., 2210 b j <j;vMTTW, and <j;vMTTo!J-a<, with obj. cl., 2210 b, 2224 a; w. redund. ~J-fJ, 2740. cp'w, 488 C, 500. 1 a and 1 D j '11'</JVK< 1 557 D 2; sec. aor., 687 ; perf. subjv., 6\!3, opt., 096; tr. and intr., 819; pres. as perf., 1887 a; perf. as pres,, 1940. cpwvw, command, w. inf., 1992 c, 107, 2017 ; say, w. 8n or ,;,, 2017. cpwv-f]es, decl., 299. <!>&>s, light, 252 a, 253 c, 255. 1 b.

I~DEX

783

-x,

in vaix<, 180. x>.:tw, 500. 2. xo6w, KXOWITTUL, 580 ]) ; EXOWITri!J-''IV and exoJ..w07Jv, 802 n. xoils, decl., 27ii. x 6w, tenses w. inserted ", 4-89 a, c. xpO.oJ.Ioa.L, 34, 35, 487 a, 489 e, 641 n, 813; w. clat., 15()!); mean. of act. and mid., 1734. 20; XPW!J-<vos, with, 2068 a. xpO.w, am eager jo1, 394. xp6.w, utter an oracle, 394, 487 a, 489 e,
()4) D.

X, pronunc., 20 ; bef. dental stop, 82 ;

bef. p., 85; changed to K in redup., 125 a; suffixes w., 864. xa.(pw, KXapf}ITW and KXapf}ITO!J-aL 1 in Hom., 584 D; w. e'll'l a.nd dat., 1518; w. ace. of person and pred. part. in poetry, 1595 b; w. dat , 1595 b; w. part., 2100; xalpwv, with . imp1mity, 2062 a. xa.Mrr-rw, 505 a. xa.E'rr&s cppew, w. part., 2100. X11J.Io.te, 1589. xa.p(ns, 114 a, 299, 313 a. xtipw, 1065 a, 1700. x6.ps, 257, 313 a. x6.o-Kw, 698, 806. XE(,OL, 37 D 2. xetp, 255. 1 d, 285. ~; implied, 1027 b. xeCpwv, XELpLO'TOS, 319. Xo, in Aeol., 347 D 3. Xw, 477b N., 607,488 a, 503 j fut., 541, 1881 ; first aor., 54;~ a; sec. aor., 088. XTJ(o,, XEL(o,, in Dor., 37 D 2, 347 1> 3. x&J.v, 131, 255. 1 c. Xh 112.

xreJ.v, copula omittecl w., 44 b. xp-f], form XP'ii or tixpfiv, 438 b, 793; inflec., 703; an old noun, 7n3, 1502; quasi-impers., 9;13 b, 198'); w. ace. and inf., l5G2, Hl85 b; w. ace. and gen., 1502; use of xpfiv w. and with out !iv, 1774-1779, 1005, 2313-2315; w. either ~J-fJ or oi>, 2714. XPilJ.Ioa., w. gen. to express size, etc., 1294. xptw, 480 b, e, :)00. 2 and 2 n. xpovos, pred. use, 1042 a. xplio-eos, dec1.' 290. xpJ.s, 257 n, 285. 29. x6>pa:, decl., 216; im.plied, 1027 b. xc.>p!s, 1097 b, 1700; w. o, 2753. 'V, 21, 22. ,YO.w, 394. ,Y, ,Ywv, ,Y!v, 325 D 4. ,Yeu!iw, a mid. pass., 818. .Yil<!>os, gender, 232 d; implied, 1027 b.

n, pronunc., 24;

interchanged w. o, 27, 30, 788 c ; for ov, dial., 33 D ; interchanged w. ii. and "' and w. 7J and or a, 3G, 831 ; length. from o, dia!., 37 n 2 ; stems in, 2()7. "'/TJ-, long thematic vowel, 457, 458, 667, 74, 092, 749, 757 a. ~. w. voc., 1284, 128b. -w, in gen., 214 D li c, 230 D 1. -w or -wv, in ace., 238 d. w-verbs, 375; conjug., 382-411; formation of tensr-s~'Rtems, 474-001; tenses inflected according to w-conjug., 602-

GIEK INIH
cl\s ( ws, ws), demons., 180 c, 34G, 298R.

-6.s, part. ending, 301 c, 309, 470 b . &O"'It'Ep, after adjs. and ad vs. of likeness, 1501 a; w. part., 2078, 2087; in W<T1f<p v <i, 2087 a, 2478-2480; in comp. clauses, 240:3-2465 ; w<T1f<p el, 2478-2480. OX,..,.e, accent, 164 a, 186 ; w. clauses of result, 1063, 2011, 2239, 22502278; 7} a,<Tre, 107\J, 2007; w. part. wviJp, 8 n. in Hom. w. force of i.re, 2085; in&pa, copula omitted w., 944 b. troduc. clauses of comp., 2463 a; and cl\pLO"'I'OS, 08 D. ws, proclit., 179, 180 c. inf., neg. with, 2759. ws, exclam., 2682, 2685, 2998. (1)"' diphth., 5 u, 25; pronunc., 25. ws, relative, summary of uses as adv., Wu-ros, Wu-rot, 5 n, 68 n. 2990-2997, as conjuuc., 3000. (I)VTos, 68 D, 327 D. ws, improper prep., 1702, 3003. C:,<j>E>.,i..,, fut. mid. w. pass. mean., 809; w. ace., 1462, 1591 a; w. dat., 1591 a. i:>s, as, like, 3002.

604; vowel vbs., 006-613 ; cons. vbs., 014-624; infiec., 625, 711. 'l' diphth., 5 ; pronunc., 25. JiSe, 346, 1245. .:.e(I), w. syllabic aug., 431. <l>KLO"'I'OS, 318 V. J.v, for ov, 2955 ; oVK wv, in Hdt., 2954 a. -(l)v. parts. in, decl., 805. -&.v, in gen. pl. of first decl., 213, 22 b. wv, being, decl., 305. WVoJLO.L, 431, 529, 813.

-(l)s, compounds in, 103 a, 888 e; iu ace., 230 v 4 ; ad vs. in, 343.